06-08 Honda Pilot SM PDF

INTRODUCTION
- How to Use This M a n u a l----------------------------------- General Information

This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
Specifications specs
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
reference system.
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
• Parts disassembly sequence.
• Bolt torques and thread sizes.
• Page references to descriptions in text.
Maintenance
1P1
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection. *Engine Electrical ■ ENGiNE ; | | a
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
- Safety M essages---------------------------------------- ■------

Engine Mechanical te a
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment.
Engine Cooling
PS
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms Fuel and Emissions
including:
8 Safety Labels — on the vehicle.
• Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol ^ and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean: *Transaxle
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
*
^WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
Steering
A CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
• instructions — how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
Suspension
(Including TPMS)
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest
product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
Brakes
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic, (Including VSA)
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures, and tables.
*Body
As you read this manual, you will find information that is
preceded by a INOTICE [symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment. *Heating, Ventilation,
and Air Conditioning
First Edition 06/2007 HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD.
All Rights Reserved Service Publication Office
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
*Body Electrical
As sections with * include SIS components;
special precautions are required when servicing.
^Restraints
2006-08 Honda Pilot
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
The Pilot SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the
glove box, seat belttensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the side of the roof, and side
airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual.
Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and should be done by an authorized
Honda dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the ignition switch is ON (II),
or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the
airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
Chassis and Paint Codes
'06 Model ...... ............. .............. ............................... ...... 1-2
'07 Model ............................................ ........................ . 1-4
'08 Model ....................... ..................... .......... . 1-6
Identification Number Locations ....... . 1-8

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-9
Under-hood Emission Control Label ......... .... 1-12
Lift and Support Points ......... ........... . 1-13

Towing ........................... ............ .................... 1-14
Parts Marking ........... ................................. . 1-15
Precautions for
Variable Torque Management 4WD
(VTM-4) System .......... ...... ....... ................. . 1-15
Chassis and Paint Codes
'06 Model
Vehicle Identification Number
5FN YF1 8 1 * 6 B 000001
C d e gh
a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle
5FN: Honda Manufacturing., of Alabama, LLC. Safety Standard Certification and Paint Code Label
Honda Multipurpose passenger vehicle
2HK: Honda of Canada Mfg., Vehicle Identification Num ber and
Canadian M otor Vehicle
Honda Canada Inc. Safety Standard Certification and Paint Code Label
b. Body and Engine Type
YF1: Pilot 4WD/J35A9
YF2: Pilot 2WD/J35Z1
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
8 :5-door/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
1: LX
4: EX
5: EXL
6: EXL with Rear Entertainment System
7: EXL with Navigation System
e. Check Digit PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE
f. Model Year
6: '06
g. Factory Code
B:Lincoln Factory in Alabama
H:Alliston, Ontario Factory in Canada
h. Serial Number
Producted in Alabama models
0 0 0 0 0 1 USA models
500001—: Canada models
Producted in Canada models
500001 —: USA models
_____________________________ d
Engine Number Paint Code

Code ■Color USA Canada
models models
J35A9 - 1500001
B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl O O
B-533M Steel Blue Metallic O O
a b G-521M Amazon Green Metallic o
NH-578 Taffeta White o
NH-662P Sage Brush Pearl o o
a. Engine Type NH-689M Billet Silver Metallic o o
J35A9: 3.5 L SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport R-519P Red rock Pearl o o
Fuel-injected engine YR-545M Desert Rock Metallic o o
J35Z1: 3.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
1000001—: J35Z1 engine
1300001—: J35A9 engine, Producted in Canada
1500001—: J35A9 engine, Producted in Alabama
Transmission Number
SVLA - 8000001
a b
a. Transmission Type
BVLA: 5-speed Automatic (2WD model)
BVGA: 5-speed Automatic (4WD model)
b. Serial Number
Chassis and Paint Codes (cont'd)
'07 Model
5FN YF1 8 1 * 7 B 000001
b c de gh
2HK: Honda of Canada Mfg., Vehicle Identification Num ber and
Honda Canada Inc. Safety Standard Certification and Paint Code Label
b. Body and Engine Type
YF1: Pilot 4WD/J35A9
8 :5-door/5-speed Automatic
1: LX
4; EX
5: EXL
e. Check Digit PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE
f. Model Year
7: '07
g. Factory Code
H:Alliston, Ontario Factory in Canada
h. Serial Number
Producted in Alabama models
0 0 0 0 0 1 USA models
Producted in Canada models
000001 —: Canada models
500001-: USA models
Code : Color USA Canada

J35A9 - 2500001 models models
NH-578 Taffeta White O O
NH-689M Billet Silver Metallic O O
a b NH-705M Nimbus Gray Metallic o 0
NH-707 Formal Black o O'
B-533M Steel Blue Metallic o o
a. Engine Type G-525M Aberdeen Green Metallic o o
J35A9: 3.5 L SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport R-529P Dark Cherry Pearl o o
Fuel-injected engine. YR-545M Desert Rock Metallic
J35Z1; 3.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport NH-677P Aspen White Pearl o
b. Serial Number
2000001—:J35Z1 engine
2300001—: J35A9 engine, Producted in Canada
Transmission Number
BVLA - 9000001.
a . b
BVLA: 5-speed Automatic (2WD model)
BVGA: 5-speed Automatic (4WD model)
b. Serial Number
Chassis and Paint Codes (cont'd)
'08 Model
5FN YF1 8 1 * 8' B 000001
a b c d e f g h

b. Body and Engine Type Vehicle Identification Num ber and
YF1: Pilot 4WD/J35A9 Safety Standard Certification and Paint Code Label
8:5-door/5-speed Automatic
USA models
2: LX-VP
3: EX-SE
4: EX
5: EXL
Canada models
1: LX PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE
3: EX
5: EXL
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year
8: '08
g. Factory Code
h. Serial Number
000001 —: USA models
Code Color USA Canada

J35A9 - 3500001 models models
NH-578 Taffeta White O O
NH-689M Billet Silver Metallic o o
a b NH-705M Nimbus Gray Metallic o o
NH-707 Formal Black II o o
B-533M Steel Blue Metallic o o
a. Engine Type G-525M Dark Silver Sage Metallic o o
J35A9: 3.5 L SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport R-529P Dark Cherry Pearl o o
Fuel-injected engine YR-573M Mocha Metallic o
J35Z1: 3.5 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport
b. Serial Number
3000001—: J35Z1 engine
Transmission Number
P34A - 6000001
a b
P35A: 5-speed Automatic (2WD model)
P34A: 5-speed Automatic (4WD model)
b. Serial Number
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Front Passenger's Compartment:

SRS W ARNING SRS INFORMATION
INFORMATION USA models
(cont'd)
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)
Steering Wheel:
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
CABLE REEL CAUTION
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
Rear Passenger's Compartment:

133
Doorjamb:
1/M TESTING SERVICE INFORMATION
INFORMATION (Under-hood Emission Control
(4WD model) Inform ation) and ENGINE
\ COOLANT INFORMATION
SRS W ARNING \
AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR CAP BATTERY

INFORMATION DANGER DANGER
Under-hood Emission Control Label
Emission Group identification Test Group and Evaporative Family
Example: Test Group:
'06-08 Models
8 HNX T 03.5 NKR
ab cd e
a. Model Year
6: '06
7: '07
8:'08
'06 Model b. Manufacturer Subcode
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5 HNX: Honda
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2006 MODEL YEAR c. Family Type
NEW LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS AND CALIFORNIA T: LDT
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2006 MODEL YEAR d. Displacement Group
NEW LEV II ULEV LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS. e. Sequence Characters
TKR/WKR: J35Z1 engine
'07 Model RKR/VKR: J35A9 engine
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5 NKR: J35Z1 and J35A9 engines
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS AND CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR Evaporative Family:
NEW LEV II ULEV LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS.
'08 Model 8 HNX R 0156 BBA
ab cd e
a. Model Year
6: '06
7:'07
8:'08
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: Honda
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Working Capacity Group
0156: '06 and '08 models
0163:'07 model
e. Sequence Characters
BBA: '06 and '08 models
BBY: '07 model
B
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the
vehicle, f i rst support the front of the vehicle with tall 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can shift lever in the P position.
change, causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
Vehicle Lift'
3. Position the floor jack under the:front jacking
1. Position the lift blocks (A) under the vehicle's front bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center
support points (B) and rear support points (C). the jacking bracket on the jack platform (C), and
jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety
stands under it.
fn j
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 u I
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle U — 101'-- nt
’
gently to be sure it is firmly supported. —C tt— 8

-
rJ ,
j
flr^n n_n
V ■3 3-*
—r— V —*
-h x.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the 2VWD model
vehicle support points for solid contact with the lift
blocks.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

support points (B and C) as for a vehicle lift. Always use
safety stands when working on or under any vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
4. Position the safety stands under the support points,

and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.

Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Wheel Lift Equipment — The tow truck uses two
towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
vehicle with a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. lifts them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
on the ground. Never tow the vehicle with this wheel
Emergency Towing lift equipment.
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Sling-type Equipment — The tow truck uses metal
Flat-bed Equipment — The operator loads the vehicle cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
on the back of a truck. This is the best way of parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that
transporting the vehicle. end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is method of towing is attempted. This method of towing
equipped with a front towing hook (A), front tie down the vehicle is unacceptable.
hook slots (B),rear towing hook (C), and rear tie down
hook slots (D). The only recommended way of towing the PILOT is on a
flat-bed truck. Towing the 4WD PILOT with only two
The towing hooks can be used with a winch to pull the wheels on the ground will damage parts of the VTM-4
vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hook slots can system. The 2WD PILOT may also be towed with the
be used to secure the vehicle to the truck. front wheels off the ground, or with all four wheels on
the ground.
If the 2WD PILOT cannot be transported by a flat-bed, it

should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If
the vehicle is damaged, and must be towed with the
front wheels on the ground, or if the vehicle is towed
with all four wheels on the ground, do this:
• Release the parking brake.

• Start the engine.
• Shift to the D position, then to the N position.
• Turn off the engine.
• Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position so the steering wheel does not lock.
• Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles

(80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55km/h).
INOTICE 1
• Improper towing preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine,
the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed.
• Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's weight.
Parts Marking Precautions for Variable Torque
B
Management 4WD (VTM-4) System
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are
marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement This vehicle is equipped with the Variable Torque
body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These Management 4WD (VTM-4) System. The VTM-4 system
labels should not be removed. The original engine or distributes driving torque between the front and rear
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the wheels when accelerating and when wheel spin occurs.
replacement engine or transmission.
The VTM-4 system does not have a manual switch to
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking disable the 4WD system. Whenever service work
labels during body repair. Mask the labels before requires spinning the front or rear wheels with the
repairing the part. engine, always lift and support the vehicle so all four
wheels are off the ground.
specs
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical ................................................... ............. 2-2
Engine Assembly .......................................... ........ ............ 2-2
Cylinder Head ............................ ......... ............................. 2-3
Engine Block ....................... .............................................. 2-4
Engine Lubrication .... .................. .................................... 2-5
Cooling System ................ ............................ ..... ........ . 2-5
Fuel and Emissions ....................................................... . 2-5
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential ........... 2-6
Rear Differential ...................................... ................... . 2-15
Steering ............................... ........ ....................................... 2-15
Suspension ............... ......... ................................................ 2-15
Brakes .................. ................................ ...................... . 2-16
Air Conditioning .............. ......................... ................. ...... 2-16
Design Specifications
Dimensions .............. .......................................... ............... 2-17
Weight ............. ........................... ................... ............ 2-17
Engine ...................................... ................. ........................... 2-17
Starter ................................................................................... 2-17
Automatic Transmission .... ..................................... ....... 2-17
Steering ............................................................ .............. 2-17
Suspension ............................ ............................... ......... . 2-18
Tires ..................................................................................... 2-18
Wheel Alignment ............................................................... 2-18
Brakes ................................................................................... 2-18
Air Conditioning ...................................................... ......... 2-18
Electrical Ratings ....................................................... ....... 2-19
Body Specifications .......................................................... 2-20
Engine Electrical_______________
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New I Service Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12V
Firing order 1-_4_ _ 2 -5 —3 -6
Spark plug Type NGK: IZFR5K11

Gap 1.0—1.1 mm (0.039—0.043 in.)
Ignition timing At idle In N or P position 10±2 °BTDC
Check the r e d mark
Drive belt Tension Auto tensioner
Alternator Output At 13.5 V and 130 A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance At 68 °F (20 *C) 2.5 Q
Slip ring O.D. 14.4 mm (0.57 in.) 14.0 mm (0.55 in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 3.2 N (0.33 kgf, 0.72 Ibf)
Starter Output 1.6 kW
Commutator mica depth 0 .4 -0 .5 mm (0.016-0.020 in.) 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Commutator runout 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max. 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
Commutator O.D. 29.3-29.5 mm (1.15-1.16 in.) 28.8 mm (1.134 in.)
Brush length 7.7—8.0 mm (0.30-0.31 in.) 11 mm (0.433 in.)
Brush spring tension (new) 15.7-17.7 N (1.60-1.80 kgf, 3.53-3.98 Ibf)
Engine Assembly
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Compression Pressure Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2r 135 psi)
Check the engine with the starter Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
cranking variation
2-2
specs
Cylinder Head
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Head Warpage 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height 120.95-121.05 mm (4.762-4.766 in.)
Camshaft End play 0.05-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height J35A9 Intake, primary 35.041 mm (1.3796 in.)
Intake, mid 36.445 mm (1.4348 in.)
Intake, 35.284 mm (1.3891 in.)
secondary
J35Z1 Intake, front side 36.149 mm (1.4232 i n.)
Intake, rear side 35.096 mm (1.3817 in.)
J35A9 Exhaust 36.326 mm (1.4302 in.)
J35Z1 Exhaust, front 35.864 mm (1.4120 in.)
side
Exhaust, rear 36.509 mm (1.4374 in.)
side
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.20—0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.)
Exhaust 0.28—0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
Stem O.D. Intake 5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 in.) 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust 5.450—5.460 mm (0.2146—0.2150 in.) 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020—0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Exhaust 0.055-0.080 mm (0.0022-0.0031 in.) 0.11 mm (0.004 in.)
Valve seat Width Intake 1.25—1.55 mm (0.049-0,061 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.75—47.55 mm (1.841 —1.872 in.) 47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Exhaust 46.68-47.48 mm (1.838-1.869 in.) 47.73 mm (1.879 in.)
Valve spring Free length J35A9 Intake 51.54 mm (2.029 in.)
J35Z1 Intake, front side 53.63 mm (2.111 in.)
Intake, rear side
J35A9 Exhaust 51.06 mm (2.010 in.)
J35Z1 Exhaust, front 52.55 mm (2.069 in.)
side
Exhaust, rear
side
Valve guide I.D. Intake 5.510-5.530 mm (0.2169-0.2177 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust 20.60-21.60 mm (0.811 -0 .8 5 0 in.)
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft J35A9 Intake 0.026-0.067 mm (0.0010-0.0026 in.)
clearance J35Z1 Intake, front side 0.019-0.067 mm (0.0007-0.0026 in.)
Intake, rear side 0.015-0.046 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)
J35A9 Exhaust 0.026—0.077 mm (0.0010—0.0030 in.)
J35Z1 Exhaust, front 0.019-0.058 mm (0.0007-0.0023 in.)
side
Exhaust, rear 0.015-0.046 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)
side
2-3
Engine Block _______
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter 89.000-89.015 mm (3.5039-3.5045 in.) 89.065 mm (3.5065 in.)
Bore taper 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit 0.25 mm (0.01 in.)
Piston Skirt O.D. at 16.0 mm (0.63 in.) from 88.975-88.985 mm (3.5029-3.5033 in.)
bottom of skirt
Clearance in cylinder 0.015-0.040 mm (0.0006-0.0016 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.240-1.250 mm (0.0488-0.0492 in.) 1.27 mm (0.050 in.)
Second 1.220—1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
Oil 2.805—2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in.) 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.055-0.080 mm (0.0022-0.0031 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Second 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in.) 0.70 mm (0.028 in.)
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin O.D. 21.962-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648 in.) 21.954 mm (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance —0.0050 to +0.0010 mm 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(-0.00020 to +0.00004 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in.) 0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652 in.)
Large-end bore diameter 58.0 mm (2.28 in.)
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 71.976-72.000 mm (2.8337-2.8346 in.)
Rod journal diameter 54.976-55.000 mm (2.1644-2.1654 in.)
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 i n.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Runout 0.025 mm (0.0010 in.) max. 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance 0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearing Rod bearing clearance 0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
Ill
Engine Lubrication
Item ■ Measurement Qualification Standard or New | Service Limit
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 5.0 L (5.3 US qt)
Oil change 4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
including filte r
Oil change 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
w ithout filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0 .04-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.10—0.19 mm (0.004-0.007 In.) 0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial 0.02—0.07 mm (0.001 -0 .0 0 3 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
clearance
Oil pressure with oil temperature at A t idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi)
176 °F (80 °C) A t 3,000 rpm 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi)
Cooling System
Item 6 Measurement \ Qualrtlcatlon Standard or New
Radiator Coolant capacities (including engine, Engine overhaul 9.2 L (2.43 US gal)
heater, hoses, and reservoir) Coolant change 7.3 L (1.93 US gal)
Use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2
Coolant reservoir Coolant capacity 0.73 1(0.19 US gal)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 9 3 -1 2 3 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm2, 1 4 -1 8 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169—176 °F (76—80 °C)
Fully open 194 °F (90 <€)
Valve lift at fully open 10.0 mm (0.39 in.) min.
Fuel and Emissions

Item .. Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Fuel pressure Pressure w ith fuel pressure gauge 3 8 0 -4 3 0 kPa (3.9~4.4 kgf/cm2, 5 5 -6 3 psi)
regulator connected
Fuel tank Capacity 77.0 L (20.34 US gal)
Engine idle Idle speed w ithout load In N or P position 650+50 rpm
(J35Z1)
In N or P position 730±50rpm
(J35A9)
Idle speed w ith high electrical load In N or P position 700±50rpm
(A/C switch ON, temperature set to (J35Z1)
max cool, blower fan on High, rear In N or P position 730+50 rpm
window defogger ON, and headlights (J35A9)
on high beam)
Automatic 1rransmission and A/T D•ifferential
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New | Service Limit
Automatic Capacity: 4WD Fluid change 3.3 L (3.5 US qt)
transmission Use Honda ATF-Z1 Overhaul 7.9 L (8.3 US qt)
fluid 2WD Fluid change 3.8 L (4.0 US qt)
Overhaul 8.4 L (8.9 US qt)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm 950-1,010 kPa 900 kPa
in N or P position (9.7-10.3 kgf/cm2, 140-1 4 6 psi) (9.2 kgf/cm2, 130 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 950-1,010 kPa 890 kPa
in D position (9.7—10.3 kgf/cm2, 140—146 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm2, 130 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 950-1,010 kPa 890 kPa
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 950-1,010 kPa 890 kPa
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 950-1,010 kPa 890 kPa
in 2 position (9.7—10.3 kgf/cm2, 140—146 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm2, 130 psi)
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 950-1,1010 kPa 890 kPa
in 1 position (9.7—10.3 kgf/cm2, 140—146 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm2, 130 psi)
1st-hold clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 8 0 0 -8 8 0 kPa 760 kPa
in 1 position (8.2—9.0 kgf/cm2, 120-130 psi) (7.7 kgf/cm2, 110 psi)
Torque converter Stall speed 1,950 rpm 1,800—2,100 rpm
Check with vehicle on level ground
Clutch Clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance 1st 1.15—1.35 mm
(0.045-0.053 in.)
2nd 1.05—1.25 mm
(0.041-0.049 in.)
3rd 0.8—1.0 mm
(0.031-0.039 in.)
4th 0.7—0.9 mm
(0.028-0.035 in.)
5th 0.75—0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in.)
1st-hold 0.6—1.0 mm
(0 024-0.039 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 68.3 mm (2.69 in.) 66.3 mm (2.61 in.)
2nd 48.3 mm (1.90 in.) 46.3 mm (1.82 in.)
3rd 52.0 mm (2.05 in.) 50.0 mm (1.97 in.)
4th 37.7 mm (1.48 in.) 35.7 mm (1.41 in.)
5th 37.4 mm (1.47 in.) 35.4 mm (1.39 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch plate thickness 1st 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) When discolored
2nd 1.8 mm (0.071 in.) When discolored
3rd 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
4th 1.8 mm (0.071 in.) When discolored
5th 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) When discolored
1st-hold 1.8 mm (0.071 in.) When discolored
1st clutch end-plate thickness Mark 1 3.1 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored
Mark 2 3.2 mm (0.126 in.) When discolored
1st-hold clutch plate B thickness 5.0 mm (0.197 in.) When discolored
specs
Clutch (cont'd) 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th clutch end plate Mark 1 2.1 mm (0.083 in.) When discolored
thickness Mark 2 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
MarkS 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
Stator shaft I.D. at needle bearing contact area Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm (1.063-1.064 in.) When worn or
side damaged
ATF pump side 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.)
I.D. at mainshaft sealing ring contact 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
area
ATF pump Gear-to-body thrust clearance 0.03-0.06 mm (0.001 -0 .0 0 2 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
Gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in.)
Driven gear 0.070—0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in.)
Driven gear I.D. 14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525 in.) When worn or
damaged
Driven gear shaft O.D. 13.980-13.990 mm (0.5504-0.5508 in.) When worn or
damaged
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.90-6.00 mm (0.220-0.236 in.) 5.4 mm (0.213 in.)
fork
Park gear and When worn or
pawl damaged
Regulator valve Shift fork shaft bore I.D. 14.000-14.010 mm (0.5512-0.5516 in.)
body Shift fork shaft/servo valve bore I.D. 37.000-37.039 mm (1.4567-1,4582 i n.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Mainshaft sealing ring contact I.D. 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
Main valve body Intermediary shaft sealing ring contact 35.000-35.025 mm (1.3780-1.3789 in.) 35.05 mm (1.3799 in.)
I.D.
ATF guide collar Secondary shaft sealing ring contact 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417—1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.1437 in.)
I.D.
Mainshaft Diameter at stator shaft needle bearing 22.984-23.000 mm (0.9049-0.9055 in.) When worn or
contact area damaged
5th gear collar diameter at needle 39.975-39.991 mm (1.5738-1.5744 in.) When worn or
bearing contact area damaged
5th gear collar length 48.7-48.8 mm (1.917-1.921 in.)
5th gear collar flange thickness 5.15-5.30 mm (0.203-0.209 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear I.D. 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear axial clearance 0.10—0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in.)
Sealing ring thickness 1.90-1.96 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
(cont'd)
Automatic Transmission and A/T Differential (cont'd)
lt@m Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Countershaft Diameter at bearing contact area Torque converter 40.505-40.515 mm.(1.5947-1.5951 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
5th gear 34.975-34.991 mm (1.3770-1.3776 in.) When worn or damaged
Diameter of 2nd gear at needle 56.975-56.991 mm (2.2431-2.2437 in.) When worn or damaged
bearing contact area
Reverse gear collar O.D. 39.979-40.000 mm (1.5740-1.5748 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse selector hub O.D. 55.885-55.900 mm (2.200—2.201 in.) When worn or damaged
Cotter thickness 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.)
I.D. of gears 5th gear 41.000-41.016 mm (1.6142-1.6148 in.) When worn or damaged
Idler gear 65.000-65.019 mm (2.5590-2.5598 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 2nd gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002—0.0016 in.)
5th gear 0.12-0.27 mm (0.0047-0.0106 in.)
Idler gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.)
Reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm (0.0039-0.0098 in.)
56 mm washer thickness A 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.) When worn or damaged
B 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.) When worn or damaged
C 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.) When worn or damaged
D 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.) When worn or damaged
E 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.) When worn or damaged
F 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) When worn or damaged
G 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.) When worn or damaged
50.2 mm washer thickness A 3.95 mm (0.1555 n.) When worn or damaged
B 3.97 mm (0.1563 n.) When worn or damaged
C 3.99 mm (0.1571 n.) When worn or damaged
D 4.01 mm (0.1579 n.) When worn or damaged
E 4.03 mm (0.1587 n.) When worn or damaged
F 4.05 mm (0.1594 n.) When worn or damaged
G 4.07 mm (0.1602 n.) When worn or damaged
H 4.09 mm (0.1610 n.) When worn or damaged
1 4.11 mm (0.1618 n.) When worn or damaged
J 4.13 mm (0.1626 n.) When worn or damaged
K 4.15 mm (0.1634 n.) When worn or damaged
L 4.17 mm (0.1642 n.) When worn or damaged
M 4.19 mm (0.1650 n.) When worn or damaged
N 4.21 mm (0.1657 n.) When worn or damaged
P 4.25 mm (0.1673 n.) When worn or damaged
Q 4.27 mm (0.1681 n.) When worn or damaged
R 4.29 mm (0.1689 n.) When worn or damaged
S 4.31 mm (0.1697 n.) When worn or damaged
T 4.33 mm (0.1705 n.) When worn or damaged
U 4.35 mm (0.1713 n.) When worn or damaged
35 x 47 mm thrust washer 5 .97-6.00 mm (0.2350-0.2362 in.) When worn or damaged
thickness
specs
Secondary shaft Diameter at bearing contact area 2nd gear 43.986—43.999 mm (1.7317—1.7322 in.) When worn or damaged
Torque converter 32.002-32.015 mm (1.2599—1.2604 i n.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
Torque converter 28.592-28.608 mm (1.1257—1.1263 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
(shaft end side)
Diameter of 1st gear collar at 38.978-38.991 mm (1.5344-1.5351 in.) When worn or damaged
needle bearing contact area
I.D. of gears 1st gear 44.000-44.016 mm (1.7323-1.7329 in.) When worn or damaged
2nd gear 50.00-50.02 mm (1.9685-1.9693 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 1st gear 0.085-0.130 mm (0.0033-0.0051 in.)
2nd gear 0.06-0.23 mm (0.0024-0.0091 in.)
52 mm thrust washer thickness M 2.405 mm (0.095 in.) When worn or damaged
L 2.430 mm (0.096 in.) When worn or damaged
K 2.455 mm (0.097 in.) When worn or damaged
J 2.480 mm (0.098 in.) When worn or damaged
I 2.505 mm (0.099 in.) When worn or damaged
H 2.530 mm (0.100 in.) When worn or damaged
A 2.705 mm (0.106 in.) When worn or damaged
1st gear collar length 63.3-63.4 mm (2.4921-2.4961 in.)
ATF feed pipe O.D. 1st clutch 11.47—11.48 mm (0.4516-0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
1st~hold clutch 5.97-5.98 mm (0.2350-0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
Feed pipe bushing I.D. 1st clutch 11.518-11.530 mm (0.4535-0.4539 in.) 11.545 mm (0.4545 in.)
1st-hold clutch 6.018—6.030 mm (0.2369-0.2374 in.) 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
(cont'd)
Item Measurement Q ualification Standard or New ' Service Limit
Secondary shaft 65 mm thrust shim thickness 0A 0.80 mm (0.031 n.) When worn or damaged
(cont'd) A 0.84 mm (0.033 n.) When worn or damaged
I 1.16 mm (0.046 n.) When worn or damaged
P 1.44 mm (0.057 n.) When worn or damaged
Q 1.48 mm (0.058 n.) When worn or damaged
U 1.64 mm (0.065 n.) When worn or damaged
V 1.68 mm (0.066 n.) When worn or damaged
W 1.72 mm (0.068 n.) When worn or damaged
X 1.76 mm (0,069 n.) When worn or damaged
Y 1.80 mm (0.071 n.) When worn or damaged
■Z 1.84 mm (0.072 n.) When worn or damaged
AA 1.88 mm (0.074 n.) When worn or damaged
AB 1.92 mm (0.076 n.) When worn or damaged
AC 1.96 mm (0.077 n.) When worn or damaged
AD 2.00 mm (0.079 n.) When worn or damaged
AE 2.04 mm (0.080 n.) When worn or damaged
AF 2.08 mm (0.082 n.) When worn or damaged
AG 2.12 mm (0.083 n.) When worn or damaged
AH 2.16 mm (0.085 n.) When worn or damaged
Al 2.20 mm (0.087 n.) When worn or damaged
AJ 2.24 mm (0.088 n.) When worn or damaged
AK 2.28 mm (0.090 n.) When worn or damaged
AL 2.32 mm (0.091 n.) When worn or damaged
specs
Intermediary I.D. of 3rd gear 36.000-36.016 mm (1.4173-1.4179 in.) When worn or damaged
shaft Axial clearance of 3rd gear 0.005-0.045 mm (0.0002-0.0018 in.)
Cotter thickness 2.99-3.02 mm (0.1177-0.1189 in.)
53 mm splined washer thickness A 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.) When worn or damaged
1 4.155 mm (0.1636 in.) When worn or damaged
M 4.235 mm (0.1667 in.) When worn or damaged
N 4.255 mm (0.1675 in.) When worn or damaged
26.5 mm washer thickness A 1.05 mm (0.041 in.) When worn or damaged
1 1.69 mm (0.067 in.) When worn or damaged
M 2.01 mm (0.079 in.) When worn or damaged
N 2.09 mm (0.082 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse idler Gear shaft O.D. 13.99-14.00 mm (0.5508-0.5512 in.) When worn or damaged
gear I.D. of transmission housing of 14.006—14.024 mm (0.5514—0.5521 in.)
gear shaft contact area
I.D. 18.007-18.020 mm (0.7089-0.7094 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance 0.07—0.38 mm (0.003-0.015 in.)
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0.97—1.05 mm (0.038-0.041 in.)
housing
Holder side 0.97—1.05 mm (0.038-0.041 in.)
(cont'd)
2-11
Automatic 1'ransmission and A/T Ddifferential icont'd)
Wire Diameter O.D. Free Length No. of Coils
Main valve body Cooler check valve spring 0.6 mm 5.8 mm 14.5 mm 6.8
spring (see page (0.024 in.) (0.228 in.) (0.571 in.)
14-291) Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 mm 8.6 mm 35.0 mm 12.6
(0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.378 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6 mm 6.6 mm 30.9 mm 11.1
(0.024 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.217 in.)
Shift valve D spring 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 32.2 mm 13.4
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.268 in.)
Shift valve B spring 0.8 mm 6.6 mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Shift valve A spring 0.8 mm 6.6 mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Modulator valve spring 1.6 mm 10.4 mm 33.5 mm 9.8
(0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.)
CPC valve C spring 0.7 mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.8 mm 7.1 mm 49.0 mm 17.2
(0.031 in.) (0.280 in.) (1.929 in.)
Relief valve spring 1.1 mm 8.6 mm 32.1 mm 11.2
(0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.264 in.)
Lubrication control valve spring 0.7 mm 7.7 mm 28.8 mm 10.4
(0.028 in.) (0.303 in.) (1.134 in.)
Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 mm 7.6 mm 63.0 mm 22.4
(0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (2.480 in.)
Secondary valve Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7 mm 6.1mm 17.8 mm 7.9
body spring (0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
(see page Servo control valve spring 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 35.7 mm 17.2
14-293) (0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Shift valve C spring 0.8 mm 6.6 mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
CPC valve A spring 0.7 mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Kick-down valve spring 0.8 mm 6.6 mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
CPC valve B spring 0.7 mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Regulator valve 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6 mm 41.4 mm 5.5
(see page Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 42.9 mm 14.2
14-294) (0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
0.8 mm 6.6 mm 44.3 mm 25.5
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.744 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.4 mm 8.8 mm 44.0 mm 12.0
(0.055 in.) (0.346 in.) (1.732 in.)
Regulator valve spring A 1.85 mm 14.7 mm 86.9 mm 16.2
(0.073 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.421 in.)
Stator reaction spring 5.5 mm 37.4 mm 30.3 mm 2.1
(0.217 in.) (1.472 in.) (1.193 in.)
specs
Accumulator Ist-hold accumulator spring 2.0 mm 13.1 mm 42.9 mm 9.8
(see page 4th accumulator spring 3.0 mm 19.6 mm 45.3 mm 6.4
14-295) (0.118 in.) (0.772 in.) (1.783 in.)
1st accumulator spring A 2.2 mm 17.7 mm 77.6 mm 12.1
(0.087 in.) (0.697 in.) (3.055 in.)
1st accumulator spring B 2.0 mm 7.1 mm 49.0 mm 10.0
(0.079 in.) (0.280 in.) (1.929 in.)
2nd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6 mm 53.4 mm 7.5
(0.122 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.102 in.)
5th accumulator spring A 2.2 mm 16.4 mm 75.7 mm 14.2
(0.087 in.) (0.646 in.) (2.980 in.)
5th accumulator spring B 2.0 mm 6.0 mm 45.5 mm 11.6
(0.079 in.) (0.236 in.) (1.791 in.)

A/T differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.000-18.025 mm
carrier (0.7087-0.7096 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.013—0.054 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.0005-0.0021 in.)
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 30.025—30.055 mm
(1.182-1,183 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045—0.096 mm 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.002-0.004 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.080—0.126 mm
(0.003-0.005 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 3.9—5.1 N m Adjust
(preload) (4 0 -5 2 kgf-em, 3 5 -4 5 lbf-in.)
For used bearing 3.6—4.8 N m Adjust
(3 7 -4 9 kgf-cm, 3 2 -4 3 lbf-in.)
A/T differential Backlash 1.3—1.8 mm
pinion gear (0.05-0.07 in.)
I.D. 18.042-18.066 mm
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055—0.095 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.0022-0.0037 in.)
(cont'd)
Transfer output Diameter at bearing contact area Transmission 21.977—21.990 mm (0.8652-0.8657 in.) 21.92 mm (0.8630 in.)
shaft housing side
Torque converter 40.002—40.018 mm (1.5749-1.5755 in.) 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
housing side
Axial clearance 0—0.39 mm (0—0.015 in.)
28.5 mm thrust washer thickness A 1.82 mm (0.0717 n.) When worn or damaged
I 1.98 mm (0.0780 n.) When worn or damaged
p 2.12 mm (0.0835 n.) When worn or damaged
u 2.22 mm (0.0874 n.) When worn or damaged
V 2.24 mm (0.0882 n.) When worn or damaged
w 2.26 mm (0.0890 n.) When worn or damaged
X 2.28 mm (0.0898 n.) When worn or damaged
Y 2.30 mm (0.0906 n.) When worn or damaged
z 2.32 mm (0.0913 n.) When worn or damaged
AA 2.34 mm (0.0921 n.) When worn or damaged
Transfer Capacity Fluid change 0.43 L (0.45 us qt)
assembly fluid Hypoid gear oil SAE90 or SAE Overhaul 0.45 L (0.48 us qt)
80W-90 viscosity, API classified
GL4 or GL5 only
Transfer Diameter of transfer hypoid drive Transfer cover 50.002-50.018 mm (1.9686-1.9692 in.) 49.95 mm (1.9665 in.)
assembly gear/shaft assembly at tapered side
roller bearing contact area Transfer gear 24.987-25.000 mm (0.9837-0.9843 in.) 24.93 mm (0.9815 in.)
side
Diameter of transfer output shaft Transfer gear 40.002-40.018 mm (1.5749-1.5755 in.) 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
(hypoid gear) at tapered roller side
bearing contact area Companion 27.975-27.990 mm (1.1014-1.1020 in.) 27.92 mm (1.0992 in.)
flange side
Transfer gear backlash 0.06—0.17 mm (0.002—0.007 in.) Adjust
Tapered roller bearing total 3.20—4.16 N-m Adjust
starting torque (preload) (32.6-42.4 kgf-cm, 28.3-36.8 lbf-in.)
specs
Rear Differential
Rear differential Capacity Fluid 2.64 L (2.79 US qt)
flui d Use Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid replacement
Steering
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside With engine 0—10 mm (0—0.39 in.)
edge running
Initial turning load measured at With engine 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf) If higher, check
outside edge running gearbox and pump
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 20 ° max.
from locked position Tighten locknut to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve 8,300—8,800 kPa (8 5 -9 0 kgf/cm2, 1,210-1,280 psi)
closed
Power steering Capacity Reservoir 0.4 L (0.42 US qt)
fluid Use Honda Power Steering Fluid capacity
System capacity With accessory power steering cooler: 1.26 L (1.33 US qt)
Without accessory power steering cooler: 1.22 L (1.29 US qt)
Suspension
Wheel alignment Camber 4WD Front —0 °30 ' _Ll
Rear —0 °30 '± 4 5 '
2WD Front —0 °40 '± 1 °
Rear —0 ° 40 ' ± 4 5 '
Caster 4WD Front 1 ° 5 3 '± 1 °
2WD Front 1 ° 5 9 '± 1 °
Total toe-in 4WD Front 0 ± 2 mm (0±0.08 in.)
Rear 0 ± 2 mm (0±0.08 in.)
2WD Front 0 ± 2 mm (0±0.08 in.)
Rear 2 ± 2 mm (0.08±0.08 in.)
CO
00
o
00
0
Front wheel turning angle 4WD Inward

Outward 30 °1 9 ' (Reference)
2WD Inward 37 ° 52'
Outward 30 °1 0 ' (Reference)
Wheel Runout Axial 0—0.7 mm (0—0.03 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0—0.7 mm (0—0.03 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0—0.05 mm (0—0.002 in.)
Rear 0—0.05 mm (0—0.002 in.)
Brakes
Parking brake Number of clicks when pedal pressed 4 to 6 clicks
with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf) of force
Drum I.D 209.9-210.0 mm (8.264-8.267 in.) 211.0 mm (8.307 in.)
Shoe lining thickness 4.0 mm (0.16 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet removed) 155 mm (6 1/8 in.)
Free play 1 - 5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in.) 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Rear 10.9—11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in.) 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)
Runout 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pad Thickness Front 10.5—11.5 mm (0.41-0.45 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 9 .5 -1 0 .5 mm (0.37-0.41 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity of system Dual 7 0 0 -7 5 0 g (24.7-26.5 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01 AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 35 mL (1 1/6 fl-oz)
Evaporator 40 mL (1 1/3fl*oz)
(front)
Evaporator (rear) 30 mL (1 fl-oz)
Each line and 10 mL( 1/3 fl-oz)
hose
Compressor 1 80-195 mL ( 6 - 6 1/2 fl-oz)
Compressor Field coil resistance At 68 °F (20 ° C ) 3.9 —4,3 Q
Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance 0.35-0.60 mm (0.014-0.024 in.)
specs
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSIONS Overall length 4,775 mm (188.0 in.)
Overall width LX, LX-VP 1,943 mm (76.5 in.)
EX, EX-SE, EXL 1,968 mm (77.5 in.)
Overall height 4WD 1,793 mm (70.6 in.)
2WD 1,780 mm (70.1 in.)
Wheelbase 2,700 mm (106.3 in.)
Track Front (4WD) 1,685 mm (66.3 in.)
Front (2WD) 1,690 mm (66.5 in.)
Rear (4WD) 1,690 mm (66.5 in.)
Rear (2WD) 1,694 mm (66.7 in.)
Ground clearance 4WD 203 mm (8.0 in,)
2WD 198 mm (7.8 in.)
Seating capacity Eight (8)
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 4WD 2,700 kg (5,950 lbs)
(GVWR) 2WD 2,650 kg (5,841 lbs)
ENGINE Type J35A9 Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6 gasoline
engine
J35Z1 Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC i-VTEC V6 gasoline engine
Cylinder arrangement 60 °V6-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 89.0 x 93.0 mm (3.50 x 3.66 in.)
Displacement 3,471 cm3(mL) (211.8 cu in.)
Compression ratio 10.0
Valve train J35A9 Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
J35Z1 Belt driven, SOHC i-VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement At 6,000 rpm 58.4 L (61.7 US qt)/minute
Water pump displacement At 6,000 rpm 172 L (182 US qt)/minute
Fuel required Normal driving Regular UNLEADED gasoline with 87 Pump Octane
Number or higher
Towing Premium UNLEADED gasoline 91 Pump Octane
Number or higher is recommended when towing load is
more than 1,590 kg (3,500 lbs.)
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output 1.6 kW
Normal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise as viewed from drive end
AUTOMATIC Type BVLA (2WD) Electronically-controlled automatic, 5-speed forward, 1
TRANSMISSION BVGA (4WD) reverse, 3-element torque converter with lock-up clutch
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.693
2nd 1.565
3rd 1.023
4th 0.726
5th 0.530
Reverse 1.888
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.375
STEERING Type Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pinion
Gear ratio 42.3
Overall ratio 16.9
Turns, lock-to-lock 3.22
Steering wheel diameter 386 mm (15.2 in.)
(cont'd)
SUSPENSION Type Front McPherson Strut
Rear Multilink with trailing arm
Shock absorber Front Twin tube gas
Rear Twin tube gas
TIRES Size of front and rear tires P235/70R16 104S
Size of spare tires T155/90D16 110M
WHEEL Camber Front (4WD) —0 °3 0 '
0
0
CO
o 0 o
ALIGNMENT Rear (4WD)
■
1
!
O
0
Front (2WD)
■*!■
1 T
Rear (2WD)
Caster Front (4WD) 1 °5 3 '
Front (2WD) 1 °5 9 '
Total toe-in Front 0 mm (0 in.)
Rear (4WD) 0 mm (0 in.)
Rear (2WD) 2 mm (0.08 in.)
SAI at camber (kingpin axis) 11 ° 5 4 '
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Foot type, mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 53.3 cm2(8.26 sq in.) x2
Rear 21.8 cm2(3.38 sq in.) x2
Parking brake shoe friction surface 60.2 cm2(9.33 sq in.) x2
area
AIR Compressor Type/Manufacturer Swash plate/DENSO
CONDITIONING Number of cylinders 10
Capacity 215 mL (13.12 cu in.)/rev.
Maximum speed 7,600 rpm
Lubricant capacity 180 mL (6 fl-oz)
Lubricant type DENSO ND-OIL 8
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Sirocco fan
Motor input (front) 228W /12V
Motor input (rear) 125W /12V
Speed control Infinite variable
(Front: Auto A/C)
Speed control 7-speed
(Front: Manual A/C)
Speed control Infinite variable
(Rear: Auto A/C)
Speed control 3-speed
(Rear: Manual A/C)
Maximum capacity (front) 490 m3(17,300 cu ft)/h
Maximum capacity (rear) 310 m3(11,000 cu ft)/h
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive
Electrical power 35 W maximum at 12 V
consumption at 68 °F
(20 <€)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Quantity (dual) 7 0 0 -7 5 0 g (24.7-26.5 oz)
ELECTRICAL Battery '06-07 models 12 V —65 Ah/20HR (12V—52 Ah/5HR)
RATINGS '08 model 12 V —72 Ah/20HR (12V—60 Ah/5HR)
Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 120 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 7.5 A
Driver's under-dash fuse/ 30 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
relay box
Auxiliary under-hood fuse 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
box
Passenger's under-dash 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
Auxiliary under-dash fuse 7.5 A
holder
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V —60 W (HB3)
Headlight low beam 12 V —55 W(H11)
Front fog lights 12 V —55 W (H11)
Front turn signal lights 12 V - 2 1 W (Amber)
Front side marker/parking ■12 V—5 W
lights
Front side turn signal lights 1 2 V -3 C P
Rear turn signal/taillights 12 V—21/5 W
Rear side marker lights 12 V -3 C P
Brake/Tail lights 12 V —21/5 W
High mount brake light 12 V —18 W
Back-up lights 12 V —21 CP
License plate lights 1 2 V -5 W
Tailgate lights 1 2 V -5 W
Vanity mirror lights 12 V —1.1 W
Front individual map lights 1 2 V -8 W
(EXL, EX-SE)
Front individual map lights 1 2 V -4 C P
(LX, LX-VP, EX)
2nd and 3rd Roll Rear 12 V—5 W
individual map lights
Courtesy lights 12 V —3.8 W
Gauge lights LED
Indicators LED
Ambient light LED
Courtesy lights 12 V—3.8 W
Heater control panel lights 14 V—0.56 W, 14V—1.4 W
Climate control unit lights 14 V—0.56 W
Rear heater control panel 14 V —1.4 W
lights
Glove box light 12 V—3.4 W
Console box light 12 V—1.4 W
Washer reservoir Capacity 4.5 L (4.7 US qt)
Body Specifications
»»( U! 9 0L) mm S6£'l

£*CU! I 0i) uiiu 0 8 i'l
• 1: LX, LX-VP
*2: EX, EXL, EX-SE
* 3: 2WD model
* 4 : 4W D model
Lubricants and Fluids
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Maintenance Main Items
Maintenance Sub Items
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of the lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work
procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
Application Lubricant or Fluid

A Engine Honda Motor Oil: American Honda P/N 08798-9023 (5W-20),
Honda Canada P/N CA66806 (5W-20)
Look for the API certification seal on the oil container. Make
sure it says "For Gasoline Engines." SAE Viscosity: See
chart.
B Automatic transmission Honda Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):
American Honda P/N 08200-9001,
Honda Canada P/N CA66689
Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can
affect shift quality.
C Transfer assembly Hypoid Gear Oil GL4 or GL5
Use SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API
classified GL4 or GL5 only
Viscosity: SAE 90: above 0 T ( —18 °C)
SAE 80W-90: below 0 °F ( - 1 8 <€)
D Rear differential Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid: P/N 08200-9003
E Brake system (including VSA lines) Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008
Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda
brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the
system.
F Brake booster clevis pin Multipurpose Grease
G Battery terminals
H Pedal linkage
I Fuel fill door
J Hood hinges and hood latch
K Door hinges: upper and lower
L Tailgate hinges
M Caliper piston boot and seal, caliper pins Honda Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M
and boots
N Door checker Molykote Grease 44MA
O Power steering system Honda Power Steering Fluid: P/N 08206-9002
Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other
type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid
can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
P Air conditioning compressor Compressor Oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH
or 38899-PR7-A01) for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
Q Cooling system Honda Long Life Antifreeze /Coolant Type2 P/N QL999-9001
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil

Engine oil viscosity fo r am bient tem perature ranges
-20 0 20 40 60 80 100°F
I___ I___ i i i i i i
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40°C
3-3
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Maintenance Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the information display. Based on engine operating conditions and
accumulated engine revolutions, the Pilot's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine oil life. The
system also displays the code for other scheduled maintenance items needing service.
Service Information 3. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,
and the remaining engine oil life is 1 % to 5 %, the
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a message "SERVICE" (A) is displayed along with
percentage on the information display. engine oil life and the same maintenance item
To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition code(s).
switch to the ON (II) position, then push and release
the Select/Reset knob repeatedly until the engine
oil life displays.
A SER\ /ICE OIL LIFE %

1
1
'
5
OIL LIFE %
on
o u A
— r
A
4. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

and the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the engine
oil life indicator (A) blinks.
2. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, Pressing the Select/Reset knob cancels the display,
and the remaining engine oil life (A) is 6 % to '15.%, but the maintenance minder indicator stays on.
the remaining engine oil life and other scheduled
maintenance item(s) needing service are displayed,
The maintenance minder indicator (B) also comes
on when the engine oil life is 15 % or less.
To cancel the display and the indicator, press the
Select/Reset knob. A SERVICE OIL LIFE %
I n
• Complete list of maintenance main items (C)
1 u
(see page 3-7).
• Complete list of maintenance sub items (D)
TA
(see page 3-8).
fi
B
C
n
A B OIL LIFE %
IDZIUCC IC
iCJ130 iD
k J
L ......... 1 t
D A
(cont'd)
General Information (cont'd)
5. if the indicated maintenance is not done, the engine Resetting the Maintenance Information
oil life indicator shows a negative mileage, for Display
example " - “10," on the display.
If the negative mileage is between 0 and —9, the NOTE;
indicator is displayed for only a few seconds when • The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. • If a required service is done and the display is not
The negative mileage remains displayed after the reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
vehicle is driven more than 10 miles (for USA doing the service, the system will not show the
models) or 10 km (for Canada models) after 0 % oil proper maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
life is reached, and the display cannot be canceled. mechanical problems because there will be no
This means the indicated maintenance item(s) accurate record of when the required maintenance is
should have been done more than 10 miles (or needed.
10 km) ago. • The engine oil life and the maintenance item(s) can
be reset independently only with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
2. Press the Select/Reset knob repeatedly until the

A SERVIC E engine oil life indicator is displayed.
_ Iiu
n
3. Press and hold the Select/Reset knob for about
10 seconds. The engine oil life indicator and the
— -------------------------r maintenance item code(s) will blink.
A
NOTE: If you are resetting the display when the

engine oil life is more than 15 %, make sure any
maintenance item(s) requiring service are done
before resetting the display.
4. Press the Select/Reset knob for another 5 seconds.

The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and
the engine oil life will reset to "100."
OIL LIFE%
i n n
i u u
3-6
Maintenance Main Items
If the message "SERVICE" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every
year,
NOTE:
* Independent of the maintenance messages In the information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
* Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km),
* Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1,2 or 3, only if they are noisy.
Symbol Maintenance Main Item s
A Replace engine oil (see page 8-8).
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt).
B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-9).
Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt).
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-2).
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-6).
Check the number of clicks (4 to 6) when the parking brake pedal is pressed with 294 N (30 kgf,
66 Ibf) of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17i3).
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage or leaking grease.
• Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3).
* Check bolts for tightness.
* Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4).
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA lines (see page 19-31).
Check the master cylinder, and VSA modulator-eontofol unit for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids.
• Engine coolant (see page 10-6).
• Automatic transmission fluid (ATF-Z1) (see page 14-213).
® Transfer fluid (Hypoid Gear Oil) (see page 14-215).
. • VTM-4 rear differential fluid (VTM-4 Differenti al Fluid) (see page 15-46).
® Power steering fluid (see page 17-13).
• Brake fluid (see page 19-8).
• Windshield washer fluid (see page 22-218).
Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-10).
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines" (see page 11-376) and connections* (see page 11-378).
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( * ) will
not void the customer's emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at
the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
Maintenance Sub Items
Number Maintenance Sub Items

1 Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition.
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
2 Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-402).
If the vehicle is primarily driven in dusty conditions, replace the element every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-53).
• If the vehicle is driven mostly in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in the
air, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
• Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and air conditioning system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-31).
Look for cracks and damage, then check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator.
3 Replace automatic transmission (see page 14-214) and transfer (see page 14-215) fluid.
• Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission and transfer fluid temperatures. This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the maintenance minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven in
these conditions, have the transmission fluid and transfer fluid changed every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km).
• Automatic transmission fluid capacity 2WD: 3.8 L (4.0 US qt), 4WD: 3.3 L (3.5 US qt), use Honda
automatic transmission fluid (ATF-Z1).
• Transfer fluid capacity: 0.43 L (0.45 US qt), use Hypoid Gear Oil GL4 or GL5.
4 Replace spark plugs (see page 4-22).
Use IZFR5K11 (NGK).
Replace timing belt (see page 6-20). If the vehicle is regularly driven in very high temperatures (over
110 °F, 43 c€), or in very low temperatures (under —20 °F, -29 °C), or towing a trailer replace every
60,000 miles (USA)/100,000 km (Canada) and inspect water pump (see page 10-5).
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-8).
Intake: 0.20—0.24 mm (0.008—0.009 in.), Exhaust: 0.28—0.32 mm (0.011 —0.013 in.).
5 Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6).
Capacity (including the reservoir): 7.3 L (1.93 US gal), use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
6 Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid (see page 15-46).
* Driving in mountainous areas at very low speeds, towing a trailer, or frequently driving fully loaded
results in a higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven
under these conditions, replace the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
• Capacity: 2.64 L (2.79 US qt), use Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid.
3-8
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the side of the roof, and side
Honda dealer.
airbags may deploy.
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools .............................. 4-2 Charging System Indicator
Circuit Troubleshooting ....... 4-26
Starting System Alternator and Regulator Circuit
Component Location Index .... 4-3 Troubleshooting .................... 4-28
Symptom Troubleshooting Alternator Control Circuit
Index ....................... ................. 4-4 Troubleshooting .................... 4-29
Circuit Diagram ......................... 4-5 Drive Belt Inspection ................ 4-31
Starter System Circuit Drive Belt Replacement ............ 4-32
Troubleshooting .................... 4-6 Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Starter Solenoid Test ............... 4-8 Inspection ........................ ...... 4-33
Starter Performance Test ........ 4-9 Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Starter Removal and Replacement ........................... 4-35
Installation .............................. 4-10 Tensioner Pulley
Starter Overhaul ....................... 4-11 Replacement .......................... 4-36
Alternator Removal and
Ignition System Installation .............................. 4-36
Component Location Index .... 4-16 Alternator Overhaul .................. 4-39
Circuit Diagram ......................... 4-17
Ignition Timing Inspection ...... 4-18 Cruise Control
Ignition Coil Component Location Index .... 4-44
Removal/Installation ............ 4-19 Symptom Troubleshooting
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Index ......................................... 4-45
Troubleshooting .................... 4-20 Circuit Diagram .......................... 4-47
Spark Plug Inspection .............. 4-22 Cruise Control Input Test ........ 4-48
Cruise Control Main Switch
Charging System Test/Replacement ................. 4-50
Component Location Index .... 4-23 * Cruise Control Set/decel,
Symptom Troubleshooting Resume/accel, Cancel Switch
Index ......................................... 4-24 Test/Replacement ................. 4-50
Circuit Diagram .... ................ . 4-25
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

® 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
© 07749-0010000 Handle Driver 1
■
© ©
n
■ ENGINE 1
Component Location Index
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
(View of back side)
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-6 Test, page 14-261

Solenoid Test, page 4-8 Replacement, page 14-262
Performance Test, page 4-9
Removal and Installation, page 4-10
Overhaul, page 4-11
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Sym ptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Engine does not start 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections. Poor ground atG101,
(does not crank) 2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-81). G102
3. Check the starter (see page 4-6).
4. Check the starter cut relay (see page 22-82).
5. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-261).
6. Check the ignition switch or wire (see page 22-85).
Engine cranks, but does 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
not start 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375).
3. Check for plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-376).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-386).
5. Check the throttle body (see page 11-406).
6. Check for low engine compression.
• J35A9 engine (see page 6-6)
• J35Z1 engine (see page 6-61)
7. Check for damaged or broken timing belt.
Engine is hard to start 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-376).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-386).
Engine cranks slowly 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-81).
3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-11).
4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
G101
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 4. Set the parking brake, then with the shift lever in
• Air temperature must be between 59 and 100 °F the N or P position, turn the ignition switch to
(15 and 38 °C) during this procedure. START (III).
• After the inspection, you must reset the powertrain
control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM will Does the starter crank the engine normally?
continue to stop the fuel injectors from operating.
• The battery must be in good condition and fully YES—The starting system is OK. Go to step 10.
charged.
NO—Go to step 5.
1. Hook up the following equipment:
5. Check the battery condition (see page 22-81). Check
• Ammeter, 0—400 A the electrical connections at the battery, the
• Voltmeter, 0—20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt) negative battery cable to the body, the engine
ground cables, and the starter for looseness and
corrosion. Then try cranking the engine again.
Does the starter crank the engine?
YES—Repairing the loose connection corrected the

problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 10.
NO—Based on the following symptoms, take the

appropriate action:
• If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to

step 6.
• If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, go to step 8.
2. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the • If the starter does not disengage from the torque
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). converter ring gear when you release the key,
replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it,
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and select PGM-FI, and check for the following: ■
INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the - Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
HDS. - Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning
clutch
6. Make sure the shift lever is in the .N or P position, . 8. While cranking the engine, check the cranki ng
and set the parking brake. Disconnect the BLK wire voltage and the current draw.
from the solenoid S terminal. Connect a jumper
wire from the battery'positive terminal to the Is the cranking voltage greater than or equal to
solenoid S terminal. 7.7 V and is the current draw less than or equal to
40 0 A ?
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—Replace the starter, or remove and

disassemble it, and check for these problems: ■
• Drag in the starter armature

• Shorted armature winding
• Excessive drag in the engine
• Open circuit in starter armature commutator
segments
• Excessive worn starter brushes
• Open circuit in the starter brushes
• Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
• Faulty drive gear clutch
Does the starter crank the engine? 9. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and
the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
YES—Go to step 7. any damaged parts.
NO—Remove the starter, and repair or replace as 10. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel ALL
necessary. ■ INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
7. Check the following items in the order listed until

you find the open circuit:■
• The BLK/WHT wire and connectors between the

driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ignition switch.
• The BLK/WHT and BLK wire and connectors
between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the starter.
• The ignition switch (see page 22-85).
• The transmission range switch and connector
(see page 14-261).
• The starter cut relay (see page 22-82).
Starter Solenoid Test
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 6. Connect the cables and wire in the reverse order of
audio system and the navigation system (if removal.
equipped), then write down the audio presets.
7. Connect the negative cable to the battery.
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
8. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
3. Disconnect the starter cable (A), BLK wire (B), and the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
motor cable (C). audio presets.
9. Do the power window control unit reset procedure

(see page 22-255).
10. Set the clock (on vehicles without navigation).
8 x 1.25 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the

S terminal and the armature housing (ground).
There should be continuity.
• If there is continuity, go to step 5.

• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
5. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the

S terminal and the M terminal. There should be
continuity.
• If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.

• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal. 5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. If the
pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
2. Make a connection for this test using the thickest
(gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge
as used on the vehicle).
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave

the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
7. Reconnect the wire to the M terminal.
8. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and

confirm that the motor starts and keeps rotating.
3. Connect the battery as shown. Make sure you
disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working
properly.
4. Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the

pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the
solenoid is working properly.
9. If the electric current meets the specification when

the battery voltage is at 11 V, the starter is working
properly.
Specification
Electric Current: 90 A or less
Starter Removal and Installation
Removal Installation
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 1. Install the starter (A) using a new gasket (B), then
audio system and the navigation system (if install the harness clamp (C), and connect the
equipped), then write down the audio presets. starter cable (D) to the B terminal and BLK wire (E)
to the solenoid S terminal. Make sure the crimped
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, side of the ring terminal faces away from the
then disconnect the positive cable. starter when you connect it
3. Remove the battery.
4. Remove the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

dipstick.
5. Remove the harness clamp (A).
2. Install the ATF dipstick.
3. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then

connect the negative cable.
6. Disconnect the starter cable (B) from the B terminal 4. Start the engine to make sure the starter works
and BLK wire (C) from the solenoid S terminal. properly.
7. Remove the two bolts holding the starter. 5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
audio presets.

(see page 22-255).

n
I ENGINE r I
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
END COVER
STARTER
SOLENOID
(Apply molybdenum
disulfide.)
STARTER
LEVER
GEAR HOUSING
(Apply molybdenum disulfide.

’ GREASE^
IDLER GEAR (Apply molybdenum disulfide.)
(cont'd)
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Brush Holder Removal Armature Inspection and Test
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10). 5. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
2. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal, and
remove the end cover. 6. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from
contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
3. Place a plastic pipe with an outside diameter of or damage, replace the armature.
29.4 mm (1.16 in.) on the armature.
7. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is

4. Move the brush holder (A) up to the pipe (B) while dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a
holding the pipe so the brushes do not pop out lathe to the specifications in step 8, or recondition
from the holder. with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
8. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is 10. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B),
below the service limit, replace the armature. undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
Commutator Diameter the commutator segments. The undercut should
Standard (Mew}; 29.3—29.5 mm (1.154—1.161 in.) not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped CD).
Service Limit; 28,8 mm (1.134 in.)
Commutator Mica Depth
Standard (New): 0.40—0.50 mm (0.016—0.020 in.)
Service Limit; 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
9, Measure the commutator (A) runout.
• If the commutator runout is within the service

limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or 11. Check for continuity between the segments of the
brass chips between the segments. commutator. If the re is an open circuit between any
• If the commutator runout is not within the service segments, replace the armature.
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New); 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max.
(cont'd)
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
12. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Starter Brush Inspection
Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while 14. Measure the brush length (A). If it is shorter than
the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
the armature.
Brush Length
Service Limit: 0.9 mm (0.04 in.)
13. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between

the commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B), Starter Brush Holder Test
and between the commutator and the armature
shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature. 15. Check for continuity between the (+ ) brush (A) and
(—) brush (B). If there is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.
Planetary Gear Inspection Starter Reassembly
16. Check the planetary gears (A) and internal gear (B). 20. Install the armature in the housing.
Replace them if they are worn or damaged.
21. Place the brush holder assembly on the armature,
then move the brush holder (A) down to the
armature.
Overrunning Clutch Inspection
17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft.

Replace it if it does not slide smoothly. 22. Install the end cover to retain the brush holder.
18. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) in both directions.

It should lock and move upward in one direction
and rotate smoothly in the other direction. If it does
not lock in either direction, or if it locks both
directions, then replace it.
19. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged,

replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately. Check the condition of
the idler gear and torque converter ring gear to see
if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.
SPARK PLUG IGNITION COIL

Inspection, page 4-22 Igniti on Timing Inspecti on, page 4-18
Removal/Installation, page 4-19
Circuit Diagram
G101
G102
ICM; Ignition Conotroi Module

Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 6. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the timing
data link connector (DLC), and check for DTCs (see belt cover. Check the ignition timing under a no
step 2 on page 11-3). If a DTC is present, diagnose load condition, (headlights, blower fan, rear
and repair the cause before inspecting the ignition window defogger, and air conditioner are turned
timing. off)
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Ignition Timing:

3,000 rpm with no load (in the N or P position) until 10° 2 ° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in the N or P
the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. position
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11-358).
4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
5. Connect the timing light to the service loop.
7. If the ignition timing differs from the specification,

check the cam timing. If the timing is OK, update
the powertrain control module (PCM) if it does not
have the latest software (see page 11-7), or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
recheck. If the ignition system works properly, and
the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-230).
8. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.

Ignition Coil Removal/Installation
1. Remove the engine cover. 3. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors (A), then
remove the rear bank ignition coils (B).
Sx 1.0 mm
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors (A), then

remove the front bank ignition coils (B). 4. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of
removal.
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 8 (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary under 4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
hood fuse box. socket terminal No. 2 and the each ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No. 3.
Is the fuse OK?
IGNITION COIL RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES—Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 2. 1
Terminal side of 2
NO—Replace the fuse. If the fuse continues to blow,
female terminals
locate and repair the short in the circuit between 4 3
the ignition coil relay and the ignition coils. ■
2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the relay block, Z \

and test it (see page 22-82).
Wire side of
female terminals
Is the relay OK?
YES—Goto step 3. IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
NO—Replace the ignition coil relay. ■ Is there continuity ?
3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P YES—Go to step 5.

socket terminal No. 1 and body ground, then
terminal No. 4 and body ground. NO—Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and each ignition coil
IGNITION COIL RELAY 4P SOCKET 3P connector terminal No. 3. ■
5. Check for continuity between each ignition coil 3P

connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
Is there battery voltage?
YES—Go to step 4. Wire side of female terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between ignition coil

relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and the auxiliary Is there continuity ?
under-hood fuse box or terminal No. 4 and the
auxiliary fuse box. ■ YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Repair open in the wire between each ignition

coil 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground. ■
6. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 9. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal
Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS A6.
line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the

powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. Terminal side of
female terminals
4 3
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). (S ) m r ly
^ (BLK/WHT)
8. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. I 1 2 3 |4 | 516 17 8 9 1
II 10 11 12
Terminal side of
/ M l / I / 17 18 19 ■
20 21 22 23 24 25
female terminals . I 26 27 28 2 9 |/|3 l[7 33 34 35 -■
13 6 1 / 38.1/1/141 142 431441
1 PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

r)
Is there continuity?
4 3
YES—The system is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections at the ignition coil relay
and the PCM (A6).H
Terminal side of female terminals NO—Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the PCM (A6). ■
YES—Repair short in the wire between ignition coil

relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the PCM (A6). ■
NO—Go to step 9.
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the spark plugs, and inspect the electrodes 3. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs,
and the ceramic insulator. replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification.
• Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by
these conditions: Electrode Gap
- Advanced ignition timing Standard (New): 1.0 — 1.1 mm (0.039—0.043 in.)
- Loose spark plug
- Plug heat range too hot A
- Insufficient cooling
• Fouled plugs may be caused by these conditions:

- Retarded ignition timing
- Oil in combustion chamber
- Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
• Improper gap
• Oil-fouling 4. Replace the plug at the specified interval or if the
• Carbon deposits
• Cracked center
center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
electrode insulator plugs listed.
Spark Plugs
NGK: IZFR5K11
2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,

clean the electrode with a plug cleaner.
NOTE: 5. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to

• Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
electrode since this will damage the electrode. cylinder head, finger-tight. Torque them to 18 N-m
• When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft).
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
DRIVE BELT
Inspection (J35A9 engine), page 4-31
Replacement (J35A9 engine), page 4-32
Inspection (J35Z1 engine), page 4-31
Replacement (J35Z1 engine), page 4-32
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Charging system Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator does not come (see page 4-26).
on with the ignition
switch ON (II)
Charging system 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
indicator stays on 2. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
(see page 4-26).
3. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-31).
4. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-33).
Battery discharged 1. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current draw
with the ignition switch off, and the key removed. The
multiplex control unit may take up to 10 minutes to turn
off (sleep mode) for some models.
2. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-31).
3. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-33).
4. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-28).
5. Check for poor connection at the battery terminal.
6. Test the battery (see page 22-81).
Battery overcharged 1. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-28).
2. Test the battery (see page 22-81).
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the charging system indicator come on? 8. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
YES—Go to step 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS
line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—Go to step 11.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
2,000 rpm for 1 minute.
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
Does the charging system indicator go off ?
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
YES—Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go terminal B42 and body ground.
to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4-28). ■ PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
NO—Go to step 3. ...r i .

I 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 19 1
I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic I 20 21 22 23 24 25
function procedure (see page 22-90). 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136 j 37 ^ 8 139 140 141 142 j— 4 3 i—
]44|i-i
*1j— i . 1... 1....r -T i
Does the charging system indicator flash?
ALTL fW HT/BLU)
YES—Go to step 4.
N o —Replace the gauge control module (see page

22 - 102 ) . ^ Terminal side of female terminals
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there continuity?
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. YES—Repair short in the wire between the
alternator and the PCM. ■
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Does the charging system indicator go off ? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
repair the alternator (see page 4-39). ■ PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230).■
NO—Go to step 7.
rn
■ ENGINE-JJ
11. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic 16. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page
' function procedure (see page 22-90). 11-3). Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the
SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch
Does the charging system indicator flash? OFF.
YES—Go to step 12. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
from damage.
NO—Replace the gauge control module (see page
22- 102). ■ 17. Disconnect the PCM connector B (44P).
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B42 and the alternator 4P connector
13. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. terminal No. 3.
PCM CONNECTOR B(44P)
14. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 3 and
body ground with a jumper wire. 3==E
— _— ---- ---- _ e
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 I6 |7
I 10 11 12
~CO
To
CD
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR 17 18 19
1 20 21 22 x 23 24 25 i
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38139140 141 |42 4 3 1441
L-i— 1— i L
Terminal side of female terminals ALTL fW HT/BLU)
L (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER Wire side of female terminals
WIRE
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
Does the charging system indicator come on? good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230). ■
repair the alternator (see page 4-39). ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
NO—Disconnect the jumper wire, then go to step alternator and the PCM.B
16.
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Make sure the battery connections are good and 5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
the battery is sufficiently charged (see page 22-81). idle.
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn 6. Turn off all the accessories. Select the charging test
the selector switch to position 1 (starting). on the tester.
LOAD ADJUSTER FULL FIELD TESTER

(CARBON PILE) LEAD (BLU)
7. Remove the inductive pickup, and zero the
ammeter.
^ a M pjJ b T ^
VOLTMETER 8. Place the inductive pickup over the B terminal wire
o
' >
NEGATIVE of the alternator so the arrow points away from the
I C L U S T E R OL0AD LIGHT j LEAD (BLK)
alternator.
x fv o ijs ^
V A T -4 0 VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
V * J LEAD (RED) 9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
there.
VOLT
SELECTOR
Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
FIELD NEGATIVE
SELECTOR TERM INAL
CABLE (BLK) YES—Go to alternator control circuit
TEST SELECTOR
SWITCH POSITIVE
troubleshooting (see page 4-29). ■
TERM INAL
CABLE (RED) NO—Goto step 10.
INDUCTIVE
PICKUP (GRN) 10. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery
voltage drops to between 12—13.5 V.
Is the amperage 87.5 A or more?

INDUCTIVE B TERM INAL
PICKUP YES—The charging system is OK. ■
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at NOTE: If the charging system indicator is still on,
3,000 rpm, with no load until the radiator fan comes replace the alternator (see page 4-36).
on, then let it idle.
NO—Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it repair the alternator (see page 4-39). ■
there.
Is the voltage over 15.1V?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or

rear housing assembly (see page 4-39). ■
NO—Go to step 5.
Fî
■ ENGINE ■
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector
data link connector (DLC), and check for DTCs (see terminal C38 and body ground. ,
step 2 on page 11-3). If a DTC is present, diagnose
and repair the cause before continuing with this
PCM CONNECTOR C !44P)
: test.
2. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the 11 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 I 7 8 9

[i 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
alternator. 23 24 25
■ 20 / 22 1
26 27 28 /|3 d |3 i |32 33 34 35
3. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high 136 i 37 38 (39 j 40141 142 43144!
-
.. iJ T l 1 L
beam. ALTC (W HT/GRN)
4. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P

connector terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal
of the battery. Terminal side of female terminals
BATTERY
© Is there continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the

C (WHT/GRN)
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheek. If the
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230). ■
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
Is there less than 1 V?
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
YES—Goto step8. from damage.
NO—Go to step 5. 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the

powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
6. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
(cont'd)
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

terminal C38 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No. 2.
PCM CONNECTOR C(44P)

Terminal side of female terminals
I I 1 I 2 3 I 4 ] 5 J6 | 7 8 I 9 I I
11 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
|36|37 38 |39l40l4l|42 43|44l
r -
ALTC
mm/mm
vwrn,
r—i (WHT/GRN)
V 2
I 4J
3
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or

repair the alternator (see page 4-39). H

Drive Belt Inspection
J35A9 engine J35Z1 engine . .. ,

1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is 1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is
cracked or damaged, replace it. cracked or damaged, replace it.
2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within 2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) on the
the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the oil pump is not beyond the edge of the indicator rib
standard range, replace the drive belt (see page (B) on the auto-tensioner. If the pointer is beyond
4-32). the indicator rib, replace the indicator rib, replace
the drive belt (see page 4-32).
Drive Belt Replacement
Special Tools Required J35Z1 engine

Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317or equivalent,
commercially available. 1. Set a socket wrench in to the drive belt auto-
tensioner (A), and slowly turn the wrench in the
J35A9 engine direction shown, then remove the drive belt.
1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) using the belt tension NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so
release tool to relieve tension from the drive belt, you must turn the wrench slowly.
then remove the drive belt
YA9317
2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal

Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Inspection
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).

Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317or equivalent,
commercially available. 7. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using a 10 mm bolt
(B), 8 mm bolt (C), and a vise (D) as shown. Do not
J35A9 engine clamp the auto-tensioner itself.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make sure the

A/C switch is OFF. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's

pointer (A). Start the engine, then check the
position again with the engine idling. If the position
of the indicator moves or fluctuates a lot, replace
the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
8. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt.

Measure the torque when the tensioner is turned
counterclockwise. If the torque is less than the
specified value, replace the auto-tensioner
(see page 4-35).
Auto-tensioner Spring Torque:

3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. 50.5 N m (5.15 kgf-m, 37.2 lbf-ft)
If you hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-
tensioner pulley (see page 4-36).
4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-32).
5. Move the auto-tensioner within its limit using the

belt tension release tool in the direction shown.
Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and
without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does
not move smoothly, or you hear abnormal noise,
replace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
Drive Beit Auto-tensioner Inspection (cont'd)
J35Z1 engine 5. Set a socket wrench into the drive belt auto-
tensioner, and slowly turn the wrench in the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make sure the direction of the rotation arrow. If the tensioner does
A/C switch is OFF. Turn the ignition switch OFF. not move smoothly, or you hear abnormal noise,
replace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's
pointer (A). Start the engine, then check the NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so
position again with the engine idling. If the position you must turn the wrench slowly.
of the indicator moves or fluctuates a lot, replace
the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley.

If you hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-
tensioner (see page 4-35).

Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Replacement
J35AS engine J35Z1 engine

1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-32). 1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-32).
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 30 on page 5-5). 2. Remove the splash shield (see step 30 on page 5-5).
3. Remove the auto-tensioner. 3. Remove the auto-tensioner.

12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 55 ibf-ft)
Apply new engine oil to
the bolt threads.
4. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of

removal.
4. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of
removal.
Tensioner Pulley Replacement Alternator Removal and Installation
J35A9 engine Removal
1. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35). 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the
audio system and the navigation system (if
2. Remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand threads), and equipped), then write down the audio presets.
remove the tensioner pulley (B).
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery-
A
10x1.5 ram
80 N-m (8.2 kgf-m, 59 Ibf-ft) 3. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-19).
5. Remove the harness clamp (A), then remove the

bracket (B).
3. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of

removal. 6. Disconnect the alternator connector (C) and the
BLK wire (D) from the alternator.
7. Remove the mounting bolt (A) and alternator Installation :
bracket mounting bolt (B), then remove the
alternator. 1. Install the alternator.
10 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm
45 N-m 22 N-m
(4.5 kgf*m, 33 Ibf-ft) 12.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
2. Connect the alternator connector (A) and the BLK

wire (B) to the alternator. Make sure the crimped
side of the ring terminal faces away from the
alternator when you connect it.
8.x 1.25 mm
12 N-m
t1.2kgf.ro, 8,8 Ibf.ft)
3. Install the bracket (C), then install the harness

clamp (D).
(cont'd)
Alternator Removal and Installation (cont'd)
4. Install the drive belt (see page 4-32).
5. Install the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-19).

audio presets.

(see page 22-255).

Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
BRUSH HOLDER
ASSEMBLY
TERMINAL INSULATOR
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the end cover (A) and the terminal
* Handle driver 07749-0010000 insulator (B).
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you

remove them (see page 4-26).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-36).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the

pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a
22 mm wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact
wrench.
6. Remove the brush holder.
4. Remove the three flange nuts.

7. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear 9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the
housing assembly (A) and washer (B). bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for
seizure marks.
• If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor

assembly.
• If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.
10. Remove the front bearing retainer.
8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to

step 13. Remove the rotor from the drive end
housing.
11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and
hammer.
(cont'd)
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
12. Install a new front bearing in the drive end housing Rotor Slip Ring Test
with a hammer, the handle driver, and attachment.
14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).

• If there is no continuity, replace the rotor
assembly.
Alternator Brush Inspection
13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a

vernier caliper (B). 15. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the
rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
• If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush holder assembly. • If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
• If the brush length is OK, go to step 14. assembly, and go to step 16.
• If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
Alternator Brush Length
Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)
Alternator Reassembly
16. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive
end housing, then torque its locknut to 110 N-m
(11.2 kgf-m, 81.0 Ibf-ft).
17. Remove any grease or any oil from the slip rings.
18. Put the rear housing assembly and drive end

housing/rotor assembly together, torque the four
through bolts.
19. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit
(B) (about 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) diameter) to hold them
there.
20. Install the brush holder, and pull out the pin.
21. Install the end cover.
22. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by

hand to make sure the rotor turns smoothly and
without noise.
23. Install the alternator (see page 4-37) and drive belt
(see page 4-32).
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Cruise Control Input Test, page 4-48 Test, page 14-261
Replacement, page 14-262

Cruise-control cannot be 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11^3) and body DTCs Faulty cruise control
;set (see page 22-3). main switch
2. Check the No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, and No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box.
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-48).
4. Do the cruise control main switch test (see page 4-50).
5. Do the cruise control set/deeel, resume/accel, ca ncel
switch test (see page 4-50),
:"Cruise control can be set, 1. Do the cruise control main switch test (see page 4-50). • Faulty cruise control
but the cruise control 2. Check for a faulty cruise control main switch indicator main switch
main switch indicator -bulb. • Poor ground G401
does not come on
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Faulty gauge control
but the cruise control (see page 22-3). module
indicator does not come 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function
on (see page 22-90).
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-48).
Test the cruise control indicator signal input.
Vehicle does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Open circuit, loose or
decelerate or accelerate (see page 22-3). disconnected
accordingly when the set/ 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-48). terminals: LT GRN/RED
decel or resume/accel Test the cruise control set/decel, resume/accel switch or GRY/PNK
switch is pressed signal input.
3. Do the cruise control set/decel, resume/accel, cancel
switch test (see page 4-50).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs • Short to power on
cancel when the brake (see page 22-3). the GRY wire
pedal is pressed 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-48). • Faulty brake pedal
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input. position switch
3. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-148).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Short to power on the
cancel when the cruise (see page 22-3). LT GRN wire
control main switch is 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-48).
pressed Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
3. Do the cruise control main switch test (see page 4-50).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Open circuit, loose or
cancel when the cancel (see page 22-3). disconnected
switch is pressed 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-48). terminals: LT GRN/RED
Test the cruise control cancel switch signal input. or GRY/PNK
3. Do the cruise control set/decel, resume/accel, cancel
(cont'd)
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

Set speed will not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs • Faulty brake pedal
resume when the (see page 22-3). position switch
resume/accel switch is 2. Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment • Open circuit, loose or
pressed (with the cruise (see page 19-5). disconnected
control main switch 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-48). terminals:
turned on, and set speed Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input. GRY/PNK
temporarily canceled by Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
pressing the brake pedal) 4. Do the cruise control set/decel, resume/accel, cancel
With the ignition switch 1. Replace the cruise control main switch illumination
ON (II), and the lighting bulb (see page 4-50).
switch turned on, the 2. Do the cruise control main switch test (see page 4-50).
cruise control main
switch illumination does
not come on
Circuit Diagram
Cruise Control Input Test
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Goto PGM-FI, and check for DTCs (see page 11-3).
4. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs,
flex their circuits, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be tested Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Brake switch Brake pedal pressed, CRUISE BRAKE SW • Faulty brake pedal position switch
signal then released should indicate OFF • Blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the driver's
when the brake pedal is under-dash fuse/relay box
pressed and ON when • An open in the wire between the
the brake pedal is powertrain control module (PCM) and
released. the brake pedal position switch
• A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the brake pedal position switch
Transmission Shift lever in D, D3, SHIFT/CLUTCH SW • Faulty transmission range switch
range switch or 2 should indicate ON in P, • An open in the wire between the PCM
signal R, N and 1 and OFF in D, and the transmission range switch
D3, or 2. • A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
• Poor ground G101 and G102
Cruise control Cruise control main CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control main switch
main switch switch ON and OFF MAIN SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
signal indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
cruise control main main switch
switch is turned ON • A wire shorted to ground between the
and OFF when the gauge control module and the cruise
cruise control main control main switch
switch is turned OFF.
Set switch Set/decel switch CRUISE CONTROL SET • Faulty cruise control set/decel, resume/
signal pressed and released SW should indicate ON accel, cancel switch
when the set/decel • An open in the wire between the gauge
switch is pressed and control module and the cruise control
OFF when the set/decel set/decel, resume/accel, cancel switch
switch is released. • A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control set/decel, resume/accel, cancel
switch
Signal to be tested Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Resume Resume/accel switch CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control set/decel, resume/
switch signal pressed and released RESUME SW should accel, cancel switch
indicate ON when the • An open in the wire between the gauge
resume/accel switch is control module and the cruise control
pressed and OFF when set/decel, resume/accel, cancel switch
the resume/accel • A wire shorted to ground between the
switch is released. gauge control module and the cruise
control set/decel, resume/accel, cancel
switch
Cancel switch Cancel switch CRUISE CONTROL Faulty cruise control set/decel, resume/
signal pressed and released CANCEL SW should accel, cancel switch
indicate ON when the
cancel switch is
pressed and OFF when
the cancel switch is
released.
Cruise control Start the engine, turn CRUISE INDICATOR Faulty gauge control module
indicator the cruise control should indicate ON
signal main switch on, and when the cruise control
drive the vehicle is set and OFF when
above 25 mph the cruise control is
(40 km/h). Set and canceled.
cancel the cruise
control.
Cruise Control Main Switch Test/ Cruise Control Set/decel, Resume/
Replacement accel. Cancel Switch Test/
Replacement
1. Remove the driver's switch panel (see page 20-92).
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A), then release the SRS component locations (see page 23-17), and the
clips of the cruise control main switch, and push precautions and procedures (see page 23-19), in the
the cruise control main switch (B) out of the panel. SRS before doing repairs or service.
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 23-201).
2. Remove the cover (A), then remove the set/decel,

resume/accel, cancel switch (B).
switch position according to the table. If there is no

continuity, replace indicator bulbs (A) or the switch.
Terminal
9 7 8 1 5
Position \
OFF o o O a -0 -
ON a oo a o -0 -
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

switch position according to the table.
A
• If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
switch failure occurred on the cruise control
input test, check and repair the wire harness on
this switch circuit.
• If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
\ Terminal
4 2 3
Position \
Set/decel KJ
kj
(PRESSED)
Resume/accel
(PRESSED) 0 — — o
KJ KJ
Cancel (PRESSED)
— o
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal ................................................................. 5-2
Engine Installation ....................... ........ .................... ...... . 5-14
Engine Mount Replacement ........................................... 5-26
Front Engine Mount Replacement ................................ 5-27
Rear Engine Mount Replacement ............... ................. 5-27
Cylinder Head ................................................... 6-1

Engine Block ............................. ............ ......... 7-1
Engine Lubrication .......... ............................. . 8-1
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System ......... . 9-1
Engine Removal
Special Tools Required 7. Remove the engine cover.

• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566
•Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000014
• Front subframe adapter VSB02BX0
These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• To avoid damaging wire and terminals, unplug the
wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
A Iso be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position by using

the support rod as shown.
8. Disconnect the breather pipe (A), then remove the
intake air duct (By.
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the

3. Drain the power steering system fluid (see page

17-13).
4. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-372).
5. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first,

then disconnect the positive cable.

9. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the 14. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A);then
battery tray (B). disconnectthe fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-380).
15. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A),

evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (B), and
the EVAP canister purge valve joint (C).
10. Remove the harness bracket (C).
11. Remove the three mounting bolts (D), and loosen

the mounting bolt (E), then remove the battery base
(F).
12. Remove the ground cable (A), harness clamp (B),

and starter cable (C).
13. Remove the shift cable. Do not bend the shift cable
excessively (see step 20 on page 14-223).
Engine Removal (cont'd)
16. Remove the driver's side console lower panel, and 22. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect
pull the carpet to expose the steering joint cover the PCM connectors (B), accelerator pedal position
(see page 20-87). (APP) sensor connector (C), and engine wire
harness connectors (D) on the right side of the
17. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). engine compartment.
C
18. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
23. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the

alternator cable (B).
19. Make a reference mark (B) across the steering joint
and gearbox pinion shaft. Remove the steering i
joint bolt (C), and disconnect the steering joint from
the steering gearbox pinion shaft (D).
20. Remove the coolant reservoir, without

disconnecting hoses.
21. Remove the bolt (A) securing the washer tank, then
remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover
(B).
te a
24. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump outlet hose 31. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
(A) from the P/S pump (B). engine coolant (see page 10-6).
32. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

(see page 14-214).
33. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-8).
34. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
25. Remove the P/S hose clamp (C),
27. Remove the radiator cap.
28. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
29. Remove the front wheels.
30. Remove the splash shield.

36. Make a reference mark (A) on the propeller shaft 42. Remove the R/S hose, then plug the line and the
(B) and transfer companion flange (C); then hose.
separate the propeller shaft from the transfer
companion flange (4WD).
43. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch

connector.
37. Remove the transfer assembly (4WD) (see step 9 on

page 14-218).
38. Separate the stabilizer links from the dampers

(see page 18-19).
39. Separate the tie-rod end ball joints from the

knuckles (see step 16 on page 17-33).
40. Separate the knuckles from the suspension lower

arm ball joints (see page 18-21).
41. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all

precision-finished surfaces with new engine oil. Tie
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
44. Remove the transmission lower front mount nuts 46. Remove the rear engine mount bolts.
and transmission lower rear mount nuts.
J35A9 engine
45. Disconnect the active control engine mount (ACM)

actuator connector (A) from the rear engine mount,
then remove the harness clamp (B). Remove the
bolt (C) securing the P/S line (J35Z1 engine). J35Z1 engine
47. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting 49. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
the A/C hoses.
50. Remove the heater hoses.
48. Disconnect the ACM actuator connector (A) from 51. Remove the upper radiator hose (A), and the lower
the front engine mount, then remove the harness radiator hose (B).
clamp (B) (J35Z1 engine).
52. Remove the ground cable. 54. Remove the radiator (see page 10-13).
55. Hang the A/C compressor with a rope as shown.
53. Remove the ATF cooler hoses from the

transmission, then plug the ATF cooler hoses and
lines.
56. Remove the connector bracket from the front 58. Install the engine hanger balance bar
cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to attach (VSB02C000019); attach the front arm (A) to the
engine hanger balance bar front arm. front cylinder head with a spacer and the 10 mm
bolt, and attach the rear arm (B) to the rear cylinder
head with the 8 mm bolt.
57. Remove the harness clamp bracket from the rear

cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to attach
engine hanger balance bar rear arm.
59. Install the engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000014)

on the ends of the support beams of the engine
support hanger (AAR-T-12566). Install the engine
support hanger and adapters to the vehicle, and
attach the hook to the slotted hole in the engine
hanger balance bar. Torque the wing nut (C) by
hand to lift and support the engine.
60. Remove the front engine mount nut (J35A9 engine). 62. Make sure the hoist brackets are .positioned
- properly. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
63. Make the appropriate reference marks (A) at both

ends of the front subframe (B) that line up with the
edge (C) of the body.
61. Remove the front engine mount stop (A), then

remove the front engine mount bolt (B) (J35Z1
engine).
(cont’d)
64. Loosen the four bolts (A) holding the adjustable 67. Remove the bolt retainers from both ends of the
arms (B) of the front subframe adapter (VSB02BX0) subframe.
to its center plate.
VSB02BX0
65. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on 68. Remove the six 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) securing the
the corner of the jack base, then attach the front subframe stiffeners (B), the four subframe
subframe adapter to the jack base with the bolts (A) mounting bolts (C), and the stiffeners, then lower
that came with the jack. Torque all bolts securely. the front subframe (D).
66. Raise the jack to vehicle height, then attach the

front subframe adapter to the front subframe using
the subframe stiffener mounting bolts (B) and bolt
holes.
KSI
69. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 72. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
70. Attach a chain hoist (A) to the engine hook (B) and electrical wiring.
the transmission hook (C), then lift up the engine/
transmission until it is securely supported by the 73. Slowly lower the engine/transmission about
chain hoist, and remove the engine support hanger 150 mm (6 in.). Check once again that all hoses and
and engine hanger adapters. wires are disconnected and free from the engine/
transmission.
74. Lower the engine/transmission all the way.

Remove the chain hoist from the engine/
transmission.
75. Raise the vehicle all the way on the lift, and remove
the engine/transmission from under the vehicle.
71. Remove the mounting bolts from the upper half of

the side engine mount bracket.
Engine Installation
Special Tools Required

•Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019
• Front subframe adapter VSB02BX0
These special tools are available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857
1. Install the engine mount bracket and accessory brackets, and torque their bolts to the specified torque.
12 x 1.25 m m
88 N-m
(9.0 kgf-m , 65 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 m m
45 N-m
(4.5 kgf*m, 33 Ibf ft)
te l
2. Position the engine/transmission under the vehicle. 5. Install new mounting bolts into the upper half of
Attach the chain hoist to the engine, then lift the . the side engine mount bracket Tighten the bolts to
engine into position in the vehicle. the specified torque.
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in 10 x 1.25 mm

the sequence given. Failure to follow this sequence
may cause excessive noise and vibration, and
reduce bushing life.
3. Install the engine hanger balance bar (VSB02C

000019); attach the front arm (A) to the front
cylinder head with a spacer and the 10 mm bolt,
and attach the rear arm (B) to the rear cylinder head
with the 8 mm bolt.
6. Remove the chain hoist, then raise the vehicle on

the lift to full height

hanger balance bar. Tighten the wing nut (C) by
hand to lift and support the engine.
(cont'd)
Engine Installation (cont'd)
7. Support the front subframe with the front subframe 9. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe
adapter (VSB02BX0) and a jack, then lift it up to the (B) with the edge (C) of the body, then tighten the
body. bolts on the front subframe to the specified torque.
B
8. Loosely install the four front subframe mounting
bolts (A) and the six 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (B), (C) with
the stiffeners (D).
10. Install the bolt retainers on both ends of the

subframe.
(10.5 kgf-m, 76 Ibf-ft)

Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N m
(3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)
11. Remove the front subframe adapter and jack.

12. Torque the transmission lower rear mount nuts (A) 13. Torque the rear engine mount bolts.
and transmission lower front mount nuts (B).
J35AS engine
38 N-m 38 N-m
(3.9 kg f-m , 28 Ibf-ft) {3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft) 38 N-m
(3.9 kgf-m , 28 Ibf-ft).
J35Z1 engine
42 N-m
(4.3 kgf-m , 31 Ib f-ft)
(cont'd)
14. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 17. Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper half of the
side engine mount bracket, then retorque them to
15. Torque the front engine mount nut (J35A9 engine). the specified torque.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
18. Remove the engine support hanger, engine hanger

16. Torque the front engine mount bolt (A), then install balance bar, and engine hanger adapters.
the front engine mount stop (B) (J35Z1 engine).
20. Install the A/C compressor.

te a
21. Connect the active control engine mount (ACM) 23. Install the P/S hose.
actuator connector (A) to the front engine mount,
then install the harness clamp (B) (J35Z1 engine).
22. Connect the ACM actuator connector (A) to the rear 24. Connect the power steering pressure switch
engine mount, then install the harness clamp (B). connector.
Install the bolt (C) securing the power steering (P/S)
line (J35Z1 engine).
C
6x 1.0 mm
10 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
Engine installation (cont'd)
25. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft, 31. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets (B) and
then install the driveshafts. Make sure each ring new self locking nuts (C).
"clicks" into place on the differential and
intermediate shaft.
26. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints

(see page 18-21).
27. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints (see step 23 on

page 17-57).
28. Connect the stabilizer links (see page 18-19).
29. Install the transfer assembly (4WD) (see step 29 on

page 14-240).
30. Align the reference marks (A) on the propeller shaft

(B) and transfer companion flange (C), then install
the propeller shaft (4WD).
33 N-m 8 x 1 .2 5 m m
(3.4 kgf-m , 24 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m
Replace. (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
32. Install the front subframe stiffener.
54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m , 4© Ib f-ft)

Replace.
re s
33. Install the splash shield. 39. Install the ground cable.
34. Install the front wheels.
35. Lower the vehicle on the lift.

6 x 1.0 mm
36. Install the radiator (see page 10-13). 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
37. Install the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler 40. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and the lower
hoses to the transmission, and secure the hoses radiator hose (B).
with the clamps.
NOTE: Check the installation location of the clamps

(see step 1 on page 14-248).
(cont'd)
41. Install the heater hoses. 44. Install the alternator cable (A), then install the
harness clamps (B).
8 x 1.25 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
42. Install the P/S pump outlet hose (A) with a new
O-ring (B) to the P/S pump (C).
6x1.0 mm 6x 1.0 mm
10 N-m 11 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 Ibf-ft) A C1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 Ibf-ft) 45. Connect the powertrain control module (PCM)
connectors (A), accelerator pedal position (APP)
sensor connector (B), and engine wire harness
connectors (C) on the right side of the engine
compartment, then install the harness clamps (D).
B
43. Secure the P/S hose clamp (D).

n 9
46. Install the PCM cover (A), then install the bolt (B) 52. Install the connector bracket on the front cylinder
securing the washer tank. head.
B
6x 1.0 mm
10 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 Ibf-ft)
53. Install the harness clamp brackets on the rear

cylinder head.
48. Align the reference marks (A) on the steering joint

and steering gearbox pinion shaft. Connect the
steering joint (B) to the steering gearbox pinion
shaft (C). Torque the steering joint bolt
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
49. Install the steering joint cover (D).
50. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
51. Install the carpet (see page 20-87) and driver's side
console lower panel.
(cont'd)
Engine installation (cont'd)
54. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A), 57. Install the starter cable (A), harness clamp (B), and
evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (B), and ground cable (C).
the EVAP canister purge valve joint (C).
6 x 1 .0 mm
12 N-m
58. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness
bracket (B).
55. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-381),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
59. Install the battery tray (C), then install the harness
clamps (D).
60. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the 62. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
breather pipe (B). cable terminals, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion.
63. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch

ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation three times, then check
for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
64. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
65. Refill the engine with new engine oil (see page 8-8).
66. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-214).
67. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see step 8 on page 10-7).
68. Refill the power steering system fluid (see page

17-13).
69. Do the PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
70. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP

pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
71. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359)

and power window control unit reset procedure
(see page 22-255).
72. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-358).
73. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-18).
74. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
audio presets.

Engine Mount Replacement
SIDE ENGINE M O UN T

Front Engine Mount Replacement Rear Engine Mount Replacement
J35Z1 Engine J35Z1 Engine
1. Remove the battery. 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-402).
2. Remove the battery base (see step 11 on page 5-3). 2. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
3. Support the engine with a jack and wood block 3. Disconnect the active control engine mount (ACM)
under the oil pan. actuator connector (A) from the rear engine mount,
then remove the harness clamp (B). Remove the
4. Disconnect the active control engine mount (ACM) bolt (C) securing the power steering (P/S) line.
actuator connector (A).
C
12 x 1.25 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
74 N-m 10 N-m
(7.5 kgf-m , (1.0 kg f-m , 7.4 Ib f-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm B 55 Ibf-ft)
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf-m,
40 Ib f-ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf-m,
40 Ib f-ft)
Replace.
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m
(5.5 kgf-m,
40 Ib f-ft)
Replace.
4. Remove the rear engine mount bolts.
5. Remove the front engine mount stop (B), then
remove the front engine mount (C).
6. Install the front engine mount in the reverse order

of removal.
42 N-m
Rear Engine Mount Replacement (cont'd)
6. Support the engine with a jack and wood block

under the oil pan.
7. Remove the rear engine mount stop (A), then

remove the rear engine mount bolt (B).
8. Remove the rear engine mount.
9. Remove the rear engine mount base.
10. Install the rear engine mount in the reverse order of

removal.
Cylinder Head (J35A9 engine)
Special Tools .................. ........ ................... ........................ 6-2
Component Location Index ............................................ 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection ................................... 6-6
VTEC Rocker Arm Test ......... ....................... ................... 6-7
Valve Clearance Adjustment ...................................... . 6-8
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-11
Timing Belt Inspection ..................................................... 6-13
Timing Belt Removal ........................................................ 6-13
Timing Belt Installation ......................................... .......... 6-16
Timing Belt Replacement .................................... . 6-20
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement ............................ . 6-24
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement ........................ 6-25
Cylinder Head Cover Removal ...................................... 6-25
Cylinder Head Cover Installation ........... ....................... 6-26
Cylinder Head Removal .................................................. 6-28
Camshaft Replacement .................................................... 6-31
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ........... ............ 6-33
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................... 6-33
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................... 6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection ................................. 6-35
Camshaft Inspection ........................ ............................... 6-37
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal ...................... 6-40
Valve Inspection ............................................ ................... 6-41
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ................ 6-41
Valve Guide Replacement .............................................. 6-42
Valve Seat Reconditioning ............................................. 6-44
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation ............ . 6-46
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly,
Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation .............. . 6-47
Cylinder Head Installation .............................................. 6-48
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car ......................... 6-53
Sealing Bolt Installation .................................................. 6-53
Cylinder Head (J35Z1 engine) ......................... 6-55

Special Tools

® 07AAJ-PNAA101 Air Pressure Regulator 1
© 07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
(D 07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
® 07JAB-001020A Holder Handle 1
07MAB-PY3010A Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 1
07 PAD-0010000 Stem Seal Driver 1
® 07PAF-0030100 Camshaft Oil Seal Driver 1
® 07VAJ-P8A010A VTEC Air Adapter 1
® 070AJ-0030100 VTEC Air Stopper 1
@ 07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1
6 © 07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 1
RUBBER SEALS
FRONT UPPER COVER
REAR UPPER COVER

SIDE ENGINE M O UNT
BRACKET
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BOLT

Replacement
page 6-11
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Removal,
page 6-11
Installation,
page 6-12
REAR CAMSHAFT
PULLEY
TIM ING BELT

TIM ING BELT ADJUSTER DRIVE PULLEY
Replacement, Replacement,
page 6-24 page 6-25
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
AUTO-TENSIONER (CKPT SENSOR
Replacement, Replacement,
step 6 on page 6-20 TIM IN G BELT page 11-228
Inspection, page 6-13
Removal, page 6-13
IDLER PULLEY BOLT Installation, page 6-16 TIM ING BELT STOPPER
TIM IN G BELT GUIDE PLATE

Installation, step 10 on page 6-18
Component Location Index (cont'd)
CYLINDER HEAD COVER

Removal, page 6-25
Installation, page 6-26
HEAD COVER
GASKET
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD Removal, page 6-28
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
DOWEL PINS
OIL CONTROL ORIFICES

Hag)
VALVE COTTERS ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

SPRING RETAINER VTEC Rocker Arm Test,
page 6-7
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal,
LOST M OTION ASSEMBLY page 6-33
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
INTAKE VALVE SPRING Reassembly, page 6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection,
page 6-35
INTAKE VALVE SEAL

CAMSHAFT
VALVE SPRING SEAT THRUST COVER
INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE SEAL

Removal, page 6-40
EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE

SOLID DOWEL PINS

HOLLOW DOWEL PINS (On the camshaft
(On the camshaft oil seal end) thrust cover end)
CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL

CAMSHAFT
CYLINDER HEAD Replacement, page 6-31
Removal, page 6-28 Inspection, page 6-37
Sealing Bolt Installation,
page 6-53
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-40
Installation, page 6-46 INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-40
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After the inspection, you must reset the 9. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with
powertrain control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM the starter motor, and measure the compression.
will continue to stop the fuel injectors from operating.
Compressi on Pressure:
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
10. Measure the compression on the remaining
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. cylinders.
3. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Maximum Variation:

data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and select PGM-FI, 11. If the compression is not within specifications,
INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the check the following items, then remeasure the
HDS. compression.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Damaged or worn valves and seats
• Damaged cylinder head gasket
6. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-19). • Damaged or worn piston rings
• Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
7. Remove the six spark plugs.
12. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel the ALL
8. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole. INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
te a
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required 9. Remove the No. 1 and No. 6 intake rocker shaft
- VTEC air adapter 07VAJ-P8A01.0A mounting bolts, then install the VTEC air adapter
•VTEC air stopper 070AJ-0030100 and VTEC air stopper, and connect the air pressure
•Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101 regulator as shown.
1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then FRONT
turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4).
3. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-25).
4. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see

step 3 on page 6-8).
5. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and
secondary rocker arm (C).
• If the intake mid rocker arm moves freely, go to

step 6.
• If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake
rocker arms as an assembly, then check that the
rocker arm pistons in the mid and primary rocker
arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs
replacing, replace the mid, primary, and
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, then
retest.
10. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:

C A 440—540 kPa (4.5—5.5 kgf/cm2, 6 4 -7 8 psi)
6. Repeat step 5 on the remaining intake mid rocker NOTE: If the rocker arm pistons do not move after
arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid applying air pressure, move the primary or
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 7. secondary rocker arm up and down manually.
7. Check that the air pressure on the shop air

compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa
(7.0 kgf/cm2, 100 psi).
8. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-8).

VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd) Valve Clearance Adjustment
11. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A) NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head
and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are temperature is less than 100 °F (38 <€).
mechanically connected by the piston and that the
mid rocker arm (C) does not move when pushed 1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4).
manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
independently of the primary and secondary rocker 2. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-25).
arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC).
Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with
the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft
pulley.
12. Remove the special tools.
13. Torque the rocker shaft bolts to 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m,

18 Ibf-ft)
14. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-26).
15. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-6).

4, Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the 5. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
valves you're going to check. screw and the end of the valve stem on No. 1
cylinder, and slide it back and forth; you should feel
Valve Clearance a slight amount of drag.
Intake: 0.20—0.24 mm (0.008—0.009 in.)
Exhaust: 0.28—0.32 mm (0.011—0.013 in.)
REAR
EXHAUST
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
6. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the

locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
INTAKE
FRONT
No. 4 No. 5 No. 6
20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 15 Ibf-ft)
No. 4 No. 5 No. 6 7. Torque the locknut and recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
EXHAUST
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
8. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 12. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the front upper cover with the No. 4 piston (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 5 piston
TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
9. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No. 4 cylinder. on No. 5 cylinder.
TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
on No. 2 cylinder. on No. 3 cylinder.
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and
Installation
16. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the front upper cover with the No. 6 piston
TDG mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. Special Tools Required
• Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
• Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A, or a commercially
available 19 mm socket
Removal
2. Remove the right front wheel.
17. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance

on No. 6 cylinder.
5. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and

holder attachment (B).
6. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket

(C) and breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft
pulley.
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and torque the bolt. Do

not use an impact wrench.
1. Remove any oil and clean the pulleys (A),
crankshaft (B), bolt (C), and washer (D). Lubricate -1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
with new engine oil as shown. holder attachment (B). Torque the bolt to
65 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 48 Ibf-ft) with a torque
X •' Remove any o i l wrench and heavy duty 19 mm socket (C).
O : Clean
£ : Lubricate w ith new engine oil -2 Mark the bolt head (D) and crankshaft pulley (E)
as shown, then torque the bolt an additional
A
60 °(The mark on the bolt head lines up with
the mark on the crankshaft pulley).
4. Install the splash shield.
5. Install the right front wheel.

Timing Belt Inspection Timing Belt Removal
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-32), 1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up
with the pointer (B).
2. Remove the front upper cover.
2. Check that the No. 1 piston top dead center (TDC)

mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the
pointer (B) on the front upper cover are aligned.
3. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant
contamination. Replace the belt if it is cracked, or is NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
contaminated with oil or coolant. Wipe off any oil crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
or solvent that gets on the belt. pulley mark.
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
3. Raise the vehicle on the lift, then remove the right 9. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
front wheel. cover (B).
6. Support the engine with a jack and wood block

under the oil pan.
7. Remove the upper half of the side engine mount

bracket.
11. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the 14. Remove the lower half of the side engine mount
battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown. .bracket.
12. Thread the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold

the timing belt adjuster in its current position.
Torque it by hand; do not use a wrench. 15. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and idler pulley (B),
then remove the timing belt. Discard the idler
pulley bolt
Timing Belt Installation
NOTE: The following procedure is for installing a used 3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the
timing belt If you are installing a new belt, refer to the TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the
timing belt replacement procedure (see page 6-20). pointers (B) on the back covers.
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide

plate, and the upper and lower covers.
2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center

(TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of
the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on
the oil pump.
REAR
flJHJ
4. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler 8. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
pulley bolt so the pulley can move but does not
come off.
5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing

belt cannot be installed, do the timing belt
replacement procedure (see page 6-20).
6. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise

sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage thetiming belt during installation.
-1 Drive pulley (A)

-2 Idler pulley (B)
-3 Front camshaft pulley (C)
-4 Water pump pulley (D)
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E) 9. Install the lower half of the side engine mount
-6 Adjusting pulley (F) bracket.
D 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m , 8.8 Ib f-ft)
(cont'd)
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
10. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown. 12. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (B).
11. Install the lower cover.
6x1.0 m m
12 N-m (1.2 kg f-m , 8.8 Ib f-ft)
13. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about six turns

clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the
pulleys.
15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)

lines up with the pointer (B).
6 k 1.0 m m
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m , 8.8 Ib f-ft)
16. Check the camshaft pulley marks. 17. Install the upper half of the side engine mount
bracket, then torque the mounting bolts in the
NOTE; If the marks are not aligned, rotate the numbered sequence shown.
crankshaft 360 degrees,-arid recheck the camshaft
pulley mark. © 1 0 x 1.25 mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 ibf-ft)
• If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to
step 17.
• If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2
through 16. ,
FRONT

Timing Belt Replacement
NOTE: The following procedure is for the installation of 4. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the
a new timing belt. If you are installing a used belt, refer TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the
to the timing belt installation procedure (see page 6-16). pointers (B) on the back covers.
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13). FRONT


the oil pump.
REAR
6. Remove the auto-tensioner.

7. Align the holes on the rod and housing of the 10. Thread the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold
auto-tensioner. the timing belt adjuster. Torque it by hand, do not
use a wrench.
8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the auto-

tensioner. Insert a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) pin through the
housing and the rod. 11. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler
NOTE: The compression pressure should not come off.
exceed 9,800 N (1,000 kgf, 2,200 Ibf).
9. Install the auto-tensioner. sequence starting with the drive pulley.
NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place. -1 Drive pulley (A)
-2 Idler pulley (B)
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E)
-6 Adjusting pulley (F)
(cont'd)
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
13. Torque the idler pulley bolt. 16. Install the lower half of the side engine mount
bracket.
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m,(1.2 kgf-m , 8.8 Ibf-ft)
17. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown.
15. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
18. Install the lower cover. 22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
23. Check the camshaft pulley marks.
NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the

crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
19. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper pulley mark.
cover (B).
step 24.
through 22.
FRONT

REAR
pulleys.
(cont'd)
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd) Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement
24. Install the upper half of the side engine mount 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13).
numbered sequence shown. 2. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
© 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 kgl m, 32 Ibf-ft) 3. Remove the auto-tensioner.
Replace.
4. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the timing belt
adjuster (B) and collar (C).
5. Install the timing belt adjuster in the reverse order

of removal.
26. Install the splash shield. 6. Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).

Timing Belt Drive Pulley Cylinder Head Cover Removal
Replacement
Front
1. Remove the timing belt (see page.6-13). 1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4).
2. Remove the crankshaft position (GKP) sensor 2. Remove the three ignition coils from the front
(see page 11-228). cylinder head (see page 4-19).
3. Remove the timing belt drive pulley (A) and key (B), 3. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the harness
holder.
4. Inspect the timing belt drive pulley and key for

damage. If it is cracked or damaged, replace the 4. Remove the dipstick (B) and positive crankcase
timing belt drive pulley. ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
5. Install the new timing belt drive pulley. 5. Remove the front cylinder head cover.
6. Install the CKP sensor (see page 11-228).
7. Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).
8. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn

procedure (see page 11-5).
(cont'd)
Cylinder Head Cover Removal Cylinder Head Cover Installation
(cont'd)
Front
Rear 1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal
is damaged, replace it.
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the
2. Remove the three ignition coils from the rear groove of the cylinder head cover.
cylinder head (see page 4-19).
3. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces with a
3. Remove the bolt (A) securing the power steering shop towel.
(P/S) hose bracket.
4. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of
A
the cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head
cover gasket is seated securely, then set the spark
plug seals (C) on the spark plug tubes, and install
the cylinder head cover.
4. Remove the two bolts (B) securing the harness

holder.
5. Remove the breather hose (C) and harness clamp

(D).
6. Remove the rear cylinder head cover.

6. Inspect the cover washers (D). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated.
7. Torque the bolts in three steps. In the final step

torque all bolts, in sequence, 12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft).
high
8. Torque the two bolts (A) securing the harness Rear

holder.
1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal
A
6 x 1 .0 mm is damaged, replace it.
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
groove of the cylinder head cover.

shop towel.

cover gasket is seated securely, then set the spark
plug seals (C) on the spark plug tubes, and install
the cylinder head cover.
9. Install the dipstick (B) and positive crankcase

ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
10. Install the three ignition coils to the front cylinder

head (see page 4-19).
6. Inspect the cover washers (D). Replace any washer

7. Torque the bolts in three steps. In the final step

(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft).
CD CD
(cont'd)
Cylinder Head Cover Installation Cylinder Head Removal
(cont'd)
NOTE:
8. Install the breather hose (A) and harness clamp (B), surfaces.
• To avoid damaging the wires and terminals, unplug
D the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
6 x 1.0 mm C
12 N-m 6x1.0mm connector portion.
• To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100 °F
(38 °C) before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
Also, be sure that they do not contact any other
wiring or hoses, or interfere with any other parts.

4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).

9. Torque the two bolts (C) securing the harness
holder. 5. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-32).
10. Torque the bolt (D) securing the power steering 6. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump (A) and the
(P/S) hose bracket. bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket.
11. Install the three ignition coils to the rear cylinder


7. Remove the alternator (see page 4-36). 14. Remove the two nuts securing the evaporative
emission (EVAP) canister purge valve joint.
9. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-19).
10. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13).
11. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and

wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.
• Six injector connectors

• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector
• Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
• Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector 15. Remove the connector bracket from the front
• Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector cylinder head.
• Oil pressure switch connector
• Two air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connectors
• Two secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) connectors
12. Remove the front warm up three way catalytic

converter (front WU-TWC) (see page 11-412) and
rear warm up three way catalytic converter (rear
WU-TWC) (see page 11-413).
13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then

disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-380).
(cont'd)
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
16. Remove the harness clamp bracket from the rear 20. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-25).
cylinder head.
21. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a
time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
17. Remove the fuel rails (see step 5 on page 11-222).
18. Remove the water passage (see page 10-10).
19. Remove the front and rear camshaft pulleys (A) and 22. Remove the cylinder heads.
back covers (B>‘
r a i
Camshaft Replacement
FRONT 10. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the
camshaft (B).

3. Remove the battery and battery tray.
5. Remove the upper radiator hose.
11. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.

Always use a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil
to the journals and cam lobes.
12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft

pulley mounting bolt, then install the front
camshaft-pulley (see step 11 on page 6-48).
13. Install the rocker arm assembly, then torque the

mounting bolts (see step 9 on page 6-47). .
15. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
16. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-429), then install
the upper radiator hose.
6. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve 17. Install the battery and battery tray. Clean the
(see page 11-429). battery posts and cable terminals, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
18. Fill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air
8. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-33). from the cooling system (see step 8 on page 10-7).
9. Remove the front camshaft pulley. 19. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
pattern lean procedure (see page 11-5).
20. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) idle learn

procedure (see page 11-359) and the power
window control unit reset procedure (see page
22-255).
21. Enter the anti-theft codes for audio the system and
audio presets.
(cont'd)
Camshaft Replacement (cont'd)
REAR 6. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the

camshaft (B).
1. Remove the two nuts securing the evaporative
emission (EVAP) canister purge valve joint.
(2.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibf-ft)
7. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.

2. Remove the brake lines from the master cylinder to the journals and cam lobes.
(see page 19-16).
3. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13). pulley mounting bolt, then install the rear camshaft
pulley (see step 11 on page 6-48).
4. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-33).
9. Install the rocker arm assembly, then torque the
5. Remove the rear camshaft pulley. mounting bolts (see step 9 on page 6-47).
12. Install the brake lines (see page 19-16) and do the
brake system bleeding procedure (see page 19-8).
13. Install the EVAP canister purge valve joint

Cylinder Head Inspection for Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-25).
1. Remove the cylinder head {see page 6-28). 2. Loosen the locknuts and adjusting screws (A).
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-37).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure

along the edges, and three ways across the center.
• If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.),

cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and
0.2 mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
• Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 121 mm (4.76 in.).
Cylinder Head Height

Standard (New): 120.95—121.05 mm
(4 .7 6 2 -4 .766 in.)
3. Remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts and the

rocker arm assembly.
A Loosen the rocker shaft mounting bolts in

sequence two turns at a time, to prevent
damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly.
-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts.
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker
arms on the shafts.
® ®
Q _0 J Q Q !r\
f o , „o„ P
II Ir
&J% 1 »1 ITS
1 rti iris
Ui IU- fn
%Jh 1I
J iM
Ip^ n n n 1 n n n ii^ P a n n ^ T
1.....,f4 inin j
•
rrTrrr'j 4=4 “rPTP n
IQ uww nul | 2 mil M
©
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
• Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
• Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-35).
• If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
• When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
• Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
• Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply new engine oii to any contact points.
• When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardwares from the new intake rocker arm
assembly.
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT

INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-33). 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-34). Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker (0.0010-0.0026 In.)
location. Service Limit: 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)
Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance

(0.0010-0.0030 in.)
Inspect rocker arm

face for wear.
6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the

clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all over-tolerance rocker arms. If any intake
rocker arm needs replacement, replace all three
rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and
secondary).
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection (cont'd)
VTEC Rocker Arms
7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push them

manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace
the rocker arm set.
NOTE:
• Apply new engine oil to the rocker arm pistons
when reassembling.
• When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
8, Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-47).

n 9
Camshaft Inspection
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-28). 4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
2. Remove the rocker arms (see page 6-33).
5. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
3. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
torque the bolts to the specified sequence. read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck.
Specified Torque If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
S x l.2 5 mm: 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft) camshaft (see page 6-31).
d> © © © © Camshaft End Play

I Standard (New): 0.05—0.20 mm
(0.002—0.008 in.)
fc l B ra FlFiol
or
cc
h
iL
c r
^ . ^ -8
J t y
6. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out

the camshaft (B).
(cont'd)
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift 10. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder
ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, head. Measure the inside diameter of each
scored, or excessively worn. camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of
round condition.
8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, goto step 12.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 11.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance

.(0.0020-0,0035 i n.)
9. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.

11. Check total runout with the camshaft supported on 12. Measure cam lobe height
V-blocks.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):
• If the total runout of the camshaft is within the INTAKE EXHAUST
service limit, replace the cylinder head. PRI 35.041 mm 36.326 mm
• If the total runout is beyond the service limit, (1.3796 i n.) (1.4302 in.)
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil MID 36.445 mm
clearance. If the oil clearance is still out of (1.4348 in.)
tolerance, replace the cylinder head. SEC 35,284 mm
(1.3891 in.)
Camshaft Total Runout PRI: Primary MID: Mid SEC: Secondary
Standard (New); 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. IN: Intake EX: Exhaust T/B: Timing Belt
SEC MID PRi
EX m EX
«- T /B
PRI MID SEC
EX IN EX
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Special Tools Required 5, Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
Valve spring compressor attachment
07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-28).
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the spring retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
B A
6. Remove the valve seal.
3. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and

spring compressor. Compress the spring and
remove the valve cotters.
07757-PJ101OA
7. Remove the valve spring seat.
4. Remove the spring compressor and valve spring

compressor attachment, then remove the spring
retainer, valve spring, and valve.
Valve Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-40).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-40).
Intake Valve Dimensions 2. Sli de the valve out of its gui de about 10 mm
A Standard (New): 34.90—35.10-mm (0.39 in.), then measure the guide-to-stem
(1.374-1.382 In.) clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the
i Standard (New): 115.70—116.30 mm stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble
(4.555-4.579 In.) method).
0 Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in.) If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
C Service Lim it: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.) recheck it using a new valve.
• If the measurement is now within the service
Exhaust Valve Dimensions limit, reassemble using a new valve.
A Standard (New): 29.90—30.10 mm If the measurement with a new valve still
(1.177-1.185 in.) exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
B Standard (New): 113.90—114.50 mm
(4.484—4.508 in.) Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
C Standard (New): 5.450—5.460 mm Standard (New): 0.04—0.09 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.) (0.002—0.004 in.)
C Service Lim it: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.) Service Lim it: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

B (0.004-0.006 in.)
j
A i
t
3. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with

a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.0008-0.0018 in.)

(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
Valve Guide Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Working from the combustion chamber side, use
•Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide
•Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 about 2 mm (0.1 in.) towards the combustion
chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page and make removal easier. Hold the air hammer
6-41). directly in line with the valve guide to prevent
damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or a face
2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air- shield.
impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward
same procedure can be done using the special tool the camshaft side of the head.
and a conventional hammer.
5.3 mm .
(0.21 in.)
/ u
- 87 mm -*• - 57 mm —
(3.43 in.) (2.24 in.)
10.8 mm
(0.42 in.)
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill

them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300 °F (150 °C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 °F (150 °C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
7. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a

8 mm (5/16 in.) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you

could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Take out the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.
te a
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with
the new valve guide. Install the guide from the cutting oil.
camshaft side of the head; use the valve guide
driver to drive the guide to the specified installed 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides valve guide bore.
to do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height

intake; 21 .20—22.20 mm f0 .8 3 5 -i.8 7 4 in.)
Exhaust; 20.80-21.80 mm (0.811-0.850 in.)
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while

drawing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-41).

Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without sticking.
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 5. Make one more very light pass with the 45 ° cutter
6-41). If the valve guides are worn, replace them to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
(see page 6-42) before cutting the valve seats. cutters.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a Valve Seat W idth
valve seat cutter. Standard (New): 1.25—1.55 mm (0.049—0.061 in.)
Service Lim it: 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve

seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
3. Carefully cut a 45 ° seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30 ° cutter

and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5 ° cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 ° cutter (exhaust seat). Check 7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
• If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you

must make a second cut with the 67.5 ° cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 °cutter (exhaust seat) to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45 °
cutter to restore seat width.
• If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30 ° cutter to move it
up, then one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with

the 45 ° cutter.
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,
and measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

Standard (New): 46.75—47,55 mm
(1.841—1.872 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

Standard (New); 46.68—47.48 mm
(1.838-1,869 in.)'
9. If the valve stem installed height is over the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
• Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
• Valve spring compressor attachment toward the cylinder head.
07757-PJ1010A
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install spring compressor. Compress the spring and
the valves in the valve guides. install the valve cotters.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly. 07757-PJ1010A
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the stem seal
driver (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring

(D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F); they are not interchangeable.
7. Remove the valve spring compressor and valve

spring compressor attachment.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three

times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve
stem only along its axis so you do not bend the
stem.
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the 6. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
camshaft oil seal,
7. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
cylinder head. 6-34).
-1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely
-2 Install the oil seal about 0.5 —1.5 mm install the bolts. Make sure the rocker arms are
(0.02—0.06 in.) below the surface of the properly positioned on the valve stems.
cylinder head.
9. Torque each bolt two turns at a time in the
FRONT sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not
8 x 1,25 mm
bind on the valves.
22 N m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 24 N-m (2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
© © © © ® ©
REAR
© © © ©
8 x 1 .2 5 mm
22 N m (2.2 kgf-m; 16 Ibf-ft)
10. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new
gasket (B).
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then

install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D). Apply new engine oil to the
journals and cam lobes.
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow

dowel pins (F).
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Cylinder Head Installation
Camshaft Seal, and Pulley
Installation (cont'd) 1. Clean the cylinder head and engine block surface.
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) with

11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft new O-rings (B).
pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (B),
then install the camshaft pulley (C).
12 x 1.25 mm
92 N-m 19.2 kgf-m, 68 Ibf-ft) 3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head
gaskets (D).
12. Set the camshaft pulleys to top dead center (TDC)
before bolting them onto the engine block (see step 4. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide
6 on page 6-49). plate, and the upper and lower covers.

the oil pump.
te a
6. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC toy aligning the 8. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pointA and point B .,
pointers (B) on the back covers.
FRONT
9. If either diameter is less than 10.6 mm (0.42 in.),

replace the cylinder head bolt.
REAR
10. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the
bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
7. Install the cylinder heads on the engine block.
(cont'd)
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
11. Torque the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 13. Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).
30 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft). Use a beam-type
torque wrench. When using a preset-type torque 14. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
wrench, be sure to torque slowly and do not
overtorque, If a bolt makes any noise while you are 15. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-26).
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retorque it from the
first step. , 16. Install the water passage (see page10-10).
17. Install the front warm up three way catalytic

II O 18. Install the fuel rails (see step 5 on page 11-222).
I D
J
P ii n r
M
19. Install the connector bracket to the front cylinder
head.
© 0
12. After torquing, torque all cylinder head bolts in two

steps (90 ° per step). If you are using a new cylinder
head bolt, torque the bolt an extra 90 °.
NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you

torqued it beyond the specified angle, and go back
to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to
the specified angle.
h s
20. Install the harness clamp bracket to the rear 22. Connectthe fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-381),
cylinder head. then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B).
8 x 1 .2 5 m m
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m , 16 Ibf-ft)
23. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and
21. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister install the wire harness clamps to the cylinder head.
purge valve joint.
connector
connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector
• Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
• Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
• Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
Oil pressure switch connector
• Two airfuel ratio (A/F) sensor connectors
25. Install the alternator (see page 4-36).
26. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4-19).
(confd)
27. Install the power steering (P/S) pump (A), and 35. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-358).
torque the bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket.
audio presets.
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
29. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals, then

assemble them and apply grease to prevent
corrosion.
30. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and

connectors are installed correctly.

runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation three times, then check
for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.



procedure (see page 11-359) and power window
control unit reset procedure (see page 22-255).
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Sealing Bolt Installation
Car
NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt (A), always use
new washer (B).
Camshaft oil seal driver 07PAF-0030100 FRONT
1. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.
2. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the lip

of the camshaft oil seal.
3. Using the camshaft oil seal driver (A), washer (B),

and a 12x75 x 1.25 mm bolt (C), press in the
camshaft oil seal (D) about 0.5—1.5 mm (0.02—0.06
in.) below the surface of the cylinder head.
28 x 1.5 mm
80 N-m (8.0 kgf-m, 59 Ibf-ft)
REAR
28 x 1.5 m m
80 N-m (8.0 kgf-m. 59 Ibf-ft)
” Portions of materials c o n t a i n e d herein h a v e b e e n reprinted u n d e r
license f r o m A m e r i c a H o n d a M o t o r Co., Inc. L i c e n s e A g r e e m e n t A H 2 2 0 .”
Cylinder Head (J35A9 engine) ............... . 6-1
Cylinder Head (J35Z1 engine)

Special Tools ....................................................................... 6-56
Component Location Index .............................. .............. 6-57
Engine Compression Inspection .......... ................. ....... 6-61
Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arm Test .... 6-62
Valve Clearance Adjustment ......................................... 6-64
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-68
Timing Belt Inspection ............................. ........ .— .. 6-69
Timing Belt Removal .... ........ ...... ......... ................. ........ 6-70
Timing Belt Installation ................. .................................. 6-72
Timing Belt Replacement ........................... ...... .............. 6-76
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement .......................... . 6-82
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement ............... ........ 6-82
Cylinder Head Cover Removal ...................................... 6-83
Cylinder Head Cover Installation .................................. 6-84
Cylinder Head Removal ................................................... 6-86
Camshaft Replacement .................................................... 6-89
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ................... 6-91
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................... 6-92
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................... 6-93
Rocker Arm and Shaft inspection ................................. 6-95
Camshaft Inspection ........................... ............................ 6-97
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal ................ . 6-100
Valve Inspection ..................................... . 6-101
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-101
Valve Guide Replacement .................... .......................... 6-102
Valve Seat Reconditioning ................................. ............ 6-104
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation .................. 6-106
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly,
Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation ................... 6-107
Cylinder Head Installation ......... ....... ....... ..................... 6-110
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - in Car ....... .................. 6-115
Sealing Bolt Installation ................................ .................. 6-115
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description City
® 07AAJ-PNAA101 Air Pressure Regulator 1

(D 07AAJ-RYPA100 VCM A ir Adapter 1
(D 07HAH-PJ7 A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
© 07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
© 07JAB-001020A Holder Handle 1
© 07MAB-PY3010A Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 1
07 PAD-0010000 Stem Seal Driver 1
© 07PAF-0030100 Camshaft Oil Seal Driver 1
© 07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1
@ 07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 1
tea
RUBBER SEALS
REAR UPPER COVER
FRONT UPPER COVER
SIDE ENGINE M O UNT BRACKET
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BOLT

Replacement,
page 6-68
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Removal,
page 6-68
Installation,
page 6-68
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY

RUBBER SEALS
TIM ING BELT ADJUSTER

Replacement,
page 6-82 TIM ING BELT DRIVE PULLEY
AUTO-TENSIONER
Replacement,
step 6 on page 6-77
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
m m SENSOR
IDLER PULLEY BOLT Replacement,
page 11-228
TIM ING BELT GUIDE PLATE TIM ING BELT

Installation, step 10 on page 6-74 Inspection, page 6-69
TIM ING BELT STOPPER
Removal, page 6-70
Repl acement, page 6-76
(cont'd)
/ CYLINDER HEAD COVER

Removal, page 6-83
Installation, page 6-84 CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS
HEAD COVER
GASKET
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD

Removal, page 6-86
I nstallation, page 6-110
OIL CONTROL
ORIFICE DOWEL PINS
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE

te a
FRONT
VALVE COTTERS
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
page 6-92
SPRING RETAINER Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 6-93
INTAKE VALVE SPRING page 6-95
INTAKE VALVE SEAL

CAMSHAFT
THRUST COVER
VALVE SPRING SEAT
INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE SEAL

Removal, page 6-100
Installation,page 6-106
EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE

HOLLOW DOWEL PINS

(On the camshaft
thrust cover end)
CAMSHAFT
INTAKE VALVE
SEALING BOLT Removal, page 6-100
Installation, page 6-115 Installation, page 6-106
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD EXHAUST VALVE

Removal, page 6-86 Removal, page 6-100
Inspection, page 6-91 Installation, page 6-106
(c o n fd )
REAR
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

Variable Cylinder Management
Rocker Arm Test, page 6-62
page 6-92
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
6-95
RING
CAMSHAFT THRUST COVER
VALVE COTTERS
EXHAUST
VALVE SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE SEAL

Removal,
page 6-100
Installation,
page 6-106 SPRING RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE GUIDE

Replacement, INTAKE VALVE SPRING
page 6-102
HMTAKE VALVE SEAL

VALVE SPRING SEAT
INJECTOR BASE
REAR CYLINDER HEAD

Removal, page 6-86
SEALING BOLTS Inspection, page 6-91
Installation, page 6-115 Installati on, page 6-110
INTAKE VALVE EXHAUST VALVE

Removal, page 6-100 Removal, page 6-100
Installation, page 6-106 Installation, page 6-106
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE; After the inspection, you must reset the 9. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with
powertrain control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM the starter motor, and measure the compression.
wil l continue to stop the fue l injectors from operating.
Compression Pressure:
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
10. Measure the compression on the remaining
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. cylinders.
3. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Maximum Variation;

data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and select PGM-FI, 11. If the compression is not within specifications,
INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the check the following items, then remeasure the
HDS. compression.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Damaged or worn valves and seats
• Damaged cylinder head gaskets
6. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-19). • Damaged or worn piston rings
• Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
7. Remove the six spark plugs.
12. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel the ALL
8. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole. INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
Variable Cylinder M anagem ent
Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required 4. Install the VCM air adapter (A) into the inspection
•Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101 hole (B), and then connect the air pressure regulator
•VCM air adapter 07AAJ-RYPA100 (C) to the adapter.
1. Remove the front and rear ignition coils and

spark plugs (see page 4-19).
2. Remove the rear cylinder head cover (see page

6-83).
3. At the steering pump pulley, rotate the engine

clockwise with a 19 mm wrench; watch the rear
bank intake and exhaust rocker arms open and
close through a full rotation.
• If any of the rear bank rocker arms are disengaged,

remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-92),
and inspect the rocker arms and shafts
(see page 6-95).
• If the rocker arms are functioning normally, go
to step 4.
5. Connect the air pressure to the regulator and

adjust the pressure to 345 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi).
6. Rotate the engine clockwise with a 19 mm wrench;

watch the rear bank intake and exhaust rocker arms
through a full rotation. The rocker arms should be
disengaging as the pistons in the rear bank go past TDC.
• If any of the rear bank rocker arms are engaged,

remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-92),
and inspect the rocker arms and shafts (see page 6-95).
• I f the entire rear bank rocker arms are disengaged,
the system is OK.
7. Remove the air pressure regulator and adapter.
8. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-84).
9. Install the spark plugs (see page 4-22) and ignition coils
(see page 4-19).
This page intentionally left blank.
Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head

temperature is less than 100 °F (38X ).
1, Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-83).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). Align

the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with the
No. 1 piston TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft
pulley.
te a
3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
valves you're going to check. screw and the end of the valve stem on the No. 1
cylinder, and slide it back and forth; you should feel
Valve Clearance a slight amount of drag.
Intake; ll.2 i-~ i.2 4 mm (0 .ii8 —i . i i 9 in.)
Exhaust; i.2 8 —0.32 mm ( i . i l 1—i.i1 3 in J FRONT
REAR
EXHAUST
No.1 No. 2 No. 3
INTAKE
FRONT
INTAKE
No. 4 No. 5 No. 6
EXHAUST
(cont'd)
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
5, If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the 7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
locknut, and turn the adjusting screw until the drag (A) on the front upper cover with the No. 4 piston
on the feeler gauge is correct. TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
FRONT

on the No. 4 cylinder.
9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer

TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
6. While holding the adjusting screw with the screw

driver, torque the locknut and recheck the
clearance. Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
Specified Torque
Front: 14 N-m (1.4 kgf-m, 10 Ibf-ft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
Rear: 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 15 Ibf-ft)

ft®
TDC mark .(B) on the front camshaft pulley. - TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
on the No. 5 cylinder. on the No. 6 cylinder.
13. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 17. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-84).
TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.

Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required Installation

• Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
• Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A 1. Remove any oil and clean the pulleys (A),
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A, or a commercially crankshaft (B), bolt (C), and washer (D). Lubricate
available 19 mm socket with new engine oil as shown.
X : Remove any oil

Removal 0 : Clean
Lubricate w ith new engine oil
A
2. Remove the right front wheel.
5. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and

holder attachment (B).
A
07 JAB-001020A
07JAA-001020A
(or commercially available)
6. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket

(C) and breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft
pulley.
Timing Belt Inspection
2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and torque the bolt Do 1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-32).
2. Remove the front upper cover.
-1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
holder attachment (B). Torque the bolt to
65 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 48 Ibf-ft) with a torque
wrench and a 19 mm socket (C).
-2 Mark the bolt head (D) and crankshaft pulley (E)
as shown, then torque the bolt an additional
60 ° (The mark on the bolt head lines up with
the mark on the crankshaft pulley).
A
©7JAB-001020A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
3. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant

07 J AA-001020A contamination. Replace the belt if it is cracked, or is
(or commercially available) contaminated with oil or coolant. Wipe off any oil
or solvent that gets on the belt.
5. Install the right front wheel.

Timing Belt Removal
1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up 3. Raise the vehicle on the lift, then remove the right
with the pointer (B). front wheel.
2. Check that the No. 1 piston top dead center (TDC)

mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the
pointer (B) on the front upper cover are aligned.

pulley mark. 6. Support the engine with a jack and wood block
under the oil pan.
7. Remove the upper half of the side engine mount

bracket.
9. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper 11. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the
cover (B). battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.

the timing belt adjuster in its current position.
10. Remove the lower cover. Torque it by hand, do not use a wrench.
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd) Timing Belt Installation
14. Remove the lower half of the side engine mount NOTE: The following procedure is for installing a used
bracket. belt If you are installing a new belt, refer to the timing
belt replacement procedure (see page 6-76).


the oil pump.
15. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and idler pulley (B),
then remove the timing belt Discard the idler
pulley bolt
te a
3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the 4./ Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler
TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the pulley bolt so the pulley can move but does not
pointers (B) on the back covers. come off.
FRONT 5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing

belt cannot be installed, do the timing belt
replacement procedure (see page 6-76).

sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage the timing belt during installation.
-1 Drive pulley (A)

-2 Idler pulley (B)
(cont'd)
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
8. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. 10. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown.
9. Install the lower half of the side engine mount

bracket. 11. Install the lower cover.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
12. I nstall the front upper cover (A) and rear upper , 16. Check the camshaft pulley marks.
cover (B).
pulley mark.

step 17.
through 16.
FRONT
6 x 1 ,0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m , 8.8 Ib f-ft)

pulleys.
15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)

REAR
(cont'd)
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd) Timing Belt Replacement
17. Install the upper half of the side engine mount NOTE: The following procedure is for the installation of
bracket, then torque the mounting bolts in the a new timing belt. If you are installing a used belt, refer
numbered sequence shown. to the timing belt installation procedure (see page 6-72).
© 1 0 x 1 .2 5 mm
44 N-m |4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft) 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-70).
Replace.

the oil pump.

4. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC by aligning the 6. Remove the auto-tensioner.
TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys, with the
FRONT
7. Align the holes on the rod and housing of the

auto-tensioner.
8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the auto-

tensioner. Insert a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) pin through the
housing and the rod.
5. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. NOTE: The compression pressure should not
exceed 9,800 N (1,000 kgf, 2,200 Ibf).
(cont'd)
9. Install the auto-tensioner. 11. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler
NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place. come off.

sequence starting with the drive pulley.
-1 Drive pulley (A)

-2 Idler pulley (B)
D

the timing belt adjuster. Tighten it by hand, do not
use a wrench.
tea
14. Remove the pin from the auto-tensioner. 17. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown.
15. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
16. Install the lower half of the side engine mount

bracket.
6 x 1 .0 m m
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 ib f-ft)
(cont'd)
18. Install the lower cover. 22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
19. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (B).
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)

pulleys.
23. Check the camshaft pulley marks. 24. Install the upper half of the side engine mount
NOTE; If the marks are not aligned, rotate the numbered: sequence shown.
® 1 0 .x 1.25 mm
pulley mark. : 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 32 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
step 24.
through 23.
FRONT
REAR

Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement Timing Belt Drive Pulley
Replacement
2. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover. 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-70).
3. Remove the auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

(see page 11-228).
4. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the timing belt
adjuster (B) and collar (C). 3. Remove the timing belt drive pulley (A) and key (B).
5. Install the timing belt adjuster in the reverse order

of removal.
6. Install the timing belt (see page 6-72). 4. Inspect the timing belt drive pulley and key for
damage. If it is cracked or damaged, replace the
timing belt drive pulley.
5. Install the new timing belt drive pulley.
6. Install the CKP sensor (see page 11-228).

Cylinder Head Cover Removal
FRONT REAR
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4). 1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4).
2. Remove the three ignition coils from the front 2. Remove the three ignition coils from the rear
cylinder head (see page 4-19). cylinder head (see page 4-19).
3. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the harness 3. Disconnect the three injector connectors, rocker
holder. arm oil control solenoid connector, and engine oil
pressure (EOF) sensor connector from the rear
cylinder head.
4. Remove the three bolts (A) securing the harness

holder.
4. Remove the dipstick (B) and positive crankcase

5. Remove the front cylinder head cover.
5. Remove the breather hose (B) and ground cable (C).
6. Remove the rear cylinder head cover.

Cylinder Head Cover Installation
FRONT 8. Torque the bolts in three steps. In the final step

1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft).
is damaged, replace it.

groove.

cover gasket is seated securely.
9. Torque the two bolts (A) securing the harness

holder.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m , 8*8 Ib f-ft)

shop towel.
5. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes,
and install the cylinder head cover (B).
10. Install the dipstick (B) and positive crankcase

11. Install the three ignition coils to the front cylinder

7. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer

REAR 6. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker
1. Check the spark plug seals for damage. If any seal shaft holder mating areas (A). Install the
is damaged/replace it. component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
groove. NOTE:
• If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
3. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of component must be installed within 4 minutes.
the cylinder head cover (B). Make sure the head • If too much time has passed after applying the
cover gasket is seated securely. liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.
7. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes,
and install the rear cylinder head cover (B).
4. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the rocker
shaft holder and cylinder head. NOTE:
• Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
5. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces with a with oil.
shop towel. • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the cylinder head cover.
8. Visually check the spark plug seals for damage.
9. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer

(cont'd)
Cylinder Head Cover Installation Cylinder Head Removal
(cont'd)
NOTE:
10. Torque the bolts in three steps. In the final step surfaces.
torque all bolts, in sequence, 12 N-m • To avoid damaging the wires and terminals, unplug
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft). the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
CD ® • To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
engine coolant temperature drops below 100 °F
(38 °C) before loosening the cylinder head bolts.

11. Torque the three bolts (A) securing the harness 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
holder.
A
6 x 1.0 mm
12 Nm 5. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-32).
6. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump (A) and the

bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket.
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
12. Install the breather hose (B) and ground cable (C).
13. Connect the three injector connectors, rocker arm

oil control solenoid connector, and engine oil
pressure (EOP) sensor connector to the rear
cylinder head.
14. Install the three ignition coils from the rear cylinder

n S
7. Remove the alternator {see page 4-36). 14. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
purge valve joint from the bracket.
9. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-19).
11. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and

wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.

connector
connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector 15. Remove the connector bracket from the front
• Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector cylinder head.
• Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
• Engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor connector
• Oil pressure switch connector
• Two air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connectors
12. Remove the front warm up three way catalytic

13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A ), then

disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-380),
(cont'd)
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
16. Remove the harness clamp bracket from the rear 20. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-83).
cylinder head.
21. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent
warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
FRONT
17. Remove the fuel rails (see step 5 on page 11-222).
18. Remove the water passage (see page 10-10).
19. Remove the front and rear camshaft pulleys (A) and REAR
front and rear back covers (B).
(D (D ® ©
22. Remove the cylinder heads.

Camshaft Replacement
FRONT 11. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal

with a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil to the
1. Make sure.you have the anti-theft codes for the .camshaft journals and lobes. ^
equipped), then write down the audio presets. 12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft
pulley mounting bolt, then install the front
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, camshaft pulley (see step 11 on page 6-108).
13. Install the rocker arm assembly, then.torque the
3. Remove the battery and battery tray. 6 mounting bolts (see step 6 on. page 6-107).
4. Drain the engine coolant -(see page 10-6). 14. Install the timing belt (see page 6-72).
5. Remove the upper radiator hose. 15. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-64).
16. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-429), then install
the upper radiator hose.
17. Install the battery and battery tray. Clean the

battery posts and cable terminals, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
18. Fill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air
from the cooling system (see step 8 on page 10-7).

pattern lean procedure (see page 11-5).
6. Remove the exhaust gas recireulation (EGR) valve
(see page 11-429). 20. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) idle learn
procedure (see page 11-359) and the power
7. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-70), window control unit reset procedure (see page
22-255).
8. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-92K
9. Remove the front camshaft pulley. the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
audio presets.
10. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the
camshaft (B). 22. Set the clock (on vehicles without navigation).
Camshaft Replacement (cont'd)
REAR 7. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.

1. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister to the journals and cam lobes.
purge valve joint from the bracket.
pulley mounting bolt, then install the rear camshaft
pulley (see step 12 on page 6-110).
9. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker
shaft holder mating surface of the cylinder head
(see step 8 on page 6-109). Install the component
within 5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
• If too much time has passed after applying the
2. Remove the brake lines from the master cylinder liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
(see page 19-16). residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket.
3. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-70). 10. Install the rocker arm assembly, then torque the
mounting bolts (see step 9 on page 6-109).
4. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-92).
NOTE:
5. Remove the rear camshaft pulley. • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
6. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
camshaft (B). installing the rocker arm assembly.
13. Install the brake lines (see page 19-16) and do the
brake system bleeding procedure (see page 19-8).
14. Install the EVAP canister purge valve joint.

Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-97).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure

along the edges, and three ways across the center.
• If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.),

cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and
0.2 mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
• Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 121 mm (4.76 in.).
Cylinder Head Height

(4.782-4.766 in.)
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
FRONT REAR
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6 83). 4. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-83).
2. Loosen the locknuts and adjusting screws (A). 5. Loosen the locknuts and adjusting screws (A).
A A
6. Remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts and the

3. Remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
rocker arm assembly.
-1 Loosen the rocker shaft bridge mounting bolts
-1 Loosen the rocker shaft mounting bolts in and rocker shaft holder mounting bolts in
sequence two turns at a time, to prevent sequence two turns at a time, to prevent
damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly.
-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do -2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. not remove the rocker shaft bridge mounting
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker bolts and rocker shaft holder mounting bolts.
arms on the shafts. The bolts will keep the rocker arms on the
shafts.
(D © ® © ® ©
® © © © ©
® 8
< > ® ©
n 9
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
FRONT
NOTE:
• Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
• If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original location.
• When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft,
• Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply new engine oil to any contact points.
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
^.-m [o]m [Sm..[qTT^

INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
SPRING
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARM B ARM A
EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT
(confd)
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
REAR
NOTE:
• Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations,
• If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
• When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the mounting bolts. The bolts will keep the
rocker arms, rocker shaft bridge, and rocker shaft holder on the shaft.
• If the rocker shaft does not remove or does not install by hand, remove or install the rocker shaft by heating the
rocker shaft bridge.
• Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set, and remove the bands after the rocker
arms have been installed.
• Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply new engine oil to any contact points.
• When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new rocker arm assembly.
• Never remove any of the circlips that retain the lost motion assemblies in the rocker shaft bridge. The circlips are
not available separately, and are factory installed in the rocker shaft bridge. To remove the lost motion assemblies,
first remove the rocker shafts and rocker arms.
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-92). 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-93). FRONT
Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shdft Clearance:'
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker Standard (New): 0.019—0.067 mm
location. (0.0007—0.0026 in.)
Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:'-

(0.0007-0 .0023 in.)
Service Limit: 0.058 mrtv (0.0023 in.)
REAR
Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
(0.0006-0.0018 in.)
Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:

(0.0006-0.0018in.)
Service Limit: 0J46 mm (0.0018In.)
Inspect rocker arm

face for wear.
6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the

clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all over-tolerance rocker arms. If any variable
cylinder management rocker arm needs
replacement, replace all rocker arms in that set
(primary and secondary).
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection (cont'd)
Variable Cylinder Management Rocker Arms
7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Slide them into

the rocker arms. If they do not move smoothly,
replace the rocker arm set.
NOTE;
• Apply new engine oil to the rocker arm pistons
when reassembling.
• When removing the rocker arm pistons from the
intake primary rocker arm (B) and exhaust
primary rocker arms (C), carefully apply air
pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm.
INTAKE
Camshaft Inspection
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-86). 5. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
. the cylinder head.
2. Remove the rocker arms (see page 6-92).
6. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
3. Front: Put the rocker shafts on the front cylinder camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
head, then torque the bolts to the specified torque. read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck.
Specified Torque If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
8 x 1.25 mm: 24 N-m (2.4 kgf.ni, 18 Ibf-ft) camshaft.
© © Camshaft End Play

Standard (New): 0.05—0.20 m m
(0.002-0.008 in.)
/r— ^
: flt mto
D pi
fiL-JI BMW
L rb3- -o-m m l
4. Rear: Put the rocker shaft bridge and rocker shaft

holder on the rear cylinder head, then torque the
bolts to the specified torque.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, IS Ibf-ft) 7. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out
the camshaft (B).
(cont'd)
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
8. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift 11. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder
ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, head. Measure the inside diameter of each
scored, or excessively worn. camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-
round condition.
9. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, goto step 13.
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 12.
Camshaft-to-HoIder Oil Clearance

(0.0020-0.0035 in.)
10. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.

tea
12. Check total runout with the camshaft supported on 13. Measure cam lobe height.
V-blocks.
NOTE: When measuring the cam lobe height of the
• If the total runout of the camshaft is within the rear camshaft, measure the secondary cam lobes.
service limit, replace the cylinder head.
• If the total runout is beyond the service limit, Cam Lobe Height Standard (New)
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil Front:
clearance. If the oil clearance is still out of Intake: 36.149 mm (1.4232 in.)
tolerance, replace the cylinder head. Exhaust: 35.864 mm (1.4120 in.)
Rear:
Camshaft Total Runout Intake; 35.096 mm (1.3817 in.)
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. Exhaust: 36.509 mm (1.4374 in.)
Servi ce Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
FRONT
INTAKE
EXHAUST EXHAUST
REAR
EXHAUST INTAKE EXHAUST
PRIMARY SECONDARY PRIMARY
INTAKE PRIMARY
(for CYLINDER
PAUSE; ZERO LIFT)
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
Valve spring compressor attachment
07757-PJ1010A
identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the spring retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
B
6. Remove the valve seal.
3. install the valve spring compressor attachment and

spring compressor. Compress the spring and
remove the valve cotters.
07757-PJ1010A
7. Remove the valve spring seat.
4. Remove the spring compressor and valve spring

compressor attachment, then remove the spring
retainer, valve spring, and valve.
Valve Inspection Valve Stem~to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-100).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-100).
intake Valve Dimensi ons 2 . Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm
A Standard (New); 34.90—35.10 mm (0.39 in.), then measure the guide-to-stem
(1.374—*1.382 In.) clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the
BStandard (New): 115.70-116.30 mm stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble
(4.555-4.579 in.) method).
C Standard (New): 5.485—5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 In.) • If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 In.) recheck it using a new valve.
• If the measurement is now within the service
Exhaust Valve Dimensions limit, reassemble using a new valve.
A Standard (New): 29,90—30.10 mm • If the measurement with a new valve still
(1.177-1.185 In.) exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
B Standard (New): 113.90—114.50 mm
(4.484-4.508 In.) Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
C Standard (New): 5.450—5.460 mm Standard (New): 0.04—0.09 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.) (0.002-0.004 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.) Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)

(0.004-0.006 in.)
3. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with

a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.0008-0.0018 In.)

(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
Valve Guide Replacement
Special T ools Required 5. Working from the combustion chamber side, use
•Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide
•Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 about 2 mm (0.1 in.) towards the combustion
chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page and make removal easier. Hold the air hammer
6 - 101 ). directly in line with the valve guide to prevent
damaging the driver. Wear safety goggles or a face
2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air- shield.
impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward
same procedure can be done using the special tool the camshaft side of the head.
and a conventional hammer.
5.3 mm
(0.21 in.) L
/ jplJL
- 87 mm - 57 mm —
(3.43 in.) (2.24 in.)
10.8 mm
(0.42 in.)
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill

them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300 °F (150 °C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 °F (150 c€); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
7. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a

8 mm (5/16 in.) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you

could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with
the new valve guide. Install the guide from the cutting oil.
camshaft side of the head; use the valve guide
driver to drive the guide to the specified installed 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides valve guide bore.
to do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height

Intake; 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust; 20.60-21.60 mm 10.811-0.850 in.)
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while

removing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-101).

Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without sticking.
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 5. Make one more very light pass with the 45 °cutter
6-101). If the valve guides are worn, replace them to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
(see page 6-102) before cutting the valve seats. cutters.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a Valve Seat W i dth
valve seat cutter. Standard (New): 1.25—1.55 mm (0.049—0.061 in.)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve

seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
3. Carefully cut a 45 °seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30 ° cutter

and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5 ° cutter
(intake seat) orthe 60 °cutter (exhaust seat). Check 7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
• If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you

must make a second cut with the 67.5 °cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 °cutter (exhaust seat) to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45 °
cutter to restore seat width.
• If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30 ° cutter to move it
up, then one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with

the 45 ° cutter.
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,
and measure the valve stem installed height {A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

(1.841-1,872 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

(1.838—1.869 In.)'
9. If the valve stem installed height is over the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
* Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
•Valve spring compressor attachment toward the cylinder head.
07757-PJ1010A
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install spring compressor. Compress the spring and
the valves in the valve guides. install the valve cotters.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the stem seal
driver (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring

(D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F). They are not interchangeable.
7. Remove the valve spring compressor and valve

spring compressor attachment.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three

times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve
stem only along its axis so you do not bend the
stem.
FRONT 6. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
1. Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the 7. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
camshaft oil seal. reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-93).
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely
install the bolts. Make sure the rocker arms are
--1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. properly positioned on the valve stems.
-2 Install the oil seal about 0.5 —1.5 mm
(0.02—0.06 in.) below the surface of the 9. Torque each bolt two turns at a time in the
cylinder head. sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not
bind on the valves.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm; 24 N-m {2.4 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft)
© © © ' © © ©

new O-ring (D). Apply new engine oil to the
journals and cam lobes.
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow

dowel pins (F).
(cont'd)
10. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new REAR
gasket (B).
1. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
2. Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the
camshaft oil seal.
3. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
-1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.

-2 Install the oil seal about 0.5 —1.5 mm
(0.02—0.06 in.) below the surface of the
cylinder head.


I*. * 1 llllll O K I . a ! *3 1I1I11
92 N-m 22 N-m new O-ring (D). Apply new engine oil to the
(9.2 kgf-m, 68 I bf-ft) (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) camshaft journals and lobes.
12. Set the camshaft pulleys to top dead center (TDC) 5. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
before bolting them onto the engine block (see step
6 on page 6-111). 6. If the rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-94).
7. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the rocker 10. Torque each bolt two turns at a time in the
shaft holder and cylinder head. sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not
bind on the valves.
8. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the rocker Specified Torque
shaft holder mating surface of the cylinder head. 8 x 1.25 mm; 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)
Install the component within 5 minutes of applying
the liquid gasket.
NOTE;
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
11. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new

gasket (B).
9. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely

install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
properly positioned on the valve stems.
NOTE:
with oil.
• Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the rocker arm assembly.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(cont'd)
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Cylinder Head Installation
Camshaft Seal, and Pulley
1. Clean the cylinder head and engine block surface.
Installation (cont'd)
2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) with
12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft new O-rings (B).
A B
12 x 1.25 mm
92 N-m19.2 kgf-m, 68 I bf-ft)
13. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDC before bolting

them onto the engine block (see step 6 on page 3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head
6 - 111). gaskets (D).


the oil pump.
6. Set the camshaft pull eys to TDC by aligning the 8. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
TDC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the point A and point B ..
FRONT
9. If either diameter is less than 10.6 mm (0.42 in.),

replace the cylinder head bolt.
10. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the
bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
7. Install the cylinder heads on the engine block.
(cont'd)
11. Torque the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 12. After torquing, torque all cylinder head bolts in two
30 N-m (3.0 kgf*mr 22 Ibf-ft). Use a beam-type steps (90 ° per step). If you are using a new cylinder
torque wrench. When using a preset-type torque head bolt, tighten the bolt an extra 90°.
wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not
overtorque. If a bolt makes any noise while you are NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you torque
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retorque it from the it beyond the specified angle, and go back to step 8
first step. of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to the
specified angle.
FRONT
© ® © ©

REAR
(D ® © ©
16. Install the water passage (see page 10-10).
17. Install the front warm up three way catalytic

18. Install the fuel rails (see step 5 on page 11-222).

19. Install the connector bracket to the front cylinder 21 . Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
head. purge valve joint
22. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-381),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (B).
20. Install the harness clamp bracket to the rear

cylinder head.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)
23. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and 29. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals, then
install the wire harness clamps to the cylinder head. assemble them and apply grease to prevent
corrosion.
Six injector connectors
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor T 30. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connector connectors are installed correctly.
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 2
connector 31. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector line. Repeat this operation three times, then check
Engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor connector for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
Oil pressure switch connector
Two air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connectors 32. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed
Two secondary heated oxygen sensor air from the cooling system with the heater valve
(secondary H02S) connectors open (see step 8 on page 10-7).
24. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-6). 33. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP
25. Install the alternator (see page 4-37).
26. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4-19). procedure (see page 11-359) and power window
control unit reset procedure (see page 22-255).
27. Install the power steering (P/S) pump (A) and
torque the bolt (B) securing the P/S hose bracket. 35. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-358).
audio presets.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Sealing Bolt Installation
Car
NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt (A), always use
a new washer (B).
Camshaft oil seal driver 07PAF-0030100 FRONT
1. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.
2. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the lip

of the camshaft oil seal.
3. Using the camshaft oil seal driver (A), washer (B),

and a 12 x75 x 1.25 mm bolt (C), press in the
camshaft oil seal (D) about 0.5—1.5 mm (0.02—0.06
in.) below the surface of the cylinder head.
28 x 1.5 m m
80 N-m (8.0 kgf-m, 59 Ibf-ft)
REAR
28 x 1.5 mm
80 N-m (8.0 kgf-m, 59 Ibf-ft)
Engine Block
Special Tools ............................................ .......................... 7-2
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection ....................... .................................................. 7-6
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ....................... 7-7
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ....................... 7-9
Oil Pan Removal ........................ ....................................... 7-11
Crankshaft and Piston Removal ..................................... 7-12
Crankshaft Inspection ...................................................... 7-15
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................... 7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing ....................................................... 7-18
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-19
Piston Ring Replacement ................................................. 7-22
Crankshaft and Piston Installation ................................ 7-24
Oil Pan Installation ............................................................ 7-29
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car ... 7-31
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal
Installation - In Car .......................................................... 7-31
Drain Bolt Installation ................................... ................... 7-32
Special Tools

© 070AD-RCAA100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 1
® 070AD-RCAA200 Driver Attachment, 106 mm 1
(D 07749-0010000 Driver 1
te s i
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-11
OIL SCREEN DOWEL PINS
O-RING
ENG I NE BLOCK END COVER
CRANKSHAFT O I L SEAL,
TRANSM ISS ION END
Installation,
step 23 on page 7-27
Instal lati on - In Car,
page 7-31
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL,

PULLEY END
Installation,
step 2 on page 8-14
Instal lation - In Car,
page 7-31 DRIVE PLATE BOLT
WASHER
J35A9 engine:
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL
OIL PUMP SOLENOID FILTER
Overhaul, page 8-12 J35Z1 engine:
O-RING DRIVE PLATE
Removal and Install ation,
J35A9 engine: page 14-234
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID/
OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY
J35Z1 engine:
OI L FILTER BASE/
OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY
Component Location index (cont'd)
CRANKSHAFT
End Play, page 7-6
Runout, page 7-15
Out-of Round, page 7-15
Rem oval, page 7-12
M AIN BEARINGS THRUST WASHERS

Oil Clearance, page 7-7
Selection, page 7-8
DOWEL PINS
OIL JET BOLTS

CJ35Z1 engine)
COOLANT DRAIN BOLT

COOLANT DRAIN BOLT

PISTON RINGS
Replacement page 7-22
PISTON
Removal, page 7-12
Measurement, page 7-16
CONNECT I NG ROD
End Play, page 7-6
Sm all End Measurement,
page 7-20
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder Bore Inspection, page 7-16
W arpage Inspection, page 7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing, page 7-18
Ridge Removal, step 12 on page 7-13
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-13). 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 11 on page 7-13). crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler exceed the service limit.
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and
crankshaft (C). Crankshaft End Play
Connecting Rod End Play Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Standard (New): 0.15-0.35-mm (0.006-0.014 in.)
6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust

washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance,
4. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-12).
install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is still
out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page
7-12).
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
1. Remove the main bearing caps and bearing halves of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with
(see step 18 on page 7-14). the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do
not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a adjust clearance.
clean shop towel.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
journal. color listed above or below that one), and check
again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
NOTE; If the engine is still in the vehicle when you by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
bolt the main cap down to check the clearance, the replace the crankshaft and start over (see page
weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten 7-12).
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank with a jack
under the counterweights, and check only one
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the

bearing cap bolts to 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 55 Ibf-ft),
and the bearing cap side bolts to 49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m,
36 Ibf-ft) in the proper sequence (see step 22 on
page 7-26).
NOTE:
• Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
• Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Remove the cap and bearing half, and measure the

widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oi l Clearance

(0.0008-0.0017 in.)
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Main Bearing Selection Larger crank bore

Bearing Identification
Crankshaft Bor® Cod® Location Color code is on the A or I B or II C or III Dor llll
Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the edge of the bearing
block as a code for the size of each of the four main ....... -..Smaller bearing (Thicker)
journal bores.
Red/ Pink/
Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft 1 or I
Pink
Pink Yellow Yellow
(codes for main journal size), to choose the correct
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an Pink Pink/ Yellow Yellow/
2 or II Yellow
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a Green
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent 3 or I II Pink/ Yellow Yellow/ Green
Yellow Green
4 or Sill Yellow Y ello w / Green G reen/

Green Brown
Yellow/ Green Green/ Brown

5 or lllll Green Brown
6 or llllll Green G reen/ Brown/

Brown
Brown Black
f f NOTE: When using bearing halves
Smaller Small er of different colors, it does not
main bearing matter which color is used in
journal (Thicker) the top or bottom.
Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)
No. 1 JOURNAL No. 4 JOURNAL

(Pulley end) (Transmission end)
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
Inspection remove the upper half of the bearing, then install a
new, complete bearing with the same color code,
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or
(see page 7-12). scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
with a clean shop towel. incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal. clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over
bolts. (see page 7-12).
NOTE;
* Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
• Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
Tightening Torque;
20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 15 Ibf-ft) + 90 °
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure

the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance

(0.0008-0.0017 in.)
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Larger big end bore

Bearing Identification
Each connecting rod falls into one of four tolerance Color code is on the 1 or I 2 or I I 3 or III 4 or lll l
ranges (from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm edge of the bearing
(0.0002 in.) increments) depending on the size of its big ----------► Sm aller bearing (Thicker)
end bore.
It's then stamped with a number or bar (1,2,3, or 4/I/II, A o rl Pink Pink/ Yellow Yellow /
Yellow Green
III, or III!) indicating the range. You may find any
combination of 1,2,3, or 4/I, II, III, or IIII in any engine. Pink/ Yellow / Green
B or II Yellow
Yellow Green
Normal Bore Size: 58.0 mm (2.28 in.)
C or 111 Yellow Y ello w / Green G reen/
Green Brown
Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat damage.
D or llll Yellow / Green Green/ Brown
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations Green Brown
Numbers or bars have been stamped on the side of
E or lllll Green Green/ B ro w n . Brow n/
each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Brown Black
Use them, and the letters or bars stamped on the crank
(codes for rod journal size), to choose the correct F or llllll Green/ Brown Brow n/ Black
Brown Black
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a NOTE: When using bearing halves
Sm aller Smaller of different colors, it does not
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or rod bearing matter which color is used in
detergent. journal (Thicker) the top or bottom.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations

(Letters or Bars) -
(Pulley end) (Transmission end)

Oil Pan Removal
1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle/ go to 9. Remove the bolts securing the <Mpm.
step 7.
10. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height from the engine block in the places shown.
3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-8).
4. Remove the splash shield (see step 30 on page 5-5).
5. Remove the front subframe stiffener (see step 34

on page 5-5).
6. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 35 on page 5-5).
7. Remove the rear warm up three way catalytic

converter (rear WU-TWC) bracket
8. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the four

bolts (B) securing the transmission.
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the engine/transmission (see page 5-2). 9. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter
assembly (J35A9 engine).
2. Remove the transmission (see page 14-222).
3. Remove the drive plate (see page 14-234).
4. Remove the cylinder heads:

5. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

(see page 11-228).
6. Remove the timing belt drive pulley from the

crankshaft.
7. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
8. Remove the engine block end cover.

10. Remove the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (J35Z1
engine).
n5S
11. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B), and oil 13. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the
pump (C). crank pin at bottom dead center (BDC) for each
cylinder. Remove the piston/connecting rod
assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take
care not to damage the oil jets, crank pin, or
cylinder with the connecting rod.
CORRECT
12. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon

around the top of any cylinder, remove it with a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may INCORRECT
damage the piston as it's pushed out.
(cont'd)
Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont'd)
14. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/ 19. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap
bearings in order. side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C).
15. Remove the upper bearing halves from the

connecting rods, and set them aside with their
respective caps.
16. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,

reinstall the cap on the rod.
17. To avoid confusion during reassembly, mark each

piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
18. Loosen the bearing cap bolts and bearing cap side
bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the
sequence until all bolts are loosened.
careful not to damage the journals.
21. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine

block in the proper order.
Crankshaft Inspection
Out-of-Round and Taper Straightness
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block 6. Place the engine block on the flat surface,
(see page 7-12). crankshaft side up.
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe 7. Clean and install the bearings on the No. land
cleaners or a suitable brush. No. 4 journal of the engine block.
3. Check the keyway and threads. 8. Lower the crankshaft into the engine block.
4. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod 9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals.
and main journal in two places. The difference Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions.
between measurements on each journal must not The difference between measurements on each
be more than the service limit. journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round Crankshaft Total Runout

Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 i n.) max. Standard (New): 0.025 mm (0.0010 in.) max.
Servi ce Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.) Service Limit: 0.030 mm (0.0012 in.)
vJ[___ Lj
n r
5. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper
Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max.
Block and Piston Inspection
1. Remove the pistons from the engine block 4. Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at
(see page 7-12). three levels in each cylinder as shown. If
measurements in any cylinder are beyond the
2. Check the pistons for distortion or cracks. oversize bore service limit, replace the engine block.
If the engine block has to be rebored, refer to step 7
3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm after reboring.
(0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
Cylinder Bore Size
Piston Di ameter Standard (New): 89.000—89.015 mm
Standard (New): 88.975—88.985 mm (3.5039-3.5045 in.)
(3.5029-3.5033 in.) Service Limit: 89.065 mm (3.5065 in.)
Oversize
Oversize Piston Diameter 0.25: 89.250-89.265 mm (3.5138-3.5144 in.)
0.25: 89.225—89.235 mm (3.5128-3.5132 in.) Reboring Limit: 0.25 mm (0.01 in.)
Bore Taper
Limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
6 mm (0.2 in.)
i
First Measurement
J
T
H
6 mm (0.2 in.)
Second Measurement
Third Measurement
h s
5. Hone any scored or scratched cylinder bores. 7. Calculate the difference between cylinder bore
(see page 7-18). diameter and piston diameter. If the clearance is
near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston
6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage. and cylinder bore for excessive wear.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown. Piston-to-CyHinder Bore Clearance
Engine Bl ock Warpage (0.0006-0.0016 In.)
Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. Service Li mit: 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
PRECISI ON STRAIGHT EDGE

Cylinder Bore Honing
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see step 4 on page

7-16). If the engine block Is to be reused, hone the
cylinders and remeasure the bores. Only scored or
scratched cylinder bores must be honed,
2. Remove the oil jets (J35Z1 engine) (see page 8-11).
3. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine

(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree crosshatch pattern.
NOTE:
• Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone,
such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent.
• Do not use stones that are worn or broken.
4. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the

engine block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
5. If scoring or scratches are still present in the

cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the engine block. Some light vertical scoring
and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep enough
to catch your fingernail and does not run the full
length of the bore.
6. Install the oil jets (J35Z1 engine) (see page 8-11).

Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to

about 158 °F (70 °C), then remove the piston pin.
1. Remove the pi stons from the engine bl ock
(see page 7-12).
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings

(A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
. bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
g::::.......... - .::::...... zizzzz:::...zzi
3. Remove snap rings (A) from both sides of the

piston. Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore.
Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go
flying or get lost. Wear eye protection.
Piston* Pin#and Connecting Rod Replacement-(cont'd)
Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting piston.
rod when they are at room temperature.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Standard (New): —0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
(-0.00020 t o +0.00004 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter Service Limit: 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance

(0.0002-0.0006 in.)
Reassembly 4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (B)
with the embossed marks (C) on the same side.
1. Install a piston pin snap ri ng (A) only on one side. Install the piston pin (D).
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in

the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new
engine oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158 °F (70 °C).
5. Install the remaining snap ring.

Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove the pistons from the engine block 4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
(see page 7-12). cylinder bore 15—20 mm (0.6—0.8 in.) from the
bottom.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (B).
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly with a

squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner
with a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the
blade, if necessary. The top ring and second ring
grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) wide, and the oil ring 5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler
groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire gauge:
brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring
grooves deeper with the cleaning tool. • If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
the proper rings for your engine.
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the • If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. diameter against the wear limits (see step 4 on
page 7-16). If the bore is over the service limit,
the engine block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap
Top Ring:
(0.008-0.014 in.)
Second Ring:
(0.016-0.022 in.)
Oil Ring:
(0.008-0.028 in.)
6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1D 7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
mark and the second ring (B) has a 2C mark. The ring-to-groove clearance:
manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.
Top Ring Clearance
(0.0022—0.0031 in;)-
Second Ring Clearance

(0.0012-0.0022 in.)
o
8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
do not bind.
9. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
About 90 °
Piston Ring Dimensions:

Top Ring (Standard)
A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
Second Ring (Standard)
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
Special Tools Required 7. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with
* Driver 07749-0010000 the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the
• Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200 engine block.
1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with

plastigage (see page 7-9).
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage

(see page 7-7).
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and

connecting rods.
4. Apply new engine oil to the inside of the main

bearings and rod bearings.
5. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine block.

C
6. Apply new engine oil to the side with the thrust

washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the
No. 3 journal.
8. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and

flanges, then loosely install the bearing cap bolts
(D) and bearing cap side bolts (E).
9. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for 15. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
the cylinder you are installi ng the piston in. at point A and point B.
10. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the 35 mm (1.38 in)
ring compressor, and the cylinder bore.
11. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/

connecting rod assembly, and check that the
bearing is securely in place.
12. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with

the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the
engine.
16. Calculate the difference in diameter between point

A and point B.
Point A—Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter
Specification: 0—0.1 mm (0—0.004 in.)
13. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the 17. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,
cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a replace the connecting rod bolt.
hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring
compressor (B) to prevent the rings from
expanding before entering the cylinder bore.
14. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and

check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
18. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, 22. Torque the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing
then install the cap. cap side bolts to the specified torque in the
sequence as shown. Repeat the torque sequence
again to measure the bolts are properly torqued.
11 x 1.5 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m 49 N-m
(7.5 kgf-m, 55 ibf-ft) (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft)
19. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and

flanges. Torque the bolts (B) to 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m,
15 Ibf-ft).
(D ©~\_
20. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as
SL ffl
shown.
©
rk
(D © AD
r
a__(o JO
21. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head lines
up with the mark on the connecting rod (turn the
bolt 90°).
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you

torqued it beyond the specified angle, and go back
to step 15 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to
the specified angle.
23. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the ; 27. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001,
crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
block mating surface of the engine block end cover.
24. Drive the new crankshaft oil seal until the driver Install'the component within 5 minutes of applying
attachment bottoms on the engine block end cover. the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
25. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the engine
block end cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt
holes.
Apply liquid gasket
26. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating along the broken line.
surfaces.- ■ "
28. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (B), and the
engine block end cover (C) on the engine block.
NOTE:
with oil.
installing the engine block end cover.
29. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and

check the seal for distortion.
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (eont d;
30. Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump (see 34. Grease the lip of the oil seal, and apply new engine
step 2 on page 8-14). oil to the new O-ring (A).
6 x 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
31. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil 12 N-m 12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 f-fl) (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 f-ft)
pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
32. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.
33. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
block mating surface of the oil pump. Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
35. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).
NOTE:
with oil.
* Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the oil pump.

37. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen
(E) with new O-ring (F).
38. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter

assembly (A), with a new rocker arm oil control
solenoid filter (B) (J35A9 engine).
Oil Pan Installation
39. Install the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (A)/with 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan
a new O-ring (B) (J35Z1 engine). mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan
mating surface of the engine block. Install the
gasket.
NOTE:
residue, then reapply the new liquid gasket
40. Install the oil pan (see page 7-29).
41. Install the tinning belt drive pulley to the crankshaft.
42. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

(see page 11-228).
43. Install the cylinder heads:

* J35Z1 engine (see page 6-110)
44. Install the drive plate (see page 14-234).

Apply l iquid gasket
45. Install the transmission (see page 14-235). along the broken line.
46. Install the engine/transmission (see page 5-14). 4. Install the oil pan on the engine block.
NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod

bearing is replaced, after assembly it is necessary
to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches
normal operating temperature, then continue to
run it for about 15 minutes.
Oil Pan Installation (cont'd)
5. Torque the bolts in three steps. In the final step, 7. Install the rear warm up three way catalytic
torque all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N-m converter (rear WU-TWC) bracket.
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft).
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
NOTE; (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
with oil.
installing the oil pan.
8. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the following

steps.
6. Torque the four bolts (A) securing the transmission,
then install the torque converter cover (B). 9. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets and new
self-locking nuts (see step 31 on page 5-20).
A
12 x 1.25 mm
75 N m (7.5 kgf-m, 55 Ibf-ft) 10. Install the front subframe stiffener using new bolts
11. Install the splash shield (see step 33 on page 5-21).
12. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page
8 - 8 ).

|
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Transmission End Crankshaft Oil

Installation - In Car Seal Installation - In Car
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

Oil seal driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCAA100 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200
1. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor,
timing belt, and timing belt drive pulley. 1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-222) and
the drive plate (see page 14-234).
2. Remove the pulley end crankshaft oil seal.
2. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the
crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 4. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the
crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.
5. Using the oil seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil
seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. 5. Using the driver and driver attachment, drive in the
When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease crankshaft oil seal until the driver attachment
off the crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is bottoms against the engine block end cover. Align
not distorted. the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the
crankshaft.
6. Install the timing belt drive pulley, CKP sensor, and

timing belt:

• J35Z1 engine (see page 6-82) 6. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7. Install the drive plate (see page 14-234) and the

transmission (see page 14-235).
Drain Bolt Installation
NOTE: When installing the drain bolts, always use new

washers.

Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ....................................................................... 8-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................................. 8-6
Oil Pressure Switch Test ................................................. 8-7
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement .................................. 8-7
Oil Pressure Test ................................................................ 8-8
Engine Oil Replacement .................................................. 8-8
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................... .................. 8-9
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement .................................. 8-10
Oil Jet Replacement .......................................................... 8-11
Oil Jet Bolt Inspection ...................................................... 8-11
Oil Pump Overhaul ........................................................... 8-12
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Descripti on

07HAA-PJ70100 Oil Filter Wrench 1
070AD-RCAA100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 1
J35A9 engi ne
J35Z1 engine
ENGINE BLOCK END COVER

O-RING
O IL CONTROL ORIFICES
O-RINGS
DOWEL PINS
O-RING
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Circuit Di agram, page 22-92
Test, page 8-7
Oil Pressure Test,
page 8-8
OIL FILTER BASE
OIL PUMP
Removal,
page 8-13
Instpection,
page 8-13
Installation,
page 8-14
OIL FILTER FEED PIPE
Replacement,
page 8-10 O IL SCREEN
OIL FILTER
DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
OIL PAN
Removal, page 7-11
Instal l ation, page 7-29
CRANKSHAFT
Removal, page 7-12
THRUST WASHERS
DOWEL PINS
OIL JET BOLTS

OIL JETS

Excessive engine oil consumption 1. Check that the engine oil fill cap, oil drain bolt,
and oil filter are tight.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for worn valve guide(s) or worn valve stem
seal(s):
4. Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s)
(see page 7-22).
5. Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts
(cylinder wall, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-16).
Low oil pressure indicator does not 1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic An open in the
come on with the ignition switch function (see page 22-90). wire between the
ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-7). gauge control
module and the oil
pressure switch
Low oil pressure indicator stays on 1. Check the engine oil level. A wire shorted to
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic ground between
function (see page 22-90). the gauge control
3. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-7). module and the oil
4. Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-8). pressure switch
5. Check the oil filter for clogging.
6. Check the oil screen for clogging.
7. Check the relief valve.
8. Check the oil pump (see page 8-13).
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Remove the BLU/YEL wire (A) from the engine oil 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then
pressure switch (B). remove the oil pressure switch.
18 N-m
(1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ib f-ft)
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal

(C) and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity with the engine stopped. There should 2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and
be no continuity with the engine running. switch mounting hole.
3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the

oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil
pressure switch.
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause

liquid gasket to get into the oil passage.
4. Connect the oil pressure switch connector.

Oil Pressure Test Engine Oil Replacement
If the low oil pressure indicator stays oh with the engine 1. Warm up the engine.
running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
correct: 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, then install

an oil pressure gauge (A).
40 N m
(4.0 kgf*m, 29 Ibf-ft)
Do not overtorque.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the 4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing. Capacity ■
At Oil Change:
3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should At Oil Change including Filter:
be: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
After Engine Overhaul:
Engine O i l Temperature: 176 T (80 °C) 5.0 L (5.3 US qt)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min.
4. If oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect these

items:
• Replace the oil filter (see page 8-9).

• Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page
8- 12).
• Check the oil screen for clogging.
• Inspect the oil pump (see page 8-13).
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Special Tools Required
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench.
7. Select BODY ELECTICAL with the HDS. 2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.
8. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with
the HDS. 3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Clean the seat on the engine block, then
9. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter
the HDS. rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass
system.
10. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the
HDS.
NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time

with the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE
OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS instead.
11. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
12. Reset the maintenance information display

(see page 3-6).
4. Install the oil filter by hand.
5. After the rubber seal seats, torque the oil filter

clockwise with the oil filter wrench.
Torque: 3/4 Turn Clockwise

Tightening Torque: 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
Engine Oil Filter Replacement Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
(cont'd)
1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-9).
6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ▼ to ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ ) 2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.

are printed around the outside of the filter, you can
use the following procedure to torque the filter.
• Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against

the block, and note which number or mark is at
the bottom.
• Torque the filter by turning it clockwise three
numbers or marks from the one you noted. For
example, if mark ▼ is at the bottom when the
seal is lightly seated, torque the filter until the
mark ▼ ▼ ▼ ▼ comes around to the bottom.
3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil

filter feed pipe, and hold one nut with a wrench,
then torque the other nut.
Mark when rubber

seal is seated.
Number or 1 2 3 4
Mark when or or or or
rubber seal ▼ . www
is seated
Number or 4 1 2 3
Mark after or or or or
torquing ▼ :WWW
7. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than 4. Torque the oil filter feed pipe to 50 N-m (5.0 kgf-m,
3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. 37 Ibf-ft), then remove the nuts from the oil filter
feed pipe.
Oil Jet Replacement Oil Jet Bolt Inspection
J35Z1 engine J35Z1 engine

1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block 1. Remove the oil jet bolt (see page 8-11).
(see page 7-12).
2 . Inspect the oil jet bolt as follows.
2. Remove the oil jet bolt (A), then remove the oil jet
(B). • Make sure that a 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) diameter drill
will go through the oil intake (0.7 mm (0.03 in.)
diameter). Make sure the check ball (A) moves
smoothly and has a stroke of about 4.0 mm
(0.16 in.)
• Check the oil jet bolt operation with an air nozzle.
It should take at least 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/cm, 17 psi)
to unseat the check ball.
3. Carefully install the oil jet and torque the oil jet bolt.
4. Install the crankshaft (see page 7-24).

Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
6x 1.0 rum
6 Nm
39 N-m
Special Tools Required Inspection
Oil seal driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCAA100
1. Remove the screws from the pump housing, then
Removal separate the housing and cover.
1. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-8). 2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If
2. Remove the timing belt: the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the
service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
• J35Z1 engine (see page 6-70) Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor Service Limit: 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
(see page 11-228).
4. Attach the chain hoist to the engine hanger on the

power steering (P/S) pump bracket (see step 70 on
page 5-13).
5. Remove the jack from under the oil pan.
6. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter

assembly (J35A9 engine) (see step 9 on page 7-12).
7. Remove the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (J35Z1

engine) (see step 10 on page 7-12).
8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).

3. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between
9. Remove the oil screen (A). the rotors (A) and pump housing (B). If the housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit,
replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

10. Remove the mounting bolts and the oil pump

assembly (B).
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
4. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance Installation

between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance 1, Remove the old oil seal from the oil pump.
exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump
assembly. 2. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the oil seal driver
bottoms on the pump.
Housi ng-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
3. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil

pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
5. Inspect both rotors and pump housing for scoring 4. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.
or other damage. Replace the parts, if necessary.
6. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
screws, then install the oil pump cover. block mating surface of the oil pump. Install the
7. Check that the oil pump turns freely. gasket.
NOTE:
6. Grease the lip of the oil seal, and apply new engine 14. Install the timing belt:
oil to the new O-ring (A).
6 x 1 .0 m m
15. Remove the chain hoist.
7. Install the dowel pins (B), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).
NOTE:
with oil.
installing the oil pump.

9. Install the oil screen (D) with new O-ring (E).
10. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter

assembly (J35A9 engine) (see step 38 on page
7-28).
11. Install the oil filter base/oil filter assembly (J35Z1

engine) (see step 39 on page 7-29).
12. Install the oil pan (see page 7-29).
13. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

(see page 11-228).
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation .................. 9-2
Injector Base Removal and Installation ....................... 9-8
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ................... . 9-10
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
J35A9 engine:
, UPPER COVER
Replace if it is cracked or if the
mating surface is damaged. 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kflf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
I 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if it is cracked
or if the mati ng
surface is damaged.
GASKET
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
te a
J35Z1 engine:
! UPPER COVER
Replace if it is cracked or if the
m ating surface is damaged. 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
END COVER
GASKET
Replace.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
(1.2 kgf-m , 8.8 Ibf-ft)
GASKET
Replace.
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
INTAKE MANIFOLD
END COVER
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if it is cracked
or if the mating
surface is damaged.
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Removal 3. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)

hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (B).
1. Remove the engine cover.
4. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A) and the transmission breather hose clamp
bracket (B).

intake air duct (B).
5. Remove and plug the water bypass hoses (C).

6. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and 8. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts and
wire harness cl amps from the intake manifold. nuts sequentially in three steps, then remove the
intake manifold.
• Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector
• Throttle actuator connector
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
• Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge
valve connector
• Intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve actuator
connector (J35Z1 engine)
7. Remove the upper cover mounting bolts and nuts

sequentially in three steps, then remove the upper
cover.
© ® . ® (D (D
9. Remove the spacer (J35A9 engine).

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 4. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A), transmission breather hose clamp bracket
1. Install the gaskets and spacer on the injector base (B), and water bypass hoses (C).
(J35A9 engine).
2. Install the intake manifold. Torque the bolts and

nuts sequentially in three steps. Always use a new
intake manifold gasket.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)
5. Install the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose

(A) and brake booster vacuum hose (B).
3. Install the upper cover. Torque the bolts and nuts

sequentially in three steps. Always use a new
gasket.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,8.8 Ibf-ft)
te s i
6. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and 8. Install the engine cover.
- install the wire harness clamps to the intake
manifold.
• Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector

• Throttle actuator connector
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
• Evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge
valve connector
• Intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve actuator
connector (J35Z1 engine)
7. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the

breather pipe(B).
10. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and


Injector Base Removal and Installation
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-372). 1. Install the front injector base (A) and rear injector
base (B) with new gaskets (C), and torque the bolts/
2. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump and P/S nuts (D) in a crisscross pattern in three steps,
hose bracket (see step 6 on page 6-28). beginning with the inner nuts.
3. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4). NOTE: The front injector base gasket is different
from the rear one. Do not mix injector base gasket
4. Remove the injectors (see page 11-222). types.
5. Remove the harness bracket mount bolt (A) and the

knock sensor connector (B).
6. Remove the injector base mount bolts/nuts (A),

then remove the front injector base (B) and rear
injector base (C). 2. Install the knock sensor connector (A) and harness
bracket mount bolt (B).
3. Install the injectors (see page 11-222).
5. Install the P/S pump and P/S hose bracket (see step
27 on page 6-52).

runs about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation three times, then check for
fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
10x1.25 mm 10x1.25 mm
54 N m C5.5 kgfm , 40 ibf-ft) 33 N-m (3.4 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft)
Replace. Replace.
Cooling System
Component Location Index ................................... ........ .10-2
Radiator Cap Test .............................................................. .10-3
Radiator Test ........,,...... ..................................................... .10-3
FanM oto rT est ...................... ........................ ................... .10-4
Thermostat Test .................................. ............................ ..10-4
Water Pump Inspection ..... ..............................................10-5
Water Pump Replacement ................................................10-5
Coolant Check ............... ......................................... .......... .10-6
Coolant Replacement .............................................. ........ 10-6
Thermostat Replacement ................. ......... ................ .....10-9
Water Passage Replacement ...................... .................. ..10-10
Radiator and Fan Replacement ................ .................... .10-13
Fan Controls
Component Location Index ................................. ............ 10-16
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. ................... .10-17
Circuit Diagram ............... ..... ............................. ................ 10-18
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit
Troubleshooting ............................................ ................10-19
RADIATOR RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY

Test, page 10-3 Fan Motor Test, page 10-4
Replacement, page 10-13 Relacement, page 10-13
• k
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its sealwith 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially the radiator cap and fi l l the radiator with engine
available pressure tester (B). coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)

B to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93—123 kPa
(0.95-1.25 kgf/cm2, 1 4 -1 8 psi).
2. Apply a pressure of 93—123 kPa (0.95—

1.25 kgf/cm2, 1 4 -1 8 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.

3. Inspectfor engine coolant leaks and a drop in
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap. pressure.
4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.

Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it is in the stuck open position
motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B). at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.

Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to

terminal No. 2 and ground to terminal No. 1.
3. If either motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,

replace it (see page 10-13).
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a

thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is

fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
Starts Opening: 1 69-176 °F (7 6 -8 0 °C)
Fully Open: 194 T (9 0 ^ )
Hal
Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement
1. Remove the timing belt: 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
• J35A9 engine (see page 6-13) 2. Remove the timing belt:

2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. • J35Z1 engine (see page 6-70)
Check that it turns freely. If it doesn't turn smoothly,
replace the water pump (see page 10-5). 3. Remove the timing belt adjuster:
NOTE: When you check the water pump pulley, you • J35A9 engine (see page 6-24)
may see a small amount of "weeping" from the • J35Z1 engine (see page 6-82)
bleed holes (A). This is normal.
4. Remove the five bolts, then remove the water
pump (A).
3. Install the timing belt: 6 x 1.0 mm

12 N-m (1.2 kgf*m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
• J35A9 engine (see page 6-16) 5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating
• J35Z1 engine (see page 6-72) surface with the engine block.
6. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the

reverse order of removal.
7. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
8. Install the timing belt adjuster:

9. Install the timing belt:

10. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed

air from the cooling system (see step 8 on page
10-7).
Coolant Check Coolant Replacement
1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition
mark (B). switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool
to the touch.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to
the MAX mark, inspect the cooling system for leaks.
4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt <B)

located at the rear of the engine block, then loosen
the drain bolt.
5. When the coolant stops draining, torque the drain

bolt. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Torque the radiator drain plug securely.

it
7. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir. 13. Set the climate control or heater control panel to
maximum heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine
8. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the
(P/N QL999-9001) into the radiator up to the base of engine.
the filler neck.
14. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long
NOTE; Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed.
•Always use Honda Long Life Ant ifreeze/Coo Iant
Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Using a non-Honda 15. Set the climate control or heater control panel to
coolant can result in corrosion, causing the maximum cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine
cooling system to malfunction or fail. speed at 1,500 rpm for 3 minutes, then turn off the
• Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a engine.
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do
not add water. 16. Check the level in the radiator, and add Honda Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, if needed.
Engine Coolant Refil l Capacity (Including the
coolant reservoir capacity of 0.73 L (0.19 US gal)) 17. Set the climate control or heater control panel to
At Coolant Change: 7.3 L (1.93 US gal) maximum heat. Start the engine. Hold the engine
After Engine Overhaul: 9.2 L (2.43 US gal) speed at 1,500 rpm for 3 minutes, then turn off the
engine.
19. Repeat steps 15 through 18 until the coolant level

does not change in the radiator, then install the
radiator cap loosely.
20. Set the climate control or heater control panel to

maximum cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 2,500 rpm for 1 minute.
9. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

1,500 rpm until it warms up (the radiator fan comes
on at least twice). Make sure the thermostat is open.
10. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coo Iant
Type 2, if needed.
11. Set the climate control or heater control panel to

maximum cool. Start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 1,500 rpm for 5 minutes, then turn off the
engine.
(cont'd)
Coolant Replacement (cont'd)
21. Set the climate control or heater control panel to 26. If the maintenance minder required engine coolant
maximum heat, and select high speed heat mode replacement, reset the maintenance minder
on the rear control panel. Measure the temperature (see page 3-4), and this procedure is complete. If
of the air from the rear floor vent for 2 or 3 minutes. the maintenance minder did not require engine
Make sure the temperature is above the standard coolant replacement, go to step 27.
line of the graph as shown. If the temperature is
below the standard line, repeat steps 15 through 18 27. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
several more times. Then loosely install the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
radiator cap and recheek.
AIR FLO W
TlM PERATURE V f€ ) ■
29. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
176 (80) I I
158 (70) 30. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGE MENU with
140 (60) the HDS.
122 ( 50)
STANDARD LINE 31. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with
104 (40) the HDS.
86 (30)
32. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the
68 ( 20)
HDS.
50 (10)
0 33. Reset the maintenance information display
59 63 66 70 73 77 81 84
(see page 3-6).
( 15) (17) (19) (21) (23) (25) (27) (29)
INTERIOR
TEMPERATURE °F TO
22. With the engine idling, make sure you do not hear
the sound of water flowing near the rear heater unit,
if you hear water flowing, repeat steps 15 through
18 several moretimes.
23. Install the radiator cap fully.
24. Fill the coolant reservoir with Honda Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 up to the MAX mark on
the coolant reservoir, then add an extra 0.4 L (0.11
US gal) coolant.

• k
Thermostat Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 5. Remove the thermostat cover (A), then remove the
audio system and the navigation system (if thermostat (B),
equipped) then write down the audio presets.

intake air duct (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
6. install the new rubber seal (C) onto the thermostat,

then install the thermostat with pin (D) up, and
install the thermostat cover.
7. Install the intake air duct, then connect the breather

pipe.

10-7).
11. Do the power window reset procedure (see page

22-255).
audio presets.

Water Passage Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 6. Remove the heater hoses.
3. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and the lower

radiator hose (B).
7. Remove the engine wire harness connectors from

the water passage.

connector
4. Remove the water bypass hose (A) and ground connector
cable (B). • Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
8. Remove the water passage (A) and connecting pipe

(B).
5. Remove the harness holder mounting bolt (C), then

remove the harness holder (D) from the bracket.
ic
9. Remove the EGR valve (A), ECT sensor 1 (B), ECT 13. Install the connecting pipe (A) and water passage
sensor 2 (C), thermostat cover (D), and thermostat (B), using the new O-rings (C) and new gaskets (D).
■(E)-
22 N-m
-(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2kgf.ni, 8.8 Ibf-ft) 14. Install the heater hoses.
10. Install the new rubber seal (F) onto the thermostat,
then install the thermostat with pin (G) up, and
install the thermostat cover.
11. Install the ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2, using the
new O-rings (H).
12. Install the EGR valve, using a new gasket (I).
(cont'd)
Water Passage Replacement (cont'd)
15. Install harness holder (A) to the bracket, then 18. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-6).
torque the mounting bolt (B).
19. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
6 x 1.0 mm

10-7).
(D).
17. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and the lower
radiator hose (B).
*
Radiator and Fan Replacement
NOTE: 8. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector

• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted (A), hood switch connector (B), and fan motor
surfaces. connectors (C).
• To avoid damaging the wires and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf*m , 8.8 I b f-ft)
connector portion.


4. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the

battery tray (B).
9. Remove the harness clips (D).
10. Remove the ground cable (E) and harness clamp (F).
12. Remove the upper radiator hose.
5. Remove the harness bracket (C).
6. Remove the three mounting bolts (D), and loosen

the mounting bolt (E), then remove the battery base
(F).
7. Remove the bulkhead cover.
(cont'd)
Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont'd)
13. Remove the bulkhead bracket 14. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the radiator fan
shroud, then remove the radiator fan shroud
assembly (B) from the battery side.
15. Remove the two bolts (C), and loosen the two bolts
(D) securing the A/C condenser fan shroud, then
remove the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly (E)
from the battery side.
l l
16. Remove the lower radiator hose (A) and automatic 18. Pull up the radiator assembly (A), then remove the
transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses (B). Plug the lower cushions (B).
ATF cooler hoses and lines.
6 m 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.8 Ibf-ft)
17. Remove the six bulkhead bracket mounting bolts

(A) that secure the radiator upper brackets/
cushions (B) and A/C condenser brackets (C), then
remove the radiator upper brackets/cushions and 19. Install the radiator and fans in the reverse order of
A/C condenser brackets. removal.
A
20. Apply touch-up paint to the bulkhead bracket
mounting bolts.
21. Check the upper and lower cushions are being

installed securely.
22. Adjust the engine hood latch (see page 20-140).
23. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and

cable terminals, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion.
24. Fill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air
from the cooling system (see step 8 on page 10-7).
25. Do the power window reset procedure (see page

.22-255).
audio presets.
27. Set the clock (an vehicles without navigation).

(ECT) SENSOR 1 Motor Test, page 10-4

*
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for

Engine overheats 1. Check the coolant level.
2. Check for any engine coolant leakage (from
;gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on radiator and
A/C condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan shroud.
6. inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan
control relays (see page 22-82).
7. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3). .
8. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect the water pump (see page 10-5).
10. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator hoses.
11. Check for plugged heater core or hoses.
12. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan runs at low speed, but Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting
it does not run at high speed when the (see page 10-19).
engine coolant temperature is above
206°F{975€ )
With the A/C off and the engine Remove the fan control relay, and test it.
coolant temperature at 206 °F (97 °C) • If the relay is faulty, replace it.
or below, the A/C condenser fan runs • If the relay is OK, check for short in the wire between
at high speed and the radiator fan fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 1 and A/C
does not run. When the engine coolant condenser fan motor 2P'connector terminal: No. 1.
temperature is above 206 °F (97 °C),
both fans run at high speed
Both the radiator fan and the A/C Check for short in the wire between radiator fan relay
condenser fan run at high speed with 4P socket terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal
the ignition switch ON (II), the A/C off, A5.
and the engine coolant temperature
below 204 °F (95 °C)
Both the radiator fan and the A/C Check for short in the wire between A/C condenser fan
condenser fan run at low speed with relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
the ignition switch ON (II) and the A/C terminal A4.
off
Both the radiator fan and the A/C Radiator and A/C condenser fans low speed circuit
condenser fan do not run at low speed troubleshooting (see page 21-29).
with the A/C on
The A/C condenser fan does not run at A/C condenser fans low speed circuit troubleshooting
all. The radiator fan does not run at (see page 21-29). -
low speed, but it runs at high speed
Both the radiator fan and the A/C Check for open in the wire between radiator fan relay
condenser fan do not run at high 4P socket terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
speed when the engine coolant terminal A5.
temperature is above 206 °F (97 °C)
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
G202 G201
k 3
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (30 A) fuse and the No. 46 (15 A) 4. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals
fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
Are the fuses OK? RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES—Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 2.
NO—Replace thefuse(s) and recheck. ■ 1

JUMPER WIRE
>
r
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood

fuse/relay box and test it (see page 22-82). 4 3
Is the relay OK ?
YES—Goto step 3. Terminal side of female terminals
NO—Replace the radiator fan relay. ■

Does the radiator fan run at high speed?
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No.1 and body ground. YES—Go to step 5.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET

NO—Repair open in the wire between radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No. 2. ■
1 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

r)
6. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P

4 3 socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
YES—Goto step 4.
NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
YES—Repair open in the wire between radiator fan

relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and the powertrain
control module (PCM).B
NO—Repair open in the wire between radiator fan

relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the PGM-FI main
relay 1 4P socket terminal No. 2 . ■
Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Supply System
Special Tools ..................................... ......... .11-2 Component Location Index .................... ..... 11-360
General Troubleshooting Information ........ .11-3 DTC Troubleshooting .................. ................. 11-362
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................ .11-10 Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting .............. 11-368
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............... .11-16 Fuel Pressure Relieving .......... ....................11-372
System Description ......... ............................11-18 Fuel Pressure Test .......................................11-375
How to Set Readiness Codes ..................... .11-67 Fuel Tank Draining ......................................11-375
Fuel Line Inspection ....................................... 11-376
PGM-FI System Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Component Location Index ..................... ....11-70 Precautions ......................... ..... ................ 11-378
DTC Troubleshooting ...................................11-72 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting ........................ 11-208 Removal .................................................... 11-380
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting ........................11-218 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Injector Replacement ...................................11-222 Installation ................................ ......... ...... 11-381
A/F Sensor Replacement ....................... ..... .11-224 Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation ............ 11-384
Secondary H02S Replacement ..................... 11-225 Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement ......... 11-386
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement .................. ........11-226 Fuel Filter Replacement ................................. 11-386
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ........................ .11-226 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
IAT Sensor Replacement ....................... .......11-227 Replacement ............................................. 11-387
MAP Sensor Replacement .......................... .11-227 Fuel Tank Replacement ............. ................ .11-388
CKP Sensor Replacement .............................11-228 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test .................. ... 11-389
CMP Sensor Replacement ............................11-228 Low Fuel Indicator Test ................................11-391
Knock Sensor Replacement ............... ........ 11-229
PCM Replacement ...................................... 11-230 Intake Air System
Component Location Index ............ ............ 11-392
Electronic Throttle Control System DTC Troubleshooting ............ ..................... 11-393
Component Location Index ........................ 11-232 Air Cleaner Removal/Installation ......... ...... 11-402
DTC Troubleshooting .................................. 11-233 Air Cleaner Element
APP Sensor Signal Inspection ........... ......... 11-274 Inspection/Replacement ................... 11-402
APP Sensor Replacement ........................... 11-275 Resonator Removal/Installation .................. 11-403
Throttle Cable Adjustment .......... .............. 11-403
VTEC Throttle Cable Removal/Installation ............ 11-404
Component Location Index ........................ 11-276 Accelerator Pedal Removal/Installation ..... 11-405
DTC Troubleshooting .................................. 11-277 IMT Actuator Replacement .......... .............. 11-405
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Throttle Body Test ...................................... 11-406
(VTEC Solenoid Valve) Replacement ........ 11-288 Throttle Body Cleaning ...... ........................ 11-407
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Throttle Body Removal/Installation ............. 11-408
(VTEC Oil Pressure Switch)
Replacement ........................................... 11-288 Catalytic Converter System
Component Location Index ........................ 11-409
Variable Cylinder Management DTC Troubleshooting ......................... ........ 11-410
(VCM) System Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter
Component Location Index ................ ........ 11-289 Removal/Installation ...................... ........ 11-412
DTC Troubleshooting .................................. 11-290
EOP Sensor Removal/Installation ............... 11-304 EGR S y s te m
Rocker ArmOil Control Solenoid (VTECSolenoid Valve)/ Component Location Index .............. 11-414
Rocker ArmOil Control Solenoid (VTECSolenoidValve) DTC Troubleshooting ......................... ........ 11-415
Filter Replacement .......... .................. ............ 11-305 EGR Valve Replacement ...... ..... ................ 11-429
Active Control Engine Mount P C V S y s te m

(ACM) System Component Location Index ........................ .11-430
Component Location Index ........................ 11-306 DTC Troubleshooting ...................................11-431
DTC Troubleshooting .................................. 11-307 PCV Valve Inspection ........... .......................11-432
Engine Mount Vibration and Noise PCV Valve Replacement ......... ............... ..... 11-432
Inspection ................................................ 11-346
Engine Mount Control Unit E V A P S y s te m
Replacement .......................... ..... ........... 11-347 Component Location Index .............. 11-433
DTC Troubleshooting ................ ................. 11-434
Idle Control System EVAP Canister Replacement ............... . 11-460
Component Location Index ........................ 11-348 FTP Sensor Replacement ........................... 11-461
DTC Troubleshooting .................................. 11-349 EVAP Canister Purge Valve
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ............. 11-352 Replacement ............................. ............. 11-461
Alternator FR Signal Circuit EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-353 Replacement ....................................... . 11-462
PSP Switch Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-354
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal
Circuit Troubleshooting .......... ......... . 11-356
Idle Speed Inspection .................................. 11-358
PCM Idle Learn Procedure ........................... 11-359
Special Tools

® 07AAA-S0XA100 Fuel Sender Wrench 1
® 07AAJ-S6MA150 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 1
(D 07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0—4 in.Hg 1
© 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
© 07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
(D-1 07406-0020201 A/T Pressure Hose 1
(D-2 07406-0070301 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
© -3 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
®-4 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose, Adapter 1
07406-004000B Fuel Pressure Gauge
I © ©
© ©
©
General Troubleshooting Information
Interm ittent Failures 2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side
The term 'intermittent failure" means a system may of the dashboard.
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose terminals
at all connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the M I L was on but then went out,
the original problem may have been intermittent
Opens and Shorts
"Open" and "short" are common electrical terms. An

open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something won't work at all. With complex electronics
(such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something
works, but not the way it's supposed to. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
System) it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-218).
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on
5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A). Also check the freeze data and/or on-board -
snapshot data, and download any data found. Then
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and refer to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
15—20 seconds (see page 11-67).
NOTE:
• Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
the first malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
malfunction was detected.
• The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, current
data, and other powertrain control module (PCM)
data.
• For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL troubleshooting

(see page 11-208).
C o r " A
(cont'd)
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
If the MIL did not stay on DTC Clear

If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability
problem, do the symptom troubleshooting. 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
If you can't duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait
continue through the procedure. To do so will only 30 seconds.
result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced
PCM. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS from the DLC.
HDS Clear Command
PCM Reset
The PCM stores various specific data to correct the
system even if there is no electrical power such as 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
when the battery negative terminal or No. 46 ACGS stopped.
(15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on
failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet 30 seconds.
this purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and crank
(CKP) pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and HDS from the DLC.
readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. 5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
The PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes,
freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and
all specific data to correct the system except crank
(CKP) pattern. If the crank (CKP) pattern data in the PCM
was cleared, you must do the crank (CKP) pattern learn
procedure. The crank (CKP) pattern clear command
erases only crank (CKP) pattern data. This command is
for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor.
Scan Tool Clear Command
If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,

be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the
PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time
(crank (CKP) pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes,
freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you
clear all commands, you then need to do these
procedures, in this order: PCM idle learn procedure
(see page 11-359); crank (CKP) pattern learn procedure;
Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete (see page
11-67).
Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP) Learn Procedure (without the HDS)
Pattern Learn.
Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS) 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard 2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed
of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the
transmission in 2 position.
3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate

(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed
of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the
transmission in 2 position.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait

30 seconds.
H ow to End a Troubleshooting Session
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If (required after any troubleshooting)
it doesn't go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-218). 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT 2. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
MENU with the HDS.
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS,
and follow the screen prompts. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system.

If you replace the PCM, it will have a different
immobilizer code, in order for the engine to start,
you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the
HDS.
(cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 4. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at a PCM

Connectors connector, use the measurement test port (A)
above the terminal you need to check.
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting
the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS
line first, can damage the PCM.
1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS,
2. Remove the cover (D) from the PCM.
5. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to

a commercially available digital multimeter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
terminals to a commercially available banana jack
(Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
(C).
3. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have a symbols

<A=D, B=A, C =0) embossed on them for 6. Gently slide the pin probe (male) at the terminal
identification. test port from the terminal side. Do not force the
tips into the terminals.
[n o t ic e !
• For accurate results, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement
• Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
iSS
Updating the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester - 2. Connect the HDS to the. data link connector (DLC)
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
with HDS and CM update software
• HDS pocket tester
• GNA-600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM
update software
NOTE:
• Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM
during troubleshooting procedures.
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version downloaded from the iN (interactive network).
• Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully changed, and connect a jumper
battery (not a battery charger) to maintain system
voltage.
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem with the update, leave the 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
ignition switch ON. it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
• To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything (see page 11-218). If you are returning from the
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, and
power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, clean the throttle body after updating the PCM
etc.) during the update. (see page 11-407).
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
• You cannot update an PCM with a program it already
has. It will only accept a new program. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
• High temperature in the engine compartment might CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts.
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If
the engine has been running before this procedure, NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
open the hood and cool the engine compartment. continue this procedure.
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) light came on or 6. Exit the HDS, then select the update mode, and
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition follow the screen prompts to update the PCM.
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will
prevent PCM damage.
(cont'd)
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect Substituting the PCM
the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that you were doing. If the software in Special Tools Required
the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on • Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI • Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
system or the A/T system, make sure you update with HDS and CM update software
both. • HDS pocket tester
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to update software
cool the PCM, follow the instructions on screen. If
you run into a problem during the update NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute
procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes, a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
status bar goes over 100 %, D or immobilizer light
flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM. (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
• Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.
• Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
• Shut down the HDS.
• Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
• Reboot the HDS.
• Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.
8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6, clean

the throttle body (see page 11-407).
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
10. Do the crank (CKP) pattern learn procedure.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If

it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-218). If you are returning from DLC
circuit troubleshooting, skip step 4 to 9, and clean
the throttle body after substituting the PCM
(see page 11-407).
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION

CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,

continue this procedure.

8 . Remove the cover (D). 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or

Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
14. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software.
16. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
17. Enter the immobilizer code using the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you
to start the engine.
18. Reset the PCM with the HDS.


21. Do the crank (CKP) pattern learn procedure.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
(A = Q B=A, C =0) embossed on them for OBD Status
identification.
The OBD status shows the current system status of
10. Remove the bolts (E), then remove the PCM (F). each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the repair was successfully completed.
11. Install a known-good PCM in the reverse order of The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed
removal. as:
12. Open the SCS with the HDS. • PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully
finished.
• FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
• EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
• OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of
the enable conditions for the DTC.
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Two Drive Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication*1) Cycle
Detection
P0107(3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-72)
P0108 (3) Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-74)
P011K10) O Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-77)
P0112 (10) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-78)
P0113 (10) Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-80)
P0116(86) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-83)
Problem
P0117 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-84)
P0118 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-86)
P0122 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-233)
P0123 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-235)
P0125 (86) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow Response ON (see page 11-89)
P0128 (87) o Cooling System Malfunction ON (see page 11-90)
P0133 (157) o Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow ON (see page 11-92)
Response
P0134 (151) o Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater System ON (see page 11-93)
Malfunction
P0135 (151) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit ON (see page 11-96)
Malfunction
P0137 (161) Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-101)
Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage
P0139 (161) o Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-106)
Sensor 2)) Slow Response
Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0153 (158) o Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow ON (see page 11-92)
Response
P0154 (152) ,o Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2 , Sensor 1) Heater System ON (see page 11-93)
Malfunction
P0155 (152) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit ON (see page 11-96)
Malfunction
P0157 (162) Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 2 , ON (see page 11-101)
Sensor 2)) Circuit Low Voltage
Sensor 2)) Circuit High Voltage
P0159 (162) o . Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 2 , ON (see page 11-106)
Sensor 2)) Slow Response
Sensor 2)) Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (153) o Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Lean ON (see page 11-112)
P0172 (153) o Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System Too Rich ON (see page 11-112)
P0174 (154) Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Lean ON (see page 11-112)
P0175 (154) Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Rich ON (see page 11-112)
P0222 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-238)
P0223 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-241)
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected in the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the M I L to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
{MIL indication* Cycle
Detection
P03GQ (77) o Random Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-113)
and any
combination of
the following
P0301 (71)
PQ302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P03O4 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
P0301 (71) O No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-116)
F0302 (72) o No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 1 -116)
F0303 (73) o No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 1 -116)
P03P4 (74) o No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 1 ■116)
F03O5 (75) o No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 1 •116)
P0306 (76) o No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 1 116)
P0325 (23) Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 1 -125)
P0335 (4) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor A No Signal ON (see page ‘ -128)
P0339 14)_ Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor A Circu i t Intermittent Interruption ON (see page 1 -131)
P0340(9) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor No Signal ON (see page 1 -132)
P0344 (9) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit intermittent Interruption ON (see page 1 ■135)
P0385 (54) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor B No Signa l . ON (see page 1 -128)
P0389 (54) Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor B Circuit Intermittent Interruption ON (see page 1 -131)
P0401 (80) o Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow ON (see page 1 -415)
P0404 (12) o Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 1 -417)
Problem________ '_______ ■ ___ _____ _
P0406 (12) Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit High ON (see page 1 -420)
Voltage
P0420(165) o Rear Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) ON (see page 1 -410)
P0430(166) Q Front Bank Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2) ON (see page 1 -410)
P0443 (92) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 1 -434)
P0451 (91) o Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 1 -438)
P0452 (91) Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Ci rcuit Low Voltage ON (see page 1 -439)
P0453 (91) Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 1 -442)
P0455 (90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Large Leak Detected ON (see page 1 -445)
P0456 (90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected ON (see page 1 -445)
P0457 (90) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Fill Cap Loose ON (see page 1 -448)
or Missing
P0461 (121) Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance OFF (see page 1 -362)
Problem _________ ___ _____________ ____
r 0*62 (121) Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 1 -363)
° 046 ?> (121 ) Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Ci rcuit High Voltage OFF (see page 1 -365)
(92) O Evaporati ve Emission (EVAP) System High Purge Flow Detected ON (see page 1 -450)
PC£97 (30) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Low Purge Fl ow Detected ON (see page 11-451)
?0498 (117) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit Low ON (see page 11-454)
Vo l tage
P0499 (117) Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit High ON (see page 11-457)
Voltage_______________ __ _________________________
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FS system is selected i n the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL Is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
* 1; These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Detection
P0506 (14) O Idle Control System RPM Lower than Expected ON (see page 11-349)
P0507 (14) o Idle Control System RPM Higher than Expected ON (see page 11-351)
P0522 (22)*3 Enqine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-290)
P0523 (22)*3 Enqine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-293)
P0562 (34) Charging System Low Voltage OFF “I (see page 11-136)
P0563(34) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Source Circuit Unexpected OFF (see page 11-137)
Voltage
P0602 (196) Powertrain Control Module (PGM) Programming Error ON (see page 11-140)
P0603 (131) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive ON (see page 11-140)
Memory (KAM) Error
P0607(131) Lost Communication with Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) ON (see page 11-244)
P061F (132) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction ON (see page 11-244)
P0630(139) VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch ON (see page 11-141)
P0641 (133) Sensor Reference Voltage A Malfunction ON (see page 11-142)
P0685 (135) - o Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit ON (see page 11-146)
Malfunction
P07G0 (70r 2 Automatic Transaxle Control System Malfunction ON (see page 11-147)
P0700 (70) Automatic Transaxle Control System Malfunction OFF (see page 11-147)
P0A14 (195K3 Front Engine Mount Actuator Circuit Malfunction OFF (see page 11-307)
P0A15(195) 3 Front Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit Low Current OFF (see page 11-310)
P0A16 (195)‘3 Front Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit High Current OFF (see page 11-314)
P0AB6 (195)*3 Rear Engine Mount Actuator Circuit Malfunction OFF (see page 11-307)
P0AB7 (195)*3 Rear Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit Low Current OFF (see page 11-310)
P0AB8 (195) 3 Rear Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit High Current OFF (see page 11-314)
P1077 (106) 3 o Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve Stuck in High RPM Position ON (see page 11-393)
P1078 (106)*3 o Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve Stuck in Low RPM Position ON (see page 11-397)
P1109 (13) Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High ON (see page 11-147)
P1116 (86) o Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-148)
Problem
P1128 (5) o Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected ON (see page 11-150)
P1129 (5) o Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected ON (see page 11-151)
P1172 (157) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range ON (see page 11-153)
High
P1174 (158) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range ON (see page 11-153)
High
P1297 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-154)
P1298 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit High Voltage OFF (see page 11-156)
P1454 (91) o Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-458)
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
* 2: The D indicator and MIL may come on simultaneously.
* 3: J35Z1 engine
Detection
P1549 (34) Charging System Hiqh Voltage OFF (see page 11-158)
P15AB (195)*3 Engine Mount Control Unit Power Source Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-317)
P15AC (195)*3 Engine Mount Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction OFF (see page 11-320)
P15AD (195)*3 Engine Mount Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction OFF (see page 11-321)
P15AE (195)*3 Cylinder Pause Signal Malfunction OFF (see page 11-322)
P15AF (195) 3 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Siqnal Malfunction OFF (see page 11-324)
P15B0 (195)*3 Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Siqnal Malfunction OFF (see page 11-328)
P15B1 (195) 3 Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor/Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Signal ' OFF (see page 11-332)
Incorrect Correlation
PI 658 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay ON Malfunction ON (see page 11-245)
P1659 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF Malfunction ON (see page 11-247)
P1683(40) Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-252)
P1684(40) Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-253)
P16BB (116) Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-159)
P16BC (116) Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-160)
P16C4(195)*3 Engine Mount Actuator Control Power Circuit Stuck OFF OFF (see page 11-335)
P16C5 (195)’3 Engine Mount Actuator Control Power Circuit Stuck ON OFF (see page 11-340)
P16C6 (195)3 Engine Mount Actuator High Voltage During Function Test OFF (see page 11-342)
P16C7 (195)*3 Rear Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit High Current OFF (see page 11-344)
P16C8 (195) 3 Front Engine Mount Actuator Control Circuit High Current OFF (see page 11-344)
P16C9 (195)*3 Engine Mount Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction OFF (see page 11-345)
P2101(40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction ON (see page 11-254)
P2118(40) Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-256)
P2122 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-258)
Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage
P2123(37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-261)
Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage
P2127(37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-263)
Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage
P2128 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-266)
Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage
P2135 (7) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation ON (see page 11-268)
P2138(37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A/B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-270)
Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage Correlation
P2176 (40) Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned ON (see page 11-272)
NOTE; The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected in the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the M I L to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the A/T
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs. .
* 3: J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)
Detection
P2183 (192) O Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-163)
Problem
P2184 (192) Enqine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltaqe ON (see page 11-165)
P2185 (192) Enqine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-167)
P2195 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Siqnal Stuck Lean ON (see page 11-170)
P2197 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean ON (see page 11-170)
P2227 (13) o Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-172)
P2228 (13) Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-173)
P2229 (13) Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-173)
P2237 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-174)
P2238 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-177)
P2240 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-174)
P2241 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-177)
P2243 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High ON (see page 11-180)
Voltage
P2245 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low ON (see page 11-183)
Voltage
P2247 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High ON (see page 11-180)
Voltage
P2249 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low ON (see page 11-183)
Voltage
P2251 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High ON (see page 11-186)
Voltage
P2252 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low ON (see page 11-189)
Voltage
P2254 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High ON (see page 11-186)
Voltage
P2255 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low ON (see page 11-189)
Voltage
P2270 (161) o Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-192)
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
P2271 (161) o Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-192)
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Rich
P2272 (162) o Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-192)
P2273 (162) o Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 2 , ON (see page 11-192)
P2279(109) o Intake Air System Leak ON (see page 11-431)
P2413 (12) o Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Malfunction ON (see page 11-422)
P2422 (117) o Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck Closed ON (see page 11-458)
Malfunction
P2610(132) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Ignition OFF Internal Ti mer ON (see page 11-193)
Malfunction
P2627 (155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit Low ON (see page 11-194)
Voltage
P2628(155) Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit High ON (see page 11-196)
Voltage
P2630(156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit Low ON (see page 11-194)
Voltage
P2631(156) Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit High ON (see page 11-196)
Voltage
(MIL indication*1} Cycle
Detection
P2646 (114)*3 VTEC System Stuck OFF ON (see page 11-296)
P2646 (22) 4 Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch (VTEC Oil Pressure Switch) Circuit Low ON (see page 11-277)
Voltage
P2647 (114)*3 VTEC System Stuck ON ON (see page 11-298)
P2647 (22)*4 Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch (VTEC Oil Pressure Switch) Circuit High ON (see page 11-280)
Voltage
P2648 (21) *3 Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit Low ON (see page 11-300)
Voltage
P2648 (21)*4 Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit Low ON (see page 11-283)
Voltage
P2649 (21) *3 Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit High ON (see page 11-302)
Voltage
P2649 (21)*4 Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit High ON (see page 11-285)
Voltage
P2A00 (157) O Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Range/ ON (see page 11-198)
Performance Problem
P2A03 (158) O Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Range/ ON (see page 11-198)
Performance Problem
U0073 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) ON (see page 11-199)
U0114 (126)*4 F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Variable Torque OFF (see page 11-202)
Management 4WD (VTM-4) Control Unit)
U0122 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Vehicle Stability OFF (see page 11-204)
Assist (VSA) Modulator-Control Unit)
U0155 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Gauge Control ON (see page 11-199)
Module)
U1101 (126) *3 F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Active Control OFF (see page 11-206)
Engine Mount (ACM) Unit)
* 3: J35Z1 engine
* 4: J35A9 engine
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

Engine will not start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-81). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the starter (see page 4-8). • No ignition spark
3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375). • Intake air leaks
4. Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit (see page 11-368). • Locked up engine
• Broken timing belt
• Contaminated fuel
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-208).
(MIL comes on and stays on,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set)
Engine will not start Check the immobilizer system.
(immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls Check the immobilizer system.
immediately
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine is hard to start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-81). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375). • Intake air leaks
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-407). • Contaminated fuel
• Weak spark
Cold fast idle too low 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-358).
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-407).
Cold fast idle too high 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
3. Adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-403).
4. Do the throttle position learning check (see page
11-406).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). Intake vacuum leaks
3. Adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-403).
4. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-406).
5. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11-352).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
is below specification without (see page 11-353).
load 2. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-406).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After warming up, idle speed 1. Adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-403).
is above specification without 2. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
load (see page 11-353).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-274).
4. Troubleshoot the PSP switch signal circuit (see page
11-354).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). Power steering
drops when steering wheel is 2. Troubleshoot the PSP switch signal circuit (see page system problems
turning 11-354).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-406).
Low power 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-403). • Incorrect camshaft
timing
• Incorrect engine oil
level
Engine stalls 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375). * Faulty harness and
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11 -358). sensor
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal connections
circuit (see page 11-356).
Difficult to refuel 1. Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister Malfunctioning gas
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) and the fuel tank. station filling nozzle.
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank.
3. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-388).
Fuel overflows during Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-388). Malfunctioning gas
refueling station filling nozzle.
(No DTCs set)
Abnormal vibration from Inspect the vibration from engine mount (see page
engine to body 11-346).
(MIL works OK)
(J35Z1 engine)
System Description
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM).
Self-diagnosis
The PCM detects a failure of a signal from a sensor or from another control unit and stores a Temporary DTC or a DTC.
Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle. When a DTC is stored, the PCM
turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal sent to the gauge via F-CAN.
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCM stores a DTC for the
failure and turns on the MIL immediately.
• Two Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit in first drive cycle, the PCM
stores a temporary DTC. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the second drive cycle, the
PCM stores a DTC and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCM ignores that signal and
substitutes a pre-programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a DTC to be
stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition

When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the PCM turns on the MIL via the F-CAN circuit for about 15 to 20 seconds to
check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all readiness
codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode

After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the PCM stays on (up to 15 minutes). If the PCM connector is disconnected
during this time, the PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable from the battery or
jump the SCS line with the HDS after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Vacuum Hose Routing
J35A9 engine
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER
T®. BRAKE PURGE VALVE
J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)
System Description (cont'd)
Vacuum Distribution
(D REAR AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 (BANK 1, SENSOR 1) © FUEL PUMP
(D FRONT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 2 (BANK 2, SENSOR 1) © FUELTANK
<D REAR SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 (§) AIR CLEANER
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 1, SENSOR 2) © RESONATOR
© FRONT SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 ® EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 2, SENSOR 2) POSITION SENSOR
REAR WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER ® POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
(WU-TWC) (BANK 1) @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
FRONT WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER
(WU-TWC) (BANK 2) ® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE
© MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR ® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 1 SHUT VALVE
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 2 ® FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
KNOCK SENSOR ® FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
THROTTLE BODY ® UNDER-FLOOR THREE W AY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TW O
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR ® INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING (IMT) VA LVE*1
INJECTOR
FUEL FILTER
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
*1: J35Z1 engine

PCM Electrical Connections
To
FAN CONTROL
RELAY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX:

© No, 41 BATTERY (120 A)
© No. 46 ACGS (15 A|
© No. 4 2IG1 MAIN (50 A)
© No. 47 STOP (20 A)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:

© No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A!
© No. 6 Fi-ECU (15 Aj
© No. 3 HEATER CONTROL
A/C aU TCH RELAY
COOLING FAN RELAY (7.5 A}
© No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A)
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX:

© No. 8 IG COIL (15 A)
© No. 9 LAF (A/F SENSOR) (15 A)
( t l ) No.7 DBW
(THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 A)
© N o . 5 ACM (10 A)
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH FUSE HOLDER

© IN-LINE FUSE (7.5 A)
*1: J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)

E g j
: Shielding
(cont'd)
.'Shielding
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
To
• NAVIGATION UNIT,
MPCS UNIT
II Ql
--Bar-'IMMOBILIZER
10 CONTROL
UNIT-RECEIVER
‘ VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
1
i A/C PRESSURE SWrTCH
TPSENSOR I
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
APPSENSOR
r< 5 » -
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
r ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL SOLENOID
(VTEC SOLENOID VALVE)
...j
*1: J3SZ1 engine

(cont'd)
f"
To ACTIVE NOISE
CONTROL UNIT
REAR ACTIVE
CONTROL ENGINE
MOUNT (ACM!
ACTUATOR
FRONT ACTIVE
CONTROL ENGINE
MOUNT (ACM!
ACTUATOR
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT

i
.J
*1:J35Z1 engine
PC M B (A)(44P)
\
H-----IT
I 11 I 2 3 14 15 I 6 I 7. 8 I 9 I 11 12 3 (4 I 5 | 6 I 7 B I 9 I 11 I 2 3 14 | 5 J 6 |T 8 I 9l I
I ■ 10 11 12 17 18 19 i ■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ 1
■ i 20 21 22
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■ / 24 m ■ ■ 20 / 22 23 24 25 l_
«* m 27 23 2 9 l/|311 / 33 34 35 26 27 23 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 A m \m \z z 33 34 35
381/1X141142 |36|37 38139140141 142 43l44l |36|37 38139140141142 43|44|
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
e 2
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( □ ) (44P)
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 V.
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 RED CANL (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V (pulses)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
LOW)
2 WHT/RED SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in the P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed, and accelerator released: about 0 V
3*1 PNK CSSAM (ROCKER ARM OIL Outputs rocker arm oil Rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid (VTEC valve) ON: battery voltage
(VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve) drive signal Rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
valve) OFF: about 0 V
4 BLU FANL (RADIATOR FAN Drives condenser fan relay With condenser fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With condenser fan stopped: battery voltage
5 GRN FANH (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) W ith radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
6 BLK/WHT MRLY (PGM-FI M AIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY 1) (FI MAIN) (power source for With ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
DTC memory)
7 GRY BKSWNC (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With ignition switch ON (I I) and brake pedal
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal released: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
8 WHT/BLK BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
9 GRN/YEL SG7 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
10 LT GRN/ VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
WHT EMISSION (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE
* 1: J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)

number
11 GRN/YEL I MOFPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives PGM-FI main relay 2 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
FUEL RUMP RELAY) (FUEL PUMP) (II), then battery voltage
12 BLU/BLK ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH PARK) switch P position signal In any position other than P position:
battery voltage
14 RED ACC (A/C COMPRESSOR Drives A/C compressor With compressor ON: about 0 V
CLUTCH RELAY) clutch relay W ith compressor OFF: battery voltage
17 ORN/BLK APSA (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: about 4.7 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 0.5 V
18 YEL APSB (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: about 2.3 V
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 0.25 V
19 YEL/BLU VCC7 (SENSOR Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
REFERENCE VOLTAGE) voltage
PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( □ ) (44P)

number
20 BRIM/RED ETCSRLY (ELECTRONIC Drives electronic throttle With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
THROTTLE CONTROL control system (ETCS)
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL control relay
RELAY)
21 ORN AFSHTCR (AIR FUEL RATIO Drives A/F sensor relay With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
(A/F) SENSOR HEATER (LAF)
CONTROL RELAY)
22 BRN/YEL LG3 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground ci rcuit for the PCM Less than 1,0 V at all times
23 GRN/RED ELD (ELECTRICAL LOAD Detects ELD signal With ignition switch ON (II): aboutO.1—4.8 V
DETECTOR (ELD)) (depending on electrical load)
24 GRN VCC3 (SENSOR Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
25 WHT VCC4 (SENSOR Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
26"1 YEL/BLK CKPOUT (CRANKSHAFT Sends CKP sensor A/B With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) OUTPUT signal
SIGNAL)
27 M PUR CMPOUT (CAMSHAFT Sends CMP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) OUTPUT
SIGNAL) i
28 BLU NEP (ENGINE SPEED Outputs engine speed pulse With engine running: pulses
PULSE)
29 BLU/WHT VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED Sends vehicle speed signal Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SIGNAL OUTPUT)
31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) about 0 V
i With service check signal opened: about 5.0 V
* 1: J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)

number
33 LT GRN FTP (FUEL TANK Detects FTP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap
PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR) removed: about 2.5 V
34 BLK SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
35 RED/YEL SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
36 WHT CANH (CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.6 V (pulses)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL si gnal
HIGH)
38 GRN/WHT PSPSW (POWER STEERING Detects PSP switch signal At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position:
PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH about 0 V
SIGNAL) At idle with steering wheel at full lock:
battery voltage
41 BLU/RED ACS (A/C PRESSURE Detects A/C pressure switch A/C pressure switch ON: about 0 V
SWITCH) signal A/C pressure switch OFF: about 5.0 V
42 RED/WHT WEN (WRITE ENABLE Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL)
43 GRY K-LINE Sends and receives HDS With ignition switch ON (II) and HDS disconnected:
signal about 9.0 V
44 RED/GRN IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER Detects immobilizer signal
CODE)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (A ) (44P)
Term inal side of female terminals

number
1 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V a t all times
circuit
2 BLK/YEL VBSOL (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valve With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
3 YEL/BLK IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit
4 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 1NJECTOR) Drives No. 1 injector At idle: duty controlled
BLK/RED I NJ5 (No. 5 INJECTOR) 5 No. 5 injector
Drives With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
6 YEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No. 4 injector
7 BLU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Drives No. 3 injector
8 RED INJ2 (No. 2 INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 injector
9 WHT/BLU INJ6 (No. 6 INJECTOR) Drives No. 6 injector
10 BLK/RED IGPLS5 (No. 5 IGNITION Drives No. 5 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
COIL PULSE) With engine running: pulses
11 BRN/WHT IGPLS6 (No. 6 IGNITION Drives No. 6 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
12 RED/BLU TPSB (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor B signal With throttle fully open: about 4.1 V
POSITION (TP) SENSOR B) With throttle fully closed: about 1.7 V
(cont'd)

number
13 BLU VSB1 (VS CELL+ BANK 1) Detects the rear A/F sensor With fully warmed up engine running:
(Bank 1, sensor 1) VS CELL about 3.4—4.8 V
siqnal
14 RED/BLU VSB2 (VS CELL+ BANK 2) Detects front A/F sensor With fully warmed up engine running:
(Bank 2 , sensor 1) VS CELL about 3:4—4.8 V-
siqnal
15 GRN SH02SB1 (REAR Detects rear secondary With throttle fully opened from idle and fully
SECONDARY HEATED H02S (Bank 1, sensor 2) warmed up engine: about 0.6 V
OXYGEN SENSOR (REAR signal With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
SECONDARY H02S) BANK
1, SENSOR 2)
16 WHT SH02SB2 (FRONT Detects front secondary With throttle fully opened from idle and fully
SECONDARY HEATED H02S (Bank 2 , sensor 2) warmed up engine: about 0.6 V
OXYGEN SENSOR (FRONT signal With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
SECONDARY H02S) BANK
2 , SENSOR 2)
17 RED/BLK TPSA (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor A signal With throttle fully open: about 3.9 V
POSITION (TP) SENSOR A) With throttle fully closed: about 0.9 V
18 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
e 2

number
19 BLU VCC5 (SENSOR Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
20 WHT/BLU IGPLS3 (No. 3 IGNITION Drives No. 3 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
21 BRN IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION Drives No. 4 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
22 RED/WHT VCENTB2 (VIRTUAL Reference voltage supply With fully warmed up engine at idle:
GROUND BANK 2) for front A/F sensor (Bank 2, about 3 .4 -4 .8 V
sensor 1)
23*2 BLU/WHT VTPSW (ROCKER ARM OIL Detects rocker arm oil With engine at low speed: about 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) (VTEC pressure switch (VTEC oil With engine at high speed: battery voltage
PRESSURE SWITCH) pressure switch) signal
24 BLU CKPA (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor A signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
A)
25 BRN/WHT LSB (A/ T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current control
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
26 YEL/GRN 1GPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION Drives No. 1 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
27 BLU/RED IGPLS2 (No. 2 IGNITION Drives No. 2 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
COI L PULSE) With engine running: pulses
28 GRN IPB1 (IPCELL+ BANK 1) Detects rear A/F sensor With engine running: about 2.0—5.6 V
(Bank 1, sensor 1) pump cell
29 GRN/RED IPB2 (IPCELL+ BANK 2) Detects front A/F sensor With engine running: about 2.0—5.6 V
(Bank 2 , sensor 1) pump cell
* 2: J35A9 engine
(cont'd)

number
30 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP) SENSOR)
31 *1 WHT/BLK IMTM (INTAKE MANIFOLD Detects IMT valve position At idling; about 5.0 V
TUNING (IMT) VALVE With engine speed above 4,200 rpm: about 0 V
MONITOR)
32 YEL CMP (CAMSHAFT Detects CMP sensor si gnal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR)
33 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
34 GRN SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1,0 V at all times
35 GRN/RED LSC (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current control
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
36 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
37 RED/WHT IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
38 RED VCENTB1 (VIRTUAL Reference voltage supply With fully warmed up engine at idle:
GROUND BANK 1) for rear A/F sensor (Bank 1, about 3.4—3.8 V
sensor 1)
39 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about 5.0 V
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor At idling in N position: about 2.5 V (pulses)
SENSOR) signals
* 1: J35Z1 engine

number
40 BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II) and front wheels rotated
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor by hand: pulses
SENSOR) signals
41 BLU/RED CKPB (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor B signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
B)
42 WHT/BLU ALTL (ALTERNATOR L Detects alternator L signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL) With engine running: battery voltage
43 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
44 YEL LC (TORQUE CONVERTER Drives TCC solenoid valve With lock-up ON: battery voltage
CLUTCH (TCC) SOLENOID) With lock-up OFF: about 0 V
fconfd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (O) (44P)
Terminal si de of female terminals
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal ■■

number
1 BLK PGMETCS (POWER Ground circuitfor PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND ETCS) circuit
2 BLU ETCSM+(THROTTLE Drives throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR +SIDE)
3 GRN ETCSM— (THROTTLE Ground for throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR -S ID E )
4 YEL/GRN IG1 ETCS (IGNITION Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL ETCS)
5 BLK/WHT S02SHTCB1 (REAR Drives rear secondary With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SECONDARY HEATED H02S heater (Bank 1, With fully warmed up engine running:
OXYGEN SENSOR (REAR sensor 2) duty controlled
SECONDARY H02S)
HEATER)
6 BLK/WHT AFSHTCB1 (REAR AIR FUEL Drives rear A/F sensor With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
RATIO (REAR A/F) SENSOR heater (Bank 1, sensor 1) With fully warmed up engine running:
HEATER CONTROL BANK 1, about 0 V or pulses
SENSOR 1)
7 GRN/RED S02SHTCB2 (FRONT Drives front secondary With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SECONDARY HEATED H02S heater (Bank 2 , With fully warmed up engine running:
OXYGEN SENSOR sensor 2) duty controlled
(SECONDARY H02S)
HEATER)
8 GRN/WHT AFSHTCB2 (FRONT AIR Drives front A/F sensor With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
FUEL RATIO (FRONT A/F) heater (Bank 2 , sensor 1) With fully warmed up engine running:
SENSOR HEATER about 0 V or pulses
CONTROL BANK 2,
SENSOR 1)
9 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve With EGR operating: duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) With EGR not operating: about 0 V
VALVE)
.< r<
Terminal side of fem ale te rm in a ls

number
10 WHT VLBLB1 (LABEL RESISTER Detects rear A/F sensor With engine running: about 0.4—4.6 V
BANK 1) (Bank 1, sensor 1) LABEL
signal
11 WHT/RED VLBLB2 (LABEL RESISTER Detects front A/F sensor With engine running: about 0.4—4.6 V
BANK 2) (Bank 2, sensor 1) LABEL
siqnal
12*1 YEL/BLU VCC6 (SENSOR Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
13 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
14 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
15 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch input • With 3rd clutch pressure: about 0 V
16 BLU/YEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 4th clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch input • With 4th clutch pressure: about 0 V
17 BLU/YEL ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D, D3 and 2 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D/D3/2 switch D, D3, 2 position In any other position: battery voltage
POSITION) signal
18 GRN SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in D (in 1st, 3rd and 5th gears),
VALVE C) valve C D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears), and 1 positions:
battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D (in 2nd and 4th
gears), D3 (in 2nd gears) positions: about 0 V
19 RED LSA (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current control
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
20 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve position With engine running:
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal 1.2—3.0 V (depending on EGR valve lift)
VALVE POSITION SENSOR)
22 *1 BLU/YEL POILCS (ENGINE OIL Detects engine oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.5 V
PRESSURE SENSOR) sensor signal With engine running:
1.5 V (depending on engine oil pressure)
* 1: J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)

number
23 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running i n P, R, N, D (in 1st, 2nd, and
VALVE B) valve B 3rd gears), D 3,2, and 1 positions: battery voltage
With engine running in D (in 4th and 5th) positions:
about 0 V
24*2 GRN/YEL VTS (ROCKER ARM OIL Drives rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid (VTEC
(VTEC SOLENOI D VALVE) solenoid valve)
24*1 GRN/YEL CSS (ROCKER ARM OIL Drives rocker arm oil With ignition switch ON (II) or at idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid (VTEC
(VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve)
25 BLU/YEL SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in D (in 1st, 2nd, and 5th gears),
VALVE A) valve A D3 (in 1st and 2nd gears), 2, and 1 positions:
battery voltage
With engine running in P, N, D (in 3rd and 4th gears),
D3 (in 3rd gears) positions: about 0 V
26 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1—4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (IAT) (depending on intake air temperature)
SENSOR)
27 RED/WHT ECT1 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 1 signal With ignition switch ON (II): aboutO.1—4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
SENSOR 1)
28 BLU/YEL ATFT (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2—4.0 V
SENSOR) signal (about 1.8 V at normal operating temperature)
(depending on ATF temperature)
30 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R position:
input battery voltage
31 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N) switch N position signal In any position other than N position:
32 LT BLU ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D) switch D position signal In any position other than D position:
* 1: J35Z1 engine
* 2; J35A9 engine
k 3

number
33 RED ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D3 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D3) switch D3 signal input In any position other than D3 position:
battery voltaqe
34 BLU ATP2 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 2 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 2) switch 2 signal input In any position other than 2 position:
battery voltaqe
35 BRN ATP1 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 1 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 1) switch 1 signal input In any position other than 1 position:
battery voltaqe
36 GRN/RED ECT2 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 2 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1—4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
SENSOR 2)
37 RED/YEL PCS (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister purge With engine running, engine coolant below 140 °F
EMISSION (EVAP) valve (60 ° C ) : battery voltage
CANISTER PURGE VALVE) With engine running, engine coolant above 140 °F
(60 ° C ) : duty controlled
38 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With engine running and fully warmed up:
CONTROL) siqnal battery voltaqe (depending on electrical load)
39 GRN/YEL SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor qround Less than 1.0 V at all times
40 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
41 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal With engine running: 0—5.0 V
SIGNAL) (depending on electrical load)
42 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor siqnal With engine knocking: pulses
43 *1 WHT/BLU IM T + (INTAKE MANIFOLD Drives IMT actuator With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
TUNING (IMT) ACTUATOR
+SIDE)
44*1 WHT/RED IM T - (INTAKE MANIFOLD Ground for IMT actuator With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
TUNING (IMT) ACTUATOR
-S ID E )
* 1: J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)
PGM-FI System Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a the PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for
sequential multiport fuel injection system. fuel injection of each cylinder, as well as detecting
engine misfire.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the PCM during charging.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay

When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the
A/C system, it delays the compressor from being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth
transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor

The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
A/F sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and sends
signals to the PCM which varies the duration of fuel
injection accordingly.
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2
ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the
CERAMIC HOLDER engine coolant temperature increases.
TERMINAL THERMISTOR
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor

The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that is used
by the PCM to modify the basic duration of the fuel
injection discharge.
Ignition Timing Control
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing
The CMP sensor input is used by the PCM to determine at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank pressures. It also adjusts the timing according to engine
angle is abnormal. coolant temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration

The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out from the memory, is further modified by
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the PCM detects long
term malfunctions in the fuel system and sets a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
&
Intake Air Temperature HAT) Sensor To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,
The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases engine. The MIL will come on for 15—-20 seconds. If it
as the intake air temperature increases. then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not
O-RING
set to complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or
run the engine as described in the procedures (see page
11-67).
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
THERMISTOR
Knock Sensor
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to
minimize knock.
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor

This sensor detects countershaft speed.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation

to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has
been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part
of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are
set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete,
the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be
finished.
(cont'd)
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way varies the signal voltage to the PCM.
catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the
PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal
heater. The PCM compares the H02S output with the
A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The
secondary H02S is on the WU-TWC.
SENSOR
TERMINALS
BRUSH
HEATER
TERMINALS
Electronic Throttle Control System

The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic
throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
see a functional layout of the system.
Idle control: When the engine is idling, the PCM

controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle
speed according to engine loads.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is Throttle Body

pressed, the PCM opens the throttle valve depending The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal. lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the
Cruise control: The PCM controls the throttle actuator to throttle plate.
maintain the set speed when cruise control is operating.
The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise
control actuator.
idle Control System Catalytic Converter System
When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC)
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the and Under-Floor Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
power steering load is high, or the alternator is The WU-TWC/TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
charging, the PCM controls current to the throttle monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), nitrogen (N2), and
water vapor.
Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM when WU-TWC
the brake pedal is pressed.
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch

The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power
steering load is high. HOUSING
Fuel Supply System

WARM UP
Fuel Cutoff Control THREE WAYj
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed, CATALYST
FRONT
current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel (Bank 2)
economy at engine speeds over 850 rpm (J35Z1
engine) or 950 rpm (J35A9 engine). Fuel cutoff control
also occurs when the engine speed exceeds 6,500 rpm,
regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to
protect the engine from over-revving. When the vehicle
is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over WARM UP THREE WAY
5,000 rpm. On a cold engine, fuel cut occurs at a lower FRONT OF CATALYST REAR
VEHICLE (Bank 1)
engine speed.
Fuel Pump Control TWC

When the ignition is turned on, the PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which feeds current
to the fuel pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel
system. With the engine running, the PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and feeds current to
the fuel pump. When the engine is not running and the
ignition is on, the PCM cuts ground to PGM-FI main
relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which cuts current to the fuel
pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2

PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) is energized whenever
the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to &
the PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI FRONT'OF
VEHICLE CATALYST
main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump
for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II),
and when the engine is cranking or running.
(cont'd)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control

System
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
of the system. Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
of the system.
EGRVaiwe
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures EVAP Canister
and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold the fuel tank until it can be purged from the EVAP
and into the combustion chambers. canister into the engine and burned.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System EVAP Canister Purge Valve

When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 °F
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping (60 °C), the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
manifold.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP
canister.
■ : BLOW-BY VAPOR The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting
=: FRESH AIR of the EVAP canister during the EVAP leak check.
VALVE
Fuel Cap Warning Message To make the message go off (With the HDS)
The PGM will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an Procedure--
evaporative system leak and alerts the driver by
showing a warning message in the gauge display. 1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
Firstdrive cycle 2. Clear the Temporary DTC with the HDS.

The first time a leak is detected a "CHECK FUEL CAP"
message in the gauge display (A). To scroll to another 3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP
message, press the select/reset button. The"CHECK FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
FUEL CAP" message will appear each time you restart the HDS.
the engine until the system turns the message off. Turn
the engine off then replace or tighten the fuel fill cap To make the message go off (Without the
until it clicks at least once. The message should go off HDS) ('06 model)
after several days of normal driving after the fuel fill
cap has been tightened or replaced. Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. The message should go off after several days of

normal driving.
To make the message go off (Without the

HDS) ('07-08 models)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the

3. Repeat Step 2 two more times.
(cont'd)
Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram

The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, the electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the PCM.
Intake Manifold Tuning (IMT) Valve System (J35Z1 Engine)
Engine power is adjusted by opening and closing the intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator. When the valve is closed,
there is high torque at low engine speed. When the valve is open, there is high torque at high engine speed.
The intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve actuator has a sensor that.detects the IMT valve position and sends it to the
PCM. . -
(cont'd)
Variable Cylinder Management (VCM) System (J35Z1 Engine)
The i-VTEC (intelligent variable valve timing and lift electric control system) adopts a cylinder pause VTEC (variable
cylinder system). The cylinder pause VTEC system pauses the intake and exhaust valves on the rear bank under
certain conditions such as cruise and fuel cut (see illustration). Since the valves on the rear bank are closed, the
frictional losses from valve spring compression and pumping are reduced because no air is compressed in the rear
bank. This reduces engine drag.
PAUSE CONDITION
The vibration generated by three-cylinder operation is counteracted by an active control engine mount system.
Operation
During 6 Cylinder Mode (intake valve side)
With the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) off, the rocker arm oil control valve (VTEC spool valve)
directs oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters the secondary rocker arm from the oil passage in the intake rocker shaft,
and it moves the VTEC switching piston in the rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching piston to slide into primary
rocker arm, locking primary rocker arm and the secondary rocker arm together. Primary rocker arm is then actuated
by the secondary rocker arm.
ROCKER ARM
During 6 Cylinder Mode (exhaust valve side)

With the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) off, the rocker arm oil control valve (VTEC spool valve)
directs oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters secondary rocker arms A and B from the oil passage in the exhaust
rocker shaft, and it moves the VTEC switching piston in the rocker arm. This causes the VTEC switching pistons to slide
into primary rocker arms A and B, locking primary rocker arms A and B to the secondary rocker arms A and B.
Secondary rocker arms A and B are then actuated by the primary rocker arms A and B.
When the engine is off, the VTEC switching piston is held in the engaged position by the return spring. This allows the
rocker arms to operate when oil pressure is low during cranking.
(cont'd)
During Cylinder Pause Mode (intake valve side)

With the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) energized by the PCM, the rocker arm oil control valve
(VTEC spool valve) switches oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters the primary rocker arm from the oil passage in the
intake rocker shaft. This forces the VTEC switching piston into the secondary rocker arm and against the return spring,
and disengages the primary rocker arm from the secondary rocker arm to stop valve actuation. The secondary rocker
arm uses a lost motion spring to maintain tension.
ROCKER ARM
During Cylinder Pause Mode (exhaust valve side)

With the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) energized by the PCM, the rocker arm oil control valve
(VTEC spool valve) switches oil pressure. Oil pressure then enters primary rocker arms A and 8 from the oil passage in
the exhaust rocker shaft. This forces the VTEC switching pistons into secondary rocker arms A and B and against the
return springs, and disengages the secondary rocker arms from the primary rocker arms to stop valve actuation. The
primary rocker arm uses a lost motion spring to maintain tension.
Active Control Engine Mount (ACM) System (J35Z1 Engine)
The active control engine mount (ACM) system decreases engine-to-chassis vibration at low rpm and when the engine
is in cylinder pause mode. The system includes conventional, liquid-filled engine mounts that absorb vibration. In
addition, the front and rear engine mounts contain an actuator that cancels engine vibration by producing a counter,
or reverse vibration. The transmission has standard rubber mounts.
CONVENTIONAL LIQUID ENGINE MOUNT

LIQUID ENGINE MOUNT
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT

ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT
(cont'd)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM memory contains the ideal EGR valve position for
various operating conditions,
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift, and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares
it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference between the two,
the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
g 51
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned.
• The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever engine coolant
temperature is.above 140 °F (60 *0.
• During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor
to the EVAP canister.
(confd)
PCM Circuit Diagram
PCM
*1: J35Z1 engine

*2: J35A9 engine
TCC SOLENOID VALVE
tOIDVALVEA
'W--
IOID VALVE B
■r^P-------
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURECONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
1 B25
LSB
A /T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
B35
JLSC
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH
1
TRANSMISSION
TCH
ATF
1
m TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
■ BLU/YEL ■
» GRN/YEL ■
(cont'd)
PCM C ircuit Diagram (cont'd)

iSi
(cont'd)
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL SOLENOID
(VTEC
SOLENOID VALVE)
ROCKER ARM OIL

PRESSURE SWITCH
(VTEC OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH)
1 ■ BLU/WHT ■
■ BRN/YEL ■
■ BRN/YEL ■
24P
■ BRN/YEL • JUNCTION
l i CONNECTOR
■ BRN/YEL ■
■ BRN/YEL 1
-£L
G101
L ..._.. . 1 YEL/BLK —_ ir
■ YEL-
CKPSENSOR A/B
■ BRN/YEL *
i — BLU —
■ BLU/RED ■
*2: J35A9 engine

Si
(cont'd)

: Shielding
*1: J35Z1 engine
(cont'd)
*2: J35A9 engine

(cont'd)

r 3
Q505 G503
: J3521 engine
(cont'd)
POM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
*1
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
( D No. 421G1 MAIN (50 A)
( D No. 46 ACGS (15 A|
(D No. 47 STOP (20 A|
© No. 41 BATTERY 1120 A)
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX;
(D No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A)
© No.6FI-ECU(15A)
0 No. 3 HEATER CONTROL, A/C CLUTCH RELAY, COOLING FAN RELAY (7.5 A)
( D No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A)
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
FUSEBOX:
( f ) No. 9 LAF (A/F SENSOR) (15 A)
< §) No. 7 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 A)
® No. 8 IG COIL (15 A)
@ No. 5 ACM (10 A)
*1: J35Z1 engine

How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
(In relation to Readiness Codes) Code .■ .
The vehicle has certain '"readiness codes" that are part NOTE:
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone procedure.
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
been reset, these readiness codes are reset to disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions PCM is reset with the HDS.,
testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. • Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch
fail the emission test, or the test cannot be finished. the readiness code from incomplete to complete.
• The readiness code will not switch to complete until
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, all the enable criteria are met.
turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the • If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15—20 seconds. If it MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it complete until you correct the fault.
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not
set to complete. To set readiness codes from Enable Criteria
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the
appropriate code. • ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 °F (70 «C) or more.
• Intake air temperature (IAT) at 20 °F ( —7 °C) or more.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the • Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) reads more than 25 mph
OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see page (40 km/h).
11-9). This screen displays the code, the current data list
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness Procedure
testing.
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link
connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS
CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions

with short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
completed.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,

check for a Temporary DTC with the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were
probably not met; repeat the procedure.
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Evaporative Emission .(EVAP)-Control Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and
System Monitor and Readiness Code Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery NOTE:
is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
PCM is reset with the HDS. procedure.
• All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
Enable Criteria disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
PCM is reset with the HDS,
• Battery voltage is higher than 10.5 V.
• Engine at idle. Enable Criteria
• ECT SENSOR 1 and SENSOR 2 between 176 °F (80 °C)
and 212 °F (100 m ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 °F (60 £€ ) or more.
• MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
• Vehicle speed 0 mph (0 km/h). Procedure
• IAT SENSOR between 32 °F (0 °C) and 212 °F (100 °C).
Procedure
2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link with short periods of steady cruise. During the
connector (DLC). drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
2. Start the engine. readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete.
3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the 3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
EVAP TEST MENU. RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS.
• If the result is normal, readiness is complete.
• If the result is not normal, go to the next step. • If the screen shows complete, readiness is
complete.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one • If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
or more of the enable criteria were probably not step.
met; repeat the procedure.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the
enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST Menu. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the ALL
DATA LIST with the HDS. If ECT SENSOR 1 is lower
than 140 °F (60 °C), run the engine until it is higher
than 140 °F (60 °C)f then repeat the procedure.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor EGR Monitor and Readiness Code
Readiness Code
NOTE:
NOTE; All readiness codes are cleared when the battery • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the procedure.
PCM is reset with the HDS. • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
Procedure PCM is reset with the HDS.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The Enable Criteria
readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete. ECT SENSOR 1 at 176 °F {80 °C) or more.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, Procedure

check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC,
repeat the procedure. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code 2. Start the engine.
• This readiness code is always set to available 3. Drive at a steady speed with the transmission in
because misfiring is continuously monitored. D position, 50—62 mph (80—100 km/h) or above
• Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if for more than 10 seconds.
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
• Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter 4. With the transmission in D position, decelerate
holds at its current value, if the throttle position from 62 mph (100 km/h) or above by completely
changes more than a predetermined value, or if releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the
driving conditions fall outside the range of any engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step
related enable criteria. 3 and do the procedure again.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code 5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
DTC's MENU with the HDS.
• This readiness code is always set to available
because the fuel system is continuously monitored • If it is passed, readiness is complete.
during closed loop operation. • If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
• Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter,
EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
• Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met
Comprehensive Component Monitor and

Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because

the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
Component Location index
INJECTORS
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
IMAP) SENSOR
POWERTRAI N CONTROL
MODULE fPCM) ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
General Troubleshooting (ECT) SENSOR 2
Information, page 11-3 Replacement page 11-226
Update, page 11-7
Substitution, page 11-8
Replacement page 11-230 INTAKE AI R TEMPERATURE
(IAT) SENSOR
Replacement page 11 -227
CAMSHAFT POSITION ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(CMP) SENSOR (ECT) SENSOR 1
Replacement page 11-228 Replacement, page 11-226
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR KNOCK SENSOR
Replacement, page 11-228 Replacement page 11-229
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1) SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S) IBANK 2, SENSOR 2}
Replacement page 11-224 Replacement, page 11-225
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Is there about 5 V?
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data YES—Go to step 16.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO—Go to step 8 .
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or
less indicated? 11. Cheek for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B18 and MAP sensor 3P connector
YES—Go to step 3. terminal No. 1.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals VCC1 (YEL/RED) ■-----
Wire side of
at the MAP sensor and the PCM.B 1 female terminals

PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) VCC1 (YEL/RED)
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.

12 3 I4 | 5 I 6 |7 8 I 'I
■ 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 199 ■
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25
6 . Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
HDS. 136137 38139 |40 |41 142 43 M
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or Terminal side of female terminals
less indicated?
YES—Go to step 12.
NO—Go to step 7.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM
7. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P (B18) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is DTC P0107 indicated?
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
15. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P to step 1.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Z \ 23. Reconnect all connectors.

1 2 3 24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
MAP software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
(GRN/RED)
good PCM (see page 11-8 ).
u
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side of female terminals Is DTC P0107 indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose

Is there continuity? terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
(B30) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18. substituted, go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 23. NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-227). indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
18. Reconnect all connectors.

DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 8 . Remove the jumper wire from the MAP sensor 3P
connector.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

VCC1 / \
HDS. (YEL/RED)
2 3
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1, 197 mmHg), or SG1
4.49 V or more indicated? (GRN/W HT)
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Wire side of female terminals
at the MAP sensor and the PCM. ■
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there about 5 V?
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. YES—Goto step 14.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 NO—Go to step 10.

and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
Z \
2 3
MAP S G I (GRN/W HT)
(GRN/RED)
JUMPER WIRE
6 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or

4.49 V or more indicated?
YES—Goto step 8 .
NO—Go to step 18.

10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Jumpthe SCS line with the HDS.
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 16. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B33 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal B30 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No. 3. terminal No. 2.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
/ \ w
2 3 1
Wire side of SG I (GRN/WHT) Wire side of I MAP (GRN/RED)
female terminals female terminals / q V
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) SG1 (GRN/WHT) PCM CONNECTOR BJ44P) MAP (GRN/RED)
I 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 | 1 1 12 3 | 4 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |
■ 10 11 12 i ■ 10 11 12 13)1 ■
13|14|15|16 r 18 19 t|l5 |l6 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 i ■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 . ■
00
00
00
o
CM
CD
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136137 38|39 14 0 141 142 4 3 144 1 136137 ^ 8 139 140 141 142 4 3 1441
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of fem ale terminals
Is there continuity? is there continuity ?
YES—Go to step 25. YES—Go to-step 25.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B33) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20. (B30) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
19. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-227).
20. Reconnect all connectors*
Is DTC P0108 indicated?

terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

good PCM (see page 11-8).

terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the
(see page 11-8 ), then recheck. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO— If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.®
.< r <
DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit Range/ 12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the"
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the IA T SENSOR change 45 °F (25 °C) or
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general more?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
ECT sensor 1/2 and the IAT sensor. at the IAT sensor and the PCM. B
Are the connections and terminals OK ? NO—Goto step 13.
YES—Goto step 2. - 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—Repair the connections or terminals, then go 14. Replace the IAT sensor (see page 11-227).
to step 15.
2. Remove the IAT sensor (see page 11-227).
3. Allow the IAT sensor to cool to ambient
temperature. 17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
4. Note the ambient temperature. 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
5. Connect the IAT sensor to its 2P connector, but do Is DTC P0111 indicated?
not install it on the intake manifold.
6 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
7. Note the value of the IAT SENSOR quickly in the
DATA LIST with the HDS. NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
8 . Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR .and the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
ambient temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR d iffe r 5.4 °F

(3 °C) or more?
YES—Go to step 13.-
NO—Go to step 9. - -
9. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the IAT sensor for
a few seconds. Do not apply heat longer than a few
seconds or you will damage the sensor.
11. Connect the IAT sensor to its 2P connector, but do

not install it on the intake manifold.
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8 . Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Check for continuity between IAT sensor 2P
2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is about 356 °F (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated?
YES—Go to step 3. IAT (RED/YEL)
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (d)

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the IAT sensor and the PCM. ■
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. W ire side of female terminals

YES—Repair short in the wire between the IAT
6 . Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the sensor and the PCM (C26), then go to step 13.
HDS.
NO—Go to step 18.
indicated? 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Go to step 7. 12. Replace the IAT sensor (see page 11-227).
NO—Go to step 11. 13. Reconnect all connectors.

17. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
. step 1.


is DTC P0112 indicated?

terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM. if the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage 8 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 9. Remove the jumper wire.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Measure voltage between IAT sensor 2P connector
terminal No. 1 and body ground.
HDS. IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is about —40 °F ( —40 °C) or less, or 4.92 V or

more indicated?
1 2
YES—Go to step 3. IAT (RED/YEL)

at the IAT sensor and the PCM. ■
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect IAT sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 with a jumper wire. YES—Go to step 12.
IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

NO—Go to step 16.
2
IAT (RED/YEL) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.

more indicated?
YES—Go to step 8 .
NO—Go to step 20 .
J ? '
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. :
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 18. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
terminal C14 and IAT sensor 2P connector terminal terminal C26 and IAT sensor 2P connector terminal
No. 2 . No. 1.
IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of Wire side of

1 2 female terminals 1 2 fem ale terminals
SG2 (GRN/YEL) IAT (RED/YEL)
SG2 (GRN/YEL) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) IAT (RED/YEL) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
i ..,.....
I 1 I 2 3 I 4 1 5 | 6 ( 7 a 19 1 T T I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
a 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ ■ ■
1 :) 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
i 20 / 22 23 24 25
1 ■
2 :> / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 / \ m \ m |32 33 34 35 2i>27 28 / 1 30131132 33 34 35
136 137 38 139 |40141 142 4 3 144 1 13 6 137 38|39 |40141 142 43144]
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES—Go to step 27. YES—Go to step 27.
(C l4) and the IAT sensor, then go to step 22. (C26) and the IAT sensor, then go to step 22.
(confd)
21. Replace the IAT sensor (see page 11-227).

terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM, then goto
step 1.



terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM. If the PCM

DTC P0116: EGT Sensor 1 Circuit Range/ 10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 °F (10 °C) or
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general more?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. ■
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. NO—Go to step 11.
Is a b o u t 1 7 6 °F ( 6 0 °C) o r m o r e , o r 0 . 7 8 V o r le s s 11 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.

indicated?
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226).
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
with the HDS. 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. Is DTC P0116 indicated?
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the YES—Check for poor connections or loose
HDS. terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
D o e s E C T S E N S O R 1 c h a n g e 18 °F ( 1 0 °C) o r
more? NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. II
NO—Goto step 11.
6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST

with the HDS.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.

DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
HDS. ECT SENSOR 12P CONNECTOR

indicated?
E C U (RED/WHT)
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (& ;

at the ECT sensor la n d the PCM.■
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.

YES—Repair short in the wire between the ECT
6. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the sensor 1 and the PCM (C27), then go to step 13,
HDS.
NO—Go to step 18.
indicated? 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Go to step 7. 12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226).
NO—Go to step 11. 13. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Reset the PCM with the HDS,


terminals at the ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go
to step 1.



terminals at the ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the

DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High 8 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Voltage
9. Remove the jumper wire.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
HDS.

more indicated? 1 2
ECT1 (RED/WHT)
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM.B
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector. Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1 YES—Go to step 12.

NO—Go to step 16.
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
2
ECT1 (RED/WHT) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.

more indicated?
YES—Goto step 8 .
NO—Goto step 20 .
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
terminal C14 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal C27 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR

female terminals 1 female terminals
SG2 (GRN/YEL) E C T ! (RED/WHT)
SG2 (GRN/YEL) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) ECT1 (RED/WHT) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
-------
= i r ..............
I4 I5 I 6 7 8 I 9 I
I■ I 110I 121 123 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ ] a
h h 3 |4 |5 |6 |7 8 I 9 I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1 i 20 / '22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 / 1 30131132 33 34 35
X
CO
CO
CO
26 27'28 33 34 35
136137
U— --J38139 |40141 142 431441 136137 38|39140141 142 43. 44
Is there continuity ? Is there continuity?
(Cl 4) and ECT sensor 1, then goto step 22. (C27) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
20 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.

terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.


Is DTCP0118 indicated?

step 1. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then recheck. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.

indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
DTC P012S: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF,
Response
10. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226). ■.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or
more. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the 14. Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature.
HDS.
15. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 minutes.
Is about 10 °F ( 12 °C) or less, or 4.45 V or more
indicated? 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Goto step 9. Is D T C P0125 indicated?
NO—Goto step 3. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
3. Allow the engine to cool to 104 °F (40 °C) or less. PCM, then go to step 1.
4. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT NO—Go to step 17.
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0125 in the
5. Start the engine, and let it idle. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
6 . Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up Does the screen indicate PASSED ?
40 °F (22 *€) or more from the recorded
temperature. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16,
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST goto the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
with the HDS.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
8 . Compare ECT SENSOR 2 and the recorded connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
temperature. ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, goto step 14.
Did ECT SENSOR 2 change 17 °F (9.5 °C) or
more?

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM M
NO—Test the thermostat (see page 10-4). if the

thermostat is OK, go to step 9. If you replace the
thermostat, go to step 11.
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction 12. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Did temperature rise 17 °F (9.5 °C) or more ?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. ■
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO—Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go
3. Turn the blower switch OFF. to step 13.
4. Turn the A/C switch OFF. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
5. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST with the 14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
HDS.
15. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
Is it OFF? between 21 °F ( - 6 <€) and 104 °F (40 °C).
YES—Go to step 6 . 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
NO—Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to 17. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15—75 mph
step 6 . (24—120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
6 . Check the radiator fan operation. 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Does the radiator fan keep running? Is DTC P0128 indicated?
YES—Check the radiator fan high speed circuit YES—Check the cooling system, then go to step 1.
(see page 10-19). If the circuits and the relay is OK,
go to step 20 . NO—Go to step 19.
NO—Go to step 7. 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
104 °F (40 °C) or less. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
8 . Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT YES—Troubleshooting i§ complete. If any other
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
9. Start the engine, and let it idle.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check the
10. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up cooling system, then go to step 1. If the screen
40 °F (22 °C) or more from the recorded indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 15.
temperature.
11 . Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.

between 21 °F ( - 6 °C) and 104 °F (40 <€).

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
23. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15—-75 mph

(24—120 km/h) for 10 minutes.

PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step 21 . If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 25.

Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
go to step 21. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, goto
step 21 .
DTC P0133: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 8 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response
DTC P0153: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
NOTE: 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
any on-board snapshot, and review the general radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
• If DTC P0139 and/or P0159 * is stored at the same time 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
as DTC P0133 and/or P0153*, troubleshoot DTC P0139
and/or P0159* first, then recheck for DTC P0133 and/ • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
or P0153*. above 158 °F (70 'C)
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the • Transmission in D position
front bank (Bank 2). • Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 26—81 mph (41 -1 30 km/h)
2 . Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Is DTC P0133 and/or P0153* indicated?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
4. Test-drive under these conditions: then go to step 1.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) NO—Goto step 14.

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Transmission in D position 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or
• Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for P0153* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
2 6 -8 1 mph (41 -1 30 km/h) Does the screen indicate PASSED?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
P0153* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
goto the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
N o —If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES—Go to step 6 . connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F CONDITION, go to step 12.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-224).
m
DTC P0134: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9 . Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction 8 P connector terminal No. 6 and PCM connector
terminal B13 (B-14)%
A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction
NOTE: 1 2 3 4
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and / 6 7 8
any on-board snapshot, and review the general ¥SB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Wire side of female terminals
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
PCM CONNECTOR B(44P)
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC
with the HDS. VSB1 (BLU) VSB2;(RED/BLU)*
• If DTC P2251, P2237, P2240 %and/or P2254 * is stored
at the same time as DTC P0134 and/or P0154*, I 1 I 2 3 I 4 I 6.1 e 17 8 [9
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
troubleshoot DTC P225VP2237, P2240.\ and/or.v
I 20 21 22 / 24 25
P2254*’first*.then reeheckfor P0134 and/or P0154\
CO
CO
s
CM
a
26 27 28; 33 34 35
• Information marked with an asterisk (■■) applies to the
136137 3 8 139 |4G 141 |42 4 3 144
front bank (Bank 2).
Terminal side of female term inals
2. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
YES—Goto step 10.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. (B13 (B14D and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 14.
I s D T C P0134 and/or PQ154* indicated?
YES—Go to step 5.

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. ■
6 . Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P connector.
(cont'd)
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (44P). 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11 . Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. Is DTC P0134 and/or P0154* indicated?
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8 P YES—Check for poor connections or loose
connector terminal No. 6 and body ground. terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) SP CONNECTOR
NO—Go to step 19.
1 2 3 4 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 and/or

P0154* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
6 7 8
VSB1 (BLU) Does the screen indicate PASSED?
VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
(v) YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Wire side of fem ale terminals
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
Is there about 0.2 V or less? (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
YES—Go to step 20. until a result comes on.
NO—Go to step 13.
13. Replace the A/F sensor (see page 11-224).
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 1 1-359).


Is DTC P0134 and/or P0154* indicated?

terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11 -8 ), then go to step 23. If the PCM
NO—Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 and/or



(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the PCM.
PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 23. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes
on.
DTC P0135: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 8 . At the sensor side, measure resistance between A/F
Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction sensor (Sensor 1) 8 P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the 1 2 3 4
front bank (Bank 2). / 6 7 8
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of male terminals

Is there 2.5—3.2 Q at room temperature?
4 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 9.
YES—Go to step 5.
9. At the sensor side, check for continuity between
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this each terminal at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8 P
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals connector and body ground.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay
(LAF), and the PCM.H A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR

■znzr-
6 . Check these fuses: 1 2 3 4
/ 6 7 8
* No. 9 LAF (A/F SENSOR) (15 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box
• 7.5 A fuse in the auxiliary under-dash fuse holder
Are any of the above fuses blown?

Terminal side of male terminals
YES—Repair short in the wire between the A/F
sensors, the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the fuse(s).
Also replace the blown fuse(s), then go to step 24. Is there continuity?
NO—Go to step 7. YES—Go to step 22.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8 P connector. NO—Go to step 10.

10. At the sensor side, check for continuity between 14. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P connector terminals No. 1 8 P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector
and No. 3, No. 4, No. 6 , No. 7, and No. 8 terminal C6 (C8 )*.
individually.
A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1)-8P CONNECTOR
AFSHTCB1 AFSHTCB2
(BLK/WHT) (GRN/WHT)*
1 2 3 4
/ 6 7 8
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
AFSHTCS1 AFSHTCB2
(BLK/WHT) (G RN/W HT)#
^ n n
1 2 3 | 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 |9 I
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 / 22 23 24 25 |
Terminal side of male term inal s 1
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38 139 |40141 142 431441
NO—Go to step 11.
12. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). (C6 (C8 )*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
step 23.
terminal C6 (C8 )* and body ground.
AFSHTCB1 AFSHTCB2
(BLK/WHT) (GRN/WHT)*
11 12 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1 10 11 12 ■
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
I 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 132 33 34 35
136137 38|39|40|41 142 43|44|
YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM

(C6 (C8 ) *) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
step 23.
NO—Go to step 14.

(cont'd)
15. Remove the A/F sensor relay (LAF) (A). 17. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay
(LAF) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
A/F SENSOR RELAY (LAF) 4P CONNECTOR
IG (BLU/WHT)
16. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8 P connector

terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. Is there continuity?

NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/F

sensor (Sensor 1) and the A/F sensor relay (LAF),
IG (BLU/WHT)
then go to step 23.
1 2 3 4
JUMPER WIRE
00
7 18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).

CD

19. Connect A/F sensor relay (LAF) 4P connector 21. Test the A/F sensor relay (LAF) (see page 22-82).
terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Isthe A /F sensor relay (LAF) OK?
A/F SENSOR RELAY (LAF) 4P CONNECTOR
AFSHTCR (ORN) NO—Replace the A/F sensor relay (LAF), then go to

3 step 23.
1 2 X JUMPER WIRE 22. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
4
11-224). .
Terminal side of female terminals 24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

terminal A21 and body ground. 26. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 L Is DTC P0135 and/or P0155* indicated?

1 10 11 12
/ | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■ YES—Check for poor connections or loose
1 26 27 28 33 34 35 terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F
36 K ' 3 6 l/ | / | 4 1 142 431441 sensor relay (LAF), and the PCM, then go to step 1.
AFSHTCR CORN)
NO—Go to step 28.

YES —Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES—Go to step 21 . Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
(A21) and the A/F sensor relay (LAF), then go to NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
step 23. connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the PCM,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.


terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F
sensor relay (LAF), and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8 ), then go to step 31 . If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 33.


go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.®

(Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the PCM.
PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step 31. If the PCM
on.
DTC P0137: Rear Secondary H 02S (Bank 1, 12 . Check for continuity between secondary "H02S
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground..
DTC P0157: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2 f
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage SECONDARY H 02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
SH02SB1 (GRN)
* Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and SH02SB2 (W HT)#
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 1 2
3 4
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
2 . Clearthe DTC with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. Is there continuity?
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B15 (B16)*) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
Does the voltage stay at 0.29 V or less? then go to step 15.
YES—Go to step 5. NO—Go to step 23.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. ■ 14. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-225). ■ :-
6 . Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector. 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
8 . Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
Does the voltage stay at 0.29 V or less? 19. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
YES—Goto step9.
NO—Go to step 13.

20. Test-drive under these conditions; 23. Reconnect all connectors.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) 24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
above 158 °F (70 °C) software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
• Transmission in D position good PCM (see page 11-8).
• Engine speed at 1,500—3,000 rpm
• Drive at a steady speed for 1 minute or more 25. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
26. Test-drive under these conditions:
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
YES—Check for poor connections or loose above 158 °F (70 °C)
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) and • Transmission in D position
the PCM, then goto step 1. • Engine speed at 1,500—3,000 rpm
• Drive at a steady speed for 1 minute or more
P0157* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Is DTC P0137 and/or P0157* indicated?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) and
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 21 , known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ 25. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NO—Go to step 28.
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 and/or
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until P0157* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 19. Does the screen indicate PASSED?


H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then go to step 25. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 25.
DTC P0138: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, 8 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage
9. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
DTC P0158: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
NOTE: YES—Go to step 10.

any on-board snapshot, and review the general NO—Go to step 19.
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary H02S
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (Sensor 2 ) 4P connector.
2 . Clear the DTC with the HDS. 12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) 4P connector
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

SH02SB1 (GRN)
SH02SB2 (WHT)*
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more? 1 2
3 4
YES—Go to step 5.
JUMPER WIRE
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM.il
6 . Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
connector.
7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) 4P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire. Does the voltage stay a t 1.27 V or more?
SECONDARY H 02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR YES—Go to step 15. :

JUMPER WIRE (C14 (C39D and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
then go to step 21 .
1 2
SH02SB1 (GRN) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
SH02SB2 (WHT)* 3 4 SG6 (GRN/YEL)*
W ire side of female terminals
(cont'd)
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 26. Test-drive under these conditions:
16. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 176 °F (80 °C)
17. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). • Transmission in D position
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector • Drive at a steady speed for 1 minute or more
terminal B15 (B16)* and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
SH02SB1 SH02SB2 Is DTC P0138 and/or P0158* indicated?
(GRN) (W HT)*
r . ;.,„r terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) and
I 1 I 2 3 I4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9 the PCM, then go to step 1.
■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
a 20 21 22 / 24 25 NO—Go to step 28.
26 27 28 29|30|31132: 33 34 35
13 6 137 38139 |40 141 |42 4 3 144
PG158* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Term inal side of female terminals Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Is there continuity? YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES—Go to step 29. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
(B15 (B16)*) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ), connections or loose terminals at the secondary
then goto step 21 . H02S (Sensor 2 ) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 25.
20. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-225).
21 . Reconnect all connectors.


above 176 °F (80 °C)
• Transmission in D position
• Drive at a steady speed for 1 minute or more

terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) and
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
31. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 34.



H02S (Sensor 2 ) and the PCM. If the PCM was
goto step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
DTC P0139: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, 11. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
Sensor 2) Slow Response or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
DTC P0159: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2 , 12 . Test-drive under these conditions:
Sensor 2) Slow Response
NOTE: above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • Transmission in D position
any on-board snapshot, and review the general • Vehicle speed above 35 mph (56 km/h)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Drive 20 seconds or more
front bank (Bank 2). 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC P 0 139 and/or P0159* indicated?
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 14.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) P0159* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
above 158 °F (70 *C)
• Transmission in D position Does the screen indicate PASSED?
• Vehicle speed above 35 mph (56 km/h)
• Drive 20 seconds or more YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 and/or go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Does the screen indicate FAILED? connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2 ) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
YES—Goto step 6 . the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent CONDITION, go to step 11.
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF

11-225).

DTC P0141: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, 8 . At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, measure
Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector terminals Nov 3 and No. 4.
DTC P0161: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
1 2
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the - 3 4-
2 . Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of male terminals

Is there 5.4—7.3 Q at room temperature?
YES—Go to step 9.
Is DTC P0141 and/or P 0 1 6 T indicated?
NO—Go to step 22.
YES—Go to step 5.
9. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, check for
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this continuity between body ground and secondary
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the A/F sensor No. 4 individually.
relay (LAF), and the PCM. ■
SECONDARY H 02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
6 . Check these fuses:

1 2
- No. 9 LAF (A/F SENSOR) (15 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box - 3 4-
Are any of the fuses blown?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the Terminal side of male terminals
secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the A/F sensor relay
(LAF), and the fuse(s). Also replace the blown
fuse(s), then go to step 23. Is there continuity?
7. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P NO—Go to step 10.

connector.
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C5 (C7)* and body ground.
11. Disconnect PGM connector C (44P).
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector S02SHTCB1 S02SHTCB2

terminal C5 (C7) * and body ground. (BLK/WHT) (GRN/RED)*

n n ^
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 I 7 8 I 9
S02SHTCB1 S02SHTCB2 ■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 8
(BLK/WHT) (GRN/RED)*
20 / 22 23 24 25 ■
1
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
lr~ ...|| ■
136 j 37 38139 \A0141 142 431441
11 12 3 I 4 I 55 I 6 I 7 8 | 9 |
I i
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 25
1 20 / 22
1
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 |3 2 - 33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 13 9 14 0 141 142 4 3 14 4 1
Terminal side of female terminals YES—Go to step 15.
Is there continuity? NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C5 (C7) *) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then
YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM go to step 23.
(C5 (C7)*> and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then
go to step 23. 15. Remove the A/F sensor relay (LAF) (A).
NO—Go to step 13.
13. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) 4P connector

1 2
3 4
S02SHTCB1 (BLK/WHT)
S02SHTCB2 (GRN/RED)*
JUMPER WIRE

16. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector 18. Disconnect PCM connector >A(44P).
19. Connect A/F sensor relay (LAF) 4P connector
A /F SENSOR RELAY (LAF) 4P CONNECTOR

1 2
IG (BLU/W HT)
3 4 AFSHTCR (ORN)
3
JUMPER WIRE 1 2X
JUM PER WIRE
4

17. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay
(LAF) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
A /F SENSOR RELAY (LAF) 4P CONNECTOR
terminal A21 and body ground.
3
I 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9
1
1 0 11 1 2 / I 1 I / I / 17 18 19
4
1
IG'(BLU/WHT) I 2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
1
1
26 27 28 29I / I 31P 73 3 34 35
'3 8 1 / | / | 4 1 14 2 4 3 1 4 4 1
L f.. . I I t
AFSHTCR (ORN)
Is there continuity? Terminal side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 18. Is there continuity ?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the YES—Go to step 21.

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the A/F sensor
relay (LAF), then go to step 23. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A21) and the A/F sensor relay (LAF), then go to
step 23.
(cont'd)
21. Test the A/F sensor relay (LAF) (see page 22-82). 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 and/or
P0161 * in the DTCs MENU with the HDS;
Is the A /F sensor relay (LAF) OK?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
NO—Replace the A/F sensor relay (LAF), then go to Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
step 23. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ®
22. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
11-225). connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2), the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and
23. Reconnect all connectors. the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). on.
25. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 29. Reconnect all connectors.
26. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). 30. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. good PCM (see page 11-8 ).
Is DTC P0141 and/or P016V indicated? 31. Start the engine, and let it idle.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose 32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the
A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the PCM, then go to Is DTC P0141 and/or P016T indicated?
step 1.
NO—Go to step 28. terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the
A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the PCM, then go to
good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step 31. If the
NO—Go to step 33.

P0161 * in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.


H02S (Sensor 2), the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and
known-good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step
31. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
until a result comes on.
DTC P0171: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375).
Too Lean
Is the fuel pressure OK ?
DTC P0172: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System
Too Rich YES—If you are troubleshooting DTC P0171 or
P0174, go to step 2. If you are troubleshooting DTC
DTC P0174: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System P0172 or P0175, check the valve clearances, and
Too Lean adjust if necessary. If the valve clearances are OK,
replace the injectors (see page 11-222 ), then go to
DTC P0175; Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System step 2 .
Too Rich
NO—If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
NOTE: pressure regulator (see page 11-386), then go to
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and step 2. If the pressure is too low, check the fuel
any on-board snapshot, and review the general pump, the fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter,
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). and the fuel feed pipe, then go to step 2 .
• If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the
same time as DTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
P0175, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for
P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175. 3. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute 4. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0133, P0153, P1172, P1174, P2195, P2197, P2237, 5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
P2238, P2240, P2241, P2243, P2245, P2247, P2249, 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
P2251, P2252, P2254, P2255, P2627, P2628, P2630, radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
P2631, P2A00, P2A03: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
(Sensor 1) 6 . Test-drive under these conditions:
P0134, P0135, P0154, P0155: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
(Sensor 1) heater • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
P0137, P0138, P0139, P0157, P0158, P0159, P2270, above 158 °F (70 °C)
P2271, P2272, P2273: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) • Transmission in D position
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater • Drive at a steady speed between 15—75 mph
P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: Exhaust gas (24—120 km/h) for 15 minutes.
recirculation (EGR) system
P0522, P0523, P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: Variable NOTE: DTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 may
Cylinder Management (VCM) system (J35Z1 engine) take up to 40 minutes of test driving to set. Using
P2279: Intake air leakage the HDS, monitor the long term fuel trim (LT FUEL
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system (J35A9 TRIM). If the LT FUEL TRIM stays within 0.84-1.8,
engine) there is no problem at this time.
Is D T C P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175

indicated?
YES—Go to step 1.

DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Combination of the Following;
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTCP0302:No.. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected or neutral).
DTC P0303: No* 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU
DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected with the HDS.
DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected Does the screen indicate FAILED?
DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected YES—Go to step 9.
Special Tools Required NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If

•Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A the screen indicates EXECUTING, let it idle until a
•A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
•A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201 CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck.
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
• A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
•Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
NOTE: with the HDS.
any on-board snapshot, and review the general Does C Y L 1 M I S F I R E , C Y L 2 M I S F I R E , C Y L 3
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). M IS F IR E , C Y L4 M IS F IR E , C Y L 5 M IS F IR E ,
• If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection and/or C Y L 6 M I S F I R E show misfire counts?
of increased emissions during two consecutive
driving cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 YES—Goto step 9.
(and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will
be stored. NO—Go to step 6 .
• If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the
catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfire 6 . Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the
misfire stops, the MIL will remain on. •ENGINE SPEED
• Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of them • VSS
were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s) • REL TP SENSOR
(Because parts can sometimes fail without setting • CLV (calculated load value)
DTCs, you should also do a physical inspection of the • ECT SENSOR 1
below systems.): • APPSENSOR
. • GEAR POSITION
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175; Fuel system
P0335, P0339, P0385, P0389: Crankshaft position
(CKP) sensor A/B
P0340, P0344: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system
P0506, P0507: Idle control system
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649; VTEC system (J35A9
engine)
(cont'd)
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, 13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU M ISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
with the HDS. CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL1 M ISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
YES—Goto step 9. M ISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until YES—Goto step 14.
CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck. NO—Go to step 20 .
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-375).
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes Is the fuel pressure OK ?
with the HDS.
YES-
Does CYL1 M ISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 • J35Z1 engine: Check for air in the fuel line, then
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, go to step 20 .
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts? • J35A9 engine: Go to step 15.
YES—Go to step 9. NO—

• If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this pressure regulator (see page 11-386), then go to
time.B step 20 .
• If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter. If they are
OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator (see page
10. Check the fuel quality. 11-386), then go to step 20.
Is the quality good? 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—Drain the tank, and fill it with a known-good

fuel, then go to step 20 .
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-22). If the spark
plugs are fouled or worn, replace them.
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the

range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
8 ENGINE SPEED
- VSS
« REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
* ECT SENSOR 1
* APPSENSOR
• GEAR POSITION
liM
16. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
oil pressure switch) (A), and install the special tools
as shown, then install the rocker arm oil pressure 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) in the pressure
gauge adapter (B). 22. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
removal with a new O-ring.
24. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
07406-0020201 or
• ENGINE SPEED
- vss
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
- ECT SENSOR 1
• APP SENSOR
- GEAR POSITION
Is DTC P0300 and any combination of DTC P0301,

P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306
indicated?
17. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the
18. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at PCM, then go to DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304,
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the P0305 or P0306 (see page 11-116) troubleshooting.
radiator fan comes on.
NO—Go to step 27.
19. Check the oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000
and 2,000 rpm. Keep the measuring time as short 27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
as possible (less than 1 minute) because the engine P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU
is running without load. with the HDS.
Is the oil pressure below 49 kPa (0,5 kgf/crrf, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
7 p si)?
YES—Check for air in the fuel line, then go to Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 26,
step 20 . go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
NO—Inspect the VTEC system (see page 6-7), then NO—if the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
go to step 20 . connections or loose terminals at the ignition coils,
the injectors, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
DTC P0301:No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
• ENGINE SPEED
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected • VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected • CLV (calculated load value)
• GEAR POSITION
DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder Misfire Detected • ECT SENSOR 1
DTC P 03ii: No. 6 Cylinder Misfire Detected 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). D o e s th e s c r e e n in d i c a t e F A I L E D ?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES—Go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8 . If
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load for a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
2 minutes (in Park or neutral), CONDITION, go to step 6.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, 8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
with the HDS. CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL1 M IS F IR E , C Y L2 M IS F IR E , C Y L3
YES—Go to step 9. M IS F IR E , C Y L 4 M IS F IR E ,C Y L 5 M IS F IR E ,
a n d / o r C Y L 6 MISFIRE s h o w m i s f i r e c o u n t s ?
N O — If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until YES—Goto step 9.
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, and recheck. NO—Intermittent fail ure, the system is OK at this
time. Check the fuel and ignition system circuit
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 connectors for loose wires or poor connections. ■
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
with the HDS.
10. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 cylinder with one from another cylinder.
MISFIRE, CYL4 M ISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts? 11. Reconnect all connectors.
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—Go to step 6 .
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 18. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED o ENGINE SPEED

- VSS - VSS
•REL TP SENSOR • RELTPSENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value) • CLV (calculated load value)
• GEAR POSITION • GEAR POSITION
• ECT SENSOR 1 ■ • ECT SENSOR 1
13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 19. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS. with the HDS.
Does CYL1 M I S F I R E , CYL2 M I S F I R E , CYL3 Does C Y L 1 M I S F I R E , C Y L 2 M I S F I R E , CYL3

M I S F I R E , CYL4 M I S F I R E , CYL5 M I S F I R E , M I S F I R E , CYL4 M I S F I R E , CYL5 M I S F I R E ,
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts? and/or CYL6 M I S F I R E show m isfire counts?
NO—Intermittent failure due to poor contact at the NO—Intermittent failure due to spark plug fouling
ignition coil contactor (no misfire at this time). (no misfire at this time).B
Make sure that the ignition coil connectors are
secure. ■ 20. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
14. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
spark plug was exchanged?
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
ignition coil was moved? YES—Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step
53.
YES—Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page
4-19), then go to step 53. NO—Goto step 21.
NO—Goto step 15. 21. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the
problem cylinder.
16. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder
with the one from another cylinder. 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(cont'd)
24. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P 27. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
IGNITI ON COI L 3P CONNECTOR
29. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 B26 YEL/GRN
No. 2 P0302 B27 BLU/RED
No. 3 P0303 B20 WHT/BLU
No. 4 P0304 B21 BRN
No. 5 P0305 B10 BLK/RED
Wire side of female term inals No. 6 P0306 B11 BRN/WHT
PCM CONNECTOR B.(44P)

NO—Repair open in the wire between the ignition

coil and the ignition coil relay, then go to step 53.
26. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
1 GND
(BLK)
2
3
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ignition and the ignition coil, then go to step 53.
coil, G101, and G102, then go to step 53.
NO—Go to step 30.
30. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition 31. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4).
coil 3P connector terminal No. 1 and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal of the 32. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
problem cylinder (see table).
33. Measure voltage between body ground and the
PROBLEM DTC - PCM WIRE appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
No. 1 P0301 B26 YEL/GRN PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE r
No. 2 P0302 B27 BLU/RED CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 3 P0303 B20 WHT/BLU No. 1 P0301- B4 BRN
No. 4 P0304 B21 BRN No. 2 P03G2 B8 RED
No. 5 P0305 B10 BLK/RED No. 3 P0303 'B7 BLU
No. 6 P0306 B11 BRN/WHT No. 4 P0304 B6 YEL
IGNIT ION COIL 3P CONNECTOR N0 . 6 P0306 B9 WHT/BLU
IGPLS z \
3NJ2 (RED)
3
IGPLS5
(BLK/RED) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
....r i ... .....

IGPLS3 h i 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
■ 10
(WHT/BLU) 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
IGPLS1
26 27 28 29|30131132 33 34 35
(YEL/GRN) 136137 38139 140141 142 4 3 1441
INJ4 (YEL)
I NJ5 (BLK/RED) INJ3 (BLU)
r
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR 11 1 2 3 | 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
IGPLS / \ ■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
1 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38139 14 0 141 142 4 3 |44 |
W ire side of female terminals Terminal side of female term inals

IGPLS6
(BRN/WHT) PCM CONNECTOR i (44P) Is there battery voltage?
IGPLS4 | 1 | 2 3 |4 |5 | 6 | 7 8 i 9 i YES—Go to step 41.

■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a
(BRN)
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■ NO—Go to step 34.
IGPLS2 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
(BLU/RED) 136 137 38139 |4G 141 |42 4 3 |4 4 |
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM and

the ignition coil, then go to step 53.
(cont'd)
34. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 39. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
35. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the
problem cylinder. PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
36. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). No. 1 P0301 B4 BRN
No. 2 P0302 B8 RED
37. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector No. 3 P0303 B7 BLU
terminal No. 1 and body ground. No. 4 P0304 B6 YEL
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
P C M CONNECTOR B (44P)
INJ2 (RED)
INJ6 (WHT/BLU)
INJ1 (BRN)
I QP (YEL/BLK)
n n
| 1 | 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I sI
■ ■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 24 25
/
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
I3 6 137 3 8 139 |4 0 1 41 142 4 3 14 4 1

INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5 (BLK/RED) I NJ3 (BLU)
... r
NO—Repair open in the wire between the injector | 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 ‘ e T fT
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a
and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), then go to step a 20 21 22 / 24 25 1
50. 26 27 28 29(30(31 (32 33 34 35
136137 38|39|40|41 142 4 3 1441

and the injector, then go to step 53.
NO—Go to step 40.

40. Check for continuity between appropriate injector 41. At the injector side, measure resistance between
2P connector terminal No. 2 and the appropriate injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
PCM connector terminal of the problem cylinder
(see table).
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
No. 1 P0301 B4 BRN
1 2
No. 2 P0302 B8 RED
No. 3 P0303 B7 BLU INJ
No. 4 P0304
1GP
B6 YEL
Wire side of
1 2 female term inals
INJ
Is there 10—13 Q?
INJ1 (BRN) »NJ2 (RED) INJ6 (WHT/BLU) NO—Replace the injector (see page 11-222 ), then
go to step 53.
PCM | 1 | 2 3 |4 I 5 I 6 I7 8 I 9 I
CONNECTOR ■ 10 11 12
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
B (44P) ■ 20 21 22 42. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
/ 24 25 ■
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35 with the one from another cylinder. Also check the
|36|37 38 139|40 141 142 431441 injector fuel inlet screen for debris, and clean if
needed.
43. Reconnect all connectors, and install the intake
manifold (see page 9-6).
Wire side of 44. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
female terminals
45. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
46. Start the engine, and let it idle without load for
2 minutes (in Park or neutral).
...r
PCM I i 2 3 I4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 ] 9 I
CONNECTOR I 10 11 12
13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
B (44P) ■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 34 35
136137 38 (39 |40 141 142 4 3 1441

terminals at the injector and PGM-FI main relay 1
(FI MAIN), then go to step 41.

the injector, then go to step 53.
(cont'd)
47. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 50. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
51. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
• ENGINE SPEED test; J35A9 engine (see page 6-6 ), J35Z1 engine
• VSS (see page 6-61).
• RELTP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value) Did the engine pass both tests?
• GEAR POSITION
• ECT SENSOR 1 Y E S -
* J35A9 engine: Go to step 52.
48. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 * J35Z1 engine: Go to step 61.
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes NO—Repair the engine, then go to step 53.
with the HDS.
52. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7).
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, Did the engine pass the test?
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO—Repair the VTEC rocker arm, then go to step
NO—Intermittent failure due to poor contact in the ■ 53.
injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the 53. Reconnect all connectors.
injector. ■
54. Resetthe PCM with the HDS.
49. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
55. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
injector was exchanged? 56. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
YES—Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-222), 57. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
then go to step 53.
NO—Go to step 50.

58. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 61. Reconnect all connectors.
range of these recorded freeze data parameters;
•ENGINE SPEED software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
• VSS good PCM (see page 11-8).
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value) 63. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
• GEAR POSITION range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
•ECTSENSOR 1
• ENGINE SPEED
59. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. - VSS
• RELTP SENSOR
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or • CLV (calculated load value)
P0306 indicated? • GEAR POSITION
• ECT SENSOR 1
terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the 64. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
PCM, then go to step 1.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
NO—Go to step 60. P0306 indicated?
60. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, YES—Check for poor connections or loose
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
with the HDS. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 63. If the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other NO—Go to step 65.


connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshootlng {cont'd)
65. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,

with the HDS.

go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting m

connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 63.
D1C P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C42 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C144P)
r
1 1 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 | 9 |
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
13613T 38139140141 [42 431441
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at KS (RED/BLU)
4. Hold the engine speed at 3,000--4,000 rpm for at

least 10 seconds. Terminal side of female term inals
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there continuity?
Is DTC P0325 indicated? YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C42) and the knock sensor subharness, then go to
YES—Goto step 6 . step 19. r
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO—Go to step 11.

at the knock sensor and the PCM. ■ 11 . Connect the knock sensor subharness I P connector
terminal to body ground with a jumper wire.
KNOCK SENSOR SUBHARNESS
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. IP CONNECTOR
8 . Disconnect the knock sensor subharness 1P

connector.
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). JUMPER WIRE KS (RED/BLU)
(cont'd)
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 16. Check for an open in the knock sensor subharness.
Is the harness OK?
YES—Goto step 17.

11 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 a I 9 1
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ NO—Repair open in the knock sensor subharness,
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
then go to step 19.
26 27 28 / 1 30131132 33 34 35
13613T 38|39|40|41 142 43|44| 17. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-229).
KS (RED/BLU)
18. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-6) and
injector base.

22 . Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
(C42) and the knock sensor subharness, then go to 23. Hold the engine speed at 3,000—4,000 rpm for at
step 19. least 10 seconds.
13. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-4) and

injector base.
14. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector.
15. Check for continuity between the knock sensor

subharness 1P connector terminal and body
ground.

IP CONNECTOR
Is there continuity ?
YES—Repair short in the knock sensor subharness,

then goto step 18.
NO—Go to step 16.

24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the
terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM, then go YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
to step 26. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 1 1-230). If any other
NO—Go to step 25. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 29,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
Does the screen indicate PASSED? and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 27. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 24, screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 27.

connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 23.


28. Hold the engine speed at 3,000—4,000 rpm for at

least 10 seconds.

terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM. If the
(see page 11-8), then go to step 27. If the PCM was
NO—Go to step 30.

DTC P0335: CKP Sensor A No Signal 8 . Measure voltage between CKP sensor A/B 6 P
connector terminal No. 6 (No. 3) * and body ground.
DTC P0385: CKP Sensor B No Signal
CKP SENSOR A/B 6P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1 2 3 4 5 6
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to IGP (YEL/BLK)* IGP (YEL/BLK)
CKP sensor B.
2 . Clear the DTC with the HDS.

4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Is DTC P0335 and/or P0385* indicated? YES—Goto step 9.
YES—Go to step 5. NO—Repair open in the wire between CKP sensor

A/B and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), then go to
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this step 18.
at CKP sensor A/B and the PCM. ■ 9. Measure voltage between CKP sensor A/B 6 P
connector terminal No. 5 (No. 2) * and body ground.
' CKP SENSOR A/B 6P CONNECTOR
6 . Disconnect CKP sensor A/B 6 P connector (see page
11-228).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1 2 3 4 5 6

CKPB (BLU/RED)* CKPA (BLU)
Wire side of fem al e terminals
Is there about 5 V?
NO—Go to step 11.

s
10. Measure voltage between CKP sensor A/B 6 P 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector terminals No. 4 (No. 1)* and No. 6 terminal B24 (B41 )* and CKP sensor A/B 6 P
(No. 3)*. connector No. 5 (No. 2)*.
CKP SENSOR A /B 6P CONNECTOR

CKP SENSOR A /B §P CONNECTOR
LO
CD
1 2 3 4
LG (BRN/YEL) r ® i IGP (YEL/BLK) W ire side of female terminals CKPA (BLU)
2 3 5 6 (S)
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) CKPA(BLU)
LG (BRN/YEL)* IGP (YEL/BLK)*
3--------------------- ------ _ £
I 1.1 2 3 |4 | 5 I 6 j 7 6H 9 |
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18i 19 ■
1 20 21 22 / 24I- 25 ■
Wire side of female terminals 26 27 28 29|30(31 (32 33 34I- 35
136137 38139 140 14-1 |42 4 3 (4 4 |
CKPB (BLU/RED)*
NO—Repair open in the wire between CKP sensor
A/B and G101, then go to step 18. YES—Goto step 15.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM B24
(B41)* and CKP sensor A/B, then go to step 18.
13. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). terminal B24 (B41)* and body ground.
....r1_
HCzzT .._c1,
LO
CD
Tfr
It 1 | 2 3 7 8 |9 T
[«
10 11 12 13|14|15(16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|31 (32 33 3 I 35
13 6 137 3 8 139 |40 141 |42 4 3 M
1r
CKPA (BLU)
CKPB (BLU/RED)

(B24 (B41)*) and CKP sensor A/B, then go to
step 18.
NO—Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
17. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-228).
23. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 1 1-5).

terminals at CKP sensor A/B and the PCM, then go
to step 1.


software (see page 11 -7), or substitute a known-

terminals at CKP sensor A/B and the PCM. If the

DTC P0339:CKP Sensor A Circuit Intermittent 6 . Check for damage to the CKP sensor A/B pulse
Interruption plate on the timing belt drive pulley; J35A9 engine
(see page 6-25), J35Z1 engine (see page 6-82).
DTC P0389: CKP Sensor B Circuit Intermittent
Interruption Is there damage?
NOTE; YES—Replace CKP sensor A/B pulse plate/timing

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and belt drive pulley; J35A9 engine (see page 6-25),
any on-board snapshot, and review the general J35Z1 engine (see page 6-82), then go to step 9.
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to NO—Go to step 7.
CKP sensor B.
8 . Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-228). .
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
• ENGINE SPEED 11 . Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.

• VSS
13. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 1 1-5).
YES—Go to step 5. range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this • ENGINE SPEED

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals • VSS
at CKP sensor A/B and the PCM. ■
5. Check for poor or loose connections at these
connectors and terminals: Is DTC P0339 and/or P0389* indicated?
• CKP sensor A/B YES—Check for poor connections or loose

• PCM terminals at CKP sensor A/B and the PCM, then go
• Engine ground to step 1.
• Body ground
Are the connections OK ? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES—Goto step 6 .
NO—Reconnect or repair the connectors or

terminals, then go to step 9.
DTC P0340: CMP Sensor No Signal 9. Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
2 . Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is DTC P0340 indicated? W ire side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 5.
Is there about 5 V?
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals YES—Goto step 10.
at the CMP sensor and the PCM. ■
NO—Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P
6 . Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector. connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
8 . Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P

CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

LG
(BRN/YEL)
IGP
(YEL/BLK) Wire side of female terminals
W ire side of fem ale terminals YES—Go to step 16.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the CMP

Is there battery voltage? sensor and G 101; then go to step 18.
YES—Goto step9.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the CMP

sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), then go
to step 18.
r 3
11 . Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor 3P

terminal B32 and CMP sensor 3P connector 1 2 3
terminal No. 1.
CMP (YEL)
1
CMP (YEL) Wire side of
female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) CMP (YEL)

r Is there continuity ?
h 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 |9 |
■
10 11 12 13|14|15|1:5 17 18 19
1 YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
■ 20 21 22 24 25 (B32) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
■
26 27 28 29|30|31 \S2>33 34 35
136137i 3 8 139 140 i 41 142 4 3 14 4 1
NO—Go to step 26.

(B32) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 1 1-228).
23. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).

terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.



terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the

DTC P0344: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent 6 . Check for damage to the CMP sensor pulse >
Interruption projection on the front camshaft pulley (see page
11 - 228 ).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is there damage?
YES—Replace the front camshaft pulley (see page
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11-228), then go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ' NO—Go to step 7.
3. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8 . Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-228).
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
Is DTC P0344 indicated? 11. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
YES—Goto step 5. 12. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 13. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 1 1-5).
at the CMP sensor and the PCM. ■ 14. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
5. Check for poor or loose connections at these
connectors and terminals: • ENGINE SPEED
° VSS
• CMP sensor
• PCM 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Engine ground
• Body ground Is DTC P0344 indicated?
Are the connections OK ? YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go
YES—Go to step 6 . to step 1.
NO—Reconnect or repair the connectors or NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

terminals, then go to step 9. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
DTC P0562: Charging System Low Voltage 11. Check under these conditions:
NOTE: • A/C on
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • Temperature control at maximum cool
any on-board snapshot, and review the general • Blower fan at maximum speed
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Headlights on high beam
• If any high current load accessories are installed, this • Rear window defogger on
DTC can be set
• If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time 12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC neutral) for 1 minute.
first, then recheck for DTC P0562.
3. Start the engine. terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
4. Check under these conditions:
• A/C on Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
• Temperature control at maximum cool indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
• Blower fan at maximum speed
• Headlights on high beam
• Rear window defogger on
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or

neutral) for 1 minute.
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), then

go to step 7.

at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and check the battery performance (see page
22-81 ) . ■
8 . Reset the PCM with the HDS.

DTC P0563: PCM Power Source Circuit 10. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
Unexpected Voltage A 6 and body ground.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general MRLY (BLK/WHT)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). ( — — — .- r — it
r
CD
CO
LO
CD
7
00
I1I2
■ 10 11 12 / 1 14 I / I / 17 18 19
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ■
20 21 22 23 24 25
■ 26 27 28 291 /| 31 [ / 33 34 35 ■
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 381 / | / | 41 142 43|44|
4. Wait 10 seconds.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Terminal side of female terminals
6 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Is DTC P0563 indicated? YES—Go to step 14.
YES—Goto step 7. NO—Goto step 11.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11 . Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A).
at PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), the No. 46 ACGS
(15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
the PCM.B
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).

12. Remove ignition coil relay (A). 15. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
16. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal

B3 and body ground.
IGP (YEL/BLK)
r ... •..... ri
| 1 | 2 3 H .r s T e T T 1 8 | 9 |
■ 10 ■
11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136137 38139 |40 141 |42 4 3 1441
■n— t ... ..—1
—r— cr


MRLY (BLK/WHT)
r ....:. r YES—Go to step 17.
1 1 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I.
a 10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
■ NO—Go to step 28.
20 21 22 23 24 25
■ 26 27 28 291 /]3 1 1 / 33 34 35 ■
17. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A).
F 1 / 381 / | / | 41 142 431441

(A6 ) and the PGM-FS main relay 1 (FI MAIN), then
go to step 20 .
NO—Go to step 19.
14. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P).

.< r *
18. Measure voltage between PGM connector terminal 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
B3 and body ground.
IGP (YEL/BLK) terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the
i . i.■ . ...,. PCM, then go to step 1.
11 12 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9
I ■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
B 20 21 22
/ 24 25 i Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 139 14 0 141 142 4 3 1441


Is there battery voltage? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
the PCM (B3) and the PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI 31. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
MAIN), then go to step 20.
NO—Go to step 19.
19. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (see page terminals at the PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and
22-82). the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then recheck. If
Is PGM-FI main relay 1 (F I MAIN) OK ? the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
YES—Go to step 29. NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

NO—Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), then original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
go to step 20 . Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
20 . Reconnect all connectors.
25. Wait 10 seconds.

DTC P0S02: PCM Programming Error DTC P0603: PCM Internal Control Module
Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
any on-board snapshot, and review the general and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• This DTC is indicated when a PCM update is not
completed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before 2 . Clear the DTC with the HDS.
completion, the PCM can be damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (see page 11-7).
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
YES—Goto step 4.
YES—Replace the original PCM (see page 11-230). tim e .*

NO—The update is complete.* software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES—If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-

good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM

DTC P0830; VIN Not Programmed or 8. Check for-Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. ,
Mismatch
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES—Go to step .9.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
• This DTC is stored only when the PCM does not have time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
the VIN information of the vehicle. Use the HDS to indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
input the missing VIN information. troubleshooting ■
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
2 . Checkthe VIN with the HDS; good PCM (see page 11-8).
Does the HDS show the vehicle’s VIN? 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 5. Is DTC P0630 indicated?
NO—Go to step 3. YES—If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-

3. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. was substituted, go to step 1.
Does the screen show COMPLETE? NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YES—Go to step 5. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
NO—Goto step 4. indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Go to the DTC P0603troubleshooting.■
NO—Go to step 9.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 5 seconds.

DTC P0641: Sensor Reference Voltage A 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Malfunction
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO—Replace the APP sensor (see page 11-275),
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. then go to step 63.
Is DTC P0641 indicated? 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Go to step 4. 15. Disconnect the front A/F sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1)
8 P connector.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
at the PCM and these connectors:*
• MAP sensor
• APP sensor 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Front/rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
• IMT actuator (J35Z1 engine) Is DTC P0641 indicated?
• EGR valve
• FTP sensor YES—Go to step 19.
• Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
• Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor NO—Replace the front A/F sensor (Bank 2,
• EOP sensor (J35Z1 engine) Sensor 1) (see page 11-224), then go to step 63.
• TP sensor
20. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1)
5. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. 8P connector.
6 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 22 . Clear the DTC with the HDS.
8 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0641 indicated? Is DTC P0641 indicated?
YES—Go to step 9. YES-

• J35A9 engine: Go to step 29.
NO—Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-227), • J35Z1 engine: Go to step 24.
then go to step 63.
NO—Replace the rear A/F sensor (Bank 1 , Sensor 1)
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (see page 11-224), then go to step 63.
10. Disconnect the APP sensor 6 P connector.

24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.- 39. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
25. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector. 40. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor 3P connector.
Is DTC P 0 6 4 1 indicated?
NO—Replace the IMT actuator (see page 11-405),
then go to step 63. NO—Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor (see page 14-209), then go to step 63.
30. Disconnect the EGR valve 6 P connector.
45. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
31. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). sensor 3P connector.
32. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 46. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
33. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 47. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is DTC P0641 indicated? 48. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 34. Is DTC P0641 indicated?
NO—Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-429), YES-

then go to step 63. • J35A9 engine: Go to step 54.
• J35Z1 engine: Go to step 49
NO—Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed
35. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector. sensor (see page 14-209), then go to step 63.
NO—Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-461),

then go to step 63.
49. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 62. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminals A19, A25, B18, B19, C12,
50. Disconnect the EOP sensor 3P connector. and C13 individually.
51. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM CONNECTORS

VCC7 (YEL/BLU)
52. Clear the DTC with the HDS. A (44P)
I 1 I 2 ‘.3.1.4.1.5.1.6.17 r a Is
1 10 11 12 / i 14 l / i / 17 18 19 VCC4
53. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. a (WHT)
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 26 27 28 2 9 l /l3 1 p 33 34 35
Is DTC P0641 indicated? 1 3 6 1 / 38 l / l / l 41 142 4 3 1441
NO—Replace the EOP sensor (see page 11-304),

then go to step 63.
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
B (44P)
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 I 9 I VCC5
55. Disconnect the TP sensor 6 P connector. I 10 11 12
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
a (BLU)
1 20 21 22 / 24 25 1
56. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38|39|40|41 142 43 |44|

C (44P)
VCC6 (YEL/BLU) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
ll ll
NO—Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408), 1 1 1 2 3 |■ 4 T 5 f e T 7 8 I 9 I
a
10 11 12'I3|14|15[16 17 18 19 a
then go to step 63.
1
20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28,/|30|31132 33 34 35
59. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 136137 38139140141 42 4 3 |44|
61. Disconnect PCM connectors A (44P), B (44P), and

C (44P).

(A19, A25, B18, B19, C12, or C13) and each sensor,
then go to step 63.
NO—Go to step 69.

63. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 69. Reconnect all connectors.
64. Reconnect all connectors. 70. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
65. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). good PCM (see page 11-8).
66 . Reset the PCM with the HDS. 71. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
67. Do the PGM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). Is DTC P0641 indicated?
68. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the PCM and these connectors:
• MAP sensor
YES—Check for poor connections or loose • APP sensor
terminals at the PCM and these connectors: • Front/rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
• IMT actuator (J35Z1 engine)
• MAP sensor • EGR valve
• APP sensor • FTP sensor
• Front/rear A/F sensor (Sensor 1) • Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
• IMT actuator (J35Z1 engine) • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
• EGR valve • EOP sensor (J35Z1 engine)
• FTP sensor • TP sensor
• Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
• Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
• EOP sensor (J35Z1 engine) PCM (see page 11-8 ), then recheck. If the PCM was
• TP sensor substituted, go to step 1.
After checking the above, go to step 1. NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.* indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
DTC P0685: PCM Power Control Circuit/ 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Internal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES—If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
any on-board snapshot, and review the general good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step 10. If the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). PCM was substituted, go to step 1,
• If the problem doesn't return after you clear the DTC,
or if this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
terminals at the IGP line connectors before replacing complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
the PCM. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
3. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
YES—Goto step 9.

time.B


DTC P0700: A/T Control System Malfunction DTC P1109:.-BARO Sensor Circuit Out of
Range High
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
any on-board snapshot, and review the general and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
* This DTC is stored when there is a problem in the A/T
control system. Check for A/T DTCs with the HDS, and 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
2 . Start the engine.
YES—Go to step 4.

time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting. ■



DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Range/ 10. Note the ambient temperature.
Performance Problem
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do
NOTE: not install it on the engine.
* Before you troubleshoot, record ail freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116, 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DATA LIST with the HDS.
DTC P1116.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
1. Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals at ambient temperature.
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4 °F
Are the connections and terminals OK? (3 °C) or more?
YES—Goto step 2. YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226), then

go to step 27.
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 27. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.B
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
Are DTC P 1 116 and P2183 indicated at the same 16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
time? HDS.
YES—Goto step 15. Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less indicated?
NO—Go to step 4. YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226), then

go to step 27.
NO—Goto step 17.
HDS. 17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less indicated? 18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226), then
goto step 27. Is about 154 °F (68 °C) or less indicated?
NO—Go to step 6 . YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-226), then

go to step 27.
NO—Go to step 19.
7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
8 . Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226).
9. Allow ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambient temperature.

21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226), and ECT

sensor 2 (see page 11-226).
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
23. Note the ambient temperature.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P

connectors, but do not install them on the engine.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR-1 and ECT

SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does one of the sensor differ more than 5.4 °F

(3 °C) from the ambient temperature?
YES—Replace the sensor, that differed more than

5.4 °F (3 °C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.B


indicated DTCfs troubleshooting.■
DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than 8 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Expected
9. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-227).
1. Inspect the air cleaner element (see page 11-402).
Is it OK?
YES—Go to step 2. 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
NO—Clean or replace the air cleaner element
(see page 11-402). 14. Test-drive under these conditions:
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 °F (70 °C)
3. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the • Engine speed between 1,200 and 5,500 rpm
HDS. • Transmission in D position
• Vehicle speed accelerated from 16—31 mph
Is there less than 54.1 kPa (16.0 in.Hg, 406 mmHg) (25—50 km/h) under half throttle
or 1.61 V held for more than 5 seconds?
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the NO—Go to step 16.
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTCP1128 in the
6 . Test-drive under these conditions: DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) Does the screen indicate PASSED?
above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Engine speed between 1,200 and 5,500 rpm YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
• Transmission in D position Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15,
• Vehicle speed accelerated from 16—31 mph go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
(25—50 km/h) under half throttle
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
DTCs MENU with the HDS. and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 5 and recheck.
g51
DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher than 6 . Monitor the OBD STATUS-for DTC P1129 in the
Expected DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the screen indicate FAILED?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES—Go to step 7.
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
• PCV valve poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
• PCV hose sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
• EVAP canister purge valve COMPLETED, go to step 5 and recheck.
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• Brake booster
• Brake booster hose 8 . Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-227).
Are there any vacuum leaks? 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Repair or replace parts with vacuum leaks, 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
then go to step 9.
NO—Go to step 2 .
12 . Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
2 . Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
HDS. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 °F (70 °C)
Is there more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg, • Engine speed between 1,200 and 5,500 rpm
277 mmHg) or 1.14 V held for more than • Transmission in D position
5 seconds? • Drive 10 seconds at 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h)
• Vehicle speed decelerated from more than
YES—Go to step 7. 55 mph (88 km/h) with the throttle fully closed for
at least 2 seconds
NO—Go to step 4.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
above 158 °F (70 °C) to step 1.
• Engine speed between 1,200 and 5,500 rpm
• Transmission in D position NO—Goto step 15.
• Drive 10 seconds at 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h)
• Vehicle speed decelerated from more than
55 mph (88 km/h) with the throttle fully closed for
at least 2 seconds
(confd)



connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
m
DTC P1172: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High
Is DTC P f 172 and/or P 1174* indicated?
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High YES—Check for poor connections or loose'
NOTE: then go to step 1.
any on-board snapshot, and reviewthe general NO—Go to step 12.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3 ).
• Information marked with an asterisk ( ’) applies to the 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 and/or
front bank (Bank 2). P1174* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Does the screen indicate PASSED?
2 . Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
3.000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1172 and/or P1174* (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
Does the screen indicate FAILED? CONDITION, go to step 10.
YES—Go to step 5.

poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
6 . Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-224).

DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11 -3). T=T
1 2 ■3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). [a 10 11 12
/ 1 1 4 1 /1 / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 1
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 26 27 28 2 9 1 /3 1 1 / 33>34 35
381 / | / | 41 ]4? 431441
ur— 1.—1.
Is 72 A or more indicated? ELD (GRN/RED)
YES—Goto step3.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Terminal side of fem ale terminals
at the ELD and the PCM. ■
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. (A23) and the ELD, then go to step 13.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO—Go to step 19.
6 . Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is 72 A or more indicated? 12. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page
22-79).
YES—Goto step7.
NO—Goto step 11.
15. Resetthe PCM with the HDS.
18. Turn on the headlights.


terminals at the ELD and the PCM, then go to step
1.


22 . Start the engine.
23. Turn on the headlights.

terminals at the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8 ), then go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted,
goto step 1.

DTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8 . Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A23 and ELD 3P connector terminal No. 3.
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
Is 0.2 A or less indicated?
YES—Go to step 3. Wire side of ELD (GRN/RED)

female terminals
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) ELD (GRN/RED)
at the ELD and the PCM. B 1 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |_
■ 10 11 12
/ | 1 4 M / 17'18 19 ■
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
■ 26 27 28
2 9 L / N 7 33•34 35
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. 3 6 / M / I Z L i l M 43 |44l

6 . Measure voltage between ELD 3P connector Is there continuity ?

ELD 3P CONNECTOR
(A23) and the ELD, then go to step 13.
3
IG1 (BLU /W HT)
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 9

LAF (A/F SENSOR) (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary
under-hood fuse box and the ELD, then go to step
13.
k 8S
11. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector 18. Update the' PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal No. 2 and body ground. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
Is DTC P 1298 indicated?
GND(BLK) YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
Wire side of female terminals NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
NO—Repai r open in the wire between the ELD and

G201, then go to step 13.
12. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page

22-79).
16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359)

DTC P1549; Charging System High Voltage 10. Start the engine.
NOTE: 11. Check under these conditions:

any on-board snapshot, and review the general • A/C off
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Headlights off
• If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to • Rear window defogger off
the vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). neutral) 1 minute.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Is DTC P1549 indicated?
4. Check under these conditions: YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
• A/C off fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
• Headlights off
• Rear window defogger off NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
neutral) 1 minute.

go to step 7.

at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay
box.il

DTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit 8. Check for an open in the wire between the
Low Voltage alternator and under-hood fuse/relay box at the
starter subharness.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is the harness OK ?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO—Repair open in the wire between the
alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then
3. Start the engine. go to step 9.
4. Check under these conditions: 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• A/C on 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

• Temperature control at maximum cool
• Blower fan at maximum speed 11 . Dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page.11-359),
• Rear window defogger on 12. Start the engine.
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or 13. Check under these conditions:
neutral) 1 minute.
• A/C on
6 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. • Temperature control at maximum cool
Is DTC P16BB indicated? • Headlights on high beam
• Rear window defogger off
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this neutral) 1 minute.
at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,' 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
and check the battery performance (see page
22-81). 11 is DTC P16BB indicated?
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES—Check for poor connections or loose
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
(+B line). fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
Are the connections and terminals OK? NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES—Go to step-8.- indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to

step 9.
DTC P16BC: Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/ 8 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
IGP Circuit Low Voltage
Is DTC P16BC indicated?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES—Go to step 9.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
the alternator 4P connector. at the alternator. ■
Are the connections and terminals OK ? 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Goto step 2. 10. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
NO—Repair the connections or terminals, then go 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
to step 19.
12. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector
2. Check the alternator mounting surfaces for terminal No. 1 and body ground.
corrosion.
Are the mounting surfaces corroded?
IG1
YES—Remove the alternator (see page 4-36). Clean (BLK/YEL)
all mounting surfaces, then reinstall the alternator, 1 2
and goto step 20 . 3 4
NO—Go to step 3.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

6 . Check under these conditions:
• A/C on
• Temperature control at maximum cool NO—Repair open in the wire between the
• Blower fan at maximum speed alternator (IG 1 line) and the No. 6 FI-ECU (15 A)
• Headlights on high beam fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, then
• Rear window defogger on go to step 19.

neutral) 1 minute.
13. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal No. 4 and body ground. terminal C41 and body ground.

| 1 | 2 3 | 4 |5 | 6 | 7 8 1 9 1
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
ALTF
(W HT/RED) I 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |40|41 |42 4 3 14 4 1
ALTF
(WHT/RED)

/s f/iere about 5 V? Is there continuity?
YES—Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), then YES—Go to step 27.
go to step 19.
NO—Go to step 14. (C41) and the alternator, then go to step 19.
15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 to 22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
body ground with a jumper wire.
• A/C on
1 2
3 4 • Blower fan at maximum speed
ALTF • Headlights on high beam
W HT/RED) • Rear window defogger on
JUMPER WIRE
neutral) 1 minute.
(cont'd)

terminals at the alternator and the PCM, then go to
step 1.


• A/C on
• Rear window defogger on

neutral) 1 minute.

terminals at the alternator and the PCM, then go to
good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step 29. If the

DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Range/ 11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do
Performance Problem not install it on the engine.
NOTE: 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

any on-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). DATA LIST with the HDS.
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P2183,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC 14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 to the
P2183. ambient temperature.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Does ECT SENSOR 2 d iffe r 5.4 °F (3 °C) or
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. more?
Are the connections and terminals OK ? YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-226), then
go to step 27.
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
step 27. at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.B
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same
time? Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less indicated?
YES—Go to step 15. YES—Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226), then
go to step 27.
NO—Go to step 4.
NO—Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
HDS. 18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 154 °F (68 °C) or less indicated?
Is about 154 °F (68 °C) or less indicated?
YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-226), then
go to step 27. YES—Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-226), then
go to step 27.
NO—Go to step 6 .
NO—Go to step 19.
8 . Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-226).
9. Allow ECT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
(cont'd)
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-226), and ECT

sensor 2 (see page 11-226).
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2 P connector, and ECT

sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install them
on the engine.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT

SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does one of the sensor differ more than 5.4 °F

(3 °C) from the ambient temperature?
YES—Replace the sensor that differed more than

5.4 °F (3 *€) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. ■
Is DTC P 2 183 indicated?


DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general :‘ ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR V

ECT2 (GRN/RED)
HDS.
(0 )
Is about 180 °C (356 °F) or more#or 0.08 V or less
indicated?
YES—Go to step 3. W ire side of fe m ale te rm in a ls

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. ■
YES—Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2 and the PCM (C36), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector. NO—Go to step 18.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-226).
HDS.
Is about 180 °C (356 °F) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated? 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Goto step?. 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 11. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). YES—Check for poor connections or loose

step 1.




DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High . . 8 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Voltage
9. Remove the jumper wire from ECT sensor 2 2P
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data connector.
1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1 1. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
HDS. ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

more indicated?
1 2
YES—Go to step 3. ECT2 (GRN/RED)

at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM B
4. Disconnect ECT sensor 2 2P connector.

Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2 with a jumper wire. YES—Go to step 12.
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR NO—Goto step 16.
2 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

ECT2 (GRN/RED) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.

more indicated?
NO—Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminal Cl 4 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector
terminal No. 2. 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR 18. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
1 2 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector

SG2 (GRN/YEL) Wire side of terminal C36 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector
female terminals terminal No. 1.
SG2 (GRN/YEL) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
/ v ,
I 1 I 2 3 I4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I Wire side of
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ 2 female terminals
23 24 25 ECT2 (GRN/RED)
1 20 / 22 1
CO
CO
B
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
136137 38139 140141 142 43 1441

11 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 I
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /130|31132 33 34 35
YES—Go to step 27. ECT2 H36137 38|39|40|41 142 4 3 1441
(GRN/RED)
(C14) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
YES—Goto step 27.

(C36) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
Is DTC P 2 185 Indicated?

step 1.




DTC P2195: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 6 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
DTC P2197; Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 2, 11-224).
Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
* Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the
front bank (Bank 2). 11 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC Is DTC P 2 195 and/or P 2 197* indicated?
with the HDS.
* If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, or a YES—Check for poor connections or loose
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122, and P2138 terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
or P2127 and P2138 is stored at the same time, then go t & step 1.
troubleshoot them first, then recheck for DTC P2195
and/or P2197*. NO—Go to step 12.
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1). 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 and/or
Is the A/F sensor loose or disconnected from the
exhaust pipe? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES—Go to step 6 . YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 1 1,
NO—Goto step 2. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. until a result comes on.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 13. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Is DTC P2195 and/or P2197* indicated? good PCM (see page 11-8 ).
YES—Check for poor connections or loose 14. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
then goto step 13.

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■

was substituted/go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 16.



(Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Circuit Range/ 7. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Performance Problem software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
• If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored
at the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those 9. Test-drive under these conditions:
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2227.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds. above 158°F(70 °C)
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with • REL TP SENSOR between 14 deg and 28 deg for
the HDS. 3 seconds
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
2.9 V at sea level indicated?
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Go to step 7. terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. go to step 8. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the NO—Go to step 11.
5. Test-drive under these conditions: DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) Does the screen indicate PASSED?
above 158 °F (70 «C)
• Transmission in D position YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
• REL TP SENSOR between 14 deg and 28 deg for complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
3 seconds original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
6 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Does the screen indicate FAILED? connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
YES—Go to step 7. (see page 11-8), then go to step 8 . If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent NOT COMPLETED, go to step 8 .
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and
recheck.
DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage DTC P2229:BARO Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is about 53 kPa (15.6 in.Hg, 397 mmHg), or 1.58 V
or less indicated? Is about 160 kPa (47.2 in.Hg, 1,200 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more indicated?
YES—Go to step 3,
YES—Go to step 3.
time.H NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- 3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
good PCM (see page 11-8). software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, YES—Check for poor connections or loose
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8 ), then terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 1 1-8), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting M
DTC P2237: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage 8 P connector terminal No. 7 and PCM connector
terminal B28(B29)\
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:
1 2 3 4
/
1PB1 (GRN)
6 7 8
IPB2 (GRN/RED)*
front bank (Bank 2). PCIVI CONNECTOR B (44P)
. . ri-------- ------- -------------- c
CD
00
| 1 | 2 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7
i 10 11 12 13114115|16 17 18 19 ■
i 20 21 22 / 24 25 i
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
13613T 32M33 |40 141 j 42 4 3 144 1
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the IPB1 (GRN) IPB2 (GRN/RED)*
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
Is DTC P2237 and/or P2240* indicated? YES—Go to step 10.
YES—Go to step 5. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(B28 (B29)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this to step 14.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8 P connector.
8 . Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Is DTC P2237 and/or P2240* indicated?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8 P then goto step 1.
NO—Go to step 19.
1 2 3 4 Does the screen indicate PASSED?

/ 6 7 8
1PB1 (GRN) YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
IPB2 (G RN/RED)* Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,

Wire side of female terminals connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
Is there about 0.2 V or less? until a result comes on.
NO—Goto step 13.

11-224).
(cont'd)


PCM (see page 11-8 ), then go to step 23. If the PCM
NO—Go to step 25.


go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.!

DTC P2238: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1; 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage terminal B28 (B29)* and body ground.
DTC P2241: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage
r
NOTE:
I1 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
■ 10 11 12 17 18 19 ■
_CD
CO
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and ■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 26 27 28 29 [30131 (32 33 34 35
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 13 6 137 38|3 3 140 141 142 4 3 1441
1PB1 (GRN) 1PB2 (GRN/RED)*

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Is there continuity?

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. to step 14.
Is D T C P 2 2 3 8 a n d / o r P 2 2 4 1 * in d i c a t e d ? NO—Goto step 10.
YES—Go to step 5. 10. Reconnect PCM connector B (44P).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. ■ radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
(cont'd)
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2238 and/or P224V indicated?
then goto step 1.
1 2 3 4
/ 6 7 8 NO—Go to step 19.
IPB1 (GRN)
IPB2 (GRN/RED)* 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or

Is there about 0.2 V or less? go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
YES—Go to step 20. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO—Go to step 13. (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page until a result comes on.
11-224).


Is DTC P2238 and/or P224T indicated?

NO—Goto step 25.



DTC Troubleshoot ing (cont'd)
DTC.P2243: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage 8P connector terminal No. 8 and PCM connector
terminal B38 (B22)\
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR
NOTE;
1 2 3 4
any on-board snapshot, and review the general VCENTB2 (RED/W HT)*) VCENTB1 (RED)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). W ire side of female terminals
front bank (Bank 2). PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). | 1 | 2 3 |4 |5 |6 |7 8 | 9 |

1 10 11 12 13[14|15|16 17 18 19
■
■ 20 21 22 24 25
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. / *■
VCENTB2 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
(RED/W HT)* 13 6 137 3 8 139 140 141 142 4 3 14 4 1
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the VCENTB1 (RED)
Terminal side of fem al e terminals
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is t h e r e c o n t in u it y ?
Is D T C P 2 2 4 3 a n d / o r P 2 2 4 7 * in d i c a t e d ? YES—Goto step 10.
YES—Go to step 5. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(B38 (B22) *) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this to step 14.

11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Is. DTC P2243 and/or P2247* indicated?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES—Check for poor connections o r loose
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 19. :;
A/FSENSOR (SENSOR 1)8PCONNECTOR
7 16 7 8
VCENTB I(RED) YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
A VCENTB2 (RED/WHT)* Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,

(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then goto step 1. If the
NO—Goto step 13.

11-224).
(cont'd)

If DTC P2243 and/or P2247* indicated?

NO—Go to step 25.


go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*

W S i
DTC P2245: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage terminal B38 (B22) * and body ground.
DTC P2249: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, mm CONNECTORBI44P)

Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
NOTE: VCENTB2 1 ■
10 11 12 1 3 11 4 115116 17 18 19
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and (r e d / w h t >* OI 22
on Zl
/ 24 25 ■
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). ! 36137 3 8 139 14 0 141 142 4 3 14 4 1
front bank (Bank 2). VCENTB1 (RED)

2. Clear the DTC with theHDS.'
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at is there continuity?

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES— Repair short in the wire between the PCM
Is DTC P2245 and/or P2249* indicated? NO—Go to step TO. r
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. ■ radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
(confd)
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
then go to step 1.
1 2 3 4
/ 6 7 8 NO—Go to step 19.
VCENTB1 (RED)
vVCENTB2 (RED/W HT)* 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2245 and/or

Is there about 0.2 V or less? go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
YES—Go to step 20. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
NO—Go to step 13. (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page until a result comes on.
11-224).

tM


NO—Go to step 25.



Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage 8P connector terminal No. 6 and PCM connector
terminal B13 (B14)\
Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:
1 2 3 4
any on-board snapshot, and review the general VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
• If DTC P2251 and/or P2254 * is stored at the same time
P C M CONNECTOR B (44P)
as DTC P0134 and/or P0154*, troubleshoot DTC P2251
and/or P2254* first, then recheck for P0134 and/or VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
P0154*.
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the I 1.1 2 3 I4 I 5 |6 |7 8 | 9 |
I■ to 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 a
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 26 27 28:29|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38139 140141 142 43144|


radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES—Go to step 10.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM
Is DTC P 2 2 5 1 and/or P2254* indicated? to step 14.
YES—Go to step 5.


iH
11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Is DTC P 2251 and/or P2254* indicated?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 19.

/ 6 7 8
V S B I(B L U ) YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
X V S B 2 (RED/BLU)* Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,

NO—Go to step 13.

11-224).
(cont'd)


NO—Go to step 25.



DTC P2252: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage terminal B13 (B14)* and body ground. .
DTC P2255: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage
VSB1(BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
NOTE: i
* Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 11 12 3 k l 5 I 6 [ 7 8 I 9 |
B
10 11 12 13 il 4 115116 17 18 19 i
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
26 27 28 1Z9130|31132 33 34 35
136137 38139 |40 141 |42 4 3 |44|
front bank (Bank 2);


radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B13 (B14D and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
Is DTC P2252 and/or P2255* indicated? NO—Go to step 10.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.H radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
(cont'd)
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 and/or
connector terminal No. 6 and body ground. P2255* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
A /F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) SP CONNECTOR


1 2 3 4 go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
/ 6 7 8
VSB1 (BLU) NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
, VSB2 (RED/BLU)* connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
CV) (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
Is there about 0.2 V or less? 21. Reconnect all connectors.
YES—Go to step 20. 22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
NO—Go to step 13. good PCM (see page 11-8).
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 23. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
11-224).
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS. terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 23. If the PCM
NO—Go to step 25.

then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 19.



DTC P2270: Rear Secondary H 02S (Bank 1, 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
DTC P2271: Rear Secondary H 02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Rich 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
DTC P2272: Front Secondary H 02S (Bank 2, 11 . Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
DTC P2273: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
NOTE: above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • Vehicle speed above 35 mph (56 km/h)
any on-board snapshot, and review the general • Drive 30 seconds or more
• Information marked with an asterisk ( *) applies to the 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P2270, P2271, P2272*, and/or P2273*
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indicated?
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270, P2271,
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) P2272\ and/or P2273* in the DTCs MENU with the
above 158 °F (70 °C) HDS.
• Vehicle speed above 35 mph (56 km/h)
• Drive 30 seconds or more Does the screen indicate PASSED?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270, P2271, YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
P2272*, and/or P2273* in the DTCs MENU with the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
HDS. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Does the screen indicate FAILED? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES—Goto step 6. H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for CONDITION, go to step 11.
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the

11-225).
c m
DTC P2610: PCM Ignition Off Internal Tim er

Malfunction

YES—Go to step 4.

time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs



DTC P2627: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit Low Voltage terminal C10 (Cl 1) * and body ground.

Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit Low Voltage
VLBLB1 3 14 I 5 | 6 17 8 9
NOTE: (WHT)
12 iall4l15ll6 17 18 19
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 20 22 23 24 25
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 26 28 X|30|31 [32 33 34 35
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 36 37 38139140141 |42 43 44
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the VLBLB2 (WHT/RED)*
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at is there continuity?

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES—Go to step 9.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO—Go to step 17.
Is DTC P2627 and/or P2630* indicated? 9. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P connector.
YES—Go to step 5. 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector

terminal C10 (C11)* and body ground.
VLBLB1 11 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (WHT) ■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
✓
■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 26 27’28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38139 140141 142 431441
7. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). VLBLB2 (WHT/RED)*

(C10 (Cl 1) *) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 12.
m

11-224).

then go to step 1.



PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was

Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit High Voltage 8P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
terminal C10 (C11)\
Sensor 1) LABEL Circuit High Voltage
VLBLB1 (WHT) VLBLB2
NOTE: (W HT/RED)*
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 1 2 3 4
any on-board snapshot, and review the general / 6 7 8
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). W ire side of female terminals
VLBLB1 VLBLB2
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (WHT) (W HT/RED)*
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. I 1 I 2 3 I4 I 5 I6 I 7 , S I 9 |

m 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at l 20 / 22 23 24 25

;1
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 136137 38139 |40141 142 431441
Is DTC P2628 and/or P263V indicated?
YES—Goto step 10.
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (CIO (C11)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
time. Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals to step 15.

isSI
10. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 14. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
8P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector 11-224).
terminal C14 (C39)\
A /F S E N SO R (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR
S G 6 (GRN/YEL)* S G 2 (GRN/YEL) 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

1 2 3 4
/ 6 7 8
SG 2 (GRN/YEL)
1 2 3 | 4 ||5 | 6 8 9
13[l4|l5ll6 17 YES—Check for poor connections or loose
22 23 24 25
26 27 28l/l30|31 [32 33 34 35 terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
36 37 38139 [40 [41 ' 42 43 441 then goto step 1.
SG6 (GRN/YEL)*
Is there continuity? indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
YES—Go to step 11. 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM 21. Reconnect all connectors.
(C14 (C39)*) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
to step 15. 22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
11. Reconnect PCM connector C (44P). good PCM (see page 11-8).
12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. Is DTC P2628 and/or P263T indicated?
13. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 8P YES—Check for poor connections or loose
connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 8P CONNECTOR PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
VLBLB1 (WHT)
VLBLB2'(WHT/RED)*
1 2 3 4 NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
/ 6 7 8 complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
W ire side of fem ale te rm ina ls
Is there about 5 V?
NO—Go to step 20.

DTC P2A00: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem 7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-224).
DTC P2A03: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Problem
NOTE;
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Test-drive under these conditions:
front bank (Bank 2). • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158°F(70 °C)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Transmission in D position
• Vehicle speed between 22—55 mph (40 —
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 88 km/h) for 5 minutes, then drive at a steady
speed between 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 10 seconds.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 12. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
4. Test-drive under these conditions: Is DTC P2A00 and/or P2A03* indicated?
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) YES—Check for poor connections or loose
above 158 °F (70 °C) terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
• Transmission in D position then go to step 1.
• Vehicle speed between 22 —55 mph (40 —
88 km/h) for 5 minutes, then drive at a steady NO—Go to step 13.
speed between 55—75 mph (88—120 km/h) for
10 seconds. 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 and/or
P2A03* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 and/or
P2A03* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate FAILED? YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES—Go to step 6. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If it is EXECUTING, screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and CONDITION, go to step 11.
recheck.
r 3
DTC U0073: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) 11. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector B (20P)
(see page 18-82).
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge
Control Module) 12. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A
(22P) (if equipped) (see page 15-48).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). connector (see page 19-100).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals A1 and A36 and body ground individually.
PCM CONNECTOR A.(44P)
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the DTCs CANL (RED)
MENU with the HDS.
1 I 2 3 I4 I 5 I 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1 10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
Is DTC U0073 and/or U0155 indicated? ■
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
1 26 27 28 33 34 35
291/1311/
YES—Go to step 4.
3 6 / 381 / | / | 41 142 431441
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this CANH (WHT)

at the gauge control module, the VSA modulator-
control unit, the navigation unit, the engine mount
control unit, the VTM-4 control unit, the TPMS Terminal side of fem ale terminals
control unit, and the PCM.B
YES—Repair short in the wire between the gauge
5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. control module, the VSA modulator-control unit,
the navigation unit, the engine mount control unit,
6. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). the VTM-4 control unit, the TPMS control unit, the
engine mount control unit, and the PCM (A36 (AD),
7. Remove the gauge control module (see page then go to step 19.
22- 102 ).
NO—Go to step 15.
8. Disconnect the gauge control module connector A
(20P).
9. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P) (if

equipped) (see page 22-508).
10. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P

connector (if equipped) (see page 11-347).
(confd)
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 17. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector
terminals A1 and A36. terminal A1 and these connector terminals:

Connector Terminal
CANL (RED)
Gauge control module A No. 1 (RED)
f
(20P)
T1 8
3
CO
LO
CD
2 I 9 |„
10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
i
20 21 22 23 24 25 VSA modulator-control unit No. 30 (RED)
■ 26 27 28 2 9 [ /l3 ll? 33 34 35 ■
47 P
\
CD
CO
381 / | / | 41 142 431441
CANH (WHT) VTM-4 control unit A (22P) No. 22 (RED)
Terminal side of female terminals TPMS control unit B (20P) No. 10 (RED)
Engine mount control unit No. 17 (RED)

Is there continuity? 20P
YES—Repair short in the wire between PCM Navigation Unit 20P No. 8 (WHT)
connector terminals A1 (CANL line) and A36 (CANH
line), then go to step 19.
Is there continuity between the PCM terminal and
NO—Go to step 16. each of the terminals in the chart?
16. Check for continuity between PCM connector YES—Goto step 18.
terminal A36 and these connector terminals:
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A1)
and the appropriate connector, then go to step 19.
Connector Terminal
Gauge control module A No. 11 (WHT)

(20P)
VSA modulator-control unit No. 14 (WHT)

47 P
VTM-4 control unit A (22P) No. 11 (WHT)
TPMS control unit B (20P) No. 19 (WHT)
Engine mount control unit No. 5 (WHT)

20P
Navigation Unit 20P No. 8 (WHT)
Is there continuity between the PCM terminal and

each of the terminals in the chart?

(A36) and the appropriate connector, then go to
step 19.
18. Referring to the chart below, select the row that 19. Reconnect all connectors.
most closely represents the combination of DTCs
retrieved from the PGM-FI, VSA, VTM-4, and TPMS 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
systems. Then check the connections at the control
module indicated in the last column. If all the 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
connections are OK, substitute the control module.
After substituting the control module, check for 22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
DTCs with the HDS.
PGM-FI VSA VTM-4 TPMS Control
module If DTG. U0073 and/or U0155 indicated?
U0073 86 41-1 85 Gauge
U0155 41-2 control YES—Check for poor connections or loose
module terminals at the gauge control module, the VSA
U0073 68 41-1 85 PCM modulator-control unit, the VTM-4 control unit, the
U0114 86 41-2 TPMS control unit, the engine mount control unit,
U0122 and the PCM, then go to step 1.
U0155
U0073 68 41-1 85 VSA NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
U0122 86 41-2 modulator- Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
U0155 control indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
unit
U0073 68 41-1 85 VTM-4
U0114 86 41-2 control
U0155 unit
U0073 68 41-1 85 TPMS
U0155 86 41-2 control
unit
U0073 68 41-1 85 Engine
U1101 86 41-2 mount
control
unit
Are the DTGs still indicated?
YES—Substitute the remaining control modules,

one at time, until the DTCs are no longer present,
then replace the control module that made the
DTCs go away. After replacing the faulty control
module, go to step 19.
NO—Replace the faulty control module, then go to

step 19.
DTC U0114: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VTM-4 9. Connect VTM-4 control unit 22P connector
Control Unit) terminals A11 and A22* to body ground with a
jumper wire.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). CANH (WHT)
• If DTC U0073 is stored at the same time as DTC
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
U0114, troubleshoot DTC U0073 first, then recheck
for DTC U0114. 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 22
/
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the CANL (RED)* JUMPER
CANL line. WIRE

Is DTC U 0114 indicated? terminal A36 and A l * and body ground individually.

YES—Go to step 4.
CANL (RED)*
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this r
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1 0 11 1 2 / I 1 4 I / I / 1 7 1 8 1 9
at the VTM-4 control unit and the PCM. ■ ■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
a
■
26 27 28 2 9 |/|3 1 ] 7 33 34 35
4. Check for a VTM-4 system DTCs in the DTCs MENU 3 8 | / | / | 4 1 14 2 4 3 |4 4 |
with the HDS.
CANH (WHT)
Is VTM-4 DTC 41 indicated?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Goto step 11.
YES—Substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. (see page 15-48), then go to step 20 and recheck. If
DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the original
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48), then go to step
20 .
8. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P)
(see page 15-48). NO—Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4
control unit (A11 (A22) *) and the PCM (A36 (A1) *),
then go to step 20.
11. Check for poor connections at the VTM-4 control 18. Check for continuity between VTM-4 control unit
unit connectors A (20P) and B (12P). 12P connector terminal B5 and body ground.
Are the connections OK? VTM -4 CONTROL U NIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
YES—Go to step 9.
PG (BLK)
NO—Repair the connections, then go to step 20. 1 2 3 4 5 y
7 / / / 11 12
13. If not already done, disconnect VTM-4 control unit

connector A (22P) (see page 15-48).
St
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). W ire side of female terminals
15. Measure voltage between VTM-4 control unit 22P

connector terminal A1 and body ground. Is there continuity?
VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P) YES—Substitute a known-good VTM-4 control unit
(see page 15-48), then go to step 20 and recheck. If
DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the original
1G1 (YEL) VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48), then go to step
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 20 .
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4
control unit and G602, then go to step 20.
Wire side of female terminals 20. Reconnect all connectors.

NO—Check the No. 11 VTM-4 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
repair open in the wire between the No. 11 VTM-4
(7.5 A) fuse and the VTM-4 control unit, then go to Is DTC U0114 indicated?
step 19.
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminals at the VTM-4 control unit and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
17. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector B (12P)
(see page 15-48).
DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Modulator-Control Unit) terminal A36 and VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector terminals No. 14, and between PCM
NOTE: connecter terminal A1 * and VSA modulator-control
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and unit 47P connector terminal No. 30*.
• If DTC U0073 is stored at the same time as DTC CANL (RED)*
U0122, troubleshoot DTC U0073 first, then recheck r
for DTC U0122. 1 2 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 | 91
1 10 11 12
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the / I 1 4 I / I / 17 18 19
■
CANL line. 20 21 22 23 24 25
■ 26 27 28 2917131 / 33 34 35 -B
1 3 6 1 / 381 / | / | 4 1 142 43 |44|
CANH (WHT)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL (§ )
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. U N IT 47P CONNECTOR T
CANH (WHT)
Is DTC U 0 122 indicated? 1 16
n \ 1 8 1 /1 2 0 1 /1 7 1 /1 /1 /1 2 6 I / I 281291301 /
YES—Go to step 4. 32
1331341351 /1 37138139 |/l4 1 |42 M
/ l/ l, /I 47
CANL (RED)*
at the VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM.B
4. Check for a VSA system DTCs in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS. YES—Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
control unit (see page 19-100), then goto step 15
Is VSA DTC 86 indicated? and recheck. If DTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
YES—Go to step 5. 19-100), then go to step 17.
NO—Go to step 10. NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit (No. 14 (No. 30) *) and the
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM (A36 (A1)*), then goto step 17.
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Check for poor connections at the left engine
compartment wire harness/dashboard wire
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). harness 18P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 47 P connector.
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
connector (see page 19-100). Are the connections OK ?

11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 32 and
12. If not already done, disconnect the VSA modulator- body ground.
control unit 47P connector (see page 19-100).
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
14. Measure voltage between VSA modulator-control

-j I 2 13 U | 5 | 6 l / l / l 9 | / | 1 1 l / l / l 1 4 |/L 16
unit 47P connector terminal No. 38 and body 17118|/| 20 i / i / 1 A / 1 / 1 26 l / l 281291‘301 /
ground. 32 133134| 35 I / I 371381391/|41 1421 4 3 1 / | / | / | 47
gnd m m
u
1 12| 3 14 15 | 6 1 /1 /1 9 L /| 11 l / l / l 1 4 |/|
16
171181 /| 20 \A /V \A A 26T/128 ]29 M / W ire side of fem ale terminals
32 1331341351 /| 371381391/|41 1421 4 3 1 / | / | / | 47
IG1 fBLK/YEL) Is there continuity ?

V
YES—Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
control unit (see page 19-100), then go to step 17
Wire side of female terminals and recheck. If DTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-100), then go to step 17.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
YES—Go to step 15. modulator-control unit and G302, then go to
step 17.
NO—Check the No. 6 FI-ECU (15 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse relay box. If the fuse is OK, 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
repair open in the wire between the No. 6 FI-ECU
(15 A) fuse and the VSA modulator-control unit, 17. Reconnect all connectors.
then go to step 16.
Is DTC U0122 indicated?

terminals at the VSA modulator-control unit and
the PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC U1101: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-ACM 9. Connect engine mount control unit 20P connector
Unit) terminals No. 5 and No. 17* to body ground with a
jumper wire.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
CANH (W H T jj
• If DTC U0073 is stored at the same time as DTC
U1101, troubleshoot DTC U0073 first, then recheck 1 2 3 4 1---L 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17 / i
(X I
O
for DTC U1101.
• Information marked with an asterisks *) applies to the CANL (RED)*
CANL line.

Is DTC U1101 indicated? terminal A36 and A1 * and body ground individually.

YES—Go to step 4.
CANL (RED)*
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this EzH T
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 1
1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9 I.
at the engine mount control unit and the PCM.B 10 11 12 / | 1 4 / / 17 18 19
a
20 21 22 23 24 25
a 26 27 ■
28 2 9 | / 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 3 8 1 / | / | 41 142 4 3 14 4 1
Is DTC P1 SAB indicated? CANH (WHT)
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Go to step 8. Terminal side of female terminals
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there continuity?
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. YES—Substitute a known-good engine mount
control unit (see page 11-347), then go to step 20
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). and recheck. If DTC U1101 is not indicated, replace
the original engine mount control unit (see page
8. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P 11-347), then go to step 19.
connector (see page 11-347).
NO—Repair open in the wire between the engine
mount control unit (No. 5 (No. 17)*) and the PCM
(A36 (A1) *), then go to step 19.
11. Check for poor connections at the engine mount 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
control unit 20P connector.
17. Check for continuity between engine mount control
Are the connections OK ? unit 20P connector terminal No. 14 and body
ground.
ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
NO—Repair the connections, then go to step 19.

1 2 3 4 i— i 5 6 / 8 9
13. If not already done, disconnect the engine mount 10 11 12 X 1415 16 17 / / 20
control unit 20P connector (see page 11-347).
LG (BLK)
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). u
15. Measure voltage between engine mount control

unit 20P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground. Wire side of female terminals

IG1 (YEL) YES—Substitute a known-good engine mount

1 2 3 4 _i—i 5 6 / 8 9 control unit (see page 11-347), then go to step 18
10 11 12 / 16 17 / and recheck. If DTC U1101 is not indicated, replace
O
C\J
cn
the original engine mount control unit (see page

v
mount control unit and G503, then go to step 19.
Is there battery voltage? 19. Reconnect all connectors.
YES—Go to step 16. 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Check the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair 22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
open in the wire between the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT,
INSTRMENT LIGHT (10 A) fuse and the engine 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
mount control unit, then go to step 18.

terminals at the engine mount control unit and the
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic procedure (see page Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
22-90).
YES—Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Does the MIL indicator flash?
NO—Go to step 11.
YES—Go to step 3.
11. Check the MIL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control
module, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, Does it indicate ON?
replace the original gauge control module.*
NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the MIL. module, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK,
replace the original gauge control module. ■
Does the MIL stay off?
12. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is a short indicated?
NO—Go to step 5.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait 20 seconds, software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
and watch the MIL. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
Does the MIL stay on or flash more than 5 times? PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230). ■
NO—The MIL circuit is OK.B 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect
the HDS.
8. Connect the HDS (see page 11-3).
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the PCM?
NO—Go to “DLC Circuit Troubleshooting"

(see page 11-218).*
16. Check for continuity between PCM connector 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC U0073 and/or U0155 indicated?
YES—Go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. ■

i„
I 1 I 2 3 I 4- I 5
I© I 7
I 9 l.| 8
1
1 0 11 1 2 / | 1 4 | / | / 1 7 1 8 1 9 ■ i NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25 software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
1
26 27 28 291 /1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35 good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
3 6 / 38 41 42 4 3 14 4 1
y .. i u symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
SCS (BRN) PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230). ■
23. Inspect the No. 42 IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse in the

Terminal side of female terminals under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is there continuity ? Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM YES—Repair open in the wire between the No. 42
(A31) and the DLC.B IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch.
If the wire is OK, go to step 24.
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- NO—Repair short in the wire between No. 42 IG1
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. Also
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good replace the No. 42 IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse. ■
24. Inspect the No. 46 ACGS (15 A) fuse in the under
17. Try to start the engine. hood fuse/relay box.
Does the engine start and idle smoothly? Is the fuse OK ?
NO—Go to step 22. NO—Go to step 25.
19. Connect the HDS (see page 11-3).
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the PCM?
NO—Goto “DLC Circuit Troubleshooting"

(see page 11-218).
(cont'd)
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
25. Remove the blown No. 46 ACGS (15 A) fuse from 28. Disconnect each of the components or connectors
the under-hood fuse/relay box. below, one at a time, and check for continuity
between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P
26. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A). connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
• PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)

• PCM connector B (44P)
• Each injector 2P connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B 6P
connector
• Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control
relay
PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 1 (FI MAIN) 4P CONNECTOR
IGP (YEL/BLK)
M i
27. Check for continuity between body ground and

PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 4 individually. Wire side of female terminals
PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 1 (FI M AIN) 4P CONNECTOR

Does continuity go away when one of the above
+ B (W HT/GRN) components is disconnected?
1
YES—Replace the component that made the short
to body ground go away when disconnected. If the
+ B (W HT/GRN)
item is the PCM, update the PCM if it does not have
the latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
Wire side of female terminals 11-230).
Also replace the No. 46 ACGS (15 A) fuse.B
Is there continuity? NO—Go to step 29.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the No. 46

ACGS (15 A), PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), and
DLC terminal No. 16. Also replace the No. 46 ACGS
(15 A) fuse.B
29. Disconnect the connectors of all these components. 32. Remove the blown No. 1 IG FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
- PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
• PCM connector B (44P) 33. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
• Injectors
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 34. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A/B
• Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control 35. Check for continuity between PCM connector
relay terminal B37 and body ground.
30. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1
(FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
I 1I 2 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 ( 7 8 |~9 [
1 ■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 1 (F I M A I N) 4P CONNECTOR 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
136 137 38 139 |40 141 142 4 3 144 1
I IG1 (RED/WHT)
IGP (YEL/BLK)
U
IM i
Wire side of fem ale terminals YES—Go to step 36.
NO—Replace the No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse,

Is there continuity? and update the PCM if it does not have the latest
YES—Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and each item. Also replace symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
the No. 46 ACGS (15 A) fuse.B PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230).B
NO—Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). Also

replace the No. 46 ACGS (15 A) fuse.B
31. Inspect the No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the

driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK ?

36. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A). 38. Remove the driver's side second row seat
(see page 20-115).
39. Remove the access panel from the floor.
40. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.
41. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P

FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
37. Check for continuity between PCM connector W ire side of female terminals
terminal B37 arid body ground.
P C M CONNECTOR-B (44P) Is there continuity ?

lr= = f
p--------- ---------- -----c YES—Repair short in the wire between the fuel
I 1 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
I 10 ■ pump and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also
11 12 13|14.|15|16 17 18 19
1 20 21 22 24 25
replace the No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
/ ■
26 27 28 29|30|31 132 33 34 35
136137 38139 140 141 142 4 3 14 4 1 NO—Go to step 42.
ti— i. .r— cr
1 I G l (RED/WHT)
Terminal side of fem al e terminals

FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the PCM (B37), PGM-FI
main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), the immobilizer control
unit receiver, or the SRS unit. Also replace the
No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
42. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). 47. Measure voltage between PGM connector terminal
A6 and body ground.
Is PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) OK?
YES—-Check the fuel .pump, and replace it if MRLY (BLK/WHT)

necessary (see page 11-387). Also replace the No. 1 r
CD
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B h I 2 3 |4 | 5 |6 |7
00
■ 10 11 12 / 1 141/ | / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 3 x C 23 24 25 i
NO—Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). 1 26 27 28
S
CO
33 34 35
CD
Csj
Also replace the No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B 3 6 / 381/ | / | 41 142 43 ]441
44. Disconnect PCM connectors A (44P) and B (44P).

(X
46. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal Is there battery voltage?
B37 and body ground.
¥ = ¥ NO—Go to step 48,
11 12 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
II 10 11 ■ 48. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
CO
OO
CSJ
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
136137 38139 |40 14-1 |42 43|44
H ....1...-.1.... i i 3----1 . 1
J i G f (RED/WHT)
Sb

FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the PCM (B37).■
(cont'd)
49. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A). 51. Connect PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P
connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 1 (FI MAIN) 4P CONNECTOR
mlMRLY (BLK/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
W ire side of fem ale terminals

50. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1
(FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body MRLY (BLK/WHT)
ground. r
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5j 6 | 7 s h i.
■ 10 11 12
Z I 1 4 / / 17 18 19
PGM-FI M A IN RELAY 1 (FI M A IN ) 4P CONNECTOR a
20 21 22 23 24 25 B
1 26 27 28
29 l/i3 1 1 / 33 34 35
M / 381/ | / | 41 142 43|44|
m
+ B (W HT/GRN)
YES-Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN)
(see page 22-82). If the relay is faulty, replace it. If
Is there battery voltage? the relay is OK, update the PCM if it does not have
YES—Go to step 51. known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 46 good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
ACGS (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI 11-230). a
M A IN ).*
NO—Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the PCM (A6) . ■
53. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P). 59. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1
(FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
54. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ground.
55. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 (FI MAIN) 4P CONNECTOR
B3 and body ground.
+B (WHT/GRN)
PCM CONNECTORB (44P)
1
IGP (YEL/BLK)
m ±
i
OO
CD
1 1 1 2 3 J4 I 5 I 6 I 7
I 10 11 12 ■
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
26 27 28 29|30|3l]32l 33 34 35
136137 38139 14 0 141 142 4 3 14 4 1

;YES—Go to-step 60.

YES—Go to step 63. ACGS (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 1
(FI MAIN). 11
NO—Go to step 56.
61. Connect PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P
57. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A). connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 1 (FI M AIN) 4P CONNECTOR
IGP (YEL/BLK)
1M
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
62. Check for continuity between PCM connector 65. Check for continuity between body ground and
terminal B3 and body ground. PCM connector terminals A22, B1, B36, B43, Cl,
and C40 individually.
PCM CONNECTORS
IGP (YEL/BLK)
A (44P)
.,.. .....ci... I h l 2 3 I4 I 5 | 6 | 7 a 19 1!
I 1 I 2 3 ■I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 1 Ll 10 11 12 / W / 17 18 19
■ 10 11 12 1
13|14|15|16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 25 ■
1
a 20 21 22 / 24 25 26 272 3 2 9 M 3 1 L ? 33 34 35
■
26 27 28 29|30131132 33 34 35 6 l / l / l 41 |42 431441
1— L^—*-*
136 137 38|39|40|41 142 43 |44l
LG3 (BRN/YEL)

B (44P)
PG2
Is there continuity? (BLK)
T 12 3 I 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1
YES-Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN)
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
(see page 22-82). If the relay is faulty, replace it. If
26 27 28 29|30|31 [32 33 34 35
the relay is OK, update the PCM if it does not have
136137 38139 14 0 141 142 43(44|
known-good PCM (see page 11-8). If the symptom/ PG1 (BLK) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
indication goes away with a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-230).
MO—Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main C (44P)

relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the PCM (B3)M PGMETCS (BLK)
63. Turn the ignition switch OFF. .r 1 |2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I

10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
64. Disconnect PCM connectors A (44P), B (44P), and C ■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
(44P). 26 27 28 /|30|31 [32 33 34 35
136137 38|39140141 142 43|44|
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between PCM (A22,

B1, B36, B43, C l, C40) and body ground (G101).«
J tT '
66. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

I1I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 B I 9 I
I
1 0 11 1 2 / | 1 4 / / 1 7 18> 1 9
■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24■ 25
■ 26 27 28 2 9 j / i l / 33 34-3 5
■
N / 38 l/l/l 41 14 2 i\ U\
^•v
VCC3 (GRN)

(A24) and the APP sensor. ■

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 3. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No. 5 and

• If the PCM does not communicate with the HDS, do No. 16.
this troubleshooting procedure.
• Check that MIL circuit is normal, then do this DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
troubleshooting.
1. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and

body ground. LG3 (BRN/YEL)
V " / /, 4 5/ 7 / } (\
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) \9 / 12 / 14 / 16/ ^
1__1
+ B (W HT/GRN)
+B
v / / 4 5/ 7 /j
12 / 14 / 16/-
(W HT/GRN)
\9 / / L. Terminal side of female terminals
Is there battery voltage ?
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Go to step 4.
Is there battery voltage? 4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 2. 5. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
NO—Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal 6. Connect the DLC terminal No. 5 to body ground
No. 16 and the No. 46 ACGS (15 A) fuse in the with a jumper wire.
under-hood fuse/relay box. m
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
2. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No. 4 and
No. 16.
LG3 (BRN/YEL)
12 14
GND (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
4 5
w
+ B (W HT/GRN)
Terminal side of fem ale terminals
YES—Goto step3.
NO—Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal

No. 4 and body ground (G401).B
7. Check for continuity between PCM connector 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
mm CONNECTOR A (44P) No. 7.
r _c■\
( h i 2 3 [ 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9c D A T A L IN K C O N N E C T O R (D L C )
1 0 11 1 2 / M l / I / 17 18 19
■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
26 27 2 9 i / i 3 l [ / 33 34 35
M / ;
j I
I4 2
—tj4— 3 | 4 4 |u LG3 K V ) l K-LINE
(BRN/YEL) I ^ I (GRY)
L G 3 (B R N /Y E L )
/ / 4 5 / 7
^7
u \9 /^ 12 / 14 / 1 6 /

YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest Is there 8.5 V or more?
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the YES—Go to step 16.
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230). ■ NO—Gotostep 10.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(A22) and DLC terminal No. 5. After repairing the
wire, check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
HDS and go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.*
(cont'd)
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Disconnect PCM connector.A (44P). 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
13. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7
and body ground.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) I 1 I 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 t 7 8 | 9 |_

■ 10 11 12
/ 1 1 4 | / / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25
K-LINE ------------- 1 26 27 28 2 9 |/3 1 1 / 33 34 35 i
(GRY)
^ l / l / l 41 142 43■ M
4 5/ 7 y j r- -
/ / / K-LINE (GRY)
\9 / / 12 14 / 16/
L_4 -

Is there continuity? YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
DLC terminal No. 7 and the PCM (A43). After symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
repairing the wire, check for a DTC with the HDS, PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230). ■
and goto the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
NO—Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
NO—Go to step 14. No. 7 and the PCM (A43). After repairing the wire,
check for a DTC with the HDS, and goto the DTC
14. Connect the DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground troubleshooting.*
with a jumper wire.
DATA LI NK CONNECTOR (DLC)
K-LINE
(GRY)
/ / 4 5/ 7
\9 / / 12 14 / 16/
L_4
JUMPER WIRE


No. 7.
LG3 K V h K-LINE
(BRN/YEL) ^ (GRY)
/ / 4 5/ 7
\9 / / 12 / 14 / 16/
HZT
Is there 0 V?
YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

NO—Repair short to power in the wire between

DLC terminal No. 7 and the PCM (A43). After
repairing the wire, check for Temporary DTCs or
DTCs with the HDS. If any Temporary DTCs or DTCs
are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.*
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-372).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
5. Remove the fuel rail mounting bolts (C) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the injector clip (E) from the fuel rail.
7. Remove the injectors from the rails.

8 . Coat the new O-ring (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C).
9. Install the injector clip (D).
10. Coat the new injector O-ring (E) with clean engine oil.
11. Install the injector/fuel rail assembly into the injector base.
12. Install the fuel rail mounting bolts.
13. Install the connectors on the injectors.
14. Connect the quick-connect fitting (see page 11-381).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.

A/F Sensor Replacement
Special Tools Required Rear Bank (Bank 1)

02 sensor wrench, Snap-on S6176, or equivalent,
commercially available 1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-19).
Front Bank (Bank 2) 2. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor 8P connector (A),
then remove the rear A/F sensor (B).
1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor 8P connector (A),
then remove the front A/F sensor (B).
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
Secondary H02S Replacement
Special Tools Required Rear Bank (Bank 1)

02 sensor wrench, Snap-on S6176, or equivalent,
commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear secondary H02S 4P connector
(A), then remove the rear secondary H02S (B).
Front Bank (Bank 2)
2. Disconnect the front secondary H02S 4P connector

(A), then remove the front secondary H02S (B).
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Remove engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-19). 2. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-19).
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector (A). 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector (A).
4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B),
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal

with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with
engine coolant (see page 10-6), and bleed air from
4. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B). the cooling system with the heater valve open.

with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with
engine coolant (see page 10-6), and bleed air from
the cooling system with the heater valve open.
IAT Sensor Replacement MAP Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-19). 1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-19).
2. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector (A). 2. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector (A).
18 N-m
11.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the IAT sensor (B).

with a new O-ring (C).
3. Remove the MAP sensor (B).

CKP Sensor Replacement CMP Sensor Replacement
1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from 1. Remove the timing belt; J35A9 engine (see page
the drive belt, then remove the belt; J35A9 engine 6-13), J35Z1 engine (see page 6-70).
(see page 4-32), J35ZT engine (see page 4-32).
2. Remove the front camshaft pulley (CMP sensor
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley; J35A9 engine pulse plate) (A).
(see page 6-11), J35Z1 engine (see page 6-68).
3. Remove the upper and lower front covers from the

engine; J35A9 engine (see step 9 on page 6-14),
J35Z1 engine (see step 9 on page 6-71).
4. Remove the CKP sensor (A) from the oil pump.
90 N m (9.2 kgf-m, 67 Ibf-ft)

A p ply engine oil to the bo lt threads.
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (B), then

remove the back cover (C).
4. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover.


Install the timing belt; J35A9 engine (see page 6-16),
J35Z1 engine (see page 6-72).

Knock Sensor Replacement
2. Remove the fuel rails and the injector base.
3. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector (A), then

remove the knock sensor (B).

PCM Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
with HDS and CM update software NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
• HDS pocket tester continue with this procedure.
update software 7. Select the REPLACE PCM MENU, then READ DATA
and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE;
• Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software NOTE:
version. • Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life
• If you are replacing the PCM after substituting a data from the original PCM so you can later
known-good PCM, reinstall the original PCM, then do download (WRITES) it into the new PCM.
this procedure. • If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with
• During the procedure, is any READ DATA, WRITE this procedure.
DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then
continue. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
10. Remove the cover (D).

(see page 11-218). If you are returning from DLC
circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 through 7,16
through 18, and 21 through 22, and do the
following procedures after replacing the PCM;
• Replace the engine oil (see page 8-8) and the 11. Disconnect the PCM connectors A, B, and C.
engine oil filter (see page 8-9).
• Clean the throttle body (see page 11-407). NOTE: The PCM connectors A, B, and C have
symbols (A=D, B=A, C =0) embossed on them for
4. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS. identification.
5. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. 12. Remove the bolts (E), then remove the PCM (F).
13. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 23. Select PGM-FI system and reset the PCM with the
HDS.
15. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS. software (see page 11-7).
NOTE: DTC P0630 “VIN Not Programmed or 25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and 26. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-5).
16. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 7,

go to step 19. Otherwise, go to step 17.
17. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
18. Select the REPLACE PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA

NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED,

continue with this procedure.
19. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS.
20. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
21. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6 clean the

throttle body (see page 11-407), then go to step 22.
22. If the READ DATA failed in step 7 or the WRITE

DATA failed in step 18, replace the engine oil
(see page 8-8) and engine oil filter (see page 8-9),
then go to step 23.
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or less?

YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the throttle body and the PCM. ■ YES—Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (B17), then go to step 18.
NO—Go to step 23.
time? 10. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
NO—Go to step 5.

1 2 3 4 5 6
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. VCC51BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
NO—Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408).
13. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 18. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 20. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
terminal B19 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No. 2. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side of
1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals Is DTC P0122 indicated?
VCC5(BLU)
_____ y r > v _ .
P C M CONNECTOR B (44P) VCC5 (BLU) terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
I 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I <>l
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19i B NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
I 20 21 22 / 24 25 Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35 indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
136137 38|39 140141 142 431441
Is there continuity? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (B19), then go to step 18. Is DTC P0122 indicated?

terminals at TP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM

£ 2 ]
DTC P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?

YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V?

at the throttle body and the PCM. ■ YES—Go to step 18.
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
time?
NO—Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
(cont'd)
terminal B17 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No. 1. 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
W ire side of
2 3 4 5 6 fem ale terminals 16. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
TPSA (RED/BLK)
17. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector
PCM CONNECTOR B C44P) TPSA (RED/BLK) terminal B34 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No. 4.
p— .— .— .— |—
h 1 2 3 | 4 15 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
■ 10 11 12 ■
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■ Wire side of
26 27 28 29|30|3t|32 33 34 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals
136137 38|39 14 0 141 142 431441 SG5 (GRN)
__ _ /?
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 ] 9 I
1 ■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
YES—Go to step 25. I 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
26 27 28 29 (30131132 33 34 35
NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle 136 137 38139 140 141 142 AcM44
SG5 (GRN)

19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408).
Is DT C P 0123 indicated?

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1.



terminals at TP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM

DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 4. 1 2 3 4 5 6
TPSB (RED/BLU)
at the throttle body and the PCM. ■

time?
YES—Repair short in the wire between the throttle
NO—Go to step 5. body and the PCM (B12), then go to step 18.
NO—Go to step 23.

10. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. terminal B19 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No. 2.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
W ire side of
1 2 3 4 5 6 fem ale terminals
12 3 4 5 6 VCC5 (BLU)
VCC5 (BLU)
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) VCC5 (BLU)
3----------------------- ci.......
I 1 I 2 3 |4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 $
■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19: ■
1 20 21 22 / 24 25■ a
Wire side of female terminals 26 27 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
136137 38|39 14 0 141 142 4 3 1441
Is there about 5 V? Terminal side of fem ale terminals
YES—Goto step 16. Is there continuity?
NO—Goto step 11. YES—Go to step 23.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle
(cont'd)

to step 1.



terminals at TP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM

DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR'

1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. TPSB (RED/BLU)
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?

YES—Go to step 4.

at the throttle body and the PCM. ■ YES—Go to step 18.
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
time?
YES—Goto step 13.
NO—Go to step 5.
(confd)
terminal B12 and throttle body 6P connector terminal B34 and throttle body 6P connector
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals
r TPSB SG5 (GRN)
0 J (RED/BLU) a
TPSB
(RED/BLU) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
r 3--------- -------------- c
00
o>
h 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 11 I 2 3 |4 | 5 |6 |7 8 | 9 |
■ ■ ■ 1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■ 1 20 21 22 / 24 25 ■
26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
CQ
00
O
CQ
05
CM
CM
26 27 28 33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 139 |40 141 142 431441 13 6 137 3 8 139 140 141 142 42514 4 1
Terminal side of female terminals SG5 (QRN)

body and the PCM (B12), then go to step 20. NO—Repair open in the wire between the throttle


to step 1.



terminals at TP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM

DTC P0607: Lost Communication with ETCS DTC P061F: ETCS Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is DTC P0607 indicated? 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Go to step 4. 5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is DTC P061F indicated?

at the throttle body and the PCM. If any other YES—Goto step 6.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest at the throttle body, and the PCM. If any other
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
good PCM (see page 11-8). indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 6. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Is DTC P0607 indicated? good PCM (see page 11-8).
YES—If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- 7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
was substituted, go to step 1. Is DTC P061F indicated?
NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is YES—If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other was substituted, go to step 1.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
DTC P I658: ETCS Control Relay ON 5. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-82).
Malfunction
Is the ETCS control relay OK?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general - YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). step 13.
2. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 6 . Jump the SCS line with the;HDS.
the HDS.
Is the RELAY circuit OK?
YES—Intermittent fai Iure, the system is OK at this terminal A20 and body ground.
time. Checkfor poor connections or loose terminals
m m C O N N E C T O R A (4 4 P )
at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. B
NO—Goto step 3.
4. Remove the ETCS control relay (A).

(A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go to
step 13.
NO—Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Reconnect all connectors.
11. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
C4 and body ground.
101ETCS (YEL/GRN) 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
ii— n i ... m ? )
I 1 1 2 3 I4 I 5 I 6 |7 8| 9| 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i
I 20 / 22
23 24 25
1 Is DTC P1658 indicated?
26 27 28 /130|31132 33 34 35
1361ST 38|39|40|41 142 43144-1
terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM,
v then go to step 1.

Terminal side of female terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
the PCM (C4) and the ETCS control relay, then go to 19. Reconnect all connectors.
step 12.
NO—Goto step 18. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-

terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was

DTC P1659; ETCS Control Relay OFF 7. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-82).
Malfunction ,
Is the ETCS control relay OK ?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES—Goto step 8.
NO—Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). step 26.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 9. Measure voltage between ETCS control relay 4P
Is D T C P 1 6 5 9 i n d i c a t e d ?
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4PCONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 3

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 1 2 X
at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. Hi 4
IGP (YEL/BLK).
y)
5. Check the No. 7 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR
CONTROL) (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood
fuse box. Terminal side of female terminals
Is th e f u s e O K ?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Remove the blown fuse, then go to step 20.
6. Remove the ETCS control relay (A). relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ETCS control relay, then
go to step 25.
A
(eonfd)
10. Measure voltage between ETCS control relay 4P 14. Connect ETCS control relay 4P connector terminal
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
3
IS
+B
(W HT/GRN) I IG1ETCS
(YEL/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
Terminal side of fem ale terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is the battery voltage? 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ETCS ” IG1ETCS (YEL/GRN)

control relay and the No. 7 DBW (THROTTLE n n
ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary 1| 2 3 I4 | 5 ( 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
B 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
under-hood fuse box, then go to step 25.
20 / 22 23 24 25 ■
I
26 27 28 /130|31132 33 34 35
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 136137 38139140141 142 43|44|
YES—Goto step 16.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C4)

and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 26.
16. Disconnect the jumper wire. 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
18. Connect ETCS control relay 4P connector terminal

No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire. I 1 I 2 l 3 l4 .1.51 6 .rt 8 I 9 L
ETCSRLY I ■ 10 11 12
(BRN/RED) X 1 1 4 L /V 17 18 19 ■
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR 20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
26 27 28 2 9 [ 7 W 33 34 35
M x; 431441
3---
ETCSRLY
(SRN/RED)
3
1 2 X JUMPER WIRE
4

(A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go to
step 26.
(cont'd)
20. Remove the ETCS control relay (A). 23. Check for continuity between PCM connector
A
~~~ ] lG1 ETCS (YEL/GRN)
C ~ zi ~:i
i ..
::n
11 12 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 ( 9 I
I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /l30|31132 33 34 35
13613T 38139 |40 141 142 431441
22. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). YES—Repair short in the wire between the ETCS
control relay and the PCM (C4). Also replace the
No. 7 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL)
(15 A) fuse in the auxilially under-hood fuse box,
then go to step 26.
NO—Go to step 24.

24. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-369).
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR

+B 4 terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM,
(WHT/GRN)
1 2 X then go to step 1.
3
u NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Terminal side of female terminals 31. Reconnect all connectors.

Is there continuity? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 A) 33. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
fuse and the ETCS control relay. Also replace the
No. 7 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL) Is DTC P1659 indicated?
(15 A) fuse in the auxilially under-hood fuse box,
then go to step 26. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. If
NO—Replace the No. 7 DBW (THROTTLE the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 A) fuse, then go to PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
step 31. substituted, go to step 1.
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
26. Reconnect all connectors. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■

DTC P I683: Throttle Valve Default Position 9. Push the throttle valve closed as shown.
Spring Performance Problem
ik CAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Release the throttle valve.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Does the throttle valve return?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-407),
then go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1683 is
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds. indicated, go to step 11.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (U). NO—Go to step 11.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408).
Is D TC P1683 indicated? 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Go to step 7. 13. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
at the throttle body and the PCM. ■ 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
body.

to step 1.

DTC P1684: Throttle Valve Return Spring 9. Push the throttle valve open as shown.
Performance Problem
ACAUTIO
while the ignition switch is ON (II), If you do, you
is activated.

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Release the throttle valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the throttle valve return?
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-407),
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the then go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1684 is
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. indicated, go to step 11.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds. NO—Go to step 11.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408).
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is DTC P1684 indicated? 13. Resetthe PCM with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 7. 14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
at the throttle body and the PCM.B 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle Is DTC P1684 indicated?
body.
to step 1.

DTC P2101: ETCS Malfunction 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle

A CAUTION body.
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
is activated.
11. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record ail freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
Does the throttle valve operate smoothly?
YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-407),
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. then go to step 21 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is
indicated, go to step 19.
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS. NO—Go to step 13.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is DTC P2101 indicated? 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
YES—Go to step 7. 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 5. 16. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 17. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: and No. 6 with a jumper wire.
* ENGINE SPEED THROTTLE BODY SP CONNECTOR

* VSS
* APP SENSOR A
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 1 2 3 4 5 6

E T C S M - (GRN) E T C S M + (BLU)
YES—Go to step 7.
JUMPER WIRE
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Wire side of female terminals
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-407). ■
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector 25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
terminals C2 and C3. range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) • ENGINE SPEED

• VSS ■
•APP SENSOR A
E T C S M + (BLU) E T C S M - (GRN) 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
T R 3 I4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 9
10 12 13|14|15|16~
17 18 19
20 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 X[30l31132 33 34 35 YES—Check for poor connections or loose
Im s i 38139 140 [41 |42 43 44 terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-407), and go to
Terminal side of female terminals step 1.

NO—Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C2, C3), then goto step 21. 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. good PCM (see page 11-8).
20. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408). 29. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
• ENGINE SPEED
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • VSS
• APPSENSOR A

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-407). If the

DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current Range/ 4. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
Performance Problem
5. At the throttle body side, measure resistance
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general and No. 6 with the throttle fully closed.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

x
3. Measure resistance between PCM connector i 2 3 4 5 6
terminals C2 and C3.
ETCSM - ETCSM +

UfW
h S h
E T C S M + (BLU) E T C S M - (GRN)
r
h i 2 3 U | 5 | 6 | 7 6 I 9 Ii Is there about 1.0 Q or less?
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 .
■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
1 YES—Go to step 6.
26 27 28 y|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38139140141 142 4 3 1441
NO—Repair short in the wires between PCM
Terminal side of female terminals connector terminals C2 (ETCS+ line) and C3
(ETCS— line), then go to step 7.
Is there about 1.0 Q or less? 6. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408).
YES—Go to step 4. 7. Reconnect all connectors.
NO—Go to step 15. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

13. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
Is DTCP2118 indicated?

to step 1.


19. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the

DTC P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Low Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
CJl
CD
1 2 3 4
YES—Go to step 3. APSA (ORN/BLK)

at APP sensor A and the PCM. ■

YES—Repair short in the wire between APP
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector sensor A and the PCM (A17), then go to step 21.
terminals No. 5 and No. 6.
NO—Go to step 11.
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC3 (GRN) SG3 (BLK)
A7v

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 12. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P).
terminal A17 and the APP sensor 6P connector
terminal No. 4. 13. Connect the APP sensor 6P connector terminals
No. 4 and No. 5 with a jumper wire.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Wire side of APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

female terminals
APSA (ORN/BUC)
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) APSA (ORN/BLK) 1 2 3 4 5 6

APSA (ORN/BLK) VCC3 (GRN)
h 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 a 19l
■ 10 11 12
/ | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 i
■ JUMPER WIRE
26 27 28 291/1311/ 33 34 35
38 l / l / l 41 142 4 3 144|
Is there continuity? 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Go to step 12. 15. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
NO—Repair open in the wire between APP sensor
A and the PCM (A17), then go to step 21. Is there 0.2 V or less?
NO—Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
19. Check for continuity between PCM connector step 1.
terminal No. 5. NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Wire side of
1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals 26. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
VCC3 (GRN)
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) VCC3 (GRN)
li— ‘ii A 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
I 1 I 2 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 |9 l
I 10 11 12 / 1141/1/ 17 18 19 I good PCM (see page 11-8).
20 21 22 23 24 25
.d
a 26 27 28 2 9 I/1 3 1 I/ 33 34 35 ■ 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
M 7 4 3 |44|

Is there continuity? terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
YES—Go to step 27. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
A and the PCM (A24), then go to step 21. NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
20. Replace the APP sensor (see page 11-275). original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
21. Reconnect all connectors. indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■

sSi
DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit High Voltage
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal A34 and the APP sensor 6P connector
terminal No. 6.
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
APP SENSOR §P CONNECTOR
HDS.
Is there about 4.9 V or more? Wire side of

1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals
sg3 mm
YES—Go to step 3.
at APP sensor A and the PCM. ■ i 1 I 2 3 | 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 S19 1
■ 10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
go 21 22 ■
23 24 25 ■
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1 26 27 28 291/| 31 j / 33 34 35
| 3 6 | / 38 1 / | / | 41 142 4cM44|
4. Disconnect the APP sensor BP connector.
SG3 (BLK)
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector Is there continuity ?

YES—Goto step 18.
A and the PCM (A34), then go to step 13.
1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC3 (GRN) SG3 mm
- /\? V
(cont'd)
12. Replace the APP sensor (see page 11-275).

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

indicated DTC's troubleshooting. *


terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
substituted, goto step 1.

g31
DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Low Voltage
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR §P CONNECTOR
HDS.
LO
6
C \J
1 3 4
YES—Go to step 3. APSB (YEL)

at APP sensor B and the PCM.B

YES—Repair short in the wire between APP sensor
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector B and the PCM (A18), then go to step 22.
NO—Go to step 11.
1 2 3 4 5 6
VCC4 (WHT) SG4 (RED/YEL)
-A/V
(cont'd)
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 12. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P).
terminal No. 3. 13. Connect the APP sensor 6P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
Wire si de of APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals
APSB (YEL)
P C M CONNECTOR A (44P) APSB (YEL) 2 3 4 5 6

In IF ... VCC4 (WHT) APSB (YEL)
11 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 | 9 l
I1
10 11 12 / i 14 I / I / 17 18 19 I
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
1 26 27 291 /|3 1 1 / 33 34 35 JUMPER WIRE
28
1 3 6 1 / 3 8 1 / | / | 41 42,| 43(44
",
----LJ
Is there continuity? 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Go to step 12. 15. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
B and the PCM (A18), then go to step 22. Is there about 0.2 V or less?
NO—Go to step 20.

J ? '
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
19. Check for continuity between PCM connector step 1.
terminal No. 1. NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
APP SENSOR 6P-CONNECTOR
Wire side of
Go
CD
cn
1 2 4 female terminals 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

VCC4 (WHT)
[1 I 2 L3.i 4 re [6 I 7 f B I 9 I software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
■ 10 11 good PCM (see page 11-8).
12 / 1 1 4 1 /1 / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25
■ 26 27 28 291 /|3 1 1 / 33 34 35 VCC4 30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
38 1/ | / | 41 142 4 3 1441 (WHT)

Is there continuity? terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM
YES—Go to step 28. (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
NO—Repair open in the wire between APP
sensor B and the PCM (A25), then go to step 22. NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
21. Replace the APP sensor (see page 11-275). indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■

DTC P2128: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit High Voltage
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal A35 and the APP sensor 6P connector
terminal No. 2.
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Wire side of
Is there about 4.0 V or more? 1 2 3 4 5 6 female terminals
SG4 (RED/YEL)
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

at APP sensor B and the PCM. ■ 11 12 3 I 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 L
1 10 11 12
/ | 1 4 | / / 17 18 19
a
20 21 22 23 24 25
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ■ 26 27 28 33 34 3b
291 /| 31
SG4
N / 381 / | / | 41 142 431441 (RED/YEL)

6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2. YES—Goto step 18.

NO—Repair open in the wire between APP
sensor B and the PCM (A35), then go to step 13.
1 2 3 4 5 6
VGC4 (WHT) SG4 (RED/YEL)
A7v

12. Replace the APP sensor (see page 11-275).

terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.



terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM

DTC P2135: TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Correlation
A CAUTION 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).

body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you terminals B12 and B17.
is activated. PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data TPSB : TPSA
(RED/BLU) (RED/BLK)
11 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9
I 10 11 12
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ■ 20 21 22 / 24 25
26 27 28 29 [30131132 33 34 35
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 136137 38 (39 |4Q 141 |42 4 3 144
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with Terminal side of female terminals
the HDS.
Is DTC P 2 135 indicated? YES—Go to step 13.
YES—-Go to step 5. NO—Go to step 22.

at the throttle body and the PCM. ■
6. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle

body.
8. Visually check the throttle valve operation while

you clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the valve temporarily move to the fully

closed position?
NO—Go to step 9.
13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 22. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminals B12 and B17. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
-------
TPSB TPSA Is DTC P2135 indicated?
(RED/BLU) (RED/BLK)
f .. ic : : .. u......:
•"—
""j----
"... ".....'
-----□pi YES—Check for poor connections or loose
11 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |
[ ■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17' 18 19 ■ l
■ 20 21;22 PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
/ 24 25 ■
26 27;28 29|30|31132 33>34 35 (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
|36 |37 38 139 140 141 142 4 3 144 1 substituted, go to step 1.
u1 L .......... 1 u.‘ .— L”
Terminal side of female terminals NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YES—Repair short in the wires between the PCM
B17 (TPSA line) and the B12 (TPSB line), then go to
step 17.
NO—Go to step 16.

to step 1.

DTC P2138: APP Sensor (TP Sensor D/E) 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Incorrect Voltage Correlation terminals A17 and A18.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). APSA (ORN/BLK) APSB

f H ii
_L .
1 1 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 8.1 7 8 | 9 l
2. Clear the DTC with HDS. i 1 10 11 12 / N l / ] / 17 18 19 1
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 i
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor. 1 26 27 28
29 L /j3 U ? 33 34 35
1361/ 381 / | / | 41 142 j 43|44|
— ».... i.
YES—Go to step 5. Is there continuity?
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminals (A17, A18), then go to step 13.
at the APP sensor and the PCM. ■
NO—Go to step 21.
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the
DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Are they the same voltage? 12. Replace the APP sensor (see page 11-275).
YES—Go to step 6. 13. Reconnect all connectors.
NO—Go to step 11. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
8. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS,
YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose

terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.


software (see page 11-7); or substitute a known-
25. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM. If the

DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System 10. Visually check the throttle valve operation. While
Idle Position Not Learned doing the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
ik CAUTION Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle position?
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you YES—Go to step 11.
is activated. NO—Go to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.

NOTE;
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES—Clean the throttle body (see page 11-407),
• If DTC P2135 is stored at the same time as DTC P2176, then go to step 21.
troubleshoot DTC P2135 first, then recheck for DTC
P2176. NO—Go to step 18.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 15. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
10 seconds.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. and No. 6 with a jumper wire.
is DTC P2176 indicated? THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 1 2 3 4 5 6

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals ETCSM— (GRN) ETC S M + (BLU)
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-407). ■
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. JUMPER WIRE
7. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle Wire side of female terminals
body.

.< r<
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-407), and go to
ETCSM+ (BLU)] lE T C S M - (GRN) step 1.
r
h i 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 I 7 8 I 9 I NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
1 indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
CO
CO
£4
CQ
o
26 27 28 33 34 35
136137 38139 140 141 142 4 3 1441
Is there continuity? good PCM (see page 11-8).
NO—Repair open in the wires between the throttle 30. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait
body and the PCM (C2, C3), then go to step 20. 10 seconds.
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408). Is DTC P2176 indicated?
20. Reconnect all connectors. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. substituted, go to step 1.
23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
10 seconds.
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
NOTE: 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,

• This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor the HDS.
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedure. • If it is below 2 %, the APP sensor is OK.
• Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS • If it is above 2 %, update the PCM if it does not
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are have the latest software (see page 11-7), or
indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),
procedure. then go to step 5.
• Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its
movement. If it does not move smoothly, check the 5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,
pedal, the throttle cable, and the APP sensor then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
individually. If you find a problem in one of them, the HDS.
replace the pa rtfs) that caused the problem.
• If it is below 2 %, the APP sensor is OK.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) • If it is above 2 %, replace the APP sensor
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. (see page 11-275), then go to step 1.

Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
(see page 11-218).
3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,

then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
• If it is below 2 %, the APP sensor is OK.

• If it is above 2 %, adjust the throttle cable
(see page 11-403), then go to step 4.
APP Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the bolts and the throttle cable cover (A).
2. Remove the throttle cable (see page 11-404).
3. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector (A).
4. Remove the bolts (B) and APP sensor (C).

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P2646: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST with
(VTEC Oil Pressure Switch) Circuit Low the HDS.
Voltage
Is ON indicated?
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A YES—Go to step 15.
•A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301
•A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201 NO—Goto step 9.
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
•A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
•Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
10. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data oil pressure switch) (A), install the special tools as
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general shown, then install the rocker arm oil pressure
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) to the oil
pressure gauge adapter (B).
1. Check the engine oil level.
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
Is the engine oil level OK? removal with a new O-ring.
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then

go to step 20.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.
Is the result OK ?

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil
pressure switch), the rocker arm oil control 11. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the PCM.B (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector.
NO—Go to step 5. 12. Start the engine.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector.
(cont'd)
14. Check the oil pressure. 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 392 kPa Is DTC P2646 indicated?
(4.0 kgf/crrf, 56.9psi)?
YES—Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch) (see page 11-288), then (VTEC oil pressure switch), the rocker arm oil
goto step 19. control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the
NO—Inspect the VTEC system. If it is OK. Replace
the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid NO—Go to step 25.
valve) (see page 11-288), then go to step 19.
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
16. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
17. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

18. Check for continuity between PCM connector go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
terminal B23 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), the
rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
I1I2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9r
1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
i valve), and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
I 20 21 22 ;23 24 25 indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 23.
■
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 |/]3 2 ;33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 139 14 0 141 \* 4 3 |4 4 |
VTPSW (BLU/WHT)

(B23) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC
oil pressure switch), then go to step 19.
NO—Go to step 26.

the HDS.

software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- .

the HDS.

terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch), the rocker arm oil
control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the
NO—Go to step 30.



connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), the
valve), and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
■ step 28.
DTC P2647: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(VTEC Oil Pressure Switch) Circuit High
Voltage 7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. At the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). pressure switch) side, check for continuity between
rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure
1. Check the engine oil level. switch) 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Is the engine oil level OK ? ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

(VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH) 2P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 2.
N o —Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then

go to step 16.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with Terminal side of male terminals
the HDS.
Is the result OK ? Is there continuity?
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES—Go to step 9.

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil NO—Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
pressure switch) and the PCM.B (VTEC oil pressure switch) (see page 11-288), then
go to step 16.
NO—Go to step 5.
5. Check the result of step 4.
• VTEC switch Failure

• VTEC switch Open
• VTEC switch SIG Line Open
• VTEC switch GND Line Open
Is the test result any of the above?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil
pressure switch). If it is OK, replace the rocker arm
oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve)
(see page 11 -288), then go to step 15.
10. Measure voltage between rocker arm oil pressure 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector terminal B23 and rocker arm oil pressure switch
terminal No. 1 and body ground. (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector terminal
No. 1.
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
(VTEC OIL PRESSURE SW I TCH) 2P CONNECTOR (VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWI TCH) 2P CONNECTOR
VTPSW
(BLU/WHT)
Wire side of female term inal s
PCM CONNECTOR i (44P)
h 12 3 I 4 | 5 t6 | 7 8 I 9 I
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
W ire side of female term inal s ■ 20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
26 27 28 29|30|/|32| 33 34 35
136137 38139 140 141 \4l 431441
Is there battery voltage? VTPSW (BLU/WHT)
YES—Repair open in the wire between the rocker Term inal side of female terminals
arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch)
and G101, then go to step 15. Is there continuity?
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B23) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. oil pressure switch), then go to step 16.
13. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(eonfd)
DTG Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). Is DTC P2647 indicated?
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch
Is DTC P2647 indicated? (VTEC oil pressure switch) and the PCM. If the PCM
YES—Check for poor connections or loose (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch substituted, go to step 1.
(VTEC oil pressure switch) and the PCM, then go to
step 1. NO—Go to step 26.
NO—Go to step 21. 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2647 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated .n step 25,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.® go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) and the pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) and the
PCM, then go to step 1, If the screen indicates NOT PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 24. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
22. Reconnect all connectors. indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.

DTC P2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
(VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit Low Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminal C24 and body ground.
m e m n
I h |2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 I9 I I
10 11 / 13|14|15|16 17 ie >19
3. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with ■
20 / / 23 24■ 25
1
the HDS. 26 27 28 / | 3 0 | 3 1 132 33 34•35
13 6 137 38139140141 142
LJ— 1— t VI
Is the result OK ? VTS (GRN/YEL)

at the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
solenoid valve) and the PCM. ■ Terminal side of fem ale terminals
NO—Go to step 4. Is there continuity?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C24) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid solenoid valve), then go to step 11.
(VTEC solenoid valve) 1P connector.
NO—Go to step 18.
6. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid 10. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
valve) 1P connector terminal and the solenoid solenoid valve) (see page 11-288).
valve body.
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
(VTEC SOLENO ID VALVE) IP CONNECTOR 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

the HDS.
Is there 14—30 Q at room temperature?
YES—Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
(VTEC solenoid valve) and the PCM, then go to step complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
1. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
NO—Go to step 17. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
DTCs MENU with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 20. If the
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16, indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 20.

PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 15.


the HDS.

terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid
(VTEC solenoid valve) and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 22.

DTC P2649: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 7. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
{VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit High Voltage the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
valve) 1P connector terminal and the solenoid
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data valve body.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). ROCKER ARM O I L CONTROL SOLENOID
(VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) 1P CONNECTOR


YES—Go to step 5. is there 14—30 Q?
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES—Go to step 8.

at the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC NO—Go to step 11.
solenoid valve) and the PCM.B
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid

(cont'd)
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 11. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
solenoid valve) (see page 11-288).
terminal C24 and the rocker arm oil control 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) TP connector
terminal. 14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

(VTEC SOLENOI D VALVE) IP CONNECTOR
W ire side of
1 fem ale terminals 16. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
VTS (GRN/YEL)
T--- ---- ---- ---- ----Ei ...... ,.
h 12 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ Is DTC P2649 indicated?
■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
k VTS
26 27 28 /]30|31 (32 33 34 35 YES—Check for poor connections or loose
(GRN/YEL)
136137 38|39|40|41 142 43I44]
(VTEC solenoid valve) and the PCM, then go to step
1.
Is there continuity? NO—Go to step 18.
YES—Go to step 19. 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the
(C24) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC Does the screen indicate PASSED?
solenoid valve), then go to step 12.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor



go to step 1.
NO—Goto step 23.
23. Monitor the OBD STATUSfor DTC P2649 in the



indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
(VTEC Solenoid Valve) (VTEC Oil Pressure Switch)
Replacement Replacement
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC solenoid valve) connector (A). (VTEC oil pressure switch) connector (A), then
remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC
oil pressure switch) (B).
2. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC

solenoid valve) (B). 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0522; EOP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 7. Measure voltage between EOP sensor 3P connector
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general EOP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
y \
1 2 3
2. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA VCC2 SG2
LISTwiththeHDS. (YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
YES—Go to step 3.
at the oil pressure sensor and the PCM. ■ Is there about 5 V?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES—Goto step 16.
4. Disconnect the EOP sensor 3P connector. NO—Go to step 12.
6. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
LISTwiththeHDS.
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Goto step7.
11. Check for continuity between EOP sensor 3P 15. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. terminal C13 and EOP sensor 3P connector
terminal No. 1.
EOP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR EOP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
A - ,
Z \ Wire side of
1 3 female terminals
2 3 VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
POILCS
. (BLU/YEL) VCC2 (YEL/BLU) mm CONNECTOR C (44P»
...J____ ii........... .
j— ,
I 1 I 2 3 | 14 I 5 | 6 | 7 a 19 1
[ 10 11 12*13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ i
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
W ire side of female terminals 26 27 28,/|30|31132 33 34 35
|36|37 38 139 |40 141 |42 4 3 1441
i—

YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM Is there continuity?

(C22) and the EOP sensor, then go to step 18.
NO—Go to step 24.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (C13) and the EOP sensor, then go to step 18.
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 17. Replace the EOP sensor (see page 11-304).
(cont'd)
20. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0522 in the
Is DTC P0522 indicated? complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
terminals at the EOP sensor and the PCM, then go go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
to step 1.
NO—Go to step 23. connections or loose terminals at the EOP sensor
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0522 in the known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
DTCs MENU with the HDS. 26. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? until a result comes on.


connections or loose terminals at the EOP sensor
result comes on.


terminals at the EOP sensor and the PCM If the
NO—Go to step 28.

.< r<
DTC P0523: EOP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
LISTwiththeHDS.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is there about 4.79 V or more?
YES—Goto step 8. -
NO—Go to step 18.
2. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
LISTwiththeHDS. 8. Remove the jumper wire.
Is there about 4.79 ¥ or more? 9. Measure voltage between EOP sensor 3P connector
YES—Goto step 3.
EOP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
/ \
at the oil pressure sensor and the PCM. ■
1 2 3
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. VCC2 SG2
(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
4. Disconnect the EOP sensor 3P connector.
5. Connect EOP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2

Is there about 5 V?
Z \
1 2 3 YES—Goto step 14.
POILCS SG2
(BLU/YEL) (GRN/YEL) NO—Goto step 10.

JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C22 and EOP sensor 3P connector
12. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). terminal No. 2.

terminal C14 and EOP sensor 3P connector / \
Wire side of
terminal No. 3. 1 female terminals
EOP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR POILCS (BLU/YEL)

y \ POILCS
(BLU/YEL) P C M CONNECTOR C (44P)
Wire side of
1 2 female terminals / ------------ \
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
I11 1101121 123 13|14|15|16
|4 | 5 | 6 I 7 8 | 9 |
17 18 19 ■ 1
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) SG2 (GRN/YEL) ■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
— — J 26 27 28 / 1 30131132 33 34 35
"Hi----- ------- ,\
136137 38139 [40141 |42 4 3 144|
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I 1
" L j— ..-I,|J
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ 1
■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
S
C
CO
oO
CO
26 27 28 33 34 35
136137 38|39|40|41 142 43144J Is there continuity ?
i,

Is there continuity? NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C22) and the EOP sensor, then go to step 20.
(C14) and the EOP sensor, then go to step 20. 19. Replace the EOP sensor (see page 11-304).

21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0523 in the
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DTC P0523 indicated? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 29,
terminals at the EOP sensor and the PCM, then go NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
to step 1. connections or loose terminals at the EOP sensor
NO—Go to step 25. known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0523 in the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
DTCs MENU with the HDS. until a result comes on.
Does the screen indicated PASSED?


connections or loose terminals at the EOP sensor
result comeson.


terminals at the EOP sensor and the PCM. If the
NO—Go to step 30.

DTC P2646: VTEC System Stuck OFF 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Special Tool s Required 6. Remove the EOP sensor (A), install the special tools
* Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A as shown, then install the EOP sensor in the oil
•A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 pressure gauge adapter (B).
•A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
•A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 removal with new O-ring.
•Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
B 07406-0070301

1. Check the engine oil level*
Is the engine oil level OK ?
YES—Goto step 2.

go to step 12.

the HDS.
Is the result OK ? 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 2 minutes.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 8. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
at the EOP sensor, the rocker arm oil control the HDS.
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the PCM.B
NO—Go to step 5.
9. Check the oil pressure. 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2646 in the
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 30 kPa
(0.3 kgf/crrf, 4.3psi)? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES—Replace the EOP sensor (see page 11-304), YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
then go to step 10. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16,
NO—Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
(VTEC solenoid valve) (see page 11-305), then go to NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
step 10. connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), the EOP
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 15.

above 167 I 1 (75 °C)

(VTEC solenoid valve), the EOP sensor, and the
NO—Go to step 17.

DTC P2647: VTEC System Stuck ON 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the EOP sensor (A), install the special tools
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A as shown, then install the EOP sensor in the oil
•A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 pressure gauge adapter (B).
•A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
•A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 removal with new O-ring.
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
B 07406-0070301

1. Cheek the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level OK?
YES—Goto step 2.

goto step 12.

the HDS.
Is the result OK ? 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
YES—intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
at the EOP sensor, the rocker arm oil control
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the PCM.B
NO—Goto step 5.
8. Check the oil pressure. 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2647 in the
Does the oil pressure increase to 392 kPa
(4.0 kgf/crrf, 56.9 psi)? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES—Replace the EOP sensor (see page 11-304), YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
then go to step 9. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15,
NO—Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
(VTEC solenoid valve) (see page 11-305), then go to NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
step 9. connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), the EOP
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
10. Reconnect all connectors. until a result comes on.


(VTEC solenoid valve), the EOP sensor, and the
NO—Goto step 16.

DTC 2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
(VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit Low Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminal C24 and body ground.

( .:..... ..-...■.... 1r=
nT...... ...... : '
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. , n ... , , . n
1 12 3 I4 I 5 I6 I7 8 I 9 I
[I 10 11 12 ■
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
3. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 1 20 / 22 23;24 25
1
the HDS. 26 27 28 /130|31 [32 33 -34 35
13613T
i— ,jr38|39 140 141 142 ^ 3 1441
-n - ■'.... 1...r —u i"”-...1.......
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. CSS (GRN/YEL)
YES—Go to step 5.
solenoid valve) and the PCM.B YES—Repair short in the wire between the rocker
arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the PCM (C24), then go to step 12.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid NO—Go to step 19.
11. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
7. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between solenoid valve) (see page 11-305).
valve) 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. 12. Reconnect all connectors.

1 2 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).

the HDS.
Term inal si de of male term inals Is DTC P2648 indicated?

1.
NO—Go to step 18.

18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC. P2648 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
COMPLETED, go to step 16. control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the
19. Reconnect all connectors. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
20. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NOT COMPLETED, go to step 21.

the HDS.

goto step 1.
NO—Go to step 23.

DTC P2849: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 7. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control
(VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit High Voltage solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) 2P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. PG2 (BLK)

solenoid valve) and the PCM. ■ YES—Go to step 8.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—Repair open in the wire between the rocker
arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid G101, then go to step 12.
6. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
valve) 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
ROCKER ARM OBL CONTROL SOLENOID

1 2
Is there 14—30 Q ?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Go to step 11.

terminal C24 and rocker arm oil control solenoid
(VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector terminal No. 2. Is DTC P2649 indicated?
ROCKER A R M OIL C O N TR O L S O LEN O ID
(VTEC S O LE N O ID V A LV E) 2P C O N N EC TO R YES—Check for poor connections or loose
Wire side of
1 female terminals 1.
CSS (GRN/YEL)
NO—Go to step 17.
PCM C O N N EC TO R C (44P)
1------------- .---- ----c
11 12 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 | 7 8 I 9 I DTCs MENU with the HDS.
I 10
11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1 20 / 22 23 24 2b
1
CO
co
CQ
o
26 27 28 33 34 35
(GRN/YEL)
136 13T 38|39|40|41 142 4 3 14 4 1 YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Terminal side of female terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16,
YES—Go to step 18. connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
(C24) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
solenoid valve), then go to step 12.
11. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC

solenoid valve) (see page 11 -305).
(cont'd)
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) EOP Sensor Removal/Installation
18. Reconnect all connectors. 1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-4).
19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 2. Remove the EOP sensor 3P connector (A).

11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
NO—Go to step 21.

DTCs MENU with the HDS. 3. Remove the EOP sensor (B).
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal

on.
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve)/Rocker Arm Oil
Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valye) Filter Replacement
1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-4).
2. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid

(VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector (A) and the
EOP sensor 3P connector (B).
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
solenoid valve) assembly (C) from the rear bank
cylinder head, and check the rocker arm oil control
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) filter (D) for
clogging. If it is clogged, replace the solenoid valve
filter, the engine oil filter, and the engine oil.

(ACM) CONTROL RELAY Repl acement, page 11 -347

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0A14: Front Engine Mount Actuator 9. Measure voltage between body ground and the
Circuit Malfunction appropriate engine mount control unit 20P
connector terminal (see table).
DTC P0AB8: Rear Engine Mount Actuator
Circuit Malfunction DTC ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT WIRE
ENGINE MOUNT (ACM) CONTROL UNIT COLOR
NOTE; ACTUATOR TERMINAL TERMINAL
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and P0AB6 Rear side No. 1 No. 1 GRN/BLK
any on-board snapshot, and review the general P0AB6 Rear side No. 2 No. 10 BLU/BLK
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). P0A14 Front side No. 1 No. 9 YEL/GRN
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to POA14 Front side No. 2 No. 20 BLU
rear active control engine mount (ACM) actuator.
SO LR M SO LFM
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. (GRN/BLK)* (Y E L/G R N )
CD
CD
cn
1 2 4 8
CD
X}-
LD
1 0 11 12 17 / 20
the HDS.
SOLRP SOLFP
(BLU/BUQ* (BLU)
Is DTC POA14 and/or P0AB6* indicated?

YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there battery voltage?

at the engine mount control unit and the active YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
control engine mount (ACM) actuator. ■ the engine mount control unit and the active
control engine mount (ACM) actuator, then go to
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. step 13.
6. Disconnect the front active control engine mount NO—Go to step 10.
(ACM) actuator (rear active control engine mount
(ACM) actuator)* 2P connector.

connector.
(cont'd)
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. At the actuator side, measure resistance between
active control engine mount (ACM) actuator 2P
11. Check for continuity between engine mount control connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
unit 20P connector terminals No. 9 (No. 1)* and
No. 20 (No. 10) V ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE M OUNT (ACM)
ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR
SOLFM
1 2
SOLRM
(GRN/BLK)* (YEL/GRN)
1 2 3 4 1---L 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17 / / 20
SOLRP SOLFP
(BLU/BLK)* (BLU)
Terminal side of male term inals

Is there about 0.75— 1.15 Q?
Is there continuity? YES—Replace the engine mount control unit

YES—Repair short in the wire between the engine
mount control unit No. 9 and No. 20 terminals NO—Replace the front engine mount (see page
(No. 1 and No. 10 terminals)*, then go to step 14. 5-27) or rear engine mount (see page 5-27)*, then
go to step 14.
NO—Go to step 12.

17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure; (see page 11-359).

the HDS.
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS.
Is DTC P0A14 and/or P0AB6* is indicated?

active control engine mount (ACM) actuator, then
go to step 1.

DTC P0A15: Front Engine Mount Actuator 7. At the actuator side, measure resistance between
Control Circuit Low Current front (rear)* active control engine mount (ACM)
actuator 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Control Circuit Low Current ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE M O UNT (ACM)
NOTE:
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1 2
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). KOr

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of male terminals
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.

Is there about 0.75- 1.15 Q?
YES—Go to step 8.
Is DTC P0A15 and/or P0AB7* indicated?
NO—Replace the front engine mount (see page
YES—Go to step 5. 5-27) or rear engine mount (see page 5-27)*, then
go to step 13.
at the engine mount control unit and the active
control engine mount (ACM) actuator or the engine
mount control unit and G505. ■
6. Disconnect the front (rear)* active control engine

mount (ACM) actuator 2P connector.
8 . Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P 10. Check for continuity between body ground and the
connector. appropriate engine mount control unit (see table).
9. Check for continuity between engine mount control DTC ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT WIRE
unit 20P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 11 and ENGINE MOUNT (ACM) CONTROL UNIT COLOR
body ground. ACTUATOR TERMINAL TERMINAL
P0AB7 Rear side No. 1 No. 1 GRN/BLK
P0AB7 Rear side No. 2 No. 10 BLU/BLK
P0A15 Front side No. 1 No. 9 YEL/GRN
P0A15 Front side No. 2 No. 20 BLU
PG1(BLK)
1 2 3 4 J---- L 5 6 / 8 9 ENGINE M O U N T CONTROL UNIT 2©P CONNECTOR
10 11 12 14 15 16 17 / / 20
PG2 (BLK) SOLRM SOLFM
1 2 3 4 1---1 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 / 1415 16 17 / / 20
SOLRP SOLFP
W ire side of female terminals (BLU/BLK)* (BLU)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the engine Is there continuity ?

mount control unit (No. 2, No. 11) and the G505,
then go to step 13. YES—Repair short in the wire between the engine
mount control unit and the active control engine
mount (ACM) actuator, then go to step 13.
NO—Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
11. Connect the appropriate active control engine 12. Check for continuity between body ground and the
mount (ACM) actuator 2P connector terminal to appropriate engine mount control unit 20P
body ground with a jumper wire (see table). connector terminal (see table).
DTC ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT WIRE DTC ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT WIRE
(ACM) ACTUATORTERMINAL COLOR ENGINE MOUNT (ACM) CONTROL UNIT COLOR
P0AB7 Rear side No. 1 GRN/BLK ACTUATOR TERMINAL TERMINAL
P0AB7 Rear side No. 2 BLU/BLK P0AB7 Rear side No. 1 No. 1 GRN/BLK
P0A15 Front side No. 1 YEL/GRN P0AB7 Rear side No. 2 No. 10 BLU/BLK
P0A15 Front side No. 2 BLU POA15 Front side No. 1 No. 9 YEL/GRN
P0A15 Front side No. 2 No. 20 BLU
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE M O UNT (ACM)
ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
SOLRM SOLFM
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE 1 2 3 4 J- “L 5 6 / 8 9
cn
4^
10 11 12 / 16 17 / / 20
SOLRP SOLFP
(BLU/BLK)* (BLU)
W ire si de of female term inal s

Wire side of fem ale term inal s
YES—Replace the engine mount control unit


mount control unit and active control engine mount
(ACM) actuator, then go to step 13.
.< r <
17. Let the engine idle 10 seconds.
Is DTC P0A15 and/or P0AB7* indicated?

go to step 1.

temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
DTC P0A16: Front Engine Mount Actuator 9. Measure voltage between body ground and the
Control Circuit High Current appropriate engine mount control unit 20P
connector terminal (see table).
Control Circuit High Current DTC ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT WIRE
ENGINE MOUNT (ACM) CONTROL UNIT COLOR
NOTE: ACTUATOR TERMINAL TERMINAL
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and P0AB8 Rear side No. 1 No. 1 GRN/BLK
any on-board snapshot, and review the general P0AB8 Rear side No. 2 No. 10 BLU/BLK
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). P0A16 Front side No. 1 No. 9 YEL/GRN
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to P0A16 Front side No. 2 No. 20 BLU
ENGINE M O U NT CONTROL U N IT 20P CONNECTOR
SOLRM SOLFM
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. (G RN/BLK)* (YEL/GRN)
1 2 3 4 ----L 5 6 / 8 9
3. Wait 10 seconds. 10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17 / / 20
SOLRP SOLFP
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. (B LU /B LK )* (BLU)
Is DTC POA 16 and/or P0AB8* indicated?
YES—Go to step 5. Wire side of fem al e terminals

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there battery voltage?
control engine mount (ACM) actuator. ■ YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
the engine mount control unit and the active
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. control engine mount (ACM) actuator, then go to
step 13.
6. Disconnect the appropriate active control engine
mount (ACM) actuator 2P connector. NO—Go to step 10.
7. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector.

11. Check for continuity between engine mount control 12. At the actuator side, measure the resistance
unit 20P connector terminals No. 9 (No. 1)* and between front (rear)* active control engine mount
No. 20 (No. 10)*. (ACM) actuator 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE MOUNT (ACM)
SOLRM SOLFM
1 2 3 4 _n_ 5 6 / 8 9 1 2
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17 / / 20
SOLRP SOLFP
(BLU/BLK)* (BLU)

is there about 0 .7 5 - 1.15 Q?
mount control unit No. 9 and No. 20 terminals YES—Replace the engine mount control unit
(No. 1 and No. 10 terminals)*, then go to step 14. (see page 11-347), then go to step 14.
NO—Go to step 12. NO—Replace the front engine mount (see page
5-27), or rear engine mount (see page 5-27)*, then
go to step 14.
(cont'd)
16. Reset the FCM with the HDS.
Is DTC POA 16 and/or P0AB8* indicated?

terminals at the engine mount control unit and
go to step 1.

DTC P15AB: Engine Mount Control Unit 7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Power Source Circuit Low Voltage
Is DTC P15AB indicated?
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES—Go to step 8.
troubleshooting information (see page 11- 3 ). NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
• If DTC P15AB is stored at the same time as DTC time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
P16C5, troubleshoot DTC P16C5 first, then recheck for at the engine mount control unit and the PCM, or
P15AB. the engine mount control unit and G503.il
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 9. Check for poor connections at PCM connector
A (44P) and the engine mount control unit 20P
Is DTC U0073 indicated? connector.
YES—Do the troubleshooting for the DTC U0073 Are the connections OK ?
NO—Go to step 3.
NO—Repair the poor connections, then go to
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. step 16.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P
connector.
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
13. Measure voltage between engine mount control 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
unit 20P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
17. Check for continuity between engine mount control
ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL U N IT 20P CONNECTOR unit 20P connector terminals No. 14 and body
ground.
IG l (YEL)
ENGINE M O U NT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 i—i ^ 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 17 / / 20
CD
LD
1 2 3 4 i—i 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 / 14 15 16 17 / / 20
(v)
Is there battery voltage? Wire side of female terminals

NO—Go to step 14.
YES—Goto step 18.
NO—Repair open in the wire between engine
15. Inspect the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT mount control unit (No. 14) and G503, then goto
LIGHT (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/ step 22.
relay box.
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the No. 9

BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A) fuse
and engine mount control unit (No. 4), then go to
step 22.
NO—Repair short in the wire between the No. 9

BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A) fuse
and engine mount control unit (No. 4). Also replace
the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT
(10 A) fuse, then go to step 22.
18. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 22. Reconnect all connectors.
19. Disconnect the PCM connector A (44P). 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Connect engine mount control unit 20P connector 24. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
terminals No. 5 and No. 17* to body ground with a
jumper wire. 25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
JUMPER WIRE
CANH (WHT) is DTC P15AB indicated?
1 2 3 4 _r—l 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 14 15 16 17 / 20 YES—Check for poor connections or loose
CANL (RED)#
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
*: CANL Line

terminals A36 and A1 * and body ground
individually.

" CANL (RED)*
1 2 3 U |5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9
1 10 I.
11 12 A H W 17 18 19
i
20 21 22 23 24 25
■ 26 27
28 S I / N / 33 34 35
38 l / l / l * 142 43 1441
CANH (WHT)
*: CANL Line

NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM (A36

(A1)*) and engine mount control unit (No. 5
(No. 17)*), then go to step 22.
*: CANL line
DTC P15AC: Engine Mount Control Unit 7. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record ail freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P15AC indicated?
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. terminals at the engine mount control unit and the
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. goto step 1.
Is DTC P15AC indicated? NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES—Go to step 4. indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—Intermittent failure* the system is OK at this

control engine mount (ACM) actuator. ■
5. Replace the engine mount control unit (see page

11-347).

DTC P15AD: Engine Mount Control Unit 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
Is DTC P15AD indicated?
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. terminals at the engine mount control unit and the
Is DTC P15AD indicated? go to step 7.
YES—Go to step 4. NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
control engine mount (ACM) actuator.*

11-347).
DTC P15AE; Cylinder Pause Signal 10. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector
Malfunction terminal A3 and body ground.

CSSAM (PNK)
n n
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ■
1 2 3 K T f IJJ 7 8 I9 L
10 11 12 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ■ 26 27 2917131/ 33 34 35
28
13 6 1 / 3 8 1 / | / | 41 1
42 4 3 |4 4 |
the HDS.
St
Is DTC P15AE indicated? Terminal side of fem al e terminals
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES—Replace the engine mount control unit
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals (see page 11-347), then go to step 11.
at the PCM and the engine mount control unit.B
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. and the engine mount control unit (No. 6), then go
to step 11.
connector.
9. Connect engine mount control unit 20P connector

SCP (PNK)
1 2 3 4 J--- L 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 71415 16 17 / /
CM
O
JUMPER WIRE


the HDS.
Is DTC P1 SAE indicated?

terminals at the PCM and the engine mount control
unit, then go to step 1.

DTC P15AF: CMP Sensor Signal Malfunction 9. Measure voltage between engine mount control
unit 20P connector terminal No. 15 and body
NOTE: ground.
any on-board snapshot, and review the general ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
• If DTC P0340 and/or P0344 is stored at the same time
as DTC P15AF, troubleshoot DTC P0340 and/or P0344
first, then recheck for DTC P15AF. 1 2 3 4 . j —l 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 / 16 17 / / 20
•s t
LD

Is DTC P15AF indicated? Is there about 5 V?

«
YES—Goto step 5. YES—Go to step 10.

at the PCM and the engine mount control unit. ■ 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check for poor connections at PCM connector 12. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
connector. 13. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P
connector.
Are the connections OK ?
YES—Go to step 7.

step 25.
7. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector.

14. Checkfor continuity between engine mount control 16. Connect CMP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1
unit 20P connector terminal No. 15 and body to body ground with a jumper wire.
ground.
CM P SE N SO R 3P CONNECTOR
E N G I NE M O U N T C O N T R O L U N IT 20P C O N N E C T O R
A
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 i— i 5 6 / 8 9
C M P (YEL)
o
C \j
10 11 12 / 16 17 /
cn
/
C M P (PUR I J U M P E R W I RE

W i re side of female terminals


mount control unit (No. 15) and the PCM (A27),
then go to step 25.
NO—Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
18. Measure voltage between engine mount control 23. Connect engine mount control unit 20P connector
unit 20P connector terminal No. 15 and body terminal No. 15 to body ground with a jumper wire.
ground.
ENGI NE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
ENGI NE M O U N T CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 _r-T_ 5 6 / 8 9
1 2 3 4 _i—i- 5 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 / 14)15 16 17 / / 20
10 11 12 / 1415 16 17 / / 20 CMP (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
W ire side of female term inal s


Is there about OV? terminal A27 and body ground.
□ --- ---- ---- ---- --- c
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 |6 |7 8 | 9 |
NO—Go to step 19. a 10 11 12 / 1 1 4 I / I / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25
i 26 27 28 2 9 |/3 lL ? 33 34 35 a
M / 3 8 1 /1 /1 4 1 142 43|44|
20. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P CMPOUT (PUR)
connector.
u
22. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). Terminal side of female terminals

(A27) and the engine mount control unit (No. 15),
then go to step 25.

Is DTC P15AF indicated?



Is DTC P15AF indicated?

unit, then go to step 1. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, goto step 1.

DTC P15B0: CKP Sensor Signal Malfunction 9. Measure voltage between engine mount control
NOTE; ground.
any on-board snapshot, and review the general ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL U N IT 20P CONNECTOR
• If DTC P0335 and/or P0339 is stored at the same time
as DTC P0335, troubleshoot DTC P0335 and/or P0339
first, then recheck for DTC P15B0. 1 2 3 4 i— i 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 14 15 16 17 / /
O
CXI
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). CKP1 (YEL/BLK)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. (v)

Is DTC P15B0 indicated? Is there about 5 V?

at the PCM and the engine mount control u n it * 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check for poor connections at PCM connector 12. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
connector.
YES—Go to step 7.

step 25.
7. Disconnect the CKP sensor 6P connector (see page

11-228).

g51
13. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P 16. Connect the CKP sensor 6P connector terminal
connector. No. 5 to body ground with a jumper wire.
14. Check for continuity between engine mount control CKP SENSOR A/B 6P CONNECTOR
ground.
ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6

CKPA (BLU)
H JUMPER W IRE
1 2 3 4
LO
CO
/
10 11 12 16 17 / 20
CJl
CKP1 (YEL/BLK)
©
Wire side of fem al e terminals

then go to step 25.
NO—Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
18. Measure voltage between engine mount control 23. Connect engine mount control unit 20P connector
unit 20P connector terminal No. 16 and body terminal No. 16 to body ground with a jumper wire.
ground.
ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL U N IT 20P CONNECTOR
CD
CD
1 2 3 4 I---- L
cn
M / 8
CD
OI
CD
1 2 3 4 i— i 10 11 12 14 16 17 / 20
10 11 12 / 14 16 17 / 20 CKP1 (YEL/BLK)
CKP1 (YEL/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
(v)
Wire side of fem ale term inal s

Is there about 0 V? terminal A26 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44PJ
?---- ------ ------ ------ -----c
I1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
NO—Go to step 19. 1
10 11 12 / | 1 4 / / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25
I a
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 26 27 28 33 34 35
36 3 8 1 / | / | 41 142 4 3 |4 4 |
20. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P CKPOUT (YEL/BLK)
connector.
22. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). Term inal side of fem ale terminals

then go to step 25.
is DTC P15B0 indicated?



Is DTC P15B0 indicated?


DTC P15B1: CMP Sensor/CKP Sensor Signal 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Incorrect Correlation
8. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect the CKP sensor 6P connector (see page
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 11-228).
• If DTC P0335, P0339, P0340 and/or P0344 is stored at 10. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P
the same time as DTC P15B1, troubleshoot DTC connector.
P0335, P0339, P0340 and/or P0344 first, then recheck
for DTC P15B1. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to
CKPOUT-CKP1 line. 12. Measure voltage between engine mount control
unit 20P connector terminal No. 15 (No. 16)* and
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body ground.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
3. Test-drive the vehicle for 20 minutes in the range of

these recorded freeze data parameters:
1 2 3 4 J — L 5 6 / 8 9
• ENGINE SPEED
CXI
O
Xt*
LO
10 11 12 16 17 /
* VSS
CMP (PUR) I I CKP1 (YEL/BLK)*
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. (Y)(Y)

YES—Go to step 5.

at PCM and engine mount control unit.B YES—Replace the engine mount control unit
NO—Go to step 13.
6. Check for poor connections at PCM connector A
(44P), the engine mount control unit 20P connector,
and C204.
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Repair the poor connections, then go to step

19.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Connect engine mount control unit 20P connector
terminal No. 15 (No. 16)4to body ground with the
14. Check for continuity between engine mount control jumper wire.
unit 20P connector terminal No. 15 (No. 16)* and
body ground. ENGINE M O U N T CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 i—i 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12/ 1 14 15516 17 / 20
1 2 3 4 i— i 5 6 / 8 9 CMP (PUR) CKPTCYEL/BUQ*
LD
10 11 12 / 16 17 / 20
CMP (PUR) CKP1 (YEL/BLK)# JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
@@

terminal A27 (A26)* and body ground.
(A27 (A26)*) and engine mount control unit (No. 15 I 1 I 2 3 ] 4 | 5 I6 | 7 8|9 l
(No. 16)*), then go to step 19. a 10 11 12 X I 1 4 I / I / 17 18 19
CKPOUT a
20 21 22 Z X L 23 24 25 i
(YEL/BLK)*
NO—Goto step 15. 26 27 28 2 9 I/I3 1 U 7 33 34 35
co
00
3 8 ]/ 1/141 |42 431441

15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. CMPOUT(PUR)
CANL Line

(A27 (A26)*) and engine mount control unit (No. 15
(No. 16) *), then go to step 19.
(cont'd)

these recorded freeze data parameters.
•ENGINE SPEED
• VSS




the recorded freeze data parameter.
•ENGINE SPEED
• VSS

terminals at the PCM and engine mount control
unit If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-

DTC P16G4: Engine Mount Actuator Control 6. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover
Power Circuit Stuck OFF (see page 20-90), then remove the active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay (A).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data
Is DTC P16C4 indicated?
YES—Go to step 4.

control engine mount (ACM) control relay.■

5. Inspect the No. 5 ACM (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary connector.
under-hood fuse box.
is the fuse OK ?
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—Goto step 6. :
(cont'd)
8. Check for continuity between body ground and 9. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover
engine mount control unit 20P connector terminals (see page 20-90), then remove the active control
No. 3 and No. 12 individually. engine mount (ACM) control relay (A).
ENGINE M OUNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
IGSOL1 (GRN)
1 2 3 4 —i 5 6 /
i 8 9
-St
LO
10 11 12 / 16 17 / 20
IGSOL2 (GRN)

mount control unit (No. 3, No. 12) and active
control engine mount (ACM) control relay. Also
replace the No. 5 ACM (10 A) fuse, then go to 10. Test the active control engine mount (ACM) control
step 20. relay (see page 22-82).
NO—Repair short in the wire between active Is the active control engine mount (ACM) control
control engine mount (ACM) control relay and the relay OK?
No. 5 ACM (10 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 5 ACM
(10 A) fuse, then go to step 20. YES—Goto step 11.
NO—Replace the active control engine mount

(ACM) control relay, then go to step 20.
11. Measure voltage between active control engine 13. Check for continuity between active control engine
mount (ACM) control relay 4P connector terminal mount (ACM) control relay 4P connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground. No. 2 and engine mount control unit 20P connector
terminals No. 3 and No. 12 individually.
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE M O U N T (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE M O UNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
+ B (RED/BLU) ----------
m
)) W ire side of
* fem ale terminals
ENGINE M O U NT
CONTROL UNIT
20P CONNECTOR IGSOL1 (GRN)
1 2 3 4 ..J----- L_ 5 6 / 8 9
Wire side of female term inals 10 11 12 1415 16 17 / 20
| I GSOL2 (GRN)
Is there battery voltage? W ire side of fem ale terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between the active YES—Goto step 14.
control engine mount (ACM) control relay and the
No. 5 ACM (10 A) fuse, then go to step 20. NO—Repair open in the wire between the engine
mount control unit (No. 3 (No. 12)) and active
12. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P control engine mount (ACM) control relay, then go
connector. to step 20.
(confd)
15. Measure voltage between active control engine 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
mount (ACM) control relay 4P connector terminal
No. 4 and body ground. 19. Checkfor continuity between engine mount control
unit 20P connector terminal No. 8 and active
ACTIVE CONTROL ENGI NE M O UNT (ACM)
CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR control engine mount (ACM) control relay 4P

CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
2
IM IG (YEL)
|T ISOLRLY (LT GRN)
Wire side of female terminals I
ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL (Q ) SOLRLY
W ire side of fem ale term inal s UN IT20P CONNECTOR | (LT GRN)
1 2 3 4 _C~L 5 6 / 8 9
cn
10 11 12 / 16 17 / 20
NO—Goto step 16. Is there continuity?
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES—Replace the engine mount control unit
17. Inspect the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT
LIGHT (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/ NO—Repair open in the wire between the engine
relay box. mount control unit (No. 8) and the active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay, then go to step
Is the fuse OK ? 20 .
YES—Repair open in the wire between the active 20. Reconnect all connectors.
No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A) 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
fuse, then go to step 20.
NO—Repair short in the wire between active

No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A)
fuse. Also replace the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT,
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (10 A) fuse, then go to step
20.
m

active control engine mount (ACM) control relay,
then go to step 1.

DTC P16C5; Engine Mount Actuator Control 4. Test the active control engine mount (ACM) control
Power Circuit Stuck ON relay (see page 22-82).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the active control engine mount (ACM) control
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general relay OK ?
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Replace the active control engine mount
2. Check the ACM BATTERY VOLTAGE and ACM (ACM) control relay, then go to step 10.
RELAY in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the ACM BATTERY VOLTAGE indicate
battery voltage when the ACM RELAY indicates 6. Disconnect the engine mount control unit 20P
OFF? connector.
YES—Go to step 3. 7. Measure voltage between body ground and engine

mount control unit 20P connector terminals No. 3
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this and No. 12 individually.
at the engine mount control unit and the active ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
control engine mount (ACM) control relay. ■
3. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover IGSOL1 (GRN)

(see page 20-90), then remove the active control 1 2 3 4 i— i 5 6 / 8 9
engine mount (ACM) control relay (A).
(X I
O
10 11 12 X 14 15 16 17 / /
IGSOL2 (GRN)
y) (y

the engine mount control unit (No. 3/No. 12) and
the active control engine mount (ACM) control
relay, then go to step 9.
NO—Goto step 8.
8. Check for continuity between engine mount control 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
unit 20P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground.
ENGINE M O U N T CONTROL U N IT 2§P CONNECTOR
SOLRLY
(LT GRN) 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
1 2 3 4 _r i_ 5 6 / 8 9
10 11 12 14 15 16 17 / / 20 Is DTC P16C5 indicated?

U terminals at the engine mount control unit and the
active control engine mount (ACM) control relay,
then goto step 1.
Is there continuity ? indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■

mount control unit (No. 8) and the active control
engine mount (ACM) control relay, then go to step
9.
NO—Replace the engine mount control unit


DTC P16C6: Engine Mount Actuator High 9. Measure voltage between body ground and the
Voltage During Function Test appropriate engine mount control unit connector
terminal (see table).
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and ACTIVE CONTROL ENGINE WIRE
any on-board snapshot, and review the general ENGINE MOUNT MOUNT COLOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). (ACM) ACTUATOR CONTROL UNIT
• If DTC P0A14, P0A16, P0AB6, P0AB8, P16C7, or P16C8 TERMINAL TERMINAL
are stored at the same time as DTC P16C6, Rear side No. 1 No. 1 GRN/BLK
troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for Rear side No. 2 No. 10 BLU/BLK
P16C6. Front side No. 1 No. 9 YEL/GRN
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the Front side No. 2 No. 20 BLU
SOLRM SOLFM
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. (GRN/BLK)* (YEL/GRN)
1 2 3 4| r -i 5 6 8 9
3. Do the ACM ACTIVATION in the INSPECTION
MENU of the ACM with the HDS.
10 11 12 /|1 4 15 16 17 /
SOLRP
A
SOLFP
20
(BLU/BLK)* (BLU)

YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there battery voltage?

at the engine mount control unit and the active YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
control engine mount (ACM) actuator.■ the engine mount control unit and the active
control engine mount (ACM) actuator, then go to
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. step 13.
6. Disconnect both active control engine mount NO—Go to step 10.

(ACM) actuator 2P connectors.

connector.

11. Check for continuity between engine mount control 14. Reconnect all connectors.
unit 20P connector terminals No. 9 (No. 1)* and
No. 20 (No. 10)*. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ENGINE M O UNT CONTROL UN IT 20P CONNECTOR


SOLRM SOLFM
(GRN/BL1C)* (YEL/GRN) 18. Do the ACM ACTIVATION with VTEC in the
1 2 3 4 i— i 5 6 / 8 9 INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
10 11 12 14-15- 16 17 / 20
SOLRP SOLFP
(BLU/BLK)* (BLU)
W ire side of female terminals YES—Check for poor connections or loose

Is there continuity? goto step 1.
YES—Repair short in the wire between the engine NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
mount control unit No. 9 and No. 20 terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(No. 1 and No. 10terminals)*, then goto step 14. indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—Go to step 12.
12. At the actuator side, measure resistance between

active control engine mount (ACM) actuator 2P
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

1 2
Terminal side of male term inals
is there about 0.75— 1.15 Q ?

(see page 11 -347), then go to step 14.
NO—Replace the faulty engine mount; front engine

mount (see page 5-27), rear engine mount
(see page 5-27)*.
DTC P16C7: Rear Engine Mount Actuator 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
Control Circuit High Current
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359),
DTC P16C8: Front Engine Mount Actuator
Control Circuit High Current 10. Wait 10 seconds.
NOTE: 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general Is DTC P16C7* and/or P16C8 indicated?
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the YES—Check for poor connections or loose
rear active control engine mount (ACM) actuator. terminals at the engine mount control unit and the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). go to step 1.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
3. Wait 10 seconds. indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
Is DTC P16C7* and/or P16C8 indicated?
YES—Go to step 5.

control engine mount (ACM) actuator. ■

11-347).

e 3
DTC P16C9: Engine Mount Control Unit


3. Wait 10 seconds.
YES—Go to step 5.

time.H

11-347).
10. Wait 10 seconds.

terminals at the engine mount control unit, then go
to step 1.

Engine Mount Vibration and Noise Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Check for any of these conditions that may cause
increased vibration and noise:
• Engine misfire
• If there are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs • Deformed radiator mounting parts (brackets
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's upper cushions, or lower cushions)
troubleshooting. • Loose bumper beam
• If there are no Temporary DTCs or DTCs • Looseness, deformation, or tears in the rubber
indicated, go to step 4. portion of the engine or transmission mounts
• Loose, damaged, or interference from exhaust
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. system parts
• Collision damage to the frame or undercarriage
4. Open the engine hood. • Abnormal wear of tires
• Loose or damaged suspension parts
5. Select ACM in the INSPECTION MENU, then select • Wheel alignment out of specification
Fr ACM and Rr ACM with the HDS.
6. Feel the engine for vibration while you turn the

engine mounts on and off in Fr ACM and Rr ACM
with the HDS.
• If the engine moves when you turn the engine

mounts on and off, go to step 7.
• If the engine does not move when you turn the
engine mounts on and off, replace the
corresponding engine mount; front engine
mount (see page 5-27), rear engine mount
(see page 5-27).
Engine Mount Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's console side trim

(see page 20- 88 ).

connector (A).
3. Remove the bolts and the engine mount control

unit (B).

FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, Signal Circuit Troubleshooting,

page 11-353 page 11-352
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower 7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
Than Expected bore.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general bore?
YES—If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body (see page 11-407). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-402), then go
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 8.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the NO—Check the A/C system or power steering
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. system, then go to step 17.
4. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with 8. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-408).
the HDS:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
• IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 <C) 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
• Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
• FSS is CLOSED 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. 12. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with
the HDS:
Does the screen indicate FAILED ?
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 *C)
YES—Go to step 6. • IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 <€)
• Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 15. • ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling • FSS is CLOSED
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, goto step 4 and recheck.
6. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
(cont'd)
YES—Check the A/C system and/or power steering
system, then go to step 1. YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
NO—Go to step 14.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the system and/or power steering system, then go to
DTCs MENU with the HDS. step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
idling until a result comes on. If the screen
Does the screen indicate PASSED? indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 12.

NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C

system and/or power steering system, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
idling until a result comes on. If the screen
15. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle

bore.
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle

bore?
YES—If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle

body (see page 11-407). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-402), then go
to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 8.
NO—Goto step 17.
17. Recheck with different load conditions (turn on the

headlights, blower motor, or A/C; change the gear
position, etc.).
DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Than Expected
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES—Check for poor connections or loose ■
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1:.
NO—Goto step 11.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at DTCs MENU with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
YES—Go to step 5. connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF (turn on the headlights, blower motor, or A/C;
CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions change the gear position, etc.), then go to step 9.
(electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), then go to
step 3.
5. Checkfor vacuum leaks at these parts:
• PCV valve
- PCV hose
• EVAP canister purge valve
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold
• Brake booster hose
Are there any leaks?
YES—Repair or replace the leaking parts(s), then

go to step 6.
NO—Goto step 6.

A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Momentarily connect PCM connector terminal A14
to body ground with a jumper wire several times.
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.

ACC (RED)
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the

1 1 1 2 3 |4 I 5 I 6 | 7 8 I 9 I.
HDS. I
10 11 12 / | 1 4 / / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 a
Does it indicate ON? I 26 27 28 33 34 35
381 / | / | 41 142 431441
YES—Go to step 5.
JUMPER WIRE
NO—Do the A/C pressure switch circuit
troubleshooting (see page 21-40).
5. Check the A/C system. Term inal side of fem ale terminals
Does the A/C system operate? Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor
clutch?
YES—The air conditioning system circuit is OK.B
NO—Go to step 6. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230).®
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION at the A/C clutch relay and the PCM. If the
MENU with the HDS. connections are OK, check the A/C clutch relay
(see page 22-82), repair open in the wire between
Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor the PCM (A14), the A/C clutch relay, and the other
clutch? A/C systems.
YES—Do the A/C system test (see page 21-71).
NO—Go to step 9.

Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Starttheengine, and letitidle.
2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with

the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the

headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES—The alternator signal circuit is OK.B
NO—Goto step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.

PCM connector terminal C41.
1 1 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 2S /130|31|32 33 34 35
|36|37 38|39|40|41 142 431441
ALTF (WHT/RED)

(C41) and the alternator. ■

PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P
2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead.
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Go to step 14.
4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position.

W ire side of female term inal s
5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it change to OFF?
YES—The PSP switch signal circuit is OK.® (A38) and the PSP switch.®
NO—Go to step 6. NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230).®
8. Start the engine. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
HDS.
16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1
Does it change to OFF? and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine.
YES—Replace the PSP switch.® PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
NO—Go to step 10.

PSPSW
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (G R N /W HT)
_______ JUMPER WIRE
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. GND (BLK)

17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the 23. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P
HDS. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Does it change to ON? PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
YES—Replace the PSP switch. ■
NO—Go to step 18.
19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P

connector.
20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. W ire side of female terminals

terminal A38 and PSP switch 2P connector terminal YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
No. 1. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
p cpcW O I ] W ire side of PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230KB
(GRN/W HT! fem a,e termina,s
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PSP
switch and G 2 0 1 .I
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P!
11 1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1 10 11 12 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 i
1 26 27 28 291/|311/ 33 34
35
1 3 6 1 / 38 | / | / l 41 142 4 3 |44I
______________PSPSW (GRN/W HT)
is there continuity?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PSP

switch and the PCM (A38).B
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with
P O M CONNECTOR A (44P)
the HDS.
BKSW (WHT/BLK) ~~
Does it indicate OFF?
t
h 1 2 3 I 4- I 5 I 6 | 7 8 I 9 L
YES—Go to step 3. a 10 11 12 / 1 141 / | / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25
NO—Inspect the brake pedal position switch i 26 27 28 2 9 1 /]3 1 |/ 33 34 35 ■
(see page 19-5). ■ 1 3 6 1 / 381 / | / | 41 142 4 3 |44|
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE

SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it change to ON ?
YES—The brake pedal position switch signal circuit
(BKSW line) is OK.m Is there continuity?
NO—Go to step 4. YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM

(A8) and the No. 47, STOP (20 A) fuse. Also replace
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the No. 47, STOP (20 A) fuse. ■
5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NO—Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P

connector.

9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

4P CONNECTOR
BKSW
r ....r ” T (WHT/BLK)
1 2
3 ><< 4
JUMPER WIRE

BKSW (WHT/BLK)
’ _______ ii— ii
j .
I 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 I 7 8 |9 l
[■ 10 11 12
L / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 W 1
20 21 22 23 24 25
■ 26 27 28 291/1311/ 33 34 35 ■
—42 43 |44|
i...1 v
.
YES—Repair open in the wire between the brake

pedal position switch and the No. 47, STOP (20 A)
fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-5). ■

and the brake pedal position switch.*
Idle Speed Inspection
NOTE: 5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

• Before checking the idle speed, check these items: 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
-T h e malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
reported on, and there are no DTCs.
- Ignition timing 6. Check the idle speed without load conditions:
- Spark plugs headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
- A ir cleaner conditioner off.
- PCV system
• Apply the parking brake. Idle speed should be: 730 (650) *± 5 0 rpm
(In Park or neutral)
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP)
canister purge valve connector. * : J35Z1 engine
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 7. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool,
blower fan on High, rear window defogger on, and
headlights on high beam).
Idle speed should be: 730 (700) *± 5 0 rpm

(in Park or neutral)
* : J35Z1 engine
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification,

do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
If the idle speed is still not within specification, go
to symptom troubleshooting.
8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve

connector.

(see page 11-218).
PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the PCM can

learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of

these actions:
• Replace PCM.
• Reset PGM.
• Update PCM.
• Clean or replace the throttle body.
NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require

you to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear
window defogger, lights, etc.) are off.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.

radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant
temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C),
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the

throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include

its running time in the 5 minutes.
FUEL TANK UNIT

Removal/Installation,
page 11-384
FUEL PUMP
Circuit Troubleshooting,
page 11-368
POWERTRAIN CONTROL FUEL FILTER
MODULE (PCM) Replacement, page 11-386
Update, page 11-7 FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Substitution, page 11-8 Test, page 11-389
Replacement, page 11-230 Replacement, page 11-387
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
FUEL PURGE LINE Replacement, page 11-386
FUEL FILL CAP
FUELTANK
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS

Precautions, page 11-378
Removal, page 11-380
FUEL FEED LINE
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS

Precautions, page 11-378
Removal, page 11-380
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge

Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
NOTE:
• Because it requires 124 miles (200 km) of driving
without refueling to complete this diagnosis, DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-389).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK ?

terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module.*
NO—Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page


terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module, then go to step 1.

DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 14. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 5P
Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). SIGNAL (ORN/WHT)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.

1 2 /
V 5 /
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge YES—Repair short in the wire between the gauge
sending unit.■ control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 23.
NO—Go to step 15.
5. Remove the driver's second row seat (see page
20-115). 15. Reconnect the gauge control module connector B
(36P).
16. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-384).
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
17. Connect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
Is DTC P0463 indicated ?
YES—Replace the fuel gauge sending unit

NO—Goto step 11.
12. Remove the gauge control module (see page

22 - 102 ).
13. Disconnect the gauge control module connector B

(36P).
(cont'd)
20. S it the float (A) to the E position. 29. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.


terminals at the gauge control module and the fuel
gauge sending unit, then go to step 1. If the PCM
21. Check the fuel gauge. (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
Does the fuel gauge move to the empty position?
Yes—Go to step 29. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO—Replace the gauge control module (see page Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
22-102), then go to step 22. indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■

gauge sending unit, then go to step 1.

DTC P0463; Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 9. Remove the gauge control module (see page
Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage 22 - 102).
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Disconnect gauge control module connector B
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general (36P).
11. Check for continuity between gauge control
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). module connector B (36P) terminal No. 8 and body
ground.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (36P)
Is DTC P0463 indicated? - GND (BlLK/YEL)

i— -------- n
ll^lsuT B IelT 8 | 9 110 111 12113 | t4fl6 116 | I 7T18 I
YES—Go to step 4.
119 1/1 21 12212313412S12S | 271 ^ | ^ 1^31311 133J ^ [ ^ 1 36

at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge
sending unit.B
5. Remove the driver's second row seat (see page Is there continuity?
20-115).
NO—Repair open in the wire between the gauge
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector. control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge
8. Connect fuel tank unit 5P connector terminal No. 1
to body ground with a jumper wire.
FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
GND
(BLK/YEL)
1 2/
JUMPER WIRE
V 5/
(cont'd)
12, Connect fuel tank unit 5P connector terminal No. 2 14. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel tank unit 5P
to body ground with a jumper wire. connector.
FUEL TANK U N IT 5P CONNECTOR

16. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-389).
SIGNAL (ORN/WHT) Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK ?

2K
1 2/ JUMPER WIRE YES—Go to step 17.
V 5/ NO—Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
W ire side of female terminals 17. Connect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
18. Reconnect gauge control module connector B (36P).

module connector B (36P) terminal No. 7 and body 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ground.
21. Set the float (A) to the F position.
SIGNAL (ORN/W HT)

T | |
n ......
■ ^
..-n
| 9 | 10| 116 |l jT l8
1
19 1 / 1 2 1 12 2 I z s j a»| 2B51as 12 7 ( 2 8 12 9 13o| 31 3 2 13 0 134 ( ^ 13B
NO—Repair open in the wire between the gauge

control module (SIGNAL line) and the fuel gauge 22. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the full position?

i f D T C P 0 4 6 3 in d ic a t e d ?

gauge sending unit, then go to step 1.


Is D T C P 0 4 6 3 in d ic a t e d ?

gauge sending unit. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that 4. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2
the fuel pump actually runs; when it is on, you will hear (FUEL PUMP) 5P connector terminal No. 5 and
some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel body ground.
fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for
2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)
the fuel pump does not make noise, check as follows: 5P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. IGP (YEL/BLK)
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A).
YES—Goto step 5.

relay 1 (FI MAIN) and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP).H
5. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2

(FUEL PUMP) 5P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)

3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 5P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 6.
NO-
• Check the No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.®
• Check for an open between the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box and PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP).®
• If needed, replace the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box. ■
6 . Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
7. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 5P 12. Connect PCM connector terminal A6 to body
connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a ground with jumper wire.
jumper wire.
MRLY (BLK/WHT)
PGM-FI MA I N RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)
5P CONNECTOR r
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 |9 l
1
5 10 11 12 / H i / / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
1 2/ 26 27 28 291 /| 311 / 33 34 35
3 3 6 / 38 l / l / l 41 142 431441
IMOFPR (GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE


14. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). A11 and body ground.
PCM connector terminal A11. IMOFPR (GRN/YEL)
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) TTI 3 I4 I 5 |6 |7 8 9

~ ~ IMOFPR (GRN/YEL) 10 1 2 l/ll4 [/1 X ltT 18 19
20 22 23 24 25
..r 26 27 28 291/131 „ 33 34 35
M l 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 I M y 38 L /l/l 431441
10 11 12 / 1 141 / | / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 25
■ 26 27 28 291 /| 311 / 33 34 35 ■
13 6 1 / 381 / | / | 41 142 431441

u
is there battery voltage?
NO—Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).i
YES—Goto step 11.

relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the PCM (A11). ■
(cont'd)
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P), 20. Remove the driver's side second row seat
(see page 20-115).
17. Open the SCS line with the HDS.
21. Cut the carpet at the dotted line (A). Be careful not
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then measure to cut the wire harness under the carpet.
voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground
within 2 seconds.

5P CONNECTOR
IMOFPR
(GRN/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals 22. Remove the access panel from the floor.
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then measure

Is there battery voltage? voltage between fuel tank unit 5P connector
terminal No. 5 and body ground within 2 seconds.
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
/ V
NO—Goto step 19.

1 2 / FUEL PUMP
(RED/ORN)
V
NO—Goto step 24.

J ? '
25. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). 29. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 5P
26. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 5P
connector terminals No. l and No. 2 with a jumper FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
wire.

5P CONNECTOR 1 2 /
GND
(BLK)
A 4 5 /
IG1 (RED/WHT)
FUEL PUMP (RED/ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female term inals Is there continuity?
YES—Replace the fuel pump (see page 11-387). ■

27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between fuel tank unit 5P connector NO—Repair open in the wire between the fuel tank
terminal No. 5 and body ground within 2 seconds. unit 5P connector and G601. ■
FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
A
1 2/ FUEL PUMP
V bA
(RED/ORN)
YES—Replace PGM-FI main relay 2

(FUEL PUMP). ■

relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and fuel tank unit 5P
connector. ■
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve 7. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump the fuel tank.
and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect
fitting in the engine compartment. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
With th e HDS 9. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select

Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the until it stalls.
equipped), then write down the audio presets. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE:

• Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) or the PCM will continue to operate the fuel
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. pump.
• A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them
as needed (see page 11-4).
13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).

(see page 11-218).

14. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and 17. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, cheek
cl ean it if needed. it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-381).
15. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect 18. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
fitting (A). do this:
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system

and the navigation system (if equipped), then
enter the audio presets.
• Set the clock (on vehicles without navigation).
W ithout the HDS

2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover

(see page 20-90), then remove PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) (A).
16. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the

connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE;
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore

them.
(cont'd)
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
5. Remove the fuel fill cap. retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. off.
7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). NOTE:

• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• Do not use tools.
new one.
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and

clean it if needed.
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting (A).
11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check

itfor dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-381).
12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then

do this:

• Set the clock (on vehicles without navigation).
Fuel Pressure Test Fuel Tank Draining
Special Tools Required - .1.... Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-384).:
• Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B
• Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150 2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container
suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit (see page 11-385).
2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel
pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge.
• If the engine starts, go to step 5.

• If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to

the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• If the pump runs, go to step 5.

• If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should

be 380—430 kPa (3.9—4.4 kgf/cm2, 55—63 psi).
• If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.

• If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-386) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-386), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines/and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Make sure the connections are

secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
Check all clamps, and retighten if necessary.
BASE GASKET
Replace.
LOCKNUT
Replace.
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION CEVAP)
CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C), (D), (E),

(F), (G) connect the fuel rail (H) to the fuel feed joint (I),
the fuel feed joint (I) to the fuel feed hose (J), the fuel
hose (J), to the fuel line (K), the fuel feed hose (L) to the
fuel tank unit (M), the fuel line (N) to the fuel feed hose
(0), the EVAP purge pipe (P) to EVAP purge hose (Q),
and the EVAP purge hose (Q) to the EVAP canister (R).
When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel
tank unit or fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or
connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect

fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other heat-
generating procedures.
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a
shop towel that was used for wiping battery
electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact
with electrolyte or something similar.
• When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them
ifthey are damaged.
G R
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:
• replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel feed joint.
• replacing the fuel line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• it has been removed from the line.
• it is damaged.
Place Manufacturer Retainer Line

color diameter
A, B, Tokai Blue green 0.31 in.
C (8.0 mm)
D Tokai Orange 0.4 in.
(9.5 mm)
E Tokai Blue green 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
F,G Tokai Orange 0.4 in.
(9.5 mm)
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,

read the “Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions"
(see page 11-378).
2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt,

and clean them if needed.
3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to
release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the
connector off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other
parts. Do not use tools.
new one.
a
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Installation
4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage.
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,
• If it is dirty, clean it. read the “Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions"
* If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump, (see page 11-378).
fuel filter, or fuel feed line.
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if needed.
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,

cover the disconnected connector and line ends
with plastic bags (A).
NOTE;
• The retainer cannot be reused once it has been 2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the
removed from the line. retainer is damaged, or after:
Replace the retainer when:
- replacing the fuel rail. • replacing the fuel rail.
- replacing the fuel feed joint. • replacing the fuel feed joint.
- replacing the fuel feed line. • replacing the fuel feed line.
- replacing the fuel pump. • replacing the fuel pump.
- replacing the fuel filter. • replacing the fuel filter.
- replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. • replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
- replacing the EVAP purge pipe. • replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
- replacing the EVAP canister. • replacing the EVAP canister.
- it has been removed from the line. • removing the retainer from the line.
- it is damaged. • Use the same manufacturer retainer and the
same size retainer when the replacing the
retainer (see page 11-378).
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect

fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from
the mating line.
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), 5. When you reconnect the connector (A) with the old
and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the retainer, make sure the connection is secure and
connector grooves (C). Then press the the tabs (B) are firmly locked into place; check
quick-connect fittings onto the line until both visually and also by pulling the connector. When
retainer pawls lock with a clicking sound. you replace the fuel line with a new one, make sure
you remove the ring pull (C) upwards after you
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of confirm the connection is secure.
new engine oil on the line end.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure
Connection with new retainer the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection
is not secure, the ring pull could break when you try
to remove it.
Reconnection to existing retainer
Connection to new fuel l ine
Connection to new fuel line
Reconnection to existing retainer
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and

turn the ignition switch ON (II) (but do not operate
the starter motor). The fuel pump will run for about
2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat two
or three times, and check that there is no leakage in
the fuel supply system.
Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit
Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100 locknut (A).
Removal
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-372).
2. Remove the fuel fill cap.
3. Remove the driver's side second row seat

(see page 20-115).
4. Cut the carpet at the dotted line (A). Be careful not

to cut the wire harness under the carpet.
8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit (B).
5. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor, then

disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector (B).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the

fuel tank unit.
Installation 4. Using the special tool, tighten a new locknut (A).
1. Temporarily attach a new base gasket (A) to the NOTE:

fuel tank unit (B), then insert the fuel tank unit • After tightening, make sure the marks are still
partially into the fuel tank. aligned.
• After installation, check the base gasket, visually
NOTE: or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
• Be careful not to damage the new base gasket.
• Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending
unit.
• Do not coat the base gasket with oil.
S3 N*m
(9.5 kgf-m* 69 Ibf-ft)
5. Connect the fuel tank unit 5P connector, then

connect the quick-connect fitting.
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and

2. Transfer the base gasket (A) from the fuel tank unit turn the ignition switch ON (II) (but do not operate
to the fuel tank. the starter motor). The fuel pump will run for about
2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat this
two or three times, then check that there is no
leakage in the fuel supply system.
7. Install the access panel.
8. Install the driver's side second row seat (see page

20-115).
9. Install the fuel fill cap.
3. Align the marks (B) on the fuel tank and the fuel
tank unit, then insert the fuel tank unit into the fuel
tank until the fuel tank unit rest on top of the base
gasket.
NOTE: To avoid a fuel leak, check the base gasket,

visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel Filter Replacement
Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (see page
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-384). 11-375), after making sure that the fuel pump and the
fuel pressure regulator are OK.
2. Remove the clip (A).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (B).

with new O-rings "(O'.
NOTE;
• Coatthe O-rings with clean engine oil. Do not use
any other oils.
• Be careful not to pinch the O-rings when you
install the fuel pressure regulator.
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank

unit:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the connectors (B)
are firmly locked into place.
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.

with new O-rings (D). When installing the fuel tank
unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank
(see page 11-385).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil. Do

not use any other oils.
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Replacement
2. Remove the fuel filter (A), the fuel level sensor (fuel
gauge sending unit) (B), the case (CL the wire
harness (D), and the fuel pressure regulator (E).
3. When connecting the fuel pump assembly, make

sure the connection is secure and the suction filter
(F) is firmly connected to the fuel pump (G).
4. Check these items before installing the fuel tank

unit:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the connectors (H) is
firmly locked into place.
* When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.

with new O-rings (I). When installing the fuel tank
unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank
(see page 11-385).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil. Do

not use any other oil.
Fuel Tank Replacement
2. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-375).
3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit (see page 11-385).
4. Raise the vehicle, and support it with jackstands.
5. Remove the exhaust muffler (see page 9-10).
6. 4WD: Remove the propeller shaft (see page 16-41).
7. Remove the fuel tank shield (A).
64 N-m
22
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf ft) (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. Remove the canister cover (B).
9. Disconnect the fuel vapor hose (C), and quick-connect fittings (D). Disconnect the filler neck hoses (E). Slide back
the clamps, then twist the hoses as you pull to avoid damaging them.
10. Place a jack or other support under the fuel tank (F).
11. Remove the strap bolts (G).
12. Remove the fuel tank. If it sticks to the undercoated mounts, carefully pry it off the mounts.

Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: Forthe fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer 8. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 5P
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-92). connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the
ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery
1. Check the No. 9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT voltage.
LIGHT (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box before testing. • If the voltage is OK, go to step 8.
• If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs (see page - a short in the ORN/WHT wire to ground.
22- 6 ). - an open in the ORN/WHT or BLK/YEL wire.
• If no problem is found, go to step 3. FU E L T A N K U N IT 5 P C O N N E C T O R

• If DTC B1175 (see page 22-99) or B1176 (see page
22-100) is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
(O R N /W H T )
troubleshooting.

(BLK/YEL)
2
4. Remove the driver's side second row seat
(see page 20-115). \ ili/
5. Cut the carpet, being careful not to cut the wire
harness underneath it, them remove the access Wire side of female terminals
panel from the floor (see step 4 on page 11-384)
6. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank
(see page 11-384).
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector (B).
(cont'd)
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test (cont'd)
11. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 5P 12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the float
at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 13. Remove the No. 13 BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the
(HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for at least
If you do not get the following readings, replace the 10 seconds, then reinstall it.
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-387).
Float F 1/2 LOW E
Position 8.3 in. 5.6 in. 1.8 in. 0.6 in. 15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates
(211.4 mm) (143.1 mm) (45.2 mm) (16.2 mm) "F" with the float at F.
Resistance 19 to 185 to 483.7 to 770 to
(0 ) 21 195 612.8 790 • If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate
"F", replace the gauge control module (see page
22 - 102 ).
• If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
• The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the
Term inal side of bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch
male terminals is OFF, regardless of the fuel level.
• Remove the No. 13 BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from
the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for at
least 10 seconds after completing
troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to
20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the
F Q .
correct fuel level.
I
1/2 r X \
ii
\ \ /fr ^ k
LCm \ \ /
‘ \\
L rr-. X /
£ 1 \\
V 1f
i ! Ji
Low Fuel Indicator Test
1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test (see page 22-90).
• If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.

• If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace
the gauge control module (see page 22-102).
2. Checkfor body electrical system DTCs.
• If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC's

troubleshooting.
• If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page

11-389).
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM) AI R CLEANER
Update, page 11-7 Removal/Instal lation,
Substitution, page 11-8 page 11-402
Replacement page 11-230 Element Inspection/
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING (IMT) THROTTLE BODY RESONATOR

ACTUATOR (J35Z1 engine) Test, page 11-406 Removal/Installation, page 11-403
Replacement, page 11-405 Cleaning, page 11-407
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P1077: IMT Valve Stuck in High RPM 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Position terminal B31 and body ground. /
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data P C M C O N N E C T O R B(44P )

troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). r r
IT110| 112 123 13|14|15|16
|i
|4 | 5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9 I I
17 18 19
■1
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ■ 20 21 22 / 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 |3 1 132 33 34 35
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 36 37 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 141 142 4 3 14 4 1
u I
JMTM (W H T /B L K )
4. Check the IMT VALVE CMD in the DATA LIST with

the HDS.
Is CLOSE indicated?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Go to step 29. (B31) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 23.
5. Check the IMT VALVE SW in the DATA LIST with NO—Go to step 30.
the HDS.
is OPEN indicated?
YES—Go to step 6.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
at the IMT actuator and the PCM. ■ terminal C43 and body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44 P )
r ................ii .h............. ,^
7. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector. 1 1 1 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 I I
a 10 11 ■j
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). i 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
9. Check the IMT VALVE SW in the DATA LIST with 13 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 142 43>\44\
i"’
the HDS. IM T + (W H T /B L U )
Is CLOSE indicated?

NO—Go to step 10.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. (C43) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 23.
(confd)
18. Checkfor continuity between IMT actuator 5P 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector terminal No. 5 and PCM connector terminal C44 and body ground.
terminal C43.
IM T ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
— A — ...ri . ...ri .
2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 |9 T
1 1|
1 2 3 !
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
V 20 / 22 23 24 25 1
?/ 26 27 2 8 /|30|31132 33 34 35
IIM T + (W H T /B L U )
l * | 37i j—
38 |39|40|41 142 43 * *1
j—
I M T - (WHT/RED)
r
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I 1
a 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ 1
20 / 22 23 24 25 1 i Terminal side of female terminals
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35 -
136137 38|39 |40141 |42 431441
U 1 1 u Is there continuity?
IM T + (WHT/BLU)

(C44) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 23.
NO—Go to step 20.
YES—Goto step 19.

20. Check for continuity between IMT actuator 5P 23. Reconnect all connectors.
connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
terminal C44. 24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
V \
2 3 26. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
W § 7
I M T - (WHT/RED) 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9I terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM, then go
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
to step 1.
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38| 39|40|41 142 431441 NO—Go to step 28.
IM T - (WHT/RED) 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1077 in the
Is there continuity? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES—Go to step 21. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO—Repair short in the wire between the PCM go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
21. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-405). connections or loose terminals at the IMT actuator
22. Move the IMT valve by hand. indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
Does it move smoothly ?
YES—Substitute a known-good IMT actuator

(see page 11-405), then go to step 23 and recheck. If
DTC P1077 is not indicated, replace the IMT
actuator (see page 11-405), then go to step 23. If
DTC P1077 is indicated, go to step 31.
NO—Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page

9-4), and repair the stuck valve. If necessary,
replace the intake manifold (see page 9-4), then go
to step 23.
(cont'd)


terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the
NO—Goto step 34.



connections or loose terminals at the IMT actuator
DTC P1078: IMT Valve Stuck in Low RPM 9. Measure voltage between IMT actuator 5P
Position connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
VCC6
(YEL/BLU)
1 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1 2 3

V 5/
3. Start the engine and hold the engine speed above

4,200 rpm.
4. Check the IMT VALVE CMD in the DATA LIST with Wire side of female terminals
the HDS.
Is OPEN indicated? Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 5. YES—Goto step 10.
NO—Go to step 32. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM
5. Check the IMT VALVE SW in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. 10. Measure voltage between IMT actuator 5P
Is CLOSE indicated?
IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 6.
I MTM
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (WHT/BLK)
at the IMT actuator and the PCM. ■
\± H 7
6. Let the engine idle, then turn the ignition switch
OFF.
7. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector.

Is there about 5 V?
NO—Go to step 15.
(cont'd)
13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 17. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
14. Check for continuity between IMT actuator 5P 18. Check for continuity between IMT actuator 5P
connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector
terminal C39. terminal B31.
IM T ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR IM T ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
SG6 (GRN/YEL)
IM TM (WHT/BLK)
1 2 3 1 2 3
V 5/
V 5/
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
r p— — — — — t
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 |6 |7 8 I 9 I | 1 I 2 3 |4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9 I
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ ■ 10 11 a
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 25 ■ 20 21 22 / 24 25 i
■ 20 / 22 1
26 27 28 /130|31132 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
|36|37 38139 140141 |42 43 1441 136137 38|39|40 141 142 4 3 |44|
SG6 (GRN/YEL) IM TM (WHT/BLK)

Is there continuity ? Is there continuity?
(C39) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 25. (B31) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 25.
19. Check for continuity between PCM connector 20. Checkfor continuity between IMT actuator 5P
terminal C43 and body ground. :; connector term inal No. 5 and PCM connector
terminal C43.
I MT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
VV
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 I 7 a I 9 1 1 2 3
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ 20 / 22 23 24 25 V
1 f /
26 27 28 / | 3013113233 34 35 I I MT-f- (WHT/BLU)
13613T 38139 140 [41 142 43 1441
IM T + (WHT/BLU)
I l l 2 13 l W T 6 l 7 J 8 I 9 I
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
Terminal side of female terminals 1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
33 34 35
CO
CO
CO
26 27 28
136137 38|39|40|41 142 43I44|
Is there continuity? -6— i..... r~~Tr
1MT+ (WHT/BLU) ___________
YES—Repair short in the w ire between the PCM Terminal side of female terminals
NO—Go to step 20.

(cont'd)
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector 22. Check for continuity between IMT actuator 5P
terminal C44 and body ground. connector terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
terminal C44.
IM T ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
11 12 3 | 4 ( 5 | 6 I 7 8 I 9 |
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ 1 2 3
I 20 / 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 /130|31|33 33 34 35
1 V 5/
1 I M T - (WHT/RED)
|36|37 38139 |40141 142 43 1441
IM T — (WHT/RED)
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
Terminal side of fem ale terminals 1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1
CO
C
CO
£>
O
26 27 2 8 33 34 35
O!
136 j 37 38|39|40|41 142 4 3 1441
I M T - (WHT/RED)
YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM Terminal side of female terminals
NO—Go to step 22.

(C44) and the IMT actuator, go to step 25.
23. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-405).

r 2
24. Move the IMT valve by hand. 32. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does it move smoothly ? 33. Reconnect all connectors.
YES—Substitute a known-good IMT actuator 34. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
(see page 11-405), then go to step 25 and recheck. If software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
DTC P1078 is not indicated, replace the IMT good PCM (see page 11-8).
actuator (see page 11-405), then go to step 25. If
DTC P1078 is indicated, go to step 34. 35. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
4,200 rpm for 10 seconds, then let it idle.
NO—Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page
9-4), and repair the stuck valve. If necessary, 36. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
replace the intake manifold (see page 9-4), then go
to step 25. Is DTC P 1078 indicated?
25. Reconnect all connectors. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
27. Reset the PCM with the HDS. substituted, go to step 1.
28. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). NO—Goto step 37.
29. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 37. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1078 in the
4,200 rpm for 10 seconds, then let it idle. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Is DTC P1078 indicated? YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

YES—Check for poor connections or loose original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM, then go Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 36,
to step 1. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—Go to step 31. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1078 in the and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
DTCs MENU with the HDS. known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
Does the screen indicate PASSED ? screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 35.


Air Cleaner Removal/Installation Air Cleaner Element Inspection/
Replacement
1. Remove the bolts (A).
1. Remove the air cleaner housing screws (A) and the

cover (B).
2. Remove the air cleaner (B).

2. Remove the air cleaner element (C) from the air
cleaner housing (D).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or

clogging. If it is damaged or clogged, replace it.
NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air

cleaner element.
4. Clean and remove any debris from inside the air

cleaner housing.
6. If the maintenance minder requires air cleaner

replacement, reset the maintenance minder
(see page 3-6).
NOTE: If the maintenance minder indicated

the air cleaner element required replacement,
check for other items that may also be
displayed in the maintenance minder main
items (see page 3-7) and the sub items (see
page 3-8) before resetting the maintenance
minder.
Resonator Removal/Installation Throttle Cable Adjustment
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-138). 1. Remove the bolts and the throttle cable cover (A).
2. Remove the side branch tube (A).
2. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable

free play (A) should be 10—12 mm (0.39—0.47 in.).
3. Remove the bolts (B).
4. Remove the resonator (C).
3. If the free play (A) is not within spec (10—12 mm,

0.39—0.47 in.), loosen the locknut (B), turn the
adjusting nut (C) until the deflection is as specified,
then retighten the locknut.
4. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle

valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
Throttle Cable Removal/Installation
1. Remove the throttle cable cover (see step 1 on page 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-403).
6. Hold the cable, removing all slack from it.
2. Fully open the throttle link, then remove the throttle
cable (A) from the throttle link (B). 7. Set the cable on the bracket (A).
Turn the adjusting nut (B) until its free play is 0 mm.
There should be
3. Remove the cable housing (C) from the cable 8. Position the adjusting nut on the other side of the
bracket (D). bracket, then tighten the locknut (C).
4. Remove the throttle cable (A) from the accelerator 9. Check the throttle cable free play (see step 2 on
pedal (B). page 11-403).
10. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle

link to be sure it opens fully when you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle link to be sure it returns whenever you
release the accelerator pedal.
Accelerator Pedal Removal/ IMT Actuator Replacement
Installation
1. Remove the throttle cable from the accelerator 2. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector (A).
pedal (see step 4 on page 11-404).
2. Remove the accelerator pedal bracket (A).
3. Remove the bolts (B) and the IMT actuator (G).

with a new O-ring (D).

Throttle Body Test
Carbon Accumulation Check Throttle Position Learning Check

NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-218). (see page 11-218).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 5. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If
needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-407).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. The reading should be below 2.46 deg. If it
is not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-407).
Throttle Body Cleaning

is activated.
1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air

cleaner is damaged, replace it (see page 11-402).
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-408).
3. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and

inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked
in throttle plate and induction cleaner.
NOTE:
• Remove the throttle body to clean it.
• Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
• To avoid removing the molybdenum coating, do
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A).
• Do not spray throttle plate and induction cleaner
directly on the throttle body.
• Use Honda genuine throttle plate and induction
cleaner.
4. Install the throttle body (see page 11-408).
5. Reset the PCM with the HDS (see page 11-4).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for

2 seconds.

Throttle Body Removal/Installation
A CAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body start at
step 4.
1. Connect the HDS while the engine is stopped.
3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
5. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A).
6. Remove the intake air duct (B).
7. Disconnect the throttle body connector (C).
8. Disconnect the water bypass hoses (D), and plug the water bypass hoses.
9. Remove the throttle body (E).
10. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (F).
11. Check these items:
• Do the PCM idle learn procedure after replacing the throttle body (see page 11-359).
• Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see page 10-6).
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC)

(BANK 2)
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Rear Bank Catalyst System 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 and/or
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) P0430* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
DTC P043O: Front Bank Catalyst System Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2)
YES—Go to step 6.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
any on-board snapshot, and review the general failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
• If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
same time as DTC P0420 and/or P0430*, troubleshoot CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0420 and/or
P0430 *. 6. Continue test driving until a result comes on.
P0137, P0138, P0157, P0158, P2270, P2271, P2272*,
P2273*: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 and/or
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater P0430* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Poor quality fuel can cause these DTCs.
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to the Does the screen indicate FAILED?
YES—Goto step8.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
9. Replace the WU-TWC:
above 158 °F (70 °C) • For DTC P0420, replace the rear WU-TWC
• Transmission in D position (Bank 1) (see page 11-413).
• Vehicle speed between 45—75 mph • For DTC P0430, replace the front WU-TWC
(72—120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more (Bank 2) (see page 11-412).
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 and/or
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the P0430* in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED ?
14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle
speed. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. ■
15. Check the CAT MONITOR CONDITION B1 (B2)* in NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check the fuel
the DATA LIST with the HDS. quality. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen
Is the temperature OK ? indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 13 and
recheck.
YES—Goto step 16.
NO—Goto step 13 and recheck.

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Vehicle speed between 45—75 mph
(72—120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set

Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
NO—Go to step 16 and recheck.
18. Continue test driving until a result comes on.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
NO—Goto step 20.

Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation
FRONT (BANK 2)
1. Remove the condenser fan shroud (see page 10-13).
2. Disconnect the front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and front secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary
H02S) connector.
3. Remove the front WU-TWC.
FRONT A /F SENSOR (BANK 2, SENSOR 1)
4. Install the front WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps.

REAR (BANK 1)
1. Remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-21).
2. Disconnect the rear air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and rear secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary
H02S) connector.
3. Remove the rear WU-TWC bracket, then remove the rear WU-TWC.
REAR SECONDARY H02S (BANK 1, SENSOR 2) 8 k 1.2S mm

44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
4. Install the rear WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps.

Substit ution, page 11-8 (EGR) VALVE

Replacement , page 11-230 Replacement, page 11-429
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 °F (70 °C)
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • Transmission in D position
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the • Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. (88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds, then
decelerate (with throttle fully closed) for
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 5 seconds.
the HDS.
Is the result OK ?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Goto step 7. terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the connections are OK, go to step 15.
NO—Go to step 14.
above 158 °F (70 °C) 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the
• Transmission in D position DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph
(88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds, then Does the screen indicate PASSED?
5 seconds. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the goto the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Does the screen indicate FAILED? connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
YES—Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
9-4), clean the intake manifold, and EGR ports with comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
throttle plate and induction cleaner, then go to step CONDITION, go to step 12.
9.

poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR
valve and the PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 5 and recheck.
8. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-429).
(cont'd)


above 158 V (70 °C)
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph
(88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds, then
5 seconds.

terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM
NO—Goto step 18.


go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting ■

connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
16. If the PCM was substituted, goto step 1. If the
DTC P0404: EGR Valve Circuit Range/ 8. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between
Performance Problem EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR

EGRP VCC2

4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is there 100 kQ or more?
Is the result OK?
time. Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve NO—Go to step 9.
with throttle plate and induction cleaner. ■
9. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
NO—Goto step 5. connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.

1 2 3
7. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between CD
EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. 4/
PG1 (BLK)
EGR VALVE SP CONNECTOR
SG2 W ire side of female terminals

EGRP
Terminal side of male terminals NO—Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and G101, then go to step 26.
NO—Goto step 8.
(cont'd)
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-429).
11. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 15. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the
passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector and induction cleaner.
16. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-429).
PCMC O N N E C T O R C (44P )
E G R (B L U /R E D ) 17. Reconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
h |2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I 18. Reconnect PCM connector C (44P).

■ ■
1 0 11 1 2 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9
20 / 22 23 24 25
i 1 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
26 27 28 / l 3 0 | 3 W 33 34 35
13 6 1 3 7 1 1
3 8 3 9 4 0 1 4 1 14 2 43 (4 4 1

Terminal side of female terminals 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM the HDS.
(C9) and the EGR valve, then go to step 26.
Is the result OK?
NO—Go to step 13.
terminal C9 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal NO—Go to step 24.
No. 4.
E G R V A L V E 6 P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 Wire side of
female terminals
4 / 6
E G R (B L U /R E D ) I
PCMC O N N E C T O R C (44 P ) E G R (B L U /R E D )
| 1 1 2 3 | 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 1
I ■
1 0 11 1 2 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9
20 / 22 23 24 25
a 1
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
13 6 1 3 7 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 1 4 1 14 2 43I44I
YES—Goto step 14.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C9)

and the EGR valve, then go to step 26.
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 34. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
25. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-429). good PCM (see page 11-8).
26. Reconnect all connectors. 35. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is D T C P 0 4 0 4 i n d i c a t e d ?
30. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. (see page 11-8), then go to step 35. If the PCM was
the HDS. NO—Go to step 37.
D o e s th e s c r e e n i n d ic a t e P A S S E D ?
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
step 1. If the connections and terminals are OK, go complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
to step 34. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
NO—Go to step 33. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0404 in the NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
DTCs MENU with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
Does the screen indicate PASSED? known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 32, result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ CONDITION, go to step 35.

connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
DTC P0406; EGR Valve Position Sensor 10. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector
Circuit High Voltage terminal C14 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal
No. 2.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). SG2
eg
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1 3 Wire side of
4/
CD
female terminals
2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
SG2 (GRN/YEL) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

Is there 4.88 V or more?
.............n .......... .... .......... n
YES—Go to step 3. I 1l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I 9'I
1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i
20 / 22 23 24 25 ■
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 26 27 28 y 7]3013113233 34 35
■
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals |36| 37 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 142 431441
at the EGR valve and the PCM. ■
YES—Goto step 18.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the EGR
6. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector valve and the PCM (C14), then go to step 13.
12. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-429).
SG2 (GRN/YEL) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
W ire side of fem ale term inal s 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 11. terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO—Goto step 7.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the

1-8.' Reconnect all connectors. "



DTC P2413: EGR System Malfunction 11. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with Wire side of female terminals
the HDS.
Is the result OK ? Is there about 5 V?
YES—Intermittent faiIure, the system is OK at this YES—Go to step 16.

at the EGR valve and the PCM.B NO—Go to step 12.
NO—Go to step 5.
7. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 0 V?
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Go to step 21.

terminal C13 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal terminal C20 and body ground.
No. 3.
EGR VALVE §P CONNECTOR
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
EGRP h i 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9I
a
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1 2 3 Wire side of
(WHT/BLK)
20 / 22 23 24 25 1
? 4 / 6 female terminals 26 27 28 /|30|31|32 33 34 35
136137 38|39140141 142 431441
VCC2 (YEL/BLU) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
I1I 2 3
LO
CO
h-:
8 I9I
1 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1 20 / 22 23 24 25
1 Terminal side of female terminals
26 27 28 /1"30|31|32 3334 35
136137 38139 |4Q141 |42 431441
Is there c o n tin u ity?
Is there continuity? (C20) and the EGR valve, then go to step 44.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the EGR

valve and the PCM (C13), then go to step 44.
(cont'd)
20. Check for continuity between PCM connector 23. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between
terminal C20 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
No. 1.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
EGRP (WHT/BLK) r
W ire side of
fem ale terminals
EGRP SG2
EGRP
(WHT/BLK) PCIVI CONNECTOR C (44P)
n .. ..... .n ...
1 1! 2 3 I 4 | 5 I 6 7 8 |9 I
1 ■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 / 22 23 24 25 |
1 Terminal side of male terminals
26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
136137 38139 140 [41 142 4 3 1441

Is there continuity? YES—Go to step 43.

22. If not already done, disconnect the EGR valve 6P

connector.
24. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between 27. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector
EGR valve 6P connector term inals No. 1 and No. 3. term inal €9 and body ground.

EGR VALVE 6PCONNECTOR
EGR (BLU/RED)
r@l ■
I 1 I 2 3 | 4
|
| 5 | 6 I 7
1 0 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9
8 I 8 I
EGRP VCC2 I
20 / 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 3 5
13 6 1 3 7 |
3 8 | 3 9 4 0 | 4 1 14 2 4 3 14 4 1

Is there 100 kQ or more? Is there continuity?
■ YES—Go to step 43. YES—Repair short in the wire between the PCM
NO—Go to step 25.
NO—Go to step 28.
25. If not already done, jump the SCS line with the HDS,
26. If not already done, disconnect PCM connector C

(44P).
(cont'd)
28. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector 29. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
terminal C9 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal connector term inal No. 6 and body ground.
No. 4.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 Wire side of
female terminals 1 2 3
CD
4/
EGR (BLU/RED)I . 4/ 6
PG1 (BLK)
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) EGR (BLU/RED)
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 I 7 8 I 9 I
a
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 25
■ 20 / 22 i
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 (32 33 34 35 Wire side of female terminals
136137 3 8 13 9 14 0 141 142 4 3 1441
Terminal side of female terminals Is there continuity?
YES—Go to step 29. N O — Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and G101, then go to step 44.
N O — Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C9)
and the EGR valve, then go to step 44. 30. Reconnect PCM connector C (44P).
31. At the EGR valve side, connect the battery positive

terminal to EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4
w ith a jum per wire.

32. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the 42. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No. 6 with a jum per wire. 43. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-429).
D o e s th e e n g in e s t a ll o r ru n ro u g h ? 44. Reconnect all connectors.
N O —Go to step 33. 46. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
33. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 47. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
34. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-429). 48. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the
passage inside the EGR valve w ith throttle plate 49. Check fo r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS.
and induction cleaner.
is D T C P 2 4 1 3 in d ic a t e d ?
36. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-429).
37. Reconnect all connectors. term inals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
N O — Go to step 50.
50. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2413 in the
40. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). DTCs MENU with the HDS.
41. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w ith D o e s th e s c re e n in d ic a t e P A S S E D ?

the HDS.
Is th e r e s u lt O K ? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 49,
N O — If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO—Go to step 42. connections or loose term inals at the EGR valve
and valve the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
(cont'd)

54. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w ith

the HDS.

(see page 11-8), then g o to step 54. If the PCM was
NO—G oto step 56.
56. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r DTC P2413 in the

DTCs MENU w ith the HDS.

Temporary DTCs o r DTCs were indicated in step 55,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. B

connections or loose term inals at the EGR valve
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
EGR Valve Replacement
2. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector (A).
3. Remove the EGR valve (B).

with a new gasket (C).

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P2279: Intake Air System Leak 7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS.
NOTE; Is D T C P 2 2 7 9 in d ic a t e d ?
any on-board snapshot, and review the general YES—Check for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). PCV hose, the EVAP canister purge line, the throttle
• If DTC P0443 is stored at the same time as DTC P2279, body, the intake manifold, or the brake booster and
troubleshoot DTC P0443 first, then recheck for DTC hose, then go to step 1.
P2279.
NO—Go to step 8.
1. Check fo r vacuum leaks at these parts:
8. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r DTC P2279 in the
• PCV valve DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• PCV hose
• EVAP canister purge line D o e s th e s c r e e n in d ic a t e P A S S E D ?
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
• Brake booster and hose Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7,
Are the parts OK ?
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
YES—Go to step 2. and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
NO—Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go
to step 4.

3.000 rpm w ithout load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.

YES—Check the camshaft tim ing; J35A9 engine

(see page 6-13), J35Z1 engine (see page 6-70), then
go to step 4.

indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 2 and
recheck.

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
PCV Valve Inspection PCV Valve Replacement
1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-4). 1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-4).
2. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and 2. Disconnect the bolt (A).
connections for leaks or restrictions.
NOTE: Take care not to spill oil on the hot exhaust
manifold.
stethoscope as you lightly pinch the PCV hose (B)

w ith your fingers or pliers several times. Each tim e
the hose is pinched, the valve should click.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve 3. Remove the PCV valve (B).
grommet fo r cracks or damage. If the gromm et is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck. 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• When installing a new PCV valve, make sure the
O-rings (C) are in place.
• When installing a used PCV valve, use new
O-rings.
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE

DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: EVAP Canister Purge Valve 7. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Circuit Malfunction
Is there vacuum?
Speci al Tools Required
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A YES—Go to step 8.
or equivalent, commercially available
NO—G oto step 14.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector.
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. 10. Checkfor continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
3,000 rpm w ithout load (in Park or neutral) until the EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2P CONNECTOR

1 2
PCS (RED/YEL)
YES—Go to step 5.

at the EVAP canister purge valve and the PCM. ■ Wire side of female terminals
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and allow the engine

to cool below 140 °F (60 °C). Is there continuity?
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge YES—G oto step 11.
joint (B) in the engine compartment, and connect a
vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the hose. NO—Go to step 23.
11. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS. 17. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
13. Check fo r continuity between EVAP canister purge 2P CONNECTOR
valve 2P connector term inal No. 1 and body ground.

2P CONNECTOR IGl (BLK/YEL)
PCS (RED/YEL)

Is there continuity? NO—Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister purge valve and the No. 6 FI-ECU (15 A)
YES—Repair short in the wire between the EVAP fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, then
canister purge valve and the PCM (C37), then go to go to step 24.
step 24.
NO—Go to step 30.
19. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
(cont'd)
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector 22. At the purge valve side, measure resistance
terminal C37 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector
connector term inal No. 1. term inals No. 1 and No. 2.

2P CONNECTOR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
2P CONNECTOR
PCS (RED/YEL) Wire side of
1 female terminals
11 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 I9 I
■ i
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
24 25
1 20 / 22 23
1
26 27 28 /130|31132 33 34 35
136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 4 3 1441
PCS (RED/YEL)
Is there about 2 6 —30 Q at room temperature?
NO—Go to step 23.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the PCM (C37), then go to 23. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
step 24. 11-461).

r53
28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 34. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the
terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
PCM, then go to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO—Go to step 29. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 33,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check fo r poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
Does the screen indicate PASSED? purge valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other go to step 32. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 28, 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.

purge valve and the PCM, then g o to step 1. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.


terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
good PCM (see page 11 -8), then go to step 32. If the
NO—G oto step 34.

DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Circuit Range/ 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES—Check for poor connections or loose
any on-board snapshot, and review the general terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). to step 1.
• If DTC P2422 is stored at the same tim e as DTC P0451,
troubleshoot DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC NO—Go to step 12.
P0451.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTCs MENU with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
4. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0451 in the go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
Does the screen indicate FAILED? connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
YES—Go to step 5. indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-461).
8. Reset the PCM w ith the HDS.
10. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute.

DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
is a b o u t 7 .3 k P a ( 2 .1 5 in .H g , 5 4 . 7 m m H g ), o r
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4 .9 0 V indicated?
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. YES—Go to step 24.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO—G oto step 14.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w ith the 14. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
HDS. terminal No. l and body ground.
Is a b o u t — 7 .3 k P a ( — 2 .1 6 in . H g , —5 5 m m H g ), o r FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

0 .3 V o r le s s in d ic a t e d ?
NO—Go t 0 step 7.
2 3
V C C 7 (Y EL/B LU )
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS fo r DTC P0452 in the Wire side of female terminals
D o e s th e s c r e e n in d ic a t e F A I L E D ? Is th e re a b o u t 5 ¥ ?
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent NO—Go to step 15.

poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
(cont'd)
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 22. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector term inal No. 1 to 23. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P
body ground with a jum per wire. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
/\
1 3
VCC7 (YEL/BLU) FTP (LT ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
19. Check for continuity between PCM connector Is there continuity?

(A33) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
VCC7 (YEL/BLU)
NO—Go to step 32.
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8h
I
10 11 12 / H 4 I / I / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 J X T 23 24 25- ■
I
26 27 28 2 9 |/l3 l|/ 33 34 35
38 l / l / l 41 142 431441

(A19) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF, 32. Reconnect all connectors.
25. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-461). 33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
26. Reconnect all connectors. good PCM (see page 11-8).
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 34. Start the engine, and let it idle.
28. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 35. Check fo r Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). Is DTC P 0 4 5 2 in d i c a t e d ?
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
is D T C P 0 4 5 2 in d ic a t e d ? PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES—Check for poor connections or loose substituted, go to step 1.
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1. NO—Go to step 36.
NO—Go to step 31. 36. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r DTC P0452 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. D o e s th e s c re e n in d ic a t e P A S S E D ?
D o e s th e s c re e n in d ic a t e P A S S E D ? YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 35,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check fo r poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor connections or loose term inals at the FTP sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
result comes on. 34. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and No. 3 w ith a jum per wire.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). /v

1 2 3
FTP SG7
(LT GRN) (GRN/YEL)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. JUMPER WIRE
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wire side of female terminals
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w ith the

HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V 14. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
or more indicated? HDS.
YES—Go to step 10. Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more indicated?
NO—G oto step 7.
NO—Go to step 26.
15. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
9. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r DTC P0453 in the terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 10. /v

2 3
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for VCC7 SG7
(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
poor connections or loose term inals at the FTP
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.

Is there about 5 V?
NO—G oto step 16.

17. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS. 22. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS.
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 23. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 to 24. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector term inal No. 2 to
body ground with a jum per wire. body ground with a jum per wire.
FT P S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R FTP S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 1 2 3
SG7 FTP
(G R N /Y E L ) (L T G R N )
J U M P E R W IR E JU M P E R W IRE
20. Check for continuity between PCM connector 25. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector
terminal A9 and body ground. term inal A33 and body ground.
PCM C O N N ECTO R A (4 4 P ) PC M C O N N E C T O R A (44 P )
S G 7 (G R N /Y E L )
i r I I 1 I 2 3 14 | 5 | 6 ( 7 8 I 9 [J
1
h 12 3 I4 I f ] 6 7 8 |sI
[l
10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
■
10 11 12 / I 1 4 / 1 / 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
■ .1
■
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 9 |7 |3 1 L ? 33 34 35
1 26 27
28 2 9 | / | 3 l | / 33 34 35 38 | / i / i 41 |<42 4 3 14 4 1
.1M / "ii
36 K 38 JZLdilJ 42 43 M
FTP (LT G R N )
u
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A9) (A33) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
(confd)
27. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-461). 35. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
28. Reconnect all connectors. good PCM (see page 11-8).
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 36. Start the engine, and let it idle.
30. Reset the PCM w ith the HDS. 37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
31. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). Is DTC P0453 indicated?
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
Is DTC P0453 indicated? PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES—Check for poor connections or loose substituted, go to step 1.
term inals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1. NO—Go to step 38.
NO—G oto step 33. 38. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the
DTCs MENU w ith the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 32, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 37,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
result comes on. 36. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
DTC P0455: EVAP System Large Leak 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
Detected mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
DTC P0456: EVAP System Very Small Leak
Detected
iNOTICEl
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or
cause eventual fuel tank failure.

Vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the
any on-board snapshot, and review the general fuel fill pipe damaged ,or is the tether cord caught
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). under the cap?
• Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that w ill create
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for YES—Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,
testing is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible, then go to step 22.
to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon o f fresh fuel to
the tank (as long as it w ill not fill the tank), just before NO—Go to step 3.
starting these procedures.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say “ TIGHTEN
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, 4. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
then it clicks.
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly MENU with the HDS.
tightened?
Is the result OK?
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 22. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM. ■
NO—Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) from the
EVAP canister purge valve (A) in the engine
7. Check fo r a poor connection or damage at the fuel compartment, and connect the vacuum pump/
tank vapor recirculation tube. gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as shown.
Is the tube OK?
YES—Go to step 9. A
NO-
• Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube,
then go to step 22.
• If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see page
8. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube

(A) from the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
canister port (C).
i f
11. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

w ith the HDS.
12. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads

1.90 V (-0 .5 9 in.H g,-1 5 .1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you

do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
13. M onitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for

1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V

(0.1 in.Hg, 0.5 mmHg)?
NO—G oto step 19.

14. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU 19. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS, w ith the HDS.
15. Disconnect the fresh air hose (A) from the EVAP 20. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
canister vent shut valve (B), and plug the EVAP
canister vent shut valve port (C). • Fuel fill pipe
• Fuel vapor return pipe
Are the parts OK ?
YES—Check the fuel tank unit base gasket

(see page 11-384), and check the fuel tank, then go
to step 21.
NO—Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go

to step 21.
21. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.

16. Apply vacuum to the EVAP system until the FTP
reads 1.90 V (—0.59 in.Hg, —15.1 mmHg). 24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you 25. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
do, the FTP sensor can be damaged. MENU with the HDS.
17. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for Is the result OK ?
1 minute with the HDS.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. ■
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V
(0 .1 in .H g , 2 .5 m m H g ) ? NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve,
YES—Go to step 18. the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO—Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve,
then go to step 21.
18. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge

line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP
canister purge valve.
Is the line OK ?
YES—Replace the following parts, then go to

step 21:
• FTP sensor O-ring (see page 11-461)

• EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring
(see page 11-462)
• EVAP canister (see page 11-460)
NO—Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

hose, then go to step 21.
DTC P0457: EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel 5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
Fill Cap Loose or Missing MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the result OK ?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "TIGHTEN at the FTP sensor, or the EVAP canister vent shut
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, valve, and the PCM. ■
then it clicks.
NO—Go to step 6.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened? 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Go to step 2. 7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-462).
NO—Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 19.
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe shut valve.
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

w ith the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)

operation.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the

fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YES—Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,

then go to step 19. Does the valve operate?
NO—Go to step 3. YES—Check the routing of the EVAP canister vent

tube, then go to step 18.
NO—Go to step 12.
13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve

(see page 11-462).

MENU with the HDS.
Is th e r e s u lt O K ?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete.■

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve

(see page 11-462).

MENU with the HDS.
Is th e r e s u lt O K ?
YES—Troubleshooting is com plete.*

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC P0496; EVAP System High Purge Flow

Detected
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK ?

time. Check for poor connections or loose term inals
NO—Go to step 4.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page

11-461).

MENU w ith the HDS.
Is the result OK ?
NO—Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals

the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then g o to step 1.
1
DTC P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow 6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge
Detected jo in t (B) in the engine compartment, and connect a
T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge and the
Special Tools Required vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the hose as
•Vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A shown.
07 J A Z -001000B
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0 —4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B

1. Check the fuel fill cap installation (The cap must say
"TIGHTEN TO CLICK". The cap should tighten 1/4
turn after it is tight.).
Is the fuel fill cap installed and properly

tightened?
YES—Go to step 2. C A
NO—Properly install the fuel fill cap, then go to 7. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
step 23. w ith the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Slowly apply about 0.6 in.Hg (15 mmHg) of vacuum
to the hose.
Does it hold vacuum?
MENU with the HDS. YES—Replace the EVAP canister purge valve, then
go to step 22.
Is the result OK?
NO—Go to step 9. .
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
NO—G oto step 5.
5. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge

line between the intake manifold and the EVAP
canister purge valve.
is th e lin e O K ?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

line, then go to step 23.
9. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister 13. Remove the FTP sensor with its connector
purge valve. connected (see page 11-461).
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the purge line (at 14. Connect a T-fitting (A) from the vacuum pump/
the EVAP canister side), and connect a T-fitting (A) gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, and the vacuum gauge to the
from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/ FTP sensor (B) as shown.
gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the hose as shown.
07 JAZ-001000B
i f
11. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

w ith the HDS.
15. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the
12. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of DATA LIST with the HDS.
vacuum to the hose.
16. Slowly apply no more than 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg,
Does it hold vacuum? 10 mmHg) of vacuum to the hose.
YES—Check for a restricted EVAP canister purge

line between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
EVAP canister, then go to step 22.
NO—G oto step 13.

17. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 21. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of
HDS. vacuum to the hose.
Is the difference more than 1.1 kPa (0.31 in.Hg, Does the hose hold vacuum?
8 mmHg) before and after applying vacuum?
YES—Check for blockage at the EVAP canister port,
YES—Go to step 18. then go to step 22.
NO—Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-461), NO—Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
then go to step 22. (see page 11-462), then go to step 22.
18. Reconnect the vacuum hoses to the EVAP canister 22. Reconnect all hoses.
purge line (EVAP canister side), and reinstall the
FTP sensor. 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from 24. Reset the PCM w ith the HDS.
the EVAP canister purge valve (B), and connect a
T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge and the 25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the hose as
shown. 26. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
07JAZ-001000B
Is the result OK ?
NO—Check fo r poor connections or loose terminals

then go to step 1.
C A
with the HDS.
DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 9. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut
Circuit Low Voltage valve 2P connector term inal No. 2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 2P CONNECTOR

IGl (BLU/WHT)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, then w ait 5 seconds.
3. Check fo r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS.

YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Go to step 4. Is there battery voltage?
4. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU YES—Go to step 10.

with the HDS.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS. canister vent shut valve and the A/F sensor relay
(LAF), then go to step 18.
YES—Go to step 6.
11. At the valve side, measure resistance between
NO—Interm ittent failure, the system is OK at this EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals term inals No. 1 and No. 2.
at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
PCM.B EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
2P CONNECTOR
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P

connector. 1 2
Is there about 2 5 —30 Q at room temperature?
YES—G oto step 12.
NO—Go to step 17.

12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector
term inal A10 and body ground.
14. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector VSV (LT GRN/WHT)
term inal A10 and body ground. r
r= f
h i i 2, 3 | 4 [ 5 | 6 1 8 I 9 I.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) ■
1 0 11 1 2 / N l / V 17 18 19
■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
¥S ¥ (LT GRN/WHT) ■
■
2 6 > 2 7 2 8 2 9 l / l 31 | / 33 34 35
r | 3 6 | / 3 8 1 / | / | 4 1 14 2 4 3 N 4 I
h i 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 B I 9 I
i
1 0 11 1 2 / I l 4 i / | / 1 7 1 8 1 9
■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
i
26 27 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 |/ 33 34 35
■
(g
N / 3 8 1 / | / | 4 1 14 2 4 3 14 4 1
Qg Is there continuity?
Terminal side of female terminals YES—Go to step 25.
Is there continuity? NO—Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A10), then go
YES—Repair short in the wire between the EVAP to step 18.
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A10), then go
to step 18. 17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-462).
NO—Go to step 15.
15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE

2P CONNECTOR
VSV (LT GRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 25. Reconnect all connectors.
20. Reset the PCM w ith the HDS. 26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359). good PCM (see page 11-8).
22. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU 27. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS. with the HDS.
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the PCM, then go to step 1. the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
NO—Go to step 24. 27. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
24. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 in the NO—Go to step 29.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? DTCs MENU w ith the HDS.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the screen indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 28,
vent shut valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
22 . NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
DTC P0499: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 8. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r DTC P0499 in the
Circuit High Voltage DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the screen indicate PASSED?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
3. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
Is DTC PQ499 indicated? go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
YES—Go to step 5.

at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
PCM.B


w ith the HDS.

terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
NO—G oto step 8.

DTC P1454: FTP Sensor Range/Performance 10. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
Problem
DTC P2422: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Stuck Closed Malfunction 12. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-462).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). shut valve.
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. 15. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
w ith the HDS.
16. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and w ait 1 minute. operation.

HDS.
Is it between —0.67 and 0.67 kPa ( —0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, — 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V ?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—G oto step 17.
8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Does the valve operate?
3,000 rpm w ithout load (in Park on neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YES—Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister,
canister filter, vent hoses, and drain joint, then
9. M onitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the install the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and go to
DTCs MENU with the HDS. step 23.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? NO—Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, interm ittent

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check fo r
poor connections or loose term inals at the FTP
sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 8 and recheck.
.< r «
17. Disconnect the air tube (A) from the FTP sensor (B). 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
HDS.
Is it between —0.67 and 0.67 kPa ( —0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, —5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES—Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP

canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to
step 23
NO—Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-461),

then go to step 23.

18. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. 24. Reset the PCM w ith the HDS.
Is it between —0.67 and 0.67 kPa ( —0.2 and 25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-359).
0.2 in.Hg, —5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES—Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air 3,000 rpm w ithout load (in Park or neutral) until the
tube or vent, then go to step 23. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
NO—G oto step 19. 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w ith the HDS.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. is DTC P1454 and/or P2422 indicated?
20. Remove the FTP sensor (A) from the EVAP canister YES—Check for poor connections or loose
with its connector connected (see page 11-461). term inals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent
shut valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 28.



connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
EVAP Canister Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister cover (A). 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket (A).
NOTE: The canister filter remains on the bracket.
2. Remove the hoses (A), the FTP sensor 3P connector 6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
(B), and EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
(C).
9.8 M m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the bolts (D).
4. Remove the EVAP canister assembly (E).

FTP Sensor Replacement EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister (see page 11 -460).
2. Remove the FTP sensor (A). 1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-4).
2. Disconnect the hoses (A) and the EVAP canister

purge valve 2P connector (B).

with a new O-ring (B).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f-m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (C).

EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister (see page 11-460).
2. Release the lock tabs (A), then remove the EVAP

canister vent shut valve (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the lock tabs.

w ith a new O-ring (C).
NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring w ith engine oil.

Transaxl e
Automatic Transmission ................................. 14-1

Rear Differential ............................................... 15-1
Driveline/Axle ................................................. 16-1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If automatic transmission maintenance is
required)
Items marked w ith an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
Honda dealer.
or side collision, all SRS service w ork should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
airbags may deploy.
Automatic Transmission A /T Gear Position Indicator
Special Tools ............. .............................. 14-2 Component Location Index .... ............. . 14-259
General Troubleshooting Information ..... 14-4 Circuit Diagram .................... ....................... 14-260
DTC Troubleshooting Index ..................... 14-11 Transmission Range Switch Test .............. 14-261
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ........ . 14-13 Transmission Range Switch
Component Location Index ..................... 14-24 Replacement ............... ............... .............. 14-262
System Description ...................... ..... . 14-25
DTC Troubleshooting ................... ....... . 14-77 A /T Interlock System
Road Test .............................................. . 14-185 Component Location Index ........................ 14-265
Stall Speed Test ............ .......................... 14-187 Circuit Diagram ............................................. 14-266
Pressure Test ........................................... 14-188 Shift Lock System Circuit
Shift Solenoid Valve A, B, and C Troubleshooting ................. ......... ............ 14-267
Test/Replacement ................................ 14-192 * Key Interlock System Circuit
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Troubleshooting ................................. .......14-272
Test/Replacement ......... ...................... 14-192 Shift Lock Solenoid Test ....................... .......14-274
A/T Clutch Pressure Control * Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ...... .......14-274
Solenoid Valve A * Park Pin Switch Test ..... .............. .................14-275
Test ................ ........................... 14-196
Replacement ................... .................... . 14-202 Transmission Housing
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Reverse Idler Gear
Solenoid Valve B Removal/Installation ............... ............ . 14-282
Test ......... ........................................ 14-199 Reverse Idler Gear Disassembly/
Replacement ......................................... 14-202 Inspection/Reassembly ..... ..................... 14-282
A/T Clutch Pressure Control ATF Filter
Solenoid Valve C Removal/lnspection/lnstallation ............ 14-283
Test ............................. ................ . . 14-204 Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
Replacement .......................... .......... 14-207 Removal ................. .................................... 14-284
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Install ation ............... .......................... ....... 14-284
Replacement ...... ................................. 14-209 Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap,
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Feed Pipe Replacement ........................... 14-285
Replacement ...... ................. ................ 14-209 Mainshaft Bearing
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Removal ......................... ............. ....... 14-286
Switch Replacement .......... ................. 14-210 Installation .............................. .................. 14-286
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Intermediary Shaft Bearing
Switch Replacement ............... ............. 14-211 Replacement .............................................. 14-287
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement ... 14-212 Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement .... 14-287
ATF Level Check ................................ ..... . 14-213 Control Shaft Bearing Replacement ..... . 14-288
ATF Replacement ................................. 14-214 Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement ..... . 14-288
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement .... 14-215
Transfer Assembly Inspection ................. 14-216 Valve Body
Transfer Assembly Removal ................... 14-217 Valve Body Repair ....................................... 14-289
Transfer Assembly Installation ........ ...... 14-219 Valve Body Valve Installation ...... ......... . 14-290
ATF Leakage at Torque Converter Main Valve Body Disassembly,
Housing Cap ...................................... . 14-221 Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-291
Transmission Removal ........................... 14-222 ATF Pump Inspection .................................. 14-292
Drive Plate Removal and Installation ....... 14-234 Secondary Valve Body Disassembly,
Transmission Installation ......................... 14-235 Inspection, and Reassembly ..... ......... . 14-293
ATF Cooler Cleaning ................................ 14-246 Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement ............... 14-248 Inspection, and Reassembly .................. 14-294
* Shift Lever Removal ................................ 14-249 Accumulator Body Disassembly,
* Shift Lever Installation ........ ................... 14-250 Inspection, and Reassembly ................... 14-295
* Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly ..... 14-252 Shift Solenoid Valve, Torque Converter
* Shift Cable Replacement ................... . 14-253 Clutch Solenoid Valve
* Shift Cable Adjustment ........................ . 14-256 Removal and Installation ......................... 14-296
Transmission Disassembly ...................... 14-276
Transmission Reassembly ....................... 14-343
Torque Converter Housing Transfer Output Shaft
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Component Location Index ............. ......... . 14-364
Replacement ........ ............... ................ 14-297 Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Countershaft Bearing Replacement .......... 14-298 Replacement ............... ............. .......... . 14-364
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement ... 14-299 Oil Seal Replacement ............................. . 14-365
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Transmission Housing Bearing
Replacement .............. ..... ................. . 14-301 Replacement ............... ..................... ......... 14-366
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement .... 14-302 Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ....... .................. 14-367
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Transfer Assembly
Inspection, and Reassembly ..................14-303 Inspection ....................................................... 14-368
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement ........... .14-304 Disassembly .............................................. 14-369
Countershaft Disassembly ....... ................14-305 Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Replacement ........................................... . 14-372
Axial Clearance Inspection ....................14-307 Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear)
Countershaft Reassembly ................ ....... .14-309 Bearing Removal/Installation ........ . 14-373
Secondary Shaft Disassembly ..................14-311 Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Outer Race Replacement ......................... 14-374
Inspection ................ ............................. 14-313 Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing
1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection ........14-315 Outer Race Removal/Installation ........... 14-376
1st Clutch Hub Replacement ................... .14-316 Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement .... . 14-377
Secondary Shaft Reassembly ...................14-317 Reassembly ........................... ..................... . 14-378
Secondary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ........ ..................14-319
Intermediary Shaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ................ .14-321
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
Removal ............................. ................. .14-322
Installation ........................................... .14-322
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial
Clearance Inspection ........................... .14-323
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ................. ....... .14-325
Clutch Disassembly ........ .........................14-326
Clutch Inspection ...................................... 14-331
Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference
Inspection ............ ..... ........................ ...14-332
Clutch Clearance Inspection ....... ..............14-333
Clutch Reassembly .................................. 14-338
A /T Differential
Component Location Index ........... ......... 14-354
Backlash Inspection ........... ..................... 14-355
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear, and
Transfer Drive Gear Replacement ........ 14-356
Differential Carrier and Final Driven Gear
Replacement ............ ............................ 14-356
Carrier Bearing Replacement ................ . 14-357
Oil Seal Replacement .............................. 14-358
Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Replacement ........................................ 14-359
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ...... 14-361
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description ... Q5L_

© 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder 1
07 GAD-PG 40100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07GAD-SD40101 Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 1
© 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1
© 07HAD-SG00100 Attachment, 83 mm 1
© 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
07JAD SH30100 Attachment, 65 mm 1
© 07 LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1
© 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment
© 07MAD-PR90100 Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 1
® 07MAF-SP0011A Tapered Bearing Race Installer 1
@ 07MAF-SP0013A Installer Shaft 1
® 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
® 07 NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
® 07 XAA-002010A Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 1
07XAB-0020100 Companion Flange Holder 1
® 07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
® 070AJ-0020101 Preload Inspection Tool 1
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set/Panel 1
(D: 07HAE-PL50101 may be used to substitute one of these tools.
< 3 &

@ 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25—40 mm 1
@ 07741-0010201 Sliding Hammer Weight 1
® 07746-0010200 Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 1
® 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1.
® 07746-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
® 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
© 07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
® 07746-0010800 Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 1
® 07746-0030100 Driver, 40 mm I.D. 1
07746-0030300 Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 1
07749-0010000 Driver 1
07936-1660101 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 12 mm 1
® 07936-3710100 Bearing Remover Shaft Handle 1
07936-3710600 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 20 mm 1
® 07936-8890300 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 30 mm 1
® 07936-GE00100 Bearing Remover Shaft, 10 mm 1
© 07936-GE00200 Bearing Remover Head, 10 mm 1
® 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
® : Must be used with commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer.
How to Check for DTCs w ith the Honda If the D indicator or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Diagnostic System (HDS) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is
suspected, follow this procedure:
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
indicator (A) in the gauge control module (B) w ill manual for specific instructions.)
usually blink.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select A/T system,
B
and observe the DTC in the DTCs MENU on the
HDS screen.
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, and A/T DTCs,

and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except for DTC P0700, DTC P0700 means there is
one or more A/T DTCs, and no problems were
detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the
PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected 6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) (located under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
steering column lower cover) and the SCS mode is data, and then recheck for a DTC. If the A/T DTC
selected, it w ill indicate the diagnostic trouble code returns, g o to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
(DTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and the If the DTC does not return, there was an
appropriate menu is selected. interm ittent problem w ithin the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

Troubleshooting
Some symptoms w ill not trigger diagnostic trouble

codes (DTCs) or cause the D indicator to blink. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or
the D indicator has been blinking, checkfor DTCs. If the
vehicle has abnormal symptom, and there are no DTCs
stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check the list
of probable cause(s) fo r the symptom, in the sequence
listed, until you find the problem.
<3 ®
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same time,
(retrieving the flash codes) or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this:
NOTE: The preferred method is to use the HDS to 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
retrieve the DTCs. manual for specific instructions.)
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select SCS mode,
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge control then observe the D indicator in the gauge control
module (B) w ill usually blink. module.
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short
i blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a
series of long and short blinks. One long blink
equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and short
blinks together to determine the code.
Example: DTC 1-1
Short bl ink (once)
ON -
OFF-
Example: DTC 15-5

Long blink Short b l i n k s (five)
inn
When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the ON
HDS to the DLC (A) (located under the steering column
lower cover). Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select OFF-
SCS mode, then the D indicator w ill indicate flash the
10 + 5 15
DTC.
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except DTC 70, DTC 70 means there is one or more
A/T DTCs, and no problems were detected in the
fuel and emissions circuit of the PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, and then recheck for DTC. If the A/T DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem w ithin the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
(cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 4. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at a PCM

Connectors connector, use the measurement test port (A)
above the term inal you need to check.
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system fo r up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting
the PCM during this function, w ithout jum ping the SCS
line first, can damage the PCM.
2. Remove the cover (D) from the PCM.
5. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to

a commercially available digital multimeter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
terminals to a commercially available banana jack
(Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
(C).

6. Gently slide the pin probe (male) at the terminal
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols test port from the terminal side. Do not force the
(A=D, B=A, C =0) embossed on them for tips into the terminals.
identification.
INOTICE I
• For accurate results, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
• Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
Clear A /T DTCs Procedures How to End a Troubleshooting Session
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.
1. Reset the PCM w ith the HDS while the engine is

stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and w ait for

30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the

HDS from the DLC.
6. Start the engine in the Por N position, and warm it

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan
comes on).
3. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen.
7. Check the problem is repaired, test-drive the
PCM Reset vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 31 mph
(50 km/h) or in freeze data range.
This command clears stored specific data from the PCM
such as DTCs freeze data, and readiness codes. It does
not clear CKP PATTERN data.
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS when the engine is

stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for

30 seconds.

HDS from the DLC.
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully
finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are
displayed as:
• PASSED: On-board diagnosis is successfully finished.

• FAILED: On-board diagnosis has finished but failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on-board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
Updating the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
with HDS and CM update software
• GNA600 and an iN workstation w ith HDS and CM
update software
NOTE:
• Use this procedure when you have to update the PCM
during troubleshooting procedure.
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version downloaded from the iN (interactive network).
• Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fu lly charged, and connect a jum per
battery (not a battery charger) to maintain system
voltage.
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem with the update, leave the 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
ignition switch ON. it do not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
• To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything (see page 11-218). If you are returning from the
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 5, and
power windows, m oonroof (if equipped), door locks, clean the throttle body after updating the PCM
etc.) during the update. (see page 11-407).
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
• You cannot update an PCM with a program it already
has. It w ill only accept a new program. 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
• High temperature in the engine compartment m ight CHECK, and follow the screen prompts with the
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If HDS.
the engine has been running before this procedure,
open the hood and cool the engine compartment. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module continue this procedure.
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) light came on or
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition 6. Exit the HDS, then select the CM Update, and
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the follow the screen prompts to update the PCM.
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This w ill
prevent PCM damage.
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect Substituting the PCM
the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that you were doing. If the software in Special Tools Required
the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on • Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
the screen. If prompted to select the PGM-FI system • Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
or the A/T system, make sure you update both. with HDS and CM update software
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to • GNA600 and an iN workstation with HDS and CM
cool the PCM, follow the instructions on screen. If update software
you run into a problem during the update
procedure, (programming takes over 15 minutes, NOTE: Use this procedure when you have to substitute
status bar goes over 100 %, D or immobilizer light a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.), follow these steps
to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
• Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
• Connect a jum per battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
• Shut down the HDS.
• Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
• Reboot the HDS.
• Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.

10. Do the crank (CKP) pattern learn procedure

(see page 11-5).

it do not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-218). If you are returning from the
DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 to 9, and
clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM
(see page 11-407).
5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION

CHECK, and follow the screen prompts with the
HDS.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,


8. Remove the cover (D). 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or

Mism atch" may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
14. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.

software.
16. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
17. Enter the immobilizer code using the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you
to start the engine.


21. Do the crank (CKP) pattern learn procedure
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (see page 11-5).
(A = Q B=A, C=0) embossed on them for
identification.
10. Remove the mounting bolts (E), then remove the

PCM (F).
11. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal.
12. OpentheSCS w ith the HDS.

NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
DTC*111 0 MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator O o
P0705 (5-2)M2> Blinks ON Short in Transmission Range Switch Circuit (see page 14-77)
(Multiple Shift-position Input)
P0706 {6-2) *m OFF ON Open in Transmission Range Switch Circuit (see page 14-87)
P0711 (28-5)+(2) Blinks OFF Problem in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit (see page 14-91)
P0712 (28-3) *(2> Blinks OFF Short in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit (see page 14-93)
P0713 (28-4)M2) Blinks OFF Open in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit (see page 14-95)
P0716 (15-5)*i2) Blinks ON Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (see page 14-97)
Circuit
P0717(15-3)M2! Blinks ON Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor (see page 14-97)
Circuit (No Signal Input)
P0718(15-6)M2) Blinks ON Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Intermittent (see page 14-101)
Failure
P0721 (9-5)*(2) Blinks ON Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed (see page 14-104)
Sensor Circuit
P0722 (9 -3 r(2) Blinks ON Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed (see page 14-104)
Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
P0723 (9-6)M2) Blinks ON Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (see page 14-108)
Intermittent Failure
P0731 (64-1) Blinks OFF Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st Clutch Hydraulic (see page 14-111)
Circuit (1st gear incorrect ratio)
P0732 (64-2) Blinks OFF Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd Clutch Hydraulic (see page 14-113)
Circuit (2nd gear incorrect ratio)
P0733 (64-3) Blinks OFF Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd Clutch Hydraulic (see page 14-115)
Circuit (3rd gear incorrect ratio)
P0734 (64-4) Blinks OFF Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th Clutch Hydraulic (see page 14-117)
Circuit (4th gear incorrect ratio)
P0735 (64-5) Blinks OFF Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th Clutch Hydraulic (see page 14-119)
Circuit (5th gear incorrect ratio)
P0741 (40-3) OFF ON Torque Converter Clutch Hydraulic Circuit Stuck (see page 14-121)
OFF
P0746 (76-3) Blinks ON A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck (see page 14-123)
OFF
P0747 (76-4) Blinks ON A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck (see page 14-123)
ON
P0751 (70-3) Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF (see page 14-125)
P0752 (70-4) Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON (see page 14-125)
P0756 (71-3) Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF (see page 14-127)
P0757 (71-4) Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON (see page 14-127)
P0761 (72-3) Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF (see page 14-129)
P0762 (72-4) Blinks ON Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON (see page 14-129)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code (Honda code) the D indicator indicates when the data link connector
(DLC) is connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
(confd)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot, and review General
DTC*m D MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator
Q
P0776 (77-3) Blinks ON A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Stuck (see page 14-131)
OFF
P0777 (77-4) Blinks ON A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Stuck (see page 14-131)
ON
P0780 (45-1) Blinks ON Problem in Shift Control System (see page 14-133)
P0847 (26-3) *(2! Blinks OFF Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure (see page 14-135)
Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Stuck ON
P0848 (26-4) *<2) Blinks OFF Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure (see page 14-137)
Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Stuck OFF
P0872 (27-3) Blinks OFF Short in 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure (see page 14-140)
Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Stuck ON
P0873 (27-4) Blinks OFF Open in 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure (see page 14-142)
Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Stuck OFF
P0962 (16-3)M2> Blinks ON Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid (see page 14-145)
Valve A Circuit
P0963 (16-4)*(2! Blinks ON Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid (see page 14-148)
Valve A
P0966 (23-3)M2) Blinks ON Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid (see page 14-150)
Valve B Circuit
P0967 (23-4) *<2) Blinks ON Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid (see page 14-153)
Valve B
P0970 (29-3) *(2i Blinks ON Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid (see page 14-155)
Valve C Circuit
P0971 (29-4) *(2) Blinks ON Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid (see page 14-158)
Valve C
P0973 (7-3)*(2> Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit (see page 14-160)
P0974 (7-4)*<2) Blinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit (see page 14-163)
P0976 (8-3) Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit (see page 14-166)
P0977 (8-4)*(2) Biinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit (see page 14-169)
P0979 (22-3) *<2> Blinks ON Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit (see page 14-172)
P0980 (22-4) *(2? Blinks ON Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit (see page 14-175)
P2769 (1-3)*(2! Blinks ON Short in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (see page 14-178)
Circuit
P2770 (1-4)*i2> Blinks ON Open in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve (see page 14-181)
Circuit
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code (Honda code) the D indicator indicates when the data link connector
(DLC) is connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

When you turn the • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line fo r a DTC
ignition switch ON • Gauge control module defective (see page 22-91).
(II), the D indicator • PCM defective • Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge
comes on and control module by using the gauge control
stays on in all shift module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-90).
lever positions, or
it never comes on
at all
A/T gear position • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
indicator does not • Gauge control module defective (see page 22-91).
come on while the • PCM defective • Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge
shift lever is in that • Transmission range switch control module by using the gauge control
position defective module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-90).
• Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-261).
Shift lever cannot • Accelerator pedal position sensor • Inspect the APP sensor signal (see page 11-274).
be moved from P circuit • Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit
while you are • Accelerator pedal position sensor (see page 14-267).
pressing on the defective • Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-274).
brake pedal • Brake pedal position switch circuit • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
• Brake pedal position switch 14-261).
defective
• Shift lock solenoid defective
• Shift lock solenoid control circuit
• Shift lock mechanism defective
• Throttle body defective
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch stuck OFF
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch line opened
Ignition switch • Interlock control system circuit • Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit
cannot be moved • Key interlock solenoid stuck ON (see page 14-272).
from ACC (1) to • Park pin switch stuck OFF • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
LOCK (0) (key is • Transmission range switch 14-261).
pushed in, shift
lever in P)
When you turn the • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
ignition switch ON • Gauge control module defective (see page 22-91).
(II), the A/T TEMP • PCM defective • Check the indicator drive circuit in the gauge
indicator comes on control module by using the gauge control
and stays on or module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-90).
never comes on at
all (4WD)
(cont'd)

Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler lines
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of for leakage and loose connections. If necessary, clean
move in any gear adjustment the ATF cooler lines.
3. Connection between shift • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
cable and transmission or transmission control lever.
body is worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. ATF pump worn or binding converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
5. Regulator valve stuck or symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
spring worn a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF strainer clogged • Check the line pressure.
7. Mainshaft worn or • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
damaged clogged, find the damaged components that caused
8. Final gears worn or the debris.
damaged • Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the
9. Park mechanism defective differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
10. Transmission-to-engine differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer, and
assembly error thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean the
11. Axle disengaged cooler and lines. Replace the torque converter.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing. You
may also damage the ATF pump when you torque
down the main valve body. This w ill result in ATF
pump seizure if not detected. Use the proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush w ith the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it w ill block the fluid
return passage and result in damage.
Vehicle moves in R, 1. 1st accumulator defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
but not in D, D3, 2, 2. Idler gears worn or • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold clutch
or 1 damaged assembly for wear and damage.
3. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the clutch
end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear
and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-plate
height. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If the wave-plate height is out
of tolerance, replace the wave-plate. If they are OK,
adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
Vehicle moves in 2 1. 1st gear one-way clutch • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
and R, but not in D, defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold clutch
D3, or 1 2. 1st gears worn or damaged assembly for wear and damage.
3. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the clutch
end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear
and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-plate
height. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If the wave-plate height is out
of tolerance, replace the wave-plate. If they are OK,
Vehicle moves in D, 1. 1st-hold accumulator • Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure.
D3, 2, and R, but defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold clutch
not in 1 2. 1st-hoId clutch defective assembly fo r wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
O-rings. Check the spring retainer fo r wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch plate-to-top disc clearance. If the
clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
and plates for wear and damage, and inspect the clutch
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
damaged, replace them as a set. If the wave-plate
height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-plate. If the
discs and plates are OK, adjust the clearance w ith the
clutch end-plate.
Vehicle moves in D, 1. 2nd accumulator defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
D 3 ,1, and R, but 2. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch assembly
not in 2 for wear and damage.
O-rings. Check the spring retainer fo r wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate and
the top disc. If the clearance is out o f tolerance, inspect
the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage, and
inspect the clutch wave-plate height If the discs and
plates are worn or damaged, replace the discs and
plates as a set. If the wave-plate height is out of
tolerance, replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates
are OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
Vehicle moves in D, 1. Shift fork shaft stuck • Check the line pressure and 5th clutch pressure.
D3, 2, and 1, but 2. Modulator valve defective • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
not in R (or moves 3. Reverse CPC valve • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the ATF strainer is
forward in R) defective clogged w ith particles of steel or aluminum, inspect the
4. 5th accumulator defective ATF pump. If the ATF pump is OK, find the damaged
5. 5th clutch defective components that caused the debris. If no cause for the
6. Reverse gears worn or contamination is found, replace the torque converter.
damaged • Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of the
countershaft 5th gear and reverse gear. Replace the
reverse gears and the reverse selector if they are worn
or damaged. If the transmission makes clicking,
grinding, or whirring noises, also replace the mainshaft
5th gear, reverse idler gear, and countershaft 5th gear.
O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate and
the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect
the clutch discs and plates for wear and damage, and
inspect the clutch wave-plate height, if the discs and
plates are worn or damaged, replace the discs and
plates as a set. If the wave-plate height is out of
tolerance, replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates
are OK, adjust the clearance w ith the clutch end-plate.
(cont'd)

Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
flares when 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines fo r leakage and loose connections. If
starting o ff in D, adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
D3, and R 3. ATF pump worn or binding • Check fo r a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
4. Regulator valve stuck or spring the transmission control lever.
worn • Check the line pressure.
5. ATF strainer clogged • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
6. Torque converter check valve clogged, find the damaged components that
defective caused the debris.
• Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
The symptom is mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a
high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This w ill result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
Poor acceleration; 1. One-way check ball defective • Checkthe 1st clutch pressure.
flares when 2. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
starting off in D, D3, valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
and R; stall speed wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
high in D, D 3,2, to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
and 1 tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-
plate height, if the discs and plates are worn or
damaged, replace them as a se t If the wave-plate
height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-plate.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the
clutch end-plate.
Poor acceleration; 1. 2nd accumulator defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
flares when 2. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
starting off in D, valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
D3, and R; stall wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
speed high in 2 to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
damaged, replace the discs and plates as a set. If
the wave-plate height is out of tolerance, replace
the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are OK,
adjust the clearance w ith the clutch end-plate.
< &
Sym ptom Probable cause(s) Notes

Poor acceleration; 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check fo r a stored. DTC, and check fo r loose
flares when 2. Shift cable broken or out of connectors.
starting off in D adjustment • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
and R; stall speed 3. Reverse CPC valve defective valve seizure.
high in R 4. 5th accumulator defective • Check fo r a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
5. 5th clutch defective the transmission control lever.
• Check the 5th clutch pressure.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Checkthe spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
Poor acceleration; 1. Torque converter clutch solenoid • Checkfor a stored DTC, and checkfor loose
flares when valve defective connectors.
starting off in D, 2. Torque converter one-way clutch • Inspect the O-ring, and checkthe solenoid valve
03, and R; stall defective seizure.
speed low 3. Engine output low • Replace torque converter.
4. Torque converter clutch piston • Check for a stuck lock-up valve in the valve body.
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve defective
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level • Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
vibration 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
valve defective lines for leakage and loose connections. If
3. Drive plate defective or necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
transmission misassembled • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. Engine output low converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
5. Torque converter clutch piston The symptom is mostly an rpm-related ticking
defective noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF pump worn or binding • Be careful not to damage the torque converter
7. Lock-up shift valve defective housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This w ill result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
(cont'd)

Vehicle moves in N 1. Excessive ATF * Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if
2. Foreign material in separator necessary.
plate orifice * Check all clutch pressures.
3. Relief valve defective * Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
4. Lubrication control valve valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-piate-
5. 1st-hold clutch defective to-top disc clearance, if the clearance is out of
6. 1st clutch defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
7. 2nd clutch defective wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-
8. 3rd clutch defective plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
9. 4th clutch defective damaged, replace the discs and plates as a set. If
10. 5th clutch defective the wave-plate height is out of tolerance, replace
11. Clutch end-plate clearance the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are OK,
incorrect adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
12. Needle bearing seized up, worn,
or damaged
13. Thrust washer seized up, worn,
or damaged
Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
D o rD 3 ,o r solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
excessive shock 3. A/T clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
when shifting solenoid valve B defective • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. A/T clutch pressure control valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
solenoid valve C defective and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control
5. Shift cable broken or out of solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
adjustment • Check fo r a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
6. Connection between shift cable the transmission control lever.
and transmission or body is • Checkthe 1st clutch pressure.
worn • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
7. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
sensor defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
8. Output shaft (countershaft) to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
speed sensor defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
9. ATF temperature sensor wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-
defective plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
10. CPC valve C defective damaged, replace them as a set. If the wave-plate
11. Foreign material in separator height is out of tolerance, replace the wave-plate.
plate orifice If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the
12. Shift valve C defective clutch end-plate.
13. Shift valve E defective
14. Servo control valve defective
15. 1st accumulator defective
16. 1st check ball stuck
17. One-way check ball defective
18. 1st clutch defective
Sym ptom Probable cause(s) Notes —
Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
R, or excessive solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
shock when 3. A/T clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
shifting solenoid valve B defective • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. A/T clutch pressure control valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes fo r wear
solenoid valve C defective and damage/-If the A/T clutch pressure control
5. Shift cable broken or out of solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
adjustment • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
6. Connection between shift cable the transmission control lever.
and transmission or body is • Checkthe 5th clutch pressure.
worn • Inspect the clutch piston/clutch piston check
7. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer fo r
sensor defective wear and damage. Inspectthe clutch end-plate-
8. Output shaft (countershaft) to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
speed sensor defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates fo r
9. ATF temperature sensor wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-
defective plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
10. Shift fork shaft stuck damaged, replace the discs and plates as a set. If
11. CPC valve C defective the wave-plate height is out of tolerance/replace
12. Reverse CPC valve defective the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are OK,
13. Foreign material in separator adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
plate orifice
14. Shift valve E defective
15. 5th accumulator defective
16. 5th clutch defective
(cont'd)

Transmission does 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
not shift sensor defective connectors.
2. Output shaft (countershaft) speed • Checkthe line pressure.
sensor defective
3. M odulator valve defective
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve B defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in D; 2. Shift valve B defective connectors.
starts off in 5th • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve B defective 9 Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in 2; 2. Shift valve B defective connectors.
starts off in 4th • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in D; 2. Shift valve A defective connectors.
starts off in 3rd • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in 2; 2. Shift valve A defective connectors.
starts off in 1st • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
valve for seizure.
Excessive shock or 1. A/T clutch pressure control • Check fo r a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on all solenoid valve A defective connectors.
upshifts and 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
downshifts solenoid valve B defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed and damage. If the A/T clutch pressure control
sensor defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. Output shaft (countershaft) speed • Inspect the sensor O-rings.
sensor defective
5. ATF temperature sensor defective
6. CPC valve A defective
7. Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
Excessive shock or 1. Foreign material in separator • Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
flares on 1-2 plate orifice • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
upshift or 2-1 2. 2nd accumulator defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
downshift 3. 2nd check ball stuck wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
4. 2nd clutch defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
wear and damage, and inspectthe clutch wave-
Symptom Probable cause(s) N otes
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 2-3 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors.
upshift or 3-2 solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
downshift 3. A/T clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
solenoid valve B defective • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
4. 3rd clutch transmission fluid fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
pressure switch defective clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
5. CPC valve B defective • Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
6. Foreign material in separator • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
plate orifice valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
7. Shift valve C defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
8. 2nd accumulator defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
9. 3rd accumulator defective tolerance, inspectthe clutch discs and plates for
10. 2nd check ball stuck wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-
11. 2nd clutch defective plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
12. 3rd clutch defective damaged, replace the discs and plates as a set. If
upshift or 4-3 solenoid valve A defective • inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
solenoid valve B defective • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
4. 4th clutch transmission fluid fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
pressure switch defective clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
5. CPC valve B defective • Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
6. Foreign material in separator • Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
plate orifice valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
7. Shift valve C defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
8. 3rd accumulator defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
9. 4th accumulator defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
10. 3rd clutch defective wear and damage, and inspect the clutch wave-
11. 4th clutch defective plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
(cont'd)

upshift or 5-4 solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
solenoid valve B defective • Check the 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
4. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
solenoid valve C defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
5. CPC valve B defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
6. CPC valve C defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
7. Foreign material in separator tolerance, inspectthe clutch discs and plates for
plate orifice wear and damage, and inspectthe clutch wave-
8. Shift valve C defective plate height. If the discs and plates are worn or
9. Shift valve E defective damaged, replace the discs and plates as a set. If
10. Kick-down valve or kick-down the wave-plate height is out of tolerance, replace
short valve defective the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are OK,
11. 4th accumulator defective adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
12. 5th accumulator defective
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Idler gears worn or damaged converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
shift lever 3. Thrust washer seized up, worn, The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
positions or damaged noise or a high pitched squeak.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace the torque converter.
accelerate above defective
31 mph (50 km/h)
Vibration in all Drive plate defective or transmission • Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
shift lever misassembled • Checkthe stall speed.
positions
Shift lever does 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
not operate defective or otit of adjustment connectors.
smoothly 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
adjustment transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
worn • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
not shift into P adjustment the transmission control lever.
2. Connection between shift cable • Check the park pawl, control shaft, and park lever
and transmission or body is link for wear and damage. Check if the control
worn shaft lever pin is disengaged from the manual
3. Park mechanism defective valve guide.
Torque converter 1. Torque converter clutch solenoid • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
clutch does not valve defective connectors.
disengage 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
solenoid valve C defective valve C body gasket for wear and damage. If A/T
3. Torque converter clutch piston clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is stuck,
defective inspectthe CPC valves.
5. Lock-up control valve defective
6. Lock-up timing valve defective
operate smoothly 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspectthe A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
3. Torque converter clutch piston clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is stuck,
defective inspect the CPC valves.
4. Torque converter check valve • Center all engine mounts.
defective
7. Lock-up timing valve defective
engage 2. A/T clutch pressure control • Inspectthe A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is stuck,
sensor defective inspect the CPC valves.
4. Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor defective
5. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
6. Torque converter check valve
defective
A/T gear position 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
indicator does not defective or out of adjustment connectors.
indicate shift lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of ® Inspectthe transmission range switch. If the
positions adjustment transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is worn adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Speedometer and Output shaft (countershaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
odometer do not sensor defective connectors.
work
Engine does not VTEC rocker arms defective Check the engine rocker arms.
rev to high rpm,
and the
transmission
upshifts at low rpm
(engine at normal
operating
temperature)
A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C 4TH CLUTCH
TRANSM ISS ION FLUID
POWERTRAIN Replacement, PRESSURE SWITCH
CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Replacement,
page 14-211
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
Test, page 14-196
Replacement,
page 14-202
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
Test, page 14-199
Replacement,
page 14-202
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
Test/Rep lacement,
page 14-192
SHIFT SOLENOID
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) } \ VALVE C
SPEED SENSOR r ITest/Replacement,
Replacement, page 14-209 A I page 14-192
TORQUE
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION / CONVERTER
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH / CLUTCH
Rep lacem ent page 14-210 SOLENOID VALVE
\ Test/Replacement,
\ page 14-192
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT) ATF TEMPERATURE SHIFT SOLENOID
SPEED SENSOR SENSOR VALVE B
Replacement, Replacement, TRANSMISSION Test/Replacement,
page 14-209 page 14-212 RANGE SWITCH page 14-192
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and four-shaft electronically controlled
unit which provides 5 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine.
Torque Converter, Shafts, Gears, and Clutches ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ' •

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing (pump)
is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel, transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has four parallel shafts; the
mainshaft, the countershaft, the secondary shaft, and the intermediary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine
crankshaft. The mainshaft includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and reverse (reverse gear is
integral with the 5th gear). The countershaft includes gears for the final drive, 2nd, idler, 1st, 4th, 5th, and reverse (the
final drive gear is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st, 1st-hold, and 2nd clutches, and
gears for park, 2nd, idler, and 1st The intermediary shaft includes the 3rd clutch, and gears for 3rd and 4th. The
countershaft 5th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its left end, providing 5th
gear or reverse, depending with which way the selector is moved. The gears on the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
intermediary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain conditions of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted through the mainshaft, to the secondary shaft or the
intermediary shaft, then to the countershaft or through the mainshaft to the countershaft to provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in
the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the secondary valve body, the regulator valve body, and the
accumulator body. They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve,
the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valves A, B, D, E, CPC valve C, the cooler check valve, the
relief valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up timing valve, the lubrication control valve, the lubrication check valve,
and the ATF pump gears. The secondary valve body contains shift valve C, CPC valve A, B, the reverse CPC valve, the
servo control valve, and the kick-down valve. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up
control valve, and the 3rd accumulator. The accumulator body contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th
accumulators, shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Fluid from the regulator
passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The all clutches receive fluid from the internal
hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

To shift gears, the PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and automatic transmission (A/T) clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A and B, while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located throughout
the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port to send hydraulic pressure
to the clutches. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B control CPC valve A and B to shift smoothly
between lower gear and higher gear. This pressurize a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its
corresponding gear.
(cont'd)
General Operation (cont'd)
Lock-up Mechani sm
The lock-up mechanism operates in the D position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and the D3 position (2nd and 3rd). The
pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque
converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the
same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing of the lock-up
mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure changes to switch lock-up
on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of lock-up according to A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is located on the accumulator body in
the transmission, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is mounted on the transmission housing. They are
all controlled by the PCM.
Gear Selection
The shift lever has seven positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear ranges, D 3:1st
through 3rd gear ranges, 2: 2nd gear, and 1:1st gear.
Position Description
P PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on secondary shaft. All clutches are
released.
R; REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 5th clutch engaged.
N;NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
D: DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then 5th, depending on
(1st through 5th) vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on
deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gear.
D3: DRIVE Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill
(1st through 3rd) driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
accelerator pedal position. Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up
mechanism operates in 2nd and 3rd gear.
2: SECOND Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear; does not shift up or down.
1: FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (A/T) Gear Position Indicator

The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which shift lever position has been selected without
having to look down at the shift lever.
Transfer Mechanism
The transfer mechanism consists of the transfer drive gear on the differential, the transfer output shaft in the
transmission, the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear), the transfer shaft, the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear), and the
companion flange. The transfer mechanism assembly is on the rear side of the transmission, beside the differential.
The transfer drive gear on the differential drives the transfer output shaft in the transmission. The transfer output shaft
in the transmission is connected to the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear) by splines. Power is transmitted from the
transfer drive gear on the differential to the rear differential via the transfer and the propeller shaft.
Clutches
The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydrauIicaIly-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the left end of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
1st-hold Clutch
The 1st-hold clutch engages/disengages 1st-hold in 1 position, and is located in the 1st clutch drum. The Ist-hold
clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
2nd Cl utch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the right end of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the end of the intermediary shaft. The 3rd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the intermediary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit
connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
5th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft
by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
One-way Clutch
The one-way clutch is positioned between the 1st clutch hub and the secondary shaft 1st gear. The secondary shaft 1st
gear is splined to the 1st-hold clutch hub, with the 1st-hold clutch hub splined to the secondary shaft. The secondary
shaft 1st gear provides the outer race surface, and the 1st clutch hub provides the inner race surface. The one-way
clutch locks when power is transmitted from the secondary shaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch
and gears remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gear ranges in the D, D3, or 2 position.
However, the one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th clutches and gears are applied in the D, D3, or
2 position. This is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the secondary shaft causes the one-way
clutch to free-wheel with the 1st clutch still engaged.
Power Flow
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
• 4th gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• 5th gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• 3rd gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:

• Final gear is integral with the countershaft.
• 1st gear, 2nd gear, and 4th gear are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
• 5th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 5th gear and reverse
gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so 5th gear and reverse
gear engage with the countershaft.
• Idler gear is located over the 2nd gear, and rotates freely from the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:

• 1st gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch. 1st gear is engaged with the secondary
shaft by the one-way clutch and the 1st-hold clutch when decelerating for engine braking.
• 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
• Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
• Park gear is integral with the 2nd gear.
Gears on the intermediary shaft:

• 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the intermediary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
• 4th gear is splined with the intermediary shaft.
Transmission Cutaway View
NOTE; The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD transmission does not have the transfer mechanism,
REVERSE IDLER GEAR INTERMEDIARY

SHAFT 4TH GEAR
REVERSE IDLER INTERMEDIARY
GEAR SHAFT SHAFT 3RD GEAR
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT
MAINSHAFT
5TH GEAR
RING GEAR
MAINSHAFT TORQUE CONVERTER

REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
M A I NSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR

5TH GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT IDLER GEAR
DRIVE PLATE
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE'
SELECTOR HUB FINAL DRIVE GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT 1ST GEAR TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT 2ND GEAR
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY SHAFT ASSEMBLY
TRANSFER
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
COMPANION
FLANGE
Power Flow (cont'd)

P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the mainshaft drives the mainshaft 3rd gear, the intermediary shaft 3rd gear, but
hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. In this position, the
position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted from the D or R position:
• When shifted from the D position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft 5th gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the 5th gear engages with the countershaft.
• When shifted from the R position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft reverse gear, and the reverse
selector hub, and the reverse gear engages with the countershaft.
NOTE: The illustration shows the 4WD transmission; the 2WD transmission does not have the transfer mechanism.
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR
< £ >
1 Posi t i on (Acceleration)
In the 1 position under an acceleration, hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch. The
power flow when accelerating is as follows:
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and the secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st-hold clutch, and the Ist-hold clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st
gear with the secondary shaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear, and the transfer drive gear
(4 W D ).
• 4WD: The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
M A I N SH A FT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR T O R Q U E CONVERTER
M AIN SH A FT
C O U N T ER SH A FT IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
C O U N T ER SH A FT
SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSFER (4WD)
TR A N SFER HYPOID
DRIVE G E A R /SH A FT
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT (HYPO I D GEAR)
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
(cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)

1 Position (Deceleration)
The power f low in the 1 position when decelerating is as follows:
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hoId clutch.
• Rolling resistance from the road surface goes through the front wheels to the final driven gear, then to the
countershaft idler gear.
• The one-way clutch disengages because the application of torque is reversed.
• The force conveyed to the secondary shaft idler gear turns the mainshaft 3rd gear via the countershaft idler gear. As
a result, engine braking can be obtained with 1st gear.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARYSHAFT
1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
TRANSFER (4WD)
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

D or D3 Position
In the D position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears (in the D
position); 1st, 2nd, and 3rd gears (in the D3 position) according to conditions such as the balance between the throttle
opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
In 1st gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st cl utch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
(4WD).
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
(cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)

In 2nd gearand 2 Posit ion
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear w ith the
secondary shaft.
• The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
(4WD).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 2nd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power from 1st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
In3rd gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd cl utch, then the 3rd clutch engages the intermediary shaft 3rd gear with the
intermediary shaft.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the intermediary shaft 4th gear via the intermediary shaft 3rd gear and the 3rd.clutch.
• The intermediary shaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft via the mainshaft 4th gear.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear, and the transfer drive,gear
C4WD).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 3rd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
3RD CLUTCH
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR \ INTERMEDIARY SHAFT
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 4TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR

TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR

4TH GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
^ TRANSFER (4WD)
z J S -------,__— TRANSFER HYPOID
J DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
TRANSFER
OU TPU T SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT (HYPOID GEARI
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
,, ,
Oyi-btJ
(cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
In 4th gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
(4WD).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 4th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR

In 5th gear •
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 5th gear while
the shift lever in the forward range (D, D3, 2, and 1 positions).
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 5th gear drives the counters haft. 5th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear/and the transfer drive gear
(4 W D ).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 5th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
5TH-CLUTCH
(cont'd)
Pow er Flow (cont'd)
R Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the R position.
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft is changed by the reverse idler gear.
(4WD).
REVERSE IDLER GEAR 5TH CLUTCH
Electroni c Contro l
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid valves. Shifting
and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
Functional Diagram
The PCM receives input signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units, processes data, and outputs
signals for the engine control system and the A/T control system. The A/T control system includes shift control, grade
logic control, clutch pressure control, and lock-up control. The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves and the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves to control shifting transmission gears and lock-up torque converter clutch.
PCM
Engine RPM Signal
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal PGM-FI
Control System
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal
Service Check Signal

A /T Control System Shift Solenoid Valve A
VTM-4 Control Unit
Signal (4WD) Shift Control Shift Solenoid Valve B
VSA M odulato r-control Grade Logic Shift Solenoid Valve C

Unit Signal Control
Cruise Control Automatic
Downshift Request 5-speed
Signal and
Reverse
Transmission
Range Switch A /T Clutch Pressure
Signal Control Solenoid Valve A
Clutch Pressure A /T Clutch Pressure
Control Control Solenoid Valve B
A /T Clutch Pressure
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Control Solenoid Valve C
Speed Sensor Signal
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Lock-up Control ON/OFF
Solenoid Valve
Speed Sensor Signal
Lock-up
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Self-diagnosis/ Conditions
Pressure Switch Signal Fail-safe Function Vehicle Speed Signal
Communication and Data Link Connector
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Output Function
Pressure Switch Signal
Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal Shift Lock Control Shift Lock Solenoid
D Indicator
Indicator Control A/T TEMP Indicator
(cont'd)
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting transmission gear.
Shift solenoid valves use ON-CLOSE/OFF-OPEN type; shift solenoid valve closes the port of shift solenoid valve
pressure while shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and opens the port when shift solenoid valve is OFF.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C are shown in the table.
Position Gear Position Shift Solenoid Valves

, A B C
D, D3 Shifting from the N position OFF ON OFF
Stays in 1st ON ON ON
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd OFF ON OFF
Stays in 3rd OFF ON ON
D Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF
Shifting gears between 4th and 5th ON OFF OFF
Stays in 5th ON OFF ON
2 2nd ON ON OFF
1 1st ON ON ON
N Neutral OFF ON OFF
R Shifting from the P and N positions OFF ON ON
Stays in reverse OFF ON OFF
Reverse inhibit control ON ON ON
P Park OFF ON OFF
Shift Contro l - Grade Logic Control
The grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in the D position. To control shifting while the
vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, the PCM compares actual driving conditions with programmed driving
conditions, based on the input from the accelerator pedal position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the
barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the shift lever position signal.
(cont'd)
Grade Logic Control; Ascending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in the D position, the system extends the engagement
area of 2nd gear, 3rd gear, and 4th gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifti ng between 2nd and 3rd
gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more
power when needed.
NOTE: Shift commands stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th
and 5th gears, enable the PCM to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in the D position, the shift-up speed from 4th to 5th
gear, 3rd to 4th gear, and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road
driving to extend the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking from the
deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are three descending modes
with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas, and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of
a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th or 4th gear and you are decelerating while applying the brakes
on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to a lower gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return
to a higher gear.
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 5th or 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope
with upcoming acceleration.
Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting
between gears, the clutch pressure regulated by A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C engages and
disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches,, processes .data,-and outputs current to A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C.
PCM
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal Actual
Driving
Shift
Output Shaft Position
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Decision'of
Accelerator Pedal Shifting Mode
Position Sensor
Signal__________
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Current A/T Clutch Pressure
Master Target of Control Solenoid
Controlling Current Feedback Valves A, B, and C
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
Correction of Data
h
Engine RPM Signal
Correction of Engine
Torque Signal Data
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Correction of
3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid _T Hydraulic Pressure
Application Timing
Pressure Switch Signal
4th Clutch
Transmission Fluid Correction of Engine
Pressure Switch Signal Coolant Temperature
Sensor Signal Data, ■. -
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal Correction of ATF
Temperature Sensor
ATF Temperature Data
Sensor Signal
(cont'd)
Lock-up Control
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM actuates the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve to start lock-up. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C applies and regulates the hydraulic
pressure to the lock-up control valve to control the amount of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in the D position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th) and in the D3 position (2nd and 3rd).
PCM A/T Control System Electrical Connections
BATTERY
B37 r
G) -cr\jD--- A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
IG1 HOT in ON (li)

--:
— W ----
and START (!!!) A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH --- -------
-0 ^ 0 -
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEA
DATAUNK CONNECTOR
— -----:---
SHIFT SOLENOID
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE VALVEB
--------
CANL SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
CANH --W ----
TORQUE CONVERTER
Warning Indicator Driver
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
-- W------
Dash-light Brightness
Control Circuit
VCC2
INPUT SHAFT
NM (MAINSHAFT)
ATPP SPEED SENSOR
SG2
ATPR
VCC1
OUTPUT SHAFT
ATPN NC (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
SGI
ATPD
ATPD3
ATP 2 3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

ATP1 -os"so
ATPFWD
PG1 4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

C16 \ FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
PG2 --------- o>o---
LG1
LG2
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
..I"'J. 11 T~11!
... Jm ziL
I 1 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 7
8 191
. 1 2 3 4 5
1
/1»l/i/
10 1 1 12
20 2 1 22
17 18 19
23 24 25
■
13 14 15 16
1 i
*v w
26 2 1 28 33 34 35
I36!/ / I / I 41
38 42 4-3 J 44 | 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 (43)
AGK44P) C (0) (44PI

PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs
PCM Harness Connector Term inal Locations
11 12 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I. 1 2 3 I4 | 5 ] 6 I 7 8 I 9 Ii| 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9i J
1 ■ ■
10 11 12 / l u l / ! 7 17 18 19 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ J 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ I 20 21 22
20 21 22 23 24 25 (23) 24 25 20 / (22^ 23 24 25 ■
■
ICSJ I
foQl
1 33 34 26 27 29 (30 (<31)(32 33 34 35 26 27 28 / 3 0 | 3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
26 27 28 2 9 1 /|3 1 / 35
3 6 / 3 8 |/|/|4 1 ]42 4 3 1441 36 37 3 8 139 |40141 |42 4 3 | 4 4 | M 37 3 8 139 14 0 141 142 (43) | (44) |
A ( □ ) (44P ) B (A ) (4 4 P ) C (O) ( 4 4 P )
Terminal W ire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
A1 RED CAN L (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): About 2.5 V (pulses)
COMMUN ICATION SIGNAL communication signal
LOW)
A2 WHT/RED SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed, and accelerator released: About 0 V
A6 BLK/WHT MRLY (PGM-FIMAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): About OV
RELAY) (FI-MAIN) With ignition switch OFF: Battery voltage
A8 WHT/BLK BK SW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: About 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
A12 BLU/BLK ATP P (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch P signal In any position other than P position: Battery
voltage
A17 ORN/BLK APSA (ACCELERATOR Detects APP Sensor A With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) Signal pressed: About 4.7 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: About 0.5 V
A18 YEL APSB (ACCELERATOR Detects APP Sensor B With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) Signal pressed: About 2.3 V
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: About 0.25 V
A24 GRN VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
voltage With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
A25 WHT VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
A31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With the service check signal shorted using HDS:
SIGNAL) About 0 V
With the service check signal open: About 5.0 V
A34 BLK SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
A35 RED/YEL SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
A36 WHT CAN H (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch ON (II): About 2.6 V (pulses)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL communication signal
HIGH)
A43 GRY K-LINE Sends and receives HDS With ignition switch ON (II) and HDS disconnected:
communication signal About 9.0 V
number
Bl BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for the PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
B2 BLK/YEL VB SOL (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid W ith ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valves With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
B3 YEL/BLK IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
B18 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provide sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
B25 BRN/WHT LSB (A/TCLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL eontrolsolenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
B30 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): About 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: About 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
SENSOR)
B33 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 Vat all times
B35 GRN/RED LSC (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
B36 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for the PCM Less than 1.0 Vat all times
B37 RED/WHT IG1 (IGNITION SWITCH) Detects ignition switch With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
signal
B39 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal With engine idling in N position: About 1.5—3.5 V
(pulses)
B4G BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V o r about
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal With vehicle moving: About 1 5 —3.5 V (pulses)
B43 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for the PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
B44 YEL LC (TORQUE CONVERTER Drives torque converter During lock-up condition: Battery voltage
CLUTCH SOLENOID) clutch solenoid valve During no lock-up condition: About 0 V
(cont'd)
PCM A/T Control System Inputs and Outputs (cont'd)
PCM Harness Connector T e rm in a l Locations
I 1 12 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 i 1 I 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9I I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 |6 I7 8 I 9 I
Ii 1 ■
10 11 12 / ^ 1 4 l / 1 Z 17 18 19 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i l 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ I 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 22 (23) 24 25 20 / (22) 23 24 25
■ 1
1 26 27 28 29M 31.I/ 33 34 35 26 27 28 29|30|(31)|32 33 34 35 26 27 2 8 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
38 1/1/141 I42 4 3 |4 4 | 136137 38 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 43 14 4 1 13 6 137 38 (39 140 141 142 (43)1(44)1
r-fr
A O H 44P) B fA )(4 4 P ) C IO ) I44P)

number
C9 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve With EGR operating: Duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) With EGR not operation: About 0 V
VALVE)
013 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
voltaqe With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
C14 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
C15 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 3rd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
C16 BLU/YEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 4th clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 4th clutch pressure: About 0 V
C17 BLU/YEL ATP FWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D, D3, or 2 position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH FWD) switch FWD signal In any position other than D, D3 or 2 position:
Battery voltage
C18 GRN SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in D (in 1st, 3rd and 5th gears),
VALVE 0) valve C D3 (in 1st and 3rd gears), and 1 positions: Battery
voltage
With engine running in P, N, D (in 2nd and 4th
gears), D3 (in 2nd gears), and 1 positions: About 0 V
C19 RED LS A (A/T CLUTCH Drives A/T clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
020 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve position With engine running: About 1.2—3.0 V
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal (depending on EGR valve lift)
VALVE)
number
C22*1 BLU/YEL POILCS (ENGINE OIL Detects engine oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): About 0.5 V
PRESSURE SENSOR) sensor signal With engine running: 1.5 V (depending on engine oil
pressure)
C23 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in P, R, N, D (in 1st, 2nd, and
VALVE B) valve B 3rd gears), D 3,2, and 1 positions: Battery voltage
With engine running in D (in 4th and 5th) positions:
About 0 V
C25 BLU/YEL SH A (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in D (in 1st, 2nd, and 5th gears),
VALVE A) valve A D3 (in 1st and 2nd gears), 2, and 1 positions: Battery
voltage
With engine running in P, N, D (in 3rd and 4th gears),
D3 (in 3rd pears) positions: About 0 V
C28 BLU/YEL ATFT (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects AFT temperature With ignition switch ON (II): 0.2—4.8 V
SENSOR) sensor signal (about 1.8 V at operating temperature)
(depending on ATF temperature)
C30 WHT ATP R (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R position:
About 10.0 V—Battery voltage
C31 RED/BLK ATP N (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N) switch N position signal In any position other than N position:
C32 LT BLU ATP D (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D) switch D position signal In any position other than D position: Battery
voltage
€33 RED ATP D3 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D3 position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D3) switch D3 position signal In any position other than D3 position:
About 10.0 V— Battery voltage
C34 BLU ATP 2 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 2 position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 2) switch 2 position signal In any position other than 2 position:
C35 BRN ATP 1 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 1 position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 1) switch 1 position signal In any position other than 1 position:
C40 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for the PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
* 1:2WD
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the
accumulator body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the end of the torque converter which is attached to the
engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the
manual valve, directing pressure to each of the clutches. Shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the accumulator body. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C
are mounted on the transmission housing.
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valve A,,
shift valve B, shift valve D, shift valve E, CPC valve C, the cooler check valve, the relief valve, the lock-up shift valve,
the lock-up timing valve, the lubrication control valve, the lubrication check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The
primary function of the main valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off to control hydraulic pressure going to
the hydraulic control system.
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up control valve, the servo valve, and the 3rd accumulator.
(cont'd)
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and the torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through B and
B'. Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the
regulator valve to the spring side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque
converter and the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve
returns under spring force. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator
valve changes, and the amount of fluid from Br through the torque converter changes. This operation is continued,
maintaining the line pressure.
From ATF PUMP
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are regulated by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
TORQUE CONVERTER
Secondary Valve Body
The secondary valve body is on the main valve body. The secondary valve body contains shift valve C, CPC valve A,
CPC valve B, the reverse CPC valve, the servo control valve, the kick-down valve, and the kick-down short valve.
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the secondary valve body, and contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
The 3rd accumulator is in the regulator valve body.
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure

As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque
converter through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check
valve prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure
to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and
switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B regulate the A/T clutch pressure and apply it to CPC valves A and
B.
When shifting gears, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode. The PCM controls one of the
shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the port of the CPC and line
pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is intercepted. Engaging the clutch with line
pressure happens when shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the ports:

Port No. Hydraulic Pressure Port No. Hydraulic Pressure Port No. Hydraulic Pressure
1 LINE 5N CPC A or LINE 56 LS A
2 LINE 5D CPC B o r LINE 57 LS B
3 LINE 5G CPC B o r LINE 58 LS C
3' ■ r e v e r s e -c p c o r Lin e - 5K CPC B o r LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
3" r e v er se cpc or l in e 6 MODULATE 90' TORQUE CONVERTER
4 LINE SA SH A 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
4' LINE SB SH B 91' TORQUE CONVERTER
4" LINE SC SHC 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
4A CPC A LA LC A 93 ATF COOLER
4B CPC B 9 LINE 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
4C CPCC 10 1ST CLUTCH 95 LUBRICATION
5B CPC A 15 1ST-HOLD CLUTCH 95' LUBRICATION
5C CPC B 20 2ND CLUTCH 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
5H CPC B 25 LINE 97 TORQUE CONVERTER
5J CPC B 30 3RD CLUTCH 99 SUCTION
5A CPC A or LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH X DRAIN
5E CPC A or LINE 50 5TH CLUTCH HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
5F CPC A or LINE . 51 5TH CLUTCH hX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
5M CPC A or LINE 55 CPC C or LINE AX AIR DRAIN
NOTE:
• CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
• SH: Shift Solenoid pressure
• LS A: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid A pressure
• LS B: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid B pressure
• LS C: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid C pressure
• LC: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid pressure
N Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and positions of the shift valve
are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A moves to the left side.
• Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and shift valve B stays on the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift valve C stays on the left side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and becomes line pressure (25). Line pressure (25) stops at shift
valve D. Line pressure (1) also flows to the modulator valve and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure
(6) flows to the shift solenoid valves, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C. Under this condition, the hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, “ left” or “ right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
1CT 1ST/1ST-HOLD
lo t CLUTCH 2N D 2N D
ACC UMULATOR ULU; f f ? r , , I cCUMULATOR CLUTCH
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEB
(cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)

D Position; 1st gear shifting from the N position
Shift solenoid valves remain the same as in the N position when shifting to the D position from the N position. The
manual valve moves to D position and switches the port of line pressure (4) leading to shift valve C and CPC valve B.
Line pressure (4) flows to the 1st clutch via shift valve C. Line pressure (1) becomes CPC C pressure (4C) at CPC valve C,
then goes to the 1st accumulator back side. Line pressure (4) also becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC B valve. CPC B
pressure goes to the 3rd clutch, via shift valves C, B, and A, and the 3rd clutch is engaged. The 1st clutch is engaged
gently when shifting to the D position from the N position.
NOTE: When used, “ left" or “right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEB
m
D Position: Driving in 1st gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valves A and C ON, and shift solenoid valve B remains ON. SH A pressure (SA) in the
right side of shift valves A and E is released, and shift valves A and E are moved to the right side. SH C pressure (SC) in
the right side of shift valve C is released, and modulator pressure (6) is applied to the left side of shift valve C. Shift
valve C is moved to the right side. These movement of these valves releases CPC C pressure (4C) from the back of the
1st accumulator and the 3rd clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged securely.
NOTE: When used, “ left" or “ right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circu it
1ST/1ST-HOLD _wn
CLUTCH 2ND 2ND
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID
VALVE
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
(cont'd)

D Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B. LS B pressure (57) in the right side of CPC valve B is released, and LS A pressure (56) is applied to the
right side of CPC valve A. Line pressure (4) becomes the CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and the CPC A pressure
passes through shift valves C, A, and B, to become the 2nd clutch pressure. The 2nd clutch is engaged with CPC
pressure, and the 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
NOTE: When used, “left" or “right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEB
D Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift solenoid valve C is
turned OFF, and the SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the
left side to switch the port of line pressure and the CPC pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure
mode, and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the
one-way clutch.
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID
VALVE
(cont'd)
D Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also
controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply the LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid
valve B remains ON, and C remains OFF. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the SH A pressure (SA> is applied to
the right side of shift valves A and E. Then shift valves A and E are moved to the left side to switch the port of line
pressure and the CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes the CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and becomes the
CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC valve B. The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes the 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A via
shift valves C and B, and flows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by
switching the position of shift valve A. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way
clutch.
NOTE: When used, “left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
1ST/1ST-HOLD
ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
*
D Position: Driving in 3rd gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release the LS A
pressure (56) in CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and i remains ON. Releasing the LS A pressure (56)
in CPC valve A releases the CPC A pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and
the SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure and the CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and
the 3rd clutch is engaged securely. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way
clutch.
(cont'd)
D Position; Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value,: the' PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also
controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply the LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid
valve A remains OFF, and C remains ON. Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and the SH B pressure (SB) is applied to
the right side of shift valve B. Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and the CPC
pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes the CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and becomes the CPC B pressure (4B) at
CPC valve B. The CPC A pressure (4A) becomes the 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve D via shift valves C, A, and B,
and flows to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by switching the position of shift
valve B. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
1ST/1ST-HOLD „wn
1ST f i I ITCH ?ND 2ND
ACCUMULATOR ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID-
VALVE
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release the
LS B pressure (57) in CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing the LS B pressure (57) in CPC
valve B releases the CPC B pressure in the 3rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the
SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the
port of line pressure and the CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes the 4th clutch pressure
(40) at shift valve D via shift valves C, A, and B, and flows to the 4th clutch. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line
pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve C, and the 4th clutch is engaged securely. The 1st clutch is also
engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
io t 1ST/1ST-HOLD
1ST CLUTCH 2ND 2ND
ACCUMULATOR , , ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH
(cont'd)
D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON. The PCM also
controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply the LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid
valves B and C remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and the SH A pressure (SA) in the right side of shift
valves A and E is released. Then shift valves A and E are moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and
the CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes the CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and becomes the CPC B
pressure (4B) at CPC valve B. The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes the 5th clutch pressure (50) at shift valve C, and flows
to the 5th clutch via shift valves B and A and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure
mode by switching the position of shift valve A. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the
one-way clutch.
, CT 1ST/1ST-HOLD ~wn
1ST c .l I ITCH 2N D ^nlU
ACCUMULATOR .ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE C
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEB
D Position: Driving in 5th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release the LS A
pressure (56) in CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing the LS A pressure (56)
in CPC valve A releases the CPC A pressure in the 4th clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and
the SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure and the CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes the 5th clutch
pressure (50) at the manual valve, via shift valves C, B, and A, and flows to the 5th clutch. The 5th clutch pressure is
changed to line pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve C. The 5th clutch is engaged securely, and the
1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
1CT 1ST/1ST-HOLD
1ST CLUTCH 2ND 2ND
AC< UMULATOR ^ i i , I c CUMtll A TOR CLUTCH
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
2D P
*_Û====iREVERSE mmmmmmmmm * 1%R
mm 1 U3 K
a T W
----------- x v v / S t i
\SSSJSERVO VALVE ■^
(cont'd)
2 Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The conditions of
the shift solenoid valves and the position of the shift valves are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift valve A is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and shift valve B is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift valve C is in the left side.
The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply the LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A.
Line pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes the 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B, via shift valves C and A.
The 2nd clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged. The 1st clutch is also engaged.
No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
, CT 1ST/1ST-HOLD _Nn
1ST r i i itt*m own
ACCUMULATOR ,- r - t i...>.......1 ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID-
VALVE
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
1 Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The conditions of
the shift solenoid valves and the position of the shift valves are as follows:
® Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift valve A is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and shift valve B is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and shift valve C moves to the right side by the modulator pressure (6).
The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply the LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B.
Line pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes the 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve C. The 1st clutch pressure
(10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged. Line pressure (4) also flows to CPC valve B, and
becomes the CPC B pressure (4B).The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes the 1st-hold clutch pressure (15) at shift valve D,
via shift valves C, B, and A. The 1st-hold clutch pressure (15) is applied to the 1st-hold clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch is
engaged.
1ST/1ST-HOLD own
CLUTCH 2ND 2ND
(cont'd)
R Position; S hifting to the R position from the P or N position

Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3)
is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes the reverse CPC pressure (3'). The reverse CPC pressure (3')
pushes the servo valve to the reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. The
reverse CPC pressure (3") becomes the 5th clutch pressure (50) at the manual valve. The 5th clutch pressure (50) is
applied to the 5th clutch, and the 5th clutch is engaged with the reverse CPC pressure.
R Position: Driving in reverse gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift.solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve
C is turned OFF, and the SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC
valve.moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 5th clutch is the same as when shifting to
the R position, and the 5th clutch pressure increases. The 5th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control

When the R position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speeds over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM turns
shift solenoid valves A and C ON, and shift solenoid valve B remains ON. The reverse CPC valve ismoved to the right
side and covers the port to stop. Line pressure (3') to the servo valve. Line pressure (3') is not applied to the servo
valve, and the 5th clutch pressure (50) is not applied to the 5th clutch, as a result, power is not transmitted to the
reverse direction.
NOTE: When u s e d ,'le ft" or “ right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
P Position
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and the SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse
CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the
servo valve. Line pressure (3') passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3") is
intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
1ST/1ST-HOLD _wn
CLUTCH 2ND 2ND
ACCUMULATOR CLUTCH
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE B
Lock-up System
The look-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in the D3 position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and D3
position (2nd and 3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage,
causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the
mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the timing and amount of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned on by the
PCM, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, the lock-up control valve, and the lock-up timing valve control the amount of
lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover;
the torque converter clutch lock-up ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same as the engine.
Power flow TORQUE CONVERTER

CLUTCH PISTON
The power flow s by w ay of:
Engine
I
Drive plate
i
Torque converter cover
I
Torque converter clutch piston
Damper spring
Turbine
i
M ainshaft
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out from the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter clutch lock-up is released; torque converter clutch lock-up OFF.
Power flow TURBINE PUMP
The power flow s by w ay of:
Engine
Drive plate
I
Torque converter cover
I
Pump
4
Turbine
1
Mainshaft
(cont'd)
Lock-up System (cont'd)
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PGM. The lock-up shift valve receives the LC pressure
(LA) on the left side, and the modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to
uncover the port leading the torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. The torque
converter pressure (92) becomes the torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque
converter to disengage the torque converter clutch. The torque converter clutch is OFF.
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM to release the LC pressure (LA) in the left cavity of the lock-up shift valve. The modulator pressure (6) is
applied to the right side of the lock-up shift valve, then the lock-up shift valve is moved in the left side to switch the
port leading the torque converter pressure to the right side of the torque converter. The torque converter pressure (91)
is applied to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM also controls A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C, and the LS C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up
timing valve. When the LS C pressure (58) is lower, the torque converter pressure (91) from the lock-up timing valve is
lower. The torque converter clutch is engaged partially. The LS C pressure (58) increases, and the lock-up timing valve
is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading the torque converter pressure to high. The torque converter clutch
is then engaged securely. Under this condition, the torque converter clutch is engaged by pressure from the right side
of the torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
NOTE: When used, “ left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit. ,
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
(cont'd)
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to increase the LS C
pressure (58). The LS C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve, and moves
them to the left side. Under this condition, the torque converter back pressure is released fully, causing the torque
converter clutch to be fully engaged.
NOTE: When used, 'left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
-M O D U L A T O R PRESSURE (6)
- L S C PRESSURE (58)
AX AX ||:=:::;:r:s=ac=FINALGEAR
MAINSHAFT
fM i M
HXft hX i
jr:
=
:L= =
:»e=
:: =rp
~:i *
—=C OC
SEUONTA
NDERR
YS
SHAFF
HA TT
p=I SN
HT
AEFR
TMEDIARY
1 =f=gpJ|
f |9 5 '
ATF COOLER FILTER

Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
I , I 2 3 4 | 5 6 7
8i9IJ
A"V\/
10 11 12
20 21 22
17 18 19
23 24 25
1
29I/I311/
26 27 28 33 34 35
I36!/ /I/I" 38 42 « m
AIUH44P) B (A| (44P) C(0)(44P)
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System (cont'd)
| 1 | 2 | 3 4 | 5 | 6 J7 8 | 9 | | 1 j 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
8 13 1
1 10 11 12 i
/ b 4l / l / 17 118 19
1
10 11 (12! 13114 jIS j16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 2!4 25 20 / (22) 23 24 25
1 1 1
26 27 28 » | / | 31l / 33 3!4 35 26 27 28 ^/|30|31132 33 34 35
/ 38 42 43 j 44 j | 36 | 37 38 | 39 | 40 | 41 42 M3) 1(44)
I3 6 ! / / M « , 1----- 1------ LJ
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
9. Measure the voltage between transmission range
NOTE: switch connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5.
any on-board snapshot, and review General TRANSM ISSION RANGE
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). SWITCH CONNECTOR
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
A TPP (BLU/ BLK ) pg mm
1 2 3 4 5
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 6 7 8 9 10

W ire side of fem ale term ina ls
4. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position. Is there b attery voltage?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs YES—Goto step 15.
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 10.
Does the screen indicate F A IL E D ?
YES—Goto step 6.

intermittent short to body ground in the wires
between the transmission range switch and the
to step 4.
7. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page

14-261).
Is the switch O K ?
YES—With the switch connector disconnected, go

to step 8.
NO—Replace the transmission range switch

10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
TRANSM ISS ION RANGE
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). SWITCH CONNECTOR
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector IPG(BLK)

1 2 3 4 5
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) 6 7 8 9 10
ATP P (BLU/BLK)
Wire side of female term ina ls

Terminal side of fem a le terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between transmission
range switch connector terminal No. 5 and ground
Is there continuity? (G101, G102), or repair poor ground (G101, G102),
then go to step 50.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal A12 and the
transmission range switch, then go to step 50.
NO—-Go to step 14.

15. Measure the voltage between transmission range 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
switch connector terminals No. 3 and No. 5.
TRANSM ISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR 18. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

ATP R (WHT )
P (BLK)
PG
1 2 3 4 5 PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

6 7 8 9 10
riz=a:
I 1 I 2 3 I4 I 5 |6 |7 8 | 9 |
■ 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ I
23 24 25
W ire side of female terminals ■ 20 /
26 27 28 /1 3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
|3 6 |3 7 s 3 8 |3 9 | 10|41142 £3) M l
ATP R (WHT)

NO—Go to step 16.

between PCM connector terminal C30 and the
NO—Go to step 57.
(cont'd)
20. Measure the voltage between transmission range 21i Turn the ignition switch OFF.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR 23. Disconnect PGM connector C (44P).

I*G (IBLK)
terminal €31 and body ground.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
6 PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
ATP N (RED/BLK)
m
CO
o>
h |2 3 I4 I 5 | 6 | 7
■ 10 11 m 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 S
20 / m 23 24 25
Wire side of fem ale terminals B 1
26 27 28 / | 3 0 |3 1 |3 2 33 34 35
13 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 141 142 w M I
ATP N (RED/BLK)

NO—Go to step 21.

NO—Go to step 57.

TRANSMISSION RANGE

ATP D (L T BLU) PG (BLK1

10
i 1 1 2 3 | 4 | 51 6 7 8 | 9 |
■
10 11 (12) 13|14 | 15|16 17 18 19 1
Wire side of female terminals a 20 /

m
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2
23
33
24
34
25
35
. 1
|3 6 |3 7 3 8 ( 3 9 140|41 42 m l m I
ATP D (LT BLU)


NO—Go to step 26.

NO—Go to step 57.

TRANSMISSION RANGE
PG (BLK)
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 6 PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
ATP D3 (RED)
I1I2 3 |4 | 5 |6 7 8 I9I
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 I
20 / 23 24 25
W ire side of female term i nals i
26 27 28 / | 3Q|31132 33 34 35
1
136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 4 i £3)1(44)1
ATP D3 IRED)

NO—Go to step 31.

NO—Go to step 57.

35. Measure the voltage between transmission range 36. Turn the ignition switch OFF./
TRANSMISSION RANGE

ATP 2 (BLU) PG (BLK)
10
h U 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 I
10 11 (12) 13|14 | 15|16 1 7 1 8 1 9 I
20 / 23 2•4 25
Wire side of female terminals . 1
26 27 28 / | 30|31132 33 2S4 35
136137 3 8 |3 9 1 4 0 14 1 14 2 ( 3)|(M)|
ATP 2 (BLU)
Is there b attery voltage?

NO—Go to step 36.

NO—Go to step 57.
(cont'd)
42. Jum p the SCS line with the HDS.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
PG (BLK)
term inal C35 and body ground.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 i PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
ATP 1 (BRN)I)
ir iz iil.
I 1 I2 3 4 | 5 I6 | 7 8 I9 |
I
10 11 m 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
20 / m 23 24 25
W ire side of female terminals 1 1
26 27 28 /1 3 0 |3 1 |3 2 33 34 35
136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 4)|
ATP 1 (BRN)

NO—Go to step 41.

NO—Go to step 57.

47. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS.

TRANSMISSION RANGE
PG (BLK) 49. Check for continuity between PCM connector

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 6 PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
ATP FWD (BLU/YEL) ATP FWD (BLU/YEL)
f ,... ..... ll— z L .
I 1 I 2 I I
3 4 5 |6 7 8 |9 |
■
10 11 02) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i
Wire side of female terminals ■
20 / 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /130|31132 33 34 35
136137 |
3 8 |3 9 40|41 42 mm I

NO—Go to step 46.

NO—G oto step 57.
(cont'd)
50. Reconnect all connectors. 60. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
51. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is D T C P 0 7 0 5 indicated?
52. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wire between the transmission range switch
53. Start the engine. and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
54. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever 58. if the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position. NO—Go to step 61.
55. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 61. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs
MENU w ith the HDS.
Is D T C P 0 7 0 5 indicated?
Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ?
YES—Checkfor intermittent short to body ground
in the wire between the transmission range switch YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
and the PCM, then go to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
NO—Go to step 56. were indicated in step 60, go to the indicated DTC's
56. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for
intermittent short to body ground in the wire
Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ? between the transmission range switch and the
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other good PCM (see page 14-9), then go to step 58. If the
DTCs were indicated in step 55, go to the indicated PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 58.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for

between the transmission range switch and the

59. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit
8. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
NOTE: 14-261).
any on-board snapshot, and review General Is the switch O K ?
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4),
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem YES—Go to step 9.
transmission. . l\IO—Replace the transmission range switch
9. Adjust the shift cable (see page 14-256).
3. 4WD: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow all four wheels to 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
rotate freely.
2WD: Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is 12. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle in the D position
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a lift. until the vehicle speed reaches 30 mph (48 km/h),
then slow down and stop the wheels.
4. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle in the D position 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test-
until the vehicle speed reaches 30 mph (48 km/h), drive in step 12.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- MENU with the HDS.
drive in step 4,
MENU w ith the HDS. YES—Go to step 15.
Does the screen indicate F A IL E D ? NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
YES—Go to step 7. poor connections or loose terminals between the
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 12.
poor connections or loose terminals between the 15.; Shift to the D position, and check the ATP FWD and
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the ATP D in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are ATP FWD and ATP D O N ?
NO—Go to step 22.

16. Shift to the D3 position, and check the ATP FWD 22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
and ATP D3 in the DATA LIST w ith the HDS.
23. Disconnect the transmission range switch
Are A T P F W D and A T P D 3 O N ? connector.
YES—Go to step 17. 24. Check fo r continuity between transmission range

switch connector term inal No. 5 and body ground.
NO—Go to step 22.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
17. Shift to the 2 position, and check the ATP FWD and SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP 2 in the DATA LIST w ith the HDS.
1PG(BLK)
Are A T P F W D and A T P 2 O N ?
1 2 3 4 ■5
YES—Go to step 18. 6 7 8 9 10
NO—Go to step 22.

VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle in the D position
until the vehicle speed reaches 30 mph (48 km/h), Is there continuity?
20. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test-
drive in step 19. NO—Repair open in the wire between the
transmission range switch and ground (G101,
21. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0706 in the DTCs G102), or repair poor ground (G101, G102), then go
MENU w ith the HDS. to step 30.

poor connections or loose terminals between the
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the

switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 9. TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR PG (BLK)
PG |BLK) 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
i ATP D3 (RED)
6 7 8 9 10
ATP FWD (BLU/YEL)

Is there voltage?
Is there voltage? YES—Go to step 29.
YES—Go to step 27. NO—Repair open in the w ire between the

transmission range switch and PCM connector
NO—Repair open in the wire between the terminal C32, then go to step 30.
terminal C17, then go to step 30. 29. Measure the voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No. la n d No. 5.
switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 5. TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATP 2 (BLU) PG (BLK)
ATP D (LT BLU) 0 -1 PG (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10

Is there voltage?
Is there voltage? YES—Go to step 37.
YES—Go to step 28. NO—Repair open in the w ire between the

NO—Repair open in the wire between the terminal C34, then go to step 30.
terminal C32, then go to step 30.
(cont'd)
30. Reconnect all connectors. 40. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
32. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose
terminals between the transmission range switch
33. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
until the vehicle speed reaches 30 mph (48 km/h), known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then go to step
then slow down and stop the wheels. 38. if the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
34. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- NO—Go to step 41.
drive in step 33.
35. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS. MENU with the HDS.
Is D T C P 0 7 0 6 indicated? Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
terminals between the transmission range switch complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
and the PCM, then go to step 1. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
were indicated in step 40, go to the indicated DTC's
NO—Go to step 36, troubleshooting. ■
36. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
MENU w ith the HDS. connections or loose terminals between the
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ? was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES—TroubIeshooting is complete. If any other substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
DTCs were indicated in step 35, go to the indicated NOT COMPLETED, go to step 38.
DTC's troubleshooting. ■

connections or loose terminals between the
transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 33.

38. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position

until the vehicle speed reaches 30 mph (48 km/h),
drive in step 38.
DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature 4. Check the ECT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w ith the
Sensor Circuit HDS.
NOTE: Does the ECT SENSOR read about the same as

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and the ambient air temperature?
any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES—Go to step 5.
* This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the NO—Leave the engine off until the ECT SENSOR
transmission. reads the same as ambient air temperature, then
go to step 5.
5. Check ATF TEMP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
2. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR in the DATA LIST the HDS.
with the HDS.
Does the A T F temperature read about the same as
Does the A T F tem perature exceed an ambient air EOT SENSOR?
tem perature?
YES—Interm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
YES—Record the ATF temperature. Leave the time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
engine off for at least 30 minutes, then go to step 3. at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. ■
NO—Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall NO—Replace the ATF temperature sensor
speed RPM (see page 14-187) three times. Go to (see page 14-212), then go to step 6.
step 3 after stall speed testing.
3. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR in the DATA LIST
w ith the HDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
D id the A T F tem perature change? 8. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
YES—Leave the engine off for at least 30 minutes, 9. Start the engine, and warm it tip to normal
then go to step 4. operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
NO—Replace the ATF temperature sensor 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and allow engine
(see page 14-212), then go to step 6. coolant temperature to cool to ambient
temperature.
(cont'd)
11. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and allow engine
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). coolant temperature to cool to ambient
Let the engine at least another 20 seconds, then temperature.
drive the vehicle at speeds over 19 mph (31 km/h)
fo r 5 minutes or more. 17. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
12. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. Let the engine at least another 20 seconds, then
drive the vehicle at speeds over 19 mph (31 km/h)
Is D T C P 0 7 11 indicated? for 5 minutes or more.
YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose 18. Check fo r DTCs w ith the HDS.
terminals between the ATF temperature sensor and
the PCM, then go to step 1. Is D T C P 0 7 11 indicated?
NO—G oto step 13. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

13. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0711 in the DTCs the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
MENU with the HDS. known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then go to step
NO—Go to step 19.
DTCs were indicated in step 12, go to the indicated 19. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0711 in the DTCs
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ MENU with the HDS.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ?
connections or loose terminals between the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
8. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
14. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest troubleshooting. ■
good PCM (see page 14-9). NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
15. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
DTC P0712: Short in ATF Temperature Sensor 10. Check fo r continuity between ATF temperature
Circuit sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NOTE: ATF TE M PER A TU R E

* Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and S EN S O R CO NNECTO R
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). JZL ■
=
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem 1 12
transmission. I ATFT (B L U /Y E L)
2. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage in the DATA

LISTwiththeHDS. Wire side of female terminals
Is the A T F tem perature sensor voltage 0 .0 7 V or

less? Is there continuity?
YES—G oto step 3. YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

between PCM connector terminal C28 and the ATF
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this temperature sensor connector No. 2 terminal, then
time. Check fo r intermittent short in the ATFT wire go to step 11.
between the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM.B NO—Go to step 17.
4. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
6. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage in the 14. Start the engine in the P position, and let it run for
DATA LIST with the HDS. at least 20 seconds.
Is the A T F tem perature sensor voltage 0 .0 7 V or 15. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
less?
YES—G oto ste p 7.
YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
NO—Replace the ATF temperature sensor in the wire between the ATF temperature sensor
(see page 14-212), then go to step 11. and the PCM, then go to step 1.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—G oto step 16.
(cont'd)

MENU with the HDS.

DTCs were indicated in step 15, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting.*

between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM,

18. Start the engine in the P position, and let it run fo r

at least 20 seconds.
19. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
Is D T C P 0 7 12 indicated?
YES—Check for interm ittent short to body ground

in the wire between the ATF temperature sensor
NO—Go to step 20.

MENU with the HDS.

were indicated in step 19, g o to the indicated DTC's

interm ittent short to body ground in the wire
between the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM.
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor 7. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature
Circuit sensor connector term inals No. 1 and No. 2.
NOTE; ATF TEMPERATURE

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and SENSOR CONNECTOR
transmission. SG2 (GRN/YEL) ATFT (BLU/YEL)
2. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage in the DATA

LISTwiththeHDS. W ire side of female terminals
Does the A T F tem perature sensor voltage exceed

4.93 V? Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 3. YES—Replace the ATF temperature sensor

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM. ■ connector term inal C14 and the ATF temperature
sensor connector, then go to step 12.
4. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector

at the transmission end cover.
6. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature

sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CONNECTOR
1 I 2
JÂTFT (BLU/YEL)
(X)
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—G oto step 8.
(cont'd)
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0713 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector DTCs were indicated in step 16, go to the indicated
terminal C28 and ATF temperature sensor DTC's troubleshooting. ®
ATF TEMPERATURE PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
SENSOR CONNECTOR temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
■■■ 15. :
h |2 3 | 4 | 5 I 6 | 7 8|9 T
■
10 11 (123 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 .i
1 2 ■
20 / m 23 24 25
1 18. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
26 27 28 / | 3 Q | 3 1 13 2 33 34 35
| 3 6 |3 7 3
2 l |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 142
ATFT
(BLU/YEL) good PCM (see page 14-9).
ATFT (BLU/YEL)
.... .....1
19. Start the engine in the P position, and let it run for
at least 20 seconds.
W ire side o f T erm in al side o f
fem ale te rm in a ls fe m a le te rm in a ls
Is there continuity? Is D T C P 0 7 13 indicated?
YES—Go to step 18. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
connector term inal C28 and the ATF temperature known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then go to step
sensor connector, then go to step 12. 19. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
12. Reconnect all connectors. NO—Go to step 21.
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 21. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0713 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
15. Start the engine in the P position, and let it run for
at least 20 seconds. YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
16. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
Is D T C P 0 7 13 indicated? troubleshooting. ■
YES—Check fo r poor connections or loose NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
terminals between the ATF temperature sensor and connections or loose terminals between the ATF
the PCM, then go to step 1. temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
NO—Go to step 17. 14-9), then go to step 19. If the PCM was substituted,
D T C .P 0 71 6: Problem in Input Shaft 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P),
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit and the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
DTC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal 10. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector
Input) term inals B1, B36, B43, and C40 and body ground
individually.
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
any on-board snapshot, and review General C (44P)
PG2 (BLK) B (44P)
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem | 1 I2 3 N T fm 7 8 m I1 I2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 |
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the ■
10 11 12 1 3 |1 4 | 15|16 17 18 19
■ I
10 11 02) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a
■ 20 21 (20
transmission. 22 &3) 24 25 1 20 / 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|3Q|(31)|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 / ] 3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
13 6 13T 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 43. 4 4 13 6 137 3 8 | 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (ll). PG1 (BLK) LG2 LG1
(BRN/YEL) (BRN/YEL)
3. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-209). Terminal side of female terminals
4. 4WD: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is Is there continuity ?

securely supported, and allow all four wheels to
rotate freely. YES—G oto step 11.
2WD: Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a lift. connector terminals B1, B36, B43, C40, and ground
(G101, G102), or repair poor ground (G101, G102),
5. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the then g o to step 31.
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph 11. Connect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P).
(20 km/h) for at least 10 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheels. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the

YES—Go to step 7.

input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM.
5.
(cont'd)
13. Measure the voltage between input shaft 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 term inal C13 and body ground.
and body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (4 4 P )
IN P U T S H A F T (M A IN S H A F T )
S P E E D S E N S O R C O N N E C T O R V C C 2 (Y E L /B L U )
11 12 3 I4 I 6 | 6 7 a 19 1
«
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■
20 / 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /i30|31132 33 34 35
13 6 13T 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 42 (43) I(44) I
V C C 2 (Y E L /B L U )

Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 18. between PCM connector terminal C13 and the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 29.
NO—G oto step 14.
NO—Go to step 35.
terminal C13 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed 20. Check for continuity between input shaft
sensor connector terminal No. 1. (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
IN P U T S H A F T (M A IN S H A F T ) P C M C O N N E C T O R
S P E E D S E N S O R C (44 P )
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
C O N N E C T O R _
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
V C C 2
(Y E L /B L U )
V C C 2
(Y E L /B L U ) 1 1 1 2 3 4, I 5 | 6 7 8 I 9 |
i 10 11 (12) 13I14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■
20 / m 23 24 25 N M (R E D )
1
26 27 28 / I 3 0 j 3 l ] 3 2 33 34 35
136137 38 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 m m \
W ire side of Terminal side of

female terminals fem ale terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM between PCM connector terminal B39 and the input
connector term inal C13 and the input shaft shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 29.
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 29.
22. Check for continuity between PCM connector 27. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
terminal C14 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 3. 28. Check for continuity between PCM connector
term inal B39 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) PCM CONNECTOR
sensor connector terminal No. 2.
SPEED SENSOR C(44P)
CONNECTOR
SG2 SPEED SENSOR B (44P)
(GRN/YEL) CONNECTOR
SG2
(GRN/YEL)
I 1 I 2 3 I4 I 5 I 6 7 8 | 9 |
I
1011 (12) 13|14I15|16 17 18 19 i 11 12 3 I4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 I9 |
■ ■
20 / 23 24 25 10 11 12 13 | 14[15|16 17 18 19
1 I
26 27 28 / i 3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35 a 20 21 22 m 24 25
i
136137 3 8 (3 9 [40141 142 (43) | m | 26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35
NM (RED) |3 6 |3 7 3 8 |3 9 1 4 0 1 4 1 142 4 3 14 4 1
W ire side o f T erm inal side o f NM (RED)

female terminals female terminals
Wire side of Terminal side of
NO—Repair open in the wire between the input YES—Go to step 35.
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM connector
terminal C14, then go to step 29. NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector term inal B39 and the input shaft
23. Connect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P). (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 29.
25. Measure the voltage between input shaft

(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.
INPUT SHAFT (MA INSHAFT)

N M (RED) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
NO—G oto step 26.

(cont'd)
29. Reconnect all connectors. 37. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
30. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is D T C P 0 7 1 6 or P 0 7 1 7 indicated?
31. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between the input shaft (mainshaft)
32. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle in the D position substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph go to step 36. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
(20 km/h) fo r at least 10 seconds. Slow down and 1.
stop the wheels.
NO—Go to step 38.
38. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the
Is D T C P 0 7 16 or P 0 7 17 indicated? DTCs MENU w ith the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ?

speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—Go to step 34. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
34. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0716 or P0717 in the troubleshooting.*
Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ? connections or loose terminals between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
DTCs were indicated in step 33, go to the indicated (see page 14-9), then go to step 36. If the PCM was
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
connections or loose terminals between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then


and hold the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph
(20 km/h) fo r at least 10 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheels.
DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed 8. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) .speed sensor
Sensor Intermittent Failure , . connector..
NOTE: 9. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph

• Before, you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and : (20 km/h) in the D position through all five gears.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test-
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem drive in step 9.
transmission. 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS'for P0718 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
3. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over 12 m p h :
(20 km/h) in the D position through all five gears. NO—If the screen indicated PASSED,
troubleshooting is complete. If the screen indicates
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- NOT COMPLETED, go to step 9 and recheck.
drive in.step 3.
5. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0718 in the DTCs
MENU w ith the HDS. 13. Jump the SCS line with the H D S . .
Does the screen indicate F A IL E D ? 14. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
YES—‘Go to step 6. 15. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor connector.
input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM.
3. . .
7. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector terminals O K ?
YES—G oto step 8.
NO—Repair the connector terminals, then go to

step 8.
(confd)
16. Check for continuity between input shaft 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2
and body ground. 21. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) 22. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR terminal B39 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed

SPEED SENSOR B (44P)
N M (RED) CONNECTOR
I1I2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8I9 I
I 10 11 121 3|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
20 21 22 £3) 24 25 a
26 27 28 2!9|30|(3i)|32 33 34 35
W ire side of fem ale terminals N M (RED) 13 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 4 3 144 |
NM (RED)
between PCM connector term inal B39 and the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23. Is there continuity?
NO—G oto step 17. YES—Go to step 30.
17. Connect PCM connector B (44P). NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal B39 and the input shaft
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23.
19. Measure the voltage between input shaft

(mainshaft) speed sensor connector term inal No. 2
and body ground.
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)

Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor (see page 14-209), then go to step 23.
23. Reconnect all connectors. 33. Check fo r DTCs w ith the HDS.
24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC P0718 indicated?
term inals between the input shaft (mainshaft)
26. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
(20 km/h) in the D position through all five gears. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- 1.
drive in step 26.
NO—Go to step 34.
Is D T C P 0 7 18 indicated? MENU w ith the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO—Go to step 29. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
29. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0718 in the DTCs troubleshooting. ■
MENU w ith the HDS.
Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ? connections or loose terminals between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
DTCs were indicated in step 28, go to the indicated (see page 14-9), then go to step 31. If the PCM was
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
connections or loose terminals between the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then

31. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over 12 mph

(20 km/h) in the D position through all five gears.
drive in step 31.
DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (44P), C (44P), and
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
connector.
DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Signal Input) terminals B1, B36, B43, and C40 and body ground
individually.
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
any on-board snapshot, and review General C (44P)
PG2 (BLK) B (44P)
rr
11 I 2 3 7 8 I9 I 1 1 1 2 3 | 4 I5 ! 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
1 10 11 12
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i ■ 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
1 20 21 22 m 24 25
transmission. ■ 20 / & 23 24 25
26 27 28 29|30|(3i)|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
|3 6 | 37 38 39 |4Q 141 I42 43 ■4 4 136137 3 8 139140141 142 (43) 1(44)1
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PG1 (BLK) LG2 LG1
(BRN/YEL) (BRN/YEL)
3. Check for proper output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-209). Terminal side of female terminals
4. 4WD: Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is Is there continuity?

securely supported, and allow all four wheels to
rotate freely. YES—Go to step 11.
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
rotate freely. Or raise the vehicle on a lift. connector terminals B1, B36, B43, C40, and ground
(G101, G102), or repair poor ground (G101, G102),
5. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the then go to step 28.
VSA OFF button, run the vehicle in the D position
w ith engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for at least 11. Connect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P).
10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
Does the screen indicate F A ILE D ?
YES—Go to step 7.

output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the

13. Measure the voltage between output shaft 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal term inal B18 and body ground.
No. 1 and body ground.
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC1 (YEL/RED)
I1 I2 3 T f B W jf 8 I9 I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16|17 18 19
1 20 21 22 3)24 25 1
26 27 28 29|30f(3i)|3i[33 34 35
(36(37 38 39(40(41(42 4 3 144(
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
Wire side of female te r m in a ls

Is th ere continuity?
Is there about 5 V? YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

between PCM connector terminal B18 and the
YES—Go to step 18. output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then go
to step 28.
NO—Goto step 14.
NO—Go to step 34.
terminal B18 and output shaft (countershaft) speed 20. Check for continuity between output shaft
sensor connector terminal No. 1. (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR
(COUNTERSHAFT) B (44P) OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
¥CC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1
(YEL/RED)
1
I1 I2 3 4 15 16 7 8 | 9 | MC (BLU)
10 11 12 1 3 |l 4 |l 5 |l 6 17 18 19 ■
20 21 22 C23)24 25
■
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35
136137 3 8 ( 3 9 14014-1142 4 3 ( 4 4 |

female terminals female terminals Wire side of female term inals
YES—Go to step 17. YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then go
connector terminal B18 and the output shaft to step 28.
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 28.
(cont'd)
terminal B33 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector term inal No. 3. 26. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).

(COUNTERSHAFT) B (44P) term inal B40 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
SPEED SENSOR sensor connector terminal No. 2.
CONNECTOR
I1 | 2 3 | 4 I 5 | 6 |. 7 8 I9I
10 11 12 1 3 | 14|15|16 17 18 19
B
O UTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR
2 3 ■ 20 21 22 n 24 25
■
(COUNTERSHAFT) B (44P)
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 | (si)|32 33 34 35 SPEED SENSOR
SG1 I 3 6 |3 7 3 8 | 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 4 1 43 4 4 1 CONNECTOR
(GRN/W HT)
SG1 I1 | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 i 9 I
(GRN/W HT) la 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
i 20 21 22 m 24 25
1
W ire side of Terminal side of 26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35
female terminals female terminals NC (BLU) 136137 38 3 9 140141 [42 4 3 14 4 1
NC (BLU)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the output Is there continuity?

shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and PCM
connector term inal B33, then go to step 28. YES—Go to step 34.
connector terminal B40 and the output shaft
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 28.
24. Measure the voltage between output shaft

(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3.

1
NC (BLU) SG1
(GRN/W HT)
Is there about 5 V?
NO—G oto step 25.

28. Reconnect all connectors. 36. Check for' DTCs w ith the HDS.
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC P0721 or P0722 indicated?
30. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ^YES—Check for poor connections or loose
term inals between the output shaft (countershaft)
31. Start the engine, disable the VSA by pressing the speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
VSA OFF switch, run the vehicle in the D position substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for at least go to step 35. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
32. Check fo r DTCs w ith the HDS. NO—G o to step 37 . 6
Is DTC P0721 or P0722 indicated? 37. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0721 or P0722 In the
YES—Check fo r poor connections or loose
terminals between the output shaft (countershaft) Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ?
speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—G oto step 33. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
33. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0721 or P0722 in the were indicated in step 36, go to the indicated DTC's
DTCs MENU with the HDS. troubleshooting. ■
Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals between the output
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. if
DTCs were indicated in step 32, go to the indicated the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ PCM (see page 14-9), then go to step 35. If the PCM
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NOT COMPLETED, go to step 35.
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM,


with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for at least
DTC P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft) 8. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure sensor connector.
NOTE: 9. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all

* Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and five gears.
Troubleshooting Information (seepage 14-4). 10. Repeat the test-drive in step 9.
* This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the 11. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0723 in the DTCs
transmission. MENU with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Does the screen indicate F A IL E D ?
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. YES—Go to step 12.
3. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If the screen
five gears. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 9 and
recheck.
drive in step 3. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0723 in the DTCs 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
MENU with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 6. sensor connector.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, interm ittent

output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector terminals O K ?
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Repair the connector terminals, then go to

step 8.
16. Check for continuity between output shaft 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(countershaft) speed sensor connector term inal
No. 2 and body ground. 21. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) 22. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR term inal B40 and output shaft (countershaft) speed

(COUNTERSHAFT) 6 (44P)
NC (BLU) SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
I1 I2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 [9 I
1 ■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
1 1 20 21 22 m 24 25 a
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35
136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 4 3 |4 4 |
W ire side of female terminals NC (BLU)
NC (BLU)
fem ale terminals female terminals
YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between
PCM connector term inal B40 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23. Is there continuity?
- NO—G oto step 17. YES—Go to step 27.
connector term inal B40 and the output shaft
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 23.
19. Measure the voltage between output shaft

(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal

Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the output shaft (countershaft)

speed sensor (see page 14-209), then go to step 23.
23. Reconnect all connectors. 33. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
terminals between the output shaft (countershaft)
26. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
five gears. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- 1.
drive in step 26.
NO—Go to step 34.
Is D T C P 0 7 2 3 indicated? MENU with the HDS.
YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ?

NO—G oto step 29. original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0723 in the DTCs troubleshooting.*
MENU w ith the HDS.
Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ? connections or loose terminals between the output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
DTCs were indicated in step 28, go to the indicated PCM (see page 14-9), then go to step 31. If the PCM
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM,

31. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all

five gears.
drive in step 31.
ell
DTCP0731: Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st 6. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (1st gear incorrect
ratio) 7. Test-drive under these condition:
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data • D position in 1st gear.
and any on-board snapshot, and review General • Engine speed 1,000 rpm or more.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). • Drive the vehicle at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h),
for at least 12 seconds.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test-
drive in step 7.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. 9. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a Is DTC P0731 indicated?
strainer. Inspectthe strainer fo r metal debris or
excessive clutch material. YES—Repair the 1st clutch, or replace the
transmission. ■
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material? NO—G oto step 10.
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. 10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0731 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-214),
then go to step 4. Does the screen indicate P A S S E D ?
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-188). YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. If any other DTCs were indicated in step 9, go
Is the line pressure within the service limit? to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
YES—Go to step 5. NO—If the screen indicated FAILED, repair the 1st
clutch, or replace the transmission. If the screen
NO—Repair the ATF pump and the regulator valve, indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 7.
or replace the transmission, then go to step 11.
5. Measure the 1st clutch pressure (see page 14-188).
Is the 1st clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES—G oto step 6.
NO—Shift valves B and C are stuck. Repair the shift

valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission, then go to step 11.
(cont'd)
13. Test-drive under these condition:
• D position in 1st gear.

• Engine speed 1,000 rpm or more.
• Drive the vehicle at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h),
drive in step 13.

terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and the PCM, then go to step 4.
NO—Go to step 16.
16. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0731 in the DTCs

MENU w ith the HDS.


connections or loose terminals at the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 4. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 13.
DTC P0732: Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd 6. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (2nd gear incorrect
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data • D position in 2nd gear.
and any on-board snapshot and review General • Engine speed 1,000 rpm or more.
fo r at least 12 seconds.
drive in step 7.
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a Is DTC P0732 indicated?
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material. YES—Repair the 2nd clutch, or replace the
transmission. ■
Does the strainer have m etal debris or excessive
clutch material? NO—Go to step 10.
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. 10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0732 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Is the line pressure within the service limit? to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. H
YES—Go to step 5. NO—If the screen indicated FAILED, repair the 2nd
5. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-188).
Is the 2n d clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair the

shift valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace the
(cont'd)
* D position in 2nd gear.

* Engine speed 1,000 rpm or more.
* Drive the vehicle at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h),
drive in step 13.
15. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the input shaft (miainshaft) speed
NO—G oto step 16.
16. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0732 in the DTCs

MENU with the HDS.


connections or loose term inals at the input shaft
go to step 13.
< s &
DTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd 6. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (3rd gear incorrect
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data • D position in 3rd gear.
drive in step 7.
proper level, and check fo r fluid leaks. 9. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a is DTC P0733 indicated?
strainer. Inspectthe strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material. YES—Repair the 3rd clutch, or replace the
transmission. ■
clutch material? NO—Go to step 10.
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. 10. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0733 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Is the line pressure within the service limit? to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
YES—Go to step 5. NO—If the screen indicated FAILED, repair the 3rd
5. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see page 14-188).
Is the 3 rd clutch pressure within service limit?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair the

shift valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace the
(cont'd)
13. Test-drive under these condition;
• D position in 3rd gear.

drive in step 13.

term inals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
NO—G oto step 16.

MENU w ith the HDS.


go to step 13.
DTC P0734: Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th 6. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit (4th gear incorrect
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data • D position in 4th gear.
drive in step 7.
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a Is D T C P 0 7 34 indicated?

excessive clutch material. YES—Repair the 4th clutch, or replace the
transm ission.*
clutch material? NO—G oto step 10.
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. 10. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0734 in the DTCs
MENU w ith the HDS.
Is the line pressure within service limit? to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■
YES—Go to step 5. NO—If the screen indicated FAILED, repair the 4th
5. Measure the 4th clutch pressure (see page 14-188).
Is the 4th clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES—G oto step 6.
NO—Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair

the shift valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace
the transmission, then go to step 11.
(cont'd)
13. Test-drive under these condition;
* D position in 4th gear.

* Engine speed 1,000 rpm or more.
* Drive the vehicle at speeds over 7 mph (12 km/h),
drive in step 13.
Is D T C P 0734 indicated?

NO—G oto step 16.

MENU with the HDS.


g o to step 13.
DTC P0735: Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th 6. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit
and any on-board snapshot, and review General • D position in 5th gear.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). • Engine speed 1,000 rpm or more.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating for at least 12 seconds.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the drive in step 7.
proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
9. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or Is D T C P 0 7 3 5 indicated?
excessive clutch material.
YES—Repair the 5th clutch, or replace the
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive transmission. ■
clutch material?
NO—G oto step 10.
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 11.
N O —Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-214), MENU w ith the HDS.
then go to step 4.
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-188).
Is the line pressure within service limit? time. If any other DTCs were indicated in step 9, go
to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.*
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—If the screen indicated FAILED, repair the 5th
NO—Repair the ATF pump and the regulator valve, clutch, or replace the transmission. If the screen
or replace the transmission, then go to step 11. indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 7.
5. Measure the 5th clutch pressure (see page 14-188).
Is the 5th clutch pressure within service limit?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair

the shift valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace
the transmission, then go to step 11.
11. Turnthe ignition switch ON (II).
• D position in 5th gear.

drive in step 13.

NO—G oto step 16.

MENU with the HDS.

NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check fo r poor

go to step 13.
<•£>
DTC P0741: Torque Converter Clutch 8. Run the engine until the ECT SENSOR value
Hydraulic Circuit Stuck OFF reaches 176 °F (80 °C).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 9. Test-drive the vehicle at a constant speed of
and any on-board snapshot, and review General 60 mph (96 km/h) for at least 22 seconds.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating drive in step 9.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the MENU w ith the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or YES—Repair the faulty torque converter clutch
excessive clutch material. mechanism, the torque converter clutch hydraulic
circuit, the lock-up shift valve, or the lock-up control
Does the strainer have m etal deb ris or excessive valve, or replace the transm ission.*
clutch material?
YES—Replace the transmission. ■ failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
then go to step 4. 12. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C (see page 14-204).
Does A / T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5. Clear the DTC with the HDS. w ork pro perly?
6. Select Lockup Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous Test YES—Repair the hydraulic system related to the
Menu, and check that the torque converter clutch lock-up shift valve, the lock-up control valve, and
solenoid valve operates w ith the HDS. the lock-up tim ing valve, or replace the
Do you hear a clicking?
NO—Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
YES—Go to step 7. valve C (see page 14-207), then go to step 13.
NO—Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid

valve (see page 14-192), then go to step 13.
7. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C w ith the HDS.
Does the screen indicate N O R M A L ?
YES—G oto step 8.
NO—Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS

for the test result, but if the HDS has not
determined the cause of the failure, g o to step 12. If
any part was replaced, go to step 13.
(cont'd)
15. Test-drive the vehicle at a constant speed of

60 mph (96 km/h) for at least 22 seconds.
drive in step 15.
Is D T C POT41 indicated?
YES—Go to step 6,
NO—G oto step 18.

MENU with the HDS.

NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 6. If

15.
DTC P0746: A/T Clutch Pressure Control 9. Clear the DTC w ith the.HDS.
Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF
10. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
DTC P0747: A/T Clutch Pressure Control in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON pressure control solenoid valve A w ith the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the result N O R M A L?
and any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
tim e.®
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO—Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
by the test result, if the tester has not determined
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the the cause of the failure, go to step 11. If any part
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. was replaced, go to step 12.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a 11. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or A (see page 14-196).
Does A / T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive work properly?
clutch m aterial?
YES—Repair the hydraulic system related to CPC
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 12. valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 12.
then go to step 4. NO—Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-202), then go to step 12.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (ll).
five gears. 14. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
five gears.
drive in step 6. 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test-
drive in step 14.
YES—G oto step 9.
(cont'd)
Is D T C P 0 7 4 6 or P 0 7 4 7 indicated?
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—G oto step 17.
17. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r PG746 or P0747 in the



12.
DTC P0751: Shift Solenoi d Valve A Stuck OFF 9. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON 10. Select Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Is a clicking sound heard?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES—G oto step 11.

NO—Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 14-192), then go to step 14.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a five gears.
excessive clutch material. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test-
drive in step 11.
clutch material? 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0751 or P0752 in the
then go to step 4. YES—Repair shift valve A, or replace the
5. Clear the DTG with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
five gears. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- 15. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
drive in step 6.
8. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0751 or P0752 in the five gears.
Does the screen indicate F A IL E D ? drive in step 16.
YES—Go to step 9.

(cont'd)
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—G oto step 19.



16.
DTC P0756; Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF 9. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
DTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON 10. Select Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Is a clicking sound heard?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES—Go to step 11.

N o —Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
strainer. Inspectthe strainer for metal debris or
drive in step 11.
clutch material? 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0756 or P0757 in the
YES—Replace the transmission. ■
Does the screen indicate F A ILE D ?
then go to step 4. YES—Repair shift valve B, or replace the
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
drive in step 6.
YES—Go to step 9.

(confd)
Is D T C POT5 6 or POT5 7 indicated?
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—G oto step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0756 or P0757 in the


DTCs were indicated in step 18/go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting.*

16.
DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF 9. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
DTC P0762: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON 10. Select Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Is a clicking sound h eard?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES—Go to step 11.

NO—Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
drive in step 11.
clutch material? 13. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0761 or P0762 in the
then go to step 4. YES—Repair shift valve C, or replace the
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
drive in step 6.
YES—Go to step 9.
I s D T C P 0 7 6 1 or POT6 2 indicated?
YES—G oto ste p 9.
NO—Go to step 19.



16.
DTC P0776: A/T Clutch Pressure Control 9. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. ;
Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
10. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B
DTC PG777: A/T Clutch Pressure Control in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch
Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the screen indicate N O R M A L ?
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES—Interm ittent failure, the system is OK at this
tim e.B
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO—Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
for the test result, if the HDS has not determined
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the the cause of the failure, go to step 11. If any part
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. was replaced, go to step 12.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a 11. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or B (see page 14-199).
Does A / T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive w ork properly?
clutch material?
YES—Repair the hydraulic system related to CPC
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. valve B and shift valve D, or replace the
then go to step 4. NO—Replace A/T clutch pressure control valve B
five gears. 14. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
five gears.
drive in step 6. 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test-
drive in step 14.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0776 or PG777 in the
YES—Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—G oto step 17.



14.
DTC P0780: Problem in Shift Control System 9. Clear the DTC with .th e HDS. ?
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Run the engine until the ECT SENSOR value ■
and any on-board snapshot, and review General reaches 176. °F (80*0.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating five gears. :
12. Turn the ignition switch .OFF, and repeat the test-
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the drive in step 11.
13. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0780.'in the DTCs
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-214) through a MENU w ith the HDS.
excessive clutch material. Does the s c re e n in d ic a te F A IL E D ?
D oes the s tr a in e r h a v e m e ta l d e b ris or e x c e s s iv e YES—Repair shift valve D, or replace the

c lu tc h m a te ria l? :: transmission, then go to step 14.
YES—Replace the transmission, then go to step 14. NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
NO—Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-214), indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.
then go to step 4.
6. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all five gears.
five gears.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repeat the test- drive in step 16.
drive in step 6.

MENU w ith the HDS.
D oes the s c re e n in d ic a te F A IL E D ?
YES—Go to step 9.

(cont'd)
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—G oto step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0780 in the DTCs

MENU w ith the HDS.


16.
< & >
DTC P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 8. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
ON pressure switch connector.

any on-board snapshot, and review General 10. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). LIST w ith the HDS.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 3rd PRESSURE SW ITCH OFF?
transmission.
YES—Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). pressure switch (see page 14-210), then go to
step 15.
NO—Go to step 11.
3. Checkthe 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA
LIST with the HDS when not in 3rd gear. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SW ITCH OFF? 12. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS.
YES—Go to step 4. 13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO—G oto step 7. 14. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector

4. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
5. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D3 position for OP3SW (BLU/W HT)
at least 2 seconds, then shift into the D position,
8 I9
and drive in 4th gear fo r at least 2 seconds. 1 1 1 2 3 . 1 . 4 |,5 I 6 I 7
_CO
» 10 11 m
$2
17 18 19
20 / m 23 24 25
■
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0847 in the DTCs 26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
36 37 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 m \m \
MENU w ith the HDS.
YES—Go to step 7. Terminal side of female terminals

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for Is there continuity?
between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
switch and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT between PCM connector terminal C15 and the 3rd
COMPLETED, go to step 4. clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go
to step 15.
(cont'd)
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is D T C P 0 8 4 7 in d ic a te d ?
17. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wire between the 3rd clutch transmission
18. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
19. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D3 position for g oto s te p l.
at least 2 seconds, then shift to the D position, and
drive in 4th gear for at least 2 seconds. NO—Go to step 26.
20. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 26. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0847 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
Is D T C P 0 8 4 7 in d ic a te d ?
Do es the s c re e n in d ic a te P A S S E D ?
YES—Check for interm ittent short to body ground
in the wire between the 3rd clutch transmission YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
fluid pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO—G oto step 21. troubleshooting. ■
21. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0847 in the DTCs NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for
MENU w ith the HDS. intermittent short to body ground in the wire
between the 3rd clutch transmission flu id pressure
D o es the s c re e n in d ic a te P A S S E D ? switch and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
DTCs were indicated in step 20, go to the indicated 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, g oto
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ step 23.

between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch arid the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen


24. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D3 position for

drive in 4th gear for at least 2 seconds.
DTC P0848: Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission 7. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0848 in the DTCs
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch MENU with the HDS.
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck
OFF Does the screen indicate F A IL E D ?

any on-board snapshot, and review General NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, interm ittent
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). failure, the system is OK at this tim e. Check for
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem interm ittent short to body ground in the wire
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure
transmission. switch and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
9. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal pressure switch connector.
4. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D3 position, and
check the DATA LIST with the HDS that the SHIFT 11. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
COMMAND indicates 3rd. transmission fluid pressure switch connector
term inal and body ground.
5. Checkthe 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA
LISTw iththeHD S. 3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SW ITCH ON?
YES—Go to step 6. :-
1
NO—G oto step 8. TOP3SW (BLU/WHT)
6. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D3 position for X)

at least 2 seconds, then shift into the D position,
and drive in 4th gear for at least 2 seconds.
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch (see page 14-210), then go to step
16.
NO—G oto step 12.

14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 18. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
15. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector 19. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
terminarC15 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
pressure switch connector terminal.
3RD CLUTCH PCM CONNECTOR at least 2 seconds, then shift to the D position, and
TRANSM ISSION C (44P) drive in 4th gear for at least 2 seconds.
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP3SW
(BLU/W HT)
|1 u 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 I
I
To
J2
CD
10 11 (12) 17 18 19
20 / m 23 24 25 YES—Check for poor connections or loose
1 1
26 27 2 8 /1 3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35 term inals between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
136|3 7 3 8 139 1 4 0 141 4 2 m m \
pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1.
W ire side o f T e rm in a l side o f
fe m a le te rm in a ls fe m a le te rm in a ls NO—Go to step 22.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? MENU with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 23. D o e s the s c re e n in d ic a te P A S S E D ?
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
connector term inal C15 and the 3rd clutch DTCs were indicated in step 21, go to the indicated
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step DTC's troubleshooting. ■
16.
connections or loose terminals between the 3rd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and the



drive in 4th gear for at least 2 seconds.

terminals between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 27.
27, M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0848 in the DTCs

MENU with the HDS.


connections or loose terminals between the 3rd
DTC P0872: Short in 4th Clutch Transmission 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 8. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
ON pressure switch connector.

any on-board snapshot, and review General 10. Checkthe 4th PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). LISTw iththeHD S.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 4 th P R E S S U R E S W IT C H O F F ?
transmission.
YES—Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). pressure switch (see page 14-211), then go to step
15.
NO—G oto step 11.
3. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA
LIST with the HDS when not in 4th gear. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is the 4th P R E S S U R E S W I T C H O F F ? 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 4. 13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO—Go to step 7. 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
5. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position for at OP4SW (BLU/YEL)
least 2 seconds, then drive in 5th gear for at least — ......... liz iz l-.........Z T Y
2 seconds. f 1 12 3 I4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 I 9 I
I 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16117 18 19 ■
I 20 / 23 24 25
1
6. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0872 in the DTCs 26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 |3 2 .33 34 35
136137 3 8 |3 9 I4 0 |4 1 |4 2 m \ m \
MENU with the HDS.
D o es the s c re e n In d ic a te F A IL E D ? u
YES—G oto ste p 7. Terminal side of female terminals

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
between the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
switch and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT between PCM connector terminal C16 and the 4th
COMPLETED, go to step 5. clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go
to step 15.
NO—Go to step 22.

15. Reconnect all connectors. 25. .Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
17. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. YES—Check for interm ittent short to body ground
in the wire between the 4th clutch transmission
18. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
19. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position, for at go to step 1.
least 2 seconds, then drive in 5th gear fo r at least
2 seconds. NO—Go to step 26.
20. Check fo r DTCs w ith the HDS. 26. M onitor the OBD STATUS fo r P0872 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wire between the 4th clutch transmission YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
fluid pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO—Go to step 21. troubleshooting.*
21. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0872 in the DTCs NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for
MENU w ith the HDS. interm ittent short to body ground in the wire
between the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
Does the screen indicate PASSED? switch and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
DTCs were indicated in step 20, go to the indicated 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, g oto
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ step 23.

interm ittent short to body ground in the wire
between the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen


24. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position, for at

least 2 seconds, then drive in 5th gear for at least
2 seconds.
DTC P0873: Open in 4th Clutch Transmission 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0873 in the DTCs
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch MENU with the HDS.
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck
OFF D oes the s c re e n in d ic a te F A IL E D ?

• Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review General NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem intermittent short to body ground in the wire
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the between the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
transmission. switch and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
9. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal pressure switch connector.
4. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position for at
least 2 seconds, then drive in 5th gear for at least 11. Measure the voltage between the 4th clutch
2 seconds. transmission fluid pressure switch connector
terminal and body ground.
5. Checkthe 4th PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA
LISTw iththeHD S. 4TH CLUTCH TRANSM ISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
Is the 4 th P R E S S U R E S W IT C H O N ?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—G oto step 8.
6. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position fo r at

least 2 seconds, then drive in 5th gear fo r at least
2 seconds.
Is th e re ab ou t 5 V ?
YES—Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch (see page 14-211), then go to step
16.
NO—Go to step 12.

14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 18. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
15. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector 19. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
term inal C16 and the 4th clutch transmission fluid operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
pressure switch connector terminal.
20. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position, fo r at
4TH CLUTCH PCM CONNECTOR least 2 seconds, then drive in 5th gear for at least
TRANSMISSION C (44P) 2 seconds.
FLUID PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP4SW
(BLU/YEL)
I1 I2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 || 7 8 I9 I
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ YES—Check for poor connections or loose
20 / (& 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 33 34 35
1 term inals between the 4th transmission fluid
|3 6 |3 T 3 8 |3 9 1 4 0 14 1 142 mm I pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1.
female term ina ls female terminals NO—Go to step 22.

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? MENU with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 23. D oes the sc re e n in d ic a te P A S S E D ?
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
connector terminal C16 and the 4th clutch DTCs were indicated in step 21, go to the indicated
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step DTC's troubleshooti ng. ■
16.
connections or loose terminals between the 4th
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM,
then g o to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT


25. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position, for at

least 2 seconds, then drive in 5th gear for at least
2 seconds.

terminals between the 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO—G oto step 27.

MENU w ith the HDS.
D o e s the s c re e n in d ic a te P A S S E D ?

complete, if the PCM was substituted, replace the

connections or loose terminals between the 4th
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. if the screen
DTC P0962: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure 9. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit valve A connector.
NOTE: 10. Measure the resistance between A/T clutch

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure control solenoid valve A connector
any on-board snapshot, and review General terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
* This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
transmission.
3. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second.

YES—Go to step 8. Is there 3—10Q?
5. Select Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control in NO—Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch valve A (see page 14-202), then go to step 19.
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
11. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure
Is the result NORMAL? control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
YES—Go to step 6.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
NO—Goto step 8. SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
6. Command A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A at 1.0 Ain Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid JZZL
Control menu. 1 2
GND (BLK)
MENU with the HDS. U)
Does the screen indicate FAILED ?

YES—Go to step 5.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent Is there continuity?

poor connections or loose terminals between A/T YES—Go to step 12.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the
PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go NO—Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch
to step 4. pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
(G101, G102) (see page 22-77), or repair poor
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ground (G101, G102), then go to step 19.
(cont'd)
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 18. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals B2 and C40.
13. Measure the voltage between A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1 PCM CONNECTORS
and No. 2.
VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
B (44P) C (44P)
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL : lr— 1!
3|41 - j6 c ................... II— I I ..............
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR h 12 7 8 I9 | 11 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 | 9 I
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15116 17 18 19 1 10 11 (125 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
a 20 21 22 023) 24 25 a 20 / (& 23 24 25
1 1
26 2'7 28 29|30|{ai)|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 /I3 0 I3 1 |3 2 33 34 35
136131r 38 3 9 140|41142 43 )4 4 ) )36 |37 3 8 |3 9 l4 0 l4 1 1 42 (43)|(44) |
"LT"
LG1
(BRN/YEL)
LS A (RED) GND (BLK) ■<2H
Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?

NO —Check for a blown No. 6 fuse in the driver's
YES— Go to step 14. under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
an open in the wire between PCM connector
NO — Repair open or short in the wire between PCM terminal B2 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
connector terminal C19 and A/T clutch pressure box, then go to step 19.
control solenoid valve A, then go to step 19.
16. Disconnect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P).

20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). I s D T C P 0 9 6 2 in d ic a t e d ?
terminals between A/T clutch pressure control
22. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second. solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
23. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS. 14-9), then go to step 26. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 28.
terminals between A/T clutch pressure control 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0962 in the DTCs
solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 24. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0962 in the DTCs YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
MENU with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? were indicated in step 27, go to the indicated DTC's
DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to the indicated NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ connections or loose terminals between A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
connections or loose terminals between A/T clutch PCM (see page 14-9), then go to step 26. If the PCM
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM, was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT NOT COMPLETED, go to step 26.


Control Solenoid Valve A valve A connector.

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure control solenoid valve A connector
* This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SOLENOI D VALVE A CONNECTOR
transmission.

1 2

Terminal si de of male terminals
YES—Go to step 8. Is there 3 - 10 Q ?
the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch valve A (see page 14-202), then go to step 12.
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate NORMAL ? control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
YES—Goto step 6.
NO—Goto step 8. SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR

valve A at 0.2 A in Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid -JC Z Z L .
Control menu. 1 2

MENU with the HDS.

Wire side of female terminal s
YES—Goto step 8.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the
to step 5. pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
< • &
12. Reconnect ail connectors. 20. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
15. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second. solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
16. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 14-9), then go to step 19. If the PCM was substituted,
goto step 1.
NO—Go to step 21,
solenoid valve A and the PCM, then goto step 1. MENU with the HDS.
NO—Goto step 17. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
troubleshooting.*
YES —Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTC's troubleshooting, ■ connections or loose terminals between A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM, was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates


Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit valve B connector.

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure control solenoid valve B connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
transmission.

1 2

YES—Go to step 8. Is there 3 —10 Q?
the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch valve B (see page 14-202), then go to step 19.
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate NORMAL? control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Goto step 8. SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR

valve Bat 1.0 A in Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Control menu. 1 2

MENU with the HDS.

YES—Go to step 8.

failure, the system is OK at this time. Checkfor
poor connections or loose terminals between A/T YES—Goto step 12.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and the
to step 5. pressure control solenoid valve B and ground

PCM CONNECTORS
control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
VB SOL (BLK/YEL) ________ _
B (44P) _______ C (44P)
A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL .......Jczzit........... . *
..... :................... i r “ ii
SOLENO I D VALVE B CONNECTOR hi 2 3 4 | 5 ( 6 7 8| 9I I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 I
■ ■ ■ 18 19 ■
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17
i 20 21 22 ; > < : (23) 24 25 20 / m 23 24 25
■ i I
26 27 28 29|30|(31)|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 / |30|31132 33 34 35
136137 3 8 |3 9 l4 0 |4 1 142 4 3 14 4 1 13 6 13T^ 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 m \m \
LG1
(BRN/YEL)
LS B GND (BLK)
(BRN/W HT)

NO—Check for a blown No. 6 fuse in the driver's
YES—Go to step 14. under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
NO—Repair open or short in the wire between PCM terminal B2 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
connector terminal B25 and A/T clutch pressure box, then go to step 19.
control solenoid valve B, then go to step 19.

21. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose
22. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second. solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 28.
solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM, was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates


Control Solenoid Valve B valve B connector.

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure control solenoid valve B connector
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
transmission.
r~ i
1i n ,

_ T
YES—Go to-step 8. Is there 3— 10 Q?
NO—G oto step 5. YES—Go to step 11.:
the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch valve B (see page 14-202), then go to step 12.
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate NORMAL? control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Go to step 8. SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR

valve B at 0.2 A in Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid .-J E Z L ,
Control menu. 1 2

MENU with the HDS.

YES—Go to step 8.

poor connections or loose terminals between A/T YES—Goto step 18.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve and the PCM.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, goto step NO—Repair open in the wire between A/T clutch
5. pressure control solenoid valve B and ground
15. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second. solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 21.
solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM, was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
then goto step 1. If the screen indicates NOT NOT COMPLETED, go to step 19.


Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit valve C connector.

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure control solenoid valve C connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
transmission.

1 2

YES—Goto step 8. Is there 3 —10Q?
the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/T clutch valve C (see page 14-207), then go to step 19.
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate NORMAL? control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
YES—Goto step 8.
A /T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
NO—Go to step 6. SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR

valve Cat 1.0 Ain Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Control menu. 1 2
I GND (BLK)
MENU with the HDS. (t)
YES—Goto step 8.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the
to step 5. pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
(conf d)
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 18. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals B2 and C40.
control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1 PCM CONNECTORS
and No. 2.
VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
B (44P) C (44P)
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL , ..... ~ .. Ii......il ......-11'' I f " ...... - '
SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR [ 1 12 3 |4 | 5 |6 I7 B | 9 | 1 1 1 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 7 a 19 1
I 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
a 20 / m
a 20 21 22 24 25 i 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35 26 27 28 /|30|31132 33 34 35
13 6 137 38 (3 9 140 14 1 142 4 3 144 | 136137 38|39l40|41142 £3)|W l
LG1
GND (BLK)
(BRN/YEL) ---------- ( \ .
LS C
(GRN/RED)
Wire si de of female terminals Is there battery voltage?

NO—Check for a blown No. 6 fuse in the driver's
YES—Go to step 14. under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
NO—Repair open or short in the wire between PCM terminal B2 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
connector terminal B35 and A/T clutch pressure box, then go to step 19.
control solenoid valve C, then go to step 19.

22. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second. solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 28.
solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
DTCs were indicated in step 23, go to the indicated NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor poor
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM, was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates


Control Solenoid Valve C valve C connector.

* Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and pressure control solenoid valve C connector
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
transmission.

1 2

YES—Go to step 8. Is there 3 - 10 Q ?
the M iscel Ia neo us T est Menu, and test A/T clutch valve C (see page 14-207), then go to step 12.
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate NORMAL? control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Go to step 6. SOLENOI D VALVE C CONNECTOR

valve C at 0.2 A in Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid J Z L ■’
Control menu. 1 2

MENU with the HDS.

YES—Goto step 8.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and the
to step 5. pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
12.-Reconnect all connectors. 20. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). is DTC P0971 indicated?
15. Start the engine, and wait for at least 1 second. solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
is DTC P0971 indicated?
NO—Goto step 21.
solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. MENU with the HDS.
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM, was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
then goto step 1. If the screen indicates NOT NOT COMPLETED, go to step 19.


DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0973 in the DTCs
Circuit MENU with the HDS.
NOTE; Does the screen indicate FAILED?

any on-board snapshot, and review General YES—Go to step 10.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
transmission. intermittent short to body ground in the wire
between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
least 1 second.
4. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear in the D position
for at least 1 second. 13. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
YES—Goto step 10. I1 I2 3 14 i § | 6 7 8 | 9 I

■ 10 11 (12013|14|15|16 17 18 1SI ■
20 / m 23 24 25
NO—Go to step 6. 26 27 28 /130|31132 33 ,
34 c Ej ®
|3 6 |3 7 3 8 |39140|41 42 £3) 4
6. Select Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test LG1 (BRN/YEL) SH A (BLU/YEL)

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard ?

Terminal side of female terminal s
YES—Goto step7.
NO—Goto step 10. Is there less than 12 Q?
7. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at YES—Go to step 14.
least 1 second.
NO—Go to step 26.
for at least 1 second.
14. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 18. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals C25 and C40. terminals B2 and C40.
PCM CONNECTORS
¥B SOL (BLK/YEL) __________________ _
B (44P) . ,------. C (44P)
I 1 I 2 3 I 4 I 5 | 6 I 7 a 19 1 f
:..... . " m . .....:::::. . :. :: ii ii 1
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 181 9 ■ 1 1 1 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 7 8-1 9 I
1 1 1 2: 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
1
20 / _
^ > ■ < 1 23 24 2 |
I 1
1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
a ■
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
26 27 28 /130|31132 33 34c 1 20 21 22 £3) 24 25 ■ 20 / m 23 24 25
1
136137 3 8 13 9 140141 142 Ml 26 2'7 28 29 |30|C31)|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 / i3 0 |3 1 132 33 34 35
LG1 (BRN/YEL) SH A (BLU/YEL) 136131r 3 8 139 J4014 1 142 4 3 144 j 13 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 W ( 4 4 ) |
(BRN/YEL)

Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire YES—Go to step 26.

solenoid harness connector, then go to step 19. NO—Check for a blown No. 6 fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
NO—Go to step 16. an open in the wire between PCM connector
terminal B2 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
16. Inspect shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-192), box, then go to step 19.
Is shift solenoid valve A OK ?
NO—Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page

(cont'd)
19. Reconnect all connectors. 27. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at
least 1 second.
21. Clear the DTC with the HDS. for at least 1 second.
22. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at 29. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
least 1 second.
for at least 1 second. YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wire between shift solenoid valve A and the
24. Check for DTCs with the HDS. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Is DTC P0973 indicated? PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground NO—Go to step 30.

in the wire between shift solenoid valve A and the
PCM, then go to step 1. 30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0973 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 25.
MENU with the HDS. YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Does the screen indicate PASSED? original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other troubleshooting, ffl
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. if the
intermittent short to body ground in the wire PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
between shift solenoid valve A and the PCM, then (see page 14-9), then go to step 27. If the PCM was
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT substituted, goto step 1. If the screen indicates
COMPLETED, go to step 22. NOT COMPLETED, go to step 27.

DTC P09-74: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A. 7. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at
Circuit least 1 second.
NOTE: : 8. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear in the D position

• Before you troubleshoot record all freeze data and for at least 1 second.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0974 in the DTCs
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem MENU with the HDS.
transmission. Does the screen indicate FAILED ?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES—Go to step 10.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
3. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at poor connections or loose terminals between shift
least 1 second. solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the screen
for at least 1 second. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Is DTC P0974 indicated? 12. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO—Goto step 6.
6. Select Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Go to step 10.
(confd)
13. Measure the resistance between PCM connector 16. Remove the solenoid harness connector (see page
terminals C25 and C40. 14-192).

17. Check for continuity between solenoid harness
connector terminal No, 4 and the shift solenoid
valve A connector terminal.
I 1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 |
10 11 (12) 13|14I15|16|17 18 1SI ■
(22) 24 25 SOLENOID HARNESS SHIFT SOLENOID
a 20 / 23
1 CONNECTOR VALVE A CONNECTOR
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 |3 2 |3 3 34 <:S*
13 6 137 3 8 13 9 14 0141142 *1
SH A (BLU/YEL)
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
—@ —
SH A (RED)
Is there 12—25 Q, ?
Termi nal side of Wire side of
male terminals female terminals
14. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. YES—Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
terminal C25 and solenoid harness connector NO—Replace the solenoid harness (see page
terminal No. 4. 14-192), then go to step 18.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) SOLENOID HARNESS 18. Reconnect all connectors.

CONNECTOR
SH A (BLU/YEL) 20. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

SHA
|i u 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 h 9 |
■ (BLU/YEL)
10 11 da) 13|14|15|16 17 18 1EI ■
■ 20 / 23 24 2E
. i
112
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 3E
|3 6 |3 7 3 8 13914014 1 142 (43)1(44)1
Terminal side of Wire side of

NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal C25 and the solenoid harness
connector, then go to step 18.
21.-Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at 26. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at :
least 1 second. least 1 second.
22. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear in the D position 27. Test-drive the vehicle in 1st gear in the D position
for at least 1 second. for at least 1 second.
23. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 28. Check for DTCs with the HDS. ■ :
YES—Check for poor connections or loose YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
terminals between shift solenoid valve A and the in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the
PCM, then go to step 1. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NO—Goto step 24. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0974 in the DTCs NO—Go to step 29.
MENU with the HDS.- - , -
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0974 in the DTCs .
Does the screen indicate PASSED? MENU with the HDS.

DTC's troubleshooting. ■ YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor original PCM (see page 11-230). If any other DTCs
connections or loose terminals between shift were indicated in step 28, go to the indicated DTC's
solenoid valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If troubleshooting.*
21. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals between shift
25. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was
software (see page 14-8), or substitute a known- updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
good PCM (see page 14-9). 14-9), then go to step 26. If the PGM was substituted,
DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0976 in the DTCs
NOTE: Does the screen indicate FAILED?

any on-board snapshot, and review General YES—Goto step 10.
between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the
least 1 second.
4. Test-drive the vehicle so that it shifts from 1st to 4th
gear in the D position, then drive the vehicle in 4th 13. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
gear for at least 1 second. terminals C23 and C40.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. PCIVI CONNECTOR C(44P)

I 1 I 2 .3 4.1.6 | 6 7 a 19 1
■
10 11 (12) 13[14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ 20 / m 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 l|3 2 34 35
136137 38 39 |40|4 1 m \m \
NO—Go to step 6.
LG1 (BRN/YEL) SH B (GRN/WHT)
6. Select Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard? Terminal side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 7.
Is there less than 12 Q?
NO—Goto step 10.
7. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at
least 1 second. NO—Go to step 26.

gear in the D position, then drive the vehicle in 4th
gear for at least 1 second.
terminals C23 and C40. terminals B2 and C40.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/YEL) ________________
I 1I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8I 9 I
B (44P) C (44P)
1 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18
19 a
lil 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 I7 S I9 | I 1I ? ! 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 |9 |
I 20 / m 23 24 25
1 l 10 11 ■
26 27 28 /130|31132 c 3 34 35 12 13[14|15|16 17 18 19 10 m m 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a
136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 \ 4 l <*3>|(44)| ■ 20 21 22 m 24 25 a 20 - X T 23 24 25
a 1
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35 26 27 28 33 34 35
LG1 (BRN/YEL) SH B (GRN/W HT) |3 6 |3 7 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 142 4 3 |4 4 | I* 3 7 (38 [39 [4 0 [4 1 142 m •1
LG1
(BRN/YEL)

Is there continuity ? Is there battery voltage?

under-dash fuse/relay box. if the fuse is OK, repair
NO—Goto step 16. an open in the wire between PCM connector
16. Inspect shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-192). box, then go to step 19.
Is shift solenoid valve B OK ?
NO—Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page

least 1 second.
21. Clear the DTC with the HDS. gear in the D position, then drive the vehicle in 4th
gear for at least 1 second.
least 1 second. 29. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
23. Test-drive the vehicle so that it shifts from 1st to 4th Is DTC P0976 indicated?
gear for at least 1 second. YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wire between shift solenoid valve B and the
is DTC P0976 indicated? PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

in the wire between shift solenoid valve B and the
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 25.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other troubleshooting. ■
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the
between shift solenoid valve B and the PCM, then (see page 14-9), then go to step 27. If the PCM was
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates

DTC P0977: Open In Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at
Circuit least 1 second.
NOTE: 8. Test-drive the vehicle so that it shifts from 1st to 4th

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and gear in the D position, then drive the vehicle in 4th
any on-board snapshot, and review General gear for at least 1 second.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0977 in the DTCs
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the MENU with the HDS.
transmission.
3. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
least 1 second. poor connections or loose terminals between shift
solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the screen
4. Test-drive the vehicle so that it shifts from 1st to 4th indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.
gear for at least 1 second. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Is DTC P0977 indicated? 12. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO—Goto step 6.
6. Select Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test

Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS.
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Goto step 10.
(confd)
13. Measure the resistance between PCM connector 16. Remove the solenoid harness connector (see page
terminals C23 and C40. 14-192).
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) 17. Check for continuity between solenoid harness
connector terminal No. 1 and the shift solenoid
valve B connector terminal.
11 12 3 |4 |5 | 6 |7 8 I9 I
I 10 11
m 13114115116 17 18 19 ■
1
20 / <&) 23 24 25
I SHIFT SOLENOID SOLENOID HARNESS
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 |3 2 S3 34 35 VALVE B CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
|3 6 l3 7 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 ? (<3)|(44)|
LG1 (BRN/YEL) SH B (GRN/WHT)
SH B (ORN)
Is there 12—25 Q ?
female terminals male terminals
14. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. YES—Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
terminal C23 and solenoid harness connector NO—Replace the solenoid harness (see page
terminal No. 1. 14-192), then go to step 18.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) SOLENOID HARNESS 18. Reconnect all connectors.

CONNECTOR
SH B (GRN/WHT) 20. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
lh U 3 I4 | 5 |6 | 7 8 I 9 I SH B (GRN/WHT)
10 11 <12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
■ 20 / 23 24 25 1
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 |3 2 33 34 35
I 1 I 2 \$\4 1 /1
136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 («)|(44)I


connector, then go to step 18.
21. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at 26. Start the enginein the P position, and w ait for at
least 1 second. least 1 second.
22. Test-drive the vehicle so that it shifts from 1st to 4th 27. Test-drive the vehicle so that it shifts from 1st to 4th
gear in the D position, then drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the D position, then drive the vehicle in 4th
gear for at least 1 second. gear for at least 1 second.
23. Check fo r DTCs w ith the HDS. 28. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0977 indicated? Is D T C P0977 indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between shift solenoid valve B and the terminals between shift solenoid valve B and the
NO—Go to step 24. - PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
24. M onitor the OBD STATUS for P0977 in the DTCs NO—Goto step 29.
MENU with the HDS.
YES—'T roubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the screen indicate PASSED?
solenoid valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If troubleshooting. ■
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, g oto step
21. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
25. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the PGM was
good PCM (see page 14-9). 14-9), then go to step 26. If the PCM was substituted,
DTC P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0979 in the DTCs

between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the
least 1 second.
SH C (GRN)
1 1 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 I 9 |
a 10 11 (12)13|14|15|16 17 18 19 E
NO—Goto step 6.
a 20 / m 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 /l30|31132 33 34 35
6. Select Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test |36|37 38|39J40|41|42
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS. LG1 (BRN/YEL)

YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Goto step 10. Is there less than 12 Q?
least 1 second.
NO—Goto step 26.
terminals C18 and €40. terminals B2 and C40.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
SH C (GRN) B (44P) C (44P)
I1 I2 3 4 |5 |6 |7 » I9I I 1 I 2 3 I 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9-1 11 12 3 | 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
i 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ I 10 11 (12) 13|14 |15|16 17 18 19 ■
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
■ 20 2 1 22 ^3) 24 25 ■ 1 20 /
(&) 23 24 25
1 20 / m 23 24 25
I 1
w
26 2 7m 26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
CO
n
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35 33 34 35
|3 6 |3 7 38 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 W 4 4 )| 136131f 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 4 3 |4 4 | 136137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 m 1(44) |
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG1

(BRN/YEL)
Terminal side of femal e terminals

Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?

solenoid harness connector, then go to step 19. NO—Check fora blown No. 6 fuse in the driver's
NO—Goto step 16. an open in the wire between PCM connector
16. Inspect shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-192). box, then go to step 19.
Is shift solenoid valve C OK ?
NO—Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page

least 1 second.
21. Clear the DTC with the HDS. for at least 1 second.
22. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at 29. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
least 1 second.
for at least 1 second, YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the
Is DTC P0979indicated? PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

in the wire between shift solenoid valve C and the
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 25.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other troubleshooting. ■
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, checkfor between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the
between shift solenoid valve C and the PCM, then (see page 14-9), then go to step 27. If the PCM was
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates

DTC P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C
Circuit

transmission. poor connections or loose terminals between shift
solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the screen
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6.
least 1 second.
SH C (GRN)
YES—Go to step 9.
I1 I2 3 I4 I 5 I 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
■
NO—Go to step 6. 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■
(23 23 24 25
■ 20 / 1
26 27 28 /i3 0 |3 1 |32 33 34 35
6. Select Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test |36137 3 8 l 3 9 |4 0 l4 l|4 2 m \ m \
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS. LG1 (BRN/YEL)

YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Goto step 9. Is there 1 2 - 2 5 Q ?
least 1 second.
NO—Go to step 14.
14. Diseonneetthe solenoid harness connector. 16. Remove the solenoid harness connector (see page
14-192).
terminal C18 and solenoid harness connector 17. Check for continuity between solenoid harness
terminal No. 2. connector terminal No. 2 and the shift solenoid
valve C connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) SOLENOID HARNESS
CONNECTOR SHIFT SOLENOI D SOLENOID HARNESS
VALVE C CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
SH C (GRN)
I 1 I 2 3 4 |5 I6 |7 8 I9 I SH C (GRN)
> 10 11 (10 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a
1 20 / (?3 23 24 25
26 27 28 /|3 0 |3 1 1 3 2 33 34 35
1 m fiWi
| 36 |37 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 )4 1 142 (43)1(44)1

female terminals female terminals Wire side of Terminal side of
YES—Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM 14-192), then go to step 18.
connector, then go to step 18. NO—Replace the solenoid harness (see page

least 1 second.

YES—Checkfor poor connections or loose YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals between shift solenoid valve C and the terminals between shift solenoid valve € and the
NO—Go to step 24. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0980 in the DTCs NO—Go to step 29.
MENU with the HDS.

solenoid valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If troubleshooting. ■
21 . NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
25. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was
good PCM (see page 14-9). 14-9), then go to step 26. If the PCM was substituted,
26. Start the engine in the P position, and wait for at COMPLETED, go to step 26.
least 1 second.

DTC P2769: Short in Torque Converter Clutch 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2769 in the DTCs
Solenoid Valve Circuit MENU with the HDS.

any on-board snapshot, and review General YES—Goto step 10.
between the torque converter clutch solenoid valve
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
3. Start the engine in the P position, and warm it up to
normal operating temperature (the radiator fan 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
comes on).
37 mph (60 km/h) in 5th gear in the D position for at 13. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
least 1 second. terminals B44 and €40.
PCM C O N N E C T O R S
Is DTC P2769 indicated? B (44P) C (4 4 P )
M U 3 4 |5 |6 |7 8 I0 I I 1 I 2 3 (4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 I
YES—Go to step 10. i 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ■ B
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
i 20 21 22 £3) 24 25 I 20 / <& 23 24 25
1
26 27 28 29|30|(31)|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 33 34 35
IMO—Goto step 6. 136137 3 8 |3914 0 141 42 4 3 14 4 1 13 6 137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |42 (43)1(44)1
L C (Y E L ) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
6. Select Lockup Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and test the torque converter clutch L—
solenoid valve with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard? Terminal side of femal e termi nals
YES—Goto step 7. Is there less than 12 Q?
7. Start the engine in the P position, and warm it up to NO—Go to step 26.
normal operating temperature (the radiator fan
comes on).

37 mph (60 km/h) in 5th gear in the D position for at
least 1 second.
14. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Check fo r continuity between PCM connector 18. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals B44 and C40. terminals B2 and C40.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS
B (44P) C (44P) VB SOL (BLK/YEL)

B (44P) C (44P)
I 1 I 2 3 |4 |5 |6 |7 8 I9 I I 1 I2 3 4 |5 |6 |7 8 |9 |
1 10 11 12
13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a a
10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a 1 2 3 4 I5 |6 |7 8 9 ]1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 |9 |
1 20 21 22 m 24 25 a 20 / (& 23 24 25 a
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 i I 10 11 (12) 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 a
a 1
26 27 28 29[30|(3i)|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 /i3 0 |3 l|3 2 l 33 34 35 a 20 21 22 £3) 24 25 1 20 (& 23 24 25
1
|36 |3T 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 142 4 3 1 * »l | 3 6 |3 7 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 26 27 28 29|30|(s0|32 33 34 35 26 27 28 /l3 0[31 13 2 33 34 35
LC (YEL) I3 6 I3 7 38 3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 43 |44 | I3 6 I3 7 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 | 41|42 (*3) M l
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
LG1
(BRN/YEL)
Is th e r e c o n t in u ity ? Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o lt a g e ?

NO—Go to step 16. an open in the wire between PCM connector
16. Inspectthe torque converter clutch solenoid valve box, then go to step 19.
(see page 14-192).
Is th e t o r q u e c o n v e r t e r c lu t c h s o le n o id v a lv e O K ?
NO—Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid

valve (see page 14-192), then go to step 19.
(cont'd)
19. Reconnect all connectors. 26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). good PGM (see page 14-9).
21. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 27. Start the engine in the P position, and warm it to
22. Start the engine in the P position, and warm it to comes on).
comes on). 28. Test-drive the vehicle at a constant speed of
23. Test-drive the vehicle at a constant speed of least 1 second.
least 1 second. 29. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
24. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC P2769 indicated?
Is DTC P2769 indicated? YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground

in the wire between the torque converter clutch
YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground solenoid valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
in the wire between the torque converter clutch updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
solenoid valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. 14-9), then go to step 27. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 25.
NO—Go to step 30.
MENU with the HDS. 30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2769 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to the indicated YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
DTC's troubleshooting. ■ complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for were indicated in step 29, go to the indicated DTC's
intermittent short to body ground in the wire troubleshooting.■
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22. intermittent short to body ground in tne wire
DTC P2770: Open in Torque Converter Clutch 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2770 in the DTCs ;
Solenoid Valve Circuit MENU with the HDS.

9 This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
transmission. poor connections or loose terminals between the
torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the PCM.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
6.
3. Start the engine in the P position, and warm it up to
normal operating temperature (the radiator fan 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
comes on).
37 mph (60 km/h) in 5th gear in the D position for at 13. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
least 1 second. terminals B44 and C40.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. PCM CONNECTORS
Is DTC P2770 indicated? i (44P) C (44P)
I 1 I 2 3 |4 |5 |6 |7 8 I 9 I 1 2 4 IS I 8 9
YES—Go to step 10. ■ 10 11 12 13|14|15I16 17 18 19 i 3 ll4 |l5 |l6
■ 20 21 22 m 24 25 ■ 23 24
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35 /|3 0 |3 1 |3i 33 34 35
NO—Goto step 6. |3 6 |3 7 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 |4 2 4 3 |44| I3 6 I3 T 14 0 141
LC (YEL) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
6. Select Lockup Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu, and test the torque converter clutch — ®~~
solenoid valve with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard ? Terminal si de of female terminals
YES—Goto step 7. Is there 1 2 - 2 5 Q?
7. Start the engine in the P Position, and warm it up to NO—Go to step 14.
comes on).

least 1 second.
14. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. 16. Remove the solenoid harness connector (see page
14-192).
terminal B44 and solenoid harness connector 17. Checkfor continuity between solenoid harness
terminal No. 3. connector terminal No. 3 and the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) SOLENOID HARNESS
CONNECTOR TORQUE CONVERTER SOLENOID HARNESS
CLUTCH SOLENOID CONNECTOR
VALVE CONNECTOR
11 12 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
■ 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 ' ■
e h
■ 20 21 22 m 24 25 ■
26 27 28 2 9 |3 0 M 3 2 33 34 35 LC (YEL)
138137 3 8 |3 9 |4 0 |4 1 1 42 4 3 1441
LC (YEL)

female terminals female terminals Wire side of Terminal side of
YES—Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM valve (see page 14-192), then go to step 18.
connector terminal B44 and the solenoid harness
connector, then go to step 15. NO—Replace the solenoid harness (see page
18. Reconnect all connectors. 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2770 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
D o e s th e s c re e n in d ic a t e P A S S E D ?
21. Start the engine in the P position, and warm it to DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated
normal operating temperature (the radiator fan DTC's troubleshooting. ■
comes on).
22. Test-drive the vehicle at a constant speed of connections or loose terminals between the torque
37 mph (60 km/h) in 5th gear in the D position for at converter clutch solenoid valve and the PCM, then
least 1 second. go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
Is D T C P 2 7 7 0 in d ic a t e d ? software (see page 14-8), or substitute a known-
terminals between the torque converter clutch 26. Start the engine in the P position, and warm it to
solenoid valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. normal operating temperature (the radiator fan
comes on).
NO—Goto step 24.
least 1 second.
(cont'd)
Is D T C P 27 70 indicated?

terminals between the torque converter clutch
solenoid valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO—Goto step 29.

MENU with the HDS.


connections or loose terminals between the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve and the PCM. If the
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
Road Test
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 5. Test-drive the vehicle on a fiat road in the D
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch
slippage. While driving, check that the shift points
2. Apply the parking brake, and block both rear occur at the proper speeds by monitoring the
wheels. Start the engine, then shift to the D position accelerator pedal position sensor voltage with the
while pressing the brake pedal. Press the HDS and comparing your shift point speeds and
accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The voltage to those in the table. (The accelerator pedal
engine should not stall. position sensor voltage represents the throttle
opening.)
3. Repeat step 2 in all shift lever positions.
Upshift: D Position
4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the A/T Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
data list. 0.75-V
1st—2nd 1 2 -1 3 mph (19-21 km/h)
2nd—3rd 19 -2 1 mph (31—33 km/h)
3rd—4th 25—29 mph (40—46 km/h)
4th—5th 4 5 -4 9 mph (7 2 -7 8 km/h)
Lock-up ON 4 7 -5 0 mph (7 6 -8 0 km/h)
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
2.5 V
1st—2nd 2 9 -3 2 mph (47-51 km/h)
2nd—3rd 5 0 -5 4 mph (80—86 km/h)
3rd—4th 7 6 -8 0 mph (121-127 km/h)
4th—5th 9 4 -9 8 mph (151-157 km/h)
Lock-up ON 102-106 mph (164-170 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
4.5 V
1st—2nd 3 6 -4 0 mph (5 8 -6 4 km/h)
2nd—3rd 6 4 -6 8 mph (102-108 km/h)
3rd—4th 100-104 mph (160-166 km/h)
(cont'd)
Road Test (cont'd)
Downshift: D Position
0.75 V
Lock-up OFF 44—48 mph (70—77 km/h)
5th—4th 39—41 mph (62—66 km/h)
4th—3rd 1 8 -2 1 mph (2 9 -3 3 km/h)
2nd—1st 9 -1 1 mph (1 4 -1 8 km/h)
2.5 V
Lock-up OFF 9 0 -9 4 mph (145-151 km/h)
5th—4th 7 3 -7 6 mph (118-122 km/h)
4th—3rd 5 3 -5 6 mph (8 6 -9 0 km/h)
3rd—2nd 25—29 mph (40—46 km/h)
2nd—1st 9 -1 1 mph (14—18 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
4 .5V
4th-*3rd 8 9 -9 3 mph (142-148 km/h)
3rd—2nd 5 8 -6 2 mph (9 3 -9 9 km/h)
2nd—1st 3 2 -3 4 mph (5 1 -5 5 km/h)
6. Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in the D position,

then shift to the 2 position. The vehicle should
immediately begin to slow down from engine
braking.
7. Shift to the 1 position, accelerate from a stop at full

throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch
slippage. Upshifts should not occur in this position.
8. Shift to the 2 position, accelerate from a stop at full

throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch
slippage. Upshifts and downshifts should not occur
in this position.
9. Shift to the R position, accelerate from a stop at full

throttle momentarily, and check for abnormal noise
and clutch slippage.
10. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16-degrees),

apply the brake, and shift into the P position.
Release the brake; the vehicle should not move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle,

when stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on
the grade of the incline, the vehicle could roll
backwards if the brake is released.
Stall Speed Test
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 8. If any of the stall speeds are out of the service limit,
proper level (see page 14-213). problems and probable causes are listed in the
table.
2. Apply parking brake, and block all four wheels.
Problem Probable causes
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the A/T Stall speed rpm high • ATF pump output
data list. in the D, 2,1, and R low
positions • Clogged ATF strainer
• Regulator valve stuck
• Slipping clutch
Stall speed rpm high • Slippage of 1st clutch
in the 1 position • Slippage of 1st gear
one-way clutch
Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 2nd clutch
in the 2 position
Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 5th clutch
in the R position
Stall speed rpm low • Engine output low
in the D, 2,1, and R • Engine throttle valve
positions closed
• Torque converter
one-way clutch
4. Make sure the A/C switch OFF. slipping
5. After the engine has warmed up to normal

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on),
shift to the 2 position.
6. Firmly press and hold the brake pedal, then press

the accelerator pedal fully for 6 to 8 seconds, and
note engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising engine speed.
7. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in

the D, 1, and R positions.
NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for at least 10 seconds at a
time.
• Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
purposes only.
• Stall speed tests should be the same in the D, 2,
1, and R positions.
• Do not test stall speed with the A/T pressure
gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:

Specification: 1,950 rpm
Service Limit: 1,800—2,100 rpm
Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 6. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the line pressure
• A/T oil pressure gauge set inspection port (A). Do not allow dust or other
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 foreign particles to enter the port while connecting
• A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A the gauge.
• A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
A/T OIL PRESSURE
GAUGE SET W/PANEL
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 07406-0020400 or
proper level (see page 14-213). 07406-0020401
© O ©
2. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported.
3. Allow the all four wheels to rotate freely. A/T PRESSURE A/T PRESSURE
HOSE, 2,210 mm HOSE ADAPTER
07MAJ-PY4011A 07MAJ-PY40120
4. Remove the splash shield. (3 required) (3 required)
5. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
7. Start the engine in the P position, and warm up to

comes on).
8. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure

inspection port (A) in the P or N position while
holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if

measurements are made in shift lever position
other than Por N.
Pressure Fluid Pressure

Standard Service Limit
Line (A) 950-1,010 kPa 900 kPa
(9.7-10.3 kgf/cm2, (9.2 kgf/cm2,
140-146 psi) 130 psi)
< s &
9. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil 13. Start the engine, in the P position,
pressure gauge from the line pressure inspection
port. 14. Shift into the 1 position, and measure the 1st clutch
pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection port
10. Install the sealing bolt to the line pressure (B) and the 1st-hold clutch pressure at the 1st-hold
inspection port with the new sealing washer, and clutch pressure inspection port (C) while holding
tighten the bolts to 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft). Do the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
not reuse the old sealing washer.
15. Upshift to the 2 position by pushing the shift lever,
11. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch and measure the 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd
pressure inspection port (B) and 1st-hold clutch clutch pressure inspection port (D) while holding
pressure inspection port (C). the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
Pressure Fluid Pressure

Standard Service Limit
1st clutch 950—1,010 kPa 890 kPa
(B) (9.7—10.3 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch 140-146 psi) 130 psi)
-(D)
1st-hold 800-880 kPa 760 kPa
clutch (C) (8.2—9.0 kgf/cm2, (7.7 kgf/cm2,
120-130 psi) 110 psi)
16. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil

pressure gauges from the 1st clutch pressure, 1st-
hold clutch pressure, and 2nd clutch pressure
inspection ports.
12. Remove the intake manifold cover and intake air
duct, and connect the oil pressure gauge to the 2nd 17. Install the sealing bolts in the 1st clutch pressure,
clutch pressure inspection port (D). Then 1st-clutch hold clutch pressure, and 2nd clutch
temporarily install the intake air duct. pressure inspection ports with the new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m,
D
13 Ibf-ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
(cont'd)
Pressure Test (cont'd)
18. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 3rd clutch 23. Release the accelerator pedal; the engine speed
pressure inspection port (E) and the 5th clutch decreases to 1,000 rpm with the transmission in
pressure inspection port (G). 2nd gear.
24. Press the accelerator pedal very slowly so that the

engine speed increases to 2,000 rpm in 5 seconds,
then hold the accelerator; the transmission shifts
into 3rd gear. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure at
the 3rd clutch pressure inspection port (E) while
holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
25. Shift to the D position; the transmission shifts into

4th gear, then 5th gear. Measure the 4th clutch
pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection port
(F) and the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch
pressure inspection port (G) while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
19. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 4th clutch Pressure Fluid Pressure
pressure inspection port (F). Standard Service Limit
3rd clutch 950-1,010 kPa 890 kPa
(E) (9.7—10.3 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
4th clutch 140-146 psi) 130 psi)
(F)
5th clutch
(G)
26. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the

brake pedal to stop the wheels from rotating.
27. Shift to the R position, then release the brake pedal

Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and measure
the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure
inspection port (G).
20. Start the engine with the transmission in the P Pressure Fl uid Pressure
position while pressing the brake pedal. Standard Service Limit
5th clutch 950-1,010 kPa 890 kPa
21. Shift to the D3 position, and release the brake (G) in R (9.7-10.3 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
pedal; the transmission is in 1st gear. 140-146 psi) 130 psi)
22. Press the accelerator pedal to increase the engine 28. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil
speed to 2,500 rpm; the transmission shifts into pressure gauges from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
2nd gear. pressure inspection ports.
29. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th
clutch pressure inspection ports with the new
sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N-m
(1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft). Do not reuse the old sealing
washers.
30. If any of the pressures are out of the service limit,
problems and probable causes are listed in the
table.
Problem Probable causes

No or low line • Torque converter
pressure • ATF pump
• Regulator valve
• Torque converter
check valve
• Low fluid level
• Clogged ATF strainer
No or low 1st clutch • 1st clutch
pressure • O-rings
No or low 2nd clutch • 2nd clutch
No or low 3rd clutch • 3rd clutch
pressure •O-rings
No or low 4th clutch • 4th clutch
No or low 5th clutch • 5th clutch
No or low 5th clutch • Servo valve
pressure in the R • 5th clutch
position • O-rings
No or low 1st-hold • 1st-hold clutch
clutch pressure • O-rings
31. Install the intake air duct and the intake manifold
cover.

Shift Solenoid Valve A, B, and C, Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
Test/Replacement
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 9. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket
(A).
6 x 1.0 mm
2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, and Lockup

Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on
the HDS.
3. Check that shift solenoid valve A, B, C, and the

torque converter clutch solenoid valve operate with
the HDS. A clicking sound should be heard.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK.

The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. 10. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and (C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
test the solenoid valves. control lever (E).
4. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio 11. Check the bushing (F) in the shift cable end for a
system and the navigation system (if equipped), proper fit and wear. If the bushing is loose or worn,
then write down the audio presets. replace the shift cable (see page 14-253).
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery,

then disconnect the positive terminal.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and

remove the battery and battery tray.
7. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake

air duct.
8. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket.

12. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (A). 15. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B, ATF pipes (C), and gasket (D).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m'
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1 .® mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 ibf-ft)
16. Replace the gasket and O-rings (E) with new ones
13. Remove the harness clamp (B) from the harness when installing A/T clutch pressure control
cover/clamp bracket (C), disconnect the 4th clutch solenoid valves A and B.
transmission fluid pressure switch connector (D),
then remove the harness cover from the bracket. 17. Remove the solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins
(B), and gasket (C).
14. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector (E), A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B connector (F), solenoid harness
connector, transmission range switch connector,
ATF temperature sensor connector, output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, and 3rd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
18. Replace the gasket with a new one when installing

the solenoid cover.
Shift Solenoid Valve A, B, and C, Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
Test/Replacement (cont'd)
19. Disconnect shift solenoid valve A connector (A), 22. Remove the solenoid harness connector (A), and
shift solenoid valve B connector (B), shift solenoid replace it. Install a new O-ring (B) on the solenoid
valve C connector (C), and torque converter clutch harness connector, and install the connector in the
solenoid valve connector (D). transmission housing, then go to step 29.
C 6 x 1.0 mm
20. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve 23. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the
between the connector terminal and body ground. solenoid valves.
Standard: 1 2 — 2 5 Q
• Replace the solenoid valve if the resistance is out

of standard.
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
21 .
21. Connect the negative battery terminal to body

ground, and connect the positive battery terminal
to each solenoid valve terminal individually.
• If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22 and

replace the solenoid harness.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 23 and
replace the shift solenoid valve.
24. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve)

(E) on each reused solenoid valves.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new

O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the
O-rings provided on it.
25. Insta l l shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by 31. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the
holding the shift solenoid va l ve body; make sure solenoid valve cover, and install the ATF pipes with
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator the filter end in the transmission housing. Install
body. new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to 32. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the A and B.
solenoid valve body.
33. Install the harness cover on the cover bracket, and
26. Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve (D) secure it with the bolt.
(black connector) by holding the solenoid valve
body; make sure the mounting bracket contacts the 34. Checkthe connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
accumulator body. repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
securely. Install the harness clamp on the bracket.
27. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure 35. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of torque bushing in the cable end. Attach the shift cable end
converter clutch solenoid valve. to the control lever, then insert the control pin into
the control lever hole through the shift cable end,
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before and secure the control pin with the spring clip/
installing torque converter clutch solenoid valve. If washer.
shift solenoid valve C is installed before installing
torque converter clutch solenoid valve, it may 36. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
damage to hydraulic control system.
37. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
28. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure 38. Install the intake air duct and the intake manifold
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator cover.
body.
39. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery hold-
29. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids: down bracket, then connect the battery terminals.
• RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve A. 40. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
• ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B. the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
• GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C. audio presets. Set the clock (on vehicles without
• YEL wire connector to the torque converter clutch navigation).
solenoid valve.
30. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins, (see page 22-255).
and a new gasket.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 9. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A

with the HDS.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete.

Disconnect the HDS. 10. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the A resistance at the connector terminals.
instructions on the HDS.
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does Standard: 3—10 Q
not determine the cause, go to step 4.
• If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
4. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
system and the navigation system (if equipped), (see page 14-202).
then write down the audio presets. • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
11.
then disconnect the positive terminal. 11. Connect the negative battery terminal to solenoid
valve A connector terminal No. 2, and connect the
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
remove the battery and battery tray. No. 1.
7. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake • If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
air duct. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
8. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket. • If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 12.
.03
12. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket 16. Remove the harness clamp (B) from the harness
(A). cover/clamp bracket (C), disconnect the 4th clutch
6 x 1 . 0 mm
then remove the harness cover from the bracket.

18. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and
O-rings (E).
13. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin

(C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
control lever (E).
14. Check the bushing (F) in the shift cable end for a
proper fit and wear. If the bushing is loose or worn,
replace the shift cable (see page 14-253).
15. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (A).

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
19. Checkthe fluid passage of the solenoid valve for

contamination.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
A /T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test (cont'd)
20. Connect the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch 27. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the
pressure control solenoid valve A connector bushing in the cable end. Attach the shift cable end
terminal No. 2, and connect the positive battery to the control lever, then insert the control pin into
terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the control lever hole through the shift cable end,
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves. and secure the control pin with the spring clip/
washer.
28. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
cover.

down bracket, then connect the battery terminals.
A
audio presets. Set the clock (on vehicles without
21. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check navigation).
valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve
body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves 33. Do the power window control unit reset procedure
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, (see page 22-255).
replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A and B.
22. Clean the mounting surfaces and fluid passages of

the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
23. Install the newsolenoid valve body gasket on the

solenoid valve cover, and install the ATF pipes with
the filter end in the transmission housing. Install
new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
24. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves

AandB.

secure it with the bolt.
26. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
A /T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test
valve B connector.
2. Select Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B

3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B

with the HDS.

Disconnect the HDS.
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the
instructions on the HDS. 10. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does B resistance at the connector terminals.
not determine the cause, go to step 4.
Standard: 3—1© Q
4. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio
system and the navigation system (if equipped), • If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T
then write down the audio presets. clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
(see page 14-202).
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
then disconnect the positive terminal. 11.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and 11. Connect the negative battery terminal to solenoid
remove the battery and battery tray. valve B connector terminal No. 2, and connect the
positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
7. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake No. 1.
air duct.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
8. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 12.
(cont'd)
A /T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test (cont'd)
12. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket 16. Remove the harness clamp (B) from the harness
(A). cover/clamp bracket (C), disconnect the 4th clutch
6 x 1.0 mm

18. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and
O-rings (E).

control lever (E).

6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 I bf-ft)
19. Checkthe fluid passage of the solenoid valve for

contamination.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
20. Connect the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch 27. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the
pressure control solenoid valve B connector bushing in the cable end. Attach the shift cable end
term inal No. 2, and connect the positive battery to the control lever, then insert the control pin into
terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure the control lever hole through the shift cable end,
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves. and secure the control pin with the spring clip/
washer.
cover.

21. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check navigation).
valve movement at the fluid passage in the valve
body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves 33. Do the power window control unit reset procedure
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, (see page 22-255).
replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
A and B.

the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
23. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the


A and B.

26. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio 9. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (A),
system and the navigation system (if equipped),
then write down the audio presets.



air duct.
6. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket

(A).
6 x 1.0 mm
10. Remove the harness clamp (B) from the harness

cover/clamp bracket (C), disconnect the 4th clutch


control lever (E).

12. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 17. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
valves A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
O-rings (E). Note the lengths and locations of the securely. Install the harness clamp on the bracket.
ATF pipes.
18. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the
bushing in the cable end. Attach the shift cable end
to the control lever, then insert the control pin into
the control lever hole through the shift cable end,
and secure the control pin with the spring clip/
washer.
cover.

.6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
Cl.2 kgf-m; 8.7 Ibf-ft) 23. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
13. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure audio presets. Set the clock (on vehicles without
control solenoid valve for dust and dirt, and clean navigation).
the passage if necessary.
14. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the (see page 22-255).

A and B.

A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test
valve C connector.
2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C

3. Test A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C

with the HDS. 6. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C resistance at the connector terminals.
Disconnect the HDS. Standard: 3—10 Q
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the
instructions on the HDS. • If the resistance is out of standard, replace the
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
not determine the cause, go to step 4. (see page 14-207).
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to
4. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake step 7.
air duct.
7. Connect the negative battery terminal to the
solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2, and
connect the positive battery terminal to the
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.

Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 8.
8. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve 11. Connect the negative battery terminal to A/T clutch
G. pressure control solenoid valve G connector
terminal No. 2, and connect the positive battery
terminal to the connector terminal No. 1. Make sure
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves.
12. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check

the valve movement at the fluid passage in valve
body mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
9. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and C.
gasket.
10. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for the solenoid valve body and the transmission
contamination. housing.
A /T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test (cont'd)
14. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the 16. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission
filter end into its mounting hole (B). housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(B) with the filter end in the transmission housing
and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 Nm
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 I bf-ft)
15. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 5 3 mm ATF joint

pipe (B) between the top (C) of the pipe and the
solenoid valve body mounting surface (D). The
height is about 7 mm (0.3 in.) If the height is over
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
17. Install new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
18. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
cover.
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake 6. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
air duct. filter end into its mounting hole (B).

valve C connector.
7. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 5 3 mm ATF joint

pipe (B) between the top (C) of the pipe and the
solenoid valve body mounting surface (D). The
height is about 7 mm (0.3 in.) If the height is over
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
3. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve

C.
4. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and

gasket.

the solenoid valve body and the transmission
housing.
(cont'd)
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement (cont'd)
8. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission
housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(B) with the filter end in the transmission housing
and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6 x 1 .0 m m
10. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
cover.
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
Sensor Replacement Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the splash shield. 1. Remove the splash shield.
2. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 2. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector, and remove the input shaft sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor (A). (countershaft) speed sensor (A).
6x 1.0 mm 6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft) 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new input shaft 3. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new output shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and apply clean ATF to (countershaft) speed sensor and apply clean ATF to
the O-ring, then install the input shaft (mainshaft) the O-ring, then install the output shaft
speed sensor in the transmission housing. (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission
housing.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
connect the connector securely. 4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
connect the connector securely.
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
2. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch connector, and remove the 3rd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A) and
sealing washer (B).
3. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch and a new sealing washer, and
tighten the switch.
4. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign

particles inside the connector.
5. Connect the connector securely.

4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake 5. Remove the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
air duct. switch (A) and sealing washer (B).
6 x 1.0 mm 6. Install the new 4th clutch transmission fluid

12 N-m (1.2 .kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
pressure switch and a new sealing washer, and
3. Remove the harness clamp (B) from the harness tighten the switch.
transmission fluid pressure switch connector (D), 7. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign
then remove the harness cover from the bracket. particles inside the connector.
4. Remove the bolts securing the harness cover (A) 8. Secure the harness cover and harness cover/clamp
and the harness cover/clamp bracket (B). bracket with the bolts, and install the harness
clamp on the bracket.

10. Connect the connector securely.
cover.
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement
2. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) (see

3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector

(A), then remove the connector from the connector
bracket (B).
5. Remove the ATF temperature sensor (E).
6. Install a new O-ring (F) on the new ATF

temperature sensor, and install the ATF
temperature sensor.
7. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil. Connect

the connector securely, and install it on its bracket.
8. Install the harness clamp on its bracket.
9. Refill the transmission with the ATF (see step 5 on

page 14-214).

ATF Level Check
NOTE” Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid
leaks at the transmission, hose and line joints, and
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. cooler lines. If a problem is found, fix it before
filling the transmission.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
the engine OFF. Do not allow the engine to warm below the lower mark:
up longer than the time it takes for the radiator fan • The transmission damage will result.
to comes on twice. • Vehicle does not move in any gear.
• Vehicle accelerates poorly and flares when
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60—90 seconds starting off in the D and R positions.
after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may • The engine vibrates at idle.
be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or
more. 7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF
to proper level (see page 14-214).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
dipstick guide tube, and wipe it with a clean cloth. NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
above the upper mark, vehicle moves in the N
position, and shifting malfunction will occur.
8. If necessary fill the transmission with the ATF

through the filler hole (A) to bring the fluid level
midway between the upper mark and lower mark
of the dipstick. Do not fill the fluid to excess of the
upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
4. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube.
5. Remove the dipstick (A) and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (B) and lower
mark (C).
9. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) and a new sealing

washer (C).
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
through the filler hole (A). Always use Honda
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. ATF-Z1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using
a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
the engine off. 4WD
3.3 L (3.5 US qt) at change
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug (A), and 7.9 L (8.3 US qt) at overhaul
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATFh 2WD
3.8 L (4.0 US qt) at change
NOTE: If a cooler cleaning is done, refer to ATF 8.4 L (8.9 US qt) at overhaul
Cooler Cleaning (see page 14-246).
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N-m
6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) and a new sealing

washer (C).
7. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark

and lower mark on the dipstick (see page 14-213).
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer
(B). Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. 5. Remove the filler plug (A) and sealing washer (B).
A
2. Warm up the engine to normal operating 20 x 1.5 mm
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn 44 N-m
the engine off.
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the transfer

fluid (hypoid gear oil).
6. Refill the transfer assembly with the recommended

20 x 1.5 mm fluid (hypoid gear oil) through the filler hole (C)
44 N-m until the fluid flows out. Use a SAE 90 or SAE
(4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4
or GL5 only.
(B). Tighten the drain plug to the specified torque. Viscosi ty
SAE 90: Above 0 T ( - 1 8 <€»
SAE80W-90: Below 0 T ( -1 8 *0
Transfer Fluid (Hypoid Gear Oil) Capacity:

0.43 L (0.45 US qt) at fluid change
7. Install the filler plug and a new sealing washer.

Tighten the filler plug to the specified torque.
Transfer Assembly Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 7. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
securely. transfer assembly, and adjust the transfer gear
backlash (see page 14-378).
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.
8. Check for fluid leaks between the mating faces of
3. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller the transfer assembly and transmission.
shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C).
9. If there is a leak, remove the transfer assembly,
remove the transfer cover, and replace the O-ring.
10. Check for fluid leaks between the transfer

companion flange and transfer oil seal.
11. If there is a leak, remove the transfer assembly

from the transmission, and replace the transfer oil
seal and O-ring on the transfer output shaft (hypoid
gear). If an oil seal and O-ring replacement is
required, you will need to check and adjust the
transfer gear tooth contact, transfer gear backlash,
the tapered roller bearing starting torque, and the
total starting torque (see page 14-378). Do not
replace the oil seal with the transfer assembly on
the transmission.
4. Separate the propeller shaft from the transfer

companion flange.
5. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion

flange (B); position dial indicator tip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D).
6. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06—0.17 mm (0.002—0.007 in.)

1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 6. Remove exhaust pipe A and its mount (B).
securely.
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic

transmission fluid (ATF).
A
18 x 1.5 mm
49 N-m
7. Remove the bolt securing the transfer breather

hose bracket (A), and disconnect the breather hose
(B) from the breather pipe (C) on the transfer
assembly.

5. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
(cont'd)
Transfer Assembly Removal (cont'd)
8. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller
shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C)
separate the propeller shaft from the transfer
companion flange.
9. Remove the transfer assembly from the

transmission.
1. Clean the areas where the transfer assembly 4. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer
contacts the transmission with solvent, and dry companion flange (B) by aligning the reference
with compressed air. Then apply transmission fluid mark (C).
to the contact area.
2. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission.
5. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on

the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install the
breather hose (B) over the breather pipe (C) with
the dot (D) facing out
6 x 1.0 m m
12N-ni
3. Insert the two 10 x 1.25 mm bolts (length: 105 mm)

(B) in the rear upper of the transfer housing, then
install the transfer assembly (C) on the
transmission.
(cont'd)
Transfer Assembly Installation (cont'd)
6. Install exhaust pipe A with the new self-locking

nuts, its mount (B), and new gaskets (C) (D).
8x1.25 mm 10x1.25 mm
22 N m 33 Nm
(2.2 kgf-m, (3.4 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft)
16 Ibf-ft) Replace.
7. Install the front subframe stiffener with the new

mounting bolts.
54 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)

Replace.
8. Refill the transfer assembly with transfer fluid

(hypoid gear oil), if necessary (see page 14-215).
9. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page

14-214).
ATF Leakage Check at Torque Converter Housing Cap
' T. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 5. Remove the torque converter housing cap (A).
securely.
2. Check fo r flu id leaks at the torque converter

housing cap (A).
3. If there is a leak, remove the drain plug (A), and

drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
A
18 x 1.5 m m
49 N-m 6. Remove the O-ring (B) from the cap, and replace it.
(5.0 kgf-m, 3§ Ibf-ft)
7. Install the new O-ring on the cap, and install the cap
on the torque converter housing (C).
8. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page

14-214).

Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 12. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 transmission fluid (ATF).
• Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019
A
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000014 18 x 1.5 mm
• Front subframe adapter VSB02BX0 49 N-m
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
NOTE;
surfaces.
• Special tool Reds engine support hanger
AAR-T-12566 must be used with the side engine
mount installed.

2. Secure the hood in the wide open position with the

support rod.
3. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position, and

lock the steering wheel. 13. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer
4. Drain the power steering system fluid from the
reservoir (see page 17-13). 14. Disconnect the steering joint (see page 17-25).
5. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. Disconnect 15. Remove the power steering pump outlet line (A)
the negative cable from the battery, then from the power steering pump, and remove the
disconnect the positive cable from the battery. hose clamp bolt (B).


air duct.
9. Remove the front bulkhead cover.
10. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely

supported.

16. Remove the transmission breather tube (A) from 19, Remove the dipstick, then remove the starter (A)
the breather pipe (B) at the transmission housing. and gasket (B).

(A).
18. Disconnect the starter cables (B) from the starter,

and remove the harness clamps (C) from the clamp
brackets (D).

control lever (E).
(cont'd)
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
23. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (A). 28. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector (A), and remove the harness clamp (B)
from the clamp bracket (C).
24. Remove the harness clamp (B) from the harness

25. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 30. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
valve A connector (E) and A/T clutch pressure cooler lines (B). Turn the ends of the cooler hoses
control solenoid valve B connector (F). up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the
cooler hoses and lines.
valve C connector (A).
27. Remove the bolts securing the harness cover (B)

and harness cover/clamp bracket (C).
32. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 34. Remove the harness clamp bracket from the engine
sensor connector (A), output shaft (countershaft) rear cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to
speed sensor connector (B), ATF temperature attach engine hanger balancer bar rear arm.
sensor connector (C), and 3rd clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch connector (D).
i
33. Remove the connector bracket from the engine

front cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to
attach engine hanger balancer bar front arm.
35. Install the engine hanger balance bar 37. 4WD: Remove the front mount nut.
(VSB02C000019); attach the front arm (A) to the
front cyl inder head with a spacer and the 10 mm
head with the 8 mm bolt.
38. 2WD: Remove the front mount stop (A), and front
mount bolt (B).

hand, to lift and support the engine.
39. Remove the front subframe stiffener. 41. Remove the lock pins (A) and castle nuts (B), and
separate the lower arms (C) from the knuckles (D)
40. Remove exhaust pipe A and its mount (B).
42. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (E) in the top of the ball

joint pin (F), and remove the nuts (G), then separate
the stabilizer link (H).
43. Remove the cotter pins (I) and nuts (J), and
separate the tie-rod end ball joints (K) from the
knuckles (see step 9 on page 18-14).
44. 4WD: Remove the bolt securing the transfer

breather tube bracket (A), and disconnect the
breather tube (B) from the breather pipe (C) on the
transfer assembly.
(cont'd)
45. 4WD: Make a reference mark (A) across the 47. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and
propeller shaft (B) and the transfer companion remove the drive plate bolts (B) (8) while rotating
flange (C), and separate the propeller shaft from the crankshaft pulley.
the transfer companion flange.
46. 4WD: Remove the transfer assembly from the

transmission. 48. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch
connector.
49. Remove the power steering fluid hose (A) from the 52. 2WD: Disconnect engine mount control solenoid
hose clamp (B) at the right front o f the subframe. valve connector (A), and remove the harness clamp
(B) from the front subframe.
53. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the

marks (B) on the edge of the fron t subframe (C).
50. Loosen the hose clamp bolt, then disconnect the

power steering fluid hose from the fluid line (C).
51. Remove the four transmission lower mount nuts

(A).
(cont'd)
54. 4WD: Remove the three rear mount bracket bolts 56. 2WD: Disconnect engine control mount solenoid
valve connector (A), and remove the harness clamp
(B). Remove the bolt (C) securing the power
steering fluid line bracket (D) on the rear mount
bracket.
55. 2WD: Remove the four fear mount bracket bolts.
57. Loosen the four bolts (A) holding the adjustable

arms (B) of the front subframe adapter (VSB02BX0)
to its center plate.
NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used the

Honda transmission jack (model number
LSL-W93714) or powertrain lift (model number
OTC-1585), both available through the Honda Tool
and Equipment Program. It will also work with
most commercially available transmission jack.
VSB02BX0
58. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on 61. Remove the six bolts securing the front stiffeners
the corner of the jack base, then attach the adapter (A) and rear stiffeners (B), and four bolts securing
(VSB02BX0) to the jack base with the bolts (A) that the front subframe (C), and lower the fr o n t.
came with the jack. Tighten the bolts securely. subframe.
59. Raise the jack to the vehicle height, then attach the
adapter to the front subframe using the subframe
stiffener mounting bolts (B) and bolt holes.
60. Remove both retainers securing the rear mounting 62. Remove the transmission lower mounts.
bolt and nut of the front subframe.
(cont'd)
63. Remove the driveshafts from the differential and 66. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting
the intermediate shaft. Coat all precision machined bolts.
surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags
over driveshaft ends.
64. Remove the exhaust manifold bracket (A) and heat 67. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting
shield (B). bolts.
65. Remove the intermediate shaft (C). Coat all

precision machined surfaces with clean engine oil,
then put the plastic bags over intermediate shaft
ends.
68. Remove the front mount bracket (A). 73. Slide the transmission away from the engine to
remove it from the vehicle.
74. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.
69. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolt 75. Inspect the drive plate, and replace if it's damaged.
(B) using a socket 22 mm in length.
70. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting

bolts.
71. Place a jack under the transmission.
72. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut

of the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear its end
from the side frame.
Drive Plate Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transmission assembly (see page

14-222).
2. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the
engine crankshaft.
12 x 1.0 mm
74 N-m,
3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine

crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a
crisscross pattern in two or more steps.
4. Install the transmission assembly (see page 14-235).

• Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019
10x1.25 mm
38 N-m
• Front subframe adapter VSBO2BX0
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surface.
1. Cleaning the ATF cooler (see page 14-246).
2. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B)

w ith the new O-ring (C).
5. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise it to

engine level.
6. Attach the transmission to the engine, and install

the lower transmission housing mounting bolts.
3. Install the 14 mm dowel pin (D) and 10 mm dowel

pin (E) in the torque converter housing.
(cont'd)
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the rear transmission housing mounting 9. Install the transmission housing mounting bolt (A).
bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
4WD:
38 N m (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)
2WD: B
8. Install the upper transmission housing mounting

bolts.
10. Install the front mount bracket (B) with the new
mounting bolts.
11. Install the new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft 14. Support the front subframe (A) with the front
(B), and install the intermediate shaft in the subframe adapter (VSB02BX0) and a jack, and lift it
differential. While installing the intermediate shaft up to the body.
in the differential, be sure not to allow dust or other
foreign particles to enter the transmission. Tighten
the three mounting bolts to the specified torque.
15. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts:

front (A), rear (B), rear stiffeners (C) and mounting
bolts (D), and front stiffeners (E) and mounting
bolts (F).
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N-m
12. Install the exhaust manifold bracket (C) and heat

shield (D).
13. Install the new set ring on the left driveshaft, then
install the left driveshaft in the differential
(see page 16-18). While installing the driveshaft in
the differential, be sure not to allow dust or other
foreign particles to enter the transmission. Install
the right driveshaft over the intermediate shaft.
NOTE: Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully

outward, and slide the driveshafts into the
differential and over the intermediate shaft until
you feel the set ring engages.
103 N-m 103 N-m 117 N-m

(10.5 kgf-m, (10.5 kgf-m, (11.9 kgf-m,
75.9 Ibf-ft) 75.9 Ibf-ft) 86 Ibf-ft)
Replace. Rep lace.
(cont'd)
16. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe 19. 4WD: Install the three rear mount bracket bolts.
(B) with the body, then tighten the bolts on the front
subframe to the specified torque.
18. Install both bolt retainers (A) on both rear mounting

bolts (B) of the front subframe (C). 20. 2WD: Install the two mount bracket bolts (A) on the
rear of the bracket, and install the new bolts (B) on
the front.
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N-m
42 N-m Replace.
21. Install the transmission lower mount nuts. 23. 2WD: Connect engine mount control solenoid valve
connector (A) on the front engine mount, and install
the harness clamp (B) on the front subframe.
38 N-m
22. 2WD; Connect engine control mount solenoid valve 24. Connect the power steering fluid hose (A) to the
connector (A) on the rear engine mount, and install line (B), and secure the hose with its hose clamp (C).
the harness clamp (B) on its bracket. Secure the
power steering fluid line bracket (C) with the bolt on D
the rear mount bracket.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(cont'd)
26. Connect the power steering pressure switch 29. 4WD: Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission.
connector. Insert the one 10 x 1.25 mm bolt (length: 105 mm)
(B) in the rear upper of the transfer housing, then
install the transfer assembly (C) on the
transmission.
27. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (A)

with eight bolts (B). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolt to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotates freely.
30. 4WD: Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer

companion flange (B) by aligning the reference
mark(C).
28. Install the torque converter cover (C).

31. 4WD: Secure the transfer breather tube bracket (A) 35. Install exhaust pipe A with the new self-locking
on the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install nuts, its mount (B), and new gaskets (C) (D).
the breather tube (B) over the breather pipe (C) with
the dot (D) on the tube facing out.
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m
32. Install the ball joints on each lower arm (A) to each 8 x 1.25 m m 10 x 1.25 mm
knuckle (B) with new castle nuts (C), and secure the 22 N-m 33 N-m
castle nuts with the lock pins (D). (2.2 kgf-m, (3.4 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft)
16 Ibf-ft) Replace.
36. Install the front subframe stiffener with the new

mounting bolts.
33. Install the nuts (E) to the ball joint pins (F) on each
stabilizer link (G). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (H) in
the top of the ball joint pins, and tighten the nuts to Replace.
the specified torque.
34. Install the tie-rod end ball joints (I) to each knuckle
with the nuts (J) and new cotter pins (K).
(cont'd)
37. 4WD: Install a new front mount nut, and tighten it. 40. Install the connector bracket on the engine front
cylinder head.
38. 2WD: Install a new front mount bolt (A), and install
the front mount stop (B).
41. Install the harness clamp brackets on the engine

rear cylinder head.
39. Remove the engine support hanger, engine hanger 8 x 1.25 mm

adapters, and engine hanger balancer bar. 26 N-m
42. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 44. Connect the transmission range switch connector
connector (A), output shaft (countershaft) speed (A), and install the harness clamp (B) on the clamp
sensor connector (B), ATF temperature sensor bracket (C).
connector (C), and 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (D). Do not allow water,
fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign particles to enter
any of the connectors.
43. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B), and secure the hoses with the clips (C)
(see page 14-248).
46. Secure the harness cover (A) and cover bracket (B)
with the bolts.
47. Connect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

valve C connector (C).
48. Install the harness cover (A) on the harness cover/ 51. Secure the shift cable bracket (F) with the nuts.
clamp bracket (B), and secure it with the bolt.
52. Install the starter (A) and new gasket (B) (see page
4-10). Install the mounting bolt (C) through the
harness clamp bracket hole (D), and into the lower
mounting bolt thread hole (E).
12 x 1.25 mm R
6 x 1 . 0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
49. Connect the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch connector (C), and install the harness clamp
(D) on the bracket. Connect the A/T clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector (E), and A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector
(F).

bushing (A) in the cable end (B). Attach the shift 53. Install the starter cables (A), and install the harness
cable end to the control lever (C), then insert the clamps (B) on the clamp brackets (C).
control pin (D) into the control lever hole through
the shift cable end, and secure the control pin with
the spring clip/washer (E).
6 x 1.0 mm
55. Install the transmission breather tube (A) over the 60. Refill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to
breather pipe (B) at the transmission housing, and the upper level line.
install the tube in the clamp (C) at the dot (D) on the
tube with facing out. 61. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page
14-214).
cover.

65. Install the front bulkhead cover.
67. Set the parking brake, run the engine at fast idle,
and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock
56. Install the power steering pump outlet line (A) with several times to bleed air from the system. Recheck
the new O-ring (B) to the pump, and secure the the fluid level, and refill if necessary.
hose clamp (C) with the bolt.
68. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
6 x 1 .0 mm 6 x 1 .0 mm
the transmission through all positions three times.
Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position
indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
69. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it

up to normal operating temperature (the radiator
fan comes on).
70. Turn off the engine, and check the ATF level
(see page 14-213).
71. Do the road test (see page 14-185).
navigation).

57. Connect the steering joint (see page 17-27). (see page 22-255).
58. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). 74. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment
(see page 18-5).
59. Center the SRS cable reel and install the steering
wheel (see page 17-24).
ATF Cooler Cleaning
Special Tools Required 2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded
• ATF cooler cleaner GHTTTCF6H electrical outlet.
• Magnetic nonbypass spin-on filter GTHGNBP2
These special tools are available through the Honda INOTICE I
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857. Make sure the outlet has no other appliances
(light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords)
Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler
automatic transmission, you must thoroughly clean the cleaner into an extension cord or drop light;
ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to you could damage the unit.
do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission
failure.
The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1

delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the
security of all hoses and connections. Always wear
safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and
protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on
your skin, rinse with water immediately.
A WARNING I
Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result
in burns and other serious injuries.
Always wear eye protection and protective
clothing, and follow all instructions in this 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green
manual. indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait
1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating
temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid when the temperature gauge reads 140 °to 150 °F.)
level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle
Use only Honda ATF-Z1; do not use any additives. switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too
low for the tank heater to work (see step 1 of this
procedure).
4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach

them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo
bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner.
<2®
5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the 11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
line that normally goes to the external filter on the
transmission). 12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. open and close the air purge valve periodically.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to 5-minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge
125 psi) to the air purge valve. valve open.
INOTICE I NOTE: While the pump is running with the air

The quick-connect fitting has a one-way purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
check valve to keep ATF from entering your from the filler/breather tube vents.
shop's air system. Do not remove or replace
the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with 13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR
the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve
your coupler is not compatible. open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and
hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve.
8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green
indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the 14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, cooler lines.
open and close the air purge valve periodically to
cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
5-minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge 16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve.
valve open. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air 17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming cooler inlet and outlet lines.
from the filler/breather tube vents.
18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet.
Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner

working properly:
• Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters
once a year or when you notice a restriction in the
ATF flow.
• Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
• Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty.
FILLER CAP
9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR

toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off.
Leave the air purge valve open for at least
15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual
ATF, then close the valve.
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet
line. M A G N E TIC N O N BYPASS
S P IN -O N FILTER
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement
1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler lines

(B) and ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips
(C ).
2. Clamp the ATF cooler hose with the yellow mark

(D) on the clamp (E).
Shift Lever Removal

SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) in the SRS
before doing repairs or service.
1. Remove the steering column covers (see step 6 on

page 17-26).
2. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-90).
4. Remove the nut (A) securing the shift cable end,

then separate the shift cable (B) from the shift lever.
7. Remove the three bolts securing the shift lever

assembly, remove the harness clamp (C), then
remove the shift lever assembly (D).
5. Rotate the socket holder (C) on the shift cable a

quarter turn; the tab (D) on the socket holder will be
in the opening (E) of the socket holder bracket (F).
Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable
from the socket holder bracket. Do not remove the
shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (G) and
damper (H).
Shift Lever Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the
SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the N position indicator comes on.
1. Install the shift lever assembly (A) on the steering

column, and install the harness clamp (B).
6. Place the shift lever in the N position, then insert a

6.0mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the positioning
hole (B) on the detent plate, and into the
2. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector (C) and positioning hole (C) on the control bracket. The
park pin switch connector (D). shift lever is secured in the N position.
3. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift
position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable guide
(B) and damper (C) to adjust the shift position.
A
7. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 9. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from
with the slot in the socket holder bracket (C), then the socket holder bracket, and reinstall the shift
slide the holder into the bracket. Install the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by mounting stud while the shift cable is on the socket
aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting holder bracket.
(G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder a
quarter turn to secure the shift cable. Do not install 10. Install and tighten the nut.
the shift cable by holding the shift cable guide (H)
and damper (I).
11. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
to each position, and check that the A/T gear
8. Check that the shift cable end (A) is properly position indicator follows the transmission range
installed on the mounting stud (B). switch.
Properly Installed:
13. Install the instrument panel (see page 20-90).
14. Install the steering column covers (see page 17-27).
trr
Cab le end rides on the bottom
of the mounting stud.
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
1. Apply grease (Molykote 103 or an equivalent) to these parts:
• Sliding surfaces on the detent plate.

• Sliding area on shift lever and control bracket.
• Select link and shift lever contacting area.
• Select link and control bracket contacting area.
• One side washer opposite of the self-locking nut.
• Pivot washer.
• Shift lever bushing.
2. Apply silicone grease (P/N 08798-9013) to movable parts of the shift lock mechanism.
4 mm SCREW
3 N-m
Shift Cable Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 10. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket.
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) in the SRS 11. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket
before doing repairs or service. (A).

page 17-26).


control lever (E).
13. Remove the cable clamp (A) from the shift cable
bracket (B), and remove the nuts securing the shift
cable bracket.

in the opening (E) of the socket holder bracket (F).
from the socket holder bracket. Do not remove the
shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (G) and
damper (H).

7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery,

then disconnect the positive cable. 14. Remove the shift cable grommet (C), and pull out
the shift cable (D).
remove the battery and battery tray. 15. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet
hole (E), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not
9. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake bend the shift cable excessively.
air duct.
(cont'd)
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
16. Secure the shift cable bracket (A) with the 21. Place the shift lever in the N position, then insert a
mounting nuts, and install the cable clamp in its 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the positioning
bracket. hole (B) on the detent plate, and into the
6 x1.0 mm positioning hole (C) on the control bracket. The
shift lever is secured in the N position.
22. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
with the slot in the socket holder bracket (C), then
slide the holder into the bracket. Install the shift
cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by
aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting
17. Apply molybdenum grease to the hole in the (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder a
bushing (B) in the cable end (C). Attach the shift quarter turn to secure the shift cable. Do not install
cable end to the control lever (D), then insert the the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (H)
control pin (E) into the hole in the control lever and and damper (I).
through the cable end. Secure the control pin with
the spring clip/washer (F).
18. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts on the
transmission housing.
19. Check that the transmission is in the N position at

the control lever on the transmission range switch.
20. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift
position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable guide
(B) and damper (C) to adjust the shift position.
A
23. Check that the shift cable end (A) is properly 27. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
cover.

LJ
30. Move the shift lever to each position, and check
that the A/T gear position indicator follows the
Improperly Installed:
31. 4WD: Raise the vehicle, make sure it is securely
supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to
m rotate freely.
Cable end rides on the bottom
of the mounting stud. 32. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all positions.
24. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from
the socket holder bracket, and reinstall the shift 33. Install the instrument panel (see page 20-90).
cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the socket 34. Install the steering column covers (see page 17-27).
holder bracket.
navigation).

(see page 22-255).
25. Install and tighten the nut.
Shift Cable Adjustment
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the Pull the shift cable back two steps so that the shift
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) in the SRS position is in N. Do not hold the shift cable guide
before doing repairs or service. (B) and damper (C) to adjust the shift position.
A
page 17-26).

7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the

R position indicator comes on.

in the opening (E) of the socket holder bracket (F). 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
from the socket holder bracket Do not remove the
shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (G) and
damper (H).
9. Place the shift lever in the N position, then insert a 10. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the positioning with the slot in the socket holder bracket (C), then
hole (B) on the detent plate, and into the slide the holder into the bracket. Install the shift
positioning hole (C) on the control bracket. The cable end (D) over the mounting stud (E) by
shift lever is secured in the N position. aligning its square hole (F) with the square fitting
(G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder a
quarter turn to secure the shift cable. Do not install
the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (H)
and damper (I).
11. Check that the shift cable end (A) is properly

installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Instal l ed:
c f = f = r
\ B
Improperly Installed:
c I i I
( !
trr
Cable end rides on the bottom
of the mounting stud.
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
12. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from

the socket holder bracket, and reinstall the shift
cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the socket
holder bracket.
13. Install and tighten the nut.
15. Move the shift lever to each position, and check

that the A/T gear position indicator follows the
16. 4WD: Raise the vehicle, make sure it is securely

supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
securely supported, and allow the front wheels to
rotate freely.
17. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all positions.
18. Install the instrument panel (see page 20-90).
19. Install the steering column covers (see page 17-27).

A /T TEMP INDICATOR (4WD)

Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-90
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Test, page 14-261
Circuit Diagram
KM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
..r. ... ___

11 1 23 4 | 5 I 6 j 7 8 j 9 j i2 3 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 |9 I
1
10 11 12
20 2 1 22
MM 17 18 19
23 24 25
i
20 (22!
j 1 j
10 11 na 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
23 24 25
1 I . / i
26 2 7 28 29 1 / 31 1 / 33 34 35 26 27 28 / I 30 I31 I32 33 34 35
361 / 38
Z IZ liiL i2
43 | 44 | | 36 | 37 38 j 39 | 40 J 41 J
42 (43) (44) |
AOI44P) CIOH44P)

< £ >
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio 7. Check for continuity between terminals at the
system and the navigation system (if equipped), transmission range switch connector. There should
then write down the audio presets. be continuity between the terminals in the
following table for each transmission range switch
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, position.
Transmissi on Range Switch Connector
remove the battery and battery tray. Connector Term inal/Signal
Posi § 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
4. Remove the intake manifold cover and the intake tion
air duct. 2 D R P GND 1 D3 N
ATP A TP
FWD NP
5. Remove the battery base. P o O rs

\J
R o -O
6. Disconnect the transmission range switch
N r\ — TV- rs
KJ
connector.
D U n
KJ
D3 Kj -T J
^ V - rs
KJ
/*% r\
2 KJ .. kJ
1 o -O '
8. Transmission range switch test is finished if the

test results are OK.
If there is no continuity between any terminals,
check that the transmission range switch
installation. If the transmission range switch
installation is OK, replace the transmission range
switch (see page 14-262).
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio 9. Disconnect the transmission range switch
system and the navigation system (if equipped), connector.
10. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (A) on the
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, control lever (B), and remove the nut (C), lock
then disconnect the positive terminal. washer, spring washer (D) and control lever.


air duct.

(A).
6 x 1 .0 mm
11. Pry the lock tabs of the lock washer (E) on the
transmission range switch (F), hold the control
shaft (G) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen the
locknut (H).
12. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove

the transmission range switch (two bolts).
13. Set the new transmission range switch (A) to the N

position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the N position, and the control shaft hole (B) aligns
with the N position line (C).
N
control lever (E).

14. Move the control shaft from the P position to the N 16. Install the new lock washer (A) over the control
position by turning the control shaft with a 6.0 mm shaft (B) while aligning the projection (C) of the lock
wrench. washer with the N positioning line (D) on the
transmission range switch (E), and install the
locknut (F).
15. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently

over the control shaft (B), and install the bolts
loosely.
17. Push the locknut against the transmission housing

to seat the transmission range switch into the
control shaft, and tighten the locknut (A) to 12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft) while holding the control shaft
(B) with a 6.0 mm wrench (C), then bend the lock
tabs (D) of the lock washer against the locknut.
18. Tighten the bolts (E) to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
securing the transmission range switch.
(cont'd)
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
19. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (B), lock 29. Check that the back-up lights come on when the
washer (C), and locknut (D) on the control shaft (E). shift lever is in the R position.
30. Allow all four wheels (4WD) or front wheels (2WD)

to rotate freely, then start the engine, and check the
shift lever operation.
navigation).

(see page 22-255).
20. Tighten the locknut to the specified torque, then

bend the lock tab of the lock washer against the
locknut.
21. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean,

then connect the connector securely.

bushing in the shift cable end. Attach the shift cable
end to the control lever, then insert the control pin
into the control lever hole through the shift cable
end, and secure the control pin with the spring clip/
washer.
cover.

27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all positions, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization with the A/T gear
position indicator.
28. Check that the engine will start in the P and N

positions, and will not start in any other shift lever
position.
PARK PIN SWITCH STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY DATA LINK

Key Interlock System Circuit KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
Troubleshooting, page 14-272 Key Interlock System Circuit (DLC)
Test, page 14-275 Troubleshooting, page 14-272
Circuit Diagram
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect the HDS to the DIG. 6. Shift into the P position by pushing the shift cable
until it stops, and press the brake pedal.: Do not
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous press the accelerator. 6
Test Menu, and check that the shift lock solenoid
operates w ith the HDS. 7. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 while pressing
Does the shift lock solenoid work properly ? the brake pedal.
YES— Go to step 13. SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
NO—Goto step 3. .
3. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-249).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). IG1 (YEL) SLS (WHT/RED)
5. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 8.
IG l (YEL)
NO— G oto step 9. :
YES—Goto step 6.
NO—Check for a blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the

driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open or short in the wire between shift lock
solenoid connector terminal No. 1 and the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box.■
(cont'd)
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
between shift lock solenoid connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. The shift position must be in the 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
P position.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENO ID CONNECTOR
terminal A2 and shift lock solenoid connector
terminal No. 2.
SHIFT LOCK PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

101 (YEL) SLS (WHT/RED) SOLENOID
CONNECTOR
.......... ^
SLS (WHT/RED)
SLS
(WHT/RED)
h i 2 3 |4 |5 | 6 7 8 |9 I
Wire side of female terminals J ------1. ■ 10 11 12 / M l / I / 17 18 19
1
1 2 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
■ 26 27 28 2 9 i / | 3 l L /
33 34 35
|3 6 |/ 3 § j Z ! Z ]£ L 42 4 3 144 1
Is there battery voltage? Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
YES—Repair a short to ground in the wire between female terminals
PCM connector terminal A2 and the shift lock
solenoid.!
NO—Check the shift lock mechanism. If the
mechanism is OK, replace the shift lock solenoid YES—Substitute a known-good PCM (see page
(see page 14-274). ■ 14-9) and recheck. ■

connector terminal A2 and the shift lock solenoid
connector. ■
13. Press the brake pedal.
Are the brake lights ON?
YES— Go to step 14. PCM C O N N EC TO R A (44P) BRAKE PEDAL

POSITION SWITCH
NO—Repair faulty brake light circuit. ■ 4P CONNECTOR
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. BK SW (WHT/BLK) BK SW

(WHT/BLK)
15. Jump the SCS line w ith the HDS. I1 |2 3 4 |5 |6 |7 8 I9 L
1 10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
■ 1 2
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
16. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). , I 26 27
36 K
28 2 9 L /|3 1 [ / 33
38 l / l / l 41 42
34 35
4 3 |44|
3/4
17. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminal A8 and body ground while pressing the female terminals female terminals
brake pedal and when the brake pedal is released.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) Is there continuity?
YES—Substitute a known-good PCM (see page

B K S W (W H T/B L K ) 14-9) and recheck. ■
f ii .....il ~
1 1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I9 L
1
10 11 12 / I 1 4 I / V 17 18 19 NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
B
20 21 22 X T 23 24 25 connector terminal A8 and the brake pedal position
.
I 26 27 28 29 1 /|3 1 1 / 33 34 35 B
|38 j / m / \ / w 42 4 3 14 4 1
switch. ■
Is there battery voltage while the brake pedal is

pressed, and no voltage when the pedal is
released?
NO—Goto step 18.
(confd)
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Disconnect the transmission range switch 21. Checkfor continuity between PCM connector
connector. terminal A12 and body ground.
20. Check for continuity between transmission range PCM CO N N EC TO R A (44P)

ATP P (BLU/BLK)
T R A N S M IS S IO N RANGE ...ir~ ~ il...... . ....
SW ITC H C O N N EC TO R
OO
CO
1 1 1 2 J I4 | 5 | 6 | 7
i 10 11 12 / l u i / i / 17 18 19
1
20 21 22 23 24 25
.■ 26 27 28 291 /|3 1 1 / 33 34 35 1
N / M Z iZ M l 42 4 3 1441
Terminal side of female terminal s
Wire side of femal e terminals Is there continuity?
YES—Repair short in the wire between PCM

Is there continuity? connector terminal A12 and the transmission range
switch connector. ■
YES—Goto step 21.
NO—Go to step 22.
NO—Goto step 24.
terminal A12 and transmission range switch
T R A N S M IS S IO N RANGE PCM C O N N EC TO R A (44P)

S W ITC H CO N N EC TO R
A TP P ATP P (B LU/BLK )
(BLU/BLK)
l ZJ,
CO
11 I 2 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 Oo
I 10 11 12 / 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
1
20 21 22 j x T 23 24 25
.1 26 27 28 29 1/13 1 1/ 33 34 35 1
10
36'< 38 l / 1 / l 41 42 4 3 14 4 1

female terminals femal e terminal s

connector terminal A12 and the transmission range
switch connector. ■
23. Checkfor continuity between transmission range 24. Test the transmission range switch (see page
switch connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. 14-261 ).H
TRANSMISSION RANGE Is the switch OK?

SWITCH CONNECTOR
1PGtBLK)
NO—Replace the transmission range switch
1 2 3 4 5 (see page 14-262). ■ ,
6 7 8 9 10
25. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
26. Check the APP SENSOR in the data list with the
HDS. Do not press the accelerator.
Is the accelerator pedal position sensor opening
11 % and above, or the sensor voltage 0.90 V and
Is there continuity? above?
YES—Substitute a known-good PCM (see page YES—Check the APP sensor (see page 11-274). ■
14-9) and recheck. ■
NO—Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9)
NO—Repair open in the wire between transmission and recheck. ■
range switch connector terminal No. 5 and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G10D.B
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Remove the shift lever assembly.
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before 6. Shift the shift lever to P position.
doing repair or service.
7. At park pin switch side, check for continuity
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I). The shift lever between park pin switch connector terminals No. 1
must be in the P position. and No. 3. Do not pull the shift lever.
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector. PARK PIN SWITCH CONNECTOR
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to the

LOCK (0) position.
Can the ignition switch be turned the LOCK (0)

position? (BLK)
izu (WHT/BLK)
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock

assembly (see page 17-29). ■ Terminal side of male terminals
4. Remove the ATP P relay and park pin switch relay,

and test the relays (see page 22-82). Is there continuity?
Are the relays OK ? YES—Faulty the park pin switch, replace the shift
lever assembly (see page 14-249). The park pin
YES—Go to step 5. switch is not available from the shift lever
assembly. ■
NO—Replace the faulty relay. ■
NO—Go to step 8.
<S0
8. Check for continuity between park pin switch relay 10. Check for continuity between ATP P relay 4P socket
4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground. terminal No. 3 and transmission range switch
PARK PIN SWITCH ATP P RELAY 4P SOCKET
RELAY 4P SOCKET
5 4 3
KEYLOCK SOL ATP P (BLU/BLK)
(WHT/RED)
ATP P (BLU/BLK)
Terminal side of femal e terminals
10
TRANSMI SSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire Wire side of female terminals
between the park pin switch relay and the park pin
switch. ■ Is there continuity?
NO—Go to step 9. YES—Test the transmission range switch (see page

14-261). If the transmission range switch is OK,
9. Disconnect the transmission range switch check for poor connections or loose terminals
connector. between the ATP P relay and the transmission
range switch. ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ATP P

relay and the transmission range switch. ■
Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). SRS components are located in this area. Review the
1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-249).
2. Remove the screws (A) securing the shift lock

solenoid (B), then remove the shift lock solenoid.
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test in Miscellaneous

Test Menu, and check that the shift lock solenoid
operates with the HDS.
3. Check that the shift lever can be moved out of the P

position when Shift Lock Solenoid: ON. Move the
shift lever back in the P position, and make sure it
locks with Shift Lock Solenoid: OFF.
4. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift

lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when
the shift lock release is released.
5. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly,

perform shift lock system troubleshooting 3. Remove the shift lock solenoid plunger (C) and
(see page 14-267). plunger spring (D) from the shift lock solenoid, and
replace the shift lock solenoid.
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger and plunger

spring in the new shift lock solenoid.
5. Apply silicone grease to the tip (E) of the shift lock

extension, and install the shift lock solenoid by
aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger
with the tip of the shift lock extension.
6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the screws.
7. Install the shift lever assembly (see page 14-250).

Park Pin Switch Test


page 17-26).
2. Disconnect the park pin switch connector.
3. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and check

for continuity between park pin switch connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 3. There should be no
continuity.
4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity

between connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
5. If the park pin switch is fails the test, replace the

shift lever assembly (see page 14-250). The park
pin switch is not available separately from the shift
lever assembly.
Transmission Disassembly

Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
1. Remove the ATF dipstick (A) and the dipstick tube (B).
2. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B (C) (six bolts), ATF feed pipes (D) (three), O-rings
(three), and gasket.
3. Remove the solenoid valve cover (E) (seven bolts), dowel pins (two), and gasket.
4. Disconnect the solenoid valve connectors, then remove the solenoid harness connector (F).
5. Remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (G) (four bolts), ATF feed pipes (H) (three), O-rings (two), and
gasket.
6. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (I) on the control 16. Gut the lock tab (A) of the mainshaft locknut (B)
lever (J), and remove the nut, lock washer, spring using a chisel (C).
washer and control lever.
NOTE: Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
7. Pry the lock tabs of the lock washer (K) on the transmission.
transmission range switch (L), hold the control
shaft (M) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen the
locknut (N).
8. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove

the transmission range switch (two bolts).
9. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor (O) and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor (P).
10. Remove the ATF temperature sensor connector

from the connector bracket (Q) and harness clamp
from clamp bracket, then remove the ATF
temperature sensor (R).
17. Remove the locknut (A) from the mainshaft (B).
11. Remove the end cover (S) (three bolts), snap ring
cap (T) (two bolts), sealing plug (U), and washer (V).
12. Remove the line bolts (W), ATF cooler lines (X), and
sealing washers (Y).
13. Remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch (Z) and sealing washer.
14. Remove the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch (AA) and sealing washer.
15. Slip the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
18. Pry the lock washer (C), and remove it.
(cont'd)
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
19. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (10 x 1.25 mm) (A) (23 bolts), 12 x 1.25 mm bolt (B),
transmission hanger (C), and ground terminal bracket (D).
20. While expanding the snap ring of the countershaft 27. Remove the park pawl stop (M), park pawl (N), pawl
bearing using the snap ring pliers, lift the spring (O), and pawl shaft (P).
transmission housing (E).
28. Remove the mainshaft (Q), countershaft (R), shift
fork, and secondary shaft (S) together, and remove
the needle bearing (T) from the torque converter
housing.
21. Release the pliers, and remove the transmission

housing, two dowel pins (F), and gasket (G).
22. Remove the ATF feed pipes (H) (four) from the
accumulator body.
23. Remove the ATF feed pipes (I) (two) from the
torque converter housing.
24. Remove the mainshaft holder from the mainshaft. T

25. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (J) on the shift 29. Remove the control shaft and park lever link (U).
fork (K), then remove the bolt (L) and washer.
30. Remove the baffle plate (V).
26. Unhook the detent spring from the detent arm.
31. Remove the differential assembly (W).
32. 4WD: Remove the transfer output shaft (X).
33. Remove the intermediary shaft (Y).
(cont'd)
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
34. Remove the ATF strainer (A) (one bolt).
35. Remove the accumulator body (B) (11 bolts), dowel pins (two), detent arm (C), arm shaft (D), and separator plate
(E).
36. Remove the ATF feed pipe (F) from the main valve 47. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B)
body. thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is good condition and that inlet opening is not
37. Remove the secondary valve body (G) (one bolt), clogged.
dowel pins (two), and separator plate (H). Do not let
the check balls (I) (three) and the choke (J) fall out.
38. Remove the regulator valve body (K) (eight bolts),

stator shaft (L), stator shaft stop (M), dowel pins
(two), and separator plate (N).
39. Remove the main valve body (O) (8 mm: three bolts,
6 mm: seven bolts). Do not let the cooler check
valve (ball) (P), spring (Q), and lubrication check
valve (R) fall out.
40. Remove the torque converter check valve (S) and

valve spring (T).
41. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft (U), then 48. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
remove the ATF pump drive gear (V) and driven the inlet opening, and replace if it is clogged or
gear (W). damaged.
42. Remove the dowel pins (two) and main separator

plate (X).
43. Remove the ATF passage pipe (Y).
44. Remove the ATF magnet (Z), clean it, then reinstall.
45. Remove the O-ring (AA) from the ATF strainer, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
46. Remove the O-ring (BB) from the stator shaft, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
Reverse Idler Gear Removal/ Reverse Idler Gear Disassembly/
Installation Inspection/Reassembly
1. Remove the reverse idler gear assembly (A) from 1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the thrust
the transmission housing. washer (B), reverse idler gear (C), needle bearings
(D), and thrust washer (E) from the reverse idler
-8x 1.25 mm gear shaft/holder (F).
26 Nm
2. Install the reverse idler gear assembly with the two 2. Inspect the reverse idler gear and gear shaft for
dowel pins (B) in the transmission housing. excessive wear and damage.
3. Inspectthe needle bearings for galling and rough

movement.
4. Install the thrust washer and needle bearings over

the gear shaft.
5. Install the reverse idler gear in the direction shown.
6. Install the thrust washer, then install the snap ring

to secure the idler gear.
ATF Filter Removal/Inspection/Installation
1. Remove the three 6.0 mm bolts securing the ATF

filter cover (A) and ATF pipe (B).
6 m 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N-m 12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft) (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 I bf-ft)
2. Remove the ATF pipe from the ATF filter cover, and
remove the ATF filter (C) from the cover.
3. Clean the ATF filter, then check that it is in good

condition, and is not clogged. Replace the ATF filter
if it is clogged or damaged.
4. Install the ATF filter with the new O-ring (D) in the
filter cover, and install the ATF pipe in the cover,
then install them in the transmission housing.
5. Secure the ATF filter cover with the two bolts (E),
then secure the ATF pipe with the bolt (F).
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
1, Cover the tip of the 1st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe 1. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF feed pipe cap
with a shop rag. (B).
2. Apply air pressure to the ATF feed pipe hole of the

1st-hold clutch pressure circuit, and remove the
ATF feed pipe cap from the transmission housing.
2. Install the ATF feed pipe cap in the transmission

housing. Do not pinch the O-ring.
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap, Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the ATF feed pipe cap from the

transmission housing (see page 14-284).
2. Remove the snap ring (A) from the feed pipe cap
(B), then remove the feed pipe guide (C), O-rings
(D) (E), and 1st clutch ATF feed pipe (F).
3. Replace the 1st clutch ATF feed pipe or 1st-hold

clutch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe cap assembly.
The 1st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe
cap is not available separately.
4. Install the new O-ring (D) over the 1st clutch ATF
feed pipe, then install the feed pipe over the 1st-
hold clutch ATF feed pipe (G) while aligning the
feed pipe tabs (H) with the guide in the cap.
5. Install the new O-ring (E) in the cap and feed pipe
guide, then secure the guide with the snap ring.
Mainshaft Bearing Removal Mainshaft Bearing Installation

• Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 • Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing, expand the snap 1. Install the bearing (A) in the direction shown.
ring with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing
out. Do not remove the snap ring unless it's
necessary to clean the groove in the housing.
2. Expand the snap ring with the snap ring pliers, and
insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
3. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into

the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
around it.
4. After installing the bearing, check that the snap ring

(A)is seated in the bearing and housing groove,
and that the ring end gap (B) is 0—7 mm (0—0.28 in.).
'03
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Park Lever Shaft Bearing

• Bearing remover shaft set, 20 mm 07936-3710600 • Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 07936-GE00100
• Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-3710100 • Bearing remover head, 10 mm 07936-GE00200
• Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201 • Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 • Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the 1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the
transmission housing using the bearing remover transmission housing using the bearing remover
shaft set (20 mm), the bearing remover shaft head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10 mm),
handle, and the sliding hammer weight. and the sliding hammer weight.
2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the 2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the
transmission housing using the driver and the transmission housing using the driver and the
attachment (37 X 40 mm). attachment (22 x 24 mm).
Control Shaft Bearing Replacement Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement
Speci al Tools Required Special Tools Required

• Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 07936-GE00100 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Bearing remover head, 10 mm 07936-GE00200 • Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
• Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000 1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
• Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the control shaft bearing from the

transmission housing using the bearing remover
head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10 mm),
and the sliding hammer weight.
2. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing

using the driver and the attachment (22 x 24 mm).
2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the

transmission housing using the driver and the
attachment (22 x 24 mm).
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: Valve body repair is only necessary if one or 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
more of the valves in a valve body do not slide should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
smoothly in their bores. Use this procedure to free the own weight. If not, repeat steps 4 and 5, then retest.
valves. If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for

about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve

drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half of the ATF-soaked #600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist
the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore
tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the paper
as you push it in and out. 7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
require much polishing to remove any burrs. lubricant.
5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the

entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
compressed air.
Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown for the main valve body (see page 14-291),
secondary valve body (see page 14-293), regulator
valve body (see page 14-294), and accumulator
body (see page 14-295). Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
of the valve body, then secure the valve cap with
the valve cap clip.
3. Install the valve (A) and valve spring (B) in the valve
body. Push the valve spring in with a screwdriver,
then install the spring seat (C).
M ain Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the cooler check valve, it may magnetize the check valve (ball).
3. Inspect the main valve body for scoring and damage.
4. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair (see page 14-289).
5. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
6. Replace the filter with a new one, and install it and the lubrication check valve in the direction shown.
TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP

CHECK VALVE TIMING VALVE
VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

Valve Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
A Cooler check valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 5.8 (0.228) 14.5 (0.571) 6.8
B Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6(0.339) 35.0(1.378) 12.6
C Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 6.6 (0.260) 30.9(1.217) 11.1
D Shift valve D spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 32.2(1.268) 13.4
E Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
F Shift valve A spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
G Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0.063) 10.4(0.409) 33.5(1.319) 9.8
H CPC valve C spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
I Shift valve E spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 49.0(1.929) 17.2
J Relief valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 32.1 (1.264) 11.2
K Lubrication control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 7.7 (0.303) 28,8(1.134) 10.4
L Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 63.0 (2.480) 22.4
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear:
0.210—0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear:
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure

the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Cl earance:
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the check balls.
3. Inspect the secondary valve body for scoring and damage.
6. Install the 1st accumulator choke in the direction shown.
S ER VO C ONTROL
REVERSE CPC V A LV E V A LV E

Valve Springs Standard (New -Unit: mm (in.)
A Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8(0.701) 7.9
B Servo control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 35.7(1.406) 17.2
C Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
D CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
E Kick-down valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
F CPC valve B spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
2. Inspect the regulator valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
6. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the stop bolt hole, then press the spring cap into the valve body,
and tighten the stop bolt.
7. Install the servo valve with the new O-ring, and the 3rd accumulator piston with the new O-ring.

Valve Springs Standard (New 1-Unit: mm (in.)
A 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 41.4(1.630) 5.5
B Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9(1.689) 14.2
0.8(0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 44.3(1.744) 25.5
C Regulator valve spring B 1.4 (0.055) 8.8 (0.346) 44.0(1.732) 12.0
D Regulator valve spring A 1.85 (0.073) 14.7 (0.579) 86.9 (3.421) 16.2
E Stator reaction spring 5.5(0.217) 37.4(1.472) 30.3(1.193) 2.1
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
2. Inspect the accumulator body for scoring and damage.
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones.

Valve Springs Standard (New bUnit: mm (in.)
A 1st-hold accumulator spring 2.0 (0.079) 13.1 (0.516) 42.9(1.689) 9.8
B 4th accumulator spring 3.0 (0.118) 19.6 (0.772) 45.3(1.783) 6.4
C 1st accumulator spring A 2.2 (0.087) 17.7 (0.697) ■77.6 (3.055) 12.1
D 1st accumulator spring B 2.0 (0.079) 7.1 (0.280) 49.0(1.929) 10.0
E 2nd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 53.4 (2.102) 7.5
F 5th accumulator spring A 2.2 (0.087) 16.4(0.646) 75.7 (2.980) 14.2
G 5th accumulator spring B 2.0 (0.079) 6.0 (0.236) 45.5(1.791) 11.6
Shift Solenoid Valve, Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Removal and
Installation
NOTE: 5. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
• Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to remove holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
and install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold the position the mounting bracket on top of the bracket
solenoid valve body. of torque converter clutch solenoid valve.
• Do not install shift solenoid valve C before installing
torque converter clutch solenoid valve (D). If shift 6. Install shift solenoid valve B (black connector) by
solenoid valve C is installed before installing torque holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
converter clutch solenoid valve, it may damage the install mounting bracket contacts to the
hydraulic control system. accumulator body.
1. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the

solenoid valves by holding the solenoid valve body.
2. Install the new O-rings (E) on each solenoid valves.
NOTE: If you are installing a new solenoid valve, it

comes with new O-rings already installed.
6 x 1.0 mm
3. Install shift solenoid valve A (brown connector) by

holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the
mounting bracket contacts to the accumulator body.
4. Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve (black

connector) by holding the solenoid valve body; be
sure the mounting bracket contacts to the
accumulator body.
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3, Install the new oil seal flush to the housing using.-
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25—40 mm the driver and the attachment (72 x 75 mm).
07736-AQ1000B or 07736-A01000A
- Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal using

the adjustable bearing puller (25—40 mm) and a
commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A),
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing using the driver and the attachment
(62x68 mm).
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the bearing (A) in the housing using the
* Adjustable bearing puller, 25—40 mm driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm); install
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A bearing outer notch-cut (B) in depth (C) of 0—
* Driver 07749-0010000 0.03 mm (0—0.001 in.) below the housing surface
* Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 (D).
07749-001000©
1. Remove the countershaft bearing from the torque
converter housing using the adjustable bearing
puller (25—40 mm) and a commercially available
3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
07738-A01000B o r
07736-A01000A
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A) into the housing,

then install the new bearing (B) in the direction
shown.
B
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the ATF guide collar from the torque
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25—40 mm converter housing.
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Bearing remover shaft set, 30 mm 07936-8890300
• Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-3710100
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200
•Attachment, 62 x68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the lock washer (A)

and bearing set plate (B).
4. Remove the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm secondary shaft

bearing from the torque converter housing using
the bearing remover shaft set (30 mm), the bearing
remover shaft handle, and the sliding hammer
weight.
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25—40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
(confd)
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm bearing into the torque 7. Install the bearing in the direction shown in the
converter housing using the driver and the housing using the driver and the attachment
attachment (37 x 40 mm). (62 x 68 mm).
6. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar

(B), then install the guide collar in the torque
converter housing. 8. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the set
plate mounting surface, then install the set plate (A)
by aligning it with the bearing groove.
6 x 1 .0 m m
12 N-m
9. Install the new lock washer (B) and bolt, then bend
the lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Drive the bearing into the housing using the driver
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25—40 mm and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
•D river 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25—40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A), then install the new
bearing (B) in the housing.
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement

• Bearing remover shaft set, 12 mm 07936-1660101
- Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the bearing
remover shaft set (12 mm) and the sliding hammer
weight.

housing using the driver and the attachment
(22 x 24 mm).
07749-0010000 07748-0010800
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the thrust needle bearing (A), mainshaft 2. Inspect the condition of the sealing rings (I). If the
5th gear (B), needle bearing (C), thrust needle sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged,
bearing (D), mainshaft 5th gear collar (E), 4th/5th remove the set ring (J) and needles bearing (K),
clutch (F), and O-rings (G) from the mainshaft (H). and replace the sealing rings with new ones.
3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and needle

bearing for wear and rough movement
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Inspect the 4th gear for wear and damage, and

inspect 4th gear bearing for wear and rough
rotation.
6. Replace the mainshaft 4th gear (L) if the 4th gear is

worn or damaged, or the bearing is worn or
damaged.
7. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and

excessive wear.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly.
9. Wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring

damage, install the new O-rings on the mainshaft,
then remove the tape.
10. Install the 4th/5th clutch.
11. Install the mainshaft 5th gear collar, thrust needle

bearing, needle bearing, mainshaft 5th gear, and
thrust needle bearing.
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Slide the new mainshaft 4th gear (A) over the
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 mainshaft (B), then press it into place using the
driver (40 mm I.D.) and a press.
1. Remove the mainshaft 4th gear (A) with a press.
Place a shaft protector (B) between the press and
mainshaft (C) to prevent damaging the mainshaft.
Countershaft Disassembly
Exploded V ie w .
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
24 x 1.25 m m
167 N-m (17.0 kgf-m , 123 Ib f-ft)
Repl ace.
Left-hand threads
REVERSE GEAR CONICAL SPRI NG

WASHER
Repl ace.
NEEDLE BEARING
r©
REVERSE GEAR COLLAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB BALL BEARI NG
sthg I ar
— | - n THRUST W ASHER,
35 x 47 x 6 m m
NEEDLE-BEARING
WASHER, 5 0 .2 m m
SNAP RI NG Selective part
COTTER RETAINER
COTTERS, 39 m m 4TH GEAR
1ST GEAR
WASHER, m m m
Selective part
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
I DLER GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR
(cont'd)
Countershaft Disassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 3. Place the countershaft 5th gear (A) on press bases
following procedure. (B), and place a shaft protector (C) between the
countershaft (D) and a press to prevent damaging
1. Cut the lock tab (A) of the countershaft locknut (B) the countershaft.
using a chisel (C).

countershaft.
4. Press the countershaft out of the press-fitted

bearing (E) and the press-fitted reverse selector
2. Hold the countershaft securely with a wrench and a hub, and remove the countershaft while holding
vise, loosen the locknut, and remove it. The locknut the underside of the countershaft. The countershaft
has left-hand threads. falls down when pressing the countershaft out of
the press-fitted reverse selector hub. Some reverse
selector hubs are not press-fitted, and the
countershaft falls down when pressing the
countershaft out of press-fitted bearing.
5. Remove the remaining parts from the countershaft.
6. Inspect the bearing for galling and rough

movement.

excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
excessive wear and damage.
NOTE: If the countershaft is worn or damaged,

replace the countershaft with the same letter (A, B,
or C) for identification as the identifying letter on
the final driven gear.
8. Check the idler gear axial clearance and 4th gear

axial clearance (see page 14-307).
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Install 2nd gear (A), thrust needle bearing (B), 3. Set the dial indicator (A) on the idler gear (B).
needle bearing (C), idler gear (D), thrust needle
bearing (E), selective 56 mm washer (F), 1st gear
(G), 4th gear (H), selective 50.2 mm washer (I),
39 mm cotters (J), cotter retainer (K), and snap ring
(L) to the countershaft (M). Install the idler gear, 1st
gear, and 4th gear in the direction shown.
4. Measure the idler gear axial clearance in at least

three places while moving the idler gear. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.005—0.040 mm (0.0002—0.0016 in.)
2. Insert a feeler gauge blade (A) as thick as possible

between the 50.2 mm washer (B) and 4th gear (C). 5. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
56 mm washer and measure its thickness.
C
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the 8. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
clearance. 50.2 mm washer and measure its thickness.
WASHER, 56 mm 9. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the

No. Part Number Thickness clearance.
A 90582-RDK-000 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.)
B 90583-RDK-000 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.) WASHER, 50.2 mm
C 90584-RDK-000 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.) No. Part Number Thickness
D 90585 RDK-000 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.) A 90521-RDK-010 3.95 mm (0.1555 n.)
E 90586-RDK-000 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.) B 90522-RDK-010 3.97 mm (0.1563 n.)
F 90587-RDK-000 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) C 90523-RDK-010 3.99 mm (0.1571 n.)
G 90588-RDK-000 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.) D 90524-RDK-010 4.01 mm (0.1579 n.)
E 90525-RDK-010 4.03 mm (0.1587 n.)
7. Measure the clearance between the 4th gear (A) F 90526-RDK-010 4.05 mm (0.1594 n.)
and the 50.2 mm washer (B) with a feeler gauge (C) G 90527-RDK-010 4.07 mm (0.1602 n.)
in at least three places. Use the average as the H 90528-RDK-010 4.09 mm (0.1610 n.)
actual clearance. I 90529-RDK-010 4.11 mm (0.1618 n.)
J 90530-RDK-010 4.13 mm (0.1626 n.)
Standard; 0.005—0.040 mm (0.0002—0.0016 in.) K 90531-RDK-010 4.15 mm (0.1634 n.)
L 90532-RDK-010 4.17 mm (0.1642 n.)
M 90533-RDK-010 4.19 mm (0.1650 n.)
N 90534-RDK-010 4.21 mm (0.1657 n.)
0 90535-RDK-010 4.23 mm (0.1665 n.)
P 90536-RDK-010 4.25 mm (0.1673 n.)
Q 90537-RDK-010 4.27 mm (0.1681 n.)
R 90538-RDK-010 4.29 mm (0.1689 n.)
S 90539-RDK-010 4.31 mm (0.1697 n.)
T 90540-RDK-010 4.33 mm (0.1705 n.)
U 90541-RDK-010 4.35 mm (0.1713 n.)
Countershaft Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 countershaft (B), then press it Into place using the
driver (40 mm I.D.) and a press.
1. Install the 2nd gear (A), thrust needle bearing (B),
needle bearing (C), idler gear (D), thrust needle NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
bearing (E), 56 mm washer (F), 1st gear <G), 4th fitted, and can be installed without using the driver
gear (H), 50.2 mm washer (I), 39 mm cotters (J), (40 mm I.D.) and a press.
cotter retainer (K), and snap ring (L) on the
countershaft (M).
4. Install the reverse selector, reverse gear collar,

needle bearing, and reverse gear over the reverse
selector hub.
2. Install the 35 x 47 x 6 mm thrust washer (N) in the

direction shown, then install the needle bearing (O)
and the 5th gear (P).
(cont'd)
Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
5. Install the ball bearing (A) over the countershaft, 7. Hold the countershaft securely with a wrench and a
then press it into place using the driver (40 mm I.D.) vise, and tighten the locknut to 167 N-m (17.0 kgf-m,
and a press. 123 Ibf-ft).
NOTE:
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
• The locknut has left-hand threads.
8. Stake the locknut into its shaft in depth (A) of 0.7—

6. Install the new conical spring washer (A) in the 1.3 mm (0.03—0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (B).
direction shown, and install the new locknut (B).
<•£>
Secondary Shaft Disassembly
Exploded View -
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)

M 2 6 x 1.25 m m
178 N-m (18.2 kg f-m , 132 Ib f-ft)
Replace.
SPLINED WASHER
NEEDLE BEARI NG
BALL BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
^ 1 S T /1 S T -H 0 L D
CLUTCH
O-RINGS WASHER, 52 m m
Replace. Selective part
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST-HOLD
CLUTCH HUB
1ST CLUTCH
HUB
1ST GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
-2N D CLUTCH
-SN AP RING, 32 m m
' SEALING RINGS, 29 m m
(cont'd)
Secondary Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Place the idler gear (A) on press bases (B), and
Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A place a shaft protector (C) between the secondary
shaft (D) and a press to prevent damaging the
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the secondary shaft.
following procedure.
1. Cut the lock tab (A) of the secondary shaft locknut

(B) using a chisel (C).

secondary shaft.
5. Press the secondary shaft out of the press-fitted

bearing (E), and remove the secondary shaft while
holding the underside of the secondary shaft. The
secondary shaft falls down when pressing the
secondary shaft out of the press-fitted bearing.
2. Place a V-block (A) on the back of a vise (B), and
clamp the wrench, 40 x 42 mm in the vise jaws (C). 6. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch, 52 mm washer,
thrust needle bearing, 1st gear assembly, needle
bearing, 1st gear collar, thrust needle bearing, and
idler gear.
7. Remove the 32 mm snap ring, and remove the 2nd

clutch, splined washer, thrust needle bearing,
needle bearing, 2nd gear/park gear, and thrust
needle bearing.
8. Inspect the bearing for galling and rough

movement.

\ B A
excessive wear, and check the shift splines for
C \ excessive wear and damage.
07XAA-002010A
10. Checkthe 1st gear axial clearance (see page
3. Place the secondary shaft (D) on the block and 14-313), 1st gear one-way clutch (see page 14-315),
attach the 1st clutch guide (E) to the wrench, and secondary shaft installation height (see page
40 x 42 mm. Loosen the locknut, and remove it. 14-319).
Remove any burrs from the splines on the shaft
and spline washer.
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

• Driver, 40 mm LD. 07746-0030100
• Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300
1. Install the idler gear (A), thrust needle bearing (B),

1st gear collar (C), needle bearing (D), 1st gear
assembly (E), thrust needle bearing (F), selective
52 mm washer (G), and 1st/1st-hold clutch (H) on
the secondary shaft (I). Install the idler gear and
52 mm washer in the direction shown. Do not
install the O-rings during inspection.
2. Install the ball bearing (J) over the 1st/1st-hold

clutch guide using the driver (40 mm I.D.), the
attachment (30 mm I.D.) and a press.
3. Install the splined washer (K) with the marked side

(L) up over the ball bearing in the same manner as
installing the ball bearing using the driver
(40 mm I.D.), the attachment (30 mm I.D.) and a
press.
4. Install the old lock nut (M) and tighten it to 29 N-m

(3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft).
5. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 1st clutch hub (B).
(cont'd)
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Measure the 1st gear axial clearance in at least 8. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the
three places while moving the 1st gear. Use the clearance.
WASHER, 52 mm
Standard: 0.085—0.130 mm (0.003—0.005 in.) No. Part Number Thickness
A 90502-RJF-T00 2.705 mm (0.106 in.)
B 90503-RJF-T00 2.680 mm (0.106 in.)
C 90504-RJF-T00 2.655 mm (0.105 in.)
D 90505-RJF-T00 2.630 mm (0.104 in.)
E 90506-RJF-T00 2.605mm (0.103 in.)
F 90507-RJF-T00 2.580 mm (0.102 in.)
G 90508-RJF-T00 2.555 mm (0.101 in.)
H 90509-RJF-T00 2.530 mm (0.100 in.)
I 90510-RJF-T00 2.505 mm (0.099 in.)
J 90511-RJF-T00 2.480 mm (0.098 in.)
K 90512-RJF-TG0 2.455 mm (0.097 in.)
L 90513-RJF-T00 2.430 mm (0.096 in.)
M 90514-RJF-T00 2.405 mm (0.095 in.)
7. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the

washer and measure its difference.
1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection
1. Hold the 1st-hold clutch hub (A), and turn the 1st
gear (B) in the direction shown to be sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the 1st gear locks in the
opposite direction.
2. If any problem occurs on the 1st gear one-way

clutch, replace the 1st clutch hub (C). The 1st gear
one-way clutch is not available separately from the
1st clutch hub.
3. Also check the 1st gear and the 1st-hold clutch hub
for wear and damage. If the 1st gear and 1st-hold
clutch hub are worn or damaged, replace the
damaged part, refer to 1st Clutch Hub Replacement
(see page 14-316).
1st Clutch Hub Replacement
Special Too l s Required 3. Install the new 1st clutch hub (A) over the 1st gear
• Driver 07749-0010000 (B), and install the 1st-hold clutch hub (C) in the 1st
• Driver attachment 07947-6340500 gear.
• Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
NOTE: If the 1st gear and 1st-hold clutch hub are
1. Remove the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) from the 1st replaced, use the 1st gear and the 1st-hold clutch
gear (B) using the driver, the driver attachment, hub with the same identifying letters (A or B).
and a press.
4. Install the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) in the 1st gear (B)
using the driver, the attachment (78 x 90 mm) and a
press.
07749-0010000
07GAD-SD40101
Secondary Shaft Reassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 new O-rings (G) in 2nd clutch O-ring grooves, then
• Attachm ent 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300 remove the tape.
• Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A
NOTE: To prevent damage to the O-rings, be sure
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing to install the O-rings after installing the splined
(B), 2nd gear/park gear (€), thrust needle bearing washer.
(D), and splined washer (E) in the direction shown
on the secondary shaft (F). 3. Install the 2nd clutch (H) on the secondary shaft,
and secure the 2nd clutch with the snap ring (I).
4. Install the idler gear (J) in the direction shown,

thrust needle bearing (K), 1st gear collar (L), needle
bearing (M), 1st gear assembly (N), thrust needle
bearing (O), and 52 mm washer (P) in the direction
shown on the secondary shaft.
5. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the

new O-rings (Q) in 1st/1st-hold clutch O-ring
grooves, then remove the tape.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the O-rings, be sure

to install the O-rings after installing the 1st gear
collar and 52 mm washer.
6. Install the 1st/1st-hold clutch (R).
7. Install the ball bearing (S) over the 1st/1st-hold

clutch guide using the driver (40 mm I.D.), and the
attachment (30 mm I.D.), and a press.
(confd)
Secondary Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Install the new splined washer (A) with the marked 10. Place a V-block (A) on a vise (B), and put the
side (B) up over the ball bearing using the driver secondary shaft (C) on the V-block and vise.
(40 mm I.D.), the attachment (30 mm I.D.), and a
press. 07XAA-002010A
11. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 mm), onto the 1st clutch
guide, and secure the wrench (40 x 42 mm), with
the vise to hold the secondary shaft. Tighten the
9. Install the new locknut (A). locknut to 178 N-m (18.2 kgf-m, 132 Ibf-ft) with the
torque wrench (D).
NOTE;
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
• The locknut has left-hand threads.
12. Stake the locknut to a depth (A) of 0.7—1.3 mm

(0.03—0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (B).
Secondary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A) in the torque Secondary Shaft Cutaway View
converter housing (B) in the direction shown, and
install the secondary shaft assembly (C).
3. Measure the height (B) of the secondary shaft

installation between the surface (C) of the gasket
2. Install the new gasket (A) on the torque converter and the top of the ball bearing outer race (D), then
housing. note the measurement.
Secondary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustm ent (cont d)
4. Remove the 65 mm thrust shim (A) from the 6. Select the 65 mm thrust shim from the following
transmission housing, and measure its thickness. table.
THRUST SHIM, 65 m m
No. Part Number Thickness
0A 90460-RDK-000 0.80 mm (0.031 n.)
A. 90461-RDK-010 0.84 mm (0.033 n.)
B 90462-RDK-010 0.88 mm (0.035 n.)
C 90463-RDK-010 0.92 mm (0.036 n.)
D 90464-RDK-010 0.96 mm (0.038 n.)
E 90465-RDK-010 1.00 mm (0.039 n.)
F 9Q466-RDK-010 1.04 mm (0.041 n.)
G- 90467-RDK-010 1.08 mm (0.043 n.)
H 90468-RDK-010 1.12 mm (0.044 n.)
1 90469-RDK-010 1.16 mm (0.046 n.)
J 90470-RDK-010 1.20 mm (0.047 n.)
K 90471-RDK-010 1.24 mm (0.049 n.)
L 90472-RDK-010 1.28 mm (0.050 n.)
5. Calculate the thickness of the 65 mm thrust shim M 90473-RDK-010 1.32 mm (0.052 n.)
using the formula. N 90474-RDK-010 1.36 mm (0.054 n.)
0 90475-RDK-010 1.40 mm (0.055 n.)
Formula: P 90476-RDK-010 1.44 mm (0.057 n.)
65 mm Thrust Shim Thickness Q 90477-RDK-010 1.48 mm (0.058 n.)
= Secondary Shaft Installation Height Standard R 90478-RDK-010 1.52 mm (0.060 n.)
— Measurement S 90479-RDK-010 1.56 mm (0.061 n.)
T 90480-RDK-010 1.60 mm (0.063 n.)
Secondary Shaft I nstallation Height U 90481-RDK-000 1.64 mm (0.065 n.)
Standard: V 90482-RDK-000 1.68 mm (0.066 n.)
222.54-222.63 m m 18.761-8.765 In.) w 90483-RDK-000 1.72 mm (0.068 n.)
X 90484-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 n.)
Y 90485-RDK-000 1.80 mm (0.071 n.)
z 90486-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.072 n.)
AA 90487-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.074 n.)
AB 90488-RDK-000 1.92 mm (0.076 n.)
AC 90489-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.077 n.)
AD 90490-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.079 n.)
AE 90491-RDK-000 2.04 mm (0.080 n.)
AF 90492-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.082 n.)
AG 90493-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.083 n.)
AH 90494-RDK-000 2.16 mm (0.085 n.)
Al 90495-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.087 n.)
AJ 90496-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.088 n.)
AK 90497-RDK-000 2.28 mm (0.090 n.)
AL 90498-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.091 n.)
7. Install the thrust shim in the transmission housing.

intermediary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the 26.5 mm washer, snap ring, cotter 4. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and
retainer, and cotters from the intermediary shaft. excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
excessive wear and damage.
5. Check the sealing rings for excessive wear and

damage.
6. Check the 3rd gear axial clearance (see page

14-323), and intermediary shaft installation height
(see page 14-325).
7. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines

with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the

shaft and gears.
9. Install the press-fitted 4th gear using the driver

(40 mm I.D.) and a press (see page 14-322) in the
direction shown.
35 mm
2. Remove the intermediary shaft 4th gear using a

press (see page 14-322), and disassemble the shaft
and gears.
3. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough

movement.
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
1. Place the 4th gear (A) on press bases (B), and place Special Tools Required
a shaft protector (C) between the intermediary shaft Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
(D) and a press to prevent damaging the
intermediary shaft. 1. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the
new O-rings in the 3rd clutch O-ring grooves, then
remove the tape.
2. Install the 3rd clutch, 53 mm splined washer, thrust

needle bearing, needle bearing, 3rd gear, thrust
needle bearing on the intermediary shaft (see page
14-321).
3. Install the 4th gear (A) using the driver (40 mm I.D.)
and a press.
2. Press the intermediary shaft out of the press-fitted

4th gear, and remove the intermediary shaft while
holding the underside the intermediary shaft. The
intermediary shaft falls down when pressing the
intermediary shaft out of the press-fitted gear.
3. Remove the remaining parts from the intermediary

shaft.
4. Install the 19.8 mm cotters, cotter retainer, and

snap ring.
5. Install the 26.5 mm washer on the top of the

intermediary shaft.
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

Driver, 40 mm LD. 07746-0030100
1. Install the 3rd clutch (A), the original thickness

53 mm splined washer (B), thrust needle bearing
(C), needle bearing (D), 3rd gear (E), and thrust
needle bearing (F) on the Intermediary shaft (G). Do
not install the O-rings during inspection.
2. Install the 4th gear (H) using the driver (40 mm LD.)
and a press.
3. Install the cotters (I), cotter retainer (J), and snap

ring (K).
4. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 3rd gear (B).
(cont'd)
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
5. Measure the 3rd gear axial clearance in at least

three places while moving the 3rd gear. Use the
Standard; 0.005-0.045 mm (0.0002-0.0018 in.)
6. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

splined washer and measure its thickness.
7. Select and install a new splined washer, then

recheck the clearance.
SPUMED WASHER, 53 mm
A 90546-RDK-000 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.)
B 90547-RDK-000 4.015 mm (0.1581 in.)
C 90548-RDK-000 4.035 mm (0.1589 in.)
D 90549-RDK-000 4.055 mm (0.1596 in.)
E 90550-RDK-000 4.075 mm (0.1604 in.)
F 90551-RDK-000 4.095 mm (0.1612 in.)
G 90552-RDK-000 4.115 mm (0.1620 in.)
H 90553-RDK-000 4.135 mm (0.1628 in.)
1 90554-RDK-000 4.155 mm (0.1636 in.)
J 90555-RDK-000 4.175 mm (0.1644 in.)
K 90556-RDK-000 4.195 mm (0.1652 in.)
L 90557-RDK-000 4.215 mm (0.1659 in.)
M 90558-RDK-000 4.235 mm (0.1667 in.)
N 90559-RDK-000 4.255 mm (0.1675 in.)
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
1. Install the intermediary shaft (A) in the torque 4. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
converter housing, and instal l the original thickness 26.5 mm washer and measure its thickness.
26.5 mm washer (B) on the intermediary shaft.
5. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the
I ntermediary Shaft Installation Height installation height.
Standard:
133.785-133.885 mm (5.2671-5.2711 in.) WASHER, 26.5 m m
A 90564-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 n.)
B 90565-RDK-000 1.13 mm (0.044 n.)
C 90566-RDK-000 1.21 mm (0.048 n.)
D 90567-RDK-000 1.29 mm (0.051 n.)
E 90568-RDK-000 1.37 mm (0.054 n.)
F 90569-RDK-000 1.45 mm (0.057 n.)
G 90570-RDK-000 1.53 mm (0.060 n.)
H 90571-RDK-000 1.61 mm (0.063 n.)
I 90572-RDK-000 1.69 mm (0.067 n.)
J 90573-RDK-000 1.77 mm (0.070 n.)
K 90574-RDK-000 1.85 mm (0.073 n.)
L 90575-RDK-000 1.93 mm (0.076 n.)
M 90576-RDK-000 2.01 mm (0.079 n.)
N 90577-RDK-000 2.09 mm (0.082 n.)
Intermediary Shaft Cutaway View
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter

housing.
3. Measure the height (D) of the intermediary shaft

installation between the surface (E) of the gasket
and the surface of the 26.5 mm washer (F).
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the 1st clutch end-plate (A), 1st clutch
* Clutch spring compressor attachment discs (B) (5), 1st clutch wave-plates (C) (5), disc
07LAE-PX40100 or 07HAE-PL50101 spring (D), 1st-hold clutch plate B (E), 1st-hold
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly clutch discs (F) (3), Ist-hold clutch wave-plates (G)
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A (2), and 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (H) from the 1st/
Ist-hold clutch drum (I).
1. Remove the snap ring (A), with a screwdriver (B).
D E
3. Make reference marks on the clutch wave-plates.

4. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), clutch discs (B) (7), 8. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), clutch discs (B) (4),
clutch wave-plates (C) (3), and clutch flat-plates (D) clutch wave-plates (C) (2), clutch flat-plates (D) (2),
(4) from the 2nd clutch drum (E). and disc spring (E) from the 4th clutch drum (F).
10. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), clutch discs (B) (5),
clutch wave-plates (C) (2), clutch flat-plates (D) (3),
and disc spring (E) from the 5th clutch drum (F).
6. Remove the clutch end-plate (A), clutch discs (B) (5),

clutch wave-plates (C) (2), clutch flat-plates (D) (3),
and disc spring (E) from the 3rd clutch drum (F).
(cont'd)
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
12. Install the clutch spring compressor attachment 14. If either end of the clutch spring compressor
and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly. attachment is set over an area of the spring retainer
that is unsupported by the return spring, the
retainer may be damaged.
15. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on

the spring retainer (B) of the 3rd and 5th clutches so
the clutch spring compressor attachment works on
the clutch return spring (C).
13. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment

(A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
16. If either end of the clutch spring compressor
attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
19. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachment.
17. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can 20. Remove the snap ring (A), spring retainer (B), and
be removed. return spring (C).
(confd)
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
21. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum, and apply 23. Remove the 1st-hold clutch piston (A) from the 1st
air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the clutch piston (B), and remove the O-rings from the
piston. Place a finger tip on the other passage while 1st-hold clutch piston.
applying air pressure.
24. Remove the clutch piston, and remove the O-rings

from the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pistons.
22. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A) from the

clutch drum (B), and remove the O-rings from the
1st clutch piston.
1. Inspect the clutch pistons and clutch piston check 6. If the clutch discs are worn or damaged, replace
valves (A). them as a set. If the clutch discs are replaced,
inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate
A and the top disc.
7. If any plate is worn, damaged, or discolored,

replace the damaged plate with a new plate, and
inspect the other wave-plates for a phase
difference. If the clutch plate is replaced, inspect
the clearance between the clutch end-plate and the
top disc.
8. If the clutch end-plate is worn, damaged, or

discolored, inspect the clearance between the
clutch end-plate and the top disc, then replace the
clutch end-plate.
2. If the clutch piston check valve is loose or damaged,

replace the clutch piston.
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
4. If the spring retainer is worn or damaged, replace it.
5. Inspectthe clutch discs, clutch plates, and clutch

end-plate for wear, damage, and discoloration.
Clutch Discs:
Standard Thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch Flat-plates and Cl utch Wave-pl ates

Standard Thickness:
1st Clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
Ist-hold Clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
2nd Clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
3rd Clutch: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
4th Clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
5th Clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference Inspection
1. Place the clutch wave-plate (A) on a surface plate, 5. Rotate the wave-plate of the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th,
and set a dial indicator (B) on the wave-plate. and 5th clutches about 60-degrees, and the 3rd
clutch wave-plate about 54-degrees or 72-degrees.
The dial indicator should be at the bottom of a
phase difference (F and G), and zero the dial
indicator.
6. Measure the phase difference at the other two tops

(H and I) of the wave-plate by following steps 3 thru
5.
7. If the two values of the three measurements are

within the standard, the wave-plate is OK. If the two
values of the three measurements are out of the
standard, replace the wave-plate.
2. Find the bottom (C) of a phase difference of the

wave-plate, zero the dial indicator and make a
reference mark on the bottom of the wave-plate.
3. Rotate the clutch wave-plate of the 1st, 1st-hold,

2nd, 4th, and 5th clutches about 60-degrees apart
from the bottom while holding the wave-plate by
its circumference, and rotate the 3rd clutch wave-
plate about 72-degrees or 54-degrees apart from
the bottom while holding the wave-plate by its
circumference. The dial indicator should be at the
top (D) of a phase difference. Do not rotate the
wave-plate while holding its surface, always rotate
it by holding its circumference.
4. Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads the

phase difference (E) of the wave-plate between the
bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference

1st Clutch: 0.17—0.30 mm (0.007-0.012 i n.)
1st-ho!d Cl utch: 0.10—0.20 mm (0.004—0.008 in.)
2nd Clutch: 0.11 —0.21 mm (0.004—0.008 in.)
3rd Clutch: 0.12-0.24 mm (0.005-0.009 i n.)
4th Clutch: 0.12-0.24 mm (0.005-0.009 i n.)
5th Clutch: 0.12—0.22 mm (0.005—0.009 in.)
< s &
Clutch Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 3. Install the 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately
Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 install the clutch discs (B) (3) and the 1st-hold clutch
wave-plates (C) (2), then install 1st-ho!d clutch plate
1. Inspect the clutch piston, discs, plates, and end- B (D) with the flat side down in the direction shown.
plate for wear and damage (see page 14-331), and
inspect the clutch wave-plate phase difference
(see page 14-332), if necessary.
2. Install the 1st-hold clutch piston in the 1st clutch

piston, and install 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A) in
the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum (B). Do not install the
O-rings on the clutch pistons duri ng inspection.
4. Measure the Ist-hold clutch plate B-to-top-disc

clearance with a feeler gauge (A) while pressing
1st-hold clutch plate B down. Take measurements
in at least three places, and use the average as the
actual clearance.
Ist-hold Clutch Plate B-to-Top-Disc Clearance:

Service Limit: 0.6—1.0 mm (0.024—0.039 in.)
5. If the clearance is out of standard, replace the Ist-

hold clutch plates and discs as a set, and recheck.
(cont'd)
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Install the disc spring (A) on 1st-hold clutch plate B 8. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
in the direction shown. Starting with the 1st clutch install the flat-plates (A) (4) and discs (B) (4) in the
wave-plate, alternately install the wave-plates (B) 2nd clutch drum (C), and alternately install the
(5) and discs (C) (5) in the 1st clutch drum (D), then wave-plates (D) (3) and discs (B) (3). Install the
install the clutch end-plate (E) with the flat side clutch end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
down. top disc.
7. Install the clutch pistons in the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and

5th clutch drums. Do not install the O-rings on the
clutch pistons during inspection.
9. Install the disc spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (B)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 3rd clutch
flat-pl ate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
and discs (D) (3), and alternately install the wave-
plates (E) (2) and discs (D) (2). Install the clutch end-
plate (F) with the flat side down on the top disc.
10. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (B)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 4th clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (2)
plates (E) (2) and discs (D) (2). Install the clutch end
13. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end-plate (B).
14. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end-plate

lifted up to the snap ring (C).
(cont'd)
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
15. Release the clutch end-plate to lower the clutch 18. If the clearance is out of the service limit, select a
end-plate, then put the clutch compressor new clutch end-pl ate from the foll owing table.
attachment on the end-plate (A).
1ST CLUTCH END-PLATES

Pl ate Part Number Thickness
No.
1 22551-RDK-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
16. Press the clutch compressor attachment down with 2 22552-RDK-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
150-160 N (1 5 -1 6 kgf, 3 3 -3 5 Ibf) (B) using a 3 22553-RDK-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
force gauge, and read the dial indicator (C). 4 22554-RDK-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
5 22555-RDK-003 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
17. The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between 6 22556-RDK-003 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
the clutch end-plate and the top disc (E). Take 7 22557-RDK-003 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
measurements in at least three places, and use the 8 22558-RDK-003 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
average as the actual clearance. 9 22559-RDK-003 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
Clutch End-Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance 2ND CLUTCH EIMD-PLATES

Service Limit: Pl ate Part Number Thickness
1st Clutch: 1.15—1.35 mm (0.045—0.053 in.) No.
2nd Clutch: 1.05-1.25 mm (0.041 -0.049 in.) 1 22561-RDK-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
3rd Clutch: 0.80-1.00 mm (0.031-0.039 in.) 2 22562-RDK-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
4th Clutch: 0.70-0.90 mm (0.028-0.035 in.) 3 22563-RDK-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
5th Clutch: 0.75-0.95 mm (0.030-0.037 in.) 4 22564-RDK-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22565-RDK-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22566-RDK-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22567-RDK-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22568-RDK-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22569-RDK-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
3RP CLUTCH END-PLATES
Plate Part Number Thickness
No.
1 22591-RDK-A01 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22592-RDK-A01 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22593-RDK-A01 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22594-RDK-A01 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22595-RDK-A01 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22596-RDK-A01 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22597-RDK-A01 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22598-RDK-A01 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22599-RDK-AOT 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
4TH and 5TH CLUTCH END-PLATES

Plate Part Number Thickness
No.
1 22571-RJB-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22572-RJB-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22573-RJB-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22574-RJB-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22575-RJB-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22576-RJB-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22577-RJB-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22578-RJB-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22579-RJB-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
19. Install the new clutch end-plate, and recheck the

cl earance. If the thickest clutch end-pl ate is
installed, but the clearance is still over the service
limit, replace the clutch discs and plates.
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Instal l the new O-rings (A) on the 1st clutch piston
• Clutch spring compressor attachment (B), and install the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston in the
07LAE-PX40100 or 07HAE-PL50101 1st/1st-hold clutch drum (C) while applying
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly pressure and rotating to ensure proper seating. Do
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A not pinch the O-ring.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Install the new O-rings (A) on the 1st-hold clutch

piston (B), and install the 1st-hold clutch piston in
the 1st clutch piston (C).
4. Install the O-rings (A) on the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th
clutch piston (B).
5. Install the clutch pistons in the clutch drums (C)

while applying pressure and rotating to ensure
proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
6 . Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), 8. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment
and position the snap ring (C) on the spring retainer. (A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.

attachment is set over an area of the spring retainer
7. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments that is unsupported by the return spring, the
and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly. retainer may be damaged.
(cont'd)
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on 12. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
the spring retainer (B) of the 3rd and 5th clutches so be installed.
the clutch spring compressor attachment works on
the clutch return spring (C).
13. Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.

attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
14. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments

and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
Install the Ist-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately 17. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
install the clutch discs (B) (3) and the Ist-hold clutch install the flat-plates (A) (4) and discs (B) (4) in the
wave-plates (C) (2) in the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum 2nd clutch drum (C), and alternately install the
(D), then install 1st-hold clutch plate B (E) with the wave-plates (D) (3) and discs (B) (3). Install the
flat side down in the direction shown. clutch end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
top disc.
16. Install the disc spring (F) on 1st-hold clutch plate B

in the direction shown. Starting with the 1st clutch 18. Install the disc spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (B)
wave-plate, alternately install the wave-plates (G) in the direction shown. Starting with the 3rd clutch
(5) and discs (H) (5), then install the clutch end-plate flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
(I) with the flat side down on the top disc. and discs (D) (3), and alternately install the wave-
plates (E) (2) and discs (D) (2). Install the clutch end-
(cont'd)
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
19. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (B) 21. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
in the direction shown. Starting with the 4th clutch the clutch end-plate.
Transmission Reassembly
Exploded View
Bolt T i ghtening Torque
6 x 1 .0 mm; 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft) ATF STRAINER
8 x-1.25 mm: 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm, Two Bolts
8 x 1.0 m m. Eight Bolts
Sx 1.0 mm, REGULATOR

11 Bolts VALVE BODY
O-RING .
Replace.
STATOR SHAFT
ACCUMULATOR REGULATOR
BODY SEPARATOR PLATE
8 x 1.0 mm, Seven Bolts
8 x 1.25 mm, Three Bolts
LUBRICATI ON
CHECK VALVE
MAIN VALVE BODY
ATF FEED PIPE,

8 x 62 mm
ATF PUMP
DRI VEN GEAR SHAFT
ATF PUMP
DRIVE-QEAR
MAIN SEPARATOR
PLATE
SECONDARY DOWEL PINS,
SEPARATOR PLATE Two Pins
6 x 1.0mm, One Bolt

ATF PASSAGE PIPE TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSI NG
(cont'd)
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tool Requi red 5. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven
Mainshaft hol der 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is cl eaned and gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
installed in the torque converter housing. Clean torques, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF
and install the ATF magnet, if necessary. pump driven gear shaft correctly will result in a
seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven
2. Install the main separator plate and two dowel pins gear shaft.
on the torque converter housing. Then install the
ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), and ATF 6. Install the lubrication check valve, cooler check
pump driven gear shaft (C). Instal l the ATF pump valve and cooler check valve spring in the main
driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side valve body. Install the lubrication check valve in the
facing down. direction shown in the in the exploded view.
7. Install the secondary separator plate and two dowel

pins on the main valve body, and install the
secondary valve body (one bolt).
8. Install the three check balls and choke in the

secondary valve body.
9. Install the accumulator separator plate and two

dowel pins on the secondary valve body.
10. Position the detent arm on the accumulator

separator plate, and install the detent arm shaft into
the detent arm through the separator plates to the
main valve body.
3. Install the torque converter check valve spring and
valve in the torque converter housing. 11. Install the 8 x 62 mm ATF feed pipe in the main
valve body, and install the accumulator body
4. Install the main valve body (seven 6 mm bolt and (11 bolts).
three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump drive
gear (A) rotates smoothly in the normal operating 12. Install the regulator separator plate and two dowel
direction, and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (B) pins on the main valve body.
moves smoothly in the axial and normal operating
direction. 13. Install the stator shaft with the new O-ring, and
install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
14. Instal l the stator shaft stop in the main valve body.
15. Install the ATF strainer with the new O-ring

(two bolts).
16. Install the ATF passage pipe (one bolt) in the torque
converter housing.
17. Install the intermediary shaft (A) into the main 23. Install the needle bearing (A) on the secondary
valve body, and install the 26.5 mm washer (B) on shaft roller bearing in the torque converter housing.
the top of the intermediary shaft.
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft) q
18. Install the transfer output shaft (C) in the torque

converter housing, and install the thrust shim (D) 24. Turn the shift fork shaft (B) so the large chamfered
on the top of the transfer output shaft. hole is facing the fork bolt hole of the shift fork.
19. Install the differential assembly (E) in the torque 25. Engage the shift fork (C) with the reveres selector
converter housing. on the countershaft, and join the mainshaft (D),
countershaft (E), and secondary shaft (F), then
20. Install the baffle plate (F), and make sure if the install them in the torque converter housing and
differential is clear of the baffle plate. shift fork on the shift fork shaft.
21. Install the control shaft and park lever link (G).
22. Assemble the mainshaft, countershaft, and

secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
26. Secure the shift fork (A) to the shift fork shaft with 28. Align the control lever pin with the manual valve
the lock bolt and the new lock washer (B), then guide.
bend the lock tab of the lock washer against the
bolt head.
29. Hook the detent arm spring to the detent arm.
27. Install the park pawl shaft (A), pawl spring (B), park
pawl (C), and park pawl stop (D).
30. Install the 8 x 8 5 mm ATF feed pipe (A), 32. Install the two dowel pins (A) and the new gasket
8 x 151.5 mm pipes (B), and 8 x 40 mm pipe (C) in (B) on the torque converter housing (C).
the accumulator body.
31. Install the 8 x 57.5 mm ATF feed pipe (A) and

10 x 123 mm pipe (B) in the torque converter
housing.
33. Place the transmission housing (D) on the torque
converter housing.
34. Wrap a screwdriver tip with tape to prevent

damaging the reverse idler gear teeth. Engage the
reverse idler gear with reverse gears by rotating
the idler gear using the screwdriver.
(cont'd)
35. While expanding the snap ring of the countershaft 39. Install the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
bearing using snap ring pliers, install the
transmission housing onto the bearing part-way.
Then release the snap ring pliers, and push down
on the housing until it bottoms and the snap ring
snaps into place in the transmission housing snap
ring groove.
40. Install the new lock washer (A) with the marked
side (B) up over the mainshaft (C), and apply ATF to
surfaces of the lock washer and old locknut (D).
A
36. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts
(22 bolts) along with the transmission hanger (A)
and transmission ground terminal bracket (B), and
tighten the bolts in two or more steps in a criss
cross pattern to 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft).
C
10 x 1.25 mm
41. Install the old locknut, and tighten it to seat the lock
washer to 178 N-m (18.2 kgf-m, 132 Ibf-ft), then
remove the old locknut.
44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)

22 Bolts
37. Install and tighten the two mounting bolts (C) to

39 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft). Keep the mounting
bolts free of grease or oil.
38. Install and tighten the special bolt (D) to 64 N-m

(6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibf-ft).
42. Install the new locknut and tighten it to 176 N-m 46. Install the new O-ring (E) on the solenoid harness
(18.2 kgf-m, 132 Ibf-ft), then stake the locknut to a connector (F).
depth (A) of 0.7—-1.3 mm (0.03—0.05 in.) using a
6 x 1.0 mm
3.5 mm punch (B).
43. Install the end cover (A), dowel pin (B), and new
O-ring (C). 47. Route the solenoid harness through the
transmission housing, and install the solenoid
F 8 x 1.25 mm harness connector.
49 N-m 26 N-m
(5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft) (2.7 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)
48. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids:
• RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.

• ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
• GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
• YEL wire connector to torque converter clutch
solenoid valve (D).
49. Secure the solenoid harness connector with the

' bolt on the transmission housing.
45. Apply thread lock sealant to the threads of the

sealing plug (F), and install the sealing plug and the
new sealing washer (G).
(cont'd)
50. Install the solenoid valve cover (A) with the two 53. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
dowel pins (B) and the new gasket (C), and secure it filter side into its mounting hole (B).
with the seven bolts.
6 x1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
54. Check the height (A) if the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe

(B) between the top (C) of the pipe and solenoid
valve body mounting surface (D). The height is
about 7 mm (0.3 in.) If the height is over 7 mm
51. Place the new gasket (A) on the solenoid valve (0.3 in.), install the pipe securely until it stops the
cover, then install the 8 x 105.8 mm ATF feed pipe accumulator body.
(B) and 8 x 58.3 mm pipes (C) with their filter side
B
into the transmission housing.
6x 1.0 mm
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
52. Install the new O-rings (D) over the ATF feed pipes,
and install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B (E).
55. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission 59. Set the transmission range switch (A) to the N
housing. Install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF pipe (B) with position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the filter side into the transmission housing, and the N position, and the control shaft hole (B) aligns
install the 8 x 25.5 mm ATF pipe (D). with the N positioning line (C).
60. Install the transmission range switch gently over

the control shaft (D), and install the bolts loosely.
56. Install new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes. 61. Install the new lock washer (A) over the control
shaft (B) by aligning the projection (C) of the lock
57. Install A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. washer with the N positioning line (D) on the
transmission range switch (E), and install the
58. Set the control shaft is from the P position to the N locknut (F).
position by turning the control shaft with a 6.0 mm
wrench.
(cont'd)
62. Push the locknut against the transmission housing 65. Install the new O-ring (A) on the input shaft
to seat the range switch into the control shaft, and (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), and install the input
tighten the locknut to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 lbf*ft) shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.
while holding the control shaft with a 6 mm wrench,
then bend the lock tabs against the lock nut.
66. Install the new O-ring (C) on the output shaft

(countershaft) speed sensor (D), and install the
63. Tighten the transmission range switch mounting output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
bolts to 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft). sensor washer (E).
64. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (B), lock 67. Install the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
washer (C), and locknut (D) on the control shaft (E). switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten
the switch with the metal part.
D
16 N-m (1.6 kgf-m, 12 Ibf-ft) A
20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibf-ft)
68. Install the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure 72. Install the ATF dipstick tube (A) with the new O-ring
switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten (B).
the switch on the metal part.
E
q 28 N-m
6 x 1.0 mm (2.9 kgf-m, 21 Ibf-ft)
73. Install the ATF dipstick (C) in its guide tube.
74. 2WD: Install the new O-ring (A) on the torque

converter housing cap (B), and install the cap in the
torque converter housing (C).
69. Install the ATF cooler lines (C) with the new sealing 8 x 1.25 mm
washers (D) and line bolts (E).
70. Install the connector bracket (F), and secure the

ATF l ines with the 6.0 mm bolts (G) on the
transmission housing. Tighten the bolts to 12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft).
71. Install the ATF temperature sensor (H) with the new
O-ring (I), then install the connector on the
connector bracket.
p
4WD 2V¥D
THRUST SHIM, 85 mm THRUST SHIM, 85 mm
Preload I nspection, page 14-361 Preload Inspection, page 14-361
SPACER
SPACER
BEARING OUTER RACE

Replacement, page 14-359 BEARING OUTER RACE
CARRIER BEARING
Replacement, page 14-357 CARRIER BEARING
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

Replacement, FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
page 14-356
Repl acement,
page 14-356
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection,
page 14-355
Replacement, page 14-356 DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash I nspection,
page 14-355
CARRIER BEARING
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR Replacement, page 14-357
BEARING OUTER RACE
CARRIER BEARING Replacement, page 14-359
SPACER
BEARING OUTER RACE
SPACER
Backlash Inspection
1. Remove the final driven gear and transfer drive

gear (4WD) from the differential carrier.
2 . Install both axles into the differential assembly (A),

and place the axles on V-blocks (B).
3. Measure the backlash of the pinion gears (C) with a

dial indicator (D).
Standard: 0.05—0.15 mm (0.002—0.006 in.)
4. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier.
5. Install the final driven gear and transfer drive gear

on the differential carrier (see page 14-356).
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Differential Carrier and Final Driven
Gear, and Transfer Drive Gear Gear Replacement
Replacement
2WD
4WD
NOTE: Inspect and adjust the carrier bearing preload
NOTE: Inspect and adjust the carrier bearing preload whenever the differential carrier is replaced.
whenever the differential carrier is replaced.
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) from the
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) and transfer drive differential carrier (B).
gear (B) from the differential carrier (C).
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts (C) have left-hand
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts (D) have left-hand threads.
threads.
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side

on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Install the bolts, and tighten them to specified

torque in a crisscross pattern.
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side
on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Install the bolts through the differential carrier to

the transfer drive gear.
4. Tighten the bolts to specified torque in a crisscross

pattern.
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new carrier bearing using the attachment
Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 07MAD-PR90100 (45 x 55 mm) and a press.
NOTE: NOTE;
• The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a • Press the bearing on until it bottoms.
set. • Use the small end of the attachment (45 x
• Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever the 55 mm) to install the bearings.
bearing is replaced. • Press the bearing on securely so there is no
• Checkthe bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the clearance between the bearing and the carrier.
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a commercially mmm-wmmm

available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepper adapter (D).
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush to the transmission
• Driver 07749-0010000 housing using the driver and the oil seal driver
• Oil seal driver attachment 07947-SD90101 attachment.
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
4. Install the new oil seal to the torque converter

housing using the driver and the oil seal driver
attachment.
2. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter
housing.
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A), spacer (B), and
•Driver 07749-0010000 outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D).
• Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100
• Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
NOTE:
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing
side.
• Adjust the preload after replacing the bearing and the
outer race.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (B), and

85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 °F
(100 ° C ) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the
housing more than 212 °F (100 ° C ) . 3. Using the driver and attachment (83 mm), install
the outer race securely in the housing so there is no
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
temperature before installing the bearing outer and housing.
race.
(confd)
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement (cont'd)
4. 4WD: Remove the plate (A), and remove the 7. Install the bearing outer race securely in the
bearing outer race (B) and spacer (C) from the housing using the driver and attachment (78 x
torque converter housing (D). 80 mm).
6 x 1 . 0 m in
07749-0010000 07GAD-SD40101
5. 2WD: Remove the plates (A) (B), and remove the 8. Install the plates over the outer race in the torque
bearing outer race (C) and spacer (D) from the converter housing.
torque converter housing (E).
"C
'D
6. Install the spacer and the new outer race in the

torque converter housing.
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Special Tools Required 4. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A) in the

•Driver 07749-0010000 transmission housing (B). If you replace the 85 mm
• Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100 thrust shim with a new one, use the same thickness
• Preload inspection tool 070AJ-0020101 shim as the old one.
NOTE;
• If the transmission housing, torque converter housing,
differential carrier, tapered roller bearing, bearing
outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing
preload must be adjusted.
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use the thrust shim on the torque converter
housing.
• Coat all parts ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (B), and

85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 °F
(100 c€) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the
housing more than 212 °F (100 ° C ) . 5. Install the spacer (C), and the bearing outer race (D)
in the transmission housing.
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload. 6. Install the outer race securely in the housing using
the driver and the attachment (83 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer

race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing

side.
(cont'd)
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
7. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque 9. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
converter housing (B), and install the gasket (C) and to seat the bearings.
the two dowel pins (D) on the housing.
10. Measure the starting torque of the differential
assembly using the preload inspection tool, a
torque wrench (A), and a socket (B). Measure the
starting torque at normal room temperature in both
directions.
Standard
New bearings:
3.9—5.1 N-m (4 0 -5 2 kgf-cm, 3 5 -4 5 lbf-in.)
Reused bearings:
3.6—4.8 N-m (3 7 -4 9 kgf-cm, 3 2 -4 3 lbf-in.)
11. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the

thrust shim and measure its thickness.
8. Install the transmission housing (E), and install the
mounting bolts (24 bolts) with the transmission
hanger (F) and the ground terminal bracket (G),
then tighten the bolts.
12. Select a new thrust shim. To increase the starting THRUST SHIM, 85 mm (cont'd)
torque, increase thickness of the thrust shim. To No. Part Number Thickness
decrease the starting torque, decrease the AA 41466-RGR-000 2.000 mm (0.0787 in.)
thickness of the thrust shim. AB 41467-RGR-000 2.025 mm (0.0797 in.)
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or AC 41468-RGR-000 2.050 mm (0.0807 in.)
decrease the starting torque about 0.5—0.6 N-m AD 41469-RGR-000 2.075 mm (0.0817 in.)
(5—6 kgf-cm, 5—5 lbf-in.). AE 41470-RGR-000 2.100 mm (0.0827 in.)
AF 4T471-RGR-000 2.125 mm <0.0837 in.)
THRUST SHIM, 85 mm AG 41472-RGR-000 2.150 mm (0.0846 in.)
■No. Part Number Thickness AH 41473-RGR-000 2.175 mm (0.0856 in.)
A 41440-RGR-000 1.350 mm (0.0531 n.) Al 41474-RGR-OOO 2.200 mm (0.0866 in.)
B 41441-RGR-000 1.375 mm (0.0541 n.) AJ 41475-RG’R-OOO 2.225 mm (0.0876 in.)
C 41442-RGR-000 1.400 mm (0.0551 n.) AK 41476-RGR-000 2.250 mm (0.0886 in.)
D 41443-RGR-000 1.425 mm (0.0561 n.) AL 41477-RGR-000 2.275 mm (0.0896 in.)
E 41444-RGR-000 . 1.450 mm (0.0571 n.) AM 41478-RGR-000 2.300 mm (0.0906 in.)
F 41445-RGR-000 1.475 mm (0.0581. n.) AN 41479-RGR-000 2.325 mm (0.0915 in.)
G 41446-RGR-000 1.500 mm (0.0591 n.) AO 41480-RGR-000 2.350 mm (0.0925 in.)
H 41447-RGR-000 1.525 mm (0.0600 n.)
I 41448-RGR-000 1.550 mm (0.0610 n.) 13. Install the new thrust shim, then recheck the
J 41449-RGR-000 1.575 mm (0.0620 n.) starting torque.
k 41450-RGR-000 1.600 mm (0.0630 n.)
L 41451-RGR-000 1.625 mm (0.0640 n.)
M 41452-RGR-000 1.650 mm (0.0650 n.)
N 41453-RGR-000 1.675 mm (0.0659 n.)
0 41454-RGR-000 1.700 mm (0.0669 n.)
P 41455-RGR-000 1.725 mm (0.0679 n.)
Q 41456-RGR-000 1.750 mm (0.0689 n.)
R 41457-RGR-000 1.775 mm (0.0699 n.)
S 41458-RGR-000 1.800 mm (0.0709 n.)
T 41459-RGR-000 1.825 mm (0.0719 n.)
U 41460-RGR-000 1.850 mm (0.0728 n.)
V 41461-RGR-000 1.875 mm (0.0738 n.)
w 41462-RGR-000 1.900 mm (0.0748 n.)
X 41463-RGR-000 1.925 mm (0.0758 n.)
Y 41464-RGR-000 1.950 mm (0.0768 n.)
z 41465-RGR-000 1.975 mm (0.0778 n.)
(cont'd)
Transfer Output Shaft
Component Location Index Transfer Output Shaft Bearing

Replacement

Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) with a

commercially available puller (B), bearing
separator (C), and shaft protector (D). Place a shaft
protector between the transfer output shaft and a
puller to prevent damaging the shaft.
2. Install the new bearing (A) on the transfer output

shaft (B) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and a press.
Oil Seal Replacement

•Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100
1. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter

housing.
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the torque converter

housing using the driver and the attachment
(65 mm).
Transfer Output Shaft
Transmission Housing Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Requi red 2. Install the new bearing in the housing in the
* Driver 07749-0010000 direction shown.
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) from

the transmission housing (B) by heating the
housing to about 212 °F (100 °C) with a heat gun (C).
Do not heat the housing more than 212 °F (100 °C).

housing using the driver and attachment (72 x
75 mm).
@9
Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
NOTE: If the transfer output shaft, transfer output shaft 4. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
bearing, transfer output shaft transmission housing 28.5 mm thrust shim and measure its thickness.
bearing, transmission housing, or torque converter
housing were replaced, adjust the transfer output shaft 5. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck
installation height with the 28.5 mm thrust shim. the installation height
1. Install the transfer output shaft (A) in the torque THRUST SHIM, 28.5 mm
converter housing, and install the 28.5 mm thrust No. Part Number Thickness
shim (B) on the top of the shaft. If you replace the A 29031-RDK-000 1.82 mm (0.0717 n.)
28.5 mm thrust shim with a new one, use the same B 29032-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.0724 n.)
thickness shim as the old one. C 29033-RDK-000 1.86 mm (0.0732 n.)
D 29034-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.0740 n.)
Standard: 46.31—46.35 mm (1.823—1.825 in.) E 29035-RDK-000 1.90 mm (0.0748 n.)
F 29036-RDK-000 1.92 mm (0.0756 n.)
G 29037-RDK-000 1.94 mm (0.0764 n.)
H 29038-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.0772 n.)
1 29039-RDK-000 1.98 mm (0.0780 n.)
J 29040-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.0787 n.)
K 29041-RDK-000 2.02 mm (0.0795 n.)
L 29042-RDK-000 2.04 mm (0.0803 n.)
M 29043-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.0811 n.)
N 29044-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.0819 n.)
0 29045-RDK-000 2.10 mm (0.0827 n.)
P 29046-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.0835 n.)
Q 29047-RDK-000 2.14 mm (0.0843 n.)
R 29048-RDK-000 2.16 mm (0.0850 n.)
S 29049-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.0858 n.)
T 29050-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.0866 n.)
U 29051-RDK-000 2.22 mm (0.0874 n.)
V 29052-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.0882 n.)
Transfer Output Shaft Cutaway V i ew w 29053-RDK-000 2.26 mm (0.0890 n.)
X 29054-RDK-000 2.28 mm (0.0898 n.)
Y 29055-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.0906 n.)
z 29056-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.0913 n.)
AA 29057-RDK-000 2.34 mm (0.0921 n.)
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter

housing.
3. Measure the height (D) of the transfer output shaft

installation between the surface (E) of the gasket
and the top (F) of the 28.5 mm thrust shim in at
least three places. Use the average as the actual
height.
Inspection
Transfer Gear Backlash Measurement Total Starting Torque Measurement
1. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion 3. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
flange (B); position dial indicator tip (C) on the with soft jaws. To prevent damaging the transfer
direct extension of the bolt hole canter (D). housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the transfer housing and a vise.
B D C
2. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06—0.17 mm (0.002—0.007 i n.)
4. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat

the tapered roller bearings.
5. Measure the staring torque at the companion

flange (C) using a torque wrench (D) and a socket
(E).
Standard: 3.20—4.16 l\l*m

(32.6-42.4 kgf-cm, 28.3-36.8 lbf-in.)
6. If the measurements are out of standard,

disassemble the transfer assembly and repair it.
Exploded View
22 x 1.25 mm
10 8-2 94 N-m (11.0 - 3 0 .0 kgf-m, 75.6-217 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
Depending on transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) starting torque value.
(cont'd)
Disassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Cut the lock tab on the locknut using a chisel.
Companion flange holder 07XAB-0020100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the

following procedure.
1. Remove the transfer cover (A) from the transfer

housing (B).
6. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)

with soft jaws. To prevent damaging the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
2. Remove the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft

assembly (C), 25 mm thrust shim (D), and tapered
roller bearing (E). 7. Install the companion flange holder on the
companion flange, then loosen the locknut
3. Remove the O-ring (F) from the cover.
8. Remove the companion flange holder.
4. Drain the transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil) from the
transfer housing.
9. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (B), 11. Remove the oil seal (A) and tapered roller bearing
back-up ring (C), O-ring (D), and companion flange (B) from the transfer housing (C).
(E)from the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (F).
10. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A)

from the transfer housing (B), then remove the
thrust washers (C) and transfer spacer (D) from the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
Transfer Hypoid DriveGear Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new tapered roller bearing (A) on the
• Driver 07749-0010000 transfer hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver, the
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 attachment (42 x 47 mm), the attachment (40 x
• Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601 50 mm), and a press.
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the

transfer hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver, the
attachment (42 x 47 mm), bearing separator (C) and
a press.
Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear) Bearing Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) over the transfer
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 output shaft (hypoid gear) (B).
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the

transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (B) with a
bearing separator (C) and a press. Place a shaft
protector (D) between the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) and a press to prevent damaging the
shaft (hypoid gear).
3. Install the tapered roller bearing (C) over the

transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) using the driver
(40 mm I.D.) and a press.
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the press-fitted bearing outer race (A) from
- Driver 07749-0010000 the transfer housing (B) by heating the housing to
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 about 212 °F (100 ° C ) with a heat gun (C). Do not
* Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101 heat the housing more than 212 °F (100 *€).
* Tapered bearing race installer A 07MAF-SP0011A
• Installer shaft 07MAF-SP0013A
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever

the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the 52 mm bearing outer race (A), 75 mm

bearing outer race (B) and 58 mm bearing outer
race (C) from the transfer housing (D).
NOTE: Some bearing outer races (52 mm, 58 mm,

and 75 mm) are press-fitted in the housing and
remove must be removed by heating the housing.
3. Install the 52 mm bearing outer race (A) until it

bottoms in the transfer housing (B) using the driver
and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
4. Install the 75 mm bearing outer race (A) and 58 mm
bearing outer race (B) in the transfer housing (C),
set the oil seal driver attachment and the tapered
bearing race installer over the races, and install the
installer shaft through the attachments and installer.
5. Tighten the installer shaft nut (A) to install the races

(B) (C) into the transfer housing (D) securely.
Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Removal/Installation
Speci a l Tools Requi red 2. Install the 80 mm trust shim (A) and bearing outer
- Driver 07749-0010000 race (B) in the transfer cover (C).
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever

the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm

thrust shim (B) from the transfer cover (C). If the
bearing outer race is press-fitted, remove the outer
race by heating the cover to about 212 °F (100 °C)
with a heat gun (D). Do not heat the cover more
than 212 °F (100 °C).
3. Install the outer race securely in the cover using the

driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new oil seal (A) in the transfer cover (B)
•Driver 07749-0010000 in height (C) of 0—1 mm (0—0.04 in.) above the
• Attachment 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100 cover surface using the driver and the attachment
(65 mm).
1. Remove the oil seal from the transfer cover.
Reassembly
Special Tool s Requi red

EXAMPLE
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
• Attachment, 7 8 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 A: Existing transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
• Driver 07749-0010000 Number = + 2
B: Replacement transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
• Oil seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40100 Number = —1
• Companion flange holder 07XAB-0020100 C: Existing 40 mm thrust shim
thickness = 1.05 mm
X: Replacement 40 mm thrust shim thickness
NOTE:
• While reassembling the transfer assembly: X = A/100—B/100+C
- Check and adjust the transfer gear tooth contact. = 2/100—(-D /1 0 0 + 1 .0 5
= 0.02+0.01+1.05 = 1.08 (mm)
- Measure the and adjust the transfer gear backlash.
- Check and adjust the tapered roller bearing starting Select No. M 40 mm thrust shim of 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
torque.
• Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
• Replace the tapered roller bearing and the bearing
outer race as a set if either part is replaced.
• Replace the transfer hypoid drive gear and the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) as a set if either
part is replaced.
1. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the transfer output

shaft (hypoid gear) is replaced. Calculate the
thickness of the 40 mm thrust shim using the
formula follow, and select the shim from the THRUST SHIM, 40 mm
following table. Shim Part Number Thickness
No.
FORMULA: A/100-B/100+C=X A 29361-RDK-000 0.72 mm (0.028 n.)
B 29362-RDK-OOO 0.75 mm (0.030 n.)
A: Number on the existing transfer output shaft C 29363-RDK-000 0.78 mm (0.031 n.)
(hypoid gear) D 29364-RDK-000 0.81 mm (0.032 n.)
B: Number on the replacement transfer output E 29365-RDK-OOO 0.84 mm (0.033 n.)
shaft (hypoid gear) F 29366-RDK-000 0.87 mm (0.034 n.)
C: Thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shi m G 29367-RDK-000 0.90 mm (0.035 n.)
X: Thickness needed for the replacement 40 mm H 29368-RDK-000 0.93 mm (0.037 n.)
thrust shim 1 29369-RDK-000 0.96 mm (0.038 n.)
J 29370-RDK-000 0.99 mm (0.039 n.)
NOTE: The number on the transfer output shaft K 29371-RDK-000 1.02 mm (0.040 n.)
(hypoi d gear) is shown in 1/100 mm. L 29372-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 n.)
M 29373 RDK-000 1.08 mm (0.043 n.)
N 29374-RDK-000 1.11 mm (0.044 n.)
0 29375-RDK-000 1.14 mm (0.045 n.)
2. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the tapered roller

bearing on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) is
replaced. Measure the thickness of the replacement
bearing and the existing bearing, and calculate the
difference of the bearing thickness. Adjust the
thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shim by the
amount of difference in bearing thickness, and
select the replacement 40 mm thrust shim.
3. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) on the transfer 6. Install the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A) in
output shaft (hypoid gear) (B), then install the the transfer housing (B). Do not install the thrust
tapered roller bearing (C) using the driver (40 mm washers and transfer spacer on the transfer output
I.D.) and a press. shaft (hypoid gear).
07746-0030100
7. Install the companion flange (A), conical spring

4. Place the tapered roller bearing on the bearing washer (B) in the direction shown, and locknut (C)
outer race of the companion flange side of the on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (D). Do
transfer housing. not install the O-ring and back-up ring.
5. Install the new oil seal securely in the transfer

housing using the driver and seal driver attachment
and a press.
(cont'd)
Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B) 11. Remove the companion flange holder.
with soft jaws. To prevent damaging to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent 12. Apply Prussian Blue to both side of the transfer
materials between the transfer housing and the hypoid drive gear teeth lightly and evenly.
vise.
13. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust
A shim (B), and transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
assembly (C) in the transfer housing (D).
8 x 1.25 mm
26 N-m (2.7 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)
9. Install the companion flange holder on the

companion flange.
10. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting

torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
the starting torque is within 1.15—1.71 N-m
(11.7—17.4 kgf-cm, 10.2-15.1 lbf-in.). Do not stake
the locknut in this step.
Starting Torque:
1.15-1.71 N-m 14. Install the transfer cover (E) and secure the cover
(11.7-17.4 kgf-cm, 10,2-15.1 lbf-in.) with the bolts. Do not install the O-ring on the
transfer cover.
15. Rotate the compani on flange several times to seat 19. If the backlash is out of the standard, adjust the
the tapered roller bearings. backlash with the 40 mm thrust shim and recheck.
Do not use more than two 40 mm thrust shims to
16. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion adjust the backlash.
flange (B); position dial indicator tip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D). 20. If the transfer gear tooth contact is incorrect, adjust
the transfer gear tooth contact with the 25 mm or
40 mm thrust shim. Do not use more than two
shims of each thrust shim to adjust the tooth
contact.
• Toe Contact
Use a thinner 40 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) away from the
transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this
movement causes the transfer gear backlash to
change, move the transfer hypoid drive gear
toward the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) to
adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
- Reduce the thickness of the 25 mm thrust shim.
- Increase the thickness of the 80 mm thrust
17. Measure the transfer gear backlash. shim by amount of reduce thickness of the
25 mm thrust shim.
Standard: 0.06-0.17 mm (0.002-0.007 In.) • Heel Contact
Use a thicker 40 mm thrust shim to move the
18. Remove the transfer cover, transfer hypoid drive transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) toward the
gear/shaft assembly, and checkthe transfer hypoid transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this
drive gear tooth contact pattern. movement causes the transfer backlash to
change, move the transfer hypoid drive gear
CORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN
away from the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
to adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
- Increase the thickness of the 25 mm thrust
shim.
- Reduce the thickness of the 80 mm thrust shim
INCORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN by the amount of increase thickness of the
25 mm thrust shim.
• Flank Contact
TOE CONTACT
Use a thicker 25 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer hypoid drive gear away from the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear).
Flank contact must be adjusted within the limits
of the transfer gear backlash. If the backlash
HEEL CONTACT exceeds the limits, adjust as described under
Heel Contact.
• Face Contact
Use a thinner 25 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer hypoid drive gear toward the transfer
FLANK CONTACT output shaft (hypoid gear).
Face contact must be adjusted within the limits of
the transfer gear backlash. If the backlash
exceeds the limits, adjust as described under Toe
Contact.
FACE CONTACT
Reassembly (cont'd)
THRUST SHIM, 25 mm 22. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
Shim Part Number Thickness with soft jaws. To prevent damaging the transfer
No. housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
1.70 29411-P1C-000 1.70 mm (0.067 n.) materials between the transfer housing and the
1.73 29412-P1C-000 1.73 mm (0.068 n.) vise.
1.76 29413-P1C-000 1.76 mm (0.069 n.)
1.79 29414-P1C-000 1.79 mm (0.070 n.)
1.82 29415-P1C-000 1.82 mm (0.072 n.)
1.85 29416-P1C-000 1.85 mm (0.073 n.)
1.88 29417-P1C-000 1.88 mm (0.074 n.)
1.91 29418-P1C-000 1.91 mm (0.075 n.)
1.94 29419-P1C-000 1.94 mm (0.076 n.)
1.97 29420-P1C-000 1.97 mm (0.078 n.)
2.00 29421-P1C-000 2.00 mm (0.079 n.)
2.03 29422-P1C-000 2.03 mm (0.080 n.)
2.06 29423-P1C-000 2.06 mm (0.081 n.)
2.09 29424-P1C-000 2.09 mm (0.082 n.)
2.12 29425-P1C-000 2.12 mm (0.083 n.)
2.15 29426-P1C-000 2.15 mm (0.085 n.)
2.18 29427-P1C-000 2.18 mm (0.086 n.)
2.21 29428-P1C-000 2.21 mm (0.087 n.)
2.24 29429-P1C-000 2.24 mm (0.088 n.)
21. Remove the transfer cover (A), transfer hypoid 23. Install the companion flange holder on the
drive gear/shaft assembly (B), 25 mm thrust shim companion flange, then loose the locknut.
(C), and tapered roller bearing (D) from the transfer
housing (E) after adjusting the transfer gear 24. Remove the companion flange holder.
backlash or transfer gear tooth contact.
25. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (B),
and companion flange (C) from the transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) (D).
26. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)

from the transfer housing.
27. Install the two thrust washers (A) and the new 30. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
transfer spacer (B) on the transfer output shaft with soft jaws. To prevent damaging the transfer
(hypoid gear) (C) in the direction shown, and install housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
them in the transfer housing (D). materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
A
31. Install the companion flange holder on the

companion flange.
32. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting

28. Coat the threads of the locknut and transfer output torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
shaft (hypoid gear) with transfer fluid (hypoid gear the starting torque is within 1.15—1.71 N-m
oil). (11.7-17.4 kgf-cm, 10.2-15.1 lbf-in.).
29. Install the companion flange (A), new O-ring (B), Tightening Torque:
back-up ring (C), new conical spring washer (D), 108-294 N-m
and new locknut (E) on the transfer output shaft (11.0-30.0 kgf-m, 7 9.6-2 17 Ibf-ft)
(hypoid gear) (F). Install the conical spring washer Starting Torque:
in the direction shown. 1.15—1.71 N-m
(11.7-17.4 kgf-cm, 10.2-15.1 lbf-in.)
NOTE:
• Rotate the companion flange several times to
seat the tapered roller bearings, then measure
the starting torque.
• If the starting torque exceeds 1.71 N-m
(17.4 kgf-cm, 15.1 lbf-in), replace the transfer
spacer and reassemble the parts. Do not adjust
the torque with the locknut loose.
• If the tightening torque exceeds 294 N-m
(30.0 kgf-m, 217 Ibf-ft), replace the transfer spacer
and reassemble the parts.
33. Remove the companion flange holder.
(confd)
Reassembly (cont'd)
34. Stake the locknut into the transfer output shaft 37. Secure the transfer housing (A) i n a bench vise (B)
(hypoid gear) in depth (A) of 0.7—1.2 mm (0.03— with soft jaws. To prevent damaging the transfer
0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (B). housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
35. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust

shim (B), and transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
assembly (C) in the transfer housing (D).
38. Rotate the companion flange (C) several times to
8x1.25 mm seat the tapered roller bearings.
26 N-m-(2.7 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)
39. Measure the starting torque at the companion
flange using a torque wrench (D) and a socket (E).
Total Starting Torque:

3 .2 0 -4 .1 6 N-m
(32.8—42.4 kgf-cm, 28.3-3 6.8 lbf-in.)
36. Temporally install the transfer cover (E) without the

O-ring, and secure the cover with the bolts.
40. Remove the transfer cover from the transfer 43. Measure the thickness of removed 80 mm thrust
housing. shim, and select the new 80 mm shim.
41. If the measurement is within the standard, go to THRUST SHIM, 80 mm

step 47. Shim Part Number Thickness
No.
42. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the A 41401-RDK-000 1.52 mm (0.060 n.)
bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm thrust shim (B) B 41402-RDK-000 1.55 mm (0.061 n.)
from the transfer cover (C). If the bearing outer race C 41403-RDK-000 1.58 mm (0.062 n.)
is press-fitted, remove the bearing outer race by D 41404-RDK-000 1.61 mm (0.063 n.)
heating the cover to about 212 °F (100 °C) with a E 41405-RDK-000 1.64 mm (0.065 n.)
heat gun (D). Do not heat the cover more than F 41406-RDK-000 1.67 mm (0.066 n.)
212 °F (100 °C). G 41407-RDK-000 1.70 mm (0.067 n.)
H 41408-RDK-000 1.73 mm (0.068 n.)
I 41409-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 n.)
J 41410-RDK-000 1.79 mm (0.070 n.)
K 41411-RDK-000 1.82 mm (0.072 n.)
L 41412-RDK-000 .1.85 mm (0.073 n.)
M 41413-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.074 n.)
N 41414-RDK-000 1.91 mm (0.075 n.)
O . 41415-RDK-000 1.94 mm (0.076 n.)
P 41416-RDK-000 1.97 mm (0.078 n.)
Q 41417-RDK-000 . 2.00 mm (0.079. n.)
R 41418-RDK-000 2.03 mm (0.080 n.)
s. 41419-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.081 n.)
T 41420-RDK-000 2.09 mm (0.082 n.)
U 41421-RDK-000 .. 2.12 mm (0.083 n.)
V 41422-RDK-000 2.15 mm (0.085 n.)
w 41423-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.086 n.)
X 41424-RDK-000 2.21 mm (0.087 n.)
Y 41425-RDK-000 . 2.24 mm (0.088 n.)
z 41426-RDK-000 2.27 mm (0.089 n.)
AA 41427-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.091 n.)
AB 41428-RDK-000 2.33 mm (0.092 n.)
AC 41429-RDK-000 2.36 mm (0.093 n.)
AD 41430-RDK-000 2.39 mm (0.094 n.)
AE 41431-RDK-000 2.42 mm (0.095 n.)
AF 41432-RDK-000 2.45 mm (0.096 n.)
AG 41433-RDK-000 2.48 mm (0.098 n.)
AH 41434-RDK-000 2.51 mm (0.099 n.)
Al 41435-RDK-000 2.54 mm (0.100 n.)
AJ 41436-RDK-000 2.57 mm (0.101 n.)
AK 41437-RDK-000 2.60 mm (0.102 n.)
AL 41438-RDK-000 2.63 mm (0.104 n.)
AM 41439-RDK-000 2.66 mm (0.105 n.)
(cont'd)
Reassembly (cont'd)
44. Install the 80 mm trust shim (A) and bearing outer 47. Install the new O-ring (A) on the transfer cover (B),
race (B) in the transfer cover (C). If you heated the then install the cover on the transfer housing (C).
cover, let it cool to room temperature before
installing the thrust shim. 8 x 1.25 mm
26 N-m (2 .7 kgf-m, 20 I bf-ft)
45. Drive the outer race securely in the cover using the
driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
48. Remove the filler plug (A), then refil l the transfer
assembly with transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil). Use a
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil,
API classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Viscosity:
SAE 90: Above 0 °F ( —18 °C)
SAE 80W-90: Below 0 °F ( —18 *C)
Hypoid Gear Oil Capacity: 0.45 L (0.48 US qt)
46. After replacing the 80 mm thrust shim, recheck and

make sure that the total starting torque is within the
specification.
20 x 1.5 mm
44 N-m
49. Install the filler plug with a new sealing washer (B).
Rear Differential
Special Tools .........................................................................15-2
Component Location Index ............................................ .15-3
General Troubleshooting Information ........................ .15-4
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............................................15-10
Symptom Troubleshooting Index .............. .................. .15-11
System Description ............................................................15-12
Circuit Diagram ................................................................... 15-18
DTC Troubleshooting ....................................................... .15-20
Symptom Troubleshooting ............................................ .15-40
Rear Differential Fluid
Inspection and Replacement .......................................15-46
Rear Differential Function Test ....................................... .15-47
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor
Replacement .................................................................. .15-47
VTM-4 LOCK Switch Test/Replacement ...................... .15-48
VTM-4 Control Unit Replacement ................................. .15-48
VTM-4 Relay Replacement ............... ............................. .15-49
Rear Differential Mount Replacement ......................... .15-50
Rear Differential Removal ............................................... .15-51
Backlash Inspection .......................................................... .15-53
Rear Differential Installation ........................................... .15-54
Special Tools

® 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2
(D 07AAD-S9VA000 Driveshaft Remover 1
© ©
V T M -4 LOCK I N D IC A TO R
Removal , page 15-51

I nstallation, page 15-54
VTM-4 Indicator
The VTM-4 indicator comes on under certain conditions even if the 4WD system is working normally. Here are some
examples:
• When you use high-powered wireless equipment such as a CB or Ham radio in the vehicle.
• When you keep spinning the front wheels while the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, snow, etc.
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops below 8 volts or rises above 16 volts.
After the VTM-4 indicator comes on, it stays on until you turn the ignition switch OFF.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
• The VTM-4 control unit can memorize up to seven different DTCs. The system displays the DTCs by blinking the
VTM-4 indicator. Multiple DTCs are displayed in the order they occured, beginning with the most recent.
• If the same DTC is detected more than once, the most recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, when the
same problem is detected more than once, it is memorized as a single DTC.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs are not cleared
when the battery or the VTM-4 control unit is disconnected.
• If there is a problem in the central processing unit (CPU) of the VTM-4 control unit, the VTM-4 indicator comes on,
but no DTC is memorized.
Self-diagnosis
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system does the following:
• Turnsonthe VTM-4 indicator.

• Memorizes the DTC.
• Stops 4WD control and puts the vehicle back in 2WD (FWD).
• Reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions when the abnormality was detected.
m
Initialization of the VTM-4 Control Unit Manual Initialization
Whenever the VTM-4 control unit is replaced, it must be 1. Start the engine (the VTM-4 indicator comes on,
initialized to make the 4WD system function. and the VTM-4 LOCK switch indicator is off).
There are two methods used to initialize the VTM-4
control unit. 2. Apply the brakes, and shift to either the R, 1, or
The recommended method is to use the Honda 2 position, then push the VTM-4 LOCK switch (the
Diagnostic System (HDS) with the appropriate software VTM-4 indicator stays on, and the VTM-4 LOCK
plugged into the data link connector (DLC). switch indicator is on). The 4WD system is now in
The other method is to initialize the VTM-4 control unit lock mode.
manually.
Initial ization with the HDS
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) (the VTM-4 indicator
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to and the VTM-4 LOCK indicator both come on for
the DLC (A). 4 seconds, then go off). The VTM-4 control unit is
initial ized.
ON
VTM-4
INDICATOR
VTM-4 LOCK
INDICATOR
2. Make sure the HDS communicates with the VTM-4

control unit. If it doesn't go to the DLC circuit
troubl eshooting (see page 11- 218 ).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the

prompts on the HDS screen.
NOTE: See the HDS user's manual for specific

instruction.
(cont'd)
How to Check for DTCs 5. After recording the DTCs, clear all DTCs.
When the VTM-4 control unit senses an abnormality in 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 4WD
the input or output systems, the VTM-4 indicator in the mode, and check for DTCs. If the DTC returns, refer
gauge control module will usually come on, and the to the DTC Troubleshooting. If the DTC does not
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), the D indicator, and/ return, there was an intermittent problem within
or the VSA indicator may also come on. the circuit. Make sure all connectors and terminals
There are two methods used to check for DTCs. in the circuit are tight.
The recommended method is to use the HDS with the
appropriate software plugged into the data link Service Check Signal Circuit (SCS) Method
connector DLC.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Shift to the P
The other method is to connect the service check signal position, then turn off the engine.
(SCS) circuit with the HDS. When the DLC is connected
to the HDS, the VTM-4 indicator will blink the diagnostic 2. Release the parking brake pedal.
trouble code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned
ON (II) and the SCS circuit is connected to body ground. 3. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
the DLC (A).
HDS Method
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to

the DLC (A).
4. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the HDS.

control unit. If it doesn't go to the DLC circuit

prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s) on the
screen. After determining the DTC(s), refer to the
DTC Troubleshooting.
NOTE: See the HDS user's manual for specific

instruction.
4. If there are fuel and emissions DTCs, A/T DTCs, or

VSA DTCs at the same time, troubleshoot the fuel
and emissions DTCs first, A/T DTCs second, VSA
DTCs third, and VTM-4 DTCs last.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and watch the How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the VTM-4
VTM-4 indicator. Control Unit
NOTE: Codes above 10 are indicated by a series of Special Tools Required

long and short blinks. One long blink equals 10 • Digital multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a
short blinks. Add the long and short blinks together commercially available digital multimeter
to determine the code. After determining the code, • Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting.
1. Remove the VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48).
2. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking

patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital
Long blinks Short blinks multimeter (C). Using the wire insulator as a guide
for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter,
-(2)' -(4)- gently slide the tip into the connector from the wire
side until it touches the end of the wire terminal.
OFF— 1
See DTC 24
6. Record all the DTC(s), then refer to the DTC

Troubleshooting to determine the meaning of each
DTC.
7. Clear the DTCs from the VTM-4 control unit

memory.
8. If the MIL, the D indicator, the VSA indicator, and

the VTM-4 indicator all come on at the same time,
troubleshoot the cause of the MIL first, then 3. If you can not get to the wire side of the connector
troubleshoot the A/T DTCs second, the VSA DTCs or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the
third, and the VTM-4 DTCs last. connector and probe the terminals (B) from the
terminal side. Do not force the probe into the
9. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 4WD connector.
mode, and check for DTCs.
If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting. INOTICE I
If the DTC does not return, there was an Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
all connectors and terminals in the circuit are tight. electrical connections.
How to Clear the VTM-4 Control Unit Service Check Si gnal Circuit (SCS) Method
Memory
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Shift to the P
There are two methods used to clear DTCs from the position, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
VTM-4 control unit memory.
The recommended method is to use the HDS with the 2. Release the parking brake pedal.
appropriate software plugged into the data link
connector (DLC). 3. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe HDS to
The other method is to connectthe service check signal the DLC (A).
(SCS) connector with the HDS, and manually clear the
memory.
HDS method
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe HDS to

the DLC (A).
4. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the HDS,
6. The VTM-4 indicator comes on and stays on for

4 seconds. Press and hold the VTM-4 LOCK switch
while the VTM-4 indicator is on.
control unit. If it doesn't go to the DLC circuit 7. When the VTM-4 indicator goes off, release the
troubleshooting (see page 11-218). VTM-4 LOCK switch.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the 8. The VTM-4 indicator comes on and stays on for
prompts on the HDS screen to clear the DTC(s). 4 seconds. Push the VTM-4 LOCK switch while the
VTM-4 indicator is on.
NOTE: Seethe HDS user's manual for specific
instruction.
9. When the VTM-4 indicator goes off, release the How to End a Troubleshooting Session
VTM-4 LOCK switch. The VTM-4 indicator will blink (required after any troubleshooting)
twice quickly to confirm that the DTCs have been
cleared from the VTM-4 control unit memory. 1. Clear the DTCs from the VTM-4 control unit
memory.
NOTE: If the VTM-4 indicator does not blink twice
quickly, the memory has not been cleared. Turn the 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
ignition switch OFF, then repeat steps 5 through 9. HDS from the DLC.
3. Verify that the problem has been repaired; test-

IG switch ON (II) drive the vehicle for several minutes in 4WD mode.
IGNITION ON
I
SWITCH
OFF
PARKING BRAKE 0N
SWITCH
OFF
HDS ON
CONNECT
OFF ___ I 0.3 sec
VTM-4 ON
INDICATOR I - ___ f j i^ n ^ i
OFF
VTM-4 LOCK ON 4 sec 4 sec 0.3 sec 0.3 sec
INDICATOR OFF _ ____ I
____ l------- L
i - J------
r - I
t f VTM-4tLOCK
VTM-4 LOCK
switch pushed switch pushed
VTM-4 LOCK VTM-4 LOCK
switch released switch released
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the

HDS from the DLC.
DTC* VTM-4 Detection Item Probable Cause(s) Note
Indicator
21-1 ON Left-front wheel sensor • Sensor is defective (see page 15-20)
22-1 ON Right-front wheel sensor • Open or short in the wire harness
23-1 ON Left-rear wheel sensor • VTM-4 control unit is defective (see page 15-21)
24-1 ON Ri ght-rear wheel sensor • VSA modulator-control unit is defective
26-1 ON VSA modulator-control unit or wire • Open or short in the wire harness from the (see page 15-23)
harness VTM-4 control unit to VSA modulator-
control unit
• VSA modul ator-control unit is defective
37-1 ON Engine RPM signal circuit • Open or short in the wire harness (see page 15-24)
38-1 ON • VTM-4 control unit or PCM is defective
41-1 ON CAN communi cation (PCMA/SA system) • Open or short in the wire harness between (see page 15-27)
the VTM-4 control unit and the PCMA/SA
• VTM-4 control unit or PCM is defective or
VSA is defective
42-1 ON Rear differential fluid temperature • Sensor is defective (see page 15-28)
43-1 ON sensor • Open or short in the wire harness
• VTM-4 control unit is defective
44-1 ON VTM-4 relay * Relay is defective (see page 15-30)
* Open or short in the wire harness
* VTM-4 control unit is defective
51-1 ON Left clutch electromagnetic coil • Electromagnetic coil is defective (see page 15-32)
52-1 ON Left clutch electromagnetic coil • Open or short in the wire harness
53-1 ON Left clutch electromagnetic coil • VTM-4 control unit is defective
54-1 ON Left clutch electromagnetic coil
55-1 ON Right cl utch electromagnetic coil • Electromagnetic coil i s defective (see page 15-34)
56-1 ON Right clutch electromagnetic coil • Open or short in the wire harness
57-1 ON 1 Right clutch electromagnetic coil • VTM-4 control unit is defective
58-1 ON Right clutch electromagnetic coil
59-1 ON Right/left clutch electromagnetic coil • Low battery voltage (see page 15-36)
power supply • Fault in the charging system
73-1 ON MAP (manifold absol ute pressure) Fault in the PCM system/MAP (manifold (see page 15-36)
sensor or PCM absolute pressure) sensor is defective
76-1 ON Rear differential clutch warni ng system • Sensor is defective (see page 15-37)
• Open or short in the wire harness
• VSA modulator-control unit is defective
77-1 ON PCM PCM is defective (see page 15-39)
78-1 ON VTM-4 control unit VTM-4 control unit is defective (see page 15-39)
41-2 ON CAN communication (PCMA/SA system) Open or short in the wire harness between (see page 15-27)
the VTM-4 control unit and the PCMA/SA
42-2 ON Rear differential fluid temperature • Sensor is defective (see page 15-28)
sensor • Open or short in the wire harness
21-2 ON Left-front wheel sensor • Sensor is defective (see page 15-20)
22-2 ON Right-front wheel sensor • Open or short in the wire harness
23-2 ON Left-rear wheel sensor • VTM-4 control unit is defective (see page 15-21)
24-2 ON Right-rear wheel sensor • VSA modulator-control unit is defective
53-2 ON Left or right clutch electromagnetic coil • Electromagnetic coil is defective (see page 15-32),
• Open or short in the wire harness (see page 15-34)
* : DTCs are indi cated by the VTM-4 i ndicator when the data link connector (DLC) is connected to the HDS.
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for
The VTM-4 indicator Symptom troubleshooting (see page 15-40).

comes on, but no DTCs
are stored in any system:
VTM-4, VSA, or PGM-FI
The VTM-4 indicator does Symptom troubleshooting (see page 15-41).

not come on
The VTM-4 LOCK Symptom troubleshooting (see page 15-42).

indicator does not come
on when the VTM-4 LOCK
switch is pressed

indicator comes on when
the ignition switch is
turned ON (II) and does
not go off

indicator does not come
on for about 4 seconds
when the ignition switch
is turned ON (II)
Noise and judder when 1. Drain and refill the rear differential with new VTM-4 fluid
turning at full lock (see page 15-46).
2. Do the Differential Function Test (see page 15-47).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the drained fluid comes out clean.
4. Drain the rear differential, then install new drain plug
washers, and refill with new VTM-4 fluid (see page 15-46).
Clunk noise and then a Normal clutch engagement at throttle opening

bump when backing and
turning
System Description
This vehicle is equipped with a rear differential system called the variable torque management 4WD (VTM-4) system.
The VTM-4 control unit controls the currents flowing through electromagnetic coils to engage and disengage the right
and left clutches in the rear differential assembly.
The operation of the VTM-4 system consists of the following functions:
• Vehicle acceleration torque control (VATC)

• Limited slip differential (LSD)
• Lock control
These functions automatically combine to distribute driving torque between the front and rear wheels when the
vehicle accelerates or when wheels are slipping. When the vehicle speed is about 18 mph (30 km/h) or below, and the
shift lever is in the R, 2, or 1position, the system wil l manually engage the rear differential clutches when the VTM-4
LOCK switch is pressed. By design, in lock mode, the torque is gradually reduced at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h) to
minimize the load on the 4WD system.
The VTM-4 control unit has a fail-safe function, a self-diagnosis function, and a provisi on to communicate with the
HDS.
• VATC (Vehicle Acceleration Torque Control)
The torque to be delivered to the rear wheels is calculated based on the acceleration of the vehicle calculated in the
VTM-4 control unit.
Acceleration of vehicle
(calculation from driving torque)
• LSD (Limited Slip Differential) Control

The torque to be delivered to the rear wheels is calculated based on the differences in speed and acceleration
between the front and rear wheels.
Front wheel Front wheel

rotation small rotation large
Rotation difference between

front wheel and rear wheel
* LOCK Control
Rear differential clutch lock control is done by pushing the VTM-4 LOCK switch manually when the shift lever is in
the R, 1, or 2 position.
(mph)
(cont'd)
VTM-4 Control Unit Electrical Connections

SB
VTM-4 Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The VTM-4 control unit terminal voltage and measuring conditions for the 4WD system are shown.
NOTE: Measure voltage with the connectors connected.
VTM-4 Co ntrol Unit Co nnector Terminal Loc ations
B (12P) ( , A (22P)
1 2 3 4 5 / 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
7 / 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 20 / 22
/
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Measurement

number Conditions Voltage
Al YEL IG1 (Ignition 1) Power supply for Ignition switch Battery Voltage
activating the system ON (II)
A3 GRY/RED RRP (Rear right Detect right-rear wheel Turn wheel at 1 There should beOto
pulse) sensor signal rotation/second about 5 V repeatedly.
(A digital voltmeter
reads about 2.5 V when
the wheel is turning
faster.)
A4 ORN/GRN FSR (Fail-safe Drives VTM-4 relay Ignition switch Battery Voltage
relay) ON (II)
Engine running Less than 1 V
A5 GRY/YEL RLP (Rear left Detects left-rear wheel Turn wheel at 1 There should be 0 to
faster.)
A6 GRN/RED PARBRK (Parking Detects parking brake Parking brake on Less than 2 V
brake) signal Parking brake off Battery Voltage
A7 LT GRN FRP (Front right Detects right-front Turn wheel at 1 There should beOto
pulse) wheel sensor signal rotation/second about 5 V repeatedly.
faster.)
A8 BRN/WHT LOCKSW (LOCK Detects VTM-4 LOCK Ignition switch Less than 1 V
switch) switch signal ON (II)
VTM-4 LOCK switch Battery Voltage
ON (pushed in)
A9 WHT/RED FLP (Front left Detects left-front wheel Turn wheel at 1 There should be 0 to
faster.)
(cont'd)
VTM-4 Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The VTM-4 control unit termina l voltage and measuring conditions for the 4WD system are shown.
NOTE: Measure voltage with the connectors connected.
V T M -4 Co ntrol U nit Connector Term inal Locations
1 2 3 4 5 / 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
7 / / 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22

A10 BRN/YEL LG1 (Logic ground) Ground Less than 1 V
A11 WHT CANH CAN communication Ignition switch About 2.5 V (pluses)
(CAN signal ON (II)
communication
signal high)
A12 BLU NEP Detects engine speed Ignition switch Above 8 V
(Engine speed pulse ON (II)
>
pulse) Engine running at
LD
00
1,000 rpm I
I
A13 BLK TOL Detects rear differential Check at normal 1—3.6 V
(Temperature oil fluid temperature temperature with
low) sensor signal the ignition switch
ON (II)
A14 RED/WHT WARN1 (Warning Drives VTM-4 indicator VTM-4 indicator on Less than 4 V
1) VTM-4 indicator off Battery Voltage
oi
A15 WHT TOH Power supply for rear Ignition switch ON

I
<
(Temperature oil differential fluid (ID

high) temperature sensor
A16 YEL/BLK LOCKL (Lock lamp) Drives VTM-4 LOCK VTM-4 LOCK Less than 4 V
indicator indicator on
VTM-4 LOCK Battery Voltage
indicator off
A18 GRY K-LINE Communication signal Ignition switch About 9.0 V
to HDS ON (II) (Not
connected to HDS)
A20 BRN SCS Detects service check SCS circuit shorted Less than 2 V
(Service check signal SCS circuit opened About 5 V
signal)
A22 RED CANL CAN communication Ignition switch About 2.5 V (pluses)
(CAN signal ON (II)
communication
signal low)
Bl BLU/YEL LCOH (Left coil Drives left clutch Ignition switch Less than 1 V
high) electromagnetic coil ON (II)
(positive) Engine running Less than 1 V
VTM-4 LOCK Above 3 V
switch ON (pushed
in)
B2 GRY/WHT LCOL (Left coil Drives left clutch Ignition switch Less than 1 V
low) electromagnetic coil ON (II)
(negative) Engine running Less than 1 V
VTM-4 LOCK Less than 1 V
switch ON (pushed
in)
B3 BRN/BRK RCOH (Right coil Drives right clutch Ignition switch Less than 1 V
high) electromagnetic coil ON (II)
(positive) Engine running Less than 1 V
VTM-4 LOCK Above 3 V
switch ON (pushed
in)
B4 RED/GRN RCOL (Right coil Drives right clutch Ignition switch Less than 1 V
low) electromagnetic coil ON (II)
(negative) Engine running Less than 1 V
VTM-4 LOCK Less than 1 V
switch ON (pushed
in)
B5 BLK PG (Power ground) Ground Less than 0.5 V
B7 RED/BLU PWR (Power) Power supply for 10 seconds after Less than 3 V
VTM-4 control unit ignition switch
ON (II)
Engine running Battery Voltage
VTM-4 LOCK Battery Voltage
switch ON (pushed
in)
B11 RED/WHT WARN2 (Warning Drives VTM-4 indicator VTM-4 indicator on Less than 4 V
2) VTM-4 indicator off Battery Voltage
B12 BRN/YEL LG2 (Logic ground) Ground Less than 1 V
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
CONTROL MODULE
------------------- : Shielding
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
LEFT CLUTCH RIGHT CLUTCH REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID

ELECTROMAGNETIC ELECTROMAGNETIC TEMPERATURE
COIL COIL SENSOR
p -W -i — vw —
1 2 2 1 1 2 |
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 21-1,21-2,22-1,22-2: Front Wheel 9. Measure voltage between the A7 and A9 terminals
Sensors of the VTM-4 control unit and body ground while
rotating the appropriate wheel (1 rotation/second).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). DTC Appropriate Terminal
21 (Left-front) A9
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 22 (Right-front) A7
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

HDS. 12 13 14 15 16 / 13 / 20 / 22
FRP (LT GRN) FLP (WHT/RED)
Is DTC 2 1 - 1 , 21-2, 22-1, and/or 21-2 indicated? (y) o o
YES—Go to step 4.
time.B
Does the voltage change from OV to about 5 V
4. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. repeatedly?
Are there any VSA DT Cs indicated? YES—Go to step 15.
YES—Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.* NO—Go to step 10.
NO—Goto step 5. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A
(22P) and the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
6. Raise the vehicle on the lift. connectors.
7. Spin the rear wheels by hand, and check for rear 12. Checkthe same terminal of VTM-4 control unit
brake drag. connector A (22P) for continuity to body ground.
Are the rear brakes dragging? VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22PJ
YES—Repair cause of rear brake drag, and retest ■

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 13 / 20 / 22
NO—Go to step 8. /I
FRP (LT GRN) FLP (WHT/RED)
13. Connect the same terminals of VTM-4 control unit DTC 23-1,-23-2,24-1,24-2: Rear Wheel
connector A (22P) to body ground with the jumper Sensors
wires.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
V T M -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8).
12 13 14 15 16 / 13 / 20 / 22
FRP (LT GRN) FLP (W H T/R E D ) 3. Start the engine, and shift to the D position. Drive
the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h), while
keeping the engine speed below 2,500 rpm for at
JUMPER WIRE
least 30 seconds.
W ire side of female terminals NOTE: Be careful not to overheat the rear
differential clutch system.
14. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator- 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
control unit connector terminals No. 26 and No. 42
to body ground. is DTC 23-1,23-2,24-1, and/or 24-2 indicated?
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (47P)

YES—Go to step 5.

FRP (LT GRN) time.B
\A20\AAAAA2B 1/128129j30 1 /
17| 18
5. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
I33l34|35l/l37|38|39|/|4l|42|43|/1/|/|
FLP (W H T/R E D ) Are there any VSA DTCs indicated?
Wire side of female terminals NO—Goto step 6.

7. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
Y E S -G o to step 15.
8 . Spin the rear wheels by hand, and check for rear
IMO—Repair open in the wire between the A7 brake drag.
and/or A9 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and
the VSA modulator-control unit. ■ Are the rear brakes dragging?
15. Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4 control YES—Repair cause of rear brake drag, and retest. ■
unit and the VSA modulator-control unit connectors.
If it is normal, replace the VTM-4 control unit. Test- NO—Goto step 9.
drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the HDS.
is DTC 21-1, 21-2,22-1, and/or 21-2 indicated?
YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit

(see page 19-100). ■
NO—The system is OK at this time. ■

(cont'd)
10. Measure voltage between the A3 and A5 terminals 14. Connect the same terminals of VTM-4 control unit
of the VTM-4 control unit and body ground while connector A (22P) to body ground with the jumper
rotating the appropriate wheel (1 rotation/second). wires.
DTC Appropriate Terminal V TM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)

23 (Left-rear) A5
24 (Right-rear) A3
10
VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
12 13 15 18 20 22
RRP (GRY/RED) RLP (GRY/YEL)
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 13 / 18 / 20 / 22
RRP (GRY/RED) RLP (GRY/YEL) JUMPER WIRE
Wire side o f female terminals

15. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
control unit connector terminals No. 9 and No. 41
Does the voltage change f rom OV to about 5 V to body ground.
repeatedly?
V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR (47P)
RLP (GRY/YEL) I
NO—Goto step 11.
1 16
17| 1 8 M 2 0 M / | A ^ / 2 6 | / l 2 8 | 2 9 | 3 0 l /
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 32 47
|33|34|35|/|37|38|39|/|41 k k l / l / l / l
RRP (GRY/RED)
12. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A
connectors.
13. Check the same terminal of VTM-4 control unit Wire side of female terminals
connector A (22P) for continuity to body ground.
VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P) Is there continuity?
YES—Goto step 16.

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 13 / 18 / 20 / 22
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A3
RRP (GRY/RED) RLP (GRY/YEL)
and/or A5 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and
(S) (U ) the VSA modulator-control unit.B
16. Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4 control DTC 26-1; VSA Modulator-Control Unit or
unit and the VSA modulator-control unit connectors. Wire Harness
If it is normal, replace the VTM-4 control unit, then
go to step 15. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
17. Start the engine and shift to the D position. Drive
the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h), while 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
least 30 seconds. 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8).
NOTE: Be careful not to overheat the rear 3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the
differential clutch system. HDS.
18. Checkfor DTCs with the HDS. is DTC 26-1 indicated?
is DTC 23-1,23-2,24-1, and/or 24-2 indicated? YES—Go to step 4.
YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
(see page 19-100).H time.B
NO—The system is OK at this time. ■ 4. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
Are there any VSA DT Cs indicated?
NO—Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
8. Measure voltage between the A3, A5, A7, and A9 DTC 37-1,38-1: Engine RPM Signal Circuit
terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and body
ground while rotating the appropriate wheel NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
(1 rotation/ second). troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
Appropriate wheel Appropriate Terminal 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Left-front A9
Right-front A7 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8).
Left-rear A5
Right-rear A3 3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the
HDS.
V TM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
Is DTC 37-1 and/or 38-1 indicated?
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YES—Goto step 4.
12 13 14 15 13 / 13 / 20 / 22
RRP FLP
(GRY/RED) RLP FRP (W HT/RED) time.B
(GRY/ (LT GRN)
YEL)
4. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Are there any PGM-FI D TC ’s indicated?

Do all four readings change from OV to about 5 V NO—Goto step 5.

repeatedly?
YES—Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4
control unit. If it is normal, replace the VTM-4 6. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A
control unit (see page 15-48). 11 (22P) from the VTM-4 control unit.
NO—Checkfor loose wires or poor connections 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
between the VTM-4 control unit and the VSA
modulator-control unit. If it is normal, replace the
VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-100). ■
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P) VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
NEP (BLU) NEP (BLU)
Condition Voltage Is there voltage?

Ignition switch ON (II) Above 8 V
Engine running at 5 -8 V YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
1,000 rpm the A12 terminal of the VTM-4 control unit and the
A28 terminal of the PCM. ■
Is the voltage correct?
NO—Go to step 14.
NO—Goto step 9.
15. Check for continuity between the A12 terminal of
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the VTM-4 control unit and body ground.
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)

1 / I 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
NEP (BLU)

the A12 terminal of the VTM-4 control unit, the A28
terminal of the PCM.B
NO—Goto step 16.

16. Connect the A12 terminal of the VTM-4 control unit 18. Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4 control
connector A (22P) to body ground with the jumper unit, PCM connectors. If it is normal, replace the
wire. VTM-4 control unit. Test-drive the vehicle, and
check for DTCs with the HDS.
VTfVt-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YES—Replace the PCM (see page 11-230). ■

1 /
12 13 14 15 16 18 /
20 22 / / NO—The system is OK at this time. ■
NEP (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE

r~nT
I 1 I 2 / I . 4 | 5 (6 [ 7 8 I 9 L
■ 10 11 12
/lr 4 |z L / 17 18 19 ■
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
/ / 28 2 9 |/|3 1 ]/ 33 34 35
36 *l / l / l 41 142 43|44|
NEP (BLU)

terminal of the VTM-4 control unit and the A28
terminal of the PCM. 11
DTC 41-1,41-2: CAN Communication (PCM/ 8. Check for continuity between the A11 terminal of
VSA System) the VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P), the A36
terminal of the PCM, and the 14 terminal of the VSA
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general modulator-control unit.

CANH (WHT)
r
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 22
/
3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the
HDS. Wire side of female terminals

I 1.1 2 / I T T T T e T 7 8 I9 L
YES—Go to step 4. 1 10 11 12
/I14I/I/ 17 18 19 ■
20 21 22 23 24 25
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 1
/ / 28 29|/311/ 33 34 35
time.B 1361/ 38l/|/|41 |42 431441
CANH (WHT)
4. Checkfor DTCs in the PGM-FI system and VSA
system with the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
VS A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
Are there any DT Cs indicated? CONNECTOR (47P) ___________
I CANH (WHT)
i | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | / | / | 9 l / | 11 l / M u M 16
YES—Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ 1711 8 1 / 20 l / l / l / l / l / l 261 / | 281291301 /
32 133134135 j/l 37138 i391/|41 ?421-43 l / l / l / l 47
NO—Goto step 5.
YES—Goto step 9.
7. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P),
PCM connector A (44P), and the VSA modulator- NO—Repair open in the wire between the A11
control unit 47 P connector. terminal of the VTM-4 control unit, A36 terminal of
the PCM, and the 14 terminal of the VSA
modulator-control u n it.l
(cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between the A22 terminal of DTC 42-1,42-2,43-1: Rear Differential Fluid
the VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P), the A1 Temperature Sensor
terminal of the PCM, and the 30 terminal of the VSA
modulator-control unit. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
V T M -4 C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R A (22P)

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 C A N L
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 /22 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8).
PCM C O N N EC TO R A (44P) HDS.
C A N L (RED)
r
Is DTC 42-1, 42-2, and/or 43-1 indicated?
•j 1 2 / I 4 | 5 | 6 J 7 8 I 9 I.
10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
■
YES—Go to step 4.
20 21 22 I X L 23 24 25 ■
■
/ / 28 291/131 33\Z
34 35 NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
| 3 6 | / 381 /1 /|4 1 142 43|44|
time.H
V S A M O D U L A T O R -C O N TR O L U N IT
C O N N EC TO R (47P) 5. Remove the wire harness cover from the rear
C A N L (RED)
1 12 13 | 4 | 5.| 6 l / l / l ? l / h l l / / | l 4 / L 16
differential (see step 2 on page 15-47).
171181/ 120 \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ 261 / | 281291301 /
32 47 6. Disconnect the 2P connector from the rear
|3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/|3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/ | 4 1 1 4 2 | 4 3 | / | / | / |
differential fluid temperature sensor, then measure
Wire side of female terminals resistance of the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
control unit, PCM, VSA modulator-control unit
connectors. If it is normal, replace the VTM-4
control unit (see page 15-48). 11

terminal of the VTM-4 control unit, A1 terminal of
the PCM, and the 12 terminal of the VSA
modulator-control unit. ■ Terminal side of male terminals
fluid temperature Resistance

32 °F (0 V ) 5.82 k Qto 7.26 k Q
86 °F (30 ° C ) 1.53 k Qto 1.83 k 0
2121= (100 ° C ) 148 Qto 162 Q
284 °F (140 ° C ) 52 Qto 61 Q
Is the resistance correct?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Replace the rear differential fluid temperature

sensor (see page 15-46).B
7. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A 12. Connectthe rear differential fluid temperature
(22P) from the VTM-4 control unit. sensor connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 to body
ground with jumper wires.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
9. Measure voltage between the A13 and A15 TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
ground.

JUMPER. WIRE
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 20 / 22
TOL (BLK) I TOH (WHT)
(S) (2) Terminal side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals 13. Check for continuity between the A13 and A15
terminals of the VTM-4 control unit connector A
(22P) and body ground.
V TM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
the A13 or A15 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit
and the rear differential fluid temperature sensor. ■ 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 22
NO—Goto step 10. /
TOL m m \ J T O H (WHT)
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (Q ) (ft)
11. Check for continuity between the A13 and A15

ground. Wire side of female terminals

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
control unit and the rear differential fluid
TOL (BLK) I TOH (WHT)
temperature sensor connectors. If it is normal,
(u) (p) replace the VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48). ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A13 or

Wire side of female terminals A15 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and the
rear differential fluid temperature sensor. ■
DTC 44-1: VTM-4 Relay 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general 6. Remove the VTM-4 relay, and test it (see page
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). 22-82).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the VTM-4 relay OK?
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). YES—Goto step 7.
3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the NO—Replace the VTM-4 relay (see page 15-49).B
HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the VTM-4
Is DTC 44-1 indicated? relay removed.
YES—Go to step 4. 8. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 4

terminals of the VTM-4 relay 4P connector and
NO—-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this body ground.
time.H
V T M -4 RELAY CONNECTOR (4P)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF with the VTM-4 control
unit still connected, measure voltage between the W H T/R E D
A4 and B7 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and
body ground with the ignition switch ON (II), and
after the engine starts.
V T M -4 CON TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R S
FSR (O R N /G R N )
I .. ..........j r-, A I22P) :' ^ B (12P)
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5/
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 20 / 22 7 / / / 11 12
PW R (R ED /B LU ) Is there battery voltage?
X
YES—Go to step 9.
Wire si de of female terminals NO—Check for a blown No. 4 (20 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse box or No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the
Condition B7 (PWR) A4 (FSR) fuses are OK, repair open in the wire between the
Ignition switch Less than 3 V Battery auxiliary under-hood fuse box or the driver's
ON (II) voltage under-dash fuse/relay box and the VTM-4 relay. ■
Engine start Battery Less than 1V
voltage 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is the voltage correct? 10. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A
(22P) and connector B (12P) from the VTM-4 control
YES—Go to step 16. unit.
NO—Goto step 5. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

<s&
12. Measure voltage between the A4 and B7 terminals 15. Check for conti nuity between the B7 terminal of the
of the VTM-4 control unit and body ground. VTM-4 control unit and the No. 2 terminal of the
VTM-4 relay, and between the A4 terminal of the
VTM-4 control unit and the No. 3 terminal of the
V T M -4 C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R S
VTM-4 relay.
FSR (O R N /G R N ) VTM-4 RELAY CONNECTOR (4P)

A (22 P) , B (12P) 1 RED/BLU
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5/ 2
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 7 / / / 11 12
PW R (R ED /B LU )
T/T
O R N /G R N
V T M -4 C O N TR O L V T M -4 C O N TR O L
U N IT C O N N EC TO R V&4/ U N IT C O N N EC TO R
A (22P) B (12P)
FS R ( O R N /G R N ) P W R (R E P /B LU )
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 /
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 7 / / / 11 12
Is t h e r e b a t t e r y v o l t a g e ?
the A4 or B7 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
and the VTM-4 relay. ■
YES—Goto step 16.
NO—Go to step 13.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A4 or B7
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and the VTM-4
relay. ■
14. Check for continuity between the A4 and B7
terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and body 16. Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4 control
ground. unit and the VTM-4 relay connectors. If it is normal,
test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the
V T M -4 C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R S
HDS.
is D T C 4 4 -1 in d ic a te d ?
FSR (O R N /G R N )
A (22P) B (12P) YES—Replace the VTM-4 control unit (see page
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 / 15-48KB
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 7 / / / 11 12
PW R (R E D /B LU ) NO—The system is OK at this time. ■
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
DTC 51-1,52-1,53-1,53-2,54-1: Left Clutch 6. Measure resistance between the No. 1 terminal of
Electromagnetic Coil the left clutch electromagnetic coil and body
ground.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). LEFT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL
CONNECTOR (2P)
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). 1 2
BLK/RED
HDS.
I s D T C 51-1, 5 2 -1 ,5 3 -2 , a n d / o r 5 4 - 1 i n d i c a t e d ?
YES—Go to step 4. Terminal side of male terminals

time.H Is th e re a b o u t 5 0 M Q or m o re ?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES—Goto step 7.
5. Disconnect the left clutch electromagnetic coil 2P NO—Replace the rear differential assembly. ■
connector on the differential. Then measure
resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of 7. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector B
the left clutch electromagnetic coil connector. (12P) from the VTM-4 control unit.
LEFT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

CONNECTOR (2P)
9. Measure voltage between the B1 and B2 terminals
of the VTM-4 control unit and body ground.
1 2 VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)

BLK/RED BLK/W HT
LCOH LCOL
(BLU/YEL) (GRY/WHT)
Terminal side of male terminals 1 2 3 4 5 /

7 / / / 11 12
Is th e r e 1 Q to 3 Q ?
NO—Replace the rear differential assembly.

Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Check for continuity between the B1 and B2
terminals of the VTM-4 control unit.
11. Checkfor continuity between the B1 and B2
terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and body VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
ground.
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)

LCOH LCOL
(BLU/YEL) (GRY/WHT)
LCOH LCOL
(BLU/YEL) (GRY/WHT) 1 2 3 4 5 /
7 / / / 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 /
7 / / / 11 12
Wire side of female terminals Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES—Do the troubleshooting for the right clutch

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? electromagnetic coil (see page 15-34). If it is normal,
replace the VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48). II
the B1 or B2 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit NO—Repair open in the wire between the B1 or B2
and the left clutch electromagnetic coil. ■ terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and the left
clutch electromagnetic coil.B
NO—Goto step 12.
12. Connect a jumper wire between the No. 1 and No. 2

terminals of the 2P connector of the left clutch
electromagnetic coil.
LEFT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL

CONNECTOR (2P)
GRY/WHT |^J BLU/YEL
JUMPER WIRE

DTC 53-2,55-1,56-1,57-1,58-1: Right Clutch 6. Measure resistance between the No. 3 terminal and
Electromagnetic Coil body ground.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, review the general RIG H T CLUTCH ELECTROM AGNETIC C O IL /
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEM PERATURE
SEN SO R C O N N EC TO R (6P)

GRN
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). 2 3 -
4- 5 6
HDS.
I s DTC 53-2, 55-1, 56-1, 57-1, and/or 58-1

in d ic a te d ? Terminal side of male terminals
YES—Go to step 4.
Is th e re 5 0 M Q o r m o r e ?
time. 11 YES—Go to step 7.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—Replace the rear differential assembly. B
5. Disconnect the right clutch electromagnetic coil 6P 7. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector B
connector on the differential. Then measure (12P) from the VTM-4 control unit.
resistance between the No. 3 and No. 6 terminals of
the right clutch electromagnetic coil 6P connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
R IG H T CLUTCH E LEC TR O M A G N ETIC C O IL /

9. Measure voltage between the B3 and B4 terminals
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEM PER A TU R E of the VTM-4 control unit and body ground.
SEN S O R C O N N EC TO R (6P)
V T M -4 C O N TR O L U N IT CO N N EC TO R i (12P)
o GRN
2 3
4 5 fi 3 > RCOH (B R N /B R K ) RCOL (R E D /G R N )
BRN
1 2 3 4 5 /
7 / / / 11 12
I s t h e r e I Q to 3 Q? Wire side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 6.
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
NO—Replace the rear differential assembly. B
11. Check for continuity between the B3 and B4

term i nals of the VTM-4 control unit and body VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (12P)
ground.
VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR i (12P)

RCOH RCOL
(BRN/BRK) (RED/GRN)
RCOH (BRN/BRK) RCOL (RED/GRN)
1 2 3 4 5
7 / / / 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 /
7 / / / 11 12
Wire side of fema l e terminals Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES—Do the troubleshooting for the left clutch

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? electromagnetic coil (see page 15-32). If it is normal,
replace the VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48).B
the B3 or B4 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit NO—Repair open in the wire between the B3 or B4
and the right clutch electromagnetic c o il. il terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and the right
clutch electromagnetic c o il.B
NO—Goto step 12.
12. Connect a jumper wire between the No. 3 and No. 6

terminals of the right clutch electromagnetic coil 6P
connector.
RIGHT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL/

REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CONNECTOR (6P)
RED/GRN
3 2
JUMPER WIRE |
6 5 4
BRN/BRK

DTC 59-1: Right/Left Clutch Electromagnetic DTC 73-1: MAP (Manifold Absolute Pressure)
Coil Power Supply Sensor or PCM
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). 2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8).
3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the 3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the
HDS. HDS.
Is D T C 5 9 -1 in d ic a te d ? Is D T C 7 3 -1 in d ic a te d ?
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.H time.H
4. Check the battery. 4. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Is th e s p e c if i e d b a tte r y in s ta lle d , a n d is it fu lly A r e t h e r e a n y P G M - F I D T C ’s i n d i c a t e d ?

charged?
YES—Goto the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4
NO—Charge or replace the battery. ■ control unit and the PCM connectors. If it is normal,
replace the VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48).H
5. Check the charging system indicator.
D o e s th e c h a rg in g s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n w ith
t h e ig n i tio n s w i t c h O N (II), a n d a f t e r t h e e n g i n e
sta rts, d o e s th e in d ic a to r g o o ff?

control unit connectors. If it is normal, replace the
VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48).B
NO—Troubleshoot the charging system. ■

DTC 76-1; Rear Differential Clutch Warning 10. Measure voltage between the A3 and A5 terminals
System of the VTM-4 control unit and body ground while
rotating the appropriate wheel (1 rotation/second).
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). >TC Appropriate Terminal
23 (Left-rear) A5
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 24 (Right-rear) A3
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). VTM -4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
3. Start the engine, and shift to the D position. Drive

the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h), while 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 1 15 1 3 / 18 / 20 / 22
least 30 seconds.
RRP RLP
(G R Y/R ED )^ (GRY/YEL)
NOTE: Be careful not to overheat the rear

Is D T C 7 6 -1 in d ic a te d ?
YES—Go to step 4. D o e s th e v o lta g e c h a n g e fr o m O V to a b o u t 5 V

re p e a te d ly ?
time.H YES—Go to step 17.
5. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. NO—Goto step 11.
A r e t h e r e a n y V S A DT Cs i n d i c a t e d ? 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. ■ 12. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A
NO—Goto step 6. connectors.
8. Spin the rear wheels by hand, and check for rear

brake drag.
A re th e re a r b r a k e s d r a g g in g ?
YES—Repair cause of rear brake drag, and retest. ■
NO—Goto step 9.

13. Check the same terminals of VTM-4 control unit 15. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
connector A (22P) for continuity to body ground. control unit connector terminals No. 9 and No.41 to
body ground.
V T M -4 C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R A (22P)
V S A M O D U L A T O R -C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R (47P)
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RLP (G R Y/YEL)
12 13 1 4 15 1 3 / 18 / 20 / 22
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 M / I 9 1 /1 .1 1 1 / | / | 141 / | 16
RRP RLP 171181 /| 201 / / | / | / | / 261 /| 281291301 /
(G R Y /R E D )^ (GR Y/YEL) 32 47
I33I34I35I / I 37I38I 39I/ 4 1 k M / l / l / i
RRP (GR Y/R ED )

the A3 and/or A5 terminals of the VTM-4 control YES—Go to step 16.
unit and the VSA modulator-control unit ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A3 and/
NO—Goto step 14. or A5 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and the
VSA modulator-control unit ■
14. Connect the same terminals of VTM-4 control unit
connector A (22P) to body ground with the jumper 16. Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4 control
wires. unit and the VSA modulator-control unit connectors.
If it is normal, replace the VTM-4 control unit
V T M -4 C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R A (22P) (see page 15-48), then go to step 17.
17. Start the engine, shift to the D position. Drive the

vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h), while
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 1 4 15 1 3 / 18 20 / 22
least 30 seconds.
RRP RLP
(G R Y /R E D ) (G R Y/YEL)
NOTE: Be careful not to overheat the rear
JU M P E R W IRE

YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit

(see page 15-48). ■

< 3 &
DTC 11 A : PCM DTC 78 - 1: VTM-4 Control Unit
NOTE: NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general

• Before you troubleshoot, review the general troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
• Check the PCM for DTCs. Diagnose and repair the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
PCM DTCs before troubleshooting DTC 77.
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8).
2. Clear the DTCs with the HDS (see page 15-8). HDS.
3. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the Is D T C 7 8 -1 in d ic a te d ?

HDS.
YES—Goto step 4.
YES—Goto step 4. time.H
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 4. Checkthe battery.

tim e.B
Is th e s p e c if i e d b a tte r y in s ta lle d , a n d is it fu lly
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest charged?
good PCM (see page 11-8). YES—Go to step 5.
5. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for DTCs with the NO—Charge or replace the battery. ■
HDS.
5. Check the charging system indicator.
D o e s th e c h a r g in g s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n w ith
YES—Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4 ig n itio n s w i t c h O N (II), a n d a f t e r t h e e n g i n e s t a r t s ,
control unit. If it is normal, replace the VTM-4 d o e s th e in d ic a to r g o o ff?
control unit (see page 15-48). ■
YES—Goto step6.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the N o —Troubleshoot the charging system. ■
original PCM (see page 11-230).■
6. Check for installation of any aftermarket CB or Ham
radios which may cause an RF signal interference.
Is th e re a n a fte r m a r k e t r a d io in sta lle d ?
YES—Disconnect the aftermarket radio, and

retest. ■

VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48).H
Symptom Troubleshooting
The VTM-4 indicator comes on, but no DTCs 6. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit and the gauge
are stored in any system: VTM-4, VSA, or control module connectors.
PGM-FI
7. Checkfor continuity between the A14 and B11
1. Check the No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under terminals of the VTM-4 control unit and body
dash fuse/rel ay box. ground.
is th e fu s e O K ? VTM-4 CONTROL U N IT CONNECTORS
YES—Go to step 2.
A (22P) B (12P)
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. ■
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 /
2. Reinitialize the VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-5).

12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 7 7 / / 11 12
W ARN1 W ARN2
v(R E D /W H T ) (R E D /W H T )
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the
VTM-4 indicator.
D o e s th e V T M -4 in d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d s ta y o n ? Wire side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 4.
is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
4. Measure voltage between the A1 and A10 the A14 or B11 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit
terminals of the VTM-4 control unit, and between and the gauge control module. ■
the A1 and B12 terminals of the VTM-4 control unit.
NO—Goto step 8.
V T M -4 CON TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R S
8. Reconnect the gauge control module connectors
only, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
LG1 (B R N /Y EL)
IG1 (YEL) D o e s th e V T M -4 in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
B (12P)
A(22P)
1 2 3 4 5 / 1 / *3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YES—Replace the gauge control module (see page
7 / / / 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 22 - 102 ). ■
LG2 (BR N /YEL)
Wire side of fem al e terminals VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48). ■
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Repair open in the wire between A1 terminal

of the VTM-4 control unit and the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box, or repair open in the wire
between A10 or B12 terminals of the VTM-4 control
unit and body ground. ■

The VTM-4 indicator does not come on 5. Connect the B2 terminal of the gauge control
module to body ground with-a jumper wire, then
1. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connector A turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(22P) and B (12P) from the VTM-4 control unit.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECOR B (36P)
3. Connect the A14 and B11 terminals of the VTM-4 RED/WHT

control unit individually or B11 terminals of the
p rs 1------- — f ., 1 - — .n „
CD
CO
1 5> | 3 |4 | 5 |6 |7 12113114 115116 117 118 |
o
VTM-4 control unit to body ground with a jumper 119 | / | 21 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 126 | 2 7 128 129 | 3 0 1 31 13 2 133 13 4 13 5 136
wire, and check the VTM-4 indicator.
JUMPER WIRE
V T M -4 C O N TR O L UNIT CONN EC TO R S
A (22P) B (12P)
W ire side of fe m a le term inals
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 /
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 22 7 / / / 11 12
W A RN 1 W ARN2
D o e s th e V T M -4 in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
(R E D /W H T ) (R E D /W H T )
YES—Repair open in the wire between the gauge
JUMPER WIRE
control module and the VTM-4 control unit ■
W ire side of fem ale term inals NO—Repair open in the wire between the B2
terminal of the gauge control module and the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the wire is
D o e s th e V T M -4 in d ic a to r c o m e o n ? good, replace the gauge control module (see page
22- 102). a
VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48). ■
NO—Goto step 4.

Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
The VTM -4 LOCK indicator does not come on 8. Measure voltage between the A8 terminal of the
when the VTM-4 LOCK switch is pressed VTM-4 control unit and body ground.
NOTE: The VTM-4 LOCK indicator will only come on VTIVI-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
when the engine is running and the shift lever is in the
R, 1, or 2 position before the switch is pressed.
LOCKSW (BRN/WHT)
1. Checkthe No. 11 (7.5 A) and No. 9 (10 A)fuses in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A re th e fu s e s O K ? 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22 6
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Replace the fuses, and recheck. ■ Wire side of female terminals
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and checkthe

VTM-4 LOCK indicator. Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e w h e n th e V T M -4 L O C K
s w itc h is p u s h e d ?
D o e s th e V T M -4 L O C K in d ic a to r c o m e o n w ith th e
i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N ( II), a n d d o e s i t g o o f f YES—Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4
4 s e c o n d s la te r? control unit connector. If it is normal, replace the
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Go to step 9.
NO—Goto step 10.
9. Test the VTM-4 LOCK switch (see page 15-48).
3. Start the engine, and move the shift lever to the
R, 1, and 2 positions then check the VTM-4 LOCK Is th e V T M -4 L O C K s w itc h O K ?
indicator.
YES—Repair open in the wire between the VTM-4
D o e s th e V T M -4 L O C K in d ic a to r c o m e o n w h e n LOCK switch and the VTM-4 control unit ■
th e V T M -4 L O C K s w itc h is p u s h e d ?
NO—Replace the VTM-4 LOCK switch (see page
YES—The system is OK at this time.B 15-48).B
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Check for DTCs in the A/T system with the HDS.
A r e t h e r e a n y A / T D T C ’s i n d i c a t e d ?
YES—Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. *
NO—Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P)

from the VTM-4 control unit.

< s &
10. Connect the A16 terminal of the VTM-4 control unit 14. Check for continuity between the A16 terminal of
to body ground with a jumper wire, and watch the the VTM-4 control unit and body ground.
VTM-4 LOCK indicator.
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 22 LOCKL (YEL/BLK)
LOCKL (YEL/BLK) u
JUMPER WIRE

Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
D o e s th e V T M -4 L O C K in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
control unit connector. If it is normal, replace the NO—Repair open in the wire between the A16
VTM-4 control unit (see page 15-48).H terminal and the VTM-4 LOCK switch. ■
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the
VTM-4 LOCK switch I P connector and body ground.
12. Remove the VTM-4 LOCK switch.
VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)
13. Connect the No. 3 terminal of the VTM-4 LOCK
switch I P connector to body ground with a jumper
wire.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH CONNECTOR (IP) YEL
X)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I YEL/BLK
JUMPER WIRE Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals YES—Replace the VTM-4 LOCK indicator bulb. ■

terminal of the VTM-4 LOCK switch 7P connector
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. HI
The VTM-4 LOCK indicator comes on when The VTM-4 LOCK indicator does not come on
the Ignition switch is turned ON (II) and does for about 4 seconds when the ignition switch
not go off is turned ON (II)
1. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P) 1. Disconnect VTM-4 control unit connector A (22P)
from the VTM-4 control unit. from the VTM-4 control unit.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and checkthe 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
VTM-4 LOCK indicator.
3. Connect the A16 terminal of the VTM-4 control unit
D o e s th e V T M -4 L O C K in d ic a to r c o m e o n w ith th e to body ground with a jumper wire, and check the
ig n itio n s w itc h O N (II)? VTM-4 LOCK indicator.
YES—Go to step 3. V TM -4 CONTROL U NIT CONNECTOR A (22P)

control unit connectors. If it is normal, replace the 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
LOCKL
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (YEL/BLK)
4. Disconnect the VTM-4 LOCK switch connector.

JUMPER WIRE
5. Check for continuity between the A16 terminal of

the VTM-4 control unit and body ground. Wire side of female terminals

D o e s th e V T M -4 L O C K in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YES—Check for loose terminal fit in the VTM-4

12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
LOCKL
X (YEL/BLK)
NO—Go to step 4.
S)
Wire side of female terminals 5. Remove the VTM-4 LOCK switch (see page 15-48).

the A16 terminal of the VTM-4 control unit and the
VTM-4 LOCK switch. ■
NO—Replace the VTM-4 LOCK switch (see page

15-48). 11
6. Connectthe No. 3 terminal of the VTM-4 LOCK 9. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the
switch TP connector to body ground with a jumper VTM-4 LOCK switch 7P connector and body ground.
wire.
VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)
VTM-4. LOCK SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
YEL
YEL/BLK
JUMPER WIRE
W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls

Is th e re b a tte ry v o lta g e ?
7, Check for continuity between the A16 terminal and
body ground. YES—Replace the VTM-4 LOCK indicator bulb. 11
VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P) NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 2
terminal of the VTM-4 LOCK switch I P connector
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 / 18 / 20 / 22
LOCKL (YEL/BLK)
YES—Go to step 8.

terminal of the VTM-4 control unit and the VTM-4
LOCK switch. ■

Rear Differential Fluid Inspection and Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on the lift. 5. Clean the drain plug, then reinstall it with a new
washer, and refill the differential with the
2. Remove the oil filler plug (A) and sealing washer recommended fluid to the proper level.
(B), then checkthe condition of the fluid, and make
sure the fluid is at the proper level (C). Fluid capacity:
2.64 L (2.79 US.qt) at fluid change
rA 2.85 L (3.01 US.qt) at overhaul
47 N-m
(4.8 kgf-m,
35 ibf-ft) Recommended fluid:
VTM-4 Differential Fluid .(P/N 08200-9003)
D
47 N-m 6. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer.
(4.8 kgf-m,
35 ibf-ft)
3. The fluid level must be up to the fill hole. If it is

below the hole, add the recommended fluid until it
runs out, then reinstall the oil filler plug with a new
sealing washer.
4. If the differential fluid is dirty, remove the drain

plug (D) and sealing washer, then drain the fluid.
Rear Differential Function Test Rear Differential Fluid Temperature
Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Before doing the Differential Function Test, the
following conditions must be present
• No DTCs detected. 1. Drain the differential-fluid. Reinstall the drain plug
• Engine is not running. with a new washer (see page 15-46).
• The VTM-4 control unit must be initialized.
2. Remove the wire harness cover (A), then
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. disconnect the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor 2P connector (B).

control unit If it doesn't go to the DLC circuit
4. Confirm that the temperature of the differential

fluid is between 68 °F (20 °C) and 140 °F (60 °C) with
the HDS.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF with the shift lever in

the P position.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Raise the vehicle on the lift so all four wheels are

off the ground.
8. Remove the rear wheels. 3. Remove the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor (C).
4. Install the rear differential fluid temperature sensor
10. Select MISCELLANEOUS TEST, then select the in the reverse order of removal, with a new O-ring
LEFT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL TEST (D).
with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. If the
results are NORMAL, the left clutch is OK, go to 5. Refill the differential with the recommended
step 9. If the results are ABNORMAL, replace the differential fluid (see page 15-46).
rear differential.
11. Select MISCELLANEOUS TEST, then select the

RIGHT CLUTCH ELECTROMAGNETIC COIL TEST
with the HDS, and follow the screen prompts. If the
results are NORMAL, the right clutch is OK. If the
results are ABNORMAL, replace the rear
differential.
VTM-4 LOCK Switch Test/ VTM -4 Control Unit Replacement
Replacement
NOTE; The VTM-4 control unit must be initialized
(see page 15-5) after replacement, otherwise the 4WD
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93). system will not work.
2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the VTM-4 LOCK 1. Remove the jack cover and jack (see page 20-80).
switch, then remove the VTM-4 LOCK switch.
2. Remove the fuel filler door latch from the body by
turning it 90 degrees.
3. Loosen the three nuts (A).
A
12 N-m
(1.2 kgfm,
8.7 Ibf-ft)

switch position according to the table. If the switch 4. Disconnect the VTM-4 control unit connectors (B).
fails any continuity check, replace the switch.
5. Remove the VTM-4 control unit (C).
6. Install the VTM-4 control unit in the reverse order of

removal.
1. On the driver's side, remove the dashboard side lid
(see page 20-91).
2. Remove the bolt (A) and VTM-4 relay (B).
3. Install the VTM-4 relay in the reverse order of

removal.
Rear Differential Mount Replacement
REAR SUBFRAME
Rear Differential Removal
Exploded View
A: 27 N-m (2.8 kgf-m, 20 Ibf-ft)

B: 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 9 Ibf-ft)
C: 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
© REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER © REAR DIFFERENTIAL CABLE ® SEALING WASHER

ASSEMBLY BRACKET C Replace.
© REAR DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT A ® REAR DIFFERENTIAL CABLE ® DRAIN PLUG
RUBBER INSULATER BRACKET F 47 N-m (4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft )
© SET RING © REAR DIFFERENTIAL DYNAMIC © REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS
Replace. DAMPER BRACKET B
©THRUST WASHER © REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID © WIRE HARNESS COVER
Replace. TEMPERATURE SENSOR
© HALF SHAFT OUTER SEAL ® O-RING
Replace. Replace.
© REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS @ FILLER PLUG
BRACKET A 47 N m (4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
Rear Differential Removal (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 6. Place a transmission jack under the rear differential
Driveshaft remover 07AAD-S9VA000 (A).
1. Drain the differential fluid. Reinstall the drain plug

with a new washer (see page 15-46).
2. Remove the propeller shaft (see page 16-41).
3. Remove the left upper arm bolt, then remove the

upper arm from the vehicle (see page 18-36).
4. Remove the left rear damper (see page 18-40).
5. Using the driveshaft remover (A), pry out both

inboard joints (B) from the differential (C).
NOTE: This is a prying tool, do not strike it with a

hammer.
A
7. Disconnect the 6P (B) and 2P (C) connectors, then
remove the mounting bolts (D) and washer (E).
8. Lower the rear differential a little on the INOTICE I
transmission jack, then remove the rear driveshafts Connecting battery voltage to eitherthe right or left
(A) from the rear differential. clutch electromagnet coils for more than 3 minutes
will damage the rear differential.
1. Install the left rear driveshaft.
9. Disconnect the breather tube (B) from the rear

differential.
2. At the left clutch electromagnetic coil side, connect
10. Lower the rear differential on the transmission jack. the left clutch electromagnetic coil 2P connector (A)
terminal No. 1 to the battery positive terminal, and
connect the terminal No. 2 to the battery negative
terminal.
3. Check the backlash of the companion flange (B)

with a dial indicator (C).
Standard: 1.23—2.38 mm (0.048—0.094 in.)
4. If the backlash is not within the standard, replace

the rear differential.
Rear Differential Installation
1. Raise the rear differential a little on the 3. Raise the rear differential to the mounting level,
transmission jack, then connect the breather tube then install the mounting bolts (A) and washer (B).
(A) to the rear differential.
2. Install the rear driveshafts (B) to the rear differential

(see page 16-39). 4. Connect the 6P (C) and 2P (D) connectors.
5. Install the rear damper (see page 18-41).
6. Install the upper arm and the upper arm bolt to the
vehicle (see page 18-36).
7. Install the new rear differential (A) onto the

propeller shaft (B), by aligning the reference marks
(C). Make sure you use new mounting bolts.
8. Attach the propeller shaft to the transmission and

the rear differential by aligning the reference marks
(see page 16-43).
9. Refill the differential with recommended fluid

(see page 15-46).
Special Tools ................................................................. . 16-2
Component Location Index .......................................... 16-3
Driveshaft Inspection ............................ ........................ 16-4
Front Driveshaft Removal ............................................. 16-4
Front Driveshaft Disassembly ...................................... 16-6
Front Driveshaft Reassembly ....................................... 16-10
Front Driveshaft Installation ......................................... 16-18
Intermediate Shaft Removal ......................................... 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ................................. 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly .................................. 16-23
Intermediate Shaft Installation ................................. . 16-26
Rear Driveshaft Removal .......... ........................ .......... 16-26
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly ....................................... 16-28
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly ........................................ 16-32
Rear Driveshaft Installation .......................................... 16-39
Propeller Shaft Inspection ............................................ 16-40
Propeller Shaft Removal ............................................... 16-41
Propeller Shaft Installation ........................................... 16-43
Special Tools

® 07AAD-S9VA000 Driveshaft Remover 1
(D 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
(D 07 LAF-SM40300 Support Base Attachment 1
© 07XAC-001020A Threaded Adapter, 24x 1.5 mm 1
(D 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
(D 07749-0010000 Driver 1
® 07947-4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 1
<D 07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
I
© ©

Removal, page 16-4
Disassembly, page 16-6
Driveshaft Inspection Front Driveshaft Removal
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
(B) for cracks, damage, leaking grease, and loose
boot bands (C). If any damage is found, replace the 2. Remove the front wheels.
boot and boot bands.
3. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),
A then remove and discard the nut.
2. Check the driveshaft (D) for cracks and damage. If

any damage is found, replace the driveshaft.
4. If you need to remove the left driveshaft, drain the
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the outboard joint transmission fluid (see page 14-214). It is not
(F) for cracks and damage. If any damage is found, necessary to drain the transmission fluid when the
replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an right driveshaft is removed.
assembly.
5. Separate the front stabilizer link (see step 3 on page
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by 18-19).
hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively
loose. If necessary, replace the inboard joint or the 6. Remove the lock pin from the lower arm ball joint
outboard joint as an assembly. castle nut and remove the nut, then separate the
ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint
thread protector and remover (see step 11 on page
18-14).
NOTE:
• To avoid damaging the ball joint, install ball joint
thread protector onto the threads of the bai l joint.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
installing the remover.
7. Pull the knuckle outward, and separate the 9. Left driveshaft: Pry the inboard joint (A) from the
driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub transmission housing with a pry bar. Remove the
using a plastic hammer. driveshaft as an assembly.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft (B) or the

inboard joint may come apart. Pull the driveshaft
straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal.
8. Right driveshaft: Drive the inboard joint (A) off of

the intermediate shaft using a drift and hammer.
Remove the driveshaft as an assembl y.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft (B) or the

inboard joint may come apart.
A
Front Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required Double loop type

* Threaded adapter, 24 x 1,5 mm 07XAC-001020A
• Slide hammer, 5/8"-18 UNF, commercially available
D
Inboard Joint Side
1. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint (B)
(left driveshaft).
Low profile type
2. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
• If the boot band is a locking tab type (A), pry up

the locking tab (B) with a screwdriver, and lift up
the end of the band.
• If the boot band is a double loop type (C), lift up
the band end (D), and push it into the clip (E).
• If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the
boot band using commercially available boot
band pliers (F).
Locking tab type

3. Make a marks (A) on each roller (B) and inboard 7. Remove the circlip (A).
joint (C) to identify the locations of rollers and
grooves in the inboard joint Then remove the Left driveshaft
inboard joint on the shop towel (D).
B
Right driveshaft
8. Make a mark (B) on the bearing retainer (C) and

inboard joint (D) to identify the locations of the ball
bearing and grooves in the inboard joint. Then
4. Remove the snap ring (A). remove the inboard joint on the shop towel (E).
Be careful not to drop the ball bearings when
separating them from the inboard joint.
9. Remove the snap ring (A).
5. Make a marks (B) on the spider (C) and driveshaft

(D) to identify the position of the spider on the shaft.
6. Remove the spider.

10. Make marks <B) on the bearing retainer (C), the
bearing race (D), and driveshaft (E) to identify the
position of the bearing retainer and the bearing
race on the shaft.
11. Remove the bearing race and the steel balls (F).
(cont'd)
Front Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
12. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape Outboard Joint Side
(A) to prevent damaging the boot.
1. Remove the boot bands (A). Lift up the three tabs
Double loop type (B) with a screwdriver. Be careful not to damage
the boot.
Locking tab type

2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard
joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
A
13. Remove the inboard boot and boot band (B). Be

careful not to damage the boot.
14. Remove the vinyl tape.

3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and 7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.
the outboard joint inner race.
8. Remove the circlip (A) from the driveshaft (B).
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same
level as the outboard joint rim (C).
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with

shop towel.
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to

damage the boot.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the 24 x 11. Remove the vinyl tape.
1.5 mm threaded adapter (B) and a commercially
available 5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer (C).
Front Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
LOW PROFILE BANDS

Replace.
DOUBLE LOOP BANDS

SET RING INBOARD JO INT BEARING RACE (B o o t band replace only)
Replace. (Left driveshaft) Replace.
LOCKING TAB BANDS

Replace.
Use the grease

included in the /
inboard boot set. i
INBOARD JO IN T
(Right driveshaft)
Use the grease included

in the inboard boot set.
CIRCLIP
DRIVESHAFT Replace.
OUTBOARD BOOT
OUTBOARD JO INT
Replace.
Special Tools Required 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
• Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
available of the driveshaft.
• Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent,
commercially available Right driveshaft
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during

this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damaging the inboard boot.
Double loop type/Low profile type
4. Install the snap ring (C).
5. Install the steel balls (A) and the bearing retainer

(B) onto the bearing race (C) by aligning the marks
(D) you made on the bearing retainer and the
bearing race.
Left driveshaft
A
Locking tab type
6. Install the bearing onto the driveshaft (E) by

aligning the marks on the bearing and the
driveshaft.
2. Install the inboard boot and boot band (B) on the
driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful 7. Install the snap ring (F).
not to damage the inboard boot.
(cont'd)
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease 10. Left driveshaft: Install the inboard joint onto the
included in the new inboard boot set. driveshaft by aligning the mark (A) you made on
the inboard joint and bearing (B).
Grease quantity
Inboard joint
Left driveshaft: 160—180 g (5.6—6.4 oz)
Right driveshaft:
'03—06 models: 2 1 0 -2 3 0 g (7.4-8.1 oz)
'07—08 models: 1 90-210 g (6.7—7.4 oz)
11. Install the circlip(C).
12. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and the
inboard joint (C).
9. Right driveshaft: Fit the inboard joint onto the

driveshaft, and note these items:
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by

aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard
joint and the rollers.
• Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up
to prevent it from falling off.
13. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as 15. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between (B), then hook the tab (C) of the band.
full compression and full extension, This prevents a
vacuum or too much air in the boot, preventing it B
from compressing or extending properly.
Right driveshaft:
With outboard joint: 573.1—578.1 mm (22.56—22.76 in.)
16. Close the hook portion of the band with a

commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
hook the tabs (B) of the band.
Without outboard joint: 555.9—560.9 mm (21.89—22.08 in.)
With outboard joint: 577.3—582.3 mm (22.73—22.93 in.)
m
it
Ml 17. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat steps 15 through 16.
14. Install new boot bands:
For the low profile type, go to step 15.

For the double loop type, go to step 18.
(Boot band replace only)
For the locking tab type, go to step 27.
18. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the 21. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
inboard joint, then install the new double loop band section of a commercially available boot band tool
(A) onto the boot (B). KD-3191 or equivalent (A) and into the slot on the
winding mandrel (B).
NOTE; Pass the end of the new double loop band
through the clip (C) twice in the direction of the
forward rotation of the driveshaft.
22. Using a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot

19. Pull up the slack in the band by hand. band tool to tighten the band until the marked spot
(C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
20. Mark a position (A) on the band 10—14 mm
(0.4—0.6 in.) from the clip (B). 23. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
24. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess 26. Repeat steps 18 through 25 for the band on the
free end of the band to leave a 5—10 mm other end of the boot.
(0.2—0.4 in.) tail protruding from the clip.
27. Install a new locking tab type boot band on the
inboard joint side of the inboard boot. Fold down
the locking tabs.
25. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a

hammer.
NOTE; 28* Lightly tap on the doubled-over portions to reduce

• Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with their height.
anything on the vehicle and the band does not
move. 29. Repeat steps 27 through 28 fo r the band on the
• Remove any grease remaining on the other end of the boot.
surrounding surfaces.
(confd)
Outboard Joint Side 4. Pack about 35 g (1.2 oz) grease included in the new
outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole in the
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent outboard joint.
damaging the outboard boot
NOTE: If you are installing a new outboard joint,
the grease is already installed.
2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard

boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to
damage the boot.
5. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)
3. Install the new circlip (A) in the driveshaft groove until the circlip (C) is closed to the joint.
(B).
6 . To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the 8. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint
driveshaft and joint, and tap or hit them from a grease included in the new outboard boot set.
height of about 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface.
Total grease quantity
NOTE: Do not use a hammer as excessive force Outboard joint: 110—130 g (3.9—4.6 oz)
may damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to
damage the threaded section (A) of the outboard
joint.

in the outboard boot set.
9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
7. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) you
made with the outboard joint rim (B).
(cont'd)
Front Driveshaft Reassembly Front Driveshaft Installation
(cont'd)
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the
mating surfaces of the joint and the splined section are
10. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with free of dirt or dust.
commercially available boot band pliers Kent-
Moore J-35910 or equivalent (B). 1. Apply grease to the contact area (A) of the outboard
joint and the front wheel bearing.
NOTE: Failure to apply grease may cause excessive

noise and vibration.
11. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion

of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band farther. 2. Install a new set ring (A) into the set ring groove of
the driveshaft (B) (left driveshaft).
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for the band on the other

end of the boot.
3. Apply 2.0—3.0 g (0.07—0.10 oz) of grease to the 5. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
whole splined surface.(A) of the right driveshaft. differential (B) or intermediate shaft (C) until the set
After applying grease, remove the grease from the ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
splined grooves at intervals of 2—3 splines and
from the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed NOTE: Insert the driveshaft horizontally to prevent
from the intermediate shaft. damaging the differential oil seal.
4. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent or brake /
cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent

6. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front wheel
hub (B).
Front Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be 10. Apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating
careful not to damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe surface of the new spindle nut (A).
off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball
joint. Torque the new castle nut (D) to the lower
range of torque specification, then tighten it only
far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do
not align the nut by loosening.
NOTE: Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged

or cracked.
(29.0 kgf-m,
210 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
11. Install a new spindle nut, then tighten the nut. After
tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
12. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
front wheel, then install the front wheel.
13. Turn the front wheel by hand, and make sure there
is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
8. Install the new lock pin (E) into the pin hole as
shown. 14. If you removed the left driveshaft, refill the
transmission with the recommended fluid
9. Connect the front stabilizer link to the damper (see (see page 14-214).
16. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if

necessary (see page 18-5).
17. Test-drive the vehicle.

<*•>
Intermediate Shaft Removal Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
1. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain Special Tools Required
plug with a new washer (see page 14-214). • Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
®Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
2. Remove the right driveshaft (see step 8 on page •Driver 07749-0010000
16-5). •Support.base 07965-SD90100
3. Remove the subframe stiffener (see step 39 on 1. Remove the heat shield.
page 14-227).
4. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 40 on page

14-227).
5. Remove the rear WU-TWC bracket (A), flange bolt

(B), and two dowel bolts (C).
2. Remove the intermediate shaft outer seal (A) from

the bearing support (B).
6. Remove the intermediate shaft (D) from the

differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontally
until it is clear of the differential to prevent
damaging the differential oil seal.
3. Remove the set ring (C) and external snap ring (D).
(cont'd)
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the 6. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the
intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the support bearing support (B) using the support base
base attachment (C), support base (D), and a press. attachment (C), 42 x 47 mm attachment (D),
Be careful not to damage the bearing support ring driver (E), support base (F), and a press.
(E) on the intermediate shaft during disassembly.
5. Remove the internal snap ring.

< &
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLT
10x 1.25 mm
DOWEL BOLTS 39 N-m
(cont'd)
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the new shaft
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101 bearing (B) using the 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm fork seal
• Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300 driver (C) and a press.
eDriver 07749-0010000
• Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 07947-4630100
•Support base 07965-SD90100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the

bearing support (B) using the oil seal driver
attachment (C), driver (D), and a press.
PRESS
07749-0010000 *
5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of

the intermediate shaft (B).
3. Seat the internal snap ring (A) into the groove of
the bearing support (B).
6 . Apply multipurpose grease to the interior lip of the
new outer seal (A). Install the outer seal into the
bearing support (B) using the support base
attachment (C), 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm fork seal driver
(D), support base (E), and a press.
8 x 1.25 m m
Intermediate Shaft Installation Rear Driveshaft Removal
1. Install the new set ring (A). Special Tools Required

Driveshaft remover 07AAD-S9VA000
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
2. Drain the differential fluid. Reinstall the drain plug

with a new washer (see page 15-46).
3. Remove the rear wheels.
4. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),

then remove and discard the nut.
2. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft

contacts the differential thoroughly with solvent or
brake cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
3. Insert the intermediate shaft assembly (A) into the

differential until the set ring locks into the groove.
NOTE: Insert the intermediate shaft horizontally to

prevent damaging the differential oil seal.
5. Remove the upper arm bolt (see page 18-36).
6. Remove the rear damper (see page 18-40).
7. Remove the lower arm B flange bolt (see page

18-37).
8. Remove the rear wheel sensor bracket (see page

19-102).
4. Install the flange bolt (B), two dowel bolts (C), and
rear WU-TWC bracket (D).
5. Install exhaust pipe A (see step 35 on page 14-241).
6. Install the subframe stiffener (see step 36 on page

14-241).
7. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-18).
8. Refill the transmission with the recommended

transmission fluid (see page 14-214).

9. Pull the knuckle outward, and disconnect the rear 11. Using the driveshaft remover (A), pry out both
driveshaft outboard joint from the rear wheel hub inboard joint (B) from the differential (C).
using a plastic hammer.
NOTE: This is a prying tool, do not strike it with a
hammer.
10. Remove the rear driveshaft outboard joint.
12. Remove the rear driveshaft (A).

Rear Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required Low profile type

•Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001020A
• Slide hammer, 5/8"-18 UNF, commercially available
Inboard Joint Side

1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage
the boot.
• If the boot band is a welded type (A), cut the boot

band.
• If the boot band is a double loop type (B), lift up
the band end (C), and push it into the clip (D).
• If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the
boot band using a commercially available boot
band pliers (F).
2. Make marks (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint
Welded type (C) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves
in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint
on the shop towel (D). Be careful not to drop the
rollers when separating them from the inboard
joint
C
3. Make marks (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (C) to 7. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape
identify the locations of ball rollers on the spider, (A) to prevent damaging the boot.
then remove the rollers.
NOTE;
• Do not engrave or scribe mark on the rolling
surface.
• If necessary, use a commercially available puller.
8. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
4. Remove the circlip (D).
5. Mark the spider (C) and driveshaft (E) to identify the

position of the spider on the shaft.
6. Remove the spider (C).
(cont'd)
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Outboard Joint Side 5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with
a shop towel.
1. Remove the boot bands.
NOTE: The boot bands for the outboard and

inboard joints are the same. Use the same
procedure.
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard

joint side.
Be careful not to damage the boot.
d lH
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the 24 x
1.5 mm threaded adapter (B) and a commercially
available 5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer (C).
7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.
8. Remove the circlip (A) from the driveshaft (B).
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and

the outboard joint end.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same

level as the outboard joint rim (C).
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to

damage the boot.

Rear Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View

Replace.
Special Tools Required 5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with the high
Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, shoulders facing outward and note these items:
commercially available
• Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during the spider by aligning the marks (C) you made.
this procedure. • Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
rollers from falling off.
Inboard Joint Side
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damaging the inboard boot.
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease

included in the new inboard boot set.
Grease quantity
2. Install the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then Inboard joint: 130—140 g (4.6—4.9 oz)
remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the
inboard boot.
3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning

the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
of the driveshaft.
4. Install a new circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove.

Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure
it is fully seated.
(cont'd)
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note 9. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as
these items: shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Doing this
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by prevents a vacuum or too much air in the boot,
aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard preventing itfrom compressing or extending
joint and the rollers. properly.
• Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint points up
to prevent it from falling off. Without outboard joint:
Right driveshaft: 5 8 0 .9 -5 8 5 .9 mm (2 2 .8 7 -2 3 .0 7 In.)

Left driveshaft: 5 5 1 .9 -5 5 6 .9 mm (2 1 .7 3 -2 1 .9 3 In.)
fffl
rmrn
HE
4. -----------^
With outboard joint:
Right driveshaft: 6 0 2 .0 -6 0 7 .0 mm (2 3 .7 0 -2 3 .9 0 In.)

Left driveshaft: 5 7 3 .0 -5 7 8 .0 mm (2 2 .5 6 -2 2 .7 6 in.)
inboard joint (C).
— rHIHlllln________ iftfC J ih
10. Install the boot bands.
• For the low profile type, go to step 11.

• For the double loop type, go to step 14.
11. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
(B), then hook the tab (C) of the band.
B
12. Close the hook portion of the band with a
commercially available boot band pliers (A), then 16. Mark a position (A) on the band 10—14 mm
hook the tabs (B) of the band. (0.4—0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
17. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
13. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, section of the commercially available boot band
and repeat steps 11 through 12. tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on
the winding mandrel (B).
14. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
inboard joint, then install the new double loop band
(A) onto the boot (B).
NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band

through the clip (C) twice in the direction of the
forward rotation of the driveshaft.
18. Using a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot

band tool to tighten the band until the marked spot
(C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
15. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
(cont'd)
19. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of 21. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the hammer.
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
NOTE:
• Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything on the vehicle and the band does not
move.
• Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces.
20. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
free end of the band to leave 5—10 mm (0.2—0.4 in.)
from the clip.
22. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat steps 14 through 21.
Outboard Joint Side 4. Pack about 35 g (1.2 oz) grease, included in the new
outboard boot set, into the driveshaft hole in the
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent outboard joint
damaging the outboard boot.
NOTE: If you are installing a new outboard joint,
the grease is already installed.
2. Install the outboard boot onto the driveshaft, then Use the grease included
remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the in the outboard boot set.
outboard boot.
5. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)
3. Install the new circlip (A) in the driveshaft groove until the circlip (C) is closed on the joint.
(B).
6. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the 8. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint
driveshaft and joint, and tap or hit them from a grease included in the new outboard boot set.
height of about 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface.
Total grease quantity
NOTE: Do not use a hammer as excessive force Outboard Joint: 70—80 g (2.5—2.8 oz)
may damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to
damage the threaded section (A) of the outboard
joint.
J=L

in the outboard boot set.
outboard joint (C).
7. Checkthe alignment of the paint mark (A) you

made with the outboard joint rim (B).
10. Install the boot bands.
NOTE: The boot bands for the outboard and

inboard joints are the same. Use the same
procedure.
Rear Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the 5. Install the driveshaft (A).
mating surfaces of the joint and the splined section are
A
free of dirt or dust
1. Apply 1.5—2.0 g (0.05—0.07 oz) of grease to the

whole splined surface (A). After applying grease,
remove the grease from the splined grooves at
intervals of 2—3 splines and from the set ring
groove (B) so that air can bleed from the differential
aflll (B).
2. Install a new set ring (A) in the set ring groove of

the differential.
3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent or brake
cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
4. Insert the inboard end (B) of the driveshaft into the

differential (C) until the set ring locks in the groove
(D).
(cont'd)
Rear Driveshaft Installation (cont'd) Propeller Shaft Inspection
7. Install the lower arm B flange bolt (see step 4 on Universal Joint and Boots
page 18-38).
1. Shift the transmission to the N position.
8. Install the rear wheel sensor bracket (see page
19-102). 2. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
9. Install the upper arm bolt (see page 18-36). 3. Check the center support bearing (A) for excessive
play or rattle. If the center support has excessive
10. Install the rear damper (see page 18-41). play or rattle, replace the propeller shaft assembly
(B).
11. Apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating
surface of the new spindle nut (A).
4. Check the universal joint boots (C) for damage and

deterioration. If the boots are damaged or
12. Install a new spindle nut, then tighten the nut. After deteriorated, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft. 5. Check the universal joints for excessive play or
rattle. If the universal joints have excessive play or
13. Turn the rear wheel by hand, and make sure there rattle, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
rear wheel, then install the rear wheel.
15. Refill the differential with the recommended fluid

(see page 15-46).
17. Checkthe rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if


Propeller Shaft Runout 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
6. Install a dial indicator w ith its needle on the center 2. Remove the No. 1 propeller shaft protector (A).
of the No. 1 propeller shaft or the No. 2 propeller
shaft.
7. Turn the other propeller shaft slowly and checkthe

runout. Repeat this procedure for the other
propeller shaft.
No. 1 Propeller Shaft Runout:
No. 2 Propeller Shaft Runout:

8. If the runout on either propeller shaft exceeds the

service limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Propeller Shaft Removal (cont'd)
4. Make a reference mark (A) across the No. 1 7. Make a reference mark (A) across the No. 2
propeller shaft (B) and the transfer companion propeller shaft (B) and the rear differential
flange (C). companion flange (C).
8. Remove the bolts, then separate the No. 2 propeller

shaft from the rear differential, then remove the
5. Remove the bolts, then separate the No. 1 propeller propeller shaft.
shaft from the transfer assembly.
6. Remove the propeller shaft protector (A) and center

support bearing mounting bolts (B).
Propeller Shaft Installation
1. If you are installing a new propeller shaft, go to 5. Install the new center support bearing bolts (A).
step 2. If you reinstalling the original propeller shaft, Then install the propeller shaft protector (B).
go to step 3.
2. Install the new No. 2 propeller shaft (A) onto the

rear differential (B), by aligning the reference mark
(C) on the new No. 2 propeller shaft with the factory
reference mark (D) on the companion flange (E). Do
not use the marks you made on the companion
flange during the removal procedure. If there are
no factory marks on the companion flange, go to
step 4.
Replace.
6. Install the No. 1 propeller shaft (A) onto the transfer
companion flange (B) by aligning the reference
mark (C). Make sure you use new mounting bolts.
3. Reinstall the propeller shaft (A) to the rear

differential (B) by aligning the reference mark (C)
you made during the removal procedure.
4. Attach the propeller shaft to the rear differential

with new mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to the
specified torque.
(confd)
Propeller Shaft Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the No. 2 propeller shaft protector (A). 9. If you installed a new propeller shaft, test-drive the
vehicle at 55 mph (88 kph), and check for noise or
vibration.
• If there is no noise or vibration, the repair is

complete.
• If there is a noise or vibration, go to step 10.
10. Remove the mounting bolts from the propeller

shaft at the rear differential companion flange.
Note the current alignment of the propeller shaft to
the rear differential companion flange.
11. Rotate the propeller shaft 180 degrees from its

current alignment with the rear differential
companion flange.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft) 12. Install new mounting bolts and tighten them to the
specified torque, go to step 4.
8. Install the No. 1 propeller shaft protector (A).
22 N-m
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If steering maintenance is required)
Honda dealer.
or side collision, all SRS service should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
airbags may deploy.
Power Steering
Special Tools .......... ........... ................................................ 17-2
Component Location Index ............... ............................. 17-3
Symptom Troubleshooting ............................................. 17-6
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ......................... 17-8
Power Assist Check ................. ........................................ 17-8
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection .................. 17-9
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ............ 17-10
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A or
T/N 07406-001A101 ....................................................... 17-11
Fluid Leakage Inspection ........................................... . 17-12
Fluid Replacement ............................................................. 17-13
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement ................................... 17-14
Pump Replacement ............. ....... ..................................... 17-15
Pump Overhaul .................................................................. 17-16
* Steering Wheel Removal ........ ........................................ 17-22
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly ................. 17-23
* Steering Wheel Installation ........................ ................... 17-24
* Steering Column Removal and Installation ............. . 17-25
Steering Column Inspection ................................. ......... 17-28
Steering Lock Replacement ............................................. 17-29
Rack Guide Adjustment .................................................. 17-30
Steering Gearbox Removal ............................................ 17-31
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ............................................ 17-38
Steering Gearbox Installation ....................................... 17-53
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement ...................... . 17-59
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement .......... ............. 17-60
Special Tools

® 07GAF-PH70100 Pilot Collar 1
(D 07MAA-SL00100 or 07916-SA50001 Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 1
07 MAC-S LOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
07NAG-SR3090A Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
07RAK-S040122 P/S Joint Adapter (Hose) 1
© 07TAF-SZ50100 Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
® 07VAK-P8A011A P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) 1
® 07VAK-P8A012 B P/S Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 1
® 07YAG-S2X0100 Sleeve Seal Ring Guide 1
© 07ZAB S5A0100 Pulley Holder 1
07ZAG-S3VA100 Piston Seal Ring Guide 1
@ 07ZAG-S3VA200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
® 07ZAG-S5A0100 Sleeve Seal Ring Sizing Tool, 36 mm 1
© 07406-0010001 or 07406-001000A or P/S Pressure Gauge 1
07406-001A101
© 07746-0010100 Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 1
® 07749-0010000 Driver 1
© 07946-1870100 Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 1
© 07965-SA50500 Front Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
P O W E R S T E E R IN G F L U ID R E S E R V O IR
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-12
Fluid Replacement, page 17-13 DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Power Steering Hose, Line, Replacement,
and Pressure Switch Replacement, page 17-14 page 23-201
i POWER STEERING PUMP
Drive Belt Inspection (J35A9 engine) page 4-31
Drive Belt Inspection (J35Z1 engine) page 4-31
Drive Belt Replacement (J35A9 engine) page 4-32
Drive Belt Replacement (J35Z1 engine) page 4-32
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001,
page 17-10
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A
or 07406-001A101, page 17-11
Pump Replacement, page 17-15
Pump Overhaul, page 17-16
STEERING WHEEL
Removal, page 17-22
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 17-23
STEERING COLUMN
Removal and Installation, page 17-25
Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-29
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-30
Removal, page 17-31
Overhaul, page 17-38
installation, page 17-53
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement, page 17-59
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement, page 17-60
Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for:
Hard steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-6). • Modified suspension
• Damaged suspension
• Tire sizes, tire varieties,
and air pressure
Assist (excessively Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30). Front wheel alignment
light steering at (see page 18-5)
high speed)
Shock or vibration 1. Checkthe rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
when the steering 2. Check the drive belt for slippage: J35A9 engine model (see page
wheel is turned to 4-31), J35Z1 engine model (see page 4-31).
full lock 3. Checkthe power steering pump fluid pressure with
T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-10), T/N 07406-001000A or
T/N 07406-001A101 (see page 17-11).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see page 17-38).
Steering wheel will 1. Check cylinder lines for deformation.
not return 2. Check the ball joints for binding.
smoothly 3. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-39).
Uneven or rough 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
steering 2. Checkthe drive belt: J35A9 engine model (see page 4-31), J35Z1
engine model (see page 4-31).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-358).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to air entering
inlet side of pump.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to
possible leaks in system (see page 17-13).
6. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-39).
Steering wheel 1. Checkthe drive belt: J35A9 engine model (see page 4-31), J35Z1
kicks back during engine model (see page 4-31).
wide turns 2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with
T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-10), T/N 07406-001000A or
T/N 07406-001A101 (see page 17-11).
Humming noise 1. Check when the noise occurs: Pump pressure
from the power • If the noise is heard 2—3 minutes after starting the engine in
steering system cold weather, this is normal.
• If the noise is heard when the wheel is turned with the vehicle
stopped, this is normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the subframe or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission converter noise.
4. Check for air bubbles in the power steering fluid, leak on inlet
side of pump.
5. Check for particle contamination of fluid and restricted filter in
the reservoir.
Power steering 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints).
rack rattle or Tighten or replace as necessary.
chattering 2. Checkthe steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering
column wobbles, replace the steering column assembly
(see page 17-25).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley:
• If the pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 34 on page 17-21).
• If the pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-15).
Symptom Pro cedure(s) Also check for:
Hissing from the 8 Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level Air in the P/S fluid
power steering and check for leaks (see page 17-12).
system/foaming • Check the reservoir for leaks.
fluid • Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into
the suction side of the system (see page 17-14).
• Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Noise from the • Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to • P/S pump pressure
power steering another like vehicle (pump noise for 2—3 minutes after starting • Air in the P/S fluid
pump the engine in cold weather is normal).
* Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page
17-16).
Squeaking from Checkthe drive belt: J35A9 engine model (see page 4-31),
the power steering J35Z1 engine model (see page 4-31).
pump
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body unit. Overhaul the valve
the steering body unit (see page 17-38).
gearbox • Fluid leaks from the driver's side boot. Replace the valve oil seal
on the pinion shaft. Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox
side.
• Fluid leaks from the passenger's side boot. Replace the cylinder
end seal on the cylinder side.
• Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt.
Overhaul the valve body unit (see page 17-38).
• Fluid leaks from the steering damping valve covers on the valve
body unit. Replace the valve housing.
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the cylinder line connections (flare nuts). Tighten
the power steering the connection and retest (see page 17-14).
line • Fluid leaks from damaged cylinder lines. Replace the cylinder line
(see page 17-14).
• Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the
valve body unit (flare nuts). Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still
leaks, replace the hose, the line, or valve body unit as necessary.
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the front oil seal. Replace the front oil seal.
the power steering • Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing. Replace the
pump leaking O-rings or seals (see page 17-16), and if necessary replace
the power steering pump (see page 17-15).
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap because the fluid level is
the power steering too high. Drain the reservoir to the proper level. If the fluid is
reservoir aerated check for an air leak on the inlet side of pump.
* Fluid leaks from reservoir. Check reservoir for cracks and replace
as necessary.
Fluid leaks from • Checkthe fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the
the power steering fitting O-ring.
pump outlet hose • Fluid leaks at the swaged joint. Replace the outlet hose.
(high-pressure)
Fluid leaks from Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly.
the power steering Replace or repair as necessary.
pump inlet hose
(low-pressure)
Hard Steering 5. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in

both directions, to the left and to the right.
1. Check the power assist (see page 17-8).
Are the two measurements within 5 .0 N (0.51 kgf,
Is the initial turning load more than 2 9 N (3 .0 kgf, 1.12 Ibf) of each other?
6 .6 Ib f)?
YES—Go to step 6.
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Goto step 11.
NO—Power assist is OK. ■
6. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure
2. Connect the P/S joint adapter (pump), P/S joint gauge valves open (if so equipped), while turning
adapter (hose), and P/S pressure gauge T/N 07406- the steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the
0010001 (see page 17-10), T/N 07406-001000A or right.
T/N 07406-001A101 (see page 17-11) to the pump.
Is the pressure 8 ,3 0 0 — 8 ,8 0 0 kP a ( 8 5 — 90 kgf/crrf,
3. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump 1,210— 1,280 psi) or more?
at idle.
YES—Go to step 7.
Is the pressure 1,470 kP a (1 5 kgf/crrf, 2 1 3 psi) or
less? NO—Faulty gearbox. ■
YES—Go to step 4. 7. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-30), and retest.
NO—Goto step8. Is the steering O K ?
4. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle. YES—Repair is completed. ■
Is the pressure 8 ,3 0 0 — 8 ,8 0 0 kP a ( 8 5 — 9 0 kgf/crrf, NO—Faulty gearbox. ■

1,210— 1,280 psi) or more?
8. Check the outlet and return hoses and lines
YES—Go to step 5. between the pump and the gearbox for clogging
and deformation.
NO—Go to step 9.
Are the lines clogged or deform ed?
YES—Repair or replace the lines. ■
NO—Faulty valve body unit. ■

10. Check the flow control valve for smooth movement
and leaks (see step 11 on page 17-18).
Is the flow control valve O K ?
YES—Faulty pump assembly.*
NO—Faulty flow control valve. ■
11. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation

(see page 17-14).
Are the A or B lines d eform ed?
YES—Replace the deformed line.B
NO—Goto step 12.
12. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack

guide (too tight).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted

too tight?
YES—Replace the rack shaft, or readjust the rack

guide. ■
NO—Faulty valve body unit. ■

Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check
Check
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel 17-13).
left and right without moving the front wheels.
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
• If the play is within the limit, the gearbox and wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up
linkages are OK. the fluid.
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-30). If the play is still excessive after 3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
rack guide adjustment, inspectthe steering steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
linkage and gearbox (see page 17-9). vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
Rotational play: 0—10 mm (0—0.39 in.)
• If the scale reads no more than the specification,
the gearbox and pump are OK.
* If the scale reads more than the specification,
troubleshoot the steering system (see page 17-6).
Initial turning load: 29 N (3.0 kgfv'6.6 Ibf)

Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
Inspect for faulty movement

and damage.
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001
Special T ools Required 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).

®P/S joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
• P/S joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
• P/S joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122
• P/S pressure gauge 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.
1. Checkthe power steering fluid level (see page

17-13).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) with the P/S joint outlet plate.
6x 1.0 mm
07406-0010001 11 N-m
(1.1 kgf-m,
8.0 Ibf-ft)
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).
07RAK-S040122 7. Start the engine and let it idle.
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature.
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
07 VAK-P8A011A
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
6x 1.0 mm (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads high, checkfor:
11 N-m • Clogged or deformed inlet or return line between
( 1.1 kgf-m,
8.0 ibf-ft) the pump and gearbox.
• Clogged valve body unit.
07VAK-P8A012B
10. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure

3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S control valve gradually until the pressure gauge
pressure gauge, then connectthe pump outlet hose needle is stable. Read the pressure.
to the P/S joint adapter (hose).
iNOTICEl
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more
adapter (pump). than 5 seconds or the pump could be
damaged by over-heating.
11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the

pump is in good condition, the gauge should read
at least 8,300-8,800 kPa (8 5 -9 0 kgf/cm2,
1,210—1,280 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001 OOOA or T/N 07406-001A101
Special Tools Required 5. Open the shut-off valve (A) fully.
• P/S joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
• P/S join t adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
• P/S join t adapter (hose) 07RAK-S04G122
• P/S pressure gauge 07406-001 OOOA or 07406-001A101
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page

17-13).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) with the P/S joint outlet plate.
07 RAK-S040122
07406-001OOOA 6 x 1.0 mm
or 07406-001 A l 01 11 N-m'
(1.1 kgf-m,
8.0 ibf-ft)
6. Start the engine and let it idle.
7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature.
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
07 VAK-P8A011A
(15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads high, check for:
6 x1.0 mm • Clogged or deformed inlet or return line between
11 N-m the pump and gearbox.
(1.1 kgf-m,
8.0 Ibf-ft) • Clogged valve body unit.
©7VAK-P8A012B
9. Let the engine idle, and gradually close the shut-off
valve and immediately read the pressure.
3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S
pressure gauge, then connectthe pump outlet hose NOTICE I
to the P/S joint adapter (hose). Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint damaged by over-heating.
adapter (pump).
10. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the
pump is in good condition, the gauge should read
at least 8,300—8,800 kPa (85—90 kgf/cm2,
1,210—1,280 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
Fluid Leakage Inspection
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Check for leaks at the pump
seal, and the inlet and outlet fittings.
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the
Power Steering Fluid. Use o f any other type of power fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause fluid at once.
increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
NOTE: Inspect the reservoir screen for any debris. If
NOTE; If the fluid is contaminated, the screen in the the reservoir screen is clogged, replace the
reservoir may be partially blocked. Replace the reservoir.
reservoir if necessary.
System capacity;
1.22 L (1.29 US. qt) at disassembly
Reservoir capacity:
0.4 L (0.42-US. qt)
2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the

disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times.
When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off
the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine and run it at idle, then turn the

steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air
from the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary.

Do not fil l the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored,

repeat the procedure as necessary.
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement
Note these items during installation:

• Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
• Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones, if necessary.
• Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (AL (Bl HOSE CLAMP (C)
H I
2.5—5.5 mm
(0 .1 0 -0 .2 2 in.)
2.5—5.5 mm A: 2.0—4.0 mm
(0.10-0.22 in.) (0.08-0.16 in.!
B: 2.0—3.0 mm
(0.08-0.12 in.)
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 9. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir
(see page 17-13). 10. I nstall the drive belt (A).
3. Remove the drive belt (A) from the pump pulley; Note these items during belt installation:
J35A9 engine model (see page 4-32), J35Z1 engine • Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on
model (see page 4-32). the pulleys (B).
• Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the
auto-tensioner, alternator, A/C compressor, and
drive belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
grease before installation.
11. Fill the resirvoir to the upper level line (see page
17-13).
4. Cover the auto-tensioner, alternator, and A/C
compressor with several shop towels to protect
them from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect
the pump inlet hose (B) and pump outlet hose (C)
from the pump (D), and plug them. Take care not to
spill the fluid on the body or parts. Wipe off any
spilled fluid at once. Do not turn the steering wheel
with the pump removed.
5. Remove the pump mounting bolts (E).
6. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape

to prevent foreign material from entering the pump.
7. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose

onto the new pump with a new O-ring (F).
8. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with

the mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings
securely.
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with an asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
-8 x 1 .2 5 mm
*4.5 m m ROLL I 20 N-m
*0 U T E R SIDE PLATE
*C A M RING
* VANES
(10 plates)
*SIDE PLATE
5 1 .0 x 2 .4 mm O-RING
Replace.
1 3 .0 x 1 .9 mm O-RING
Replace.
INLET JOINT
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N-m
(1.1 kgf-m,
8.0 Ibf-ft)
*FLOW CONTROL VALVE
1 6 .7x 1 .8 mm O-RING
PULLEY NUT Replace.
64 N-m (6.5 kgf-m, 47 Ibf-ft)
* FLOW CONTROL VALVE CAP
49 N-m (5.0 kgf-m, 36 Ibf-ft)
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring.
• Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100
• Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 07946-1870100 5. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex
•Driver 07749-0010000 wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, spring, and
flow control valve.
Disassembly
6 . Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure. 7. Remove the outer side plate, cam ring, rotor, vanes,
side plate and O-rings.
1. Drain the fluid from the power steering pump
(see page 17-13). 8. Remove the snap ring, then remove the subvalve
from the pump housing.
2. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-15).
9. Remove the snap ring, then remove the driveshaft
3. Hold the power steering pump (A) in a vise with by tapping the shaft end with a plastic hammer.
soft jaws (B), then hold the pulley (C) with the
pulley holder (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and 10. Remove the pump seal from the pump housing.
pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
D
(cont'd)
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection 14. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control
valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the flow
11. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and control valve in a container of power steering fluid
other damage to the edges of the grooves in the or solvent (C), and blow in the hose.
valve.
• If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump
as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
available separately.
• If the flow control valve is OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
12. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the

pump housing for scratches and wear.
13. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump

housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 14; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The flow control valve (A) is 15. Inspectthe ball bearing by rotating the outer race
not available separately. slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and
install a new one (B).
16. Inspect each partshown with an asterisk in the

Exploded View. If any of them are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
Reassembly 18. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side
facing in) into the pump housing (B) by hand first,
17. Align the pin (A) of the subvalve (B) with the oil then drive it in using the attachment and the driver
passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the until there is no step at the top of the pump seal,
subvalve into place, then install the snap ring (D) and the seal is fully seated in the pump housing.
19. Position the driveshaft (A) in the pump housing,

then press it in with the appropriate size socket
wrench (B) as shown.
20. Install the 40 mm snap ring (C) with its beveled

edge facing out.
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
21. Coat the new pump cover seal (A) with power 24. Install the rotor (A) to the pump cover (B).
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
pump cover (B).
25. Set the 10 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor.

Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are
in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
22. Install the outer side plate (C) over the two roll pins
(D). 26. Coat the new 15.2 mm O-ring (A) with power
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
23. Set the cam ring (A) over the two roll pins with the side plate (B).
mark (B) facing down.
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
the roll pin set holes (D) in the side plate with the
roll pins (E).
28. Coat the new 51.0 mm O-ring (A) with power 32. Coat the new 13.0 mm O-ring (A) with power
steering fluid, and position it in the bottom of the steering fluid, and install it on the inlet joint (B).
pump housing. Install the inlet joint on the pump housing.
29. I nstall the pump cover assembly (B) in the pump 33. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
housing. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
alternating in two or more steps. jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
30. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump
housing.
34. Hold the pulley with the pulley holder, and tighten
the pulley nut to the specified torque.
35. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the

31. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C) with power pulley by hand. If it turns hard, loosen the four
steering fluid, and install it on the flow control flange bolts on the cover, then retighten them in
valve cap (D), then install the cap on the pump the same manner as in step 29. Turn the pump
housing. Tighten it to the specified torque. again by hand.
Steering Wheel Removal
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Install a commercially available steering wheel
SRS component locations (see page 23-17), and the puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before steering wheel from the steering column shaft by
doing repairs or service. turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the Note these items when removing the steering
audio system and the navigation system (if wheel:
equipped). • Do not tap on the steering wheel dr the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel
2. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove • If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel
the driver's airbag from the steering wheel hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the
(see page 23-201). cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller
3. Disconnect the horn switch connector (A), radio bolt.
remote switch connector (B), and the cruise control
set/decel, resume/accel, cancel switch connector
(C).
6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

steering wheel nut and steering wheel from the
steering column.
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly
DAMPER
Steering Wheel Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the 3. Install the steering wheel nut (A) and tighten it to
front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center the specified torque. Connectthe horn switch, radio
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable remote switch, and the cruise control set/decel,
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it resume/accel, cancel switch connectors. Make sure
counterclockwise about two and half turns. The the wire harness is routed and fastened properly.
arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label should point
A
straight up. 49 N-m
A B
4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the

2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal system is operating properly (see page 23-201).
cancelling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering
wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable to the battery,
the steering wheel hubs (C) engages the pins (D) of and do these tasks:
the cable reel and tabs of the turn signal cancelling
sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering • Do the power window control unit reset
column shaft when installing the steering wheel. procedure (see page 22-255).
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system or
the navigation system (if equipped), then enter
the customer's audio preset.
• Set the clock (without navigation).
• Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
• Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
Steering Column Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Set the column shaft (A) in the neutral position by
SRS component locations (see page 23-17), and the pulling up the steering column to its uppermost
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before position, then lower it 8 mm (0.31 in.). Tighten the
doing repairs or service. tilt lever (B).
FULL STROKE; 23 mm (0.9 in.)

Removal

audio unit or the navigation system (if equipped).
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then

disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
3. Remove the driver's airbag assembly and the

steering wheel (see page 17-22).

Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6, Remove the column covers (A).
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 N-m

16 lbf-ft) (1.6 kgf-m, 12 Ibf-ft)
7. Move the shift lever (B) to the N position, and remove the shift cable from the column, and set it aside.
8. Remove the combination switch assembly and cable reel (C) from the steering column shaft by removing the
three mounting screws, and disconnecting the connectors.
9. Disconnect the ignition switch connectors and disconnect the harness clips.
10. Disconnect the immobilizer receiver unit, the park pin switch, and the shift lock solenoid.
11. Disconnect the steering joint (D), and remove it from the column shaft.
12. Remove the steering column (E) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
13. Remove the center guide (F) (if equipped) from the top of the pinion shaft, and discard it. The center guide is for
factory assembly use only.
Installation 5. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft then loosely
1. Install the steering column in the. reverse orderof install the lower joint bolt (C). s
removal, and note these items:
: • Take care not to let the sliding plates fall out of

position during column installation.
• Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by
any parts.
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
3. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the '
steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (B) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft), and loosely install the
upper joint bolt.
6. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower
joint bolt to the specified torque.
7. Tighten the upper joint bolt (D) to the specified

torque.
8 . Install the steering joint cover (A) with the clamps

(B) and clips (C).
4. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the

pinion shaft taking care to align the gap (D) within
the angle.
10. Reconnect the negative battery cable to the battery,

and do these tasks:
• Do the power window control unit reset

• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system or
the navigation system (if equipped), then enter
properly.
Steering Column Inspection
Inspection
• Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper movement. If any
bearing is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
• Checkthe retaining collar (C) for damage. If it is damaged, replace the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the absorbing plates (D), absorbing plate guides (E) and sliding capsules (F) for distortion or breakage. If there
is distortion or breakage, replace the steering column as an assembly. The sliding capsule is attached to the column
bracket with the plastic injections (G).
G
Steering Lock Replacement
Lock Lever Inspection/Adjustment 1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-25).
1. Move the lock lever (A) from the loosened position 2. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill
to the locked position three to five times. With the their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.) drill bit. Be
lock lever in the loosened position measure the careful not to damage the switch body and steering
lock lever preload at 10 mm (0.39 in.) from the end column when removing the shear bolts.
of the lock lever.
Preload: 7 0 - 9 0 IM( 7 - 9 kgf, 1 5 -2 0 Ibf)
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted,

2. If the measurement is out of the specification,
adjust the preload using the following procedures. 5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
• Loosen the lock lever, and set the steering 6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper
column to the neutral position. operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
• Remove the 6 mm lock bolt (B), and remove the ignition key turns freely.
stop ( C ) . Be careful not to loosen the lock lever
when installing the stop or tightening the 6 mm 7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
lock bolt. twist off.
• Adjust the preload by turning the tilt lock bolt (D)
left or right. A
• Pull up the lock lever to the uppermost position,
and install the stop. Checkthe preload again. If
the measurement is still out of specification,
repeat the above procedures to adjust.
8. Register the immobilizer control unit-receiver

(see page 22-239), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.
Rack Guide Adjustment
Special Tools Required 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N-m
Locknut wrench, 40 mm (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft), then loosen it.
07M AA-SLO0100 or 07916-SA50001
20° max.
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the

locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N-m

(0.4 kgf-m, 4 Ibf-ft), then back it off to the specified
angle.
Specified return angle: 20 ° max.
3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw 6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench,
(A), and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully
Loctite 5699) to the middle of the threads (B). seated.
Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering
gearbox. 7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut (B),
continue to hold the rack guide screw stationary
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after and tighten the locknut an additional 30 °with the
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and locknut wrench.
residue, and reapply new sealant.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the
complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotational play (see page

17-8) and the power assist (see page 17-8).
Steering Gearbox Removal
Special T oo l s Required 9. Remove the steering joint bolts, disconnect the

• Ball jo in t remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SLOA2O2 steering jo in t by moving the steering joint (A)
• Engine-:Support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 * toward the column.
•'Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019 *
• Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000014 *
• Front subframe adapter VSB02BX0 *
• Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857
Note these items during removal:

• Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off
the valve body unit, it's lines, and the end of the
gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
• Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering jo in t Damage to the cable
reel can occur.
• Lower the front subframe from the body and remove
the steering gearbox through the gap produced by
lowering the front subframe.
1. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-13).

10. Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped), and
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the discard it. The center guide is fo r factory assembly
audio system or the navigation system (if use only.
3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then

disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety

stands in the proper locations (see page 1-13).
6. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page

23-201).
7. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
(cont'd)
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
11. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the 13. Install the engine hanger balance bar
power steering pump, and remove the clamp (B). (VSB02C000019); attach the front arm (A) to the
6 x 1.0 m m front cylinder head w ith a spacer and the 10 mm
head w ith the 8 mm bolt.
12. Remove the 10 mm flange bolts (A) on the engine

side mount bracket (B).

hand, and to lift and support the engine/
transmission.
15. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the 12 mm nut .(B), 18. Remove the three self-locking nuts, and disconnect
and loosen the nut. the under-floor threeway catalytic converter (A)
from the muffler (B) (see page 9-10).
10 m1.25 mm
Replace.
16. Separate the tie-rod ball joints and knuckles using

the ball joint remover (see page 18-11). 19. Remove the 8 mm flange bolts from the exhaust
rubber mount (A).
17. Remove the front suspension subframe stiffener
plate (A).
(cont'd)
20. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch 22. Remove the splash shield (A).
connector (A).
(A).
23. Attach the front subframe adapter to the front
suspension subframe and the transmission jack or
the powertrain lift (see step 57 on page 14-230).
24. Make sure the front suspension subframe (A) is

securely supported by the jack with the front
subframe adapter (B).
VSB02BX0
25. Loosen the two 14 mm flange bolts (A) on the front 27. Then remove the 10 mm flange bolts, nuts,; and the
suspension subframe so they are about 30 mm subframe bolt retainers (A).
(1 3/16 in.) from the mounting surface. Do not
loosen the 14 mm flange bolts more than
necessary.
14 x 1.5 mm
Replace.
Replace.
28. Remove the two 12 mm flange bolts, 14 mm
26. Remove the four 12 mm flange bolts (A) from the special bolts and front suspension subframe rear
front suspension subframe front brackets (B). brackets (B) on the right and left of the vehicle.
29. Lower the transmission jack slow ly until the rear

portion of the front suspension subframe has
dropped about 50 mm (1 15/16 in.) from the
mounting surface.
12x1.25 mm
(cont'd)
30. Remove the P/S line mounting brackets (A) from 31. Loosen the 14 mm flare nut (A), and disconnect the
the front suspension subframe and gearbox inlet line (B).
mounting bracket.
4W D model:
32. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp (C) and

disconnect the return hose (D).
2W D m odel: 33. Remove the two 10 mm flange bolts from the right
side of the steering gearbox, then remove the
mounting bracket (A) and cushion (B).
B
34. Remove the tw o 10 mm flange bolts from the left 36. Remove the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) from the
side of the gearbox. left side of the fron t suspension subframe.
10x1.25 mm
35. Lower the transmission jack slowly until the front

suspension subframe rear edge has dropped
100 mm (3 15/16 in.) total. 37. Slide the steering gearbox (A) between the body
and front suspension subframe toward the left, and
remove the steering gearbox.
38. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure

that no power steering fluid gets on the gearbox
mount cushions, gearbox housing, surface of the
front subframe and stiffener. Wipe off any spilled
fluid at once.
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded V iew
VALVE HOUSING
FLANGE BOLT
20 N-m
CYLINDER LINE A SNAP RING

Repl ace.
■SLEEVE SEAL RINGS

Replace.
VALVE SEAL RING

Replace.
O-RING
Replace.
•VALVE OIL SEAL

Replace.
FLARE NUTS
26 N-m WAVE WASHER
PINION SHAFT
LOCKNUT
RACK GUIDE SCREW
SPRING
RACK GUIDE
CYLINDER END
88 N-m
PISTON SEAL RING

Replace.
BACKUP RING
Replace.
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace.
Special Tools Required 3. Unbend the lock washer (A).
• Cylinder end seal remover attachment
07TAF-SZ50100- .
• Pilot collar 07GAF-PH70100
• Valve. .seal ring sizing tool 07NAG-SR3090A
• Sleeve seal ring guide 07YAG-S2X0100
• Sleeve seal ring sizing tool, 36 mm
07ZAG-S5A0100
• Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
•D river 07749-0010000
• Piston seal ring guide 07ZAG-S3VA100
•Piston seal ring sizing tool 07ZAG-S3VA200
• Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially
available
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during 4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering
this procedure. rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends
(C) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the
Removal rack surface w ith the wrench. Remove the lock
washer (D) and rubber stop (E).
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-31).
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B).

Pull the boots away from the ends of the steering
gearbox.
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide

screw (B)./
6. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from
the gearbox housing.
(cont'd)
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Remove the cylinder lines from the steering 11. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 in.) diameter hole about
gearbox. 2.5—3.0 mm (0.10—0.12 in.) in depth in the staked
point (A) on the cylinder. Do not allow metal
shavings to enter the cylinder housing. After
removing the cylinder end (B), remove any burrs at
the staked point.
8. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly

moving the steering rack back and forth.
9. Loosen the 16 mm flare nut (A), and remove the

return line joint (B).
12. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (commercially

available) (A) to the steering gearbox mounts with
bolts. Clamp the yoke in a vise with soft jaws as
shown, then loosen and remove the cylinder end
(B). Do not clamp the cylinder housing or gearbox
housing in the vise.
10. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the

valve body unit (C) from the gearbox housing (D).
Remove the O-ring (E).
13. Install a commercially available bearing separator 18. Install a washer (O.D. 27.5 mm, P/N 94103-10400)
(A) on the gearbox housing as shown. (A) so it w ill fit through the rack guide hole of the
gearbox housing, then position the washer on the
cylinder end seal (B). Make sure that the washer is
securely positioned on the cylinder end seal edges.
14. Place an appropriately sized deep socket wrench

(B) on the steering rack (C). 19. Install the socket wrench with a 27.5 mm O.D. (A)
onto the 24 " long 3/8 "-drive extension (B), and
15. Set the gearbox housing in a press so the gearbox carefully place it on the washer (C).
housing points upward, then press the cylinder end
seal (D) and steering rack out of the gearbox. Hold
the steering rack to keep it from falling when
pressed clear. Be careful not to damage the inner
surface of the cylinder housing w ith the tool.
16. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering

rack.
17. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside of the seal ring groove and piston edges
when removing the seal ring.
20. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the gearbox

housing points upward, then push out the cylinder
end seal (D) 5—6 mm (0.20—0.24 in.) by pressing
on the 24 " long 3/8 " drive extension end.
21. Remove the gearbox housing from the press, and

remove the washer from the gearbox inside.
22. Turn the cylinder end seal remover attachment so it 24. Before removing the valve housing (A), apply vinyl
w ill fit through the rack guide hole of the steering tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft (G).
gearbox, then position the seal remover on the
cylinder end seal (A). Make sure that the seal
remover is securely positioned on the seal edges.
25. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft/

valve using a press.
23. Insert a 24 " long 3/8 " drive extension (A), on the 26. With your finger, check the inner wall of the valve
cylinder end seal remover attachment. Place the housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step
gearbox housing in a press, then remove the in the w all, the housing is worn. Replace it.
cylinder end seal (B) from the gearbox housing by
pressing on the 24 " long 3/8 " drive extension. NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal
ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end valve housing only if the wall is stepped.
seal:
• Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end
seal.
• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool;
striking the tool would break the cylinder end
seal, and the seal would remain in the gearbox
housing.
27. Check for wear, burrs and other damage to the . 29. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and
edges of the grooves in the sleeve. remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. Be
careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision grooves and outer surface when removing the seal
matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve rings.
must be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
28. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (B) from the
pinion shaft.
(cont'd)
30. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve 32. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and roller bearing (B)
seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) at the cutting groove out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press
position (C) in the pinion shaft. Remove the valve and pilot collar.
seal ring and O-ring. Be careful not to damage the
edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface
when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring.
33. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them w ith compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
in the solvent.
31. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and wave washer (B)
from the pinion shaft.
Note these items during disassembly:

• Inspectthe ball bearing (C) by rotating the outer
race slowly. If there is any excessive play or wear,
replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an
assembly.
• The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do
not intermix old and new pinion shafts and
sleeves.
Reassembly 39. Remove the tape, and apply power steering flu id to
the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
34. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion of the
07NAG-SR3Q90A
pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape
with power steering fluid.
B C
35. Install the wave washer (B). 40. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the valve
seal ring sizing tool. Set the larger diameter end of
36. Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal (C) the sizing tool over the valve seal ring, and move
with power steering fluid, and install the seal w ith the sizing tool up and down several times to make
its grooved side facing opposite the bearing, then the valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
slide it over the pinion shaft, being careful not to
damage its sealing lip (D). 41. Remove the sizing tool, turn it over, slide the
smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring.
37. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the splines and stepped Move it up and down several times to make sure
portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the the valve seal ring fits snugly in the pinion shaft
vinyl tape with power steering fluid. groove.
38. Fit the new O-ring (B) in the groove of the pinion
shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring (C) over
the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft.
(cont'd)
42. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the 46. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the
sleeve seal ring guide. Slip two new seal rings (A) pinion shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion
over the ring guide from the smaller diameter end, shaft by aligning the locating pin (C) on the inside
and expand them. Install only two rings at a tim e of the sleeve with the cutout (D) in the shaft. Then
from each end of the pinion shaft sleeve (B). install the new snap ring (E) securely in the pinion
shaft groove. Be careful not to damage the valve
Note these items when installing the seal ring: seal ring when inserting the sleeve.
• Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin
seal rings with care so as not to damage them.
After installation, make sure you contract the seal
rings using the sizing tool.
• There are two types of sleeve seal rings; black
and brown. Do not mix the different types of
rings as they are not compatible.
A
47. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the
new valve oil seal (A), then install the seal in the
valve housing (B) using a hydraulic press, driver,
and attachment. Install the seal with its grooved
side facing the tool.
43. Align the ring guide with each groove in the sleeve,
and slide a sleeve seal ring into each groove. After
installation, compress the seal rings with your
fingers temporarily.
44. Apply power steering flu id to the seal rings on the

sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the sleeve
seal ring sizing tool, then slowly insert the sleeve
into the sizing tool.
48. Press the roller bearing (C) into the valve housing
with a hydraulic press, driver, and attachment.
45. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to

make the seal rings fit snugly in the sleeve. Make
sure the seal rings are not twisted.
49, Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft;then coat 52. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing
the vinyl tape with power steering fluid. w ith a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion shaW
sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
53. Coat the piston seal ring guide with power steering
fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first.
50. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (6). Be 54. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
careful not to damage the valve seal rings (C). ring (B) on the piston seal ring guide, then slide
them down toward the big end of the tool.
51. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then
remove any residue from the tape adhesive. Note these items during reassembly:
• Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings w ith care so as not to damage
them. After installation, make sure you contract
the seal ring using the sizing tool.
• Replace piston's O-ring and seal ring as a se t
55. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
56. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the 59. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
piston seal ring sizing tool w ith power steering fluid, (A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over steering rack with its grooved side toward the
the piston seal ring. piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not to damage the lip of the seal w ith the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
57. Move the sizing tool back and forth several times to
make sure the piston seal ring fit snugly in the
piston.
58. Wrap vinyl tape (A) around the rack teeth and rack
end edges, then coat the surface of the tape with
power steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape
is wrapped carefully so there is no stepped portion. 60. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
61. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack,
then place the cylinder end seal (B) against the
piston.
A
62. Apply multipurpose grease to the steering rackP 66. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gearbox coat the surface of the tape with the power steering
housing. Be careful not to damage the inner fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
surface of the cylinder wall with the rack edges. carefully so there is no stepped portion.
63. Insert an appropriate size deep socket wrench (A) 67. Coat the inside surface o f the new cylinder end seal
onto the steering rack as shown. w ith power steering fluid, then install the seal onto
the steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston.
64. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of
the cylinder by pressing on the tool w ith a press.
Do not push on the tool w ith excessive force as it 68. Push in the cylinder end seal on with your finger.
may damage the cylinder end seal. Be careful not to damage the face of the seal with
the threads and burrs at the staked position of the
65. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack. cylinder housing.
69. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
(cont'd)
70. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (commercially 73. Coat the new O-ring (A) with steering grease
available) (A) to the gearbox housing mounts with (08C35-B0534L), and carefully fit it on the valve
bolts, then clamp the yoke in a vise w ith soft jaws. housing.
Do not clamp the cylinder housing or gearbox
housing in the vise.
71. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end (A) with
power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end
by screwing it into the cylinder (B). Tighten the
cylinder end to the specified torque. 74. Apply multipurpose grease to the needle bearing
(B) in the gearbox housing, then install the valve
body unit (C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve
body unit installation position (direction of the line
connections).
75. Tighten the flange bolts (D) to the specified torque.
76. Install the return line joint (E), and tighten the
16 mm flare nut (F).
72. Remove the yoke from the gearbox housing. After

tightening the cylinder end (C), stake the point of
the cylinder shown (opposite from where the stake
was removed during disassembly).
77. Install the cylinder lines. 81. Install a new rubber stop (A) and a new lock washer
(B) on the rack end (C) in the rack. Align the lock
Note these items during reassembly: washer tabs (D) with the slots (E). Install the rack
• Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines. end (F) while holding the lock washer in place.
The joints must be free of foreign materia l. Repeat this step for the other side of the rack.
• Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
26 N-m
17 N-nm 82. Hold the flat surface sections (G) of the steering
(1.7 kgf-m, 12 Ibf-ft) rack with a wrench, and tighten both rack ends.
Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the
78. Apply steering grease to the sliding surface of the wrench.
rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox
housing. Wipe the grease off the threaded section 83. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
of the housing. the rack end joint housing.
79. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw
(B), then apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or
Loctite 5699) ail around the threads. I nstall the
spring (C), rack guide screw and locknut (D).
80. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-30). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after

applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and
residue, and reapply new sealant.
(confd)
84, Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference o f 87. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
the rack end join t housing (A). w ith the holes (B) on the band.
85. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (P/N 08798- 88. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with
9013) to the boot grooves (B) on the rack end. comm ercially available Oetiker 1098 pincer or
equivalent (B).
86. Center the steering rack w ithin its stroke. Install the
boots on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips. After
installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (A) of the rack end.
89. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
90. Install the tie-rod ends.
91. Reinstall the steering gearbox (see page 17-53).

Steering Gearbox Installation
1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure 4. Install the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) on the front
that no power steering fluid is on the mating suspension subframe, and tighten the bolts and nut
surface of the steering gearbox and front subframe. to the specified torque.
To prevent the gearbox mounting bolts from
loosening after the installation, remove any power
steering fluid from the mount cushions and bolt
holes.
2. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A) on the valve

housing.
NOTE: If the return line (B) was removed previously,

install it.
5. Loosely install the new 10 mm flange bolts on the

left side of the gearbox.
3. Slide the steering gearbox (A) between the front

suspension subframe and body from the driver's
side. Place the gearbox in position on the front
suspension subframe.
(cont'd)
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the mounting cushion (A) on the right side of 10. Carefully raise the front suspension subframe with
the gearbox. the front subframe adapter and the transmission
jack or the powertrain lift until the subframe is in
position (see page 20-173).
11. Install the P/S line mounting brackets (A) on the

front suspension subframe and gearbox mounting
bracket.
4W D model:
7. Install the gearbox mounting bracket (B) over the

mounting cushion, then install the tw o 10 mm
6 x 1.0 mm
flange bolts (C). Tighten the four 10 mm flange 9.8 Nm
bolts for the gearbox to the specified torque. (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. Connectthe return hose (A) securely, and tighten 2WD model:

the adjustable hose clamp (B) (see page 17-14).
A
14 x 1.5 mm
37 N-m (3.8 kgf-m, 27 I bf-ft)
9. Connectthe inlet line (C), and tighten the 14 mm

flare nut (D) to the specified torque.
12. Install the front suspension subframe rear brackets 15. Install the splash shield (A).
(A). Tighten the 12 mm flange bolts (B) and new
14 mm special bolts (C) on the right and left of the
vehicle to the specified torque. Then install the
subframe bolt retainers (D). Tighten the two flange
bolts (E) and nuts (F) to the specified torque.
Replace.
13. Install the front suspension subframe front brackets
(A) with 12 mm flange bolts (B) and new 14 mm
special bolts (C), and tighten to the specified torque.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
14x 1.5 mm
103 N-m
(10.5 kgf-m,
75.9 ibf-ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft)
14. Lower the front suspension subframe support that

is attached to the transmission jack or the
powertrain lift.
(cont'd)
17. Connect the power steering pressure switch 19. Install the exhaust rubber mount (A) on the frame.
connector (A).
18. Connect the under floor three-way catalytic 8 x 1.25 mm

converter (A) to the m uffler (B). Install the new 22 Nm
10 mm self-locking nuts and tighten them to the
specified torque.
10 x 1.25 mm
33 N m (3.4 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
20. .Install the front suspension subframe stiffener plate 22. Connectthe pump outlet hose (A) to the power
; (A) w ith new m ounting bolts (B), and tighten to the steering pump, and install the inlet hose clamp (B).
specified torque.
J x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
54 M « m
15.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
21. Install the 10 mm flange bolts on the engine side

mount bracket (A).
23. Wipe o ff any grease contamination from the ball
10x1.25 mm
44 N-m jo in t tapered section and threads. Reconnect the tie
rod ball joints (A) to the knuckles. Install the 12 mm
nut (B) and tighten it to the specified torque.
24. Install the new cotter pin (C) and bend it as shown.
25. Remove the engine support hanger, the hanger

balance bar, and the hanger adapter set.
(cont'd)
26. Center the steering rack w ithin its stroke. 32. Install the steering join t cover (A) with the clamps
(B) and clips (C).
27. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (B) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft), and loosely install the
upper joint bolt.
33. Install the front wheel, then set the wheels in the
straight ahead position.
NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating

surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
34. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
28. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the 35. Reconnect the negative battery cable to the battery,
pinion shaft taking care to align the gap (D) w ithin and do these tasks:
the angle.
• Do the power w indow control unit reset
29. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the procedure (see page 22-255).
groove (B)around the pinion shaft then loosely • Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system or
install the lower joint bolt (C). the navigation system (if equipped), then enter
properly.
36. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
air from the system (see page 17-13).
37. After installation, do these checks.
• Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(see page 17-12).
30. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the • Do the front toe inspection (see page 18-5).
steering jo in t is fu lly seated, then tighten the lower • Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering
join t bolt to the specified torque. spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered),
31. Tighten the upper join t bolt (D) to the specified correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
torque. serrations, then adjust the front toe by turning
the tie-rod ends, if necessary.
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required ; 6. Install a new tie-rod ball jo in t boot (A) using the
Front hub dis/assembly tool Q7965-SA50500 front hub dis/assembly tool. The boot must not
have a gap at the boot insta l lation sections (B).
1. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle After installing the boot, checkthe ball pin tapered
(see step 15 on page 17-33). section for grease contamination, and wipe it if
necessary.
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end.
3. Remove the tie-rod ball joint boot from the tie-rod

end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
multipurpose grease.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
8. Connect the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle (see

■ step 23- on page 17-57),
9. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

5. Pack the interior of a new tie-rod ball joint boot (B)
and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:

• Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and
the tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-31). 4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new
gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on
2. Position the 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange the gearbox mounting cushion hole.
part of the gearbox housing with a washer (B),
a 10 x 105 mm flange bolt (C) and a 10 mm nut (D)
as shown.
5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange

part of the gearbox housing with a washer, a flange
bolt, and a nut as shown.
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the

nut until the mount cushion edges (B) contact the
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the gearbox flange surface.
nut w ith a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount
cushion (E). 7. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-53).
Front and Rear Suspension
Special Tools .................................................... .................. 18-2
Component Location Index .................... .......... ............. 18-3
Wheel Alignment ............ ....................... ..... ................... . 18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ............................. 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection .............................................. . 18-9
Wheel Bolt Replacement ......................................... ....... 18-10
Ball Joint Removal ........................ ............................. . 18-11
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement ...... 18-12
Ball Joint Boot Replacement .............................. ............ 18-18
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ................. .......... 18-19
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ........................... ........ ....... 18-20
Lower Arm Removal/Installation .................................. 18-21
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation ................... 18-22
Damper/Spring Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .............. .......... ............. 18-24
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement ...................18-27
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ......................... ....... ........ .18-33
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ............................ .18-34
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ............................ ................ 18-35
Upper Arm Removal/Installation ...................... .............18-36
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation ................................18-37
Lower Arm B Removal and Installation .........................18-37
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation .......... ..................... .18-39
Damper Removal and Installation ........... ................. .... 18-40
Spring/Bump Stop Replacement .................................. .18-42
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) 18-45

Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description ........ QSl

® 071AD-S3VA000 Ball Joint Striker Tool 1
© 071AF-S3VA000 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 1
(D 07GAF-SD40100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool, 42 mm 1
® 07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool, 40 mm 1
© . 07MAC-SL0A202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
© 07VAD-P8A0 TOA Attachment, 80 mm 1
© 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
© 07749-0010000 Driver 1
© 07948-SB00101 or 07ZAD-PNA0100 Attachment, 96 mm 1
07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
07974-SA50700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1
Front Suspension
Rear Suspension
STABILIZER BAR
UPPER ARM
SPRING/BUMP STOP
STABILIZER LINK
LOWER ARM B
Removal, page 18-37
Installation, page 18-38 WHEEL BOLT
Replacement,
page 18-10
KNUCKLE/
HUB /
WHEEL BEARING
LOWER ARM A
TRAILING ARM Removal/Installation, page 18-37
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front Caster Inspection
toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments
are related to each other. For example, when you adjust Use commercially available computerized four wheel
camber, the toe w ill change. Therefore, you must adjust alignment equipment to. measure wheel alignment .
the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
or toe. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Pre-Alignment Checks Check the caster angle.
For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel Caster angle:

alignment, do these checks: 2W D: 1 ° 5 9 '± 1 °
4WD: 1 °53#±1 °
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
measurement. • If the measurement is w ithin specifications, measure
the camber angle.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified. * If the measurement is not within specifications, check
for bent or damaged suspension components.
3. Check the tire size and pressure.
Tire size: P235/70R16104S

Tire pressure: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm 2, 32 psi), cold
4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires

(see page 18-9).
5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a tire with

your hands, and move it up and down and right and
left to check for wobbling.)
6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to

stabilize the suspension.
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Camber Inspection F ro n t Camber Adjustment
Use commercially available computerized four wheel 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment safety stands in the proper locations (see page
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the 1-13).
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Check the camber angle.
3. Loosen the flange nuts and bolts (A), and adjust the
Camber angle: camber angle by moving the bottom of the damper
Front: within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play.
2WD: - O ° 4 0 ' ± 1 °
A
4WD: - 0 ° 3 0 '± 1 ° 16 x 1.5 mm
Rear: 157 N m
2WD: —0 °40 '± 4 5 ' (16.0 kgf-m,
116 Ibf-ft)
4WD: —0 ° 30 ' ± 4 5 '
• If the measurement for the front camber is outside

the specification, go to front camber adjustment.
• If the measurement for the rear camber is outside the
specification, check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified

torque.
5. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the

vehicle to the ground, and move the front of the
vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the
suspension.
6. Measure the camber angle.
• If the measurement is within specification,

measure the toe-in.
• If the measurement is not within specification,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustm ent Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Use commercially available computerized four wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment „
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
steering wheel holder tool. measurement.
2. Check the toe. The left and right side should be 2. Checkthe toe.
equal.
Rear toe-in:
Front toe-in: 0 ± 2 mm {©±0.08 in.) 2WD: 2 ± 2 mm (O.O8±0.08 in.)
4WD: 0 ± 2 mm (0±0.08 in.)
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
• If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe • If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
inspection/adjustment. • If no adjustment is required, remove the
alignment equipm ent
3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the
flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a 3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the rear lower arm B,
wrench, and turn both rack ends (C) until the front and loosen the self-locking nut (C).
toe is within specifications.
14 x 1.5 mm
44 N-m (4.5 kgf m, 33 Ibf-ft)
4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and
4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. lightly tighten it.
Reposition the rack-rod boot if it is twisted or
disp laced. NOTE:
• Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it
5. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment. has been loosened.
• Assemble the adjusting bolt and cam plate with
the eccentric facing up.
5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt

until the toe is correct.
6. Tighten the self-locking nut while holding the

adjusting bolt.
Wheel Alignment (cont'd) Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
Turning Angle Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-13).
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment 2. Remove the wheels.
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install suitable washers (A) and the wheel nuts, and
torque to the specified torque.
1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the
brake, and measure the turning angle of both Front:
wheels.
Turning angle:
Inward:
2WD: 37 ° 5 2 '
4WD: 38 ° 0 8 '
Outward (reference):
2WD; 30 ° 1 0 #
4WD: 30 ° 1 9 '
2. If the turning angle is not w ithin the specifications,

check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against

the hub flange.
5. Measure the bearing end play moving the brake

disc or the brake disc/drum inward or outward.
Front/Rear:
Standard: 0 —0.05 mm (0—0.002 in.)
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than

the standard, replace the wheel bearing.
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it w ith safety stands 4. Readjust the dial gauge to the position shown, and
in the proper locations (see page 1-13). measure radial runout.
2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. Front and rear wheel radial runout:
Standard: 0 —0.7 mm (0—0.03 in.)
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure axial Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
runout by turning the wheel.
Front and rear wheel axial runout:

Standard: 0—0.7 mm (0—0.03 in.)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,

check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8),
and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake
disc or the brake disc/drum and the inside of the
wheel are clean.
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification

but the wheel runout is more than the service lim it,
replace the wheel.
Wheel Bolt Replacement
I NOTICE I 3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while
• Do not use a hammer or air or electric impact aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with
tools to remove and install the wheel bolts. the wheel bolt.
• Be careful not to damage the threads of the
wheel bolts. NOTE:
Degrease all around the wheel bolt.
1. Remove the front or rear hub: front (see page • Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
18-12), rear (see page 18-27). relation to the hub disc surface.
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using 4. Install the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press until
a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic the wheel bolt shoulder is fu lly seated.
press attachments (C) or equivalent tools.
5. Install the front or rear hub: front (see page 18-12),
NOTE: Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean rear (see page 18-27).
the mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
NOTE: If you can not tighten the wheel nut to the
Press specified torque value when installing the wheel,
replace the front or rear hub as an assembly.
Special Tools Required 3. Install the ball joint remover as shown. Insert the
•Ball joint striker tool 071AD-S3VA000 jaws carefully, making sure not to damage the ball
•Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 pressure bolt (A).
NOTE: The front lower arm ball joint is not replaceable NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (B) securely to a
separately. If the ball joint is worn or damaged, replace suspension arm or the subframe (C). Do not fasten
the lower arm and ball jo in t as an assembly. it to a brake line or w ire harness.
1. Screw the ball joint thread protector all the way

onto the ball joint stud.
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the

head of the adjusting bolt (D) is in the position
shown to allow the jaw (E) to pivot.
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas 5. Tighten the pressure bolt (A) to 133 N-m (13.5 kgf-m,
shown (A). This w ill ease installation of the tool and 97.6 Ibf-ft). If the ball join t does not pop loose, strike
prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. the side of the knuckle with a hammer and the ball
joint remover to dislodge the ball joint.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on

the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover. Then remove the

thread protector from the end of the ball joint, and
pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension
arm. Inspectthe ball joint boot, and replace it if
damaged.
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Exploded View
Apply a small amount of engine oil

to the seating surface.
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B).
• Ball jo in t thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000 Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
• Ball join t remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
• Hub dis/assembly tool, 40 mm 07GAF-SE00100
•Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
•Driver 07749-0010000
• Support base 07965-SD90100
•Attachment, 96 mm 07948-SB00101 or 07ZAD-
PNA0100
•Attachment, 80 mm 07VAD-P8A010A
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with

safety stands in the proper locations (see page
1-13).
2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel.
6. Raise the stake (A) of the spindle nut (B), then

remove and discard the nut.
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A). 285 N-m

(29.0 kgf-m, 210 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
4. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts (B), then

remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle.
To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or
brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not
tw ist the brake hose with force.
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the brake disc (see page 19-14). 11. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball
joint, then remove the castle nut (B).
8. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after
9. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball tightening the new castle nut.
joint, then loosen the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin

after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
12. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the

knuckle using the ball join t thread protector, and
the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
NOTE: Do not force or hammer on the lower arm,

or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You
could damage the ball joint.
10. Disconnect the tie-rod ball join t from the knuckle

using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
13. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and flange nuts 15. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the
(B) from the damper. hub dis/assembly tool and a hydraulic press. Hold
the knuckle w ith the attachment (C) of the hydraulic
NOTE: During installation, install the new damper press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform
pinch bolts and new flange nuts. the splash guard (D). Hold onto the hub to keep it
from falling when pressed clear.
16. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B)
from the knuckle (C).
14. Remove the driveshaft outboard join t (C) from the

knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) with a
plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle.
NOTE:
• Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
• During installation, apply grease to the mating
surfaces of the wheel bearing and driveshaft
outboard joint (see step 1 on page 16-18).
17. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) 19. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash
using the attachment, the driver, and a press. point solvent before reassembly.
20. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B)
using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the
attachment, the support base, and a press. Be
careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal.
Press
18. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) from the hub
(B) using the hub dis/assembly tool, commercially
available bearing separator (C), and a press.
O7GAF-SEOO100
Press
21. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B).
22. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws
(D) to the specified torque value.
I
23. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (6) using the 24. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of remova l ,
attachment, the driver, the support base, and a and note these items:
hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the splash
guard (C). • First install all the components, and lightly
tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
Press
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fu lly tightening to the specified torque
values. Do not place the jack against the ball join t
pin of the knuckle.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots
when installing the knuckle.
• Before connecting the lower ball joint to the
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion of the ball join t pin, the ball join t
connecting hole, the threaded section, and
mating surfaces of the castle nut.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot w ith the ball jo in t pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
• Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
• Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a d rift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surfaces of the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
wheel.
• Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Adjust the bail join t boot clip guide w ith the
Bail joint boot clip guide 07974-SA50700 adjusting bolt (A) until its base is just above the
groove around the bottom of the boot. Then slide
1. Remove the lower arm {see page 18-21). the clip (B) over the ball joint boot clip guide and
into position on the boot.
2. Remove the boot clip and the boot.
3. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with

grease. Do not contaminate the lower collar of the
boot (B) with grease.
7. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the

exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
8. Install the lower arm (see page 18-21).
4. Wipe the grease off the tapered section (C) of the

pin, and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not
let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot.
5. Install the boot onto the ball joint, then squeeze it

gently to force out any air.
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 5. Install the flange nuts, and lightly tighten them.
1-13). 6. Place a jack under the lower arm, and raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight.
2. Remove the front wheel.
7. Tighten the flange nuts (A) to the specified torque
3. Remove the flange nuts (A) while holding the values while holding the respective joint pin .(B)
respective joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and with a hex wrench (C).
remove the stabilizer link (D).

4. Install the stabilizer link (A) on the stabilizer bar (B) inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
and damper (C) with the joint pins (D) set at the
center of each moving range.
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it w ith 6. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page removal, and note these items:
1-13).
• Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
2. Remove the front wheels. bar.
• Do not set the bushing (A) on the bent or curved
3. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer part of the stabilizer bar (B).
bar on the right and left sides (see page 18-19). • Align the ends of the paint marks (C) on the
stabilizer bar with each end of the bushings.
4. Remove the front suspension subframe (A) from • Note the front to rear direction of the bushings.
the body (see page 20-173). • Refer to Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
B
10 x 1.25 mm 18-19).
39 N-m • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
(4.0 kgf-m,29 Ibf-ft) surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
• Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
5. Remove the flange bolts (B) and the bushing

holders (C), then remove the bushings (D) and the
stabilizer bar (E).
• Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm G7MAC-SL0A202 -1 Remove the forward lower arm mounting bolt
(A).
1. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety -5 Remove the rearward lower arm mounting bolt
stands in the proper locations (see page 1-13). (B).
-3 Remove the lower arm (C) from the front
2. Remove the front wheel. suspension subframe.
3. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball NOTE: During installation, install the new
joint, then remove the castle nut (B). mounting bolts.

tightening the new castle nut.
6. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of

4. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the • First install all the components, and lightly
knuckle using the ball joint thread protector, and tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
the ball joint remover (see page 18-11). suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque
NOTE: Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, values.
or pry between the lower arm and the knuckle. You • Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
could damage the ball joint. connecting the lower arm to the knuckle.
• Before connecting the lower ball joint to the
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the ball joint
connecting hole, the threaded section, and
mating surfaces of the castle nut.
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
wheel.
• Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation
Removal 4. Remove the service caps (A), and remove the

damper by removing the three flange nuts (B).
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it w ith safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-13). NOTE: Damper springs are different, left and right.
Mark the springs L and R before you continue.
3. Remove the damper.
-1 Remove the wheel sensor harness (A) from the

damper (B). Do not disconnect the wheel
sensor connector.
-2 Remove the brake hose bracket (C) from the
damper.
-3 Disconnect the stab ilizer link (D) from the
damper.
-4 Remove the flange nuts (E) and damper pinch
bolts (F) from the damper.
Replace.
3. Raise the fro n t suspension w ith a floor jack to load
the suspension with the vehicle's weight.
1. Loosely install the damper (A) onto the frame, then
loosely install three new flange nuts (B). 4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts holding the flange
nut to the specified torque value.
5. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the

specified torque value.
6. Install the service caps.

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
8. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if

2. Install the damper onto the knuckle.
-1 Loosely install the new damper pinch bolts (A)

and new flange nuts (B) to the damper (C).
-2 Install the wheel sensor harness(D) to the
damper.
-3 Install the brake hose bracket (E) to the damper.
-4 Loosely install the stabilizer link (F) to the
damper.
16 x 1.5 mm
157 N-m
(16.0 kg-m, 116 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View
DAMPER M O UNTING WASHER -SELF-LOCKING NUT

12 x 1.25 m m
DAMPER M O UNTING BASE 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)
Check for deformation. Replace.
NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a Inspection
commercially available strut spring compressor
(Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) 1. Reassemble allparts, except fo r the spring..
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
Disassembly check fo r smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self should extend in a smooth, continuous motion
locking nut (A) while holding the damper shaft with when the compression is released. If it does not (no
a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the spring more compression or no extension), the gas is leaking,
than necessary to remove the nut. and the damper should be replaced.
A.
12x1.25 mm
Replace.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring 3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding
compressor, then disassemble the damper as during these tests.
shown in the Exploded View.
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Reassembly 4. Install the damper mounting washer (A) and a new

self-locking nut (B).
1. Install all the parts except the damper mounting
B
washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit 12 x 1.25 mm
by referring to the Exploded View. Align the bottom
of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower
spring seat (B).
5. Hold the damper rod using a hex wrench (C), and

tighten the self-locking nut.
LEFT: RIGHT:
FRONT FRONT
2. Align the mark (C) on the upper spring seat with the
spring mounting cushion as shown. Install the
damper assembly using a commercially available
strut spring compressor (D).
3. Compress the damper spring with the spring

compressor. Do not compress the spring
excessively.
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Exploded View
REAR AXLE SHAFT 12x1,25 mm

74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibf-ft)
. KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and damage.
BACKING PLATE
Check for corrosion, deformation,
and damage. Replace if rusted.
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
ASSEMBLY
FLAT SCREW
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
WHEEL BEARING
Replace.
REAR HUB
Check for deformation
damage and cracks.
SPINDLE NUT
BRAKE DISC/ 24 x 1.5 mm
DRUM 245 N-m
Check for wear, (25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibf-ft)
damage, and rust. Replace.
Apply a small amount of

engine oil to the seating surface.
(cont'd)
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont d)
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolts (A)
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 from the knuckle.
• Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm 07GAF-SD40100
•Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
•Driver 07749-0010000
• Support base 07965-SD90100
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with

1-13).
2. Remove the wheel nuts and rear wheel.
5. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts (B), then

remove the caliper assembly (C) from the knuckle.
To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or
brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not
tw ist the brake hose excessively.
6. Remove the wheel sensor (A) and sensor harness

from the knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel
sensor connector.
3. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolts (A)
from the trailing arm.
7. Raise the stake (A) of the spindle nut (B), then 12. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball
remove and discard the nut. . joint, then remove the castle nut (B).

tightening the nut.
B
24x1.5 mm
245 N-m
(25.0 kgf-m, 181 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
8. For 2WD: Remove the rear axle shaft from the

knuckle.
9. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake 13. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the
disc/drum from the rear hub (see page 19-22). knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page
18-11).
10. Check the rear hub for damage and cracks.
14. Remove the self-locking nut (B), washer, and flange
11. Remove the parking brake shoes (see page 19-26), bolt (C), then remove the lower arm A.
and parking brake cable (see page 19-33).
NOTE: During installation, install a new self-locking
nut.
B
15. Remove the flange bolts (A), and separate the 18. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the
knuckle from the trailing arm (B). hub dis/assembly tool and a hydraulic press. Hold
the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform
bolts. the backing plate (D). Hold onto the hub to keep it
from falling when pressed clear.
07.GAF-SD40100
16. Place a floor jack under lower arm B. Remove the

self-locking nut (A), washer, and flange bolt (C). 19. Remove the flange nuts (A), backing plate (B), and
snap ring (C).
NOTE: During installation, install new flange bolt,
and new self-locking nut.
12 x 1.25 mm 'A
74 N-m 12 x 1.25 mm
(7.5 .kgf-m, 64 N-m
54 Ibf-ft) (6.5 kgf-m,
Replace. 47 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
17. For 4WD: Remove the knuckle w hile pushing in the

driveshaft and holding the driveshaft outboard joint.
NOTE: Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The

driveshaft inboard join t may come apart.
20. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) 22. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash
using the attachment, the driver and a press. point solvent before reassembly.
07749-0010000
23. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B)
using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the
support base, and a press. Be careful not to
damage the sleeve of the pack seal.
Press
21. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) from the hub
(B) using the hub dis/assembly tool, comm ercially
available bearing separator (C), and a press.
07965-SD90100
07GAF-SD40100
24. Install the snap ring (A), backing plate (B), and
flange nuts (C). Tighten the flange nuts to the
specified torque.
C
12 x 1.25 mm
74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont d)
25. Install the hub (A) on the knuckle (B) using the 26. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
attachment, the driver, the support base, and a and note these items:
hydraulic press. Be careful not to deform the
backing plate (C). • First install all the components, and lightly
Press suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fu lly tightening to the specified torque
values.
installing the knuckle.
align the slot w ith the ball join t pin hole. Do not
• Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
• Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
amount o f engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a d rift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
• Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
mating surfaces of the rear hub and the inside of
the brake disc/drum.
surfaces of the brake disc/drum and the inside of
the wheel.
• Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
Special Tools Required 6. Adjust the ball joint boot clip guide w ith the
Ball joint boot clip guide 07974-SA50700 adjusting bolt (A) until its base is just above the
groove around the bottom of the boot. Then slide
1. Remove the upper arm (see page 18-36). the clip (B) over the ball jo in t boot clip guide and
into position on the boot.
2. Remove the boot clip and the boot.
3. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with

grease. Do not contaminate the lower collar o f the
boot (B) w ith grease.
7. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the

exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
8. Install the upper arm (see page 18-36).
4. Wipe the grease off the tapered section (C) of the

pin, and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not
let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot.
5. Install the boot onto the ball joint, then squeeze it

gently to force out any air.
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 5. Install the new flange nuts, and lightly tighten them.
1-13). 6. Place a jack at the connecting point of lower arm B
and the knuckle, and raise the suspension to load it
2. Remove the rear wheel. w ith the vehicle's weight.
3. Remove the flange nuts (A) while holding the 7. Tighten the flange nuts (A) to the specified torque
respective joint pin (B) w ith a hex wrench (C), and values while holding the respective joint pin (B)
remove the stabilizer link (D). w ith a hex wrench (C).
4. Install the stabilizer link (A) on the stabilizer bar (B) 8. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum
and stabilizer link bracket (C) with the joint pins (D) and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
set at the center of each moving range. wheel.
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with . 6. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page removal, and note these items:
1-13).
• Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
2. Remove the rear whee l s. bar.
• Do not set the bushing (A) on the bent or curved
3. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer part of the stabilizer bar (B).
bar on the right and left sides (see page 18-34). • Align the ends of the paint marks (C) on the
stabilizer bar with each end of the bushings.
4. Remove the rear suspension subframe (A) from the • Note the front to rear direction of the bushings.
body (see page 20-174). • Refer to Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
. B 18-34).
surfaces of the brake disc/drum and inside of the
wheel.
• Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
5. Remove the flange bolts (B) and the bushing

holders (C), then remove the bushings (D) and the
stabilizer bar (E).
Upper Arm Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the upper arm bolt (A). Remove the upper
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 arm (B) from the vehicle.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with NOTE: During installation, install the new mounting
safety stands in the proper locations (see page bolt.
1-13).
2. Remove the rear wheel.
3. Place a floor jack at the connecting point of lower

arm B and the knuckle.
12x1.25 mm
93 N-m (9.5 kgf-m, 69 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of

• First install all the components, and lightly

4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball before fu lly tightening to the specified torque
joint, then remove the castle nut (B). values.
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
tightening the nut. • Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
the wheel.
5. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the

knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page
18-11).
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w ith
1-13). Removal ■
2. Remove the rear wheel. 1. Raise the rear o f the vehicle, and support it with
3. Remove lower arm A mounting bolt (B). 1-13).
C 2. Remove the rear wheel.

12x1.25 mm

4. Remove lower arm A self-locking nut (C).
NOTE: During installation, install the new self-

locking nut. 4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint
pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), and disconnect the
5. Remove lower arm A from the vehicle. stabilizer link (E) from lower arm B.
6. Install lower arm A in the reverse order of removal, 5. Remove the three flange bolts (A) and the wheel
and note these items: sensor harness (C) from lower arm B. Do not
disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
the wheel.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
6. Remove the flange bolt (D) that connects lower arm

B and the knuckle.
Lower Arm B Removal and Installation (cont'd)
7. Lower the floor jack gradually. Installation
8. Remove the spring (A), upper spring seat (C), and 1. Position lower arm B, install the adjusting bolt (A),
lower spring seat (D). adjusting cam plate (C), and loosely install the new
self-locking nut (D).
9. Remove the self-locking nut (E), adjusting cam

plate (F), and adjusting bolt (G), then remove lower
arm B. 2. Install the spring (E), and upper spring seat (F).
Align the bottom of the spring and the lower spring
seat (G) with lower arm B as shown.

arm Band the knuckle.
4. Raise the jack slowly until you can align the bolt
holes of lower arm B and the knuckle, then loosely
install the new flange bolt (A).

Replace.
5. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack to load it

with the vehicle's weight.
6. Tighten the flange bolt and self-locking nut on the

adjusting bolt to the specified torque values.
7. Install the wheel sensor harness (C).

Connect the stabilizer link to the lower arm B, then 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w ith
tighten the new flange nut (A) to the specified safety stands in the proper locations (see page
torque value while holding the join t pin (B) w ith a 1-13).
hex wrench (C).
3. Remove the parking brake shoes (see page 19-26),

and parking brake cable (see page 19-33).
4. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the

trailing arm (B).
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 I bf-ft)
Install the rear wheel.
Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if


before fu lly tightening to the specified torque 5. Remove the brake hose bracket (C) from the trailing
values. arm.
• Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and
the adjusting cam plate w ith the marked 6. Place a floor jack at the connecting point of lower
positions when tightening. arm B and the knuckle.
surfaces of the brake disc/drum and the inside of 7. Remove the flange bolts (A) and trailing arm
the wheel. mounting bolts (B) from the trailing arm, then
remove the trailing arm.
NOTE: During installation, install the new bolts.
A
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N-m
Replace.
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N-m
110.5 kgf-m, 75.9 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation Damper Removal and Installation
(cont'd)
Removal
8. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
removal, and note these items: safety stands in the proper locations (see page
1-13).
tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the 2. Remove the rear wheel.
before fu lly tightening to the specified torque 3. Place a floor jack at the connecting point of lower
values, arm B and the knuckle.
• Checkthe brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary. 4. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the body.
• Check the brake hose for interference and
twisting.
the wheel.
• Checkthe rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
5. Remove the self-locking nut (B) and washer from

the knuckle.
6. Compress the damper (C) by hand, and remove it

from the vehicle.
Inspection
1. Push on the damper by hand as shown. 1. Place a floor jack at the connecting point of lower
2. Compress the damper (A) by hand, and move it into

position. Loosely install the new flange bolt (B),
washer (C), and new self-locking nut (D).
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and

check for smooth operation through a fu ll stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
should extend in a smooth, continuous motion
when the compression is released. If it does not
(no compression or no extension), the gas is
leaking, and the damper should be replaced.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding with the vehicle's weight.
during these tests.
4. Tighten the flange bolt and self-locking nut to the
specified torque values.
5. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum

and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
6. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if

Spring/Bump Stop Replacement
Exploded View
BUMP STOP
Check for weakness
and damage.
10 k 1.25 mm
39 N m
UPPER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration
and damage.
LOWER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration
and damage.
Removal 7. Lower the floor jack gradually.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 8 . Remove the spring (A), upper spring seat(B), and
safety stands in the proper locations (see page lower spring seat (C).
1-13).

9. Remove the flange bolt (D) and bump stop (E).
4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint

pin (C) with a hex wrench (D), and disconnect the
stabilizer link (E) from lower arm B.
5. Remove the three flange bolts (A) and the wheel

sensor harness (C) from lower arm B. Do not
disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
6. Remove the flange bolt (D) that connects lower arm

B and the knuckle.
Spring/Bump Stop Replacement (cont d)
Installation 4. Slowly raise the jack until you can align the bolt
holes of lower arm B and the knuckle, then install
1. Install the bump stop (A), and tighten the flange the new flange bolt (A).
bolt (C) to the specified torque value.

Replace.

with the vehicle's weight.
2. Install the upper spring seat (D) and spring (E).
Align the bottom of the spring and the lower spring 6. Tighten the flange bolt to the specified torque value.
seat (F) w ith lower arm B as shown.
7. Install the wheel sensor harness (C).
arm B and the knuckle. 8. Connect the stabilizer link to the lower arm B, then
tighten the new flange nut (A) to the specified
torque value while holding the join t pin (B) with a
hex wrench (C).

wheel.
10. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if

Front and Rear Suspension ........................... 18-2
Front Suspension .......................................... 18-12
Rear Suspension ............................................ 18-27
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Component Location Index .................................... ....... 18-46
General Troubleshooting Information .......... .............. 18-47
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID .................... 18-51
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............ ........ ..................... 18-52
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. ................... 18-53
System Description ........................................................... 18-54
Circuit Diagram ..................................... ............................ 18-60
DTC Troubleshooting ......... ............................................. 18-63
Symptom Troubleshooting ............................................ 18-78
TPMS Control Unit Replacement .................................. 18-82
Initiator Replacement ....................................................... 18-83
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement .............................. 18-84
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

RIGHT-REAR INITIATOR
AUXILIARY TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX Replacement page 18-84
PASSENGER'S LEFT-FRONT INITIATOR

UNDER-DASH Replacement,
FUSE/RELAY BOX page 18-83
UNDER HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX I/ LEFT-REAR INITIATOR
Replacement,
page 18-83
TIRE PRESSURE SENSORS

RIGHT-FRONT DATA LINK

INITIATOR DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
CONNECTOR (DLC) FUSE/RELAY BOX
Replacement,
page 18-83 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
System Indicator Location
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(cont'd)
How TPMS Works If a problem is detected in the system, the TPMS

indicator w ill come on and stay on until the system
The TPMS (Tire Pressure M onitoring System) has six returns to normal with most DTCs. If DTC 45,81,83 or
indicators; four tire indicators, a low tire pressure 85 is set, the TPMS indicator w ill go o ff only when the
indicator, and a TPMS indicator. When the TPMS ignition switch is turned off.
control unit detects low pressure in a tire or a problem
in the system, it turns on the appropriate indicator(s). If a flat tire is replaced w ith the spare tire, and the flat
tire is stored in the cargo area, the low tire pressure
• If low tire pressure is detected, the low tire pressure indicator w ill stay on but the appropriate tire indicator
indicator and the appropriate tire indicator come on. w ill go off. This prevents the customer from thinking
• If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS there is a problem with the spare tire. When the flat tire
indicator comes on. is taken out of the vehicle fo r repair, the TPMS indicator
• If low tire pressure and a problem in the system are w ill come on (DTC 32,34,36 or 38) because the system
detected, only the TPMS indicator comes on. is no longer receiving the signal from the tire's
transmitter.
If the system is OK, the TPMS indicator, the low tire
pressure indicator, and the four tire indicators should
come on when you turn the ignition switch ON (II), and
then go off 2 seconds later. If they don't, there is a
problem with the system.
If the system detects low pressure in any of the four

tires, the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate
tire indicator(s) w ill come on, and the control unit w ill
set one or more of these codes:
DTC 11,13,15,17. When the tire pressure returns to
normal, the control unit w ill turn off the indicators and
store the DTC(s). However, if the control unit detects a
problem in the system during an indication of low tire
pressure, it w ill turn off the low tire pressure and tire
indicators, store the DTC(s), and turn on the TPMS
indicator.
NOTE: Tire pressures w ill increase as the temperature

in the tires rises during driving at highway speeds.
Pressures w ill also increase or decrease w ith changes
in outside air temperature. A temperature change of
about 18 °F (10 °C) w ill change tire pressure by about
10 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi). If the temperature drops
and then rises, tire pressure could decrease just enough
to turn on the low tire pressure and tire indicator(s), but
later increase enough to turn them off. To resolve a
complaint of such intermittent indications, confirm and
clear the stored DTC(s) and checkthe tire pressures
when the tires are cold. Then explain to the customer
how temperature changes can affect the system,
especially when tire pressures are near the low end of
the TPMS normal range -168 to 220 kPa (1.7 to
2.2 kgf/cm2, 24 to 32 psi).
Problems That are Not System Faults How to Troubleshoot TPMS DTCs
• Tire Sealant DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of
Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator is
permanently damage the tire pressure sensor still on. (NOTE: The TPMS indicator comes on for DTCs
mounted on each wheel. It can prevent the system 11,13,15, and 17 only if the low tire pressure indication
from detecting the correct tire pressure, which sets a is false, caused by a problem in the system.) Do not use
DTC 11,13,15 or 17 even though the system is a troubleshooting procedure unless the system has set
normal. the DTC listed for it and is still present.
• Cold Weather
When the weather is extremely cold - about —40 °F 1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when
(—40 °C) or colder - the output of the lithium battery the indicator came on, and try to reproduce the
in each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if the
the control unit sets a DTC for low battery voltage (31, customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
33,35, or 37) even though the system is normal. since the indicator came on.
• Non-TPMS Wheels
Vehicles equipped with TPMS must use wheels made 2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-
for the system. Every TPMS wheel is marked with the drive, check for loose terminals, poor contact due
letters TPMS; do not use any other type of wheel. to damaged terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting.
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set
3. After troubleshooting, repair and clear the DTCs,
• When the system detects a problem, the TPMS and test-drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators
control unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, come on.
and w ill not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
• If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the
TPMS indicator w ill come on, but no DTC w ill be set.
• The memory can hold all the DTCs that could
possibly be set. However, when the same DTC is
detected more than once, the most recent one
overwrites the previous one, so only the latest DTC of
each type is stored.
• DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the
order they occurred.
• Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), they cannot be cleared by disconnecting
the battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
H ow to Retrieve TPMS DTCs How to Clear TPMS DTCs
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS NOTE: You cannot clear the DTCs manually.
(Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's side of the 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
dashboard. the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.

prompts on the HDS to retrieve any DTC(s) and 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the
display them on the screen. Refer to the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the HDS.
troubleshooting procedure(s) for the DTC(s) listed.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
instructions.
_______________________________________________________________________ I
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID
Memorizing a Tire Pressure Sensor ID Memorize the ID with the HDS
When a tire pressure sensor is replaced, the sensor ID The HDS can memorize the ID of a new tire pressure
must be memorized by the TPMS control unit. sensor or a previously memorized ID.
NOTE: To ensure the control unit memorizes the correct 1, With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
ID, the vehicle with the new sensor must be at feast 10 ft the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
(3 m) from any other TPMS pressure sensor not driver's side of the dashboard.
installed on that vehicle.
Memorizing a Sensor ID Automatically .
After rotating the tires or replacing a tire pressure

sensor, drive the vehicle for at least 40 seconds at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more, and all the sensor
IDs w ill be memorized automatically.
NOTE:
• The automatic ID memorization process w ill not
begin until the ignition switch is turned OFF, so make
sure the ignition switch is turned to OFF before the
vehicle is driven to memorize the IDs.
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HDS
to memorize IDs. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and memorize the
• After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure in ID of the tire pressure sensor by follow ing the
a l l four tires to less than the appropriate specification, screen prompts on the HDS.
and check to see that the four tire indicators come on.
NOTE:
• See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the
HDS to memorize IDs.
• After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure
in all four tires to less than the appropriate
specification, and check to see that the four tire
indicators come on.

PTC Detection Item Troubleshooting

11 Right-front tire low air pressure (see page 18-63)
13 Left-front tire low air pressure (see page 18-63)
15 Right-rear tire low air pressure (see page 18-63)
17 Left-rear tire low air pressure (see page 18-63)
21 Right-front tire pressure sensor abnormally high temperature (see page 18-64)
22 Left-front tire pressure sensor abnormally high temperature (see page 18-64)
23 Right-rear tire pressure sensor abnormally high temperature (see page 18-64)
24 Left-rear tire pressure sensor abnormally high temperature (see page 18-64)
31 Right-front tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-64)
32 Right-front tire pressure sensor transmission failure (see page 18-65)
33 Left-front tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-64)
34 Left-front tire pressure sensor transmission failure (see page 18-65)
35 Right-rear tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-64)
36 Right-rear tire pressure sensor transmission failure (see page 18-65)
37 Left-rear tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-64)
38 Left-rear tire pressure sensor transmission failure (see page 18-65)
41 Abnormal signal reception error (see page 18-68)
45 Initiator circuit short detection (see page 18-69)
51 Right-front tire pressure sensor registration error (see page 18-72)
53 Left-front tire pressure sensor registration error (see page 18-72)
55 Right-rear tire pressure sensor registration error (see page 18-72)
57 Left-rear tire pressure sensor registration error (see page 18-72)
81 TPMS control unit failure (see page 18-75)
83 No VSP signal (see page 18-76)
85 F-CAN communication failure (see page 18-76)
91 Right-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-77)
93 Left-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-77)
95 Right-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-77)
97 Left-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-77)

Low tire pressure and tire indicators do not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-78)
come on, and no DTCs are stored
Low tire pressure and tire indicators do not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-79)
go off, and no DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-79)
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-80)
DTCs are stored
System Description
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (14P)
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal

number (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
1 RED + B (Battery Power source for 1—GND At all times Battery
positive) the TPMS control voltage
unit
3 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for the 3—GND At all times Less than
TPMS control unit 0.1 V
5 YEL IG1 (Ignition 1) Power source for 5—GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
activating the voltage
system Ignition switch OFF Less than
0.1 V
8 YEL/BLU LF LF PWR. Power source for 8—GND For 5 seconds with About 7 V
(LF low the left-front ignition switch ON (II)
frequency initiator After 5 seconds with
power) ignition switch ON (II)
9 PNK RF LF PWR. Power source for 9—GND For 5 seconds with About 7 V
(RF low the right-front ignition switch ON (II)
10 GRN/ORN LR LF PWR. Power source for 10—GND For 5 seconds with About 7 V
(LR low the left-rear ignition switch ON (II)
11 BLU RR LF PWR. Power source for 11—GND For 5 seconds with About 7 V
(RR low the right-rear ignition switch ON (II)
H j?
~ TPMS
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (20P)
..n__ n <_ _> n... n

1 2 3 4 / 9 10
13 14 15 16 / 19
O ------- L J □ ------- L T

1 GRY/YEL RF LF SIG. Detects the signal 1—GND Forthe first 5 seconds Pulses
(RF low from the right-front after turning the 0 -2 V
frequency initiator ignition switch ON (II)
signal) With ignition switch Less than
ON (II) for more than 5 0.1V
seconds
2 WHT/RED RR LF SIG. Detects the signal 2—GND For the first 5 seconds Pulses
(RR low from the right-rear after turning the 0—2 V
ON (II) for more than 5 0.1V
seconds
3 ORN LF LF SIG. Detects the signal 3—GND For the first 5 seconds Pulses
(LF low from the left-front after turning the 0 -2 V
ON (II) for more than 5 0.1 V
seconds
4 PNK/BLK LR LF SIG. Detects the signal 4—GND For the first 5 seconds Pulses
(LR low from the left-rear after turning the 0 -2 V
ON (II) for more than 5 0.1 V
seconds
9 GRY K-LINE Communications
(Data link with HDS
connector)
10 RED CAN L Sends the Ignition switch ON (II) Pulses
(CAN communication
communication signal
signal low)
(cont'd)
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (20P) (cont'd)
ri ri ri r
1 2 3 4 / / 9 10
13 14 15 16 / 19

13 GRN LF LF GND Ground for the 13—GND Ignition switch ON (II) Less than
(LF low left-front initiator 0.1 V
frequency
ground)
14 RED/BLK RF LF GND Ground fo rthe 14—GND Ignition switch ON (II) Less than
(RF low right-front initiator 0.1 V
frequency
ground)
15 YEL/GRN LR LF GND Ground fo rth e 15—GND Ignition switch ON (II) Less than
(LR low left-rear initiator 0.1V
frequency
ground)
16 RED/ORN RR LF GND Ground for the 16—GND Ignition switch ON (II) Less than
(RR low right-rear initiator 0.1V
frequency
ground)
19 WHT CANH Sends the Ignition switch ON (II) Pulses
(CAN communication
communication signal
signal high)
i
System Structure
Whenever the engine is running, the TPMS control unit continuously monitors all four tires and the: system. If it detects
low pressure-in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator.
If it detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator.
Initiators
Mounted on each wheel well, each initiator sends a start/stop signal to the tire pressure sensor in the tire below it
Control unit
Mounted on the left side of the lower dash, the control unit sends signals to the initiators and receives signals from
them to verify pressure sensor IDs every time the engine starts. It also receives signals from the transmitters in the tire
pressure sensors, and it continuously monitors and controls the system.
Indicators
Six indicators are in the gauge assembly: The low tire pressure indicator, four tire indicators to show which tire is
affected, and the TPMS indicator that comes on only if there's a problem with the system. When tw o or more tire
pressures are low, the low tire pressure indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire indicator.
Once low pressure is detected, the system scans all four pressure sensors to ensure that it turns on the correct tire
indicator.
Initiator
(confd)
Tire pressure sensor

Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of the wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits a signal to the control unit when tire
pressure is less than 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm2, 25 psi). The TPMS control unit then turns on the low tire pressure indicator
and the appropriate tire indicator(s). When that tire's pressure is increased to more than 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi),
the transm itter stops sending the signal, and the control unit turns the indicators off.
W heels
TPMS w ill not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. There are three different type wheels used.
The original equipment wheels have a "TPMS" mark on them (A), and a counterweight (B) cast into the opposite side
of the spoke to balance the weight of the sensor (C).
TYPE1: TYPE2:
TYPES:
System Communication
• When the vehicle is running, an RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is continuously transmitted from each tire
pressure sensor to the control unit.
• When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the initiators send an LF (low frequency) band wave signal to the tire
pressure sensors, switching them from sleep mode to normal function mode. When the ignition switch is turned
OFF, the sensors switch from normal function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
• Each tire pressure sensor has its own ID to prevent jam ming by sim ilar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the control unit receives only those specific signals.
• An ID can be memorized manually or automatically. Each initiator is hardwired to the control unit. Every tim e the
ignition is turned ON (II), the control unit asks each initiator for a sensor ID. The initiators then transm it the sensor
IDs, and the control unit receives and memorizes them. The control unit then knows which ID belongs to each tire
location. This recurring ID confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit and front initiators: Misalignment of the control
unit and initiators could interfere with sending and receiving signals.
Control Unit
(with Radio Frequency Antenna)
Initiator Tire Pressure Sensor

(Low Frequency Initiator) (Sensor-transmitter)
Circuit Diagram
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
B
6401
(cont'd)
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (20P) GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (36P)
i—ri_ r f __r1., . r
1 2 3 / / 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
OO
CO
OO
LO
CD
o
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34
r .... ri3— i---- 1---- 1---- 1— S

h 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 17 8 I 9 I
.a 10 11 12 17 18 19
/ 14 / V ■
20 21 22 23 24 25 ■
26 27 28 2 9 1 /1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
36 / 38 7 41 42 43 44
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
a t©
12 14 16
Terminal side of female terminals Wire side of femal e terminals
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P) TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
n.._ J a r> P.-.rT__ Ci ... I i__ r

1 / 3 / 5 / /
1 2 3 4 / / / / 9 10
8 9 10 11 / / /
13 14 15 16 / / 19

TPMS
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11,13,15,17: Tire Low Air Pressure 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the control unit 8. Check pressure of the appropriate tire w ith the HDS.
wil l set one or more of these DTCs, and turn on the low
tire pressure indicator and the appropriate tire NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor
indicator(s). If the low tire pressure and tire indicator(s) transm itter status, turn the ignition switch OFF,
come on due to true low tire pressure, and the rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch
customer corrects it before bringing the vehicle in, the ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
DTCs w ill have been stored, but all the indicators w ill be displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
off. sentence until NORMAL is shown.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the t ir e p re s s u re s h o w n on the H D S m o n ito r

w ith in 4 0 k P a (0.4 k g f / c r r f , 6 p s i) o f the a c tu a l tire
2. If no tire indicators are on, retrieve the DTC(s). p re s s u r e ?
DTC Tire location YES—Check for loose terminals and poor

11 Right-front connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
13 Left-front substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
15 Right-rear (see page 18-82) and recheck. ■
17 Left-rear
NO—Replace the tire pressure sensor (see page
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18-84). ■
4 . Checkthe pressure of the indicated tire(s).
Is th e re 17 5 k P a (1.8 k g f / c r r f , 2 5 p si) o r le ss?
YES—Go to step 5 .:
NO—G oto step7.
5. Check for and repair the cause of air loss, and then
inflate the tire (see page 18-5).
Do the t ir e in d ic a to rs g o o f f w ith in 1 m in u te ?
YES—The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC

with the HDS. H
NO—G oto step 8.

DTC 2 1 , 2 2 ,2 3 ,2 4 : Tire Pressure S e n s o r DTC 3 1 ,3 3 ,3 5 ,3 7 : Tire Pressure Sensor Low

A b n o rm a lly High Tem perature Battery Voltage
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature
around the sensor is —40 °F ( —40 *€) or lower. Note
2. Check the tire indicated by the DTCs you retrieved. that the diagnosis must be made in a place where
ambient temperature is —4 °F ( —20 *€) or higher.
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature
of the tires can be caused by 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• Excessive braking
• Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires D o e s th e T P M S in d ic a to r g o o ff w ith in 1 m in u te ?
only)
• Leaving the vehicle running while parked (2WD: YES—The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
front tires only) w ith the HDS.B
• Improper assembly of a wheel and tire
NO—Go to step 2.
DTC Tire locat i on
21 Right-front 2. Read the tire pressure sensor voltage with the HDS.
22 Left-front
23 Right-rear NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor
24 Left-rear transm itter status, turn the ignition switch OFF,
rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ON (II), and try again, if UNDEFINED is still
displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
4. Make sure the tires have cooled down. sentence until NORMAL is shown.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTC Tire location

31 Right-front
D o e s th e T P M S in d ic a to r g o o ff w ith in 1 m in u te ? 33 Left-front
35 Right-rear
YES—The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC 37 Left-rear
with the HDS.B
Is th e s e n s o r tr a n s m itte r b a tte r y lo w ?
NO—G oto step 6.
YES—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
6. Read the internal temperature of the tire with the (see page 18-84). ■
HDS.
NO—Checkfor loose terminals and poor
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
transm itter status, turn the ignition switch OFF, substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch (see page 18-82) and recheck. ■
ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
sentence until a response is shown.
Is th e in te rn a l te m p e r a tu r e s h o w n o n th e H D S
176 °F ( 8 0 °C) o r m o re ?
YES—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor

(see page 18-84). ■
NO—Check for loose terminals and poor

connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-82) and recheck. ■
DTC 3 2 , 3 4 , 36,38: Tire Pressure Sensor 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Transmission Failure
Is D T C 8 5 in d ic a te d ?
NOTE: "
• The vehicle must be driven for 3 minutes at a speed YES—Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
above 15 mph (24 km/h) for DTC 32,34, 36, or 38 to 18-76). ■ .
set.
• Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device interfering NO— Check for loose terminals and poor
with the RF signal from the sensors when the ignition connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
switch is ON (II). substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
2. Checkthe indicated location to make sure the
wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
properly mounted in it.
11. Check the indicated tire for sensor transmitter
DTC Tire location status changing to "N o rm al" with the HDS.
32 Right-front
34 Left-front NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor
36 Right-rear transmitter status, turn the ignition switch OFF,
38 Left-rear rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch
Is the t ir e p re s s u re s en sor m o u n te d p r o p e r ly ? displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous
sentence until NORMAL is shown.
YES—Go to step 5.
DTC Tire location
NO—Go to step 3. 32 Right-front
34 Left-front
3. Install a known-good TPMS wheel. 36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
4. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or Is th e re a t le a s t one re sp on se in one f u l l tu rn o f the
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-51). tir e ?
5. Test-drive the vehicle, and check the Vehicle Speed YES—The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
in the TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS. with the HDS.B
Is the v e h ic le s p e e d in d ic a te d ? NO—G oto step 12.
YES—G oto step 9.
NO—G oto step 6.

12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Check for continuity between the appropriate
terminal in TPMS control unit connector A (14P)
13. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure and the corresponding terminal in the initiator 3P
sensor on the vehicle. connector (see table).
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTC TPMS control Initiator name/
u nit term ina l No. terminal No.
15. Memorize the sensor ID and check that wheel 32 9 RIGHT-FRONT/1
location again for normal sensor signal (repeat the 34 8 LEFT-FRONT/1
procedure in step 11). 36 11 RIGHT-REAR/1
38 10 LEFT-REAR/1
Is th e re a re sp on se th is tim e ?
T P M S C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R A (14P)
YES—Replace the tire pressure sensor on the JX.

customer's wheel (see page 18-84).B
NO—G oto step 16.
17. Disconnect TPMS control unit connectors A (14P)

and B (20P) and the appropriate initiator 3P
connector. Wire side of
female terminals
DTC Tire location
32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
Wire side of
femal e terminals
LEFT-FRONT
IN ITIA TO R 3P C O N N EC TO R
YES—G oto step 19.
NO—Repair the open in the appropriate wire

between the TPMS control unit and the initiator.
19. Check for continuity between the appropriate 20. Check for continuity between the appropriate
terminal in TPMS control unit connector B (20P) terminal in TPMS control unit connector B (20P)
and the corresponding terminal in the initiator 3P and the corresponding terminal in the initiator 3P
connector (see tab l e). connector (see table).
DTC TPMS control Initiator name/ DTC TPMS control Initiator name/
unit terminal No. terminal No. unit terminal No. terminal No.
32 14 RIGHT-FRONT/3 32 1 RIGHT-FRONT/2
34 13 LEFT-FRONT/3 34 3 LEFT-FRONT/2
36 16 RIGHT-REAR/3 36 2 RIGHT-REAR/2
38 15 LEFT-REAR/3 38 4 LEFT-REAR/2
T P M S CO N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R B (20P) IN ITIA T O R 3P C O N N EC TO R
RiGHT-REAR LEFT-FRONT
2
R IG H T-FR O N T LEFT-REAR
Q fg , © SSSMn.!. © Q fg .
RR LF S IG . LF LF SIG.
(W H T/R E D ) (ORN) ©
T
RF LF SIG . LR U= SHS. (PNK/BLK)
(G R Y/YEL)
n. n •C, r* . n .n.
2 3 I / / / / 9 10
13 14 15 16 / / 19
TP M S C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R B (20P)
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR NO—Repair the open in the appropriate wire

between the TPMS control unit and the initiator. ■

between the TPMS control unit and the initiator. I
21. Check for continuity between the appropriate DTC 41; Abnormal Signal Reception Error
terminal in TPMS control unit connector B (20P)
and body ground (see table). NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device that
may produce RF signals. This may interfere with the
DTC TPMS control unit signals from sensors.
terminal No.
32 1 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
34 3
36 2 2. Check ail four wheels to make sure they are the
38 4 TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor properly
mounted in each one.
TPMS CONTROL UN I T CONNECTOR B (20P)
Is each t ir e p re s s u re se n s o r m o u n te d p r o p e r ly ?
RR LF SIG.
(WHT/RED) LF LF SIG. (ORN)
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Install known-good TPMS wheel(s).
4. To memorize the new sensor ID(s), drive the

vehicle above 15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous
Wire side of female terminals seconds, or memorize the ID(s) with the HDS
(see page 18-51).
Is th e re c o n tin u ity ? 5. Test-drive the vehicle, and check the VEHICLE

SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES—Repair the short to body ground in the
appropriate w ire between the TPMS control unit Is the v e h ic le s p e e d in d ic a te d ?
and the initiator H
YES—Go to Step 9.
NO—Check fo r loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, NO—Goto Step 6.
substitute a known-good TPMS contro l unit
(see page 18-82) and recheck. ■ 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTC 45: Initiator Circuit Short Detection
8. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is D T C 8 5 in d ic a te d ? 2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS.
YES—Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
18-76). ■ again.
NO—Check fo r loose terminals and poor 4. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS.
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit Is D T C 45 in d ic a te d ?
YES—Go to step 5.
11. Check that all the wheels are transmitting signals
with the HDS. 6. Disconnect TPMS control unit connectors A (14P)
and B (20P).
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor
transmitter status, turn the ignition switch OFF, 7. Check for continuity between the appropriate
rotate the appropriate tire 1/4 turn, then turn the terminal in TPMS control unit connector A (14P)
ignition switch ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED and body ground (see table).
is still displayed, repeat the procedure in the
previous sentence until NORMAL is shown. Terminal name TPMS control unit
terminal No.
Is th e re a t le a s t one re sp on se fro m each w heel, in RF LF PWR. 9
one f u ll tu rn o f the tire ? LF LF PWR. 8
RR LF PWR. 11
YES—The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC LR LF PWR. 10
with the HDS.B
T P M S C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R A (14P)
NO—Check fo r loose terminals and poor

YES—Go to step 8.
NO—G oto step 10.
(cont'd)
8. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector. 10. Check for continuity between the appropriate
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate and connector B (20P) terminals.
and body ground (see tab l e). Tire location TPMS control unit
terminal name/No.
Terminal name TPMS control unit Connector A Connector B
terminal No. (14P) (20P)
RF LF PWR. 9 Right-front RF LF PWR./9 RF LF GND/14
LF LF PWR. 8 Left-front LF LF PWR./8 LF LFGND/13
RR LF PWR. 11 Right-rear RR LF PWR./11 RR LF GND/16
LR LF PWR. 10 Left-rear LR LF PWR./10 LR LFGND/15
TPM S CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (14P) TPMS CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (14P)

^ t..... ....—
LF LF PWR.
(YEL/BLU)

appropriate wire between the TPMS control unit
and the initiator. ■
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS (20P)
NO—Replace the initiator (see page 18-83). ■ Wire side of femal e terminals
is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
YES—G oto Step 11.
NO—Go to Step 13.

TPMS
11. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Check for continuity between the appropriate 14. Measure voltage between the appropriate terminal
terminal in TPMS control unit connector A (14P) in TPMS control unit connector B (20P) and body
and connector B (20P) terminals. ground individually.
TPM S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
Tire location TPMS control unit
terminal name/No.
Connector A Connector B
-C14P) I2DP)
Right-front RF LF PWR./9 RF LFGND/14
Left-front LF LF PWR./8 LF LFGND/13
Right-rear RR LF PWR./11 RR LFGND/16
Left-rear LR LF PWR./10 LR LFGND/15
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)

Jn___CT ^ P ... n.
10 11
LF LF PWR. (YEL/BLU) RR LF PWR. (BLU)
RF LF PWR. (PNK) LR LF PWR. (GRN/ORN)
Is th e re b a t te r y v o lta g e ?
RF LF GND (RED/BLK) L.R LlFGND (YEL/GRN)
n n c_ r> n n
1 2 3 4 / 9 10 YES—Repair the short to power in the appropriate
/ /
/ /
wire between the TPMS control unit and the
13 4 '15 16 / / 19
u u u u initiator. ■
LF LF GND (GRN) RR LF GND (RED/ORN) NO—Check for loose terminals and poor
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls (see page 18-82) and recheck. ■
YES—Repair the short in the appropriate wire

NO—Replace the initiator (see page 18-83). I

DTC 5 1 ,5 3 ,5 5 ,5 7 : Tire Pressure Sensor 8. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
Registration Error sensor on the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
2. Check the indicated location to make sure the memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-51).
wheel is a TPMS type w ith the tire pressure sensor.
DTC Tire location
51 Right-front 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear 12. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for the tire
57 Left-rear sensor transm itter status changing to "N orm al".
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor
mounted on the vehicle? transmitter status, turn the ignition switch OFF,
rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch
YES—Go to Step 8. ON (II), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still
NO—G oto S tep3. sentence until NORMAL is shown.
3. Install a known-good TPMS wheel. DTC Twe location

51 Right-front
4. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above 53 Left-front
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or 55 Right-rear
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-51). 57 Left-rear
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there a response this time?
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES—Replace the tire pressure sensor on the
customer's wheel (see page 18-84). ■
7. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for the tire
sensor transmitter status changing to "N orm al". NO—Go'to step 13.
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
transm itter status, turn the ignition switch OFF,
rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch 14. Disconnect TPMS control unit connectors A (14P)
ON (ll), and try again. If UNDEFINED is still and B (20P) and the appropriate initiator 3P
displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous connector.
sentence until NORMAL is shown.
DTC Tire l ocation
DTC Tire location 51 Right-front
51 Right-front 53 Left-front
53 Left-front 55 Right-rear
55 Right-rear 57 Left-rear
57 Left-rear
Is there at least one response in one full turn of the

tire?
YES—The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC

with the HDS.B
IL b
term i nal in TPMS control unit connector A (14P) terminal in TPMS control unit connector B (20P)
and the corresponding terminal in the initiator 3P and the corresponding terminal in the initiator 3P
connector (see table). connector (see table).
DTC TPMS control Initiator name/ DTC TPMS control Initiator name/
unit terminal No. terminal No. unit terminal No. terminal No.
51 9 RIGHT-FRONT/1 51 14 RIGHT-FRONT/3
53 8 LEFT-FRONT/1 53 13 LEFT-FRONT/3
55 11 RIGHT-REAR/1 55 16 RIGHT-REAR/3
57 10 LEFT-REAR/1 57 15 LEFT-REAR/3
TPM S CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A'(14P) TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
Is t h e re c o n tin u ity ?
YES—Go to step 16. INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
NO—Repair the open in the appropriate wire is th e re c o n tin u ity ?


(cont'd)
17. Checkfor continuity between the appropriate 18. Check for continuity between the appropriate
terminal in TPMS control unit connector B (20P) terminal in TPMS control unit connector B (20P)
and the corresponding terminal in the initiator 3P and body ground (see table).
connector (see table).
DTC TPMS control unit
DTC TPMS control Initiator name/ 6 terminal No.
unit termi nal No. terminal No. 51 1
51 1 RIGHT-FRONT72 53 3
53 3 LEFT-FRONT/2 55 2
55 2 RIGHT-REAR/2 57 4
57 4 LEFT-REAR/2
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
RIGHT-REAR LEFT-FRONT RR LF SIG.
RIGHT-FRONT I
(TT2T3I (TT2T3I1 LEFT-REAR
(WHT/RED) LF LF S I G. (ORN)
\ .... 1 /W \ Wire side of ( fs s (~ __j

lJ L 2 3 f female term ina l s 1 2 3 f

TPMS CONTROL UN I T CONNECTOR B (20P) appropriate wire between the TPMS control unit
and the initiator. ■
NO—Goto step 19.

^ O —Repair the open inthe appropriate wire

1
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure
20. Measure voltage between the appropriate terminal NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this DTC. Make
in TPMS control unit connector B (20P) and body sure the battery is fu lly charged and in good condition.
ground (see table).
. DTC TPMS control unit
terminal No. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
51 1
53 .3 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (ll)
55 2 again.
57 4
TPMS CONTROL UN I T CONNECTOR B (20P)
Is D T C 81 in d ic a te d ?
RR LF SIG.
(WHT/REP) LF LF SIG. (ORN)
YES—Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
RF LF SIG.
(GRY/YEL) LR LF SIG. (PNK/BLK) 18-82).H
JO__ □. NO—The system is OK at this time. ■

10
13 14 15 16 19
W ire side o f fe m ale te rm in a ls
Is th e re b a tte ry v o lta g e ?
YES—Repair the short to power in the appropriate

wire between the TPMS control unit and the
initiator. ■
NO—Check for loose terminals and poor

DTC 83: No VSP Signal DTC 85: F-CAN Communication Failure
3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle 7 mph 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition
(10 km/h) or more. switch ON (II) again.
4. Check the Vehicle Speed in the TPMS DATA LIST 4. Wait about 5 seconds.
with the HDS.
Is the v e h ic le sp e e d in d ic a te d ?
YES—The system is OK at this time. ■
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Go to Step 5.
Do es the s p e e d o m e te r w o rk ?
YES—Go to DTC 85 troub l eshooting (see page
18-76). ■ YES—G oto step 10.
NO—Go to Step 6. NO—Go to step 7.
6. Check the speedometer. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the s p e e d o m e te r r e g is te r s p e e d ? 8. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P).
YES—Check for loose terminals and poor 9. Test-drive the vehicle.

substitute a known-good TPMS control unit D o es the s p e e d o m e te r w o rk ?
YES—Checkfor loose terminals and poor
NO—Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8) connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
and retest. If no codes are shown, replace the substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
original PCM (see page 11-230). ■ (see page 18-82), and recheck. ■
NO—Turn the ignition switch OFF, then reconnect

all connectors, then check and troubleshoot the fuel
and emissions system (see page 11-3). ■
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC 9 1 ,9 3 ,9 5 ,9 7 : Tire Pressure Sensor
Internal Error
11. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
13. Disconnect TPMS contro l unit connector B (20P).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
14. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit again.
connector B (20P) terminals and PCM connector A
(44P) terminals individually (see table). 4. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
Terminal TPMS control PCM DTC Tire location

name unit B terminal A terminal 91 Right-front
CANL No. 10 No. 1 93 Left-front
CAN H No. 19 No. 36 95 Right-rear
97 Left-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P»
is D T C 91, 93, 9 5 o r 97 in d ic a te d ?
i
... r ..r r CANL
(RED)
1 2 3 4 / / / 9 10
7 YES—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
13 14 15 16 / / u 19 u (see page 18-84). ■
U Ll
CANH
(WHT) NO—The system is OK at this time. ■
r
P C
| 1 12 a I 4 | 5 I 6 | 7 8 | 9
[a
10 11 12 / | 1 4 | / | / 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 l / l 3 ' ! / 33 34 35
■ i abl / 38 I / V I 41 142 4 3 144
YES—Check for loose terminals and poor

(see page 18-82), and recheck. ■
NO—Repair open in the appropriate wire between

the TPMS control unit and the PCM. ■
Low tire pressure and tire indicators do not 7. Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
come on, and no DTCs are stored module (see page 22-90).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the g a u g e c o n tro l m o d u le O K ?
2. Checkthe low tire pressure indicator fo r several YES—G oto step 8.

seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
D id the in d ic a t o r com e on an d then g o o f f ? 22-102). H
NO—Go to step 7. 9. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Measure voltage between TPMS control unit
connector A (14P) terminals No. 3 and No. 5.
4. Check the pressure in all four tires.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
Is the t ir e p re s s u r e 17 5 k P a ( 1 8 k g f / c r r f , 2 5 p s i)
o r le ss?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—The system is OK at this time, m
6. Check the pressure of all four tires w ith the HDS.

W ire side o f fe m a le te rm in a ls
NOTE: If UNDEFINED is shown on sensor
transm itter status, turn the ignition switch OFF,
rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch Is th e re b a tte ry v o lta g e ?
displayed, repeat the procedure in the previous YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
sentence until NORMAL is shown. the TPMS control unit and the No. 9 (10 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
Is the t ir e p r e s s u re sh o w n on the H D S m o n ito r
w ith in 40 k P a (0 .4 k g f / c r r f , 6 p si) o f th e a c tu a l tir e NO—Check for loose terminals and poor
p re s s u re ? connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
YES—Go to step 7. (see page 18-82), and recheck. ■
NO—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor

(see page 18-84). ■
i
Low tire pressure and tire indicators do not TPMS indicator does not come on, and no
go off, and no DTCs are stored DTCs are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P). 2. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P).
4. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several 4. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II). when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
D id the in d ic a to r com e on a n d the n g o o f f ? D id th e in d ic a to r c o m e on an d th e n g o o f f ?
YES—Checkfor loose terminals and poor YES—Checkfor loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-82), and recheck. ■ (see page 18-82), and recheck. ■
NO—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control NO—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-90). If necessary, substitute a module (see page 22-90). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page known-good gauge control module (see page
22-102), and recheck. ■ 22-102), and recheck. ■
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 7. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS
are stored control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 1.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P)
2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds + B (RED)

when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
n r*...... n.:..
cn
D id the in d ic a to r com e on an d the n g o o f f ? 1 / 3 / / /
00
9 10 11 / / /
YES—The system is OK at this tim e.B
NO—G oto step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. W ire side o f fem ale te rm in a ls
4. Checkthe No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under

hood fuse box. Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
Is the fu s e b lo w n ? YES—Go to step 8.
YES—Replace the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse, and NO—Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
recheck. ■ control unit and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse box. a
NO—Reinstal l the fuse, then go to step 5.
5. Check the No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box. 9. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 5.
Is the fu s e b lo w n ?
TPMS CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR A (14P)
YES—Replace the No. 9 (10 A) fuse, and recheck. ■
161 (YEL)
NO—Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 6.
n S _> n
6. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P). 1 / 3 / 5 / /
8 9 10 11 / y
NO—Repair open in the wire between the TPMS

control unit and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse box.B
s
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
connector B (20P) terminals and gauge control
11. Reconnect TPMS control unit connector A (14P). module connector A (20P) terminals individually
(see table).
Terminal TPMS control Gauge control
13. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS name unit B terminal module A
control unit connector A (14P) terminal No. 3. terminal
CANL No. 10 No. 1
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (14P) CANH No. 19 No -H
TPMS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P).

GND (BLK)
n___ <- r> n
1 / 3 / 5 / / .... n . ci P ■■ n... n .. CAN L (RED)
1 2 3 4 / / / / 9 10
8 9 10 11 / / /
13 14 15 16 / / 19
u u u D
CAN H (WHT)
n n - — ;— — n
Wire side of female terminals 1 2 3 / / 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CAN H (WHT)
Is th e re 0.1 V o r m o re ?
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES—Repair open or high resistance in the wire Wire side of female terminals
between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G40D.B Is th e re c o n tin u ity ?
NO—G oto step 14. YES—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-90). If the gauge control
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
15. Disconnect gauge control module connector A substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(20P). (see page 18-82), and recheck. ■
16. Disconnect TPMS control unit connector B (20P). NO—Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the gauge control module. ■
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting 4. Remove the TPMS control unit (A) from the bracket
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its (B).
communication w ith the initiators and the tire pressure
sensors.
2. Remove the clip (A), and disconnect the TPMS

control unit connectors (B).
NOTE: The TPMS control unit is located under the

steering column.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
5. Install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of

removal.
6. Connect the HDS and memorize the pressure

sensor IDs (see page 18-51). Do not memorize the
IDs automatically.
3. Remove the TPMS control unit with the bracket (C).

Front ; : Rear
NOTE: Make sure the initiator mounting bracket is not 1. Turn the ignition switclrOFF.
bent or twisted as this may affect its communication
w ith the TPMS control unit and the tire pressure sensor. 2. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1-13).
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 3. Remove the rear wheel.
1-13). 4. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
4. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-161).
5. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ib f-ft)
5. Remove the initiator (B) from the inner side of the
wheelwell.
6. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.

6x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Remove the initiator (B) with the bracket (C) from

the inner side of the wheelwell.
7. Remove the initiator from the bracket.
8. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.

Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal 5. Position the wheel so the tire machine (A) and tire
iron (B) are next to the valve stem (C) and w ill move
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands away from it when the machine starts. Then
in the proper locations (see page 1-13). remove the tire from the wheel.
2. Remove the wheel with the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap and the valve stem
core, and let the tire deflate,
4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the

bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A).
NOTICE
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire
pressure sensor:
• Do the outside of the wheel first.
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve
stem (B) is 90 degrees from the bead
breaker (C) as shown. 6. Remove and discard the valve stem nut (A), then
• Do not position the bead breaker of the tire remove the tire pressure sensor and valve stem (B)
changer too close to the rim. from the wheel.
NOTE: Use a new nut and a new valve stem on

reassembly.
7. Remove and discard the valve stem (A), and the
screw (B) from the tire pressure sensor (C).
NOTE:
NOTE: The valve stem grommet (D) might stay in • Use only wheels that have a "TPMS" mark (A) on
the wheel; make sure you remove it. them.
• The vehicle may be equipped with one of the three
types of wheels.
TYPE!: WPE2:
TYPE3:
1. Assemble the new valve stem (A), new screw (B),

and the tire pressure sensor (C).
NOTE: Always use a new valve stem and new

screw.
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
2. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the 5. Lube the tire bead, and position the wheel so the
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel. tire machine (A) and tire iron (B) are next to the
valve stem (C) and w ill move away from it when
3. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) to the wheel (B), the machine starts. Then install the tire onto the
and tighten the valve nut (C) finger tight. Make sure wheel.
the pressure sensor is resting on the wheel.
6. Inflate the tire to 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat

the tire bead to the rim, then adjust the tire
pressure (see page 18-5), and install the valve stem
cap.
4. Tighten the valve nut to the specified torque while NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both
holding the tire pressure sensor toward (D) the sides of the rim uniformly.
wheel. You may hear a snap or pop as you tighten
the nut. This is normal. 7. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the
wheels on the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Do not reuse any nut that has been tightened, 8. Remove the jack stands, and lower the jack.
even one tim e, to the specified torque, as it is
deformed inside (E). 9. Connectthe HDS and memorize the pressure
• Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten a sensor ID(s) (see page 18-51).
valve stem nut.
• Tightening the nut above the specified torque
can damage the nut.
• Make sure that there is no space between the
sensor and the wheel.
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Component Location Index ........................................ 19-2
Brake System Inspection and Test ............................ 19-3
Symptom Troubleshooting ......... .............................. 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment ................................................................. 19-5
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment .............. 19-6
Brake System Bleeding ............. .............................. . 19-8
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram .................. 19-9
Parking Brake Switch Test ................ ......... ............... 19-10
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test .................................... 19-10
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ....... 19-11
Front Brake Disc Inspection .... ................................... 19-13
Front Brake Disc Replacement ............................ . 19-14
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul .................. .................. 19-15
Master Cylinder Replacement ........ ...................... . 19-16
Master Cylinder Inspection .... ........ ...... .................... 19-16
Brake Booster Test .............................................. ......... 19-17
Brake Booster Replacement ....................................... 19-18
Rear Brake Pad inspection and Replacement ........ 19-19
Rear Brake Disc Inspection ....................... ........ ........ 19-21
Rear Brake Disc Replacement ..................................... 19-22
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-23
Parking Brake Inspection .................................... ........ 19-24
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement .......................... 19-26
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in ......................... 19-29
Brake Pedal Replacement ............................ .............. 19-30
Brake Hose and Line Inspection ............ ....... ............ 19-31
Brake Hose Replacement ............................................ 19-32
Parking Brake Cable Replacement ............................ 19-33
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System Components .............................. 19-35
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

Circuit Diagram, page 19-9
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-10
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-10
BRAKE HOSE and LINE
Brake Hose Replacement,
page 19-32
REAR DISC BRAKE

Pad Inspection and
Disc Inspection, page 19-21
Disc Repl acement, page 19-22
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-23
PARKING DRUM BRAKE

Shoe Replacement, page 19-26
Shoe Lining Break-in, page 19-29
PARKING BRAKE
Inspection and Adjustment,
page 19-6
Cable Replacement, page 19-33
FRONT BRAKE
BRAKE BOOSTER Pad Inspection and Replacement, page 19-11
Test, page 19-17 Disc Inspection, page 19-13
Replacement, page 19-18 Disc Replacement, page 19-14
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-15
MASTER CYLINDER
Brake System Bleeding, page 19-8
Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Component Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look fo r damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seat at reservoir cap. This is a
• Reservoir or reservoir grommets. sign of fluid contamination.
• Line joints.
• Between master cylinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look fo r damage or signs of fluid leakage at: ' Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
• Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
• Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look fo r damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
® Piston seal.
• Banjo bolt connections.
• Bleed screw.
VSA Modulator- Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
control Unit • Line joints.
• Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test
Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the A/C switch. Allow the engine to warm up to normal
operating temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it.
3. With the transmission in the P or N position, press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same pressure
needed to keep an A/T-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up
to the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering
wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6 . Watch the tape measure.
• If the measurement increases 10 mm (3/8 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
• If the measurement increases more than 10 mm (3/8 in.), replace the master cylinder.
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration 5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder,
(after a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed Is th e re b ra k e d ra g a t a n y o f the w h e e ls?
correctly.
The upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are YES—Go to step 6.
different. If the pins are installed in the wrong location,
it w ill cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, NO—Check the master cylinder reservoir for
and possibly uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
location (see page 19-15). contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, replace
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the the master cylinder (see page 19-16). ■
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more
brake pedal applications during an extended test- 6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin
drive. the wheels to check for brake drag.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift, Is th e re b ra k e d ra g a t an y o f the w h e e ls?
and spin all four wheels by hand.
YES—Checkthe master cylinder reservoir for
Is th e re b ra k e d ra g a t an y o f the w h e e ls? contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
YES—Go to step 3. contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid is OK,
disassemble and repair the caliper on the wheel(s)
NO—Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, with brake drag. ■
or vehicle vibration. ■
NO—Look for and replace any damaged brake lines,
3. Turn the engine off, press the brake pedal several If all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA
times to deplete the vacuum in the brake booster, modulator-control unit (see page 19-100). ■
and then spin the wheels again to check for brake
drag.
Is th e re b ra k e d r a g a t a n y o f the w h e e ls?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Replace the brake booster (see page 19-18).H
4. W ithout removing the brake lines, unbolt and

separate the master cylinder from the booster, then
spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
Is th e re b ra k e d ra g a t a n y o f the w h e e ls?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Checkthe brake pedal position switch

adjustment and pedal free play (see page 19-5). ■
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance -
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) 3. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully
longer touching the brake pedal. pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on
the pedal arm). Turn the switch 45 °clockwise to
lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position
switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to
0.7 mm .(0,03 in.) by locking the switch. Make sure
the brake lights go off when the pedal is released.
2. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout (B) in the
insulator. Measure the pedal height (C) at the
middle of the left side center of the pedal pad (D) to
the floor. 4. Checkthe brake pedal free play.
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):

155 mm (61/8 in.)
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Parking Brake Inspection and
Position Switch Adjustment Adjustment
(cont'd)
In s p e c tio n
Pedal Free Play
1. Press the parking brake pedal (A) with 294 N (30 kgf,
1. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) at the brake 66 Ibf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake pedal by hand. parking brake pedal should be locked within the
If the brake pedal free play is out of specification, specified number of clicks (B).
adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the
brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in Pedal locked clicks: 4 to 6
brake drag.
If the number of pedal clicks is excessive, adjust the
Free play: 1—5 mm (1/16—3/16 in.) parking brake.
Minor Adjustment
1-13).
2. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut (A) until the

parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels
are turned.
3. Back off the parking brake adjusting nut in half-turn

increments, and check for proper adjustment (4 to
6 clicks) at a pedal force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf).
Major Adjustment (to be done when 5. Remove the access plug (A).
replacing parking brake shoes)-

1-13).
2. Fully release the parking brake pedal.
3. Back off the parking brake adjusting nut (A) in the

parking brake pedal.
6. Turn the ratchet teeth on the adjuster nut (B) with a

flat-tip screwdriver (C) until the shoes lock against
the parking brake drum. Then back off the adjuster
10 clicks, and install the access plug.
7. Do the minor adjustment procedure.

wheels.
9. Do the parking brake shoe lining break-in

Brake System Bleeding
NOTE: 5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the

• Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. in the fluid.
Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and shorten the life of the system. BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed
to contaminate the brake fluid. © Front Right
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may G 5T >\
not be compatible.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
• The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must
be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the
rag J
© Front Left © Rear Left
bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each
brake system. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at

the MAX (upper) level line (A). Front
2. Slide a piece of clear plastic hose over the first Rear

bleed screw, and submerge the other end in a
container of new brake fluid. 8 N*m (0.8 kgf-m, 6 Ibf-ft)
3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal

several times, then apply steady pressure.
4. Starting at the left-front, loosen the brake bleed

screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then
tighten the bleed screw securely.
6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX

(upper) level line.
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT

A11
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX -W H T -
CONTROL UNIT VSA MODULATOR-
DAYTIME RUNNING BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT
LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT (EBD INDICATOR)
(Canada models)
GRN/BLU
PARKING BRAKE BRAKE FLUID

, SWITCH LEVEL SWITCH
Closed: Pedal pressed Closed: Float down
Open: Pedal released Open: Float up
BLK
-CL
G301
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
NOTE: If both the ABS/VSA indicator and the brake 1. Remove the reservoir cap (A). Check that the float
system indicator come on at the same time, check the (B) moves up and down freely; if it doesn't, replace
VSA system first (see page 19-37). the reservoir cap assembly.
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A)

from the parking brake switch (B).
2. Check for continuity between the terminals with the

float in the down position (C) and the up position
(D).
• With the float up, there should be no continuity.

• With the float down, there should be continuity.
2. Check for continuity between the switch terminal
(C) and body ground.
• W ith the parking brake pedal pressed, there

should be continuity.
* With the parking brake pedal released, there
should be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the fluid

level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module test
(see page 22-90).
3. Connect the parking brake switch connector to the

parking brake switch.
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Replacement
A CA U TIO
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust; regardless of 1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health. 2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
* Avoid breathing dust particles. safety stands in the proper locations (see page
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake 1-13).
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner. 3. Remove the front wheels.
4. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolt (A).

Inspection

1-13).
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner brake pad (B)

and outer brake pad (C). Do not include the
thickness of the backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 10.5—11.5 m m (0.41—0.45 in.)
Service l imit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
5. Remove the flange bolt (B) while holding the lower
caliper pin with a wrench being careful not to
damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (C) up
out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
6. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B).
4. If the brake pads thickness is less than the service

limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
5. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
(cont'd)
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the pad retainers (A). 13. Push in the piston (A) so that the caliper will fit over
the brake pads. Make sure that the piston boot is in
position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the
caliper down.
NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the caliper

piston; brake fluid might overflow from the master
cylinder's reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any
painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove

any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
9. Inspect the brake disc, and check for damage and

cracks (see page 19-13).
10. Clean and install the pad retainers.
11. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N

08798-9010) to the pad side of outer pad shim C, 14. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the
inner pad shim B, both sides of inner pad shim A, flange bolt (B), and tighten it to the specified torque
the back of brake pads (D), and the other areas while holding the lower caliper pin (C) with a
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot.
paste off the shims and brake pads. Contaminated
brake discs or brake pads reduces stopping ability. 15. Install the brake hose bracket mounting bolt, and
Keep grease and assembly paste off the brake discs tighten it to the specified torque.
and brake pads.
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal

stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
18. Add brake fluid as needed.
19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
12. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. (see page 19-31).
Install the pad with the wear indicator (E) on the top
inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, always
reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to
prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency.
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout Thickness and Parallelism
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page safety stands in the proper locations (see page
1-13). 1-13).
2. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-11). 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-11).
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and thickness at eight points, about 45 °apart and
remove all rust. 10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque
to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 27.9-28.1.m m (1.10-1.11 in.)
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements, v
10 mm (3/8 in.)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:

Service limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish parallelism, refinish the brake disc with a
the brake disc with a commercially available on-car commercially available on-car brake lathe.
brake lathe.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.) for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-14).
NOTE:
• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 19-14).
• A new brake disc should be refinished if its
runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
Front Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake 5. Remove the brake disc flat screws (A).
pads.

1-13).
^.O IV‘111
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Remove the brake disc (B) from the front hub.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the front hub,

screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts to push it away from the front hub. Turn each bolt
(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the 90 degrees to prevent the brake disc from binding.
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire 7. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of
to hang the caliper assembly from the removal.
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
excessively. NOTE: Before installing the brake disc, clean the
mating surfaces of the front hub and the inside of
the brake disc.

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
* Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different.
If these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
• Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
• After installing the caliper, checkthe brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
: Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)
CALIPER
BRACKET
Master Cylinder Replacement Master Cylinder Inspection
INOTICE I 1. Inspect and note these items:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, • Before reassembling, check that all parts are free
wash it off immediately with water. of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake • Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder
lines during removal and installation. assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and with a new part if necessary.
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel • Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to
or equivalent. contaminate the brake fluid.
• Bleed the brake system (see page 19-8).
1. Remove the intake air duct (see page 5-2).
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connectors

(A), and remove the reservoir cap (B).
3. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder

reservoir (C) with a syringe.
4. Disconnect the brake lines (D) from the master

cylinder. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints Check for damage and
with rags or shop towels. deterioration.
5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (E).
6. Remove the master cylinder (F) from the brake

booster (G). Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines when removing the master cylinder.
7. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of

removal.
8. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-8).
9. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.

Brake Booster Test
Functional Test 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at

the booster. The check valve (B) is built into the
1. With the engine off, press the brake pedal several hose.
times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then press
the brake pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If
the brake pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is
bypassing internally, or the brake system is leaking.
Inspectthe brake hoses and lines (see page 19-31).
2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the

brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does
not vary, do the brake system test (see page 19-3).
L eakiest
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then
stop the engine. The brake pedal height should not
vary while pressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal 4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
height rises, go to step 6. If it does not rise, go to vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
step 2. check valve is not working properly. Replace the
brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn retest. If vacuum is found, go to step 5.
the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press
the brake pedal several times using normal 5. With the engine off, reconnect the vacuum hose to
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should the brake booster.
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise. Does the pedal rise on 6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster
each consecutive application? If it rises the booster vacuum hose between the check valve and the
is OK. If it does not go to step 3. booster.
7. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds.

Press the brake pedal several times using normal
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise.
• If the pedal position does not vary inspect the

seal between the master cylinder and booster. If
the seal is OK, replace the brake booster.
• If the pedal position varies, replace the brake
booster vacuum hose/check valve assembly.
Brake Booster Replacement
1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-16). 5. Pull the brake booster (A) forward, and remove it
from the engine compartment.
2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A)
from the brake booster (B). NOTICE I
• Be careful not to damage the booster
surfaces and threads of the booster stud
bolts.
• Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines.
3. Remove the lock pin (A) and joint pin (B).
6. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of

• After installing the brake booster and master

cylinder, fill the reservoir with new brake fluid,
bleed the brake system (see page 19-8).
• Check the brake pedal height and free play
(see page 19-5).
4. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C).

Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of 1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health. 2. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
* Avoid breathing dust particles. safety stands in the proper locations (see page
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake 1-13).
cleaner. 3. Remove the rear wheels.
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) while holding the lower

Inspection caliper pin (B) with a wrench being careful not to
damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (C) up
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
safety stands in the proper locations (see page damage and deterioration.
1-13).
3. Check tl
outer pc
backing
Brakep
Static
Servi<
A
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.

wheels.
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 12. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the
brake pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position
to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
NOTE: Be careful when pushing in the caliper

piston; brake fluid might overflow from the master
cylinder's reservoir, if brake fluid gets on any
painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove

any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
8. Inspectthe brake disc/drum, and check for damage

and cracks (see page 19-21).
9. Clean and install the pad retainers.
10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N

08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the 13. Pivotthe caliper down into position. Install the
back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas flange bolt (B), and tighten it to the specified torque
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly while holding the iower caliper pin (C) with a
paste off the pad shims and brake pads. wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot.
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce
stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste 14. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum
off the brake discs and pads. and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheels.
15. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal

stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
16. Add brake fluid as needed.
17. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-31).
11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly.

Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on
the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency.
Runout - Thickness and Parallelism
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page safety stands in the proper locations (see page
1-13). 1-13).
2. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the rear wheels.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-19). 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-19).
4. Inspect the brake disc/drum surface for damage 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc/drum
and cracks. Clean the brake disc/drum thoroughly, thickness at eight points, about 45 °apart and
and remove all rust. 10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake
disc/drum. Replace the brake disc/drum if the
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), smallest measurement is less than the max.
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque ' refinishing limit.
to hold the brake disc/drum securely against the
hub. Brake disc/drum thickness:
Standard: 10.9—11.1 mm (0.43—0.44 in.)
Max. refinishi ng lim i t: 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)
Brake disc/drum parallelism:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
■mo w-m
(11.0 kgf-m,
79.6 Ibf-ft)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc/drum
as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc/drum.
Brake disc/drum runout:

Servi ce limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
5. If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit
7. If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit, for parallelism, refinish the brake disc/drum with a
refinish the brake disc/drum with a commercially commercially available on-car brake lathe.
available on-car brake lathe.
NOTE: If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service
Max. refinishing limit: 9.0 mm (0.35 in.) limit for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-22).
NOTE:
• If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-22).
• A new brake disc/drum should be refinished if its
runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
Rear Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake dise/drum and 6. Remove the brake disc/drum flat screws (A).
brake pads.

1-13).
7. Remove the brake disc/drum (B) from the rear hub.
NOTE:
• It may be necessary to back-off the parking brake
adjuster nut (C) to remove the brake disc/drum
from the rear hub (see step 6 on page 19-7).
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts • If the brake disc/drum has stuck to the rear hub,
(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (D) into the brake
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper disc/drum to push it away from the rear hub.
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire Turn each bolt 90 degrees to prevent the brake
to hang the caliper assembly from the disc/drum from binding.
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose • After installation, checkthe parking brake, and
excessively. adjust it necessary (see page 19-6).
5. Release the parking brake. 8. Install the brake disc/drum in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE: Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean

the mating surfaces of the rear hub and the inside
of the brake disc/drum.

wheel.
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
1
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
• Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
: Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M) 8 x 1.0 mm

BRAKE HOSE 37 N-m (3.8 kgf-m, 27 Ibf-ft)
oo iM-m ^ v jr
(5.6 kgf'm, 41 I bf-ft) ^ RETAINERS
CALI PER BRACKET
Parking Brake Inspection
ikCAUTIO
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-13).
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake disc/drum (see page 19-22).
TENSION PIN U-CLIP

Replace.
•WAVE WASHER
PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Marked left and ri ght.
RETAINER SPRING
FLANGE NUT Check for weakness
12 x 1.25 mm and damage.
74 N m
RETAINER
BACKING PLATE Install securely on
Check for deform ation. tension pin.
CONNECTING ROD
LOWER RETURN SPRING

Check for weakness
BRAKE SHOE and damage.
If brake shoes are to be
reused, mark and reassemble ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY
in the same position. Check ratchet teeth
for wear and damage.
UPPER RETURN SPRING

Check for weakness
and damage.
©
4. Checkthe parking brake linings (A) fo r cracking, 8,; .Measure the inside diameter of the parking brake
glazing, wear, and contamination. drum with inside vernier calipers.
NOTE: Contaminated brake linings or drums Parking brake drum inside diam eter:
reduce stopping ability, Standard: 209.9—210.0 mm
18.264-8.267 in.)
Service limit: 21 1.0 mm (8.307 in.)
5. Measure the parking brake lining thickness (B).

Measurement does not include brake shoe
thickness. 9. If the inside diameter of the parking brake drum is
more than service limit, replace the brake disc/
Parking brake lining thickness: drum.
Standard: 4.0 mm (0.16 in.)
Service limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) 10. Check the parking brake drum for scoring, grooves,
and cracks.
6. If the parking brake lining thickness is less than the
service lim it, replace all of the parking brake shoes 11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc/drum
as a set (see page 19-26). and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheels.
7. Check the bearings in the hub unit for smooth
operation.
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
5. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing the

ik CAUTION respective retainer (B) and turning the pin.
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
material composition, eould be hazardous to your
health.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
cleaner.
Disassembly

1-13).
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear

brake disc/drum (see page 19-22).
4. Disconnect and remove the upper return

springs (A).
7. Lower the parking brake shoe assembly.
8. Remove the forward brake shoe (A) and the

adjuster assembly (B) by removing the lower return
spring (C).
B
9. Remove the rearward brake-shoe by disconnecting Reassembly
the parking brake cable (A) from the parking brake
lever (B). - : ’ 1. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 44 MA grease to the
sliding surface of the pivot pin (A) of the rearward
brake shoe (B).
10. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (B), and

parking brake lever (C) from the brake shoe (D).
2. Install the parking brake lever (C) and wave washer

(D) on the pivot pin, and secure with a new U-clip
(E).
• Install the wave washer with its convex side

facing out.
* Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the parking
brake lever from coming out from the brake shoe.
3. Connectthe parking brake cable (A) to the parking

brake lever (B).
A
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement (cont'd)
4. Apply a thin coat of Molycote 44 MA grease to the Clean the threaded portions of the clevis A, and
shoe ends and connecting rod ends (A), sliding coat the threads with multipurpose grease. Clean
surfaces (B), and opposite edges of the parking the sliding surface of the clevis B, and coat the
brake shoe (C) as shown. Wipe off any excess. sliding surface with multipurpose grease. Install
Keep grease off the brake linings. the clevis A and B on the adjuster nut (C), and
shorten the clevis A by turning the adjuster nut.
Greasing symbols:
Brake shoe ends and connecting rod ends
- t o Opposite edge of the shoe
c=>@ Sliding surface
7. Install the brake shoe adjuster assembly (D), and
5. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B), hook the lower return spring (E) on the parking
and the retainer (C) on the rearward brake shoe (D). brake shoes.
Make sure the tension pin does not contact the
parking brake lever. 8. Install the rod spring (A) to the connecting rod (B)
first. Then install the connecting rod on the parking
brake shoes.
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in
9. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B),

and the retainer (C) on the forward brake shoe (D). ik WARNING
Do this operation in a safe area.
NOTE: Do the brake linings surface break-in when

replacing shoes with new brake linings and/or new rear
brake disc/drum.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Do the major parking brake adjustment (see page

19-7).
3. Do the minor parking brake adjustment (see page

19-6).
10. Install the forward upper return springs (A) as 4. Press the parking brake pedal 2 to 4 clicks.
shown.
5. Drive the vehicle for 1/4 mile (400 m) at no more

11. Install the rearward upper return spring (B) as than 31 mph (50 km/h).
shown.
6. Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake for
12. Install the rear brake disc/drum and the rear brake 5—10 minutes to allow the brake disc/drum to cool.
caliper bracket in the reverse order of removal.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 three more times.
13. Do the major parking brake adjustment (see page
19-7). 8. Check the parking brake pedal adjustment
(see page 19-6).
Brake Pedal Replacement
1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch

connector (A).
D
3. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D)

and nuts (E).
4. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F).
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch

adjustment (see page 19-5).
Brake Hose and Line Inspection
1. Inspectthe brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Checkthe brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also checkfor bent brake lines.
3. Checkfor leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
NOTE: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced.
Connection Point Component Connected to Specified Torque Value BSSote

A Front brake caliper Brake hose 34 N-m (3.5 kaf-m, 25 Ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 8 N-m (0.8 kgf-m, 6 Ibf-ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 8 N-m (0.8 kgf-m, 6 Ibf-ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N-m (1,5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder Brake line 30 N-m (3.1 kaf-m, 22 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
E VSA modulator- Brake line 30 N-m (3.1 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
control unit (14mm nut)
Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
(10 mm nut)
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE: 5. Remove the brake hose from the damper.

• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dirt and other foreign particles. 6. Install the brake hose (A) on the damper with the
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to flange bolt (B) first, then connect the brake hose to
do so. the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage washers (D).
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and B
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or 8 x 1.25 mm
equivalent material. 22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft)
1. Remove the wheel.
2. Disconnect the brake hose (A) from the brake line

(B) using a 10 mm flare-nut wrench (C).
7. Install the brake hose (A) onto the upper brake hose
bracket (B) on the body with a new brake hose clip
(C).
D
15 N-m
(1.5 kgf-i t
11 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the brake hose clip (A) from the brake hose
(B).
8. Connectthe brake line (D) to the brake hose.
9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake

system (see page 19-8).
10. Do the following check:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
• Checkthe brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
4. Remove the banjo bolt (C), and disconnect the 11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
brake hose from the caliper. inside of the wheel, then install the wheel.
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
(cont'd)
Parking Brake Cable Replacement (cont'd)
NO TE:
• The parking brake cables must not be bent or
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and
premature failure.
• Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this
procedure.
1. Remove the parking brake shoes, and disconnect

the parking brake cable from the brake shoe
(see page 19-26).
2. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the

backing plate (B) using a 12 mm offset wrench (C).
3. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse

order of removal, and note these items:
• Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the

mating surfaces of the rear hub and the inside of
the brake disc/drum.
surfaces on the brake disc/drum and the inside of
the wheel.
• Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-6). Apply
the parking brake firmly 10 times, then adjust it
again.
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components ................. 19-1

VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Components
Component Location Index .......................................... . 19-36
General Troubleshooting Information ........................ 19-37
DTC Troubleshooting Index .................... ...................... 19-40
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................... .............. 19-41
System Description ............................... ........ ........... ...... 19-42
Circuit Diagram .............. ...... ......... ................................... 19-54
DTC Troubleshooting .... ..... ................................. .......... 19-57
Symptom Troubleshooting ...................... ..................... 19-88
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement .................. 19-96
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor
Replacement ....................... ......... ................................ 19-97
VSA Sensor Neutral Position Memorization .............. 19-98
VSA OFF Switch Test ......... ................ .......... ........ ......... 19-99
VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation ......................... ................. 19-100
Wheel Sensor Inspection ................................................ 19-102
Wheel Sensor Replacement .......................................... 19-102
I
System Indicator VSA Activation Indicator
This system has four indicators: The VSA activation indicator blinks, when the VSA
function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
• ABS indicator (A) comes on, when the VSA is turned OFF by using the
• Brake system indicator (B) VSA OFF switch, or the VSA function is lost.
• VSA indicator (C)
• VSA activation indicator (D) ABS/VSA Indicator
• If the system is OK, the ABS and VSA indicators will

i A go off 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch
ON (II).
• The ABS and VSA indicators come on when the
control unit detects a problem in the system.
However, even though the system is operating
properly, the indicator may come on under these
conditions:
- Only the drive wheels rotate.
- One drive wheel is stuck.
- The vehicle goes into a spin.
- The ABS or VSA continues to operate for a long
time.
-T h e vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal
When the system detects a problem, it will turn the disturbance.
appropriate indicator on. Depending on the failure, the
VSA modulator-control unit determines which To determine the actual cause of the problem, question
indicators are turned on. the customer taking these conditions into consideration.
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for
about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II), • When a problem is detected, there are cases when
then goes off. the indicator stays on until the ignition switch is
turned OFF, and cases when the indicator goes off
ABS Indicator automatically when the system returns to normal.
- DTC 61 or 62:
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is The ABS and VSA indicators go off automatically
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system. when the system returns to normal.
- DTC 11,13, 15,17, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 54,
Brake System Indicator 71,81,112,121,122,123 or 124:
The ABS and VSA indicators stay on until the
The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD ignition switch is turned OFF whether or not the
function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the system returns to normal.
brake fluid level is low. - DTC 12,14, 16,18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 41, 42, 43, 44, 51,
52 or 53:
VSA Indicator The ABS and VSA indicators stay on until the
system returns to normal after the vehicle is driven.
The VSA indicator comes on, when VSA function is lost. - DTC 25, 26, 27,28, 64, 65,66, 68, 83,84 or 86:
The VSA indicator stays on until the ignition switch
is turned OFF whether or not the system returns to
normal.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs
• The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However, The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
when the same DTC is detected more than once, the of the problem is still present and the ABS and/or VSA
more recent DTC is written over the earlier one. indicator is still on. Following the troubleshooting
Therefore, when the same problem is detected procedure when the ABS and/or VSA indicator does not
repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC. come on (no problem is present) can result in incorrect
• The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order, diagnosis.
not in the order they occur. The connector illustrations show the female terminal
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, connectors with a single outline and the male terminal
the memorized DTCs cannot be erased by connectors with a double outline.
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified
procedures to clear the DTCs. 1. Question the customer about the conditions when
the problem occurred, and try to reproduce the
Self-diagnosis same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
when the ABS and/or VSA indicator came on, such
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories: as during control, after control, when the vehicle
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch was traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary,
is turned ON (II) and until the ABS or VSA indicator have the customer demonstrate the concern.
goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial 2. When the ABS or VSA indicator does not come on
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF. during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done
• When the system detects a problem, the VSA based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode. contact of the terminals, etc. before you start
troubleshooting.
Kickback
3. After troubleshooting, or repairs are done, clear the
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir conditions as originally set with the DTCs. Make
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at sure the ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
the brake pedal.
Intermittent Failures
Pump Motor
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
• The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
control unit is functioning. indicator(s) of the system does not come on, check for
• The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump loose connectors and grounds, poor contact of the
motor operation one time after completing initial terminals related to the circuit that you are
diagnosis during regular diagnosis when the vehicle troubleshooting.
is driven over 10 mph (15 km/h).
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures

are identical to the procedures used on vehicles without
the VSA system (see page 19-8).
How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear DTCs
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to NOTE: You cannot clear the DTCs manually.
the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
side of the dashboard. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe HDS to
the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.

prompts on the HDS to display the DTC(s) on the
screen. After determining the DTC, refer to the DTC 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the
Troubleshooting. DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the HDS.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions. instructions.
3. If the VSA activation indicator remains on, but the

VSA and ABS indicators are off, do the VSA sensor
neutral position memorization (see page 19-98).
DTC Detection Item Note

11 Right-front wheel sensor (short to power/short to body ground/open) (see page 19-57)
12 Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-60)
13 Left-front wheel sensor (short to power/short to body ground/open) (see page 19-57)
14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-60)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor (short to power/short to body ground/open) (see page 19-57)
16 Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-60)
17 Left-rear wheel sensor (short to power/short to body ground/open) (see page 19-57)
18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-60)
21 Right-front pulser (see page 19-61)
22 Left-front pulser (see page 19-61)
23 Right-rear pulser (see page 19-61)
24 Left-rear pulser (see page 19-61)
25 Yaw rate sensor (see page 19-63)
26 Lateral acceleration sensor (see page 19-65)
27 Steering angle sensor (see page 19-68)
28 Longitudinal acceleration sensor (4WD) (see page 19-71)
31 ABS solenoid (see page 19-74)
41 Right-front wheel lock (see page 19-75)
42 Left-front wheel lock (see page 19-75)
43 Right-rear wheel lock (see page 19-75)
44 Left-rear wheel lock (see page 19-75)
51 Motor lock (see page 19-75)
52 Motor stuck OFF (see page 19-75)
53 Motor stuck ON (see page 19-77)
54 Fail-safe relay (see page 19-77)
61 Low +B-FSR voltage (see page 19-78)
62 High +B-FSR voltage (see page 19-78)
64 Sensor power voltage (see page 19-79)
65 Brake fluid level (see page 19-80)
66 VSA pressure sensor (Inside of VSA modulator-control unit) (see page 19-80)
68 Brake pedal position switch (see page 19-81)
71 Different diameter tire (see page 19-82)
81 Central processing unit (CPU) (see page 19-83)
83 PCM (see page 19-84)
84 VSA sensor neutral position (see page 19-85)
86 F-CAN communication (see page 19-85)
107 TCS operation (see page 19-86)
108 VSA operation (see page 19-86)
112 Internal power source stuck OFF (see page 19-86)
121 VSA solenoid (see page 19-87)
Symptom Diagnostic procedure :

ABS indicator does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-88)
ABS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-88)
Brake system indicator does not come on (check bulb operation Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-90)
with parking brake)
Brake system indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-91)
VSA indicator does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-91)
VSA indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-92)
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up (bulb Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-94)
check)
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are stored Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 19-94)
System Description
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 47P Connector
1
2 3 4 5 6 // 9 / 11 // 14 / 16
17 18 / 20 7 / 7 7 7 26 7 28 29 30 7
32 47
33 34 35 7 37 38 39 / 41 42 43 ///
Terminal W i re Terminal Description Measurement (VSA modulator-control unit 47P

number color sign connector connected)
Terminals Conditions Voltage
1 WHT/ +B-FSR Power source for the 1—GND At all times Battery
GRN fail-safe relay voltage
2 GRY RLS ( - ) Detects left-rear 2 -3 Ammeter connected in About 7 mA to
3 PUR RLS (+ ) wheel sensor signal series with the wheel about 14 mA
4 BRN FLS ( - ) Detects left-front 4—20 speed sensor, then alternately
wheel sensor signal ignition switch ON (II)*1
5 BLU/ RRS ( - ) Detects right-rear 5 -6 Rotate the appropriate
YEL wheel sensor signal wheel slowly
6 GRN/ RRS (+ )
YEL
9*2 GRY/ RLP Outputs left-rear
YEL wheel speed signal
11 GRY K-LINE Communication with 11—GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
HDS voltage
14 WHT CAN-H F-CAN 14—GND Ignition switch ON (II) About 2.5 V
communication
circuit
16 WHT +B -M R Power source for the 16—GND At all times Battery
motor relay voltage
17 GRN/ FRS ( + ) Detects right-front 1 7 -1 8 Ammeter connected in About 7 mA to
BLK wheel sensor signal series with the wheel about 14 mA
18 GRN FRS ( - ) speed sensor, then alternately
20 GRN/ FLS ( + ) Detects left-front 4 -2 0 ignition switch ON (II)*1
BLU wheel sensor signal Rotate the appropriate
wheel slowly
26*2 LT FRP Outputs right-front
GRN wheel sensor signal
* 1: If a DTC is set during set up, turn the ignition switch OFF, then back ON (II) before testing.
* 2 :4WD
Terminal Wire Terminal Description Measurement (VSA modulator-control unit 47P
number color s i gn connector connected)
Terminals Conditions Voltage
28 RED/ STR-A Detects steering 28—GND Ignition switch ON (II), 1 -4 V
YEL angle sensor signal turn steering wheel very alternately
slowly
29 BLU/ STR-D Detects steering 29—GND Ignition switch ON (II), TV on center
ORN angle sensor signal steering wheel in straight 4 V off center
ahead position, then
turned off at center —
30 RED CAN-L CAN communication 30—GND Ignition switch ON (II) 2.5 V
circuit
32 BLK GND Ground for the VSA 32—GND Under all conditions Continuity
modulator-control
unit
33 LT SGND Ground forthe 33—GND Ignition switch ON (II) OV
BLU sensors
34 GRN/ YAW Detects yaw rate 34—GND Ignition switch ON (II) 2.5 V
WHT sensor signal
35 RED SVCC Power source for the 35—GND Ignition switch ON (II) 5V
sensors
37 RED/ GLAT Detects lateral 37—GND Ignition switch ON (II) 2.5 V
WHT acceleration sensor
signal
38 BLK/ IG1 Power source for 38—GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
YEL activating the system voltage
39*2 GRN/ GLONG Detects longitudinal 39—GND Ignition switch ON (II) 2.5 V
RED acceleration sensor
signal
4 r2 GRY/ RRP Outputs right-rear
RED wheel sensor signal
42*2 WHT/ FLP Outputs left-front
RED wheel sensor signal
43 YEL/ STR-B Detects steering 43—GND Ignition switch ON (II), 1—4 V
RED angle sensor signal turn steering wheel very alternately
slowly
47 BLK MR-GND Ground for the pump 47™GND Under all conditions Continuity
motor
* 1: If a DTC is set during set up, turn the ignition switch OFF, then back ON (II) before testing.
* 2 :4WD
(confd)
ABS Features
When the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels can lock before the vehicle comes to a stop. In such an
event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of the vehicle is
reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. The ABS precisely controls the slip
rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures maneuverability and stability
of the vehicle.
The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the vehicle speed and the wheel speed, then it controls the
brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface
TARGET SLIP RATE

TCS Features
When a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheel and sends engine torque control request to the PCM to slow the spinning wheel
and keep traction.
4WD:
m m
(cont'd)
V S A S ystem Features
Oversteer control
Applies the brake to the front outside wheel
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

to the turning direction
Understeer control
• Applies the brake to the rear inside wheel
• Controls the engine torque when accelerating
The brake increases the yaw rate tow ard

the turning direction
The throttle control effect;

• reduces vehicle speed
• increases cornering force
Electronic Brake D istrib ution (EBD)
Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) has been added to the VSA system. EBD eliminates the need for an external,
mechanical proportioning valve and improves overall braking performance.
When the vehicle is heavily loaded, most of the increase in weight is born by the rear wheels, increasing braking
capability. Proportioning valves maintain a fixed distribution of brake pressure between the front and the rear wheels,
making it very difficult to fully utilize increased rear wheel braking capability. EBD varies brake pressure distribution
according to load, using input from the wheel speed sensors, which improves overall braking performance.
Best distribution under heavy load Under heavy load
Rear w heel
brake pressure
Front w heel brake pressure
Normal Braki ng
Under normal braking conditions, brake pressure is evenly distributed between the front and rear brakes, and EBD is
not used.
Firm Braking
Under hard braking conditions, the VSA modulator-control unit monitors wheel speed in order to allow a maximum
amount of brake distribution individually to the rear wheels. Once the VSA modulator-control unit detects that one or
both rear wheels are nearing their maximum braking potential, the inlet valve closes for one or both rear wheels,
maintaining the current pressure. If the traction is improved, and the wheel(s) is no longer nearing its limits, the VSA
modulator-control unit will open the inlet solenoid allowing additional pressure to be distributed to the rear wheel. The
rear wheels are controlled independently of each other during EBD function.
If during EBD function the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the wheels are beginning to slip more than a
predetermined amount, the control unit abandons EBD control and shifts to select low 3-channel ABS control.
(cont'd)
Brake A s s is t
Brake assist has been added to the VSA system. Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking
potential of the vehicle by increasing brake system pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS
stop.
Each time the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the VSA modulator-control unit learns the current driver's normal
braking characteristics by monitoring the brake pressure sensor and the brake pedal position switch at each stop.
Using these inputs and their values, the VSA modulator-control unit is able to learn the driver's normal braking habits,
and then determine the difference between a normal stop and a panic stop for the individual driver of the vehicle. If
during a panic stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a
learned threshold in less than a learned amount of time, the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the threshold before the time threshold had expired, the VSA modulator-
control unit goes into brake assist mode.
Threshold Tim e
Normal Braking
During normal braking conditions, brake assist does not affect brake system pressure.
Panic Stop
During a panic stop, the control unit turns the VSA pump ON, and opens the inlet valve. This brings the brake system
pressure up high enough to cause a full ABS stop. As soon as the brake pedal is released, brake assist is stopped and
the brake system returns to normal operation.
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, VSA normally open (NO) solenoid valve,
VSA normally closed (NC) solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the damping chamber.
The modulator controls the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid
circulates through the caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel.
ABS Control
Pressure Intensifying Mode
VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed.
Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper.
Pump Motor
When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is
OFF,
The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the master cylinder.
MASTER C Y L IN D E R
M ODULATOR UNIT
r
I"VSA NO VSANC 1 VSANC VSA NO I
I^WMy
JT%, VALVE
rasa*™ fen i i I ir S fta v\q REGULATOR
I ^ IN
v ... 1
N
W nl 1 vj 'jp [
J— MOTOR 1— DAMPING
CHAMBER
*A I■ > r p(y — < 3 —

OUT OUT OUT
e)| |
|gj] RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
(g )
RL
(confd)
Pressure Retaining Mode

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed.
Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
M ASTER CYLINDER
in ——
Ja y C T T T ls] * ^
C lip ]
(U ) (g ) (0 )
RL FL RR
Pressure Reducing Mode

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open.
Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir.
M ASTER CYLINDER
M ODULATOR U N IT
TCS Control
VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the front caliper.
M ASTER CYLINDER
^PRESSURE /CN
M ODULATOR U N IT j SENSOR
tr r vsaw
o VSANC ______ _____
tz [ ]H IZ [;E W VC
'Af I
■ I motor W IPING
MBER
E li™ [fr
Cg) ID )
FR RR
Pressure Retaining Mode

VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
Front caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
M ASTER CYLINDER
rao:
M ODULATOR U N IT 0 -
VSANC II VSA NO 1
1 . i f i L REGULATOR
'n f l n r t o d t kV ^ - J I] v a l v e
^ EzHTTk I
....“^ or ;
■J — DAMPING E L - -----------—■
CHAMBER ( OUT
RESERVOIR
(U )
FR
(cont'd)
Pressure Reduci ng Mode

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, front outlet valve open, pump motor ON.
MASTER CYLINDER
VSA Control

VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the front and
rear calipers.
M ASTER CYLINDER
Pressure Retaining Mod©
VSA NO valve closed, VSA NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
Front and rear caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
MASTER CYLINDER
Pressure Reducing Mode

VSA NO valve open, VSA NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open, pump motor ON.
MASTER C Y L IN D E R
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION VSA OFF SWITCH 13P CONNECTOR

SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
1 2 1 / / / 5
7 8 9 / 11 12 /
3_>< 4
k_
/
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX C O N N E C T O R J !18P )

C O N N E C T O R D (2 0P )
1 / 3 4 _JT—L / / 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 _J "L 5 / /
13 14 / / 18 / L20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 / 18
n/ r / / / -upJ
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE C O N N E C T O R B (36P)

C O N N E C T O R A (2 0P )
n... )— —i jn n n n ----- _—f ■

Ti . n n r
-1 2 3 / / 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ;10 11 12 1 3 1 4 15 16 1 7 18
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 19 ^ 2 1 '2?I 2c^ 2î 25j 2e > 27r 281 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

5P CONNECTOR
i1 2 3 4 5 6 /
9 / I 11 / //14 /
16 ET... ........ 3
17 1 8 Z 20Z Z Z Z ^ 7 26 2 28 29 30 / ll 2 3 4 5
32 47
33 34 35 / 37 38 39 / 41 42 43 / / / YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
5P CONNECTOR
fin n
1 2 3 4 5
W ire side of female term inals
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
r / / 4 5 / 7
3 |4 5 6
7 8 |9 L
■
j 1 | 2
/ / 12 / 14 /
10 11 1 2 / M L / V 17 18 19
■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25 a
26 27 28 2 9I7 I3 1U 733 34 35
36 3 8 | / 1 / 41 142 4 3 144
WHEEL SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
FRONT REAR
J lE=*i1
< S >
Term inal side of Wire side of

male terminals female terminals
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11,13,15,17: Wheel Sensor (Short to 9. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
Power/Short to Body Ground/Open) appropriate wheel sensor (+ ) and (—) terminals of
the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). individually (see table).
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. DTC Appropriate Terminal

(+) Side ( - ) Side
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the 11 (Right-front) No. 17: No. 18:
HDS. FRS (+ ) F R S (-)
13 (Left-front) No. 20: No. 4:
4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. FLS (+ ) FLS ( - )
15 (Right-rear) No. 6: No. 5:
5. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. RRS (+ ) R R S (-)
17 (Left-rear) No. 3: No. 2:
is D T C 11, 13, 15, a n d /o r 17 indicated? RLS (+ ) RLS (—)

YES—Go to step 6.
FLS ( - ) (BRN)
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this RLS ( + ) (PUR) RRS (“ I (BLU/YEL)
time (see page 19-38). Check for loose or poor RLS (—
connections. ■ (GRY) RRS ( + ) (GRN/YEL)
I 2 13 j 4 | 6 i 6 | / U 1 s ! / h ! / l / b 4 / |
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17| 1 8 | / | 2 0 i / L / | / | / | / l 2 6 | / i s | 2 9 | 3 0 | /
7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P I33!3 4 |3 5 [ / 1 3 7 13 8 13 9 I / I 41 (42)43 / l / l / l
connector. X FLS (+ ) (V )
FRS (+ ) F R S (-) (GRN/BLU) Y
(GRN/BLK) (GRN)
y) (y ;

the VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate
wheel sensor. ■
NO—Goto step 10.

11. Checkfor continuity between body ground and the 12. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P
appropriate wheel sensor (+ ) and (— ) term inals of connector.
the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
individually (see table). 13. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate wheel sensor (+ ) and (—) terminals of
DTC Appropriate Terminal the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
(+ ) Side ( - ) Side individually (see table).
11 (Right-front) No. 17: No. 18:
FRS (+ ) F R S (-) DTC Appropriate Terminal
13 (Left-front) No. 20: No. 4: (+ ) Side ( - ) Side
FLS (+ ) FLS ( - ) 11 (Right-front) No. 17: No. 18:
15 (Right-rear) No. 6: No. 5: FRS (+ ) F R S (-)
RRS (+ ) RRS (—) 13 (Left-front) No. 20: No. 4:
17 (Left-rear) No. 3: No. 2: FLS (+ ) FLS ( - )
RLS (+ ) RLS ( - ) 15 (Right-rear) No. 6: No. 5:
RRS (+ ) R R S (-)
17 (Left-rear) No. 3: No. 2:
FLS(-HBRN) RLS (+ ) RLS ( - )
RLS ( + ) (PUR) RRS ( - ) (BLU/YEL)
RLS ( - )
(GRY) RRS (-B (GRN/YEL) FLS (—) (BRN)
RLS ( + ) (PUR) RRS ( - ) (BLU/YEL)
I 2 | 3 | 4 I 5 | 6 l / l / l 9 | / | 111 / | / | 1 4 l / | ,
7 |l8 l/|2 0 |/|/|/|/l/|2 6 |/l2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |/ RLS ( - )
32 (GRY) RRS ( + ) (GRN/YEL)
35 / 1 3 7 | 3 8 | 3 9 | / | 4 1 |4g|43~ IZ 0 2 .
FLS (+ ) (Q ) I 2 13 I 4 [ 5 I 6 l / l / l 9 L /l 111
A / l 14(71
n
FRS (+ ) FR S (-) (GRN/BLU) J n \ m / \ 20
(GRN/BLK) (GRN)
^ 34l35l7T^l38l39l/l41 \aSl\4S0 2 Z L
;o ) c a
¥ FRS ( + )
(GRN/BLK)
FRS ( - )
(GRN)
FLS ( + ) (0 )
(GRN/BLU) T

;a ) c a
Is there continuity ?---------
NO—Goto step 14.
between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
wheel sensor. ■
NO—Replace the wheel sensor (see page 19-102).

14. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P 16. Substitute a known-good wheel sensor for the
connector. ■ ■ appropriate wheel sensor (see table).
15. Check for continuity between the appropriate DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor :
wheel sensor (+ ) and (—) terminals of the VSA 11 Right-front
modulator-control unit 47P connector (see table). 13 Left-front
15 Right-rear
DTC Appropriate Terminal 17 Left-rear
(+) Side 7 ( - ) Side
11 (Right-front) No. 17; No. 18: 17. Reconnect all connectors,
FRS (+ ) FRS ( - )
13 (Left-front) No. 20: No. 4: 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
■ FLS (+ ) ■ FLS ( - )
15 (Right-rear) No. 6: No. 5; 19. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
RRS (+ ) R R S (-)
17 (Left-rear) No. 3: No. 2: 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
RLS (+ ) RLS (—) HDS.

21. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
FLS ( - ) (BRN)
RLS ( + ) (PUR) R R S j—| (BLU/YEL)
Is D T C 11, 13, 15, a n d /o r 17 indicated?

RLS ( - ) RRS ( + )
(GRY) (GRN/YEL) YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
i Ifl 8l4ffl6Rl/l!9 |/|l117I/11 4 | / | 16
modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
| ii3 1
it /1 2 0 1 / / / I / I / I 2 6 1 / | 2 8 1 2 9 1 3 0 1 / substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
32 47
133 3 4 13 5 1 7 ] 3 7 13 8 13 9 1 / | 41 k M / l / l / l unit (see page 19-100), and retest. ■
FRS ( + ) FLS ( + )
(GRN/BLK) F R S ( -)
(GRN) (GRN/BLU) NO—Replace the original wheel sensor (see page
19-102).!
YES—Repair short in the wires between the VSA

modulator-control unit and the wheel sensor. ■
NO—Goto step 16.

DTC 1 2 ,1 4 ,1 6 ,1 8 : Wheel Sensor (Electrical 9. Check for continuity between the appropriate
Noise/Intermittent Interruption) wheel sensor (+ ) terminal and other wheel sensor
(+ ) terminals of the VSA modulator-control unit
NOTE: If the ABS and VSA indicators come on because 47P connector (see table).
of electrical noise, the indicator goes off when you
test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h). DTC Appropriate Other (+ ) Terminals
(+) Terminal
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 12 No. 17: No. 20 No. 6 No. 3
FRS (+ )
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 14 No. 20: No. 17 No. 6 No. 3
FLS (+ )
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the 16 No. 6: No. 17 No. 20 No. 3
HDS. RRS (+ )
18 No. 3: No. 17 No. 20 No. 6
4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. RLSC+)
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UN IT 47P CONNECTOR
Is D T C 12, 14, 16, an d /o r 18 indicated?
YES—Go to step 6. | 2 | 3 j4 | 5 | 6 I /M 9 l / | 11 l / l / | 1 4 | / |
i 16
1?! 18 | / l 20 | / l / l / | / l / l 2 6 1 / | 2 8 12 9 13 0 1 /
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/|3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/l4 1 k M / l / l / l
time (see page 19-38). Check for loose or poor
connections.®

7. Check the appropriate wheel sensor and pulser for
debris or damage and proper air gap (see page
19-102). Is there continuity?
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor YES—Repair short in the wire between the
12 Right-front appropriate wheel sensor and the other wheel
14 Left-front sensor. ■
16 Right-rear
18 Left-rear NO—Goto step 10.
Are they O K ?
YES—Goto step 8.
NO—Clean and reinstall or replace the appropriate

wheel sensor or pulser. ■

connector.
10. Substitute a known-good wheel sensor forthe DTC 21 ,2 2,23#24: Pulser ■ -
appropriate wheel sensor (see table).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
12 Right-front 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
18 Left-rear HDS. ;;
11. Reconnect VSA modulator-control unit 47P 4. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
connector.
Is D T C 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 3 , a n d / o r 2 4 in d i c a t e d ?
YES—Goto step 6.
HDS. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time (see page 19-38). ■
7. Check the appropriate pulser for debris or damage
Is D T C 12, 14, 16, a n d / o r 18 in d i c a t e d ? and proper air gap (see table) (see page 19-102).
YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA DTC Appropriate Pulser

modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary, 21 Right-front
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control 22 Left-front
unit (see page 19-100), and retest. ■ 23 Right-rear
24 Left-rear
NO—Replace the original wheel sensor (see page
19-102).■ Is th e p u ls e r O K ?
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Glean and reinstall or replace the pulser. ■
(cont'd)
8. Substitute a known-good wheel sensor for the

appropriate wheel sensor (see table).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor

21 Right-front
22 Left-front
23 Right-rear
24 Left-rear
9, Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

HDS.
Is D T C 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 3 , an d /o r 2 4 indicated?
YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA

substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-100), and retest. ■
NO—Replace the original wheel sensor (see page

19-102).®
DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor 9. Measure the voltage between body ground and
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
NOTE: If DTG 64 is stored at the same time as DTC 25, terminals No. 33, No. 34, and No. 35 individually.
troubleshoot DTC 64 first, then recheck for DTC 25.
" | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | / | 9 l / 1 11 l / l / 1 14171
^ -j,j"f3 |qqj / j
32 I33l34l35l/l37l38|39l/l41 k ^ l / M /l
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the SGND (LTBLU) SVCC IRED)
HDS. yaw "
(GRN/WHT) >
4. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
Is D T C 2 5 indicated?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw rate-
time (see page 19-38), and recheck. ■ lateral acceleration sensor and the steering angle
sensor. ■
NO—Go to step 10.
connector, steering angle sensor 5P connector and
yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector.
(cont'd)
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 33 and yaw
11. Check for continuity between body ground and rate-lateraJ acceleration sensor 5P connector
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector terminal No. 4.
terminals No. 33, No. 34, and No. 35 individually.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNST 47P CONNECTOR
17]WAm7\AAAAm7\mmm7
1 U U U U I e / M .9 l 7 h l7 l7 iu lA 1
. 16
3313 4 l a s ) / 3 7 13 8 ) 3 9 [ / 1 41 \ as \ a a \ 7 \ A A
n lw iA 2 0 lA A 7 lA A 2 6 l7 l2 8 k 9 l3 0 l7
32
|3 3 |3 4 | 3 5 | / l 3 7 | 3 8 l 3 9 l / l 4 1 k M / M / l
47 SGND (LT BLU)
SGND (LT BLU) SVCC (RED)

YAW YAW RATE-LATERAL
(GRN/WHT) . ACCELERATI ON
LT BLU SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
ii i g.f i ]:
between the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
rate-lateral acceleration sensor and the steering modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
angle sensor. ■ acceleration sensor. ■
NO—Goto step 12. 14. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
12. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 35 and yaw terminal No. 3.
rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector
terminal No. 2. Wire side of female terminals
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR 1 16
W i re side of female terminals K \ \z \A m \A A A A A & \ /\& \is \? n \y
32 47
■j | 2 | 3 |4 | 5 16 .l / l / l 9| / | 11l / l / l U \7 \ 16 N 4 K M 3 ? N 3 9 /k : W M d / l d . .
v \ w \a m \A A a A a z $ \7 \2 s \ 2 $ \ ® \7 YAW (GRN/WHT)
32 47
1 3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/3 7 l^ | 3 9 |/|4 1 | 4 2 | 4 3 [ / I / | / l
SVCC (RED) —@ — YAW RATE-LATERAL

ACCELERATION
GRN/WHT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
YAW RATE-LATERAL jh
ACCELERATION
RED SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR Im m
YES—Go to step 13. NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA acceleration sensor. ■
modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor. ■
15. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral DTC 26: Lateral Acceleration Sensor
acceleration sensor.
NOTE: If DTC 64 is stored at the same time as DTC 26,
16. Reconnect all connectors. troubleshoot DTC 64 first, then recheck for DTC 26.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
HDS. HDS.
20. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners. 4. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
21. Check fo r DTCs w ith the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C 2 5 indicated? Is D T C 2 6 indicated?
YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA YES—Go to step 6.

modulator-control unit 47P connector, and inspect
for a loose or poor connection at G302. If necessary, NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control time (see page 19-38), and recheck. ■
NO—Replace the original yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor (see page 19-97). ■ 7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P

9. Measure the voltage between body ground and 12. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector control unit 47P connector terminal No. 35 and yaw
terminals No. 33, No. 35, and No. 37 individually. rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector
terminal No. 2.
V S A M O D U L A T O R -C O N T R O L U N IT 4 7 P C O N N E C T O R VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
1 1 Z U J 4 |_6J 6 1 / V | 9 l / | 11 I / M M M 16 z. kL
..[ I f.I .i.4 .|.i .|.i .l / l / l 9 | / | H | / ..| / ..| 1..ZLc....L.ji
1 4 |/|
1 ..I. ,!p. 1, . 1.Z„„I, ., ,.l. ............. 1.2LML. 1.1 16
17| 1 8 M 2 0 M A / / / 2 6 | / 2 8 | 2 9 | 3 o | / 1 7 |l8 |/2 0 |/M //^ /2 6 |/|2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |/
32 47 32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/|3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/|4 1 k k i / l / l / l 133| 3 4 |3 5 |/l-S 7 1 3 8 | 39 |/ l 4 1 \a i \a z \ A A A
S G N D G L A T (R E D /W H T ) SVCC (RED)
(L T B L U )
S V C C
(R E D )
I
YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION
RED SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
.—jh
Wire side of fem ale terminals DUf w i
Is there 0.1 V or more? Is there continuity?
YES—Repair short to power in the wire between YES—Go to step 13.

the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw rate-
lateral acceleration sensor and the steering angle NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
sensor. ■ modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
NO—Go to step 10.
13. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. control unit 47P connector terminal No. 33 and yaw
11. Check for continuity between body ground and terminal No. 4.
terminals No. 33, No. 35, and No. 37 individually. Wire side of female terminals
■j | 2 | 3 I4 | 5 | 6 | / j / | 9 | / | 11 l/ l/l \AA
16
V S A M O D U L A T O R -C O N T R O L U N IT 4 7 P C O N N E C T O R 1T|1181/| M /l/l /L /] 2 6 1/| 2 8 12 9 130 1/
20
32 47
133 13 4 1351 / | 3 7 138139| / | 4 1 142|43|/|/|/|.
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 l / l / l 9 | / | 11 I / M u M .. SGND (LT BLU)
16
17| 18 1/| 20 l / l / L / l / l / l 2 6 1 / | 2 8 12 9 130
32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/ |3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/ |4 1 | 4 2 | 4 3 | / j / | / |
S G N D G L A T (R E D /W H T ) YAW RATE-LATERAL
(L T B L U ) ACCELERATION
S V C C LT BLU SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
(R E D )
Q u a u
Wire side of fem ale terminals Is there continuity ?

YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
between the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw acceleration sensor. ■
rate-lateral acceleration sensor and the steering
angle sensor.■
14. Checkfor continuity between VSA modulator- 15. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral
control unit 47P connector term inal No. 37 and yaw acceleration sensor.
terminal No. 5. 16. Reconnect all connectors.
•J I 2 l3 |4 |5 [ 6 m 9 l / | l l | / t / | l 4 | / l
16 18. Clear the DTC with the HDS. *
1 ? |l8 |/l2 0 |/1 /1 /1 /|/l2 6 |/|2 8 |2 9 |3 0 |/
32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/|3 7 |3 8 i3 9 |/; 4 l|4 2 i4 3 |/|/! / 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
GLAT (RED/WHT) HDS.
“ l 20. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.

YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION 21. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR RED/W HT

YES—Checkfor loose terminals in the VSA
Is there continuity? for a loose or poor connection at G302. If necessary,
YES—Go to step 15. unit (see page 19-100), and retest. ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA NO—Replace the original yaw rate-lateral
modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor (see page 19-97). ■
DTC 27: S teering A ng le Sensor 9. Measure the voltage between body ground and
NOTE: If DTC 64 is stored at the same time as DTC 27, terminals No. 33, No. 35 individually.
troubleshoot DTC 64 first, then recheck for DTC 27.
•J
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 17 | l 8 | / | 2 0 \AAAAA 2 6 1 / 1 2 8 1 » 1301 /
16
32 47
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the SVCC (RED)
HDS.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 6.
sensor. ■
NO—Go to step 10.

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 47P C O N N EC TO R V S A M O D U L A T O R -C O N TR O L U N IT 47P C O N N EC TO R
STR -A (RED/YEL) STR -D (B LU /O R N ) STR-A (RED/YEL) STR-D (B L U /O R N )
1 1 2 1 3 I 4 | B | 6 l / l / l 9 I / 1 11 l / L / I 1 4 1 / 1 16 T 5 I il7 r B T ? l7 l7 m 7 m / 1 4 /
17| 181 / | 20 l / l / l / l / l / l 2 6 1 / | 2 8 12 9 13 0 1 / 1^118 l / l 2 0 l / | / | / l / [ / | 2 6 1 / 1 ^
32 47
|3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/ |3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/ |4 1 k M / l / l / l |3 3 l3 4 :3 5 |/|3 7 i3 8 |3 9 |/|4 1 k f c l / l / l / l
STR-B STR-B
(YEL/R ED ) (YEL/RED)
Wire side of fem ale terminals Wire side of fem ale terminals
Is t h e r e 0.1 V o r m o r e ? I s t h e r e c o n t in u i t y ?
YES—Repair short to power in the wire between YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
the VSA modulator-control unit, the steering angle between the VSA modulator-control unit, the
sensor and the yaw rate-lateral acceleration steering angle sensor and the yaw rate-lateral
sensor. acceleration sensor. ■
NO—Goto step 11. NO—Go to step 14.
control unit 47P connector terminals No. 33, No. 35
12. Check for continuity between body ground and and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector No. 1, No. 5 individually.
terminals No. 33, No. 35 individually.
V S A M O D U L A T O R -C O N TR O L U N IT 47P CON N EC TO R
V S A M O D U LA TO R -C O N TR O L U N IT 47P C O N N EC TO R
I 2 If I4 I 5 ] 6 l / l / l 9 M l1 .1 /J /[ u |7 L
i7| i 8 M a | / | / | / l A / m A m m m j /
1 I 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 l / l / l 9 |/|1 1 l / l / l m |/ |
16 33134[ 35 [ / ] 3 7 1 3 8 1 3 9 t / j 41
17 | 1 8 ) ^ 1 2 0 l / l / l / l / l / l 2 6 1 / | 2 8 12 9 13 0 1/^
32 47 SGND I SVCC (RED)
|3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/|3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/|4 1 k | 4 3 | / | / | / |
(LT BLU)
SGND SVCC (RED)
(LT BLU)
STEERING ANGLE
SEN SO R
5P C O NNECTOR


between the VSA modulator-control unit, the
steering angle sensor and the yaw rate-lateral NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
acceleration sensor. ■ modulator-control unit and the steering angle
sensor. ■
(confd)
15. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 16. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor.
control unit 47P connector terminals No. 28, No. 29,
No. 43 and steering angle sensor 5P connector 17. Reconnect all connectors.
STR-A (RED/YEL) STR-D (BLU/ORN)

lV| 18L/l20\ A A / \ A A 261/131 13017 HDS.
32 l33|34j35M37|38|39M41 \4Z\as\AAA 47
STR-B 21. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
m J (YEL/RED)
STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR 22. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
5P CONNECTOR YEL/RED
11 I 2 [T| 4| iT Is D T C 2 7 indicated?
RED/YEL I 1BLU/ORN
YES—Checkfor loose terminals in the VSA
Wire side of female terminals modulator-control unit 47P connector. Inspect for
poor or loose connection at G302. If necessary,
Is there continuity? substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
NO—Replace the original steering angle sensor
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA (see page 19-96). ■
modulator-control unit and the steering angle
sensor. ■
DTC 28: Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor 9. Measure the voltage between body ground and
(4WD) VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector
term inals No. 33, No. 35, and No. 39 individually.
NOTE: If DTC 64 is stored at the same tim e as DTC 28,
troubleshoot DTC 64 first, then recheck for DTC 28. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR

1 | 2 | 3 j 4 | 5 | 6 l / l / | 9 l / | 111 / | / | 1 4 [/| 16
17| 181 /| 20 \7\7\7\7\T\26 \/\ 129130 [ /
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 32 133134135I / I 371381391/141 \az\a s\A7\A 47
SGND SVCC GLONG
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the (LT BLU) (RED) (GRN/RED)
HDS.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of fem ale terminals
Is th e r e 0 .1 V o r m o r e ?
YES—Goto step 6.
sensor. ■
NO—Goto step 10.
connector, steering angle sensor 5P connector, and
(cont'd)
11. Check for continuity between body ground and rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector terminal No. 2.
1 12 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 M/1 9 I / ] 11 l / l / l 1 4 M 16
17| 1 s |/| 20l / l / l / l / l / l 261/1281291301/
1 | 2 |3 | 4 | 5 I 6 l / l / l 9 | / | 11 l / l / l I j ^ l / I 16 32 i33|34|35|/l37|38|39|/|41 |4 2 |4 3 |/|/|/1 47
1?| 1 8 |/| 201 / | / | / | / | / | 2 6 I / I 28|29|30|/
32 |3 3 |3 4 !3 5 |/|3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/|4 1 1 4 2 |4 3 |/|/|/| 47 SVCC (RED)
SGND SVCC GLONG
(LT BLU) (RED) (GRN/RED)
YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION
RED SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
juj
12
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire YES—Goto step 13.

between the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor and the steering NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
angle sensor. ■ modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
NO—Goto step 12.
13. Check fo r conti nuity between VSA modulator- 14. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 33 and yaw control unit 47P connector terminal No. 39 and yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL U N IT 47P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
W ire side of fem ale terminals W ire side of fem ale terminals
r
1 1 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 8 I / V I 9 |/|,1 1 1 /|/| 1 4 l/| 16 1 16
17|1181 /| 20 l / l / l / l/ l / l 261 /|281291301 / 17(18| / | 2 0 1/ 126 | / i 28 129 130 \/
32
1331341351 /| 371381391/|41 M 4 3 l / l / l / l 47 32 1*33! 34 j 3b ! / i 3713b| 39| / U l 142143 I/I /./* 47
SGND (LT BLU) GLONG (GRN/RED)
YAW RATE-LATERAL YAW RATE-LATERAL

ACCELERATION ACCELERATION
LT BLU SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
GRN/RED
rrfffft in MlzfaUlsI
W ire side of fem ale term ina ls Wire side of fem ale terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral modulator-control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor. ■ acceleration sensor. ■
(cont'd)
15. Check for continuity between body ground and DTC 3 1 ,3 2 ,3 3 ,3 4 ,3 5 ,3 6 ,3 7 ,3 8 : ABS
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector Solenoid
terminals No. 32 and No. 47 individually.
1 1 2 1f I 4.1 5 | 6 l / l / l 9 1/|11 l / l / l 1 4 | / l 16 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
n | 18I / I 20 X A A A A A ^ V W a ^ V
again.
32 133l 34| 35 1 /| 37138 j 391/ 41142143 l / l / l / l 47
MR-GND 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

(BLK) , ,
(0 ) Is D T C 31, 3 2 , 33, 34, 3 5 , 36 , 3 7 , a n d /o r 3 8
in d ic a te d ?
Wire side of fem a le terminals YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? unit (see page 19-100), and retest. ■
YES—Go to step 16. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

modulator-control unit and G302. If the wire is OK,
checkfor a poor connection at G302.B
16. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral

acceleration sensor.

HDS.

modulator-control unit 47P connector, if necessary,
NO—Replace the original yaw rate-lateral

acceleration sensor (see page 19-97). ■
DTC 41,42#43,44: Wheel Lock DTC 51: M otor Lock
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTC 52: M otor Stuck OFF
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
HDS.
4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check for brake drag by HDS.
duplicating city driving at speeds over 30 mph
(50 km/h). Use the brakes often. 4. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more.
D o th e b r a k e s d r a g ? 5. Check fo r DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Repair the brake drag.B Is D T C 5 1 o r 5 2 in d ic a te d ?
IMO—Goto step 5. YES—Goto step 6.
5. Checkthe installation of the appropriate wheel NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
sensor and the pulser for damage, debris, or time (see page 19-38). Check for loose terminals at
excessive air gap (see page 19-102). the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector. ■
: m e Appropriate Wheel Sensor 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

41 Right-front
42 Lsft-front 7. Check the No. 3 (30 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-
43 Right-rear hood fuse box.
44 Left-rear
Is th e fu s e O K ?
Is it c o r r e c t ?
Y E S — Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 8.
YES—If the DTC does not reappear, the most
probable cause for the DTC is that the vehicle might NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. ■
have lost traction in poor weather and spun
around. ■
NO—Reinstall or replace the wheel sensor

(see page 19-102).■
(cont'd)
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P 10. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
connector. control unit 47P connector terminal No. 47 and
body ground.
9. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 16 and VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
body ground.
•j 12 1 3 I f 1 5 16 l / l / l 9 I / 1 11 l / l / l 1 4 | / | 16
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR 1 7 |l8 |/|2 0 |/l/i/|/|/l2 6 |/|5 B |2 9 |3 0 |/
32 47
I 33I34I35I / I 37I38I39I / I 411 4 2 | 4 3 1 / | / | / |
+ B -M R (WHT) | M R-GND
1 | 2 13 | 4 | 5 I 6 | / | / | j f l / l 11 l / l / l 1 4 |/l 16
(BLK) JL
17) 1 8 |/| 201 /1 /1 /1 /1 /1 261/1^ 1291301 / u
32 |33|34|35|/|37|38|39|/|41142|43|/1/|/1 47
Wire side of fem al e terminals Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

YES—Go to step 10. modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).B
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(30 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box
and the VSA modulator-control unit.B 12. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

HDS.
Is D T C 5 1 o r 5 2 in d ic a te d ?


time (see page 19-38).■
DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON DTC 54: Fail-safe Relay
2. Clear the DTC w ith the HDS. 2. Clear.the PTC w ith the HDS..
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
HDS. HDS.
4. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more. 4. Test-drive the vehicle.
5. Checkfor DTCs w ith the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
1$ D T C 5 3 i n d ic a t e d ? Is D T C 5 4 in d ic a t e d ?
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
: time (see page 1,9-38).■ time (see page 19-38). ■
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6 . Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-

body ground.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UN IT 47P CONNECTOR
1 |2 |3 |4 j5 |6 [7 M 9 M lli/[/|l4 M 16
1T| 18 | / 1 20 26 [ / 1 281291301 /
32 j33134|351/137138139l/^ U l k k l / l / l / l 47
MR-GND
(BLK) i
U
Wire side of female term inals

for a loose or poor connection at G302. If necessary,

modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).B
7. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- DTC 61: Low +B -FSR Voltage
body ground. DTC 62: High +B -FSR Voltage
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

1 | 2 ] 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 l / l / l 9 |/|1 1 l / l / l 141/1 16
171181 /| 20l / l / l / l / l / l 261/1 ^ 1291 1 /
32 |3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/|3 T |^N I/|4 1 |42 | 4 3 | / l / l / j 47
HDS.
MR-GND
(BLK)
W ire side of fem ale terminals Is D T C 6 1 o r 6 2 in d ic a te d ?
YES—Check the battery (see page 22-81) and the

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? charging system (see page 4-26). If the battery tests
good, check for loose terminals in the VSA
YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector. Inspect for
modulator-control unit 47P connector, and inspect loose or poor connection at G302. If necessary,
for a loose or poor connection at G302. If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-100), and retest. ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA time (see page 19-38). ■
modulator-control unit and body ground (G302). ■
DTC 64: Sensor Power Voltage 10. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body ground.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR

HDS. 1 12 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 1 / 1 / 1 9 | /| 1 1 l / l/ l 1 4 | / | 16
1T| 181 / | 20 l / l / l / l / l / l 261 /1 2 8 129130| /
32 47
133l 34| 3 5 l / | 3713S| 391/141 k M / l / l / l
SVCC (RED)
©

time (see page 19-38). Check connections at the Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector and
G302.1H YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the VSA modulator-control unit and yaw
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. rate-lateral acceleration sensor and steering angle
sensor. ■
connector. NO—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
8. Start the engine. substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
body ground.
1 1 2.| 3 I 4 j 5 j 6 l / l / l 9 | / | l 1 M / 1 1 4 | / |
16
1T| 1 8 | / | 201 / M / I / 1 / I 2 6 I / I 28129|301/
32 47
133| 34|c® 1/137 i 381391/1411421431 / | / 1 /
SVCC (RED)
I s th e r e 0 .1 V o r m o r e ?

the VSA modulator-control unit and yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor and steering angle
sensor ■
DTC 65: Brake Fluid Level DTC 66: VSA Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA
Modulator-control Unit)
1. Checkthe brake fluid level,
Is th e le v e l c o rr e c t?
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Check for leaks in the brake system. If no HDS.
leaks are found, inspect the brake lining and
replace any worn brake pads.H 4. Test-drive the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the gauge control module connector B 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(36P), and brake fluid level switch connector.
Is D T C 2 5 ,2 6 ,2 7 , a n d /o r 6 4 in d ic a te d ?
3. Check for continuity between terminal No. 4 of the
gauge control module connector B (36P) and body YES—Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
ground. DTC. 11
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B.(36P). NO—Go to step 6.
6. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization

I GRN/BLU
n n. . n... 1".;..;.-.;. n
l|2|3|4|5|6|7 8| 911011112113114116116117118I
n ti (see page 19-98).
119L/l21|2212312412512612712B12$|30131(32133134135136 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

HDS.

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is D T O 6 6 in d ic a te d ?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
between the gauge control module connector B modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary,
and the brake fluid level switch. ■ substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-100), and retest.■
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Check the brake fluid level switch (see page 19-10). time (see page 19-38). ■
Is th e s w itc h O K ?
YES—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

module (see page 22-90). ■
NO—Replace the brake fluid level switch. ■

DTC 68: Brake Pedal Position Switch 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is D T C 6 8 in d ic a te d ?
2. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with YES—Go to step 8.
the HDS. (see page 11-3).
A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ? time (see page 19-38). ■
YES—Do the applicable troubleshooting for the 8. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch
PCM. 11 circuit (see page 11-356).
NO—Go to step 3. Is th e b r a k e p e d a l p o sitio n s w itc h c irc u it O K ?
3. Checkthe brake pedal position switch (see page YES—Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck:
19-5).
• If the problem is gone, replace the original
Is th e b r a k e p e d a l p o s itio n s w itc h O K ? . : PCM.fl : ;
* If the problem continues, replace the VSA
YES—Go to step 4. modulator-control unit (see page 19-100). ■
NO—Adjust the brake pedal position switch NO—Repair the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-5). ■ circuit. ■

HDS.

DTC 71: Different Diam eter Tire

HDS.
YES—Goto step 6.
NO—Intermittent failure, confirm that tire inflation

is set to spec (see page 19-38). The vehicle is OK at
thistime.B
6. Check that all four tires are the specified size and
are inflated to the proper specification.
A r e a ll fo u r tir e s th e c o r r e c t s iz e a n d p r o p e r ly
in fla te d ?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Install the correct tires or set the tires to the

correct inflation (see page 18-5), and retest. ■
7. With the vehicle on level ground, mark each tire

with a small spot of grease. Roll the vehicle until
each of the tires makes two grease spots on the
floor.
8. Measure and record the distance between the two

grease spots.
Is th e d iffe r e n c e b e tw e e n th e s h o r te s t a n d th e
lo n g e s t m e a s u r e m e n t m o r e th a n 1 0 % ?
YES—Replace the tire/tires that is smaller or larger

than the others.*
NO—Check for loose terminals in the VSA

DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)-. ,
2. Check for other DTCs with the HDS. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
is a n o th e r D T C in d ic a te d ?
1 T i l s i i T s i T C / i T r s i / w i T r u r / r 16
it| m \ A 2 . o \ y \ A A / \ A m \ / \ 2 8 \ 2 9 \ m \ /
YES—Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the 32
|33 | 34|35'| /l3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/|4 1 W \te \A A A 47
DTC.B SVCC IRED)
NO—G oto step 3. (X

HDS.
6. Check for DTCs w ith the HDS. the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor, and the steering
is D T C 8 1 in d ic a te d ? angle sensor.■
YES—Go to step 7. NO—Goto step 11.
NO—Intermittent failure, the vehicle is OK at this 11. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
time (see page 19-38). ■ control unit 47P connector terminal No. 35 and
body ground.
connector, the steering angle sensor 5P connector,
1 J2|3 |415 | 6 I / ] / ) 9 L / h l i / l / | l 4 | / | 16
and the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P 17| 181/|20 l/l/l/l/l/l 26 |/l28129130
connector. 32
|33|34|35|/|37|38|39[/|41(42143|/|/|/f 47
SVCC IRED)
u

between the VSA modulator-control unit, the yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor, and the steering
angle sensor. ■

DTC 83: PCM 8. Check the VSA system for DTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). I s D T C 8 3 i n d i c a t e d a n d n o P C M ’s D T C ?
2. Check for other DTCs with the HDS. YES—Substitute a known-good PGM, and recheck.
If the code returns, check for loose terminals in the
Is D T C 8 6 in d ic a te d ? VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector. If
necessary, substitute a known-good VSA
YES—Do the troubleshooting for DTC 86 (see page modulator-control unit (see page 19-100), and
19-85). ■ retest. ■
NO—Goto step 3. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time (see page 19-38).■

HDS.
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Intermittent faiIure, the system is OK at this

7. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with

the HDS. (see page 11-3).
A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
YES—Do the applicable troubleshooting for the

PCM.B
NO—Goto step 8.
DTC 84: VSA Sensor Neutral Position DTC 86: F-CAN Communication
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the 3. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds, then
HDS. turn the engine off.
4. Test-drive the vehicle. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is D T C 8 6 in d ic a te d ?
Is D T C 8 4 in d ic a te d ? YES—Go to step 5.
YES—Go to step 6. NO—Intermittent failure, the F-CAN

communication line is OK at this time (see page
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 19-38).H
5. Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs with
6. Check for other system DTCs with the HDS. the HDS. (see page 11-3).
A re a n y o th e r D T C s in d ic a te d ? A re a n y D T C s in d ic a te d ?
YES—Troubleshoot the appropriate DTC.B YES—Do the applicable troubleshooting for the
PCM.B
NO—Goto step 7.
7. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization modulator-control unit 47P connector. Inspect for
(see page 19-98). loose or poor ground at G302. If necessary,
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. unit (see page 19-100), and retest. ■

HDS.


DTC 107: TCS Operation DTC 112: Internal Power Source Stuck OFF
DTC 108: VSA Operation NOTE: If the battery cable was disconnected three times
with the ignition switch ON (II), this DTC may be stored.
NOTE: The ABS/VSA indicators do not come on by
memorizing the DTC 107 or 108. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Check for other DTCs with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is a n o th e r s y s te m D T C in d ic a te d ?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the YES—Do the appropriate troubleshooting forthe
HDS. DTC.B
4. Test-drive the vehicle. NO—Go to step 3.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is D T C 1 0 7 o r 1 0 8 in d ic a te d ? 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the

HDS.
modulator-control unit 47P connector. If necessary, 5. Test-drive the vehicle.
unit (see page 19-100), and retest.■ 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is D T C 11 2 in d ic a te d ?

YES—Go to step 7.


8. Inspect G302 for a clean and tight connection. DTC 12 1 ,122,123,124: VSA Solenoid
Is G 3 0 2 c le a n a n d p r o p e r ly c o n n e c te d ? 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—G oto ste p 9. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO—Repair the connection at G 3 0 2 .I 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
HDS.
9. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47 P
connector. 4. Test-drive the vehicle.
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
terminals No. 32 and No. 47 individually. Is D T C 121, 122, 123, or 124 In d ic a te d ?
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR YES—Checkfor loose terminals in the VSA
T z 1 3 | 4 l 5 l 6 | / l / l 9 l / l 11 l / l / l 141/1-L
■ It I 1 8 l y M 2 0 | / l / l / / l / 2 6 l y ^ ^ | 2 9 l ^ l / -
13313 4 135 l / l 3 7 13813 9 1 /1 4 1 14-2143 l / l / l / l

GND (BLK) MR-GND time (see page 19-38).B
(BLK)


modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).B
ABS indicator does not come on ABS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS
indicator. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
D o e s th e A B S in d ic a to r c o m e o n fo r s e v e r a l 2. Check the No. 2 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary under

seconds? hood fuse box.
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 'fs th e f u s e O K ?

time (see page 19-38).B
YES—Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO—Goto step 2.
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is
2. Apply the parking brake. blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse
circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the VSA
D o e s th e b r a k e s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n ? modulator-control unit (see page 19-100). ■
YES—Go to step 3. 3. Check the No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the driver's under
NO—Repair open in the gauge control module
indicator power source circuit® Is th e fu s e O K ?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES—Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 4.
4. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is
connector. blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). modulator-control unit (see page 19-100).■
D o e s th e V S A in d ic a to r c o m e o n ? 4. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P

connector.
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

7. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control

unit (see page 19-100).
D o e s th e A B S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
YES—Replace the original VSA modulator-control

unit (see page 19-100).B

5. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator- 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground. 9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR body ground.
| +B -FSR (W HT/GRN) VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
1 I 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 t / l / l 9 |/|111/ | / | 14|/| 16
17|l8|/2 0|/|/1 //^ 2 6]/^ |2 9|30 |/ | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 1 / | / | 9 l / | 11 l / l / l u l / L 16
■j
32 |33|34|35|/|37|38|39|/|411421431/|/|/| 47 1T|181/120 l / l / l / l/ l / l 261/|2B1291301/
32 133[341^5L/13T1381391>/|41142(431/I/1/I 47
gnd m m
u
Wire side of fem ale term inals
W ire side of fem ale term inals

YES—Go to step 6. Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 2 YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
(40 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box modulator-control unit 47P connector. Substitute a
and the VSA modulator-control unit ■ known-good gauge control module, and recheck. If
the test results are the same, substitute a known-
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). good VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-100),
and retest. ■
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 38 and NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
body ground. modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).B
*1 1f | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | / / | 9 |/| 11l / l/ l 14|/| 16

17| 18|/| 20\A A A A A 26l/l 28|29|30| /
32 |33M35|/37|38|39|/|41 k |43M /|/| 47
IG1 (BLK/YEL)
W ire side of fem al e terminals
YES—Go to step 8.
Brake system indicator does not come on 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(Check bulb operation with parking brake)
10. Measure the voltage between the parking brake
1. With the parking brake applied, turn the ignition switch connector terminal and body ground.
switch ON (II), and watch the brake system
indicator. Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
D o e s th e b r a k e s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n ? YES—Replace the parking brake switch (see page

19-10).■
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Go to step 11.
NO—Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again. 12. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-102), and leave the gauge control module
D o e s th e A B S in d ic a to r c o m e o n fo r s e v e r a l connectors.
secon ds?
13. Connect gauge control module connector B (36P)
YES—Replace the gauge control module (see page terminal No. 5 and body ground with a jumper wire.
22-102).■
NO—Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit. If necessary, substitute a known-good GRN/RED
gauge control module, and recheck. ■ n n n i--------- — r
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | e | 7 8 | 9 110 111 12 113 114 115 116 117 118 |
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 119 | / | 21 | 22123124125 126127| 28 129 130131132133 134135136
JUMPER WIRE
4. Release the parking brake.
D o e s th e b r a k e s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n fo r Wire side of fem ale terminals

s e v e r a l s e c o n d s th e n g o o ff?
NO—Check for loose terminals in the gauge control D o e s th e b r a k e s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n a n d s ta y

module connectors. If necessary, substitute a on?
known-good gauge control module, and recheck.B
YES—Repair open in the wire between the gauge
6. Apply the parking brake. control module, and the parking brake switch.!
D o e s th e b r a k e s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n ? NO—Replace the gauge control module (see page

22 - 102 ). ■
NO—Go to step 7.
8. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector

(see page 19-10).
Brake system indicator does not go off, and VSA indicator does not come on
no DTCs are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II ), and watch the VSA
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indicator.
2. Release the parking brake. D o e s th e V S A in d ic a to r c o m e o n fo r s e v e r a l

seconds?
D o e s t h e b r a k e s y s t e m in d ic a t o r g o o f f a f t e r
s e veral seconds? YES—Intermittent faiIure, the system is OK at this
time (see page 19-38). ■ NO—Go to step 2.
NO—Go to step 3. 2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Checkthe brake fluid level (see page 19-8). D o e s th e b r a k e s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
Is th e le v e l O K ? YES—Go to step 3.
YES—Go to step 4. NO—Repair open in the gauge control module

indicator power source circuit. ■
NO—Checkfor leaks in the brake system. If no
leaks are found, inspect the brake lining, and 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
replace the worn brake pads. ■
4. Check the ABS indicator. connector.
D o e s th e A B S in d ic a to r s ta y o n ? 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Read the DTC (see page 19-39), and do the D o e s th e A B S in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

applicable troubleshooting for the DTC. ■
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Checkthe brake system indicator circuit:
• Short to body ground between the gauge control module (see page 22-90). ■
module and the parking brake sw itch.■
• Short to body ground between the gauge control 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
module and the brake fluid level switch. ■
• Parking brake switch stuck ON. ■ 7. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
• Brake fluid level switch stuck ON. ■ unit (see page 19-100).
• Faulty gauge control module. ■
D o e s th e V S A in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?

unit (see page 19-100). ■

VSA indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 4. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P
are stored connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
control unit 47P connector terminal No. 1 and body
2. Check the No. 2 (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary under ground.
hood fuse box.
| +B -FSR (W HT/GRN)
1 16
17| 1 8 |/| 2 0 | / l / | / | / 1 / l 261/128|29|30|/
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is 32 47
I33I34I35I / 37I38I39I/ 4 1 k M / l / l / l
blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse
modulator-control unit (see page 19-100). ■
3. Check the No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the driver's under-

dash fuse/relay box. W ire side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is
blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 2
circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the VSA (40 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse box
modulator-control unit (see page 19-100). ■ and the VSA modulator-control unit. ■

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UN IT 47P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 47P CONNECTOR
1 I 2] 3 14 | 5 | 6 \AA f M i l l / l / l 14-1/1 16 •j 12 | 3.1.4 | 5 | 6 l / l / l 9 l / l 11 l / l / l M i/I 16

n | 1 8 |/ 2 0 | / / | / / ^ 2 6 l/ | ^ |2 9 | 3 0 | / 17l 1 8 |/| 201 / | / | / | / | / | 2 6 l / l 28|29|30|/
32 |3 3 |3 4 |3 5 |/|3 7 |3 8 |3 9 |/l4 1 1 4 2 |4 3 |/|/|/| 47 32 |3 3 |3 4 |3 s |/!3 7 |3 8 !3 9 i/|4 1 k l 4 3 | / | / | / l 47
JG1 fBLK/YEL) GND (BLK)
W ire side of fem ale terminals W ire side of fem ale terminals
Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES—Go to step 8. YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA

modulator-control unit 47P connector. Substitute a
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 6 known-good gauge control module, and retest. If
(15 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay the test results are the same, substitute a known-
box and the VSA modulator-control unit. ■ good VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-100),
and retest. ■
modulator-control unit and body ground (G302).■
VSA activation indicator does not come on VSA activation Indicator does not go off, and
at start-up (bulb check) no DTCs are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II ), and watch the VSA 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA
activation indicator. activation indicator.
D o e s th e V S A a c tiv a tio n in d ic a to r c o m e o n fo r D o e s th e V S A a c tiv a tio n in d ic a to r g o o ff?

several seconds?
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time (see page 19-38).■
NO—Go to step 2.
NO—Go to step 2.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Checkthe VSAOFF switch (see page 19-99).
D o e s th e b r a k e s y s te m in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
Is th e V S A O F F s w itc h O K ?
YES—Go to step 3.
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Repair open in the gauge control module
indicator power source circuital NO—Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-99).
*
4. Do the VSA sensor neutral memorization (see page
4. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control 19-98).
5. Check the VSA activation indicator.
D o e s th e V S A a c tiv a tio n in d ic a to r g o o ff?
D o e s th e V S A a c tiv a tio n in d ic a to r c o m e o n ?
YES—Intermittent fai Iure, the system is OK at this
YES—Replace the original VSA modulator-control time (see page 19-38).■
NO—Go to step 6.
module (see page 22-90). ■ 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

(36P).
8. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 13P connector. 11. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
9. Check for continuity between the gauge control
module connector B (36P) terminal No. 6 and body 12. Reconnect all connectors.
ground.
VSA OFF SW IRED/W HT)
l — ------------- r « « n
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | e5 I 7 12113 11 4 115 116 117 118 J HDS.
CO
119 | / | 21 I 22 j 23 12412512612712812 9 130131132133134135136
u D o e s th e V S A a c tiv a tio n in d ic a to r g o o ff?

Wire side of female terminals unit (see page 19-100). ■
NO—Check for loose terminals in the gauge control

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? module connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module, and recheck. ■
between the gauge control module and the VSA
OFF switch. ■
NO—Goto step 10.
10. Reconnect the gauge control module connector B

(36P).
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the-combination- switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-25) and the cable reel (see page 23-212).
3. Remove the combination switch assembly (see page 17-25).
4. Remove the combination light/turn switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (B).
5. Replace the combination switch body assembly (C).
6. Install the combination switch in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch body.
• When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position (see page 23-213).
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor Replacement
NOTE:
* Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive.
• Do not use power tools.
1. Make sure the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-88).
3. Disconnect the connector (A).
9.8 N-m
(1.0'kgf'm, 7.2 lbf.fl)
4. Remove the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor (B).
5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
6. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization

(see page 19-98).
VSA Sensor Neutral Position Memorization
NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal during this 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the brake pedal
procedure. position switch released.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface. 5. The ABS indicator comes on for 2 seconds and
goes off.
2. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe HDS to
the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's 6. After the ABS indicator goes off, press and release
side of the dashboard. the VSA OFF switch once within 0.5 seconds.
7. After the ABS indicator comes on, press and

release the VSA OFF switch once within
0.5 seconds.
8. The VSA activation indicator blinks two times and

goes off in 1 second, then the system completes
the VSA sensor neutral position memorization.
9. When the ABS indicator, VSA indicator and VSA

activation indicator go off, the memorizing is done.
If the indicators do not go off, retry these steps.

HDS.
3. Short the SCS circuit using the HDS.
VSA OFF Switch Test
2. Remove the switch panel (A).
VSA OFF SW ITCH 1.3'P CONNECTOR
ILL (+ ) ILL ( - )
ri_ -_
1 / / 5
oo
CD
/ 7 / 11 12
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 13P connector (B),
4. Remove the VSA OFF switch (C) from the switch

panel.
5. Check for continuity between the VSA OFF switch

13P connector terminals No. 11 and No. 12. There
should be continuity when the switch is pressed,
and no continuity when the switch is released.
VSA OFF SWITCH 13P CONNECTOR
1/ /
/ i 7 8

VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
2. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector (A) by pushing the lock (B) and pulling up the lever (C);
the connector disconnects itself.
To right-front ' To left-rear
- To right-rear
'To left-front
FLARE NUT
15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m,
11 Ibf-ft)
6 mm NUT
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6 mm BOLT
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Disconnect the six brake lines from the VSA modulator-control unit (D).
4. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit with bracket (E) from the body.
5. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit from the bracket.

Installation -- . .
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit on the bracket
2. Install the bracket with the VSA modulator-control unit to the body.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. Lower the lock of the VSA modulator-control unit 47P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
6. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-8).
7. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 19-98).
8. Start the engine, and check that the ABS and VSA indicators go off.
9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal
brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again (see page 19-8).
Wheel Sensor Inspection Wheel Sensor Replacement
1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or NOTE: Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting the
damaged teeth. wires.
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and Front
pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser.
If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 in.), repair as
needed.
Standard:
Front/Rear: 0.4—1.0 mm (0.02—0.04 in.)
Front/Rear
0.4—1.0 mm
l U J
— -----------------
(0 .0 2 -0 .0 4 in.) " X ----------- " ~ fEEE^
Rear
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If body maintenance Is required)
Honda dealer.
airbags may deploy.
Doors Moonroof
Component Location Index-Front Door .... 20-2 Component Location Index ........ ............ 20-50
Component Location Index-Rear Door ..... 20-4 Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 20-51
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation ..... 20-6 Glass Position Adjustment ..................... 20-52
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement .... 20-8 Glass Replacement ...................... ....... . 20-52
Front Door Latch Replacement ................. 20-10 Wind Deflector Replacement ................... 20-53
Front Door Glass and Regulator Drain Channel Replacement .................... 20-54
Replacement .............................. ...... . 20-11 Sunshade Replacement ....................... . 20-55
Front Door Sash Trim Replacement ........ 20-13 Motor Replacement ................................. 20-57
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip * Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ........ 20-58
Replacement ........... ............................. 20-13 Drain Channel Slider and Cable
Front Door Glass Inner Weatherstrip Assembly Replacement ................... 20-60
Replacement ..................................... . 20-14 Limit Switch Adjustment ........... ............. 20-62
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement .... 20-14 Closing Force and Opening Drag Check ... 20-63
Front Door Upper Seal Replacement ........ 20-15
Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement .... 20-15 Interior Trim
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation ..... 20-16 Component Location Index ........ ............ 20-64
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ..... 20-17 Trim Removal/lnstallation-Door Area ....... 20-65
Rear Door Latch Replacement ....... ........ . 20-19 * Trim Removal/Installation
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and -Pillar Areas ....................... ................. 20-67
Regulator Replacement ................. 20-20 Trim Removal/Installation
Rear Door Sash Trim Replacement ...... ... 20-24 -Rear Side Area ............... .................... 20-80
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Trim Removal/Installation
Replacement .................................. . 20-24 -Cargo Area ................. ......... .............. 20-81
Rear Door Glass Inner Weatherstrip Trim Removal/Installation
Replacement ........................ ................ 20-25 -Tailgate Area .................................. . 20-82
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement ..... 20-25 Headliner Removal/Installation ......... . 20-83
Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement ........ 20-26 * Carpet Replacement ............................... . 20-87
Rear Door Side Sill Seal Replacement ..... 20-26
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ... 20-27 Consoles
Front and Rear Door Position Center Console Removal/Installation ...... 20-88
Adjustment .................. ................ ...... . 20-28
Front and Rear Door Striker Dashboard
Adjustment .......................................... 20-29 Instrument Panel Removal/Installation .... 20-90
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Mirrors Removal/Installation ............................ 20-90
Component Location Index ...... .............. 20-30 Driver's Panel Removal/Installation ......... 20-91
Power Mirror Replacement ................... 20-31 Driver's Switch Panel
Mirror Holder Replacement ........... ......... 20-32 Removal/Installation .......... ................. 20-92
Rearview Mirror Replacement ........ ....... 20-33 Left Middle Panel
Remova l/l nsta IIation ........................... 20-92
Glass Center Panel Removal/Installation ...... . 20-93
Component Location Index .................. 20-34 Right Middle Panel
Windshield Repl acement ........ ................ 20-36 Removal/Installation ........ ................... 20-93
Rear Window Replacement ...... .............. 20-41 * Glove Box Removal/Installation .............. 20-95
Quarter Glass Replacement ..................... 20-45 Dashboard Side Vent
Removal/Installation ............................ 20-95
* Dashboard Removal/Installation ............. 20-96
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement ....... 20-99
Seats Tailgate ,
Component Location Index ...... ....... ..... . 20-103 Tailgate Adjustment ......................... 20-142
* Front Seat Removal/Installation .............. 20-104 Tailgate Support Strut Replacement ....... 20-143
* Front Seat Disassembl y/Reassembly Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement ........ 20-144
-Driver's 8-Way Power ............... ........ .. 20-107
* Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly Fuel Fill Door
-Driver's Manual Height Adjustabl e ...... 20-108 Fuel Fill Door Adjustment ....................... 20-145
* Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
-Passenger's Manual ............................. 20-109 Exterior Trim
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/ Front Grille Replacement ..........................20-146
Reassembly-Driver's 8-Way Power ...... 20-110 Cowl Cover Replacement ..........................20-147
Front Passenger's Seat Riser A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement .......... .20-148
Disassembly/Reassembly .................... 20-111 C-Pillar Outer Trim Repiacement ............ .20-149
Front Seat Torsion Bar Replacement Roof Rail Replacement ....................... .......20-150
-Driver's Manual Height Adjustable ..... 20-112 Roof Molding Replacement ..................... .20-151
* Front Seat Cover Replacement ............... 20-112 Rear Fender Side Molding
Second Row Seat Removal/Installation ... 20-115 Replacement ....... ........ .........................20-152
Left Second Row Seat Door Molding Replacement ...................... 20-153
Disassembly/Reassembly .......... ......... 20-116 Side Sill Panel Replacement .................... .20-156
Right Second Row Seat Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement .......... 20-157
Disassembly/Reassembly ....... .......... 20-117 Rear License Trim Replacement .............. 20-158
Left Second Row Seat Linkage Rear Door Protection Tape
Disassembly/Reassembly ........... ...... . 20-118 Replacement .........................................20-159
Right Second Row Seat Linkage Emblem Replacement ............................. .20-160
Disassembly/Reassembly .................... 20-119
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Fenderwell
Replacement ................ 20-120 Front Inner Fender Replacement ............ 20-161
Second Row Seat-back Recline Cable Splash Shield Replacement ....... .............. 20-162
Replacement ....................................... 20-122 Front Fender Fairing Replacement ....... . 20-163
Third Row Seat Access Cable Rear Fender Cover Replacement ............. 20-164
Replacement ............ ...... .................. . 20-122 Fenderwell Trim Replacement ............. 20-164
Second Row Seat Beverage Holder/Tray Rear Air Outlet Replacement .............. . 20-165
Replacement ....... ..... . 20-123 Left Front Splash Guard Reinforcement
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement .... 20-124 Replacement ...... .............................. . 20-165
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation ....... 20-128
Third Row Seat Openers
Disassembly/Reassembly ...................... 20-129 Component Location Index .................. . 20-166
Third Row Seat Recline Adjuster Hood Opener Cable Repiacement ............ 20-167
Replacement ....................... . 20-130 * Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable
Right Third Row Seat Pivot ; Replacement ........................................ 20-168
Replacement ........................... ....... . 20-131 Hood Release Handle Replacement ......... 20-169
Third Row Seat-back Recline Lever Hood Latch Replacement ............ ....... . 20-169
Repiacement .......... ..... ........................ 20-132 Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement ......... 20-170
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable Tailgate Handle Replacement ................... 20-171
Repiacement ........... ....................... ..... 20-133 Tailgate Latch Replacement ........ ............ 20-171
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement ......... 20-134
Frame
Bumpers Spare Tire Hoist Replacement ................. 20-172
Front Bumper Removal/Installation .......... 20-138 Front Subframe Replacement ............ 20-173
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation .......... 20-139 Rear Subframe Replacement .................. 20-174
Frame Repair Chart ................................ 20-176
Hood
Hood Adjustment ................ ............ 20-140
Hood Seal and Hood Molding
Replacement ........ .................. 20-141
Component Location Index - Front Door
DOOR GLASS INNER WEATHERSTRIP

DOOR UPPER SEAL
SASH TRIM
DOOR W INDOW
OUTER TRIM
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
DOOR GLASS OUTER

WEATHERSTRIP
DOOR
Position Adjustment, page 20-28
PLASTIC COVER
§ LOCK KNOB TRIM
COURTESY LIGHT BULB

COURTESY LIGHT LENS
POWER W INDOW
SWITCH PANEL DRIVER'S DOOR SUBHARNESS SWITCH
POWER W INDO W
SWITCH
IMMOBILIZER and SECURITY
Adjustment, page 20-29

Component Location Index - Rear Door
QUARTER GLASS SEAL
REGULATOR
OUTER HANDLE PROTECTOR
STR IKER
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Disconnect the power door lock switch connector
• KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * (A), then remove the inner handle (B).
•Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent,
commercially available
* Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool
set to avoid damage when prying components.
1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with

protective tape, pry out on the lower portion of the
cover (A) to release the hooks (B), then remove the
cover.
Fastener Locations
► ; Screw, 2
0 )0 5. Detach the clip and release the hooks (A, B), then
remove the switch panel (C). Take care not to
B
scratch the door panel. Disconnect the power
window switch connectors (D). On driver's side,
disconnect the power mirror switch connector (E).
Fastener Location
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the inner handle (A) from the door panel.
-1 Pull the handle forward and out half-way to

release the hook (B).
-2 Pull out the top of the handle.
-3 While pulling on the handle (C), disc onnect the
inner handle rod (D) from the joint bushing (E).
NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened

joint bushing, and replace if necessary.
E
D. \
^ fiiN
6. Remove the m irror mount cover (see step 2 on 8. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
page 20-31). removal, and note these items:
7. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
-1 Remove the screws (B). • Make sure the connectors are plugged in
-2 Release the clips (C) that hold the door panel properly.
with a commercially available trim pad • Push the clips into place securely.
remover (D). • Do the power window control unit reset
-3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward, procedure (see page 22-255).
then release the lock knob (E). • Check the window and power door lock
-4 On driver's side, disconnect the front door operations.
subharness connector (F). On passenger's side, • When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
disconnect the courtesy light bulb socket, and plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
detach the harness clip from the panel. around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
• Check for water leaks.
45 mm
(1.77 in.)
Fastener Locations
: Screw, 2 C | > : Clip, 8
A
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 4. Remove the screw, and release the hook (A), then
remove the lock rod protector (B) by detaching the
1. Remove these items: clip (C).
Fastener Location
• Door panel (see page 20-6)
► : Screw, 1
• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-2)
2. Raise the glass fully.
3. Remove the bolt, then remove the center lower A

channel (A) with the center lower glass run channel
(B) by pulling it downward.
Fastener Location
► : Bolt, 1
5. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A) from the joint

bushing (B) and cylinder rod (C).
NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened joint

bushing, and replace if necessary.
6 . Release the retainer clip (A) with a hook-shaped 9. Disconnect the cylinder switch connector (A), and
tool. Remove the lock cylinder (B). detach the harness clips (B), and remove the
cylinder switch harness (C).
7. Replace the bushing (C) with a new one on the lock 10. Remove the maintenance seal (A), and remove the
cylinder. bolt, then remove the cylinder protector (B).
Fastener Location
NOTE: If the cylinder lock-rod is disconnected,
replace the bushing. ► : Bolt, 1
8. Remove the screw, then separate the lock cylinder

(A) and cylinder switch (B).
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
(cont'd)
Front Door Outer Handle Front Door Latch Replacement
Replacement (cont'd)
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
11. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A). 1. Remove these items:
Fastener Location
2. Raise the glass fully, and remove these items:
• Center lower channel (see step 3 on page 20-8)

• Lock rod protector (see step 4 on page 20-8)
3. Disconnect the outer handle rod and cylinder rod

9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) 4. Remove the latch (A). Take care not to bend the
outer handle rod (B), cylinder rod (C), lock rod (D),
12. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the and inner handle rod (E).
handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door. -1 Release the inner handle rod from the rod
holder (F).
-2 Disconnect the connectors (G).
-3 Remove the screws.
-4 Remove the latch from the hole in the door.
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3
.®nnnD. ! .
13. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items:
• Make sure the cylinder switch harness is routed

properly.
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,
and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
• When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer
door handle bolts loose so the inner protector 5. Instal l the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
does not interfere with the lock cylinder note these items:
installation, then tighten the handle bolts.
• Install the lock cylinder retaining clip on the • Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in
handle, then install the lock cylinder. Be sure the properly, and each rod is connected securely.
clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock cylinder. • Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the • When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water. around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
• Check for water leaks. • Check for water leaks.
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can seethe
bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass
1. Remove these items: out through the window slot. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
• Door glass inner weatherstrip (see page 20-14)
2. Driver's side: Disconnect the power window control

unit connector (A), and remove the screws, then
remove the power window control unit (B).
Fastener locations
► :Scr@w, 2
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
4. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and 7. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
harness clips (B) from the door. of removal, and note these items:
Fastener Locations
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in
C ► : Bolt, 4 D ^ ; Bolt, 3 properly.
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-27).
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
• Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-27).
• Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
5. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then
remove the regulator (E) through the hole in the
door.
6. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding

surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
Front Door Sash Trim Replacement Front Door Glass Outer
Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the door.
1. Turn the door weatherstrip (A) at the rear upper NOTE:

corner portion, then remove the screw. • Put on gloves to protect your hands,
• Take care not to scratch the door.
Fastener Location
► ‘. S c re w ,! 1. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-31).
2. Starting at the rear, pry the door glass outer

weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clips (B, C), then
remove the weatherstrip.
Fastener Locations
B > : C lip ,4 C [ > : Clip, 1
2. Pull up the sash trim (B) to release the hooks (C),

then remove the trim. Take care not to damage the
door glass outer weatherstrip (D).
3. Install the sash trim in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of

• Check if the clips are damaged or stress-

whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
• Push the clips into place securely.
Front Door Glass Inner Front Door Weatherstrip
Weatherstrip Replacement Replacement
NOTE: NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Take care not to scratch the door and molding. • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting
bolt (A),
2. Pull the door glass inner weatherstrip (A) up, then
Fastener Locations
remove it.
A ^ :B o lt,1 B[> : Clip, 20 C |> : Clip, 3

removal.
29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft)
2. Detach the clips (B, C), then remove the door

weatherstrip (D).


new ones.
• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
holder (E) securely.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the door checker
mounting bolt before installation.
Front Door Upper Seal Replacement Front Door Side Sill Seal
Replacement
NOTE:
• Use a clip remover to remove the clip. NOTE:
1. Remove these items: • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
• Power mirror (see page 20-31) 1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
• Door sash trim (see page 20-13) (A).
Fastener Locations
2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip, then remove the
door upper seal (A). > : Clip, 13
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of


new ones.
3. Install the upper seal in the reverse order of

Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,

and if necessary, replace it with new one.
Push the clip into place securely.
Make sure the upper seal is installed in the
holder (B) securely.
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A, B, C),
• KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * then remove the switch panel (D). Take care not to
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, scratch the door panel. Disconnect the power
commercially available window switch connector (E).
Fastener Locations
| > : Clip, 2
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool
set to avoid damage when prying components.
1. Lower the glass fully.
2. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to

scratch the door panel.
-1 Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with

protective tape, pry out on the lower portion of
the cover (B) to release the hooks (C, D), then
remove the cover.
-3 Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way
to release the hook (E).
-4 Disconnect the inner handle rod (F) from the
joint bushing (G).
NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened

joint bushing, and replace if necessary.
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 2
Rear Door Outer Handle
Replacement
4. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
-1 Remove the screws (B).
-2 Release the clips (C) that hold the door panel 1. Remove these items:
with a commercially available trim pad
remover (D). • Door panel (see page 20-16)
-3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward, • Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4)
then release the lock knob (E).
2. Raise the glass fully.
Fastener Locations
B► : S crew ,2 C l> : C lip ,8

3. Release the hooks (A), then remove the rod
protector (B) by detaching the clip (C).
(0.04 in.) J“ U _ * h!
45 mm (1.77 in.)
4. Remove the screws securing the latch (A), then

lower the latch.
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3
5. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,


new ones.
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly
and the rod is connected properly.
• Check the window and power door lock
operations.
(cont'd)
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the maintenance seal (A), then disconnect 7. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).
the outer handle rod (B) from the joint bushing (C).
Fastener Location

(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the

handle from the holes in the door. Take care not to
scratch the door.
6. Remove the bolt, then remove the protector (A).
Fastener Location
► : Bolt, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgfm , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
9. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the outer handle rod is connected

securely.
• Make sure the childproof door locks operate
properly.
• Checkfor water leaks.
Rear Door Latch Replacement
NOTE; Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Disconnect the inner handle rod (A) from the joint
bushing (B).
1. Remove these items;

• Rod protector (see step 3 on page 20-17)
2 . Raise the glass fully.
3. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A) from the joint

bushing (B) and lock rod (C) from the joint bushing
(D). Detach the inner handle rod (E) from the rod
holder (F), and disconnect the actuator connector
(G). Take care not to bend any of the rods.

Fastener Locations
6. Move the latch (A) through the gap between the

center channel (B) and door, then remove it.
V Jfk l.u
6 N-m
4. Remove the screws securing the latch (H).
(cont'd)
Rear Door Latch Replacement Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and
(cont'd) Regulator Replacement
7. If necessary, detach the lock crank (A) from the NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
door.
1. Remove these items:

• Plastic cover (see page 20-4)
• Door glass inner weatherstrip (see page 20-25)
• Door glass outer weatherstrip (see page 20-24)
2. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then remove them. Carefully lower the glass.
Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2 .
03M D
8. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in

properly, and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the childproof door locks operate
properly.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
Remove the bolts (A, B) and collar (C) from the 4. Pull the upper portion of the center channel (A)
center channel (D). Pull the upper seal (E) away as forward to remove it from the door quarter glass
needed, and remove the screw (F). Pull the glass seal (B), and pull up the center channel through the
run channel (G) away as needed from the center window slot. Take care not to scratch the door, and
channel. damage the door quarter glass seal.
Fastener Locations
A ^ : Bolt, 1 B► : Bolt, 1 F ► : Screw, 1
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the door quarter glass (A) and seal (B) as 6. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the
an assembly from the door. window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside
the door.
7. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and 9. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding
harness clip (B) from the door. surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
Fastener Locations
10. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.

• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
(0.8 kgf-m, 6 Ibf-ft) closed.
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
8. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then (see page 20-27).
remove the regulator (E) through the hole in the • When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
door. plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
• Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-27).
Rear Door Sash Trim Replacement Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip
Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door,
1. Turn the door weatherstrip (A) at the front upper NOTE:

corner portion, then remove the screw. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Take care not to scratch the door and molding.
Fastener Location
1. Starting at the front, pry the door glass outer
weatherstrip (A) up to detach the clip (B).
Fastener Locations
B [ > : Clip, 1 C [ > : Clip, 5
2. Pull up the sash trim (B) to release the hooks (C),

then remove the trim. Take care not to damage the
door glass outer weatherstrip (D).
3. Install the sash trim in the reverse order of removal. 2. Detach the clips (C), then remove the weatherstrip.
3. Install the outer weatherstrip in the reverse order of


new ones.
• Make sure the end of the outer weatherstrip is
attached to the quarter glass seal securely.
Rear Door Glass Inner Weatherstrip Rear Door Weatherstrip
NOTE: NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Take care not to scratch the door and molding. • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-16). 1. At the B-piliar, remove the door checker mounting
bolt (A).
2. Pull the door glass inner weatherstri p (A) up, then
remove it. Fastener Locations
A ^ :B o lt ,1 B !> : Clip, 22 d > : € ! i p , 1

removal. A
8 x 1 .2 5 mm
29 N*m
2. Detach the clips (B, C), then remove the door

weatherstrip (D).


new ones.
• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
holder (E) securely.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the door checker
mounting bolt before installation.
Rear Door Upper Seal Replacement Rear Door Side Sill Seal
Replacement
NOTE:
• Use a clip remover to remove the clip. NOTE:
1. Remove the door sash trim (see page 20-24). • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
2. Detach the door weatherstrip clip, then remove the 1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
door upper seal (A). (A).
Fastener Location Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 9
2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of

* Check if the clips are damaged or stress-

new ones.
3. Install the upper seal in the reverse order of
• Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,

• Push the clip into place securely.
• Make sure the upper seal is installed in the
holder (B) securely.
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: "5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.

Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for
damage or deterioration, and replace them if 6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Check that
necessary. the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (B)
• Wipe the run channel clean with a shop towel. evenly.
® Lubricate the run channel with Shtn-Etsu grease
P/N 08798-9013.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
• Front door panel (see page 20-6), rear door panel

(see page 20-16)
• Front door plastic cover (see page 20-2), rear
door plastic cover (see page 20-4)
• Frontdoor power window control uni t, driver's
side (see step 5 on page 20-6)
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the 7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and
glass mounting bolts (i), then loosen them. on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
Front • Use a 12 mm (1/2 i n.) diameter hose (A).

• Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
• Do not use a nozzle.
• Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from
the door.
12 mm (1/2 in.)
0.5 m (19 in.)
6 x1.0 mm ^B
9.8 N m {1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 lbf ft)
Rear 300 mm (12 in.)

A
8. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed

around its outside perimeter to seal out water, then
install the door panel:
• Front door (see page 20-6)

6x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) • Rear door (see page 20-16)
4. Push the glass against the center channel (C), then 9. Test-drive and check for wind noise.
tighten the glass mounting bolts.
Front and Rear Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for 4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
edges and the body. Check that the door and body rear of the doors flush with the body.
edges are parallel.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when

adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the door (A):
• Loosen the door mounting bolts (B) slightly, and

move the door up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps, and in or out until it's flush
with the body.
• Pad a floor jack (C) with shop towels (D), then use
the jack to support the door to prevent damage to
the door while adjusting it.
5. Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot portions of

the hinges indicated by the arrows.
6. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts,

and around the hinges.
7. Check for water leaks.

(3.0 kgf-m, 29 N-m
22 ibf-ft) (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft) 8. Test-drive and check for wind noise.
3. If necessary, replace the hinge mounting bolts (E)

with the adjusting bolts (P/N 90102-SFA-305) made
specifically for door adjustment, then adjust at the
hinges (F): Loosen the hinge mounting bolts (E, G)
slightly, and move the door backward or forward,
up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming

it If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B).
2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the

striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (C). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door

against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
Without Compass With Compass
MOUNT
SPRING
REARVIEW MIRROR REARVIEW MIRROR

Power Mirror Replacement
1. Lower the door glass fully. 5. While holding the mirror, push in on the connector
clips (A), then push out to remove the mirror (B).
2. Carefully detach the clips, and release the hooks Take care not to scratch the door.
(A, B), then pry out the mirror mount cover (C) by
hand in the sequence shown.
Fastener Locations
0 : Cli p, 2
3. Disconnect the connector (A).

6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,
Fastener Locations and note these items:
► : Bolt, 3
new ones.
4. While holding the mirror, remove the bolts

securing the mirror.
Mirror Holder Replacement
1. Push in the bottom of the mirror holder (A).
2. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with a shop

towel at the bottom gap between the mirror holder
and mirror (B). Push the mirror holder upward to
release the hooks (C, D) from the actuator adapter
plate (E) while holding the mirror holder.
3. If equipped, disconnect the mirror defogger

terminals (A).
4. Install the mirror holder in the reverse order of

• Make sure the terminals are plugged in properly.

• Push the mirror holder downward to lock in the
hooks.
• Push in the bottom of the mirror fully before you
push on the mirror holder.
• Check the operation of the actuator.
Rearview Mirror Replacement
1. With compass: Slide the mirror harness upper 3. Turn the rearview mirror base (A) 90 °.
cover (A) forward, then remove the mirror harness
lower cover (B).
4. Slide the rearview mirror (A) down toward the

bottom of the windshield to detach it from the
spring (B) in the mount (C).
5. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount.
6. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of

removal.
UPPER RUBBER DAM

(Required for replacement or reinstallation)
UPPER CLIP, 2
UPPER RUBBER DAM (Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
(Required for replacement
or reinstallation)
MOLDING UPPER SEAL, 2
UPPER CLIP, 2
(Clip-type, body side)
or reinstallation)
WINDSHIELD
MOLDING
SIDE RUBBER DAM, 2

or reinstallation)
WINDSHIELD LOWER RUBBER DAM

Repl acement page 20-36
DASHBOARD SEAL
MOLDING SIDE SEAL, 2
SIDE SPACER, 4
Windshield Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole
• Available through the American Honda Tool and through the rubber dam, adhesive, and dashboard
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 seal from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of
the glass. Push a piece of piano wire through the
NOTE: hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
avoid damage when prying components. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
• Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to
with a piano wire. prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
• When replacing a broken windshield, a commercially (C) around the entire windshield.
available windshield cutter can be efficiently used for
cutting the adhesive. For details, follow the
instructions of the tool manufacturer.
• Rearview mirror (see page 20-33)

• A-pillartrim, both sides (see page 20-67)
• Windshield wiper arms (see page 22-201)
• Cowl covers (see page 20-147)
2. Remove the molding (A) from the edge of the

windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a
utility knife.
3. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, make

alignment marks across the glass and body with a
grease pencil.
4. Pull down the front portion of the headliner

(see page 20-83). Take care not to bend the
headliner excessively, as you may crease or break
it.
8. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a ■ 11. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), side rubber dam
thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding .(B), and lower rubber dam (C) with adhesive tape
surface around the entire windshield opening where the clips (D) will be applied, then attach the
flange: clips with adhesive tape and dashboard seal (E) to
the inside face of the windshield (F) as shown:
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper • Be sure the side rubber dam, lower rubber dam,
bonding. and dashboard seal line up with the alignment
• Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the marks (G).
body. • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive will be applied.
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, Rubber dam adhesive tape:
grease and water from getting on the clean surface. Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Width 4 mm (0.16 i n.)
10. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, use a putty Cl ips adhesive tape:
knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the Thickness 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
rubber dam, and the dashboard seal from the Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
windshield. Clean the inside face and the edge of
the windshield with alcohol where new adhesive '/fz : Appl y primer here.
will be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is
kept free of water, oil, and grease.
(confd)
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
12. Apply primer to the edge of the windshield 14. Attach the molding upper seal (A) and molding side
between the alignment marks (A). Be careful not to seal (B) to the inside surface of the molding (C) with
touch the windshield where adhesive will be adhesive tape as shown:
applied.
• Be sure the molding upper seal and molding side
seal line up with the alignment dots (D).
• Be careful not to touch the windshield where
Alignment dot location
13. Attach the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the
edge of the windshield (C):
• Be sure the alignment mark (D) of the molding

lines up with the alignment mark (E) of the
windshield.
• Be careful not to touch the windshield where
Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)

Width 4 m m (0.16 in.)
15. Install the clips to the body. 18. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
around the edge of the windshield (A) between the
Fastener Locations
upper rubber dam (B), side rubber dam (C), lower
rubber dam (D), and molding (E) as shown, then
lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
• Apply glass primer to the moldi ng.

• Do not apply body primer to the w indshield, and
do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed
up.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the
windshield is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from the primed surfaces.
16. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it. : Apply glass primer here.
Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield
and body with a grease pencil at the four points
shown. Be careful not to touch the windshield
where adhesive will be appl ied.
Inside
o-it
(cont'd)
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
19. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to 21. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
the original adhesive remaining around the to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
windshield opening flange. Let the body primer dry caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
for at least 10 minutes: around the edge of the windshield (B) between the
upper rubber dam (C), side rubber dam .(D), lower
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining rubber dam (E), and molding (F) as shown. Apply
original adhesive on the flange. the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the
• Be careful not to mix up the body and glass glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each
primer sponges. corner.
• Mask off the dashboard before priming the 2 mm
(0.08 in.)
flange. 13 mm
(0.51 in.)
: Apply body primer here.
20 mm
20. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the Inside
nozzle (A) as shown. 1.5 mm
(0.059 in.)
22. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the NOTE:
opening, align it with the alignment marks made in • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
step 16, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
push on the windshield until its edges are fully with a piano wire.
seated on the adhesive all the way around. • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
• Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for and terminals.
about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
23. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted • Tailgate trim panel (see page 20-82)
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop • Rear window wiper motor (see page 22-215)
towel dampened with alcohol. • Tailgate spoiler trim (see page 20-157)
24. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the 2. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors
windshield and check for leaks. Mark the leaking (A).
areas, let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant:
• Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after

windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be
used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
• Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after
installation.
25. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Install the

rearview mirror after the adhesive has dried
thoroughly.
NOTE; Advise the customer not to do the following

things for 2 to 3 days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
3. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make
grease pencil.
4. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside

edges of the tailgate. Using an awl, make a hole
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the
corner portion of the glass. Push the piano wire
through the hole, and wrap each end around a
piece of wood.
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) 9. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, use a
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive and
wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to rubber dam from the rear window. Clean the inside
prevent damage to the tailgate, and carefully cut face and the edge of the rear window with alcohol
through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear where new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the
window. bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and
grease.
10. Attach the upper corner fasteners (A), lower corner

fasteners (B), rubber dam (C) and spacer (D) to the
inside surface of the rear window (E) as shown:
• Be sure the fasteners and rubber dams line up

with the alignment marks (F).
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where
Fastener adhesive tape A:

'Thickness 0.6 mm (0.024" in.)
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
Fastener adhesive tape B:
Thickness 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
Rubber dam adhesive tape:
Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
Spacer adhesive tape:
Width 6.5 mm (0.26 in.)
Fastener Locatio ns
A t> : Fastener, 2 B t> : Fastener, 2
6. Carefully remove the rear window.
7. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth

to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
bonding surface around the entire rear window
opening flange:
* Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the

body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
• Remove the fasteners from the tailgate.
8. Clean the tailgate bonding surface with a sponge

dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease, and water from getting on the surface.
11. Attach the corner fasteners (A, B) with adhesive 14. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to
tape to the tailgate as shown. the edge of the rear w indow (A) along the rubber
dam (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with
Adhesive tape: Thickness 0,6- mm (0.024 in.) gauze or cheesecloth:
Width 9.5 mm (0.37 in.)
• With the printed dots (C) on the rear window as a
Fastener Locations
guide, apply the glass primer to both side
A t> ; Fastener, 2 B [> : Fastener, 2 portions of the rear window.
• Do not apply body primer to the rear window,
and do not get tailgate and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
U\\ • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
window is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
: Appl y glass primer here.
12. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it.
Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window,
tailgate, and body with a grease pencil at the four
points shown. Be careful not to touch the rear
window where adhesive will be applied.
Inside
12 mm T
(0.47 in.)
13. Remove the rear window.
(cont'd)
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
15. With a sponge, apply a l ight coat of body primer to 17. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
the original adhesive remaining around the rear to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
window opening flange. Let the body primer dry for caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) on the
at least 10 minutes: glass primer trace (B) you applied on step 14, and
around the edge of the rear window (C) as shown.
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
original adhesive on the flange. applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
• Be careful not to mix up the body and glass bead at each corner.
primer sponges.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. 2 mm (0.08 in.)
13 mm m ^ —A
/ / / / / / / / / : Apply body primer here. (0.51 in.)
8 mm (0.31 in.)
16. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the

nozzle (A) as shown.
inside
mm i- J
>.08 in.) f
Quarter Glass Replacement
18. Use suction cups to hold the rear w indow over the NOTE:
opening, align it with the alignment marks you • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
made in step 12, and set it down on the adhesive. • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are with a piano wire.
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
• Do not damage the glass antenna grid lines and
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for terminals.
about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted • C-pillartrim (see page 20-74)
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel • D-pillar trim (see page 20-77)
dampened with alcohol.
2. Disconnect the glass antenna connector (A).
20. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, let the rear window dry, then seal with
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
21. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following

3. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled, make

grease pencil.
(cont'd)
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
4. Pull down the rear side portion of the headliner as 8. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
necessary (see page 20-83). to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
bonding surface around the entire quarter glass
5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside opening flange:
edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push • Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
each end around a piece of wood. bonding.
• Remove the fasteners from the body.
6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano 9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
wire as close to the quarter glass (B) as possible to dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
prevent damage to the body, and careful ly cut grease, and water from getting on the surface.
through the adhesive (C) around the entire quarter
glass. 10. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled, use a
putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive and
the rubber dam from the glass. Clean the inside
face and the edge of the glass with alcohol where
new adhesive will be applied. Make sure the
bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and
grease.
11. Attach the rubber dam (A) with adhesive tape to the
inside surface of the glass (B) as shown:
• Be sure both ends of the rubber dam line up with

the alignment marks (C).
• Be careful not to touch the glass where adhesive
will be applied.
Rubber dam adhesive tape:

B A
Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
7. Carefully remove the quarter glass.

12. Attach the clips (A) with adhesive tape to the inside 13. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to
face of the quarter glass (B) as shown. Be careful the edge of the glass (A) and along the rubber dam
not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
be applied: cheesecloth:
• Be sure the clips line up with the alignment • Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass,
marks (C). and do not get body and glass primer sponges
• Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where mixed up.
adhesive will be applied. • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
Clips adhesive tape: quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the
Thickness 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) quarter glass is installed.
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.) • Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
: Apply gl ass primer here.

B
12 mm
(0.47 in.)
(confd)
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
14. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to 16. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
the original adhesive remaining around the quarter to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
glass opening flange. Let the body primer dry for at caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
least 10 minutes: around the edge of the glass (B) as shown. Apply
the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each
original adhesive on the flange. corner.
• Be careful not to mix up the body and glass
primer sponges. 2 mm
(0.08 in.)
13 mm
(0.51 in.)
W /f : Appl y body primer here.
2 mm
(0.08 In.)
Inside
17. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass over
the opening, align it and set it down on the
15. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its
nozzle (A) as shown. edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way
around.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for

about an hour until the adhesi ve is dry.
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the quarter glass, use a soft shop towel
dampened with alcohol.
19. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, let the quarter glass dry, then seal with
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
20. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following


Water leaks from 1. Check for a clogged drain tube.
moonroof 2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof
panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass
weatherstrip or drain" channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise from Checkfor excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and
moonroof the roof panel.
Motor noise from 1. Check for a loose motor.
moonroof 2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Moonroof glass does 1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
not move, but motor 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the
turns slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
Moonroof glass does 1. Check for a blown fuse.
not move and motor 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
does not turn (glass 3. Checkthe limit switch.
can be moved with 4. Check for a run down battery.
5 mm hexagonal 5. Check for a defective motor.
wrench) 6. Checkfor a faulty relay.
Glass Position Adjustment Glass Replacement
The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass 1. Close the glass fully.
weatherstrip (B), to within 0 + 1 /—1 mm (0+0.04/
—0.04 in.) all the way around. If not, make the following 2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
adjustment:
3. Pry out the lid (A), remove the screws (B), and
B release the hooks (C), then remove both bracket
covers (D).
Fastener Locati ons

B ► . Screw, 2 E ► ; Bolt, 6
1. Remove the bracket cover from each side (see step

3 on page 20-52).
2. Using a TORX T25 bit, loosen the bolts on each side,

and adjust the glass (A).
Fastener Locations 5 x 0 8 mm
► : Bol t, 6 4 N-m (0.4 kgf-m, 3 Ibf-ft)
4 N-m
(0.4 kgf-m, 3 I bf-ft)
4. Using a TORX T25 bit, remove the bolts (E) from

both glass brackets (F).
5. Remove the glass .(A) by lifting it up. Do not 1. Open the glass fully.
damage the roof panel.
2. Remove the links (A) from both sides.
6. Install the glass in the reverse order o f the removal,

and adjust the glass position alignment.
7. Check for water leaks. Use free-flowing water from

a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
water. 3. Remove the wind deflector (A).
NOTE: It is normal fo r some water to seep past the

moonroof into the moonroof frame, and exit out
through the drains.
(cont'd)
Wind Deflector Replacement Drain Channel Replacement
(cont'd)
1. Fully close the moonroof, then place it in the full
tilt-up position.
4. Pry up on the deflector bases (A) and release the
hooks (B), then remove the bases with springs (C) 2. Remove the glass (see page 20-52).
from both sides.
3. Disconnect the rod clips (A), then remove the drain
channel rods (B) on both sides.
A
*
Sunshade Replacement
5. Pull the rear edge of the drain channel (A) up while 1. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-54).
pushing both clips (B), and release the channel
from both hooks (C) of the drain channel slider by 2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both
pulling it rearward. sunshade slider spacers (B).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 4
7. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal,

• Push the clip portions into place securely.

• Full close the moonroof and check the glass
position adjustment (see page 20-52).
8. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray.
(cont'd)
Sunshade Replacement (cont'd)
4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A), 6. Remove the sunshade (A).
move the sunshade forward until you can see both
sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the
sunshade and hooks.
Fastener Locati ons
7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and

both rear sunshade base sliders (B).
8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal,

and check the glass position adjustment (see page
20-52).
spray.
Motor Replacement
1. Removethe headliner (see page 20-83).
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the

connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove
the motor (B).
6 x 1 .0 mm
9 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,


® Check the motor operation.
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the precautions
and procedures (see page 23-19) before doing repairs or service.
• Headliner (see page 20-83)

• Moonroof glass (see page 20-52)
2. Remove the moonroof frame (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands.
-1 Disconnect the motor connector (B), open/close-tilt/close switch connector (C), and the drain tubes (D), and
remove the moonroof relays (E).
-2 Detach the clips (F).
-3 With an assistant holding the frame, remove the bolts (G) starting at the rear, and release the rear hooks (H)
by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame.
-4 With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take care not to
damage the interior trim, body, or seat covers.
3. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, 5. Remove the rear drain tube (A) from the body.
remove the kick panel, driver's or passenger's
(see page 20-65). Tie a string to the end of the front Fastener Location
drain tube (B) then puli the drain tube down out of
the A-pillar.
6. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order

• Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes

4. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, and drain valves using compressed air.
remove these parts; • Check the frame seal.
• Clean the surface of the frame.
• Rear side trim panel, right side (see page 20-80) • When installing the frame, first attach the rear
• Rear woofer, right side (see page 22-377) hooks into the body holes.
Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), properly.
then pull back the trunk side trim panel and pull the • When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the
drain tube down out of the pillar. frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).
• Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as
shown.
Upward
i
spray.
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement
1. Remove the frame (see page 20-58). 4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release
the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the
2. Remove these parts from the frame; frame.
• Sunshade (see page 20-55)

• Moonroof motor (see page 20-57) Forward
3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the

screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C), and cable
tube rear brackets (D), cable tube side bracket
mounting bolts (E) and the cable tube mounting
screws (F) from both sides of the frame (G).
Fastener Locations
A ► : Screw, 2 B ► : Screw, 2 E ► : Bol t, 2
F ► : Screw, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
5. Pivot the glass brackets (G) down by sliding the lift

up sliders (D) back, then sl ide both glass brackets
back with the link lifters.
6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way.

7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel 9. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse
sliders (B) from both sides. order of removal, and note these items:
• Damaged parts should be replaced.

• Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket
(A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
indicated by the arrows.
• Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both
link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed
position.
• Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame
and glass, then check the opening drag (see page
20-63).
8. S l ide the cable assembly (A) and both glass

brackets (B) back, remove the deflector sliders (C)
from both glass brackets, then remove them from
the frame (D).
Limit Switch Adjustment
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-83).
2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully:
• Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown.
• Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass position (see page 20-52).
3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C).
4. Adjust the limit switch (D):
• Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the
switch cams (F) pushes the limit switch (open/close).
• Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (G).
5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to
the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch: Adjust the switch plate until the glass opens and
closes correctly.
6. Reinstall all remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.

Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
1. Remove the headl iner (see page 20-83). 4. Opening drag check; Protect the leading edge of the
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
2. Closing force check: required to open the glass using a spring scale (B)
as shown.
• With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (B), attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
• Have an assistant hold the switch to close the
glass while you measure the force required to
stop it.
• Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
Closing force; 200 -2 90 N (2 0 -3 0 kgf, 4 4 -6 6 Ibf)
5. If the load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check:
• The side clearance and glass position adjustment

(see page 20-52).
• For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any
sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
3. If the force in not within specification, remove the

moonroof motor (see page 20-57), then check:
• The gear portion and the inner cable for breakage

and damage. If the gear portion is broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged,
remove the frame (see page 20-58), and replace
the cable (see page 20-60).
• The moonroof motor (see page 20-57). If the
motor fails to run or doesn't turn smoothly,
replace it.
• The opening drag. Go to step 4.
TAILGATE SIDE TRIM

Remova l/Insta llation, page 20-82
C-PILLAR TRIM
REAR DOOR OPENING'TRIM

B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM

FRONT DOOR OPENING TRIM

Removal/Insta llation, page 20-65
A-PILLARTRIM
HEADLINER
page 20-83
TAILGATE TRIM PANEL
Remova l/ Installation CARPET
page 20-82 Replacement,
page 20-87
TAILGATE UPPER TRIM

Remova l/ Installation,
page 20-82
KICK PANEL
page 20-65
D-PILLAR TRIM
Remova l/Installation, FRONT SIDE OUTER TRIM
page 20-77 Removal/Installation, page 20-65
FRONT DOOR SILL TRIM

REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL
page 20-80 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM
REAR TRIM PANEL

Removal/Installation REAR SIDE OUTER TRIM
page 20-81 Removal/Installation, page 20-65
CARGO FLOOR LID REAR DOOR SILL TRI M

Removal/Installation, Removal/Installation, page 20-65
page 20-81
CARGO BOX
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Special Tools Required.- 3. Remove the kick panel (A).

KTC trim tool set SOJATP201 A - *-,
• Availabl e through the American Honda Tool and -1 Pul l out the door opening trim (B) as needed
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 from the kick panel hook (C) and the door
opening flange.
NOTE: -2 Release the clip (D).
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. -3 Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. clip (E), then remove it.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim too l set to
avoid damage when prying components. Fastener Locations
D [> : Clip, 1 E P> : Clip, 1
W h ite )
1. Pull out the fuel fill door opener knob (A), and
detach the tabs (B) from the kick panel (C)and
B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the front door sill
trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F) and a clip
(G) (driver's), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
F p> : Clip, 5 ■ G t > : Cli p, 1
2. Pull the front side outer trim (H) by hand to detach

the clips, then remove it.
(cont'd)
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas (cont'd)
4. Pul l out the front door opening trim (A) from the 7. Pull out the rear door opening trim (A) from the
trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening trim hooks (B) and around the rear door opening
f l ange, then remove the trim. flange, then remove the trim.
5. Detach the tab (A) and hook (B) from the B-pillar
lower trim (C) and rear side trim panel (D), and pull
the rear door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the
clips (F), then remove it. 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Fastener Locations
F [> : Cl ip, 5 • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
(White)
new ones.
v • Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
6. Pull the rear side outer trim (G) by hand to detach

the clips, then remove it.
Special Tools Required 1. Pull the.front door opening seal away from the
KTC trim tool set.SOJATP2014 * A-pillar as needed (see step 4 on page 20-66).
• Avail able through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 2. Hit the upper clip in the A-pillar trim (A) with a
rubber mallet. The clip is under the '"SIDE CURTAIN
A-Pillar Trim AIRBAG" mark (B). Hitting the clip breaks the
projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the
SRS components are located in this area. Review the grommet (E) and against the body (F). The
SRS component locations (see page 23-1.7) and the grommet becomes narrow.
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before
doing repairs or service. NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new when
the A-pillar trim is reinstalled.
NOTE:
• Follow the A-pillar trim installation procedure
carefully; improper installation could cause the side
curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
.• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when prying components.
• Take care not to scratch the trim and panels.
• The upper clip in the A-pillar trim (A) consists of a
grommet (B) and a pin (C). The grommet expanded
with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The
projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal,
so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the
trim is reinstalled.
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
3. Pull the top of the A-pillar trim (A) back by hand to 5. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
remove the upper clip (B) from the body (C). A-pillar trim with a new one. If the tweeter is on the
removed A-pillar trim and it is reusable.
6. If the side curtain airbag has not been deployed,

remove the upper clip (A) from the removed
A-pillar trim (B). Then check the trim:
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from

deploying, improperly and possibly causing
injury, inspect the A-pillar trim and replace it if it
has any of these types of damage:
- Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
in the A-pillar trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitenings in the clip
seating surfaces (C, D)
• Check if clip (E) is damaged or stress-whitened,
• Replace the upper clip with a new one because it
was damaged.
4. Remove the A-pillar trim (A). Pull the A-pillar trim

by hand to detach the clips, then pull the trim up
from the dashboard (B).
Fastener Location
1
t > : Clip,
(Black)
7. Before installing the A-pillar trim (A}, carefully 10. Reinstall the A-pillar trim (A).
remove the upper clip (B).
A Insert the bottom of the trim into the -
dashboard (B).
-2 Place the trim over the A-pillar (C), and fit its
upper clip (D) and lower clip (E) into holes (F) in
the A-pillar, then lightly push the trim into
place.
NOTE:
• Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
down under the clips and ribs.
• Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too
hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not
hold the trim properly.
Fastener Location
8. Check the overlap between the headliner and E |> : Clip, 1
(White)
A-pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it (see page
23-200).
9. Carefully reinstall the upper clip (A) to the A-pillar C

trim (B). Be sure that the grommet (C) is nearest to
the top of the pin (D) as shown.
11. Reinstall the front door opening seal.

Special Tools Required 1. Remove these items:

KTC trim tool set SCXJATP2014 *
• Available through the American Honda Tool and • Front door sill trim (see step 1 on page 20-65)
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 • Rear door sill trim (see step 5 on page 20-66)
• Front door opening trim, as needed (see step 4
B-Pi!lar Upper/Lower Trim on page 20-66)
• Rear door opening trim, as needed (see step 7 on
SRS components are located in this area. Review the page 20-66)
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before 2. Driver's: Pull the front seat belt lower anchor cover
doing repairs or service. (A) up, and remove the lower anchor bolt (B).
NOTE:
• Follow the B-pillar upper trim installation procedure
carefully; improper installation could cause the side
curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
• The upper clip in the B-pillar upper trim (A) consists
of a grommet (B) and a pin (C). The grommet
expanded with the pin secures it to the body panel (D).
The projections (E) on the pin is broken during 32 N m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft)
removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one
when the trim is reinstalled. 3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A).
-1 While pulling both upper edges of the B-pillar

lower trim outward, pull the top of the trim
back to release the hooks (B).
-2 Detach the clips.
Fastener Locations
> : Cli p, 3
(White)
4. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and remove 6. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (A).
the upper anchor bolt (B),
-1 Pull the bottom of the trim back while releasing
the lower hooks (B).
-2 Detach the clip.
-3 Lower the trim to release the upper two hooks
(C) from the body, and disengage the top of the
trim from the edge of the headliner (D).
32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft)
5. Hit the upper clip in the B-pillar upper trim (A) with
a rubber mallet. Hitting the clip breakes the
projections (B) on the pin (C) and pushes it into the
grommet (D) and against the body (E). The
grommet becomes narrow.
NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one

when the A-pillar trim is reinstalled.
(cont'd)
7. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the 10. Check the overlap between the headliner and
B-pillar upper trim with a new one. B-pillar upper trim, and if necessary, adjust it
(see page 23-200).
remove the upper clip (A) from the removed 11. Carefully reinstall the upper clip (A) to the B-pillar
B-pillar upper trim (B). Then check the trim: upper trim (B). Be sure that the grommet (C) is
nearest to the top of the pin (D) as shown.
injury, inspect the B-pillar upper trim and replace
it if has any of these types of damage:
areas in the B-pillar upper trim
seating surfaces (C)
was damaged.
9. Before installing the B-pillar upper trim (A),

carefully remove the clip (B).
12. Reinstall the B-pillar upper trim (A). 13. Install the B-pillar lower trim (A) in the reverse
order of removal, and note these items:
-1 Insert the upper of the trim into the headliner
(B). • Check if the clips (B) are damaged or stress-
- 2 Place the trim over the B-pillar (C), and fit its whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
clip (D) and hooks (E) into holes (F) in the new ones.
B-pillar, then lightly push the trim into place. • To prevent the side curtain airbags from
deploying improperly and possibly causing
. NOTE: injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them
* Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked if they are damaged:
down under the clips and ribs. - Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
• Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too areas in the B-pillar lower trim
hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not - Any cracks, or stress-whitenings in the clip
hold the trim properly. seating surfaces (C)
14. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Apply liquid thread lock to the front seat belt

upper anchor bolt before installation.
• Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Speci al Tool s Required 2. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * upper anchor bolt (B).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 B
7/16-20 UNF
C-PillarTrim

doing repairs or service.
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
• The upper clip in the C-pillar trim (A) consists of a 3. Hit the upper clip in the C-pillar trim (A) with a
grommet (B) and a pin (C). The grommet expanded rubber mallet. The clip is under the “SIDE CURTAIN
with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The AIRBAG" mark (B). Hitting the clip breakes the
projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal, projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the
so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the grommet (E) and against the body (F). The
trim is reinstalled. grommet becomes narrow.
NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new when

the C-pillartrim is reinstalled.

page 20-66)
• Rear side trim panel, upper portion as needed
(see step 7 on page 20-66)
4. Pull the top of the C-pillar trim (A) back by hand to 6. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
remove the upper clip (B) from the body (C). C-pillartrim with a new one.

C-piliar trim (B). Then check the trim:

injury, inspectthe C-pillartrim and replace it if it
areas in the C-pillar trim
• Check if the clip (E) is damaged or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace it with new
one.
was damaged.
5. Remove the C-pillar trim (A). Pull the C-pillar trim

by hand to detach the clip (B).
Fastener Location
B > : Clip, 1
(White)
(cont'd)
8. Before installing the C-pillartrim (A),

10. carefully
Reinstall the C-pillartrim (A).
remove the upper clip (B).
A Insert the upper of the trim into the headliner
(B).
- 2 Place the trim over the C-pill ar (C), and fit its
upper clip (D) and lower clip (E) into holes (F) in
the C-pillar, then lightly push the trim into
place.
NOTE:
Fastener Location
9. Check the overlap between the headliner and E t> : Clip, 1
(White)
C-pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it (see page
23-200).
Carefully reinstall the upper clip (A) to the C-pillar
11. Reinstall the rear door opening seal.

Special Tools Requi red 2. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * upper anchor bolt (B).
• Avail able through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 B
7/16-2© UNF
D-Pillar Trim

NOTE:
• The upper clip in the D-pillartrim (A) consists of a 3. Hit the upper clip in the D-pillar trim (A) with a
grommet (B) and a pin (C). The grommet expanded rubber mallet. The clip is under the "SIDE CURTAIN
with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The AIRBAG" mark (B). Hitting the clip breakes the
projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal, projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the
so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the grommet (E) and against the body (F). The
trim is reinstalled. grommet becomes narrow.
NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new when

the D-pillartrim is reinstalled.

page 20-66)
• Rear side trim panel, upper portion as needed
(see page 20-80)
(cont'd)
4. Pull the top of the D-pillar trim (A) back by hand to 6. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
remove the upper clip (B) from the body (C). D-pillar trim with a new one.

D-pillar trim (B). Then check the trim:

injury, inspectthe D-pillartrim and replace it if it
areas in the D-pillar trim
• Check if the clips (E) are damaged or stress-
new ones.
was damaged.
5. Remove the D-pillar trim (A). Pull the D-pillartrim

by hand to detach the clips.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 3
<*
(W hite)
8. Before installing the D-pillar trim (A), carefully 10. Reinstall the D-pillartrim (A). Place the trim over
remove the upper clip (B). the D-pillar (B), and fit its upper clip (C) and lower
clips (D) into holes (E) in the D-pillar, then lightly
push the trim into place.

Fastener Locations
D P> : Cl ip, 3
9. Check the overlap between the headliner and

D-pillartrim, and if necessary, adjust it (see page
23-200).
Carefully reinstall the upper clip (A) to the D-pillar
11. Reinstall the rear door opening seal.

Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area
Special Tools Requi red

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
• Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when prying components.
1. Remove these items, then remove the trim in the sequence shown:
• Rear door sill trim (see page 20-65)

• D-pillartrim (see page 20-77)
• Rear trim panel (see page 20-81)
• Third row seat (see page 20-128)
2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
• Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
• Make sure there are no pinches in the belt.
Fastener Locations
Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo Area

KTCtrimtool set SOJATP2014 *
• Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; cal l 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. Remove the trim as shown. To remove the cargo box/remove both rear side trim panels (see page 20-80).
Fastener Locations
t > : Clip, 9
Trim Removal/Installation - Tailgate Area

NOTE:
1. Remove the trim in the sequence shown. To remove the tailgate trim panel, remove the cargo area light.
• Tailgate upper trim

• Left tailgate side trim
• Right tailgate side trim
• Tailgate handle
• Tailgate trim panel
• Push the clips, hooks, and tabs into place securely.
Fastener Locations
A > : Clip, 19 B > : C l ip, 2 C ► : Screw, 2
Headliner Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the sunvisor (A) and holder (B) from both
KTC trim tool set SCXJATP2014 * sides.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -1 Remove the self-tapping ET screws.
- 2 Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder.
NOTE: -3 Disconnect the vanity mirror light connector
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to (C).
avoid damage when prying components. -4 Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (D),
• Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. and turn the holder 90 °, then pull it out.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other
interior trim pieces. Fastener Locations
1 . Remove these items:
• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-67)

• B-pillar lower trim, upper portion of both sides
(see page 20-70)
• B-pillar upper trim, both sides (see page 20-70)
• D-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-77)
• Rear side trim panel, upper portion of both sides
(see page 20-80)
• C-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-74)
2. Release the tabs (A) on both sides with a flat-tip

screwdriver, then remove the sunvisor cap (B) from
the bracket (C). Turn the cap, and remove it.
5 x 0.8 mm
3.4 N-m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the roof console (A).
-1 Remove the lens (B).

-3 Pull out the roof console, and disconnect the
front individual map light connectors (C).
Fastener Locations
(cont'd)
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Lower the grab handle, then pry out the lid (A). 7. With rear entertainment system: Remove the
Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove display cover (see page 22-423).
the grab handle (B). Remove the remaining grab
handles. 8. Pull the center second row seat belt cover (A) down
to detach the clips, then remove it. Remove the seat
Fastener Locations belt (B) through the hole in the cover.
With Moonroof
Fastener Locations
| > : Clip, 4
-1 Remove the lens (B).

-3 Pull out the roof console, and disconnect the
interior light connectors (C).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 4 Without Moonroof
Fastener Locations
9. Pull the center third row seat belt cover (A) down to 11. With the help of an assistant, remove the headliner
detach the clips, then remove it. (A).
Fastener Locations
-1 Remove the roof portion of the tailgate
[> : Clip, 4 weatherstrip (B).
-2 Pull the rear edge of the headliner down to
detach the clips, and release the Velcro
fasteners (C).
-3 Remove the remaining front door opening trim
(D) and rear door opening trim (E) from each
opening.
-4 Lower the headliner.
With Moonroof
Fastener Locations
10. Detach the hooks (A) and pin (B), then remove the
seat belt guide (C), and remove the center third row
seat belt (D) through the hole in the guide.
Without Moonroof
Fastener Location
12. Remove the headliner through the tailgate opening.

Take care not to damage the headliner.
(cont'd)
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
13. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,


new ones.
• When reinstalling the headliner through the
tailgate opening, be careful not to fold or bend it.
Also, be careful not to scratch the body.
• Hold the headliner in place with the grab handles
installed loosely, then install the center second
row seat belt cover. This will center the headliner
front to rear.
• Push the clips and tabs into place securely.
• If the threads on a visor mounting ET screw are
worn out, use an oversized ET screw (P/N 90137-
S30-003) made specifically for this application.
• Check that both sides of the headliner are
securely attached to the trim.
Carpet Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 2. Remove the carpet (A).
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before -1 Release the Velcro fastener (B), then pull back
doing repairs or service. the carpet from under the dashboard and
center console (C).
NOTE; -2 Pull out the carpet from under both rear side
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. trim panels (D).
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
B
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
interior trim pieces.
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-104)

• Second row seats, both sides (see page 20-115)
• Third row seats, both sides (see page 20-128)
• Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-65)
• B-pillar lower trim, both sides (see page 20-70)
• Console side trim, both sides (see step 4 on page
20-89)
• Console rear trim (see step 5 on page 20-89)
3. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal,

• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the

carpet.
• Make sure the seat harnesses are routed
correctly.
• Slip the carpet under both rear side trim panels
and center console properly.
Center Console Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the center lower cover (A).

• Available through the American Honda Tool and -1 Remove the coin pocket (B).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -2 Remove the screws (C).
-% Pull the cover out to detach the clips (D).
NOTE: -4 Disconnect the console accessory power
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to socket connector (E) and console light
avoid damage when prying components. connector (F).
• Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard,
Fastener Locations
and related parts.
1. Starting at the top, gently pull the center front

covers (A) out to detach the clips (B), then pull the
cover out to detach the remaining clips (C), and
remove the covers from both sides.
Fastener Locations
B, C [> : Clip, 6
3. For some models: Remove the center lower cover

(A) with the seat heater switches.

-2 Pull the cover out to detach the clips (C).
-3 Disconnect the console accessory power
socket connector (D), seat heater switch
connectors (E), and console light connector (F).
Fastener Locations
4. Detach the clips and release the hooks (A), then 6 . Remove the center console (A).
remove the driver's console side trim (B) and
passenger's console side trim (C), -1 From both sides, remove the bolts (B) and
screws (C).
Fastener Locations -2 Detach the harness clip (D).
-3 Disconnect the console accessory power
socket connector (E), and detach it.
-4 Lift the console up, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
5. Starting at the top, gently pull out the console rear

trim (A) to detach the clips (B), then pull out the trim
to detach the remaining clips (C), and disconnect
the rear heater-A/C passenger's control panel-unit 9.8 N-m
connectors (D) and console accessory power socket (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
connector (E). If equipped with rear entertainment
system, disconnect the rear entertainment system 7. Install the center console in the reverse order of
jack connector (F). removal, and note these items:
Fastener Locations • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace them w i th
new ones.
• Make sure all the connectors are plugged in
properly.
Dashboard
Instrument Panel Removal/ Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover

Installation Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * related parts.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A).
NOTE: -1 Remove the screw (B).

• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to -2 Pull out on the bottom of the cover to release
avoid damage when prying components. the clips (C).
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related -3 Pull it down to release the hooks (D).
parts.
Fastener Locations
1. Tilt the steering column down. B ► : Screw, 1 C t> : Cl ip, 2
2. Remove the instrument panel (A). <^|

-2 Gently pull out the panel to release the clips (C)
and hooks (D).
-3 Release the bottom portion (E) of the panel
from the steering column upper cover (F).
Fastener Locations
B ► : Screw, 2 C > :C lip ,2
2. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,


new ones.
E


new ones.
Driver's Panel Rem oval/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the driver's panel (A).

• Available through the American Honda Tool and -1 Gently pull out the inside edge of the panel to
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 detach the clips (B).
-2 On the outside edge of the dashboard, release
NOTE; the hooks (C) from the dashboard.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to -3 Gently pull out the outside edge of the panel to
avoid damage when prying components. detach the clips (D).
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
Fastener Locations
parts.
B, D j> : Cl i p, 5
2. On the driver's side of the dashboard, remove the

dashboard side lid (A).
-1 Remove the front door opening trim (B), as

necessary.
-2 Gently pull out along the rear edge to release
the clips and hooks (C).
-3 Gently pull out on the lid to release the top and
bottom clips and the hooks (D), then remove
the lid.
Fastener Locations
t > : Clip, 4


new ones.
Driver's Switch Panel Rem oval/ Left M iddle Panel Rem oval/
installation Installation
Specia l Too l s Required Special Tools Required

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * KTC trim tool set SOJATP2Q14 *
• Available through the American Honda Tool and • Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE; NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when prying components. avoid damage when prying components.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts. parts.
1. Remove the driver's switch panel (A). 1, Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-90).
-1 Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry out the bottom 2. Remove the left middle panel (A).
portion of the panel to detach the clips.
Fastener Locations
-2 Pull out the panel to release the upper hooks
<B), then remove the panel. t> : Cli p, 3
-3 Disconnect the cruise control main switch
connector (C), and interior lights switch
connector (D) and moonroof switch connector
(E).
Fastener Locations
3. Instal l the panel in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items: • Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly. whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress- new ones.
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with • Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
new ones.
Center Panel Removal/Installation Right M iddle Panel Rem oval/
Installation
Special Tools;Required
• Available through the American Honda Tool and Special Tools Required
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 KTC trim tool set SOJATP2G14 *
NOTE; Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
avoid damage when prying components. NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
parts. avoid damage when prying components.
1. Remove the left middle panel (see page 20-92). parts. -
2. On the driver's side, gently pull out on the panel (A) 1. Remove these items:
to detach the side clips, then remove the panel.
• Instrument panel (see page 20-90)
Fastener Locations
[> : Clip, 4
• Center panel (see page 20-93)
2. On the passenger's side of the dashboard, remove

the dashboard side lid (A).
-1 Remove the front door opening trim (B), as

necessary.
-2 Gently pull out along the rear edge to release
the clips and hooks (C).
-3 Gently pull out on the lid to release the top and
bottom clips and the hooks (D), then remove
the lid.
Fastener Locations
| > : Clip, 4
3. Disconnect the multi switch two connectors (A).

• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.

new ones.
(cont'd)
Right M iddle Panel Rem oval/Installation (cont'd)
3. Remove the screws securing the middle panel (A). 5. Instal l the panel in the reverse order of removal,
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3 Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
new ones.
Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
4. Remove the middle panel (A).
-1 On the outside edge of the dashboard.

-5 On the passenger's side, gently pull out along
the top and bottom edges of the panel to
detach the clips.
-3 On the driver's side, gently pull out on the
panel to release the clips.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 11
Glove Box Removal/Installation Dashboard Side V ent Rem oval/
Installation
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before NOTE:
doing repairs or service. • Take care not to scratch the driver's panel or middle
panel.
NOTE: Take,care not to scratch the dashboard and • The driver's side vent is shown, the passenger's side
related parts. vent is similar.
1. Remove the right kick panel (see page 20-65). 1. Remove the dashboard side vent (A).
2. While holding the glove box (A), remove the glove -1 Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape,
box stop (B) on each side. and apply protective tape around the related
parts to prevent damage.
- 2 Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver next to
the upper pivot portion (B).
-3 Gently pry out on the side vent to release the
upper pivot portion.
-4 Release the bottom pivot portion (C).
-5 If necessary, remove the bottom pivot bushing
(D).
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the glove box (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2
2. Reinstall the side vent onto the bottom pivot

portion first, then reinstall it onto the -tipper pivot
portion. Make sure that both pivot portions are
installed securely.
5 x 0.8 mm
i N-m (0.9 kgf.m, 7 I bf-ft)
4. Install the gl ove box in the reverse order of

removal.
Dashboard Rem oval/Installation
Special Tools Requi red Driver's side

• Available through the American Honda Tool and 5. From under the dash, disconnect the side wire
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 harness connectors (A), engine compartment wire
harness connectors (B), door wire harness
SRS components are located in this area. Review the connectors (C), dashboard wire harness connectors
SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the (D), B-DIR CONNECT (E), brake peda l position
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before switch connector (F), and parking brake switch
doing repairs or service. connector (G). Detach the wire harness clip (H).
NOTE:
• Have an assistant hel p you when removing and
installing the dashboard.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body, and
other related parts.

2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and

wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
• Center console (see page 20-88)

• Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-90)
• Dashboard side vent, passenger's side (see step
1 on page 20-95)
• Glove box (see page 20-95)
• Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-65)
• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-67)
• Steering column (see page 17-25)
• A-pillar corner trim, driver's side (see page 20-67)
• Dashboard lid (see page 20-91)
4. With navigation system, remove these items:
• Front seat, passenger's side (see page 20-104)

• Carpet, passenger's side as necessary (see page
20-87)
Middle portion 8 . On the passenger's side, disconnect the evaporator
temperature sensor connector (A), air mix control
6. On the driver's side, disconnect the mode motor motor connector (B), SRS main subwire harness
connector (A), and the in-car temperature sensor connector (C), and antenna lead and wire harness
hose (B). Detach the wire harness clip (C). clip (D). With navigation system, release the
navigation subwire harness (E) and GPS antenna
harness (F) from the floor.
7. On the inside of the dashboard center frame,

disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
connector (A) and rear A/C subwire harness
connectors (B), SRS floor wire harness connector
(C), and detach the wire harness clip (D).
(cont'd)
Dashboard Rem oval/Installation (cont'd)
Passenger's side 11. Remove the bolts (A, B, C, D, E, F), and lift up on the
dashboard (G) to release it from the guide pins
9. Remove the bolt (A), and pull out the passenger's (H, I) on the body.
under-dash fuse/relay box (B). Disconnect the side
Fastener Locations
wire harness connectors (C), engine compartment
wire harness connectors (D), door wire harness A► : Bolt,2 B► : Bol t, 1 C ^ : Bolt,3
connectors (E), interior wire harness connector (F), Ii
recirculation control motor connector (G), power
transistor connector (H), and blower motor
connector (I). D► : Bolt, 5 E► : Bol t, 2 F ► : Bolt, 2
hmrnm
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
8 x 1.25 mm 8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m 6 x 1.0 mm 22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 9.8 N-m (2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft) (1.0 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
7.2 Ibf-ft)
10. Detach all of the harness and connector clips.
12. Carefully remove the dashboard through the front
door opening.
Steering Hanger Beam
Replacement
13. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of
remova l , and note these items;
NOTE:
• Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins • Have an assistant help you when removing and
correctly. installing the steering hanger beam.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the center frame • Take care not to scratch the dashboard.
mounting bolts before reinstallation. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Make sure the center frames are installed on the
center bracket properly. 1. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-96).
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure each wire
harness is not pinched. 2. Remove these items from the dashboard:
properly, and the antenna lead is connected • Instrument panel (see page 20-90)
properly. • Gauge assembly (see page 22-102)
• Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. • Driver's switch panel (see page 20-92)
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system • Driver's panel (see page 20-91)
and the navigation system (if equipped), then • Center panel (see page 20-93)
enter the audio presets. • Left Middle panel (see page 20-92)
• Reset the clock. • Right Middle panel (see page 20-93)
• Do the power window control unit reset • Audio unit (see page 22-373)
procedure (see page 22-255). • Display unit, with navigation system (see page
22-509)
• Climate control unit (see page 21-123)
(cont'd)
Steering Hanger Beam Replacem ent (cont'd)
3. On the driver's side of the dashboard, remove the 4. On the driver's outside edge of the dashboard,
nut (A), and pull out the driver's under-dash fuse/ remove the ground bolts (A), and detach all of the
relay box (B). Disconnect the dashboard wire harness clips.
harness connectors (C), and detach all of the
dashboard wire harness clips and connectors.
A
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
5. In the middle portion of the dashboard, remove the 6. On the passenger's side, remove the ground bolt
ground bolt (A), and disconnect the front (A), and disconnect the dashboard wire harness
passenger's airbag connector (B). Detach all of the connectors (B), keyless entry control unit connector
dashboard wire harness clips, and with navigation (C), and condenser connector (D). Detach a l l of the
system, detach the navigation subwire harness dashboard wire harness clips.
connector.(C), and release the GPS antenna
harness (D) by detaching the clips from the steering
hanger beam.
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement (cont'd)
7. On the front of the dashboard (A), remove the 10. Install the beam in the reverse order of removal,
screws. (B) and front passenger's airbag mounting and note these items:
nuts (C).
• Make sure the dashboard wire harness and
Fastener Locations
steering hanger beam wire harness are not
B► : Screw, 17 C # : Nut, 4 pinched.
properly.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8Nm
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. On the back of the dashboard (A), remove the

screws.
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 4
9. With the help of an assistant, separate the

dashboard and steering hanger beam (B).
T H IR D R O W S E A T S
Removal/Installa tio n /
page 20-128
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 20-129
Recli ne Adjuster Replacement,
page 20-130
Right Third Row Seat Pivot
Seat-back Recline Lever
Seat-back Recline Cable
Seat Cover Replacement,
page 20-134
SECOND ROW SEATS

Removal/Instal lation, page 20-115
Left Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-116
Right Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-117
Left Second Row Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-118
Right Second Row Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-119
Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement, page 20-120
Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-122
Third Row Seat Access Cable Repl acement, page 20-122
Beverage Holder/Tray Replacement, page 20-123
FRONT SEATS Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-124
Disassembly/Reassembly-Driver's 8-way Power, page 20-107
Disassembly/Reassembly-Driver's Manual Height Adjustable, page 20-108
Disassembly/Reassembly-Passenger's Manual, page 20-109
Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly-Driver's 8-way Power, page 20-110
Passenger's Seat Riser Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-1 11
Torsion Bar Replacement-Driver's Manual Height Adjustable, page 20-112
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-112
Front Seat Rem oval/Installation
Special Tools Requi red 4. Slide the seat to the rear, about halfway to access
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * the front riser cover. If equipped with an driver's
• Available through the American Honda Tool and 8-way power seat, fully raise the seat.
5. Detach the clips, then remove the front riser cover
SRS components are located in this area. Review the (A).
Fastener Locations
doing repairs or service. P > : C li p , 4
NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.

2. Slide the seat all the way forward to access the rear
riser cover.
3. Detach the clips, then remove the rear riser cover wait at least 3 minutes before continuing.
(A).
7. Remove the bolts securing the front seat (A).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 4 Fastener Locations
► : B o lt 4
ifr
8. Tilt the front of the seat up, then disconnect the 9. Tilt the front of the seat up, then disconnect the
seat harness connector (A) (driver's 8-way power seat harness connector (A), side airbag harness
seat) or seat belt switch connector (B) (driver's ■ connector (B), and ODS unit harness connector (C),
manual height adjustable seat), side airbag harness and front passenger's weight sensor connector (D).
connector (C), and seat position sensor connector If equipped with navigation system, disconnect the
(D). navigation unit connectors (E) and GPS antenna
harness connector (F). If equipped with AC power
Driver's 8-way power seat outlet, remove the AC inverter unit connector (G).
Passenger's manual seat
/ / /
10. Remove the head restraint.
11. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the

front seat through the door opening.
(cont'd)
Front Seat Rem oval/Installation (cont'd)
12. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items;

new ones.
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
• Make sure each wire harness is routed correctly,
and not pinched.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the seat mounting
bolts before reinstallation.
• Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat all
the way back and tighten ® and (D, then slide it
forward and tighten ® and ® . The driver's seat is
shown; the passenger's seat is similar.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them
to specification with a torque wrench.
• Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
• Reset the clock.
Fastener Locations
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - Driver's 8-W ay Power

SRS components are1located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the precautions
The operation of the driver's seat position sensor must be checked (see page 23-36) after any of these procedures:
• Driver's seat position sensor replacement

• Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement
NOTE:
• Route the seat wire harness correctly.
• Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
• To prevent wrinkles in the seat-back cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad.
PIVOT WASHER SEAT-BACK/HEAD RESTRAINT
PIVOT NUT BACK PANEL

8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
SIDE AIRBAG
HARNESS
HOOKS
SEAT-BACK HEATER HARNESS

(For some models)
HEIGHT INNER COVER
CENTER COVER
CLIP POWER SEAT SWITCH

To seat cushion
cover. RECLINE COVER
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N-m
(4.8 kgf-m, 35 I bf-ft)
CUP
To seat cushi on cover.
SEAT LINKAGE
10 x 1.25 mm SWITCH KNOBS

47 N-m
(4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft) HEIGHT OUTER COVER
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - Driver's Manual Height Adjustable

The operation of the driver's seat position sensor must be checked (see page 23-36) after any of these procedures;
• Driver's seat position sensor replacement

NOTE:
PIVOT WASHER SEAT-BACK/HEAD RESTRAINT
PIVOT NUT BACK PANEL
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
HOOKS
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
Apply liqui d thread lock.
CENTER COVER
10 x 1.25 mm
34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft)
I NNER SEAT TRACK

10 x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 47 N-m (4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft)
47 N-m
END CAP
WASHER 8 x 1.25 mm
t 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Apply liquid thread lock.
HEIGHT KNOB
CLIP
CONNECTING WIRE RECLINE LEVER

Twist 90 °to connect.
RECLINE COVER
10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
47 N-m 34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft)
(4.8 kgf-m, 35 I bf-ft) 8 x 1.25 mm
SEAT RISER 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
Apply liquid thread lock.
Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly - Passenger's M anual

The ODS unit must be calibrated (see page 23-34) after any of these procedures:
• Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components)

• Replacement of the seat weight sensors
• Replacement of the ODS unit
NOTE:
• If the seat-back pad or the ODS unit is replaced with new one, reinitialize the ODS unit (see page 23-33).
TAMPER-RESISTANT SEAT-BACK/
TORX BOLT HOOK HEAD RESTRAINT
10 x 1.25 mm CONTROL HOLDER
10 x 1,25 mm (For some models)
47 N-m 47 N-m (4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft)
(4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft) Use a TORX T45 bit.
BACK PANEL
RECLINE ADJUSTER/
OUTER SEAT TRACK
RECLINE COVER
RECLINE LEVER
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N-m
(4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft) TAMPER-RESISTANT
TORX BOLT
TAMPER-RESISTANT 10 x 1.25 mm
TORX BOLT 47 N m
lOx 1.25 mm (4.8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft)
47 N-m Use a TORX T45 bit.
Use a TORX T45 bit.
CENTER COVER
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N-m
..8 kgf-m, 35 Ibf-ft)
CONNECTING WIRE
Twist 90 °to connect.
OUTER WEIGHT TAMPER-RESISTANT TAMPER-RESISTANT
SENSOR TORX BOLT TORX BOLTS
10 x 1.25 mm (Four places)
INNER WEIGHT SENSOR 47 N-m
Use a TORX T45 bit.
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - Driver's 8-Way Power
The operation of the driver's seat position sensor must be checked (see page 23-36) after any of these procedures:
• Driver's seat position sensor rep l acement

NOTE:
• Replace the bushings with new ones.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions.
• Check operation of the recline adjuster and slide/up-down adjuster.
RECLINE BOOT
RECLINE ADJUSTER
6 x 1.0 mm
SLIDE/UP-DOWN ADJUSTER 8.5 N-m
(0.87 kgf-m, 6.3 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Use a TORXT3Q bit.
LOWER END CAP

DRIVER'S SEAT HARNESS
UPPER END CAP
6 x 1 .0 mm
8.5 N-m
(0.87 kgf-m, 6.3 I bf-ft)
SEAT POSITION SENSOR

6x1.0mm
9 .8 -N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Use a TORX T30 bit.
6 x 1.0 mm
6 x 1 .0 mm 9.8 N-m
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 I bf-ft)
(1.0 kgf-m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
'SEAT RISER
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N-m
CD CHANGER Use a 5/8 inch socket wrench.
BRACKETS
CD CHANGER (With navigation system)
(With navigation system)
Front Passenger's Seat Riser Disassembly/Reassembly
The ODS unit must be calibrated (see page 23-34) after any of these procedures:
• Front, passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components)

• Replacement of the seat weight sensors
• Replacement of the ODS unit
NOTE;
• When tightening the weight sensor mounti ng nuts, starting at the rear, tighten the nuts in the sequence shown.
Improper tightening could cause the front passenger's airbag system to malfunction.
• Make sure the weight sensor connectors are plugged in properly.
• Make sure the weight sensor wires are routed properly so they are not pinched or interfere with other parts.
AC POWER UNIT
(For some models)
Front Seat Torsion Bar Front Seat Cover Replacement
Replacement - Driver's Manual
• SRS components are located in this area. Review the
Height Adjustable SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the doing repairs or service.
seat covers. • The operation of the driver's seat position sensor
must be checked after any of these actions (see page
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-104). 23-36);
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the - Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
torsion bar (A) from the hook (B) with a flat-tip replacement
screwdriver (C), then pull out the torsion bar from • The ODS unit must be calibrated after any of the
the seat cushion frame (D). these actions (see page 23-34):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the seat weight sensors
- Replacement of the ODS unit
NOTE:
• Seats with a side airbag have a "SIDE AIRBAG" label
on the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-
back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without
airbags are different, make sure you install only the
correct replacement parts.
• Do not repair any tears or frayed spots of the seat-
back cover. If necessary, replace the seat-back cover.
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers.
• On the passenger's seat, do not touch the OPDS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil.
Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail.
3. Install the torsion bar in the reverse order of

removal.
*
Seat-back Cover 5. Release the hook strips (A), hooks: (B, C), and inside
springs (D), then loosen the seat-back cover (E).
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-104).
E A .
2. Remove the head restraint.
3. Detach the clips by pulling on the bottom of the

back panel (A) back, then pull the panel upward to
release the hooks (B) from the seat-back frame, and
remove the panel.
Fastener Locations
6. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the

way around. Release the clips (A) from under the
seat-back cover (B), then remove the seat-back
cover.
4. For some driver's seats: Remove the clip (A), then

remove the lumbar support knob (B).
(cont'd)
Front Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
7. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of 4. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
removal, and note these items: way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat cushion cover (B).
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the fasteners, hooks
and inside springs.
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones using commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (B).
• Use only original Honda replacement seat-back
covers.
• Replace the back panel clips with new ones.
5. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat

cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hooks.
S e a t C u s h io n C o v e r • Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-104). ring pliers (B).
2. Remove the seat cushion, driver's 8-way power

(see page 20-107), driver's manual height
adjustable (see page 20-108), passenger's manual
(see page 20-109).
3. Release the clips (A) and hooks (B) from under the
seat cushion, then loosen the seat cushion cover
(C).
Second Row Seat Rem oval/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the bolts securing the second row seat (A).
KTC trim tool set SQJATP2014 *
Fastener Locations
• Availab l e through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate too l from the KTC trim tool set to
covers.
1. Remove the front foot covers (A) from the front of

both seat tracks, and remove the rear outer foot
cover (B) and rear inner foot cover (C) from the
back of the seat tracks.
3. Fold the seat-back forward. With the help of an

assistant, remove the second row seat through the
door opening.

apply liquid thread lock to the seat mounting bolts
before reinstallation.
Left Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend the seat-back recline cables and third row seat access cables.
• Make sure the seat-back recline cables, third row seat access cables, and lock outer cable are connected securely.
I NNER THIRD
ROW SEAT
ACCESS CABLE
I NNER SEAT-BACK THIRD ROW SEAT

RECLI NE CABLE ACCESS TRIM
SECOND ROW
CHILD SEAT TETHER
ANCHOR COVER
BACK COVER
INNER UPPER
BRACKET COVER
LOCK OUTER
LOCK OUTER CABLE
CABLE
OUTER
THIRD ROW
SEAT ACCESS
CABLE
OUTER SEAT-BACK
RECLINE CABLE
SEAT BELT OUTER SLIDE COVER

BUCKLE POCKET
6 x 1.0 mm
11 N-m (1.1 kgf-m,
8.0 Ibf-ft) PIVOT BOLT
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 I bf-ft)
Use a TORX T30 bit.
Right Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend the seat-back recline cable and third row seat access cable.
• Make sure the seat-back recline cable, third row seat access cable, and lock outer cable are connected securely.
LOCK OUTER CABLE
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Use a TORX T30 bit.
Left Second Row Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly
N O TE:
• Take care not to bend the slide cabl e,
• Replace the push nut with a new one.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions.
• Make sure the slide cable is connected securely, and if necessary, adjust the cable.
Right Second Row Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend the slide cable.
• Replace the push nut with a new one.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions.
• Make sure the slide cable is connected securely, and if necessary, adjust the cable.
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement
NOTE: 9. Left second row seat: Remove the clip (A) securing
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat the inner recline cable (B), release the clips (C)
covers. (see page 20-116), then remove the inner recline
• Take care not to bend the cables. cable and outer recline cable (D) from both brackets.
1. Slide the second row seat forward fully. inner
2. Left second row seat: Remove the left second row

seat belt center anchor bolts (see page 23-9).
3. Remove the pivot bolt cover. Using aTORXTSO bit,

remove the pivot bolt from both sides, left second
row seat (see page 20-116), right second row seat
(see page 20-117).
4. Remove the third row seat access trim (see step 4

on page 20-124) and back cover (see step 5 on page
20-125), then release the clips from behind the seat-
back, as necessary (see step 6 on page 20-125).
5. Left second row seat: Lift the seat cushion up, and
remove the outer bracket cover and inner bracket Outer
cover (see page 20-116).
6. Right second row seat: Lift the seat cushion up, and
remove the outer bracket cover (see page 20-117).
7. Return the second row seat-back, and fold down

the seat-back.
8. Pry out the lid (A), and remove the screws securing
the recline lever (B).
Fastener Locations
10. Right second row seat: Detach the clip (A) and Right second row seat
recline cable (B) from the bracket.
#
13. Install the lever in the reverse order of removal,

11. Left second row seat: Remove the screws from and note these items: Make sure the recline cables
behind the seat-back. are connected securely.
12. Remove the recline lever (A) with the recline cables
(B).
Left second row seat
Fastener Locations
Second Row Seat-back Recline Third Row Seat Access Cable
Cable Replacement Replacement
Special Tools Required NOTE: Take care not to bend the cable.
• Available through the American Honda Tool and 1. Slide the second row seat forward fully.
2. Remove the pivot bolt cover. Using a TORX T30 bit,
NOTE: remove the pivot bolt from both sides, left second
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to row seat (see page 20-116), right second row seat
avoid damage when prying components. (see page 20-117).
• Take care not to bend the cable.
3. Remove the second row seat-back cover/pad from
1. Remove the seat-back recline lever (see page the seat-back frame (see page 20-124).
20 - 120 ).
4. Left second row seat: Lift the second row seat
2. Carefully pry out the cover (A) with a flat-tip cushion up, and remove the outer bracket cover
screwdriver at the gap while holding the lever fully and inner bracket cover (see page 20-116).
open. Release the tabs (B) and the stops (.C), then
remove the cover. 5. Right second row seat: Lift the seat cushion up, and
remove the outer bracket cover (see page 20-117).
6. Disconnect the third row seat access cable (A) at

each end, and remove the screw from behind the
left seat-back, then remove the cable(s).
Left second row seat
3. Disconnect the recline cables (A). There is no inner

recline cable on the right recline lever.
4. Install the second row seat-back recline cables in

the reverse order of removal, and make sure the
cables are connected securely.
Second Row Seat Beverage Holder/
Tray Replacement
Right second row seat
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the

seat covers.
1. Detach the clips of the beverage holder/tray panel

(A), then pull the panel upward to release the hooks
(B) and remove it.
Fastener Locations
| > : Clip, 2
7. Install the third row seat access cable in the reverse

order of removal, and make sure the cable is 2. Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the screws, then
connected securely. remove the beverage holder/tray (A).
(confd)
Second Row Seat Beverage Holder/ Second Row Seat Cover
Tray Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
3. Detach the clips, and release the front hooks (A), NOTE:
then remove the beverage holder/tray (B). • Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers.
Fastener Locations
Seat-back Cover
1. Slide the second row seat forward fully.

(see page 20-117).
3. If equipped, remove the beverage holder/tray

(see page 20-123) left second row seat.
4. Remove the screw (A), then remove the third row

seat access knob (B). Peel off the labels (C), and
remove the screws (D), then remove the third row
seat access trim (E).
4. Install the beverage holder/tray in the reverse order
Fastener Locations
of removal, and check if the clips are damaged or
stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them A ► : Screw, 1 D► : Screw, 2
with new ones.
5. Fold the seat-back forward fully, detach the clips, 6 . Release all of the clips (A) from the back of the seat-
and remove the back cover (A). back (B).
Fastener Locations
Left seat-back
t > : Clip
Left seat-back, 14
Right seat-back, 11
Right seat-back
(cont'd)
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
7. Lift and pull out the release button (A), and remove 10. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the
the screw (B), then remove the head restraint way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
guides (C). the seat-back cover (B).
11. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of

8. Remove the screws securing the recline lever (see removal, and note these items:
9. While holding the recline lever (A) away from the cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
seat-back cover (B), pull the retainers (C) out from over the pad before securing the hook and clips.
under the lever (D). • Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ring pliers (B).
Seat Cushion Cover ■ 5. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
way around, and release the clips (AH then remove
1. Left second row seat; Remove the seat belt buckle the seat cushion cover (B).
pocket then remove the left second row seat belt
buckle and center second row seat belt detachable Left seat cushion
anchor complete from the seat cushion (see page
23-9).
2. Slide the second row seat forward fully.

(see page 20-117).
4. Lift the seat cushion (A) up. Release all of the hook
strips (B, C) from under the seat cushion.
6. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat

cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hooks.
ring pliers (B).
A
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation
Specia l Too l s Required 3. On the left third row seat: Release the hooks (A),
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * then remove the seat belt buckl e pocket (B), and
• Available through the American Honda Tool and tuck the l eft third row seat belt buckle (C) and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 center third row seat belt detachable anchor (D)
under the seat cushion.
NOTE:
covers.
1. Remove the front mounting bolt covers (A) from

both front links.
4. Lift the seat cushion up.
5. Remove the rear mounting bolts while holding the

seat cushion.
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 4
2. Remove the front mounting bolts.
Fastener Locations
6. With the help of an assistant, remove the third row

seat through the tailgate opening.

apply liquid thread lock to the seat mounting bolts
Third Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
• To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before
securing the hook strip.
Third Row Seat Recline Adjuster Replacement
NOTE: 6. If necessary, remove the inner bracket cover (A).

• Take care not to bend the seat-back recline cable.
Fasten er Locat i on
• The left third row seat outer recline adjuster is shown,
the left inner is symmetrical and the right inner is
similar except it has the seat belt buckles in place of
the seat belt detachable anchor.
1. Remove the left third row seat or right third row

seat (see page 20-128).
2. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-129).
3. Remove the screws securing the seat-back recline

lever (see step 3 on page 20-132).
4. Remove the back cover (see step 4 on page 20-134),

then release the clips from behind the seat-back, as
necessary (see step 5 on page 20-134).
5. Remove the screw and release the hook (A), then

remove the outer bracket cover (B). 7. Disconnect the seat-back recline cable (A).
Fastener Location
Right Third Row Seat Pivot
Replacement
8. Remove the bolts, then remove the recline adjuster
(A).
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt 2 1. Remove the right third row seat (see page 20-128).

lever (see step 3 on page 20-1.32),
4. Remove the back cover (see.step 4 on page 20-134),

5. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat pivot (A).
Fastener Locations
► : Bolt, 2
9. Install the adjuster in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the seat-back recline cable is
connected securely.
Third Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement
Special T oo l s Required 5. Remove the screw and release the hook (A), then
KTC trim tool set SQJATP2014 * remove the outer bracket cover (B).
Fastener Location
► : Screw, 1
NOTE;
• Take care not to bend the seat-back recline cable.
1. Remove the left third row seat or right third row

seat (see page 20-128).
3. Pry out the lid (A), and remove the screws securing
the third row seat-back recline lever (B).
Fastener Locations
4. Remove the back cover (see step 4 on page 20-134),

Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable
Replacement
7. Remove the screw(s), then remove the seat-back
recline lever (A) with the recline cable(s) (B).
Left third row seat KTC trim tool set SOJATP2Q14 *
Fastener Locations
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate too l from the KTC trim tool set to
• Take care not to bend the cable.
1. Remove the third row seat-back recline lever

(see page 20-132).
2. While holding the lever (A) open, carefully pry out

the cover (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver to release
the tabs (C), then remove the cover.
Right third row seat
Fastener Location
3. Disconnect the recline cables (A). There is no inner

recline cable on the right recline lever.
8. Install the lever in the reverse order of removal ,

and make sure the recline cables are connected
securely.
4. Install the third row seat-back recline cable in the

reverse order of removal, and make sure the cables
are connected securely.
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement
NOTE: Right seat-back

• Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
Fastener Locations
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers. A > : Clip, 3 B > : C lip ,6
Seat-back Cover
1. Remove both front mounting bolts, then lift the seat
cushion up (see page 20-128).
2. Remove the pivot bolt cover and pivot bolt from

both sides, then remove the seat cushion (see page
20-129).

lever (see step 3 on page 20-132).
4. Detach the clips (A, B, C), and remove the back

cover (D) from the frame, then turn the cover to
pass the recline lever (E) through a hole in the 5. Release all of the clips (A) from behind the seat-
cover. back (B). On left second row seat-back, pull the wire
(C) half-way until the end of it crosses over the
Left seat-back middle frame (D).
Fastener Locations
Left seat-back
A [> ; Clip,4 B |>:C iip,7or8
C > : Clip, 1
Ifr IK
Right seat-back 7. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the
way around, then release all of the clips (B).
Remove the seat-back cover.
Left seat-back
6. Lift and pull out the release button (A), and remove
the screws (B), then remove the head restraint
guides (C). Right seat-back
8. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of


cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the hook and clips.
ring pliers (B).
A
(cont'd)
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
Seat Cushion Cover 5. Detach the retainers (A) from both sides of the link
(B), and release all of the hook strips (C) and clips
1. Remove both front mounting bolts (see page (D) from under the seat cushion (E).
20-128).
Left seat cushion
2. On the left third row seat: Remove the seat belt
buckle pocket, the left third row seat belt buckle,
and the center third row seat belt detachable
anchor under the seat cushion (see step 3 on page
20-128).
3. Remove the pivot bolt cover from both sides

(see page 20-129).
4. Release the hook strips (A) from under the seat

cushion (B).
Left seat cushi on

6. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all 7. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order
the way around, release all of the clips (B), and of removal, and note these items:
release the Velcro fastener (C) under the right seat
cushion cover, then remove the seat cushion cover. • To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing all
Left seat cushion the clips.
• Replace all of the clips fastening the seat-back
cover (A) and pad wire (B) with new ones (C)
using commercially available upholstery ring
pliers (D).
C
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
• Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
1. Remove the front bumper as shown.
2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks on both side stiffeners, the corner upper beams, and the center
upper beam securely.
Fastener Locations
A ► : Screw, 2 i ^ : B o lt , 4 C > : Clip, 15 D [ > : C lip ,2 E |> :C IIp f 2
FRONT GRILLE COVER

*
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2Q14 *
NOTE:
• Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
1. Remove the rear bumper as shown.
2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper brackets on both sides securely.
Fastener Locations
A ► : Bolt, 3 B► • Bolt, 2 . C► : Screw, 2 D► : Screw, 4 E► Screw, 2 F f > : Clip, 4
II* 0mm> $)as>
ABSORBER
Hood
Hood Adjustment
1. Loosen each bolt slightly.
2. Adjust the hood (A) alignment in this sequence.
• Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes on the hood hinge
.(B)-
• Turn the hood edge cushions (C), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at the front and side
edges.
3. Adjust the hood latch (D) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left
until the striker (E) is centered in the hood latch.
4. Tighten each bolt securely.

Hood Seal and Hood Molding
Replacement
5. Check that the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A, B), then
6. For some models, check that the security system remove the hood seal (C, D). On Canada models:
operates properly with the hood opened and closed. Detach the clips (A), then remove the hood molding
(E). Take care not to scratch the hood.
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts
Fastener Locations
8. Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch (A)

and hood hinge (B) as indicated by the arrows.
2. Install the hood seal and hood molding in the

reverse order of removal, and note these items:

new ones.
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment
1. Remove the support strut from each side (see page 20-143).
2. Loosen each bolt and nut slightly.
3. Adjust the tailgate (A) alignment in the following sequence.
• Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (see page 20-83). Take care not to bend the headliner excessively.
Adjust the tailgate hinges (B) right and left, as well as forward and rearward, using the elongated holes.
• Turn the tailgate edge cushions (C), in or out as necessary, to make the tailgate (D) fit flush with the body at the
side edges.
• Adjust the fit between the tailgate and tailgate opening by moving the striker (E).
8 x 1.25 mm
18 N-m
Tailgate Support Strut
Replacement
4. Tighten each bolt and nut securely.
5. Check that the tailgate opens properly and locks 1. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip
securely. screwdriver (A) to pry the support strut clips (B)
from each end of the support strut (C) at the tailgate
6. Reinstall the support struts securely. and body, then release the support strut from the
pivot bolts (D). Do not remove the clips from the
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting nuts support strut.
8. Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot portion of

the tailgate hinges (A) as indicated by the arrows.
2. Set the clips (A) to the original position, then

reattach the support strut (B) on the pivot bolts (C)
by pushing on the support strut.
Tailgate
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement
1. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip (A) by pulling out

on it.
2. Locate the painted alignment mark (B) on the

tailgate weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with
the alignment tab in the center of the tailgate
opening, and install the tailgate weatherstrip all the
way around. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
weatherstrip.
3. Check for water leaks.

Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door Adjustment
1. Loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A) slightly. 5. Apply multipurpose greaseto each location-
indicated by the arrows.
6. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts

2. Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it's flush
with the body, and up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps.
3. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
4. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and

locks securely, and check that the rear of the door is
flush with the body.
Front Grille Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-138).
2. Remove the clips, and release the hooks (A), then

remove the front grille (B) from the front bumper
by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front
bumper.
Fastener Locations
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal,


new ones.
Cowl Cover Replacement
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-214).
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A), then remove the front seal (B) and hood rear seal rubber (C). Take care
not to scratch the cowl covers.
Fastener Locations
A > : Cli p, 25 D [> : Cl ip, 6
3. Detach the clips (D), and release the hooks (E, F) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (G) upward. Pull
the hinge cover (H) out from the front fender (I), and release the windshield washer tube (J), then remove the
cover. Take care not to scratch the body.
4. Detach the clips (D), and release the hooks (K) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (L) upward. Pull the
hinge cover (M) out from the front fender (N), then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body.
5. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Push the cli ps into place securely.
A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement
1. Open the front door. 5. Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
2. Remove the screw securing the A-pillar corner trim
(A). 6. Install the clips (A) on the trim (B).
Fastener Location
► ; Screw, 1
7. Hold the trim (A) up, and fit the clips (B) into the
holes in the body, then push on the trim until the
clips snap into place.
Fastener Location
3. Gently slide the A-pillar corner trim (A) to release it

from the clips (B).
4. Using a clip remover, remove the clips from the

body.
C-Pillar Outer Trim Replacement
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove

the C-pillar outer trim (A).
Fastener Locations
2. Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

3. Hold the trim up, and fit the clips into the holes in
the body, then push on the trim until the clips snap
into place.
Roof Rail Replacement
Special Tool s Required

KTC trim tool set SQJATP2014 *
For Som e Models
NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch each cover, roof rail, and the body.
1. Remove the roof rail (A).
-1 Remove the front cover (B) and rear cover (C) by sliding them in the direction shown while pushing the spring
plates (D) through the hole in each bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver.
-2 Remove the center cap (E).
-3 Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the nuts (F) from the front bracket (G) and rear bracket (H).
-4 Remove the bolts (I) from the center bracket (J).
-5 Remove the roof rail. Do not remove the rubber pads from the brackets.
Fastener Locations
2. Remove the center cover (K). Using a TORX T30 bit, remove the nuts (F), then remove the center bracket. Do not
remove the rubber pad from the center bracket.
3. Install the roof rail in the reverse order of removal and make sure the front and rear covers are tightly snapped
into place.
Roof Molding Replacement
NOTE: 3. Install the roof molding(s) in the reverse order of

• Take care not to scratch the body. removal, and note these items:
• The steel core in the roof molding cannot be restored
to its original shape once it is bent. Replace the roof • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
molding if the steel core is bent. whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones. The front clip should be installed on
1. If equipped, remove the roof ra i l and center bracket the body with its hook toward the front, and the
(see page 20-150). rear clip should be installed with its hook toward
the rear.
2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with • Make sure the roof moldings (A) are installed on
protective tape and a shop towel on the body, the clips (B) securely.
detach the clips by prying up the roof molding (A).
Fastener Locations A
D>: Clip
W ithout roof rail, 4
With roof rail, 2
Forward
Rear Fender Side Molding Replacement
NOTE: 2. Slide the rear fender side molding (A) down to

* Take care not to scratch the body. remove it from the clips (B).
1. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the double-sided

adhesive tape (A) along the rear wheel arch side
edge of the rearfender side molding (B).
3. Using a clip remover, remove the clips, and check if

the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if
necessary, replace them with new ones.
4. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive NOTE:
tape from the molding and body, then clean the • Take care not to scratch the door.
molding and body surfaces with a sponge • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
5. Attach the double-sided adhesive tape (A) (3M 5355,
or equivalent) to the molding (B), and fold the • Door panel, front door (see page 20-6), rear door
upper edge of the adhesive backing (C) from the (see page 20-16)
double-sided adhesive tape. • Plastic cover, front door (see page 20-2), rear
door (see page 20-4)
Adhesi ve tape: Thi ckness 2 mm (0.08 in.)
Width 5 mm (0.2 i n.) 2. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the double-sided
adhesive tape (A) along the edge of the door
moldings (B).
Front door
6. Install the clips (D) on the molding.
7. Hold the molding up, and fit all the clips into the
holes in the body, then push on the molding until
the clips snap into place. Rear door
8. Carefully pull the adhesive backing away, and push

the molding into place securely.
Door Molding Replacement (cont'd)
3. From inside the door, detach the clips, then remove 5. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive
the door molding (A). tape from the molding and door, then clean the
molding and door surfaces with a sponge
Fastener Locations dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
t > : Clip
Front door, 12
Rear door, 10 6. Attach the double-sided adhesive tape (A) (3M 5311,
or equivalent) and double-sided adhesive tape (B)
(3M 4213, or equivalent) to the molding (C), and
fold the edge of each adhesive backing from the
double-sided adhesive tape.
Adhesi ve tape (A): Thi ckness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.)

Width 5 mm (0.2 in.)
Adhesive tape IB); Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
Width 5 mm (0.2 in.)
Front door
17 mm (0.67 in.)
4. Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

Rear door Rear door
18 mm (0.71 in.)
8. Carefully pull the adhesive backing (C) away, and

push the molding into place securely.
9. Reinstall the plastic cover and door panel.
7. Hold the molding (A) up, and fit all the clips (B) into
the holes in the door, then push on the molding
until the clips snap into place.
Front door
Side Sill Panel Replacement
1. Remove the front splash guard (see page 20-161).
2. Slide the side sill panel (A) forward, and remove it. The clips w ill stay in the body.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 11
3. Remove the clips from the body.
4. Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
5. Install the clips on the side sill panel.
6. Hold the panel up, and fit all the clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the clips snap into
place.
7. Reinstall the front splash guard.

Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement
1. Remove the tailgate upper trim (see page 20-82). 4. Gently close the tailgate, and lift up on the tailgate
spoiler trim (A) to detach the clips. Remove the
2. Remove the access cap (A) from the tailgate, and high mount brake light connector grommet (B)
remove the nuts (B, C) securing the tailgate spoiler from the tailgate, and disconnect the high mount
trim. brake light connector (C), then remove the tailgate
spoiler trim. Take care not to scratch the tailgate
Fastener Locations
and body.
B % : N u t,3 C # :N u t,2
Fastener Locations
<3 o > :Clip,2
4x0.7 mm
4 N-m
w if
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Disconnect the rear window washer tube (A).
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly

and the washer tube is connected properly.
new ones.
Rear License Trim Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands, 3. From inside the tailgate, release the lower clips (A).
Gently close the tailgate, and pull the rear license
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-82). trim (B) out to detach the upper clip (C), then
remove the trim. Take care not to scratch the
2. From inside the tailgate, remove the nuts securing tailgate.
the rear license trim (A), and disconnect the back
Fastener Locations
up light connectors (B), rear view camera connector
(C). A, C [>; Clip, 4
Fastener Locations
4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:

new ones.
• Make sure the back-up light connectors and the
rear view camera harness connector are plugged
in properly.
Rear Door Protection Tape Replacement
1. Slowly peel up the old rear door protection tape.
2. Clean the door bonding surface with a sponge

grease, and water from getting on the surface.
3. Peel the adhesive backing from the rear door

protection tape.
4. Align the rear door protection tape (A) with the

edge of the door (B), then press the tape into place.
5. Remove the application tape (C).

Emblem Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the screws securing the "H" emblems:
• To remove the front "H" emblem, remove the front bumper (see page 20-138).
• To remove the rear "H " emblem, remove the rear license trim (see page 20-158).
2. Use a piece of string to cut through the adhesive tape on the emblem.
3. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened with isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and
water from getting on the surface.
4. Apply the emblems where shown.
Unit: m m (in.)
Adhesive tape: 3M 4213, or equivalent
REAR LICENSE TRIM SCREWS
5. Reinstall the front bumper and rear license trim.

Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), then remove the front splash guard (C).
-2 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B) securing the front fender side molding (D).
-3 From under the front bumper (E), remove the bolts (F) securing the front bumper and front inner fender.
-4 From the wheel arch, remove the clips (G, H) securing the front inner fender (and splash shield) on the body.
-5 Pull the front inner fender out.
Fastener Locations
B► : Screw, 5 F ► ; Bolt, 2 G > : Clip, 14' H >:C iip,1
^0XOi>
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Splash Shield Replacement
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the splash shield (A).
-1 From under the front suspension subframe, remove the clips (B) and bolts (C).
-2 From both wheel arch, remove the clips (B) securing the front inner fender (E) and splash shield (on the body).
-3 From under the front bumper (F), remove the clips (B, D).
-4 Pull the splash shield out.
Fastener Locations
2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Front Fender Fairing Replacement
1. Remove the front inner fender as necessary 3. From the wheel arch, release the hooks (A, B) from
(see page 20-161). the front fender, then remove the front fender
fairing (C).
2. Open the front door, and from inside the door,
remove the screws securing the front fender fairing
(A).
Fastener Locations
► : Screw, 3
4. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of

removal, and make sure the hooks are installed to
the front fender properly.
Rear Fender Cover Replacement Fenderwell Trim Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rearfender cover 1. Remove the fenderwell trim (A) by pulling it out.
and body.
NOTE: The steel core (B) in the fenderwell trim
1. Remove the rear wheel (see step 2 on page 18-28). cannot be restored to its original shape once it is
bent. Replace the fenderwell trim if the steel core is
2. Remove the rear fender cover (A). bent.
-1 Removethe screws (B) securing the rear

bumper (C) and rear fender cover.
-2 Remove the bolts (D), screw (E), and clips (F),
then remove the rear fender cover.
Fastener Locations
2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge

grease and water from getting on the clean surface.
3. Apply clear sealant (C) into the channel of the

fenderwell trim from end to end.
6x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m , 7.2 Ib f-ft)
Sealant: Cemedine P/N 08712-0004, or equivalent
3. Install the rear fender cover in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: 4. Install the fenderwell trim.
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress- 5. Scrape or wipe the excess sealant off with a towel.
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with To remove sealant from a painted surface, wipe
new ones. with a soft shop towel dampened with isopropyl
• Push the clips into place securely. alcohol.
Rear Air Outlet Replacement Left Front Splash Guard
Reinforcement Replacement
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-139).
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air 1. Remove these items:
outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body.
• Left front inner fender, as necessary (see page
20-161)
• Left side sill panel (see page 20-156)
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the left front splash

guard reinforcement (A). Take care not to scratch
the body.
Fastener Locations
3. Install the rear air outlet by pushing on the hook

portions until the hooks snap into place.
3. Install the reinforcement in the reverse order of

removal.

r tiiN
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle;
• Front inner fender (see page 20-161)

• Kick panel (see page 20-65)
2. Remove the hood latch (A) (see page 20-169), and disconnect the hood opener cable (B).
Fastener Locations
D t> : Clio. 4 E [> : Clio. 2
3. Remove the hood release handle (C) (see page 20-169), and disconnect the hood opener cable.
4. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (D, E) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle.
Take care not to bend the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement
1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle:
• Front door sill trim (see page 20-65)

• B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-70)
• Rear door sill trim (see page 20-65)
• Rear side trim panel (see page 20-80)
2. Pull the carpet back as necessary (see page 20-87).
3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B) (see page 20-170).
Fastener Locations
C |> :C lip ,5 D D > ; Clip, 2
E B
4. Release the opener cable from the clips (C, D), then remove the fuel fill door latch (E) from the body by turning it
90°.
5. Remove the fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable.
6. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal.

Hood Release Handle Replacement Hood Latch Replacement
1. Remove the l eft kick panel (see page 20-65). 1. Remove the bolts securing the hood latch (A) on
the body.
2. Detach the side wire harness connector (A) and
remove the bolts, then remove the hood release Fastener Locations
handle (B).
Fastener Locations
► •.Bolt, 2
2. Detach the hood opener cable (A) from the latch,

then remove the latch from the body.
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the

hood release handle (B). Take care not to bend the
cable.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order

• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected

properly.
• Make sure the hood opens properly.
(cont'd)
Hood Latch Replacement (cont'd) Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement
3. If equipped, disconnect the hood switch 1. Remove the left front door sill trim (see page 20-65).
connector (A) and detach the harness clip (B).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the fuel fill door
opener (A) from the floor.
Fastener Locations
► -.Bol t, 2
4. Install the hood in the reverse order of removal,

• Apply multipurpose grease to each location of

the hood latch as indicated by the arrows.
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and hood switch connector is plugged
in properly. 3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (B), then
• Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you remove the fuel fill door opener.
close the hood.
• Adjust the hood latch alignment (see page 4. Install the fuel fill door opener in the reverse order
20-140). of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the hood locks securely.
• For some models, make sure the security system • Make sure the opener cable is connected
operates properly with the hood opened and properly.
closed. • Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly.
Tailgate Handle Replacement Tailgate Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-82). 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-82).
2. Remove the nuts, then remove the tailgate handle. 2. Disconnect the handle cable (A), cylinder rod (B),
tailgate latch actuator connector (G), and tailgate
Fastener Locati ons
latch switch connector (D), and detach the
connector.
3. Disconnect the handle cable (A) from the tailgate 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the tailgate latch
handle (B). (A).
Fastener Locations
4. Install the tailgate handle in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items: 4. Install the tailgate latch in the reverse order of
• Make sure the handle cable is connected securely.
• Make sure the tailgate opens properly. • Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly and the handle cable is connected
properly.
• Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you
close the tailgate.
• Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
• For some models, make sure the security system
operates properly with the tailgate opened and
closed.
Spare Tire Hoist Replacement
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the spare tire hoist

(A). Take care not to bend the cable (B).
Fastener Locations
22 N-m
3. Install the hoist in the reverse order of removal.
Front Subframe Replacement
Subframe Torque
NOTE;
• After removing the subframe mounting bolts and front suspension subframe stiffener mounting bolts, be sure to
replace them with new ones.
• When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using
a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide.
Reference holes alignment

SUBFRAME - REFERENCE HOLE
(Body side)
STEERING GEARBOX
STIFFENER
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N-m
SCREWDRIVER or (3.9 kgf-m, 28 Ibf-ft)
TAPERED PUNCH
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE
HOLE
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
REAR BRACKET
FRONT SUSPENSION 12 x 1.25 mm
SUBFRAME 117 N-m
FRONT BRACKET (11.9 kgf-m,
88.1 Ibf-ft)
SPECIAL BOLT
14x 1.5 mm
103 N-m
(10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 Ibf-ft)
SPECIAL BOLT 10 x 1.25 mm Replace.
14x1.5 mm 54 N-m
103 N-m (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft) 10 x 1.25 mm
(10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 Ibf-ft) 54 N-m
Replace. (5.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 mm
54 N-m 4WD model:
(5.5 kgf-m, FRONT SUSPENSION
40 Ibf-ft) SUBFRAME BOLT RETAI NER
Rear Subframe Replacement
Subframe Torque
After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
Reference holes alignment
SUBFRAME^
REFERENCE HOLE
(Body side)
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
(Subframe side)
SCREWDRIVER or
TAPERED PUNCH REAR SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
Replace.
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in.) a1,a 2 For bumper beam 011 (0.43) fM 2 Locating hole 028 (1.1)
0 : Inner diameter b1,b 2 For subframe 015 (0.59) gi, g2 For propeller shaft 011 (0.43)
e For engine mount 011 (0.43) h For fuel tank 01 5 (0.59)
d1,d 2 Damper center i For fuel tank 015 (0.59)
el, e2 For subframe 015 (0.59) j 1J 2 For suspension 0 I 8 (0.71)
kl, k2 For suspension 018 (0.71) p1,p 2 Damper center
11, 12 Locating hole 025 (0.98) q1,q 2 . For suspension
m l, m2 Locating hole 025 (0.98) r l, r2 For rear subframe 0 I 8 (0.71)
n l, n2 For fuel tank 015 (0.59) Si, 82 Locating hole 025 (0.98)
oi, o2 For rear subframe 0 I 6 (0.63) t For spare tire hoist
u For spare tire hoist
(cont'd)
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (in.) a l,a2 For bumper beam 011 (0.43) f1 ,f2 Locating hole 028 (1.1)
0 : Inner diameter b1,b 2 For subframe 0 1 5 (0.59) j.1,j 2 For suspension 0 I 8 (0.71)
c For engine mount 01 1 (0.43)
d1,d 2 Damper center
el, e2 For subframe 015 (0.59)
kl, k2 For suspension 0 T8 (0.71) p1, p2 Damper center
II, 12 Locating hoist hole 025 (0.98) q1, cj2 For suspension
m l, m2 Locating hole 025 (0.98) rl, r2 For rear subframe 0 I 8 (0.71)
oi, o2 For rear subframe 01 6 (0.63) si, s2 Locating hol e 025 (0.98)
M14X1.5 M14X1.5
M14X1.5
POINT j1 , j2
POINT s i, s2
V POINT r1, r2
POINT q1, q2
POINT II ,12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)
The Pi lot SRS i ncludes a driver's ai rbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the
Items marked with an asterisk { * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
Honda dealer.
airbags may deploy.
Heating/Air Conditioning Climate Control
Component Location Index ........ . 21-2 Component Location Index ........................ 21-75
A/C Service Tips and Precautions ............... 21-5 General Troubleshooting Information ......... 21-78
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement ............... 21-5 Symptom Troubleshooting Index ........... . 21-84
Front A/C Line Replacement .................. ..... 21-6 System Description ................... ................. 21-85
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 21-7 Circuit Diagram ............ .......... ...... ............. 21-90
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 21-9 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 21-92
System Description ................... ...... ........... 21-11 Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Circuit Diagram .............. .................... ........ 21-16 Troubleshooting ............ ......................... 21-114
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 21-18 ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Troubleshooting ......... 21-116
Recirculation Control Motor Climate Control Power and Ground
Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 21-26 Circuit Troubleshooting ..................... ..... 21-116
Heater Control Power and Navigation Communication Line Circuit
Ground Circuit Troubleshooting ........ ..... 21-28 Troubleshooting ...................................... 21-117
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit
Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting ......... 21-29 Troubleshooting ................................ ,.... 21-118
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed In-car Temperature Sensor Test ................. 21-120
Circuit Troubleshooting ...... ................... 21-33 In-car Temperature Sensor Replacement .... 21-120
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test ....... . 21-121
High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting ........ 21-34 Outside Air Temperature Sensor
A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Replacement.... ...... ................................. 21-121
Troubleshooting .................................... 21-37 Sunlight Sensor Test ................ ................ . 21-122
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Sunlight Sensor Replacement ...................... 21-122
Troubleshooting ........................ ............. 21-40 Climate Control Unit
Rear Blower Motor Circuit Removal/Installation ............................... 21-123
Troubleshooting ........................ ............. 21-42 Climate Control Unit Bulb Replacement ..... 21-123
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting ........................... . 21-46 Rear Heater-A/C
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test ......... 21-48 Component Location Index ............. ........ . 21-124
Front Power Transistor Test ..... 21-48 System Description ....... ............... ............. 21-125
Front Air Mix Control Motor Test ............... . 21-49 Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test .............. . 21-126
Front Air Mix Control Motor Rear Air Mix Control Motor Replacement ... 21-126
Replacement .................. ..................... . 21-50 Rear Mode Control Motor Test ..................... 21-127
Front Mode Control Motor Test .................. 21-50 Rear Mode Control Motor Replacement ..... 21-128
Front Mode Control Motor Replacement .... 21-51 Rear Power Transistor Test ....... ................. 21-129
Recirculation Control Motor Test ........ ........ 21-51 Rear Heater-A/C Control Switch
Recirculation Control Motor Removal/Installation ......... .............. . 21-130
Replacement .................. ......................... 21-52 Rear Heater-A/C Control Switch Test ...... 21-130
Heater Control Panel Rear Blower Motor Replacement ......... 21-131
Removal/Installation .................... ..... . 21-52 Rear Heater Core Replacement ............. 21-131
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement ............. 21-53 Rear Heater-A/C Unit
Eva porato r Remova l/l nsta 11ation ................ 21-54 Removal/Installation .............................. 21-132
Evaporator Component Replacement .......... 21-55 Rear Heater-A/C Unit
* Blower Unit Removal/Installation ..... .......... 21-56 Component Replacement .......... ......... 21-134
Blower Unit Component Replacement ........ 21-56 Rear A/C Line Replacement ........................ 21-135
* Heater Unit/Core Replacement ............... 21-57
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment ........... . 21-59
A/C Compressor Replacement ............... . 21-60
A/C Compressor Clutch Check .................... 21-62
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul ............. 21-63
A/C Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement .......... ............. .................. 21-64
A/C Condenser Replacement ........................ 21-65
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement ....... 21-66
Refrigerant Recovery .............. ................... 21-67
System Evacuation ................ . 21-68
System Charging ............. ............. ........ .... 21-69
Refrigerant Leak Test .................. ....... ....... . 21-70
A/C System Test .............................. . 21-71

Clutch Check, page 21-62
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-63
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-64
o n
A/C DIODE A, A/C DIODE B

(Located under-dash, taped to harness)
RELAY BOX
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test, page 22-82
RADIATOR FAN
A /C CONDENSER FAN
A /C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-82
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-82
□ □ □ □ □ □ S
□ □ □ ■= ■□□□
a [=□ rn Q p]
q f— ,L_J ----- A /C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
Test, page 22-82
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-83
(cont'd)
,HEATER VALVE CABLE

I Adjustment, page 21-59
HEATER U N IT/CORE
EVAPORATOR
EVAPORATOR COMPONENT
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-51
BLOWER UNIT
page 21-56
BLOWER UNIT COMPONENT

FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR

Test, page 21-48
DUST AND POLLEN FILTER

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-48
FRONT AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-49
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR HEATER CONTROL PANEL

Test, page 21-50 Removal/Installation, page 21-52
A/C Service Tips and Precautions A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8

AWARNIN
Compressed air mixed with the R-134a forms a - P/N 38897-PR7-A01 AH: 120 m l (4 fl-oz)
combustible vapor. • P/N 38899-PR7-A01: 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz)
The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury. Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
Never use compressed air to pressure test listed if you replace any of the following parts.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning systems. • To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
ACAUT IO £ the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor absorption.
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
Be careful when connecting service equipment. damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. immediately.
A/C Condenser .........35 mL (1 1/6 fl-oz)

The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) Front evaporator ......40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz)
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil, Rear evaporator .......30 mL (1 fl-oz)
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant Line or hose ....... .....10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral Leakage repair .........25 mL (5/6 fl-oz)
oil in this system, and do not attempt to use R-12 A/C Compressor .... For A/C compressor replacement,
servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning subtract the volume of oil drained
system or your servicing equipment will result. from the removed A/C
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is compressor from 180 mL (6 fl-oz),
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to and drain the calculated volume
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system. of oil from the new A/C
compressor: 180 mL (6 fl-oz) —
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the Volume of removed A/C
work area before resuming service. compressor = Volume to drain
from new A/C compressor.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested NOTE: Even if no oil is drained
with compressed air. from the removed A/C
compressor, don't drain more
Additional health and safety information may be than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz) from the
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant new A/C compressor.
manufacturers.
REMOVED NEW
A /C COMPRESSOR A /C COMPRESSOR
• Always disconnect the negative cable from the
battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
• Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
• Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
• When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
• When discharging the system,"use an R-T34a A: 180 mL (6 fl-oz)
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
Front A/C Line Replacement
EVAPORATOR
FRONT SUCTION LINE
SUCTION HOSE
A /C CONDENSER ^ RECEIVER/DRYER
© Discharge hose to the A/C compressor (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
(D Discharge hose to the A/C condenser (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© Front Receiver line to the A/C condenser (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
® Front Receiver line to the evaporator: 13 N-m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
© Front Suction line to the evaporator: 31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibf-ft)
© Suction hose to the sucti on line: 31 N-m (3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibf-ft)
@ Suction hose to the A/C compressor (6x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
® A/C compressor to the A/C compressor bracket (8 x 1.25 mm): 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
® A/C compressor bracket to the engine block (10 x 1.25 mm): 44 N-m (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft)
How to Retrieve a DTC
The heater control panel has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
2. Turn the fan switch OFF.
3. Press the recirculation control button to select Recirculation (recirculation indicator comes on).
4. Press and hold the recirculation control button to select Fresh (recirculation indicator goes off). Continue to hold
the button for 10 seconds. The recirculation indicator comes on for 2 seconds, and the self-diagnosis begins.
5. After recording the DTC, release the recirculation control button.
• If the system is OK, the recirculation indicator stays off.

• If any trouble is found, the recirculation indicator blinks the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) to indicate a faulty
circuit or component
RECIRCULATION INDICATOR
RECIRCULATION CONTROL BUTTON FAN SWITCH

Example of DTC Indicator Pattern (DTC 2):
recirculation
control button
Canceli ng the Self-diagnostic Function
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the self
diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
Max Cool Position Function
When the mode control dial is in the MAX A/C position, the heater control panel will automatically select the VENT
mode and turn the A/C on. The VENT switch and A/C switch are disabled and cannot be turned off in this mode. If the
control panel fails to function as described, replace it.
(cont'd)
DTC Detection Item Page

(Recirculation
Indicator Blinks)
1 A problem in the front blower motor circuit (see page 21-18)
2 A problem in the front air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-21)
3 A problem in the front mode control motor circuit (see page 21-22)
4 A problem in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-24)
In case of multiple problems, the recirculation indicator will indicate only the DTC with the least number of blinks.
In case of an intermittent failure, the heater control panel will store the DTC until the ignition switch is turned off.
Symptom ,r Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Recirculation control doors do not Recirculation control motor circuit HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
change between Fresh and troubleshooting (see page 21-26) : • Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the
Recirculate driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Cleanliness and tightness of all
terminals
Blower, heater controls, and A/C Heater control power and ground - HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
do not work circuit troubleshooting (see page • Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the
21-28) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Poor ground at G401
terminals
The A/C compressor clutch does A/C compressor clutch circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21 -7)
not engage (but both fans run at troubleshooting (see page 21-37) • Blown fuse No. 59 (7.5 A) in the
high speed with the A/C on) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No. 3 (7.5 A) in the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box
terminals
A/C system does not come on A/C pressure switch circuit - HVAC DTCs (see page 21 -7)
(both fans and the A/C troubleshooting (see page 21-40) • Cleanliness and tightness of all
compressor do not work); heater terminals
isOK
Rear blower motor runs, but one Rear blower motor circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
or more speeds do not work troubleshooting (see page 21-42) • Poor ground at G501
terminals
Rear blower motor does not run at Rear blower motor circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
all troubleshooting (see page 21-42) • Poor ground at G501
terminals
Rear mode control doors do not Rear mode control motor circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
change between ceiling vents troubleshooting (see page 21-46) • Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the
(cool) and floor vents (hot) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
terminals
(cont'd)

Both fans do not run at low speed Radiator and A/C condenser fan low • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
with the A/C on (but the A/C speed circuit troubleshooting • Blown fuse No. 58 (30 A) in the
compressor runs with the A/C on) (see page 21-29) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No. 3 (7.5 A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
terminals
The A/C condenser fan does not A/C condenser fan high speed circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
run at high speed (but both fans troubleshooting (see page 21-33) • Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the
run at low speed and the A/C driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
compressor operates with the A/C • Poor ground at G201
on) • Cleanliness and tightness of all
terminals
Both fans do not run at high speed Radiator and A/C condenser fan high • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
with the A/C on (but both fans run speed circuit troubleshooting • Cleanliness and tightness of all
at low speed and the A/C (see page 21-34) terminals
compressor operates with the A/C
on)
Both fans run at high speed all the Radiator and A/C condenser fan high • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-7)
time with the A/C on speed circuit troubleshooting • Cleanliness and tightness of all
(see page 21-34) terminals
U f a ]
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient air
to the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air with the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The
refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat from the ambient
air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the
passenger compartment.
FRONT E X P A N S IO N V A LVE
(M eters th e required a m o u n t of
refrig e ran t in to th e evapo rator)
FR O N T BLOW ER FAN
FRONT EVAPORATOR
(A b sorption o f heat)
EVAPORATOR TEM PER A TU R E

SENSOR
A /C CO M PR ESSO R RELIEF VA LV E
(Relieves pressure a t the com pressor
w h en th e pressure is to o high)
A /C PRESSURE SW ITC H
When the refrigerant is below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm2,
455 psi), the A/C pressure
switch opens the circuit to
the A/C switch and stops the
air conditioning to protect the
A/C compressor.
A /C COM PRESSOR
(Suction and com pression)
HIG H PRESSURE VA PO R
A /C C O N DENSER HIG H PRESSURE LIQ U ID

(R adiation of heat)
I 1 LO W PRESSURE LIQ U ID
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
rem o ves m oisture) LO W PRESSURE VAPO R
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
9 Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL8) designed forthe R-134a A/C
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in A/C
compressor failure.
• Ail A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air
conditioning systems.
• Always recover the refrigerant R~134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting
any A/C fitting.
(cont'd)
Heating/Air Conditioning Door Positions
HOT COOL
/ *
(VENT)
(HEAT/VENT)
(HEAT)
D O
HOT <=3 COOL
(HEAT/DEF)
(DEF)
(cont'd)
Heater Control Panel Inputs and Outputs
HEATER CONTROL PANEL 30P CONNECTOR
1 3 4 6 7
> < C 8 9 10 11
/ 13 14
16
15 17 18 19
/ 21
/ X 23 / 25
/ 27 29 30
Cavity Wire color Signal

1 BRN/YEL REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
3 BLU/RED FRONT BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
4 ORN/BLK FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
6 GRN/WHT RECIRCULATE OUTPUT
7 GRN/RED FRESH OUTPUT
8 BLU/BLK FRONT MODE DEF OUTPUT
9 BLU/ORN FRONT MODE VENT OUTPUT
10 WHT FRONT AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
11 RED/YEL FRONT AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
13 BLK/YEL IG2 (Power) INPUT
14 RED/BLK TAILLIGHTS RELAY INPUT
15 BLU/YEL FRONT MODE4 INPUT
16 LT GRN/BLK FRONT MODES INPUT
17 GRN/YEL FRONT MODE2 INPUT
18 GRN/BLK FRONT MODE1 INPUT
19 BRN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
21 PNK/BLK FRONT AIR MIX POTENTIAL INPUT
23 RED/ORN A/C PRESSURE SWITCH OUTPUT
25 GRY FRONT AIR MIX POTENTIAL + 5 V OUTPUT
27 YEL/GRN SENSOR COMMON GROUND OUTPUT
29 BLK GROUND (G401) INPUT
30 RED DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT INPUT
B i i
Circuit Diagram
G202 G201
D U
HEATiR CONTROL PANEL T

G501 G501 G401
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 1: A Problem in the Front Blower Motor 7. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of
Circuit the front power transistor 5P connector and body
ground.
1. Checkthe No. 56 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 5P CONNECTOR
X L
Are the fuses OK?
YES—Go to step 2. BLK
NO—Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. ■
2. Connectthe Nonterminal of the front blower

motor 2P connector to body ground with a jumper Wire side of female terminals
wire.
FRONT iLO W ER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES—Go to step 8.
I J
NO—Check for an open in the wire between the
1 2 front power transistor and body ground. If the wire
/ is OK, check for poor ground at G401. ■
BLU/RED
JUMPER
WIRE 8. Connectthe No. 4 and No. 5 terminals of the front
power transistor 5P connector with a jumper wire.
Wire side of female terminals . 'FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 5P-CONNECTOR
Does the front blower motor run at high speed?

BLU/RED BLK
YES—Go to step 4.
JUMPER WIRE
NO—Go to step 17.
5. Disconnect the jumper wire. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Disconnect the front power transistor 5P connector. Does the front blower motor run at high speed?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the front

power transistor and the front blower motor. ■
11. Disconnect the jumper wire.

H A
12. Disconnect the heater control panel 30P connector. 15. Reconnect the heater control panel 30P connector.
13. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 16. Test the front power transistor (see page 21-48).
terminals of the heater control panel 30P connector
and body ground individually. Is the front power transistor OK ?
HEATER CONTROL PANEL SOP CONNECTOR YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the heater control panel 30P connector and at the
BLU/REP ORN/BLK
front power transistor 5P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/
15 16 17 18 19
/ 21 XIXI23/ 25
/ 27 / 29 30
indication goes away, replace the original heater
control panel. ■
NO—Replace the front power transistor. ■
Wire side of female terminals 17. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the front blower motor 2P connector and body
ground.
FROOT BLOWER MOTOR 2PO>NNECTOR
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the heater control panel and the front
I J
power transistor. ■
NO—Goto step 14. 1 2

\ /
YEL/BLK I
14. Checkfor continuity between the following
terminals of the heatercontr.ol panel 30P connector
and front power transistor 5P connector.
SOP; 5P:
No. 3 No. 1 Wire side of female terminals
No. 4 No. 3
BLU/RED YES—Replace the front blower motor, a

1 X 3 / 6 7 > < c X 138 9 10 11 14
15 16 17 18 19
/ 21
XIXI* / 25 / 27 X 29 30 NO—Go to step 18.
(O ) 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

| B L U /R E D 7 O R N /B L K J
1 X
4 □ 5 19. Remove the front blower motor relay from the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 5P CONNECTOR 22-83).
Is the relay OK ?
NO—Replace the front blower motor relay. H
(cont'd)
20. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the front blower motor relay 4P socket and body
ground. 24. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
ground.
____ O____
2 1
4 " 3 BLK
2 1
4 3
tr

NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.B YES—Repair open in the YEL/BLK wire between the
front blower motor relay and the front blower
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). motor. ■
22. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of NO—Check for an open in the wire between the
the front blower motor relay 4P socket and body front blower motor relay and body ground. If the
ground. wire is OK, check for poor ground at G201. ■
FRONT BLOWER M OTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
BLK/YEL

(7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box and the front blower motor relay. ■
B k i
DTC 2: A Problem in the Front Air Mix Control 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and checkthe same
Motor Circuit terminals for voltage.
1. Disconnect the front air mix control motor 7P HEATER CONTROL PANEL SOP CONNECTOR
connector.
2 . Disconnect the heater control panel 30P connector.

1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
3. Check for continuity between body ground and the 15 16 17 18 19 / 21 /1XIM/ 25 / 27

/ 29 30
heater control panel 30P connector terminals PNK/BLK GRY YEL/GRN

No. 10,11,21, 25, and 27 individually.

1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 / 21 25 / 27 29 30 Is there any voltage?
Z !K l!L / I /
YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between

the heater control panel and the front air mix
control motor. This short may also damage the
heater control panel. Repair the short to power
before replacing the heater control panel. ■
NO—Go to step 5.
YES—Re pa ir short to body ground inthe wi re(s)

between the heater control panel and the front air
mix control motor. ■
NO—Goto step 4.
(cont'd)
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC 3: A Problem in the Front mode control
motor Circuit
6. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of the heater control panel 30P connector 1. Disconnect the front mode control motor 7P
and the front air mix control motor 7P connector. connector.
30P 7P:
No. 10 No. 1 2. Disconnect the heater control panel 30P connector.
No. 11 No, 2
No. 21 No. 3 3. Check for continuity between body ground and the
No. 25 No. 7 heater control panel SOP connector terminals No. 8,
No. 27 No. 5 9,15,16,17,18, and 27 individually.
HEATER CONTROL PANEL 30P CONNECTOR HEATER CONTROL PANEL 30P CONNECTOR
BLU/BLK
BLU/ORN
1 / 3 4 / 6 7 / 8 9 10 11 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
I
/ /IX]23/ / /
21 25 27 29 30
YEL
FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR W CONNECTOR
Is there continuity? between the heater control panel and the front
mode control motor. ■
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Go to step 4.
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the heater
control panel and the front air mix control motor. ■
7. Test the front air mix control motor (see page

21-49).
Is the front air mix control motor OK ?
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the heater control panel connector (30P) and at
front air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
front air mix control motor and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original front air mix control motor. If the symptom
/indication continues, substitute a known-good
control panel. ■
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and checkthe same 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminals for voltage.
HEATER CONTROL PANEL SOP CONNECTOR
terminals of the heater control panel SOP connector
BLU/BLK and the front mode control motor 7P connector.
SOP 7P:
1 / 3 4 6 7 > < c 8 9 10 11 / 13 14 No. 8 No. 1
15 18 17 18 19
/ 21
/ M 23 / 25
/ 27
/ 29 30 No. 9 No. 2
No. 15 No. 3
No. 16 No. 4
No. 17 No. 5
No. 18 No. 6
No. 27 No. 7
Wire side of fem a le terminals
BLU/BLK
€i ? [BLU/ORN
Is there any voltage? 7 x
1 / 3 4 / 6 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 21 /IX i^ / 25 27 29 30
/ / /
the heater control panel and the front mode control
motor. This short may also damage the heater
control panel. Repair the short to power before
replacing the heater control panel. ■
NO—Goto step 5.
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

YES—Goto step7.

control panel and front mode control motor. ■
7. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-50). DTC 4: A Problem in the Evaporator
Temperature Sensor Circuit
Is the front mode control motor OK ?
1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at connector.
the heater control panel connector (30P) and at
front mode control motor 7P connector. If the 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and
connections are good, substitute a known-good No. 2 terminals of the evaporator temperature
front mode control motor and recheck. If the sensor.
original front mode control motor. If the symptom/ NOTE: Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure
indication continues, substitute a known-good resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor,
heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/ and check for a change in resistance.
control panel.*
:
—;.L .
NO—Replace the front mode control motor. ■ h 1
2
U U
RESISTANCE
kQ
0 10 20 30 %
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor. ■
3. Disconnect the heater control panel 30P connector.

6. Check for continuity between the No. 27 terminal of
the heater control panel SOP connector and the
No. 1 terminal of the evaporator temperature
HEATER C O N TR O L PANEL SOP CO N N EC TO R
1 3 4 6 7 X T 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 21 Z lx S ? / 25
/ 27 29 30
15 16 17 18 19 / 21 AXI23/ 25 / 27
/ 29 30
YEL/GRN
BRN
<5
YEL/GRN
JjZjZL^
1 2
J---- ---- L
2P C O N N EC TO R
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire Is there continuity?

between the heater control panel and the
eva po rato r te m pe rat ure sensor. ■ YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
the heater control panel SOP connector and at the
NO—Go to step 5. evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
5. Check for continuity between the No. 19 terminal of heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/
the heater control panel SOP connector and the indication goes away, replace the original heater
No. 2 terminal of the evaporator temperature control panel.■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the heater
HEATER C O N TR O L PANEL SOP C O NNECTOR
control panel and the evaporator temperature
Wire side of fem a le terminals
sensor. ■
1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
/ 21
2x1? / 25
/ 27
/I 29 30
BRN
BRN
EVAPORATOR TEM PER A TU R E SENSOR

2P C O N NECTOR
Wire side of female term ina ls
YES—Go to step 6.

control panel and the evaporator temperature
sensor. ■
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under 8. Check for continuity between the No. 6 and No. 7
dash fuse/relay box. terminals of the heater control panel 30P connector
and body ground individually.
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Go to step 2.
G RN/W HT GRN/RED
1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 21 25 27 29 30
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P / /M 23 / / /
connector.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of

the recirculation control motor 7P connector and
body ground. Wire side of female terminals

7P CONNECTOR
between the heater control panel and the
recirculation control m otor.*
NO—Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same


G RN/W HT GRN/RED
1 3 4 6 7 _ > < c 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 21 25 27 29 30
YES—Go to step 5. / / X I 23 / / /

box and the recirculation control motor. ■

6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
21-51). Is there any voltage?
Is the recirculation control motor OK ? YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between
the heater control panel and the recirculation
YES—Goto step7. control motor. This short may also damage the
heater control panel. Repairthe short to power
NO—Replace the recirculation control motor. B before replacing the heater control panel. ■
7. Disconnect the heater control panel SOP connector.


terminals of the heater control panel 30P connector
and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
SOP: 7P:
No. 6 No. 7
No. 7 No. 5
H E A T E R C O N T R O L P A N E L SO P C O N N E C T O R
G R N /W H T G R N /R E D
1
/ 3 4
/ 6 7 8 9 10 11
/ 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
/ 21
/M 2S / 25
/ 27
/ 29 30
R E C iR C U L A T IO N C O N T R O L M O T O R 7 P C O N N E C T O R

the heater control panel 30P connector and at
recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
control panel.!

control panel and the recirculation control motor. H
Heater Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Checkthe No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under 6. Check for continuity between the No. 29 terminal of
dash fuse/relay box. the heater control panel SOP connector and body
ground.
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Go to step 2.

1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
2. Disconnect the heater control panel 30P connector. 15 16 17 18 19 / 21 / [ X I 23 / 25 27 29 30

/ /
BLK
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 13 terminal

of the heater control panel 30P connector and body
ground.
BLK/YEL
YES—Checkfor loose wires or poor connections at
1 / 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 the heater control panel SOP connector. If the
15 16 17 18 19 21 25 / 27 29 30 connections are good, substitute a known-good
/ /M ? / /
control panel.■

heater control panel and body ground. If the wire is
Wire side of female terminals OK, check for poor ground at G401.B
YES—Go to step 5.

box and the heater control panel. ■

Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 4. Connectthe No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C

• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the symptom
troubleshooting index. A /C C O N D EN S E R FA N RELAY 4P SOCKET
• Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check the No. 58 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the JU M P E R W IRE
Are the fuses O K ? BLU/YEL
YES—Go to step 2.
N O — Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. ■
2. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay from the Does the A/C condenser fan run?
22-82). YES—Goto step 5.
Is the relay OK ? NO—Go to step 13.
YES—Goto step 3. 5. Disconnect the jumper wire.
NO—Replace the A/C condenser fan relay. ■ 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of 7. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of
the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket and body the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket and body
ground. ground.
A /C C O N DENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET A /C CON D EN SER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
f 1 f
1 1
2 2
4 3 4 3
YEL/W HT
Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?
NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. I NO—Goto step 31.
(cont'd)
Radiator and A/G Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
9. Reinstall the A/C condenser fan relay. 17. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of
the A/C condenser fan 2P connector and body
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. ground.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the A/C CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
11. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P), and turn the

BLU/YEL
ignition switch ON (II).

PCM connector A (44P) and body ground.
BLU
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 [7 8 J I-----9_ JIi
-----
10 11 n\/\u\/\Arf 18 YES—Go to step 18.

20 21 22 23 24
26 27 2 8 [Z 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / | 3 3 34
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/C
10 38 4 l ] 4 2 43 [441
condenser fan relay and the A/C condenser fan. l
18. Turn the A/C and fan switches OFF, then turn the
19. Reconnect the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.
20. Connectthe No. 1 terminal of the A/C condenser
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at fan 2P connector to body ground with a jumper
No. 4 terminal of PCM connector A (44P). If the wire.
PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes A/C CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
away, replace the original PCM (see page 11-230).
BLU/RED
condenser fan relay and the PCM. ■ JUMPER
WIRE
14. Reinstall the A/C condenser fan relay. Wire side of female terminals
15. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.

21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the A/C
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the A/C and fan switches ON.
and blower fan switches ON.
Does the A/C condenser fan run?

22. Turn the A/C and fan switches OFF, then turn the 28. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.
23. Disconnect the jumper wire. the fan control relay 5P socket and the No. 2
terminal of the radiator fan 2P connector.
24. Remove the fan control relay from the auxiliary
under-hood relay box, and test it (see page 22-82). FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
Is the relay OK ?
YES—Goto step 25.
NO—Replace the fan control relay. ■
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the A/C
and fan switches ON.

the fan control relay 5P socket and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
BLU/RED
NO—Repair open in the wire between the radiator

fan relay and the radiator fan. ■

condenser fan and the fan control relay. H
27. Turn the A/C and fan switches OFF, then turn the
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
30. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of 33. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
the radiator fan 2P connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR A/C diode 4P connector and body ground.
r~ ^ A/C DIODE 4P CONNECTOR

1 2
BLK
1 2 3 4
BLK/YEL

YES—Replace the radiator fan motor. ■ Is there battery voltage?
NO—Check for an open in the wire between the YES—Repair open in the wire between A/C diode
radiator fan and body ground. If the wire is OK, 4P connector terminal No. 3 and the A/C condenser
check for poor ground at G202. ■ fan relay.*
31. Remove A/C diode A from under the dashboard. NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3
32. Using the diode setting (*-+#-) on a DVOM, check box and A/C diode 4P connector terminal No. 4. ■
for current flow in both directions between the
No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of A/C diode A.
A/C DIODE A
1 O------14|------02
Is there current flow in only one direction?
NO—Replace A/C diode A. ■

s *
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE: 5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the the fan control relay 5P socket and body ground.
radiator fan and/or the A/C compressor is inoperative.
Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. -FAN-CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
BLK
1. Check the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Go to step 2.
2. Remove the fan control relay from the auxiliary Is there continuity?
under-hood relay box, and test it (see page 22-82).
YES—Go to step 6.
Is the relay OK ?
NO—Check for an open in the wire between the fan
YES—Go to step 3. control relay and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G201. ■
NO—Replace the fan control relay. ■
6. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). fuse/relay box.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 terminal of 7. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of
the fan control relay 5P socket and body ground. the fan control relay 5P socket and the No. 4
terminal of the radiator fan relay 4P socket.
5 4 3
YEL/W HT

NO—Goto step 8. YES—Repair open in the wire between the radiator

fan relay terminal No. 4 and the PCM terminal
A 5 .B
NO—Repair open in the wire between the fan

control relay and the radiator fan relay. ■
(cont'd)
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
8. Remove A/C diode A from the right side of the NOTE;

dashboard. • Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if only one
fan is inoperative, or if the A/C compressor is
9. Using the diode setting (-W -) on a DVOM, check inoperative. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting
for current flow in both directions between the index.
No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of A/C diode A. • Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check
A/C DIODE A • The normal operating A/C pressure for the radiator
and A/C condenser fans to run at high speed when
the A/C is ON or the ECT is above 206 °F with A/C OFF.
1. Check the No. 57 (30 A) fuse and No. 58 (30 A) fuse

in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 3
box.
Are the fuses OK?

1O— — 02
YES—Goto step 2.
Is there current flow in only one direction? NO—Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. ■
YES—Go to step 10. 2. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the
Data List at idle.
NO—Replace A/C diode A. ■
A/C SWITCH ON
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). A/C CLUTCH ON
Fan Low Speed ON
11. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of Fan High Speed ON
A/C diode 4P connector and body ground.
Are all the values OK ?
A/C DIODE 4P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Troubleshoot the value that is not the

1 2 3 4 specifications. ■
BLK/YEL
YES—Repair open in the wire between A/C diode

4P connector terminal No. 3 and the fan control
relay. ■

box and A/C diode 4P connector terminal No. 4. ■
U iu
4. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. 8. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2
terminals of the A/C pressure switch.
6. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
the A/C pressure switch 2P connector and body
ground.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 2 'P CONNECTOR
YES—Goto step 9.
NO—Goto step 19.
Is th e re a b o u t 5 V ? 9. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
YES—Go to step 7. 10. Disconnect the heater control panel 30P connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Measure the voltage between the No. 23 terminal
of the heater control panel SOP connector and body
ground.
1 3 4 / 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
/ 21 /iX I23 25 / 27 / 29 m
RED/ORN
Wire side of femal e terminals
Is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ?

control panel and the A/C pressure switch. ■
(cont'd)
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
14. Measure the resistance between the No. 19 and 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
No. 27 terminals of the heater control panel 30P
connector. 16. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

17. Disconnect the PCM connector A (44P).
1 / 3 4 / 6 7 x 8 9 10 11
/ 13 14
18. Checkfor continuity between the No. 41 terminal of
15 16 17 18 19
/ 21 /IX h / 25 / 27
/ 29 30
PCM connector A (44P) and No. 2 terminal of the
BRN YEL/GRN A/C pressure switch 2P connector.

Terminal side of fema l e terminals
Wire side of female terminals ri r

| 1 I 2 3 | 4 15 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |
■ 10 11 12 / 1 14| / i / 17 18 19
■
Is the resistance less than 2 4 k Q ? 20 21 22 23 24 / ■
26 27 28 29|7|31|7 33 34 /
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at 36 < 381 / | / | 41 142 43|44|
the heater control panel 30P connector and at the BLU/RED
A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the
heater control panel, and recheck. If the symptom/ (g)
control panel.■ /T V
^ 1 BLU/RED
NO—Test the evaporator temperature sensor A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
(see page 21-48). ■ Wire side of female terminals

the PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the

the A/C pressure switch. ■
19. Check for proper A/C system pressure (see page

21-71).
Is the pressure within specifications?
YES—Replace the A/C pressure switch. ■
NO—Repair the A/C pressure problem. ■

A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting
N O TE:
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans
are also inoperative with the A/C on. Refer to the
symptom troubleshooting index.
A /C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
1. Check the No. 59 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A re th e fu s e s O K ?
YES—Go to step 2.
2. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the

PGM-FI Data List at idle. Is there battery voltage?
ECT sensor 1 1 4 4 -1 6 9 °F (7 6 -9 0 ° C ) YES—Goto step 6.

TP Sensor About 0.5 V
RPM More than 730 NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.B
A/C SWITCH ON
A/C CLUTCH ON 6. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C
compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper
Are all the values within specifications? wire.
YES—Go to step 3. - A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
NO—Troubleshoot the value that is not within the

specifications. ■
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. r ...... JUMPER WIRE

1
4. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay from the >
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page RED
22-82).
4 3
j
Is the relay O K ?
YES—Goto step 5.
Does the A / C compressor clutch click?
NO—Replace the A/C compressor clutch relay. ■
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Go to step 21.

A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay.
9. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of 12. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket and
body ground. 13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
r >
1
2
15. Connect PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 14 to
4 3 body ground with a jumper wire.
V j
f r
| 1 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 L
I 2
li 10 11 17 18 19
12
.■
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 ■
.i 26 27 28 29 L 33 34 /
|3 6 t/ / 1 41 142 4 3 1441
j— u— LJ
YES—G oto step 10. RED
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 JUMPER WIRE

box and the A/C compressor clutch relay. ■

D o e s th e A /C c o m p re s s o r c lic k ?
YES—Goto step 17.

compressor clutch relay and the PCM. ■

H 9
19. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P), and turn the 21. Disconnectthe jumper wire.
ignition switch ON (II).
22. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch IP connector.
of PCM connector A (44P) and body ground. 23. Check for continuity between the A/C compressor
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and the A/C
P C M -C O N N E C T O R A (4 4 P ).
compressor clutch 1P connector terminal No. 1.
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET

| 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 |6 |7 8 I 9 L
,1 10 11 12
Z J l 4 / [ / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 / ■
.1 .26 27 28 291/131 [ ? 33 34
/
1 3 6 1 / 381 / | / " | 41 142 4 3 |44|
BLU/RED

A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH I P C O N N E C T O R
Is th e r e a b o u t 5 V ?
YES—Repair open in the wire between the PCM
and the heater control panel. ■ YES—Check the A/C compressor clutch clearance,
and the compressor clutch field coil (see page
NO—Checkfor loose wires or poor connections at 21-62). Repair as needed. ■
PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are good,
checkthe PCM grounds. If the grounds are good, NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/C
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor
symptom/indication goes away, replace the clutch. ■
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 5. Connect A/C pressure switch 2P connector terminal

• If the blower motor does not run at all speeds, the A/C No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
compressor will be inoperative. Before doing this
troubleshooting, checkthe DTC and repair the cause A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
of the inoperative blower motor.
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of
the following items are operative; condenser fan,
radiator fan, A/C compressor, or if the heater is
inoperative. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting
index.
• Before doing symptom troubleshooting, checkfor
powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Disconnectthe A/C pressure switch 2P connector.

3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of 6. Using the HDS, confirm the A/C switch value in the
the A/C pressure switch 2P connector and body PGM-FI Data List at idle.
ground.
Does the H D S Data List show the A / C switch O N ?
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
YES—Goto step7.
NO—Substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If

the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-230). ■
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Goto step 12.

DO
9. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 15. Measure the resistance between the No. 19 and
terminals of the A/C pressure switch. No. 27 terminals of the heater control panel 30P
connector.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH HEATER CONTROL PANEL SOP CONNECTOR
1 / 3 4 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 21 25 27 29 30
/ /M 23 / / /
BRN YEL/GRN
Is the resistance less than 2 4 kQ ?
NO—Goto step 20. the heater control panel 30P connector and at the
A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the
10. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. connections are good, substitute a known-good
11. Disconnect the heater control panel SOP connector. indication goes away, replace the original heater
control panel.■
NO—Repair cause of high resistance in the
13. Measure the voltage between the No. 23 terminal evaporator temperature circuit. ■
of the heater control panel 30P connector and body
ground. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
HEATER CONTROL PANEL SOP CONNECTOR 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

1 / 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 21 25 27 29 30
/ /M 2i / / / 18. Disconnect the PCM connector A (44P).
RED/ORN
I
Is there about 5 V?

control panel and the A/C pressure switch. H

(cont'd)
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Rear Blower Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting (cont'd) Troubleshooting
19. Check for continuity between the No. 41 terminal of 1. Check the No. 55 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
PCM connector A (44P) and No. 2 terminal of the fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A/C pressure switch 2P connector. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.

A re the fuses O K ?
YES—Goto step 2.
f r
11 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 L
■
10 11 12 / 1 4 1 / | / 17 18 19 NO—Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.■
■
20 21 22 23 24 / ■
.i 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
26 27 28 291 /|3 1 1 / 33 34 /
3 6 / 3 8 1 / | / 1 41 142 4 3 14 4 1
BLU/RED 3. Connectthe No. 2 terminal of the rear blower
motor 2P connector to body ground with a jumper
wire.
Q)
/T V 1 BLU/RED
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
1=1
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
JUMPER BLU
WIRE
the PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-230). ■ Wire side of female terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM and Does the rear blower motor run?
the A/C pressure switch. ■
YES—Go to step 4.
20. Check for proper A/C system pressure (see page
21-71). NO—Go to step 16.
Is the pressure within specifications? 4. Disconnect the jumper wire.
YES—Replace the A/C pressure switch. ■ 5. Disconnect the rear blower resistor 5P connector.
NO—Repair the A/C pressure problem. ■

6. Connect the No. 3 terminal of the rear blower 10. Disconnect rear heater-A/C control switch
resistor 5P connector to body ground with a jumper ...connector A (7P).
wire.
11. Reconnect the blower resistor 5P connector. '
REAR BLOWER RESISTOR
5P CONNECTOR
12. Ground each of the rear heater-A/C control switch
n __ ____ JTl connector A (7P) terminals individually in the
1 2 following order: No. 1, 3, 4,6, and 7.
I I
3 4 5 REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH
CONNECTOR A ( 7 P )
JUMPER BLU
WIRE BLU/BLK REP/BLU
WHT/RED
RED/ RED/
GRN GRN
Does the rear blow er motor run?
YES—Goto step7.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the rear
blower motor and the rear blower resistor. ■ Does the re ar blow er motor run at progressively
higher speeds?
. YES—Go to step 13.
NO—Repair open or cause of excessive resistance
9. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and in the appropriate wire(s) between the blower
No. 5 terminals of the rear blower resistor. resistor and the rear heater-A/C control switch. ■
13. Disconnect rear heater-A/C control switch

REAR BLOWER RESISTOR
connector B (10P).
p.— _ -- n
1 2
I I
3 4 5
h Oh
Is there about 4 —5 0,?
NO—Replace the rear blower resistor. ■

Rear Blower Motor Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of 16. Disconnect the jumper wire.
rear heater-A/C control switch connector A (7P) and
body ground. 17. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.
REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH 18. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
.CONNECTOR A (7P)
the rear blower motor 2P connector and body
p_ ..... n ground.
1 / I— 1 3
4 5 6 7 REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
BLK
BLU/YEL
1
NO—Check for an open in the wire between the Is there battery voltage?
rear heater-A/C control switch and body ground. If
the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G501.B YES—Replace the rear blower motor (see page
21-131).■
15. Checkfor continuity between the No. 7 terminal of
rear heater-A/C control switch connector B (10P) NO—Goto step 19.
and body ground.
REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH

CONNECTOR B (10P)
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
/
BLK
YES—Test the rear heater-A/C control switch

(see page 21-130).■

rear heater-A/C control switch and body ground. If
the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G501.B
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 23. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of
the rear blower motor relay 4P connector and body
20. Remove the rear blower motor relay from the left ground.
side of rear heater-A/C unit, and test it (see page
22-83). REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
Is the relay O K ? _r~... .....L BLK/YEL

1 2
3 4
NO—Replace the rear blower motor relay. ■

ground.

REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
-J....... .. L Is there battery voltage?

RED
1 2
3 4 YES—Go to step 24.

box and the rear blower motor relay. ■
Wire side of female terminals 25. Check for continuity between the No. 4 terminal of
Is there battery voltage? ground.
YES—Go to step 22. REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR

(30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the rear blower motor relay. ■
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). BLK
YES—Repair open in the wire between the rear

blower motor relay and the rear blower motor. ■

rear blower motor relay and body ground. If the
wire is OK, checkfor poor ground at G501.B
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under 7. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of
dash fuse/relay box. the rear mode control motor 7P connector and
body ground.
Is the fuse O K ?
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Replace the fuse and recheck. ■
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of Wire side of female terminals
the rear mode control motor 7P connector and
body ground. Is there continuity?
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR YES—Go to step 8.

rear mode control motor and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for ground at G501. ■

the rear heater-A/C control switch connector B
(10P) and body ground.
CONNECTOR B HOP)

jzz
YES—Goto step 4.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 W ire side of fem ale term inals
box and the rear mode control motor. ■
YES—Go to step 9.
5. Disconnect the rear mode control motor I P
connector. NO—Check for an open in the wire between the
rear heater-A/C control switch connector and body
6. Disconnect rear heater-A/C control switch ground. If the wire is OK, check for ground at
connectors A (7P) and B (10P). G501.B
9. Test the rear mode control motor (see page 21-127).
Is the re ar mode control motor O K ?
NO—Replace the rear mode control motor

(see page 21-128). B
B D
10, Check fo r continuity between body ground and rear 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
heater-A/C control switch connector B (10P)
terminals No. 1 ,2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 individually. 13. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of rear heater-A/C control switch
REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH connector B (10P) and the rear mode control motor
CONNECTOR B(10P)
7P connector.
10P 7P:
No. 1 No. 7
No. 2 No. 7
No. 3 No. 7
No. 4 No. 4
No. 5 No. 3
No. 6 No. 3
REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH CONNECTOR B (10P)

BLU/YEL
Is there continuity? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 / 10
GRN/ YEL
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) BLU/YEL RED YEL
between the rear heater-A/C control switch and the
rear mode control motor. ■
© I GRN/RED
NO—Go to step 11. YEL j V “ ? - BLU/YEL
1 2 3 4
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and checkthe same / /
terminals for voltage. REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR B (10P)

rear heater-A/C control switch connector B (10P)
and at the rear mode control motor 7P connector. If
the connections are good, substitute a known-good
rear heater-A/C control switch, and recheck. If the
original rear heater-A/C control switch. ■
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the rear

heater-A/C control switch and rear mode control
motor. ■
Is there any voltage?

the rear heater-A/C control switch and the rear
mode control motor. This short may also damage
the rear heater-A/C control switch. Repair the short
to power before replacing the rear heater-A/C
control switch. H
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Front Power Transistor Test
Test
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the front power
transistor.
1. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
resistance between its terminals. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and
No. 4 terminals of the front power transistor. It
should be about 1.4 — 1.5 kQ .
• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to
step 3.
• If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the front power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the front blower motor. Front

power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective front blower motor.
2. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for

a change in resistance.
3
1/
3. Compare the resistance readings with the
specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
40
30
RESISTANCE
kQ
20
•; 10
32 50 68 86-V
0 10 20 30 °C
TEMPERATURE
m u
Front Air M ix Control M otor Test
3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 3 terminal 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the front air mix
(ORN/BLK) (A) in the 5P connector, then remove the control motor.
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
INOTICE!
Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the front air mix control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the

front air mix control motor, and ground the No. 2
terminal; the front air mix control motor should run,
and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the
JUMPER WIRE
connections; the front air mix control motor should
V // run, and stop at Max Hot.
(To 12 V power
source on vehicle)
3. If the front air mix control motor does not run in
step 2, remove it, then check the front air mix
4. Reconnect the 5P connector to the front power control linkage and door for smooth movement.
transistor.
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace
5. Supply 12 Vto the No. 3 cavity with a jumper wire. the front air mix control motor.
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the as needed.
front blower motor runs. • If the front air mix control motor runs smoothly,
go to step 4.
• If the front blower motor does not run, replace
the front power transistor. FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
• If the front blower motor runs, the front power
transistor is OK.
4. Measure the resistance between the No. 5 and

No. 7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
5. Reconnect the front air mix control motor 7P

connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage

between the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals.
Max Cool: About 0.7 V

Max Hot: About 4.2 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not

as specified, replace the front air mix control motor.
Front Air Mix Control Motor Front Mode Control Motor Test
Replacement
1. Disconnect the I P connector from the front mode
control motor.
1. Disconnect the I P connector (A) from the front air
mix control motor (B). Remove the rod (C) of the INOTICE I
front air mix control motor from the front air mix Incorrectly applying power and ground to
control linkage (D). Remove the self-tapping screws the front mode control motor will damage it.
and the front air mix control motor from the heater Follow the instructions carefully.
unit
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the
front mode control motor, and ground the No. 2
terminal; the front mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Defrost. If it doesn't, reverse
the connections; the front mode control motor
should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. When the
front mode control motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
2. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the pin on the motor is properly
engaged with the linkage. After installation, make 3. If the front mode control motor does not run in step
sure the motor runs smoothly. 2, remove it, then check the front mode control
linkage and doors for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace

the front mode control motor.
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
• If the front mode control motor runs smoothly,
go to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or

less at the 20 k Q range. With the front mode
control motor running as in step 2, check for
continuity between the No. 3, 4, 5, and 6 terminals
and the No. 7 terminal individually. There should
be continuity for a moment as the motor moves
past each switch terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each

terminal, replace the front mode control motor.
Front Mode Control Motor Recirculation Control Motor Test
Replacement
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation
control motor.
1. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the front
mode control motor (B). Remove the rods (C) of the INOTICE I
front mode control motor from the front mode Incorrectly applying power and ground to
control motor linkage (D) and the front mode the recirculation control m otor will damage it.
control linkage (E). Remove the self-tapping screws Follow the instructions carefully.
and the front mode control motor from the heater
unit. 2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the
recirculation control motor, and ground the No. 5
or No. 7 terminals; the recirculation.control motor
should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the
recirculation control motor, do not reverse power
and ground. Disconnect the No. 5 or No. 7
terminals from ground; the recirculation control
motor should stop at Fresh (when the No. 7
terminal is disconnected) or Recirculate (when the
No. 5 terminal is disconnected). Don't cycle the
recirculation control motor for a long time.

After installation, make sure the motor runs
smoothly.
3. If the recirculation control motor does not run in

step 2, remove it, then checkthe recirculation
control linkage and doors for smooth movement.

the recirculation control motor.
as needed.
Recirculation Control Motor Heater Control Panel Removal/
Replacement Installation
1. Remove both glove box stops, then let the glove 1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93).
box hang down (see page 20-95).
2. Remove the screws, and remove the heater control
2. Remove the wire harness connectors from the panel (A) with the brackets from the dashboard,
evaporator. then disconnectthe connector (B).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the

recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self
tapping screws and the recirculation control motor
from the blower unit.
B
3. Remove the screws and the heater control panel

(A) from the brackets (B).

engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
sure the motor runs smoothly.
4. Install the control panel in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the control
panel controls to see whether it works properly.
5. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that

there are no problems in the system (see page
21-7).
m i
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-95). 4. Remove the filte r lid (A) from the evaporator, then
pull out the dust and pollen filter (B).
2. Cut the plastic cross brace in the glove box opening
with diagonal cutters in the area shown, and
discard it.
5. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.

Note the direction of the arrow. Make sure that
3. Remove the bolts, the screws, and the glove box there is no air leaking out of the evaporator.
frame.
6. Install the glove box frame and glove box in the
Evaporator Removal/Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 5. Remove the wire harness connectors (A).
charging station (see page 21-67). Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor
connector (B). Remove the self-tapping screws, the
2. Disconnectthe suction line (A) and receiver line (B) mounting nuts, the mounting bolts, the bracket (C),
from the evaporator. Remove the mounting nut. and the evaporator (D).
Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination.
8x1.25 mm
31 N-m 13 N-m
(3.2 kgf-m, 23 Ibf-ft! d-3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Install the evaporator in the reverse order of

3. Remove the glove box (see page 21-95). removal, and note these items:
4. Remove the plastic cross brace, then remove the • If you're installing a new evaporator, add
glove box frame (see page 21-53). refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see page 21-5).
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Charge the system (see page 21-69).
Evaporator Component Repiacement
1. Remove the filter lid (A), then pull out the dust and pollen filter (B).
2. Pull out the front evaporator temperature sensor (C) from the front evaporator fins.
3. Remove the screws, carefully separate the upper housing (D) from the lower housing (E), then remove the front
evaporator core (F).
4. If necessary, remove the front expansion valve (G).
5. Reassemble the evaporator in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Replace all O-rings with new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them.
Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
• Reinstall the evaporator temperature sensor bulb (H) and clip in their original location.
• Make sure no air is leaking from the upper housing and the lower housing fitting.
Blower Unit Removal/Installation Blower Unit Component
Replacement
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
• The recirculation control motor (A), the front power
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the transistor (B), and the front blower motor (C) can be
audio and the navigation system, then write down replaced without removing the blower unit.
the audio presets. • Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and doors move smoothly without
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
3. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-96). motor runs smoothly (see page 21-52).
4. Remove the front evaporator (see page 21-54).
5. Remove the wire harness clip (A). Remove the

mounting nuts, the mounting bolt, and the blower
unit (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
6. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• For front evaporator and A/C-related information,

refer to front evaporator removal/installation
(see page 21-54).
• Do the power window control unit resetting
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the
navigation system, then enter the audio presets.
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the
SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C)
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before from the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out
doing repairs or service. when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a
clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any
audio and the navigation system, then write down coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
the audio presets.
3. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),

then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to
the fully opened position as shown.
6. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit.

Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines, the
brake lines, and related parts.
4. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant

from the radiator (see page 10-6).
(cont'd)
Heater Unit/Core Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-96). 11. Install the heater core in the reverse order of
removal.
8. Remove the evaporator (see page 21-54).
12. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of
9. Remove the mounting bolts and the heater unit. removal, and note these items:
• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater

hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
• Refill the cooling system with engine coolant
(see page 10-6).
• Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-59).
• Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• For evaporator and A/C-related information, refer
to evaporator removal/installation (see page
21-54).
• Do the power window control unit resetting
6x1.0 mm procedure (see page 22-255).
9.8 N-m ( 1 . 0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) • Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the
10. Remove the self-tapping screws and the clamp (A),
then carefully pull out the heater core (B) so you
don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes.
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (A)
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
heater valve arm (C). Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (C).
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the front
air mix control linkage (C).
3. Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool with

the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable to the front air mix

control linkage as shown in step 2. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D),
then snap the heater valve cable housing into the
cable clamp.
A/C Compressor Replacement
1. If the A/C compressor is marginally operable, run 7. Remove the A/C compressor clutch harness clip (A)
the engine at idle speed, and let the air from the A/C condenser fan shroud (B), then
conditioning work for a few minutes, then shut the disconnect the connector. Disconnect the A/C
engine off. condenser fan connector (C), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the A/C condenser fan
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the shroud. Loosen the lower mounting bolts, then
audio and the navigation system, then write down remove the upper mounting bolts and the A/C
the audio presets. condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage
the radiator fins when removing the A/C condenser
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. fan shroud.
4. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 6 x 1.0 mm

9.8 N-m
charging station (see page 21-67). (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
5. Remove the alternator (see page 4-36).
6. Remove the bolts from the cooler line brackets (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)

B B
8. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector 10. Install the A/C compressor in the reverse order of
(A) remove the bolt and the n u t then disconnect removal, and note these items;
the sucti on line (B) and discharge line (C) from the ■
A/C compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately • If you're installing a new A/C compressor, you
after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
dust contamination. removed from it (see page 21-5). ;\ ;
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft) and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
• Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for
HFC-134a DENSO piston type A/C compressor
only.
• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
absorption.
Remove the mounting bolts and the A/C • Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
compressor. Be careful not to damage the radiator installing the A/C compressor or the A/C
fins when removing the A/C compressor. condenser fan shroud.
• Charge-the system (see page 21-69). ;
• Reset the power window control unit (see page
22-255).
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibf-ft)
A/C Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the pressure plate for discoloration, peeling, 4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not
or other damage. If there is damage, replace the within specifications, replace the field coil
clutch set (see page 21-63). (see page 21-63).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating Field Coil Resistance: 3.9—4.3 0 at 68 °F (20 °C)
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-63).
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and

the pressure plate (B) all the way around. If the
clearance is not within specifies limits, remove the
pressure plate (see page 21-63) and add or remove
shims as needed to increase or decrease clearance,
Clearance: 0.35—0.60 mm (0.014—0.024 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in three

thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Special Tools Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore . ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley or
commercially available the A/C compressor.
1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the

pressure plate with a commercially available A/C
clutch holder (B).
A
18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground

terminal (A). Remove the wire harness clip (B) from
the holder (C), then disconnectthe field coil
connector (D). Remove the snap ring (E) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (F). Be careful
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), not to damage the field coil or the A/C compressor.
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the
number and thickness of shims as necessary, then
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
clearance (see page 21-62).
NOTE: The shims are available in three

thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul A/C Compressor Relief Valve
(cont'd) Replacement
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
disassembly, and note these items; charging station (see page 21-67).
• Install the field coil with the wire side facing 2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
hole in the A/C compressor. the system and the A/C compressor oil from
• Clean the pulley and A/C compressor sliding running out.
surfaces with contact cleaner or other non
petroleum solvent.
• Install newsnap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
• Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
• Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
13.2 N-m
(1.35 kgf-m, 9.76 Ibf-ft)
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief

valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief

valve.
6. Charge the system (see page 21-69).

A/C Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 5. Remove the bolts, then remove the A/C condenser
charging station (see page 21-67). by lifting it up. Be careful not to damage the
radiator or the A/C condenser fins when removing
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover, and the hood the A/C condenser.
latch (see page 20-169).
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
3. Remove the bolts and the radiator upper brackets.
4. Remove the bolts and screw, then disconnect the

discharge line (A) and receiver line (B) from the A/C
condenser. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination. 6. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of
• If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add

refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see page 21-5).
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
absorption.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator or the A/C
condenser fins when installing the A/C condenser.
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement
1. Remove the A/C condenser (see page 21-65).
2. Remove the cap (A) from the bottom of the A/C

condenser, then remove the O-rings (B), the filter
(C) and the desiccant (D).
3. Install the desiccant in the reverse order of removal,

Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a

thin coat of refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) before
Refrigerant Recovery
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed

ACAUTIO ■from the A/C system after the recovery process is
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before
Be careful when connecting service equipment charging.
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs/ventilate the
work area before resuming service.
* Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
System Evacuation
3; If the low-pressure does not reach more than

ik CAUTION 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes,
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor there is probably a leak in the system. Partially
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. charge the system, and check for leaks (see step 3
Be careful when connecting service equipment. on page 21-70).
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service.
• Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturers.
1. When an A/C system has been opened to the

atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station. If the system
has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.

port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
instructions. Evacuate the system.
System Charging
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-68).

A CA U TIO
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. system that was removed during recovery. Use
Be careful when connecting service equipment. only DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil,
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
NOTE: the compressor will be damaged.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service. Select the appropriate units of measure for your
• Additional health and safety information may be refrigerant charging station.
manufacturers. Refrigerant Capacity:
700 to 750 g
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ 0.70 to 0.75 kg
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service 1.5to1.7lbs
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as 24.7 to 26.5 oz
instructions. 5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-70).
6. Check for system performance (see page 21-71).

Refrigerant Leak Test
Special Tools Required 2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to
Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM the specified capacity, then close the supply valve,
commercially available and disconnect the charging station fittings.
Select the appropriate units of measurement for

your refrigerant charging station.
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. Refrigerant Capacity:
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. 700 to 750 g
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. --0.70 to 0.75 kg
1.5 to 1.7 lbs
24.7 to 26.5 oz
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the 3. Check the system for leaks using an R-134a
work area before resuming service. refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
• Additional health and safety information may be (0.5 oz) per year or better.
manufacturers. 4. If you find leaks that require the system to be
opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), do
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ the refrigerant recovery procedure (see page 21-67).
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as 5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's must be evacuated.
instructions.
Performance Test 6 . Test conditions:
• Avoid direct sunlight.

ikCAUTION • Open hood.
Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor • Open front doors.
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool, the
Be careful when connecting service equipment. mode control switch to Vent, and the
Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. recirculation control switch to Recirculate.
• Turn the A/C switch on and the fan switch to Max.
• Run the engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
The performance test will help determine if the air • No driver or passenger's in vehicle.
conditioner system is operating within specifications.
7. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
NOTE; under the above test conditions, read the delivery
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the temperature from the thermometer in the center
work area before resuming service. vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit,
• Additional health and safety information may be and the high and low system pressure from the A/C
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant gauges.
manufacturers.

charging station to the high-pressure service port
and the low-pressure service port, following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air

temperature.
3. Remove the glove box stops (see page 20-95), and

let the glove box hang down.
4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent

A/C System Test (cont'd)
8. Refer to the inspection data.
Inspection data
Example Intake tem perature (dry): 86 °F (30 ° C ) H um idity level 70 %
Intake tem perature (wet): 77.9 °F {25.5 ° C )
Intake pressure: 294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm 2) [42.7 psi]
Delivery tem perature: 68.9 °F (20.5 ° C )
Delivery pressure: 2010-kPa (20.5 kgf/cm2) [291.6 psi]
Results: Within normal range
kPa
(kgf/cm2)
[psi]
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
HUMID I TY
LEVEL
INTAKE 68 77 86 95 104 °F
PRESSURE (20 ) (25) (30) (35) (40) CC)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
Pressure Test
Test results [felated symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Di scharge (high) After stopping A/C compressor, Air in system Recover, evacuate (see page 21-68),
pressure pressure drops about 196 kPa and recharge with specified amount
abnormal l y high (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi) quickly, and then (see page 21-69)
falls gradually
Reduced or no airflow through A/C • Clogged condenser or radiator • Clean
condenser fins • Check voltage and fan rpm
• Condenser or radiator fan not • Check fan direction
working properly
Line to A/C condenser is excessively Restricted flow of refrigerant in Restricted lines
hot system
Discharge pressure • High and low-pressures are • Faulty A/C compressor Replace the A/C compressor
a b n o rm a lly lo w balanced soon after stopping A/C discharge valve
compressor • Faulty A/C compressor seal
• Low side is higher than normal
Outlet of expansion valve is not • Faulty expansion valve * Replace
frosted, low-pressure gauge indicates • Moisture in system • Recover, evacuate, and recharge
vacuum with specified amount
Suction (low) Expansion valve is not frosted, and * Frozen expansion valve • Recover, evacuate, and recharge
pressure low-pressure line is not cold. Low- (Moisture in system) with specified amount
abnormally l ow pressure gauge i ndicates vacuum • Faulty expansion valve • Replace the expansion valve
Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with A/C compressor off,
airflow from vents is restricted then check evaporator temperature
sensor
Expansion valve is frosted Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace
Suction pressure Low-pressure hose and check joint are Expansion valve open too long Repair or replace
abnormally high cooler than the temperature around
evaporator
Suction pressure is lowered when A/C Excessive refrigerant in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled by water specified amount
High and low-pressures are equalized • Faulty gasket Replace the A/C compressor
as soon as the A/C compressor is • Faulty high-pressure valve
stopped, and both gauges fluctuate • Foreign particle stuck in high-
while running pressure valve
Sucti on and Reduced airflow through A/C • Clogged A/C condenser or • Clean
discharge condenser radiator fins • Check voltage and fan rpm
pressures • A/C condenser or radiator fan • Check fan direction
abnormally high not working properly
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal end Clogged or kinked low-pressure Repair or replace
discharge areas are cooler than evaporator hose parts
pressures Temperature around expansi on valve Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace
abnormally low is too low compared with that around
receiver/dryer
Refrigerant l eaks A/C compressor clutch is dirty A/C compressor shaft seal leaking Replace the A/C compressor
A/C compressor bolt(s) are dirty Leaking around bolt(s) Tighten bolt(s) or replace A/C
compressor
A/C compressor gasket is wet with oil Gasket leaking Replace the A/C compressor
A/C fitting is dirty Leaking O-ring Clean the A/C fitting and replace the
O-ring

Clutch Check, page 21-62
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-63
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-64
(cont'd)
A /C DIODE A, A /C DIODE B
(Located under-dash, taped to harness)
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
RELAY BOX
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test, page 22-82
RADIATOR FAN
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-121
A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-82
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-82
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY

Test, page 22-82
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-83

h b
, SUNLIGHT SENSOR
'Test, page 21-122
HEATER UNIT/CORE
EVAPORATOR
EVAPORATOR COMPONENT

Test page 21-51
BLOWER UNIT
page 21-56
BLOWER UNIT COMPONENT


Test page 21-48
DUST AND POLLEN FILTER


Test, page 21-48
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

FRONT AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR
Test page 21-49
■ IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-120
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-50
HEATER VALVE CABLE

Climate Control System If there is any abnormality in the system, the

temperature indicator will light up the segment (A
How to Retrieve a DTC through N) corresponding to the error. If no DTCs are
found, go to symptom troubleshooting index. The
The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. temperature indicator will then alternate every second
between displaying "88" (all segments lit) and the error
Running the Self-diagnostic Function code segment (A through N).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: The system will only display the DTC when the
AUTO and OFF buttons are pressed. If you release the
2. Set the driver's temperature control dial on MAX buttons, the display will go blank. To return the display,
Cool. simply press the AUTO then the OFF buttons again.
3. Press and hold the OFF button. To determine the meaning of the DTC, refer to the DTC
troubleshooting index. If there is no abnormality, the
4. While holding the OFF button, press the AUTO segments will not light up.
button five t i mes within 10 seconds. The self-
diagnosis begins. NOTE: If there are no DTC's detected (no opens or
shorts in the climate control circuits or sensors), and
the system is still not operating properly, check the
AUTO BUTTON TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
sensor input to the climate control unit.
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
CE BD
CONTROL DIAL
Canceling the Self-diagnostic Function
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self

diagnostic function. After completing repair work,
run the self-diagnostic function again to make sure
that there are no other malfunctions.
D k j
Climate Control System ;
To retrieve the DTC, you must run the self-diagnostic function. In the case of multiple problems, the respective
indicator segments will come on. If indicator segments A, C, E, G, I, and Lcome on at the same time, there may be an
open in the common ground wire of the sensors.
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
C E . i D
DTC (Temperature Detection Item Page

Indicator Segment)
A An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-92)
B A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-93)
C An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-93)
D A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-95)
E An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-95)
F A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-96)
G An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-97)
H A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-98)
1 An open in the front air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-99)
J A short in the front air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-99)
K A problem in the front air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-100)
L 1 An open or short in the front mode control motor circuit (see page 21-101)
M A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-103)
N A problem in the front blower motor circuit (see page 21-104)
(cont'd)
Rear Heater-A/C Control System
How to Retrieve a DTC
The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
2. Turn the temperature control knob to LO for about 20 seconds, then HI for about 20 seconds.
3. Press the OFF button, then press the recirculation control button to select Recirculation (recirculation indicator
comes on).
4. Press and hold the recirculation control button to select Fresh (recirculation indicator goes off). Continue to hold
the button for 10 seconds. The recirculation indicator comes on for 2 seconds, and the self-diagnosis begins.
• If the system is OK, the recirculation indicator stays off.

• If any trouble is found, the recirculation indicator blinks the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) to indicate a faulty
circuit or component.
5. After recording the DTC, release the recirculation control button.
To determine the meaning of the DTC, refer to the DTC troubleshooting index for rear heater-A/C control system.
RECIRCULATION INDICATOR
OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATION CONTROL BUTTON
Example of DTC Indicator Pattern (DTC 2):

0.3 sec 0.3 sec
Recirculation
indicator “
on
Recirculatiori"
indicator
o ff 10 sec 2 sec 2 sec 1 sec
Press and hold the
recirculation
control button
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the
self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
Rear Heater-A/C Control System
DTC Detection Item Page

{Recirculation
Indicator Blinks)
1 A problem in the rear blower motor circuit (see page 21-107)
2 A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-112)
3 A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-113)
4 An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-114)
In case of multiple problems, the recirculation indicator will indicate only the DTC with the least number of blinks.
In case of an intermittent failure, the climate control unit will store the DTC until the ignition switch is turned off.
(confd)
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit
The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the climate
control unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a sensor is faulty.
Check these Items before using the sensor input display mode:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to switch
from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperatures, note
these items:
® "Lo" temperature setting will default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
• "Hi" temperature setting will default to MAX HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
• 58 through 86 °F settings will use the automatic climate control logic.
To run the sensor input display mode* follow these steps:
2. Press and hold both the AUTO and RECIRC buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release the buttons. The climate control display will flash the sensor number and then the
value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the rear window defogger button.
Sensor Item Displayed Value

1 In-car Temperature Sensor °C
2 Outside Air Temperature Sensor °C
3 Solar Radiation Sensor Value: Dark = 00, Flashlight = 04, Cloudy = 10, 10 kcal/m2-h
Sunny = 65
4 Engine Coolant Temperature
5 Evaporator Outlet Air Temperature °C
6 Front Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air distribution, % of opening
higher value indicates warmer air distribution)
7 Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) °C
8 Vehicle Speed (Vehicle must be driven to display speed) km/h
NOTE:
• The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius (‘C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert
the value to degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
• If the sensor value displays "Er," this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Run the self
diagnostic function to check for a DTC.
• If necessary, compare the sensor input display to an alike, known-good vehicle under the same test conditions.
• If the sensor is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test, or substitute the sensor with a known-good
sensor, and recheck.
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button, or turn the ignition OFF.
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table

°e °F °C °F °C °F °C , °F °F
0 ' 32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 , 22 72 32 ■ 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 ' 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 63 27 81 37 . 99 47 117
8 46 *18 64 28 \ 82 . 38 TOO 48 118
9 ■48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table

OQ °F °C op
°F °C °F °C °F
50 - 122 ■ 60 140 70 158 ■■■ 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126- 62 144 72 .162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 - ■■ 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
'■ 58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
Alphanumeric Conversion Table

Display Reading °C op %
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9 —1 thru —9 30 thru 16 —1 thru —9
B0 thru B9 —10thru —19 14 thru —2 — TO thru —19
CO thru C9 . . - 2 0 thru -2 9 —4 thru —20 —20 thru —29
DO thru D9 - 3 0 thru —39 - 2 2 thru - 3 8 —30 thru —39
E0 thru E9 —40 thru —49 —40 thru —58 —
F0thru F9 —50 thru —59 —58 thru —74 +100 thru+109
Recirculation control doors do not Recirculation control motor circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
change between Fresh and Reci rculate troubleshooting (see page 21-114) • Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box
• Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
The blower motor does not run NOTE: The temperature control dial or button Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
immediately even though the engine is must be set between 57 °F (24 ° C ) and 87 °F
fully warmed up (31 °C) and the engine coolant temperature is
above 104°F (40 ° C )
ECT Sensor 1 circuit troubleshooting (see page
21-116)
Blower, heater controls, and A/C do not Climate control power and ground circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
work troubleshooting (see page 21-116) • Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the driver's
Voice communication does not work Navigation communication line circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
troubleshooting (see page 21-117) • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
Both fans do not run at low speed with Radiator and A/C condenser fan low speed • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
the A/C on (but the A/C compressor runs circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-29) • Blown fuse No. 58 (30 A) in the under-hood
with the A/C on) fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5 A) in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
The A/C condenser fan does not run at A/C condenser fan high speed circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
high speed (but both fans run at low troubleshooting (see page 21-33) • Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the driver's
speed and the A/C compressor operates under-dash fuse/relay box
with the A/C on) • Poor ground at G201
Both fans do not run at high speed with Radiator and A/C condenser fan high speed * HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
the A/C on (but both fans run at low circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-34) • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
speed and the A/C compressor operates
with the A/C on)
Both fans run at high speed all the time Radiator and A/C condenser fan high speed • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
with the A/C on circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-34) • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
The A/C compressor clutch does not A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
engage (but both fans run at high speed (see page 21-37) • Blown fuse No. 59 (7.5 A) in the under
with the A/C on) hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5 A) in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
A/C system does not come on (both fans A/C pressure switch circuit troubleshooting • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
and the A/C compressor do not work); (see page 21-40) • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
heater is OK
Rear mode control doors do not change Rear mode control motor circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-78)
between ceiling vents (cool) and floor troubleshooting (see page 21-118) • Bl own fuse No. 3 (7.5 A) in the driver's
vents (hot) under-dash fuse/relay box
Blower fan runs slower than expected in ECT Troubleshooting: ECT sensor 1 circuit low • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
cold weather voltage (see page 11-84), ECT sensor 1 circuit
high voltage (see page 11-86)
NOTE: It is normal for the blower to run slowly
until the engine coolant temperature begins to
rise. If the blower continues to run slowly for an
abnormal length of time, continue to
troubleshoot the problem.
ill
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient air
to the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air with the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The
refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat from the amb ient
air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the
passenger compartment.
FRONT EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters th e required am ount of
refrigerant into the evaporator)
FRONT BLOWER FAN
FRONT EVAPORATOR
(Absorption of heat)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
A /C COMPRESSOR RELIEF VALVE

(Relieves pressure at the compressor
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH when the pressure is too high)
When the refrigerant is below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm2,
455 psi), the A/C pressure
switch opens the circuit to
the A/C switch and stops the
air conditioning to protect the
A/C compressor.
A /C COMPRESSOR
(Suction and compression)
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
A/C CONDENSER HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID

(Radiation of heat)
f " "" I LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture) LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) designed forthe R-134a A/C
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in A/C
compressor failure.
• All A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air
conditioning systems.
• Always recover the refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting
any A/C fitting.
(cont'd)
Climate Control Door Positions
COOL
HOT <=■
(VENT!
♦/*
CHEAT/VENT!
(HEAT)'
(HEAT/DEF)
(DEF)'
(cont'd)
Climate Control Unit Connector A (20P) Inputs and Outputs
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 / 14 16 17 18 19 20
CONNECTOR A
Cavity Wire color Signal
1 GRN/ORN REAR A I R MIX HOT OUTPUT
2 PNK REAR AIR M IX COOL OUTPUT
3 GRN REAR POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
4 RED/GRN REAR BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
6 YEL REAR H3 INPUT
7 YEL/WHT REAR H2 INPUT
8 GRN/RED REAR H I INPUT
9 LT BLU REAR Cl INPUT
10 LT GRN REAR C2 INPUT
11 GRN/WHT REAR MODE VENT OUTPUT
12 BLU/ORN REAR MODE HEAT OUTPUT
14 BRN/YEL REAR AIR M IX POTENTIAL INPUT
16 RED/YEL REAR INDICATOR OUTPUT
17 GRN/ORN NAVIGATION UNIT INPUT
18 YEL/BLU NAVIGATION UNIT OUTPUT
19 RED/GRN NAVIGATION UNIT OUTPUT
20 YEL/BLU REAR C3 INPUT
B B
Climate Control Unit Connector B (30P) Inputs and Outputs
5Z2
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X 23 25 26 27 28 29 30
CONNECTOR B
Civity Wire color Signal
1 BLU/V PCM (VSS) INPUT
3 YEL/GRN SENSOR COMMON GROUND OUTPUT
a BLU/YEL FRONT MODE4 INPUT
5 LT GRN/BLK FRONT MODES INPUT
6 GRN/YEL FRONT MODE2 INPUT
7 GRN/BLK FRONT MODE1 INPUT
8 BLU/BLK FRONT MODE DEF OUTPUT
9 BLU/ORN FRONT MODE VENT OUTPUT
10 WHT FRONT AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
11 RED/YEL FRONT AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
13 BLK/YEL IG2 (Power) . INPUT
14 RED/BLK TAILLIGHT RELAY INPUT
15 -LU/RED BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
16 ORN/BLK POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
17 PNK/BLK FRONT AIR MIX POTENTIAL INPUT
18 YEL/RED IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
19 RRN/WHT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
20 WHT/BLK SUNLIGHTSENSC INPUT
21 BRN EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPl
22 RED/WHT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) INPUT
SENSOR 1
23 GRY FRONT A I R MIX POTENTIAL + 5 V OUTPUT
25 GRN/RED FRESH OUTPUT
26 GRN/WHT RECIRCULATE OUTPUT
27 RED/ORN A/C PRESSURE SWITC OUTPUT
28 BRN/YEL REAR W INDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
29 BLK GROUND (G401) INPUT
30 RED DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT INPUT
Circuit Diagram
TEMPERATURE
SECT) SENSOR 2
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC Indicator A: An Open in the In-car 4. Check for continuity between the No. 18 terminal of
Temperature Sensor Circuit climate control unit connector B (SOP) and the No. 1
terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page connector.
21 - 120 ).
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P)
W ire side of female term inals
No. 2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor. 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
Check for a change in resistance by heating or 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

221X123 25 26 27 28 29 30
cooling the sensor with a hair dryer. YEL/RED
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

YEL/RED
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

Wire side of fem ale term inals
Terminal side of male terminals ' YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor. ■

climate control unit connector B (30P) and the No. 2
RESISTANCE terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
kQ
connector.
Wire side o f female term inals
, 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 I X ] 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30
-1 0 0 10 20 30 40*€
TEMPERATURE r— Jye l / g r n
iS r
Is the resistance within the specifications shown ‘ IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female te rm inals
on the graph?
NO—Replace the in-car temperature sensor.* YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector B (30P) and at the
3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P). in-car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit ■

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor. ■
DTC indicator B: A Short in the--in-car DTC indicator C: An Open in the Outside Air
Temperature Sensor Circuit Temperature Sensor Circuit
1. Remove the in-ear temperature sensor (see page 1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor
21 - 120). (see page 21-121).
2. Test the in-car temperature sensor (see page 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and
21 - 120 ), No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature
sensor. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure
Is t h e i n - c a r t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r O K ? ; the resistance. Then pour warm water on the
sensor, and check for a change in resistance.
YES—Go to step 3.
O U T S I D E A I R 'T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
NO—Replace the in-car temperature sensor,®
3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P).

climate control unit connector B (30P) and body
ground.
C L IM A T E CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P ) Terminal side of male terminals
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X 23
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
YEL/RED
RESISTANCE
kQ
Is t h e r e continuity?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire 14 32 50 68 86 104 T

—10 0 10 20 30 40
between the climate control unit and the in-car
temperature sensor. ■ TEMPERATURE
NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit, Is the resistance within the specifications shown
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, o n th e g ra p h ?
replace the original climate control unit. ■
YES—Goto step3. ;
NO—Replace the outside air temperature sensor. ■

4. Check for continuity between the No. 19 terminal of 5. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of
climate control unit connector B (SOP) and the No. 2 climate control unit connector B (30P) and the No. 1
terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P
connector. connector.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B |30P|
i
/ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X 23
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
YEL/GRN
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES—Go to step 5. YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at

NO—Repair open in the wire between the climate outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
control unit and the outside air temperature connections are good, substitute a known-good
sensor. ■ climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit.M

control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor. ■
D u
DTC indicator D: A Short in the Outside Air DTC indicator E: An Open in the Sunlight
Temperature Sensor Circuit Sensor Circuit
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor 1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
(see page 21-121).
2. Test the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21 - 121 ). 3. Check for continuity between the No. 20 terminal of
climate control unit connector B (30P) and the No. 1
Is the rear outside air temperature sensor OK ? terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Replace the outside air temperature sensor. ■

1 X 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P),

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X X23 25 26 27 28 29 30
and gauge control module connector B (36P). WHT/BLK

WHT/BLK
ground.
SUNLIQHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

1 X 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X /
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
YES—Go to step 4.
BRN/WHT

control unit and the sunlight sensor. ■

between the climate control unit, the gauge control
module, and the outside air temperature sensor. ■
NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
(cont'd)
4. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of DTC indicator F: A Short in the Sunlight
climate control unit connector B (30P) and the No. 2 Sensor Circuit
terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / 13 14 3. Check for continuity between the No. 20 terminal of

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X /
23 25 26 27 28 29 30 climate control unit connector B (SOP) and body
ground.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (SOP)

YEL/GRN
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X 23
/ 25 26 27 28 29 30
WHT/BLK
U
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the climate Wire side of female terminals
control unit and the sunlight sensor. ■
5. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector. Is there continuity?
6. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (SOP). YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
7. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-122). sensor. ■
Is the sunlight sensor O K ? NO—Go to step 4.
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at 4. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are 5. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (30P).
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, 6. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-122).
Is the sunlight sensor O K ?
NO—Replace the sunlight sensor. I
YES—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
replace the original climate control unit.H
NO—Replace the sunlight sensor. ■

DTC indicator G: An Open in the Evaporator 4. Check for continuity between the No. 21 terminal of
Temperature Sensor Circuit climate control unit connector B (30P) and the No. 2
terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
connector.
No. 2 terminals of the evaporator temperature
sensor. 1
/ 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X /
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
i ■—
L.
1 2
LI U
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES—Go to step 5.

RESISTANCE control unit and the evaporator temperature
kQ sensor. ■
1© 20 30 X
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?
YES—Goto step 3.

sensor. ■

5. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of DTC indicator H: A Short in the Evaporator
climate control unit connector B (30P) and the No. 1 Tem perature Sensor Circuit
terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector. 1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
2. Test the evaporator ternperature sensor (see page
21-48).
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
Is the rear evaporator temperature sensor OK ?
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X X
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
YES—Go to step 3.

sensor. ■
YEL/GRN
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR 3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P).
Is there continuity? climate control unit connector B (30P) and body
ground.
climate control unit connector B (30P) and at the CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P)
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
1 X 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
control unit. ■
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X X23 25 26 27 28 29 30
BRN

control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor. ■

between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor. ■

replace the original climate control unit.B
HB
DTC indicator I: An Open in the Front Air Mix DTC indicator J: A Short in the Front Air Mix
Control Motor Circuit Control Motor Circuit
1. Test the front air mix control motor (see page 1. Test the front air mix control motor (see page
21-49). 21-49).
Is th e f r o n t a ir m ix c o n tr o l m o to r OK ? Is the front air mix control motor OK ?
NO—Replace the front air mix control motor. ■ NO—Replace the front air mix control motor. ■
2. Disconnect the front air mix control motor 7P 2. Disconnect the front air mix control motor 7P
3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (SOP), 3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (SOP),
and gauge control module connector B (36P). and gauge control module connector B (36P).
4. Check for continuity between the following 4. Check for continuity between body ground and
terminals of climate control unit connector B (SOP) climate control unit connector B (30P) terminals
and the front air mix control motor 7P connector. No. 17 and No. 23 individually.
30P: 7P;
No. 3 No. 5 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30PJ
No. 17 No. 3
No. 23 No. 7
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (SOP) 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 " X T 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
Wire side of female terminals 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X X 23 25 26 27 28 29 30
PNK/BLK GRY
1 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10
11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 |X | 23 25 28 27 28 29 30
YEL/
PNK/BLK c;— ? IGRN iGRY Wire side of female terminals
FRONT AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)

YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at module, and the front air mix control motor. ■
climate control unit connector B (SOP) and at the
front air mix control motor 7P connector. If the NO—Go to step 5.
front air mix control motor, and recheck. If the
original front air mix control motor. If the symptom
/indication continues, substitute a known-good
control unit ■
(cont'd).
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same DTC indicator K: A Problem in the Front Air
terminals for voltage. Mix Control Linkage, Door, or Motor

1. Test the front air mix control motor (see page
21-49).
3 4 5 8 9 10 11 13 14 Is the front air mix control motor OK ?

18 19 20 21
PNK/BLIC GRY YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Replace the front air mix control motor, or

repair the linkage and doors. B
2. Disconnect the front air mix control motor IP

Wire side of female terminals connector.

YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between terminals of climate control unit connector B (30P)
the climate control unit, the gauge control module, and the front air mix control motor IP connector.
and the front air mix control motor. This short may 30P; 7P:
also damage the climate control unit. Repair the No. 10 No. 1
short to power before replacing the climate control No. 11 No. 2
unit.B
NO—Substitute a known-good front air mix control
motor, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original front air mix control
motor. If the symptom/indication continues,
substitute a known-good climate control unit, and
1
/ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X /23 25 26 27 28 29 30
replace the original climate control unit.B
WHT
a
RED/YEL
FRONT AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the front air mix control
motor. B
nu
5. Check for continuity between body ground and DTC indicator L: An Open or Short in the
climate control unit connector B (30P) terminals Front Mode Control Motor Circuit
No. 10 and No. 11 individually.
1. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-50).
YES—Go to step 2.
1 X a 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X X
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
NO—Replace the front mode control motor. ■
2. Disconnect the front mode control motor IP

connector.
3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (SOP).

climate control unit connector B (30P) terminals
Is there continuity? No. 4,5,6, and 7 individually.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B OOP)
between the climate control unit and the front air LTGRN/BLK GRN/YEL
mix control motor. ■
BLU/YEL GRN/BLK

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / 13 14

15 18 17 18 19 20 21 22IXT2
3X 25 26 27 28 29 30

between the climate control unit and the front
mode control motor. ■
NO—Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for
terminals for voltage. continuity between the following terminals of
climate control unit connector B (30P) and the front
. CUMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B(30P) mode control motor 7P connector.
30P: 7P:
LT G R N /B L K G R N /Y E L
No. 3 No. 7
B LU /Y EL G R N /B L K
No. 4 No. 3
No. 5 No. 4
1 / 3 4 5 e 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
No. 6 No. 5
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 *1 X 1 23 25 26 27 28 29 30
/ No. 7 No. 6
CLIM ATE C O N T R O L U N IT C O N N E C T O R i (30P)

G R N /Y E L
LT G R N /B L K
B LU /Y EL G R N /B L K
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14
Is there any voltage? /
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22I X I 23 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
the climate control unit and the front mode control Y E L /G R N
motor. This short may also damage the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before B LU /Y EL G R N /B L K
replacing the climate control unit.B LT G R N /B L K
G R N /Y E L
NO—Go to step 6.
FRO N T M ODE CONTROL M OTO R 7P CO NN ECTO R

climate control unit connector B (SOP) and at the
front mode control motor 7P connector. If the
front mode control motor, and recheck. If the
original front mode control motor. If the symptom/
indication continues, substitute a known-good
control unit. ■

climate control unit and the front mode control
motor. ■
DTC indicator M: A Problem in the Front 5. Check for continuity between body ground and
Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or Motor climate control unit connector B (30P) terminals
1. Test the front mode control motor (see page 21-50),
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR i (30P)
BLU/BLK
YES—Goto step 2.
BLU/ORN
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
NO—Replace the front mode control motor, or
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 I X l 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30
repair the linkage and doors. ■
2. Disconnect the front mode control motor IP

connector.
S)
terminals of climate control unit connector B (30P) Is there continuity?
and the front mode control motor 7P connector.
30P: 7P; YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
No. 8 No. 1 between the climate control unit and the front
No. 9 No. 2 mode control motor. ■

BLU/BLK replace the original climate control unit.B
BLU/ORN
1 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 18 17 18 19 20 21 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
BLU/BLK
BLU/ORN
gT"?
3 4 5
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR IP CONNECTOR

YES—Go to step 5.

climate control unit and the front mode control
motor. ■ ■
DTC indicator N: A Problem in the Front 7. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of
Blower Motor Circuit the front power transistor 5P connector and body
ground.
fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 5P CONNECTOR
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. XL
Are the fuses OK?
YES—Go to step 2. BLK
2. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the front blower

motor 2P connector to body ground with a jumper W ire side of fem ale term inals
wire.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES—Go to step 8.
I J
X
1 r
/
front power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G401. ■
BLU/RED
JUMPER
WIRE
8. Connect the No. 4 and No. 5 terminals of the front
Wire side of female terminals FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 5P CONNECTOR
Does the front blower motor run?

BLU/RED BLK
YES—Go to step 4.
JUMPER WIRE
NO—Go to step 17.
6. Disconnect the front power transistor 5P connector. Does the front blower motor run at high speed?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the front

power transistor and the front blower motor. ■

12. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P). 15. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (30P).
13. Check for continuity between the No. 15 and No. 16. 16. Test the front power transistor (see page 21-48).
terminals of climate control unit connector B (30P)
and body ground individually. Is the front power transistor OK ?
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (SOP) YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
front power transistor 5P connector. If the
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14 connections are good, substitute a known-good
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ( X I 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 ' climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
/
[ORN/BLK indication goes away, replace the original climate
BLU/RED
control unit ■
(0 )
NO—Replace the front power transistor. ■
Wire side of female terminals 17. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the front blower motor 2P connector and body
ground.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
between the climate control unit and the front
power transistor. ■
‘ I y
NO—Go to step 14. 1 2
\ /
YEL/BLK I
terminals of climate control unit connector B (30P) (Y)
and front power transistor 5P connector.
SOP: 5P:
No. 15 No. 1 Wire side of female terminals
No. 16 No. 3
1 3 4 5 6 7 > < T 8 9 10 11 13 14 YES—Replace the front blower motor. ■

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 ^ 2 3 25 26 27 28 29 30
/
ORN/BLK NO—Go to step 18.
© 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

I BLU/RED 1
ORN/BLK
/
4 □ 5 19. Remove the front blower motor relay from the
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 5P CONNECTOR 22-83).
Is the relay OK ?
YES—Goto step 20.
NO—Replace the front blower motor relay. ■
(confd)
20. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 term inal of 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ground. 24. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of
ground.
BLK
2 1
4 ’ 3
tr

NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. ■ YES—Repair open in the YEL/BLK wire between the
front blower motor relay and the front blower
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). motor. ■
22. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of NO—Check for an open in the wire between the
the front blower motor relay 4P socket and body front blower motor relay and body ground. If the
ground. wire is OK, check for poor ground at G201.B
BLK/YEL

box and the front blower motor relay. ■
BB
DTC 1: A Problem in the Rear Blower Motor 7. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of
Circuit the rear power transistor 4P connector and body
ground.
fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
.ii"
d
2
Are the fuses OK ?
3 4
YES—Goto step 2. BLK
2. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the rear blower

motor 2P connector to body ground with a jumper
wire.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR Is there contlnuity ?
n=n
................................................................ ,r
.
YES—Goto step 8.

rear power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G501. ■
JUMPER BLU
WIRE
8. Connect the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals of the rear
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR


BLU
ro
1
Does the rear blower motor run? 4 JUMPER
CO
WIRE
BLK
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Go to step 25.

6. Disconnect the rear power transistor 4P connector. Does the rear blower motor run at high speed?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the rear

power transistor and the rear blower motor. ■
(cont'd)
12. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (20P). 15. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (20P).
13. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 16. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-129).
terminals of climate control unit connector A (20P)
and body ground individually. Is the rear power transistor OK ?
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) YES—Goto step 17.
GRN RED/GRN NO—Replace the rear power transistor. ■

1 2 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10
17. Disconnect the rear heater-A/C control switch 10P
11 12 14 16 17 18 19 20 connector.
/ /
18. Test the rear heater-A/C control switch (see page

21-130).
Wire side of female terminals Is the rear heater-A/C control switch OK ?

NO—Replace the rear heater-A/C control switch. ■
between the climate control unit and the rear 19. Check for continuity between body ground and
power transistor. ■ climate control unit connector A (20P) terminals
No. 6,7, 8,9,10, and 20 individually.
NO—Go to step 14.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P).

YEL/WHT
GRN/RED
and rear power transistor 4P connector. YEL ILTBLU
20P: 4P:
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 m [LT GRN
No. 3 No. 4
No. 4 No. 1 11 12
/ 14 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/BLU
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
GRN RED/GRN
1 2 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 Wire side of female terminals
/
RED/GRN [ g Is there continuity?

JGRN between the climate control unit and the rear
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR heater-A/C control switch. ■

20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
YEL/W HT REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR

GRN/RED
YEL [LT BLU
8 9 m LT GRN *T ?
1 2 3 / 4 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12
/ /
14 16 17 18 19 20
BLK
YEL/BLU
'iM g >
Wire side of female terminals W ire side of female terminals

the climate control unit and the rear heater-A/C YES—Go to step 23.
control switch. This short may also damage the
rear heater-A/C control switch. Repair the short to NO—Check for an open in the wire between the
power before replacing the rear heater-A/C control rear heater-A/C control switch and body ground. If
switch. ■ the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G501.B
NO—Go to step 21.
(cont'd)
23. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 25. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the rear blower motor 2P connector and body
24. Check for continuity between the following ground.
and the rear heater-A/C control switch 10P REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
connector.
20P: 10P: JSL
BLU/YEL
No. 6 No. 6 1
No. 7 No. 5
No. 8 No. 4
No. 9 No. 3
No. 10 No. 2
No. 20 No. 1

YEL/WHT Wire side of female terminals

GRN/RED
YEL LT BLU Is there battery voltage?
LT GRN
1 2 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10
YES—Replace the rear blower motor (see page
11 12 14 16 17 18 19 20
/ / 21-131).■
YEL/BLU
NO—Go to step 26.
u (0 (U )
ltg r n T Il t b l u
a
5~£bS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
YEL/BLU YEL/WHT
GRN/RED
REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH 10P CONNECTOR

climate control unit connector A (20P) and at the
rear heater-A/C control switch 10P connector. If the
control unit.■

climate control unit and the rear heater-A/C control
switch. ■
27. Remove the rear blower motor relay from the left
side of rear heater-A/C unit, and test it (see page
22-83). REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
Is the relay OK?

L
BLK/YEL
1 ?
3 4
NO—Replace the rear blower motor relay. ■

ground.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

-T"... .""“ L.
RED
1 2
3 4
box and the rear blower motor relay. ■
Is there battery voltage? ground.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR

(30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the rear blower motor relay.■
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). BLK
YES—Repair open in the BLU/YEL wire between

the rear blower motor relay and the rear blower
motor. ■

rear blower motor relay and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G501.ll
DTC 2: A Problem in the Rear Air Mix Control 5. Check for continuity between body ground and
Linkage, Door, or Motor climate control unit connector A (20P) terminals
1. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page
21-126). CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Is the rear air mix control motor OK ?

PNK
YES—Go to step 2. 1 2 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 14 / 16 17 18 19 20
NO—Replace the rear air mix control motor /
(see page 21-126), or repair the rear air mix control GRN/ORN
linkage or door.■
2. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor IP

connector. W ire side of female terminals
3. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (20P).

terminals of climate control unit connector A (20P) YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
and the rear air mix control motor IP connector. between the climate control unit and the rear air
20P: 7P: mix control motor. ■
No. 1 No. 1
No. 2 No. 2 NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) replace the original climate control unit.H
PNK
1 2 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 14 16 17 18 19 20
/ / f
GRN/ORN
GRN/ORN
1 2 3 5
/ /
PNK
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

YES—Goto step 5.

climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor. ■
BB
DTC 3: A Short In the Rear Air Mix Control 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
Motor Circuit terminal for voltage.
1. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P CUMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B OOP)
connector.
2. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P), 1 / 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14

and gauge control module connector B (36P). 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X /
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
GRY
climate control unit connector B (3GP) terminal
No. 23.
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B OOP)-

1
/ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X /
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
GRY
YES—Repair short to power in the wirefs) between
the climate control unit, the gauge control module,
and the rear air mix control motor. This short may
also damage the climate control unit. Repair the
short to power before replacing the climate control
Wire side of female terminals unit.B

Is there continuity? and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control u n it.l
module, and the rear air mix control motor. ■
NO—Go to step 4.
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd) Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting
DTC 4: An Open in the Rear Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit
1. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P dash fuse/relay box.
connector.
Is the fuse OK ?
2. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (20P)
and B (30P). YES—Go to step 2.
3. Check for continuity between following terminals NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. ■
of climate control unit connector A (20P) and B
(30P) and the rear air mix control motor 7P 2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
20P: 7P:
No. 14 No. 3 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
30P: 7P;
No. 3 No. 5 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
No. 23 No. 7 the recirculation control motor 7P connector and
body ground.
4 7 7P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/ 6 8 9 10
11 12 14 17 18 19 20
/ / 16
BRN/YEL
@ REAR AIR MIX CONTROL

MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
BRN/YEL
a
YEL/GRN
GRY
1 / 3 4 5 6 7 x 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ( X I 23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30
GRY
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) YES—Go to step 5.
Is there continuity? NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3

YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at box and the recirculation control motor. ■
climate control unit connectors A (20P) and B (30P)
and at the rear air mix control motor 7P connector. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
If the connections are good, substitute a known-
good rear air mix control motor, and recheck. If the 6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
symptom/indication goes away, replace the 21-51).
original rear air mix control motor. If the symptom
continues, substitute a known-good climate control Is the recirculation control motor OK ?
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit.B YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Replace the recirculation control motor. ■

an
8. Check for continuity between the No. 25 and No. 26 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminals of climate control unit connector B (30P)
and body ground individually. 11. Check for continuity between the-following. ',
terminals of climate control unit connector B (30P):
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
30P: 9 7P:
No. 25 No. 5
No. 26 No. 7
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B I30P)
19 3 4 5 6 x 7 8 1011X 9 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 202122X X 23 25 26 27 28 29 30
Is th e r e c o n t in u ity ?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) 7P CONNECTOR
between the climate control unit and the W ire side of female terminals
recirculation control.motor.p.
Is th e r e c o n t in u ity ?
NO—Goto step9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same climate control unit connector B (30P) and at
terminals fo r voltage. recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit.P :
1 9 3 4 5 6 7 > < 8 9 10 11
9 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X / 23 25 26 27 28 29 30
climate control unit and the recirculation control
GRN/RED
motor. ■
Is th e r e a n y v o lta g e ?

the climate control unit and the recirculation
control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit. Repair the short to power
before replacing the climate control unit. P
ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Climate Control Power and Ground
Troubleshooting Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Before performing symptom troubleshooting, NOTE: Before performing symptom troubleshooting,
check for powertrain DTC (see page 11-3). check for powertrain DTC (see page 11-3).
1. Check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). 1. Check the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under
Does the malfunction indicator lamp come on?
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Refer to the fuel and emissions systems
DTCs (see page 11-3). YES—Goto step 2.
NO—Go to step 2. NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. ■
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P).
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (30P). 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 13 terminal
of climate control unit connector B (30P) and body

of climate control unit connector B (30P) and body
ground. BLK/YEL I
<T ?
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B OOP)

1
X 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X X23 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 X 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
X X
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
RED/WHT

YES—Go to step 5.
Is there about 5 V? NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3

YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at box and the climate control unit ■
ECT sensor 1 2P connector. If the connections are 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,

control unit and the ECT sensor 1. ■
Navigation Communication Line
DB
Circuit Troubleshooting
ground. : 1. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P).
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (30P) 2. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (20P).

1 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 13 14
and navigation unit connector A (20P).
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 X 9
23 25 26 27 28 29 30
20P 20P
BLK
No. 17 No. 4
No. 18 No. 15
No. 19 No. 14

1 2 3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10
Is there continuity? 11 12 / 14 16 17 18 19 20
/
GRN/ORN RED/GRN
YEL/BLU
climate control unit connector B (SOP). If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good GRN/ORN |, ®
. j —
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ 1 2 3 4

5 X / 8 9 10
indication goes away, replace the original climate 11 12 13 14 15 / / 18 X 20
control unit.H
RED/GRN YEL/BLU
climate cpntrol unit and body ground. If the wire is NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
OK, check for poor ground at G401. ■ Wire side of female terminals
YES—Go to step 4.

climate control unit and the navigation unit. I
(cont'd)
Navigation Communication Line Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit
Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd) Troubleshooting
4. Check for continuity between body ground and NOTE: Before performing symptom troubleshooting,
climate control unit connector A (20P) terminals check for powertrain DTC (see page 11-3).
No. 17,18, and 19 individually.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20PI dash fuse/relay box.
..ESQ. Is the fuse OK?

1 2 3 4 6 7 9 10
11 12 14 16 17 18 19 20 YES—Go to step 2.
GRN/ORN RED/GRN
YEL/BLU NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. ■

Wire side of female terminals the rear mode control motor 7P connector and
body ground.
Is there continuity? REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) 7 9 7 ^7 7 1 " .'I

between the climate control unit and the navigation
BLK/YEL
unit. ■
NO—Check for loose wire or poor connections at

climate control unit connector A (20P) and at the
navigation unit connector A (20P). If the Wire side of female terminals
climate control unit and/or navigation unit, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, Is there battery voltage?
replace the original climate control unit and/or
navigation unit. ■ YES—Go to step 4.

box and the rear mode control motor. ■
5. Disconnect the rear mode control motor 7P

connector.
6. Test the rear mode control motor (see page 21-127).
Is the rear mode control motor OK ?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Replace the rear mode control motor. ■
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (20P).

BB
8. Check for continuity between the No. 11 and No. 12 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
and body ground individually. 11. Check for continuity between the following
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) and the rear mode control motor IP connector.
20P: IP:
No. 11 No. 5
No. 12 No. 7

1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10
/
11 12 14 16 17 18 19 20
/ /
GRN/W HT BLU/ORN
@ (u
grn/ w h t] ,b lu / orn
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
between the climate control unit and the rear mode W ire side of female terminals
control motor. ■
NO—Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same climate control unit connector A (20P) and at rear
terminals for voltage. mode control motor 7P connector. If the
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit 11
1 2 3 /
4 6 7 8 9 10
11 12
/ 7
14 16 17 18 19 20
climate control unit and the rear mode control
G RN/W HT
motor. ■

the climate control unit and the rear mode control
motor. This short may also damage the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit ■
In-car Temperature Sensor Test In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement
Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling
the sensor with a hair dryer.
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (A) from the
Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector (B)
No. 2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with and the air hose (C). Be careful not to damage the
the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance sensor or the dashboard.
should be within the specifications.
A B
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

12
11
10
9
8
RESISTANCE 1
(kQ) 6
5
4 2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
3 Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
2
1
14 32 50 68 86 104 °F
—10 0 10 20 30 m ° c
TEMPERATURE
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Outside Air Temperature Sensor
an
Test Replacement
Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. 1. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, and remove the
Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for a outside air temperature sensor (B) from the back of
. change in resistance. the front bumper beam. Disconnect the 2P
connector (C) from the outside air temperature
Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and sensor.
No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor
with the specifications shown in the graph; the
resistance should be within the specifications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11
10
9
8 \
RESISTANCE 7
i kQ) 6
5
4
\
3 ..9 ■
2
1
14 32 50 68 86 104 T
-1 0 0 10 20 30 40 *C
TEMPERATURE
Sunlight Sensor Test Sunlight Sensor Replacement
Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage 1. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the
between the terminals with the (+ ) probe on the No. 1 dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector (B).
terminal and the (—) probe on the Nonterm inal with Be careful not to damage the sensor or the
the 2P connector connected. The voltage readings will dashboard.
not change under the light of a flashlight or a
fluorescent lamp. Voltage should be:
• 3.6—3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct

sunlight.
• 3.3—3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.

Climate Control Unit Removal/ Climate Control Unit Bulb
Installation Replacement
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93). 1. Discharge the static electricity (which accumulated
on you when you removed the climate control unit)
2. Remove the screws, and remove the climate by touching the door striker or other body parts.
control unit (A) with the brackets from the
dashboard, then disconnect the connectors (B). 2. Remove the self-tapping screws, then carefully
separate the climate control unit cover (A) and the
control unit (B) from the control unit display (C). Do
not kink or pull on the wires between the display
and the control unit. Do not touch the electronic
components on the printed circuit board in the
control unit.
3. Remove the screws and the climate control unit (A)

from the brackets (B). C
A
3. Remove the bulb(s) with a flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Install the control unit in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the control unit
controls to see whether it works properly. 4. Install the bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal.

there are no problems in the system (see page
21-78).
REAR HEATER-A/C UNIT

,REAR HEATER-A/C UNIT COMPONENT

/Replacement, page 21-134
/ /REAR HEATER CORE

/ / Replacement page 21-131
I / , REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH

j Removal/Installation, page 21-130
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR

(Climate Control System)
T e s t page 21-127
REAR AIR M IX CONTROL MOTOR

(Climate Control System)
T es t page 21-126
REAR A /C LINE
(Heating/Air Conditioning System)
Test, page 21-127
REAR BLOWER MOTOR REAR POWER TRANSISTOR

Replacement page 21-131 (Climate Control System)
Test, page 21-129
REAR BLOWER RESISTER
(Heating/Air Conditioning System)
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-82
Urn
System Description
Rear Heater-A/C Door Positions
COOL
(VENT)
HOT
(HEAT)
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test Rear Air M ix Control Motor
Replacement
Climate Control System
1. Disconnect the IP connector from the rear air mix Climate Control System
control motor.
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-104).
INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to 2. Remove the center console (see page 20-88).
the rear air mix control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully. 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the rear air
mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the screws and the rear air mix control motor from the
rear air mix control motor, and ground the No. 2 rear heater-A/C unit.
terminal; the rear air mix control motor should run,
and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the rear air mix control motor should
run, and stop at Max Cool.
3. If the rear air mix control motor does not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the rear air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.

the rear air mix control motor.
as needed.
• If the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly,
go to step 4.
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
sure the motor runs smoothly.

No. 7 terminals. It should be between 2.5 to 4.7 kQ.
5. Reconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P

connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage

between the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals.
Max Cool: About 4.2 V

Max Hot: About 0.7 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not

as specified, replace the rear air mix control motor.
Rear Mode Control Motor Test
Heating/Air Conditioning System - Climate Control System
1.. Disconnect the IP connector from the rear mode 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the rear mode
control motor. control motor.
INOTICE INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the rear mode control motor will damage it. the rear mode control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully. Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 2 terminal of the 2. Connect battery power to the No. T terminal of the
rear mode control;motor, and ground the No. 1 rear mode control motor, and ground the No. 5 and
terminal, then connect ground the No. 3 or No. 4 or No. 7 terminals; the rear mode control motor
No. 7 terminals; the rear mode control motor should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the rear
should run smoothly. To -avoid damaging the rear mode control motor, do not reverse power and
mode control motor, do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the No. 5 or No. 7 terminals
ground; the rear mode control motor should stop at from ground; the rear mode control motor should
- Vent or Heat. stop at Vent or Heat. Don't cycle the rear mode
control motor for a long time.
3 |f rear mode control motor does not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the rear mode control 3. If the rear mode control motor does not run in
linkage and door for smooth movement. step 2, remove it, then check the rear mode control
linkage and door for smooth movement.
the rear mode control motor. • If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace
* If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them the rear mode control motor.
as needed. • If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
Rear Mode Control Motor Replacement
Heating/Air Conditioning System Climate Control System
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-104). 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-88).
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-88). 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the rear
mode control motor (B). Remove the rod (C) of the
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the rear rear mode control motor from the rear mode
mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping control linkage (D). Remove the self-tapping screws
screws and the rear mode control motor from the and the rear mode control motor from the rear
rear heater-A/C unit. heater-A/C unit.

Make sure the pin on the motor is properly 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
engaged with the linkage. After installation, make After installation, make sure the motor runs
sure the motor runs smoothly. smoothly.
Rear Power Transistor Test
Climate Control System 4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the rear power

transistor.
1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the rear power
transistor. 5. Supply 12 V to the No. 4 cavity with a jumper wire.
2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and 6 . Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the
No. 2 terminals of the rear power transistor. It rear blower motor runs.
should be about 1.4— 1.5 k Q .
• If the rear blower motor does not run, replace the
• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to rear power transistor.
step 3. * If the rear blower motor runs, the rear power
• If the resistance is not within the specifications, transistor is OK.
replace the rear power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the rear blower motor. Rear

power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective blower motor.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR
3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 4 terminal

(GRN) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
Rear Heater-A/C Control Switch Rear Heater-A/C Control Switch
Removal/Installation Test
1. Remove the console rear trim (see step 5 on page Check for continuity between the terminals in each
20-89). switch position according to the table.
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the rear \ Terminal

1 3 4 5 6 7
heater-A/C control switch (A) from the console rear Position \
trim (B). OFF
• (Cool) o o
• (Cool) oo
• (Cool) o o
• (Hot) o o
• (Hot) o o
• (Hot) oo
REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH SOCKET A (7P)
fp — J Li
1 3
4 5 6 7
\ Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
3. Install the control switch in the reverse order of Position \
removal. After installation, operate the control OFF
switch controls to see whether it works properly.
• (Cool)
r \
o k j
there are no problems in the system.
• (Cool)
• (Cool)
O
O
o o 0
• (Hot) kJ
• (Hot) o o
• (Hot) do
REAR HEATER-A/C CONTROL SWITCH SOCKET B (10P)
mm
Rear Blower Motor Replacement Rear Heater Core Replacement
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-88). 1. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant
from the radiator (see page 10-6).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear
blower motor (B), then remove the self-tapping 2. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page
screws and the cover (C). Turn the rear blower 20-104).
motor clockwise to the stop, and remove it.
3. Remove the center console (see page 20-88).
4. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the

inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C)
from the rear heater core. Engine coolant will run
out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a
clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on
the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any
coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
5. Remove the self-tapping screws and the clamps (A).

Carefully pull out the rear heater core (B) so you
don't bend the inlet and outlet pipes.
6. Install the heater core in the reverse order of


(see page 10-6).
Rear Heater-A/C Unit Removal/Installation
19 When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant 5. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnectthe
from the radiator (see page 10-6). inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose (C)
from the rear heater core. Engine coolant will run
2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a
charging station (see page 21-67). clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on
the electrical parts, the carpet, or the painted
3. Remove the center console (see page 20-88). surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off
immediately.
4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the rear blower
motor relay. Remove the bolts and the bracket (B).
6. Remove the nuts at the rear evaporator suction line

(A) and the receiver line (B) connections.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
7. Disconnect the connector (A) from the dashboard 8. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and
wire harness. Remove the mounting bolts and the note these items;
rear heater-A/C unit (B). Plug or cap the lines
immediately after disconnecting them to avoid • If you're installing a new rear evaporator, add
moisture and dust contamination. Disconnect the refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see page 21-5).
connectors (C) from the rear blower motor, the rear • Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
blower resistor (heating/air conditioning), the rear and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
power transistor (climate control system), the rear installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
air mix control motor (climate control system) and for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
the rear mode control motor, then remove the wire • Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
harness clips (D). on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft) • Do not spill refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts
the paint, wash it off immediately.
(see page 10-6).
Rear Heater-A/C Unit Component Replacement
NOTE: The rear blower motor (A), the rear heater core (B), the blower screen (C), the rear blower resistor (heating/air
conditioning system) and the rear power transistor (climate control system) (D), the rear air mix control motor (climate
control system) (E), the rear mode control motor (F) and the rear expansion valve (G) can be replaced without
removing the rear heater-A/C unit.
1. Remove the self-tapping screws and the clamp (H), then remove the bolts and the rear evaporator lines (I) with the
rear expansion valve. If necessary, remove the rear expansion valve. Use a second wrench to hold the other fitting
on the valve so the rear evaporator lines won't twist. Leave the first fitting loosely connected so you can use it to
hold the valve while you loosen the second fitting.
♦CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM 4 4 I

2. If necessary, remove the rear blower motor (see page 21-131), the rear heater core (see page 21-131), the blower
screen, the rear blower resistor (heating/air conditioning system), the rear power transistor (climate control
system), the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-126) and the rear mode control motor (see page 21-128).
3. Remove the self-tapping screws and the lower housing (J). Remove the self-tapping screws, and carefully
separate the left upper housing (K) from the right upper housing (L). Remove the rear evaporator core (M).
4. Reassemble the unit in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Replace all O-rings with new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them.
Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
• Make sure no air is leaking from the left upper housing and the right upper housing fitting and from the upper
housings and the lower housing fitting.
• Install the capillary tube (N) directly against the outlet line, and wrap it with electrical tape (O).
• Before reassembly, make sure that the rear air mix control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the rear mode control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-126).
• After reassembly, make sure the rear mode control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-127).
Removal 5. Remove the screwfrom the A/C line clamp (A)
above the steering rack on the driver's side.
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycIing/
charging station (see page 21-67).
2. Disconnect the rear A/C suction line (A) and

receiver line (B) at the front evaporator.
6. Remove the screw from the A/C line clamp (A) next
to the steering rack.
3. Remove the screws from the two clamps (A) along

the engine compartment bulkhead, then free the
rear A/C lines (B) from the clamps.
4. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the left front

wheel.
Rear A/C Line Replacement (cont'd)
7. Disconnect the rear A/C suction line (A) and Installation

receiver line (B) at the rear evaporator connections.
NOTE:
• Use care not to bend the replacement A/C lines
during installation.
• Be careful not to bend or snag the brake lines, wire
harness, or other components when installing the
replacement A/C lines.
1. Route the lower replacement rear A/C lines (suction

line, then receiver line) from the top of the engine
compartment down to the rear evaporator
connections. Do not connect the lines yet.
2. Route the upper replacement A/C lines along the

engine compartment bulkhead, and loosely
connect the upper lines (A) to the lower lines (B).
Do not tighten the connections yet.
8. Free the rear A/C lines from the bracket above the
31 M m
steering gearbox.
9. Remove the rear A/C lines (receiver line, then

suction line) from the top of the engine
compartment. If necessary, bend the rear A/C lines
as needed for removal.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend or snag the brake

lines, wire harness, or other components when
removing the rear A/C lines.
13 N m
(1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 Ibf ft)
3. Install the A/C line clamp (A) on the lower

replacement A/C line. Slide the bracket onto its A/C
line bracket (B), but do not install the screw yet.
DU
4. Install the A/C line clamp (A) on the lower 9. Apply a few drops of refrigerant oil to the
replacement A/C line. Slide the bracket onto the its connections, then connect the rear A/C suction line
A/C line bracket but do not install the screw yet. (A) and receiver line (B) to the front evaporator
lines. Do not tighten the connections yet.
31 N-m A
5. Apply a few drops of refrigerant oil to the

connections, then connect the lower lines (A) to the
rear evaporator lines (B). Do not tighten the
connections yet. 10. Install the screws into the two A/C line clamps (A)
along the engine compartment bulkhead.
(3.2 kgf-m,
23 Ibf-ft)
11. Tighten the upper-A/C-1ine-to-front-evaporator
6 . Install the screw in the A/C line clamp (above the connections.
steering gearbox) on the lower A/C lines.
12. Tighten the upper-to-lower A/C line connections.
7. Install the screw in the A/C line clamp (next to the
steering rack) on the lower A/C lines. 13. Add refrigerant oil (see page 21-5).
8. Tighten the lower A/C lines at the rear evaporator 14. Charge the system (see page 21-69).
connections.
15. Reinstall the left front wheel.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)
Honda dealer.
airbags may deploy.
Body Electrical Auto-off Headlights Control Unit Input
Special Tools ............................... ...... . 22-2 Test ........ ...................................... ...... 22-137
General Troubleshooting Information ..... 22-3 Daytime Running Lights Control
Unit Input Test ....................... ......... 22-140
Relay and Control Unit Headlight Adjustment .............. ............... 22-142
Locations..... ............................. 22-7 Headlight Replacement ............................ 22-143
Bulb Replacement .................... .............. 22-144
Connectors and Harnesses ......... 22-13 License Plate Light Replacement ............. 22-146
Taillight Replacement ............................. 22-147
Fuse/Relay Boxes .......................... 22-67 Back-up Light Replacement ............ ........ 22-147
High Mount Brake Light Replacement ...... 22-148
Power Distribution .................... . 22-70 Brake Pedal Position Switch Test ............. 22-148
Fog Light Replacement ........................... 22-149
Ground Distribution ....... .......... . 22-77 Fog Light Adjustment ....... ....................... 22-149
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights

Removal and Installation ........................ 22-79 Component Location Index ..................... .22-150
Circuit Diagram ............ ..... ......................22-151
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test ........22-152
Removal and Installation ............. ........... 22-80 Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement ...... 22-153
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement ...... ..22-153
Battery
Battery Test ........... ................................ . 22-81 Interior Lights
Component Location Index ................. 22-154
Relays Circuit Diagram ................... ....... ...... ..... 22-156
Power Relay Test ..................... ............... 22-82 Front Individual Map Light Test/
Replacement ..................... ...... ............. 22-158
* Ignition Switch Rear Individual Map Light Test ......... . 22-159
Test .................. ......................... ............ 22-85 Tailgate Light Test ................................... 22-160
Tailgate Latch Switch Test ..................... 22-160
* Gauges Glove Box Light Test .............................. 22-161
Component Location Index .......... ........ . 22-87 Front Console Light Test .................. . 22-161
Self-diagnostic Function ......................... 22-90 Vanity Mirror Light Replacement ............ 22-162
Circuit Diagram ............ ........................... 22-92 Courtesy Light Replacement .................. 22-162
DTC Troubleshooting Index .......... .......... 22-98 Interior Lights Switch Test ............ .......... 22-163
DTC Troubleshooting ............................... 22-99 Ambient Light Test/Replacement ........... 22-163
Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring
the Maintenance Minder on a Entry Lights Control System
New Gauge Control Module ............ . 22-102 Component Location Index .................... 22-164
Gauge Control Module Replacement ....... 22-102 Circuit Diagram ....................................... 22-165
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Ignition Key Switch Test ......................... 22-166
Calibration .......................................... . 22-103 Ignition Key Light Test ............................ 22-166
Gauge Control Module Input Test ............ 22-105 Control Circuit Input Test ........................ 22-167
Dash Lights Brightness Controller
Circuit Diagram ................................ 22-107 HomeLink® Remote Control System
Circuit Diagram .............. ......................... 22-173
Safety Indicator System Test ................................... .................... . 22-174
Component Location Index ......................22-109
Circuit Diagram ............................. ...........22-110 * Horns
Safety Indicator Input Test ........................22-112 Component Location Index ................. 22-175
Brake Light Failure Sensor Test .............. .22-114 Circuit Diagram ..................................... . 22-176
Horn Switch Test ................... ................. 22-177
Reminder Systems Horn Test/Replacement ....... ............... 22-178
Circuit Diagram ....................... ............. 22-116
Control Unit Input Test ............................. 22-118 Rear Window Defogger
Gauge Control Module Input Test ............. 22-121 Component Location Index .............. ...... 22-179
Circuit Diagram ....................................... 22-180
Exterior Lights Function Test ........................................... 22-181
Component Location Index ..................... 22-122 Defogger Wire Repair .............................. 22-181
Circuit Diagram - Auto-off Headlights ..... 22-125 Noise Condenser Capacity Test ...... ....... 22-182
Circuit Diagram - With Automatic
Lights-off Feature (USA models) ......... 22-126 Power Seats
Circuit Diagram - Without Automatic Component Location Index .................... 22-183
Lights-off Feature (USA models) ......... 22-127 Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-184
Circuit Diagram - With Automatic Power Seat Adjustment Switch Test/
Lights-off Feature (Canada models) ..... 22-128 Replacement .................... ................... 22-185
Circuit Diagram - Without Automatic Motor Test ........................... ................... 22-186
Lights-off Feature (Canada models) ..... 22-130
Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights .......... ......... 22-132 Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights ............. 22-133 Component Location Index .................... 22-187
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights ................ 22-134 Circuit Diagram ...................... ................ 22-188
Combination Light Switch Test/ Seat Heater Test ....................... .......... 22-189
Replacement ....................... ....... . 22-135 Switch Test/Replacement ....................... 22-190
Power Mirrors Transmitter Programming ............... 22-290
Component Location Index ......... ....... .....22-191 Keyless Receiver Unit Input Test ..... 22-291
Circuit Diagram ....................................... .22-192 Door Lock Knob Switch Test ............ 22-293
Function Test ...................................... ......22-193 Door Lock Actuator Test ........... ...... 22-295
Power Mirror and Mirror Defogger Door Key Cylinder Switch Test ......... 22-296
Switch Test/Replacement ..................... .22-194 Door Lock Switch Test ............... 22-296
Power Mirror Actuator Test .......................22-195 Tailgate Lock Actuator Test ............. 22-297
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement ...... .22-195 Hood Switch Test ............................. 22-297
Security Indicator Test/Replacement 22-298
Moonroof
Component Location Index ................. 22-197 Accessory Power Sockets
Circuit Diagram ................................... ......22-198 Component Location Index .......... . 22-299
Limit Switch Test ..................................... 22-199 Circuit Diagram .................. ............... 22-300
Limit Switch Replacement ........... ........... 22-199 Front Accessory Power Socket
Switch Test ............................................ 22-200 Test/Replacement ........................ 22-301
Moonroof Motor Test ........................... . 22-200 Console Accessory Power Socket
Test/Replacement ........................ 22-302
Wipers/Washers Rear Accessory Power Socket
Component Location Index .................... . 22-201 Test/Replacement ............. ........... 22-303
Circuit Diagram ....... ...................... ......... 22-204 Cargo Area Accessory Power Socket
Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement ..... . 22-304
Test/Replacement ................................ 22-207
Control Unit Input Test ............................ 22-208 AC Power Outlet
Wiper Motor Test ................... ................. 22-212 Component Location Index 22-305
Washer Motor Test/Replacement ............ 22-213 Circuit Diagram ................. 22-306
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test/ AC Inverter Unit Input Test 22-307
Replacement .............. ......................... 22-213 Power Outlet Replacement 22-308
Wiper Motor Replacement ........... .......... 22-214
Washer Tube Replacement ..................... 22-216 Electrical Compass
Washer Reservoir Replacement .............. 22-218 Component Location Index ......... 22-309
Circuit Diagram ............................ 22-310
Immobilizer System Electrical Compass Unit Input Test 22-311
Component Location Index .................... 22-219 Electrical Compass Calibration ..... 22-312
System Description ...... ................. ........ 22-221
System Check ........ ................ ..... ...... . 22-223 Audio System
Status Log .............................. .............. . 22-224 Component Location Index ............ 22-314
Circuit Diagram ........................................ 22-225 Symptom Troubleshooting Index .... 22-315
Troubleshooting ..................................... 22-226 System Description ........................ 22-316
Imoes Unit Input Test/Replacement ........ 22-237 Circuit Diagram ........ ...................... 22-328
Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver Self-Diagnostic Function ................. 22-331
Replacement ........ ................ .............. 22-239 Error Codes .................... 22-333
Immobilizer Key Registration ........ ..... . 22-240 Symptom Troubleshooting ............ 22-334
Sound Quality Diagnosis ................ 22-366
Multiplex Control System Audio Unit Removal/Installation .... 22-372
Component Location Index .......... .......... 22-241 XM Receiver Removal/Installation ... 22-375
Circuit Diagram .................. .................... 22-242 Active Noise Control Unit Removal/
System Description ..................... ........... 22-243 Installation ..... ................. ...... ...... 22-375
Troubleshooting ...... ........ ................... . 22-244 Active Noise Control Microphone
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test ...... . 22-250 Removal/Installation ................... 22-376
Speaker Replacement .......... .......... 22-376
Power Windows Audio Remote Switch Test/Replacement 22-378
Component Location Index ................ . 22-254 AM/FM Antenna Amplifier Replacement . 22-378
System Description ..................... ........... 22-255 XM Antenna Replacement .............. 22-379
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit ......... 22-255 AM/FM Antenna Test .................... . 22-379
Circuit Diagram ...................... ................. 22-256 AM/FM Antenna Repair .............. ..., 22-380
Control Unit Input Test ........................... 22-260
Power Window Control Unit Input Test .......... 22-266 Rear Entertainment System
Driver's Power Window Motor Test ....... 22-269 Component Location Index ................ 22-381
Passenger's Power Window Motor Test... ...... 22-270 Symptom Troubleshooting Index ....... 22-382
Power Window Master Switch System Description ............................ 22-383
Replacement ................. .............. ........ 22-271 Circuit Diagram ................... ............. 22-390
Passenger's Power Window Switch Test/ Self-Diagnostic Function ..................... 22-395
Replacement ........................................ 22-271 Symptom Troubleshooting ............... . 22-404
DVD Player Unit Removal/Installation . 22-423
Kevless/Power Door Locks/ Rear Controller and Screen Removal/
Security System Installation ...................................... 22-423
Component Location Index ................. 22-272 Auxiliary Jack Assembly Replacement 22-425
System Description ................................. 22-274 Wireless Headphone Battery Replacement .. 22-426
Circuit Diagram ................................ . 22-276 Wireless Remote Control Battery
Control Unit Input Test ............................ 22-280 Replacement ................... ................ 22-426
Transmitter Test ..................................... 22-289
Navigation System 22-427
Special Tools
Ref. No, Tool Number Description Qty

® 07WAZ-001010A MFCS Short Connector 1
® 07XAJ-001000A Terminal Inspection Feeler Tool Set 1
(D 07TAZ-001020A Back Probe Adaptor 1
® 07AAZ-SDBA100 Diagnostics CD 1
07AAZ-SDBA200 (ABEX-TCD-725B) Skip Test CD 1
® 07AAZ-SDBA300 (ABEX-TCD-721) Skip Test CD 1
®,©,(D
Tips and Precautions Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Before Troubleshooting another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay unless you first release the lock and remove the
box.: connector from its mount bracket (A).
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and

clean and tight connections.
INOTICE I
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the
battery ground cable has been
disconnected, otherwise you will damage
the alternator diodes.
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with
the battery ground cable loosely
connected or you will severely damage the
wiring.
Handling Connectors
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
loose wire terminals. wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with Always reinstall plastic covers.
dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
Before connecting connectors, make sure the

terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
• Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
A • Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
* The backs of some connectors are packed with

dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the
grease is contaminated, replace it.
After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and
other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (B).
• Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is

securely locked.
• Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces
down.
Testing and Repairs Five-step Troubleshooting
• Do not use wires or harnesses w ith broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break 1. Verify The Complaint:
with electrical tape. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. to verify the customer complaint. Note the
If there is an open or damage is SRS wiring or symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing
terminals, replace the harness. until you have narrowed down the problem area.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them. 2. Analyze The Schematic:
• When using electrical test equipment, follow the Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
manufacturer's instructions and those described in Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
this manual. tracing the current paths from the power feed
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire through the circuit components to ground. If
side (except waterproof connector). several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or a
ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of

the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:

Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:

Once the specific problem is identified, make the
• Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:

Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.
• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
Wire Color Codes How to Check for DTCs w ith the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire
colors in the circuit schematics: 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
W H T.......................... ..............White Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) located under the
YEL...... ....................................Yellow driver's side of the dashboard.
BLK......... .................................Black
BLU...... ...................................Blue NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's
GRN..................................... Green manual that came with the Honda Diagnostic
RED ..........................................Red System (HDS).
ORN........... ..............................Orange
PNK........... ..............................Pink
BRN........ .................................Brown
GRY.................................... .....Gray
PUR.......................... ...............Purple
LT BLU............................... .....Light Blue
LT G R N ........ ...........................Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with

another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
2. Select the TEST MODE MENU and check for

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs), and note them.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Index and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
n
■ BODY j'/d
Engine Compartment
HORN RELAY UNDER-HOOD

FUSE/RELAY BOX
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2 (LEFT) z FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
HEADLIGHT A/C CONDENSER FAN

RELAY 1 (RIGHT) RELAY
RADIATOR FAN
RELAY
A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
REAR WINDOW
INTERMITTENT
WIPER RELAY
Wire colors: GRN, BLK,
RED/BLU, LT GRN/BLK,
and YEL/GRN
FAN CONTROL RELAY AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

[W ire colors: BLU/RED, BLK, 1
[GRN, BLU/BLK, and YEL/WHTj
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY

Wire colors: WHT, BLK, 1
GRN/RED, BLU/WHT, and GRN/BLK J
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD RELAY BOX

Dashboard
I REAR ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET RELAY

/[W ire colors: BLU/ORN, 1
[ORN, BLK, andYEL/BLKJ
DAYTIME
RUNNING LIGHTS
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT (Canada models)
WINDSHIELD WASHER
MOTOR RELAY
fW ire colors: WHT/BLK, GRN/BLK,"
[BLK, BLK, and BLK/YEL
ATP P RELAY
[W ire colors: YEL/BLK, 1
[PNK, BLU, and YEL/BLKj
PARK PIN RELAY

[W ire colors: YEL/BLK, 1
[GRN, WHT/RED, and YEL/BLKJ
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 (FI MAIN)

[W ire colors: WHT/GRN,"
YEL/BLK, BLK/WHT,
and WHT/GRN
PGM-FI M AIN RELAY 2 (FUFL PUMP)

[W ire colors: RED/WHT, RED/ORN,]
[GRN/YEL, and YEL/BLK J
REAR BLOWER MOTOR REL ■LAY
[W ire colors: RED, BLK/YEL,
[BLU/YEL, and BLK 'J
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD DIMMER RELAY

RELAY [W ire colors: ORN/WHT, BLK,]
[RED/WHT, and BLU J
TAILLIGHT RELAY
[W ire colors: RED/BLK, RED/GRN, 1
A /T REVERSE [RED/YEL, and RED/GRN J
RELAY
VTM -4 RELAY (4WD)
[W ire colors: WHT/RED, RED/BLU,
[ORN/GRN, and YEL
ACM CONTROL RELAY (2WD)
[W ire colors: RED/BLU, GRN,]
[LT GRN, and YEL
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

STARTER CUT RELAY (ST CUT)
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER
(cont'd)
Dashboard (cont'd)
With Navigation
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT
W ithout Navigation
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT or
HEATER CONTROL PANEL
(W ith rear entertainm ent system)

n
I B0Dy ! I
Side Trim and Roof
X M RECEIVER IW ith XM)

Door and Seat
Driver's Door
POWER WINDOW CONTROL UNIT DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
Front Passenger's Seat

Connector Index
identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, and terminals. The number is preceded by the letter "C"
for connectors, "G" for ground terminals or "T" for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Floor, Seat, Notes
Door, Tailgate and
Roof)
Battery ground cable T4 (see page 22-15)
G1 and (—)
Cable reel subharness (see p a g e 22-66)
CKP sensor subharness C171 (see page 22-25)
Console accessory power socket C951 (see page 22-54)
subharness
Dashboard wire harness B C301, C302, C324, C401, (see page 22-33)
(left branch) C402, C404, C601, G401
Dashboard w ire harness B C201, C202, C203, C403, (see page 22-37)
(right branch) C553
Dashboard wire harness A C303, C304, C306, C323, (see page 22-39)
(left branch) C401, C402, C404, C502
through C504, C552,
C602,
C701, C801, C821, G501,
G502, G504
Dashboard wire harness A C204 through C208, C403, C951 (see page 22-43)
(right branch) C551,C554, C651, C652,
C901, C961,
G503, G505
Driver's door wire harness C701, C710 C702 (see page 22-58)
Driver's door subharness C702 (see page 22-58)
Driver's seat position sensor C605 (see page 22-51)
subharness
Driver's seat wire harness C605, C606 (see page 22-63)
Engine ground cable T5 (see page 22-15)
G2
Engine mount control solenoid C305 (see page 22-31)
subharness
Engine wire harness (4WD) C101 through C105, (see page 22-17)
C151, C161, C171,
G101 a n d G102
Engine wire harness (2WD) C101 through C105, (see page 22-21)
C151, C161, C171,
G101 and G102
(cont'd)
Connector Index (cont'd)
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Floor, Seat, Notes
Door, Tailgate and
Roof)
Front console liqht subharness C961 (see page 22-43)
Front passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-59)
Front passenger's seat wire harness C607 (see page 22-64)
Ignition switch lead (see page 22-65)
Knock sensor subharness C161 (see page 22-25)
Left rear door wire harness C604 (see page 22-60)
Left engine compartment wire C305, C321, G301 C301 through C304, C320, (see page 22-31)
harness G302
Left side wire harness C601, C602 C603, C604, C608, (see page 22-45)
C609, C657,
G601 and G602
Navigation wire harness C901 (see page 22-62)
ODS unit harness C802 (see page 22-51)
Rear A/C wire harness C502through C504 (see page 22-53)
Rear differential subharness A C609 (see page 22-57)
(4WD) T6
Rear differential subharness B C608 (see page 22-57)
(4WD)
Right rear door wire harness C653 (see page 22-61)
Right engine compartment wire C101, C102, C201 through C206 (see page 22-27)
harness G201, G202
Right side wire harness €651, C652 C603, C653 through (see page 22-47)
C656,
G651 and G652
Roof wire harness C551 through C554 G901 (see page 22-55)
Shift solenoid wire harness C151 (see page 22-19) *1
(see page 22-23)’2
SRS harness C801, C854 C605 through C607, (see page 22-51)
G801 C610, C656, C657
SRS subharness C821, C854 (see page 22-51)
G802
Starter cable T1,T2, T3and (+ ) (see page 22-15)
Tailgate wire harness C654, C655, C851 (see page 22-49)
through C853
Tailgate subharness C851, C852, C853 (see page 22-50)
* 1:4WD
* 2 : 2WD
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
T1 5 Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
12 6 Left side of engine compartment Starter motor
13 7 Left side of engine compartment Auxiliary under-hood fuse
box
(+ ) Left side of engine compartment Battery positive terminal
Battery Ground Cable

T4 2 Left side of engine compartment Transmission housing
G1 1 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
ground cables
(-) Left side of engine compartment Battery negative terminal
Engine Ground Cable

T5 4 Front of engine Front cylinder head
G2 3 Front of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
ground cable
(cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (4WD)
A lte rn a to r 45 4 Middle of engine compartment
ATF t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r 29 2 Transmission housing
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid 28 2 Left side of engine compartment
valve A
valve B
valve C
CMP sensor 50 3 Right side of engine compartment
EGR valve and EGR valve position 21 6 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 20 : 2 Left side of engine compartment
sensor 1
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 19 2 Left side of engine compartment
sensor 2
EVAP canister purge valve 12 2 Left side of engine compartment
Front A/F sensor (B2, S1) 38 8 Left side of engine compartment
Front secondary H02S (B2, S2) 39 4 Left side of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 1 5 3 Middle of engine compartment
Injector No. 1 4 2 Middle of engine compartment
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 34 3 Left side of engine compartment
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 16 2 Left side of engine compartment
MAP sensor 17 3 Left side of engine compartment
Oil pressure switch 49 1 Right side of engine compartment
Output shaft (countershaft) speed 32 3 Transmission housing
sensor
PCM connector B 52 44 Right side of engine compartment
PCM connector C 51 44 Right side of engine compartment
Rear A/F sensor (B1/S1) 14 8 Left side of engine compartment
Rear secondary H02S (B1, S2) 13 4 Left side of e n g in e compartment
(cont'd)
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine W ire Harness (4WD) (cont'd)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to [Motes
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 48 2 Right side of engine compartment
(VTEC oil pressure switch)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 1 Right side of engine compartment
(VTEC solenoid valve)
Starter solenoid 35 1 Left side of engine compartment
Transmission range switch 30 10 Transmission housing
Throttle position (TP) sensor/ 15 6 Middle of engine compartment
Throttle actuator
3rd clutch transmission fluid 33 1 Transmission housing
pressure switch
4th clutch transmission fluid 23 1 Transmission housing
pressure switch
C101 54 23 Right side of engine compartment Right engine compartment
wire harness (see page
22-27)
22-27)
C103 (Junction connector) 8 24 Middle of engine compartment
C151 31 5 Left side of engine compartment Shift solenoid wire harness
C161 47 1 Right side of engine compartment Knock sensor subharness
(see page 22-25)
C171 2 6 Right side of engine compartment CKP sensor subharness
(see page 22-25)
G101 37 Left side of engine compartment Engine ground, via engine
wire harness
G102 3 Right side of engine compartment Engine ground, via engine
wire harness
S hift Solenoid W ire Harness

Shift solenoid valve A 36 1 Left side of engine compartment
Shift solenoid valve B 26 1 Left side of engine compartment
Shift solenoid valve C 24 1 Left side of engine compartment
Torque converter clutch solenoid 25 1 Left side of engine compartment
valve
C151 31 5 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (4WD)
(cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (2WD)
Alternator 47 4 Middle of engine compartment
ATF temperature sensor 35 2 Transmission housing
valve A
valve B
valve C
CMP sensor 51 3 Right side of engine compartment
EGR valve and EGR valve position 23 6 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
sensor 1
sensor 2
EOP sensor 14 3 Left side of engine compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 13 2 Left side of engine compartment
Front A/F sensor (B2, S1) 40 8 Left side of engine compartment
Front secondary H02S (B2f S2) 41 4 Left side of engine compartment
IMT actuator 3 5 Right side of engine compartment
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 31 3 Left side of engine compartment
Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor 18 2 Left side of engine compartment
MAP sensor 19 3 Left side of engine compartment
Oil pressure switch 50 1 Right side of engine compartment
Output shaft (countershaft) speed 34 3 Transmission housing
sensor
PCM connector B 53 44 Right side of engine compartment
PCM connector C 52 44 Right side of engine compartment
Rear A/F sensor (B1, S1) 16 8 Left side of engine compartment
Rear secondary H02S (B1, S2) 15 4 Left side of engine compartment
(cont'd)
Connectors and Harnesses

Engine Wire Harness (2WD) (cont'd)
Connector or Terminal ie f Cavities Location Connects to Notes
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 12 2 Right side of engine compartment
(VTEC solenoid valve)
Starter solenoid 37 1 Left side of engine compartment
Transmission range switch 33 10 Transmission housing
Throttle position (TP) sensor/ 17 6 Middle of engine compartment
Throttle actuator
3rd clutch transmission fluid 36 1 Transmission housing
pressure switch
4th clutch transmission fluid 24 1 Transmission housing
pressure switch
22-27)
22-27)
C l 03 (Junction connector) 8 24 Middle of engine compartment
C104 (Junction connector) * 10 24 Middle of engine compartment
C151 32 5 Left side of engine compartment Shift solenoid wire harness
C161 49 1 Right side of engine compartment Knock sensor subharness
(see page 22-25)
C171 1 6 Right side of engine compartment CKP sensor subharness
(see page 22-25)
G101 39 Left side of engine compartment Engine ground, via engine
wire harness
G102 2 Right side of engine compartment Engine ground, via engine
wire harness
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness

Shift solenoid valve A 38 1 Left side of engine compartment
Shift solenoid valve B 28 1 Left side of engine compartment
Shift solenoid valve C 26 1 Left side of engine compartment
Torque converter clutch solenoid 27 1 Left side of engine compartment
valve
C151 32 5 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness (2WD)
(cont'd)
22-23
ENGINE SHIFT SOLENOID

WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS
Knock Sensor Subharness
Knock sensor 3 1 Middle of engine compartment
C161 2 1 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
• 4WD (see page 22-17)
• 2WD (seepage 22-21)
CKP Sensor Subharness

Crankshaft position sensors A and B 4 6 Right side of engine compartment
(CKP A, CKP B)
(cont'd)

lig h t Engine Compartment Wire Harness
A/C compressor clutch 18 1 Middle of engine compartment A/C compressor clutch
harness
A/C condenser fan motor 17 2 Middle of engine compartment
A/C diode assembly 34 4 Behind right kick panel
A/C pressure switch 33 2 Right side of engine compartment
A/F sensor relay 40 4 Behind right kick panel
ELD unit (see page 22-67) 32 3 In under-hood fuse/relay box
ETCS control relay 41 4 Behind right kick panel
Fan control relay 11 5 In auxiliary under-hood relay box
High horn 20 1 Behind right side of front bumper
Ignition coil relay 39 4 Behind right kick panel
Auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 42 2 Behind right kick panel
Intermittent wiper relay 10 5 In auxiliary under-hood relay box
Outside air temperature sensor 16 2 Behind middle of front bumper *1
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 37 3 Behind right kick panel
connector A (see page 22-69)
connector B (see page 22-69)
connector K (see page 22-69)
PCM connector A 31 44 Right side of engine compartment
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 8 2 Right side of engine compartment
Radiator fan motor 14 2 Middle of engine compartment
Rear engine mount control solenoid 9 2 Rear of engine compartment 2WD
Rear washer motor relay 38 4 Behind right kick panel
Rear window intermittent wiper relay 12 5 In auxiliary under-hood relay box
Right fog light 22 2 Behind right side of front bumper *2
Right front impact sensor 19 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right front parking light 27 2 Behind right headlight assembly
Right front side marker light 29 2 Behind right headlight assembly
Right front turn signal light 28 2 Behind right headlight assembly
Right front wheel sensor 5 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right headlight (high) 23 2 Behind right headlight assembly
Right headlight (low) 26 2 Behind right headlight assembly
Seat heater relay 13 4 In auxiliary under-hood relay box EXL
Security hood switch 15 2 Middle of engine compartment *2
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector A 4 18 Right side of engine compartment
(see page 22-67)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector B 3 7 Right side of engine compartment
(see page 22-67)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector C 2 3 Right side of engine compartment
(see page 22-67)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector D 1 16 Right side of engine compartment
(see page 22-67)
Washer fluid level switch 21 2 Behind right side of front bumper Canada
models
Washer motor 25 2 Behind right side of front bumper
* 1: With climate control
* 2: Except LX and LX-VP models
(cont'd)
UNDER-HOOD AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD

FUSE/RELAY BOX RELAY BOX
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (cont'd)
- 2WD (see page 22-21)
* 4WD (see page 22-17)
* 2WD (see page 22-21)
C201 46 8 Behind glove box Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-37)
(see page 22-37)
(see page 22-37)
C204 44 20 Behind glove box Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-43)
(see page 22-43)
(see page 22-43)
G201 30 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right
engine compartment wire
harness
G202 24 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right
harness
(cont'd)
UNDER-HOOD AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD

FUSE/RELAY BOX RELAY BOX
22-30
Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
Brake fluid level switch connector (A) 1 1 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch connector (B) 2 1 Left side of engine compartment
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 8 5 Under left side of dash
connector C (see page 22-68)
connector D (see page 22-68)
Left fog light 23 2 Left side of engine compartment * 1
Left front impact sensor 24 2 Left side of engine compartment
Left front parking light 19 2 Behind left headlight assembly
Left front side marker light 18 2 Behind left headlight assembly
Left front TPMS initiator 13 3 Behind left fender
Left front turn signal light 17 2 Behind left headlight
Left front wheel sensor 14 2 Left side of engine compartment
Left side turn signal light 11 2 Behind left fender
Left headlight (high) 22 2 Behind left headlight assembly
Left headlight (low) 21 2 Behind left headlight assembly
Low horn 26 1 Behind left side of front bumper
VSA modulator-control unit 15 47 Left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper motor 3 5 Left side of engine compartment
C301 4 20 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-33)
(see page 22-33)
C303 9 18 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-39)
C304 10 4 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-39)
C305 25 2 Behind left side of front bumper Engine mount control 2WD
solenoid subharness
C320 (Fog light switch connector) 12 2 Under left side of dash *2
C321 (Fog light connector) 20 1 Left side of engine compartment *2
G301 16 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left
harness
G302 6 Behind left kick panel Body ground, via left
harness
Engine Mount Control Solenoid Subharness (2WD)

Engine mount control solenoid 27 2 Front of engine compartment
C305 25 2 Behind left side of front bumper Left engine compartment
wire harness
* 2: LX and LX-VP models
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left branch)
Connector or Termora' Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
AC inverter unit 16 12 Under left side of dash
ACM control relay 35 4 Under left side of dash 2WD
Active noise control unit 12 16 Under left side of dash 2WD
ATP P relay 15 5 Under left side of dash
Brake pedal position switch 27 4 Under left side of dash
Cable reel connector B 8 13 In steering column cover *2
Cable reel connector B 8 5 In steering column cover *3
Combination light switch 5 16 In steering column cover
Cruise control main switch/VSA off 32 13 Left side of dash
switch
Data link connector (DLC) 21 16 Under left side of dash
Daytime running lights control unit 11 14 Under left side of dash Canada
models
Dimmer relay 33 4 Under left side of dash
connector L (see page 22-68)
connector M (see page 22-68)
connector N (see page 22-68)
connector P (see page 22-68)
Fog light relay 4 4 Under left side of dash *4
Front washer motor relay 14 5 Under left side of dash
Ignition key swi tch/key light 23 7 In steering column cover
Immobilizer control unit-receiver 9 7 In steering column cover
In-car temperature sensor 20 2 Under left side of dash *4
Interior light relay 3 4 Under left side of dash
Multiplex control inspection connector 28 3 Under left side of dash
Park pin relay 13 4 Under left side of dash
Park pin switch 7 3 In steering column cover
PGM-FI main relay 1 17 4 Under left side of dash
PGM-FI main relay 2 18 5 Under left side of dash
Rear accessory power socket relay 2 4 Under left side of dash
Shift lock diode (A and B) 19 4 Under left side of dash
Shift lock solenoid 6 2 In steering column cover
Steering angle sensor 24 5 In steering column cover
Taillight relay 34 4 Under left side of dash
TPMS control unit connector A 25 14 Under left side of dash
TPMS control unit connector B 26 20 Under left side of dash
VTM-4 relay 35 4 Under left side of dash 4WD
Wiper/washer switch 10 14 In steering column cover
* 1: With AC power outlet
* 2: With navigation
* 3: Without navigation
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness i (Left branch} (cont'd)
C301 29 20 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-31)
C302 30 14 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C324 (security connector) 31 14 Under left side of dash *2
C401 41 34 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-39)
(see page 22-39)
C404 22 2 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A *1
(see page 22-39)
C601 36 18 Behind left kick panel Left side wire harness 4WD
(see page 22-45)
(see page 22-45)
G401 1 Left side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness B
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right branch)
Climate control unit connector B 2 30 Under middle of dash *1
Evaporator temperature sensor 13 2 Behind glove box
Front air mix control motor 12 7 Under right side of dash
Front blower motor 6 2 Under right side of dash
Front blower power transistor 5 5 Under right side of dash
Heater control panel 2 30 Under middle of dash *2
Front mode control motor 1 7 Under left side of dash
connector 1(see page 22-69)
connector J (see page 22-69)
Recirculation control motor 4 7 Behind glove box
C201 10 8 Behind glove box Right engine compartment
wire harness (see page 22-27)
C403 14 18 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-43)
C553 7 6 Behind center of dash Roof wire harness (see page
22-55)
(cont'd)
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B

(Right branch)
22-38
Dashboard Wire Harness A (Left branch!
Audio unit connector A 8 20 Middle of dash *4
Audio unit connector A 16 20 Middle of dash *1
Audio unit connector B 9 14 Middle of dash *2
Audio unit connector B 15 14 Middle of dash *1
Audio unit connector B 9 5 Middle of dash LX
Audio unit connector C 11 14 Middle of dash *4
Audio unit connector C 17 14 Middle of dash *1
Audio unit connector D 10 40 Middle of dash *2
Cable reel connector A 27 4 Under left side of dash
Driver's multiplex control unit 42 22 Under left side of dash
connector B
Driver's seat heater switch 18 6 Middle of dash EXL
connector B (see page 22-68)
connector J (see page 22-68)
connector K (see page 22-68)
DVD player unit connector 13 22 Middle of dash *2
Front passenger's airbag first and 14 4 Behind glove box
second inflators
Front passenger's airbag cutoff 7 7 Middle of dash 2WD
indicator
Gauge control module connector A 4 20 Behind gauge assembly
Gauge control module connector B 3 36 Behind gauge assembly
Hazard warning switch 6 10 Middle of dash
Interior light switch 29 6 Left side of dash
Left tweeter 45 2 Left side of dash *5
Memory erase signal (MES) connector 33 2 Under left side of dash
Moonroof switch 28 6 Left side of dash *3
Navigation display unit 12 20 Middle of dash * 1
Parking brake switch 30 1 Under left side of dash
Sunlight sensor 5 2 Middle of dash *6
VTM-4 lock switch/front passenger's 7 7 Middle of dash 4WD
airbag cutoff indicator
Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 22 5 Under middle of dash
* 2: With rear entertainment system
* 3: With moonroof
* 5: Except LX model
(cont'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness A (Left branch) (cont'd)
C303 38 18 Behind left kick panel Left engine compartment
22-31)
C304 39 4 Behind left kick panel Left engine compartment
22-31)
C306 (Junction connector) 2 22 Behind gauge control module
C323 (Keyless connector) 32 2 Under left side of dash
(see page 22-33)
C4Q2 44 14 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-33)
C404 26 2 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B *5
(see page 22-33)
C502 21 14 Under middle of dash Rear A/C wire harness *2
(see page 22-53)
C502 21 8 Under middle of dash Rear A/C wire harness * 3, * 4
(see page 22-53)
C503 19 2 Under middle of dash Rear A/C wire harness
(see page 22-53)
(see page 22-53)
(see page 22-53)
C552 37 16 Behind left kick panel Roof wire harness *1
(see page 22-55)
(see page 22-45)
(see page 22-45)
C701 31 4 Under left side of dash Driver's door wire harness
(see page 22-58)
C801 23 3 Under middle of dash SRS harness (see page *6
22-51)
C801 23 10 Under middle of dash SRS harness (see page *7
22-51)
C821 25 28 Under middle of dash SRS subharness (see page
22-51)
G501 34 Under left side of dash Body ground, via
dashboard wire harness A
G502 1 Under left side of dash Body ground, via
G504 24 Under middle of dash Body ground, via
* 2: With climate control and rear entertainment system
* 3: With climate control and without rear entertainment system
* 4: Without climate control
(cont'd)
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS A
(Left branch)
Dashboard Wire Harness A flig h t branch)
Cigarette lighter connector 3 4 Under middle of dash Option
Climate control unit connector A 1 20 Under middle of dash *5
Engine mount control unit 26 20 Under middle of dash 2WD
Front accessory power socket 24 2 Under middle of dash
Front passenger's seat heater switch 2 6 Middle of dash * 1
Front passenger's seat heater switch 2 8 Middle of dash *2 .
Glove box light 20 2 Behind glove box
Keyless receiver unit 18 7 Behind glove box
Passenger's multiplex control unit 14 22 Behind right kick panel
connector B
connector G (see page 22-69)
connector H (see page 22-69)
Right tweeter 6 2 Right side of dash *6
C204 19 20 Behind glove box Right enginie compartment
C207 (Junction connector) 5 22 Behind glove box
C208 (Junction connector) 8 12 Behind glove box *2
C403 4 18 Behind center of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-37)
C551 13 20 Behind right kick panel Roof wire harness (see page
22-55)
C554 12 4 Behind right kick panel Roof wire harness (see page
22-55)
C651 15 23 Behind right kick panel Right side wire harness
(see page 22-47)
C652 16 6 Behind right kick panel Right side wire harness * 4
(see page 22-47)
C901 23 34 Right side of center console Navigation wire harness *2
(see page 22-62)
C951 22 2 Right side of center console Console accessory power
socket subharness (see page
22-54)
C961 25 2 Under middle of dash Front console light
subharness
G503 17 Behind glove box Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness A
G505 21 Right side of center console Body ground, via dashboard 2WD
wire harness A
Front Console Light Subharness

Front console light 27 Under middle of dash
* 3: With moonroof
* 4: W ith XM
* 5: Except LX model
(cont'd)
Left Side Wire Harness
Cargo area accessory power socket 6 2 Left side of cargo area
Driver's door switch 18 1 Left B-pillar
connector E (see page 22-68)
connector F (see page 22-68)
Driver's seat belt tensioner 16 2 Left B-pillar
EVAP canister vent shut valve 23 2 Under left side of floor
Fuel tank unit 10 5 Middle of floor
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 24 3 Under left side of floor
Left rear door switch 12 1 Left C-pillar
Left rear TPMS initiator 13 3 Front of left rear wheelwell
Left rear wheel sensor 3 2 Under rear floor
Left side impact sensor (2nd) 11 2 Left C-pillar
Right rear wheel sensor 2 2 Under rear floor
VTM-4 control unit connector A 8 22 Left side of cargo area 4WD
VTM-4 control unit connector B 7 12 Left side of cargo area 4WD
C601 19 18 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness B 4WD
(see page 22-33)
C601 19 8 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness B 2WD
(see page 22-33)
C602 20 20 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A 4WD
(see page 22-39)
C602 20 10 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A 2WD
(see page 22-39)
C603 5 4 Left side of cargo area Right side wire harness
(see page 22-47)
C604 15 10 Left B-pillar Left rear door wire harness *2
(see page 22-60)
C604 15 8 Left B-pillar Left rear door wire harness * 1
(see page 22-60)
C608 4 2 Under rear floor Rear differential subharness B 4WD
(see page 22-57)
C609 1 6 Under rear floor Rear differential subharness A 4WD
(see page 22-57)
C657 17 4 Under driver's seat SRS harness (see page 22-51)
G601 14 Left side of floor Body ground, via left side
wire harness
G6G2 9 Left side of cargo area Body ground, via left side
wire harness
(cont'd)
23 24 LEFT SIDE WIRE HARNESS

Right Side Wire Harness
Brake light failure sensor 19 6 Right side of cargo area
Front passenger's door switch 10 1 Right B-pillar
Imoes unit 24 5 Rear side of cargo area '08 models
Left taillight assembly 23 4 Behind left taillight assembly
Navigation unit connector D 9 7 Under front passenger's seat EXL
connector C (see page 22-69}
Rear window defogger noise 3 2 Behind tailgate upper trim
condenser
Rear safing sensor 22 2 Left side of cargo area
Rear woofer 17 2 Right side of cargo area *4
Right rear door switch 12 1 Right C-pillar
Right rear TPMS initiator 13 3 Front of right rear wheelwell
Right side impact sensor (2nd) 14 2 Right C-pillar
Right taillight assembly 18 4 Behind right taillight assembly
Trailer lighting connector 20 6 Left side of cargo area
XM receiver connector A 16 14 Right side of cargo area *1
C603 21 4 Left side of cargo area Left side wire harness
(see page 22-45)
C651 8 23 Behind right kick panel Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-43)
C652 7 6 Behind right kick panel Dashboard wire harness A *1
(see page 22-43)
C653 4 10 Right B-pillar Right rear door wire harness *3
(see page 22-61)
C653 4 8 Right B-pillar Right rear door wire harness *2
(see page 22-61)
C654 2 6 Upper side of tailgate Tailgate wire harness
(see page 22-49)
C655 1 12 Upper side of tailgate Tailgate wire harness
(see page 22-49)
C656 5 4 Right side of floor SRS harness (see page 22-51)
G651 11 Right side of floor Body ground, via right side
wire harness
G652 15 Right side of cargo area Body ground, via right side
wire harness
* 1: With XM
* 2; LX and LX-VP models
* 4: Except LX models
(cont'd)
R IG H T S ID E W IR E H A R N E S S
Tailgate Wire Harness
High mount brake light 3 2 Top middle of tailgate
Rear window defogger connector A 4 1 Left side of rear window
C654 1 6 Behind tailgate upper trim Right side wire harness
(see page 22-47)
C655 2 12 Behind tailgate upper trim Right side wire harness
(see page 22-47)
C851 5 6 Behind tailgate trim panel Tailgate subharness (see page
22-50)
22-50)
22-50)
TAILGATE WIRE HARNESS

Tailgate Subharness
Left back-up light 10 2 Behind tailgate trim panel
Left license plate light 9 2 Behind tailgate trim panel
Rear view camera 3 6 Behind tailgate trim panel *
Rear window defogger connector B 1 1 Right side of rear window
Rear window wiper motor 8 4 Behind tailgate trim panel
Right back-up light 4 2 Behind tailgate trim panel
Right license plate light 5 2 Behind tailgate trim panel
Tailgate latch switch 6 2 Behind tailgate trim panel
Tailgate lights 2 3 Behind tailgate trim panel
Tailgate lock actuator 7 2 Behind tailgate trim panel
C851 13 6 Behind tailgate trim panel Tailgate wire harness
(see page 22-49)
(see page 22-49)
(see page 22-49)
*: With navigation
SRS Harness
Driver's seat belt switch 22 3 Under driver's seat
Driver's side airbag inflator 21 2 Under driver's seat
Left side impact sensor (1st) 19 2 Left B-pillar
Front passenger's seat belt switch 6 3 Under front passenger's seat *2
Front passenger's seat belt tensioner 9 2 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 11 2 Under front passenger's seat
Right side impact sensor (1st) 8 2 Right B-pillar
Roll rate sensor 15 2 Under middle of center console
C605 17 2 Under driver's seat Driver's seat position sensor *I
subharness
C605 17 10 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness *2
(see page 22-63)
C606 22 2 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness *2
(see page 22-63)
C607 6 6 Under front passenger's seat Front passenger's seat wire EXL
C610 16 4 Under middle of center console
C656 10 4 Right side of floor Right side wire harness
(see page 22-47)
C657 20 4 Left side of floor Left side wire harness
(see page 22-45)
C801 23 3 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A *1
(see page 22-39)
(see page 22-39)
C802 13 4 Under front passenger's seat ODS unit harness
C854 24 28 Under middle of dash SRS subharness
G801 14 Under middle of center console Body ground, via SRS
harness
SRS Subharness
SRS unit connector A 1 28 Under middle of dash
SRS unit connector B 2 28 Under middle of dash
SRS unit connector C 3 28 Under middle of dash
C821 4 28 Under middle of dash Dashboard Wire Harness A
(see page 22-39)
C854 24 28 Under middle of dash SRS harness
G802 25 Under middle of dash Body ground, via SRS
subharness
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Subharness (LX and LX-VP models)

Driver's seat position sensor 18 2 Under driver's seat
C605 17 2 Under driver's seat SRS harness
ODS Unit Harness

Inner side front passenger's weight 5 3 Under front passenger's seat
sensor
ODS unit connector D 12 8 In front passenger's seat
Outer side front passenger's weight 7 2 Under front passenger's seat
sensor
C802 13 4 Under front passenger's seat SRS harness
* 1:LX and LX-VP models
(cont'd)
SRS SUBHARNESS
Rear A/C Wire Harness
Auxiliary jack assembly 4 16 Under center console *4
Power outlet 6 3 Under center console *6
Rear accessory power socket 5 2 Under center console *1
Rear air mix control motor 8 7 Under center console *2
Rear blower motor relay 11 4 Left side of center console
Rear blower motor 1 2 Right side of center console
Rear blower power transistor 9 4 Left side of center console *2
Rear blower motor resistor 10 5 Left side of center console *3
Rear heater-A/C control unit connector A 3 10 Under center console
Rear heater-A/C control unit connector B 2 7 Under center console *3
Rear mode control motor 7 7 Under center console *2
Rear mode control motor 8 7 Under center console *3
(see page 22-39}
C502 12 8 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A * 3r * 5
(see page 22-39}
(see page 22-39)
C504 13 21 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A ^4
(see page 22-39)
(see page 22-39)
* 1: Without AC power outlet
* 2; With climate control
* 3: Without climate control
* 4: With climate control and rear entertainment system
* 5: With climate control and without rear entertainment system
Console Accessory Power Socket Subharness
Console accessory power socket 2 2 Behind center console
(see page 22-43)
POWER SOCKET SUBHARNESS

Roof Wire Harness
Ambient light 6 10 Front middle of roof *2
AM/FM antenna amplifier 18 3 Roof
Antenna lead connector 8 3 Under middle of dash
Automatic dimming inside mirror 3 2 Front middle of roof Option
Driver's vanity mirror light 7 2 Driver's sunvisor mount
Electrical compass unit 5 7 Front middle of roof EXL*3
Front individual map lights 4 3 Front middle of roof
Front passenger's vanity mirror light 15 2 Front passenger's sunvisor mount
Left side curtain airbag 26 2 Left side of roof
Moonroof close relay 2 5 Middle of roof *2
Moonroof limit switch 20 4 Middle of roof *2
Moonroof motor 19 2 Middle of roof *2
M oonroof open relay 1 5 Middle of roof *2
Rear active noise control microphone 23 5 Rear middle of roof 2WD
Rear controller and screen 17 26 Middle of roof *1
Rear individual map lights (2nd) 22 3 Middle of roof
Rear individual map lights (3rd) 24 3 Rear middle of roof
Right front TPMS initiator 10 3 Behind right fender
Right side curtain airbag 25 2 Right side of roof
Right side turn signal light 11 2 Behind right fender
(see page 22-43)
C552 9 16 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A * 1
(see page 22-39)
C553 14 6 Behind right kick panel Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-37)
(see page 22-43)
G901 16 Right side of roof Body ground, via roof wire
harness
* 2: With moonroof
(cont'd)
22-55
Rear Differential Subharness A
Rear differential fluid sensor 4 2 Rear differential
Right clutch electromagnetic coil 2 2 Rear differential
C609 1 6 Rear differential Left side wire harness
(see page 22-45)
T6 3 Rear differential
Rear Differential Subharness B

Left clutch electromagnetic coil 5 2 Rear differential
C608 6 2 Rear differential Left side wire harness
(see page 22-45)
Driver's Door Wire Harness
Door multiplex control unit connector A 9 20 Driver's door
Door multiplex control unit connector B 8 2 Driver's door
Driver's door key cylinder switch 10 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock actuator 13 2 Driver's door
Driver's door lock knob switch 14 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock switch 2 5 Driver's door
Driver's door speaker 7 2 Driver's door
Driver's window motor 17 6 Driver's door
connector H (see page 22-68)
Left power mirror 1 8 Driver's door
Power mirror switch 3 13 Driver's door
Power window control unit 15 18 Driver's door
(see page 22-39)
C702 12 6 Driver's door Driver's door subharness *2
C702 12 4 Driver's door Driver's door subharness *1
C710 (Security connector) 4 2 Under left side of dash *1
Driver's Door Subharness

Driver's door courtesy light 11 2 Driver's door
Security indicator 16 2 Driver's door *2
C702 12 6 Driver's door Driver's door wire harness *2
C702 12 4 Driver's door Driver's door wire harness * 1
*1:LX and LX-VP models
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS

Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness
Front passenger's door courtesy light 7 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's door lock actuator 6 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's door lock knob 5 3 Front passenger's door *
switch
Front passenger's door lock switch 3 5 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's door speaker 8 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's window motor 4 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's window switch 2 6 Front passenger's door
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 9 4 Behind right kick panel *
connector D {see page 22-69}
connector E (see page 22-69}
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 10 2 Behind right kick panel *
connector F (see page 22-69}
Right power mirror 1 8 Front passenger's door
* : Except LX and LX-VP models
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR WIRE HARNESS
Left Rear Door Wire Harness
Left rear door speaker 3 2 Left rear door
Left rear door lock actuator 5 2 Left rear door
Left rear door lock knob switch 6 3 Left rear door *1
Left rear window motor 4 2 Left rear door
Left rear window switch 2 6 Left rear door
C604 1 10 Left B-pillar Left side wire harness *1
(see page 22-45)
C604 1 8 Left B-pillar Left side wire harness *2
(see paae 22-45)
LEFT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS

lig h t Rear Door Wire Harness
Right rear door speaker 2 2 Right rear door
Right rear door lock actuator 5 2 Right rear door
Right rear door lock knob switch 6 3 Right rear door *1
Right rear window motor 4 2 Right rear door
Right rear window switch 3 6 Right rear door
C653 1 10 Right B-pillar Right side wire harness *1
(see page 22-47)
C653 1 8 Right B-pillar Right side wire harness *2
(see page 22-47)
■* 2: LX and LX-VP models
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS

Navigation Wire Harness
Navigation unit connector A 3 20 Under front passenger's seat
Navigation unit connector B 4 14 Under front passenger's seat
Navigation unit connector C 2 8 Under front passenger's seat
Navigation service check connector 5 2 Under front passenger's seat
C901 1 34 Right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-43)
1
Driver's Seat Wire Harness (Except LX and LX-VP)
Driver's power seat adjustment switch 8 6 Leftside of driver's seat
connector A
Driver's power seat adjustment switch 6 6 Left side of driver's seat
connector B
Driver's seat belt switch 1 3 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat back heater 4 2 Under driver's seat EXL
Driver's seat cushion heater 2 4 Under driver's seat EXL
Driver's seat position sensor 5 2 Under driver's seat
Front up-down motor 10 2 Under driver's seat
Rear up-down motor 11 2 Under driver's seat
Recline motor 9 2 Under driver's seat
Slide motor 12 2 Under driver's seat
22-63
Front Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (EXL)
Front passenger's seat belt switch 1 3 Under front passenger's seat
Front passenger's seat cushion heater 3 4 Under front passenger's seat
C607 2 6 Under front passenger's seat SRS harness (see page 22-51)
Ignition Switch Lead
Connector or Terminal ■“ Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 1 6 Under leftside of dash
connector A (see page 22-68) ........... ..... . .... • ... ........................ i .......... ;............................ - .;
Cable Reel Subharness (With navigation)
Audio remote/voice control switch 4 5 Steering wheel
Cable reel connector C 1 13 Steering wheel
Cruise control 2 5 Steering wheel
set/resume/cancel switch
Horn switch positive terminal 3 1 Steering wheel
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS

Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to

A 15 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
A/C compressor clutch relay 8 4
A/C condenser fan relay 6 4 '
B 14 7 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
C 13 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
D 12 16 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
Diode 3 __ Not used
ELD unit 9 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
Front blower motor relay 5 4
Horn relay 4 4
Headlight relay 1 1 4
Headlight relay 2 2 4
Radiator fan relay 7 4
T1 11 Starter cable (see page 22-15)
T10.1 10 Alternator cable
12 13 14 15
D - ''“ □ □ a □
□ □ □ □r □ n n□ n O
C 3 L 3 C 3 uuu
O
" : : □
□ □ C D 1— 1
D
9 - im
t iz j t
9 TUT
(<y 11 10
22-67
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A 22 6 Ignition switch lead (see page 22-65)
A/T Reverse relay 26 4
B 13 2 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-39)
C 10 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-31)
D 4 20 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-31)
Diode 1 . — Driver's door courtesy light
Diode 2 — Not used
Driver's multiplex control unit 6 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box)
connector A
E 11 10 Left side wire harness (see page 22-45)
F 3 14 Left side wire harness (see page 22-45)
G 5 6 Optional fog light connector
H 8 18 Driver's door w i re harness (see page 22-58)
I 9 " —: Optional fog light connector
J 20 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-39)
K 21 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-39)
L 24 22 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-33)
tvt 12 20 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-33)
N 23 7 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-33)
P 19 3 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-33)
R 18 1 Optional connector
S 17 \ 1 Optional connector
Starter cut relay ■ 25 4
T 16 1 Optional connector
Turn signal/hazard relay 27 4
U 15 1 Optional connector
V 14 — Not used
w 7 — Memory erase signal (MES) connector
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A 10 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
Accessory power socket relay 12 4
B 4 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
C 5 20 Right side wire harness (see page 22-47)
D 9 4 Front passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-59)
Dimmer relay diode 6 __ Dimmer relay
Diode 7 __ Not used
Diode 8 — Front passenger's door courtesy light
E 2 20 Front passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-59)
F 3 2 Front passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-59)
G 15 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-43)
H 17 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-43)
1 14 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-37)
J 18 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-37)
K 1 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-27)
Passenger's multiplex control 16 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box)
unit connector A
Power window relay 11 4
Rear window defogger relay 13 4
Fuse to Components Index
Fuse Amps W ire Color C om ponents) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
41 120 A Battery, Power distribution
42 50 A WHT Ignition switch, Optional keyless connector
43 20 A RED/GRN Combination light switch, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada
models), Right headlights
44 Not used
45 20 A RED/YEL , Combination light switch, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada
models), Left headlights, High beam indicator light, Optional fog light
connector
46 15 A WHT7GRN Data link connector (DLC), PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), PGM-FI main
relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (via PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN))
47 20 A WHT/YEL Ignition key light, Brake pedal position switch, Horn relay
internal Horns
connection
48 20 A WHT Audio unit, DVD player unit (rear entertainment system), Rear controller
and screen (rear entertainment system)
49 15 A WHT/GRN Hazard warning lights
50 Not used
51 40 A WHT/BLU No. 1 fuse (in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box), Power window
relay
52 40 A YEL/GRN No. 2,3, 4 and 6 fuses (in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box)
53 30 A WHT/GRN Noise condenser, Rear window defogger
54 40 A YEL No. 9,10,11,12 and 13 fuses (in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box)
55 30 A RED Rear blower motor (via rear blower motor relay)
56 40 A YEL/BLK Front blower motor (via front blower motor relay)
57 30 A BLU/BLK Radiator fan motor (via radiator fan relay)
58 30 A BLU/YEL A/C condenser fan motor (via A/C condensor fan relay)
59 7.5 A RED A/C compressor clutch (via A/C compressor clutch relay)
G id G «0 C 4d
0 € . M
Os□ Cm□
: Spare fuse
22-70
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
1 15 A RED/WHT Fuel pump (via FGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)), Immobilizer control
unit-receiver, Imoes unit, PCM, SRS unit (VA)
2 10 A BLK/WHT SRS unit (VB)
3 7.5 A BLK/YEL A/C compressor clutch relay, Climate control unit, Front blower motor relay.
Heater control panel, PCM (via A/C compressor clutch relay), Recirculation
control motor, Rear blower motor relay, Rear mode motor, Rear window
defogger relay, Seat heater relay
4 7.5 A ORN AC inverter unit, Power mirror actuator, Power mirror defogger
Fuse/relay Optional connector
box socket
5 10 A YEL/RED Daytime running lights control unit (Canada models)
6 15 A BLK/YEL Alternator, Brake pedal position switch, Cruise control main switch
indicator light, EVAP canister purge valve, Gauge control module, PCM,
VSA modulator-control unit
7 7.5 A YEL/GRN Electrical compass mirror, ODS unit, Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator,
Optional automatic dimming inside mirror connector, Passenger's
multiplex control unit (via rear window intermittent wiper relay), Rear
window wiper/washer switch, Rear window wiper motor
Fuse/relay Optional fog light connector
box socket
8 7.5 A YEL/BLK Active control engine mount (ACM) control relay (2WD), Accessory power
socket relay, Active noise control rear microphone (2WD), Active noise
control unit (2WD), Gauge control module, Optional keyless connector, Key
interlock solenoid (via ATP P relay), Rear accessory power socket relay
Fuse/relay Optional connector
box socket
9 10 A YEL Active noise control unit (2WD), A/T reverse relay, Back-up lights, Brake
light failure sensor, Gauge control module, Keyless receiver unit,
Navigation unit, Optional automatic dimming inside mirror connector,
Optional security connector, Passenger's multiplex control unit, Shift lock
solenoid, VTM-4 lock switch indicator light (4WD), TPMS control unit
Fuse/relay Driver's multiplex control unit
box socket
10 7.5 A YEL/RED Turn signal/hazard relay
11 7.5 A YEL VTM-4 control unit (4WD)
12 30 A GRN/BLK Driver's multiplex control unit (via intermittent wiper relay), Front
windshield washer motor (via front washer motor relay), Front windshield
wiper motor, Rear window washer motor (via rear washer motor relay),
Windshield intermittent wiper circuit (in the driver's multiplex control unit)
13 Not used
(cont'd)
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
*: Not used
22-72
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Number
1 20 A GRN Power window control unit
2 20 A RED Driver's power seat front up-down motor (EXL), Driver's power seat slide
motor (EXL)
Driver's power seat rear up-down motor (Except EXL), Driver's power seat
recline motor (Except EXL)
3 20 A WHT/GRN Front seat heaters
4 20 A BLU Driver's power seat rear up-down motor (EXL), Driver's power seat recline
motor (EXL)
Driver's power seat front up-down motor (Except EXL), Driver's power seat
slide motor (Except EXL)
b Not used
6 10 A RED/BLU Daytime running lights control unit (Canada models)
7 20 A WHT/YEL Left rear power window motor (via power window motor switch), Power
window master switch, Power window control unit
8 20 A BLU/BLK Front passenger's power window motor (via power window motor switch)
9 15 A WHT/RED Audio unit, DVD player unit (with rear entertainment system), Console
accessory power socket, Front accessory power socket, Navigation unit,
Navigation display unit, Optional cigarette lighter connector
10 15 A RED/GRN Audio unit light, Auxiliary jack assembly light (with rear entertainment
system), Cruise control main switch light, Climate control unit light, DVD
player unit (with rear entertainment system), Driver's multiplex control unit,
Front parking lights, Front side marker lights, Front console light, Front door
lock switches light, Gauge control module lights, Glove box light, Hazard
warning switch light, Heater control panel lights, Interior lights switch light,
License plate lights, Moonroof switch light, Navigation display unit,
Navigation unit, Optional cigarette lighter connector, Optional connector
(driver's under-dash fuse/relay box), Optional fog light connector (driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box), Power mirror switch light, Rear heater-A/C
control unit light, Rear controller and screen (with rear entertainment system),
Roof console light, Seat heater switches light, Taillight relay, Taillights,
Trailer lighting connector, VTM-4 lock switch light
11 10 A WHT/BLU Front individual map lights, Front door courtesy lights, HomeLink, Interior
lights relay, Navigation display unit, Navigation unit, Rear individual map
lights, Tailgate light, Vanity mirror lights
12 20 A Fuse relay Passenger's multiplex control unit
box socket
13 7.5 A WHT/RED Driver's multiplex control unit, Door multiplex control unit, Gauge control
module, Immobilizer control unit-receiver, Immobilizer indicator, Keyless
receiver unit, Optional security connector, Security indicator
Fuse relay Passenger's multiplex control unit
box socket
14 7.5 A GRN Moonroof close relay, Moonroof open relay
15 20 A BLU Moonroof close relay, Moonroof motor, Moonroof open relay
16 20 A WHT/BLK Right rear window motor (via right rear window switch)
(cont'd)
a
□ □ □
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse Box

Number-
1 20 A GRN AC inverter unit
: 2 40 A WHT/GRN VSA modulator-control unit (+B FSR)
3 30 A WHT VSA modulator-control unit (+B MTR)
4 20 A WHT/RED VTM-4 control unit (4WD)
5 10 A RED/BLU Engine mount control unit (2WD) (via active control engine mount (ACM)
control relay)
6 15 A BLU/ORN Console accessory power socket, Rear accessory power socke;
7 15 A WHT/GRN PCM (via electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay)
8 15 A BLU/ORN PCM, Ignition coils, Ignition coils (via ignition coil relay)
9 15 A WHT/RED Front A/F sensor, Front secondary H02S, Rear A/F sensor, Rear secondary
H02S, ELD unit, EVAP canister vent shut valve
10 7.5 A RED TPMS control unit
11 20 A BLK/GRN Fog lights, Gauge control module, Optional fog light connector, Optional fog
light switch connector
r 9
f ^ f 9
n
1 2 3
LJ v J v J
r \
n n r~ r I I I— I m I I
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
V J I__ J L J LJ LJ LJ LJ L J
(cont'd)
Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder

Number
60 7.5 A YEL/BLK Radiator fan relay
Ground to Components Index
Ground Component or circuit grounded

G1 Battery, Transmission housing
G2 Engine block
G101, G102 PGM (PG1 and PG2 are BLK; LG1 and LG2 are BRN/YEL)
BLK: A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B, A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, EGR valve position sensor, Ignition coils, Rocker arm oil
control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) (2WD), Shift control solenoid valve A, Shift control solenoid
valve B, Shift control solenoid valve C, TCC solenoid valve, Transmission range switch
BRN/YEL: CMP sensor, CKP sensor A/B, Rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch)
(4WD)
Shielding between the PCM and these components have BRN/YEL wires: Knock sensor, Front A/F
sensor, Front secondary H02S, Rear A/F sensor, Rear secondary H02S, Throttle body
G201 ELD unit, Fan control relay, Front blower motor relay, Power steering pressure (PSP) switch, Rear
window intermittent wiper relay, Rear window washer motor, Rear window washer relay, Right front
side marker light, Right front parking light, Right front turn signal light, Right headlight (low), Seat
heater relay, Washer fluid level switch (Canada models), Windshield intermittent wiper relay
G202 Hood switch, Radiator fan motor, Right fog light
G301 Brake fluid level switch, Left fog light, Left headlight (low), Left front side marker light, Left front turn
signal light, Left front parking light, Windshield wiper motor
G302 VSA modulator-control unit (2 wires)
G401 AC inverter unit, Active noise control unit (2WD), Climate control unit, Combination light switch,
Cruise control main switch, Data link connector (DLC), Daytime running lights control unit (2 wires)
(Canada models), Driver's door key cylinder switch, Driver's door lock switch, Driver's door lock knob
switch, Driver's and door multiplex control units, Headlights (high), Heater control panel, Ignition key
switch (2 wires), Interior light relay, Multiplex control inspection connector, Optional security
connector, Optional front fog light connector, Park pin switch, Power transistor, Rear accessory
power socket relay, Right side signal light, Turn signal/hazard relay, TPMS control unit, Wiper/
washer switch, Windshield washer motor relay (2 wires)
G501 Navigation display unit (with navigation), Driver's multiplex control unit, DVD player unit (with rear
entertainment system), Interior lights switch, Memory erase signal (MES) connector, Moonroof
switch, Navigation unit, Rear blower motor relay, Rear heater-A/C control switch (2 wires). Rear
mode control motor, Rear accessory power socket, Rear power transistor
Shielding between the PCM and these components have BRN wires: VTM-4 control unit (4WD), VSA
modulator-control unit
G502 Gauge control module (2 wires)
G503 Console accessory power socket, Engine mount control unit (2WD), Front accessory power socket,
Front individual map lights (without moonroof), Glove box light, Keyless receiver unit, Left side turn
signal light, Optional automatic dimming inside mirror connector (without moonroof), Optional
cigarette lighter connector, Passenger's multiplex control unit, Vanity mirror lights (without
moonroof)
G504 Audio unit, Auxiliary jack assembly (with rear entertainment system)
G505 Engine mount control unit (2 wires) (2WD)
(cont'd)
Ground to Components Index (cont'd)
Ground Component or circuit grounded

G601 Door multiplex control unit (2 wires), Fuel pump (FP), Left mirror defogger, Left rear door lock knob
switch (with security), Power mirror switch, Power window control unit, Rear accessory power socket
G602 BLK: Rear Differential, Cargo area accessory power socket, VTM-4 control unit (4WD), Shielding
between the VTM-4 control unit and clutch electromagnetic coils
BRN/YEL: VTM-4 control unit (2 wires)
G651 Accessory power socket relay, Front passenger's door lock switch, Front passenger's door lock knob
switch (with security), Passenger's multiplex control unit, Power window relay, Right mirror defogger,
Right rear door lock knob switch (with security)
G652 Back-up lights, Brake lights failure sensor, High mount brake light, Left taillight/left rear side marker
light, License plate lights, Noise condenser, Rear window defogger, Rear window wiper motor, Right
taillight/right rear side marker light, Tailgate latch switch, Trailer lighting connector
G801 Driver's seat belt buckle switch, Driver's seat heater, Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, Front
passenger's seat heater, Power seat adj ustme nt switch (2 wires), ODS unit
G802 SRS unit (2 wires)
G901 * Electrical compass unit, Front individual map lights, Moonroof motor, Optional automatic dimming
inside mirror connector, Rear controller and screen (with rear entertainment system), Vanity mirror
lights
*; With moonroof
22-78
Removal and Installation
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
audio system and the navigation system (if under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the under
equipped), then write down the audio presets. hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
2 . Disconnect the negative battery cable, then 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least removal.
3 minutes.
3. Connect both the positive and negative cables to
3. Remove the screws (A) for the alternator and the battery.
battery cable terminals from the under-hood fuse/
relay box. 4. Do the power window control unit reset procedure
(see page 22-255).
5. Enter the anti-theft codes forthe audio system and

audio presets.
Set the clock (on vehicles without navigation).
6. Confirm that all systems work properly.
4. Remove the mounting bolt (B) from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
5. Remove the bottom cover from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
7. If replacing the fuse/relay box, carefully remove the

relays by prying under the base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the

relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Disconnect the driver's or passenger's under-dash
SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the fuse/relay box connectors, and remove the driver's
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before or passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
performing repairs or service.
NOTE: The dashboard wire harness A (driver's
Removal under-dash fuse/relay box connector B)
2P connector for SRS is a spring-loaded lock type
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the (see page 23-23).
audio system and navigation system (if equipped),
and write down the audio presets. Installation
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then 1. Connect the connectors to the driver's or
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, then install
minutes. the driver's or passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box in the reverse order of removal.
3. Driver's fuse box* Remove the left kick panel
(see page 20-65) and dashboard lower cover 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
(see page 20-90). removal.
Passenger's fuse box: Remove the right kick panel
(see page 20-65) and glove box (see page 20-95). 3. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable
to the battery, enter the anti-theft codes for the
4. Remove the mounting nut or bolt, and pull the audio system and the navigation system (if
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (A) or equipped), then enter the audio presets, and set the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (B) away clock (on vehicles without navigation).
from the body.
5. Reset the power window control unit (see page

22-255).
6. Confirm that all systems work properly.

Battery
Battery Test
AWARNIN
A battery can explode if you do not follow the
proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and follow the

manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized testers, follow this conventional
test procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is

between 70 °F (21 °C ) and 100 °F (38 *€).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
• If the case is damaged, replace the battery. ■

• If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.
• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to

step 4.
• If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 A load for 15 seconds to remove the

surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 A for

15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
• If voltage is above 9.6 V, the battery is OK. ■

• If voltage is below 9.6 V, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 A) until the EYE

shows the battery is charged, plus an additional
30 minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may
be necessary to bypass the charger's polarity
protection circuitry.
• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged within

3 hours, the battery is OK. ■
0 If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged
within 3 hours, replace the battery. ■
Power Relay Test
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the Normally-open type A
test listed for it.
Check for continuity between the terminals.
NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test
(see page 22-152). • There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
No. 2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
Relay Test connected to the No. 4 terminal, and battery negative
Accessory power Normally-open type A terminal is connected to the No. 3 terminal.
socket relay • There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and
ACM control relay No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected.
A/C compressor clutch
relay
A/C condenser fan
relay ©
A/F sensor relay 4 2
A/T reverse relay
Dimmer relay
ETCS control relay
Headlight relay 1
(RIGHT)
Headlight relay 2
(LEFT) ©
Horn relay
Ignition coil relay
Interior light relay
Park pin relay
PGM-FI main relay 1
PGM-FI main relay 2
Power window relay
Radiator fan relay
Rear accessory power
socket relay
Seat heater relay
Starter cut relay
Taillight relay
VTM-4 relay
Front blower motor Normally-open type B
relay
Rear window defogger
relay
Rear blower motor Normally-open type C
relay
ATP P relay Five-terminal type
Fan control relay
Fog light relay
Front washer motor
relay
Intermittent wiper relay
Moonroof close relay
Moonroof open relay
Rear washer motor
relay
Rear window
intermittent wiper relay
Normally-open type B Front blower motor relay, type 1
Check fo r continuity between the terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No. 3 and

No. 4 terminals when battery positive terminal is
connected to the No. 1 terminal, and battery negative
terminal is connected to the No. 2 terminal.
• There should be no continuity between the No. 3 and
No. 4 term i nals when power is disconnected.
©
1 3
Front blower motor relay, type 2
Rear window defogger relay
Front blower motor relay, type 3
(cont'd)
Power Relay Test (cont'd)
Normally-open ty pe C Five-terminal type
Check for continuity between the terminals. Check for continuity between the terminals.
* There should be continuity between the No. 1 and • There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
No. 3 terminals when battery positive terminal is No. 2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
connected to the No. 2 terminal, and battery negative connected to the No. 5 terminal, and battery negative
terminal is connected to the No. 4 terminal. terminal is connected to the No. 3 terminal.
• There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and * There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
No. 3 terminals when power is disconnected. No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected.
© ©
2 1 1 5
© ©
Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the switch position according to the table.
performing repairs or service. Terminal WHT/ BLK/ BLK/
BLK WHT YEL YEL WHT
Position (3) (2) (5) (4) (i)
audio system and navigation system (if equipped), O (LOCK)
then write down the audio presets. I (ACC) o — —O
II (ON) O— — o — — o — — O
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. III (START) o— —o— —O

(see page 20-90). 6. If the continuity checks do not agree with the table,
replace the steering lock (see page 17-29).
4. Disconnect the 6P connector from the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box. 7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft
codes for the audio system and the navigation
system (if equipped), then enter the audio presets,
and set the clock (on vehicles without navigation).
8. Reset the power window control unit (see page

22-255).
WHT/BLK WHT
(ACC) (BAT)
BLK/WHT
(ST)
YEL BLK/YEL
(IG2) Wire side of female (IG1)
terminals
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT

.OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Removal/Installation, page 11-365

Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration,
page 22-103
Rewriting the O D O Data and
Transferring the Maintenance Minder
on a N e w Gauge, page 22-102
Gauge Control Module Input Test,
page 22-105
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Test, page 19-10
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

Test, page 19-10
(cont'd)
CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR A
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Self-diagnostic Function
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function.
• The beeper drive circuit check

• The indicator drive circuit check
• The LCD segments check
• The gauges drive circuit check (Speedometer, Tachometer, Fuel gauge, Coolant temperature gauge)
• The communication line check (the coolant temperature signal line between the gauge and PCM)
Entering the self-diagnostic function

Before doing the self-diagnostic function, check the No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
With HDS
Select Body Electrical from the main menu, select functional test, then self-diagnostic function.
Without HDS
1. Push and hold the trip/reset button.
2. Turn the lighting switch ON.
4. Within 5 sec., turn the lighting switch OFF, then ON and OFF again.
5. Within 5 sec., release the trip/reset button, then push and release the button four times repeatedly.
NOTE:
• While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dash lights brightness controller operates normally.
• While in the self-diagnostic mode, the trip/reset button is used to start the beeper drive circuit check and the gauge
drive circuit check.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or the ignition switch is turned OFF, the self-diagnostic mode ends.
Ignition
Sw itch
Lighting
Switch
Trip/R eset
Sw itch
M ove to self-diagnostic mode.
5 sec. 5 sec.
The Beeper Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds five times.
The Indicator Drive Circuit Check

ABS indicator, A/T fluid temperature indicator, A/T gear position indicator (except P, R, N), Brake system indicator,
Charging system indicator, Cruise control indicator, Door/tailgate indicator, ECO indicator (2WD), Malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL), Low fuel indicator, Low oil pressure indicator, Low tire pressure indicator, Maintenance required
indicator, Seat belt reminder indicator, TPMS indicator, VSA activation indicator and VSA indicator, Washer fluid level
indicator (Canada models).
Switch Input Check
After the intermittent beeper sounds at the initial stage of self-diagnostic, a beeper sounds continuously while any of
the following switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON:
Parking brake switch, VSA OFF switch, cruise control master, SET, RESUME and CANCEL switches.
The LCD Segment Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the odo/trip segment blinks five times.
The Gauge Drive Circuit Check

When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer and the tachometer, the fuel gauge, and the coolant
temperature gauge needles sweep from the minimum position to maximum position, then return to the minimum
position.
NOTE:
After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return to the minimum position, pushing the trip/reset button
starts the beeper drive circuit check (one beep), and the gauge drive circuit check again.
The check cannot be started until the needles return to the minimum position.
If the gauge needles fail to sweep, replace the gauge control module.
The needles sweep from the

minimum position to the
maximum position, then return
to the minimum position.
The Communication Line Check

In the self-diagnostic mode, after the odo/trip LCD segments check, the self-diagnosis starts the communication line
check.
If all segments come on, the communication line is OK.
If the word "Error" is indicated, check the PCM DTCs with the HDS. If U0073 and/or U0155 indicate, go to the PCM
troubleshooting. If U0073 and/or U0155 does not indicate, check for loose or poor connections. If the connections are
good, replace the gauge control module.
Normal Faulty
OUTSIDE AB SERVICE OIL LIFE % OUTSI DE AB SERVICE OIL LIFE %

8 8 8 8 8 1 T?Bp- s e a e E r r o r I Ta b " B H t i 8
Ending the self-diagnostic function

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), the self-diagnostic function ends.
If any of the checks do not function as specified, replace the gauge control module.
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
. TPMS
CONTROL UNIT
• NAVIGATION UNIT
: CAN line
: Other communication line
DASH
LIGHT
BRN/WHT GRY
BRN/WHT
V V
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
V
_£L
YEL/GRN
G502
(cont'd)
No. 8 (7.5 A) FUSE

(DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX (ACC))
(Canada models)
(DRIVER'S CONTROL
UNDER-DASH MODULE
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
(cont'd)
1 PARKING
BRAKE
SWITCH
(Closed:
Pedal pressed)
(Open:
Pedal repressed)
G301
I m m
*1: USA models

*2: Canada models
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

HAZARD SWITCH
y
GRN/WHT
v
GRN
No. 45 (20 A) FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX) * ’ No. 13 (7.5 A) FUSE
I-------------- 1
I No. 9 (10 A) FUSE :
GRN/WHT GRN/YEL DAY TIME RUNNING (PASSENGER'S (DRIVER'S I
FOG LIGHT LIGHTS UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH |
RELAY CONTROL UNIT*2 FUSE/RELAY BOX) FUSE/RELAY BOX) ;
GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
V v
LEFT FRONT TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
LEFT SIDE TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
LEFT REAR TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
GRN/WHT GRN/YEL
RIGHT FRONT TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
RIGHT SIDE TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
RIGHT REAR TURN
SIGNAL LIGHT
YY
RED/YEL*1
RED/WHT*2
B19
WHT/RED
A10
HIGH BEAM IMMOBILIZER DRL

INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
(LED) (LED) (LED)
DIM
II
..J
A6
GRN ORN/WHT WHT/BLU WHT/GRN
V V V V
ODS DIMMER IMMOBILIZER DAYTIME
UNIT RELAY CONTROL RUNNING
UNIT-RECEIVER UGHTS
CONTROL
UNIT
i
(Canada models)
DTC Description ECU DTC type Page

B1152 Gauge Control Module EEPROM error Gauge Control Internal Error (see page 22-99)
Module
B1175 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending unit) Gauge Control Signal Error (see page 22-99)
signals input error Module
B1176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending unit) Gauge Control Signal Error (see page 22-100)
circuit short Module
B1177 Battery voltage abnormal Gauge Control Signal Error (see page 22-101)
Module
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1152: Gauge Control Module EEPROM DTC B1175: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Error Sending Unit) Signals Input Error
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. ,
2. Start the engine. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is D T C B 1 1 5 2 in d ic a te d ? Is D T C B 1 1 7 5 in d ic a te d ?
YES—Go to step 4. YES—Go to step 4. -
NO—Intermittent failure. The gauge control NO—Intermittent failure, the fuel level sensor
module is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor circuit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections. If the connections are good, check the connections. ■
battery condition (see page 22-81), and the
charging system.* 4. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector and gauge
control module connector B (14P) and check for
4. Disconnect the gauge control module connectors, loose or damaged terminals.
then reconnect them.
6. Reconnect the connectors that were disconnected,
Is D T C B 1 1 5 2 still in d i c a te d ? measure the voltage between the No. 7 and No. 8
terminals of gauge control module connector B
YES—Faulty gauge control module; replace the (36P) and No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the fuel tank
gauge control module (see page 22-102). ■ unit 5P connector.
NO—Intermittent failure. The gauge control FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR

module is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections. If the connections are good, check the BLK/YEL ORN/WHT
battery condition (see page 22-81), and the
charging system.■ r
1 2
/
V 5/
ORN/WHT BLK/YEL
1I 2I 3I 4I 5I 6I 7 8 I 9 110 111 12 113 114Tl5 116 11Th8 I
119 | / | 21 122123124125 128127128 | 29130131132133 | 34135136

Is th e r e le s s th a n 1 V ?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Repair the loose connection or open in the

ORN/WHT or BLK/YEL wire between the gauge
control module and fuel tank unit. ■
(confd)
8. Disconnected the gauge control module connector DTC B1176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
B (36P). Sending Unit) Circuit Short
9. Check for continuity between gauge control 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
module connector B (36P) No. 7 and No. 8
terminals and body ground. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R B (36P)
Is D T C B 1 1 7 6 in d ic a te d ?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the fuel level sensor

circuit is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections. ■
4. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page

Wire side of female terminals 11-389).
Is th e fu e l g a u g e s e n d in g u n it O K ?
Is th e re co n tin u ity ?
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Replace the fuel gauge sending u n it ■
NO—Repair the short to ground in the wire
between the gauge control module and the fuel 5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
gauge sending unit.B
10. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page (36P).
11-389).
Is th e fu e l g a u g e s e n d in g u n it O K ? module connector B (36P) No. 7 and No. 8
terminals and body ground.
YES—Replace the gauge control module. ■
NO—Replace the fuel tank unit. ■
DTC B1177: Battery Voltage Abnormal 8. Check the battery (see page 22-81) and the
charging system.
Is th e b a tte r y c o n d itio n n o rm a l a n d th e c h a rg in g
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). syste m O K ?
3. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES—Go to step 9.
Is D T C B 1 1 7 7 in d ic a te d ? NO—The battery needs a recharge or replacement,

or the charging system needs to repaired. ■
YES—Go to step 8.
NO—Go to step 4.
10. With the gauge control module 36P connector still
4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. connected, measure the voltage between the body
ground and gauge control module 36P connector B
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). (36P) No. 25 terminal.
6. Crank the engine. Is th e v o lta g e a b o v e 7 .5 V ?
7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES—Replace the gauge control module. ■
Is D T C B 1 1 7 7 in d ic a te d ? NO—Repair an open or high resistance in the YEL

wire between the ignition switch and the gauge
YES—Go to step 8. control module. ■
NO—Intermittent fa i lure. The gauge control

module and power supply voltage (IG1) that is
supplied to the gauge control module are OK at this
time. The battery may have been discharged, and
recovered. ■
Rewriting the ODO Data and Gauge Control Module
Transferring the Maintenance Replacement
Minder on a New Gauge Control
NOTE: Before replacing the gauge control module, do
NOTE: the "Rewriting the ODO Data and the Transferring the
• if the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge Maintenance Minder on a New Gauge Control Module"
control module, the ODO value on the multi (see page 22-102).
information display will appear as "------ —", making
the ODO function unusable, and the HDS will be 1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-90).
unable to retrieve additional ODO values.
• Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module 2. Remove the screws from the gauge control module
that does not communicate. (A), and spread a protective cloth (B) on the upper
• Obtain a new gauge control module before starting column cover.
the rewriting process.
1. Before replacing the gauge control module,

connect the HDS to the data link connector.
2. Select GAUGES from the BODY ELECTRICAL

SYSTEM SELECT menu display.
3. Select "GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

REPLACEMENT (ODO rewrite)" from the
ADJUSTMENT MENU, and follow the instructions
on the display to retrieve the ODO value.
4. Replace the gauge control module.
5. Follow the instructions on the display to write the

new ODO value to the new gauge control module.
3. Disconnect the connectors (C), and remove the
gauge control module.
4. Install the gauge in the reverse order of removal.

Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration
With .Climate Control Forced Display
NOTE: The outside air temperature sensor test You can also force the indicator to display the
(see page 21-121). measured temperature.
The outside air temperature sensor for the indicator is 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
mounted behind the front bumper. Because of the
location of the sensor, the temperature reading can be 2. Removed the No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse from the
affected by heat reflection from the road, engine heat, passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for
and even exhaust from the surrounding traffic. These 60 seconds, then reinstall it.
conditions can heat soak the sensor and cause
inaccurate readings. To prevent abnormal or fluctuating 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
outside air temperature indicator readings, the display
uses a specific logic as shown. NOTE: After this procedure, reset the power
w indow control unit (see page 22-255).
The outside air is warmer than when the ignition switch
was turned OFF (ACC or LOCK position): Troubleshooting
• If the ignition switch was turned OFF for more than If the indicator displays — " for more than
2 hours, the displayed temperature when you turn the 2 seconds after selecting the outside air temperature
ignition switch to ON (II) stays at the ignition switch- display mode, check for an open in the BRN/WHT wire
off temperature until the vehicle has gone faster than between the gauge and the outside air temperature
19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds, then the display sensor, the YEL/GRN wire between the climate control
immediately updates to the measured outside air unit and the outside air temperature sensor or the GRY
temperature. wire between the gauge control module and the climate
• If the ignition switch was turned OFF for 2 hours or control unit
less, the displayed temperature when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) and vehicle is traveling
faster than 19 mph (30 km/h) for 90 seconds, will rise
1 degree every minute until the outside air qJ o j o j
temperature is reached.
U U U
The outside air is cooler than when the ignition switch
was turned OFF (ACC or LOCK position):
• If the ignition switch was turned OFF for less than

2 hours, the displayed temperature when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) is the ignition switch-off
temperature. The displayed temperature then drops
1 degree every 2 seconds until the reading matches
the outside air temperature.
• If the ignition switch was turned OFF for 2 hours or
more, the displayed temperature is the measured
outside air temperature.
(cont'd)
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Calibration (cont'd)
Calibration
The outside air temperature indicator's displayed

temperature can be recalibrated ± 3 °F to meet the
customer's expectations.
NOTE: This procedure must be done after the

temperature sensor stabilizes.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make sure the

outside air temperature is displayed.
2. Press the trip/reset switch button for 10 seconds.

While you continue to hold the button, the display
will scroll through temperature settings from + 5 °
to —5 °F as shown.
L n § “i ~i 11 r* 11 _ ~i i i I
i. C. -J . K J*. «J. I. \J . t. I.
3. When the desired correction value appears on the

display, release the button, and the recalibrated
outside air temperature will be displayed.
Each time a desired correction value is entered, it

replaces the previous value.
Example-
Incorrect value = 68 °F
Desired correction value = + 2 °F
Corrected value = 70 °F
Desired correction value = —2 °F

Corrected value = 66 °F
NOTE: To recalibrate the display to the true

temperature, remove the outside air temperature
sensor (A), but leave it connected. Submerge the
sensor and a thermometer (B) in a container of ice
water (C). Select the calibration mode as described
above, then recalibrate the display to the true
temperature.
Gauge Control Module Input Test
NOTE: If there is malfunction of the parking brake reminder and speedometer function simultaneously,
troubleshooting the vehicle speed signal circuit first.
1. Remove the gauge control module and disconnect the 36P connector B from the gauge control module (see page
22-102).
2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 3.
GRN/RED BLU/RED
^ , p— / — o
1 2 3 j 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 / 21 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 2 7 128 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
/
WHT/RED
\ \ BLK
YEL
(confd)
Gauge Control Module Input Test (cont'd)
3. Reconnect the connectors to the gauge control module, and make these input tests at the connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the gauge internal circuit must be faulty; replace the gauge control module.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test; Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
B24 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
conditions ground: passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
There should be battery box
voltage. • An open in the wire
B25 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the
ON (II) ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery • An open in the wire
voltage.
B26 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G502)
conditions ground: • An open in the wire
There should be less than 1 V.
B9 BLU/RED Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G801)
ON (II), driver's ground: • Faulty driver's seat belt switch
seat belt There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
unbuckled
Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's seat belt switch
ON (II), driver's ground: • A short to ground in the wire
seat belt There should be 5 V or more.
buckled
B5 GRN/RED Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground
ON (II), ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
parking brake There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
set
Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty parking brake switch
ON (II), ground: • A short to ground in the wire
parking brake There should be battery
released voltage.
Dash Lights Brightness Controller
Circuit Diagram
*1: With rear entertainment system

*2: With HOMEUNK
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH LIGHT VTM-4 LOCK SWITCH LIGHT (4WD)/

DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH LIGHT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH LIGHT INDICATOR UGHT
POWER MIRROR SWITCH LIGHT DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH LIGHT FRONT PASSENGER'S
MOONROOF SWITCH UGHT SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT
INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT AUDIO UNIT
CRUISE SWITCH LIGHT DVD PLAYER*1
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT or AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY*’
HEATER CONTROL PANEL REAR CONTROLLER and SCREEN *
REAR HEATER CONTROL SWITCH LIGHT FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP UGHT * 2
FRONTCONSOLE UGHT
V
RED YEL WHT/RED
B25 B24 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
,E(i— |
(BULB)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
B18
BLK
-C l
G502
n
■ body Id
Test, page 22-114

Circuit Diagram
YEL WHT/RED
WHT/BLK
RIGHT HIGH MOUNT

BRAKELIGHT BRAKELIGHT
(21W
) {18 W)
G652
Safety Indicator Input Test
1. Remove the gauge control module (see page 22-102).
2. Disconnect 36P connector B from the gauge control module.
WHT/GRN ORN GRN/WHT
n n \> n ..... i — ------------ r n a rn n

00
CD
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
CD
21 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 29 30 31 32 | 33 | 34 135 | 36
\
WHT/RED YEL BLK GRN/ORN

/
WHT/ORN LT GRN/BLK
\
4. Reconnect the connectors to the gauge control module, and make the following input tests at the appropriate connector.
• Ifany test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• Ifallthe input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
B26 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
B24 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
• An open in the wire
B25 YEL Ignition switch O N (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
B35 LTGRN/ Left rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
BLK There should be less than 1 V. * An open in the wire
Left rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
B27 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to ground: * Faulty driver's door switch
B16 ORN Tailgate open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty tailgate latch switch
• Poor ground (G652)
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to ground: Faulty tailgate latch switch
There should be 5 V or more. ° A short to ground in the wire
B34 WHT/ORN Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: ° Faulty front passenger's door switch
door open There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Front passenger's Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
door closed There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
B17 GRN/WHT Right rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
There should be less than TV. • An open in the wire
Right rear door Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
closed There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
5. Disconnect connector B (36P) from the gauge control module, and make this input test at the connectors.
* Ifany test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• Ifall the input tests prove OK, the gauge internal circuit must be faulty; replace the gauge control module.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause ifresult is not obtained
B3 WHT/GRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between the B3 An open in the wire
terminal and the brake light failure sensor
No. 4 terminal:
Ignition switch O N (II) Measure the voltage to ground: A short to ground in the wire
There should be battery voltage.
Brake Light Failure Sensor Test
1. First make sure the brake lights come on when the 4. Measure the voltage at the No. 5 terminal of the 6P
brake pedal is pressed. connector with the ignition switch ON (II).
• If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. • If there is battery voltage, go to step 5.
• If one of the brake lights does not come on, check • If there is no voltage, check for an open in the
whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is blown, YEL wire.
replace it and recheck.
• If none of the brake lights come on, check the 5. Reconnect the 6P connector.
brake pedal position switch (see page 22-148).
6. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP indicator comes on
2. Open the tailgate, and remove the right rear side and goes off when the No. 3 terminal of the 6P
trim panel (see page 20-80). The brake light failure connector is grounded, the brake pedal is pressed,
sensor is mounted on the back side of the right rear and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II).
side trim panel.
• If the BRAKE LAMP indicator comes on and stays
on, substitute a known-good sensor.
• If the BRAKE LAMP indicator goes off, check for:
- A poor ground (G 652).
- An open in the BLK wire.
3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP indicator does not

come on and stay on when the brake light failure
sensor connector is disconnected and the ignition
switch is turned from OFF to engine running.
• If the indicator comes on, check for:

- A short to ground in the WHT/GRN wire
between the safety indicator and the No. 4
terminal of the failure sensors.
- A faulty safety indicator circuit in the gauge
control module.
• If the BRAKE LAMP indicator does not come on,
go to step 4.
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
G501 G401
n ? n
I B0DY I
YEL ■ f: Canada models
' WHT/RED '
B24 B25 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
-H - -H -
SEATBELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(LED)
LOW OIL
I PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(LED)
BUZZER
• KEY-IN
REMINDER
• LIGHTS-ON
REMINDER
• PARKING BRAKE
REMINDER
J
• SEATBELT
REMINDER
DRIVE CIRCUIT DRIVE CIRCUIT
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
B10 026 B5
• DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
• VTM-4 CONTROL UNIT (4WD)
• IMMOBILIZER CONTROL
BLU/RED GRN/RED UNIT-RECEIVER
• DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
SRS UNIT CONTROL UNIT*
Y
BLU/RED
Y
GRN/RED
BLU /YEL BLU/RED GRN/RED
OIL PRESSURE DRIVER'S PARKING

© » SWITCH
(Closed:
SEATBELT
BUCKLE
BRAKE
SWITCH
Engine stopped) SWITCH (Closed:
(Open: (Closed: Pedal pressed)
Engine running) Unbuckled) (Open:
(Open: Pedal released)
BLK Buckled) BLK
J2_ J2.
G801 G502
Control Unit Input Test
1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-244).
2. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX SOCKET

(Driver's multiplex control unit connector A)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 1/ 18 19 21 22 23 24
/
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E

GRN/ORN
2 3 4
/ ..F = L
5 10
/ i / / /
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR M

RED/BLK BLU/BLK
n_.... .v n
1 3 4 5 7 8 9
/ .. E = 1 .. /
11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
j/ / L
4. Reconnect the driver's multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following
input tests at the appropriate connectors on the back of the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
For driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-68).
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
B 11 *1 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G501)
E3 G R N /O R N Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
open ground: • An open in the wire
Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
closed ground: • A short to ground in the wire
There should be 5 V or more.
M 9 B L U /B L K Ignition key is Measure the voltage to • Faulty ignition switch
in the ignition ground: • Poor ground (G401)
switch There should be l e s s than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Ignition key is Measure the voltage to • Faulty ignition switch
out of the ground: • A short to ground in the wire
ignition switch There should be 5 V or more.
M3 R E D /B L K Combination Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the
light switch ground: passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
O N There should be battery box
voltage. • Faulty taillight relay
• Faulty combination light switch
• Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box
* 1: Multiplex control unit connector B
(cont'd)
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
5. Remove the driver's multipl ex control unit from the driver's multiplex control unit and make these input tests at
the connector and driver's under-dash fuse/relay box sockets.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to gauge control module input test (see page 22-121).
A24 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the
boxsocket ON (II) ground: There should be driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
battery voltage. • Faulty driver's fuse/relay box
A12 Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions ground: There should be under-hood fuse/relay box
battery voltage. • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box
A1 Under all Attach to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the
conditions The ignition key light should under-hood fuse/rel ay box
come on. • Faulty ignition key light
Gauge Control Module Input Test
NOTE: If there is malfunction of the parking brake reminder and speedometer function simultaneously,
troubleshooting the vehicle speed signal circuit first.
1. Remove the gauge control module and disconnect 36P connector B from the gauge control module (see page
22-102).
GAUGE CONTROL M ODULE CONNECTOR B (36P)
GRN/RED BLU/RED BLU/YEL
n n nA i- a /- r .. n. . . n n
1 2 3 | 4 I 5 j 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
3. Reconnect the connectors to the gauge control module, and make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the gauge internal circuit must be faulty; replace the gauge control module.
B9 BLU/RED Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G801)
O N (II), driver's ground: • Faulty driver's seat belt switch
seat belt There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
unbuckled
Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's seat belt switch
O N ( I I ) , driver's ground: • A short to ground in the wire
seat belt There should be 5 V or more.
buckled
B10 BLU/YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty oil pressure switch
ON (II), engine ground: ® An open in the wire
O FF There should be less than 1 V.
Start the Measure the voltage to • Insufficient oil
engine ground: • Improper lubrication
There should be battery • Faulty engine oil pressure switch
• A short to ground in the wire
B5 GRN/RED Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground
ON (II), ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
parking brake There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
set
Ignition switch Measure the voltage to 8 Faulty parking brake switch
ON ( I I ) , ground: • A short to ground in the wire
parking brake There should be battery
released voltage.

TAILLIGHT and REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT
(cont'd)
r-? n
I B O m
Circuit Diagram - Auto-off Headlights
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK(YEL
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III) l A4 WHT/RED RED GRN
DRIVER'S
No. 9 UNDER-DASH
(10 A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX
(Fuse/relay box socket)
A24
DOOR
MULTIPLEX DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
■Q- O------Q
A17<|>A7Kj>A15 A13 A14 A16 A10 A22 B16
E3 L6 17 RED/GRN RED 'BLK

PNK
PNK I—
1— BRN -
GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE 4
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE MODULE TAILLIGHT
RELAY
V V V FOG
LIGHT DIMMER
BLK 'RED BLU/BLK BLK GRN ORN RELAY RELAY WHT/ORN RED/YEL RED YEL RED/BLK
BLU/BLK GRN/ORN
V V
HEADLIGHT RED YEL RED/BLK
RELAYS
PNK
Is
BLU/BLK GRN/ORN WHT /BLU RED WHT
V
EXTERIOR
x DRIVER'S GRN LIGHTS
O, DOOR
1 DRIVER'S
DASH LIGHTS
Jr
KEY f ^ \ DOOR
UN LOCK LOCK gj s w itc h g j s w itc h
LOCK
T
KNOB
SWITCH
2 (Closed: (Closed: I
Key inserted! Door open) RED 'WHT G GRN
5
BLK BLK
LOW
V
HIGH X ,o- +4- PASSENGER'S
MULTIPLEX
DIMMER 0 PASSING
(E D ) < CONTROL UNIT
BO
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
1
BLK
1
BLK
Circuit Diagram - With Automatic Lights-off Feature
USA models

No. 41 (120 A)
— crxjD—
0 “
I No, 45 I No, 43
, BOA) , (20 A)
I A3 I AS IA 4 A7 B7
RED/YEl RED/GRN RED/GRN WHT/ORN YEL
Circuit Diagram - W ithout Automatic Lights-off Feature
USA models

No. 41 (120 A)
—<rxj>—
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2 RELAY 1
> No. 54
, (40 A)
I A5 j A4 A7 A13
RED/GRN RED/GRN WHT/ORN GRN
l _ L
_£L _Q _ .xl 1
Circuit Diagram - With Automatic Lights-off Feature

BATTERY
No. 41 (120 A)
\ IGNITION
1G2/ SWITCH
■ RED/ORN -
■ RED/WHT -
LED) DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S

3 No. 5 UNDER-DASH 5 No. 6 UNDER-DASH
T
L (10 A) FUSE/RELAY (10 A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX BOX
WHT/GRN YEL/RED RED/YEL RED/GRN RED/ORN RED/WHT
9 12 2 3 5 11 1
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT

1r
6 7 4 10 8
DRIVER'S
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
INIT BLK BLK ORN/WHT GRN
Y
GRN/RED GRN/RED
1 PARKING
BRAKE
) SWITCH
(Closed:
Pedal pressed)
) No. 54
I No. 45 * No. 43 t (40 A)
120 A) t (20 A)
A3 | A5 A7
RED/YEL RED/GRN RED/GRN WHT/ORN
I__ L -I_____I
_ jCL 1
Circuit Diagram - W ithout Automatic Lights-off Feature
Canada models
WHT/GRN YEL/RED RED/BLU RED/YEL RED/GRN RED/ORN RED/WHT

HEADLIGHT
RELAY 1
> No. 43
, (20 A)
| A5 j A4 A7 B7
RED/GRN RED/GRN WHT/ORN YEL
L — L i_ J
BLR
_Q_ .X L _Q _ XL _LL 1
Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights
Expect LX and LX-VP models
FUSE/RELAY BOX DRIVER'S
G301 G202 G401

Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
6652 6652 G101

G102
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BATTERY
No. 47 (20 A)
—crxjo-
© -
WHT/YEL
G652 G652 G652 G652

P I
■ BODY ■
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-90).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-25).
3. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch.
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
*: With automatic light-off

Turn signal switch
N\ Terminal
2 10 11
Position S\
LEFT o — — o
NEUTRAL
RIGHT o — — o
Fog light switch

Terminal
14 15
Position
OFF
ON o — — o
6. If the continuity is not as specified in the table, replace the switch.

Auto-off Headlights Control Unit Input Test
1. Before testing the auto-off headlights functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-244).
Driver's Multiplex Control Unit
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repairthem as necessary, and recheck the system.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 1b 1/ 18 19 21 22 23 24
/
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B
(Plugs into driver's multiplex control unit)
1 10
11 13 14 15 16
El
RED/W HT RED/GRN

GRN/ORN
1 __cp__
2 __F=3L_ 3 4
71
5 10
--- r / / 4 j
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR L
W HT/O RN RED/YEL
n _ n
1 2 3 / 5 6 7 8 9 / /
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21
/

BLU/BLK
n r n
1 3 4 7 8 9
/ _ J = 3 .. 5 /
/J— 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/ L—ti
(cont'd)
Auto-off Headlights Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector or driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
box socket ON (II) ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery • Faulty dri ver's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket conditions ground: passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. * An open in the wire
5. Reconnect the driver's multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following
input tests at the appropriate connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. For driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box connector socket location (see page 22-68).
E3 GRN/ORN Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch.
B16* RED/GRN Combination Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401)
light switch ground: • Faulty combination light switch
ON There should be about 12 V. • An open in the wire
B13* RED/WHT Passing switch Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401)
ON ground: • Faulty combination light switch
There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty taillight relay
Passing switch Measure the voltage to • Faulty combination light switch
OFF ground: • A short to ground in the wire
L6 WHT/ORN Combination Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401)
ON There should be about 12 V. • Faulty headlight relay
L7 RED/YEL Combination Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401)
ON There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
M9 BLU/BLK Ignition key is Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401)
in the ignition ground: • Faulty ignition switch
switch There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Ignition key is Measure the voltage to • Faulty ignition switch
out of the ground: • A short to ground in the wire
ignition switch There should be 5 V or more.
Door Multiplex Control Unit
6. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect connector A (20P) from the door multiplex control unit.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A
8. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make this input test.
• If the test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If the input test proves OK, the driver's or door multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace with a known-good
unit and retest.
Cavity Wire Test condition T o s j Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
A7 PNK Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401)
lock knob ground: • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
locked There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
lock knob ground: • A short to ground in the wire
unlocked There should be 5 V or more.
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test
Canada models
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-90).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B).
RED/BLU RED/GRN
RED/WHT \ RED/YEL BLK / GRN/RED
1 2 a 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
I 1... — .....rTL...... / /
WHT/GRN RED/ORN
GRN ORN/WHT YEL/RED

3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact
4. Reconnect the T4P connector to the daytime running lights control unit and make these input tests at the connector.
• ifallthe input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause Ifresult is not obtained
2 RED/BLU Under allconditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 52 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 6 (10 A) fuse in the passenger's
12 YEL/RED Ignition switch O N (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 42 (50 A) fuse in the under-hood
• Blown No. 5 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty Ignition switch
1 RED/WHT Ignition switch O N (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under-
There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty daytime running lights control unit
11 RED/ORN Ignition switch O N (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under
There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
10 ORN/WHT Ignition switch O N (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 5 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under
There should be less than 1 V. dash fuse/relay box
• Blown bulb
4 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
7 There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
3 RED/YEL Combination light Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 45 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
switch O N (=D) There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
• Faulty headlight relay 2
• Faulty driver's multiplex control unit
5 RED/GRN Combination light Measurer the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 43 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
switch O N (=D) There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
• Faulty headlight relay 1
5. Disconnect the 14P connector from the daytime running lights controlunit, and make these tests at the connector.
• Ifallthe input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Wire Test conditi on Test: Desired result Possible cause ifresult is not obtained
6 GRN/RED Parking brake pedal Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
pushed There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
8 GRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty headlight relays
There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
9 WHT/GRN Ignition switch O N (II) Attach to ground: • Faulty LED
The DRL indicator should come on. • An open in the wire
Headlight Adjustment
2. Park the vehicle 25 ft (7.5 m) away from a wall or a

A CAUTION screen (A).
Headlights become very hot during use; do not
touch them or any attaching hardware immediately
after they have been turned off.
Before adjusting the headlights;
• Park the vehicle on a level surface.

• Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
• The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat.
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
of the headli ghts (A).
3. Turn the low beams on.
4. Determine if the headlights are aimed properly.
Vertical adjustment:
Measure the height of the headlights (A). Adjust the
cut line (B) to the lights height.
HeadlightReplacement
5. If necessary, adjust the headlights to local 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-138).
requirements by turning the vertical adjuster (A).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the headlight
(B).
3. Remove the clips and mounting bolts, then remove

the corner upper beam (C) and headlight assembly.
5. After replacement, adjust the headlights to local

requirements.
B
ulbReplacement
Headlight (Low Beam) Headlight (High Beam)
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the headlight. 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the headlight.
Headlight {low beam); 55 W (H11) Headlight (high beam); 60 W (HB3)
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 °counterclockwise to

remove it from the headlight housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 °counterclockwise to
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. remove it from the headlight housing.
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.

Front Turn. Signal Light Front Parking Light
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front turn 1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front
signal light. parking light.
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 °counterclockwise to 2. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlight housing. remove it from the headlight housing.
Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W Front Parking Light: 5 W
(cont'd)
B
ulbReplacement(cont'd) L
ice
n s
ePlateLightReplacement
Front Side Marker Light 1. Pull the license plate light assembly out, and
disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light.
1. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-161).
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT; 5Wx2
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the light.
FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT; 6W
J .
3. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 ° counterclockwise to

remove it from the headlight housing. 2. Separate the lens (B) and housing (C), then remove
the bulb.
3. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
TaillightReplacement B
ack
-upLightReplacement
1. Open the tailgate. 1. Open the tailgate and remove the maintenance lids
from the tailgate.
2. Remove the two mounting bolts from the taillight
(A) and carefully pull off the taillight. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the back-up
light (B).
3. Turn the bulb sockets (B) 45 °counterclockwise to
remove them from the housing. BACK-UP LIGHT; 21 CP
BRAKE/TAILLIGHT: 2 1/5 W
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT/TAILLIGHT; 21/5 W
REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT: 3 CP
3. Turn the bulb socket (C) 45 “counterclockwise to

remove it from the housing.
4. Remove the rear license plate trim (see page

20-158).
4. If replacement of the ta i llight harness is necessary,
remove the grommet (C) and disconnect the 4P 5. Remove the two screws and the back-up light.
connector (D) from the right side wire harness.
5. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal,

and run water over it to make sure it does not leak.
Hig
hM ountB ra
keLight Bra
keP
eda
lPo
sitionSwitchTest
Replacement
(see page 20-90).
1. Remove the caps (A) from the high mount brake
light (B) with a small screwdriver. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake
pedal position switch (B).
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT; 18 W
9
3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2
2. Remove the two screws and high mount brake light. terminals.
3. Turn the bulb socket (C) 45 °counterclockwise to • There should be continuity when the brake pedal
remove it from the housing. is pressed.
• There should be no continuity when the brake
4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal. pedal is released.

terminals.
• There should be no continuity when the brake

pedal is pressed.
• There should be continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
5. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust the pedal

height (see page 19-5).
F
ogLightReplacement F
ogLightAdjustment
Expect LX and LX-VP models Expect LX and LX-VP m odels
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-138). Before adjusting the fog lights:
2. Remove the screw and mounting bolts from the fog • Park the vehicle on a level surface.
light (A). • Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
• The driver or someone who weights the same should
sit in the driver's seat.
Adjust the fog lights to local requirements by turning

the adjuster (A).
3. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 °counterclockwise to

remove the bulb.
Fog Light: 55 W {H11)
4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.

Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights
ComponentL
oca
tio
nIndex
FUSE/RELAY BOX
CircuitDiagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
G652 G503 G301 G502 G201 G401 G652 G401

Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights
T
urnSignal/HazardR
ela
yInputTest
1. Remove the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-80).
2. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (B).
3. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
4. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
1 Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
2 Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty turn signal switch
Hazard warning switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 49 (15 A) fuse in the
ON There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty hazard warning switch
3 Ignition switch ON (II) Connect N o n terminal to No. 3 • Poor ground (G201, G301, G401,
and turn signal switch in terminal: G502, G503, G652)
Right or Left position Right or left turn signal lights • Faulty hazard warning switch
should come on. • Faulty turn signal switch
Hazard warning switch Connect No. 2 terminal to No. 3 • Poor ground (G201, G301, G401,
ON terminal: G502, G503, G652)
Hazard warning lights should • Faulty hazard warning switch
come on. • An open in the wire
Ha
za rdW arningSwitchTest/ SideTurnSignalLightReplacement
Replacement
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the fender.
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93). 1. Push the retaining spring, and remove the side turn
signal light (A).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the hazard
warning switch (B). SIDE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT; 5W
3. Remove the hazard warning switch.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light.
\ Terminal
5 6 1 2 3 4 7 10
Position \
OFF ■o -o o - -o
o o o -o o
ON
o - -o
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb

(C) or the switch.
ComponentL
oca
tio
nIndex
/ DRIVER'S
' VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
I FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS
' Test/Replacement, page 22-158
PASSENGER'S
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR

COURTESY LIGHT
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
AMBIENT UGHT
Test/Replacement, page 22-163
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
INTERIOR LIGHTS SWITCH DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
Test, page 22-163
CircuitDiagram

BATTERY
INTERIOR
LIGHT
RELAY
1 No. 10 (15 A) FUSE

(PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
MULTIPLEX MULTIPLEX
CONTROL CONTROL INTERIOR
UNIT UNIT RED/BLK
LIGHT
r 2 4 6 SWITCH
V 7 " 1
GAUGE
CONTROL OFF >x ON OFF / I ON
Y j ! MODULE
^ LIGHT o''
Y Y Q
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S (0.56 W) C) \ ° ' (
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
DOOR J DOOR
n
GRN/ORN WHT/ORN GRN/ORN
■R i|o r" WHT/ORN 1 3 5
BLK RED BLK
WHT/ORN
I 1 FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open)
_Q -
G401 G501
No. 10 (15 A) FUSE
(PASSENGER'S m : With moonroof
UNDER-DASH FUSE
RELAY BOX) IT! : Without moonroof
FrontIndividualMapLightTest/Replacement
W ith m oonroof W ith o u t m oonroof
1. Turn the light switch OFF. 1. Turn the light switch OFF.
2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small 2. Carefully pry off the lenses (A) with a small
screwdriver. screwdriver.
MAP LIGHT: 8Wx2 MAP LIGHT: 4 CP x 2
3. Remove the four mounting screws.
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the roof

console (C).
3. Remove the four mounting screws. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
4. Disconnect the 3P and 10P connectors (B) from the
housing (C). \ Terminal
1 2 3
Position \
switch position according to the table. ON o — —@— “ O
R
OFF o — —@— —o
ON o — —@— — o
\ Terminal L
1 2 3 OFF o — —@— —o
Position \
ON o — —® — — o 6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the
R
OFF o — — @— —o bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light.
ON o — — @— — o
L
OFF o — — @— —o
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the

bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light.
R
earIndividualMapLightTest
1. Turn the light switch OFF.
2. Carefully pry off the lenses (A) with a small

screwdriver.
MAP LIGHT; 5Wx2
3. Remove the two mounting screws.
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing

(C).

\ Terminal
1 2 3
Position \
D ON o — —@— — o
rt
OFF o — —@— —o
■ ON o — —@— — o
L
OFF o — —@— —o

TailgateLightTest TailgateL
atc
hSwitchTest
91. Open the tailgate. 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small 2. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-82).
screwdriver.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the tailgate latch.
TAILGATE LIGHT: 5 W x 2

terminals.
• With the tailgate open, there should be continuity.

• With the tailgate closed, there should be no
continuity.
3. Remove the two mounting screws. 5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
tailgate latch switch.
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing
(C).
5. Check for continuity between the terminals. There

should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 3
terminals with the switch ON.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the

bulb(s). If the bulb(s) are OK, replace the light.
Glov
eBo
xLightTest FrontCo
nsoleLightTest
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-95). 1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-88).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the glove box 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front
light (B). console light (B).
GLOVE BOX UGHT; 3.4 W FRONT CONSOLE LIGHT: 1.4 W
3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 3. Turn the bulb socket (C) 45 °counterclockwise to
terminals. remove it from the light.
• With the button (C) pressed, there should be no

continuity.
• With the button (C) released, there should be
continuity.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb.

If the bulb is OK, replace the light.
VanityMirrorLightReplacement CourtesyLightReplacement
1. Open the sunvisor. 1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver.
2. Remove the sunvisor (see step 3 on page 20-83).
COURTESY LIGHT: 3.8 W
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the vanity
mirror light.
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT; 1.1 W

terminals.
• With the vanity mirror cover (B) opened, there

should be continuity.
• With the vanity mirror cover closed, there should
be no continuity.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulbs.

If the bulbs are OK, replace the sunvisor.
F I
■ BODY | |
InteriorLig
htsSwitchTest AmbientLightTest/Replacement
1. Remove the switch panel (see page 20-92). 1. Turn the combination light switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the interior 2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
lights switch (B). screwdriver.
3. Pull the interior lights switch out of the switch panel.

3. Remove the four mounting screws.
switch position according to the table. 4. Disconnect the 3P and 10P connectors (B) from the
housing (C).
^ Terminal
T 2 3 4 5 6 5. Remove the ambient light module assembly (D).
Position \
OFF o o 6. The ambient light should come on when power is

MIDDLE connected to the No. 4 terminal and ground is
(DOOR) o o o - -o a -o connected to the No. 1 terminal.
ON o -@ - - o a o -o
7. If the LED does not come on, replace the ambient
light module assembly.
(C) or the switch.
ComponentL
oca
tio
nIndex
CircuitDia
g ra
m
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH : Other communication line

BATTERY
No. 41 (120 A) No. 42 (50 A)
©■ "W HT ■
No. 47
(20 A) IG1 HOT in ON (II) and
START (III)
B5
WHT/YEL BLK/YEL
A4
IGNITION ) No. 9 DRIVER'S

KEY (10A) UNDER-DASH
LIGHT (Fuse/relay box socket) FUSE/RELAY
Q1
(LED) BOX
No. 10 (15 A) FUSE
(PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
WHT/BLK RED/BLK YEL BLK/WHT
A24 A22
DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT PASSENGER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
A7 I A15 A13 A16 A17 A15 A14
PNK BRN PNK

M9 E10 C16 C14
GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE

BLK/RED CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
Y
ORN
BLU; BLK
Y
BLU/BLK
GRN/ORN \ ^ / L T GRN/BLK
GRN/ORN
Y
LT GRN/BLK
WHT/ ORN
Y
WHT/ORN
GRN/ WHT
Y
GRN/WHT
UN ,0 DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK
LOCK LOCK KNOB
SWITCH M TAILGATE JL> IGNITION JU DRIVER'S JU LEFT REAR FRONT RIGHT REAR
f P ) LATCH (\o\ KEY
KEY (@\ DOOR DOOR PASSENGER'S DOOR
M b y SWITCH H o'gj
y SWITCH
SWITCH V lb / SWITCH V l b / ’ SWITCH DOOR ’ SWITCH
^ 1 (Closed: ^ 2 ---------
(Closed:------- ^ 1
(Closed: ^ (Closed: SWITCH (Closed:
Tailgate open) Key inserted) Door open) Door open) (Closed: Door open)
Door open)
BLK BLK BLK
Jl. _£L _£L
G401 G652 G401

IgnitionK
eySwitchTest IgnitionK
eyLightTest
NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower
circuit diagram (see page 22-116) and input test covers (see page 17-25).
(see page 22-118).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector.
When the ignition key is in the ignition switch, the key-
in beeper in the driver's multiplex control unit senses NOTE: Lock tab (A) points down when installed.
ground through the closed ignition key switch. When
you open the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses
ground through the closed door switch.
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower

covers (see page 17-25).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector.
NOTE: Lock tab (A) points down when installed.
3. The LED should come on when power is connected

to the No. 6 terminal and ground is connected to
No. 5 terminal.
4. If the LED does not come on, replace the ignition

key switch.
3. Check for continuity between the No. la n d No. 2

terminals.
* There should be continuity with the key in the

ignition switch.
• There should be no continuity with the key
removed.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the

ignition key switch.
ControlCircuitInputTest
1. Before testing the entry light control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-244).
Driver's M ultiplex Control Unit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 1b 1/ 18 19 21 22 23 24
/
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX UNIT CONNECTOR B
t GRN/ORN
/ 2 3 4
F=l
5 / / / / 10
-LT GRN/BLK
BLU/BLK
i. —r
1 3 4 5 / 7 8 9
/ F=1
11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
/ / L—i
_i
(cont'd)
ControlCircuitInputTest(cont'd)
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector or driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
A1 Fuse/relay Under all Attach to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the
box socket conditions The ignition key light should under-hood fuse/relay box
come on. • Blown LED
A24 Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the
There should be battery • Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
A6 Fuse/relay Combination Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
box socket light switch ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
ON There should be battery • Blown No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the
voltage and jump 12 V to passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
driver's multiplex connector box
B16 (EX). • Faulty taillight relay
5. Reconnect the driver's m ultiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following
input tests at the appropriate connectors on the back of the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
E3 GRN/ORN Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door switch
Driver's door Measure the voltage to • A short to ground in the wire
closed ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be 5 V or more. • An open in the wire
M9 BLU/BLK Ignition key is Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G401)
in the ignition ground: • Faulty ignition switch
switch There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Ignition key is Measure the voltage to ° A short to ground in the wire
out of the ground: • Poor ground (G401)
ignition switch There should be 5 V or more. • Faulty ignition switch
E10 LTGRN/ Left rear door Measure the voltage to • Faulty left rear door switch
BLK open ground: • An open in the wire
Left rear door Measure the voltage to " A short to ground in the wire
closed ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
There should be 5 V or more. • An open in the wire
B8 * ORN Tailgate open Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G652)
ground: • Faulty tailgate latch switch
Tailgate Measure the voltage to • A short to ground in the wire
closed ground: • Poor ground (G652)
There should be 5 V or more. • Faulty tailgate latch switch
* : Driver's multiplex control unit connector B
(cont'd)
Passenger's Multiplex Control Unit
6. Remove the passenger's multiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect
its connector.
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX SOCKET

(Passenger's multiplex control unit connector A)
3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
/ / /
13 14 15 1b 18 19 2U 21 22 23 24
/
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C
2 3 4 5 6 7
/
8 / i 10 11 12 113 16 j 17 18 19 20
' 9
/
GRN/WHT
\WHT/ORN
8. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
A 22 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the
box socket ON (II) ground: There should be driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
battery voltage. • Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box
• Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
A 21 Interior light Attach to ground: Interior ° Blown No. 11 (10 A) fuse in the
switches in the lights should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
middle (Door) box
position • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
• Faulty individual map light
• Faulty interior lights switch
9. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the
following input tests at the appropriate connector of the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
* If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
C16 WHT/ORN Front Measure the voltage to ° Faulty front passenger's door switch
passenger's ground: • An open in the wire
door open There should be less than 1 V.
Front Measure the voltage to • Faulty front passenger's door switch
passenger's ground: • A short to ground in the wire
door closed There should be 5 V or more.
C14 GRN/WHT Right rear Measure the voltage to • Faulty right rear door switch
door open ground: • An open in the wire
Right rear Measure the voltage to • Faulty right rear door switch
door closed ground: • A short to ground in the wire
(cont'd)
Door Multiplex Control Unit
10. Remove the driver's door panel and disconnect the 20P connector from the door multiplex control unit.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repairthem as necessary, and recheck the system.
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 10
/ /
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
/
BLK/RED
12. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make the input test at the connector.
• If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If the input test proves OK, goto step 13.
A17 BLK/RED Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
lock knob ground: • Poor ground (G401)
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Driver's door Measure the voltage to • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
lock knob ground: • Short to ground
locked There should be 5 V or more.
13. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit for the
one that is most likely at fault, then recheck the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is
faulty; replace it. If there is still a malfunction, substitute a known-good control unit for the next most likely unit to
be at fault, and recheck. If the system works properly, the original unit is faulty; replace it.
CircuitDiagram
BATTERY *1: With moonroof

*2: Without moonroof
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
*1
r* ""“ I
WHT/BLU
G901
L ...
Test
NOTE: If the HomeLink remote control system will not 5. Point the test remote transmitter (A) straight up
open the customer's garage, do this: exactly 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) away from the HomeLink
unit (B).
1. Press any of the buttons on the HomeLink unit
• If the red indicator comes on, go to step 3.

• If the red indicator does not come on, go to
step 2.
2. Measure the voltage between the No. 6(1)(+)and

No. 5(3)(—) terminals of the roof console 10P (front
individual map light 3P) connecter. There should be
battery voltage.
• If the voltage is not as specified, check for these

problems:
- A blown No. 11 (10 A) fuse in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box.
- A faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box. 6. Press and hold the button on the test remote
- An open in the WHT/BLU wire between the transmitter and one of the buttons (C) on the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the HomeLink unit at the same time.
roof console (map light).
- An open in the BLK wire between the roof 7. Wait about 20 seconds while watching the red
console (map light) and G901 (G501). indicator (D) on the HomeLink unit.
• If the voltage is as specified, go to step 3.
• If the red indicator starts blinking slowly and then
(): without moonroof blinks faster, the unit is OK. Release the buttons,
then clear the learned code (see step 4). Explain
3. Make sure the commercially available Genie to the customer that garage door remote
remote transmitter (test remote) has fresh batteries. transmitters come in two types: fixed code and
rolling code. Each type has its own programming
NOTE: The Genie remote transmitter can be either method, and each method is covered in the
the fixed code type or rolling code type. owner's manual. If the customer has concerns
about the HomeLink unit, have the customer
4. Clear any previously learned codes by pressing and contact the HomeLink assistance desk at
holding the two outside buttons (A) on the 1-800-355-3515. On the internet, go to www.
HomeLink unit (B) for about 20 seconds. When the homelink.com.
red indicator (C) on the unit starts blinking, release • If the red indicator does not blink, replace the
the buttons. roof console (map light). With moonroof
(see page 22-163). Without moonroof (see page
22-158).
(): without moonroof
B
ComponentL
oca
tio
nIndex
HORN (HIGH)
CircuitDiagram
BATTERY *1: With navigation

*2: Without navigation
^991
■ B0DY I 1
H
ornSwitchTest
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
17-25). 23-201).
2. Disconnect dashboard wire harness B 13P (or 5P) 6. Check for continuity between the cable reel 13P (or
connector (A) from the cable reel (B). 5P) connector (A) and the horn switch positive
terminal (B).
• If there is no continuity, check for continuity of

the radio remote switch harness. If the harness is
OK, replace the cable reel (see page 23-212) and
check for proper operation.
13P CONNECTOR
—M (With navigation)
1 / / 4
6 7 /
/ I / I 11 12 < Wire side of
female terminals
5P CONNECTOR
(Without navigation)
Wire side of
female terminals
3. Using a jumper wire, connect dashboard wire

harness B 13P (or 5P) connector (A) No. 1 terminal
to body ground. The horns should sound. Without navigation
2 3 4 Terminal side
• If the horns sound, go to step 4. of male terminals
• If the horns don't sound, check the horn relay
circuit.
7. Check for continuity between the center of the
4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of steering column and ground.
the cable reel side 13P (or 5P) connector and body
ground with the horn switch pressed. • If there is continuity, replace the horn plate.
• If there is no continuity, replace the steering
• If there is continuity, the switch is OK. column.
• If there is no continuity, go to step 6.
Ho
rnTest/Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-138).
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from each horn (B).
3. Remove the mounting bolt and horn.
4. Test each horn by connecting battery power to the

terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (B). The
horn should sound.
5. If it fails to sound, replace it.

F I
■ BODY |
ComponentL
oca
tio
nIndex
HEATER CONTROL PANEL: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT:

CircuitDiagram
[] : Heater control panel

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
G652 G652 G401

Function Test DefoggerWireRe
p a
ir
NOTE: NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section

• Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger must be no longer than 1 inch (25 mm).
wires with the tester probe.
• Before testing, check the No. 53 (30 A) fuse in the 1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
under-hood fuse/relay box and No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in with fine steel wool, then clean it with isopropyl
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. alcohol.
1. Measure the voltage between the positive terminal

(A) and body ground with the ignition switch and
defogger switch ON.
• If there is no voltage, check for:

- Faulty defogger relay.
- An open in the BLK/GRN wire.
- Faulty climate control panel unit or heater
control panel.
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 2.
B A
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion

of the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).
3. Mix the silver conductive paint thoroughly. Using a

small brush, apply a heavy coat of paint (A)
extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break.
Allow 30 minutes to dry.
2. Measure the voltage between the positive terminal

(A) and negative terminal (B).
• If there is no voltage, check for:

- Poor ground (G 652).
3. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to the halfway

point of each defogger wire, and the negative
probe to the negative terminal. 4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
There should be about 6 V with the ignition switch
and the defogger switch ON. 5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
• If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire is
OK.
• If the voltage is not as specified, repair the
defogger wire.
- If it is battery voltage, there is a break in the
negative half of the wire.
- If it is 0 V, there is a break in the positive half of
the wire.
NoiseCo
nde
n s
erCapacityTest
1. Remove the right side trim panel (see page 20-80).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the noise

condenser (B).
3. Use a commercially available condenser tester.

Connect the condenser tester probes and measure
the condenser capacity.
No. 1 and No. 2 terminal capacity: 0.47 microfarads
Wire side of
female terminals
4. If not within the specifications, replace the noise

condenser.
ComponentL
oca
tio
nInde
x
Test, page 22-186

CircuitDiagram
*1: EXL model

*2: EX, EX-SE models
6801 6801
■ body [a
PowerSeatAdjustmentSwitchTest/Replacement
1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs and recline cover from the driver's seat, then remove the two
screws and the power seat switch (see page 20-107).
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors from the power seat adjustment switch (A).
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
Terminal
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
Position
Forward : KJ .... KJ
SLIDE KJ KJ
SWITCH C\ o
KJ
Backward
KJ .... kj
Forward a - —o
RECLINE KJ KJ
SWITCH Q— — O
Backward o - —o
KJ
FRONT UP u .... n
KJ
UP-DOWN
SWITCH U~“.. Pi
KJ
DOWN n
KJ
KJ
r\
UP KJ KJ
REAR o ——o
UP-DOWN
SWITCH DOWN o— o —o
KJ
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.

MotorTest
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-104). 3. Test each motor by applying battery voltage and
body ground to the terminals.
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors from the adjustment
switch (A). Slide motor:

Terminal
A1 A5
Position
Forward 0 ©
Backward © ©
Recline motor:
Terminal
B3 B4
Position \
Forward © 0
Backward 0 ©
Front up-down motor:
Terminal
A3 A4
Position
UP © ©
DOWN © ©
Rear up-down motor:
Terminal
A2 A6
Position
UP © ©
DOWN © ©
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

check for an open in the driver's seat wire harness
between the 6P connector and each 2P power seat
motor connector. If the harness is OK, replace the
motor (see page 20-107).
■ BODY k |
Seat Heaters
ComponentL
o c
ationIndex
CircuitDiagram
[ ] : With navigation system

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH HI: High
BATTERY LO: Low
No. 41 (120 A) No. 42 (50 A) C2
-U~\JD ■< ■W H T " ■ YEL-
© - No. 52 (40 A)
B3
YEL/GRN IG2 HOT in ON (II)
PASSENGER'S A DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH J o.3 UNDER-DASH No. 3 J
FUSE/RELAY C :0A) FUSE/RELAY (7.5 A) C
(ON : 9 8 — 110 V ( 3 6 . 5 - 4 3 . 5 '€») BOX BOX
TH: THERMOSTAT
(O F F : 1 17 -1 2 7 °F (47 - 5 3 °C))
BR: BREAKER (ON : 9 5 -1 1 3 T (3 5 -4 5 °C))
(OFF: 1 4 0 - 1 5 8 T ( 6 0 - 7 0 °C))
No. 10 (15 A) FUSE

FUSE/RELAY BOX)
SeatHeaterTest
Driver's Seat Front Passenger's Seat
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-104). 1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-104).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and 2P connector 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the seat
(B) from the seat heater. heater.
3. Seat Cushion Heater: 3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 3
Check for continuity between the A1 and A2 terminals, and No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the 4P
terminals, and A1 and A3 terminals of the 4P connector. There should be continuity.
connector A. There should be continuity.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat
4. Seat-back Heater: heater.
Check for continuity between the B1 and B2
terminals of the 2P connector B. There should be
continuity.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat

heater.
6. If only the seat-back heater fails to warm-up, check

for on open in the YEL wire of the driver's seat wire
harness.
SwitchTest/Replacement
Driver's and Passenger's Switch (With Driver's and Passenger's Switch (Without
Navigation System) Navigation System)
1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-88). 1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-88).
2. Disconnect the 6P or 8P connector (A) from the seat 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from each seat
heater switch (B), and remove the switch. heater switch (B), and remove the switch.
B
3. Check for continuity between the terminal in each
switch position according the table.
3. Check for continuity between the terminal in each
Driver's seat switch position according the table.
\ Terminal Terminal
1 2 3 6 4 5 1 2 3 6 4 5
Position \ Position \
r\
r \
ON HIGH _0_
a o a o o ON HIGH
o - o O - o o
LOW a -0 - o a o o LOW a o o - -o
■o
OFF a o
OFF o o
passenger's seat
\ Terminal switch.
1 2 4 7 5 6
Position \
5. If any of the illumination bulbs (C) are blown,
ON HIGH replace it.
_0_
a o a o -o
LOW a o a -0 - o o
OFF _0_
a o

switch.
5. If any of the illumination bulbs (C) are blown,

replace it.
C o m p o n e n t L o c a tio n In d e x
MIRROR DEFOGGER SWITCH

CircuitDiagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX *: With mirror defogger
BATTERY
No. 41 (120 A) No. 42 (BOA) No. 4 (7.5 A)
H17
— c r x j D : ......"Cr \ j o - “ <ru>”
(±> ■ YEL ■
No. 10 (15 A) FUSE IG2 HOT in ON (II) ORN

FUSE/RELAY BOX)
BLK ORI ORN
9 2 POWER MIRROR SWITCH

UP
LEFT RIGHT
a
A ) LIGHT DEFOGGER
(0.84 W) £ j / SWITCH*
INDICATOR
(LED)*
DOWN
RED
O' 1'Q RIGHT Q' 'Q

LEFT RIGHT
BRIGHTNESS 8* 13
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module) ORN ’WHT* BLU YEL/WHT BLK
_Q -
G601
F
unc
tio
nTest
1. Remove the driver's door switch trim (see page Left mirror
20-6).
6. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the No. 10 terminal,
and the No. 5 (or No. 12) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The left mirror should tilt down
(or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the BLU/WHT (or BLU/
ORN) wire between the left mirror and the 13P
connector. If the wire is OK, check the left mirror
actuator.
• If the mirror neither tilts down (nor swings left)
check for an open in the BLU/GRN wire.
• If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
Right mirror
ORN/WHT* / b L U /G R N \ BLU/ORN
RED/BLK YEL/WHT 7. Connect the No. 2 terminal to the No. 11 terminal,
*:With mirror defogger and the No. 5 (or No. 13) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The right mirror should tilt
2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power down (or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
mirror switch (B), and inspect the terminals. If OK, • If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
go to step 3. left), check for an open in the BLU/WHT (or LT
GRN) wire between the right mirror and the 13P
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the connector.
symptom: If the wire is OK, check the right mirror actuator.
• Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4. • If the mirror neither tilts down (nor swings left)
• Left mirror doesn't work, go to step 6. check for an open in the YEL/WHT wire.
• Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 7. • If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
• Defoggers don't work, go to step 8. switch.
Both mirrors Defogger
4. Reconnect the power mirror switch connector, and 8. Connect the No. 1 and No. 8 terminals with a
measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal jumper wire, and measure the voltage between the
and body ground with the ignition switch ON (II) No. 8 terminal and body ground. There should be
while operating the power mirror switch. battery voltage and both mirrors should warm up
There should be battery voltage. with the ignition switch ON (II).
• If there is no voltage, check for: • If there is no voltage or neither warms up, check
- Blown No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under for:
dash fuse/relay box. - An open in the ORN and ORN/WHT wires.
- An open in the ORN wire. - Blown No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. dash fuse/relay box.
- Poor ground (G 601, G651).
5. Measure the voltage between the No. 6 terminal • If only one fails to warm up, check its defogger.
and body ground while operating the power mirror • If both warm up, check the defogger switch.
switch.
There should be less than 1V.
• If there is more than 1 V, check for:
• If there is less than 1 V, check both mirrors
individually as described in the step 6 to 8.
PowerMirrora
n dMirrorDefoggerSwitchTest/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's door switch trim (see page 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
20-6). switch position according to the table.
2. Disconnect the 13P connector from the power

mirror switch.
1 2
9 4 5
6
9 8 9 10 11 12 13
Defogger Switch
Terminal
1 8
Position
ON O ----------- — - o
OFF ■.

switch.
PowerMirrorActuatorTest Pow erMirrorActuator
Replacem ent
1. Remove the m irror mount cover (see page 20-31).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the power 1. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-31) and
mirror actuator (B). mirror holder (see page 20-32).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector from the mirror

■ actuator.
3. Record the terminal location and wire colors, then

cut the mirror actuator wires with the wire cutter.
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

ground according to the table.
4. Remove the two TORX screws from the mirror

\ Terminal
Position \
6 7 8 connector (A), then remove the connector and
cover (B).
TILT UP 0 ©
TILT DOWN 0 ©
SWING LEFT © ©
SWING RIGHT © ©
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the

mirror actuator.
Defogger Test

terminals of the 8P connector. There should be
continuity. If there is no continuity, check for an
open circuit.
PowerMirrorActuatorReplacement(cont'd)
5. Remove the four TORX screws and separate the 7. Insert the terminals into the connector in the
actuator (A) from the mirror housing (B). original arrangement as shown.
Left Right
BLK* BLK* BLK* BLK*
*: With mirror defogger
8. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

Be careful not to break the mirror holder when
reinstalling it to the actuator (see page 20-32).
6, Route the wire harness (A) of the new actuator 9. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door.
through the hole in the bracket (B).
10. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth
B operation.
ComponentL
oca
tio
nInde
x
MOONROOF CLOSE RELAY

[Wire colors; GRN/BLK, BLU, 1
LGRN/WHT, BLK, and GRN J
Test, page 22-82
CircuitDia
g ra
m
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX MULTIPLEX
BATTERY CONTROL UNIT
No. 41 (120 A) No. 51 (40 A! (Key-off timer circuit)
crxjo.........
<+>■ — W HT/BLU"
POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
POSITION SW1 SW2 PASSENGER'S
OPENING OPEN OPEN UNDER-DASH
OPENED OPEN OPEN FUSE/RELAY No. 15
BOX (20 A)
CLOSED OPEN TILT (OPEN)
CLOSING OPEN OPEN
TILTING TILT (CLOSE) TILT (OPEN)
TILT (CLOSE) TILT (CLOSE) TILT (OPEN)
110
nB4
No. 14
(7.5 A)
G18
m
“I
BLU BLU
r
BLK GRN
T
BLK
n
BLK
MOONROOF ,0 MOONROOF
OPEN CLOSE
" ■{ RELAY RELAY
3 1
MOONROOF MOTOR
GRN/YEL GRN/BLK
2
GRY BLU GRN/WHT
■ GRY/BLU — r - GRN/WHT —
4 MOONROOF LIMIT SWITCH 1
SW1 SW2
DRIVER'S
GRY 'BLU
I\ TILT ^ TILT MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
OPEN / \ (CLOSE) OPEN / \ (OPEN)
O 3
T ? 1
2
LT GRN/BLK GRN/ORN RED/BLK
1 5
OPEN CLOSE TILT LIGHT

(0.56 W)
3 MOONROOF SWITCH
BLK
1 v i
GAUGE
G901 G501 CONTROL G651
MODULE
LimitSwitchTest LimitSwitchReplacement
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-83). 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-83).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the moonroof 2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch (A)
limit switch (B). on the moonroof frame (B).

5N-m
\ Terminal (0.5 kgf-m, 4 ibf-ft)
1 2 3 '4
Position \
3. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the moonroof
TILT 0 - - o 0
. - - o
limit switch.
OPEN o - - o
4. Remove the two mounting bolts (D).
CLOSE O H - o
5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, adjust the 6. Adjust the moonroof limit switch as needed
moonroof limit switch (see page 20-62). (see page 20-62).
If the continuity is still not as specified, replace the
moonroof limit switch.
SwitchTest MoonroofMotorTest
NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-83).
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the
"II" to the "I" or "O" positions, as long as none of the 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the moonroof
doors are opened. This provides a convenience to motor (B).
parked occupants while offering a degree of security
against unwanted or accidental moonroof operation.
1. Remove the switch panel (A).
2. Carefully push out the moonroof switch (B) from

behind the dashboard lower cover, then disconnect
the 6P connector (C) from the switch.
3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground

according to the table.
^ Terminal
1 2
Position \
OPEN © ©
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each CLOSE 0 ©

4. If the motor does not run, replace it.
\ Terminal
2 5 1 3 4 6
NOTE: See closing force check (see page 20-63) for
Position \
motor clutch test.
CLOSE o - -o
T I LT o - -o o - —o
OPEN o - -o

(D) or the switch.
ComponentLoc
ationInde
x
(cont'd)
ComponentLo
cationIndex(cont'd)
FRONT WASHER MOTOR RELAY

[Wire colors: WHT/BLK, GRN/BLK,
|_BLK, BLK, and BLK/YEL
Test, page 22-82
REAR WINDOW
INTERMITTENT
WIPER RELAY
Wire colors: GRN, BLK,
REAR WASHER RED/BLU, LT GRN/BLK,
MOTOR RELAY and YEL/GRN
[Wire colors: PNK, GRN/BLK, Test, page 22-82
LBLK, BLK, and GRN/YEL
Test, page 22-82
REAR WINDOW
INTERMITTENT
WIPER CIRCUIT
(In the passenger's AUXIL I ARY UNDER-HOOD
multip l ex contro l unit) RELAY BOX
Input Test, page 22-208
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY
[Wire colors: WHT, BLK, 1
LGRN/RED, BLU/WHT, and GRN/BLK J
Test, page 22-82
n

Circ
u itDiagram-Windshield
(Fuse/relayboxsocket)
6101 G501
C ir c u it D ia g r a m - R e a r W in d o w
W ip e r /W a s h e r S w itc h T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-90).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-25).
3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/washer switch.
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
Windshield
Terminal
4 5 6 11 12 13 14 9 10
Position
OFF Q - -o
INT O O -o
-o
LO \J KJ
HI o - O
Mist switch ON O -o
Washer switchON P
K Ji kj
Intermittent dwell time * t\

controller turned KJ KJ
0-30 kQ
Rear Window
\ Terminal 1 2 3
Position \ 7
WasherswitchONand
wiper switchOFF O— —O
OFF
ON O - —O
Wiper andwasher o— —o
switchON -o
6. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the switch.
C o n tr o l U n it In p u t T e s t
Windshield
1. Before testing the wiper/washer control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-244).
Driver's Multiplex Control Unit
2. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect its
connector.
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 1b 1/ 18 19 21 22 23 24
/

PNK GRN/YEL GRN/WHT
\ __________ = - , _______ w
/ /\ / / / X / 8 9 10
1 2 6
11
/ 14
13 15 16
X / / / / /
BLK BLU/WHT GRN/RED

4. With the driver's mult iplex control unit still d isconnected, make these input tests at the connector and driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
sockets.
• If all the input tests prove OK, driver's multiplex control unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity W ire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause Mresult is not obtained
s ir 1 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
A24 Fuse/relay Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the driver's
box socket There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
A3 Shift lever in P position Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G101)
A8 Brake pedal pressed Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
• Faulty brake pedal position switch
B14 BLU/WHT Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: An open in the wire
B15 GRN/RED Parking brake pedal Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
pressed There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
B9 GRN/YEL Intermittent dwell time Measure the resistance between the • Faulty intermittent dwell time controller
B10 GRN/WHT control ring turned terminals: • An open in the wire
It should vary from 0 to about. 30 k Q
as the ring is turned.
A9 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (30 A) fuse in the driver's
box socket ON (II) and wiper There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
switch at INT • Faulty wiper switch
A11 Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (30 A) fuse in the driver's
• Faulty windshield intermittent wiper relay
A21 Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (30 A) fuse in the driver's
ON (II) and washer There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
switch ON • Faulty washer switch
and windshield wiper There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
motor in the PARK • Faulty windshield wiper motor
position * Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
* An open in the wire
* 1 : Make this test at driver's mu ltiplex control unit connector B with all connectors reconnected
(cont'd)
C o n t r o l U n it In p u t T e s t ( c o n t 'd )
Rear W indow
1. Before testing the wiper/washer control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-244).
Passenger's Multiplex Control Unit
its connector.
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
* If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
* If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.

3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
/ /
13 14 15 lb / 18 19 2u 21 22 23 24
PASSENGER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL U N IT CONNECTOR B
PNK

4. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box sockets.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the control unit
box socket ON (II) ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be battery • Faulty driver's fuse/relay box
B22* BLK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G503)
B16 RED/BLU Ignition switch Attach to ground: • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) The rear window wiper motor driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
should run. • Faulty rear window intermittent
wiper relay
B14 LT Ignition switch Attach B16 to ground, • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
GRN/BLK ON (II) measure the voltage between driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
B16 and B14 and ground: • Faulty rear window intermittent
RED/BLU There should be 4 V or more wiper relay
with the wiper in the park • Faulty rear window wiper motor
position and 0 V as it sweeps. • An open in the wire
B15* BLU/GRN Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) and rear ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
wiper switch ON There should be battery • Faulty wiper/washer switch
-B18* GRN/YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) and ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
washer switch There should be battery • Faulty wiper/washer switch
ON voltage. • An open in the wire
* : Make this test at passenger's multiplex control unit connector B with all connectors reconnected
W ip e r M o to r T e s t
W in d s h ie ld R e a r W in d o w
1. Remove the cowl cover (see page 22-214). 1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-82).
2. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor connector 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the rear
(A) from the windshield wiper motor (B). window wiper motor (B).

3. Test the motor by connecting battery power and
ground according to the table.
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the
Terminal rear window wiper motor 4P connector No. 1
2 .. 3 5 terminal and grounding the No. 3 terminal. The
Position \
motor should run. If the rear window wiper motor
LOW SPEED © © does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace the
HIGH SPEED
rear window wiper motor (see page 22-215).
© ©
4. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 4 (+ )

4. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 4 (+ ) and No. 2 (—■) terminals, and run the motor. The
and No. 1 (—■) terminals, and run the motor at low voltmeter should indicate 0 V and 4 V or more
or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V alternately.
and 4 V or more alternately.
5. If the voltmeter does not indicate as specified,
5. If the voltmeter does not indicate as specified, replace the wiper motor.
replace the wiper motor.
W a s h e r M o t o r T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t W a s h e r F lu id L e v e l S w it c h T e s t /
R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the right front .inner fender (see page
20-161).
Canada models
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer
motor (B). 1. Remove the right front inner fender (see page
20-161).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer

fluid level switch (B).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the

No. 1 (No. 2) terminal and ground the No. 2 (No. 1)
terminal of the washer motor. The motor should
run.
( ): Rear window washer direction.
• If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

replace it. 3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the
• If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no reservoir.
washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected
or blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer NOTE: Fluid may flo w out of the opening.
motor outlet.
terminals in each float switch position (C).
• There should be continuity when the float is

down.
• There should be no continuity when the float is
up.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the float

switch.
W ip e r M o t o r R e p la c e m e n t
Windshield 3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the

windshield wiper motor (B).
1. Remove the nuts (A) and the windshield wiper
9.8 N-m
arms (B). (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove the hood seal (A) and cowl covers (B).
Remove and
replace the clips
4. Remove the mounting bolts and the wiper linkage

assembly (C).
5. Scribe a line (A) across the link and windshield Rear W in d o w -
wiper linkage to show the original adjustment.
Separate the windshield wiper linkage (B) from the 1. Remove the cover (A), mounting nut (B) and rear
wiper motor (C). window wiper arm (C).
2. Open the tailgate and remove the tailgate lower

trim panel (see page 20-82).
3. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the rear

window wiper motor (B).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note B

these items:
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts.

• Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the wiper
switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to
the park position.
• If necessary, replace any damaged clips.
• Make sure the wiper motor operates properly.
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4. Remove the mounting bolts and the wiper motor.

W a s h e r T u b e R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 20-161).
2. Remove the washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tube.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the washers operation.
W a s h e r R e s e r v o ir R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the right front inner fender (see page 4. Remove the three mounting bolts and washer
20-161). reservoir.
2. Disconnect the washer tubes (A). Washer reservoir capacity: 4.5 L (4.8 US qts.)
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the washer (1.0 kgf-m,

motor (C) and the washer fluid level switch (Canada 7.2 Ibf'ft)
models) (D).
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure
the washer motors operate properly.
FI
■ BODY [f!
(cont'd)
C o m p o n e n t L o c a tio n In d e x ( c o n t 'd )
S y s te m D e s c r ip tio n
The vehicle is equipped w ith a type IV immobilizer system that w ill disable the vehicle unless a programmed ignition
key is used.
This system consists of a transponder located in the ignition key, an immobilizer control unit-receiver, an indicator,
and the PCM.-
fO6-07 m odels
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer control unit-receiver
sends power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back through the
immobilizer control unit-receiver to the PCM. The code is a rolling type embedded in the receiver instead of the PCM.
A handshake with the HDS is required at PCM repair and replacement, and all keys are required at control unit-receiver
repair and replacement.
'OB m odel
When the immobilizer key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer control
unit-receiver sends power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back to
the immobilizer control unit-receiver which sends a coded signal to the imoes unit, which confirms the code and
signals the PCM to supply power to the fuel pump circuit.
A handshake with the HDS is required at PCM or imoes unit repair or replacement, and all keys are required at
immobilizer control unit-receiver repair or replacement.
(cont'd)
S y s te m D e s c r ip t io n ( c o n t 'd )
• If a programmed key has been used, the immobilizer indicator will come on for about 2 seconds, then go off. When
the ignition switch is turned OFF, the indicator will blink for about 5 seconds to signal that the unit has been set
correctly, then the indicator will go off.
• If the wrong key has been used whose code was not received or recognized by the unit, the indicator will come on
for about 2 seconds, then it will blink until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR BLINKING PATTERN

S y s te m C heck
NOTE: The HDS can be used to check the state of the immobilizer key registration and the IMOCD (S-Net) line by doing a system check.
1 . Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
3. Monitor the System Check in the Immobilizer Info with the HDS.
4. If the HDS displays the "Immobilizer system is normal", the immobilizer system is OK. If the HDS d isplays any other messages, check as
follows:
Status Log No. System Check Possible Failures

A-1 Immobilizer system • Th is key is not registered in the immobilizer control unit-receiver. Try to register keys by
is not normal using "KEYS".
• The communication was not good between the antenna and the immobilizer key by
influence of metal such as key chains.
battery voltaqe low.
A-2 Immobilizer system • Intermittent interruption between transponder and immobilizer control unit-receiver.
is not normal • The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle but for another one or for
other company's one.
• Key failure (transponder failure)
battery voltaqe low.
A-3 Immobilizer system • The ignition switch was turned on with a non-immobilizer key.
is not normal • The immobilizer key type is different. It is not for this vehicle but for another one or for
other company's one.
• Key failure (transponder failure)
battery vo ltage low.
• Immobilizer control unit-receiver failure
B-1 Immobilizer system • The PCM was not registered. Try to register the PCM by using "REPLACE PCM".
is not normal • The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer control unit-
receiver by battery voltage low.
• The communication was not good between the immobilizer control unit-receiver and the
PCM by influence of some noise.
B-2 Immobilizer system • The PCM was not registered. Try to register the PCM by using "REPLACE PCM".
is not normal • The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer control unit-
C-1 Immobilizer system The imoes unit was not registered. Try to register the imoes unit by using "REPLACE MICU/
is not normal IMOES".
e-2 Immobilizer system * The imoes unit was not registered. Try to register the imoes unit by using "REPLACE
is not normal MICU/IMOES".
imoes unit by influence of some noise.
D-1 Immobilizer system • Harness short from the PCM to the immobilizer control unit-receiver. (IMOCD (S-Net) line
is not normal short)
• The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer control unit-
• PCM failure
D-2 Immobilizer system • Blown fuse
is not normal • Harness open from the immobilizer control unit-receiver and the imoes unit.
imoes unit bv influence of some noise.
D-3 Immobilizer system • Blown fuse
is not normal • Harness open from the PCM to the immobilizer control unit-receiver.
• The communication was not good between the PCM and the immobilizer control unit-
° The communication was not good between the immobilizer control unit-receiver and the
9 PCM fa ilure
S ta tu s L o g
If you suspect there is an immobilizer system problem, the HDS can be used to check the number of times the
immobilizer control unit-receiver doesn't permit the engine to run by checking the status log.
NOTE: The Status Log count can be reset by disconnecting the negative battery terminal or by removing the No. 13
(7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, or by disconnecting the IP connector from the immobilizer
control unit-receiver.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
3. On the HDS screen, select Honda systems, select immobilizer set-up, select immobilizer information, then select
status log.
4. Check the Status log count. Troubleshoot the status with the highest count first. If no counts are listed, the
immobilizer system is OK. Continue with normal symptom troubleshooting.
Status Log No. Detected Item Probable Cause

A-1 KEY CODE MISMATCH 1. The key was not registered
(Code format normal, but code 2. Interference from metal such as key chains
data is mismatch) 3. Low battery voltage
A-2 KEY CODE MISMATCH 1. Ignition switch was turn on with another type
(Code format failure) of immobilizer key or aftermarket key
2. Interference from metal such as key chains
3. Low battery voltage
A-3 KEY CODE MISMATCH 1. Ignition switch was turn on with another type
(No key code or non-immobilizer of immobilizer key or aftermarket key
key) 2. Interference from metal such as key chains
3. Low battery voltage
4. Key failure
5. Immobilizer control unit-receiver failure
B-1 PCM CODE MISMATCH 1. PCM was not registered correctly
(Code format normal, but code 2. Low battery voltage
data is mismatch) 3. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
immobilizer control unit-receiver
4. Communication line electrical noise
B-2 PCM MISMATCH 1. PCM was not registered correctly
(Code format failure) 2. Low battery voltage
3. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
immobilizer control unit-receiver
D-1 IMOCD (S-Net) terminal 1. Low battery voltage
PROBLEM 2. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
(Short to ground) immobilizer control unit-receiver and the PCM
D-3 IMOCD (S-Net) terminal 1. Open or short in the harness from the PCM to
PROBLEM the immobilizer control unit-receiver
(Open line or PCM failure) 2. Low battery voltage
3. Poor or loose terminal connections at the
immobilizer control unit-receiver and the PCM
C ir c u it D ia g r a m
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX ......... . : Other communication line
G101 G601
T r o u b le s h o o tin g
*08-07 m o d e ls 6. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator comes on

and blinks.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with a programmed
key. Does the indicator blink?
2. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator comes on. YES—Go to step 25.
Does the indicator come on? NO—Go to step 7.
YES—Go to step 3. 7. Disconnect the IP connector from the immobilizer

NO—Go to step 12.
8. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator goes off.
3. Checkthe Immobilizer Indicator operation.
Does the indicator go off?
Does the indicator come on for 2 seconds, then go
off? YES—Substitute a known-good immobilizer control
unit-receiver and/or PCM. ■
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Go to step 9.
NO—Go to step 6.
4. Try to crank the engine.
10. Remove the gauge control module and disconnect
Does the starter motor operate? connector A (20P) (see page 22-102).
YES—Go to step 5. 11. Check for continuity between the immobilizer

control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 5 (IMOARM)
NO—Check the starter motor. ■ terminal and body ground.
5. Try to start the engine. IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER

7P CONNECTOR
Does the engine start?
YES—Check the Status Log in the immobilizer info

with the HDS check the item with the highest count
first (see page 22-224).■
NO—Go to step 25.
YES—Repair a short to ground in the wire.H
NO—Faulty immobilizer indicator, replace the

gauge control module. ■
12. Try to start the engine. 17. Check for continuity between the immobilizer
D o e s th e e n g in e s t a r t ? terminal and gauge control module connector A
(20P) No. 9 terminal.
IM M OBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER 7P CONNECTOR
NO—Go to step 18.
13. Turn the ignition switch: OFF,
14. Disconnect the 7P connector from the immobilizer

15. Measure the voltage between the immobilizer

control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 7 (+B)
terminal and body ground.
IM M OBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER
7P CONNECTOR
n 12 13 5 6 7 YES—Faulty immobilizer indicator, replace the

+ B (WHT/RED) gauge control module. ■
(V) NO—Repair an open in the wireB
W ire side of female terminals 19. Disconnect the 7P connector from the immobilizer
Is there battery voltage? 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Faulty No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's

under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check
for an open in the wire between the immobilizer
control unit-receiver and passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box. ■

(cont'd)
T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t 'd )
21. Measure the voltage between the immobilizer 24. Check for continuity between the immobilizer
control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 6 (IG1) control unit-receiver IP connector No. 1 (LG3)
terminal and body ground. terminal and PCM connector A (44P) No. 22
terminal.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER 7P CONNECTOR
7P CONNECTOR W ire side of female terminals
r n r 3 T4T 5 I 6 | t ]
(BRN/YEL)
II-------ll —
^ n n
1 1 I 2 3 I 4 | 5 [ 6 | 7 8 I 9i |
[■ 10 11 12
T I u L / l / 17 18 19
■-
20 21 22 23 24 /
. 1 26 27 28
29193119 33 34 /
Is there battery voltage? 38 1919141 142 431441
YES—Go to step 22. PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

NO—Faulty No. 1 (15 A) fuse in the driver's under 1$ there continuity?

dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an
open in the wire between the immobilizer control YES—Substitute a known-good immobilizer control
unit-receiver and under-hood fuse/relay box and unit-receiver and/or PCM. ■
check the PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-82). ■
NO—Repair an open in the wire. ■
23. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then disconnect
PCM connector A (44P) (see page 11-8).
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 33. Check for continuity between the immobilizer
control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 2 (IMOCD (S-
26. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. Net)) terminal and body ground.
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER

7P CONNECTOR
28. Look at the System Check in the immobilizer info
with the HDS (see page 22-223).
j l j 2 | 31~9f 5 [ 6 | 7 1
Is the immobilizer system normal ? I IMOCD (S-Net) (RED/GRN)
(H )
YES—Go to fuel and emission systems symptom
troubleshooting index.B
NO—Go to step 29. W ire side o f fem ale terminals
29. Verify the System Check display on the HDS for the
following information: Is there continuity ?
• Harness short from the PCM to the immobilizer YES—Repair a short to ground in the wire. ■
control unit-receiver. (IMOCD (S-Net) line short)
• The communication was not good between the NO—Substitute a known-good immobilizer control
PCM and the immobilizer control unit-receiver by unit-receiver and/or PCM. ■
the battery voltage low.
• The communication was not good between the 34. Verify the System Check display on the HDS for the
immobilizer control unit-receiver and the PCM by following information:
influence of some noise.
• Immobilizer control unit-receiver failure. • Blown fuse.
• PCM failure. • Harness open from the PCM and the immobilizer
Does the HDS display any of the above • The communication was not good between the
information? PCM and the immobilizer control unit-receiver by
YES—Go to step 30. • The communication was not good between the
immobilizer control unit-receiver and the PCM by
NO—Go to step 34. influence of some noise.
• Immobilizer control unit-receiver failure.
30. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • PCM failure.
31. Disconnect the 7P connector from the immobilizer Does the HDS display any of the above
control unit-receiver. information?
32. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then disconnect YES—Go to step 35.
NO—Check the Possible Failures shown on the
System Check display (see page 22-223).

(cont'd)
38. Check for continuity between the immobilizer

control unit-receiver IP connector No. 2 (IMOCD (S-
Net)) terminal and PCM connector A (44P) No. 44
terminal.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER 7P CONNECTOR

YES—Substitute a known-good immobilizer control

unit-receiver and/or PCM.B

#08 m odel 6. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator comes on
and blinks.
1. Turn the Ignition switch ON (II) w ith a programmed
key, Does the indicator blink?
2. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator comes on. YES—Go to step 26.
Does the indicator come on? NO—Goto step7.
YES—G oto step3. 7. Disconnect the I P connector from the immobilizer

NO—Goto step 12.
8. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator goes off.
3. Check the Immobilizer Indicator operation.
Does the indicator go off?
Does the indicator come on for 2 seconds, then go
o ff? YES—Substitute a known-good immobilizer control
unit-receiver and/or PCM. B
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Go to step 9.
NO—Go to step 6.
4. Try to crank the engine.
Does the starter motor operate? connector A (20P) (see page 22-102).
YES—Go to step 5. 11. Check for continuity between the immobilizer

NO—Check the starter motor. ■ terminal and body ground.
5. Try to start the engine. IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER

7P CONNECTOR
Does the engine start?
YES—Check the Status Log in the immobilizer info

with the HDS. Troubleshoot the line with the
highest number of counts first. If all are zero, the
immobilizer system was not the problem (see page
22-224). ■
NO—Goto step 26.

YES—Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
NO—Faulty immobilizer indicator, replace the

gauge control module. ■
(cont'd)
12. Try to start the engine. 17. Check for continuity between the immobilizer
Does the engine start? terminal and gauge control module connector A
(20P) No. 9 terminal.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER 7P CONNECTOR
W ire side of fem ale term ina ls
NO—Goto step 18.
12 3 4 5 6 7
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. JlM O ARM (WHT/BLU)
@
14. Disconnect the IP connector from the immobilizer
control unit-receiver. "~1 IMOARM -
(WHT/BLU)
15. Measure the voltage between the immobilizer 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10
control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 7 (+B) / /
terminal and body ground. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
W ire side of female term ina ls
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER
7P CONNECTOR
12 3 5 6 7 YES—Faulty immobilizer indicator, replace the

+ B (WHT/RED) gauge control module.*
NO—Repair an open in the wireB
W ire side of fem ale terminals 19. Disconnect the 7P connector from the immobilizer
Is there battery voltage? 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO—Faulty No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's

under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check
for an open in the wire between the immobilizer
control unit-receiver and passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box. ■

21. Measure the voltage between the immobilizer 24. Check for continuity between the immobilizer
control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 6 (IG1) control unit-receiver IP connector No. 1 (LG3)
terminal and body ground. terminal and PCM connector A (44P) No. 22
terminal.
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER 7P CONNECTOR
7P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals
3
|1 | 2 | 3 T4J 5 | 6 [ 7 |
IG1 (RED/WHT)
(V)
00
CD
| 1 | 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 |7
■
10 11 12 / 1 1 4 | / V 17 18 19
■
W ire side of female terminals 20 21;22 23 24 ■
■ 26 A
27;28 2 9 1 ^ 1 7 33 34 /
3 8 1 /1 /1 4 1 142 4 3 144 J

NO—Faulty No. 1 (15 A) fuse in the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an YES—Go to step 25.
open in the wire between the immobilizer control
unit-receiver and under-hood fuse/relay box and NO—Repair an open in the wire. ■
check PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-82).■
25. Check for continuity between the imoes unit 5P
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF. connector No. 1 (LG3) terminal and PCM connector
A (44P) No. 22 (LG3) terminal.
IMOES UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
PCM connector A (44P) (see page 11-8). Wire side of female terminals
LG3 (BRN/YEL)
i ._ .
1112 3. | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 L
■ 10 11 12-
/ 1 141 / | / 17 18 19
■
20 21 22 23 24 ■
■ 26 27 2£>291 /| 31 j / 33 34
/
1 3 6 1 / 381 /1 /|4 1 142 43|44|

YES—Substitute a known-good immobilizer control

unit-receiver and/or imoes unit, and recheck. ■
(cont'd)
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 34. Check for continuity between the immobilizer
control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 2 (IMOCD (S-
27. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. Net) terminal and body ground.
28. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER

7P CONNECTOR
29. Look at the System Check in the immobilizer info
w ith the HDS (see page 22-223),
Is the immobilizer system normal? I IMOCD (RED/GRN)
YES—Go to fuel and emission systems symptom

©
troubleshooting index. ■
NO—Go to step 30. Wire side of female term inals
30. Verify the System Check display on the HDS for the
following information: Is there continuity?
• Harness short from the PCM to the immobilizer YES—Repair a short to ground in the wire.B
control unit-receiver. (IMOCD line short)
• The communication was not good between the NO—Go to step 35.
PCM and the immobilizer control unit-receiver by
low battery voltage.
• The communication was not good between the
immobilizer control unit-receiver and the PCM by
influence of some noise.
• PCM failure.
Does the HDS display any of the above

information?
YES—Goto step 31.
NO—Go to step 37.

35. Disconnect the imoes unit 5P connector. 37. Verify the System Check display on the HDS for the
following information:
36. Check for continuity between the imoes unit 5P
connector No. 2 (IMOCD) terminal and body • Blown fuse.
ground. • Harness open from the PCM and the immobilizer
control unit-receiver,
IMOES UNIT 5P CONNECTOR • The communication was not good between the
PCM and the immobilizer control unit-receiver by
c • The communication was not good between the
1 2 3 4 5 immobilizer control unit-receiver and the PCM by
IMOCD (RED/GRN) influence of some noise.
• PCM failure.
Does the HDS display any of the above

Wire side of female terminals information?

NO—Check the Possible Failures shown on the
YES—Repair short to ground in the wire * System Check display (see page 22-223). ■
NO—Substitute a known-good imoes unit, PCM 38. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
and/or immobilizer control unit-receiver, and
recheck. ■ 39. Disconnect the 7P connector from the immobilizer
(confd)
41. Check for continuity between the immobilizer 42. Check for continuity between the imoes unit 5P
control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 2 (IMOCD (S connector No. 2 (IMOCD (S-Net)) terminal and PCM
Net)) terminal and PCM connector A (44P) No. 44 connector A (44P) No. 44 (IMOCD) terminal.
terminal.
IMOES UNIT 5P CONNECTOR
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER 7P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals
1 2 3 4 5
11 12 13 I 4-I.B16 17 j (S-Net) (RED/GRN)
IMOCD (S-Net) (RED/GRN)
n
i... ....... ... ,..... r
fn — i
1 1 [ 2
—\ 3 | 4 [ 5 16 | 7
f ....... ....r1 .... . .... ....1 B I 9 I
,a
11 I 2 3 j 4 15 j 6 J7 8 I 9 I 10 11 1 2 ^ 4 / ^ 17 18 19
■ a
10 11 12 / | 1 4 / / 17 18 19 2 0 21 2 2 23 24
■ a
20 21 22 23 24 / 26 27 28 2 9 / 1 / 33 34 /
.i ■
26 27 28 2 9 | / 3 1 1 / 33 34 / 3 6 / 3 8 |/1 /|4 1 1 4 2 4 3 14 4 1
3 6 1 / 3 8 | / 1 / | 4 1 142 4 3 14 4 1
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) Is there continuity?

Wire side of fem ale term ina ls
YES—Substitute a known-good imoes unit and/or
Is there continuity? immobilizer control unit-receiver, and recheck the
system. If the imoes unit and/or immobilizer control
YES—Go to step 42. unit-receiver is OK, substitute a known-good PCM,
and recheck.■
NO—Repair an open in the wire.
Im o e s U n it In p u t T e s t /R e p la c e m e n t
'08 model
1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-128).
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the imoes unit (B).
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
(cont'd)
Im o e s U n it In p u t T e s t /R e p la c e m e n t ( c o n t 'd )
4. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the imoes unit, then do the imoes unit registration with the HDS, and
make sure the immobilizer indicator blinks correctly.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
1 BRN/YEL Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
LG3 conditions the No. 1 terminal and PCM
NOTE: Disconnect connector A (44P) No. 22
PCM connector E terminal:
(31P). There should be continuity.
5 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in
+B conditions There should be battery voltage. the under- hood fuse/relay
box
• Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in
the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
3 RED/WHT Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 1 (15 A) fuse in
IG1 (ID There should be battery voltage. the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box
4 BLU/BLK Ignition key is in Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
KEY SW the ignition switch There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
• Poor ground (G501, G601)
Ignition key is Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
removed from the There should be battery voltage. • A short to ground in the
ignition switch wire
2 RED/GRN Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
IMOCD conditions the No. 2 terminal and PCM
(S-Net) NOTE: Disconnect connector A (44P) No. 44
PCM connector E terminal:
(31P). There should be continuity.
Im m o b iliz e r C o n tr o l U n it-R e c e iv e r R e p la c e m e n t

(see page 20-90).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page

17-25).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the

immobilizer control unit-receiver (B).
4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer

control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder
(C).
5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the

6. After replacement, rewrite the unit with the HDS,

then check the immobilizer system.
NOTE: You must have all of the customer's keys.

Im m o b iliz e r K e y R e g is tr a tio n
NOTE: A ll k e y s a r e lo s t
• The HDS is required for registration of the
immobilizer keys. 1. Prepare all new keys and have the immobilizer
• Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can PCM code.
cause problems with transponder operation.
• The immobilizer control unit-receiver can store up to 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
six immobilizer keys.
Add one new key
4. Select "IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM
1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key that SELECT" menu.
has been cut to fit the ignition switch, and the first
password from the iN system. 5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", then "ALL KEYS
LOST"
6. Do the registration according to the instruction of
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). the HDS screen.
4. Select "IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM 7. Check if the engine can be started by all the
SELECT" menu. registered keys.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", then "Add 1 key".
6. Do the registration according to the instructions on

the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started by the newly

registered key. Check the keyless remote operation
to make sure that it functions properly.
Delete or add multiple keys

NOTE: If any of the registered keys were lost, do the
following procedure to delete the lost registered key.
1. Have all registered keys, all new keys, and the first
password.
4. Select "IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM

SELECT" menu.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", or "Delete or Add

Multiple Keys".
6. Do the registration according to the instruction of

the HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be started by all the

registered keys.
G401 G601 G501 G401 G503 G651

The m ultiplex control system has four internal Wake-up and Sleep
functions:
The multiplex control system has "wake-up" and
• M ultiplexing (sends m ultiple signals over shared "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
wires) battery when the ignition switch is OFF.
• Wake up/sleep modes (runs at full power only on
demand to reduce battery draw) • In the sleep mode, the multiplex control unit stops the
• Fail-safe (fixes or ignores faulty signals) functions (communication and CPU control) when it
• Self-diagnosis (Mode 1 for the system, Mode 2 for is not necessary for the system to operate.
input lines) • As soon as any operation is requested (for example,
door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep
The system controls the function of the following mode immediately wakes up and begins to function.
circuits This control unit also sends a wake-up signal to the
other control units via the communication lines.
• Low oil pressure indicator • When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the
• Lights-on reminder driver's orfront passenger's door is opened and
• Key-in reminder closed, there is about a 15 second delay before the
• Key light timer control units go from the wake-up mode to the sleep
• Dash lights brightness control mode.
• Entry light control • If any door is open, the sleep mode will not function.
• Automatic lights-off • If the key is in the ignition switch, the sleep mode will
• Power door locks not function.
• Power window (including key-off timer operation) • If a door or tailgate key cylinder switch is shorted, the
• Windshield wiper/washer (including speed sensitive sleep mode will not function.
intermittent wiper) • When in the sleep mode, the current draw is reduced
• Security alarm from 60—80 mA to less than 20 mA.
• Rear window intermittent wiper
Fail-safe
Multiplex Communication
To prevent improper operation, the multiplex control
To reduce the number of wire harnesses, digital signals system has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode,
are sent via shared multiplex communication lines the output signal is fixed when any part of the system
rather than sending normal electrical signals through malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or
individual wires. communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that
• The input signals from each switch are converted to fixes the output signal when there is any CPU
digital signals at the central processing unit (CPU). malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that
The digital signals are sent from the transmitter unit ignores the signal from the malfunctioning control unit
to the receiver unit as serial signals. and allows the rest of the system to operate normally.
• The transmitted signal is converted to a switch signal
at the receiver unit, and it operates the related
component
• There are exclusive communication lines between
each of the multiplex control units:
- Door ^Driver's (between the door and the driver's
multiplex control units) wire color: BRN
- Driver's ^Passenger's (between the driver's and
the passenger's multiplex control units) wire color:
PNK
The control units always communicate via these lines

when the system is operating, and they stop
communicating when the system is OFF.
T r o u b le s h o o tin g
Special Tools Required 4. After about 5 seconds, the ignition key light should
MPCS service connector 07WAZ-001010A come on and the beeper should beep for 2 seconds,
go off for 0.2 seconds, then blink and beep for
M odel 0.2 second. This means that you are in Mode 1 of
the self-diagnosis function. Check self-diagnostic
Description: function Mode 1 for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
Mode 1 is a communication line and CPU self test If a MODE 1: Ignition Key Light and Beeper
problem occurs on a communication wire or with an
individual control unit the multiplex system will store a
DTC as long as the fault is still present.
To Enter Mode 1:
1. Check the No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the driver's under

dash fuse/relay box and the No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in
the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse.B

Did the multiplex system enter Mode 1?
2. Connect the special tool to the multiplex control
inspection connector (A). YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Go to step 6.
5. Check for a DTC.
* If there are no DTCs present:

The ignition key light and beeper will not blink/
beep again after the Mode 1 indication.
• If there is a DTC present:
About 1 second after entering Mode 1, the
ignition key light and beeper indicate the DTC(s),
then repeat it every 3 seconds. If there is more
than one DTC, the system will indicate them in
succeeding order.
Is there a DTC present?
YES—Follow the procedure in the chart. ■

3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the driver's seat
belt is unbuckled, the seat belt reminder will beep NO—Go to Mode 2.
five times.
DTC(s) Cause Procedure 8. Measure the voltage between the A24 terminal of
1 The driver's:unit Goto BRN wire ^ the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box socket and
is notable to communication body ground.
receive signals line test.
from the door
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A
unit.
2 The driver's unit Goto PNK wire
is not able to communication
receive signals line test. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
from the 13 14 15 1b 1/ 18 19 9 21 22 23 24
passenger's unit.
3 Malfunction in Goto
the driver's unit. multiplex
control system
input test, if all
inputs are OK,
replace driver's
multiplex
control unit. Is there battery voltage?
4 Signals from Confirm
each unit do not correct YES—Goto step 9.
match. multiplex
control units NO—Replace the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
are installed. box. ■
' 5 The passenger's Go to
unit is not able to m ultiplex 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
receive signals control system
from the other input test, if all 10. Measure the voltage between A12 terminal of the
units. inputs are OK, driver's under-dash fuse/relay box socket and body
replace ground.
passenger's
multiplex DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A
control unit.
6 The door unit is Goto
not able to multiplex
receive signals control system 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
from the other input test, if all
units. inputs are OK,
13 14 15 16 1/ 18 19
9 21 22 23 24
replace door
multiplex
control unit.
1,2 and 3 Communication Goto shorted
Simultaneously (BRN or PNK) communication
wire is shorted, line test.
(12 V or Ground).
6. Remove the special tool from the MFCS inspection
connector. YES—G oto step 11.
7. Remove driver's multiplex control unit from the NO—Repair an open in the wire between the No. 13
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box socket. ■
(cont'd)
11, Check for continuity between the A14 terminal of 13. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box socket and the MFCS inspection connector and the A15
body ground. terminal of the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
socket.
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A MULTIPLEX CONTROL INSPECTION CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 1/ 18 19
9 *1 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 V 18 19 21 22 23 24
/
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the driver's NO—Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
multiplex control unit connector and body ground. internal circuit between the inspection connector
If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G401. ■ and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Replace
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.B
12. Check for continuity between the B11 terminal of
the driver's multiplex control unit connector and 14. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of
body ground. the multiplex control inspection connector and
body ground.
DRIVER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR B (22P) MULTIPLEX CONTROL INSPECTION CONNECTOR
1 2/ / / 6/ 8 9 10 L
1
/ 3JI
11
/ 13 14 15 16
X/ / / / 9 / is— --
BLK
u
YES—Goto step 13. YES—If there is still no mode 1 indication, replace

the driver's multiplex control unit and recheck the
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the driver's symptom.
multiplex control unit connector and body ground.
If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G501. ■ NO—Repair an open in the wire between the
inspection connector and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for a poor ground at G401.B
Description: NOTE:
• A second key is necessary to test the key cylinder
Mode 2 is an easy way to identify a problem circuit with switches. If only one key is available, cut a
out having to test the circuit with a DVOM. Mode 2 will second key from a non-immobilizer type key
confirm a switch/circuit is working by flashing the blank for the test.
ignition key light and sounding the beeper as the circuit • When testing the door lock knob switches, make
is used. The multiplex control system will confirm sure all three passenger doors are locked. After
inputs as they are grounded except for the following unlocking the door, make sure to return the door
circuits: lock knob switch to the lock position, otherwise
the test results will be inaccurate.
• Turning the intermittent wiper ring (several
confirmations as ring is turned). Passenger's Multiplex Control Unit
• Turning the dash light illumination dimmer (several First start with the front passenger's door lock
confirmations as the knob is turned). knob switch in the lock position
• The Audio unit, Navigation display, RES display, DVD Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
player (confirmation as any one component is Front Passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/
disconnected). UNLOCK)
Front Passenger's door switch (OPEN)
To Enter Mode 2: Right rear door switch (OPEN)
Rear window wiper switch (WASHER/WIPER/
1. From Mode 1, disconnect the special tool from the INT)
multiplex control (MFCS) inspection connector for Tailgate key cylinder (LOCK/UNLOCK)
between 5 and 10 seconds, then reconnect it. The Security input for the radio, navigation system
ignition key light should come on and the beeper or, DVD player, or rear controller and screen.
should beep for 2 seconds, then blink/beep twice Test by disconnecting and reconnecting the
more at 0.2 second intervals. This indicates the radio, navigation system or, DVD player, or
system has entered Mode 2. rear controller and screen connector.________
Mode 2 : Ignition Key Light and Beeper Driver's Multiplex Control Unit______
Dash lights brightness controller (ROTATE)
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch (OPEN)
Driver's seat belt switch (UNBUCKLED)
Windshield wiper/washer switch (except MIST
switch)
Brake pedal position switch (Brake switch)
(PRESSED)
Parking brake switch (ON)
Hood switch (OPEN)
Headlight or combination switch (ON)_______
NOTE: To cancel Mode 2, disconnect the special tool

from the multiplex control inspection connector for
more than 10 seconds or turn the ignition switch OFF.
T r o u b le s h o o t in g ( c o n t'd )
_________Poor Multiplex Control Unit BRN Wire Communication Line Test

Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/
UNLOCK) 1. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the
Driver's key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's key cylinder switch (UNLOCK) 2. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim
Power window master switch (the passenger's (see page 20-6).
switches) (UP/DOWN)
3. Disconnect door multiplex control unit connector A
Did the multiplex control system confirm all the (20P).
circuits by flashing the ignition key light and
sounding the beeper? 4. Check for continuity between the A2 terminal of the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box socket and the
YES—The multiplex system is OK, if the symptom No. 15 terminal of door multiplex control unit
is still present, go to the input test for the system connector A (20P).
with the problem (see chart below), or refer to
multiplex control unit input test (see page 22-250).
BRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
__________ System
Power door locks (see page 22-280) ___________
13 14 15 16 1 / 18 19
9 Zi 22 23 24
Security (see page 22-280) _____

Keyless (see page 22-280) _______ _ ©
Power windows (Includes key-off timer operation) rf r __ I
(see page 22-260)_____ ~ _____ 1 2
/ 4 5 6 7 8
7
Entry light control, Key light timer (see page
22-167) _________
11 12
u
13 14 15 16 17 18 / 20
BRN
Wiper controls (front and rear) (see page 22-208)
Automatic lights off (see page 22-137) _____ DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Reminder chimes (Key-in, lights-on, parking brake,
seat belt) (see page 22-118) ______
Low oil pressure indicator (see page 22-121) Is there continuity ?
NO—Find the open or short in the circuit that was YES—Replace the multiplex control unit most
not confirmed by the multiplex control system. If closely related to the failure. ■
the circuit is OK, replace the multiplex control unit
that monitors the circuit. ■ NO—Repair an open in the wire between the door
multiplex control unit connector and the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the wire is OK, replace
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. ■
n
I B00V •
PNK W ire C om m unication Line Test Shorted Communication Line Test
1. Disconnect driver's multiplex control unit 1. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the
connector B (22P). driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Disconnect passenger's multiplex control unit 2. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim
connector B (22P). (see page 20-6)
3. Check for continuity between the B1 terminal of the 3. Disconnect door multiplex control unit connector A
driver's multiplex control unit connector B (22P) (20P).
and the B9 terminal of the passenger's multiplex
control unit connector B (22P). 4. Disconnect passenger's multiplex control unit
connector B (22P).
U N IT CONNECTOR B (22P)
door multiplex control unit connector A (20P) and
PNK body ground.
..^ ?
1 2 /13 /14 /15 X X 8 9 10
6
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
11 / 16
XX X X X XX 1 2 X 4 5 8 7 8 /
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
PNK
1 2 3 / T 7 / 9 X W ire side o f fem a le term inals
11
XX 14 15 fl6 X / ^ / / 21 22
PASSENGER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR B (22P) YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between
Wire side of fem a le terminals the door multiplex control unit connector and body
ground. ■
NO—Goto step 6.
YES—Replace the multiplex control unit most
closely related to the failure. ■ 6. Check for continuity between the B9 terminal of
passenger's multiplex control unit connector B
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the driver's (22P) and body ground.
multiplex control unit connector B (22P) and
PASSENGER'S MULTIPLEX CONTROL
passenger's multiplex control unit connector B UNIT CONNECTOR B (22P)
(22PLB
1 2 X9 9 / / / 9 /
15 « M / 18
11 /
/b / / 21 22
W ire side o f fem a le term inals

the passenger's multiplex control unit connector
and the driver's multiplex control unit connector.*
M u ltip le x C o n tro l U n it In p u t T e s t
Before performing the multiplex control unit input test, do the multiplex troubleshooting (Mode 1 and Mode 2).
Passenger's Unit
1. Remove the passenger's multiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
P A S S E N G E R 'S M U L T IP L E X C O N T R O L
U N IT C O N N E C T O R B (22P )
1 2 3
/ 99 / 9
11
9/ 14 15
16|X9 99 18 21 22
BLK
Wire side of female Terminals

P A S S E N G E R 'S M U L T IP L E X C O N T R O L
U N IT C O N N E C T O R A (2 4 P )
/9 3 4
—
/ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
/ 18 19 20 — 21 22 23 24
3. Make the following input tests at connector B (22P) and passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box socket connector A.
Be careful not to spread the fuse box connectors.
Cavity Wire ! Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
B22* BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G503)
conditions There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
A24 Fuse/relay Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
• Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
• Faulty passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
A8 Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G651)
A22 Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
A12 Under all Attach A12 to battery voltage: • Poor ground (G651)
conditions Power window relay should • Faulty passenger's fuse box
click and measure the voltage • Faulty power window relay
between No. 7 (20 A) fuse and • An open in the wire
ground: • Blown No. 51 (40 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
* : Make this test with all connectors reconnected
f = - 9
I B0DY
Door Unit
4. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim (see page 20-6).
5. Disconnect the connectors (A).
1___ E ____ i
1 2 4 5 6 7 8
7
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
— ^
i—
7. Make the following input tests at connector A (20P).
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 8.
A1 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
conditions ground: passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
A2 WHT/YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 51 (40 A) fuse in the
ON (II) and ground on A2: under-hood fuse/relay box
passenger's There should be battery ® Blown No. 7 (20 A) fuse in the
A12*1 Fuse/relay multiplex voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box socket terminal A12 box
connected to • Faulty power window relay
battery • An open in the wire
voltage
A12*2 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ° Poor ground (G401)
A13*2 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G601)
*1 : Passenger's multiplex control unit connector A
* 2: Make this test with all connectors reconnected
(cont'd)
M u l t i p l e x C o n t r o l U n it In p u t T e s t ( c o n t 'd )
Driver's Unit
8 . Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.

UNIT CONNECTOR B (22P)
W ire side of female Terminals
2 9
1
99 6
9 8 9 10
11
9 13 14 15 16M9/ 9 9 9 9
SBLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 — 17 18 19 21 22 23 24
/

UNIT CONNECTOR A C24PJ
10. Make the following input tests at 22P connector B and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box socket connector A.
Be careful not to spread the fuse box connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, one of the multiplex control units (door, driver's or passenger's) must be faulty. Substitute a known-good
control unit for the one that's is most closely related to the failure, then recheck. If the symptom continues, replace the next most likely
control unit until the symptom goes away.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desi red result Possible cause if result is not obtained
B ir BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
A12 Fuse/relay Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the passenger's
box socket There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box
A14 Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
A13 Ignition key is inserted Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
into the ignition switch There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
• Poor around (G401)
Ignition key removed Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
from the ignition switch There should be no continuity. • A short to ground in the wire
A1 Under all conditions Attach to ground: Ignition key light • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
should come on. fuse/relay box
• Blown LED
A15 Short the multiplex Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
control inspection There should be continuity. • Faulty driver's fuse/relay box
connector terminals • An open in the wire
with the special tool
Remove the special Check for continuity to ground: A short to ground in the wire
tool from the multiplex There should be no continuity.
control inspection
connector
* : Make this test with all connectors reconnected

The driver's w indow will stop and automatically open if you pinch your hand or something during auto-up operation.
The system is composed of the power w indow master switch, the power w indow control unit and the driver's power
w indow motor.
The power w indow motor incorporates a pulser which generates pulses during the motor's operation and sends the
pulses to the power w indow control unit. As soon as the power window control unit detects no pulses from the pulser,
the control unit makes the power w indow m otor stop and reverse.
POWER W INDOW MASTER

SWITCH MAGNET
HALL 1C UNIT
POWER W INDO W MOTOR POWER W INDO W
CONTROL UNIT
Sensor
^ N ^ j^ S ^ [lc~|——Period o f p u ls e s — ► | | [~ j f~ |
MAGNET - Period of p u l s e s -
1C
. Position when somethi ng

is pinched
Period of
p u ls e s
Threshold value for

judgment of p i n c h i n g
Resetting th e Power W indow Control Unit
Resetting the power window control unit is required after performing the following procedures
• Disconnecting the battery.
• Removing the No. 1 (20 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
• Disconnecting the 18P connector from the power window control unit
• Removing the window regulator, glass or glass run channel.
• Disconnecting the driver's door wire harness.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then back ON (II).
2. Move the driver's power window all the way down by holding the driver's power window switch firmly down to
the second detent, when the window reaches the bottom, hold the driver's power window switch in the AUTO
DOWN position for 2 seconds.
3. Move the driver's power window all the way up without stopping by holding the driver's power window switch
firmly up to the second detent, when the window reaches the top, hold the driver's power window switch in the
AUTO UP position for 2 seconds.
If the power window does not work in AUTO, reset the power window master switch according to the above
procedures again.
PASSENGER'SUNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX FUSE/RELAYBOX
BATTERY
LEFT FRONT RIGHT

REAR PASSENGER'S REAR
POWERWINDOW POWERWINDOW POWERWINDOW
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
_£L
G651
PASSENGER'S
POWERWINDOW
SWITCHES
WHT/RED
POWERWINDOWMASTERSWITCH
(Inthe door multiplex control unit)
> 4 *h -u .
LIGHTS(LED) “' I
A20
A M r^ —
RIGHT LEFT RIGHT

FRONT REAR REAR LID
<) () c)
UP/ ' DN UP / ' \D N UP / ' \ DN
"o o
9 9 9 9
BLK BLK BLK
POWERWINDOWCONTROLUNIT
UP © DOWN ©
RED/BLU RED/YEL WHT YEL BLK BLU BLK
■Q—■—O------ Q------- Q—---- Q
PULSER
DRIVER'SPOWERWINDOWMOTOR
.XL “=“‘ -£L

G601 G401 G601
(cont'd)
C ir c u it D ia g r a m ( c o n t'd )
DOOR No. 13(7.5A) FUSE No. 13(7.5A) FUSE

MULTIPLEX (PASSENGER'S (PASSENGER'S
CONTROL UNDER-DASH UNDER-DASH
UNIT FUSE/RELAYBOX) FUSE/RELAYBOX)
G401 G6S1
: Other communication line
MAINSWITCH POWERWINDOWMOTOR MAINSWITCH

C o n tro l U n it In p u t T e s t
Passenger's Unit
1. Before testing the power window control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-244).
its connector.

(Passenger's m ultiplex control unit connector A)
3 4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
/ /
13 14 15 16 18 19 2U 21 22 23 24
/
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C
JCL.
2 3 4 5 6 7
/
8 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20
/
W HT/O RN

4. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the passenger's under-
dash fuse/relay box socket
* If ail the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
A24 Fuse/relay Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 13 (7,5 A) fuse in the
box socket conditions ground: There should be passenger's under-dash fuse/
battery voltage. relay box
• Faulty passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
A12 Fuse/relay JumpA12to The power window relay • Faulty power window relay
box socket battery voltage should make a click sound • Poor ground (G651)
and there should be 12 V at • Blown No. 51 (40 A) fuse in the
fuses 7,8 and 16. under-hood fuse/relay box
A8 Fuse/relay Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G651)
box socket conditions ground: • An open in the wire
A19 Fuse/relay With power Check the front passenger's • Poor ground (G601, G651)
box socket window main power window motor • Blown No. 8 (20 A) fuse in the
switch ON, jump operation: passenger's under-dash fuse/
A12 and A19to The window should go down. relay box
battery voltage • Faulty power window master
A18 Fuse/relay With power Check the front passenger's switch
box socket window main power window motor • Faulty front passenger's power
A12 switch ON, jump operation: window switch
A18 and A12 to The window should go up. • Faulty front passenger's power
battery voltage window motor
A7 Fuse/relay With power Check the right rear power • Poor ground (G601, G651)
box socket window main window motor operation: • Blown No. 16 (20 A) fuse in the
A12 switch ON, jump The window should go down. passenger's under-dash fuse/
A7 and A12 to relay box
battery voltage • Faulty power window master
A6 Fuse/relay With power Checkthe right rear power switch
box socket window main window motor operation: • Faulty right rear power window
switch ON, jump The window should go up. switch
A6and A12 to • Faulty right rear power window
battery voltage motor
C16* WHT/ORN Front passenger's Measure the voltage to • Faulty front passenger's door
door open ground: switch
Front passenger's Measure the voltage to • A short to ground in the wire
door closed ground:
* ; Reconnect the connector to the passenger's multiplex control unit
(cont'd)
C o n t r o l U n i t In p u t T e s t ( c o n t 'd )
Driver's Unit
6. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 lb 1 / 18 19 Zl 22 23 24
/
GRN/ORN
2 3 4
/
5 10
/ / / /
7. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box socket.
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket conditions ground: There should be passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
battery voltage. box
A14 Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401)
ground: • An open in the wire
8. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box socket
9. Remove the passenger's multiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and connect fuse/
relay box socket terminal A12 to battery voltage. This turns the power window relay on.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result - Possible cause if result is not obtained
A19 Fuse/relay With power Check the left rear power • Poor ground (G601, G651)
switch ON, The window should go down. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
jump A6 to box
battery • Faulty left rear switch
voltage • Faulty power window master switch
A7 Fuse/relay With power Check the left rear power • Poor ground (G601, G651)
switch ON, The window should go up. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
jump A18to box
battery • Faulty left rear switch
voltage • Faulty power window master switch
E3* GRN/ORN Driver's door Measure the voltage to ° Faulty driver's door switch
* : Reconnect the connector to the passenger's multiplex control unit
(cont'd)
C o n t r o l U n it In p u t T e s t ( c o n t'd )
Door Unit
10. Remove the door multiplex control unit from the driver's door, and disconnect its connectors.
-DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A
WHT/RED W HT/YEL YEL/GRN RED/GRN
1 2 / 4 5 6 7 8 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
BLK/WHT BLK
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B
BLK
\
JCZ1
1
W HT/RED
12. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors.
NOTE: For the terminals A4, A5, A10, A11, and A14, refer to the power window control unit input test (see page
22-266).
A1 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
A2 WHT/YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (20 A) fuse in the
ON (II) with There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash
power window fuse/relay box
relay jumped • Faulty passenger's multiplex
control unit
• Faulty power window relay
A12 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401, G601)
A13 conditions There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
B1
A20 WHT/RED Ignition and Measure the voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
B2 WHT/RED main switch There should be battery voltage. • Blown No. 7 (20 A) fuse in the
ON passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
13. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit for the
one that is most likely at fault using the chart below, then check the system. If the system works properly, the
original control unit is faulty; replace it. If there is still a malfunction, substitute a known-good control unit for the
next most likely unit to be at fault, and recheck. If the system works properly, the original unit is faulty; replace it.
Affected window Most likely control unit
Driver's power window Door multiplex control unit or power window control unit
Front passenger's power window Passenger's multiplex control unit

from power window master switch
Right rear power window from Passenger's multiplex control unit

power window master switch
Left rear power window from power Driver's multiplex control unit
window master switch
P o w e r W in d o w C o n tro l U n it In p u t T e s t
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6), but leave the driver's door subharness connector connected to
the driver's door wire harness.
2. Disconnect the 18P connector (A) from the power window control unit (B).
RED/BLU BLU/GRN YEL WHT/YEL

BLK GRN
3 4 7 8S
/ ..F = l.. 5 / Wire side of
9 / 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 / female terminals
BLK WHT
BLU
YEL/GRN / BLK/WHT \ RED/GRN
RED/YEL BLU/ORN
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors.
* If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtai ned
1 BLK Under ail conditions Measure the voltage to ground: * Poor ground (G601)
There should be less than 1 V. * An open in the wire
8 GRN Under all conditions *1 Measure the voltage to ground. * Blown No. 1 (20 A) fuse in the
7 WHT/YEL Ignition switch ON (II) and Measure the voltage to ground: * Blown No. 7 (20 A) fuse in the
passenger's multiplex There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
terminal A12 connected * Faulty power window relay
to battery voltage * An open in the wire
13 BLK/WHT Ignition switch ON (II) and Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty power window master switch
driver's power window There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
switch UP
11 YEL/GRN Ignition switch ON (II) and
driver's power window
switch AUTO UP
Ignition switch ON (II) and
switch AUTO DOWN
15 RED/GRN Ignition switch ON (II) and
switch DOWN
17 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage between the No. 17 • Faulty driver's power w indow motor
9 BLK (+ ) and No. 9 (—) terminals: • Faulty pulser
There should be battery vo ltage. • An open in the wire
5 YEL While operating the Measure the voltage between the No. 5 • Faulty power window control unit
driver's power window (+ ) and No. 9 (—) terminals:
switch There should be pulse voltage 0—5 V (an
analog voltmeter needle should move
back and forth alternately; a digital
voltmeter should show the average
voltage of about 2.5 V).
16 BLU While operating the Measure the voltage between the No. 16
driver's power window (+ ) and No. 9 (—) terminals:
switch There should be pulse voltage 0—5 V (an
analog voltmeter needle should move
back and forth alternately; a digital
voltmeter should show the average
voltage of about 2.5 V).
17 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage between terminal • Faulty power window control unit
No. 17 and body ground: • A short to ground in the wire
There should be battery voltage. • Faulty driver's power window motor
* 1 : Make sure the driver's door subharness is connected
* 2: Passenger's multiplex control unit connector
(cont'd)
P o w e r W i n d o w C o n t r o l U n it In p u t T e s t ( c o n t 'd )
5. Disconnect the 18P connector from the power window control unit, then make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
4 BLU/GRN Driver's power Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401, G601)
window switch ground: • Faulty power window master
DOWN There should be continuity. switch
4 BLU/GRN Driver's power Check for continuity between • Faulty power window master
14 BLU/ORN window switch the No. 4 and No. 14 switch
OFF terminals: • An open in the wire
3 RED/BLU Connect the Check for driver's power • Faulty driver's power window
battery power to window motor operation: motor
the No. 12 (+ ) and It should run (the window • An open in the wire
ground the No. 3 moves down).
(—) terminals
12 RED/YEL Connect the Check for driver's power • Faulty driver's power window
battery power to window motor operation: motor
the No. 3 (+ ) and It should run (the window • An open in the wire
ground the No. 12 moves up).
(—) terminals
D r iv e r 's P o w e r W i n d o w M o t o r T e s t
Motor Test Pulser Test
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). 5. Reconnect the 6P connector to the power window
motor.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the power
w indow motor. 6. Measure the voltage between the terminals.
• There should be battery voltage between the

1 2 No. 6 (+ ) and No. 4 (—) terminals when the
...F = l Terminal side of ignition switch is ON (II).
3 4 5 6 male terminals
• Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 5
(+ ) and No. 4 (—) terminals, and run the power
window motor at down or up. The voltmeter
needle should move back and forth alternately
(a digital voltmeter should show the average
voltage between 0—5 V).
• Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 3
(+ ) and No. 4 (—) terminals, and run the power
window motor at down or up. The voltmeter
needle should move back and forth alternately
(a digital voltmeter should show the average
voltage between 0—5 V).
3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting

battery power and ground according to the table.
When the motor stops running, disconnect one
lead immediately.
Terminal
1 2
Direction
UP 0
DOWN 0 ©
4. If the motor does not run or does not run smoothly,

replace it.
P a s s e n g e r 's P o w e r W i n d o w M o t o r T e s t
1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page

20-6).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the power

window motor.
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power and

ground according to the table. When the motor
stops running, disconnect one lead immediately.
Terminal
1 2
Direction V
UP 0 0
DOWN 0 ©
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

replace it.
P o w e r W in d o w M a s te r S w itc h P a s s e n g e r 's P o w e r W i n d o w S w i t c h
R e p la c e m e n t T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t
1. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim 1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim (see page
(see page 20-6). 20-6).
2. Disconnect the power mirror and power window 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the power
switch connectors (A). window switch (B), then remove the three
mounting screws and the power window switch
from the switch trim (C).
Front Passenger's
3. Remove the four mounting screws, then remove

the master switch (A) from the panel (B).
3. Swap the window switch with another known-good

switch and test. If the original window switch is
faulty, replace it.
KNOB SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-295
Knob Switch Test, page 22-293
*: Except LX and LX-VP models
CONTROL UNIT
Input Test, page 22-280
S e c u rity A la rm S y s te m
The security alarm system is armed automatically after the doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and locked. For the
system to arm, the ignition switch must be off, the key must be removed, and the security control unit must receive
signals that the doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and locked. The alarm can be disarmed at any time by unlocking
either door with the key or the remote transmitter.
When everything is closed and locked, the only control unit inputs that are grounded, and have 0 volts, are the driver's
door lock knob switch, the audio unit, DVD player, rear controller and screen, and the navigation display. In other
words, all of the other switches are open, including the key cylinder switches, and they have about 10 V. 10 seconds
after the doors and tailgate are locked with the key or the lock knob (with the door open), or immediately after the
doors are locked with the LOCK button on the remote transmitter, the security system arms, and the security indicator
on the door flashes. If the security indicator does not flash, the system is not arming. Check the doors, hood, and
tailgate to see if they are closed. A beep to confirm the security alarm system is armed will sound if the LOCK button is
pressed a second time within 5 seconds.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or there is a short in the system, the system will not arm. As long as the control
unit continues to receive a ground signal, it senses that the vehicle is not closed and locked, and the system will not
arm. Conversely, a switch that is slightly misadjusted can sound an alarm for no apparent reason. In this case, a
significant change in outside temperature, the vibration of a passing truck, or someone bumping into the vehicle could
cause the alarm to sound. There is no glass breakage or motion detector feature.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the system is armed, the control unit receives a ground signal from
that switch, and the 10 V reference drops to 0 V. If the audio unit, navigation display, DVD player, or rear controller and
screen is disconnected, the input loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 10 V. The system sounds the alarm
when any of these things occur:
• The ignition switch is turned ON (II).

• A door or tailgate is forced open.
• A door is unlocked without using the key or the remote transmitter.
• The hood is opened.
• The audio unit, navigation display, DVD player, or rear controller and screen is disconnected.
• The panic mode is activated.
When the system sounds the alarm, the horns sound and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can be
stopped at any time by unlocking either door with the key or by pressing any button on the remote transmitter.
Panic Mode
The panic mode allows the security system to sound the alarm with the remote transmitter in order to attract attention.
When the PANIC button is pressed and held for 2 seconds, the alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash for
about 30 seconds.
The panic mode can be canceled at anytime by pressing any button on the remote transmitter or by turning the
ignition switch ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the ignition switch is ON (II).
K ef less Entry System
The security alarm system is integrated with the keyless entry and multiplex systems. The passenger's multiplex
control unit receives LOCK (arm) and UNLOCK (disarm), and Panic signals from the keyless entry control unit
The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle with the remote transmitter. When you press the
LOCK button, all doors lock. When you press the UNLOCK button once, only the driver's door unlocks. The other doors
and the tailgate will unlock when you press the button a second time.
When the switch for the front individual light is in the center position (rear individual lights is in '"door" position), they
will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If you do not open a door, the lights will go off in about 30 seconds,
the doors will automatically relock, and the security system will rearm. If you relock the doors with the remote
transmitter within 30 seconds, the lights will go off immediately.
You cannot lock the doors with the remote transmitter if a door or the tailgate is not fully closed, or if the key is in the
ignition switch. If the tailgate or hood is not closed, the doors will lock and unlock, but the security system will not arm
until the tailgate and hood are closed.
The system will signal you when the doors lock and unlock by flashing the parking lights, side marker lights, and
taillights: once when they lock, and twice when they unlock.
When you press the LOCK button a second time within 5 seconds after you have locked the doors, the horns will
sound once to verify that vehicle is secure and the security system will be set.
If the lights do not flash, make sure the doors, the hood, and the tailgate are closed and locked. The most common
failure is a door, hood, tailgate, lock knob, ignition key, or door key cylinder input Check that the security indicator
blinks. If the security alarm system does not arm, refer to the multiplex mode or security input tests.
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX IGNITIONSWITCH FUSE/RELAYBOX
*1: Except LX, LX-VPmodels
*2: LX, LX-VPmodels
(cont'd)
C ir c u it D ia g r a m ( c o n t 'd )
navigation system) entertainment system) (Without rearentertainment system)

DRIVER'S
C o n tr o l U n it In p u t T e s t
NOTE: These tests cover the door, driver's, and passenger's multiplex control units.
1. Before testing the power door lock and security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system
(see page 22-244).
Driver's Unit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 1b 1/ 18 19 21 22 23 24
/

GRN/ORN
\
2 3 4
/ 9F=I.
5 10
/ / / /
LT GRN/BLK

BLU/BLK
T---- r,n L
1 3 4 5 7 8 9
/ . 1......1 /
..............................
11 12 14 15 16 17
oM
C
18 19
/
:...............
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
sockets.
A12 Fuse/relay Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty driver's fuse/relay box
A24 Ignition switch ON (II) Measure the voltage to ground: * Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the driver's
A5* Under all conditions Attach to ground: * Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
The security indicator should passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
come on. • Faulty security indicator
A22* Connect B16 to battery The parking lights and dash lights • Blown No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the
voltage and A22 to should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
ground • Faulty taillight relay
B16* RED/GRN Combination light Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty taillight relay
switch OFF There should be no continuity. • Faulty combination light switch
• A short to ground in the wire
Combination light The parking lights and dash lights • Blown No. 10(15 A) fuse in the
switch ON and jump should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
B16 to battery voltage • Faulty taillight relay
(cont'd)
5. Reconnect the driver's multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following input tests at the
appropriate connectors on the back of the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6 .
B2* GRN/BLK Wake up the Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
multiplex system by There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty left rear door lock knob switch
locking all doors and • An open in the wire
tailgate with the
power door lock
switch;
Left rear door lock
knob switch unlocked
Wake up the Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door lock knob switch
multiplex system by There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
locking all doors and
tailgate with the
power door lock
switch;
Left rear door lock
knob switch locked
B6 ‘ YEL Hood open Measure the voltage to ground: * Poor ground (G202)
There should be less than 1 V. * Faulty hood switch
Hood closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty hood switch
There should be 5 V o r more. • A short to ground in the wire
B8 ORN Tailgate open Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G652)
There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty tailgate latch switch
Tailgate closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty tailgate latch switch
E3 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
Driver's door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
E10 LT GRN/BLK Left rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: * Faulty left rear door switch
Left rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
M9 BLU/BLK Ignition key is in the Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
ignition switch There should be 5 V or more. • Faulty ignition key switch
Ignition key is out of Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
the ignition switch There should be less than 1 V. • A short to ground in the wire
B11 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
[ 9body1
■ gj
Passenger's Unit ■"
6. Remove the passenger's m ulti plex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect
its connector.
7. Inspect the connector and socket term inals to be sure they are all making good contact
• If the term inals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
PASSEN G ER 'S U N D ER -D A SH FU S E /R ELA Y B OX SOCKET

3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
/ /
13 14 15 1b 18 19 ZU 21 22 23 24
PASSEN G ER 'S M U LTIP LE X C O N TR O L U N IT C O N N EC TO R B
1 2 3 7 9 /
7 X I 7 / /
\
X
\
LO
CO
xf-
CD
11 21 22
x /
/ / \
YEL BLU BLK
W ire side of fe m ale term inals
PA SSEN G ER 'S U N D ER -D A S H FU S E /R ELA Y BOX C O N N EC TO R C

_Q-_
2 3 4 5 6 7
X
8 X 10 11 12 13 « ! / 16 17 18 19 20
L_J
/ / \
R E D /B L U * G R N /W H T W H T /O R N
W ire side of fe m ale term inals
n.....
1 2
\ //
^PASSEN G ER 'S U N D ER -D A SH FU S E/R ELA Y B O X C O N N EC TO R E
G R N /R E D *
7
11 12 13
4 | !
14
B L U /O R N
5 If = ll6 X
15 16 17
B LK /O R N
8
18 19 20
9 10
r
(cont'd)
8 . With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors and the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box sockets.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possibl e cause if result is not obtained
A8 Fuse/relay box Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G651)
socket There should be continuity. • Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
A9 Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the under
Horns should sound. hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty horn relay
• Faulty horn
A20 Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Faulty headlight relay 1 or 2
Headlights should come on. • Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
A23 Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the
* Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
A24 Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A10 Fuse/relay box Jump A10 to battery Check driver's door lock • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
socket voltage and B1 1 to operation: • Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
B1V YEL body around. The door should lock. • An open in the wire
A10 Fuse/relay box Jump A10 to battery Check passenger's doors lock • Faulty passenger's door lock actuator
socket voltage and A11 to operation: • Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
body ground. The doors should lock. • An open in the wire
A11 Check tailgate lock operation: • Faulty tailgate lock actuator
The tailgate should lock. • Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
B21 BLU Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: * Poor ground (G504)
There should be continuity. * Faulty connections at the audio unit,
DVD player, rear controller and screen,
navigation display unit
* Faulty audio unit, DVD player unit, rear
controller and screen, navigation
display unit
* Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
9. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following input tests at the
appropriate connectors on the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
For passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-69).
C8 ‘ RED/BLU Wake up the multiplex Measure the voltage to ground: * Poor ground (G651)
NOTE* Front system by locking all There should be less than 1 V. * Faulty right rear door lock actuator
passenger's doors and tailgate with * An open in the wire
door lock knob the power door lock
switch in the switch;
locked position Right rear door lock
knob switch unlocked
Wake up the multiplex Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door lock actuator
system by locking all There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
doors and tailgate with
the power door lock
switch;
Right rear door lock
knob switch locked
E2 GRN/RED Wake up the multiplex Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G651)
NOTE: Right system by locking all There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
rear door lock doors and tailgate with actuator
knob switch in the power door lock • An open in the wire
the locked switch;
position Front passenger's door
lock knob switch
unlocked
Wake up the multiplex Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door lock
system by locking all There should be 5 V or more. actuator
doors and tailgate with • A short to ground in the wire
the power door lock
switch;
Front passenger's door
lock knob switch locked
B2 1 BLU Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G504)
There should be battery voltage. • Poor connection at audio unit, DVD
player, rear controller and screen,
navigation display unit
• Faulty audio unit, DVD player unit, rear
controller and screen, navigation
display unit
B2 2 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G503)
There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
i • An open in the wire
(cont'd)
C14 GRN/WHT Right rear door open Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
There should be less than 1 V. » An open in the wire
Right rear door closed Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
C16 WHT/ORN Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
open There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
closed There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
E5 BLU/ORN Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G651)
lock switch in UNLOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door lock
lock switch in neutral There should be 5 V or more. switch
position * A short to ground in the wire
E6 BLK/ORN Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G651)
lock switch in LOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
Front passenger's door Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door lock
lock switch in neutral There should be 5 V or more. switch
position • A short to ground in the wire
n
I B 0D Y-I^
Door Unit
10. Remove the door multiplex control unit, and disconnect its connector.
11. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
BLU/W HT* BLK/WHT

W HT/RED
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 10
/
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20
/
/ T X X
BLK / BLU \ GF
GRN/RED
BRN BLK/RED
(confd)
12. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and make these input tests at the connector.
A1 WHT/RED Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A12 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
A6 * BLU/WHT Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch
cylinder switch in LOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
cylinder switch in the There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
neutral position
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground:
cylinder switch in There should be 5 V or more.
UNLOCK
A16 BLU Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch
cylinder switch in There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401)
UNLOCK • An open in the wire
Measure
Driver's thekey
door voltage to ground: • A short to ground in the wire
cylinder switch in the There should be 5 V or more.
neutral position
Driver's door key Measure the voltage to ground:
cylinder switch in LOCK There should be 5 V or more.
A7 PNK Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
locked There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
unlocked There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
A17 BLK/RED Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock knob Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
locked There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
A8 BLK/WHT Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in LOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in the neutral There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
position
A18 GRN/RED Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in UNLOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock Measure the voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in the neutral There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground in the wire
position
13. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit for the one that is most likely at
fault, then recheck the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is faulty; replace it. If there is still a malfunction,
substitute a known-good control unit for the next most likely unit to be at fault, and recheck. If the system works properly, the original unit
is faulty; replace it.
19
■
9
BOm M
!
T r a n s m itte r T e s t
NOTE: 3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,

• If the doors unlock or lock with the transm itter, but and try to lock and unlock the doors with the
the LEO on the transm itter does not come on, the LED transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button
is faulty; replace the transmitter. five or six times.
• If any door or the tailgate is open, you cannot lock the
door and tailgate with the transmitter. • If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is
• If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do O K .lv
not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the • If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4.
doors relock automatically.
• The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if
the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch.
1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to

reset the transmitter.
• If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. ■

• If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
• If you find any water damage, replace the

transmitter. ■
• If there is no water damage, go to step 3.
4. Reprogram and register the transmitter, then try to

lock and unlock the doors.
• If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is

OK.B
• If the doors don't lock and unlock, try and
program to another vehicle. If still not operating
replace the transmitter. ■
T r a n s m itte r P r o g r a m m in g
Storing transmitter codes: 12. The door lock actuators will activate to confirm that
The codes of up to three transmitters can be read into the system has entered the transmitter
the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is programming mode. Within 1 to 4 seconds, push
stored, the code which was input first w ill be erased.) the transmitter lock or unlock button again to
program that transmitter. The door lock actuator
NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits will activate to confirm that the transmitter code is
between the steps. Make sure the doors, hood and stored.
tailgate are closed.
13. Within 10 seconds, press the transmitter lock or
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). unlock buttons on the two additional transmitters.
The door lock actuators will activate each time after
2. Within 1 to 4 sec., press the transmitter lock or you press the lock or unlock button to confirm that
unlock button. the transmitter code is stored.
3. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key.
4. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Confirm proper operation with the new code(s).
5. Within 1 to 4 sec., press the transmitter lock or

unlock button.
6. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).

unlock button.
9. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Within 4 sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II).

unlock button.
K e y le s s R e c e iv e r U n it In p u t T e s t
1. Remove the glove box and glove box cover (see page 20-95).
2. Disconnect the I P connector (A) from the keyless receiver unit (B).
• If the terminals are OK, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
K e y le s s R e c e iv e r U n it In p u t T e s t ( c o n t 'd )
4. Reconnect the connector to the control unit, and make these input tests at the connector.
1 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to • Poor ground (G503)
5 YEL Ignition switch Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 9 (10 A) fuse in the
There should be battery • An open in the wire
voltage.
7 WHT/RED Under all Measure the voltage to • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
conditions ground: passenger's under-dash
There should be battery fuse/relay box
5. Disconnect the 7P connector from the keyless receiver unit, and make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the keyless receiver unit.
2 PNK/BLK Under all Check for continuity between • An open in the wire
conditions the No. 2 terminal and • A short to ground in the wire
passenger's multiplex control
unit B2 terminal:
There should be no continuity
to ground.
3 GRN/BLU Under all Check for continuity between • An open in the wire
unit B1 terminal:
to ground.
6 LT BLU Under all Check for continuity between • An open in the wire
unit B3 terminal:
to ground.
D o o r L o c k K n o b S w itc h T e s t
D riv e r's -Door - . -j F ro n t P a s s e n g e r's D o o r (E x c e p t L X and

L X -V P m o d e ls )
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
1. Remove the front passenger's door panel (see page
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No. 1 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
and No. 3 terminals when the door lock knob
switch is In the LOCK position and no continuity • There should be continuity between the No. 2
when it is in the UNLOCK position. and No. 3 terminals when the door lock knob
• There should be continuity between the No. 2 switch is in the UNLOCK position and no
and No. 3 terminals when the door lock knob continuity when it is in the LOCK position.
switch is in the UNLOCK position and no
continuity when it is in the LOCK position. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
(cont'd)
D o o r L o c k K n o b S w it c h T e s t ( c o n t 'd )
L e ft R ear D o o r (E x ce p t L X a n d L X -V P R ig h t R e a r D o o r (E x c e p t L X a n d L X -V P
m o d els) m o d els)
1. Remove the left rear door panel (see page 20-16). 1. Remove the right rear door panel (see page 20-16).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the actuator.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity between the No. 1 and There should be continuity between the No. 2 and
No. 2 terminals when the door lock knob switch is No. 3 terminals when the door lock knob switch is
in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when it in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when it
is in the LOCK position. is in the LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator. lock actuator.
D o o r L o ck A c tu a to r T e s t
D riv e r's D o o r P a ss en g e r's D o or.
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page
20-6).

ground according to the table. To prevent damage 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only ground according to the table. To prevent damage
momentarily. to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily.
Terminal
1 2
\ Terminal
Position \ 1 2
Position \
LOCK © ©
LOCK © ©
UNLOCK © ©
UNLOCK © ©
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it. 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it.
D o o r K e y C y lin d e r S w it c h T e s t D o o r L o c k S w itc h T e s t
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder 2. Remove the two screws, then remove the door lock
switch. switch.
Driver's
With Security
Except LX and
LX-VP models
Driver's
Without Security
LX and
LX-VP models

• There should be continuity between the No. 1
• There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is
and No. 3 terminals when the door key cylinder in the LOCK position.
switch is in the LOCK position (Except driver's • There should be no continuity between the No. 1
door without security). and No. 2 terminals when the door lock switch is
• There should be no continuity between the No. 2 in the neutral position.
and No. 3 terminals when the door key cylinder • There should be continuity between the No. 2
switch is in the neutral position (Except driver's and No. 3 terminals when the door lock switch is
door without security). in the UNLOCK position.
• There should be continuity between the No. 1 • There should be no continuity between the No. 2
and No. 2 terminals when the door key cylinder and No. 3 terminals when the door lock switch is
switch is in the UNLOCK position. in the neutral position.
• There should be no continuity between the No. 1 • Except LX: There should be continuity between
and No. 2 terminals when the door key cylinder the No. 5 (+ ) and No. 4 (—) terminals under all
switch is in the neutral position. condition.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
switch. switch.
NOTE: Make sure the slot in the switch is properly

aligned with the tab on the key cylinder.
T a ilg a te L o c k A c tu a to r T e s t H o o d S w itc h T e s t
1. Remove the tailgate trim panel (see page 20-82). Except LX and LX-VP models
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. 1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch.

ground according to the table. To prevent damage 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily. • There should be continuity between the No. 1
and No. 2 terminals when the hood is opened
Terminal (lever released)
1 2 • There should be no continuity between the No. 1
Position \ and No. 2 terminals when the hood is closed
(lever pushed down)
LOCK © ©
UNLOCK © © 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
hood latch (see page 20-169).
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it.
S e c u r ity In d ic a to r T e s t /R e p la c e m e n t
E x c e p t L X a n d L X -V P m o d e ls
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the security

indicator.
3. Test the indicator by connecting battery power to

the No. 2 terminal and grounding the No. 1
terminal. The LED should come on.
4. If the LED does not come on, replace the security

indicator.
FUSE/RELAY BOX
*1: With navigation system

*2: Without rear entertainment system
BATTERY
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX
No. 41 (120A) No. 42(50A)
-WHT -
No. 54(40Aj
I BAT l IGNITION
\ o J swrrcH
V l / ACCHOTinACC(I)
andON(II)
YEL WHT/BLK
A3
DRIVER'S AUXILIARY
3 No. 8 UNDER-DASH J No. 6
C (7.5A) FUSE/RELAY C (15A) UNDER-HOOD
BOX FUSEBOX
IM11
YEL/BLK
YEL/BLK YEL/BLK BLU/ORN

No. 9
(15A) J7
ACCESSORY REAR
POWER ACCESSORY
SOCKET POWER
RELAY SOCKET
RELAY
2
G13 C3 PASSENGER'S ORN
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
WHT/RED WHT/RED ORN ORN

1 1 1 1
FRONT CONSOLE CARGO REAR
ACCESSORY ACCESSORY AREA ACCESSORY
Ci) POWER
SOCKET
ci) POWER
SOCKET (!) POWER
SOCKET
ci) POWER
SOCKET
BLK BLK BLK
JCL S.L -O. jD_. _CL
G503 G503 G651 G401 G602 L G501

F ro n t A c c e s s o ry P o w e r S o c k e t T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-88). 5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal
and body ground. There should be continuity.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the front
accessory power socket. • If there is continuity, go to step 6.
• If there is no continuity, check for:
- An open in the wire.
6. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B).
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are

all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded,

repair them as necessary, and recheck the socket. 7. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 4. removal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and measure the

voltage between the No. 1 terminal and body
ground. There should be battery voltage.

• If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under
- Blown No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the passenger's
- Faulty accessory power socket relay.
C o n s o le A c c e s s o r y P o w e r S o c k e t T e s t /R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-88). 5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the console
accessory power socket. • If there is continuity, go to step 6.
• If there is no continuity, check for:

• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded,

repair them as necessary, and recheck the socket.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and measure the 7. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
voltage between the No. 1 terminal and body removal.

- Blown No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the passenger's
- Faulty accessory power socket relay.
R e a r A c c e s s o ry P o w e r S o c k e t T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t
W ith o u t re a r e n te rta in m e n t s y s te m 5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal

1. Remove the console rear trim (see step 5 on page
20-89). If there is continuity, go to step 6.
If there is no continuity, check for:
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the rear - Poor ground (G 501).
accessory power socket. - An open in the wire.
Wire s
femali
3. Inspwvi IIIVUV/lIIIV/VI.WI IWIlllllIMI4 IV WV WWIIV IIIVVUlV

7. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, removal.
repair them as necessary, and recheck the socket.


- Blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary under
hood fuse/relay box.
- Faulty rear accessory power socket relay.
C a rg o A re a A c c e s s o ry P o w e r S o c k e t T e s t/R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page 5. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal
20-80). and body ground. There should be continuity.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the cargo area • If there is continuity, go to step 6.
accessory power socket. • If there is no continuity, check for:

• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, 7. Install the power socket in the reverse order of
repair them as necessary, and recheck the socket. removal.
• If the terminals looks OK, go to step 4.


- Blown No. 6 (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary under
hood fuse/relay box.
- Faulty rear accessory power socket relay.

UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAYBOX IGNITIONSWITCH
A C In v e r te r U n it In p u t T e s t
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio system and the navigation system (if equipped), then write
down the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the front passenger's seat (see page 20-104).
4. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the AC inverter unit (B).
I W ire side of
lakagMdaH I male terminals
6. With the control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the control unit.
6* BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
r GRN Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 1 (20 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. auxiliary under-hood fuse box
3* ORN Ignition switch Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under -dash fuse/relay
box
• Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box
5 YEL Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
conditions the No. 5 terminal and power
outlet 3P connector No. 3
terminal:
12 WHT Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
conditions the No. 12 terminal and power
outlet 3P connector No. 1
terminal:
P o w e r O u t le t R e p la c e m e n t
1. Remove the console rear trim (see step 5 on page

20-89).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the power

outlet (B).
3. Remove the power outlet.
4. Install it in the reverse order of removal.

BATTERY
No. 41 (120A) No. 42(50A)
—cnoo—"...—■cnuo— ■WHT*
i IGNITION
J SWITCH
V 9^/lG 1H 0T in0N (ll)
andSTART(III)
BLK/YEL
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/REUYBOX
YEL/GRN
BLK
-CL
G901
E le c tr ic a l C o m p a s s U n it In p u t T e s t
1. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the electrical compass (B).
3. Reconnect the connector and, make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the electrical compass unit must be faulty; replace it.
Cavity Wire Test Condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
2 BLK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: * Poor ground (G901)
1 YEL/GRN Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the
(ID There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
E le c tr ic a l C o m p a s s C a lib r a t io n
1. Briefly press the button to toggle the display "ON/ 5. Zone selection is required to compensate for the
OFF". difference between magnetic North and geographic
North. This deviation is referred to as declination
NOTE: The compass display will default "ON" at and can be compensated for by selecting the zone
each new ignition cycle. that corresponds with your area.
See this illustration. Each zone represents about
2. With the BLUE CENTER LED displayed, press and 5 degrees of declination.
hold the button for six seconds, or until a RED
CENTER LED is displayed in the compass window,
then release the button. While the RED CENTER
LED is "ON" release the button. The compass is
now in calibration mode. To calibrate, drive the
vehicle in circles at less then 5 mph (8 km/h) until a
BLUE CENTER LED is displayed. Typically
2—5 circles are required.
3. Find your current location and determine the

correct zone number, for your geographic area,
from the table "DISPLAY REFERENCE FOR ZONE".
Press and hold the button for three seconds (until
ALL DIRECTION BLUE LEDs BLINK), then release
the button. The BLINKING LED(s) displayed is/are
the current zone value, (see the table "DISPLAY
REFERENCE FOR ZONE")
DISPLAY REFERENCE FOR ZONE
o o N
6 11 o o E
o
1 o o E
0
o S s
o
2 o o o
S
o N N
o o E 8 o o o
*
LU
3 13
o
S o o ...
N N
O0 o
4 9 o o E 14 W o o
£
o S
N
O0 o
SS
STf
15
o
5
m
4. If a new zone value is desired, briefly press the

button to increment the displayed value (Range
1—15) until you find your desired zone setting.
No button activity for four seconds ends the zone
entry mode. The compass display will return to
normal operation and the new zone number will be
set.
NOTE: See the table "DISPLAY REFERENCE FOR

ZONE".
■ RIGHT TWEETER*1
Rep lacement, page 22-377
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER

r ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT (2WD)
Connector Inputs and Outputs, page 22-326
AUDIO UNIT (Without navigation)

System Description, page 22-316
RI GHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

WOOFER*1
XM ANTENNA*2
page 22-379
AM/FM ANTENNA LEAD

ANTENNA
A M / F M
AMPLIFIER
Replacement,
AM/FM ANTENNA SUBLEAD page 22-378
A M / F M ANTENNA
Test, page 22-379
Repair, page 22-380
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL

REAR MICROPHONE (2WD)
Connector Inputs
and Outputs,
page 22-327
Removal/Insta llation,
page 22-376
XM ANTENNA LEAD*2
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

XM RECEIVER*2
Connector Inputs and Outputs,
page 22-325
page 22-375
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

AUDIO UNIT
(With navigation) AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH*1
LEFT TWEETER*1
*1: Except LX model

*2: W ith XM
S y m p t o m T r o u b le s h o o tin g In d e x

Poor AM or FM radio reception or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page AM/FM antenna lead/sublead
interference 22-334) short or open in the wire
Power switch will not turn ON (No Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
information display and no sound) 22-337)
Radio stays powered with the ignition Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
switch OFF 22-338)
No sound is heard from speaker(s) Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
(display is normal) 22-338)
Audio system sound is weak or distorted Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
(display is normal) 22-340)
Audio unit button illumination does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
work 22-341)
Radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Battery condition
22-342) • Battery cable condition
Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
unit does display XM channels) 22-342)
XM radio display is blank and no station Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
information is displayed 22-344)
Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
ANTENNA is displayed 22-347)
XM radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
22-348)
Audio disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
22-349)
Audio disc changer does not load all six Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Tire pressure (over-inflated),
discs 22-349) disc smudged, dirty, or
scratched
Audio disc changer does not move Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
between discs 22-350)
Volume does not change Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
22-350)
Radio tuner does not change stations Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
22-351)
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
22-351)
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
22-352)
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Tire pressure (over-inflated),
22-352) disc smudged, dirty, or
scratched
Audio remote switch does not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
properly 22-353)
Booming sound while driving with audio Symptom Troubleshooting (see page
unit on or off 22-355)
O v e rv ie w
The audio unit acts as the "processor" for all audio and video signals (RES). Selection of the audio functions can be
done from the front panel, the audio remote (on the steering wheel), or by using the navigation voice control system.
The audio display provides the current front and rear audio status. For vehicles with the navigation option, additional
audio information is available by touching the audio button. (See the owner's manual for more details)
Each audio component passes its audio or video signal to the audio. In addition, it communicates with the audio unit
via the GA-Net bus. Any open connection in this circuit will cause the audio, and the navigation functions to appear
inoperative.
The system includes an active noise control system to cancel some of the vehicle noise (2WD). It uses a sine-wave-
sound output to cancel noise developed during the cylinder cancel operation. This occurs in the 1,500—2,400 rpm
range. Two microphones detect the low frequency sound, and the system outputs a canceling sound through the
audio speakers.
L O W -F R E Q U E N C Y
N O IS E
SOUND
W AVE
T IM E T IM E
The XM can output to either the front or the rear RES. However, if the XM is playing in the front, the RES (DVD player)
can be used to play a CD in the rear.
A security signal is daisy-chained between the audio, RES and navigation components for integration into the vehicle's
alarm system.
The RES consists of a DVD player, a rear controller/screen, and an auxiliary jack assembly.
The optional navigation system provides voice control for the audio, XM, and CD player. The GA-Net (audio unit)
communicates the voice control commands. When using the TALK/BACK button, the audio is muted on all speakers
(but not the RES headphones), and you hear navigation sound on the front channels. When using the navigation or
route guidance (RG), the front speakers provides the navigation sound. The GA-Net bus passes the muting commands.
For more information, see the navigation section. The outline of the interruption function is shown in this table.
Contents Audio output
Left front CH Right front CH Right rear CH Left rear CH ■- Subwoofer CH
TALK/BACK Navigation voice Navigation voice Muted Muted Muted

Buttons output output
Route guidance Navigation voice Navigation voice Audio Audio Audio

output output
GA-Net Bus Configuration
The GA-Net bus passes audio, RES and navigation commands throughout the navigation, RES and audio components.
These commands include navigation touch screen and hard button signals, audio/XM selections by voice, and XM
station and music title names. Because the entire bus is "daisy chained" between components (see diagram), any
open or short in the GA-Net bus harness can cause any one or all of these functions to become inoperative. The
addition of any audio accessory must maintain the continuity of the GA-Net bus by installing the Y cable included with
the accessory kit.
(cont'd)
System Diagram
(With navigation)
NOTE: All items may not apply to this vehicle. See the Owner's Manual for more information.
Audio Glossary
Item Definition
Active Noise Control The active noise control system cancels some of the vehicle noise. This occurs
in the 1,500—2,400 rpm range. Microphones detect the low frequency sound,
and the system outputs a canceling sound from the audio speaker.
AM (Amplitude Modulation) The type of transmission used in the standard radio broadcast band from 530 to
1,705 kHz.
Amplifier A device that increases the level of a signal by increasing the current or voltage.
Antenna A device used to send or receive electromagnetic waves through the air.
ATA (PC Card) A type of card that has been tested for use in playing WMA, and MP3 music
files in the PC card slot. Sizes of up to 1 GB have been tested.
Auxiliary jack Allows the customer to use a portable audio device to input music recordings.
Audio Remote switch The switches on the steering wheel that control the audio system.
Balance A control that changes the relative volume of the left and right channels.
Band A range of frequencies between two definite limits. Bands are assigned by the
Federal Communications Commission for specific uses.
Bass An adjustment for the low frequency sounds of around 160 Hz and below.
Byte A unit of storage for computer files and memory. A CD holds approximately
700 million bytes.
Cassette Audio or video magnetic tape container having two reels. Customers can insert
it for recording or play back.
Compact Flash A standard for small-size ( 3x4 cm), memory cards used in mobile computers,
PDAs, digital cameras. Compact flash memory cards are available in size of
32 MB up to 4 GB or more and can be played in the audio PC slot. Sizes above
1 GB has not been tested.
CD (Compact Disc) A 4.5-inch plastic disc containing digital audio recording that is played optically
on a laser equipped player. Never use discs with a paper label. In a hot car,
labels can curl up and jam the unit.
CD (audio disc) Changer CD player that can store and play more than one CD. Two types are available.
Some units accept CDs fed into the changer one at a time, and others accept a
magazine (with CD's stacked in a container).
CD player A component designed to play compact disc CD recording using a laser optical
pickup. The signal from a CD player usually requires amplification.
Distortion Inexact reproduction of an audio signal caused by playing music at levels the
audio system cannot handle.
Dolby (noise reduction) A processing system developed by Dolby Laboratories that reduces the
background noise on recording media. The result is a clearer playback from the
audio system.
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) A 4.5-inch CD-like format used for storing movies with digital audio and video
features. The DVD-A format is a DVD format designed for DVD audio systems.
Some vehicles can play DVD and DVD-A formats.
Equalizer A device that changes the relative volume of individual frequency bands to suit
personal tastes of the listener.
Fader The control that adjusts the relative volume levels of front and rear speakers in
a four-speaker system.
Format To prepare a PC card to receive files, this function is performed on a PC. Always
choose either FAT or FAT32 as the NTFS format is not accepted by the system.
Pick the default sectors for the format method selected.
FM (Frequency Modulation) The modulation used for radio and television sound transmission in most of the
world. Less prone to interference than AM. The FM broad cast band covers
roughly 87 to 108 MHz.
(cont'd)
Audio Glossary
Item Definition
GA-Net The GA-Net allows the audio unit to communicate with all the audio and
navigation components in a vehicle. If there is an open in the GA-Net,
components or the entire audio and navigation system may appear inoperative.
GB (Gigabyte) A unit of memory or disk storage equal to billion bytes (1000 million bytes).
HDD Abbreviation for hard disc drive. They are sensitive to heat and it is not
recommended that they be used in the PC .card- slot for playing audio files.
Hertz (HZ) The unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second (cps). One kilohertz (kHz)
equals 1,000 cps; one megahertz (MHz) equals 1 million cps.
Integrated Amplifier A component that combines a pre amp and a power amp into a single unit. A
receiver combines an integrated amp and a tuner into a single unit.
Jewel Case The hard plastic case that contains a compact disc or DVD. Always use a jewel
case to prevent scratches on the underside of a CD or DVD.
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) A type of digital display that changes reflectance or transmittance when an
electrical field is applied to it.
Memory Circuitry or devices that hold information in electrical or magnetic form, such
as the AM/FM radio presets.
MB (Megabyte) One million bytes. Written as 1 MB. Megabytes are used a measure of digital
storage space. For example, a CD can hold 650 MB.
Mic An abbreviation for microphone. For vehicles with navigation, the microphone
accepts navigation voice commands to control audio and navigation functions.
MP3 music files MP3 is an audio coding format. MP3 is a poplar audio compression format on
the Internet and computers. CDs, and PC card with these files can be played on
some vehicle's audio system.
Mute When the navigation gives guidance, the front speakers are muted (no music).
When you use the voice control system, all of the speakers are muted.
Noise Unwanted random sounds like buzzing, hiss, pops, static, whine, etc.
PC Card The slot used for playing MP3 and WMA music files. The PC card is usually a
combination of a small flash card in a PCMCIA adaptor that slides into the slot.
The ATA, SD, and compact flash types of cards have been tested up to 1 GB.
PCMCIA A computer standard for the slot that the PC card slides into. Another term for
the PC card slot.
Processor The part of an audio device that performs task/calculations. In the audio unit the
processor handles muting to allow the navi to speak voice commands, and the
decoding/playback of the sound files etc.
Radio A head unit that combines a tuner, a preamplifier, and often a power-amplifier.
SCF (Cold Start Fix) screens These screens are displayed if the system requires a GPS initialization. The
vehicle should be moved outside into an open area away from buildings/power
lines.
SD (Secure Digital) card This compact type of memory card allows for fast data transfer and has built-in
security functions. SD cards have a small write-protection switch on the side.
Shield A metallic foil or braided wire layer surrounding conductors which are
designed to prevent electrostatic or electromagnetic interference (noise) from
external sources such as buzzing, or popping sounds heard on the speakers.
Speaker (Loudspeaker) A device that converts electrical energy into acoustical energy (sound).
Stereo A recording of at least two channels where you can hear sound or music from
the left or right side.
Speed-sensitive Volume The SVC increases the audio volume to compensate for increased interior noise
Compensation (SVC) when the vehicle drives at freeway speeds.
Subwoofer A loudspeaker made to reproduce the lowest audio frequencies, approx 25 Hz
to 125 Hz.
Audio Glossary
Item Definition
Track A sound recording on a CD, tape, or PC card.
Treble An adjustment to control the "volume" of the high frequency sounds.
Tuner A component (or part of a component) that receives radio signals and selects
one broadcast from many.
Tweeter A speaker designed to reproduce the higher frequencies (treble) only.
Voice Coil A coil of wire wrapped around a tube and then attached to the speaker cone or
diaphragm. When an audio signal is applied, the coil becomes an
electromagnet and interacts with the permanent magnet causing the cone or
diaphragm to vibrate. We interpret this vibration as sound.
Volume Control Allows you to control the loudness of the music.
WMA music file Windows Media Audio File. This is an accepted format for music files to be
played on either a CD or a PC card.
Woofer A speaker that is designed to reproduce bass frequencies only.
XM Radio Satellite based radio transmission, which also uses a ground based repeater
network to ensure seamless reception. The channels originate from XM's
broadcast center, in Washington, DC, and uplink to two satellites. These
satellites transmit the signal across the entire continental United States.
XM Receiver The external component that receives and processes the XM signals from the
XM satellites, and terrestrial (land) stations. The audio unit communicates to
the XM receiver over the GA-Net bus.
(cont'd)
A u d io U n it C o n n e c to r f o r In p u ts a n d O u tp u ts
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
Except LX model
AUDIO UNIT AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR D (40P) CONNECTOR A (2 0 P)
— ---- -------------- -1
1 2 3 4 I 5 I 6 I7 I 8 9 110 111 112 13 114 1151161/\ 18 119 12D | / 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
121 j 22 123 124 125126127128129130131 132 \/\/\/\/\/\ 38 139 140 11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 J4 j 5 J 6
/ / 9 110 111 9 13 14 8
9 9 9 9 k *
LX model
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR B (5P)
AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR E(3P)
ji....r■»... __ c1__E
/ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / z / 15 16 17 18 19 20
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR 1
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A Except LX model__________
Cavity Wire Connect to Cavity Wire Connect to
A2 WHT/RED : ACC (main stereo power B1 WHT/GRN Woofer
supply) (ACC) (RR WOOFER+)
A3 GRN/RED Audio remote switch ■" B2 BLK Active noise control unit
(REMOTE CTRL) (ANC FR+)
A4 B L IT Passenger's multiplex B3 GRN Active noise control unit
control unit (SCTY (ANC FR—)
AUDIO) B4 GRY/YEL Active noise control unit
GRN/WHT*2 Navigation display unit (ANCRR+)
(SCTY AUDIO) B5 WHT Active noise control unit
BRN/WHTT3 DVD player unit (ANC RR—)
(SCTY AUDIO) B6 RED/BLK Active noise control unit
A5 RED/YEL Right rear speaker (ANCCHK2)
(RR R SPKR+) B8 BLK/WHT Woofer
A6 BLU/YEL Left rear speaker (RR WOOFER-)
(RRLSPKR+)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B
A7 . RED/GRN Passenger's door speaker, LX model
Right tweeter Cavity Wire Connect to
(FR AS SPKR+) B1 BLK Active noise control unit
A8 BLU/GRN .. Driver's door speaker, (ANCFR+)
Left tweeter B2 GRN Active noise control unit
(FR DR SPKR+) (ANC FR—)
A9 RED/BLK Lights-on signal (ILL+) B3 ■ GRY/YEL Active noise control unit
A10 WHT Constant power (+B) (ANC RR+)
A11 BRN Audio remote switch B4 WHT Active noise control unit
(REMOTE GND) (ANC RR—)
A12/2 PUR Navigation system B5 ■ RED/BLK Active noise control unit
(RG GND) (ANC CHK2)
A13*2 LT GRN Navigation system
(RG L-b)
A15 BRN/WHT Right rear speaker
(RRRSPKR-)
A16 GRY/WHT Left rear speaker
(RR LSPKR—)
A17 BRN/BLK Passenger's door speaker,
Right tweeter
(FR AS SPKR—)
A18 GRY/BLK Driver's door speaker,
Left tweeter
(FR DR SPKR—)
A19 RED Dash lights brightness
controller (ILL—)
A20 BLK Ground (G504)
* 1: Without navigation, rear entertainment system
(cont'd)
AUDIO CONNECTOR C
(With XM) ____
Cavity Wire Connect to D19 BRN/BLK* Rear controller and screen
C1 RED/BLU XM receiver (+B GA-NET) (RR NTSC SHIELD)
C2 LT GRN/RED XM receiver (SAT SYS ACC) D20 BLU Rear controller and
C3 LTBLU* XM receiver screen (RR NTSC)
(AUDIO BUS SHIELD) D21 WHT Rear controller and
C4 GRY* XM receiver (SAT SHIELD) screen (HP R/L GND)
C5 WHT XM receiver (SAT R +) D22 BRN* Rear controller and
C6 RED XM receiver (SAT L+) screen (HP R/L SHIELD)
C9 RED/BLU XM receiver (ECU BUS+) D23 BRN Rear controller and
C10 RED/WHT XM receiver (ECU BUS—) screen (HP L)
C11 GRY/BLU XM receiver D24 GRN/BLU Rear controller and
(GA-NET GND) screen (HP R)
C13 BLK XM receiver (SAT R—) D25 WHT Auxiliary jack assembly
C14 GRN XM receiver (SAT L—) (VIDE01 GND)
AUDIO CONNECTOR D D26 GRY/YEL" Auxiliary jack assembly
(W ith rear entertainment system) (VI DE01 SHIELD)
Cavity Wire Connect to D27 BLK Auxiliary jack assembly
D1 BRN DVD player unit (VIDE01)
(DVD COMM1) D28 WHT/RED Auxiliary jack assembly
D2 GRY/ORN* DVD player unit (R/L SHIELD) (CONN CHECK)
D3 ORN/BLU DVD player unit (R/L GND) D29 BRN Auxiliary jack assembly
D4 ORN DVD player unit (L CH) (R/L GND)
D5 BLU/GRN DVD player unit (R CH) D30 GRY/ORN* Auxiliary jack assembly
D6 GRY/PNK* DVD player unit (R/L SHIELD)
(DVD SHIELD) D31 GRN/BLU Auxiliary jack assembly
D7 PNK DVD player unit (DVD GND) (R CH)
D8 BLU DVD player unit (DVD) D32 WHT Auxiliary jack assembly
D9 BRN* Rear controller and (LCH)
screen (RR BUS SHIELD) D38 BRN/WHT* DVD player unit
D10 RED/BLU Rear controller and (DVD COMM SHIELD)
screen (RR BUS—) D39 GRN/BLU DVD player unit
D11 RED/WHT Rear controller and (DVD COMM GND)
screen (RR BUS+) D40 WHT DVD player unit
D12 RED Auxiliary jack assembly (DVD COMM2)
(HP R/L OUT GND) AUDIO CONNECTOR E
D13 BRN/WHT* Auxiliary jack assembly Cavity Wire Connect to
(HP R/L OUT SHIELD) E1 AM/FM Antenna
D14 WHT Auxiliary jack assembly amplifier (SIG)
(HP R OUT) E2 AM/FM Antenna amplifier
D15 BLK Auxiliary jack assembly (SH (AM/FM))
(HP L OUT) E3 AM/FM Antenna amplifier
D16 YEL/RED Rear controller and (SWD+B)
screen (RR SYSTEM ACC)
AUDIO CONNECTOR F
D18 PNK Rear controller and (With rear entertainment system)
screen (RR NTSC GND)
Cavity Wire Connect to
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
F1 DVD player unit
insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the
(DIGITAL SIG)
insulating tube, typically black or dark gray, may
F2 DVD player unit
not match the color of the wire listed on the
(DIGITAL SHIELD)
schematic.
XM Receiver Connector fo r inputs and O utputs
When replacing a XM receiver connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in {the follow ing table.
KM RECEIVER
CONNECTOR B (2P)
1 2 .ET"‘^l 3 9 5 6
/ 9 9 10 111 / 13 14
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR B

Cavity Wire Connect to Cavity Wire Connect to
A1 RED/BLU Audio unit (+ B GA-NET) B1 Satellite signal antenna
A2 LT GRN/RED Audio unit (SAT SYS (SIG)
ACC) B2 Satellite signal antenna
A3 LT BLU * Audio unit (GA-NET BUS (SH (SAT))
SHIELD)
A5 WHT Audio unit (SAT R +)
A6 RED Audio unit (SAT L + )
A9 RED/BLU Audio unit (GA-NET
BUS+)
A10 RED/WHT Audio unit (GA-NET
B U S -)
A11 GRY/BLU Audio unit (GA-NET
GND)
A13 BLK Audio unit (SAT R—)
A14 GRN Audio unit (SAT L—)
* ; The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
not match the color o f the wire listed on the
schematic.
(cont'd)
S y s te m D e s c r ip t io n ( c o n t'd )
A c tiv e N o is e C o n tro l u n it C o n n e c to r fo r In p u ts a n d O u tp u ts (2 W D )
When replacing an active noise control unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.

1 GRY/YEL Audio unit (ANC RR+)
2 BLK Audio unit (ANC FR+)
3 ORN Active noise control rear
microphone (RR M IC+)
7 BLK Ground (G401)
8 YEL/BLK ACC (main stereo power
supply)
9 WHT Audio unit (ANC RR—)
10 GRN Audio unit (ANC FR—)
11 GRN Active noise control rear
microphone (RR MIC—)
12 RED/BLK Audio unit (ANC CHK2)
14 PNK PCM (CCSAM)
15 BLU PCM (NEP)
16 BLK/WHT Passenger's multiplex
control unit (INTR LT)
A c tiv e N o is e C o n tro l R ea r M ic ro p h o n e C o n n e cto r fo r In p u ts a n d O u tp u ts (2 W D )
When replacing an active noise control rear microphone connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the
following table.

1 ORN Active noise control unit
(RR M IC+)
2 GRN Active noise control unit
(RR MIC—)
3 BLK Ground (G503)
4 YEL/BLK ACC (main stereo power
supply)
(Except LXmodel)
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
insulating the outside of the wire.
The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray,
may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
( ): Without navigation
- " : Shielding
AM/FM
ANTENNA
SPEAKER SPEAKER DOOR SPEAKER {Except LX model) DOOR SPEAKER (Except LX model)
(cont'd)
(With XM)
[ ] ; LX model
- - : Shielding
XM
ANTENNA
XM ANTENNA LEAD
J
L _ . ____ _ --------- —
------------
~ n
B1 j B2
SIG SH (SAT)
XM RECEIVER GA-NET
SAT SYS +B GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET BUS
ACC GA-NET GND S ATL+ S A T L - S ATR + S A T R - BUS+ BUS- SHIELD
A14 A13 A10 j A3
LT BLU*
RED/BLU RED/WHT U
— ______ - J
(With Navigation)
, .................
1
LTGRN/RED RED BLU GRY/BLU RED GRN W HT B I
r ................ h I I n
RED/BLU RED/WHT ; RED/BLU RED/WHT ; LT BLU *
h GRY*
n
LT BLU*
C2 C1 C11 C6 C14 C5 013 I C4 C9 C10 I C3
SAT SYS +B GA-NET SA TL+ S A T L - S ATR + S A T R - SAT : GA-NET GA-NET GA-NET

ACC GA-NET
.•
GND SHIELD
- ------ — • -- ----------- :............ ~ ~ .— ‘ ----------------------
| BUS+ BUS- BUS
sh ie ld
V V V i
r ' ANCFR+ ANC F R - ANC RR+ ANC R R - ANCCHK2 I AUDIO UNIT NAVIGATION UNIT
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT
| No. 8 (7.5 A) FUSE B2 [B1] B3 [B2] B4 [B3] B5 [B4] J B6 [B5] \
(DRIVER'S
' UNDER-DASH
i FUSE/RELAY BLK GRN GRY YEL W HT RED BLK I
BOX)
IY
i YEL/BLK
j_ _ _ ___ ____ ____ ___ _
No. 8 (7.5 A) FUSE

(2WD)
10 12 (DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
ACC ANCFR+ ANC FR - ANCRR+ ANC R R - ANCCHK2 FUSE/RELAY
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT BOX)
GND NEP INTRLT CCSAM RRMIC+ R R M IC -
15 16 14 3 n
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL UNIT
BLK/WHT PNK ORN GRN
y 1 j 2 | 4
RRMIC+ R R M IC - ACC
V V ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL
PASSENGER'S PCM REAR MICROPHONE
MULTIPLEX GND
CONTROL UNIT
BLK
1
G401
.-J
The audio system has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
How to check for audio display condition
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (I) or ON (II) position.
2. Enter the anti-theft code.
3. Turn off the audio unit.
4. Push and hold the "1" and "DISC 6" buttons. While holding the buttons, push the "VOL push PWR" knob (A) to
ON. Release the buttons and the self-diagnostic function begins.
(cont'd)
Self-diagnostic Function (cont'd)
5. "DIAGNOSTIC" appears on the audio unit to indicate you have entered the self-diagnostic mode.
6. By pressing a preset button while "DIAG" is displayed, the input will trigger the diagnostic mode that is assigned
to that preset switch.
" 3 " button

Entire LCD lighting mode: Turns on the entire LCD to sh ow the presence or absence of an LCD failure.
" 4 " button

Entire LCD light-out mode: Turns off the entire LCD to show the presence or absence of an LCD failure.
" 1 " button (2W D)

Active noise control system function check mode:
H ow to check th e active noise contro l system in th is check m ode
• With the engine stopped and while in "DIAGNOSTIC" mode, turn the ANC ON to OFF by pressing the No. 1
button, a low-Frequency hum (50 Hz) should sound for about a minute.
- If the hum does not sound, check for an open in the wire between the active noise control unit and the audio
unit.
- If the hum does not sound for a minute, check for an open in the wire between the active noise control unit
and the microphone.
• Start the engine while the hum is sounding, the hum should stop. If the hum does not stop, check for an open in
the wire (NEP line) between the active noise control the unit and PCM.
• Test drive the vehicle at 55 mph (88 km/h) and enter the "DIAGNOSTIC" mode, turn the active noise control
system OFF and back to ON (II), the active noise control system should activate.
NOTE: The active noise control system is cancelled when any of the doors are opened.
"DISP/MODE" b utton
DVD player unit region code display mode: Display region code for DVD player unit.
7. The self-diagnostic function ends when you turn the audio unit off, or turn the ignition switch off.
Serial Number Display Mode
To obtain the audio unit serial number on a vehicle, do the following:
NOTE: This procedure can only be performed when the battery power is disconnected from the audio unit and the
audio unit displays "CODE."
2. With the audio unit turned off, push and hold the "1" and "DISC 6" buttons. While holding the buttons, push the
VOL push PWR knob to ON.
3. The display will show an 8 digit serial number.
4. Use all 8 numbers as the serial number when using the iN (Interactive Network) to retrieve the 5 digit anti-theft
code.
5. The serial number display mode ends when you turn the audio unit off, or turn the ignition switch off.
Error Codes
The audio system displays error codes when a problem is detected with the audio disc changer, the audio disc, the XM
radio, or the anti-theft code.
CD Error Codes
Error Code Displayed Possible Cause Solution
DISC ERROR There is a problem with the disc Try to eject the disc and try another one. If there
player. A common problem is is still a problem, replace the audio unit.
disc labels coming off the disc
while in the player.
HEAT ERROR Disc player is hot. This can Park the vehicle in a cooler place for a while and
happen if the vehicle is parked try the disc player again. If the error code is still
out in the hot sun all day. present, try another disc. If the error code is still
present, replace the audio unit.
Mech Error • CD label jammed in the Press the EJECT button and hold it for 5 seconds.
mechanism. If the CD does not eject, try again. If the CD still
• CD eject mechanism or motor won't eject, replace the audio unit.
is inoperative.
• CD spindle motor won't spin
up the CD.
XM Error Codes
OFF AIR XM channel not in service. Try another XM channel.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal. Both terrestrial and satellite antennas have lost
signal. Park the vehicle outside with a clear view
of the southern horizon.
UPDATING XM radio is receiving an This message will disappear once the update
information update from the finishes.
network.
ANTENNA XM antenna error. Repair open or short in the XM antenna or lead.
Substitute the XM antenna with a known-good
one, and recheck. If the error is gone, replace the
original XM antenna. If the error is still present,
substitute a known-good XM receiver. If the error
code goes away, replace the XM receiver. If the
error code is still present, replace the antenna
lead.
LOADING XM radio is acquiring audio or Wait until the radio receives the information.
program information.
No signal from XM. Check known-good vehicle with XM radio. If the
known-good vehicle has the same symptoms,
contact XM satellite radio at (800) 852—9696.
Audio Unit Error Codes

CODE ERROR 1 Anti-theft code mismatch Enter the correct anti-theft code.
(1st try).
CODE ERROR E Anti-theft code mismatch Remove fuse No. 48 (20 A) in the under-hood
(10thtry). fuse/relay box, then reinsert it. You will have 10
more tries to enter the correct anti-theft code.
Poor AM or FM radio reception or 6. Do the AM/FM antenna test (see page 22-379).
interference
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity in a ll s e c t i o n s o f th e a n te n n a ?
NOTE:
• Check the vehicl e battery condition first. YES—Go to step 7.
• Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by the NO—Repair the window antenna wire. Go to
fo l lowing: AM/FM Antenna Repair (see page 22-380). ■
- The radio station is far away.
- Atmospheric conditions are unfavorable. 7. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372). Check
-T a ll buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power that AM/FM antenna sublead is properly connected.
lines are nearby.
- Aftermarket window tint. NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). mechanism.
2. Do the seek stop test (see page 22-370). Is it c o n n e c te d p r o p e r ly ?
Is th e te s t v e h ic le w ith in 1 0 % o f th e k n o w n - g o o d YES—Goto step 8.

v e h ic le ?
NO—Reconnect the connector, and recheck the
YES—Multipath interference or weak station. function. ■
Operation is normal.■ '
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Cheek if the radio reception/interference is the

same in several locations.
Is th e r e c e p tio n /in te r fe r e n c e th e s a m e ?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Multipath interference or weak station.

Operation is normal.B
4. Check the reception/interference while the engine

is running.
Is th e r e n o is e (s ta tic o r w h in e ) o n ly w ith th e
e n g in e ru n n in g ?
YES—Check the antenna and radio grounds. If OK,

check the charging system and the ignition
system. ■
NO—Go to step 5.

8. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P 15. Check for continuity between body ground and
connector (see page 22-378). audio unit connector E (3P) terminal No. 3.

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (3P)
10. Turn on the audio unit and select AM or FM.
11. Measure the voltage between the AM/FM antenna

amplifier 3P connector No. 3 terminal and body
ground.
AM /FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR
S W D +B
£ Terminal side of female terminals
Terminal side of female terminals YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire. ■
NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). ■

17. Disconnect the audio unit connector E (3P).
NO—Goto step 12.
18. Check for continuity between the audio unit
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. connector E (3P) terminal No. 1 and the AM/FM
antenna amplifier 3P connector terminal No. 1.
13. Disconnect the audio unit connector E (3P).
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (3P|
connector E (3P) terminal No. 3 and the AM/FM
antenna amplifier 3P connector terminal No. 3.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR E (3P)
n
S W D +B
S W D +B
r e A M /FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR

A M /FM ANTENNA AMPLIFIER 3P CONNECTOR
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? YES—Go to step 19.
YES—Go to step 15. NO—Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or

sublead. ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between the audio
unit and the AM/FM antenna amplifier and check
the AM/FM antenna lead and sublead
connections. ■
(cont'd)
Sym ptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Check for continuity between the audio unit 21. Check for continuity between the audio unit
connector E <3P) terminal No. 1 and body ground. connector E (3P) terminal No. 1 and No. 2.
A U D IO UNIT C O N N E C T O R E (3P) A U D I O UNIT C O N N E C T O R E (3P)
{E SIG
{E
S H (AM/FM)
SIG
.YES—’Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or YES—Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or
sublead, m sublead. ■
NO—Go to step 20. NO—Replace the AM/FM antenna amplifier

(see page 22-378), and recheck. If the reception is
20. Check for continuity between the audio unit still poor, replace the audio unit (see page 22-372).
connector E (3P) connector terminal No. 2 and the
AM/FM antenna amplifier 3P connector terminal
No. 2.
A U D I O UNIT C O N N E C T O R E (3P>
S H (AM/FM)
S H (AM/FM)
{H
A M / F M A N T E N N A AMPLIFIER 3P C O N N E C T O R
NO—Replace the AM/FM antenna lead and/or

sublead. ■
Power switch will not turn ON (No 7. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 and No. 10
information display and no sound) terminals of the audio unit connector A (20P) and
body ground.
NOTE; Check the vehicle battery condition first.
AUD I O UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
ACC (WHT/R ED) +B
2. Push the power switch ON to see if audio unit turns JO. .......... _ S r*................... n ... n . (WHT)
ON. / 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 15 16 17 18 19
Does the audio unit operate property, and does the
11 12
u
/ u
20
audio sound normal?

time. 11
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there battery voltage?
4. Check the No. 48 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood YES—Go to step 8.

fuse/relay box and No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box. NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the No. 48
(20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, No. 9
Are the fuses OK? (15 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box and the audio unit.B
YES—Go to step 5.
8. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck.il A (20P) No. 20 terminal and body ground while
pressing and releasing the audio unit power switch
5. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372). Check several times.
that the audio unit is properly connected.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load ri ri c -.—F o. _
mechanism. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20
Is it connected properly? L--- JL---- / — ,13------
GND (BLK)
YES—Go to step 6.

function. ■
Is there less than 0.1 V ?
YES—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372).!

Radio stays powered w ith the ignition No sound is heard from speaker(s) (display is
switch OFF normal)
NOTE: Always check for aftermarket accessories NOTE:

plugged into the vehicle's accessory power sokets. • Check the vehicle battery condition first.
• Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Before doing symptom troubleshooting, do the
power switch will not turn ON troubleshooting
2. Push the power switch OFF or turn the ignition (see page 22-337).
switch OFF to see if the audio unit turns OFF.
Is th e a u d io u n it O F F ?
2. Turn on the audio unit and check that the volume
YES—Operation is normal. ■ button is not set to the min level.
NO—Go to step 3. Is it a t th e M IN le v e l?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES—Raise the volume level, and recheck the
function. ■
4. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372).
Disconnect the audio unit connector A (20P). NO-
• With navigation: Go to step 3.
NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio • Without navigation: Go to step 4.
mechanism. 3. Check the NAVIGATION MUTE COMMAND.
5. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of is th e N A V IG A T IO N M U T E C O M M A N D s e t?

the audio unit connector A (20P) and body ground.
YES-Caneel the NAVIGATION MUTE MODE by
A U D IO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P).
depressing the voice command back button, and
recheck the function. ■
A C C (WHT/R ED)
n n S r* n n NO—Go to step 4.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 4. Check to see if there is a specific speaker that has
— tj / EL.— no sound.
Is th e r e as p e c ific o n e ?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Go to step 10.
Is th e r e v o lta g e ? 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES—Check for short to power on WHT/RED

wire.H

6. Check the speaker with no sound for any damage. 11. Measure the resistance between following
terminals of audio unit connector A (20P).
Is th e re a n y d a m a g e ?
Speaker Terminal Wire color
YES—Substitute the speaker and recheck. ■ Driver's door speaker, A8 (+ ) BLU/GRN
Left tweeter A18 (—) GRY/BLK
NO—Goto step7. Front passenger's A7 (+ ) RED/GRN
door speaker, A17 (—) BRN/BLK
7. Remove the speaker(s) with no sound (see page Right tweeter
22-376), and disconnect its connector. Left rear speaker A6 (+ ) BLU/YEL
A 1 6 (-> GRY/WHT
8. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and Right rear speaker A5 (+ ) RED/YEL
No. 2 terminals of the speaker connector. A15 (—) BRN/WHT
Is th e r e a b o u t 4 0 ,? AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—Faulty speaker(s). ■ ri n S r* n ....... n ,

/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
9. Check the speaker 2P connector for a loose or poor

connection.
11 12 13
JT....
/ 15 16 17 18
i
19
L------
20
R e c o n n e c t th e s p e a k e r 2 P c o n n e c to r a n d r e c h e c k
th e s y m p t o m ; d o e s it s till fa il?
NO—Operation is normal. ■ Is th e r e m o r e th a n 4 Q ?
10. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and YES—Repair open in the wire between the audio
disconnect the audio unit connector A (20P). unit and speaker. ■
NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio NO—Go to step 12.
mechanism.
(cont'd)
12. Check for continuity between body ground and Audio system sound is weak or distorted
audio unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 5,6,7, (display is normal)
8,15,16,17 and 18 individually.
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first.
A U D I O UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (20P)
2. Turn on the audio unit and check for sound in each

mode (AM, FM, XM, and disc).
Is th e r e s o u n d fro m th e s p e a k e r s , a n d is th e s o u n d
q u a lity n o r m a l in e a c h m o d e ?
YES—Intermittent failure. The system is OK at this

time. Check for loose connection at the audio unit,
amplifier, and each speaker. ■
NO—Speakers all work, sound quality is poor.B
Wire side of female terminals • If sound is poor only with XM radio, or the XM
radio does not function, go to poor or no sound
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? with XM radio (see page 22-342).
• If the sound is poor only with AM or FM, go to
YES—Go to step 13. poor radio reception or interference (see page
22-334).
NO—Substitute a known-good audio unit and • If sound is poor in all modes, go to sound quality
recheck. If the symptom/ indication goes away, diagnosis (see page 22-366).
replace the original audio unit. ■
13. Disconnect the speaker that has continuity to

ground and recheck.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity to g r o u n d ?

between the audio unit and the speaker. ■
NO—Replace the speaker. ■

Audio unit button illumination does not 8. Check for continuity between audio unit connector
work A (20P) No. 19 terminal and gauge control module
connector B (36P) No. 36 terminal.
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition fir s t
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
.ri n c P r1 n
/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2. Turn the headlight switch to the parking light
position. 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20
— iji— / — ijrrr:
IL L - (RED)
3. Check the illum ination of the audio unit buttons.
Are the buttons illuminated?

I--------------- f
2
1T | 3 | 4 ? 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 110 111 12113 114115 116 117118 |
YES—Intermittent problem: the audio unit is OK at 119 I / I 21 1221231241^ | ^ | 271 1291M | 31 1321331341^ | »
this time. Check for loose or poor connections at ILL—(RED)
audio unit connector A (20P). ■
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Check the illumination of several other buttons not
related to the audio system. YES—Go to step 9.
A r e th e b u tto n s illu m in a te d ? NO—Repair open in the wire between the gauge

control module and the audio unit. ■
YES—Go to step 5.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO—Troubleshoot the interior lights. Start by
checking the No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the passenger's 10. With the headlight switch still on, measure the
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check voltage between audio unit connector A (20P) No. 9
for an open in the wire between the passenger's terminal and body ground.
under-dash fuse/relay box and the audio unit.B
ILL-+ -(RE ED/BLK)
n n S r> ..n..
6. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
disconnect audio unit connector A (20P).
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20
— _JL— J / — JL-----
mechanism.
7. Disconnect gauge control module connector B Wire side of female terminals

(36P).
YES—Check the connections at the audio unit

connector A (20P), If all connections are OK, replace
the audio u n it ■

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
audio unit.■
Radio preset memory is lost Poor or no sound with XM radio (Audio unit
does display XM channels)
NOTE: If only XM stations are lost, go to XM radio
preset memory is lost (see page 22-348). NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor
reception/interference can be caused by tall buildings,
2. Turn on the audio unit and set each of the radio mountains, or high-voltage power lines that are
station preset buttons. nearby.
• If you can only tune to channels 000,001,174 and
D o e s e a c h b u tto n s e t p r o p e r ly ? 247, make sure the audio unit is set to channel mode
(see owner's manual), if it is set to channel mode call
YES—Go to step 6. XM Satellite Radio customer support and check the
NO—Go to step 3. account activation status.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372). 2. Turn on the audio unit and select XM radio.
5. Measure the voltage between No. 10 terminals of 3. Check for an error message on the display.
the audio unit connector A (20P) and body ground.
A re th e re a n y m e s s a g e s d is p la y e d ?
YES—Go to error code list (see page 22-333). ■
(____ + B (WHT) I
n1__c
n ■ S r _____[
n ___ n 1_
1.._c
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7 NO—Go to step 4.
11 12 13
9
15 16 17 18 19 20
3----
(x
5. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and
disconnect audio unit connector C (14P).
6. Disconnect XM receiver connector A (14P).

YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between No. 48
(20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
audio unit.B
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF for 1 minute, then turn

it back ON (II).
7. Test the preset buttons for proper recall operation.
D o th e p r e s e t b u tto n s r e c a ll th e s e t r a d io s ta tio n s ?
YES—System is normal at this time. Check the

connections at the audio unit.B
NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). B
7. Check for continuity between body ground and 9. Check for continuity between audio unit connector
audio unit connector C (14P) terminals No. 5, No. 6, C (14P) and XM receiver connector A (14P)
No. 13 and No. 14 individually. according to the table.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P)
Audio unit connector XM receiver connector
C5 A5
SAT R-f (WHT) SATL+ (RED) C6 A6
2 3 4 5 6 Cl 3 A13
/ C14 A14
/ 9 10 11 /I 13 14
SATL+
(REP)
S A T R + (WHT)
Wire side of female terminal s 2 3 4 5 6
/
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? SAT R - (BLK) SATL-
(GRN)
YES—Short to body ground in the wire(s) between
audio unit and XM receiver. Replace the affected SATL+
shielded harness. ■ SAT R + (WHT) (REP)
1 2 3 / 5 6
NO—Go to step 8.
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
8. Check for continuity between the audio unit SAT R - (BLK) SATL-
(GRN)
connector C (14P) according to the table.
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
From terminal To terminals Wire side of female terminals
C4 C5, C6, C13, C14
C5 C6,C13,C14 Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
C6 C13, C14
C13 C14 YES—Substitute a known-good XM receiver and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) replace the XM receiver. If the symptom/indication
is still present, replace the audio unit.B
NO—Oper in the wire between audio unit

connector and XM receiver. Repalce the affected
/ 2 3 4 5 6
shielded harness. ■
/ 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n a n y o f th e te rm in a ls ?
YES—Short in the wire(s) between audio unit and

XM receiver. Replace the affected shielded
harness. ■
XM radio display is blank and no station 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
information is displayed
4. Measure the voltage between XM receiver
NOTE: connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and body ground.
Check the vehicle battery condition first.
• Do not do this procedure if the navigation display X M RECEIVER C O N N E C T O R A (14P)
buttons are inoperative. Refer to the navigation
system troubleshooting.
1. Remove the XM receiver (see page 22-375).

1 2 3
/ 5 6
/ / 9 10 11
/ 13 14
2. Measure the voltage between XM receiver GA-NET G N D (GRY/BLU)
connector A (14P) No. 1 terminal and body ground.
X M RECEIVER CONNECTOR A. (14P)
+ B GA-NET (RED/BLU) Wire side of female terminals

1 2 3 / 5 6
/ / 9 10 11
/ 13 14 I s th e r e l e s s th a n 0 .1 V ?
YES—Goto step 5.
X
NO—Repair open in the wire between XM receiver
connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and audio unit.B
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ? 6. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372).
YES—Go to step 3. NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio
NO—Repair open in the wire between audio unit mechanism.
and XM receiver connector A (14P) No. 1
term inal.*
r a
■ BODY
7. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector 9. Measure the voltage between audio unit connector
C (14P) No. 2 terminal and body ground. C (14P) No. 2 terminal and body ground.
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (14P) A U D IO UNIT C O N N E C T O R C (14P)
I LT GRN/RED i LT GRN/RED
/ 2 3 4 5 6 / 2 3 4 5 6
9 9 10 11 / 13 14 / / 9 10 11 / 13 14
Is th e re a b o u t 10 V p re se n t? Is th e r e le s s th a n 0 .5 V ?
NO—Go to step 10. NO—Substitute a known-good audio unit and

recheck. If less than 0.5 V or present, replace the
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). original audio unit 11
11. Disconnect audio unit connector C (14P) and XM

receiver connector A (14P).
12. With navigation, disconnect navigation unit

connector A (20P) and navigation display unit 20P
connector.
(cont'd)
13. Check for continuity between body ground and the 15. Check for continuity between the XM receiver
XM receiver connector A (14P) terminals No. 9 and connector A (14P) and the audio unit connector C
No. 10 individually. (14P) according to the table.
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) XM receiver Audio unit connector

connector
A9 C9
1 2 3 5 6 A10 C10
/
9 10 11 13 14
/ / /
GA-NET BUS+ GA-NET B U S -
(RED/BLU) A A Ê D /W H T) XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P)
(U )(Q ) Wire side of female terminals
GA-NET BUS
Wire side of female terminals SH (LT BLU)
1 2 3
/ 5 6
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? / / 9 10 11
/ 13 14
GA-NET BU S+ GA-NET B U S -
(RED/BLU) (RED/BLU)
XM receiver, audio unit, navigation unit (with
navigation) and navigation display unit (with
navigation). Replace the affected shielded GA-NET BUS
SH (LT BLU)
harness. ■
NO—Go to step 14. 10 11 13 14

GA-NET BU S+ GA-NET B U S -
14. Check for continuity between the XM receiver (RED/BLU) (RED/BLU)
connector A (14P) according to the table.
From terminal To terminals Wire side of female terminals
A3 A9, A10
A9 A10
YES—Substitute a known-good XM receiver, then
reconnect all connector and recheck. If the
1 2 3 5 6 symptom/indication goes away, replace the
/
9 10 11 13 14 original XM receiver. If the symptom/indication is
/ / still present, replace the audio unit. ■
NO—Open in the wire(s) between XM receiver and

audio unit. Replace the affected shielded
harness. ■
YES—Short in the wire(s) between XM receiver,

audio unit, navigation unit (with navigation) and
navigation display unit (with navigation). Replace
the affected shielded harness.B
Error code: XM NO SIGNAL or XM ANTENNA 4. Measure the voltage between XM receiver
is displayed ; connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and body ground.
NOTE; X M RECEIVER C O N N E C T O R A (14P)

• Do not do this procedure if the navigation display
buttons are inoperative. Refer to the navigation
system troubleshooting.
1 2
^><r
3 / 5 6
• Check XM radio reception in an open area. Poor / / 9 10 11

/ 13 14
reception/interference can be caused by tall buildings, GA-NET G N D (GRY/BLU)
mountains, or high voltage power lines.
id
1. With the ignition switch turned to ON (II),
park vehicle outside with a clear view of
the southern horizon. Wire side of female terminals
D o e s X M ra d io r e c e iv e a sig n a l?
Is th e r e l e s s th a n 0 .1 V ?
YES—Reception interference operation is
normal. ■ YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Go to step 2. NO—Repair open in the wire between XM receiver

connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and audio unit.B
2. Check XM antenna connector B (2P) at XM receiver.
5. Substitute known-good XM antenna.
Is X M a n te n n a c o n n e c to r B c o n n e c te d ?
D o e s th e X M r a d io r e c e iv e a s ig n a l?
YES—Go to step 3.
YES—Replace XM antenna. ■
NO—Reconnect XM connector B, recheck XM radio
operation. If the signal restored, operation is NO—Substitute known-good XM antenna lead. If
normal. If signal not restored go to step 3. XM radio receives a signal, replace original XM
antenna lead. If the XM radio does not receive a
3. Measure the voltage between XM receiver signal, substitute a known-good XM receiver. ■
X M RECEIVER C O N N E C T O R A (14P)
1+B GA-NET (RED/BLU)

1 2 3
/ 5 6
/I/ 9 10 11
/ 13 14
YES—Go to step 4.
XM radio preset memory is lost 6. Measure the voltage between XM receiver

NOTE: If you can only tune to channel 000, 001,174,
and 247, make sure the audio unit is set to channel mode XM RECEIV E R C O N N E C T O R A (14P)
(see owner's manual), if it is set to channel mode, call
XM Satellite Radio customer support and check the + B GA-NET (RED/BLU)
account activation status. 1 2 3 5 6
/j
9 10 11 13 14
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). / / 9
2. Turn on the audio unit and set each of the XM radio y

channel preset buttons.
D o e a c h o f th e X M r a d io c h a n n e l p r e s e t b u tto n s
s e t p ro p e rly ?
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Replace the XM receiver. H
YES—Go to step 7.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF for 1 minute, then turn
NO—Repair open in the wire between the audio
it back to ON (II).
unit and XM receiver connector A (14P) No. 1
terminal. ■
4. Test all of the XM radio channel preset buttons for
proper recall operation.
D o th e p r e s e t b u tto n s r e c a ll th e s e t r a d io s ta tio n s ?
8. Measure the voltage between XM receiver
YES—System is normal at this time. Check
connections at the XM receiver. ■
X M RECEIVER C O N N E C T O R A (14P)
NO—Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1 2 3

/]
5 6
9 10 11 13 14
/ / /
GA-NET G N D (GRY/BLU)
x )
Is th e r e l e s s th a n 0 .1 V ?
YES—Replace the XM receiver (see page 22-375). ■
NO—Repair open in the wire between XM receiver

connector and body ground. ■
Audio disc does not eject Audio disc changer does not load all six discs.
NOTE: NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first. • Check the vehicle battery condition first.
• Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They • Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
may damage the player mechanism. may damage the player mechanism.
2. Turn on the audio unit 2. Turn on the audio unit and try loading six discs into
the audio unit (in-dash disc changer).
D o e s th e s y s te m tu rn o n ?
D o e s th e a u d io u n it a c c e p t a ll s ix d is c s ?
YES—Go to step 3.
YES—Intermittent failure, the audio unit is OK at
NO—Go to power switch will not turn ON (see page this time. ■
22-337). ■
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Check to see if the disc ejects correctly with no
binding by pushing the EJECT button. 3. Try loading the audio unit (in-dash disc changer)
with six known-good discs.
D o e s th e d is c e je c t n o rm a lly ?
D o e s th e a u d io u n it a c c e p t a ll s ix d i s c s ?
YES—Operation is normal. ■
YES—At least one of the original discs is faulty. ■
NO—Replace audio unit (see page 22-372).■
NO—Replace audio unit (in-dash disc changer)
(see page 22-372). ■
Audio disc changer does not move between Volume does not change
discs
NOTE: Set the fader and balance positions to the center.
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
may damage the player mechanism. 2. Turn on the audio unit and check for sound in each
Is th e s o u n d n o rm a l?
2. Turn on the audio unit and insert six discs into the
audio unit (in-dash disc changer) and see if the YES—Goto step 3.
changer moves between discs.
NO—Go to audio system sound is weak or
D o e s th e c h a n g e r o p e r a te n o rm a lly ? distorted (see page 22-340), or no sound is heard
from speakers (see page 22-338). ■
YES—Intermittent failure, the disc changer is OK at
this time. ■ 3. Operate the volume knob to see if the volume
changes.
NO—Go to step 3.
D o e s th e v o lu m e c h a n g e ?
3. Insert six known-good discs into the audio unit
(in-dash disc changer). YES—Operation is normal. ■
D o e s th e c h a n g e r o p e r a te n o r m a lly ? NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). ■
YES—At least one of the original discs is faulty. ■
NO—Replace audio unit (in-dash disc changer)

(see page 22-372). ■
Radio tuner does not change stations . Audio disc does not load .
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first. NOTE:

• Check the vehicle battery condition first,
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Disc labels should not be used in the audio unit. They
may damage the player mechanism.
2. Turn on the audio unit and check the audio • Make sure the CD disc is compatible with the system
information on the display panel. (see the owner's manual for more information).
D o e s th e a u d io in fo rm a tio n d is p la y p r o p e r ly ? 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Goto step 3. 2. Turn on the audio unit and insert a known-good

disc to see if the symptom can be duplicated.
NO—Goto power switch will not turn ON (see page
22-337). ■ D o e s th e d is c lo a d ?
3. Operate the tuning knob to see if the radio station YES—Operation is normal. If the disc loads
changes. normally, but will not play, go to audio disc does
not play (see page 22-352). ■
D o e s th e r a d io s ta tio n c h a n g e ?
NO—Go to step 3.
YES—Intermittent failure: the turning knob is OK at
this time. ■ 3. Insert another disc.
NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). ■ D o e s th e d is c lo a d ?
YES—The original disc is faulty. ■
NO—Replace audio unit (see page 22-372). ■


Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-SDBA100 • Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
• Skip test CD 07AAZ-SDBA200 or 07AAZ-SDBA300
A u d io d is c d o e s n o t p la y
A u d io d is c s k ip s
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first
1. Confirm the vehicles tires are properly inflated.
2. Turn on the audio unit and try loading a disc.
2. Check the customers CD for scratches, fingerprints,
D o e s th e d is c lo a d ? and marks.
YES—Go to step 3. NOTE: The following test should be performed with

audio unit bass and treble set to customer's
NO—Go to audio disc does not load (see page listening performance. When comparing to known-
22-35D.il good vehicles, comparison should be performed
on same model and trim level.
3. Insert another disc to see if the symptom can be
duplicated. 3. Test drive to identify when the customers CD skips.
The audio diagnostic CD (T/N: 07AAZ-SDBA100)
D o e s th e d is c p la y ? can be used if the customers CD is not available.
Use tracks 10—12.
YES—Operation is normal.■
D o e s th e d is c s k ip ?
NO—Go to step 4.
YES—Go to step 4.
4. Insert audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100)
in the audio unit. NO—Operation is norm al.*
D o e s th e d is c p la y ? 4. Compare the customers CD that skips to a known-

good vehicle under the same conditions.
YES—The original disc is faulty or has an
unreadable format ■ D o e s th e C D s k ip in th e k n o w n - g o o d v e h ic le u n d e r
th e s a m e c o n d itio n s?
YES—Operation is norm al.*
NO—Go to step 5.
NOTE: The following test should be performed with

the vehicle parked and the engine running.
5. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (07AAZ-SDBA300). Audio rem ote sw itch does not w ork properly
Play tracks 2—11 and note the track number(s)
where the CD starts to skip. Do the same test on a NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first.
known-good vehicle.
1. Test the audio remote switch (see page 22-378).
D o e s th e C D s k ip o n s a m e tr a c k n u m b e r (s) a s
k n o w n -g o o d v e h ic le ? Is th e a u d io r e m o te s w itc h O K ?
YES—Operation is norm al.* YES—Goto step 2.
NO—Go to step 6. NO—Replace the audio remote switch (see page

22-378). ■
6. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (07AAZ-SDBA200).
Play tracks 7—11 and tracks 13—15 and note the 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
track number(s) where the CD starts to skip.
Perform the same test on a known-good vehicle. 3. Turn on the audio unit and check the audio unit
operation (volume up, volume down, CH, MODE).
D o e s th e C D s k ip o n s a m e tr a c k n u m b e r (s ) a s
k n o w n -g o o d v e h ic le ? Is th e a u d io u n it o p e r a tio n O K ?
YES—Operation is normal. ■ YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). ■ NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372), and
recheck. ■

unit to prevent damagine the CD player's load
mechanism.
(cont'd)
6. Measure the resistance between the audio unit 7. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 11
connector A (20P) No. 3 and No. 11 terminals as terminals of the audio unit connector A (20P) and
specified in the table. body ground.
A U D IO UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (20P) AU D I O UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (20PJ
R E M O T E CTI=IL (GRN/RED)
n n r* n n
R E M O T E CTI*L (GRN/RED) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
n n S ? n .. n . . /
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20
/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 /
r
11 12 13
U
/15 16 17 18 19 20
u
R E M O T E G N D (BRN)
R E M O T E G N D (BRN)
© <2>
AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH TABLE Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

Button held VOL VOL UP CH MODE (NONE)
down DOWN YES—Repair short to body ground in the circuit
Resistance about about about about about between the audio unit and the audio remote
50 Q 300 Q 900 Q 2.4 kQ 10 kQ switch. If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel
(see page 23-212). ■
Is th e r e s is ta n c e O K ?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Repair open or high resistance in the circuit

between the audio unit and the audio remote
switch. If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel
(see page 23-212). ■
Booming sound while driving with audio 8. Measure the voltage between the active noise
unit on or off control front or rear microphone 5P connector
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition firs t
1. Check for the No. 8 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's REAR MICROPHONE 5P CONNECTOR
Is th e fu s e OK? J
CO
1 2 4
/
YES—Go to step 2. ACC (YEL/BLK)

3. Turn on the audio unit, and check the function of
the speakers.
D o a ll th e s p e a k e r s o p e r a te n o r m a lly ?
YES—Goto step 9.
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Go to no sound is heard from speakers (7.5 A) in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-338). ■ and the active noise control rear microphone 5P
connector. ■
4. Turn the audio power switch OFF.
5. Do the self-diagnostic procedure (see page 22-331).
6. Press the "No. 1" button.
Is th e lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m s o u n d h e a r d ?
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Go to step 21.
7. Check that the low-frequency hum sound continues

sounding for about 1 minute.
D o e s th e lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m s o u n d c o n tin u e
so u n d in g fo r a b o u t 1 m in u te ?
(cont'd)
9. Measure the voltage between the active noise 12. Check for continuity between body ground and the
control rear microphone 5P connector terminal active noise control rear microphone 5P connector
No. 3 and body ground. No. 1 and No. 2 terminals individually.
ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L A C T IVE NOISE C O N T R O L

R E A R M I C R O P H O N E 5P C O N N E C T O R R E A R M I C R O P H O N E 5P C O N N E C T O R
Terminal side of male terminals Terminal side of male terminals
I s th e r e l e s s th a n 0 .1 V ? Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
YES—Goto step 10. YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

between body ground and the active noise control
NO—Repair open or poor connection in the wire rear microphone 5P connector terminals No. 1 and
between active noise control rear microphone 5P N o .2 .»
connector No. 3 terminal and body ground
(G503KB NO—Go to step 13.
11. Disconnect the active noise control rear

microphone 5P connector.
13. Reconnect the active noise control rear microphone 18. Disconnect the active noise control rear;
connectors. ■ : microphone 5P connector. .■
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19. Check for continuity between the active noise
control unit 16P connector No. 3 terminal and the
15. Measure the voltage between the body ground and active noise control rear microphone 5P connector
the active noise control rear microphone 5P terminal No. 1.
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually
ACTIVE NOI SE CONTROL
while lightly tapping the rear microphone. REAR MICROPHONE 5P CONNECTOR
REAR MICROPHONE 5P CONNECTOR
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

Terminal side of male terminals Wire side of female terminals
D o e s th e v o lta g e flu c tu a te ?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the active
NO—Replace the active noise control rear noise control unit 16P connector No. 3 terminal and
microphone. ■ the active noise control front microphone 5P
connector terminal No. 1.11
17. Disconnect the active noise control unit 16P

connector.
(cont'd)
20. Check for continuity between the active noise 22. Measure the voltage between the active noise
control unit 16P connector No. 11 terminal and the control unit 16P connector No. 8 terminal and body
active noise control rear microphone 5P connector ground.
terminal No. 2.
ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L UNIT 16P C O N N E C T O R
R E A R M I C R O P H O N E 5P C O N N E C T O R
Terminal side of male terminals A C C (YEL/BLK)
1 2 3 4
10 11 12 14 15 16
R R MIC— (GRN)
10 11 12 14 15 16
RR M I C - (GRN)
ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L UNIT 16P C O N N E C T O R YES—Go to step 23.

Is th e r e c o n tin u i ty ? NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 8

YES—Replace the active noise control unit box and the active noise control unit 16P connector
(see page 22-375). ■ terminal No. 8. ■

noise control unit 16P connector No. 11 terminal
and the active noise control rear microphone 5P
connector terminal No. 2 M

23. Measure the voltage between the active noise 26. Measure the voltage between the active noise
control unit 16P connector No. 7 terminal and body control unit 16P connector No. 12 terminal and
ground. body ground.
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT16P CONNECTOR
| GND (BLK)
n n n r
1 2 3 1 8 1 2 3 7 8
/ i / / / / /
9 10 11 12 / 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 / 14 15 16
ANCCHK2 (RED/BLK)
(v )
Is there less than 0.1 V? Is there about 5 V?
N O —Repair open in the wire between the active NO—

noise control unit 16P connector No. 7 terminal and • Except LX models: Go to step 27.
the body ground (G40D.B • LX model: Go to step 32.
24. Do the self-diagnostic procedure (see page 22-331). 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
25. Press the "No. 1" button. 28. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and
disconnect audio unit connector B (14P).

mechanism.

connector.
(cont'd)
30. Check for continuity between the active noise 31. Check for continuity between body ground and the
control unit 16P connector No. 12 terminal and active noise control unit 16P connector terminal
audio unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 6. No. 12.
ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L UNIT 16P C O N N E C T O R

Wire side of female terminals ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L UNIT 16P C O N N E C T O R
1.... _n
1 2 3 7 8
/ / /
9 10 11 12 14 15 16
/
A N C CHK2 (WHT)
A U D IO UNIT C O N N E C T O R B (14P)
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? between the active noise control unit 16P connector
No. 12 terminal and audio unit connector B (14P)
YES—Goto step 31. terminal No. 6.B
NO—Repair open in the wire between the active NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). ■
and audio unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 6 .1
active noise control unit 16P connector terminal
33. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and No. 12.
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT 1§P CONNECTOR
NOTE; Eject all the discs before removing the audio
mechanism. n.... n
1 2 3 7 8
/ / /
34. Disconnect the active noise control unit 16P 9 10 11 12 14 15 16
connector and audio unit connector B (5P). /
ANC CHK2 (WHT)
35. Check for continuity between the active noise
U
control unit 16P connector No. 12 terminal and
audio unit connector B (5P) terminal No. 5.

10 11 12 14 15 16
between the active noise control unit 16P connector
I ANC CHK2 (RED/BLK) No. 12 terminal and audio unit connector B (5P)
terminal No. 5.H

ANC CHK2 (RED/BLK)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (SP)


and audio unit connector B (5P) terminal No. 5.11
(cont'd)
37. Press and release the "No. 1" button, then measure 41. Check for continuity between the active noise
the voltage between the active noise control unit control unit 16P connector and audio unit
16P connector No. 2 terminal and body ground. connector B (14P) as shown.
A C T IV E N O I S E C O N T R O L U N I T 16P CONNECTOR
16P: 14P:
No. 1 No. 4
A N C F R + {BLK) No. 2 No. 2
n . ,n
n ....... I I n No. 9 No. 5
1 2 3 / / 7 8 No. 10 No. 3
9 10 11 12 / 14 15 16 A C T IV E N O I S E C O N T R O L U N I T 16P CONNECTOR
Is th e re a b o u t 2 .5 V ?
YES—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). ■
NO—
• Except LX models: Go to step 38.
• LX model: Go to step 43.

A U D IO U N IT C O N N E C T O R B ( 14P)
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
mechanism.
connector and audio unit connector B (14P). NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the active
noise control unit 16P connector and audio unit
connector B (14P).B
42. Check for continuity between body ground and the 43. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
active noise control unit 16P connector No. 1,2,9
and 10 individually. 44. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and
RR~4~ NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio
(GRY/YEL) unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load
FR+ (BLK) mechanism.
1 2 3 8 45. Disconnect the active noise control unit 16P

/ / / connector.
9 10 11 12
/ 14 15 16
RR' FR— (GRN) 46. Check for continuity between the active noise
(WHT)
control unit 16P connector and audio unit
;o x o ) (Q )(f2 connector B (5P) as shown.
16P: 5P:
No. 1 No. 3
No. 2 No. 1
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? No. 9 No. 4
No. 10 No. 2
between the active noise control unit 16P connector ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
and audio unit connector B (14P).B
NO—Replace the active noise control unit

(see page 22-375). ■
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (5P)

YES—Goto step 47.
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the active

noise control unit 16P connector and audio unit
connector B (5P).B
(cont'd)
47. Check for continuity between body ground and the 48. Start the engine and let it idle.
active noise control unit 16P connector No. 1, 2,9
and 10 individually. 49. Press the "No. 1" button.
ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L U N IT 16P C O N N E C T O R

Is th e lo w -fr e q u e n c y h u m s o u n d h e a r d ?
NO—The system is OK. ■

connector and PCM connector A (31P).

PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 28.
ACTIVE NOISE C O N T R O L UNIT 16P C O N N E C T O R

Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Wire side of female terminals
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire p n

between the active noise control unit 16P connector 1 2 3 7 8
and audio unit connector B (5P).B
/ / /
9 10 11 12 / 14 15 16
NO—Replace the active noise control unit INEP (BLU)
(see page 22-375). ■ ©
00
CD
| 1| 2 3|4 | 5| 6|7
■
10 11 12 9114199 17 18 19
20 21 22 > 9 23 24 / ■■
26 27 28 29913117 33 34 /
QC
>1919141 142 431441
—□ — r : m r— □ — —
_____________ IN EP (BLU)
P C M C O N N E C T O R A C44P)

and PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 2 8 .■
body ground.
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT ISP CONNECTOR

between body ground and the active noise control
unit 16P connector No. 15 terminal and PCM
connector A (44P) terminal No. 28. ■
NO—Faulty the PCM. ■

Sound Quality Diagnosis

Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-SDBA100 Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
Use the following tests to check the sound quality. Phase Test
NOTE: Before beginning the following tests, write down Do this test to confirm proper speaker phasing.
the audio unit's bass, treble, fader and balance settings,
then set them to their center positions for testing. 1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-
SDBA100) into the CD player.
Left/Right Channel ID
2. Play track No. 2 (phase) at a normal, or slightly
Do this test to confirm proper channel routing. higher than normal, volume level.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ- 3. The voice should sound centered, and focused
SDBA100) into the CD player. when it is in-phase.
2. Play track No. 1 (left, both, right channel ID) at a 4. The voice should sound diffused, and have "less
normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume bass" when it is out of phase.
level.
• If the voice changes from in-phase to out of
3. The voice should be audible only from the channel phase as indicated by the prompt, the phasing is
or channels when indicated. correct. Go to electrical noise test (see page
22-367).
• If the channel ID is correct for each side, go to • If the voice always sounds out of phase, phasing
phase test. is not correct. Check for:
• If the channel ID is not correct, check for - Crossed speaker wires
- Shorted speaker wire - Faulty audio unit
- Faulty audio unit
Special Tools Required 7. Operate any electrical device that causes noise
Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-SDBA1G0 from the audio system, including starting the
engine.
Electrical Noise Test
• If no abnormal noise is heard, go to the
Do this test to check for electrical noise being induced individual speaker test.
into the audio system. • If the noise is present only during the SNR track,
replace the audio unit.
NOTE: Electrical noise may be caused by outside • If the noise is heard during the digital zero or
sources that cannot be handled by the audio system. near digital zero track, check for:
Make sure you remove any cell phones, and/or turn off - Poor ground for the audio unit, engine or
any aftermarket device before beginning this test. battery cable
- Pinched or shorted speaker wire
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ- - Faulty audio unit
SDBA100) into the CD player. - Other faulty components causing excessive
electrical noise (ignition coils, alternator, door
2. Play track No. 4 (digital zero) at a normal, or slightly lock actuators, etc.). Disconnect any suspect
higher than normal, volume level. components, and then replay the tracks that
were originally noisy. If the noise is gone,
3. Operate any electrical device that causes noise check the component's circuit and the
from the audio system, including starting the component.
engine.
4. Play track No. 5 (near digital zero) at a normal, or

slightly higher than normal, volume level.
5. Operate any electrical device that causes noise

from the audio system, including starting the
engine.
6. Play track No. 6 (SNR) at a normal, or slightly

higher than normal, volume level.
Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd)
Special Tool s Required Special Tools Required

In d iv id u a l S p e a k e r T e s t S o u n d B a la n c e T e s t
Do this test to identify a faulty speaker. Perform this test to identify a faulty channel or speaker.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ- 1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-
SDBA100) into the CD player. SDBA100) into the CD player.
2. Play track No. 30 (steady 300 Hz tone) at a normal, 2. Confirm the bass and treble are set to the center
or slightly higher than normal, volume level. positions.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound compared to 3. Play track No. 3 (pink noise) at a normal, or slightly
the other speakers. Use the audio unit's fader and higher then normal, volume level.
balance settings to help isolate the channel with the
problem. 4. A "static" type sound should be heard through all
speakers.
• If the sound quality produced by a specific
speaker is poor, substitute it with a known-good 5. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-
speaker. If the poor sound quality continues, go SDBA100) into the CD player of a known-good
to the sound balance test (see page 22-368). vehicle.
• If the sound quality is OK, go to the sound
balance test (see page 22-368). 6. Set the bass and treble to the center position.
7. Play track No. 3 (pink noise) at the same level as

was played in step 3.
8. Compare the sounds made by the two vehicles.
• If the sounds made by the two vehicles are very

similar, go to the Frequency Sweep Test
(see page 22-369).
• If the sound does not have as much bass, check
the subwoofer (2WD) and circuit.
• If the sound does not have enough "hiss", check
the tweeters and their circuits.
Frequency sweep Sound judging
Do this test to find rattles or reverberation that may Do this test to compare the overall sound quality,
cause a perception of poor sound quality. imaging, and dynamics between the customer's vehicle
and a known-good vehicle. Only use a vehicle of the
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ- same model and trim level for this test.
SDBA100) into the CD player.
1. In the customer's vehicle, set the bass, treble, fader,
2. Play track No. 13 (sweep from 500 Hz to 35 Hz) at a and balance settings to the customer's normal
normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume settings that were written down before beginning
level. the testing.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound quality or 2. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-
reverberations caused by specific frequencies. Use SDBA100) into the CD player.
the voice-over to estimate the frequency that
causes the vibration. Use the audio unit's fader and 3. Play tracks No. 7 to 12 (sound quality, midland,
balance settings to help isolate the channel with the dynamics, and imaging demonstration tracks) at a
problem. normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume
level. Write down the volume setting being used.
• If vibrations or poor sound quality are heard, go
to step 4. 4. Listen to areas of the track that stand out as being
• If no vibrations or poor sound quality are heard, either very clear or poorer than other areas of the
go to sound judging (see page 22-369). track.
4. Choose the appropriate track from No. 14 to 25 5. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-
(small range frequency sweep) or 26 to 53 (single SDBA100) into the CD player of a known-good
frequencies) to recreate the frequency that caused vehicle.
the poor sound quality or vibration located in step
3: this aids in diagnosing of the cause. 6. Play the tracks at the same volume level and the
same bass, treble, balance, and fader settings as
NOTE: When you get to the track that recreates the used in step 3 in the customer's vehicle.
problem, select the repeat function on the audio
unit, this will help you isolate the cause. 7. Listen to the same area of the track that stood out
as being either very clear or poorer than other
5. Replace or insulate the source of the vibration or, if areas of the track.
the speaker is the source of the poor sound quality,
replace it.
(cont'd)
Sound Quality Diagnosis (cont'd)
8. Compare the customer's vehicle's sound quality Seek Stop Test

results the known-good vehicle's results.
Do this test to check the performance of the audio unit's
• If the sound quality in the customer's vehicle is AM and FM reception. Refer to the symptom
comparable to the sound quality in the known- troubleshooting: audio sound weak or distorted
good vehicle, then the customer's vehicle is (see page 22-340), or no sound is heard from speakers
operating as designed. (display is normal) (see page 22-338) before continuing
• If the sound quality is not comparable, check with this test.
these items in order.
- Loose or improperly installed speakers or NOTE:
other hardware that may become excited by • Window tint, aftermarket theft-recovery devices and
the vibrations generated by the speakers other aftermarket accessories may reduce radio
- Damaged speaker(s) reception.
- Faulty audio unit • Changes in cloud cover and other atmosphere
conditions will affect the ability of the audio unit to
receive radio signals.
1. Park the customer's vehicle in an open area away

from buildings or other obstructions.
2. Park a known-good vehicle (same year, model, and

trim level) next to the customer's vehicle, facing the
same direction.
3. Start the engine in the customer's vehicle, and turn

on the radio.
4. Set the FM receiver to 87.7 MHz.
5. Press the "Seek + " button, and record the first

station that the audio unit locks onto.
6. Press the "Seek + " button repeatedly, and write

down each station that the audio unit locks onto
until the station recorded in step 5 is reached again.
7. Set the AM receiver to 530 kHz.
8. Press the "Seek + " button, and record the first

station that the audio unit locks onto.
9. Press the "Seek + " button repeatedly, and write

down each station that the audio unit locks onto
until the station recorded in step 8 is reached again.
11. Start the engine in the known-good vehicle, and

then perform steps 4 thru 10 on the known-good
vehicle.
12. Compare the number of stations received in steps 6

and 9 in the customer's vehicle with the number of
stations received in the known-good vehicle.
• If the number of stations received is the same, or

within 10 %, the audio unit's tuner performance
is OK. The problem may be atmospheric
conditions, multi path interference, or other
obstructions to the radio signal.
* If the customer's vehicle receives fewer stations
by at least 10 %, go to step 2 of poor AM or FM
radio reception of interference (see page 22-334).
Audio Unit Removal/Installation
With Navigation System 5. Remove the screws (A) and the audio unit (B).

SRS component locations (see page 23-17), and the
NOTE:
• Eject all the discs before removing the audio unit to
prevent damaging the CD player's load mechanism.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts.

audio system and the navigation system, then write
down the audio presets. 6. Install the audio unit and the climate control unit in
the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-90).
• Make sure the audio unit and climate control unit
3. Remove the bolts (A). connectors are plugged in properly, and the
antenna lead is connected properly.
22-255).
and the navigation system, then enter the audio
presets and set the clock.
4. Disconnect the all connectors (B) from the audio

unit (C) and the climate control unit (D).
Without Navigation System (Except LX 5. Remove the screws (A) from the audio unit.
model)

NOTE:
parts.
• If you are replacing the audio unit, write down the
audio presets (if possible), and enter them into the
new audio unit.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 6. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of
audio system, then write down the audio presets. removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93). • Make sure the audio unit connectors are plugged
in properly, and the antenna lead is connected
3. Remove the bolts (A). properly.
22-255).
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system,
then enter the audio presets and set the clock.
4. Disconnect the audio unit connectors (B) from the

audio unit.
Audio Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)
W it h o u t N a v ig a tio n S y s te m (L X m o d e l) 4. Remove the screws (A) from the audio unit

NOTE:
parts.
• If you are replacing the audio unit, write down the
audio presets (if possible), and enter them into the
new audio unit
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93).

5. Install the audio unit in the reverse order of
2. Remove the bolts (A). removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the audio unit connectors are plugged

in properly, and the antenna lead is connected
properly.
22-255).
• Enter the audio presets and set the clock.
3. Disconnect the audio unit connectors (B) from the

audio unit
XM Receiver Removal/Installation Active Noise Control Unit Removal/
Installation
With XM
1. Remove the right rear side trim panel (see page 2WD
20-80).
N O TE:
2. Disconnect the antenna 2P connector (A) and 14P • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
connector (B) from the XM receiver (C). • Take care not to scratch the headliner and display
cover.
• Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working
on them to protect the face panel from scratches or
other damage.
1. Remove the navigation display unit (with

navigation) (see page 22-509) or audio unit (without
navigation) (see page 22-373).
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the

bolts and the active noise control unit (B).
3. Loosen the three nuts, and remove the XM receiver.
4. Install the XM receiver in the reverse order of

removal.
3. Install the active noise control unit in the reverse

order of removal.
Active Noise Control Microphone Speaker Replacement
Removal/Installation
Door
2WD 1. Remove the front door panel (see page 20-6).
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-83). 2. Remove the three screws, then disconnect the 2P
connector (A) from the speaker (B).
2. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the
screws and the active noise control microphone (B).
3. Install the active noise control microphone in the

Tweeter (Except LX model) Woofer (Except LX model)
1. Carefully pry the tw eeter (A) out of the dashboard, 1. Remove the right rear trim (see page 20-80).
then disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the
tweeter. 2. Remove the four mounting screws, then disconnect
the 2P connector (A) from the woofer (B).
2. Remove the screws and tweeter.

Audio Remote Switch Test/ AM /FM Antenna Amplifier
Except LX model 1. Remove the left C-pillar trim (see page 20-74).
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the AM/FM
SRS component locations (see page 23-17), and the antenna amplifier (B).
1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page

23-201).
2. Remove the two screws and the cover (A) from the
steering wheel.
3. Disconnect all the connectors, then remove the bolt

and AM/FM antenna amplifier.
3. Remove the two screws from the audio remote 4. Remove the mounting bolt from the AM/FM
switch (B). antenna amplifier.
4. Disconnect the 4P connector from the audio remote

switch.

No. 4 (with navigation system) or No. 1 (without
navigation system) terminals in each switch
position according to the table.
Position Resistance
OFF About 10 kQ
MODE About 2.4 kQ
CH About 900 Q
▲ About 300 Q
(VOL UP)
▼ About 50 Q
(VOL. DOWN)
6. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

remote switch.
XM Antenna Replacement AM /FM Antenna Test
With XM 1.: Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of the tester
probe (B) as shown.
2. Remove the nut (A) from the XM antenna (B).
2. Touch one tester probe near the window antenna

terminal (A) and move the other tester probe along
the antenna wires to check for continuity. Repair if
3. Disconnect the connector (C), and remove the XM there is no continuity.
antenna.
4. Install the XM antenna in the reverse order of

removal.
AM/FM Antenna Repair
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section

must be no longer than 1 inch.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)

with fine steel wool, then clean it with isopropyl
alcohol.
2. Carefully mask the area above and below the

broken portion of the AM/FM antenna wire (B) with
cellophane tape (C).
3. Mix the silver conductive paint thoroughly. Using a

small brush, apply a heavy coat of paint (A)
extending about 1/8 " on both sides of the break.
Allow 30 minutes to dry.
4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it

dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
| RIGHT TWEETER
'Replacement, page 22-377
r FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL UNIT (ZWD)
AUDIO UNIT
Removal/lnstailation page 22-373
RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR CONTROLLER and SCREEN
Removal/Installation page 22-423
WOOFER
XM ANTENNA*
page 22-379
A M / F M ANTENNA LEAD
A M / F M ANTENNA
Test, page 22-379
AM/FM ANTENNA Repair, page 22-380
SUBLEAD A M / F M ANTENNA
AMPLIFIER
Replacement,
page 22-378
REAR MICROPHONE (ZWD)
Connector Inputs and Outputs,
page 22-327
page 22-376
XM ANTENNA LEAD*
LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER

XM RECEIVER*
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY
DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER
DVD PLAYER UNIT Replacement, page 22-376
System Description, page 22-383 AUDIO REMOTE SWITCH
Removal/lnstailation page 22-423 T est/Replacement, page 22-378
LEFT TWEETER
• WIRELESS HEADPHONE Replacement, page 22-377
Battery Replacement, page 22-426
* WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL
Battery Replacement, page 22-426
*: W ith XM

RES disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-404) • Peeled label stuck in
player
• Wrong type disc
RES disc does not eject Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-404) • Peeled label stuck in
player
• Wrong type disc
RES disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-405) • Peeled label stuck in
player
• Wrong type disc
RES disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-406) • Peeled label stuck in
player
• Wrong type disc
Black picture is shown on the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-407)
display
White picture is shown on the Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-408)
display/display lock
Display area picture has lines or has Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-408)
shifted
Display does not go off when screen Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-409)
is closed
No display appears on the rear Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-409)
controller indicator
No sound/no display with auxiliary Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-410) • Poor connections or
video unit inputs disconnected device
• Low batteries in
accessory device, or
disconnected from power
source
Wired headphone sound is weak, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-413)
distorted, volume does not change,
or there is no sound
Wireless headphones do not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-414)
or there is static in DVD mode
Wireless headphone sound is weak, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-416) Wireless headphone
sound is distorted, there is static, batteries
volume does not change, or there is
no sound in all modes
Wireless remote control does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-418) Wireless remote control
work (all buttons) batteries
work (source select buttons) batteries
work (rear power button) batteries
Screen backlight does not dim/ Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-419)
remains dim
DVD player unit illumination does Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-421)
not come on/does not dim
DVD player unit DISC IN indicator or Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-422)
DISC DISTINCTION indicator does
not come on/does not go off
Wireless remote control Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 22-422) Wireless remote control
illumination does not come on batteries
System Description
The rear entertainment system is composed of a special audio unit, a DVD player unit, a rear controller, a screen
wireless headphones, a wireless remote control, and auxiliary input jacks.
System Components ■ -
Audio Unit
• Provides rear system power
• Provides control for the rear functions
• Allows the rear display to show information about the rear system status
• Provides a method to stop the rear passenger's from having control of the rear system
DVD Player Unit

• Offers simple operation (control in the audio unit)
• Automatically turns off when battery voltage drops below 12 volts
Rear Screen
• Has a flip down 9" display
• Displays information on the LCD
• Display does not work when pushed beyond the detent
• Provides output for infrared (IR) headphones
Wireless Headphone
• Has automatic ON/OFF control
• Has volume control
• Works only in the second and third row seats, not outside the vehicle or in the front seats
Wireless Remote Control

Allows remote operation of the audio and DVD units.
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Input Jacks

• Allows input from standard video game and video equipment using RCA connectors
• Provides three headphone connectors and separate volume controls
Audio Remote Switch

Allows operation of the audio and DVD units from the steering wheel.
(cont'd)
G A -N e t B u s C o n fig u r a tio n
The GA-Net bus passes audio, RES and navigation commands throughout the navigation, RES and audio components.
These commands include the navigation touch screen and hard button signals, audio/XM selections by voice, and XM
station and music title names. Because the entire bus is "daisy chained" between components (see diagram), any
open or short in the GA-Net bus harness can cause any one or all of these functions to become inoperative. The
addition of any audio accessory must maintain the continuity of the GA-Net bus by installing the "Y" cable included
with the accessory kit.
Audio Unit
Accessory
(MP3 player, Music Link etc.)
Navigation Display Unit

(with navigation}
Navigation Unit
(with navigation)
XM Receiver
(with XM)
Rrar controller
and screen
(with RES)
n
■ body ■
Operating Method
NOTE: Refer to the Owner's Manual fo r full operation details.
Audio Unit
1. Turn the rear entertainment system ON.
• After the main power switch "VOL PUSH PWR" (A) is turned ON, push "REAR PWR" switch (B) to turn the rear
system ON. To turn the rear system OFF, push "REAR PWR", and to turn the whole system OFF, push "VOL
PUSH PWR".
A M /F M (((
REAR
PWR
2. Using the selector knob.

• Turn left to select the front controls (Audio).
• Turn right to select the rear controls (After rear operation is finished, selector will automatically return to the
front control in 10 seconds).
O 9 ^ 9 9 9 x O
3. Rear Control Enable/Disable.

• By pushing the selector knob, the driver can prevent the rear passengers from operating the system. Each push
of the selector knob cycles the switch between ON-OFF (Rear Control Enabled/Rear Control Disabled). When
rear operation is disabled, the LCD on the audio unit displays "RR CONT OFF".
(cont'd)
4. Viewing the display.

• The display (A) indicates the status of the front and rear systems.
5. Rear speaker automatic OFF Function.

• By turning the rear speaker OFF, you can reduce the interference between the front source and the rear source
(Headphone). The speaker will be turned ON/OFF automatically when the front and rear have different sources
selected. When the rear speaker is in the OFF mode, the LCD display on the audio unit displays "RR SP OFF".
RR SP OFF
Wireless Remote Control

Remote control switch use and function.
* With "Rear Power ON", and the rear control enabled, the rear passengers can control the functions with the remote,
except volume.
• Rear passengers can control the functions, unless the rear control has been turned off by the front user.
Source selection
IF , BODY
h ■
DVD Player Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing a DVD player unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the follow ing table.
CONNECTOR B (2P)
..........■...';........ 1n r
"TntFl
13
o
C O N N E C T O R A (22P)
/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 /
/ 12 13 14 15 16
X 17 18 19 20 21
/
CONNECTOR A (22P) A20 ORN/BLU Audio unit (R/L GND)

Cavity Wire Connect to A21 GRY/ORN* Audio unit (R/L SHIELD)
A2 WHT Constant power (+B) * : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
A3 RED/BLK Lights-on signal (ILL+) insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the
A4 WHT/RED ACC (Main stereo power insulating tube, typically black or dark gray, may
supply) not match the color of the w ire listed on the
A5 BLU Audio unit (DVD) schematic.
A6 WHT Audio unit (DVD COMM2)
A7 GRN/BLU Audio unit CONNECTOR B (2P)
(DVD COMM GND) Cavity Wire Connect to
A8 ORN Audio unit (L CH) B1 Audio unit (DIGITAL SIG)
A9 BLU/GRN Audio unit (R CH) B2 Audio unit
A12- BLK Ground (G501) (DIGITAL SHIELD)
A13 RED Dash lights brightness
controller (ILL—)
A14 PNK Audio unit (DVD GND)
A15 GRY/PNK* Audio unit (DVD SHIELD)
A16 BRN/WHT Audio unit (SCTY AUDIO)
A17 BRN/YEL Rear controller and
screen (SCTY DVD)
A18 BRN Audio unit (DVD COMM1)
A19 BRN/WHT* Audio unit (DVD COMM
SHIELD)
(cont'd)
Rear Controller and Screen Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing a rear controller and screen connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
951
n n X n n
1
/ a / / 6 7 8
/ / / 12 13
/ 15 16
u
/ 18 19 20 21 22 23 / u
25 26
26P CONNECTOR 16 RED/BLU Audio unit (RR BUS—)

Cavity Wire Connect to 18 BLU Audio unit (RR NTSC)
1 WHT Constant power (+B) 19 BRN/BLK* Audio unit
3 RED/WHT Audio unit (RR BUS+) (RR NTSC SHIELD)
6 PNK Audio unit 20 WHT Audio unit (HP R/L GND)
(RR NTSC GND) 21 BRN* Audio unit
7 BRN Audio unit (HP L) (HP R/L SHIELD)
8 GRN/BLU Audio unit (HP R) 22 BLU Passenger's multiplex
12 RED/BLK Lights-on signal (ILL+) control unit (SCTY RR
13 YEL/RED Audio unit DISP)
(RR SYSTEM ACC) 23 BRN/YEL DVD player unit
15 BRN* Audio unit (SCTY DVD)
(RR BUS SHIELD) 25 RED Dash lights brightness
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube controller (ILL—)
insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the 26 BLK Ground (G901)
schematic.
Auxiliary Jack Assembly Connector for Inputs and Outputs
When replacing an auxiliary jack assembly connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in the following table.
. ^ - -----— — ----- ^
— -X _
T*” : ^
o o !
V ...... 1 J
i— i
1 2 3 4 5 6 /
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 16

1 BLK Ground (G504)
2 RED/BLK Light-on signal (ILL+)
3 BRN/WHT* Audio unit
(HP R/L OUT SHIELD)
4 GRY/YEL* Audio unit
(VIDE01 SHIELD)
5 GRY/ORN* Audio unit (R/L SHIELD)
6 WHT/RED Audio unit
(CONN CHECK)
8 RED Audio unit
(HP R/L OUT GND)
9 WHT Audio unit (VIDE01 GND)
10 BLK Audio unit (VIDE01)
11 WHT Audio unit (L CH)
12 BRN Audio unit (R/L GND)
13 GRN/BLU Audio unit (R CH)
14 BLK Audio unit (HP LOUT)
15 WHT Audio unit (HP ROUT)
16 RED Dash lights brightness
controller (ILL—)
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
schematic.
Circuit Diagram
G504
: Shielding
AM/FM
ANTENNA
SPEAKER SPEAKER DOORSPEAKER DOORSPEAKER
(cont'd)
The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube
No. 10(15A) FUSE The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark gray,
No. 48(20A) FUSE (PASSENGER'S may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
(UNDER-HOOD ACCESSORY (UNDER-DASH REAR : Shielding
FUSE/RELAY POWERSOCKET FUSE/RELAY CONTROLLER
BOX) RELAY BOX and SCREEN
G504
(cont'd)

■ ; Shielding
G901
The rear entertainment system has a self-diagnostic function that shows on the display. To run the self-diagnostic
function, do the fo l lowing:
How to Enter for Self-diagnostic Function with the Wireless Remote Control
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (I) position.
2. To run the self-diagnosis, press the DVD/AUX button (KA model) or DVD button (KC model), the AM/FM button,
the 6 button, and then the AM/FM button again. The buttons must be pressed in that order, within 2 seconds of
each other (see table), and the self-diagnostic begins.
NOTE:
• If the display does not work, try to enter the self-diagnostic function by using the audio unit.
• Use the wireless remote to navigate within the self-diagnostic function.
USA model Canada model

S BUTTON 6 BUTTON
USA model Canada model
DVD/ AM / 6 AM/
DVD
AM/ AM/
AU X FM ►► FM FM FM
ON - ----------- O N ---------
OFF- u rr" ™-
^ — ► — ► ^— ► ___ ► ------►
Within 2 seconds Within 2 seconds
(cont'd)
How to Enter the Self-diagnostic Function with the Audio Unit
NOTE:
• Use the wireless remote control to enter the self-diagnostic function prior to entering the self-diagnostic function
with the audio unit
• If you can't enter the self-diagnostic function using the wireless remote control, but get an image on the display
when entering using the audio unit, swap a known-good remote. If OK, replace the remote.
• If you can't enter the self-diagnostic function using the wireless remote control, and don't get an image on the
display when entering using the audio unit, check the units that are connected to the audio unit.
• Use the wireless remote to navigate within the self-diagnostic function.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (I) position.
2. To run the self-diagnosis, press the REAR PWR button four times within 5 seconds.
Continue to hold button Continue to hold button

down for 1 second down for 1 second
ON
Audio unit
REAR PWR button
OFF
Within 5 seconds
Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing the repair, run the self-diagnostic
function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
Self-diagnostic Function Mode Select
Use the wireless remote control to navigate within the self-diagnostic function.
LEFT/RIGHT button: Change the function mode

UP/DOWN button: Change the detection
ENTER button: Select the detection point
UP BUTTON
Function Category Check item or Information Judge display

No.
1 CONNECT DVD PLAYER DVD player unit connection check OKorNG
with GRN or RED
H/U Audio unit connection check OKorNG
with GRN or RED
JACK ASSY Auxiliary jack assembly connection check OK or NG
with GRN or RED
DEVICE Device connection information Device code
2 STATUS + B VOLT + B voltage * * V or Err
TEMP. Screen temperature * * h or Err
DISP PANEL Screen open or close condition OPEN or NG
3 UNIT CHECK RAM CHECK Rear controller and screen RAM check OKorNG
ERR. STATUS DVD player unit error status Error code
DIGITAL OUT Digital out connection check OKorNG
4 VERSION RR DISPLAY Rear controller and screen version information
DVD PLAYER DVD player unit version information
H/U Audio unit version information
(cont'd)
Self-diagnostic Function Mode Display
1. CONNECT
The screen will display connection cheek status for each device while in this self-diagnostic mode.
• "RR DISPLAY" (rear controller and screen) will always indicate OK (green color).
• The screen indicates connecting device codes.
• If the connection for the "H/U" (audio unit) is "DVD" (DVD player unit), or "JACK" (auxiliary jack assembly) is
faulty, the screen will display NG (red color).
Connection check Connecting device codes

Connection OK: Green color
Connection NG: Red color
Connecting Connecting device

devi ce code
0 Built-i n control block
1 Audio unit button and LCD
2 Built-in audio block
6 Built-in CD changer
7 Built-in AM/FMtuner unit
19 XM receiver
1B DVD player unit
2. STATUS
The screen will display the screen status while in this self-diagnostic mode.
• If there is a change (analog to digital) of signal error for the categories "+ B VOLT" or "TEMP", the screen will
display "Err".
• The screen indicates an open or closed condition of the screen.
Screen open/close condition Normal: Green color

OPEN: Green color Error: Red color
CLOSE: Red color
(cont'd)
3. UN IT CHECK
The screen will display self-diagnostic status while in this self-diagnostic mode.
1 I 2 [: 9 l l S 9 . 9 9 9*
Digital out connection check \ RAM CHECKING: White color

OK: Green color \ RAM OK: Green col or
NG: Red color \ RAM NG: Red color
DVD player unit error information
OK: Green color
ERROR: Red color
Error Code Displayed Possi ble Cause

MECHA Disc read or eject error
FOCUS Cannot read disc
REGION Region code mismatch
ROM Built-in FLASH memory data broken
PARENTAL Parental error
DISC Disc format that is not recognized
4. VERSION
The screen will display the device version information while in this self-diagnostic mode.
If a connection to a device is no-good, the screen will display
(cont'd)
Howto Enter the Audio System Self-diagnostic Function to Check the C onnected U n its S ta tu s
NOTE; This function operates when the rear controller and screen does not function, and can be used to check the
status of the units connected to the audio unit.
2. Push the "VOL push PWR" knob (A) to ON.
3. To run the self-diagnosis mode, simultaneously push and hold the buttons "DISC+6" "SEEK+" and "A.SEL" for
more than 2 seconds.
4. Release the buttons when a diagnosis message and diagnosis indication shows in the display (B) of the audio unit.
It changes every 3 seconds for the XM receiver (XM), DVD player unit (DVD), the rear controller and screen
(R-DISP), and auxiliary jack assembly (AUX).
5. When no problem is detected, the system returns to normal operation automatically followed by a single audible
beep.
Normal
i73nTn o A%l/M
0*7 'l
c n n js
.U M U M .
3sec.
t it n r w /'
±$±f iU Ja g o o
3sec.
3sec.
T| 7 O f"
M lh s j hOfu A G O O II
3sec.
I
STs
Id H G tto jj PRSS
6. When a problem is detected, the system will display which component has the error followed by three audible
beeps.
Faulty
a i o r v w c p p
it 1 r a j A H
3 sec.
T i r o r c p p
± l ± ! i U M ' B
3 sec.
T U o r p _ B T C p c p p
± i ± i i U is J t ± U l
3 sec.
i l l IV c p p
i l l H b L > f\9 s
3 sec.
js i o r C M 7* c p p
a i n u O ^X f .
Refer to the following table for troubleshooting procedures:

Error Code Displayed Diagnostic Procedure
DIAG XM ERR (only) Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-344)
DIAG DVD ERR (only) Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-404)
DIAG R-DISP ERR (only) Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-407)
DIAG AUX ERR (only) Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-410)
DIAG XM ERR and R-DISP ERR Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-407)
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF or push the "VOL push PWR" button to cancel the self-diagnostic function.
RES disc does not load RES disc does not eject
NOTE: NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first. • Check the vehicle battery condition first.
• Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD • Disc with labels should not be used in the DVD player
player unit. They may damage the player mechanism. unit. They may damage the player mechanism.
• Make sure the CD or DVD is compatible with the
system (refer to the Owner's Manual for more 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
information).
2. Try ejecting the disc from the DVD player unit.
D o e s th e d is c e je c t?
2. Try loading a disc into the DVD player unit.
YES—Intermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK
D o e s th e d is c lo a d ? at this time. ■
YES—Intermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK NO—Goto step 3.

at this time. ■
3. Turn the ignition switch off.
NO—Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the DVD player unit 22P connector and
3. Insert a known-good disc into the DVD player unit. wait 2 minutes, then reconnect the connector.
D o e s th e d is c lo a d ? 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—The original disc is faulty. ■ 6. Try ejecting the disc from the DVD player unit.
NO—Go to step 4. D o e s th e d is c e je c t?
4. Check the Diagnosis Menu 1. CONNECT of the RES YES—Intermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK
self-diagnostic test (see page 22-398). at this time ■
Is th e D V D p la y e r u n it c o n n e c t c o n d it io n O K ? NO—Replace the DVD player unit (see page 22-423).
YES—Replace the DVD player unit (see page

22-423). ■
NO—Repair the loose connection in the DVD player

unit connections.*
RES disc does not play 5. Check the "UNIT CHECK" of the rear entertainment
system self-diagnostic (see page 22-398).
NOTE;
• Check the vehicle battery condition first. Is th e D V D p la y e r u n it e rro r s ta tu s in d ic a to r O K ?
• CD-R/RWs and DVD-R/RWs will not work in the DVD
player unit. YES—Go to step 6.
• Damaged or contaminated discs may not always play
properly. NO-
• Discs with labels should not be used in the DVD - If "MECHA" or "FOCUS" or "ROM" is indicated:
player unit. They may damage the player mechanism. Replace the DVD player unit.B
- If "REGION" or "DISC" is indicated; Change the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). unrecognized format disc.B
• If "INVALID REGION" is indicated: Replace the
2. Try loading a disc into the DVD player unit. DVD player unit information). ■
• If "PARENTAL" is indicated: Check the parental
D o e s th e d is c p la y (d is p la y a n d so u n d )? level or password (refer to the Owner's Manual
for more information). *
YES—Intermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK
at this time. ■ 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—Goto step 3. 7. Substitute a known-good DVD player unit (see page
22-423), then test the DVD player unit.
3. Insert a known-good disc into the DVD player unit.
Is th e s o u n d n o rm a l?
D o e s th e d is c p la y (d is p la y a n d so u n d )?
YES—Replace the original DVD player unit.B
YES—The original disc is faulty or is an unreadable
format.* NO—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
DVD player unit connectors, and recheck. B
NO—Goto step 4.
4. Check the Diagnosis Menu 1. CONNECT of the rear

entertainment system self-diagnostic
(see page 22-398).
Is th e D VD p la y e r un it c o n n e c t c o n d itio n O K ?
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Repair the poor connection in the DVD player

unit connectors.*
RES disc skips 6. Compare the disc skipping to a known-good vehicle

under the same conditions.
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first. D o e s th e k n o w n -g o o d v e h ic le ’s d is c s k ip u n d e r th e
• Copy protected material on a CD-R/RWor DVD-R/RW s a m e c o n d itio n s ( o v e r th e s a m e b u m p s a n d on th e
disc will skip or not play. s a m e ro u g h ro a d s)?
• Check for scratches, smudges, and finger prints on
the disc. YES—Operation is normal. ■
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO—Substitute a known-good DVD player unit,
2. Insert the disc into the DVD player unit and try replace the original DVD player unit (see page
playing a disc. 22-423). ■
D o e s th e d is c s k ip ?
YES—Goto step 3.
NO—intermittent failure, the DVD player unit is OK
at this time.!
3. Clean the disc, and recheck.
D o e s th e d is c p la y p r o p e r ly ?
YES—The original disc was dirty.B

NO—Go to step 4.
4. Insert a known-good disc.
D o e s th e d is c p la y p r o p e r ly ?
YES—The original disc is dirty or wrong type. ■
NO—Go to step 5.
5. Check the "UNIT CHECK" of the rear entertainment
system self-diagnostic (see page 22-398).
Is th e D V D p la y e r u n it e rro r s ta tu s in d ic a to r O K ?
YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Replace the DVD player unit (see page 22-423).
Black picture is shown on the display 7. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the rear controller and screen 26P connector and
NOTE: body ground.
* If the audio unit, or XM radio do notfunction properly, REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN
troubleshoot and resolve those problems first. 26P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). + B

(WHT) rs n n n
1 9/ /3 6 7 8 / 9 / 12 13
2. Push the audio unit rear power switch ON to see if / 15 LyJ
16
/ 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26
the screen turns ON.
D o e s th e s c r e e n c o m e O N ? X
YES—Operation is normal at this time. ■
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Check for brightness settings in the display set up Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?

(refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
YES—Go to step 8.
A re th e d isp la y s e ttin g s e t p r o p e r ly ?
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the No. 48
YES—Go to step 4. (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse box and the rear
controller and screen. B
NO—Adjust the display setting and recheck the
function. ■ 8. Measure the voltage between the rear controller
and screen 26P connector terminal No. 26 and body
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ground.
5. Check the No. 48 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN
box. 26P CONNECTOR
1
/ 3
/ / 6 7 8 / / / 12 13
YES—Go to step 6. / 15 16
/ 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26
LifJ 4 r GND
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. ■ (BLK)
6. Remove the display cover (see page 22-423). Then

check that the rear controller and screen is properly
connected. Wire side of female terminals
Is th e re a r c o n tro lle r a n d s c r e e n c o n n e c te d
p ro p e rly ? Is th e r e le s s th a n 0.1 V ?
YES—Go to step 7. YES—Replace the rear controller and screen. ■
NO—Reconnect the connector, and recheck the NO—Repair open in the wire between the rear
function. ■ controller and screen 26P connector terminal
No. 26 and body ground (G901).H
W h ite p ic tu re is sh o w n on th e d is p la y / D isp la y area p ic tu re has lin e s o r has s h ifte d

d is p la y lo ck
2. Push the rear power switch ON to see if the screen
2. Push the audio unit rear power switch ON to see if turns ON.
the screen turns ON.
D o e s th e s c r e e n h a v e lin e s or h a s th e im a g e
D o e s th e d is p la y tu r n o n ? s h ifte d ?
YES—Operation is normal. ■ YES—Goto step 3.
NO—Goto step 3. NO—Operation is normal at this time. ■
3. Do the rear entertainment system self-diagnostic 3. Check the screen set up (refer to the Owner's
(see page 22-395). Manual for more information).
D o e s th e s e lf-d ia g n o s tic in d ic a te O K ? A r e th e s e ttin g s s e t p r o p e r ly ?
YES—Check the self-diagnostic information. ■ YES—Substitute a known-good rear controller and

screen, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
NO—Substitute a known-good rear controller and goes away, replace the original rear controller and
screen, and recheck. If the symptom/indication screen (see page 22-423). ■
goes away, replace the original rear controller and
screen (see page 22-423). ■ NO—Adjust the display settings and recheck the
function. ■
r-5 i
j§] BODY |.
Display does not go off when screen is No display appears on the rear controller
closed indicator
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first. NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first.
2. Open the screen, and push the audio unit rear 2. Push the audio unit rear power switch ON to see if
power switch ON. Then close the screen by the indicator turns ON.
pivoting it up.
D o e s th e in d ic a to r c o m e on?
D o e s th e s c r e e n g o o f f ?
YES—Operation is normal at this time.B
NO—Go to step 3.
NO—Goto step 3.
3. Check the operation and display of the screen, the
3. Check the lock switch. wireless remote control, and the wireless
headphone.
D o e s th e s c r e e n c lo s e s e c u r e ly ?
D o e s th e s y s t e m o p e r a te norm ally, a n d d o e s th e
YES—If the screen securely closes, and the screen d is p la y c o m e o n ?
does not go off, replace i t ■
YES—Faulty rear indicator.■
NO—Relock the screen, and recheck. If the screen
will not securely lock into position, replace i t ■ NO-
• Screen faulty: Go to the "Black picture is shown
on the display" troubleshooting (see page
22-407). ■
• Wireless remote control faulty: Go to the
"Wireless remote control does not work (all
buttons)" troubleshooting (see page 22-418).■
• Wireless headphone faulty: Go to the "Wireless
headphone sound is weak, distorted, volume
does not change, or there is no sound in all
modes "troubleshooting (see page 22-416).■
No sound/no display w ith auxiliary video 7. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and
unit inputs disconnect audio unit connector D (40P).
NOTE; 8. Disconnect auxiliary jack assembly 16P connector.
• Check the vehicle battery condition first
• Check that the auxiliary device is properly connected, 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
and has fresh batteries or power source connected. audio unit connector D (40P) terminal No. 25 and
• Do not connect an RCAtype shorting plug with the No. 27 individually.
auxiliary jack assembly 16P connected, or system
damage may occur. A U D IO U N IT CO N N EC TO R D (40P)

1I21a14IsIe|7|8 10111112!131141161161918119I201
|21[22123124-125[gj|2T|<b|29| 311321919I9I9I9IM|ig140
2. Connect an auxiliary video source, and check the V ID E 0 1 (BLK) V ID E O I G N D <WHT>
volume/display operation.
A re th e s o u n d a n d d is p la y n o rm a l?
W ire s id e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls
YES—Operation is normal at this time.B Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?

NO—Go to step 3. YES—Short to body ground in the wire(s) between
audio unit connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack
3. Substitute a known-good auxiliary video unit, and assembly 16P connector. Replace the affected
recheck. shielded harness. B
D o e s th e a u x ilia ry v id e o u n it o p e r a te p r o p e r ly ? NO—Go to step 10.
YES—Original auxiliary video unit faulty. B 10. Check for continuity between audio unit connector
D (40P) according to the table.
NO—Go to step 4.
From terminal To termi nals
4. Check the Diagnosis Menu 1. CONNECT of the rear D25 D26, D27
entertainment system self-diagnostic mode D26 D27
(see page 22-398).
A U D IO U N IT CON N EC TO R D (40P)
Is th e a u x ilia ry ja c k a s s e m b ly c o n n e c tio n O K
(g r e e n co lo r)?
1 1 2 1 a ) 4 I 6 [ 6 1 7 1 8 faT io 1111 J 13 114116 116 | 9 | 18119 1
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Go to step 5. W ire s id e o f fe m a le te rm in a ls
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n a n y o f th e te rm in a ls?

YES—Short in the wire(s) between audio unit
6. Remove the auxiliary jack assembly (see page connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P
22-425). Check that the auxiliary jack assembly is connector. Replace the affected shielded
properly connected. harness. B
Is th e a u x ilia ry ja c k a s s e m b ly c o n n e c te d
p ro p e rly ?
YES—Go to step 7.
function. B
r~
■ - BODY ■
11. Check fo r continuity between audio unit connector 12. Check for:continuity between body ground and
D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P connector audio unit connector D (40P) terminal No; 29, No 31
according to the table. and No. 32 individually.
Audio unit Auxiliary jack

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D WOPF
connector assembly connector
D25 9
\ D27 ; ; 10 -
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 [ 7 | 8 9 | l0 111 112 13 [ I 4T16116 I / T iT l9 T 2 0 )
| 21 122123 1M 125 126 127128 129 1301311321 9 V V 1 / I 9 1 3 8 13914 0
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D ( 4 0 P ) R/L GND (BRN) LCH (WHT)
(U )R C H @
(GRIW T
1 I 2 k l 4 | 6 | 8 |7 | 8 9 110 111 112 1 3 114 J18 [ i s l T l 18 [ 19I 20] BLU) 4 r
J211^ 1 23124125 1^ 12? 1281291» | 811^ ® I » 140
V IDE01 GND VIDEOI (B L K )

,WHT> b

1 2 3 4 5 6 audio unit connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 16 assembly 16P connector. Replace the affected
VIDE01 GND VIDEOI (BLK)
IWHT)
.NO—Go to step 13.
AUX ILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY 16P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female termina ls
connector D (40P) according to the table.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? From terminal To "terminals'

030 D29, D31, D32
YES—Go to step 12. D29 D31, D32
D31 D32
NO—Open in the wire(s) between audio unit
connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P AUDIO UNIT C O N N E C T O R D (40P)
connector. Replace the affected shielded
harness.!
1f 2T 31 4j s J e 1 7I s F 9 110 | 11 [12 13 114118 116 i / i 18 119 ! 20 ]

\n\2z\m\m\2&\2§\zt\m\m\m\®\$i\/\/\AAA^\m\m
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?

connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P
harness. ■
NO—Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
14. Check for continuity between audio unit connector 15. Connect an RCAtype shorting plug to each audio
D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P connector input (Rand L).
NOTE: Do not connect the RCAtype shorting plug
Audio unit Auxiliary jack with the auxiliary jack assembly 16P connector, or
connector assembly connector system damage may occur.
D29 12
D31 13 16. Check for continuity between the following
D32 11 terminals of the auxiliary jack assembly.
No. 11 o No. 1
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D ( 4 0 P ) No. 13 No. 1
i U h U l B l e i T l s 9 110 111112 13 114116 116 \/ \ 18 119 f20 j AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY 16P CONNECTOR
12112212312412S1261271281291301311321 / | / | / | / | / | 38139140
R/L GND (BRN) LCH (WHT)
R CH GND (BLK)
(GRN/ 1-----1
BLU) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
X
L CH (WHT) RCH (GRN/BLU)

1 2 3 4 6 X
5
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 16
L CH (WHT) R/L RCH (GRN/BLU) Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
GND
(BRN)
YES—Goto step 17.
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY 16P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals NO—Faulty auxiliary jack assembly. ■
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? 17. Remove the RCAtype shorting plug(s) and check
the same terminals again for continuity.
connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P YES—Faulty auxiliary jack assembly. ■
harness. ■ NO—Faulty audio unit. ■
Wired headphone sound is weak, distorted,, 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
volume does not change, or there is no . audio unit connector D (40P) terminal No. 12, No 14
sound and No. 15 individually.
NOTE: Check the vehicle battery condition first. AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (40P)
HP R OUT (WHT)
1. Check that the wired headphone jack is properly
connected. HP R/L OUT GND (RED) HP L OUT (BLK)
l U b U u U M s 9 110 111112 131141151161 / | 18119120 1
Is th e h e a d p h o n e ja c k c o n n e c te d p r o p e r ly ? 121122123124125128127128129180131132 l 9 V 1 / l 9 l / t 3 8 1 39140
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Reconnect the wired headphone connector,

and recheck the symptom. ■ Wire side of female terminals

3. Substitute a known-good wired headphone set, and
recheck the symptom. YES—Short to body ground in the wire(s) between
audio unit connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack
D o e s th e s y m p to m g o a w a y ? assembly 16P connector. Replace the affected
YES—Original wired headphone set is faulty. ■
NO—Go to step 9.
NO—Go to step 4.
9. Check for continuity between audio unit connector
4. Plug the wired headphones into the other ports of D (40P) as shown.
the auxiliary jack assembly to check their condition.
From terminal To terminals
D o all th e p o r ts h a v e th e s a m e s y m p to m ? D12 D13, D14, D15
D13 D14, D15
YES—Go to step 5. D14 D io
NO—Replace the auxiliary jack assembly (see page AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (40P)
22-425).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1

9 110 111112 13 114115 16 L / i 18 (191201
i U U U I e l e M e
I 21122123124125126127128129 13013113219 1 / 1 / 1 9 l / 1 38139140
disconnect audio unit connector D (40P).
NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio Wire side of female terminals
mechanism. Is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n a n y o f th e te rm in a ls?
7. Disconnect auxiliary jack assembly 16P connector. YES—Short in the wire(s) between audio unit
connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P
harness. ■
(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between audio unit connector Wireless headphones do not work or there is
D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P connector static in DVD mode
NOTE:
Audio unit Auxiliary jack • Check the vehicle battery condition first.
connector assembly connector • Check the wireless headphone battery condition first.
D12 8
D13 3 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
D14 15
D15 14 2. Check the diagnosis menu 1. CONNECT and 3.
UNIT CHECKof the rear entertainment system self
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (40P)
diagnostic (see page 22-398).
HP R/L OUT SH I ELD (BRN/W HT) Is th e s e lf-d ia g n o s tic s ta tu s in d ic a to r O K (G r e e n

HP R OUT (WHT) c o lo r)?
YES—Go to the "Wireless headphone sound is
1----------------- 1 weak, distorted, there is static volume does not
l U U U U l e M a 9 110 111112 13 114115 116 L / 1 18 j 19 | 2D |
1
121 122123124 2 5 128 12712 8 12 9 1301311321 / / M I / 1 / 1 38 139140
change, or there is no sound in all modes (see page
22-416h"B
NO—Go to step 3.
HP R/L OUT SH I ELD 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

(BRN/W HT)
1 2 3 6 X
4 5
8 9 10 11 X 12 13 14 15 16
HP L OUT (BLK) HP R OUT unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load
HP R/L
(WHT)
OUT mechanism.
GND (RED)
AUXILIARY JACK ASSEMBLY 16P CONNECTOR 5. Check that the audio unit digital audio lead 2P
Wire side of female terminals connector is properly connected to the audio unit.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? Is th e d ig ita l a u d io 2 P c o n n e c to r c o n n e c te d
p r o p e r ly ?
YES—Substitute a known-good auxiliary jack YES—Go to step 6.
assembly (see page 22-425) and recheck. If the NO—Reconnect the digital audio lead 2P connector
symptom/indication goes away, replace the and recheck the wireless headphone function. ■
original auxiliary jack assembly. If the symptom is
still present, substitute a known-good audio unit 6. Remove the DVD player unit (see page 22-423).
(see page 22-372) and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original audio 7. Check that the DVD player unit digital audio lead 2P
unit.B connector is properly connected to the DVD player
unit.
connector D (40P) and auxiliary jack assembly 16P Is th e d ig ita l a u d io le a d 2 P c o n n e c to r c o n n e c te d
connector. Replace the affected shielded p ro p e rly ?
harness. ■ YES—Goto step 8.
NO—Reconnect the digital audio lead 2P connector
and recheck the wireless headphone function. ■
8. Disconnect the digital audio lead 2P connector from

the audio unit and the DVD player unit.
9| I B9ODY !! |
9. Check for continuity between the audio unit digital 11. Check for continuity between the audio unit digital
audio lead 2P connector No. 1 terminal and the audio lead 2P connector No. 1 terminal No. 2
DVD player unit digital audio 2P connector No. 1 terminal.
terminal.
AUDIO UNIT DIGITAL AUDIO 2P CONNECTOR AUDIO UNIT DIGITAL AUDIO 2P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of female termina ls
DIGITAL SIG
DIGITAL TAG
DIGITAL
SHIELD
DIGITAL SIG Terminal side of female terminals

DVD PLAYER UNIT DIGITAL AUDIO 2P CONNECTOR
YES—Replace the digital audio lead. H
NO—Go to step 12.
NO—Replace the digital audio lead. ■
12. Substitute a known-good DVD player unit, and
10. Check for continuity between the audio unit digital recheck the wireless headphone function.
audio lead 2P connector No. 1 terminal and body
ground. Do th e w ir e le s s h e a d p h o n e s w o rk in D V D m o d e ?
AUDIO UNIT DIGITAL AUDIO 2P CONNECTOR

YES—Replace the original DVD player unit
(see page 22-423). ■
DIGITAL SIG
NO—Replace the digital audio lead. ■

W ireless headphone sound is w e a k, sound is 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
d is to rte d , th e re is s ta tic , v o lu m e does n o t audio unit connector D (40P) terminal No. 21, No 23
change, o r th e re is no sound in a ll m odes and No. 24 individually.
NOTE: AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR D (40P)

• Check the wireless headphone battery condition first.
1-------------------F
1. Check the lens on the rear edge of the rear screen ' 12 U 1 *U 16 I T | 8 1
9 110 11112 13 114115 116 | 9 1 18 119 1201
for dirt or damage. |21 1a 1

123124125 2 6 127128 a 1 |a ) | 31132 l / l / l / l / L / j ^ 1^ 140
HP R (GRN/BLU)
HP R/L
D o e s th e re a r s c r e e n a p p e a r to b e in g o o d GND HPL (C f)
c o n d itio n ? (WHT) ^ T ^ ( B R N ) ^
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Substitute a known-good rear controller and
screen and recheck the symptom. ■
2. Substitute a known-good wireless headphone.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). audio unit connector D (40P) and rear controller
and screen 26P connector. Replace the affected
4. Turn on the RES system and recheck the symptom. shielded harness. ■
D o e s th e s y m p to m g o a w a y ? NO—Go to step 9.
YES—Replace the original wireless headphone. ■ 9. Check for continuity between audio unit connector
D (40P) according to the table.
NO—Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. D21 D22, D23, D24
D22 D23, D24
6. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and D23 D24
disconnect audio unit connector D (40P).
mechanism. T------------------- \
i U U U U U M s 9 110 111 [ 12 13114 fi5 1 i e l 7 l 1 8] 19 la o f
7. Disconnect rear controller and screen 26P 1 111

I 21 22123124125 28 27 28 12S130 31 32 1 1 \/\/\/\/\/\ 3 8 139 140
connector.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n a n y o f th e te rm in a ls?

connector D (40P) and rear controller and screen
26P connector. Replace the affected shielded
harness. ■
10. Check fo r continutty between audio unit connector
D (40P) and rear controller and screen 26?
connector according to the table.
Audio unit Rear controller and

connector sa’een connector
D21 20
D22 21
D23 7
024 8

HP R/L
1--------n
i UUI^ bUItIs 9 [10 1
11 j 12 1
31116116 l/^l13119120 [
GND 121122 123 12412 5 126 127 12B129 130131132 \/[/[/[/[/\ 38 138 140
(WHT)
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN 26P CONNECTOR


connector D (40P) and rear controller and screen
26P connector. Replace the affected shielded
harness. ■
11. Substitute a known-good audio unit and recheck.
D o e s th e s y m p to m g o a w a y ?
YES—Replace the original audio unit.B

NO—Replace the rear controller and screen. B
Wireless remote control does not work (all W ireless rem o te control d o es n o t w ork
buttons) (source se le ct b u tto n s)
NOTE: NOTE: Check the battery condition first.
• Check the battery condition first.
* Make sure that the rear control (RR CTRL) on the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
audio unit is turned off (refer to the Owner's Manual
for more information). 2. Check the wireless remote control operation.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). D o e s th e s o u r c e s e l e c t b u tto n o p e r a te ?
2. Check the wireless remote control operation. YES—Operation is normal at this time. ■
D o e s th e w ir e le s s r e m o te c o n tro l o p e ra te NO—Go to step 3.

n o rm a lly ?
3. Check the diagnosis menu 1, CONNECT status of
YES—Operation is normal at this time.B the rear entertainment system self-diagnostic
(see page 22-398).
NO—Go to step 3.
Is th e d e v ic e c o n n e c t c o n d itio n O K ?
3. Substitute a known-good wireless remote control,
and recheck. YES—Replace the wireless remote control. ■
D o e s th e w ir e le s s r e m o te c o n tro l o p e r a te NO—Repair the poor connection for the device that
n o rm a lly ? has a connection error indicated. ■
YES—Replace the original wireless remote

control. ■
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Check the audio unit operation.
D o e s th e a u d io u n it o p e r a te n o rm a lly ?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Go to the "Power switch will not turn ON (No
information display and no sound)"
troubleshooting (see page 22-337).■
5. Check the rear controller display.
D o e s th e d is p la y o p e r a te n o rm a lly ?
YES—Replace the rear indicator printed circuit

board (see page 22-423).■
NO—Go to the "No display appears on the rear
controller indicator" troubleshooting (see page
22-409). ■
Wireless remote control does not work (rear Screen backlight does not dim/remains dim
power button) 9
2. Check the wireless remote control operation. 2. Turn the combination light switch ON and OFF,
D o e s th e a u d io u n it in d ic a t e “ R E A R P W R ” ?
D o e s th e s c r e e n b a c k lig h t d im w ith th e
c o m b in a tio n lig h t s w itc h in th e O N p o sitio n ?
YES—Replace the wireless remote control. ■
NO—Go to step 3.
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Press the "REAR PWR" button of the audio unit.
3. Check the backlight settings in the display set up
Is it no rm a l? (refer to the Owner's Manual for more information).
YES—Operation is normal at this time. ■ A re th e d is p la y s e ttin g s s e t p r o p e r ly ?
NO—Replace the wireless remote control. ■ YES—Goto step 4.

NO—Adjust the display settings and recheck the
. functions. B
5. Check that No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the passenger's
Is th e f u s e O K ?
YES—Goto step 6.
NO—Replace the fuse and recheck the symptom. B
6. Check that the rear controller screen and audio unit

are properly connected.
A re th e c o n n e c tio n s O K ?
YES—Goto step7.
function, fl
(cont'd)
7. Disconnect the rearcontroller and screen 26P 10. While opening the combination light switch,
connector. measure the voltage between the rear controller
and screen 26P connector terminal No. 26 and body
9. Measure the voltage between the rear controller REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN 26P CONNECTOR
and screen 26P connector No. 12 terminal and body
ground. Operate the combination light switch on
and off to see if the voltage changes. n......... n................ ... n n
1 / 9/ 3 6 7 8 / / / 12 13
REAR CONTROLLER AND SCREEN 26P CONNECTOR / 15 LyJ

16 / 18 19 20 21 22 23
£
25 26
L------K -y -J -------
GND (BLK)
ILL+ (RED/BLK)
n .......n .... n n_ v
1 / 3 / 9 6 7 8 / / / 12 13
15 16 9 18 19 20 21 22 23 / 25 26
/
Is th e r e le s s th a n 0.1 V ?
Wire side of female terminals YES—Repair open in the wire between rear
controller and screen 26P connector terminal
No. 26 and body ground (G901). ■
Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e w ith th e c o m b in a tio n lig h t
s w itc h O N ? NO—Replace the rear controller and screen
(see page 22-423). ■
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the No. 10

(15 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box and the rear controller and screen. ■
DVD player unit illumination does not come 4. Measure the voltage between DVD player unit 22P
on/does not dim connector No. 3 terminal: and-No. 13 terminal.
Operate the dash brightness controller dial to see if
NOTE: the voltage changes.
• If all of the dash lights does not come on, check the DVD PLAYER UNIT 22P CONNECTOR
No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box first.
IL L + (RED/BLK)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). c;—?
X 2 3 4
5 X 6 7 8 9
X
2. Turn the combination light switch ON and OFF. X 12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21
X
IL L - (RED)
D o e s th e D V D p la y e r u n it illu m in a tio n d im w ith th e
c o m b in a tio n ligh t s w itc h in th e O N p o sitio n ?
YES—Operation is normal at this time.B Wire side of female terminals
NO—Go to step 3.
D o e s th e v o lta g e c h a n g e ?
3. Measure the voltage between the DVD player unit
22P connector No. 3 terminal and body ground. YES—Replace the DVD player unit (see page
Operate the combination light switch to see if the 22-423). ffl
voltage changes.
NO—Repair open or short in the wire between the
DVD PLAYER UNIT 22P CONNECTOR DVD player unit and gauge control module.■
1LL+ (RED/BLK)
/ 2 3 4 5 X 6 7 8 9 X
12 13 14 15 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 X
/
Y)
YES—Goto step 4.
DVD player unit.B
DVD p la ye r u n it DISC IN in d ic a to r o r DISC W ireless re m o te c o n tro l illu m in a tio n does

DISTINCTION in d ic a to r does n o t com e o n / n o t com e on
does n o t go o ff
2. Check the wireless remote control button
2. Check the DVD player unit operation. illumination.
D o e s th e D V D p la y e r unit o p e r a te n o rm a lly ? D o e s th e illu m in a tio n fo r all th e b u tto n s c o m e on
(1 0 s e c o n d s )?
YES—Operation is normal at this time. ■
NO—Go to step 3.
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Substitute a known-good disc, and recheck.
3. Replace the batteries in the wireless remote control,
Is it n o rm a l? and recheck (see page 22-426).
YES—Original disc is faulty. ■ D o e s th e w ir e le s s c o n tro l illu m in a tio n c o m e o n ?
NO—Substitute a known-good DVD player unit, YES—The original batteries were faulty. ■
and recheck. ■
NO—Wireless remote control is faulty. ■
DVD Player Unit Removal/ Rear Controller and Screen
Installation Removal/Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the NOTE:

SRS component locations (see page 23-17), and the • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
precautions and procedures (see page 23-19) before • Take care not to scratch the headliner and display
doing repairs or service. cover.
NOTE; 1. Remove the display cover.
parts.
1. Remove the center lower cover (see page 20-88).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the climate

control unit (B) and DVD player unit (C).
2. Remove the mounting bolts, disconnect the

connector (A) from the rear controller and screen.
3. Remove the screws, then remove the climate

control unit and DVD player unit.
4. Remove the screws (A) and the DVD player unit (B).
5. Install the DVD player unit in the reverse order of

removal, and make sure the DVD player unit
connectors are plugged in properly.
(cont'd)
Rear Controller and Screen Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Remove the wireless remote control (A). 7. Remove the screws, then remove the screen (A)
and base (B). Disconnect the cable (C).
4. Remove the screws from the rear indicator (B).
5. Disconnect the cable (C) from the rear indicator.
6. Remove the screws, then remove the rear indicator

printed circuit card (A).
8. Remove the screws and lock switches (A).

Auxiliary Jack Assembly
Replacement
9. Disconnect the cable (A), then remove the screws
and the rear control printed circuit card.
1. Remove the console rear trim .{see page 20-88).
2. Disconnect the 16P connector (A) from the auxiliary
jack assembly (B).
10. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the rear controller and screen
connector is plugged in properly.
3. Remove the screws (C) from the auxiliary jack

assembly.
4. Carefully pry the auxiliary jack assembly out of the
console rear trim.
5. Install the auxiliary jack assembly in the reverse
order of removal.
Wireless Headphone Battery Wireless Remote Control Battery
1. Remove the battery cover (A) from the wireless 1. Remove the cover (A) from the remote control.
headphone and lift the covers.
2. Remove the battery (B) from the wireless 2. Remove the batteries (B).
headphone.
Replacement Battery: BR3032
Replacement Battery Size: AAA
3. Confirm that each operation works normally after
3. Turn the left speaker (A), and confirm that the replacing the batteries.
indicator (B) comes on after the battery is replaced.
Special Tools ................................................................... 22-428
Component Location Index ...................... ................... 22-429
General Troubleshooting Information ...... ................ 22-430
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................................ 22-437
System Description ....................................................... 22-441
Circuit Diagram ............................................................... 22-460
Symptom Troubleshooting .......................................... 22-463
System Diagnostic Mode .............................................. 22-487
Forced Starting of Display ............................................ 22-507
DVD-ROM Replacement ................................................ 22-507
Navigation Unit Removal/Installation ........................ 22-508
Navigation Display Unit Removal/Installation ........... 22-509
GPS Antenna Removal/lnstailation ............................ 22-509
Rearview Camera Removal/Installation ..... ............... 22-510
Voice Control Switch Test/Replacement .................... 22-510
Special Tools

07PAZ-0010100 SCS Service Connector 1
©
VOICE CONTROL SWITCH

MICROPHONE
(Inside the map light housi ng!
GPS ANTENNA
Removal/lnstailation, page 22-509
PCM (Vehicle Speed Pulse)
AUDIO UNIT
Removal/lnstailation, page 22-372
NAVIGATION UNIT
NAVIGATION SERVICE
CHECK CONNECTOR
Forced starting of display, page 22-507
REARVIEW CAMERA
General Operation Seif-lnertial Navigation Limitations
Refer to the Honda Navigation System manual, for the The limitations of the self-inertial portion of the
navigation system operating procedures. navigation system (the yaw rate sensor and the vehicle
speed signal) can cause some discrepancies between
Anti-theft Feature the vehicle's actual position, and the indicated vehicle
position (GPS vehicle position). However, if GPS signals
The navigation system has a coded theft protection cannot be received, you must tune the vehicle's
circuit. Be sure to get the customer's 4-digit anti-theft position manually.
security code before;
The following circumstances may cause vehicle
• Disconnecting the battery positioning errors:
• Disconnecting the navigation unit 8P connector
• Removing the INTR LIGHT (10 A) fuse from the • Moving the vehicle with the engine stopped, such as
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box by ferry or tow truck, or if the vehicle is spun on a
turn table
After service, reconnect the power to the navigation • Tire slippage, changes in tire rolling diameters, and
unit, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). Enter the some driving situations may cause discrepancies in
4-digit anti-theft security code, then select "Done". travel distances. Examples of this include:
- Continuous tire slippage on a slippery surface
If you cannot find the 4-digit anti-theft code, you must - Driving with snow chains mounted
look it up using the Interactive Network (iN). To do this - Abnormal tire pressure
select Service, Vehicle Information, Anti-Theft Code - Incorrect tire size
Inquiry, and then select the "Navigation" choice from - Frequent lane changes across a wide highway
the "Product" dropdown box. You can obtain the - Continuous driving on a straight or gently curving
navigation unit serial number from the diagnostic highway
screen "Navi ECU", found under the navigation - Very bumpy roads
diagnostic menu item "Unit Check" (see page 22-489). • Tolerances in the system and map inaccuracies
Alternately, the serial number can be found on the sometimes limit how precisely the vehicle position is
underside of the navigation unit located under the indicated. Examples of this include:
passenger seat. - Driving on roads not shown on the map (map
matching is not possible).
When replacing the navigation unit, be sure to give the - Driving on a road that winds in one direction, such
customer the new anti-theft security code. as a loop bridge, an interchange, or a spiral parking
garage.
Symptom Diagnosis - Driving on a road with a series of sharp hair-pin
turns.
Certain circumstances and system limitations will result - Driving near a gradual highway exit or transition.
in occasional vehicle positioning errors. Some - Driving on one of two close parallel roads.
customers may think this indicates a problem with the - Making many 90 degree turns.
navigation system when, in fact, the system is normal. - The direction to destination icon or the
Keep the following items in mind when interviewing "Destination icon" shown or the map may be up to
customers about navigation system symptoms. several hundred feet away from the actual location.
• The system does not know the number of lanes of a
highway, therefore it may place the vehicle icon
several feet behind an intersection.
Global Positioning System (GPS) Limitations Muting Logic
The GPS cannot detect the vehicle's position during the Whenever the navigation system is giving guidance,
following instances: the front speakers are muted. When the voice control
system is being used, all of the speakers are muted.
• For the first 5 to 10 minutes after reconnecting the
battery (This can take as long as 45 minutes). Symptom Duplication
• When the satellite signals are blocked by tall
buildings, mountains, tunnels, large trees, or large • If you can duplicate the symptom, compare it to a
trucks. known-good vehicle. If you can duplicate the
• When the GPS antenna is blocked by an object placed symptom in the known-good vehicle, then it is a
above it in the vehicle. The GPS antenna requires a characteristic of the system.
clear unobstructed view of the sky.
• When the satellite signals are blocked by the A known-good vehicle is another vehicle of the same
operation of some electronic aftermarket accessories year and model that has the same software version
including, but not limited to non-OEM in-dash installed.
entertainment units (radio, CD players/changers • When the symptom can be duplicated, follow the self
radar detectors, and Lo Jack), cell phones placed near diagnostic procedures, and the appropriate
the navigation system. troubleshooting procedures.
• Metallic window tinting above the GPS antenna. • When the symptom does not reappear, or only
reappears intermittently, ask the customer about the
The accuracy of GPS is reduced during these instances: conditions when the symptom occurred.
• Always ask the customer to demonstrate the problem.
• When only three satellite signals can be received • Try to establish possible user error, or a
(Four satellite signals are required for accurate misunderstanding of the system.
positioning). -Try to establish if outside interference may have
• When the satellite control centers are experiencing been the cause.
problems. -Try to duplicate the symptom under the same
• When driving near high tension power lines. conditions that the customer experienced.
- Vibration, temperature extremes, and moisture
LCD Display Unit Limitations (dew, humidity) are factors that are difficult to
duplicate.
• In cold temperatures, the display may stay dark for - Inspect the vehicle for after-market electronic
the first 2 or 3 minutes until it warms up. devices (vehicle locators, radar detectors amps, etc.)
• When the display is too hot because of direct summer that may be hidden.
sunlight, it will remain dark until the temperature
drops. NOTICE I
• When the humidity is high and the interior When interchanging navigation DVD/parts during
temperature is low, the display may appear cloudy. diagnosis.
The display will clear up after some use.
• Fingerprints on the touch panel may sometimes be When troubleshooting navigation system problems,
noticeable because of the panel's low-reflection ensure that the known-good vehicle is the same
coating. Clean the screen with a soft damp cloth. You software version year and model as the vehicle being
may use a mild cleaner intended for eye glasses or serviced. Mixing incompatible navigation DVDs or
computer screens. To avoid scratching the panel, do other system components can delay the
not rub too hard, or use abrasive cleaners, or shop troubleshooting process by causing side effects
towels. unrelated to the original problem.
• The touch panel uses a resistive membrane that is
unaffected by sunlight. If a touch switch does not
function immediately, shift your finger slightly, and
touch it again.
(cont'd)
Service Precautions Entering Security Code
• If the navigation unit needs to be replaced, inform the Any time power is disconnected from the navigation
customer that personal information in the navigation unit, the 4-digit anti-theft code must be entered on the
system will be lost. If possible, have the customer navigation system display. This 4-digit code can be
record their personal information before the unit is found on a small code card that was given to the client.
replaced. On '07-08 models you can back-up the Enter the 4-digit code, then select "Done".
navigation data and transfer it to a new navigation
unit. See save users memory (see page 22-503). If the navigation system anti-theft code cannot be found,
• Check for service bulletins or service news articles use the interactive Network (/N) to look it up. You will
that may relate to the customer's concern. need the serial number for the navigation unit to do this.
• Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you You can view the serial number by entering the
have the anti-theft codes for the audio and the diagnostic mode. Select "Unit Check" from the main
navigation system, and write down the audio presets. menu, then the "Navi ECU" diagnostic screen. This
• The navigation unit is located under the passenger's allows you to get the serial number without removing
seat. The unit can be damaged if fluids leak down the navigation unit.
through the passenger's seat, such as a spilled
beverage. The /N may display more than one code for a given
• When the battery is disconnected, the internal GPS serial number. This is because serial numbers are not
clock is reset to "0:00". The clock will reset to the unique. You may have to try more than one 4-digit code.
correct time after the system finishes GPS If no code is shown, or if the code(s) given do not work
initialization. in the navigation unit, contact the Automobile Warranty
• After reconnecting the battery, you have to wait to get department. If the code "0000" works, then replace the
the initial signal from the satellite. It will take from 10 navigation unit.
to 45 minutes.
• Verify map matching. When replacing the navigation unit or audio unit, be
• Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter sure to give the customer the new anti-theft security
the audio and navigation system anti-theft security code.
codes, then enter the audio presets.
• Adjust the setup clock settings (time zone and GPS initialization
daylight savings) in the navigation system.
Depending on the length of time the battery was
System Initialization disconnected, your system may require GPS
initialization. If it does, the following screen appears:
If for any reason, you lose power to the navigation
system (like the battery was disconnected), the
navigation system will require initialization. Once
completed, your system is ready to use. * * * W a it* * *
The system is acquiring its GPS signal.
This initialization requires the following: This could take up to 10 minutes.
• Engine must be running
• Entering the 4-digit anti-theft security code to •Vehicle must be parked outside,
"unlock" the system away from buildings
• GPS initialization (may not be needed depending of • Do not move the vehicle at this time
the length of time the system was without power)
• Map matching to align the GPS to a location on the
map
If this procedure is not necessary, the system proceeds
directly to the Disclaimer screen. During initialization,
the system searches for all available GPS satellites, and
obtains their orbital information. During this procedure,
the vehicle should be out in the open with a clear view
of the sky.
If the navigation system finds the satellites properly, Obtaining A Navigation DVD
this box clears, and changes to the Disclaimer screen. If
within 10 minutes the system fails to locate a sufficient If the Navigation DVD is lost or damaged, or you need a
number of satellites to locate your position, the yearly updated DVD, you have two ways to purchase
following screen appears. one. You can either call (888) 549-3798, or order on-line
at www.honda.com.
Navigation system is unable acquire a

Both methods require a credit card. The DVD for this
proper GPS signal. model has a white label, and cannot be ordered through
• Move vehicle to another location the parts system. The following DVDs will not work in
• Turn the Ignition switch off this navigation system:
• Disconnect the battery for 30
minutes to clear the GPS receiver's
memory • Earlier model navigation DVDs (black label)
• Reconnect the battery and follow • Map software programs manufactured by other
the screen prompts
companies
• DVD movies, or DVDs containing audio recordings
Update DVDs are available for purchase usually in the
After 30 minutes with this screen displayed, turn off the fall of each year. They may contain the following:
engine, then restart the vehicle. If you now see the
Disclaimer screen, the GPS initialization is complete. • Enhanced maps and points of interest (POI) coverage
• Fixes for minor software bugs
NOTE: • Additional features
• The average acquiring time is less than 10 minutes,
but it can take as long as 45 minutes. NOTE:
• If the system is still unable to acquire a signal, follow • Map matching must be done any time the DVD is
the instructions on the screen. If this screen appears removed or replaced.
again, go to troubleshooting for the GPS icon is white • Always order navigation DVDs on an as-needed basis.
or not shown (see page 22-474). During a typical model year, each color DVD may
undergo a half a dozen software only version
Map Matching upgrades to fix minor issues on some or all models
the DVD supports. This is normal. Usually only the
This part of the initialization matches the GPS letter at the end of the version number changes,
coordinates with a road on the map screen. To perform while the database (maps and POIs) remain
this part of the procedure, ensure that the navigation unchanged.
system is displaying a map. Check the GPS icon in • Never promise your customer future free updates.
the upper left corner of the screen, it should be green There are no free programs for updating the
when the vehicle is parked outside, with the correct navigation DVD. Update DVDs are generally available
color labeled DVD installed in the navigation unit. Drive for purchase each fall. The on-line DVD order site
the vehicle on a mapped road shown on the map screen provides information when an update for a particular
Do not enter a destination at this time. When the name color DVD is available.
of the current road you are driving on, appears at the • Damaged discs are not covered by warranty unless the
bottom of the screen, the entire procedure is complete. disc is damaged by the navigation unit
Your system is now ready to use.
(cont'd)
DVD H anding and C leaning E a rlie st DVD V ersion A p p lic a tio n fo r Each
M odel
To avoid damaging or leaving fingerprints on the DVD,
always handle it by the edges and place it in a jewel Each navigation system DVD contains a map/POl (point
case whenever it is outside the navigation unit Deep of interest) database and the navigation system
scratches or fingerprints on the back of the DVD can software for each model that it supports. Inserting an
cause intermittent rebooting or other system errors. older DVD can cause problems since it lacks the
software to provide the specific features needed for that
model. Unfortunately, the navigation software does not
detect or warn you that the version is outdated, and it
may even appear to operate.
NOTE: Replacing a DVDjust because the version

number is higher is not always justified. A higher
software version does not necessarily mean it contains
newer software for your model. The DVD contains
software for all models that use the same color DVD,
and a revised number may or may not have software
fixes or upgrades for the model in question.
Typical warning symptoms that an outdated DVD is

being used include:
Smudges and fingerprints can be carefully removed
using a mild cleaner and tissues designed to clean • The Honda model navigation screen may display a
eyeglasses. To clean a DVD, use a clean soft cloth. Very Acura logo while booting up.
gently wipe across the DVD from the center to the • A newly introduced model future or accessory may
outside edge, never in a circular motion. not display properly, and Extension will display
instead.
NOTE: Extension may be displayed when using

MusicLink, but should never be displayed when XM
is selected.
• The current street (the street being driven on) may
not appear properly at the bottom of the map screen
display when the vehicle is driven on a main road.
NOTE: If necessary, compare the operation to the
navigation system of the same model and year
vehicle that has a current DVD.
Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the DVD.
How to Identify Navigation DVD Versions, • Incorrectly colored DVDs being put into navigation
and How to Inspect A DVD for Damage vehicles. This causes the system to either display
error messages, or it causes system malfunctions
To determine the navigation version on a particular that mimic a hardware problem. This result in the
model, start the engine, then locate the navigation unit. customer driving away with a malfunctioning
Open the DVD door, and push the eject button to eject navigation system.
the DVD. Hold the DVD by the edges, and check for • The DVD version provided to the customer is out-of
these items: date or incompatible with a particular model. This
inconveniences your customer by delaying the repair,
• The label color. or by causing additional (and unnecessary) returns to
• Read the DVD version on the label, and note it on the your dealership.
repair order. The version number is near the bottom • The customer experiences bugs or other issues that
of the label text (for example, ver: 4.23A). You will have already been resolved in later versions currently
need this version number: available at the fulfillment desk.
- To verify that the DVD version is appropriate for the
vehicle. If the DVD is defective, or has any of the issues
- Any time you call Tech Line regarding a navigation mentioned above, return the vehicle to your customer
system issue. and recommend that they order the proper DVD from
-To answer customer inquires concerning update or the Honda Disc Fulfillment Center (see ORDERING A
coverage issue. DVD).
NOTE: Customers may obtain DVDs from sources NOTE: If it is determined that the navigation unit is
outside the normal ordering process. If you defective (through the appropriate service manual
determine this is the case, recommend that your troubleshooting procedures) and the DVD will not eject,
customer purchase the appropriate DVDfrom the order a replacement navigation unit, and also order a
Honda Disc Fulfillment Center (see ORDERING A DVDfrom the Honda Disc Fulfillment Center.
DVD).
- Check the underside of the DVDfor signs of

mishandling. Deep scratches, swirl marks, or
fingerprints can cause random lock-ups, reboots,
and DVD read or format errors.
NOTE: A damaged DVD is not covered under
warranty unless the disc is damaged by the
navigation unit. Damage by the navigation unit
typically appears as circular scratches caused by
something rubbing against the DVD as it spins. The
damage may appear as arcs or complete circles on
the DVD reading surface.
- Verify that the underside of the DVD is silver, and

not a "copy" with a blue color. Copies will not
work properly and can cause other symptoms that
mimic hardware problems.
(cont'd)
How to Answer Customer Questions About Precaution on Customer "Sneak Previews"

Navigation Coverage
Your customer might request a look (or "sneak
Some customers may ask questions regarding a city, preview") at features in the latest navigation software.
address or POI (point of interest) covered by the You should never preview a navigation DVD in a
navigation system. It is better to verify a coverage customer's vehicle. Inserting a new DVD installs the
question on an actual vehicle than to disappoint your latest software from the DVD into the memory of the
customer by promising coverage that may be customer's navigation system. When the original DVD
incomplete or missing in their area. The following is reinstalled, the newer software remains in memory
suggestions can be used to answer coverage inquiries and is often incompatible with the customer's original
from your customer. DVD Map and POI database.
Is my-address covered by the navigation system? . If your customer wishes to see the latest navigation
coverage or software features, demonstrate it on an in
Using a current production vehicle (of the same model), stock vehicle that already has the latest DVD version.
try entering the customer's address (street first) to see if
their area is covered. Always enter the street first, If, by chance, a newer version is located accidentally,
because sometimes their city may be included in a either by the dealer or the customer, the only remedy is
neighboring township, or under some lager to enter the navigation diagnostic mode's Version
metropolitan city name. If the address is shown in a screen and do a forced download. Refer to the iN for
later year vehicle, but not your customer's vehicle, you applicable patches that may need reinstalling.
might want to recommend that your customer purchase
an update.
Is my city covered by the navigation system?
For general questions about whether a city is covered,

view the map coverage link on the DVD order site. On
the site, you enter a year and model, and then click on
the Coverage link. You then select a state or province,
and the cities are listed. Of course, this does not
guarantee that the customer's road or address is in the
system. Verifying on an actual production vehicle is
always the best guarantee that your information is
accurate.
The gas station on my corner is now a restaurant. Why
is it still incorrect in the navigation system?
For POI-related customer questions, explain that
businesses are constantly moving, and there can be a
considerable lag in updating the millions of POIs in the
system. The database is updated annually, and the best
way to the verify whether the POI is accurate is verify
the inquiry on a current production vehicle.
Answers to these and other questions regarding
coverage can be found in these locations:
• Inthe Frequently Asked Questions section of the

navigation system manual.
• At the on-line DVD order site, by clicking on the FAGs
link (see ORDERING A DVD).

No picture is displayed Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation unit
(see page 22-464) • DVD damaged or wrong color
• Navigation display unit
• Non-OEM device tapped into
the system like gaming system
or TVtuner
• Harness/fuses/switches
Picture is missing a color or tone or is an Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation unit
odd color (see page 22-465) • DVD damaged or wrong color
or TVtuner
• Navigation screen settings
Picture has lines or rolls Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation unit
(see page 22-467) • DVD damaged or wrong color
• Navigation display unit
or TVtuner
Navigation display buttons do not work Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation display unit
or respond properly (see page 22-468) • DVD damaged or wrong color
• Short in the GA-NET Bus
• Open in the GA-NET Bus
• A defect in the XM receiver,
audio unit, or navigation display
unit causing an open or short in
the GA-NET Bus
GPS icon is white or not shown Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation unit
(see page 22-474) • GPS antenna/cable
Voice guidance cannot be heard, is Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation unit
broken up, or there is static (see page 22-474) • DVD damaged or wrong color
• Navigation settings
• Audio unit/amplifier
Vehicle position icon constantly leaves Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation unit
road, moves erratically, or is very far (see page 22-476) • DVD damaged or wrong color
from actual position • GPS antenna/cable
• PCM (speed and fuel pulses)
DVD screen error messages Symptom Troubleshooting • Navigation unit
(see page 22-477) • Navigation display unit
• DVD damaged or wrong color
(cont'd)

Navigation system stays on the GPS System Initialization (see page 22-432) • Navigation unit
initialization screen GPS Initialization (see page 22-432) • DVD damaged or wrong
color
• GPS antenna/cable is
disconnected or damaged
Voice control does not work/respond SymptomTroubleshooting (see page • Navigation unit
22-463) • Volume or Voice feedback
settings (see Owner's
manual for details)
• DVD damaged or wrong
color
• Microphone/steering
buttons
Time is not correct Reset Time Adjustment in set-up • See Owner's manual for
adjusting automatic time
zone
color
Navigation system will not Map Match Refer to the troubleshooting for GPS antenna/cable is
Vehicle position icon constantly leaves disconnected or damaged
road, moves erratically, is very far
from actual position (see page 22-476)
The navigation anti-theft code card is See anti-theft feature (see page GPS antenna/cable is
lost or missing 22-430) disconnected or damaged
The vehicle icon lags behind when the See self-inertial navigation limitations • Aftermarket accessories
vehicle turns (see page 22-430) connected to the system
• GPS antenna/cable
Navigation screen is darker than normal See LCD display unit limitations Compare to known-good
or takes time to start up when it is cold (see page 22-431) vehicle under the same
conditions
The navigation clock is off by 1 to 3 See service precautions (see page • Do the map matching
hours after replacing the navigation unit 22-432) (see page 22-433)
• Compare to known-good
vehicle under the same
conditions
color
• GPS antenna/cable
• Check and adjust the clock
settings
OKcannot be selected at the disclaimer Refer to troubleshooting for • Compare to known-good
screen and the screen turns black Navigation display buttons do not vehicle under the same
work or respond properly (see page conditions
22-468) • DVD damaged or wrong
color
A new navigation DVD is needed See obtaining a navigation DVD
(see page 22-433)
System always comes up in in-line See factory Diagnostic screen"ln-Line . • Software remedy, do not
diagnostic mode Diag" (see page 22-488) replace hardware
• Factory diag mode
• SCS connected diag
connector
Navigation cannot control HVAC by Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Navigation display unit
voice command 22-479) • DVD damaged or wrong
color
• Faulty HVAC system
Display day/night mode does not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Navigation display unit or
22-481) setting
• Gauge control module
(CAN)
System locks up or freezes constantly Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Navigation unit
22-481) • Harness/fuses/switches
color
Vehicle icon wanders across the map Refer to the troubleshooting for Navigation unit (Yaw rate
when driving (does not follow a vehicle position icon constantly leaves sensor)
displayed road) or map or vehicle ICON road, moves erratically, is very far
spins from actual position troubleshooting
(see page 22-476)
Vehicle icon moves by itself when Symptom Troubleshooting (see page Navigation unit
parked 22-482)
Navigation display stays on with ignition Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Harness/fuses/switches
switch OFF 22-482) • Non-OEM assembly
Navigation cannot control audio system Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Navigation display unit
color
• Audio unit
Navigation cannot control XM radio Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Navigation display unit
color
• Harness
Navigation frequently asks for anti-theft Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Navigation unit
code and needs GPS initialization 22-478) • Low battery
• Harness/f uses/switches
Rearview camera image does not come Symptom Troubleshooting (see page • Navigation unit
on or work properly 22-484) • Rearview camera
* No reverse (back-up) signal
* Harness
The navigation display does not respond Refer to the troubleshooting for • Short in the GA-NET Bus
and XM cannot be selected on the audio Navigation display buttons do not • Open in the GA-NET Bus
unit work or respond properly (see page • A defect in the XM receiver,
22-468) audio unit, navigation unit
or navigation display unit
causing an open or short in
the GA-NET Bus
(cont'd)

Address cannot be found or system • See "Answering customer • The wrong colored DVD or
gives poor routing questions about navigation version is installed
coverage" in general • Database limitations (address
troubleshooting not in database)
• Verify proper operation and
system limitations using the
navigation system manual
Some set-up and information functions Customer did not select "OK"
of the navigation system are grayed-out from Disclaimer screen
and do not work
Previous Destinations button is dim and The vehicle may be new, or the See Owner's Manual for more
not selectable in the Enter destination by customer deleted them. Enter a details
screen (grayed-out) destination, and allow the system
to route to it. After the trip, the
Previous Destinations button will
be selectable
Today's Destinations button is dim and The customer has not entered a
not selectable in the Enter destination by group of locations for Today's
screen (grayed-out) Destinations. This is normal. The
button is only selectable if the
customer is using this function
The map will not display the Southern North American coverage is The wrong colored DVD or
portion of the U.S. or the Northern parts different for U.S./Canada markets. version is installed
of Canada See the version diagnostic screen
(see page 22-502) for details on
coverage differences
The DVD is scratched or dirty See "DVD Handling and Navigation unit
Cleaning" (see page 22-434)
The wrong DVD was installed and now See "Precaution customer Sneak • Install the correct version DVD
the system does not function properly Previews" (see page 22-436) • Check on-line for service
bulletins or other service
information for the navigation
system
APOI cannot be found See "How to answer customer The DVD is scratched or dirty
questions about navigation
coverage" (see page 22-436)
Aspecificcity cannot be found See "How to answer customer The DVD is scratched or dirty
questions about navigation
coverage" (see page 22-436)
An In Line Diagnosis screen appears See factory diagnostic screen "In
every time vehicle is started Line Diag" (see page 22-488)
Navigation unit will not eject or accept Symptom troubleshooting
the navigation DVD (see page 22-472)
System Description
Overview
The navigation system is a highly-sophisticated, hybrid locating system that uses satellites and a map database to
show where the vehicle is and to help guide you to a desired destination.
The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), a network of 24 satellites in orbit
around the earth. By receiving signals from several of these satellites, the navigation system can determine the
latitude, longitude elevation of the vehicle. In addition, signals from the system's yaw rate sensor and the PCM
(vehicle speed pulse) enable the system to keep track of the vehicle's direction and speed of travel.
This hybrid system has advantages over a system that is either entirely self-contained or one that relies totally on the
GPS. For example, the self-contained portion of the system can keep track of vehicle position even when satellite
signals cannot be received. When the navigation system is on, the GPS can keep track of the vehicle position even
when the vehicle is transported by ferry.
The navigation system applies all location, direction, and speed information to maps and calculates a route to the
destination entered. As you drive to that destination, the system provides both visual and audio guidance.
This navigation system also has voice recognition that allows voice control of most of the navigation functions. The
TALK and BACK buttons on the steering wheel activate the voice control. The voice control also allows control of the
audio and climate control.
The navigation system provides a trip computer function. The fuel economy display is calculated by data provided by
the PCM. The PCM provides fuel use and level data via the F-CAN bus, and a dedicated speed signal.
The illumination signal is used by the navigation unit to automatically switch the display between Night and Day
brightness modes when Display is set to Auto. When the instrument panel brightness control is set to full brightness,
the navigation system stays in the Day mode, even with the headlights on. Display unit button illumination is supplied
through the audio unit.
The GA-Net II bus passes information back and forth between the navigation display, the navigation unit, the climate
control unit, and the audio system components. The information passed on this bus are touch button commands,
audio muting signal, and audio (radio and XM), when commanded by voice control.
The rear view camera image is shown on the display when in reverse. Camera brightness is adjustable by touching
the "Zoom in/Zoom out" button while viewing the camera image.
The clock on the audio unit display is set, and maintained by the navigation unit The time is automatically adjusted for
daylight savings, and time zone changes while driving. The time can be adjusted in the setup menu.
Additional information is available about the navigation components following the System Diagram. A glossary of
terms that are used throughout this section follows the detailed information.
The UART serial bus is used to communicate with the climate control unit. Voice commands to adjust climate feature
such as, "Climate control full Automatic", are sent over this bus. In return, climate control status (such as the current
fan speed) is sent to the navigation unit
(cont'd)
System Diagram
Navigation Function
The navigation system is composed of the navigation unit, the PCM (vehicle speed signal), the GPS antenna,
microphone, voice control switch, audio unit, climate control unit, and the navigation display.
Function Diagram
VOICECONTROLSWITCH MICROPHONE AUDIO UNIT
Vehicle Speed Pulse

The vehicle speed pulse is produced by the PCM. The PCM receives a signal from the countershaft speed sensor, then
it processes the signal and transmits it to the navigation unit speedometer (F-CAN) and other systems.
NAVIGATION UNIT
PCM
DISTANCE
DETECTION
CIRCUIT
Charge Signal and Navigation Unit Cooling Fan Operation

The PCMsends a charge signal to the navigation unit via F-CAN. A thermister inside the navigation unit monitors the
units internal temperature. This information combined with the charge signal determines the control units internal
cooling fan operation.
(cont'd)
Yaw Rate Sensor

The yaw rate sensor (located in the navigation unit) detects the direction change (angular speed) of the vehicle. The
sensor is an oscillation gyro built into the navigation unit.
Sensor Element Structure
The sensor element is shaped like a tuning fork, and it consists of the piezoelectric parts, the metal block, and the
support pin. There are four piezoelectric parts: one to drive the oscillators, one to monitor and maintain the oscillation
at a regular frequency, and two to detect angular velocity. The two oscillators, which have a 90-degree twist in the
center, are connected at the bottom by the metal block, and supported by the support pin. A detection piezoelectric
part is attached to the top of each oscillator. The driving piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of one oscillator,
and the monitoring piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of the other oscillator.
Oscillation Gyro Principles

The piezoelectric parts have "electric/mechanical transfer characteristics." They bend vertically when voltage is
applied to both sides of the parts, and voltage is generated between both sides of the piezoelectric parts when they are
bent by an external force. The oscillation gyro functions by utilizing this characteristic of the piezoelectric parts and
"Coriolis force." (Coriolis force deflects moving objects as a result of the earth's rotation.) In the oscillation gyro, this
force moves the sensor element when angular velocity is applied.
Operation
1. The driving piezoelectric part oscillates the oscillator by repeatedly bending and returning when an AC voltage of
6 kHz is applied to the part, The monitoring-side oscillator resonates because it is connected to the driving-side
oscillator by the metal block.
2. The monitoring piezoelectric part bends in proportion to the oscillation, and outputs voltage (the monitor signal).
The navigation unit control circuit controls the drive signal to stabilize the monitor signal.
3. When the vehicle is stopped, the detecting piezoelectric parts oscillate right and left with the oscillators, but no
signal is output because the parts are not bent (no angular force).
4. When the vehicle turns to the right, the sensor element moves in a circular motion with the right oscillator
bending forward and the left oscillator bending rearward. The amount of forward/rearward bend varies according
to the angular velocity of the vehicle.
5. The detecting piezoelectric parts output voltage (the yaw rate signal) according to the amount of bend. The
amount of vehicle direction change is determined by measuring this voltage.
Enlarged view of sensor element Sensor element top view
_ _ - j .
Coriolis force
— ----------— 9> Oscillation
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The global positioning system (GPS) enables the navigation system to determine the current position of the vehicle by
using the signals transmitted from the satellites in orbit around the earth. The satellites transm it the satellite
identification signal, orbit information, transmission time signal, and other information. When the GPS receiver
receives a signal from four or more satellites simultaneously, it calculates the current position of the vehicle based on
the distance to each satellite and the satellite's positions in its respective orbit.
Position detection Image with GPS satellite
Precision of GPS
The precision of the GPS varies according to the number of satellites from which signals are received and the view of
the sky. The precision is indicated by the color and shape of the GPS icon shown on the display.
GPS ICON NUMBER OF CONDITION DESCRIPTION
SATELLITES
No GPS icon shown 2 or less Impossible to detect GPS function is normal.
vehicle position The satellite signals received by
the GPS are too few to detect the
vehicle position.
Square GPS icon shown with white 3 Vehicle position The longitude and latitude of the
"GPS" detectable in 2 vehicle position can be detected.
dimensions (Less precise than detection in
three dimensions)
Cube GPS icon shown with green 4 or more Vehicle position The longitude, latitude and the
"GPS" detectable in 3 altitude of the vehicle position can
dimensions be detected. (More precise than
detection in two dimensions)
GPS Antenna
The GPS antenna amplifies and transmits the signals received from the satellites to the GPS receiver.
GPS Receiver
The GPS receiver is built into the navigation unit. It calculates the vehicle position by receiving the signal from the GPS
antenna. The current time, vehicle position, and signal reception condition is transmitted from the GPS receiver to the
navigation unit to adjust vehicle position.
(cont'd)
Navigation U nit
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position and guides you to the destination. The unit performs map matching
correction, GPS correction, and distance tuning. It also controls the menu functions, the DVD-ROM drive, the back-up
camera, and interprets voice commands. With control of all these items, the navigation unit makes the navigation
picture signal, then it transmits the signal to the navigation display and audio driving instructions to the audio unit.
Calcul ation of Vehicle Position

The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position (the driving direction and the current position) by receiving the
directional change signals from the yaw rate sensor and the travel distance signals from the PCMs vehicle speed pulse
(VSP) signal.
Map Matching Tuning
The map matching tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position on the roads on the map. The map data
transmitted from the DVD-ROM is checked against the vehicle position data, and the vehicle position is indicated on
the nearest road. Map matching tuning does not occur when the vehicle travels on a road not shown on the map, or
when the vehicle position is far away from a road on the map.
GPS Tuning
The GPS tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position as the GPS's vehicle position. The navigation unit
compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle position data. If there is a large difference between
the two, the indicated vehicle position is adjusted to the GPS vehicle position.
Distance Tuning
The distance tuning reduces the difference between the travel distance signal from the VSP and the distance data on
the map. The navigation unit compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle position data. The
navigation unit then decreases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always ahead of the GPS vehicle position,
and it increases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always behind the GPS vehicle position.
Route Guidance
The navigation unit can calculate different routes to a selected destination. You have five options:
• Direct Route —Calculate a route that is the most direct.
• Easy Route —Calculate a route that minimizes the number of turns needed.
• Minimize Freeways —Calculate a route that avoids freeway travel. If that is not possible, keep the amount of
freeway travel to a minimum.
• Minimize Toll Roads —Calculate a route that avoids, or minimizes travel on toll roads.
• Maximize Freeways —Calculate a route that uses freeways as much as possible.
Audio Guidance
The navigation unit transmits audio driving instructions before entering an intersection or passing a junction.
The audio instructions come through the audio unit to the front speakers.
NOTE: The front speakers are muted wheneverthe navigation system is giving guidance commands, and all of the
speakers are muted when the voice control system is being used.
DVD-ROW
The map data (including all scale rates) is stored in the DVD-ROM. The map data includes:
• Road distances, road widths, speed limits, traffic regulations, passing time at junction, distances to junctions, and
the driving instructions for audio guidance.
• Latitude and longitude GPS.
Solar Angle
The navigation system uses the sun's angle, along with the sunlight sensor to control the driver/passenger A/C air
flow.
Off Road Tracking (breadcrumbs)
Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map retrace your route back to a mapped (digitized) road.
Clock and Time Zone

The clock set up allows you to set daylight savings time, auto time zone and time adjustment.
Audio Unit
The audio unit receives the audio driving instructions from the navigation unit, and transmits the instructions through
the front speakers even when the audio system is in use.
Navigation Display
The navigation display uses a liquid crystal display (LCD). The LCD is a 7-inch-diagonal, thin film transistor (TFT),
stripe type with 336,960 picture elements. The color film and fluorescent light are laid out on the back of the liquid
crystal film. The touch sensor on the front of the LCDconsists of a touch sensitive resistive membrane with a large
number of possible touch locations. The navigation display transmits the signal from each operation key and the touch
switches to the navigation unit over the GA-Net bus.
Microphone
The microphone (on the ceiling, near the front map light) receives voice commands and transmits them to the
navigation unit for interpretation.
TALK Button
Activates the voice control system in the navigation unit to accept voice commands.
BACK Button
Returns the display to the previous screen (similar function as the CANCEL button).
(cont'd)
Glossary
The following is a glossary of terms pertaining to the Voice Recognition Navigation System.
Item Definition
Audio-HVAC subdisplay The upper display that shows the time and current status of the audio and climate
control system.
Breadcrumbs (white Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the map to retrace your route back to a
dots) mapped (digitized) road. This function can be turned on/off in Setup screen 1.
CAN Controller Area Network. This communication network allows processors in the
vehicle to send/receive information. The fuel pulses used by the trip computer are
received from the PCM using the F-CAN (Fast Controller Area Network) bus.
B-CAN Body CAN Bus (see CAN)
CPU Central Processing Unit. The main device within the navigation unit that coordinates
the rest of the electronic functions.
Database This consists of the Map data, and the POI (Points Of Interest) data stored on the DVD.
DBW Drive By Wire. Allows electrical control of the throttle without the need of a
mechanical linkage.
DCA Detailed coverage area, an area that is covered in the database digital mapping. For
example, the 48 continuous United States are within the DCA. Hawaii and Alaska are
outside of the DCA.
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Use the HDS tablet to obtain, and troubleshoot the cause of
these codes.
Dead Reckoning The use of the speed signal, and yaw rate sensor to position the vehicle on the map
even when tall buildings, or driving in a tunnel obscures the GPS signal.
Digitized Road A road that appears on the navigation screen. The road name will appear at the
bottom of the navigation screen. If the user drives "off road", the navigation system
will display "Not on a digitized road". The "breadcrumbs" will appear after driving for
1/2 mile.
Disclaimer Screen Screen containing cautionary information. It is meant to be read carefully, and
acknowledged by the customer when using the navigation system.
DVD or DVD-ROM Digital Versatile Disk. The navigation program and database resides on this disk. See
the Navigation Owner's Manual for information on how to order a replacement or an
update DVD.
ECM Engine Control Module. Typically referred to as the ECM.
E/T Elapsed Time for the current trip as displayed by the trip computer screen.
FAQ Frequently Asked Question. See the Navigation Owner's Manual for a list of the
customer FAQs, and troubleshooting information.
F-CAN Fast CAN Bus (see CAN)
FE Fuel Economy value as displayed on the trip computer screen.
Fuel Pulses This signal is transmitted on the CAN bus, and is used by the Trip Computer to
calculate the fuel economy.
GA-Net bus Units communication line.
GPS Global Positioning System. A network of 24 satellites in orbit around the earth. The
navigation system can simultaneously receive signals from up to 12 satellites to
accurately position the vehicle on the map.
HDS Honda Diagnostic System. A hand held tablet PC used for diagnosing vehicle
problems.
H/U Head Unit. The navigation system display unit assembly in the dash.
Initialization This refers to the period needed to re-acquire the GPS satellite orbital information
wheneverthe navigation system power has been disconnected. This can take from 10
to 45 minutes.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display (the navigation screen)
Item Definition
Map Matching The received GPS: information allows the navigation system to position the vehicle on
the map. Map matching has occurred if the map screen is displaying the current street
name in the bottom-shaded area.
Mic ; Abbreviation for the microphone used for:receiving voice; commands. It is located
near the map light in the ceiling.
Model (in the diagnosis - A "m odel code" stored on an internal "c h ip " in the navigation unit. The model code
Version screen), .tells the navigation unit what software to load. Every navigation unit "m o d e l" has a
unique part number for the navigation unit. :
MID - ■Multi-Inform ation Display.
MW Maneuver Window. While on-route to a destination, this window displays information
about the next maneuver.
Navi Abbreviation fortheNavigation System. ,
Off Road Tracking See Breadcrumbs.
Off Route This occurs when the user leaves mapped roads. Off road tracking dots
("breadcrumbs") are displayed if the option is enabled in the setup menu. The user
can use them to return to a mapped road. The bottom of the navigation screen will
say "N o t on a digitized road", and the breadcrumbs will appear after driving for 1/2
mile.
Outlying Areas These are rural areas that typically have only their main roads mapped. All other
roads are shown in light brown for reference only, since they have not been verified.
So street numbers, direction, etc may be unreliable (see Unverified Streets).
PC Card Slot The PC Card (PCMCIA, type II) s l ot is for factory use only. Make sure that the sliding
door is closed at all items. If opened, an error message is displayed on the screen.
PCM Powertrain Control Module. This unit supplies the navigation system speed signal,
fuel level, and sends fuel use pulses for the trip computer function.
PCMCIA, A computer industry defined term referring to the PC Card slot standard.
PIN Personal Identification Number. A random 4 digit number created by the customer to
protect personal information. There are 2 different PINs for 2 different users.
POI Point Of Interest. These are the businesses, schools, etc. found under the "places"
option on the main menu.
Polygon Colored areas on the map screen denoting parks, schools, etc. See the Navigation
Owner's Manual "Traveling to Your Destination" for a list of the assigned colors.
QWERTY Keyboard layout resembling the typewriter keys. The keyboard layout can be changed
to an alphabetical layout in the Setup mode.
SCS connector The 2-pin connector used to put the navigation system into the diagnostic mode.
Security Code Code needed to activate the navigation system. You can obtain the security code from
the "iN" by entering the navigation system control serial number. You can find the
serial number on the diagnostic screens (Unit Check, Navi ECU), or on the underside
of the navigation unit.
Touch Screen Buttons or The display panel has 2 layers of clear film on the screen panel. If you touch the
Touch Sensor screen panel, the layers engage and the navigation display detects the touch point.
Tuning A continual update of internal navigation system scaling factors. See the individual
sensor tuning discussions under either "System Description", or "System Diagnosis
Mode" (see page 22-487).
Unverified Streets These streets have not been verified for turn restrictions, one-way, etc. They are
shown in light brown on the map. You can enter address destinations in these areas,
but, depending on your "Unverified Routing" choice in setup, voice guidance may
end at the last verified street closest to your destination.
(cont'd)
Item Definition
CSF (Cold Start Fix) These screens are displayed if the system requires a GPS initialization. The vehicle
screens should be moved outside in an open area away from buildings/power line.
SCS Connector A 2-pin shorting plug used to force the navi system into the diagnostic mode. This is
used to bypass the CSF screen, or to invoke the diagnostic mode if the display hard
buttons are inoperative.
UART (climate Bus) This serial bus passes climate control commands to the climate ECU.
Verified Streets These streets consist of the detailed metropolitan coverage areas, and all other inter
town connection roads. These roads are shown in black on the map.
VP Vehicle Position. When in map mode, this circular icon shows the vehicle position on
the map. Touch this icon to show the latitude, longitude, and elevation of your current
position.
VR Voice Recognition. This allows voice control for many of the navigation functions. The
hardware consists of the microphone, steering wheel (TALK/BACK) buttons, and the
front speakers. See the overview for more information.
VSP Vehicle Speed Pulse. This pulse signal coming from the PCM is used to update the
Vehicle position on the map, and to calculate the trip computer fuel economy. These
pulses do not indicate direction (forward or backward). When in reverse, the
navigation receives a signal from the MICU, and directs the VPto move backwards on
the map.
VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor. This sensor reads the output shaft speed at the transmission,
and provides a speed pulse to the PCM. The PCMsends this pulse to the navigation
system and speedometer.
XM Satellite Radio A satellite band radio system where signals are received from either a satellite or land
based transmitters.
Yaw Sensor This device is located in the navigation unit, and senses the side-to-side twisting force
generated when the vehicle turns. See a detailed description of how this sensor works
in this manual.
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (20P)
r> zr\
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
99 18 20
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description Voltage (about) Symptom

Number
1 WHT R SIG Red color signal 0 -1 VAC If open: Red color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Redsignal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
2 RED G SIG Green color signal 0 -1 VAC If open: Green color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Green signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Green color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
3 BRN/BLK* SHIELD SIG Shield for terminal ov If open: No change to display.
(Shield signal) No. 1,2,11,12,13 If short to ground: No change to display.
4 GRN/ORN UART BUS SI A/C input signal 0—battery If open: Voice control does not work for climate
(A/C Signal voltage pulses control. Navi system link is NG shown in RED.
input) If short to ground: Voice control does not work.
Navi system link is NG shown in RED.
5 RED/BLK ILL (+ ) Parking light on Lights on= If open: When brightness="Auto", night mode for
(Illumination signal from dash battery voltage, the display is inoperative when lights on.
positive) and console lights Lights off=0 V If short to ground: Blows fuse 7 in passenger's
under-dash fuse/relav box.
8 WHT F-CAN-HI F-CAN bus Pulses 2 .5 -6 V If open:
(CAN high) communication average 3 V DSystem Links FI-ECU, and Meter both show "NG".
2)F-CAN diagnostic="NG".
3)B-CAN dtagnostic="NG".
If short: Check for F-CAN malfunction DTCs with the
HDS.
9 LT BLU * GA-NET BUS Shield for display OV If open: No change to display or audio.
SHIELD (Shield bus terminal If short to ground: No change to display or audio.
display bus) No. 10,20
10 RED/BLU GA-NET BUS Data bus (+ ) 0—5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons, audio accessories,
<+) GA-Net average 2.5 V touch screen and XM radio do not work. Navi
(Display bus depends on bus system links is NG shown in RED.
positive) traffic If short to ground: Navigation buttons, audio
accessories, touch screen and XM radio do not
work. Navi system links is NG shown in RED.
* : The shielded w i res have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark
gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic.
(cont'd)
Number
11 YEL B SIG Blue color signal 0 -1 VAC If open: Blue color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Blue signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Blue color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
12 BRN C SIG Composite video 0.3 VAC If open: Picture rolls horizontally as lines, colors still
(Composite (vertical/horizontal) visible.
signal) Synchronizing If short to ground: Picture rolls horizontally as lines,
signal colors still visible.
13 BLU GND SIG Ground for color OV If open: No change to display.
(Ground signal) signal If short to ground: No change to display.
14 RED/GRN UARTBUS SO A/C output signal 0—battery If open: A/C voice control does not work for climate
(A/C Signal voltage pulses control.
output) If short to ground: A/C voice control does not work.
15 YEL/BLU UART BUS CLK Time set sync 0—battery If open: A/C voice control does not work for climate
(A/C Clock signal for the voltage pulses control.
signal) climate control unit If short to ground: A/C voice control does not work
for climate control.
18 RED F-CAN-LO F-CAN bus Pulses 2 .5 -6 V If open:
(CAN low) communication average 3 V 1) System Links PCM, and Gauge Control Module
both show "NG".
2) F-CAN diagnostic="NG".
3) B-CAN diagnostie="NG".
If short: Check for F-CAN malfunction DTCs with the
HDS.
20 RED/WHT GA-NET BUS Data bus (—) 0—5 V pulses If open: Navigation buttons, audio accessories, and
(-) GA-Net nominally 2.5 V touch screen and XM radio do not work. Navi
(Display bus system link is NG shown in RED.
negative) If short to ground: Hard and touch buttons work OK.
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (14P)
/ c, J / 5 6
9 10
9 11 12 13 14

Number
5 LTGRN RG L (+) Left audio signal of Audio signal If open: If voice activated, radio speakers buzz; if
(Route guidance voice guidance, 0.004-0.04 V voice off, no effect.
voice left and Voice If short to ground: If voice activated, radio speakers
positive) Recognition (VR) buzz; if voice off, no effect.
prompts
6 BLU MIC SIG (+) Microphone output 4 -5 V If open: No microphone signal shown in diagnostic
(Mic signal signal positive (with TALK screens: "Navi System Link" NG shown in RED and
positive) button pressed) Functional Setup "Mic Level".
If short to ground: No microphone signal shown in
diagnostic screens: "Navi System Link" NG shown
in RED and Functional Setup "Mic Level".
10 ORN NAVI REMOTE Steering switch 3.7 V If open: Steering wheel TALK and BACK buttons do
SWITCH output (TALK button not work or respond in the Navi System links test.
(Steering pressed) If short to ground: Steering wheel TALK and BACK
switches) 2.5 V buttons do not work or respond in the Navi System
(BACK button links test.
pressed)
4.3 V
(No buttons
pressed)
11 LT BLU * RG SHIELD Shield for terminal 0V If open: No effect on voice output.
(Shield route No. 5,12 If short to ground: No effect on voice output.
guidance)
12 PUR RG GND Ground for voice 0V If open: No effect on voice output
(Ground routs guidance, and If short to ground: No effect on voice output.
guidance) Voice Recognition
(VR) prompts
13 LT BLU* MIC SHIELD Shield for terminal 0V If open: No effect on voice recognition.
(Shield mic) No. 6,14 If short to ground: No effect on voice recognition.
14 RED GND MIC Ground for OV If open: No microphone signal shown in
(Ground mic) microphone signal diagnostics: "Navi System Link" NG shown in RED
and Functional Setup "Mic Level".
If short to ground: No effect on voice recognition.
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark
(cont'd)
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (8P)
1 2 9 4
5 6 7 8

Number
1 WHT/BLU +B Continuous power Battery voltage If open: Display picture goes out (display back light
(+B Power source still on).
source) NOTE: System will reboot to "enter code" screen.
If short to ground: Blows No. 11 (10 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2 WHT/RED ACC Power source for Battery voltage If open: Displ ay picture goes out (display back light
(Accessory) accessories at ACC (I) still on).
NOTE: When re-connected the system will reboot to
"enter code" screen.
4 BLK GND Ground for OV If open: No effect on system.
(Ground) navigation unit If short to ground: No effect on system.
5 GRN/BLK BACK LT Reverse signal of In reverse, If open: Navigation never sees the reverse signal
(Back light) select lever from battery voltage: and back-up camera does not come on when in
the A/T backup Otherwise 0 V reverse.
l ight switch Diagnostic screen "Car Status", "Back"=0.
6 BLU/WHT VSP Vehicle speed Pulses 0—5 V: If open: No vehicle speed signal pulse.
(Vehicle speed pulse signal from Average 2.5 V, Diagnostic screen "Car Status", VSP Navi=0.
pulse) PCM when moving If short to ground: No vehicle speed pulses.
Diagnostic screen "Car Status", VSP Navi=0.
7 GRN/RED DIAG+ Service check 5 -6 V If open: No effect on system.
(Diagnostic signal for If short to ground: System goes into diagnostic
positive) navigation system mode at ignition switch ON (I or II).
NOTE: Also see symptom troubleshooting for "an
inline diag" screen appears everytime the vehicle is
started.
8 BLU/GRN DIAG— Ground for service OV If open: No effect on system.
(Diagnostic check signal If short to ground: No effect on system.
negative)
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector D (7P)
c, J
99
CM
LD
1 6 7
Terminal Wire Terminal Name Description Voltage (about) Symptom

Number Color
1 PNK CAMERA VCC Power source for 7V If open: No rearview camera image.
(VCC supply) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse, the
navigation screen goes black (backlight still
operative).
2 BLK CAM GND Ground for rearview OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
(Ground) camera If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
5 BLU CAMERA V Video signal for 0.3 V If open: No rearview camera image.
(Video camera) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse, the
navigation screen goes black (backlight still
operative).
6 GRY* CAMERA SHIELD Shield for terminal OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
(Shield camera) No. 1 to No. 7 If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
7 WHT CAMERA ADPT Control signal for OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
(Adaptive camera) rearview camera If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
* : The shiel ded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark
gray, may not match the color of the wire listed on the schematic,
(cont'd)
Navigation Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector E (2P)

Number
1 GPS GPS signal 5V If open: GPS icon on screen is white, system links
(5 V in, GPS signal screen ANT shows "NG."
out) If short to ground: Same as open.
2 SH GPS Shield for terminal OV If open: GPS icon on screen is white, system links
No. 1 screen ANT shows "NG."
If short to ground: No effect on system.
Navigation Display Unit Inputs and Outputs for the 20P Connector
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
1 2 5 6 8 9 10
11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Nam© Description Voltage (about) Symptom

Number
1 WHT/BLU +B Continuous power Battery voltage If open: Screen completely off (no backlight visible).
(+B power source If short to ground: Blows No. 11 (10 A) fuse in the
source) passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2 WHT/RED ACC Power source for Battery voltage If open: Display and buttons do not work.
(Accessory) accessory at ACC (I) If short to ground: Blows No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the
5 RED/BLU GA-NET BUS Data bus (+) 0—5 V pulses If open: XM radio, Navigation buttons, audio
(+) GA-Net average 2.5 V accessories, and touch screen do not work.
(Display bus depends on bus If short to ground: XM radio, audio accessories,
positive) traffic Navigation buttons and touch screen do not work.
6 BLU SCTY DISP Security signal OV If open: If security system set, it will not trip when
from MPX CU screen is removed.
PASS SIDE rear If short to ground: The security system set, it will
screen not trip when screen is removed.
8 WHT R SIG Red color signal 0 -1 VAC If open: Red col or missing (see "RGB Color"
(Red signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Red color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
9 RED G SIG Green color signal 0 -1 VAC If open: Green color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Green signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Green color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
10 BLK GND Ground for display OV If open: No change to display.
(Ground) unit If short to ground: No change to display.
(cont'd)
Number
11 RED/BLK ILL (+) Parking light on Battery voltage if If open: When brightness="Auto", night mode for
(Illumination signal from dash lights on: the display is inoperative when lights on.
positive) and console lights otherwise 0 V If short to ground: Blows No. 10 (15 A) fuse in
12 RED ILL (—) Ground for With full dash If open: When brightness="Auto", night mode for
illumination l ight lights brightness, the display is inoperative when l ights on.
OV If short to ground: No change to display.
14 GA-NET BUS SH
LT BLU * Shiel d for display OV If open: No change to display.
GND bus terminal If short to ground: No change to display.
(Shield display No. 5,15
bus)
15 RED/WHT ECU BUS (—-) Data bus (—) 0—5 V pulses If open: XM radio, Navigation buttons, audio
(GA-NET) GA-Net average 2.5 V accessories, and touch screen do not work.
(Display bus depends on bus If short to ground: XM radio, audio accessories, and
negative) traffic the navigation hard and touch buttons work OK.
16 GRN/WHT SCTY AUDIO Security pass thru OV If open: The security system set, it will not trip when
signal to audio unit screen is removed.
If short to ground: If security system set, it will not
trip when screen is removed.
17 BLU GND SIG Ground for color OV If open: No change to display.
(Ground signal ) signal If short to ground: No change to display.
18 YEL B SIG Bl ue color signal 0—1 VAC If open: Blue color missing (see "RGB Color"
(Blue signal) diagnostic).
If short to ground: Blue color missing (see "RGB
Color" diagnostic).
19 BRN C SIG Composite video 0.3 VAC If open: Picture rolls horizontally, colors still visible.
(Composite (vertical/horizontal) If short to ground: Picture rolls horizontally, colors
signal) synchronizing still visible.
signal
20 BRN/BLK* SIG 1 SH GND Shield for terminal OV If open: No change to display.
(Shield signal) No. 8,9,17,18,19 If short to ground: No change to display.
* : The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark
gray, may not match the col or of the wire listed on the schematic.
Rearview Camera inputs and Outputs for 6P Connector
. n n ...
1 2 3 4 5 6
I t ...... ......LI
Terminal Wire Terminal Name Description Voltage (about) Symptom

Number Color
1 WHT CAMERA ADPT Console signal for OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
(Adaptive camera) rearview camera If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
2 GRY* CAMERA SHIELD Shield for terminal OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
(Shield camera) No. 5 If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
3 BLU CAMERA V Video signal for 0.3 V If open: No rearview camera image.
(Video camera) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
navigation screen goes black (display
backl ight stil l operative).
4 BLK CAMERA GND Ground for rearview OV If open: No change to rearview camera image.
5 (Ground) camera If short to ground: No change to rearview
camera image.
@ PNK CAMERA VCC Power source for 8V If open: No rearview camera image.
(VCC supply) rearview camera If short to ground: When put into reverse,
navigation screen goes black (display
backlight still operative).
*: The shielded wires have a heat-shrunk tube insulating the outside of the wire. The color of the insulating tube, typically black or dark
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'SUNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX
REVERSE
RELAY D>— (
PASSENGER'SUNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX
No,9(15A)FUSE
(ViaACCESSORY
POW ERSOCKETRELAYI t > — *
o -
> —
NAVIGATIONDISPLAYUNIT
DASHUGHTSBRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER < ]— RED— ■W HT/RED-
(Inthegaugecontrolm
odule}
■W HT/BLU■
PASSENGER'S
MULTIPLEXCONTROL j > —— BLU— i ILL+ ■ RED/BLK■
UNIT
RSIG “ W HT—
-
GSIG
BSIG ■ YEL-
CSIG »BRN-
GNDSIG - BLU-
SHIELDSIG
GA-NETBUS+ 1RED/BLU«
GA-NETBUS ■ RED/W
HT■
-LTBLU* -
C9
SCTYAUDIOGA-NETBUS+ RED/BLU • RED/BLU' GA-NETBUS+
CIO
VOICECONTROLSW
ITCHD>— b REMOTE GA-NETBUS- **■■
GND C3
GA-NETBUS —
R
L
ED/W
TBL
HT
U*■
' RED/WHT■
-LTBLU* -
GA-NETBUS- XMRECEIVER
SHIELD
BLU/GRN- FRDR
SPKRr RGL+ LTGRN
GRY/BLK- FRDR RGGND ■■ PUR•
< f- SPKR—
FRAS GND - BLK
<3-RED/GRN- SPKR+
“ L
FRAS
< h SPKR-
*;Theshieldedwireshaveaheat-shrunktube
insulatingtheoutsideofthewire.
Thecoloroftheinsulatingtube,typicallyblackordarkgray,
m aynotm atchcolorofthewirelistedontheschem atic.
:Shielding
■:Com m unicationline
NAVIGATIONUNIT
(cont'd)
Navigation System Connector Location

o o ooo o OOOOOOOOOO
oooo oo OOOOOOOOOO
o oooo o OOOOOOOOOO
o ooooo OOOOOOOOOO
o o oo oo OOOOOOOOO
o oo o o o DOOOOOOOO
o o oooo OOOOOOOOO
o ooooo DOOOOOOOO
0 O0O0O0-00
OOo
POOOOOQOO
OOOOOOOO
1 2 5 6 8 9 10
/ / /
11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

20P CONNECTOR
NAVIGATION UNIT
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR E ( 2 P )
/ / X 5 6
/ / 10
X 11 12 13 14
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)

NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C ( 8 P )
1 2 3 4 5 XX 8 9 10
1 2 5 6 7
11 12 13 14 15
XX X 18 20
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P ) NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D ( 7 P )
XM RECEIVER 14P CONNECTOR AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C ( 1 4 P ) AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (2 0 P )

1 r1 i;3___ IEp__
____
1 2 r-ss53T1 3 X 5 6 1 2
P3= 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
XX 9 10 11 X 13 14 XX 9 10 11
X 13 14 11 X XX 15 16 17 18 19 20

NAVIGATION SERVICE REARVIEW CAMERA
CHECK CONNECTOR 6P CONNECTOR
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6
i i
Voice control does not work/respond 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (I I).
NOTE: 2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the Mic

• Always check the connectors for poor connections or Level test the under Functional Setup (see page
loose terminals. 22-500) to check the operation of the TALK and
• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the BACK buttons.
audio and navigation system anti-theft codes.
• After troubleshooting, enter the audio and navigation Are the TALK and BACK buttons operational?
system anti-theft codes, and the audio presets.
YES—Go to .step 3.-:
Before assuming that a voice complaint is hardware
related, ensure that the voice control system is being NO—Check for an open or short to ground on
operated correctly. navigation unit connector B (14P) terminal
No. 10.B
• Make sure you are on the correct screen when trying
to issue a voice command. For instance, the 3. Use the Mic Level diagnostic under Functional
command "Find the nearest Italian Restaurant" only Setup (see page 22-500) to check the operation of
works on a Map screen. the microphone.
(See the Navigation System Manual for a complete
list of allowed voice commands for the information Is th e m ic r o p h o n e o p e ra tio n a l?
being displayed.)
• Close the windows and moonroof. YES—Check the operation of the voice control
• Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2). system (see the Navigation System Manual).!
• Adjust the air flow from the air conditioning vents so
that they do not blow against the microphone on the NO—Check for a loose front map light
ceiling. (microphone) assembly. If OK, check for an open or
• Pause after pressing the TALK button, then give a short to ground on navigation unit connector B
voice command clearly in a natural speaking voice. If (14P) terminals No. 6 and No. 14.B
the system cannot recognize your command, speak
louder.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the system may not interpret your voice commands
correctly.
• If you speak a command with something in your
mouth, or your voice is too husky, the system may
misunderstand your command.
• Determine if the problem only happens to one person,
or everyone who uses the system.
• If the system only has a problem with one person's
voice, this should be considered a system limitation.
• Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged.
• Make sure the correct DVD color and version is installed.
• Check on-line for service bulletins or any other
service information for the navigation system.
SymptomTroubleshooting(cont'd)
No p ic tu re Is d isplaye d 7. Measure the voltage between body ground and

navigation unit connector C (8P) terminals No. 1
NOTE: and No. 2 individually.
• Make sure the correct DVD color and version is NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
installed.
+B
• Always check the connectors for poor connections or (WHT/BLU) ACC (YEL/RED)
loose terminals.
• Inspect the system for Non-OEM accessories like
gaming consoles or TV tuners. 1 2 / 4
5 6 7 8
2. Turn on the audio unit and check for sound in each Q£)
Can you hear the audio?
YES—Go to step 4. Is th e r e b a tte r y v o lta g e ?
NO—Go to step 3. YES—Goto step 8.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO—If the + B or ACC wire(s) do not have voltage,
repair open in the wire(s) between the under-hood
4. Check the No. 11(10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and passenger's under-dash fuse/
fuse/relay box and No. 9 (15 A) fuse in the relay box and the navigation unit. ■
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK. 8. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
connector C (8P) terminal No. 4 and the body
Is th e fu s e O K ? ground.
YES—Go to step 5. NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)

GND (BLK)
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1 2 4
/
5 6 7 8
6. Shield the navigation display unit from the sun with
your hand, and check that the display is back lit
(only back light is ON).
C a n y o u s e e th e b a c k lig h t?
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Go to step 10. Is th e r e 0 .2 V o r le s s ?
YES—Goto step9.
NO—Repair open or high resistance in the wire

between the navigation unit and body ground
(G501).B
9. Do the forced starting of display {see page 22-507). Picture is missing a- color-or tone or Is an odd
color
Is the Navi System Link image displayed?
NOTE:
YES—Check all pinfits at the navigation unit A and • Always check the display settings in "set up".
C connectors and recheck operation. If connections • Always check the connectors for poor connections or
are OK, substitute a known-good navigation unit. If loose terminals.
the symptom/indication is still present, replace the • Inspect the system for Non-OEM accessories like
navigation display unit (see page 22-509). ■ gaming consoles or TV tuners.
• Before troubleshooting, get the navigation system
NO—Go to step 10. anti-theft codes.
• After troubleshooting, enter the navigation system
10. Measure the voltage between terminal No, 10 and anti-theft codes.
the navigation display unit 20P connector terminal • Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged.
No. 1 and No. 2 individually. • Make sure the correct DVD color and version is
installed.
NAVIGATI ON DISPLAY UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
+B
(WHT/BLU) 2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "RGB
Color" test under Monitor Check (see page 22-489).
ACC (WHT/RED)
A re th e r e d , g r e e n , a n d b lu e s h o w n ?
1 2 5 6 8 9 10
/ / /
11 12
/ 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 YES—The system is OK at this time. ■
NO—Go to step 3.
Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? 4. Disconnect the navigation unit connector A (20P)

and navigation display unit 20P connector.
YES—Replace the navigation display unit (see page
22-509). ■ 5. Check for loose terminals at navigation unit
connector A (20P) and the navigation display unit
NO—If both terminals No. 1 and No. 2 have no 20P connector.
voltage to terminal No. 10, repair open in the wire
between terminal No. 10 and G501. If only one of A re th e r e lo o s e te rm in a ls ?
either terminal No. 1 or No. 2 have no voltage to
terminal No. 10, repair the open in the affected YES—Repair the terminal. ■
terminal w ire .■
NO—Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
terminals of navigation unit connector A (20P) to terminals of navigation unit connector A (20P) and
the navigation display unit 20P connector based on the navigation display unit 20P connector based on
the missing color(s). the missing color(s).
Missing Navigation Navigation Wire Missing Navigation Navigation

color unit display unit color color unit connector display unit
connector A 20P A (20P) 20P connector
(20P) connector Blue A11 10,20
Blue A11 18 YEL Green A2 10,20
Green A2 9 RED Red A1 10,20
Red A1 8 WHT
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20PJ
NAVIGATI ON UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
1 2 3 4 5
/ 9] 8 9 10
1
11
2 3
12 13 14 15
4 5
/ / 8
18
9 10
20
11 12 13 14 15 18 / 20
/ /


1 2 / 5 6 8 9 10
/ i /
1 2 5 6 8 9 10
/ / / 11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

YES—There is a short to body ground in the circuit
YES—Go to step 7. between the navigation display unit and the
navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded
NO—There is an open in the circuit between the harness.!
navigation display and the navigation unit. Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the NO—Replace the navigation unit. If the problem is
navigation display unit and navigation units. If a still unresolved, replace the navigation display
poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace unit.B
the affected shielded harness. ■
Picture has Sines or rolls 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: 6. Substitute a known-good navigation display unit,

• Always check the display settings in "setup". and recheck.
• Always check the connectors for poor connections or
l oose terminals. Is th e p ic tu re O K ?
• Inspect the system for Non-OEM accessories like
gaming consoles or TV tuners. YES—Replace the navigation display unit. ■
anti-theft codes. NO—Replace the navigation unit (see page 22-508).
• After troubleshooting, enter the navigation system ■ -
anti-theft codes.
• Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• Make sure the correct DVD color and version is
installed. 8. Disconnect the navigation unit connector A (20P)
and navigation display unit 20P connector.
1. Check for electronic aftermarket accessories
(possibly hidden) mounted near the navigation 9. Check for continuity between the navigation unit
display or the navigation unit. connector A (20P) terminal No. 12 to navigation
display unit 20P connector terminal No. 19.
A re th e r e a n y e le c tr o n ic a c c e s s o r ie s ?
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES—Disable the accessories, and recheck. ■
Wife side of female terminals
NO—Goto step 2. 1 2 3 4 5
/ / 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15
9/ 18 / 20
J C SIG (BRN)
3. Start up the navigation picture.
1 2 5 6 8 9 10
Is th e p ic tu r e s c r o llin g h o r iz o n ta lly (le ft to rig h t o r / / /
15 16 17 18 19 20
r ig h t to le ft)?
11 12
/ 14
C SIG (BRN) |
YES—Go to step 7. NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Go into the Diagnostic mode, and use the "RGB Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
Color" test under Monitor Check (see page 22-489).
Is th e p ic tu r e m is sin g a re d , g r e e n o r b lu e c o lo r?
NO—There is an open in the wire. Replace the
YES—Do the troubleshooting for the picture is affected shielded harness. ■
missing a color or tone or is an odd color (see page
22-465). ■
10. Check for continuity between navigation display Special Tools Required
unit 20P connector terminal No. 19 and terminal SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100
No. 20.
Navigation display buttons do not work or
respond properly
NOTE;
• Always check connectors for poor contact and poor
pin fits.
• Before troubleshooting, get the navigation and audio
system anti-theft codes.
• Before troubleshooting, write down all the audio
presets and re-enter them after repairs are complete.
• Always verify the concern and compare the system
operation to a known-good vehicle with the same
Wire side of female terminals software loaded whenever possible. If the concern is
duplicated in the known-good vehicle, then it can be
considered a characteristic of the system.
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? • Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged.
• Make sure the correct DVD color and version is
YES—There is a short to body ground in the circuit installed.
between the navigation display unit and the
navigation unit. Replace the affected shielded 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
harness. ■
2. Eject the navigation DVD (see page 22-507).
NO—Replace the navigation unit. If the problem
still doesn't go away, replace the navigation D o e s th e D V D e je c t?
display unit.B
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Do the troubleshooting for navigation unit will

not eject or accept the navigation DVD (see page
22-472). ■
3. Check the DVD label color, version number, and the

reading surface for damage, scratches or dirt.
NOTE: Refer to ISIS or Honda Service Express

website for any service bulletins about navigation
system DVD information.
Is th e D V D th e c o r r e c t c o lo r ( w h ite ), c o r r e c t
v e r s io n (m in im u m r e q u ir e m e n t), c le a n , a n d fr e e o f
sc ra tc h e s?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Replace the navigation system DVD and

recheck the system. B
4. Turn the audio system ON and test all of its 8. Do the forced starting of display (see page 22-507)
functions. and check the connection links in the "In-Line Diag"
mode.
D o e s th e a u d io s y s te m tu rn o n a n d fu n c tio n
n o rm a lly ? A re th e c o n n e c tio n lin k s n o rm a l (g r e e n )?
YES—Go to step 5. YES—Substitute a known-good navigation display

unit and recheck. If the problem goes away, replace
NO—Troubleshoot the audio system. ■ the original navigation display unit. If the problem
is still present, substitute a known-good navigation
5. Turn the navigation display ON. unit and recheek. If the problem goes away, replace
the navigation unit (see page 22-508). ■
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y tu r n O N , a n d d is p la y
th e d is c la im e r s c r e e n ? NO—Go to step 9.
YES—Goto step 6. 9. Check the connection links on the "In-Line Diag"

mode.
NO—Do the troubleshooting for no picture is
displayed (see page 22-464). ■ A r e a ll th e c o n n e c tio n lin k s r e d ( f a ile d r e s p o n s e ) ?
6. Select "OK" on the disclaimer screen. YES—If the vehicle is equipped with any OEM
audio accessories (audio disc changer, Music Link,
C a n y o u s e le c t “ O K ” o n th e d is c la im e r s c r e e n ? etc.), go to step 12. If there are no OEM audio
accessories connected to the vehicle, go to step 14.
YES—Go to step 7.
NO—Some of the links are red, go to step 10.
NO—Goto step 8.
7. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Touch
Panel Check" (see page 22-489) and "Hard Key" 11. Inspect the connections and pin fits of the following
(see page 22-492) to test all the possible touch units:
locations on the screen and the hard key buttons
that surround the navigation display unit. • Audio unit
• XM receiver
D o e s th e e v e r y b u tto n d is p la y e d o n th e s c r e e n a n d • Navigation display unit
e v e r y h a r d k e y re sp o n d " p ro p e rly rw h e n -to u c h e d -? • Navigation unit------
YES—No problems at this time. Get further details A r e a ll th e c o n n e c tio n s p r o p e r ly c o n n e c te d a n d

from the customer and try to duplicate the problem te rm in a l fits tig h t?
under the same conditions and perform this
troubleshooting again at that time. ■ YES—if the vehicle is equipped with any OEM
audio accessories (audio disc changer, Music Link,
NO—Substitute a known-good navigation display etc.), go to step 12. If there are no OEM audio
unit and recheck. If the problem goes away, replace accessories connected to the vehicle, go to step 14.
the original navigation display unit. If the problem
is still present, substitute a known-good navigation NO—Repair the connection(s) and/or tighten the
unit and recheck. If the problem goes away, replace terminals and retest. ■
the navigation unit (see page 22-508). ■
(cont'd)
navigation unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 10
13. Completely disconnect all cables that connect an and No. 20 individually.
OEM audio accessory to the vehicles GA-NET II
communication bus, then turn the ignition switch
ON (II) and recheck the navigation system.
GA-NET BUS+
(RED/BLU) r
I S L _'__ __ _!
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y n o w r e s p o n d to 1 2 3 4 5 8 910
to u c h ? 11121314159/ /9 18/ 20
GA-NET BUS-
YES—Replace the defective OEM audio accessory (RED/WHT) i JL
or cable. ■ ® (u
NO—Go to step 14.
15. Disconnect the XM receiver connector A (14P), then

turn the ignition switch ON (II) and recheck the Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
navigation system.
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n d is p la y n o w r e s p o n d to the navigation unit connector A (20P), navigation
to u c h ? display unit 20P connector, XM receiver connector
A (14P) and the audio unit connector C (14P).
YES—Replace the defective XM receiver.* Replace the affected shielded harness. ■
NO—Go to step 16. N o —Goto step 21.
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 21. Check for continuity between the navigation unit
connector A (20P) as shown.
disconnect the audio unit connector C (14P). From terminal To terminals
A9 A10/A20
NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio A10 A20
mechanism. NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
18. Disconnect the navigation display unit 20P

2 3 4 5 8 910
121314159719/ 189 20
connector. 1
11
19. Disconnect the navigation unit connector A (20P).
YES—Short in the wire(s) between the navigation

unit connector A (20P), navigation display unit 20P
connector, XM receiver connector A (14P) and the
audio unit connector C (14P). Replace the affected
22. Check for continuity: between the navigation unit 23. Check for continuity between the navigation unit
connector A (20P) and the audio unit connector C r connector A (20P) and the navigation display unit
(14P) according to the table. 20P connector according to the table.
Navigation unit Audio unit connector Navigation unit Navigation display

connector connector unit connector
A9 C3 A9 14
A10 C9 A10 .5
A20 C10 A20 15

GA-NET BUS GA-NET BUS+
SH(LTBLU) (RED/BLU) GA-NET BUS GA-NET BU S+
'SH(LTBLU) (RED/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5
/ / 8 9 10
8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 /GA-NET
/ BUS-
9
18 20
1 2 3 4 5 /
11 12 13 14 15 /
/
/ 18 20
/
I RED/WHT) GA-NET BUS-
(RED/WHT)
GA-NET BU S+
GA-NET BUS (RED/BLU)
SH(LT BLU)
/ 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
/ / 5 6 9 8 9 10
/ / 9 10 11 / 13 14
11 12 / 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
GA-NET B U S+ GA-NET BUS- GA-NET BUS GA-NET BUS-

(RED/BLU) f RED/WHT) SHCLT BLU) (RED/WHT)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C(14P)

Wire side of femal e terminals Wire side of female terminals
NO—Open in the wire(s) between the navigation
unit connector A (20P) and the audio unit connector NO—Open in the wire(s) between the navigation
C (14P). Replace the affected shielded harness. ■ unit connector A (20P) and the navigation display
unit 20P connector. Replace the affected shielded
harness. ■
(cont'd)
24. Check for continuity between the navigation unit N a v ig a tio n u n it w ill n o t e je ct or accept th e
connector A (20P) and the XM receiver connector A n a v ig a tio n DVD
(14P) according to the table.
1. Check No. 11 (10 A) fuse in the passenge's under
Navigation unit XM receiver dash fuse/relay box.
connector connector
A9 A3 A r e th e f u s e s O K ?
A10 A9
A20 A10 YES—Go to step 2.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A <20P)
Wire side of female terminals NO—Replace the blown fuse(s) and recheck. ■
GA-NET BUS GA-NET BUS+
SH (LT BLU) (RED/BLU) 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10
/ / I 3. Eject the DVD from the navigation unit (see page
11 12 13 14 15 / 18 / 20
/ 22-507).
GA-NET BUS-
(RED/WHT)
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n D V D e je c t?
GA-NET BUS
YES—Goto step 4.
SH (LTBLU)
NO—Goto step 5.
1 2 3
/ 5 6
/ / 9 10 11 13 14
4. Reinsert the navigation DVD into the navigation
GA-NET BUS+ GA-NET BUS- unit.
(RED/BLU) (RED/WHT)
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n u n it a c c e p t th e n a v ig a tio n
D VD ?
YES—No problems at this time, the system is
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? normal. Inspect for loose or poor connections at
terminals No. 1, No. 2 and No. 4 of navigation unit
YES—Substitute the following units with known- connector C (8P).B
good units, one at a time in the following order
listed and recheck the navigation system operation NO—Replace the navigation unit (see page 22-508).
after each unit substitution: ■
• Audio unit 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

• XM receiver
• Navigation display unit 6. Slide the passenger's seat forward.
• Navigation unit
If the problem goes away, replace the original

defective unit. ■

unit connector A (20P) and the XM receiver
connector A (14P). Replace the affected shielded
harness. ■
8. Measure the voltage between body ground and

navigation unit connector C (8P> terminals No. 1
and No. 2 individually.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR G (8P)

+i
(WHT/BLU) ACC (YEL/RED)
1 2 / 4
cn
H
7 8
Wire si de of femal e terminals
YES—Go to step 9.
NO—If the + B or ACC wire(s) do not have voltage,

repair open in the wire(s) between the under-hood
fuse/relay box and passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box and the navigation u n it ■
9. Measure the voltage between navigation unit

connector C (8P) terminal No. 4 and the body
ground.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (SP)
GND (BLK)
1 29 4
5 6 17 8
Is th e r e 0 .2 V o r le s s ?
YES—Replace the navigation unit (see page 22-508).
NO—Repair open or high resistance in the wire

between the navigation unit and body ground
(G50D.B
GPS icon is w hite or not shown Voice guidance cannot be heard, is broken
up, or there is static
NOTE:
• Make sure the vehicle is parked outside and away NOTE:
from buildings. • Always check that the volume setting and voice
• Refer to GPS Information (see page 22-496) for feedback are turned ON.
realtime satell ite reception display. • Always check the connectors for poor connections or
• When the reception is good, the icon should appear loose terminals.
green. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the
audio and navigation system anti-theft codes.
1. Check for metallic window tint on the windshiel d, • After troubleshooting, enter the audio and navigation
and electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly system anti-theft codes, and the audio presets.
hidden) mounted near the GPS antenna or the • Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged.
navigation unit. • Make sure the correct DVD color and version is
installed.
Is th e r e m e ta llic w in d o w tin t o r e le c tr o n ic
a c c e s so r ie s? 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES—Remove tint or the accessories, and 2. Press the display unit SET-UP button.
recheck. ■
3. Check the volume setting for the navigation system.
NO—Go to step 2.
Is it s e t to O F F ?
YES—Set the volume to an audible level. ■
3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Navi
System Link" test (see page 22-489) to check the NO—Go to step 4.
GPS antenna.
4. Check the radio operation.
Is th e “ G P S A n t” ic o n r e d ?
C a n y o u h e a r th e ra d io ?
YE S-U se the "Navi ECU" test under Unit Check
(see page 22-492) to cheek for a kinked, crushed, or YES—Go to step 5.
disconnected GPS antenna wire. If necessary, try a
known-good GPS antenna. If the icon is still red, NO—Troubleshoot the audio system. ■
replace the navigation unit.B
5. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Navi
NO—Check that nothing is blocking the GPS System Link" test (see page 22-489) to check the
antenna located behind the gauge control module, radio.
and recheck. Substitute a known-good navigation
unit, and recheck.■ Is th e “ R a d io ” ic o n r e d ?
YES—Check for an open in the RED/BLU or RED/

WHT wires between the navigation unit connector
A (20P) terminals No. 10 and No. 20 and the audio
unit connector C (8P) terminals No. 9 and No. 10. If
the wires are OK, substitute a known-good audio
unit. If the problem doesn't go away, substitute a
known-good navigation unit. Replace the audio
and/or navigation unit as needed. ■
NO—Go to step 6.

7. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-372), and I s t h e r e c o n t i n u i t y between a n y o f t h e terminals?
disconnect the audio unit connector A (20P).
YES—Short in.the wire(s) between the navigation
NOTE: Eject all the discs before removing the audio unit connector A (20P), navigation display unit 20P
unit to prevent damaging the CD player's load connector, XM receiver connector A (14P). Replace
mechanism. the affected shielded harness. ■
8. Disconnect the navigation unit connector B (14P). NO—Go to step 11.
9. Check for continuity between body ground and 11. Check for continuity between navigation unit
navigation unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 5 connector B (14P) terminal No. 5 and the audio unit
and No. 12 individually. connector A (20P) terminal No. 13.

NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) Wire side of female terminals
RG L Hr) (LT GRN) f ~ ~“
RG (+ )
(LTGRN) X/ X X c j> 5 6
/ XX X c p 5 6
XXX X 10 11 12 13 14
/ / Xn 10 12 13 14
r» n ......... h r*.......... n.......n......
GND RG
v(PUR) X 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13
...... u X 15 16 17 18 19
u
20
Wire side of female terminals AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

YES—Short to body ground in the wire(s) between YES—Go to step 12.

the audio unit and the navigation unit. Replace the
affected shielded harness.■ NO—Open in the wire between the navigation unit
and audio unit. Check for poor connections or loose
NO—Goto step 10. terminals at the audio and navigation units. If no
poor connection or loose terminal is found, replace
10. Check for continuity between navigMion'unit the affected shielded harness. ■ ..
connector B (14P) according to the table.

B5 B11,B12
B11 B12
X XX ? X
5 6
XXX X 10 11 12 13 14

12. Check for continuity between navigation unit Vehicle position icon constantly leaves road,
connector B (14P) terminal No. 12 and the audio moves erratically, or is very far from actual
unit connector A (20P) terminal No. 12. position
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) NOTE:
/ / / / 5 6 • Make sure the correct DVD color and version is
10 11 12 13 14 installed.
/ / / X
GND RG (PUR) [
....... r n c r ...... r i n
/
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2. Check the GPS icon on the navigation picture.
11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 i
/
u LJ
Is th e G P S ic o n o n th e m a p s c r e e n ?
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) YES—Do the troubleshooting for the GPS icon is
Wire side of female terminals white or not shown (see page 22-474). ■
Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ? NO—Go to step 3.
YES—Go to step 13. 3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Yaw
Rate" test (see page 22-498) to check the yaw rate
NO—Open in the wire between the navigation unit sensor.
and the audio unit Check for poor connections or
loose terminals at the audio and the navigation 4. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Car
units. If no poor connection or loose terminal is Status" test (see page 22-494) to check the vehicle
found, replace the affected shielded harness. ■ speed pulse.
13. Substitute a known-good navigation unit, and A r e th e y a w r a te s e n s o r a n d v e h ic le s p e e d p u ls e

recheck. O K ?
Is th e s y s te m O K ? YES—The problem may be normal. Check to see if

the problem occurs in the same place. If it does, the
YES—Replace the navigation unit (see page 22-508). problem could be in the database. Go to step 5.
■
NO—If the problem is the yaw rate sensor, replace
NO—Replace the audio unit (see page 22-372). ■ the navigation unit (see page 22-508). If the
probl em is the vehicle speed pulse, troubleshoot
the vehicle speed signal circuit ■
5. Substitute a known-good navigation unit, and

check to see if the problem occurs in the same
place.
D o e s th e p r o b le m o c c u r in th e s a m e p l a c e ?
YES—The problem is in the database. Report the

problem according to the Navigation System
Manual under "Reporting Errors".*
NO—Replace the navigation unit (see page 22-508).

DVD screen error messages. Navigation cannot control XM radio
NOTE: N O TE:
• Check the Navigation System Manual for a list of • Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged.
common DVD screen error messages, and the • Make sure the correct DVD color and version is
probable causes. installed.
• Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Car
Status" test (see page 22-494) to check the status of 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
the DVD lid.
• Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged. 2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Navi
• Make sure the correct DVD color and version is System Link" test (see page 22-489).
installed.
• The following troubleshooting is for the error Is th e “ X M ” ic o n r e d ?
messages shown on the error message table
(see page 22-506). YES—Check the connector at the XM receiver and
the navigation unit (20P connector). ■
1. Check the DVD-ROM reading surface for scratches.
NO—Go to step 3.
A re th e r e s c r a tc h e s ?
YES—Replace the DVD-ROM (see page 22-507). ■
4. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
NO—If the problem occurs occasionally when the 22-508), and recheck.
system is cold, this is normal. If the problem occurs
frequently when driving, replace the navigation C a n th e n a v ig a tio n c o n tro l th e X M r a d io ?
■ unit (see page 22-508). ■
NO—Do the audio system troubleshooting. ■

'frequently asks for anti-theft

-Navigation1 3. Measure the voltage between body ground and
code and needs GPS initialization navigation unit connector C (8P) terminal No. 2.
NOTE: NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)

• Check for low battery.
• This is often caused by losing battery power or a poor
ACC (YEL/RED)
ground.
• Make sure the correct DVD color and version is 1 2 / 4
installed. 5 6 7 8
1. Measure the voltage between body ground and

navigation unit connector C (8P) terminal No. 1.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P) Wire side of female terminals
+BCWHT/BLU)
1 2 / 4 YES—Go to step 4.
5 6 7 8
NO—Repair open or short in the wire between
navigation unit.B
Wire side of female terminals 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Disconnect the navigation unit connector C (8P).

6. Check for continuity between navigation unit
YES—Go to step 2. connector C (8P) terminal No. 4 and body ground.
NO—Repair open or short in the wire between

NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
navigation unit.B
GND (BLK)
C333 ...
1 2 / 4
5 6 7 8

■
NO—Repair open in the wire between navigation

unit and body ground (G501). B
Navigation connot control HVAC by voice 4. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use the Navi
command System Link diagnostic (see page 22-489).
NOTE: Is th e A ir-c o n ic o n r e d ?
• Always check the connectors for poor connections or
loose terminals. YES—Goto step 5.
anti-theft codes. NO—Substitute a known-good climate control units
• After troubleshooting, enter the navigation system and navigation unit one at a time, in this order.
anti-theft codes. Recheck the system operation after each unit
• Verify that the correct navigation unit is installed for substitution until the problem is resolved, then
this model. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use replace the malfunction u n it. 11
"Version" (see page 22-502).
• Always check for and resolve all CAN DTCs before 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
troubleshooting the navigation system.
• Make sure the DVD is not scratched or damaged. 6. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (20P)
• Make sure the correct DVD color and version is and navigation unit connector A (20P).
installed.
7. Check for continuity between body ground and the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). navigation unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 4,
No. 14, and No. 15 individually.
2. Check the navigation system function.
NAVIGATI ON UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n s y s t e m fu n c tio n n o r m a lly a ll
o th e r a s p e c ts o f o p e ra tio n ? ____________ , UART BUS S1 (GRN/ORN)
1 2 3 4 5 / 8 910
YES—Go to step 3.
11121314159/ 9 189 20
UART BUS I T UART BUS
NO—Refer to the navigation system symptom S i (RED/ORNjl JC L K (YEL/BLU)
troubleshooting. Resolve any other problems and
then recheck the system function. ■ (g ) (g )
3. Check the HVAC function. Wire side of female terminals
D o e s th e H V A C s y s t e m fu n c tio n n o r m a lly a ll o th e r
-....... aspects of operation?.... - -..........-... - t s t h e r e ~ c o n t i n u f t y ? ....
YES—Go to step 4. YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the navigation unit connector A (20P) and
NO—Refer to the HVAC system symptom climate control unit connector A (20P).H
troubleshooting. Resolve any other problems and
then recheck the system function. ■ NO—Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between the navigation unit
connector A (20P) and the climate control unit
9. Measure the voltage between body ground and the connector A (20P) according to the table.
navigation unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 4,
No. 14, and No. 15 individually. Navigation unit Climate control unit
connector connector
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) A4 A17
A14 A19
A15 A18
1 2 3 4 5
/ / 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
UART BUS
/ 91 / 18
UART BUS
20
SO (RED/ORN) CLK (YEL/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 / 8 9 10
/
11 12 13 14 15 18 / 20
/ /
UART BUS UART BUS
Wire side of female terminals SO (RED/ORN) CLK (YEL/BLU)
1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10
/
YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between 11 12 14 16 17 18 19 20
/ /
the navigation unit connector A (20P) and climate UART BUS SI (GRN/ORN)
control unit connector A (20P). ■ UART BUS
UART BUS CLK (YEL/BLU) SO (RED/ORN)
NO—Go to step 10. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (A20P)


navigation unit connector A (20P) and the climate
control unit connector A (20P). ■
12. Substitute a known-good climate control unit

(see page 21-123), and recheck.
D o e s th e p r o b le m g o e s a w a y ?
YES—Replace the original climate control unit.B

Display day/night mode does not work System locks up or freezes constantly
NOTE: NOTE:
* Check the display setting. Check the DVD for damage.
• Always check the connectors for poor connections or • Check the DVD color.
loose terminals. • Check the'GPS and'VSP signals in the'GPS
* Before troubleshooting, make sure you have the information and car status tests. :
navigation system anti-theft codes.
• After troubleshooti ng,'enter the navigation system 1. Start the engine.
anti-theft codes.
® Full brightness on- the instrument panel brightness 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then back ON (II).
control causes the system to stay in the day mode,
even when the lights are on. D o e s th e s y s te m re b o o t?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES—The system is OK at this time. ■
2. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control NO—Check the DVD for scratches or damage, and
is not on full brightness. Turn the headlights on, the navigation unit for water damage. If OK, go into
and adjust the dash brightness to.the- middle range. the Diagnostic Menu, and do all of the "Unit Check"
tests (see page 22-492). ■
3. Change the day/night mode under Set-up to "Auto"
and recheck.
D o e s th e d is p la y c h a n g e to d a y a n d n ig h t m o d e s
w h e n tu rn in g th e h e a d lig h t o n a n d o ff?
YES—The system is OK at this time.B
NO—Goto step 4.
4. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Car

Status" test to check for an ILL signal (see page
22-494).
Is t h e “ ILL” s i g n a l O K ?
YES—The system is OK. ■
NO—Check the ILL-f- circuit between the

navigation unit and No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box. If OK,
substitute a known-good navigation unit and
navigation display unit one at a time, in this order.
Recheck the system operation after each unit
substitution until the problem is resolved, then
replace the malfunction unit ■
V eh icle Icon m oves b y its e lf w h e n parked N a v ig a tio n d is p la y sta ys on w ith ig n itio n

s w itc h OFF
NOTE:
• Always check the connectors for poor connections or NOTE:
loose terminals. • Always check the connectors for poor connections or
• Before troubleshooting, make sure you have loose terminals.
navigation system anti-theft code. • Before troubleshooting, make sure you have
• After troubleshooting, re-enter the anti-theft code, navigation system anti-theft code.
and re-initialize the navigation system. • After troubleshooting, re-enter the anti-theft code,
and re-initialize the navigation system.
1. Start the engine. • Check for Non-OEM accessories using the ACC circuit.
2. From the main menu, select places, then select any 1. Remove the key from the ignition.
destination, and begin the trip.
D o e s th e n a v ig a tio n s c r e e n s ta y o n ?
3. With the vehicle parked, watch the vehicle icon on
the display. YES—Go to step 2.
D o e s th e v e h ic le p o s itio n ic o n m o v e b y its e lf? NO—The system is OK at this time.M
YES—Go to step 4. 2. The vehicle may have been used as a

demonstration vehicle at an event like an auto
NO—The system is OK at this time. ■ show. In these events, power is often jumpered to
the navigation system so that the ignition key is not
4. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and select "DEMO needed in the vehicle. At the end of the show, the
MODE" test (see page 22-500) under Functional jumper wire may not have been removed. Check
Setup. the navigation unit "C" connector (8P) for a "non
factory" jumper wire in series with the factory
Is th e “ D E M O M O D E ” s e t to “ Y E S ” ? cable.
YES—Set the Demonstration mode to "NO". ■ Is th e re a ju m p e r w ire ?
NO—Replace the navigation unit (see page 22-508). YES—Remove the jumper wire, and re-test. ■
NO—Go to step 3.
3. The navigation display or the navigation unit may

have been jumpered to allow the navigation
system to run without the ignition key.
D o e s th e s y s te m fu n c tio n w ith th e ig n itio n s w itc h

off?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Go to step 5.
4. Remove the navigation display, and check to see if Navigation cannot control audio system
the navigation display unit 20P connector has a
non-factory jumper wire in series with the factory NOTE:
connector. • Check the vehicle battery condition first.
• Check for and resolve any audio unit concerns first.
Is th e r e a ju m p e r w ire ?
YES—Remove the jumper wire, and re-test. ■
2. Make sure the anti-theft code for the audio system
NO—Goto step 5. is entered.
5. Check the interior lights with the ignition switch off. 3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu, and use the "Navi
System Link" test (see page 22-489).
C a n y o u tu r n o n th e in te r io r lig h ts w ith th e ig n itio n
sw itc h o ff? Is th e “ R a d io ” ic o n r e d ?
YES—Go to step 6. YES—Do the troubleshooting for the voice

guidance cannot be heard is broken up or there is
NO—Replace the navigation unit (see page 22-508). static (see page 22-474). ■
■
NO—Go to step 4.
6. Disconnect Navigation unit connector C (8P).
7. Measure the voltage between navigation unit
connector C (8P) terminal No. 2 and body ground. 5. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see page
22-508), and recheck.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR C (8P)
C a n th e n a v ig a tio n u n it c o n tr o l th e a u d io ?
ACC (YEL/RED) YES—Replace the original navigation unit

(see page 22-508). ■
1 2 / 4
NO—Do the audio system troubleshooting. ■
5 6 7 8
YES—Repair short to power in the wire. ■

Rearview camera image does not come on or 10. Check for continuity between body ground and
work properly navigation unit connector D (7P) terminal No. 1 and
No. 5 individually.
NOTE:
• Check the vehicle battery condition first. NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D «7P)
• Check for the correct color DVD (white) and software
version. The wrong DVD or software version may
affect the rearview camera function.
• A short in the wiring to the rearview camera can 1 2
permanetly damage the navigation unit. VCC (PNK) I CAMERA V
. . (BLU) , ^
1. Set the parking brake. (q ) ca
3. Go into the system diagnostic menu and check the Wire side of female terminals
reverse signal in the car status test.
D o e s t h e b a c k - u p s i g n a l g o f r o m O F F ( 0 ) t o O N ( I) Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
w h e n th e s h ift le v e r is m o v e d fr o m th e p a r k to th e
r e v e r s e p o s itio n s? YES—Short to body ground in the wire(s) between
the navigation unit and the rearview camera.
YES—Go to step 7. Replace the appropriate shielded harness. ■
NO—Go to step 4. NO—Go to step 11.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check for continuity between the terminals of
navigation unit connector D (7P) according to the
5. Disconnect the navigation unit connector C (8P). table.
6. Measure the voltage on the navigation unit From terminal To terminals

connector C (8P) terminal No. 5 to body ground D6 (GRY) D1 (PNK), D5 (BLU)
with the shifter in the reverse position. D1 (PNK) D5(BLU)
Is th e re b a tte r y v o lta g e ? NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P)
YES—Place the shifter back into the park position

and go to step 8. @ 1 (a)
1 2 5 6 7
NO—There is no back-up signal voltage from the
reverse relay. Place the shifter back into the park
position and troubleshoot the open or short in the
back-up light circuit. ■
8. Disconnect the navigation unit connector D (7P). Is th e r e c o n tin u ity b e tw e e n a n y o f th e te rm in a ls ?
9. Disconnect the rearview camera 6P connector. YES—Short in the wire(s) between the navigation
unit and the rearview camera. Replace the affected
12. Check for continuity between navigation unit 13. Check for continuity between the navigation
connector D (IP) and rearview camera 6P connector D (7P) terminal No. 7 and body gruound.
connector according to the table.
Navigation unit Rearview camera NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P)

connector connector
D1 6
D5 3 ■ 5 6 7
D6 2
CAMERA
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P) ADPT
(WHT) (Q )
S ?
1 2
/ / 5 6 7
VCC (PNK) CAMERA V CAMERA SHIELD (GRY) Wire side of female terminals
(BLU)
CAMERA V ____j
© <tp
T 1 Is th e r e c o n tin u ity ?
VCC
(BLU) (PNK)
n___ _ n YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
1 2 3 4 5 6 between the navigation unit and the rearview
y u
camera. ■
CAMERA SHIELD
(GRY)
REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR NO—Go to step 14.

unit and the rearview camera. Replace the affected
(cont'd)
14. Check for continuity between navigation unit

connector D (7P) and reaview camera 6P connector
Navigation unit Rearview camera

connector connector
D2 4 and 5
D7 1
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (7P)

1 2
/ / 5 6 7
CAM GND (BLK) CAMERA

ADPT (WHT)
~ © ----
CAMERA CAM GND (BLK)

ADPT (WHT)
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6
u u
CAM GND (BLK)
REARVIEW CAMERA 6P CONNECTOR
YES—Substitute and known-good rearview camera

then retest. If the problem is resolved, replace the
original rearview camera. If the problem is not
resolved, replace the navigation unit (see page
22-508). ■

navigation unit and the rearview cam era.!
System Diagnostic Mode
Diagnostic Function Diagram

This diagram shows the diagnostic slice of the System Function Diagram. I t has the diagnostic features of the
navigation system starting at the center and working outward in layers. The diagnostic starts at "Key O N /' and then
displays the Diagnostic Main Menu (Sel ect Diagnosis items) after:
The diagram shows the available menu choices starting at the bottom left and moving clockwise.
You will find a detailed explanation of each feature on the given page numbers.
In most cases, do not clear or change settings in any diagnostic screen unless instructed to do so in the explanation or
by the factory. If the factory supplies you with a PCMCIA card to place in the PC slot, then the features specified in the
diagram with "Card" are available.
• Starting the vehicle with the SCS service connector plugged in to the navigation service check connector (see page
22-507) to get to the System Links screen, then selecting Return.
• Simultaneously pressing and holding the MENU, MAP/GUIDE, and CANCEL buttons.
(cont'd)
System Diagnostic Mode (cont'd)
Factory diagnostic screen In Line Diag Start-up procedure and Diagnosis Menu
NOTE; Check the SCS service connector for a shorting 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
connector.
Press and hold the Menu, the Map/Guide, and the
1. When a navigation unit is powered up for the first Cancel buttons. Keep them pressed for
time at the factory, the "factory diagnosis" screen approximately 5 seconds or jumper the 2-pin SCS
(In Line Diag) appears. Normally the factory service connector. The display screen then goes
performs the steps necessary to verify proper directly to the Diagnostic Menu.
operation and terminate the "factory diagnostic".
Until the proper confirmation sequence is NOTE:
performed, the screen will appear every time the * This only allows access to the diagnostic screens.
vehicle is started. All other Navigation functions are disabled.
• When you finish troubleshooting, make sure you
remove the SCS service connector.
In Line Diag | Start Di ag | Exit Diag
rl Navi ECU 1 DIAGNOSTIC MENU SCREEN
XXXX Correct PIN
A GPS Antenna 1
1 2 3 Select Di agnosis Items | I Return |
H Display 1 4.
BACK
H A/C I Navi System DPS Information |
4 5 6
-J......R a r i i n ” .... 1[□□□□□□□□□□I
I Monitor Check Yaw Rate 1
H XM 1 7 8 9 [ Onit Check Tire Calibrate |
H F-CAN I KA I Car Status Functi onal Set up 1
H Rear Camera 1 Delete 0 Done I F- CAN Versi on |
2. Follow the steps to prevent the screen from

showing up in the future:
2. After the display changes to the Diagnostic Menu,
• Hold down the buttons (Menu+Map/Guide+ select the item you want to check, and the test will
Cancel) for about 5 seconds (the "Select start. To return to the previous screen, select
Diagnosis Items" screen will appear). "Return".
• Hold down the Map/Guide button for 5—10
seconds (A screen with a "Complete" button, will • Navi System (Link)
appear). • Monitor Check
• Touch "Complete", and then the "Return" button • Unit Check
(the system may re-boot). • Car Status
• Wait 10 seconds, and then restart the vehicle, • F-CAN
and confirm normal operation by completing the • GPS Information
"PDI of the navigation system" Service Bulletin. • Yaw Rate
• Tire Calibrate
• Functional Setup
• Version
Navi Syst em Link Monitor Check .,
• Thi s diagnostic tests the cables connecting the Overview of the navigation display
navigation components. Ensure that the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. When the diagnostic • The navigation display-communicates with the
begins, you hear a "bong" sound. The system is in a navigation unit over its own GA-Net bus. Information
, "Detecting" mode, and is waiting for all items in is sent to the navigation unit wheneverthe user
white to be tested. This includes the voice control activates the touch screen or buttons* Information
switch (TALK/BACK buttons), and microphone. sent by the navigation unit to the navigation display
• Press the TALK button on the steering wheel, and in a includes commands to control the LCD back light
normal voice, say "testing". The Talk indicator on the • This security system protects the navigation display
screen should turn green, and the voice level by daisy-chaining the security signal through it, and
indicator should move to at least the 6th bar to pass. then passing the signal to the audio unit.
Next, press the BACK button. The "back" indicator • The illumination input from the gauge brightness
should turn green. control provides back lighting for the buttons
• If all of the communication lines connecting the surrounding the screen.
system components, and the TALK/BACK buttons/
microphone check out OK (all block diagram items These screens allow you to troubleshoot the navigation
are green), then the "OK" indicator turns green. display. Select the item you want to troubleshoot, and
• If there is a problem with the system, the faulty follow the diagnostic instructions.
system component item turns red, and the screen will
show "NG" in red. Use the troubleshooting index, • RGB Color
and other diagnostic screens to help locate the • Gray Tone
problem. • White Raster
• The indication on the screen will not change until you • Black Raster
cycle the ignition switch. After repairing the affected • Color Pattern
cable or system, repeat this diagnostic. • Monitor Adjustment
NOTE: Green boxes and green "OK" indicate that the • Touch Panel Check
communications lines (cables) are intact. This • Touch Panel Calibration
diagnostic does not necessarily imply that the
individual components are functioning properly. For
instance, the GPS antenna wire may be crushed, but 1 Monitor Check ] ( R e tu rn !
still show as "green". A road test, or other diagnostic
may be necessary to find the problem. Additionally I RGB Color || Color Pattern 1
the rear camera is optional. If the vehicle has the rear I Gray Tone || Monitor Adjustment |
view camera installed, the indication w ill be green, - 1 W hite Raster || Touch Panel Check |
otherwise the indication is a yellow color-this is 1 Black Raster || Touch Panel Calibraion |
normal.
• Select "Return" to return to the Diagnostic Menu or
the "Exit Diag" button to exit.
NOTE: The Mic Level indicator must reach the 6th bar
or greater to pass the test.
Navi System Link [ j Return ~j
(cont'd)
RGB Color Gray Tone

This screen verifies that the navigation display is This screen looks for problems with contrast. You
receiving the video (R, G, B and Composite sync) should be able to see the changes from bar to bar
signals properly. The three primary colors should all be across the scale. It is normal for the 2 bars on either
shown without distortion. The combination of all three side to appear the same.
should produce a central white section. If any of the
colors are missing, troubleshoot for the color signal
(see page 22-465). If the picture has lines in it, or scrolls
horizontally or vertically, troubleshoot for a Composite | Return |
( Gra\f Tone
sync problem (see page 22-467).
White Raster
The entire display must be white.
( White Raster ) I Return

Hack Raster
The entire display must be black.
( Monitor Adjustment ) 1 Return |
Setting ( 0 ,0 )
Default ( 0 ,0 )
Default Tuning
Touch Panel Check

The panel touch sensing system consists of a touch
Color Pattern sensitive resistive membrane covering the display.
The chart below shows the colors being used for the Contrary to other systems using infrared beams, the
Map and Menu screens. This is for factory use only. To screen has to be physically touched to make it work.
check the color signal use the "RGB" test. The display has the capability of an almost infinite
number of touch locations. However, to be compatible
with earlier systems, the software only senses the
locations shown on the diagnostic screen below. Every
possible touch button position is shown on this
diagnostic screen. Touching one of these areas should
cause its color to reverse, and the sound a "beep". If
the touch locations are off slightly (by less than one
touch location), use the "Touch Panel Calibration"
diagnosis to re-align the touch "zones" with the screen
image. If any areas of the screen either don't respond,
or respond at some other location when touched, then
replace the navigation display.
NOTE: Unlike earlier screens that used infrared sensors,

direct sunlight will not affect this test
Monitor Adjustment
This allows you to center the navigation display. Use
the joystick to move the picture up/down or left/right. It
is unlikely that you will ever need to adjust the monitor | Return
position. The "Default" button will reset the display
position to factory specifications. The factory default is
0,0.
(cont'd)
Touch Panel Calibration Unit Check

The display screen uses a touch sensitive membrane
instead of fixed infrared "beams". This means that To start the test, select the item you want to check.
every location of the entire surface of the display is
touch sensitive. • Display
Forthe display to be compatible with earlier navi • Radio
systems, the system software creates "touch zones" • Navi ECU
emulating the touch "switches" created by the • PC Card Info
intersections of 20 vertical and 10 horizontal infrared • Hard Key
beams. This diagnostic allows alignment of these
artificially created "zones" with the location of the
buttons images on the screen.
( Select Check Units ] I Return I
Normally this should never need adjustment, and it is
used only to adjust the touch locations for parallax (the Display PC Card Info. I
touch locations appear different when viewed at an Radio Hard Key H
angle). However if an adjustment is necessary, follow Navi ECU
this procedure:
• The screen consists of four test areas consisting of a

" + " button and an adjacent box with a black border.
Touch the four" + " buttons to verify alignment. If
you touch a " + " button, and the adjacent box
becomes yellow, then do the following. Continue to
hold the " + " button, and simultaneously move the
joystick to shift the screen slightly from side to side,
or up and down. The adjustment is complete when
you can touch all four" + " boxes and none of the
adjacent boxes turns yellow.
• To store any changes you make, push in the joystick.
• To reset the touch zones to the factory default, touch
the Map/Guide button.
• Press Return to exit the diagnostic.
+ I Return |
Push M ap/Guide to reset the parameter.

i+ i i I l+ l
Push Joy stick to set it.
±
Display Navi'ECU
This performs additional checks on the communication This screen looks for problems with the navigation unit.
bus between the navigation unit and the navigation When you initiate this diagnostic the navigation unit
display unit. In addition, the internal electronics and may delay up to a minute while the diagnostic runs.
touch screen functionality are confirmed.
• If the "V-RAM" or "D-RAM" is NG, then replace the
• When the connection is IMG, first check for loose navigation unit.
terminals at the navigation unit, the navigation • If the "GPS" indicates "NG (ANT)", then check the
display unit and the audio unit connections. Next, entire GPS antenna wire from the navigation unit to
check for an open or short in the communication line the antenna. If the wire is crushed or damaged, try a
between the navigation unit, the navigation display known good antenna. If this diagnostic reads OK,
unit and the audio unit; If you find the line has an then order a new GPS antenna. If the diagnostic still
open or short, replace the affected shielded harness. reads NG (ANT), then replace the navigation unit.
• If the ROM or RAM is NG, replace the navigation • "DVD ROM" represents the database version on the
display unit. DVD. You can also find this information in setup by
• The version represents the software version in the selecting System Information.
display. • "Serial No." should be the same as the serial number
found on the underside of the navigation unit. You
need this number to obtain the security code from the
Interactive Network (iN) system.
"Mem Clear" is for factory use, and should never be
( Display ) 1 Return used unless instructed by the factory. Accidental
selection will erase the customer's personal data,
Connection OK OK
ROM OK PINS, and settings. If selected, a popup box is
RAM OK appears asking if you want to clear the memory. If so,
Version 040423 select "Yes".
f Navi ECU ~ ] I Return

■ -------
V—RAM OK OK
Radio D-RAM OK
GPS OK
This diagnostic checks the audio connections. If not OK,
DVD-ROM
do the troubleshooting for the audio system. Serial No. ABC011234567
Mem Clear
( Radio 1 1 Return 1
...............
Connection OK OK
PC Card i nfo Car Status

There is no PC Card in the PC slot, and the screen
should say, "PC Card is not inserted". Use this screen to confirm that the navigation unit is
properly receiving input signals. Signals equal to (0) are
NOTE: Do not insert any card or object into the slot. OFF, and signals equal to (1) are ON. If the value on the
display does not match the actual vehicle status, then
check the wire carrying the signal.
{ PC Card Information ) I Return ] • VSP-Vehicle Speed Pulse from PCM

(Pin 6 of 8-Pin C-connector)
a) OFF (0) when vehicle is not moving
PC Card is not inserted. b) ON (1) when vehicle is moving
The VSP comes from the PCM as a dedicated signal.
Internally, the navigation unit compares the actual VP
on the map against street data to adjust the pulse to
speed scaling factor. As this scaling factor becomes
more accurate, the "Level" gradually increases from 0
to 10.
If the factory provides a PC card, and instructs you to
insert a card, then the screen displays the Manufacturer, • BACK-Reverse indication from the taillight relay
and Product Name as shown in the following screen. (Pin 5 of 8-Pin C-connector)
a) OFF (0) when the shift lever is in any position other
NOTE: the "FILES" is for factory use only. than reverse
b) ON (1) when the shift lever is in reverse
The Back signal is used by the navigation unit to allow
PC Card Inform ation 1 Return the map screen to show the VP moving backwards
when in reverse, and to trigger the optional rear view
M anufacturer
camera. This signal is needed because the Speed Pulse
xxxxxx does not provide any directional information to the
Product Nam e system.
xxxxxx
• ILL CANCEL
Files a) OFF (0) when the gauge control module brightness
control is not set to maximum brightness.
b) ON (1) when the gauge control module brightness
knob is at full bright
Hard Key The illumination cancel feature comes from the meter
This diagnostic checks the status of each hard button message in F-CAN.
surrounding the navigation display. When each hard
button is pressed, the corresponding item on the screen
should flash "blue". Touch the return key, or press and
hold the joystick to exit.
Hard Key ] I Returnl

• ILL-lllumination Indication F-CAN System Link
(Pin 5 of the navigation unit 20-Pin A-connector)
a) OFF (0) when the parking lights, or headlights are F-CAN (Fast Controller Area Network) passes
off information between processors on the network. For
b) ON (1) when the parking lights, or headlights are example, the F-CAN network is used to pass charging
on system or "illmination cancel" signals. The F-CAN
The navigation unit uses the signal to determine network uses a communication protocol that transmits
whether to put the navigation screen into the Day or data at 500 Kbps.
Night brightness mode. (Setup screen 1)
• If the diagnostic screen below reads NG with the
• DVD Lid-senses if the DVD door is open ignition switch ON (II), you can use the HDS (HONDA
a) (Close) when the door is closed Diagnostic System) to retrieve the diagnostic trouble
b) (Open) when the door is open codes (DTCs) from the F-CAN. The data displayed in
The navigation unit has a microswitch to detect this. If the ID boxes is irrelevant.
open is indicated when the door is closed, replace the • For more details on troubleshooting the F-CAN, refer
navigation unit. to the multiplex system.
NOTE: If this is red "IF4", then the F-CAN link to the

gauge control module may be malfunctioning.
Car Status Returnl Troubleshoot in the F-CAN selection of the service
manual.
VSP m ILL [0]
BACK [0] DVD Lid [Close] F- CAN System Link Return
ILL CANCEL [0] F-CAN ERROR ACTIVE | OK ]
UNIT ID
METER | 1F4 |
(cont'd)
GPS In fo rm a tio n
This screen shows the current status of GPS reception.

The circular diagram shows the current location of the Return
GPS Information
GPS satellites (yellow numbers) as they would appear
in the sky. The outer circle represents the horizon Number of Satellites
(0 degrees elevation). The middle and inner circles
represents 30 and 60 degrees respectively. The very Current Position
center of the diagram (90 degrees elevation) is directly Latitude: U k x ° x x 'x x ”
Longitude: Exxxôc'xx*
overhead. Nearby obstructions, like tall buildings, will Elevati on: 0 feet
block satellites in that direction. That is why it is xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx
necessary to troubleshoot GPS reception issues in an
open area. The satellites shown on the diagram
correspond to the "PRN" number in the "GPS Details"
screen. There are always 24 "active" GPS satellites in
orbit. Because satellites fail, and have to be removed NOTE:
from service, spares are always parked in orbit, ready Push and hold the "Map/Guide" button, and the "dots"
to be activated. This is why the PRN (satellite ID on the diagram are replaced with the "PRN"# (satellite
number) can be greater than 24. numbers). These numbers correspond to the numbers
in the "PRN" column on the "GPS details" screen.
NOTE:
• To use this screen for troubleshooting, the vehicle
should be outside, away from buildings, tall trees,
and high-tension wires for at least 10 minutes with
the engine running.
• Metallic window tinting on the front window dr after-
market electronic accessories mounted near the
navigation unit, GPS antenna or navigation display
can interfere with GPS acquisition.
• The "Number of Satellites" box shows the number of
acquired satellites (maximum of 12). It should contain
3 or more icons. If not, troubleshoot for "GPS icon is
white or not shown" (see page 22-474).
• The "Current Position" shows latitude, longitude, and
elevation (in meters). If there are less than 4 satellites,
the elevation can be grossly inaccurate.
• The Date/Time field shows the current date, and also
a time that includes daylight savings and other
offsets entered by the customer in Setup function
"Adjust Time Zone/Clock".
GPS Detail NOTE: The data shown in the GPS Detail screen is an
example only.
By pressing and holding the MENU button for
10 seconds, a GPS Detail screen appears. This screen C o lu m n Description . Problem indication
displays real time incoming satellite positional data. Active Active satellites If "3D" is missing
Most of the information shown on this screen is for (Yellow Dot) do the GPS icon is
factory use, however, some of the data can indicate white or not shown
partial GPS signal interference. troubleshooting
(see page 22-474).
PRN The satellite ID
number
Return ST The status: If all 0, then, do the
GPS Detail
0 = cannot view or GPS icon is white
TS:xx ]|HDop:xx.x jf Speed:x.xMi/h ][ Date:xxxx.xx.xx
c AS:xx JlVDop:xx.x , [ Direction: x ° , [ Tirrte:xx:xx:xx searching, or not shown
3D PRN ST AZI EL cm ACC 1 2 = acquiring troubleshooting
O XX XX XXX XX XXX XX s (see page 22-474).
O XX XX XXX XX XXX XX
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX 1/2 AZI Azimuth, the angle
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX (0—360) clockwise
o XX XX XXX XX XXX XX from north
SOJ XX XX XXX XX XXX XX s
EL Elevation from the
horizon
(90 deg is overhead)
C/N N/A Healthy signal is
The box TS/AS and HDopA/Dop is for factory use. 4 9 -5 2 ,
The Speed and Direction information is updated in no signal: 27—33
real time when driving, and can be used to detect ACC N/A
intermittent speed sensor problems.
The Date/Time Information is the same as in Setup
screen 2 "Adjust Time Zone/Clock".
If the "3D" icon is shown above the yellow dots, this
implies that at least 4 satellites are available for map
positioning, and the "GPS" indicator on the map
screen will be green. See the Global Positioning
System detailed explanation in the "System
Description" (see page 22-445).
If the row of data in the table below begins with a
"yellow dot", the AZI and EL fields can be used to
locate each satellite "PRN"# on the circular GPS
diagram (see prior screen).
(confd)
Y a w Rate • The yaw rate offset and sensor should be within + / —

0.01 V of each other when stopped. The sensor value
This diagnostic checks the yaw rate sensor in the should change relative to the offset as the car is
control unit. This device detects when the vehicle turns, turned while driving. If not, replace the navigation
and repositions the vehicle position icon on the map unit.
screen. For more detailed information, see the yaw rate
sensor theory of operation under "System Description" Example: Vehicle stopped
(see page 22-444).
Normal Abnormal
• "Sensor" indicates the voltage output from the yaw Offset 2.526 V Offset 2.526 V
rate sensor. It should indicate about 2.500 V when Sensor 2.516-2.536 V Sensor 2.623 V
stopped.
• "Offset" is the reference voltage or standard within Example: Vehicle turning
the yaw rate sensor. It also should indicate about
2.500 V when stopped. Normal Abnormal
• A "sensor" output voltage LOWER than the "Offset" Offset 2.526 V Offset 2.526V
voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the Sensor 2.678 V Sensor 2.623 V
right. (left turn) (no change on
A "sensor" output voltage HIGHER than the "Offset" 2.478 V turns)
voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the left. (rightturn)
• The yaw rate offset and sensor should both indicate
about 2.500 V when stopped. If either reads zero or The settings "CCW Cal Factor", "CW Cal Factor", and
5.000 V, replace the navigation unit. "Set" are for factory use only. This function should
never be used.
NOTE: Do not try to adjust the yaw rate sensor without
instructions from American Honda. See the Yaw Rate
Tuning subsection to tune the sensor.
( Yaw Rate ] 1 Return [

r
Sensor x.xxxV
Offset x.xxxV
CCW Factor 0.0% m
m
m Tuning
CW Factor 0.0%
m Set
J
Yaw Rate Tuning Tire Calibrate ~ - :- ;1
This diagnostic allows you to graphically display As the vehicle moves, the navigation system receives
problems with the yaw rate sensor. speed pulses from the PCM. These pulses are
converted using a conversion factor to a mph speed
• The "ANG-Disp" value accumulates any differences that moves the vehicle position (VP) on the map. The
between the "offset", and "sensor" voltages (see navigation system has an internal tuning function that
Yaw Rate diagnostic). When the sensor is working, generates, and refines this factor based on actual
the random changes in these two voltages generally driving. The "Level" indicates the status of the tuning.
cancels out, so the value is 0. However, if one voltage At navigation initialization, it begins at 0, and increases
is consistently higher than the other, then the "ANG- to 10 as the navigation system is used.
Disp" value accumulates the constant change.
• The "Reset" button temporarily clears the angular • The "Auto Tuning" is factory set to "ON", and should
accumulation (ANG-Disp), and clears the display dots. remain on.
• Do not touch the "CCW" or "CW", or "Set" buttons. • The "Study" indicates the tuning status. If it is less
These are used for factory setup only. than 10, the unit is still calibrating.
• The "Tire-Cal. Tuning" and "Set" should not be used.
For gross problems with the sensor, the stationary test It is for factory use only.
usually confirms whether the sensor is defective. For
yaw rate issues related to driving, do the road test
described below.
( Tire-—Calibrate ) I Retu.0L
1. Stationary test: If the "VP" icon spins in place, and
the "ANG-Disp" value slowly increases or Auto Tuning OFF f0N~l
decreases in value, the yaw rate sensor is defective. I OFF I
Replace the navigation unit. Study LevelO
Tire—Cal. Tuning xx.xx%
2. Road test: Drive the vehicle on a very straight road.
Enter the diagnostic mode, select "Yaw rate", and Set
touch the "Tuning" button. While driving down a
straight road, the white "dots" should trace a
straight line across the screen. However, if you are
driving on a straight road, and you notice the dots
constantl y dropping down or heading up as you
drive, the navigation unit's yaw sensor is defective.
You can touch "Reset" to clear "ANG-Disp", and
the dotted line.
3. If either test fails, please enter "Yaw rate sensor

defective" for the problem description, on the
"Navigation core return form".
! Tuning | o.o% f A r v 1 r Peturn ]
m
ANG-Disp
0°
| Reset | | CCW | I CW | [ Set I
(cont'd)
Functional Setup Log Data

This screen allows the factory to collect log data to
Select the item you want to check. troubleshoot navigation system issues.
• Lag Data • There is no card in the "PC Card Slot", and the PC slot
• GPS Send Time door should always be closed. The screen should
• Demo Mode appear as shown.
• Mic Level
• Solar Angle
• Save Users Memory ( ' 0 7 - 0 8 models)
( Log Data ) 1 Return
'06 model
PC Card i s not inserted.

Functional Setup Return
Log Data Mic Level
GPS Send Time Solar Angle
Demo Mode
• However, if the factory provides a PC card, insert it

into the card slot (label side up), and then slide the PC
Card door shut, if instructed by the factory, select
"Gyro. Sensor Logs ON". Follow the factory
procedure for gathering test data, and properly
'07-08 models ending the test.
Functi onal Setup R e tu rn

( Log Data ] 1 Return
| Log Data | Mic Level |
I GPS Send Time [ Solar Angle j
1 Demo Mode I Save Users Memory | Logging VP Data OFF I o n 1 [o f f !
GPS Send Time Mic Level
This screen is for factory use only. It allows adjustment This diagnostic allows you to independently test the
of the GPS time. This display updates in real time. microphone, the TALK and BACK buttons. They are
used to activate the voice control system. The
• "GPS Time" is the time as received from the GPS microphone is located near the map light in the ceiling.
satellites. It is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). It is directional, and works best if the voice is coming
• "System Time" is the internal time used by the from the drivers seat
navigation unit to calculate your position on the map.
It is also in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). • Press the TALK button on the steering wheel, and in a
• "Display Time" is the time shown on Setup screen 2 normal voice say "testing". The TALK indicator on
"Adjust Time Zone/Clock", and reflects any changes the screen should momentarily turn green, and the
due to daylight savings time or time adjustments text "Now Recording..." should appear yellow. If the
entered by the customer. Mic Level indicator on the screen does not briefly turn
• Date, Hour, Minute, and "Set" should not be used. green, then check the wiring from the TALK button to
the navigation unit. If there is no "Mic Level"
movement when you speak, then you should check
the wire running from the microphone to the control
unit.
Send GPS Time 1 R eturn
• Press the BACK button on the steering wheel. This
GPS Time xxxx.xx.xx xx:xx:xx Set should cause the Cancel indicator on the screen to
Year xxxx Hour XX
momentarily turn green. If it does not briefly change
to green, then check the wiring from the steering
Month Minute wheel BACK button to the navigation unit
XX
cS XX
• The mic level should reach at least the 6th bar.
Day XX
CAD Second XX
( Mic Level ~~~~] I Return

Demo Mode Mic Level Now Recording ! !
This screen is for factory use only, and should always s u m
be set to "OFF". Occasionally this setting is turned
"ON" when vehicles are being used at Auto Shows or Steering Switch
similar events. Turning this feature on, allows the i M BACK j
navigation system to automatically follow a route to a J

destination when the vehicle is stationary.
NOTE:
Demo Mode Return If the radio is off, and there is movement in the
indicator-even without speaking, then ensure that the
Demo ON ON OFF vents are not blowing on the microphone.
This should resolve voice control complaints such as:
• Sometimes the system does not understand my
Speed Rate 1200 ms
commands.
• I have to shout at the navi for a command to be
recognized.
• The system just says "pardon"
Solar angle Version
This screen graphically displays the sun's position as This screen displays the current version of the program,
determined by GPS. The climate control uses the sun's and allows the loading of a new version of the program
angle, along with the sunlight sensor to control the from either a CD/DVD or from a PC card.
driver/passenger A/C airflow. The heat that the A/C unit
removes varies, depending on the angle of the sun The Program Flash version should always be greater
entering the vehicle. than or equal to the Program Disc version.
This screen is for factory use only, and allows IPL, APL, DBOOT, and system uCom are for factory use
simulation of this feature for development purposes. only.
• The "manual tuning" button should always be "OFF" The Model code is S9VX, and is for factory use only.
• The "Angle" is the angle that the sun (shown with the This code is stored on a chip in the navigation unit.
red "dot") is above the horizon. Therefore, every model has a unique part number for
• The "vehicle" value represents the angle, clockwise the navigation unit.
from North, to the direction that the vehicle position
(VP) icon is pointing (always points straight up). NOTE: If any model number other than S9VX is
• The "direction" value is the angle, measured displayed, replace the navigation unit with the correct
clockwise from the VP (straight up) to the suns part. The model code tells the navigation unit what
position. software to load off the DVD.
• The reliability ranges from 1 to 3, and represents the
accuracy of the Vehicle Position relative to the sun. Do not use Download, unless instructed to do so by the
factory.
( Solar Angle ) I Return | Version ~] ■ I Return ]

Manual Tuning rjrrjn
OFF Program Flash 1.03.00.KA
Angle r-x —)Direction ]===< Program Disc 0.99.5000
33.0 LAJ 307.0 U k J IPL 0.231.000
Vehicle Reli ability >===< APL 0.310.122
I # 143.0 3 LjLJ DBOOT 0.310.122
m m ]
System uCom 0.910.000
Model S9VX (Download |
Save Users M em ory '07-08 models 1. Select EXPORT button to move the customer's data
from the original navigation unit to the PC card.
When replacing the navigation unit, this function allows Select "YES" on the "Export User Data"
the dealer to transfer the customer's personal data to Confirmation screen. The process takes only a
the new navigation unit The transferred information couple of seconds. The system stores two files on
includes their Setup settings, and personal addresses. the card.
The dealer inserts a PC card to the navigation unit, and
then selects the "Save Users Memory" function. The NOTE: If the EXPORT button is grayed out, check
two functions in this diagnostic screen are EXPORT and the PC card's edge connector, and the pins inside
IMPORT. EXPORT saves the customer's data to the PC the navigation unit (with a flashlight) for damage.
card, and IMPORT moves the PC card files to the new
navigation unit
Save Users Memory ] [ Return [
Save Users Memory_____| | Return
..EXPORT.....~ 1 ....... IMPORT
2. After installing the customer's original DVD in the

new navigation unit, allow the system to boot up.
Insert the PC card in the new navigation unit and
enter the "Save Users Memory" in the navigation
Before starting this function, see the PC Card FAQs for system diagnostic mode.
information regarding PC cards, and the use of this
function. 3. Select IMPORT button to move the two files stored
by the Export process from the PC card to the new
navigation unit Select "YES" on the "Import User
Data" Confirmation screen. When the transfer is
finished (a few seconds) the system will
automatically reboot. After the system reboots,
remove the PC card from the PC slot
NOTE: If the IMPORT button is grayed out, check if

the "Model" and the "Program Flash" shown on
the "Version" screen are the same.
| Save Users Memory | I Return |
c D
Import User Data ?
| Yes | | No |
(cont'd)
PC Card FAQs
Question Answer
Where do we buy the flash memory or You need a "PCMCIA type II" adaptor and a flash memory chip. They can
adaptors, and what do we ask for? be purchased at a computer, or office supply store. The card will have
the same size and shape as the PC card in the HDS. Adaptors that accept
multiple flash types are not recommended.
What memory flash chips will work The flash memory devices that have been tested include Compact Flash
with what adaptors? (CF), and ATA style (like the card in the HDS). Other card types and flash
memory chips may work, but have not been tested.
What capacity card do 1need for this A memory chip with capacity of 64 MB to 2 GB will work. The two files
function? moved to the PC card during "export" are less than a Megabyte in size.
Should the dealer have a dedicated PC Yes, treat the PC card as a dedicated "special tool" that should be used
card for the Export and Import anytime your '07 or later customer needs their navigation personal files
navigation function? transferred to a new navigation unit.
What device can 1use to maintain the Any computer store sells USB style card readers that accept the PC card,
PC card, and delete files? and allow you to perform file maintenance on your PC card. Most laptops
will also accept the PC card.
Can we move the customer's data to No, the files are model specific and will only load into a navigation unit
different models? with the same part number.
Can we move the customer's data to The customer's files can only be transferred to a new navigation unit, if
the same vehicle with a different the "Model" and the "Program Flash" shown on the "Version" screen
software version? are the same. Files cannot be transferred to the different model and
different versions.
Will other files on the PC card like No, the system simply adds two small files that are recognized by the
images or music files prevent the new navigation unit when performing the import function. However, it
Export/Import function from working? the PC card is full, the "Export" function won't work correctly.
Do 1have to delete the files on the PC After the transfer of customer's data to the new navigation unit, the files
card after each transfer of the remain on the PC card. Since this is confidential information, we
customer's data? recommend that you delete these files after each use. Please note that
each time you export navigation files of the same model and version, the
files are overwritten. Over time the PC card will accumulate two files for
each version of the 8 or so Honda navigation models.
What format should be used if the PC It is unlikely that the PC card will ever need formatting, however the FAT
card needs reformatting? file system should be used.
1can't enter the navigation diagnostic Some internal navigation unit ECU failures may make it impossible to
mode to do the Export/Import function. use the Export/Import function.
How can 1transfer the customer's
data?
Question Amswer
Why wont the Export or Import • The card may not be fully inserted into the slot. Eject the PC card, and
functions work? What do 1check as inspect for warping or damage to the edge connector. Never use
part of troubleshooting? excessive force to insert a PC card. This can result in damage to the
pins in the rear of the slot.
• The PC card may not contain files that are recognized by the new
navigation unit. Navigation data can only be transferred between
navigation units with the same "Model code", and with the same navi
"Program flash" version.
• The flash memory chip type may not be accepted by the system. Only
Compact Flash and ATA cards have been tested.
• The card's PCMCIA adaptor may be preventing a known-good PC card
from playing. Avoid multi-slot type PCMCIA adaptors that accept
several different flash memory types.
• The card may be full and as a result the files are stored, but without
any data. Export and import appear to function, but move nothing.
Delete unused files from the PC card.
• There may not be any files on the PC card. If the PC card has a "write
protection" switch, make sure it is turned off before attempting to use
the Export function.
• Although flash memory chips are reliable, occasionally they develop
bad sectors or other formatting errors that prevents them from
accepting files. The PC card should be reformatted using the FAT
format.
• The PC card may have been formatted using the format "NTFS". Only
the "FAT" format is accepted by the system.
• Hard Disc Drive (HDD) cards may not work properly in the system and
can overheat or quit functioning, particularly in a hot vehicle. They are
not recommended.
• Before performing the Import function, ensure that the customer's
original DVD is loaded into the new navigation unit and working
properly.
(cont'd)
Error Message Table
Screen Error Message Solution

Navigation system is unable to acquire a proper Make sure there is nothing on the dashboard blocking the GPS
GPS signal. antenna. If not, move the vehicle to an open space away from
tall buildings, trees, etc. After market devices can affect the
GPS reception.
Navigation unit door is open or No DVD disc Make sure the correct white-labeled navigation DVD is
installed. Please check system. installed with the label side up, and the navigation unit door is
snapped fully closed (see page 22-507).
No DVD disc, please check system. Check that the navigation DVD is installed with the label side
up check the DVD color.
Display temp is too high. System will shut down This message will appear briefly when the display
until display cools down. temperature is too high, and the display will turn off until the
temperature cools down. The system will turn back on when
the display cools down.
Outside temperature is low, system will take a The temperature is below —30 ° C , and the navigation ECU has
while to startup. difficulties reading the DVD. The system will start up when the
temperature .war ms up.
DVD disc reading error (unformatted), please Check the DVD source for deep scratches or other damage.
consult your dealer. Make sure you are using an official Honda navigation DVD
(white in color). The system cannot read other mapping
databases or video DVDs. If the problem persists, see your
dealer check the DVD color.
Route has not been completed. Please try again Routing to or from a place (new area) that is not in the
from a different location. database. Try planning a different route to or from a different
location.
No alternate route found. Original route will be No alternate route method was found. The original route will
guided. be used.
This destination cannot be found in database. The destination was not found in the database. Try another
destination nearby, or select the destination with the joystick.
Please operate climate control after starting The engine needs to be running to operate the climate control
engine. system.
Forced Starting of Display DVD-ROM Replacement
Special Tools Required N O TE:
SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100 • When the DVD-ROM is re-inserted or replaced, a map
match must be done (see page 22-433),■ .
1. Slide the passenger's seat (A) forward. • Make sure that the correct color DVD is installed
(white).
• Go on-line and check for any service bulletins or
other service information regarding the navigation
system.
1. Slide the passenger's seat (A) to the rear.
07PAZ-0010100
2. Remove the cover attached to the seat to gain

access to the navigation unit.
3. Connect the SCS service connector (B) to the

navigation service check connector (C) located
behind the navigation unit.
4. Check that the diagnosis menu for the picture
diagnosis starts up, and then changes to the 3. Open the front cover (B) of the navigation unit.
system link menu.
4. Press the EJECT button (C).
5. If the display does not turn on, turn the ignition
switch OFF, press and hold the SET UP button (A), 5. Remove the DVD-ROM.
press and hold the joystick (B) up, then turn ignition
switch to ACC (I). 6. Insert the new DVD-ROM with the white label
facing up.
NOTE: If the display fails to light or the system link
screen is not displayed, refer to no picture is 7. Close the front cover.
displayed (see page 22-464).
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF until data is
down loaded to navigation unit.
NOTE: After servicing, the front cover must be

closed. If you start up the navigation system with
the front cover open, the display will indicate.
"Navigation unit door is open or No DVD Disk
installed. Please check system".
8. Do the Map Matching procedure after servicing

(see page 22-433).
Navigation Unit Removal/Installation
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then reinstall the

* Before replace the navigation unit, back-up the original DVD, verifying that the DVD is free of
customer data using system diagnostic mode "save scratches or smudges.
users memory" under the functional set up (see page
22-503). 9. Check online for any service publications
• If the navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, a prescribing patches for the navigation system, and
Map Matching must be done (see page 22-433). if any should be applied to the new navigation unit.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: Simply transferring the DVD from the
original navigation unit to the new navigation unit
2. Eject the DVD from the original navigation unit does not assure the correct software for the vehicle
(see page 22-507). To avoid scratching or damaging will be loaded into the new navigation unit. Doing
the DVD, temporarily place the DVD in a jewel case. the DVD transfer without doing software patches
may cause the new navigation unit to appear to be
NOTE: If the DVD will not eject, refer to symptom malfunctioning.
troubleshooting "Navigation unit will not eject or
accept the navigation DVD" (see page 22-472). 10. Enter the new navigation anti-theft code.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Park the vehicle outside, and do the GPS
initialization (see page 22-432).
4. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-104).
12. Give the new navigation anti-theft code to the
customer.
A B
5. Remove the navigation unit bracket (A) from the

passenger's seat.
6. Remove the bracket from the navigation unit (B).
7. Install the navigation unit in the reverse order of

removal.
Navigation Display Unit Removal/ GPS Antenna Removal/Installation
Installation
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93).
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-93). 2. Remove the navigation display unit (see page
22-509).
2. Remove the display unit (A).
3. Loosen the two screw-bolts (A).
3. Install the navigation display unit in the reverse

order of removal.
4. Pull, and pry up the GPS antenna (B), then remove

the GPS antenna.
5. Install the GPS antenna in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: Be careful when routing the GPS antenna

wire so that it does not become pinched, especially
near the front passenger's seat and center console.
Rearview Camera Removal/ Voice Control Switch Test/
Installation Replacement
1. Remove the rear license trim (see page 20-158). 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page
23-201).
2. Remove the screw, and the rearview camera (A).
2. Remove the two screws and cover (A) from the
steering wheel.
3. Remove the screws and the rearview camera (A)

from the rearview camera cover (B).
3. Remove the two screws from the audio remote/

voice control switch (B).
4. Disconnect the 4P connector from the audio

remote/voice control switch.

No. 5 terminals in each switch position according
to the table.
Position Resistance
OFF About 10 kQ
TALK About 2.2 kQ
BACK About 630 0
6. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

4. Install the rearview camera in the reverse order of voice control switch.
removal.
Restraints
Restraints
Special Tools ....... ......... ....... ................... .......................... 23-2
Seat Belts
Front Seat Belt Replacement ....................................... 23-4
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement ................... ........ 23-8
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement ................................ 23-12
Inspection ............................................................................. 23-15
Third Row Child Seat Tether Anchor Replacement ... 23-16
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

Component Location Index ........................................... 23-17
Precautions and Procedures .......................................... 23-19
General Troubleshooting Information ........................ 23-28
ODS Unit Initialization ...................................................... 23-33
ODS Unit Calibration ........................................................ 23-34
ODS Unit Operation Check .......... ......... ......................... 23-35
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check ........ 23-36
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............ .............................. 23-37
System Description .......................................................... 23-42
Circuit Diagram .................................................................. 23-48
DTC Troubleshooting ....................................................... 23-52
Symptom Troubleshooting ............................................ 23-191
Component Replacement/Inspection After
Deployment .............................................................. ....... 23-198
Driver's Airbag Replacement .......................... .............. 23-201
Front Passenger's Airbag Replacement ...................... 23-202
Side Airbag Replacement .... .......................................... 23-203
Side Curtain Airbag Replacement ................................. 23-204
Airbag and Tensioner Disposal ..................................... 23-208
Cable Reel Replacement ................................................. 23-212
SRS Unit Replacement ..................................................... 23-215
Side Impact Sensor (First) Replacement ..................... 23-216
Side Impact Sensor (Second) Replacement ........... 23-217
Rear Safing Sensor Replacement ................................. 23-218
ODS Unit Replacement .................................................... 23-219
Front Impact Sensor Replacement ............................... 23-220
Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Replacement ....... 23-221
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Replacement .............. 23-222
Roll Rate Sensor Replacement ...................................... 23-223
Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator
Illumination Bulb Test ................................................. 23-224
Restraints
Special Tools

© 07HAZ-SG00500 Deployment Tool 1
® 07PAZ-001010A SGS Service Connector 1
® 07SAZ-TB4011A SRS Inflator Simulator 1
© 07TAZ-SZ5011A SRS Simulator Lead C 1
®* 07TAZ-001020A Backprobe Adapter, 17 mm
® 07XAZ-S1A0200 SRS Simulator Lead E 1
07XAZ-SZ30100 SRS Simulator Lead F 1
® 07YAZ-S3AA100 SRS Simulator Lead H 1
® 07 OAZ-SAA0100 SRS Short Canceller 2
* : Use with the stacking patch cords from T/N 07SAZ-001000A, Backprobe Set.
, FRONT SHOULDER ANCHOR ADJUSTER

Replacement step 9 on page 23-4
CENTER THIRD ROW SEAT BELT
I nspection, page 23-15
THIRD ROW CHILD SEAT
TETHER ANCHOR
CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT
THI RD ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE and
CENTER THIRD ROW SEAT BELT
DETACHABLE ANCHOR
THIRD ROW SEAT BELT

SECOND ROW SEAT BELT

THIRD ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE/

DETACHABLE ANCHOR
FRONT SEAT BELT LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE and
Replacement, page 23-4 CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT
Inspection, page 23-15 DETACHABLE ANCHOR
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLES CENTER SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Replacement page 23-6 Replacement page 23-10
RIGHT SECOND ROW SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Front Seat Belt Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel (see page
SRS component locations (see page 23-17) and the 20-70).
doing repairs or service. 7. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and remove
the upper anchor bolt (B).
NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and
replace them if necessary.
Front Seat Belt

audio and the navigation system (if equipped), then
write down the audio presets.
2. Slide the front seat forward fully.

wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
4. Driver's seat belt: Pull the lower anchor cover (A)

up, and remove the lower anchor bolt (B). 32 N-m
(3.3 kgf-m, 24 I bf ft)
8. Release the seat belt tensioner connector (A) from

the connector holder (B), and disconnect it.
Remove the retractor mounting ET screw (C), and
retractor bolt (D), and remove the front seat belt (E)
and retractor (F).
32 N-m
(3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ib fft)
5. Passenger's seat belt: Remove the rear riser cover

(see step 3 on page 20-104). Remove the bolt (A),
and release the hook (B), then remove the lower
anchor bracket (C) from the outer weight sensor (D).
NOTE: Do not remove the seat belt anchor bolt (E)

from the lower anchor bracket.
(0.4 kgf-m, 7/16-20 UNF

3 Ibf-ft) 32 N-m (3.3 kgf-m, 24 Ibf-ft)
9. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector

(G).
10. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (see page 20-70). Upper anchor bolt construction
11. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster(A).
8x1.25 mm
22 N-m
(2.2 kgff-m, 16 I bf-ft)
Lower anchor bolt construction
LOWER ANCHOR
12. Install the front seat belt and retractor in the BOLT WASHER
• Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to

the anchor bolts before reinstaNation.
• Check that the retractor locking mechanism
functions (see page 23-15). ;
• Assemble the washers, collars, and bushings on
the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown.
• Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
• Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is ANCHOR WASHER
plugged in properly.
• Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. Lower anchor bolt construction
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the (passenger's seat belt)
navigation system (ifequipped), then enter the
audio presets.
• Reset the clock. LOWER ANCHOR BUSHING
LOWER ANCHOR BOLT COLLAR
BOLT
LOWER ANCHOR NUT
COLLAR
SPRING WASHER
TOOTHED LOCK WASHER
LOWER ANCHOR BRACKET
Front Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
Seat Belt Buckle 3. Disconnect the seat belt switch connector (A)
(8-way power seat). Detach the seat belt switch
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-104). connector, harness clips (B), and wire tie (C).
2. Remove the screws (A),then remove the center NOTE: Driver's 8-way power seat and driver's
cover (B). manual height adjustable seat are shown.
Passenger's manual seat issymmetrical to the
NOTE: Driver's 8-way power seat and driver's driver's manual height adjustable seat.
manual height adjustable seat are shown.
Passenger's manual seat issymmetrical to the Driver's 8-way power seat
driver's manual height adjustable seat.
Driver's 8-way power seat
Driver's manual height adjustable seat
Driver's manual height adjustable seat

4. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), then rem ove 6. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal,
the seat belt buckle (B) from the inner seat track. and note these items:

the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
• Assem ble the washers and collar on the center
anchor bolt as shown.
• Move the seat up and down to make sure the
buckle harness is not pinched.
Center anchor bolt construction
5. Remove the seat belt switch harness (A):
• Driver's manual height adjustable seat: Adjust

the seat cushion to itsmaximum height, and
remove the harness.
• Driver's 8-way power seat and passenger's
manual seat: Remove the seat cushion mounting
bolts (B) from the seat linkage (C),then liftthe
seat cushion halfway from the seat linkage, and ANCHOR
remove the harness.
A
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement
NOTE: Check the second row seat belts for damage, 4. Remove the retractor bolt (A),then remove the
and replace them ifnecessary. second row seat belt (B) and retractor (C).
Second Row Seat Belt

1. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-80).
2. Pull the carpet back as necessary, and remove the

lower anchor bolt (A).
A
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
7/16-20 UNF
32 N-m
5. Ifnecessary, remove the second row seat belt

protector (D).
6. Install the second row seat belt and retractor in the

3. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the
upper anchor bolt (B). • Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
the anchor bolts before reinstallation.
B
7/16-20 UNF • Tighten the bolts by hand first,then tighten to
specification with a torque wrench.
functions (see page 23-15).
• Assemble the washers, collars, and bushing on
the upper anchor bolt as shown.
there are no twists or kinks inthe second row
seat belt.
Upper anchor bol t construction

&
Center Second Row Seat Belt Left Second Row Seat Belt Buckle and .
Center Second Row Seat Belt Detachable
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-83). Anchor
2. Remove the upper anchor mounting bolt (A),the NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the
upper anchor bolts (B),the retractor mounting bolt seat covers.
(C), and the retractor bolt (D),then remove the
upper anchor (E), center seat belt (F),and retractor 1. Remove the leftsecond row seat (see page 20-115).
' (G).
2. From the back of the seat, remove the screws (A),
then remove the anchor cover (B).
7/16-20 UNF 6 x 1 .0 m m
32 N-m 9.8 N-m
(3.3 kgf-m, 24 I bf-ft) (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
3. Instal lthe center second row seat belt and retractor

in the reverse order of removal, and note these
items:

• Tighten the bolts by hand first,then tighten to
functions (see page 23-15).
• Before install ing the upper anchor bolt, make
sure there are no twists or kinks inthe center seat 34 N-m
belt. (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft)
(confd)
Second Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont'd)
4. Release the hooks (A),then remove the seat belt Center Seat Belt Buckle/Right Seat Belt
buckle pocket (B). Buekle
B
NOTE: The center seat belt buckle isshown, and the
right seat belt buckle issimilar.
1. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-115).
2. From both sides of the seat, release the hooks

(A, B) in the sequence shown, then remove the
pivot bolt cover (C). Using a TORX T30 bit, remove
the pivot bolt (D).
D
6 x 1 .0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
5. Remove the leftsecond row seat belt buckle (A)

and center second row seat belt detachable anchor
(B) from the elastic straps (C), and remove them
from the seat cushion.
3. On the leftsecond row seat: Remove the seat belt

buckle pocket.
6. Install the buckle and the detachable anchor in the

reverse order of removal, and apply medium
strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts
4. On the leftsecond row seat: Remove the left 7. Remove the screws (A),then remove the center
second row seat belt buckle (A) and center second cover (B).
row seat belt detachable anchor (B) from the elastic
straps (C),then remove the buckle and detachable
anchor under the seat cushion.
5. Remove the center seat belt buckle (D) or right seat 8. Remove the center anchor bolt (A), and remove the
belt buckle from the elastic strap (E). seat belt buckle (B).
6. Liftthe seat cushion (A) up.
7/16-2© UNF
34 N-m
9. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal,

and apply medium strength type liquid thread lock
to the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement
NOTE: Check the third row seat belts for damage, and 5. Remove the retractor bolts (A),then remove the
replace them ifnecessary. third row seat belt (B) and retractor (C).
Third Row Seat Belt

1. Remove the upper anchor cap (A) and the upper
anchor bolt (B).
32 N-m
6. Install the third row seat belt and retractor in the


the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first,then tighten to
2. Remove the D-pillartrim (see page 20-77). functions (see page 23-15).
• Assemble the washers, collars, and bushing on
3. Remove the rear side trim panel (see page 20-80). the upper anchor bolt as shown.
4. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the seat belt there are no twists or kinks in the third row seat
guide (B). belt.
Upper anchor bolt construction
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Center Third Row Seat Belt Seat Belt Buckle/Center Seat Belt
Detachable Anchor
1. Remove the head l iner (see page 20-83).
1. Fold the leftthird row seat down.
2. Remove the bolts (A) and screw (B), then remove
the third row seat belt cover bracket (C). 2. Remove the cargo floor lid.
3. From the gap between the third seat-back and

cargo floor bin, remove the center anchor bolts (A).
3. Remove the upper anchor bolts (A), support

bracket bolt (B), and the retractor bolts (C),then
remove the upper anchor (D), center seat belt (E),
and retractor (F).
4. Release the hooks (A),then remove the seat belt
c
7/16-20 UNF buckle pocket (B).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf ft)
4. Install the center seat belt and retractor in the

reverse order of removal, and note these items: 5. Remove the leftthird row seat belt buckle (C) and
center third row seat belt detachable anchor (D)
• Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to from the seat cushion.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first,then tighten to 6. Install the buckle and detachable anchor in the
specification with a torque wrench. reverse order of removal, and apply medium
• Check that the retractor locking mechanism strength type liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts
functions (see page 23-15). before reinstallation.
• Before install ing the upper anchor bolt, make
sure there are no twists or kinks inthe center seat
belt.
(confd)
Third Row Seat Belt Replacement (cont d)
Seat Belt Buckle/Seat Belt Detachable 4. Install the buckle inthe reverse order of removal.
Anchor Assemble the washers, spring, bushing, bracket,
and collar on the center anchor bolt as shown.
NOTE: The seat belt buckle is shown, and the seat belt
detachable anchor issimilar. Center anchor bolt constructi on
1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-128). RETURN SPRING TOOTHED
2. Remove the screw (A), and release the hook (B),

then remove the bracket cover (C).
3. Remove the center anchor bolt (A),then remove

the seat belt buckle (B).
Inspection
For fro n t seat belt retractors w ith seat belt tensioners, Center second row
review the SRS com ponent locations (see page 23-17)
and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-19)
Retractor
1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat

belt can be pulled out freely.
2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the
retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15 °from the Inside
mounted position. The seat belt should lock when
the retractor is leaned over 40 °.Do not attempt to
disassemble the retractor.
Front Third row
8°
Second row Center third row
7.5°
3. Replace the seat beltwith a new assembly ifthere

isany abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
the seat beltfor any reason.
(cont'd)
Inspection (cont'd) Third Row Child Seat Tether Anchor
Replacement
In-vehicle
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on 1. Remove the rear trim panel (see page 20-81).
anything.
2. Remove the screws (A), and remove the third row
2. After installing the anchors, check for free child seat tether anchors (B).
movement on the anchor bolts. Ifnecessary,
A
remove the anchor bolts and check that the 8 x 1.25 mm
washers and other parts are not damaged or 18 N-m
improperly installed. (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft)
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration.

Clean with a shop towel ifnecessary. Use only
soap and water to clean.
NOTE: Dirt build up in the loops of the upper

anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled
out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only
during a sudden stop or impact.
5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract 3. Install the anchor inthe reverse order of removal,
automatically when released. and apply medium strength type liquid thread lock
to the threads of the child seat tether anchor screws.
6. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt
retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic
locking retractor). This function isfor securing child
seats.
-1 Pull the seat belt allthe way out to engage the

ALR. The seat belt should retract, but not
extend. This is normal.
-2 To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and
allow itto fully retract, then pull the seat belt
out part-way. The seat belt should retract and
extend normally.
7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly ifthere

isany abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
the seat belt for any reason.
SRS iffl
iSRS I NDICATOR
/Troubleshooting, page 23-191
.SIDE airb ag
CUTOFF INDICATOR
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Disposal, page 23-208
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG

MEMORY ERASE Replacement, page 23-202
SIGNAL (IVIES) Disposal, page 23-208
CONNECTOR (2P) PASSENGER AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
(YELLOW) Bulb Test, page 23-224
ODS UNI T
Initialization, page 23-33
Ca libration, page 23-34
Operation Check, page 23-35
OPDS SENSOR/
SEAT BACK
Replacement,
page 20-109
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SIDE AIRBAG
Replacement,
page 23-203
Disposal,
page 23-208
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT TENSIONER
CABLE REEL Disposal, page 23-208
Rep lacement,
page 23-212 FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSORS
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR ROLL RATE SENSOR
(DLC) Replacement, page 23-223
SRS UNIT DRI VER'S SIDE AIRBAG

Replacement, Replacement, page 23-203
page 23-215 Disposal, page 23-208
DRI VER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER

Operation check, page 23-36 Replacement, page 23-4
Replacement, page 23-222 Disposal, page 23-208
(cont'd)
, LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR LEFT SIDE CURTAIN A IRBAG

RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST)

RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST)

LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND)

REAR SAFING SENSOR
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND)

&
Precautions and Procedures
General Precautions • The original audio system has a coded theft

protection circuit. Make sure you have the anti-theft
Please read the following precautions carefully before codes for the audio system and navigation system (if
performing airbag system service. Ifthe instructions equipped), then write down the audio presets before
described inthis manual are not properly followed, or disconnecting the negative cable from the battery.
the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause
damage or injuries. • Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter
the anti-theft codes forthe audio system and
• Except when performing electrical inspections, navigation system (ifequipped), then enter the audio
always turn the ignition switch OFF, ground the SCS presets; set the clock.
line with the HDS to take the PCM out of active status,
disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and • After disconnecting the negative cable from the
wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. battery, do the power window control unit reset
NOTE: The SRS memory of codes is not cleared even
ifthe ignition switch isturned OFF or the battery Steering-related Precautions
cables are disconnected from the battery.
Cabl e Reel Alignment
• Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the
same standards and quality as the original parts. Do • Misalignment ofthe cable reel could cause an open in
not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when the wiring, making the SRS system, and the horn
making SRS repairs. inoperative. Center the cable reel wheneverthe
following is performed (see step 6 on page 23-214).
• Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. - Installation of the steering wheel
Do not install any part that shows signs of being - Installation of the cable reel
dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks - Installation of the steering column
or deformation. - Other steering-related adjustment or installation
• Do not disassemble the cable reel.
• Do not apply grease to the cable reel.
• Ifthe cable reel shows any signs of damage, replace

itwith a new one. For example, ifitdoes not rotate
smoothly, replace the cable reel.
Before removing any SRS parts (including

disconnection of connectors), always disconnect the
SRS connector.
Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. Ifit

is not a Honda multimeter, make sure itsoutput is
10 m A (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest
value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher
output could cause accidental deployment and
possible injury.
(cont'd)
Precautions and Procedures (cont'd)
Airbag Handling and Storage • Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags,
such as measuring resistance.
Do not disassemble an airbag. Ithas no serviceable
parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, itcannot be • Do not position yourself in front of the airbag during
repaired or reused. removal, inspection, or replacement.
For temporary storage of an airbag during service,

observe the following precautions.
• Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.

Never put anything on the airbag.
• For proper disposal of a damaged airbag, referto

airbag disposal (see page 23-208).
• The side curtain airbag inflator assembly isa long,

• To prevent damage to the airbag, keep itaway from jointed part containing an inflator (A), a flexible bag
any oil,grease, detergent, or water. (B), and an adapter pipe (C).
• Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface

away from any high heat source (exceeding 200 °F/
93 <€). • When removing or installing the side curtain airbag
inflator assembly, never handle the adapter pipe.
&
SRS Unit, Impact Sensors, Driver's Seat • Do not disassemble the SRS unit, front impact
Position Sensor, Front Passenger's W eight sensors, side impact sensors, driver's seat position
Sensors, Rear Safing Sensor, and Roll Rate sensor, front passenger's weight sensors, rear safing
Sensor sensor, or roll rate sensor.
• Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit,front • Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative
impact sensors, side impact sensors, rear safing cable from the battery and wait at least 3 minutes
sensor, or rol lrate sensor whenever the ignition before beginning installation or replacement of the
-switch isO N (II),or for at least 3 minutes after the SRS unit, or disconnecting the connectors from the
ignition switch isturned OFF. SRS unit
• During installation or replacement, be careful not to • Be sure the SRS unit,front impact sensors, side
bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.)the area impact sensors, rear safing sensor and roll rate
around the SRS unit, front impact sensors, the side sensor are installed securely with the mounting bolts
impact sensors, rear safing sensor, or roll rate sensor. torqued to 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft).
The airbags could accidentally deploy and cause
damage or injury. • Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side
impact sensors, or roll rate sensor, and keep them
away from dust.
• Store the SRS unit,front impact sensors, side impact

sensors, rear safing sensor and roll rate sensor in a
cool (lessthan 104 °F/40 °C) and dry (less than 80 %
relative humidity, no moisture) area.
• After a collision where a front airbag, a side airbag, a

side curtain airbag, or a seat belt tensioner deployed,
go to Component Replacement/Inspection after
.Deployment (see page 23-198). After a collision
where the airbags or the side airbags did not deploy,
inspect for any damage or any deformation on the
SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors,
rear safing sensor, and roll rate sensor. Replace all
damaged parts.
(cont'd)
Wiring Precautions Precautions for Electrical Inspections
Some of the SRS wiring can be identified by special • When using electrical test equipment, insertthe
yellow outer covering, and the SRS connectors can be probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector.
identified by their yellow color. Observe the Do not insert the probe ofthe tester into the terminal
instructions. side of the connector, and do not tamper with the
connector.
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring.
Ifthere isan open or damage in SRS wiring, replace
the harness.
• Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insertthe probe

forcibly.
• Be sure to install the harness wires so they do not get

pinched or interfere with other parts.
• Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting.

Using improper tools could cause an error in
inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
• Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and
grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-
metal contact. Poor grounds can cause intermittent
problems that are difficultto diagnose.
Spring-loaded Lock Connector Side Airbag Connector
Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded Disconnecting

lock. To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the
Front Airbag Connectors connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector half.
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A)
toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of
the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be
sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.
Connecting
Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly
Connecting together until the projection (A) ofthe sleeve-side
1. To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and connector clicks.
press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in
the direction shown. As the two connector halves
are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed back
by the pawl (B). Do not touch the sleeve.
2. When the connector halves are completely

connected, the pawl is released, and the spring-
loaded sleeve locks the connector.
(cont'd)
Opening the SRS Unit Shorting Connectors Terminal numbers are shown from the wire side of the
For Diagnosis female terminals. Insertthe short canceller(s) into the
cavities on the terminal side ofthe connector.
SRS short canceller 070AZ-SAA0100 SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
NOTE: O
• To prevent damaging the connector cavity, insert the 1| 2 3 4 5 SDA 6 7 8 9 10
SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) straight into
the cavity from the terminal side. "W7IV EE / 14/ 4 16
• Before installing the short canceller, wash itwith 17 18 9 >< > 22 23 9 27 28
electrical contact cleaner, then dry itwith
compressed air.
• Do not use the short canceller ifitisdamaged. Insert short canceller(s) here
• Make sure to remove the short canceller before re
connecting. Wire side of female terminals
When SRS unit connector A or C isdisconnected, a

short circuit iscreated in the connector by itsown
function to prevent airbag deployment. The circuit may SRS UNIT CONNECTOR C (28P)
need to be opened when diagnosis is performed on the
circuit. O
1 2 3 4 5 SFF 6 7 8 9 10
Insertthe short canceller (T/N 070AZ-SAA0100) in the 11 N 13 H I 4 \ 16
specified cavities when itis necessary to keep the
circuit open for diagnosis. 17 18 19 99/ / 99
Insert short canceller(s) here
SRS Short Canceller

(070AZ-SAA0100)
Backprobing Spring-loaded Lock Connectors Seats w ith Side Airbags
W hen checking v o ltage or resistance on this type of Seats with side airbags have a “SIDE AIRBAG" tab on
connector the firsttime, you must remove the retainer the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back
to insert the tester probe from the w ire side. cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags
are different, make sure you install only the correct
NOTE: Itis not necessary to reinstall the removed replacement parts.
retainer; the terminals will stay locked in the connector
housing.
To remove the retainer (A), insert a flat-tipscrewdriver

(B) between the connector body and the retainer, then
carefully pry out the retainer. Take care not to break the
connector.
• When cleaning, use a damp cloth to clean the seat.

Do not soak the seat with liquid, and do not spray
steam on the seat.
• Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover.

Replace the seat-back cover.
• After a collision where the side airbag was deployed,

replace the side airbag with new parts. Ifthe seat-
H
Li
Vi back cushion issplit, itmust be replaced. Ifthe seat-
back frame isdeformed, itmust be replaced.
• Never put aftermarket accessories on the seat (covers,

pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).
m
■.. 1
L==p
19
(cont'd)
Disconnecting System Connectors

Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning the following procedures.
• Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2).
• Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B from the SRS unit, disconnect both seat belttensioner 2P
connectors (3, 4).
h CABLE REEL
.......... tb .................... - DRIVER'S
AIRBAG
SRS
SUBHARNESS
P -------- I P - —
1 FRONT
) • s PASSENGER'S
J AIRBAG
f t
LEFT FRONT
IMPACT
SENSOR
4}
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
RIGHT FRONT
IMPACT
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS 3
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEATBELT
SRS
SUBHARNESS
SRS
HARNESS
4] TENSIONER
DRIVER'S
SEATBELT
■0* LEFTSIDE
WIRE HARNESS
TENSIONER
DRIVER'S
SIDE AIRBAG
f t
SRS
UNIT LEFTSIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR (first)
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SIDE AIRBAG
SRS
HARNESS
f t
RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR (first)
ROLLRATE
SENSOR
i ............................. REAR SAFING

L RIGHT SIDE
SENSOR
■
LEFTSIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG
DASHBOARD ROOF WIRE
WIRE HARNESS A HARNESS
RIGHT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG
■J
LEFTSIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR (second)
f t RIGHT
y
WIRE
SIDE
HARNESS
LEFTSIDE
WIRE HARNESS
RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT
SENSOR (second)
LEFTSIDE
WIRE HARNESS
f t RIGHT SIDE
WIRE HARNESS
iiffl
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the Side Airbag
battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from
Driver's Airbag the SRS harness.
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering

wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P
connector (B) from the cable reel.
Side Curtain Airbag

Front Passenger's Airbag
6. Disconnect both roof wire harness 2P connectors
3. Remove the glove box (see page 20-95), then (A)from the side curtain airbags.
disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P
connector (A) from dashboard wire harness A.
(cont'd)
Precautions and Procedures General Troubleshooting
(cont'd) Information
Seat Belt Tensioner DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
7. Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel (see page The self-diagnostic function ofthe SRS system allows it
20-70). Disconnect the seat belttensioner 2P to locate the causes of system problems and then store
connector (A) from the SRS harness or leftside this information in memory. For easier troubleshooting,
wire harness 2P connector (B). this data can be retrieved via a data linkcircuit.
• When you turn the ignition switch ON (II),the SRS

indicator comes on. Ifitgoes off after 6 seconds, the
system is normal.
• Ifthere is an abnormality, the system locates and

defines the problem, stores this information in
memory, and turns the SRS indicator on. The data
will remain in memory even when the ignition switch
isturned off or ifthe battery isdisconnected.
NOTE: The SRS indicator may go out depending on
the code ifthe problem is intermittent, but the code
will remain in memory.
-The SRS indicator iseither latchable or resettable,
depending on the DTC. When latchable, the SRS
indicator turns on and stays on whenever the
ignition switch is in the ON position, or until the
Driver's side shown; passenger's side is similar.
DTC iscleared. When resettable, the SRS indicator
SRS Unit turns on when the DTC isset. Itwill not turn on
afterthe ignition switch iscycled from ON to OFF if
8. Remove the center console side trim (see page the problem is intermittent and goes away, but the
20-88). Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P), SRS DTC will remain in memory until cleared.
unit connector B (28P), SRS unit connector C (28P)
from the SRS unit. • The "x" atthe end of each DTC denotes a numeric
character (0thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F)
that isdisplayed on the HDS.
• When you use the HDS, you can retrieve the DTC in
the Honda Systems “SRS" menu.
• After reading and recording the DTC, proceed with

the troubleshooting procedure for this code.
Precautions
• Make sure the battery issufficiently charged. Ifthe
battery isdead or low, measuring values may not be
correct.
• Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If

it's not a Honda multimeter, make sure it'soutput is
10 m A (0.01 A) or less when switched to the smallest
value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a higher
output could damage the airbag circuit, or cause
accidental airbag deployment and possible injury.
• Wheneverthe ignition switch is ON (II),or has been Clear the DTC M em ory w ith the HDS
turned OFF for less than 3 minutes, be careful not to
bump the SRS unit;the airbags could accidentally 1. Make sure the ignition switch isOFF.
deploy and cause damage or injuries.
2. Connect the HDS to.data l ink connector (DLC) (A).
• Before you remove the SRS harness, disconnect the
driver's airbag connector, the front passenger's
airbag connector, both side airbag connectors, both
side curtain airbag connectors, and both seat belt
tensioner connectors.
• Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals inthe

SRS unit or harness connectors, and do not connect
the SRS unitterminals or the sensor terminals with a
jumper wire. Use only the backprobe set and the
multimeter. Backprobe spring-loaded lock type
connectors correctly.
Reading the DTC
1. Make sure the ignition switch isOFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch O N (II).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector 4. In the TEST MOD E M EN U of the HDS, select DTC
(DLC)(A). CLEAR. This clears the DTC(s).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for

10 seconds.
6. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
4. Use the HDS to check for SRS DTCs.
NOTE: S W S DTC assists SRS DTC. Therefore, do

troubleshoot correspond to SRS DTC.
5. Read the DTC.

10 seconds.
7. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
8. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC.

Clear the DTC M em ory Using MES

Connector w ithout the HDS

SCS service connector 07PAZ-001010A
1. Make sure the ignition switch isOFF.
2. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the

yellow MES connector (2P) (B). Do not use a jumper
wire.
4. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds,

and then goes off. Remove the SCS service
connector from the MES connector within 4
seconds afterthe indicator goes off.
5. The SRS indicator will come on again. Reconnect

the SCS service connector to the MES connector
within 4 seconds afterthe indicator comes on.
6. When the SRS indicator goes off, remove the SCS

service connector from the MES connector within
4 seconds.
7. The SRS indicator blinks two times, indicating that

the memory has been cleared.

10 seconds.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)again. Ifthe SRS

indicator comes on for 6 seconds, and then goes off,
the system is OK.
Troubleshooting Interm ittent Failures 8. Shake the.related wire harness and the connectors,
and check for loose connections, pinfits, and poor
Ifthere was a malfunction, but itdoes not recur, itwill grounds.
be stored inthe memory as an intermittent failure, and
the SRS indicator may come on depending on this 9. Take a test-drive (quick acceleration, quick braking,
malfunction detected. and cornering), turn the steering wheel fully left
and right, and hold itthere for 5 to 10 seconds. If
NOTE: Check the condition ofthe battery (see page the problem recurs, the SRS indicator will come on.
22-81), cables, and the charging system (see page 4-23).
Low battery voltage may cause some intermittent NOTE: A faulty cable reel can cause intermittent
failures. DTCs related to the driver's airbag.
After checking the DTC, troubleshoot as follow: 10. Ifyou cannot duplicate the concern, ask the
customer about the conditions when itoccurred, or
1. Make sure the ignition switch isOFF. ask the customer to demonstrate the concern.
2. Connect the HDS to the data linkconnector 11. Ifyou cannot duplicate the intermittent failure, the
(DLC) (A). system isOK at this time.
4. Read the DTC (see “Reading the DTC").
5. Clear the DTC memory (see “Clear the DTC

Memory").
6. Set the parking brake, then startthe engine, and let

itidle.
7. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds

and then goes off.
(cont'd)
Checking the Front Passenger's Weight

Sensors after a Vehicle Collision
1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost

position, adjust the recliner to the forwardmost
position. Do not move the seat from this position.
2. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h),

then stop on level ground.
4. Connect the HDS to the data linkconnector (DLC)

(A).
6. From the SRS inspection menu, select Seat Weight

Sensor, then Misc Test, then "SEA T O UTPUT CHK."
and follow the prompts until the ODS operation
check has completed.
ifl
ODS Unit Initialization
When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or ODS 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
unit is replaced, initializethe ODS unit by following this
procedure. 6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc
Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu,
NOTE: A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a select ODS INIT. Follow the screen prompts to
faulty OPDS sensor can cause DTC 85-71 and 85-78. initializethe ODS.
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 23-29). 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Make sure the front passenger's seat isdry. Set the 8. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there
is nothing on the seat. NOTE: Ifthe ODS failsto initialize after several .
attempts, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back and
3. Make sure the ignition switch isOFF and the MES retry. Ifthe ODS continues to failto initialize,
connector is not shorted. replace the ODS unit (see page 23-219).
4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector

(DLC) (A).
ODS Unit Calibration
When you replace the front passenger's weight sensors 6. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight
or ODS unit, calibrate the ODS unit. Sensor, then Misc Test, then select "SWS INIT,"
and follow the prompts until the calibration has
While calibrating the front ODS unit, observe these been completed.
precautions:
• Make sure all components of the front passenger's
seat are correctly installed.
• Make sure nothing ison or under the front passenger's
seat.
• Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
seat-back pocket.
• Keep the windows closed.
• Perform allcalibration procedures, except test-
driving, inthe service bay.
• Make sure the vehicle ison level ground.
• Keep the A/C and the heater off.
• Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you
prompted to or when you have completed the
calibration.
• Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden
temperature changes.
1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost

position, and adjust the recliner to the forwardmost
position. Do not move the seat from this position.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
3. Connect the HDS to the data linkconnector (DLC)

(A).
5. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph

(36 km/h), then stop on level ground.
ODS Unit Operation Check
Check the ODS operation after any ofthese actions. After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat
• Replacement offront passenger's seat component(s) Component(s)
(except ODS unit and/or front passenger's w eight
sensors) 1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
• After a vehicle collision
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
Pre-operation Check Set-up (A).
• Make sure all the components ofthe front passenger's

seat are correctly installed.
• Position the front passenger's seat to the rearmost
position.
• Adjust the seat recline to the forwardmost position.
• Do not move the seat from this position.
• Make sure nothing ison or under the front passenger's
seat.
• Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's
seat-back pocket.
• Keep the windows closed.
• Perform all calibration procedures, except test-
driving, in the service bay.
• Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
• Keep the A/C and the heater off. 3. Turn the ignition switch O N (II).
• Do not touch the front passenger's seat during the
calibration. 4. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h),
• Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden then stop on level ground.
temperature changes.
5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat
Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection. In
the HDS Inspection Menu, select “SEAT OUTPUT
CHK" and follow the prompts until the ODS
operation check has been completed.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Operation Check
Check the driver's seat position after any ofthese 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
actions.
• Driver's seat position sensor replacement 4. Move the seat allthe way forward.
• Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement 5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then SRS,
then Data List,then SPS.
6. Using a piece of tape (A), mark a line on the seat's
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector outer cover (B), where the front riser cover meets
(DLC) (A). the seat riser (C).The SPS should read “NEAR."
7. Move the seat-back in small increments (about

0.2 in.,5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR."
The seat should be about 1 in. (25 mm) from the
front.
NOTE: Ittakes a few seconds for the HDS to display

changes, so wait about 5 seconds between each
move.
Ifthe SPS data does not work as described, check

the driver's seat position sensor or the cover plate
for damage, and replace parts as needed.

HDS from the DLC.
£
DTC Troublesho oting index
DTC Latch 1 Reset"2 Detection Item Notes
11-1x O Open in driver's airbag first inflator (see page 23-52)
11-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's airbag first inflator (see page 23-54)
11-4x Open in driver's airbaq second inflator (see page 23-52)
11-6x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's airbag second (see page 23-54)
inflator
11-8x O Short to power in driver's airbaq first inflator (see page 23-57)
11-Sx Short to qround in driver's airbaq first inflator (see page 23-59)
11-Ax Short to power in driver's airbaq second inflator (see page 23-57)
11-Bx Short to qround in driver's airbaq second inflator (see page 23-59)
12-1x o Open in front passenger's airbaq first inflator (see page 23-62)
12-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's airbag first (see page 23-64)
inflator
12-4x Open in front passenqer's airbaq second inflator (see page 23-62)
12-6x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's airbag (see page 23-64)
second inflator
12-8x o Short to power in front passenger's airbag first inflator (see page 23-66)
12-9x Short to ground in front passenger's airbag first inflator (see page 23-68)
12-Ax Short to power in front passenger's airbag second inflator (see page 23-66)
12-Bx Short to ground in front passenger's airbag second inflator (see page 23-68)
21-1x o Open in driver's seat belt tensioner (see page 23-70)
21-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's seat belt tensioner (see page 23-72)
21-8x o Short to power in driver's seat belt tensioner (see page 23-75)
21-9x Short to ground in driver's seat belt tensioner (see page 23-77)
22-1x o Open in front passenger's seat belt tensioner (see page 23-80)
22-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's seat belt (see page 23-82)
tensioner
22-8x o Short to power in front passenger's seat belt tensioner (see page 23-84)
22-9x Short to ground in front passenger's seat belt tensioner (see page 23-86)
31-1x 0 Open in driver's side airbaq inflator (see page 23-88)
31-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 23-90)
31-8x o Short to power in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 23-92)
31-9x Short to ground in driver's side airbag inflator (see page 23-94)
32-1x 0 Open in front passenger's side airbag inflator (see page 23-96)
32-3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in front passenger's side airbag (see page 23-98)
inflator
32-8x o Short to power in front passenger's side airbag inflator (see page 23-100)
32-9x Short to ground in front passenger's side airbag inflator (see page 23-102)
33-1 x o Open in left side curtain airbaq inflator (see page 23-104)
33~3x Short to another wire or decreased resistance in left side curtain airbag (see page 23-106)
inflator
33-8x o Short to power in left side curtain airbag first inflator (see page 23-109)
33-9x Short to qround in left side curtain airbag first inflator (see page 23-111)
34-1 x o Open in right side curtain airbaq first inflator (see page 23-114)
34-3x I Short to another wire or decreased resistance in right side curtain airbag first (see page 23-116)
inflator
34-8x o Short to power in right side curtain airbag first inflator (see page 23-119)
34-9x Short to ground in right side curtain airbag first inflator (see page 23-121)
NOTE; The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you w il l see on the HDS
display. The character is unrelated to your troubleshooting; it designates the SRS unit manufacture and other detail used for product analysis.
* 1: The SRS indicator turns on and stays on whenever the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, or until the DTC is cleared. .
* 2: The SRS indicator turns on when the DTC is set. The SRS indicator will not turn on after the ignition switch is cycled from ON (II) to OFF (0),
but the DTC is stored in the SRS unit.
(cont'd)
DTC Latch*1 Reset*2 Detection Item Notes
41-1x O No signal from the left front impact sensor (see page 23-124)
41-2x Internal failure of the left front impact sensor (see page 23-132)
41-3x
41-Bx O
42-1 x O No signal from the right front impact sensor (see page 23-128)
42-2x Internal failure of the right front impact sensor (see page 23-132)
42-3x
42-Bx O
43-1 x o No signal from the left side impact sensor (first) (see page 23-133)
43-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (first) (see page 23-132)
43-3x
43-Bx O
44-1 x o No signal from the right side impact sensor (first) (see page 23-137)
44-2x Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (first) (see page 23-132)
44-3x
44-Bx O
45-1 x o No signal from the left side impact sensor (second) (see page 23-141)
45-2x Internal failure of the left side impact sensor (second) (see page 23-145)
45-3x
45-Bx O
46-1 x o No signal from the right side impact sensor (second) (see page 23-143)
46-2x O o Internal failure of the right side impact sensor (second) (see page 23-145)
46-3x
46-Bx O
&
51-xx O Internal failure of the SRS unit (see page 23-145)
52-xx O
53-xx O
54-xx
55-xx
56-xx o
61-1x O Open in driver's seat belt buckle switch (see paqe 23-146)
61-2x Short in driver's seat belt buckle switch (see paqe 23-149)
62-1 x Open in front passenqer's seat belt buckle switch (see paqe 23-152)
62-2x Short in front passenqer's seat belt buckle switch (see paqe 23-155)
71-1x Open in driver's seat position sensor (see page 23-157)
71-2x Short in driver's seat position sensor (see page 23-159)
81-4x Internal failure of the ODS unit (see page 23-166)
81-5x
81-61 No siqnal from the ODS unit (see page 23-162)
81-62 Response data error from the ODS unit
81-63 Internal failure of the ODS unit (see page 23-166)
81-64
81-71 ODS unit does not calibrate (see page 23-167)
81-78
NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS
* 1:The SRS indicator turns on and stays on whenever the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, or until the DTC is cleared.
* 2: The SRS indicator turns on when the DTC is set. The SRS indicator will not turn on after the ignition switch is cycled from ON (II) to OFF (0),
but the DTC is stored in the SRS unit.
(cont'd)
81-79 O Front passenger's weight sensors initial check failure (see page 23-167)
82-1x No signal from the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (see page 23-168)
83-2x No signal from the outer side front passenger's weight sensor
85-4x Internal failure of the ODS unit (see page 23-166)
85-5x
85-61 No signal from the ODS unit (see page 23-162)
85-62 Response data error from the ODS unit
85-63 Internal failure of the ODS unit (see page 23-166)
85-64
85-71 ODS unit not initialized (see page 23-167)
85-78
85-79 OPDS sensor initial check failure (see page 23-168)
86-1 x Faulty OPDS sensor (see page 23-169)
86-2x
87-3x Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on/off (see page 23-170)
91-1x Short to ground in the SRS indicator circuit (see page 23-172)
92-1x Open in the front passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (see page 23-174)
92-2x Open or short to ground in the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (see page 23-175)
A1 1x Faulty power supply (VA line) (see page 23-178)
A2-1x Faulty power supply (VB line) (see page 23-180)
B1-11 No signal from the roll rate sensor (see page 23-182)
B1-17 Internal failure of the roll rate sensor (see page 23-187)
B1-8x
B1-9x
B1-Ax
B1-Bx
B2-11 O No signal from the rear safing sensor (see page 23-188)
B2-17 Internal failure of the rear safing sensor (see page 23-190)
B2-84 O
B2-90
B2-Ax
B2-Bx
Ex-xx o Control operation recorded (see page 23-172)
Fx-xx Airbags, and/or tensioners deployment recorded
NOTE; The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an a lpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS
* 1:The SRS indicator turns on and stays on whenever the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, or until the DTC is cleared.
* 2: The SRS indicator turns on when the DTC is set. The SRS indicator w ill not turn on after the ignition switch is cycled from ON (II) to OFF (0),
but the DTC is stored in the SRS unit
&

SRS indicator does not come on Symptom Troubleshooting
(see page 23-191)
SRS indicator stays on, but no DTCs Symptom Troubleshooting
are stored (see page 23-195)
Side airbag cutoff indicator stays on • Make sure nothing ison the front
after bulb check, and no DTCs are passenger's seat.
stored, or side airbag cutoff • Ifthe side airbag cutoff indicator
indicator isflashing stays on afterthe ignition switch
isturned ON (II),initializethe ODS
- Ifthe side airbag cutoff
indicator operates normally, the
system isOK.
- Ifthe side airbag cutoff
indicator stays on or flashes,
replace the OPDS sensor
(see page 20-109). The sensor is
part of the seat-back pad.
System Description
SRS Components
Airbags
The SRS isa safety device which, when used with the seat belt, isdesigned to help protect the driver and front
passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit, including safing
sensor and impact sensor (A),the cable reel (B),the driver's airbag (C),the front passenger's airbag (D), side airbags
(E), side curtain airbags (F), seat belttensioners (G), front impact sensors (H), side impact sensors (first) (I),side impact
sensors (second) (J), roll rate sensor (K), and rear safing sensor (L).
Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate atthe same time.
However, itis possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision isat the margin, or
threshold, that the SRS unit determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
Front Passenger's Weight Sensors

The OPDS sensor (M) and ODS unit (N) are in the front passenger's seat-back. The weight sensors (O) detect the
weight on the seat, and send the information to the ODS unit. Ifthe total weight isabout 65 lbs (30 kg) or less,the ODS
unit sends a signal to the SRS unitto prevent the passengers airbag from deploying. When the passenger's airbag is
disabled, the passenger airbag cutoff indicator on the center panel comes on to alertthe driver that the front
passenger's airbag will not deploy in a front-end collision.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor

The driver's seat position sensor (P) is under the driver's seat on the leftside. When the driver's seat is moved to its
fullforward position, the deployment of the driver's airbag is moderated to decrease itsforce of impact during a front-
end collision.
&
Roll Rate Sensor

The roll rate sensor is located under the front passenger's seat. Itdetects the amount of roll ofthe vehicle and sends
the information to the SRS unit. The SRS unit uses this information to determine ifa vehicle rollover isimminent. Ifso,
itdeploys both side curtain airbags and the front seat belttensioners.
Rear Safing Sensor

The rear safing sensor is located under the third row seat. The rear safing sensor performs the same basic function as
the safing sensor inthe SRS unit. Itmeasures sideways G force, such as the force the vehicle would receive in a side
collision in the rear, and sends that information to the SRS unit. The SRS unit uses that information, and the
information from the second side impact sensor to determine the side that is impacted and the force. Ifthe threshold is
met, the SRS unit deploys the side airbag, the side curtain airbag and the seat belttensioner on that side.
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator/ODS Operation

The indicator comes on ifthe front passenger's seat isoccupied by a small adult or child who isleaning into the
deployment path, or an object (grocery bag, briefcase, purse, etc.) is in the seat. This indicates the passenger's side
airbag isoff and will not deploy; there is no problem with the side airbag. Ifthe passenger sits upright or moves to
another seat, or you remove the object from the seat, the light should go off.There will be some delay between the
occupant's repositioning, and when the indicator will turn on or off.
Passenger Airbag Cutoff indicator

The indicator comes on ifthe weight of the front passenger isabout 65 lbs (30 kg) or less. This indicates the passenger's
front airbag isoff and will not deploy. The front airbag isshut offto reduce the chance of airbag-caused injuries.
SRS Operation
The main circuit inthe SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, ifnecessary, ignites the inflator charges. If
battery voltage istoo low or power isdisconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power
circuitwill keep voltage at a constant level.
For the SRS to operate
Seat Belt Tensioners

(1) A front impact sensor, side impact sensor, or the roll rate sensor must activate and send electric signals to the
microprocessor.
(2)The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners.
(3)The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners.
Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s)

(1)A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2)The microprocessor must compute the signals, and send them to the airbag inflator(s).
(3)The inflators that receives signals must ignite and deploy the airbags.
Side Airbag(s)
(1)A side impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
(2)The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However, the
microprocessor cuts offthe signals to the front passenger's side airbag ifthe SRS unit determines that the front
passenger's head is in the deployment path ofthe side airbag.
(3)The inflatorthat receives the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag.
Side Curtain Airbag(s)

(1) Side impact sensor or the roll rate sensor must activate and send electrical signals to the microprocessor.
(2)The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side curtain airbag and side airbag inflator(s).
(3)The inflatorthat receives the signals must ignite and deploy the side curtain airbag and side airbag atthe same
time.
(cont'd)
FRONT
Self-Diagr»ostic System
A self-diagnostic circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch isturned ON (II),the SRS indicator comes
on and goes off after about 6 seconds ifthe system is operating normally. Ifthe indicator does not come on, or does
not go off after 6 seconds, or ifitcomes on while driving, itindicates an abnormality in the system. The system must
be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates
to the cause of the malfunction, and the unit isconnected to the data link connector circuit. This information can be
read with the HDS when itisconnected to the DLC (see page 23-29).
NOTE: Ifthe negative cable from the battery isdisconnected during troubleshooting, do the following.
Before you disconnect the battery make sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio and the navigation system (if
equipped).
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (28P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SDA
11 12
/ L 2 14 15 16
17 18 21 22 23 24 27 28
/ / /
Term inal W ire Color Term inal N am e Description

Num ber
1 GRN/YEL LA2+ Power source for driver's airbag second inflator
2 G R N /W H T LA2- Ground for driver's airbag second inflator
3 BLU/BLK R A 2+ Power source for passenger's airbag second inflator
4 BLU/RED RA 2— Ground for passenger's airbag second inflator
5 LT G RN/ MES Memory erase signal input
BLK
6 BRN SCS Service check signal input
7 GRN/BLK LA1 + Power source for driver's airbag first inflator
8 GRN/RED LA 1- Ground for driver's airbag first inflator
9 YEL RA1 + Power source for passenger's airbag firstinflator
10 BLU/YEL R A 1- Ground for passenger's airbag first inflator
11 ORN S R S IN D SRS indicator output line
12 RED/BLU PTT Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator output line
14 G RN/ORN ODS Sends and receives communication signal
15 BRN/YEL LFS— Ground for leftfront impact sensor
16 BRN RFS— Ground for rightfront impact sensor
17 RED/W HT VA SRS system sub power
18 BLK/WHT VB SRS dedicated power (dedicated booster circuit)
21 YEL CDS Crash detection signal
22 BLK SRS G ND A Ground circuitforthe SRS
23 BLK SRS G ND B Ground circuitfor the SRS
24 GRY K-LINE Sends and receives scan tool signal
27 RED LFS+ Power source for leftfront impact sensor
28 GRN RFS+ Power source for rightfront impact sensor
(cont'd)
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (28P)

N um ber
1 RED/BLU LRP+ Power source for driver's side seat belttensioner
2 RED/WHT LRP— Ground for driver's seat belttensioner
3 RED/BLK RRP+ Power source for front passenger's seat belttensioner
4 RED/YEL RRP- Ground for front passenger's seat belttensioner
5 GRN/YEL ss- Ground for driver's seat position sensor
6 GRN/RED SS+ Power source for driver's seat position sensor
11 BLU/RED LBSC Driver's seat belt buckle switch un-buckled signal
12 LTGRN LBSO Driver's seat belt buckle switch buckled signal
15 BLU RBSC Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch un-buckled signal
16 ORN RBSO Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch buckled signal
£
SRS Unit Inputs and Outputs a t Connector C (28P)
o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S F F
11 12 13
S IX 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
/ /

Num ber
1 W HT/G RN LSA+ Power source for driver's airbag inflator
2 W HT/RED IS A — Ground for driver's airbag inflator
3 WHT/BLK RSA+ Power source for front passenger's airbag inflator
4 W HT/BLU RSA— Ground for front passenger's airbag inflator
5 BLU/W HT SSS+ Power source for rear safing sensor
6 BLU/YEL sss- Ground for rear safing sensor
7 BLU/BLK LCA+ Power source for leftside curtain airbag inflator
8 BLU LCA— Ground for leftside curtain airbag inflator
9 RED/YEL RCA+ Power source for right side curtain airbag inflator
10 RED RCA— Ground for right side curtain airbag inflator
11 PNK/BLU LBS1 + Power source for leftside impact sensor (first)
12 GRY/RED LBS— Ground for leftside impact sensor (first)
13 RED/YEL RRS+ Power source for roll rate sensor
14 BLU/BLK RRS— Ground for roll rate sensor
15 BRN/YEL RBS1 + Power source for right side impact sensor (first)
16 LTG RN/ RBS1 — Ground for right side impact sensor (first)
RED
17 GRN/BLK LSC1 + Power source for leftside impact sensor (second)
18 ORN LSC1 — Ground for leftside impact sensor (second)
19 YEL/BLK RCS1 + Power source for right side impact sensor (second)
20 YEL RCS1 — Ground for right side impact sensor (second)
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
G502 G801
i3
BLUE, BROWN, GRAY, ORANGE,
or GREEN wire color can be
FRONT used for the SRS circuit's
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S
I
A RBAG
FIRST
AIRBAG
SECOND
AIRBAG AIRBAG
that have a * mark
FIRST SECOND
INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR INFLATOR
- ( am) -
DASHBOARD
YEL BLK GRN WHT HARNESSA
I JL X JL.
2
GRN/RED' GRN/BLK* GRN/WHT* GRN/YEL* _____ YEL* ____
3
J__ ii__ ll__ !ij___’| 21 ;| 81
BRN/BLK
2P 2 I 2P 2 [
HFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
< I)
(cont'd)
(WITHOUT TOWER SEAT) {WITH POWER SEAT) DRIVER'S

SIDE AIRBAG SIDE AIRBAG
i— r " ." r " ‘... INFLATOR INFLATOR
LEFT RIGHT
DRIVER'S DRIVER'S SIDE SIDE
SEATPOSmON SEAT POSITION IMPACT IMPACT ROLL RATE
SENSOR SENSOR
(FIRST)
LI 2P 2P u
11
■ DRIVER'S
SEAT
POSITION WHT
F M mmm gT
BLK
9
rn/¥EL GRNiRED
! SENSOR
jSUBHARNESS HARNESS
I C605 u : C606 L
1
GRN/RED* GRN/YEL* WHT/RED* WHT/GRN* GRY/RED* PNK/BLU* WHT/BLU* WHT/BLK* LT GRN/RED* BRN/YEL* BLU/BLK* RED/YEL*
i J _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 20 | 19 |________ 23 | 24 [__ _ _ _ _ _ _ 26 [ 25 |
i i "■.i.." T .. i...i — r .. i... ..i .!.i— n — f SRS

GRN/RED* GRN/YEL* WHT/RED* WHT/GRN* GRY/RED* PNK/BLU* WHT/BLU* WHT/BLK* LT GRN/RED* BRN/YEL* BLU/BLK* RED/YEL*
, J ___il ■! -I .■!____ ■! ■! .1 -I .1 .1
,,rl
BLU/RED*
T
LTGRN* BLU* ORN* SUBHARNESS
C821 i - f - i C854 u
DASHBOARD
JUNTCION WIRE
CONNECTOR HARNESS A
BLU/RED* LTGRN* BLU* ORN*
I
BLU/RED*
m
BLU* ORN*
* 1
BLU/RED* LTGRN*
ZL
<D— BLU/RED* LTGRN*
4
r j 1 “~l
:C607 r - j
DRIVER'S FRONT
RED/BLU BLU/RED BU
io ! BLU/RED LTGRN
SEAT WIRE
HARNESS
BLU* ORN*
PASSENFER'S
HARNESS^
^ d 31 I J__ d___lL
l_.3P
4RED/BLU- 1 BLU/RED
---------1
a
|----------- r ------------ 1-------------- ---
! BLU/RED LTGRN
ON:
UNBUCKLED
ll I*
1 1 ON:
I (p BUCKLED
DRIVER'S
“
G801
&
BLUE, BROWN, GRAY, ORANGE, [Tj : With power seat, with heated seat
uwdforthe SRS S c u ffs * B : With power seat, without heated seat
that have a * mark FT! : Without power seat, without heated seat
LEFTSIDE RIGHT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG CURTAIN AIRBAG E : With heated seat
INFLATOR INFLATOR
LEFT RIGHT
SIDE SIDE REAR
r@~ IMPACT
SENSOR
IMPACT
SENSOR
SAFING
SENSOR
(SECOND) (SECOND)
LET SIDE 21 RIGHT SIDE

» ti r 2P !
ROOF WfRE GRN/BLK< ORN* WIRE YEL/BLK* YEL*

HARNESS HARNESS
WIRE
HARNESS 1 L_iL 1— L
RIGHT SIDE
WERE
LEFTSIDE
WIRE
T ^ r
BLU/BLK* BLU* HED/YEL* RED* GRN/BLK* ORN* YEL/BLK* YEL* BLU/WHT* BLU/YEL*
HARNESS HARNESS
_ L - _ L J ., C655 L I — L. C656 L-J- JL, 55 -I--- L
i n n t
2r r r r vr
DASHBOARD
BLK* BLU* RED/YEL* RED* GRN/BLK1
IL K * ORN* YEL/BLK* YEL*
BLU/WHT* 1
X essa b lu “ ' BLU/YEL*
C821
J__ d__ 2
A__d_ J_d. _ d __10J
i
BLU/BLK* BLU*
T T
RED*
!1 i—
GRN/BLK* ORN*
r “ i— r
YEL/BLK* YEL*
I uI ha rness BLU/YEL*
3
I____ iL 10I 19 | 20 |
_ ! i _
I j 3 jjsf
I I 81
RED/WHT* RED/BLU* RED/YEL*
21 ,JL X '
RED/WHT* RED/BLU* RED/YEL* RED/BLK*
J__ lL
J 2Pu
DRIVER'S
SEATBELT
TENSIONER SEATBELT
TENSIONER
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q
Open in Driver's Airbag First Inflator connectors) and the simulator lead F to the cable
reel.
DTC 11-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
Open in Driver's Airbag Second Inflator 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Special Tools Required 7. Clear the DTC memory.

•SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
•SRS simulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100 8. Check for a DTC.
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, is DTC 11-1x or 11-4x indicated?
review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page
23-19) and General Troubleshooting Information YES— Go to step 9.
(see page 23-28).
NO—Open in the driver's airbag firstor second
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 23-29). inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page
23-201 ).■
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II),and check that the
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
then goes off. negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3
minutes.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11~1x
or 11-4x indicated? 10. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness A 4P
connector (A) from the cable reel.
YES— Go to step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK atthis time.

Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
(see page 23-31). Ifanother DTC is indicated,
troubleshoot the DTC.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the

negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3
minutes.
4. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A)

from the cable reel.
11. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q

connectors) and the simulator lead to dashboard
wire harness A.
12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
13. Clear the DTC memory.

&
14. Check for a DTC. 18. Measure the resistance between the terminals of
SRS simulator lead. There should be less than 1 Q .
Is DTC 11-1x or 11-4x indicated?
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A
NO—Open inthe cable reel; replace the cable reel

(see page 23-212). ■

minutes.
16. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the

SRS unit (see step 8 on page 23-28).
17. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS

simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator
lead from the dashboard wire harness A 4P
connector.
Is the resistance as specified?
YES—Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS

unit connector A (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection between the connector and the SRS
unit. Ifthe connection isOK, replace the SRS unit
(see page 23-215).■
NO—Go to step 19.
19. Disconnect SRS subharness 28P connector C821

(B) from dashboard wire harness A connector
C821.
(cont'd)
20. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and DTC 11-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
No. 4 terminals of SRS subharness 28P connector Short to Another W ire or Decreased
C821, and between the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals. Resistance in Driver's Airbag First Inflator
There should be less than 1 Q .
SRS SUBHARNESS 28P CONNECTOR C821 Short to Another W ire or Decreased
Resistance in Driver's Airbag Second Inflator

•SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4G11A
3|4 sox 6 7 8 9 10 il •SRS simulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100
11 j i IZ L □ / 15 16 •SRS short canceller 070AZ-SAA0100
£1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 9 25 26 27 28
l5 Hr NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,
23-19) and General Troubleshooting Information
Terminal side of male terminals (see page 23-28).
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 23-29).

YES—Open in dashboard wire harness A; replace SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
dashboard wire harness A. ■ then goes off.
NO—Open in the SRS subharness; replace the SRS Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-3x
subharness. ■ or 11-6x indicated?
YES—Goto step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at thistime.

Goto Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures

minutes.
4. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) 10. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness A 4P
from the cable reel. connector (A) from the cable reel.

5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q wire harness A.
connectors) and simulator lead F to the cable reel
6. Reconnect the negative cable tothe battery.
14. Check for a DTC.
8. Check for a DTC.
Is DT C 11-3x or 11-6x indicated?
YES— Goto step 15.
NO—Short in the cable reel; replace the cable reel
NO—Short inthe driver's airbag firstor second (see page 23-212). ■
inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see page
23-201 ).■ 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the minutes.
minutes. 16. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the
17. Disconnect the SRS inflatorsimulator from the SRS

connector.
18. Connect the SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100)

to the No. 7 and No. 8 terminals (forcode 11-3x) or
No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of SRS unit connector A
(28P) (for code 11-6x) (see page 23-24).
19. Measure the resistance between the terminals of 20. Disconnect SRS subharness 28P connector C821
SRS simulator lead F.There should be an open (B) from dashboard wire harness A connector C821.
circuit or at least 1 M Q .
DASHBOARD WI RE HARNESS A

No. 4 terminals of SRS subharness 28P connector
C821, and between the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals.
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 M Q .
SRS SUBHARNESS 28P CONNECTOR C821
YES— Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit
(see page 23-215). ■
1 J3 | 4 5 SOX 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 9 □ 9 15116
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 / 25 26 27 28
15 ar
YES— Short in dashboard wire harness A; replace

dashboard wire harness A M
NO-Short in the SRS subharness; replace the SRS

subharness. ■
&
DTG 11-8x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 4. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A)
Short to Power in Driver's Airbag First from the cable reel.
Inflator
DTC 11-Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Short to Power in Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator

-S R S sim ulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure,

(see page 23-28).

SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and 5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q
then goes off. connectors) and simulator lead F to the cable reel.
Does the SRS indicator stay o n , and is DTC 11-8x 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
or 11-Ax indicated?
YES— G o to step 3.
8. Check for a DTC.
NO—Intermittent failure, system isOK atthis time.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures Is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
troubleshoot the DTC. YES— Go to step 9.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the NO—Short to power in the driver's airbag firstor
negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3 second inflator; replace the driver's airbag
minutes. (see page 23-201 ).■

minutes.
(cont'd)
10. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness A 4P 20. Measure the for voltage between each terminal of
connector (A) from the cable reel. both SRS simulator leads and body ground. There
should be less than 0.5 V.
4P CONNECTOR
11. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 0

wire harness A.
Is the voltage as specified?
YES—Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit
13. Clear the DTC memory. (see page 23-215).®
14. Check for a DTC. NO—Go to step 21.
Is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated? 21. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO—Short to power in the cable reel; replace the

cable reel (see page 23-212). ■

minutes.


connector.
&
22. Disconnect SRS subharness 28P connector C821 DTC 11-9x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
(B)from dashboard wire harness A connector C821. Short to Ground in Driver's Airbag First
Inflator
DTC 11-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):

Short to Ground in Driver's Airbag Second
Inflator

•SRS simulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100

(see page 23-28).
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 23-29).
24. Measure the for voltage between the No. 3 terminal 2. Turn the ignition switch O N (II),and check that the
of SRS subharness 28P connector C821 and body SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
ground, the No. 4 terminal and body ground, the then goes off.
No. 9 terminal and body ground, and the No. 10
terminal and body ground. There should be less Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-9x
than 0.5 V. or 1 1 - B x indicated?
SRS SUBHARNESS 28P CONNECTOR C821 YES— Go to step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system isOK at this time.

-rr ri Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
iTrfrfT [Usox 6 7 8 9 10 (see page 23-31). Ifanother DTC is indicated,
11 y 9 15 16
C
M
17 18 19 20 2
1 22239 25 26 27 28 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
is c±r negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3
minutes.
Is the voltage as specified?
YES— Short to power in dashboard wire harness A;

replace dashboard wire harness A. H
N O — Short to power in the SRS subharness;

replace the SRS subharness. H
(cont'd)
4. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) 10. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness A 4P
from the cable reel. connector (A) from the cable reel.

5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q wire harness A.
connectors) and simulator lead F to the cable reel.
8. Check for a DTC.
Is DTC 11-9x or 11-Bx indicated?
Is DT C 1 1-9xor 11-Bx indicated?
N O — Short to ground inthe cable reel; replace the
N O — Short to ground in the driver's airbag firstor cable reel (see page 23-212).■
second inflator; replace the driver's airbag
(see page 23-201 ).■ 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the minutes.
minutes. 16. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the

connector.
18. Measure the resistance between each term inal of 209 M easure the resistance betw een the No. 3 term inal
both SRS sim ulator leads and body ground. There o f SRS subharness 28P connector €821 and body
should be an open circuit or at least 1 M fi . ground, the No. 4 term inal and body ground, the
N o n te r m in a l and body ground, and No. 10
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A term inal and body ground. There should be an
4P CONNECTOR
open circuit or at least I'M Q .
1 2^3 4 5 SOX 6 7 8 9 10
11 12-191 0 9 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 9 25 26 27 28
T5— HT
Is the resistance as specified? Is the resistance as specified?
YES— Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit Y E S —Short to ground in dashboard w ire harness
(see page 23-215). ■ A; replace dashboard w ire harness A. ■
N O — Go to step 19. N O — Short to ground in the SRS subharness;

replace the SRS subharness. ■
(B) fro m dashboard w ire harness A connector
C821.
Open in Front Passenger's Airbag First connectors) and simulator lead F to the dashboard
Inflator wire harness A 4P connector.
DTC 12-4x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Open in Front Passenger's Airbag Second
Inflator 7. Clear the DTC memory.
Special Tools Required 8. Check for a DTC.

*SRS simulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100 Is DTC 12-1x or 12-4x indicated?
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, YES— Go to step 9.

23-19) and General Troubleshooting Information N O — Open in the front passenger's airbag firstor
(see page 23-28). second inflator; replace the front passenger's
airbag (see page 23-202).■
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II),and check that the negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and minutes.
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 12- 1x SRS unit (see step 8 on page 23-28).
or 12-4x indicated?
11. Disconnect the SRS Inflator simulator from SRS
YES— Go to step 3. simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator
N O — Intermittent failure, system isOK at this time. connector.

minutes.
4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P

#3
12. Measure the resistance between the term inals of 14. M easure the resistance between the No. 1 and the
both SRS' sim ulator leads. There should be less No. 2 terminaIs and between the No. 7 and the
than 1 Q . No. 8 terminals of SRS subharness 28P connector
C821.There should be less than 1 Q.
4P CONNECTOR
1j 2tf i ” 4 5 SOX 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 / □ / 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 9 25 26 27 28
""15..” 2 T
Is the resistance as specified? YES— Open in dashboard wire harness A; replace

dashboard wire harness A. ■
YES— Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS
unit connector A (28P). Check the connection; ifthe N O — Open in the SRS subharness; replace the SRS
connection isOK, replace the SRS unit (see page subharness. ■
23-215). ■

(B) from dashboard wire harness A connector
C821.
DTC 12-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P
Short to Another W ire or Decreased connector (A) from dashboard wire harness A.
Resistance in Front Passenger's Airbag First
Inflator

Short to Another W ire or Decreased
Resistance in Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator
Special T ools Required

®SRS short canceller 070AZ-SAA0100

(see page 23-28). 5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 Q
connectors) and simulator lead F to the dashboard
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 23-29). wire harness 4P connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II),and check that the 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
then goes off. 7. Clear the DTC memory.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 12-3x 8. Check for a DTC.
or 12-6x indicated?
YES— Goto step3.
N O — Intermittent failure, system is OK atthis time.
Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures N O — Short inthe front passenger's airbag firstor
(see page 23-31). Ifanother DTC is indicated, second inflator; replace the front passenger's
troubleshoot the DTC. airbag (see page 23-202).■

minutes.
&
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the 14. Disconnect SRS subharness 28P connector C821
negative cable from the battery, and w ait for 3 (B) from dashboard wire harness A connector C821.
minutes.


connector.
12. Connect four SRS short cancellers (070AZ-

SAA0100) to the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals and the
No. 9 and No. 10 terminals of SRS unit connector A
(28P) (see page 23-24).
13. Measure the resistance between the terminals of 15. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and
both SRS simulator leads. There should be an open No. 2 terminals and between the No. 7 and No. 8
circuit or at least 1 M Q . terminals of SRS subharness 28P connector C821
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 M Q .
4P CONNECTOR
=4 —rrj
1 4 5 SOX 6 7 8 9 10
=n
11 12M □ 9 15 16 £1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 9 25 26 27 28
15— SI
Is the resistance as specified? YES— Short in dashboard wire harness A; replace

dashboard wire harness A. ■
YES— Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit
(see page 23-215). ■ N O — Short inthe SRS subharness; replace the SRS
subharness. ■
N O — Goto step 14.
Short to Power in Front Passenger's Airbag connectors) and simulator lead F to the dashboard
First Inflator wire harness A 4P connector.
DTC 12-Ax ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Short to Power in Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator 7. Clear the DTC memory.

•SRS simulator lead F G7XAZ-SZ30100 Is DTC 12-8x or 12-Ax indicated?
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, YES— Goto step 9.

23-19) and General Troubleshooting Information N O — Short to power in the front passenger's airbag
(see page 23-28). firstor second inflator; replace the front passenger's
airbag (see page 23-202).■
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II),and check that the negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 12-8x SRS unit (see step 8 on page 23-28).
or 12-Ax indicated?
YES— Goto step 3. simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator
N O — Intermittent failure, system isOK atthis time. connector.
(see page 23-31). Ifanother DTC is indicated, 12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
minutes.

-a
14. Measure the voltage between each terminal of both 18. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
SRS simulator leads and body ground. There SRS subharness 28P connector C821 and body
should be less than 0.5 V. ground, the No. 2 terminal and body ground, the
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A terminal and body ground. There should be less
4P CONNECTOR
than 0.5 V.
1 2^3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SOX
11 12 □ 9 15 16
9
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28
9
Is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c ifie d ? Is th e v o lta g e a s s p e c ifie d ?
YES—Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit YES—Short to power in dashboard wire harness A;
(see page 23-215). ■ replace dashboard wire harness A M
NO—G oto step 15. N O —Short to power in the SRS subharness;

replace the SRS subharness.■

(B) from dashboard wire harness A connector C821.

DTC 12-9x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F); 5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 0
Short to Ground in Front Passenger's Airbag connectors) and simulator lead F to the dashboard
First Inflator wire harness A 4P connector.
DTC 12-Bx ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A-thru F):- 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Short to Ground in Front Passenger's Airbag
Second Inflator 7. Clear the DTC memory.

• SRS simulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100 Is D T C 12-9x or 12-B x in d ic a te d ?
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, YES—Go to step 9.

23-19) and General Troubleshooting Information NO—Short to ground in the front passenger's
(see page 23-28). airbag first or second inflator; replace the front
passenger's airbag (see page 23-202). ■
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3
then goes off.
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y on, a n d is D T C 12-9x SRS unit (see step 8 on page 23-28).
or 1 2-B x in d ic a te d ?
YES—Go to step 3. simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. connector.
(see page 23-31). If another DTC is indicated,

minutes.

12. Measure the resistance between each terminal of 14. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal
both SRS simulator leads F and body ground. of SRS subharness 28P connector C821 and body
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MQ, ground, the No. 2 terminal and body ground, the
4P CONNECTOR terminal and body ground. There should be an
open circuit or at least 1 M Q.
1 5 6 7 8 9 10
2T 3 I 4 SOX
11 12 9 □ 9 15 116
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28
9
Is t h e r e s i s t a n c e a s s p e c i f i e d ? Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?
YES—Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit YES—Short to ground in dashboard wire harness
(see page 2 3 -2 1 5 ).■ A; replace dashboard wire harness A M
N O —Go to step 13. N O —Short to ground in the SRS subharness;

replace the SRS subharness. ■
(B) from dashboard wire harness A connector C821
DTC 21-1x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Open in Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
• SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A 8. Check for a DTC.
•SRS simulator lead C 07TAZ-SZ5011A
• SRS simulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100 Is D T C 2 1 - 1 x in d ic a te d ?
NOTE: Before doing this troubleshooting procedure, YES—Go to step 9.

23-19) and General Troubleshooting Information NO—Open in the driver's seat belt tensioner;
(see page 23-28). replace the driver's seat belt (see page 23-4). ■
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 23-29). 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the minutes.
then goes off. 10. Disconnect SRS harness 4P connector C656 (A)
from the left side wire harness 4P connector
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y on, a n d is D T C 2 2 - 1x C656 (B).
in d ic a te d ?
YES—Go to step 3.
NO —Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.


minutes.
4. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner 2P

connector from the left side wire harness (A).

connectors) and simulator lead F to the SRS
harness 4P connector C656.
£
12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery9 17. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the
SRS unit (see step 8 on page 23-28). Do not
13. Clear the DTC memory. disconnect the simulator lead from the SRS
harness 4P connector.
Is D T C 2 1 -1 x in d ic a te d ? No. 2 terminals of SRS unit connector B (28P).
There should be 2.0—3.0 Q .
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B C28P)
N O —Open in the left side wire harness; replace the
left side wire harness. ■

1 2 3 4 5 6
negative cable from the battery, and wait for 3 SOX 9 9 / /
minutes. 11 12 9 H o / 15 16
16. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt

tensioner connector (see step 7 on page 23-28).
Wire side of female termina ls
Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?
YES—Faulty SRS unit or poor connection at SRS

unit connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check the
connection; if the connection is OK, replace the
SRS unit (see page 23-215). ■
NO—Goto step 19.
(cont'd)
19. Disconnect SRS harness 28P connector C854 (A) DTC 21-3x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F):
from SRS subharness connector C854 (B). Short to Another Wire or Decreased
Resistance in Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner

• SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
• SRS simulator lead C 07TAZ-SZ5011A

(see page 23-28).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the

20. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
No. 2 terminals of SRS harness 28P connector then goes off.
C854. There should be 2.0—3.0 Q .
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y on, a n d is D T C 2 1 -3 x
SRS HARNESS 28P CONNECTOR C854 in d ic a te d ?
YES—Go to step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SAA Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
9 12 13 m /
15 16 (see page 23-31). If another DTC is indicated,
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 troubleshoot the DTC.

Wire side of female terminals minutes.

Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ? connector from the left side wire harness (A).
YES—Open in the SRS subharness; replace the

SRS subharness. ■
NO—Open in the SRS harness; replace the SRS

harness. ■
£
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery. 16. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt
tensioner connector (see step 7 on page 23-28).
17. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the
8. Check for a DTC. SRS unit (see step 8 on page 23-28).
Is D T C 2 1 - 3 x in d ic a te d ? 18. Disconnect the simulator lead from the SRS

harness 4P connector.
YES—Goto step 9.
NO—Short in the driver's seat belt tensioner;

replace the driver's seat belt (see page 23-4). ■

minutes.
10. Disconnect SRS harness 4P connector C656 (A)

from left side wire harness 4P connector C656 (B).

connectors) and simulator lead Fto the SRS
harness.

Is D T C 2 1 - 3 x i n d i c a t e d ?
NO—Short in the left side wire harness; replace the

left side wire harness.■
minutes.
(cont'd)
19. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and 21. Measure the resistance between No. 1 and No. 2
No. 2 terminals of SRS unit connector B (28PK terminals of SRS harness 28P connector C854.
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MQ. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 MQ.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR B (28P) SRS HARNESS 28P CONNECTOR C854
o
2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
so x SAA
11 12VL 11 15 16 9 12 13 R || 1 9 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ? Is th e r e s is ta n c e a s s p e c ifie d ?
YES—Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit YES—Short in the SRS subharness; replace the
(see page 23-215). ■ SRS subharness. ■
NO—Go to step 20. NO—Short in the SRS harness; replace the SRS
harness. ■
20. Disconnect SRS harness 28P connector C854 (A)
from SRS subharness connector C854 (B).
DTC 21 - 8x ("x" can be 0 thru 9 or A thru F): 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Short to Power in Driver's Seat Belt
Tensioner 7. Clear the DTC memory.
• SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
*SRS simulator lead C07TAZ-SZ5011A Is D T C 2 1 -8 x in d ic a te d ?
•SRS simulator lead F07XAZ-SZ30100
YES—Goto step 9.
review SRS Precautions and Procedures (see page NO—Short to power in the driver's seat belt
23-19) and General Troubleshooting Information tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt (see page
(see page 23-28). 23-4). ■ ‘
1. Clear the DTC memory (see page 23-29). 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the minutes.
then goes off. 10. Disconnect SRS harness 4P connector C656 (A)
from left side wire harness 4P connector C656 (B).
D o e s th e S R S in d ic a to r s ta y o n a n d is D T C 2 1 ~ 8x
in d ic a te d ?
Yes —Goto step 3.
NO—Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.


minutes.

connector from the left side wire harness (A).
connectors) and simulator lead Fto the SRS
harness.

Is D T C 2 1-8x in d ic a te d ?

06-08 Honda Pilot SM PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

06-08 Honda Pilot SM PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

INTRODUCTION

- How to Use This M a n u a l----------------------------------- General Information

- Safety M essages---------------------------------------- ■------

Identification Number Locations ....... . 1-8

Lift and Support Points ......... ........... . 1-13

Vehicle Identification Number

5FN YF1 8 1 * 6 B 000001

Engine Number Paint Code

Vehicle Identification Number

5FN YF1 8 1 * 7 B 000001

Code : Color USA Canada

5FN YF1 8 1 * 8' B 000001

a. Manufacturer, Make, and Type of Vehicle

Code Color USA Canada

Front Passenger's Compartment:

CABLE REEL CAUTION

Rear Passenger's Compartment:

AIR CONDITIONING RADIATOR CAP BATTERY

Emission Group identification Test Group and Evaporative Family

Example: Test Group:

'08 Model 8 HNX R 0156 BBA

NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

gently to be sure it is firmly supported. —C tt— 8

To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

4. Position the safety stands under the support points,

5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.

If the 2WD PILOT cannot be transported by a flat-bed, it

• Release the parking brake.

It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles

Standards and Service Limits

Spark plug Type NGK: IZFR5K11

Fuel and Emissions

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

Front wheel turning angle 4WD Inward

»»( U! 9 0L) mm S6£'l

Application Lubricant or Fluid

API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil

A SER\ /ICE OIL LIFE %

4. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

2. Press the Select/Reset knob repeatedly until the

NOTE: If you are resetting the display when the

4. Press the Select/Reset knob for another 5 seconds.

Number Maintenance Sub Items

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

Component Location Index

Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-6 Test, page 14-261

Sym ptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH

Does the starter crank the engine?

YES—Repairing the loose connection corrected the

NO—Based on the following symptoms, take the

• If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to

NO—Replace the starter, or remove and

• Drag in the starter armature

7. Check the following items in the order listed until

• The BLK/WHT wire and connectors between the

9. Do the power window control unit reset procedure

10. Set the clock (on vehicles without navigation).

4. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the

• If there is continuity, go to step 5.

5. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the

• If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.